Ad-C-01 - Part 2

STANDARD CONSTRUCTION
SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION
SPECIFICATIONS
PART 2
ROAD UTILITIES
Document Number: AD-C-01

First Edition • 2014
STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
PART 2
ROAD UTILITIES
DOCUMENT NO: AD-C-01

Document No: AD-C-01
First Edition
2014
Department of Transport
PO Box 20
Abu Dhabi, United Arab Emirates
© Copyright 2014, by the Department of Transport. All Rights Reserved. These specifications, or parts
thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without written permission of the publisher.
Document Development Consultant: Parsons International Limited

Project Management Consultant: Aurecon
Table of Contents
PART 2
ROAD UTILITIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
10 Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works

11 Utilities
12 Stormwater Drainage
13 Landscaping and Irrigation
PART 2
ROAD UTILITIES
CHAPTER 10 – LIGHTING & ELECTRICAL

DISTRIBUTION WORKS

Chapter 10: Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works
Chapter 10: Lighting & Electrical Distribution Works

Table of Contents
Table of Contents ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
List of Tables ................................................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10 Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works .................................................................................................... 10-11
10.1 Standards, Industry Codes and Procedures ................................................................................................ 10-11
10.1.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-11
10.1.2 Reference Standards and Codes......................................................................................................... 10-11
10.1.3 Definition of Terms ........................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.1.4 Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) Electrical System ....................................... 10-17
10.1.5 Service Connections .......................................................................................................................... 10-17
10.1.6 Site Conditions .................................................................................................................................. 10-17
10.1.7 Coordination with Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) and Abu Dhabi Distribution
Company (ADDC) .............................................................................................................................................. 10-18
10.1.8 Schedules and Technical Details ....................................................................................................... 10-18
10.1.9 Inspection and Testing ....................................................................................................................... 10-18
10.1.10 Field Performance Tests .................................................................................................................... 10-19
10.1.11 Electrical, Utilities and Record Drawings ......................................................................................... 10-20
10.1.12 Procedures for Electrical and Lighting Works .................................................................................. 10-20
10.1.12.1 Procedure for the Lighting Works ............................................................................................ 10-20
10.1.12.2 Procedure for ADWEA/ADDC Electrical, Distribution Works ............................................... 10-21
10.1.12.3 Shop Drawings Procedures for Lighting Systems after Approval of Materials ........................ 10-21
10.1.12.4 As-built Drawings ..................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.2 Lighting and Electrical Materials, General ................................................................................................ 10-23
10.2.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-23
10.2.2 General .............................................................................................................................................. 10-23
10.2.3 Control of Materials .......................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.2.4 Analysis of Materials ......................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.2.5 Identification ..................................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.3 Earthwork for Electrical ............................................................................................................................. 10-25
10.3.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-25
10.3.2 Trench and Backfill ........................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.3.3 Construction Methods ....................................................................................................................... 10-26
10.3.4 Excavation for Structures .................................................................................................................. 10-26
10.4 Conduits, Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes .................................................................................................. 10-26
10.4.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-26
10.4.2 Rigid Galvanized Steel Electrical Conduit ........................................................................................ 10-27
10.4.3 Rigid Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Conduit ........................................................................................... 10-27
10.4.4 Junction Boxes .................................................................................................................................. 10-28
10.4.5 Poly Carbonate Pull Boxes ................................................................................................................ 10-29
10.4.6 Pull Boxes, Type IV .......................................................................................................................... 10-30
10.4.6.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-30
10.4.6.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 10-30
10.4.6.3 Construction .................................................................................................................................. 10-30
10.5 Lighting and Low Voltage Electrical Cable ............................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-31
10.5.2 General Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.3 Electrical Low Voltage Cables, Direct Burial ................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.3.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.3.2 Laying-Up ..................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.3.3 Conductors .................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.3.4 Insulation....................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.3.5 Sheath ............................................................................................................................................ 10-32
10.5.3.6 Armor ............................................................................................................................................ 10-32
10.5.3.7 Serving .......................................................................................................................................... 10-32
10.5.3.8 Current Ratings ............................................................................................................................. 10-32
10.5.3.9 Short Circuit Ratings ..................................................................................................................... 10-32
10.5.3.10 Guarantee .................................................................................................................................. 10-32
10.5.3.11 Tests .......................................................................................................................................... 10-32
Page 10-1
10.5.4 Low Voltage PVC Wiring Cables ..................................................................................................... 10-33

10.5.4.1 Low Smoke and Fume .................................................................................................................. 10-33
10.5.4.2 PVC Wiring Cables ....................................................................................................................... 10-33
10.5.4.3 Fire resistant PVC wiring cables ................................................................................................... 10-33
10.5.5 Low Voltage (LV) Cable ................................................................................................................... 10-33
10.5.5.1 Low Smoke and Fume .................................................................................................................. 10-33
10.5.5.2 Fire Resistant Cable ...................................................................................................................... 10-34
10.5.5.3 Modular Cable – Fire Resistant, LSOH Type ............................................................................... 10-34
10.5.6 Electrical Cables - In Conduit and Light Poles.................................................................................. 10-35
10.5.7 Packing .............................................................................................................................................. 10-35
10.5.8 Markings ............................................................................................................................................ 10-35
10.5.9 Drawings & Information ................................................................................................................... 10-35
10.5.10 License............................................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.5.10.1 Materials ................................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.5.11 Splicing 600/1000 Volt Cable and Wire ............................................................................................ 10-36
10.5.12 Lighting and Low Voltage Electrical Cable Installation ................................................................... 10-36
10.6 Foundations for Light Poles and Lighting Control Cabinets ...................................................................... 10-40
10.6.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-40
10.6.2 Foundations for Light Poles .............................................................................................................. 10-40
10.6.2.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-40
10.6.2.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 10-40
10.6.2.3 Construction .................................................................................................................................. 10-40
10.6.3 Foundations for Lighting Control Cabinets ....................................................................................... 10-42
10.6.3.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-42
10.6.3.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 10-42
10.6.3.3 Installation ..................................................................................................................................... 10-42
10.7 Light Poles ................................................................................................................................................. 10-42
10.7.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-42
10.7.2 Electrical Cutout for Light Poles ....................................................................................................... 10-43
10.7.2.1 Electrical Cutout ABS ................................................................................................................... 10-43
10.7.2.2 Electrical Cutout Sheet Steel ......................................................................................................... 10-43
10.7.3 Light Poles, 30.5M High ................................................................................................................... 10-43
10.7.3.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-43
10.7.3.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 10-44
10.7.3.3 Construction .................................................................................................................................. 10-44
10.7.3.4 Lantern Support Ring and Head Frame ......................................................................................... 10-45
10.7.3.5 Lowering Winch ........................................................................................................................... 10-45
10.7.3.6 Portable Power Tool Unit.............................................................................................................. 10-46
10.7.4 Light Poles, 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M, 10.0M and 8.0M High ................................................. 10-46
10.7.4.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-46
10.7.4.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 10-46
10.7.4.3 Construction .................................................................................................................................. 10-47
10.7.5 Mid-Hinged Light Poles .................................................................................................................... 10-47
10.7.6 Multi-Function Light Poles ............................................................................................................... 10-49
10.7.6.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-49
10.7.6.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 10-49
10.7.6.3 Assembly....................................................................................................................................... 10-51
10.7.6.4 Design Submission and Production............................................................................................... 10-51
10.7.6.5 Quality Assurance ......................................................................................................................... 10-52
10.7.6.6 Warranty ....................................................................................................................................... 10-52
10.7.7 Electrical Cables, Low Voltage, In Light Poles................................................................................. 10-52
10.7.8 Required Submittals .......................................................................................................................... 10-52
10.7.9 Light Poles Furnished by the Owner ................................................................................................. 10-53
10.7.10 Truck Mounted Hydraulic Platform .................................................................................................. 10-53
10.7.10.1 General...................................................................................................................................... 10-53
10.7.10.2 Construction.............................................................................................................................. 10-53
10.7.11 Paint and Number Light Poles ........................................................................................................... 10-54
10.7.11.1 Paint Light Poles ....................................................................................................................... 10-54
10.7.11.2 Numbering of Light Poles......................................................................................................... 10-54
10.7.12 Spares ................................................................................................................................................ 10-54
10.8 Lanterns (HID and LED) and Ornamental Lighting .................................................................................. 10-57
Page 10-2
10.8.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-57

10.8.2 1000 Watt HPS Lanterns for 30.5M High Light Poles ...................................................................... 10-57
10.8.2.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-57
10.8.2.2 Lamp ............................................................................................................................................. 10-57
10.8.2.3 Ballast ........................................................................................................................................... 10-57
10.8.3 1000W HPS for 20.0M, 18.0M and 14.0M High Poles and 400W HPS and MH and 250W HPS and
MH Lanterns for 10.0M High Poles ................................................................................................................... 10-58
10.8.3.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-58
10.8.3.2 Construction details ....................................................................................................................... 10-58
10.8.3.3 Lamp and Ballast Requirements ................................................................................................... 10-58
10.8.4 LED Lanterns for Roadway and Parking Area .................................................................................. 10-61
10.8.4.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-62
10.8.4.2 Applicable Standards and Guidance Documents .......................................................................... 10-62
10.8.4.3 Construction .................................................................................................................................. 10-63
10.8.4.4 Fixture Technical Data .................................................................................................................. 10-64
10.8.4.6 Warranty ....................................................................................................................................... 10-67
10.8.5 LED Lanterns for Tunnel and Underpass Areas ................................................................................ 10-68
10.8.5.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-68
10.8.5.2 Applicable Standards & Guidance Documents ............................................................................. 10-68
10.8.5.3 Construction .................................................................................................................................. 10-69
10.8.5.4 Fixture Technical Data .................................................................................................................. 10-70
10.8.5.6 Warranty ....................................................................................................................................... 10-74
10.8.6 LED Overhead Sign Lantern Materials ............................................................................................. 10-74
10.8.7 150 Watt Metal Halide Overhead Sign Lantern Materials ................................................................ 10-75
10.8.8 LED Under Bridge Lantern Materials ............................................................................................... 10-76
10.8.8.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-76
10.8.8.2 Surface Mounted Lanterns ............................................................................................................ 10-76
10.8.8.3 Recessed Under Bridge Lantern Construction .............................................................................. 10-76
10.8.8.4 Lantern Optical System ................................................................................................................. 10-76
10.8.8.5 Warranty ....................................................................................................................................... 10-77
10.8.9 Under bridge Lantern Materials ........................................................................................................ 10-77
10.8.9.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-77
10.8.9.2 Surface Mounted Lanterns ............................................................................................................ 10-77
10.8.9.3 Recessed Under Bridge Lantern Construction .............................................................................. 10-77
10.8.9.4 Lantern Optical System ................................................................................................................. 10-77
10.8.10 Basis of Lantern Acceptance ............................................................................................................. 10-78
10.8.10.1 General...................................................................................................................................... 10-78
10.8.11 Required Submittals .......................................................................................................................... 10-78
10.8.12 Spares ................................................................................................................................................ 10-80
10.9 Lighting Control Cabinets .......................................................................................................................... 10-84
10.9.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-84
10.9.1.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 10-84
10.9.1.2 Construction .................................................................................................................................. 10-84
10.9.1.3 Lighting Control Cabinet for LED Lighting ................................................................................. 10-85
10.9.1.4 Inspection and Testing .................................................................................................................. 10-86
10.9.2 Lighting Control Cabinets Supplied by the Owner ........................................................................... 10-86
10.10 Public Lighting Management System ........................................................................................................ 10-86
10.10.1 Public Lighting Energy Saving, Control and Monitoring System for HPS and MH Installations ..... 10-86
10.10.1.1 General Requirements............................................................................................................... 10-86
10.10.2 Public Lighting Energy Saving, Control and Monitoring System for LED Installations .................. 10-87
10.10.2.1 General Characteristics of the Wireless System for LED Lanterns .......................................... 10-87
10.10.2.2 General Characteristic of the LPC Module for LED Lanterns.................................................. 10-89
10.10.2.3 Warranty ................................................................................................................................... 10-89
10.10.3 Tunnel Lighting Energy Saving, Control and Monitoring System for LED Installations ................. 10-90
10.10.3.1 General Characteristic of the LPC Module for LED Lanterns.................................................. 10-90
10.10.3.2 Warranty ................................................................................................................................... 10-91
10.11 Electrical Appurtenances............................................................................................................................ 10-91
10.11.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-91
10.11.2 Cable Tray, Cable Trunking, Cavity Floor Trunking and Junction Box for Tunnel Lighting ........... 10-91
Page 10-3
10.11.2.1 General...................................................................................................................................... 10-91

10.11.2.2 Cable Tray ................................................................................................................................ 10-91
10.11.2.3 Cable Trunking ......................................................................................................................... 10-91
10.11.2.4 Junction Box for Tunnel Lighting ............................................................................................. 10-92
10.11.2.5 Cavity Floor Trunking .............................................................................................................. 10-92
10.11.3 Isolator Switches ............................................................................................................................... 10-92
10.11.4 Local Devices .................................................................................................................................... 10-92
10.11.4.1 Local Switches .......................................................................................................................... 10-92
10.11.4.2 Switched Socket Outlets ........................................................................................................... 10-93
10.11.4.3 Flexible Outlets ......................................................................................................................... 10-93
10.11.5 Lanterns for Control Rooms and Utility Rooms ................................................................................ 10-93
10.11.5.1 Fluorescent Lantern with Two 28-Watt Lamps for Ancillary Rooms ...................................... 10-93
10.11.5.2 Recessed Compact Fluorescent Lantern with Two 40-Watt Lamps for the Equipment Room. 10-94
10.11.5.3 36 Watt LED Recessed Down Light for Control Room ........................................................... 10-94
10.11.5.4 3 Watt LED Illuminated Single Sided Signs ............................................................................ 10-94
10.11.5.5 3 Watt LED Emergency Light .................................................................................................. 10-94
10.11.5.6 LED Illuminated Signs ............................................................................................................. 10-95
10.11.5.7 Inspection Lamp ....................................................................................................................... 10-95
10.11.5.8 Spares........................................................................................................................................ 10-95
10.11.6 Tunnel/Under Pass Lighting System ................................................................................................. 10-95
10.11.6.1 General...................................................................................................................................... 10-95
10.11.6.2 Operational Objectives ............................................................................................................. 10-96
10.11.6.3 Scope of Work .......................................................................................................................... 10-96
10.11.6.4 Description of Lighting System ................................................................................................ 10-97
10.11.6.5 Design Criteria of Lighting System .......................................................................................... 10-97
10.11.6.6 Power Regulators/Power Controllers ........................................................................................ 10-98
10.11.6.7 Tunnel Lanterns – General ....................................................................................................... 10-98
10.11.6.8 Lanterns - Construction ............................................................................................................ 10-99
10.11.6.9 Lanterns - Mechanical Requirements ....................................................................................... 10-99
10.11.6.10 Lanterns - Electrical Requirements ......................................................................................... 10-100
10.11.6.11 Lanterns - Photometrical Requirements .................................................................................. 10-101
10.11.6.12 Lanterns - Photometrical Performance Requirement .............................................................. 10-101
10.11.6.13 Documents to be submitted ..................................................................................................... 10-101
10.11.6.14 Tunnel Lighting Control ......................................................................................................... 10-102
10.11.6.15 Tunnel Lighting Dimming Control System ............................................................................ 10-103
10.11.6.16 Dimming Controllers/Power Controllers ................................................................................ 10-104
10.11.6.17 The Main Control System ....................................................................................................... 10-104
10.11.6.18 Supervision and Back-up Control System .............................................................................. 10-105
10.11.6.19 Training for the Owner’s Personnel ........................................................................................ 10-107
10.11.6.20 Site Inspection and Testing ..................................................................................................... 10-108
10.11.6.21 Spares...................................................................................................................................... 10-109
10.11.7 Low Voltage Switchgears ................................................................................................................ 10-109
10.11.7.1 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................... 10-109
10.11.7.2 Submittals ............................................................................................................................... 10-110
10.11.7.3 Testing .................................................................................................................................... 10-110
10.11.7.4 Main Distribution Board (MDB) ............................................................................................ 10-111
10.11.8 Automatic Transfer Switch Panel .................................................................................................... 10-126
10.11.8.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-126
10.11.8.2 Applicable Standards .............................................................................................................. 10-126
10.11.8.3 Design Considerations ............................................................................................................ 10-126
10.11.8.4 Constructional Requirements for ATS Enclosure ................................................................... 10-127
10.11.9 Diesel Generator Set ........................................................................................................................ 10-129
10.11.9.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-129
10.11.9.2 Sequence of Operation ............................................................................................................ 10-129
10.11.9.3 Shop Drawings........................................................................................................................ 10-130
10.11.9.4 Inspection and Testing ............................................................................................................ 10-131
10.11.9.5 Materials ................................................................................................................................. 10-133
10.11.9.6 Installation Works ................................................................................................................... 10-141
10.11.10 Grounding & Bonding ..................................................................................................................... 10-142
10.11.10.1 Summary ................................................................................................................................. 10-142
10.11.10.2 References............................................................................................................................... 10-142
Page 10-4
10.11.10.3 General Requirements............................................................................................................. 10-143

10.11.10.4 Performance Requirements ..................................................................................................... 10-143
10.11.10.5 Submittals for Review ............................................................................................................ 10-143
10.11.10.6 Submittals for Information ...................................................................................................... 10-143
10.11.10.7 Submittals for Closeout .......................................................................................................... 10-143
10.11.10.8 Regulatory Requirements ....................................................................................................... 10-143
10.11.10.9 Products - Rod Electrodes....................................................................................................... 10-144
10.11.10.10 Plant Electrodes ..................................................................................................................... 10-144
10.11.10.11 Earth Continuity Conductors ................................................................................................. 10-144
10.11.10.12 Main Conductor..................................................................................................................... 10-144
10.11.10.13 Mechanical Connectors ......................................................................................................... 10-144
10.11.10.14 Exothermic Connections ....................................................................................................... 10-144
10.11.10.15 Pit Components ..................................................................................................................... 10-144
10.11.10.16 Execution - Examination ....................................................................................................... 10-145
10.11.10.17 Installation ............................................................................................................................. 10-145
10.11.10.18 Field Quality Control ............................................................................................................ 10-146
10.11.11 Capacitor Bank Panel ...................................................................................................................... 10-147
10.11.11.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-147
10.11.11.2 Unit Capacitors ....................................................................................................................... 10-147
10.11.11.3 Power Factor Controller Units ................................................................................................ 10-147
10.11.11.4 Communication Interface ....................................................................................................... 10-148
10.11.12 Fire Alarm System for Tunnel and Ancillary Rooms ...................................................................... 10-148
10.11.12.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-148
10.11.12.2 Standards, Codes and Approvals ............................................................................................ 10-149
10.11.12.3 Qualifications of Installers ...................................................................................................... 10-149
10.11.12.4 Manufacturer's Representative ................................................................................................ 10-149
10.11.12.5 Submittal ................................................................................................................................. 10-149
10.11.12.6 System Requirements ............................................................................................................. 10-150
10.11.12.7 System Operation.................................................................................................................... 10-150
10.11.12.8 Products .................................................................................................................................. 10-152
10.11.12.9 Linear Heat Detector ............................................................................................................... 10-154
10.11.12.10 System Architecture .............................................................................................................. 10-155
10.11.12.11 Sensor Cable .......................................................................................................................... 10-156
10.11.12.12 Boxes, Enclosures And Wiring Devices................................................................................ 10-157
10.11.12.13 Conductors ............................................................................................................................ 10-157
10.11.12.14 Devices .................................................................................................................................. 10-158
10.11.12.15 Field Quality Control: Testing, general ................................................................................. 10-158
10.11.12.16 Acceptance Testing ............................................................................................................... 10-158
10.11.12.17 Documentation ...................................................................................................................... 10-158
10.11.12.18 Warranty and Services........................................................................................................... 10-159
10.11.13 Uninterruptible Power Supply ......................................................................................................... 10-159
10.11.13.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-159
10.11.13.2 System Description ................................................................................................................. 10-159
10.11.13.3 Relevant Legislation, Directives and Reference Standards .................................................... 10-159
10.11.13.4 Description of Supply ............................................................................................................. 10-160
10.11.13.5 Operating Modes .................................................................................................................... 10-162
10.11.13.6 Controls, Measurements, Signals and Alarms ........................................................................ 10-163
10.11.13.7 Uninterruptible Power System Technical Data ....................................................................... 10-166
10.11.13.8 Miscellaneous Provisions ....................................................................................................... 10-168
10.11.13.9 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 10-168
10.11.14 Telephone Systems .......................................................................................................................... 10-168
10.11.14.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-168
10.11.14.2 Submittals ............................................................................................................................... 10-168
10.11.14.3 Products Description of PABX - General ............................................................................... 10-169
10.11.14.4 Capacity .................................................................................................................................. 10-169
10.11.14.5 System Features ...................................................................................................................... 10-169
10.11.14.6 Station Related Features ......................................................................................................... 10-169
10.11.14.7 Maintenance and Servicing Facilities ..................................................................................... 10-170
10.11.14.8 Telephone Set Features ........................................................................................................... 10-170
10.11.14.9 Telephone Sets ........................................................................................................................ 10-171
10.11.14.10 Telephone Distribution Boxes ............................................................................................... 10-171
Page 10-5
10.11.14.11 Terminal Block ...................................................................................................................... 10-171

10.11.14.12 Power Supply ........................................................................................................................ 10-172
10.11.14.13 Main Distribution Frame ....................................................................................................... 10-172
10.11.14.14 Telephone Socket Outlets ...................................................................................................... 10-172
10.11.14.15 Telephone Cables .................................................................................................................. 10-172
10.11.14.16 Conduits and Conduit Accessories ........................................................................................ 10-172
10.11.14.17 Documentation ...................................................................................................................... 10-172
10.11.14.18 Execution - Documentation ................................................................................................... 10-173
10.11.14.19 Separate Earthing .................................................................................................................. 10-173
10.11.14.20 Training ................................................................................................................................. 10-173
10.11.14.21 Telephone Service Connection .............................................................................................. 10-173
10.11.15 Public Address and Voice Evacuation System ................................................................................ 10-173
10.11.15.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-173
10.11.15.2 System Overview .................................................................................................................... 10-174
10.11.15.3 Equipment Specifications ....................................................................................................... 10-174
10.11.16 Products - Labels/Circuit Lists/Cable Identification........................................................................ 10-181
10.11.16.1 Labelling ................................................................................................................................. 10-181
10.11.16.2 Equipment Duties and Ratings................................................................................................ 10-182
10.11.16.3 Segregation Of Services.......................................................................................................... 10-183
10.11.16.4 Execution - Polarity ................................................................................................................ 10-183
10.11.16.5 Thermographic Survey of the Installation .............................................................................. 10-183
10.11.16.6 Fire and Safety Precautions .................................................................................................... 10-184
10.11.16.7 Safety Interlocks ..................................................................................................................... 10-185
10.11.17 Connection of Materials and Equipment Specified Under Other Sections ...................................... 10-185
10.11.18 Connection of Materials Furnished by the ADWEA/ADDC and by the Owner ............................. 10-186
10.11.19 Spares .............................................................................................................................................. 10-186
10.12 Installation of Miscellaneous Electrical works ......................................................................................... 10-191
10.12.1 Description ...................................................................................................................................... 10-191
10.12.2 Temporary Protection ...................................................................................................................... 10-191
10.12.3 Conduit Installation, General ........................................................................................................... 10-191
10.12.4 Installation of Galvanized Steel Conduits ....................................................................................... 10-191
10.12.4.1 Description .............................................................................................................................. 10-191
10.12.4.2 Materials ................................................................................................................................. 10-191
10.12.5 Installation of PVC Conduits ........................................................................................................... 10-191
10.12.5.1 Description .............................................................................................................................. 10-191
10.12.5.2 Materials ................................................................................................................................. 10-191
10.12.5.3 Construction............................................................................................................................ 10-192
10.12.6 Reinforced Concrete Service Chambers .......................................................................................... 10-192
10.12.6.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-192
10.12.6.2 Materials ................................................................................................................................. 10-192
10.12.6.3 Construction............................................................................................................................ 10-192
10.12.7 PVC Conduit and Concrete Encased Ducts ..................................................................................... 10-192
10.12.8 Protection of Existing Electric Cables ............................................................................................. 10-193
10.12.9 Supply of Cable Covering Tiles ...................................................................................................... 10-193
10.12.9.1 Materials, General ................................................................................................................... 10-194
10.12.9.2 Concrete Mix .......................................................................................................................... 10-194
10.12.9.3 Curing ..................................................................................................................................... 10-194
10.12.9.4 Molding .................................................................................................................................. 10-194
10.12.9.5 Inspection and Tests................................................................................................................ 10-194
10.12.10 Placement of Warning Tapes ........................................................................................................... 10-194
10.13 Remove and Salvage Existing Lighting System....................................................................................... 10-195
10.13.1 Description ...................................................................................................................................... 10-195
10.13.2 Remove and Salvage Existing Lighting System .............................................................................. 10-195
10.13.3 Removal and Reinstallation of Existing Light Poles ....................................................................... 10-195
10.13.3.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-195
10.13.3.2 Remove and Salvage Existing Light Poles with Lanterns ...................................................... 10-195
10.13.3.3 Foundations for and Install Light Poles .................................................................................. 10-196
10.14 Electrical Distribution .............................................................................................................................. 10-196
10.14.1 Description ...................................................................................................................................... 10-196
10.14.2 Guaranteed Characteristics .............................................................................................................. 10-197
10.14.2.1 Design and Criteria ................................................................................................................. 10-197
Page 10-6
10.14.2.2 Rejection of Equipment .......................................................................................................... 10-197

10.14.3 Submittals ........................................................................................................................................ 10-197
10.14.3.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-197
10.14.3.2 Record Drawings, Manuals, Cable Schedules and Records.................................................... 10-197
10.14.4 Low Voltage (LV) Cable and Accessories ...................................................................................... 10-197
10.14.4.1 Cable ....................................................................................................................................... 10-197
10.14.4.2 Joint Box for Low Voltage Cable ........................................................................................... 10-197
10.14.5 11 KV and 22 KV Cable.................................................................................................................. 10-199
10.14.5.1 Description .............................................................................................................................. 10-199
10.14.5.2 Construction and Materials ..................................................................................................... 10-199
10.14.5.3 Test ......................................................................................................................................... 10-201
10.14.5.4 Packing ................................................................................................................................... 10-201
10.14.5.5 Cable Joint Box and Cable Terminations for 11 and 22 KV Cable ........................................ 10-201
10.14.5.6 Fiber Optic Cable, Telephone Cable and Pilot Cable ............................................................. 10-203
10.14.5.7 Technical Requirements ......................................................................................................... 10-203
10.14.6 33 KV Cable and Accessories ......................................................................................................... 10-203
10.14.6.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-203
10.14.6.2 Fundamentals for the Design .................................................................................................. 10-203
10.14.6.3 Tests ........................................................................................................................................ 10-203
10.14.6.4 Material ................................................................................................................................... 10-203
10.14.7 132 KV Cable and Accessories ....................................................................................................... 10-208
10.14.8 Tests ................................................................................................................................................ 10-208
10.14.8.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-208
10.14.8.2 Tests for All Cables during Manufacture ................................................................................ 10-208
10.14.8.3 Tests for Fiber Optic Cables ................................................................................................... 10-210
10.14.8.4 Site Tests for 11 KV, 22 KV and 33 KV Cables .................................................................... 10-210
10.14.8.5 Tests for 11 KV Cable ............................................................................................................ 10-210
10.14.8.6 Tests for Pilot/Telephone Cables ............................................................................................ 10-211
10.14.9 Training ........................................................................................................................................... 10-211
10.14.10 Cable Installation ............................................................................................................................. 10-211
10.14.10.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-211
10.14.10.2 Installing Cables for Lighting and Street Furniture ................................................................ 10-211
10.14.10.3 Earthing and Bonding for Lighting Installations .................................................................... 10-212
10.14.10.4 Trench and Backfill ................................................................................................................ 10-212
10.14.10.5 Cable Laying ........................................................................................................................... 10-213
10.14.10.6 Install Cable Covering Tile ..................................................................................................... 10-214
10.14.10.7 Jointing and Terminating ........................................................................................................ 10-214
10.14.10.8 Install Low Voltage Feeder Pillars (Sub Distribution Feeder Pillars) and Service Turrets (Sub
Distribution Service Cabinets) ...................................................................................................................... 10-215
10.14.11 Remove and Salvage Existing Electrical Circuits and Materials ..................................................... 10-222
10.14.11.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-222
10.14.11.2 Remove Existing Cable .......................................................................................................... 10-222
10.14.11.3 Remove Existing Low Voltage Feeder Pillars and Service Turrets ........................................ 10-223
10.14.12 Rerouting Existing 132 KV Circuits................................................................................................ 10-223
10.15 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Sub-Station .............................................................................. 10-223
10.15.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 10-223
10.15.1.1 Technical Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 10-224
10.15.2 Housing ........................................................................................................................................... 10-225
10.15.2.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-225
10.15.2.3 Testing and Inspection ............................................................................................................ 10-227
10.15.3 11 or 22 or 33 KV Switchgear ......................................................................................................... 10-227
10.15.4 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Transformer .......................................................................................... 10-227
10.15.4.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-227
10.15.4.4 Corrosion Protection ............................................................................................................... 10-232
10.15.4.5 Rejection ................................................................................................................................. 10-232
10.15.4.6 Transport ................................................................................................................................. 10-232
10.15.5 100 kVA Transformer 6.6 KV/0.400 KV (IP68) ............................................................................. 10-232
10.15.5.1 Description .............................................................................................................................. 10-232
Page 10-7

10.15.5.3 Technical Requirements for the Transformer ......................................................................... 10-232
10.15.5.4 Technical Requirements for the Terminations ........................................................................ 10-233
10.15.6 6.6 KV Switchgear .......................................................................................................................... 10-233
10.15.6.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-233
10.15.6.3 Equipments ............................................................................................................................. 10-235
10.15.7 Lighting Control Methodology ........................................................................................................ 10-240
10.15.7.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 10-240
10.15.7.2 Technical Description ............................................................................................................. 10-240
10.15.8 Remote Announcation System ........................................................................................................ 10-241
10.15.9 Spares .............................................................................................................................................. 10-242
10.16 MV Power Distribution Network ............................................................................................................. 10-270
10.16.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 10-270
10.16.1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 10-270
10.16.1.2 Site Conditions........................................................................................................................ 10-270
10.16.2 Trench and Backfill ......................................................................................................................... 10-270
10.16.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 10-270
10.16.3 Armoured Three Single Core 6.6 KV Cable.................................................................................... 10-270
10.16.3.1 Description .............................................................................................................................. 10-270
10.16.3.3 Network Earthing .................................................................................................................... 10-271
10.16.4 Cable Laying ................................................................................................................................... 10-271
10.16.5 Supply Cable Covering Tiles ........................................................................................................... 10-271
10.16.6 Install Cable Covering Tiles ............................................................................................................ 10-271
10.16.7 T-Junction Box ................................................................................................................................ 10-271
10.16.7.1 Description .............................................................................................................................. 10-271
10.16.8 Watertight Transformer 6.6 KV/0.400kV ....................................................................................... 10-271
10.16.8.1 Description .............................................................................................................................. 10-271
10.16.8.3 Technical Requirements for the Transformer ......................................................................... 10-272
10.16.8.4 Technical Requirements for the Terminations ........................................................................ 10-272
10.16.9 Low Voltage IP55 Cabinet / Lighting Distribution Board............................................................... 10-273
10.16.9.1 Description .............................................................................................................................. 10-273
10.16.10 Reinforced Concrete Transformer Chamber.................................................................................... 10-273
Index 10-292
Page 10-8
List of Tables
Table 10-1: Designations and titles for ASTM standards that apply to lighting and electrical distribution works ..... 10-12
Table 10-2: Designations and titles for BS and DIN standards apply to lighting and electrical distribution works .... 10-12
Table 10-3 Designations and titles for IEC standards apply to lighting and electrical distribution works .................. 10-13
Table 10-4: ADWEA Electrical System ...................................................................................................................... 10-17
Table 10-5: ADWEA Electric Power Distribution ...................................................................................................... 10-17
Table 10-6: Typical Properties of Polycarbonate ........................................................................................................ 10-29
Table 10-7: Basis of Lighting Acceptance – Street Lighting ....................................................................................... 10-66
Table 10-8: Basics of Lighting Acceptance - Tunnels ........................................................................................... 10-73
Table 10-9: 11 KV Test Requirements .................................................................................................................. 10-202
Page 10-9
Page 10-10
10 LIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

WORKS
10.1 Standards, Industry Codes and Procedures
10.1.1 Description
Lighting and electrical distribution Works including the supply of all lighting and electrical distribution materials, labor,
tools, equipment and incidentals for the installation of lighting systems, sign lighting systems, underpass lighting, tunnel
lighting, ornamental lighting, bridge lighting, under bridge lighting, cables for low voltage, electrical distribution
systems, conduits, lighting controllers and electrical appurtenant works shall be as indicated on the Contract plans, as
specified herein and as directed by the Engineer. The LV, 11 KV, 22 KV, 33 KV, 132 KV and 220KV electrical cabling
works shall include only the relocation works required due to geometrical modification of the existing road or any new
construction. Any electrical development work shall not be added to the Owner’s scope, unless instructed.
The Contractor, if approved by the Owner, shall perform all work related to the installation of the proposed lighting and
electrical distribution system. In the event the Contractor is not approved by the Owner to do such work, the Contractor
will be required to employ a Subcontractor as nominated or designated by the Owner. The approved Subcontractor
shall perform all work related to the complete installation of the lighting and electrical distribution systems.
10.1.2 Reference Standards and Codes

Lighting, electrical materials and equipment furnished and installed shall comply with internationally recognized
standards and codes and those of the Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) Emirate of Abu Dhabi, any
interim resolutions issued by local authorities or the Owner. Specific standards and industry codes applicable to the
work are as follows:
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
ANSI American National Standards Institute;
ASTM American Society of Testing Materials;
BS British Standards;
DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm;
FS Federal Specifications;
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission;
IES Illuminating Engineering Society;
IPCEA Insulated Power Cables Engineer’s Association (U.S.A.);
IPCEA P-45-482 Short Circuit Performance of Metallic Shields and Sheaths on Insulated Cable;
IPCEA S-66-524 Cross-Linked Polyethylene Insulated Wire & cable for Transmission & Distribution;
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
NEMA 410 Performance testing for lighting controls and switching devices with electronic drivers and
discharge ballasts
NEMA TC-2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80);
NEMA TC-3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;
VDE Verin Deutsher Electrotecniker;
NFPA National fire Protection Association;
CIE International Commision on Illumination;
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration;
UL Underwriters Laboratories;
Page 10-11
CSA CSA Group International;

Any contradictions between the requirements of two or more such standards or codes pertaining to a particular
installation shall be brought to the Engineer's attention by the Contractor prior to placing orders for any cable,
equipment or material. The Contractor shall submit information to the Engineer concerning contradictions and
qualifying information. The Engineer will direct the Contractor as to the governing standard or code.
Materials and equipment not meeting the requirements of the above standards and codes shall not be used unless
approved in writing by the Owner.
Table 10-1: Designations and titles for ASTM standards that apply to lighting and electrical distribution works
ANSI ASTM
Title
Designation Designation
ANSI A92.2 -
Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices
2009
ANSI B1.20.3–
Dryseal Pipe Threads
1976 (R2013)
ANSI B1.20.5-
Gaging for Dryseal Pipe Threads
1991(R1998)
ASTM A36 /
Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
A36M - 08
ASTM A123 / Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
A123M - 12 Iron and Steel Products
ASTM C143 /
Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
C143M - 10a
ASTM A153 / Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
A153M - 09 Hardware
ASTM A384 / Standard Practice for Safequarding Against Warpage and
A384M-07(2013) Distrortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies
Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-alloy Structural Steel,
ASTM A588 /
up to 50 ksi Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion
A588M-10
Resistance
ASTM A595 / Standard Specification for Steel Tubes, Low-Carbon or High-
A595M-11 Strength Low-alloy, Tapered for Structural Use
ASTM C150 /
Standard Specification for Portland Cement
C150M-12
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe,
ASTM D1785-12
Schedules 40,80, and 120
Table 10-2: Designations and titles for BS and DIN standards apply to lighting and electrical distribution works
DIN
BS Designation Title
Designation
Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel

BS 729:1971
articles
Specification for continuously hot-dip zinc coated and iron-zinc alloy
BS 2989:1992
coated steel flat products: tolerances on dimensions and shapes
BS 3692:2001 ISO Metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
Page 10-12
DIN
BS Designation Title
Designation
Specifications for degrees of protection of enclosures of switchgear

BS 5420:1997 and controlgear for voltages up to and including 1000 VAC and 1200
VDC
Specification for cables with thermosetting insulation for electricity
BS 5467:1989 supply for rated voltages of up to and including 600/1000 V and up to
and including 1900/3300 V
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies requirements for
BS 5486-1:1990
type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies
BS 5972:1980 Specification for photoelectric control units for road lighting
Mechanical cable glands, Armour glands. Requirements and test

BS 6121-1:2005
methods
BS 6360:1991 Specification for conductors in insulated cables and coords
BS 6746:1984 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables
Specification for performance requirements for cables required to

BS 6387:1994
maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions
Metallic tube connections for fluid power and general use 37° flared
BS 8434-2:2007
connectors
Fire detection and fire alarm systems for buildings code of practise
BS 5839-1:2013 for design, installation, commissioning and maintenance of systems
in non-domestic premises
Emergency lighting code of practise for the emergency escape
BS 5266:2011
lighting of premises
DIN 43623:1981- Three Pole Fuse-Base Racks 660V, 100 to 630A, For L.V.H.R.C.
05 Fuses, for Busbar Mounting
Table 10-3 Designations and titles for IEC standards apply to lighting and electrical distribution works
IEC
Title
Designation
Specifications for degrees of protection of enclosures of switchgear and controlgear for

IEC 60144:1963
voltages up to and including 1000 VAC and 1200 VDC
IEC 60228:2004 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60269-
Low voltage fuses
1:2009
IEC 60332:2004 Tests on electric and optical fiber cables under fire conditions
IEC 60502- Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1KV
1:2009 up to 30KV
IEC 60529:2013 Degrees of Protection Package
Page 10-13
IEC
Title
Designation
IEC 60598:2011 Lanterns, general requirements and tests
IEC 60227:2007 Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including 450/750V
IEC 60754:2013 Tests on gases evolved during combustion of materials form cables
IEC 61034:2013 Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under defined conditions
IEC 60695:2006 Fire hazard testing
IEC 60068:2013 Environmental testing
IEC 60947:2010 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear
10.1.3 Definition of Terms

The following are definitions of terms used on the Contract plans and in these Standard Specifications:
Ambient Light: Illumination at, near, or around a traffic facility but outside of the right-of-way.
Average Initial Illuminance - The average level of horizontal Illuminance on the roadway pavement area at the time
the lighting system is installed when lamps are new and lantern are clean; expressed in average footcandles (or lux if SI)
for the pavement area.
Average Luminance of the Road Surface (Lav) - The values of Lav are the minimum values to be maintained
throughout the life of the installation for the specified lighting classes. They are dependent on the light distribution of
the lanterns, the luminous flux of the lamps, the geometry of the installation, and on the reflection properties of the road
surface. Higher levels are acceptable when they can be environmentally or economically justified.
Average Maintained Illuminance - The average level of horizontal Illuminance on the roadway pavement when the
output of the lamp and lantern is diminished by the maintenance factors; expressed in average footcandles (or lux if SI)
for the pavement area.
Binning - General term for the production and sorting methodologies used by LED manufacturers to ensure that the
LEDs they manufacture conform to stated specifications for forward voltage, colour and luminous flux.
Ballast - An auxiliary device used with high intensity discharge (HID) lamps to provide proper starting and operating
characteristics. It limits the current through the lamp and may also regulate the voltage.
Bonding Jumper - A reliable conductor to assure the required electrical conductivity between metal parts required to
be electrically connected.
Candela, cd - The unit of luminous intensity (the force generating the luminous flux). Formerly the term “candle” was
used.
Candlepower, cp - Luminous intensity expressed in candelas. (It is not an indication of the total light output.)
Coefficient of Utilization, Cu - The ratio of the luminous flux (lumens) from the lantern received on the surface of the
roadway to the total lumens emitted by the lantern lamp.
Conduit - A closed system of galvanized steel or PVC pipe to protect and carry electric cables.
Control Cabinet - An enclosure designed for surface mounting and provided with a frame on which swinging doors are
hung and within which circuit protective and other electrical devices are installed.
Page 10-14
Cut-Off (or Shielding) Angle of a Lantern - The angle between the vertical axis and the line of sight at which the
bare tight source is not visible.
Duct - A concrete encased PVC pipe to protect and carry direct burial electric cable beneath roads, footpaths or other
structures.
Footcandle, FC - The illumination on a surface one square foot in area on which there is uniformly distributed one
lumen, or, the illumination produced on a surface, all points of which are at a distance of one foot from a directionally
uniform point source of one candela.
Frame - An assembly consisting of all parts of the circuit breaker except the trip unit and the terminal connectors.
Glare - The sensation produced by luminance within the visual field that is sufficiently greater than the luminance to
which the eyes are adapted to cause annoyance, discomfort or loss of visual performance and visibility.
High Pressure Sodium Lamp - A high intensity discharge lamp in which light is produced by excitation of inert gases
Mercury-Sodium in an Xenon gas atmosphere.
Interrupting Current - The rated interruption current is the maximum current at rated voltage which a device is
required to interrupt under the specified conditions and with a normal frequency recovery voltage not less than the rated
voltage.
Isocandela Line - A line plotted on any appropriate coordinates to show directions in space, about a source of light, in
which the candlepower is the same. For a complete exploration, the line always is a closed curve. A series of such
curves of equal candlepower is an isocandela diagram.
Horizontal Lux - Lux measured in a horizontal plane.
Illuminance - The density of luminous flux incident on a surface; the quotient of the flux divided by the area of the
surface, when the surface is uniformly illuminated.
Lantern - A complete lantern unit consisting of the lamp or lamps, chokes, capacitors, together with the parts designed
to distribute the light, to position or protect the lamps, and to connect the lamps to the power supply.
Light Emitting Diode (LED) - A light emitting diode (LED) is a solid-state semiconductor device that converts
electrical energy directly into light. On its most basic level, the semiconductor is comprised of two regions. The p-
region contains positive electrical charges while n-region contains negative electrical charges. When voltage is applied
and current begins to flow, the electrons move across the n-region into the p-region. The process of an electron moving
through the p-n junction releases energy. The dispersion of this energy produces photons with visible wavelengths.
LED Driver: An electronic circuit that converts input power into a current source – a source in which current remains
constant despite fluctuations in voltage. An LED driver protects LEDs from normal voltage fluctuations, over voltages,
and voltage spikes.
Lighting Unit - The complete assembly of the light pole, lantern, and in the case of a 30.5M high light pole, the
lowering device.
Light Loss factor - Also known as Maintenance Factor. It is a depreciation factor which is applied to the calculated
initial average lux to determine the value of depreciated average illumination at a predetermined time in the operating
cycle, usually just prior to relamping.
Longitudinal Uniformity of Road surface Luminance (U l ) - U l is the ratio of the minimum to the maximum
luminance along a line or lines parallel to the run of the road. It is mainly a criterion relating to comfort and its purpose
is to prevent the repeated pattern of high and low luminance values on a lit run of road becoming too pronounced. It
only applies to long, uninterrupted sections of road.
Lowering Device - A device used to lower the lantern to within one meter from ground level for inspection and
servicing of lanterns on 30.5M high light poles as indicated on the Contract plans.
Lumen, Lm - The unit of luminous flux. It is equal to the flux through a unit solid angle (steradian) from a uniform
point source of one candela (candle) or to the flux on a unit surface, all points of which are a unit distance from a
uniform point source of one candela.
Lantern Dirt Depreciation - Dirt and dust present in all ambient environments are ultimately attracted to and trapped
in electrical equipment. The extent of dust collecting on the lamps depends on the environment, what type of fixture is
in use, whether it is ventilated or not, and the type of work performed in the area. The extent of LDD depends on these
conditions and also how often the fixtures will be cleaned. To determine this factor, first identify the fixture type’s
maintenance category (I through VI) in ascending order of imperviousness to dirt and dust intrusion.
Page 10-15
Lantern Efficacy (Lumens per Watts) - Specific measure of the net useful light output from the lantern for a given
power input. Properly measured, Lantern Efficacy combines both the light source system efficacy and lantern
efficiency, allowing for a true comparison of lantern regardless of the light source. Lantern efficacy is the preferred
metric for LEDs because it measures the net light output from the lantern divided by power into the system, accounting
for driver, optical, and thermal looses. Methods for measuring lantern efficacy of Solid-state lighting fixtures and lamps
are defined in the IESNA standard, LM-79-2008.
Luminance (photometric brightness) - The quotient of the luminous flux at an element of the surface surrounding the
point, and propagated in directions defined by an elementary cone containing the given direction, by the product of the
solid angle of the cone and the area of the orthogonal projection of the element of the surface on a plane perpendicular
to the given direction.
Lux, Lx - The international system (SI) unit of illumination. It is a unit of illumination equal to the direct illumination
on a surface that is everywhere one meter from a uniform point source of one candela intensity or equal to one lumen
per square meter.
Optic Factor - The amount of space lamps take up serves as an obstruction to light leaving the fixture that is reflected
internally. Since lamp absorbs mass, they absorb some of this light output. The result is what is called the Optic Factor.
Overall Uniformity of Road Luminance (U o ) - U o is the ratio of the minimum luminance at a point to the average
road surface luminance. This criterion is important as regards the control of minimum visibility on the road.
Pavement Reflection Factor (or Reflectance) - The ratio of the light reflected by a pavement surface to the light
incident upon it.
Post Top Lighting Unit - A light pole with a short vertical shaft for mounting the lanterns.
Metal Halide Lamp - A high intensity discharge (HID) lamp in which the major portion of the light is produced by
radiation of metal halides and their products of dissociation - possibly in combination with metallic vapors such as
mercury. Includes clear and phosphor coated lamps.
Mounting Height - The vertical distance between the roadway or motorway surface and the center of the apparent light
source of the lantern.
Shoe Base - A low profile casting that connects the shaft to the pole base plate.
Slip Base - A pole base plate designed to slide off a lower plate on impact.
Spacing - For roadway lighting, the distance between successive lighting units, measured along the centerline of the
roadway or motorway.
Specular Glare - Glare resulting from light being reflected from polished or glossy surfaces.
Surround Ratio SR (RS) - One of the principal aims in road lighting is to create a bright road surface against which
objects can be seen. However, the upper parts of tall objects on the road and objects towards the side of the road,
particularly on curved sections, are seen against the surrounds of the road. Thus adequate lighting on the surrounds
helps the motorist to perceive more of the environment and make speed adjustments in time.
The function of the surround ratio is to ensure that light directed on the surrounds is sufficient for objects to be revealed.
In situations where lighting is already provided on the surrounds, the use of surround ratio is rendered unnecessary.
Threshold Increment TI (fTI) - Disability glare results from the scattering of light within the eye, so reducing
contrasts of the retinal image. The effect may be explained by the superimposition of a uniform luminance veil over the
scene, which is quantified as the equivalent veiling luminance. The magnitude of this depends on the illuminance on the
driver’s eye from the lanterns and the angles at which type are seen. While the degree of disability glare increases with
the equivalent veiling luminance, it decreases as a function of the average road luminance. TI is a measure of the loss of
visibility caused by the disability glare from the road lighting lanterns. The formula from which it is calculated is based
on the percentage increase in the luminance difference needed to make the object visible in the presence of glare when it
is just visible in the absence of glare, that is, when the lanterns are screened from the view of the observer.
Uniformity Ratio - The ratio of the Average Maintained Illuminance level to the Minimum Maintained Illuminance
level. The uniformity ratio is used as a design check to ensure lighting performance.
Vertical Lux - Lux measured in a vertical plane.
Vertical or Brightness Control - The brightness control classification provides a means of rating the lanterns
according to the amount of glare or brightness at high angles from the lantern. The major categories are: cut-off, semi-
cut-off, and non-cut-off.
Page 10-16
10.1.4 Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) Electrical

System
The voltage level and other characteristics of the ADWEA electrical distribution system for the roadway lighting, sign
lighting and similar systems are shown in Table 10-4
Table 10-4: ADWEA Electrical System
System Rated Voltage 400/230 volts

Number of Phases 3 phase (4 wire)
Frequency 50 Hertz (Hz)
Prospective Fault Current 46 kA for 1 sec
Earthing System Solidly earthed
The voltage level and other characteristics of ADWEA's systems in operation for electric power distribution are in
Table 10-5:
Table 10-5: ADWEA Electric Power Distribution
System Rated Voltage 11 KV 22 KV 33 KV 132 KV

Highest System Voltage 12.5 KV 23.5 KV 36 KV 145 KV
Number of Phases 3 phase 3 phase 3 phase 3 phase
Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
Design Level Fault 500 MVA 1000 MVA 2500 MVA 7500 MVA
Solidly Earthing through

Earthing System Solidly earthed Solidly earthed
earthed resistor
Information regarding the point of origin of the design level fault shall be obtained by the Contractor from the
ADWEA/ADDC.
10.1.5 Service Connections

The Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with the Abu Dhabi Distribution company
(ADDC) for service connections, including all connections to lighting control cabinets and service connections to any
other electrical system installation indicated on the Contract plans, specified in the Particular Specifications or in these
Standard Specifications.
The Contractor will not be permitted to interrupt electric service except as directed by the ADDC. The Contractor shall
contact the various sections of the DoT and the ADDC to arrange for supply of electrical service connection. The
Contractor shall submit to ADDC all necessary documentation including the Owner signed service connection
applications and any drawings approval charges as required by ADDC and as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall include in the contract price, all costs for arranging the service connections to the electrical system
installed under the Contract, including but not limited to, the service connection charges and any drawings approval
charges payable to the ADDC and the cost of metering equipment and associated accessories required to obtain the
service connections. No separate payment will be made for arranging the ADDC service connections to the electrical
system.
10.1.6 Site Conditions

Climatic conditions are very severe in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi. Dust storms are prevalent and the atmosphere is
saliferous, humid and highly corrosive. Humidity is high, maximum relative humidity being 100 percent, and periods of
high humidity are long and continuous. Temperatures are high in summer. The prevalent temperatures are shown
below:
Page 10-17
Ground thermal resistivity (g) 150 Kcm/W

Max. peak ambient shaded temperature 50°C
Max. daily average ambient shade temperature 45°C
Minimum ambient temperature 7°C
Max. temp of metal surfaces in direct sunlight 80°C
Altitude Sea level to 300 m
Maximum wind velocity 125 Km/hr
The soil in Abu Dhabi is very corrosive. Sulphate reducing bacteria are common to all soils in the Abu Dhabi area, and
as the soil is generally rich in sulphate, the anaerobic conditions which may arise in contact with buried pipes and cables
favors the development of these anaerobic organisms, which generate hydrogen sulphate and consequently render these
areas most corrosive.
In view of the high temperature encountered in Abu Dhabi, PVC plasticizers shall be of the long chain, high molecular
weight type to reduce the loss of plasticizer in the hot conditions. The sand is not corrosive under dry aerated
conditions, but under anaerobic conditions the sulphate reducing bacteria in the sand will result in serious corrosion of
metals in contact with the sand. PVC shall be suitable for the soil conditions and the Contractor shall submit a
certification along with samples verifying that the PVC shall be suitable for the conditions.
10.1.7 Coordination with Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority

(ADWEA) and Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (ADDC)
The Contractor, prior to commencement of his work, shall notify the ADWEA/ADDC of his intent to perform the work.
Upon request from the Contractor, the ADWEA/ADDC will locate any buried cable, duct or other electrical facilities
which may interfere with the Contractor's operations without charge to him. The Contractor shall report any known or
suspected damage to any electrical facilities immediately to the Engineer. This shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility for the repair or replacement of facilities damaged by his operations.
In the event of damage to any ADWEA/ADDC facilities by the Contractor's operations, the ADWEA/ADDC will
require the Contractor to restore the system or facilities to operation immediately. The repair or replacement shall meet
with the approval of the ADWEA/ADDC. All damaged cable shall be replaced in complete spans and all splices shall
be in locations permitted in the original installation. No additional payment will be made by the Owner for compliance
with these requirements or for any penalty or expenses incurred to effect repairs to damaged electrical facilities.
10.1.8 Schedules and Technical Details

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings and material submittals for all lighting and electrical distribution work in
accordance with the requirements of Section 1.15, of Chapter 1, General Requirements, of these Standard Specifications
and as directed and approved by the Engineer, the Owner and the ADWEA/ADDC. The Contractor shall supply
comprehensive supporting information and full technical particulars to enable the Engineer, the Owner and the
ADWEA/ADDC to assess the merits of each submittal. These shall be signed by the manufacturer and reviewed by the
Contractor before submitting to the Engineer and to the Owner.
All shop drawings for the supply of electrical materials shall be completed fully, correctly and signed by the
manufacturer. Any deviations to the specified materials shall be notified to the attention of the Engineer. In case of the
proposed deviations are accepted by the Engineer, the Contractor must support his proposal with the test certificate
from third Party showing it is equivalent to the original.
10.1.9 Inspection and Testing

All lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor for the Works will
be subject to inspection and testing during manufacture and installation. The inspection and testing requirements
specified herein are in addition to the inspection and testing by the independent inspection and testing authorities,
specified elsewhere in these documents.
During manufacture, inspection and testing of electrical distribution cables, materials and electrical appurtenances will
be carried out by the Engineer, the ADWEA/ADDC representatives and the Owner and or an Inspector appointed by the
Owner. During manufacture, inspection and testing of lighting materials (poles, lanterns and accessories) and electrical
appurtances will be carried out by the Engineer and the Owner and/or an inspector appointed by the Owner. The
Contractor shall provide all transportation, housing, living expenses, tools, test equipment and all other necessary
facilities of the Engineer, the Owner and the ADWEA/ADDC and/or the Inspector approved by the Owner, who may
carry out or witness any inspections and tests that may be deemed necessary.
Page 10-18
All required materials for inspection and testing as well as all testing equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor for
the testing of lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and electrical appurtenances during manufacture and
for such material, during installation, which is furnished by ADWEA/ADDC or by the Owner. The Contractor shall
include in the Contract price, all costs of inspection and testing, including the fees payable to the inspector appointed by
the Owner and the cost of all material samples and inspection and testing equipment required as specified herein.
The Contractor shall carry out the tests specified in the latest relevant I.E.S./I.E.C./B.S.S. specifications and these tests
shall be carried out to the satisfaction and in the presence of the Engineer or the approved Inspector appointed by the
Owner.
These tests shall be carried out prior to shipment of the tested material from the place of manufacture. The Contractor
shall give not less than fourteen days notice to the Inspector as to when the different parts of the equipment will be
ready for the specified tests.
The Contractor will not be required to provide inspection and testing during manufacture of any lighting and electrical
distribution cables, materials and equipment provided by the ADWEA/ADDC or by the Owner.
The lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment shall not be shipped unless the Inspector's
approval is obtained. Approval by the Inspector shall not relieve the Contractor of liability to supply the specified
lighting and electrical distribution materials and equipment nor exonerate him from any of the guarantees required by
these Standard Specifications.
After the installation has been completed, current, voltage, and insulation resistance readings for each circuit shall be
taken and tabulated by the Contractor. Any indications of ground faults, shorts, or high resistance splices shall be
thoroughly investigated and remedied before final acceptance of the installation. Wiring devices, electrical apparatus or
lanterns if grounded or shorted in any integral "live" part, shall be removed and the trouble corrected by replacing all
defective parts or materials. All "live" wires shorted or grounded within ducts or conduit shall be removed and replaced.
Any high voltage or low voltage distribution cable not equal to the specified standards shall be rejected. Defective cable
shall be replaced with new cable and retested until satisfactory. Insulation resistance readings shall meet the specified
requirements. Lamp terminal voltages shall be taken at the locations designated by the Engineer. Three copies of the
tabulation of voltages, current, and insulation resistance showing readings for each branch circuit shall be submitted to
the Engineer. A field test shall be made and witnessed the Engineer and a representative of the Owner.
The Owner will accept no claim for any costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of replacing defective electrical
distribution cables, materials and equipment furnished by the ADWEA/ADDC or by the Owner. The Contractor shall
check the condition at the time of delivery of all material furnished by the ADWEA/ADDC or by the Owner.
10.1.10 Field Performance Tests

Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall conduct a complete inspection of all lighting and electrical
distribution Works to ensure that all lighting, distribution and control equipment is in proper operating condition. All
electrical circuits and lighting systems shall be checked by the Contractor and he shall make corrections and
adjustments that are deemed necessary to provide a system in accordance with these Standard Specifications. Such
corrections and adjustments shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Each circuit shall be tested for continuity and
for ground. An ohmmeter test shall be made on each circuit between the circuit and a ground. The insulation resistance
shall not be less than the specified value for the cables and equipment and the readings shall be recorded and furnished
to the Engineer. The lighting field performance tests shall include the luminance and illuminance measurements as per
CIE or IESNA approved methods for measurements.
A functional test shall be made to verify that every part of the system functions as required by the Contract plans and
these Standard Specifications. The length of the functional test shall consist of not less than five days of continuous
satisfactory operation. If unsatisfactory performance of the system develops due to faulty materials, fabrication or
installation, the condition shall be corrected and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved.
Any components of the lighting and electrical distribution system found to be faulty, malfunctioning or damaged during
the test period shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
During the specified test period, the Contractor's maintenance crews shall maintain the system or systems undergoing
test. The cost of any maintenance necessary shall be at the Contractor's expense and no additional compensation will be
allowed. The functional test for lighting systems shall consist of an operational test for five consecutive nights
according to the regular lighting schedule. Shutdown caused by factors beyond the Contractor's control shall not
constitute discontinuity of the functional test.
Page 10-19
10.1.11 Electrical, Utilities and Record Drawings

For purposes of clearances and legibility, the electrical and utilities drawings are essentially diagrammatic, and although
the size and location of equipment is indicated to scale wherever possible, the Contractor shall make use of all of the
data in all the Contract Documents, and shall verify this information with actual site conditions.
All other drawings take precedence over the electrical and utilities drawings in the representation of the construction of
the Works. The Contractor shall constantly refer to all other drawings in order to coordinate the electrical works with
the other work.
The wiring and equipment shall be modified as necessary to meet the requirements of any particular manufacturer's
equipment which is installed.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit record drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 1.26.7, of
Chapter 1, General Requirements, of these Standard Specifications. These drawings shall include definite locations of
all cable crossings under pavements or shoulders. The Engineer will not authorize final inspection of the electrical
systems until he has received said record drawings.
10.1.12 Procedures for Electrical and Lighting Works

Procedures for Electrical and Lighting Works are outlined below; however, it is the Contractor's responsibility to verify
these procedures with the Owner and ADWEA/ADDC prior to starting the electrical distribution works.
10.1.12.1 Procedure for the Lighting Works

The lighting works shall be administered in accordance with requirements of the following procedures:
1. The Contractor, if approved by the Owner shall perform all work related to the installation of the proposed
lighting, materials and equipment. If not approved the Contractor shall employ an electrical Subcontractor who
is specialized in street lighting construction and maintenance works, and is approved by the Owner for
performing the lighting works. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper and immediate
maintenance of the lighting system until the end of the Maintenance Period and shall have the facilities to carry
out the works as required on a 24-hour-a-day basis.
2. The shop drawing procedures shall be submitted by the Contractor as included in Section 10.1.12.3 below.
3. All ducts, conduits and pull boxes required for lighting works in a particular sector or area shall be constructed
and their locations as per approved shop drawings before proceeding with light pole and cable installation in
the area.
4. Lighting material, if supplied by ADWEA/ADDC/the Owner or from other ongoing Contracts, shall be
collected from their storeyard as a subsidiary obligation. No separate payments will be made for the
transporting of these materials.
5. The Contractor is responsible for maintenance of the lighting and the entire lighting system from the date of
energizing until completion of the Maintenance Period and shall undertake specific maintenance or repair
works within twenty four hours notice from the Owner. This requirement is also applicable for detour lighting
during the construction period.
6. The Contractor shall remove the existing light poles based on the Owner’s authorization or as directed by the
Engineer. Before removing the light poles, the Engineer and the Contractor shall prepare a joint site inspection
report indicating the existing condition of the light poles and associated appurtenances.
7. Removed and salvaged materials shall be returned to the Owner’s store in accordance with the requirements of
Section 10.13.2, of these Standard Specifications.
8. All unused materials, at the end of the Contract or when directed by the Engineer, shall be delivered to the
Owner’s store or to other locations as directed by the Engineer.
9. The details of poles installed and cables laid, with sketches showing cable routes, joint locations, if any, and
locations of lighting control cabinets, feeder pillars, service turrets, etc. are to be furnished to ADWEA/ADDC,
the Engineer or to the Owner by the Contractor immediately after each installation is complete. No circuits will
be energized without this information.
10. The Contractor shall submit as-built sketches to the Engineer and the Owner within one week from the date of
energizing the circuits.
Page 10-20
11. If the Contractor does not deliver the unused lighting materials to the Engineer store within the time limits
specified in Item 7 above, the Engineer will advise the Owner to hold the Contractor's payment or to recover
the cost of non-delivered materials as invoiced by the Engineer. The Owner will recover the amount from the
Contractor or hold the Contractor's payment in accordance with the prevailing laws.
12. Final handing over of lighting works will be after completion of the Maintenance Period. In addition to the
above Procedures, the Contractor shall familiarize himself with Chapters 10, 11 and 12 of the Road Lighting
Manual.
13. The Contractor shall submit a monthly material statement in a format approved by the Engineer, showing the
details of materials received, installed, and balance available. This material statement shall be submitted with
the Contractor’s monthly progress certifications.
14. All materials to be used in the lighting and electrical works shall have the Owner’s approval prior to
installation.
15. Any deviations from the contract drawings shall require the Owner’s approval, while preparing the shop
drawings by the Contractor prior to installation.
16. Any change in the design documents requires the Owner’s approval prior to installation.
10.1.12.2 Procedure for ADWEA/ADDC Electrical, Distribution Works

1. The Contractor shall follow ADWEA/ADDC standards for performing the electrical works.
2. ADWEA/ADDC, through the Engineer, will issue design plans for electrical works to the Contractor in
suitable parts according to the Contractor’s program for the road works and to meet electrical requirements. To
facilitate preparation of electrical design plans, the Contractor shall provide to ADWEA/ADDC, through the
Engineer, the excavate to locate details of the existing utilities and other relevant existing condition survey
information.
3. The Contractor shall prepare detailed shop drawings based on the ADWEA/ADDC design plans and matching
the site conditions.
4. Cables and other required materials, if supplied by ADWEA/ADDC or from another ongoing Contract, shall be
collected from their stores as a subsidiary obligation. No separate payment will be made for the transporting of
these materials.
5. ADWEA/ADDC approval is necessary for the materials, if any, supplied by the Contractor for electrical works.
The latest specification for the electrical cables and accessories shall be obtained from ADDC prior to
submission of material submittals for electrical works. Any deviations from the standard specifications shall be
indicated in the material submittals.
10.1.12.3 Shop Drawings Procedures for Lighting Systems after Approval of

Materials
Prior to beginning lighting work, and after approval of materials, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
approval the following shop drawings:
1. Shop drawings for all lighting work
2. Comprehensive supporting information and full technical particulars, signed by the manufacturer, as needed to
evaluate the submittal
3. For lighting control cabinet components, shop drawing submittal shall:
• Show the commercial standard rating and the Abu Dhabi rating
• Include the manufacturer's certified shop drawings indicating all related components along with their
details for approval by the Engineer
4. Engineering luminance study with recommendations as to pole spacings, lantern type, mounting heights.
5. Any additional information as directed by the Engineer
6. All of these drawings that apply:
i. Lighting pole layout plan with pole foundation and pole mounting details
ii. Control cabinet details
Page 10-21
iii. Cable routing (overall and poles) with necessary conduit and pullbox details
iv. Earthing system details
v. Load schedules
vi. Power supply routing and details
vii. Lantern mounting details
7. Detailed shop drawing for any tunnel and underpass lighting, including:
i. Wiring diagram, electrical load schedule and control system required to achieve lighting regulation for
different external lighting levels
ii. Results of L20 value field measurements, taken during construction in association with the tunnel lantern
and control manufacturer, including determination of the required lighting level
iii. Tunnel lighting levels
iv. Lantern spacing required to achieve the specified lighting levels
v. Any other electro-mechanical system shop drawings for tunnels
For clarity and legibility, the lighting drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Size and location of equipment is
indicated to scale wherever possible, but the Contractor shall consult all of the Contract Documents for useful data.
Contractor shall verify information given on Contract plans and in the Contract with actual conditions at the site of the
works. Contractor shall constantly refer to Contract plans for other disciplines to coordinate with the other work. Wiring
and equipment shall be modified as necessary to meet the requirements of any particular manufacturer's equipment
which is installed.
In addition to the above the Shop drawings for lighting systems (i.e. roadway, parking and sidewalk duct works) after
approval of materials shall be in accordance with the following requirements:
1. The Contractor shall submit sketches to the Engineer showing areas where lighting facilities are proposed for
construction, in stages according to the approved schedule of works.
2. The Contractor shall identify on the shop drawings, the adjacent areas which require coordination of lighting
facilities.
3. The shop drawings shall indicate, but not be limited to, the following:
i. Roadway pavement, parking, sidewalk, service reservation and pedestrian paved areas.
ii. Proposed pole locations (Use different symbols for each pole height and each lantern type and the number
of lanterns. Centreline station locations for each pole number shall also be given).
iii. Locations of all existing and future electrical ducts with number of ways indicated.
iv. Proposed locations of all pull boxes.
v. Proposed locations of all control cabinets.
vi. Proposed locations of bus shelters and telephone booths.
vii. Proposed circuitry.
viii. Legend.
4. The Engineer will obtain all available information from adjacent Contracts, if any, to facilitate coordination
defined in Item 2 above in the form of approved shop drawings or proposed lighting system drawings.
5. The Engineer and the Owner’s representative will jointly review the proposed locations of pull boxes, control
cabinets, circuitry and conduits as indicted on the shop drawings.
6. The marked-up print will be returned to the Contractor with approval or comments by the Engineer.
10.1.12.4 As-built Drawings

Contractor shall comply with the requirements for as-built drawings, also called record drawings, established in Section
1.26.7 of Chapter 1, general Requirements of these Standard Specifications, in addition to the requirements stated
herein. Final presentation of the as-built drawings and schedules shall be approved by the Engineer and the Owner.
Final inspection of the electrical systems will not be authorized until the Engineer has received the as-built drawings.
As-built drawings shall be provided for the installation of electrical cables and all materials shall show:
Page 10-22
1. Route of each cable

2. Exact location of each cable
3. Position of each joint, with the relative positions of the cable, tiles, depths and spacing
4. Exact locations of all cable crossings under pavements or shoulders
As-built drawings, drawn to a scale of at least 1:500, shall be submitted within 2 months of laying cable or as approved
by the Owner.
The as-Built drawings of street lighting shall be drawn to a scale of at least 1:500, or as advised by the Owner.
In addition to the requirements under “Shop Drawings” given above, full details of the following shall be presented to
the Engineer for any electro-mechanical as-built drawings.
1. Position and extend of all support construction left in.
2. Precise location of all services installed.
3. Amendments to approved working drawings as a consequence of construction.
4. Measure locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and
accessible features of the Work.
5. Field changes of dimension and detail.
6. Details not on original Contract plans.
Contractor shall submit to ADDC a draft copy of the as-built drawings immediately after each installation is complete.
No circuits will be energized without this information. Contractor shall submit completed as-built drawings to ADDC
within 1 week from the date of energizing the circuits, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Five paper copies shall be provided, suitably bound, and 3 copies in electronic format (AutoCAD, PDF and GIS) on a
CD or as approved by the Owner.
10.2 Lighting and Electrical Materials, General

10.2.1 Description
Materials supplied by the Contractor to be incorporated in the lighting and electrical distribution Works shall be as
indicated on the Contract plans, as specified herein and as directed by the Engineer.
10.2.2 General
All materials shall comply with the requirements as specified herein in this Chapter, inclusive and other applicable
Sections of these Standard Specifications.
The materials of all components used in the lighting and electrical distribution Works shall be new and the best of their
respective kind and the most suitable for working under the weather and site conditions set out in these Standard
Specifications, thus withstanding the variations of temperatures and other prevailing conditions without distortion or
deterioration of any part of the electrical materials. In every case where a standard has been established for a particular
type of material, the material shall comply with the provisions set forth in the standard, such standards being previously
listed under Section 10.1.2.
The workmanship on all components shall be of the highest order and defective parts shall not be welded, plugged or
filled in any manner without written approval of the Engineer.
Metal works shall be adequately protected against corrosion, oxidation or other deterioration, bearing in mind the
prevailing site conditions.
Corresponding parts shall be made to gauge and shall be interchangeable wherever possible and the Contractor shall
provide interchangeability as and when directed by the Engineer.
Electrical materials or devices for use in electrical Works shall be of the same type and by the same manufacturer,
unless otherwise approved.
Mechanisms shall, where necessary, be constructed of stainless steel, brass or gun metal to prevent sticking due to
corrosion. Cast iron shall not be used for the chambers of oil filled apparatus or parts subject to mechanical stress.
Page 10-23
The equipment specified in these Standard Specifications shall be so manufactured as to facilitate easy and proper
erection and maintenance. The design of all equipment shall ensure satisfactory operation under the prevailing site
conditions.
It is the intent of these Standard Specifications that a manufacturer shall be selected by the Contractor who can supply
complete lighting units meeting the general requirements of the specifications and Contract plans. The selected
manufacturer shall submit, for review and approval by the Engineer, a complete list of equipment and materials
proposed for use.
The list shall include descriptive literature, technical details and drawings sufficient to fully describe and explain the
proposed material. When directed by the Engineer, samples of any of the materials and equipment proposed for use
shall be submitted.
Before placing a final order, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three samples of requested material for quality
evaluation otherwise one sample shall be submitted.
The materials and equipment specified herein shall give continuous, satisfactory and trouble-free service under the
conditions as required and as specified in these Standard Specifications.
The Contractor shall submit with his shop drawings satisfactory evidence that the manufacturer whose products he is
offering has been in commercial operation successfully for at least five years. The Contractor shall also submit the
manufacturer's annual reports and balance sheets for the last five years. Proposals which do not include such evidence
or which include unsatisfactory evidence may be rejected by the Owner.
10.2.3 Control of Materials

Procedures for documentation and approval of all lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment
proposed for use are specified herein.
The Contractor shall conduct his own search into the timely availability of the specified cables, materials and equipment
required and shall ensure that all lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment required for the
Works are in strict compliance with these Standard Specifications.
All costs of work and lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment, including samples, required
by these Standard Specifications shall be included in the Bills of Quantities Item for which the subject material or
equipment is paid and no additional payment will be made by the Owner for any incidental costs that may occur in
fulfilling the requirements of these Standard Specifications.
The control of lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment shall be exercised in the following
stages:
1. Within 90 days after the award of Contract and before any work is performed, the Contractor shall submit for
approval of the Engineer:
i. Complete shop drawings in accordance with Section 10.1.8, and Section 1.15.9 of Chapter 1, General
Requirements, of these Standard Specifications. Manufacturer's specifications and detailed technical
bulletins, drawings, design calculations and similar documents of the poles, lanterns, lamps, ballasts, wire,
cable, joints, splicing connectors, ducts, conduits, raceways and equipment for the Works specified in
these Standard Specifications. Manufacturer's catalogue data for adhesive tapes and miscellaneous items
shall also be submitted.
ii. Shop drawings for the fabrication of the control cabinets, the parts thereof and the wiring of the equipment
therein and shop drawings of the light pole shafts and arms, showing in detail the fabrication thereof and
the description of any materials used in the fabrication, anchor bolts and foundation reinforcing materials.
iii. Isofootcandle or isolux diagrams of horizontal illumination, utilization curves, and isocandela diagrams
for the proposed lanterns. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall also furnish candlepower
tables for all vertical and lateral angles of the lanterns.
iv. Spectral distribution details showing values of the lantern in lux at various test points in accordance with
the current edition of the I.E.S. standards and/or at locations as directed by the Engineer.
v. Three copies of all of the above items shall be gathered by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer at
one time. A letter enumerating the submitted items shall accompany the submittal package. Partial and
sporadic submittals will not be acceptable and the Engineer will return such incomplete submittals
unmarked or will evaluate the circumstances and possible consequences and may accept to review such
partial submittals conditionally.
Page 10-24
2. Only after the requirements of "1" above have been completely satisfied and before any lighting and electrical
distribution cables, materials and equipment are delivered to the site, the following requirements shall be met:
i. If the Owner will exempt any material from testing during manufacture, the Contractor shall obtain and
forward to the Engineer a written, certified and notarized statement from the manufacturer, stating that all
such equipment and/or materials exempt from testing during manufacture by the Owner, is guaranteed by
the manufacturer and that all such equipment and material complies in all respects with the requirements
of these Standard Specifications.
ii. When testing is required, it shall be performed in strict compliance with the testing procedure as specified
herein or as directed by the Engineer.
iii. The Contractor shall prepare the equipment in his shop so that it can be readily inspected and shall request
an inspection of the equipment. The Inspector will tag the equipment which is inspected and it may be
delivered to the job site. No uninspected material shall be delivered to the job site or installed in the work.
No material will be inspected unless the certified and notarized statement required above is delivered to
the Engineer and/or the testing has been performed and the results have been acceptable to the Engineer. A
one-week notice will be generally required for the material inspection.
3. Material which has been installed prior to fully satisfying the requirements of these Standard Specifications is
subject to removal, disposal and replacement in kind at the sole expense of the Contractor.
4. The Contractor shall obtain engineering assistance as required from the light pole and lantern manufacturer for
the assembly of light poles, lanterns, power cables, supporting cables to the ring, head frame assembly and to
make the lighting unit operational. The cost for all engineering assistance shall be borne by the Contractor.
10.2.4 Analysis of Materials

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Section 10.1.9.
10.2.5 Identification
The manufacturer’s name, trademark or other descriptive marking by which the organization responsible for the product
may be identified, shall be placed on all equipment in addition to the identification of its voltage, current, wattage,
frequency, phase and other applicable ratings and characteristics. The equipment including, but not by way of
limitation, switches, circuit protective devices, transformers and control cabinets shall also be identified to indicate their
purpose or function.
Before leaving the manufacturer’s works, all apparatus, fittings and similar items shall be painted or stamped in at least
two places with a marking number and/or letter as shown on the approved shop drawings and materials list.
All labels, rating and name plates shall be in the Arabic and English languages and shall be non-deteriorating and non-
warping. Size and text shall be as approved by the Engineer. Labels for mounting outdoors shall be of chromium plated
bronze with black filled letters. Rating and name plates for mounting indoors shall be in accordance with B.S.S. label
specifications and shall be made of suitable engraving material approximately 2 mm thick with a white surface with
black engraving.
10.3 Earthwork for Electrical

10.3.1 Description
Earthwork for lighting and electrical distribution Work, including but not by way of limitation, trench and backfill for
installation of underground electrical Works salvage of existing cables, and installation of new lighting, LV, 11 KV, 22
KV, 33 KV and 132 KV cables; and excavating and backfilling for electrical structures shall be as indicated on the
Contract plans or as designated by the Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC and as specified herein.
10.3.2 Trench and Backfill

This work shall consist of excavating trenches and backfilling the installations of electric cables, ducts, conduits and
precast concrete protection slabs at the locations indicated on the Contract plans or where directed by the Engineer
and/or the ADWEA/ADDC. The Contractor shall include the furnishing of backfill materials and disposing of surplus
materials in this Work.
Page 10-25
Excavation, backfill, compaction, placement of cable tiles and warning tapes and providing end caps and draw lines in
ducts and conduit shall be in accordance with the applicable Sections in Chapter 2, Earthwork, of these Standard
Specifications and as specified herein.
10.3.3 Construction Methods

The trench shall be excavated in a manner to prevent cave-ins and to a depth and width as indicated on the Contract
plans or as designated by the Engineer. Excavated material shall be deposited at a sufficient distance so that the
excavated material will not fall back into the trench. The banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as
practicable and where required, shall be properly sheeted and braced. Where electric cables enter ducts or conduits, the
bottom of the trench shall be built up to provide a smooth bed for the electric cable.
The electrical cable shall be placed in the bottom of the trench, after all loose and protruding stones and all sharp
materials likely to damage the cables have been removed, and covered with backfill material as directed by the
Engineer.
Backfill material shall comply with the Section 2.5.2 of Chapter 2, Earthworks, of these Standard Specifications. No
additional payment will be made by the Owner for such backfill material.
The trenches shall not be backfilled until the system as installed is inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer, the
Owner and/or by the ADWEA/ADDC.
The backfill material shall be thoroughly compacted in layers to a density as specified in Section 2.5.4 of Chapter 2,
Earthworks , of the Standard Specifications, as approved by the Engineer, the Owner and/or by the ADWEA/ADDC
and in such a manner as not to injure the electric cable.
No stone or rock shall be allowed in the cable bedding or in the first fifteen (15) centimetre layer of backfill over the
cable. No stone or rock greater than five (5) centimetres in maximum dimension shall be allowed in any succeeding
layer of backfill.
The Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC will inspect:
1. The trench before the electric cable, duct, conduit, or cable covering tiles is placed in the trench.
2. The trench at any other time during excavation or backfilling.
The method and type of equipment to be used in compaction the backfill material shall be approved by the Engineer, the
Owner and/or the ADWEA/ADDC before any work is started.
Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper
compaction, then refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required grade and compaction, mounded over
and smoothed off or as directed by the Engineer.
10.3.4 Excavation for Structures

All excavation for structures shall comply with the requirements of Section 2.4.2.11 of Chapter 2, Earthwork, of these
Standard Specifications, as directed by the Engineer and with the requirements as hereinbefore specified.
Excavation shall be made to the depth and dimensions necessary for the proper installation of all electrical structures as
indicated on the Contract plans. Care shall be taken that foundation areas of structures are not excavated below grades
established on the Contract plans. Excavation may be carried out mechanically, but final shaping and trimming of the
subgrade shall be performed by hand. The subgrade shall be covered up to the bottom level of the concrete base slabs
with a 10 cm thick layer of Class C20/20 blinding concrete as indicated on the Contract plans and in compliance with
Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications and as specified herein.
10.4 Conduits, Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes

10.4.1 Description
Electrical conduit and junction boxes to be furnished and installed by the Contractor shall be as indicated on the
Contract plans and as specified herein. Conduit shall include conduit couplings, fittings, bushings, all hardware for
attaching, embedding or mounting and all appurtenances.
Page 10-26
10.4.2 Rigid Galvanized Steel Electrical Conduit

Rigid galvanized steel electrical conduit bends, elbows, couplings, and nipples, shall be heavy wall, hot-dip galvanized
or sheradised, standard weight, and shall comply with the requirements of the applicable specification or any equivalent
or superior international standard provided the minimum wall thickness specified below :
Inside Diameter (cm) Minimum Wall Thickness (mm)

1.9 2.8
2.5 3.0
3.2 3.2
3.8 3.5
6.4 4.7
7.6 5.0
The tube used in the manufacture of the rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be of high grade, mild steel with maximum
welding characteristics and ductility. The tube shall have a circular cross section sufficiently accurate to permit the
cutting of clean, true threads. The pitch and form of threads shall comply with the American National Standards
Institute, ANSI B 1.20.3 or ANSI B 1.20.5 for pipe threads or equivalent. The tube shall be thoroughly cleaned inside
and outside and ends threaded and chamfered before applying any protective coating. The cleaning process shall leave
the tube in such a condition that zinc or enamel coating, when applied, shall firmly adhere and have a smooth finish.
The outside and inside surfaces of the conduit shall be thoroughly protected against corrosion by an even coating of at
least 99 percent pure zinc applied by the hot-dip or sheradising process. The zinc coating shall be such that it shall not
show a fixed deposit of copper after four one-minute immersions in a standard copper sulphate solution. A biochromate
finish shall be applied to the inside and outside surfaces of the conduits after galvanizing. The threads shall have the
same degree of corrosion resistance as the conduit itself. All the fittings to be used on the galvanized, rigid, steel
conduit system shall also comply with similar requirements.
Hardware to support and fasten the conduit and fittings including, but not by way of limitation, nuts, bolts, washers,
bushings and similar items shall be galvanized and shall be of a type approved by the Engineer and shall be appropriate
in design for this application. Conduit clamps shall be of malleable iron. Conduit fittings, such as pulling elbows,
entrance fittings, and similar items, shall be cast of malleable iron. Flexible conduits used for connections shall be
watertight, made of square-locked galvanized metal tubing. All conduits, fittings, boxes, covers and outlets shall be new
and shall not have been stored where such material is exposed to the weather.
10.4.3 Rigid Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Conduit

All rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) electrical conduit up to 6 cm diameter shall comply with BS4607, BS6099, Gulf
Standards GS32/33 and relevant IEE regulation and as specified herein. Larger size PVC conduits shall comply with
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication No. TC 2, Electrical Plastic Tubing
(EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) or ANSI/ASTM D1785-76 and as specified herein.
All PVC electrical conduit shall be designed and approved for direct burial, concrete encased applications below grade
or for exposed routing applications above grade. The type of routing and application shall be as indicated on the
Contract plans.
All PVC electrical conduit shall be tested by the manufacturer in accordance with NEMA TC 2 or by other equivalent
standards as approved by the Engineer and reports of all testing shall be submitted to the Engineer. Testing shall
include, but not by way of limitation, the following:
1. Impact resistance
2. Crush resistance
3. Heat distortion temperature
4. Chemical resistance
5. Water Absorption
6. Extension quality
7. Modulus of elasticity
Page 10-27
8. Tensile and flexural strengths

9. Thermal coefficient of expansion
All fittings, junction and pullboxes to be used on PVC electrical conduit system shall be made in compliance with
identical standards and specifications as those used for the conduit and shall be by the same manufacturer. All joints and
connections on PVC electrical conduit system shall be watertight and all support hardware used to support the conduit
and boxes shall be the type approved for the particular application.
Electrical conduit and fittings shall be free of any substances that would be harmful to any wire or cable covering. The
bore of the conduit shall be straight and circular in cross section with smooth interior surfaces. Conduit shall be
furnished in standard lengths of six (6) meters including the coupling. Fittings shall be of a type made for use with PVC
conduit for electrical service. The construction of conduit and conduit fittings shall ensure sufficient strength and
rigidity to enable the conduit to resist damage during shipment, rough handling, installation and use. Conduit and
fittings shall not be threaded or tapered and shall be attached by a solvent cement so as to provide a watertight and root
proof joint.
The outside diameter and minimum wall thickness of PVC electrical conduit are shown below:
Nominal Size (cm) Minimum Wall Thickness (mm)

2.0 1.8
2.5 1.9
3.2 2.5
3.8 2.5
5.0 3.2
6.0 4.7
10.0 6.0
15.0 7.1
20.0 8.2
The Contractor shall submit proof that the PVC electrical conduit complies with the requirements of NEMA TC 2 or
similar standards as approved by the Engineer.
Fittings used with rigid PVC electrical conduit shall comply with requirements of NEMA TC 3 Standards Publication,
PVC Fittings for use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
10.4.4 Junction Boxes

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing junction boxes of the sizes indicated on the Contract plans at the
designated locations.
The junction boxes shall be watertight, NEMA 4 rated and shall be flush mounted or surface mounted as indicated on
the Contract plans. Junction boxes shall be drilled or drilled and tapped for installation of threaded conduit to agree with
the sizes of conduit as indicated on the Contract plans. Standard locknut spacing shall be allowed for proper entry of
conduit to the junction box.
The junction box shall be dust-tight and weatherproof and shall be constructed of cast-iron or aluminium having a wall
thickness of four (4) millimetres. The junction box and cover shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A123 and be provided with neoprene gasket material. The cover shall be fastened to the box by a minimum of four (4)
stainless steel screws of adequate size. Provision shall be made for properly terminating the ground wire inside the box.
Junction boxes shall be of the sizes indicated on the Contract plans, as described in the Bills of Quantities, or as
required to receive material or appurtenances as indicated on the Contract plans or as specified herein in various
Sections of this Chapter. Weather proof junction box shall be used to accommodate distribution boards for under bridge
lighting.
Locknuts, bushings, screws and terminal boards shall be incidental to the cost of junction boxes.
Page 10-28
10.4.5 Poly Carbonate Pull Boxes

Poly carbonate manholes as an alternative to concrete Pull boxes-Type IV can be provided, if approved by the Owner,
for street lighting works in case the ground water table level is 50cm (min.) below the bottom level of the manholes
and no high contents of acids or organic solvents are found in the soil as per geotechnical investigations.
Poly carbonate manholes shall be designed and manufactured by an approved qualified vendor in order to carry our
possible traffic loads. Type test certificate for manhole loaded and tested to confirm the same shall be provided.
Manufacturer shall certify the design and durability of the manholes for minimum 25 years life cycle.
Poly carbonate manholes shall have good characteristics in resisting oil and chemicals from aggressive soils. Contractor
shall submit test certificates for poly carbonate material used by the Manufacturer. It shall comply with relevant
International standards and Codes with properties similar or better than the data shown in table below.
Poly carbonate manholes installed in the walk ways, green areas or sand areas shall receive medium duty ductile iron
manhole cover class Bl25. Heavy duty manhole cover class D400 are required if the ploy carbonate manholes are
installed in the carriage ways. The Owner’s name/logo and function of the manhole shall be integrated in manhole
cover. Sub frame for D.I cover shall be deep galvanized painted with epoxy and polyurethane top cost for exposed part.
Elastomeric layer for support of manhole covers is required for better sealing and protection. Polycarbonate manholes
can be fabricated with different connected segments as follow:
• Integrated wall in top polycarbonate frame for height adjustment.
• Height Adjustment integrated in steel frame
• Modular frame structure.
• Predetermined breaking points for connection of 100 mm l.D. PVC pipes for street lighting cabling.
• Outer manhole body with structure for connection to surrounding condensed earth.
• Base plate with openings for water outlet.
Polycarbonate manholes may be fabricated also by complete walls connected together and to the base plate frame
structure with opening for water outlet. It shall provide the specified sizes with predetermined breaking points for
connection of 100 mm PVC pipes for street lighting cables. All breaking points openings for connection of PVC pipes
for street lighting cables shall be closed properly with proper fittings. Size of manholes shall be as indicated on Contract
plans for Pull box Type IV manholes. After the preliminary approval from the Owner for the proposed material
submittal and Manufacturer for polycarbonate manholes, the Contractor shall install mock up sample at site to obtain
final approval. Engineer may ask for load test on the mock up sample to ensure that the proposed design and used
material are capable to carry out the possible design traffic loads. Site load test is mandatory if the Contractor fail to
submit acceptable load test certificate from the approved Manufacturer and for the same manhole design.
Table 10-6: Typical Properties of Polycarbonate
ASTM or UL
Property Unfilled 30 % Glass
test
PHYSICAL
Density (lb/ln3) 0.043 0.052

D792 3
(g/cm ) 1.2 1.43
D570 Water Absorption, 24 hrs (%) 0.12 0.12

MECHANICAL
D638 Tensile Strength (psi) 9,500 19,000

D638 Tensile Modulus (psi) 320,000 -
D638 Tensile Elongation at Break (%) 60 10
D790 Flexural Strength (psi) 15,000 23,000
D790 Flexural Modulus (psi) 375,000 1,100,000
D695 Compressive Strength (psi) 12,000 18,000
Page 10-29
ASTM or UL
Property Unfilled 30 % Glass
test
D695 Compressive Modulus (psi) 240,000 500,000

D785 Hardness, Rockwell M70/R118 M92
D256 IZOD Notched Impact (ft-lb/in) 13 2
THERMAL
D696 Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (x 10-5in/in/ ̊F) 3.9 1.2

D648 Heat Deflection Temp ( ̊F/ ̊C) 270/132 295/146
D3418 Glass Transition Temp ( ̊F/ ̊C) 293/145 300/149
- Max Operating Temp ( ̊F/ ̊C) 250/121 270/132
Thermal Conductivity (BTU-in/ft2-hr- ̊F) 1.3 1.3
C177
(x 10 cal/cm-sec- ̊C)
-4
6.9 6.9
Flammability Rating @ less than .45” (11.5mm) thickness H-B H-B
UL94
@.45” (11.5mm) thickness and above V-D V-D
ELECTRICAL
D194 Dielectric Strength (V/mil) short time, 1/8” thick 390 470
D150 Dielectric Constant at 60 Hz 3.17 3.35
D150 Dissipation Factor at 60 Hz 0.0009 0.0011
16
D257 Volume Resistivity (ohm-cm) at 50% RH 10 1016
10.4.6 Pull Boxes, Type IV

10.4.6.1 General
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing concrete pullboxes type IV, with ductile iron frames and covers, for
lighting, street furniture and traffic control systems as indicated in the Contract plans or at locations required by site
conditions and as directed by the Engineer.
10.4.6.2 Materials
All concrete work and reinforcement steel shall comply with applicable Sections of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these
Standard Specifications. All concrete incorporated in the construction of concrete pullboxes shall be Class C 30/20
concrete. All reinforcing steel shall be Grade 60 deformed steel bars.
Pullbox, Type IV, covers and frames shall be manufactured from ductile iron materials meeting all the requirements
listed in Section 10.12.6.
10.4.6.3 Construction
All excavation, foundation preparation and backfill shall comply with the requirements of Section 10.3.
All concrete work shall comply with the dimensions and details as indicated on the Contract plans. The tops of the
covers of pullboxes, type IV, shall match final grade levels in paved areas, and shall be placed 10 cm above final grade
level in non-paved areas.
All unused ducts, conduits or sleeves at concrete pullboxes shall be capped in a watertight manner.
Page 10-30
10.5 Lighting and Low Voltage Electrical Cable

10.5.1 Description
The lighting and low voltage electrical cables to be furnished and installed by the Contractor shall be as indicated on the
Contract plans and as specified herein. Electrical cables shall include, but not by way of limitation, all splicing
materials, jointing materials and all related materials and appurtenances required to install all lighting and low voltage
electrical cables.
10.5.2 General Requirements

The cables shall give trouble-free service under the worst conditions encountered in Abu Dhabi and shall carry the rated
current continuously even under the high temperature conditions which prevail in summer and shall also withstand
maximum fault currents without damage or deterioration.
The cable drums shall be stored for periods up to 18 months in the open and shall be exposed to direct sunlight.
Therefore, the cables shall be so designed as to withstand such conditions without any deterioration of their mechanical
or electrical properties.
Inspection, testing and technical schedules of all cable and cable material shall be completed in accordance with the
requirements of these Standard Specifications.
10.5.3 Electrical Low Voltage Cables, Direct Burial

All low voltage direct burial electrical cable shall be rated 600/1000 volts, stranded, annealed copper, cross linked
polyethylene insulated, PVC oversheathed, wire/tape armored and PVC served complying with the requirements of and
tested to BS 5467 or IEC 502 and as specified herein.
10.5.3.1 General
All wiring to loads supplied from 400/230 volt electrical systems shall be with a single, multi-conductor cable insulated
and rated at 600/1,000 volts. The minimum conductor size installed to connect to a load shall be no less than the
conductor size indicated on the Contract plans or described in the Bills of Quantities.
The design, manufacture and testing of the cables shall be in compliance with the requirements of these Standard
Specifications and the requirements of the Engineer, the Owner and ADWEA/ADDC. The required values in the
Technical Particulars for low voltage cables indicate the properties acceptable to the Engineer, the Owner and
ADWEA/ADDC based on previously accepted cables. The Contractor's proposed cable shall meet these requirements
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer and the Owner.
10.5.3.2 Laying-Up
The cores of the cables shall be laid with a right hand direction of lay. Where necessary, non-hygroscopic fillers, which
may be applied integrally with the sheath of the cables, shall be used to form a compact and circular cable. There shall
be no adhesion between the sheath and insulation of the cable and where the sheath is applied integrally with the fillers
it shall be possible to strip it from the cable without damaging the insulation of the cores.
10.5.3.3 Conductors
The cores of the cables shall be comprised of stranded, smooth, annealed, copper wire, having a conductivity of not less
than 100 percent of the international standard. The surface of the individual strands shall be smooth and clean prior to
the application of insulation. The Conductor shall be free of defects likely to injure the insulation. Conductors of all
cable sizes shall be in compacted circular shaped cross-section. The size of the neutral conductor shall be the same as
that of the phase conductors in the circuit. The Conductor shall comply with the requirements of BS 6360 or IEC 60228.
10.5.3.4 Insulation
Heat resisting cross-linked polyethylene shall be used for the insulation of the conductors. The cross-linked
polyethylene insulation shall be free of foreign materials and defects that would reduce the effectiveness of the
insulation. It shall be applied by an extrusion process and shall form a compact homogenous body.
The insulation thickness shall comply with the requirements of Table IV of I.E.C. publication 502.1. Further, the
insulation shall comply with the following:
Page 10-31
1. Normal Operating temperature 90°C

2. Permitted overload temperature 130°C
3. Short circuit temperature 250°C
4. Chemical resistance high
5. Moisture resistance high
6. Thermal resistivity low
7. Fire resistance high
8. Phase Identification "red,” "yellow,” "blue" and "black,” full colored cores for three
phases, and neutral respectively
10.5.3.5 Sheath
The sheath shall consist of extruded PVC. The material shall comply with Type 9, Table 1 of B.S.S. 6746 or IEC 60540.
The thickness of the sheath shall be as specified in the respective schedules for each cable size.
10.5.3.6 Armor
The armor shall consist of galvanized steel wires and shall provide a conductivity of not less than 50 percent of the
phase conductor. Armor shall be solidly earthed and shall serve as the means for earthing continuity for the branch
circuit supplied by the cable. If required, the armor shall be supplemented with additional tinned copper wires of the
same diameter to achieve the required conductivity. The zinc coating in the armor shall not be less than 200
grams/square meter for 16, 25 and 70 square millimetre cables and not less than 250 grams/square meter for 120 and
240 square millimetre cables.
10.5.3.7 Serving
The serving shall be an extruded black PVC applied over the armor, fire retardant and shall have qualities as per IEC
60332. The material shall comply with Type 9, Table 1 of BS 6746 or IEC 60540. The thickness shall be as specified in
the respective schedules for each cable size.
The voltage designation, cable size, number of conductors, manufacturers name, Contract number and the name of the
Owner shall be embossed on the PVC sheath. The sheath shall be termite resistant and shall be made up of long chain,
high molecular weight type PVC. The PVC sheath of the cable on a drum shall be embossed with a marking indicating
the length of the cable every ten meters such that the markings 10, 20, 30, 40 . . . etc., shall commence inside near the
core of the drum and the final marking indicating the total length of the cable shall be on the outside. The name of the
Owner shall appear every one meter over the entire length of the cable.
10.5.3.8 Current Ratings

The current ratings of cables for the site and installation conditions mentioned above shall be stated. Where ratings are
specified for any standard conditions appropriate adjustment factors shall be stated.
10.5.3.9 Short Circuit Ratings

The Contractor shall submit curves showing permissible short circuit ratings for low voltage cables being proposed for
this work.
10.5.3.10 Guarantee
A separate guarantee certificate shall be submitted with each submittal to guarantee that the offered cables, particularly
the outer PVC sheathing, shall withstand the severe ambient climatic conditions when stored on drums in the open for a
period of 18 months.
10.5.3.11 Tests
All tests for direct burial low voltage cables shall comply with the requirements of Section 10.1.9 and as specified
herein. The cable shall be subject to all the routine tests as per BS 5467. Additionally, the following tests shall be
conducted in accordance with relevant IEC/BS/ASTM standards in the presence of Owner’s representative on samples
collected from each batch of maximum 20 drums.
Page 10-32
1. Spark Test on cores and sheaths

2. Voltage Test on completed cable
3. Conductor Resistance Test
4. Armor Resistance Test
5. Flame Retardant Characteristics (The flame retardant characteristics of electric cable shall be tested for
compliance with IEC 60332)
6. Thickness of insulation
7. Thickness of PVC Sheath
8. Number and thickness of wire armor
9. Thickness of PVC overall serving
10. Weight of copper conductor in gm/meter.
11. Weight of copper in armor in gm/meter.
12. Weight of zinc coating gm/sq.meter.
The thickness and weight as determined above shall agree with the guaranteed values. Also the weight of copper per
meter of cable shall be determined.
All cable lengths cut and used for the various tests shall be at the Contractor's expense and these shall not affect the
final length of cable to be supplied as specified.
Test certificates from international recognized laboratories shall be submitted for the electrical cable along with the
material submittal for Engineer’s approval.
10.5.4 Low Voltage PVC Wiring Cables

10.5.4.1 Low Smoke and Fume
The low voltage PVC wiring cables to be supplied shall meet the requirements of BS, 7211, low smoke and fume
wiring cables. The cable insulation shall allow continuous conductor operation up to 90°C temperature. Maximum
conductor temperature allowed under short circuit condition shall be 250°C. Independent product testing to BS 7211 by
an agency shall be submitted for Engineers approval.
10.5.4.2 PVC Wiring Cables

Cables of sizes smaller than 16mm² shall be XLPE or PVC insulated as indicated on the Contract plans or as approved
by the Engineer and the Owner. The PVC insulated wiring cables shall meet with the requirements of BS 6004 and IEC
60227.
10.5.4.3 Fire resistant PVC wiring cables

Cables of sizes smaller than 16mm² shall be XLPE or PVC insulated as indicated on the Contract plans or as approved
by the Engineer and the Owner. Fire resistant non armoured cables shall meet the requirements of BS6387 category
C,W & Z, BS8434-2, BS5839-I, BS5266-I and BS 8519.
10.5.5 Low Voltage (LV) Cable

10.5.5.1 Low Smoke and Fume
The low voltage armoured cables shall meet the requirements as specified herein. The name of the cable owner shall be
embossed on the PVC outer sheath. The low voltage armoured cable to be supplied by the Contractor shall meet the
requirements of BS 6724, complies with acid gas emission requirements of IEC 60754 Part 1 and Part 2, and Category
C of IEC 60332-3. The cable shall have low smoke and fume properties, no halogen acid gas emissions and reduced
ignition and fire propagation properties. Materials used for termination and joints shall also be low smoke and fume
type.
Page 10-33
10.5.5.2 Fire Resistant Cable

The low voltage armoured cables shall meet the requirements as specified herein. The name of the cable owner shall be
embossed on the PVC outer sheath. The low voltage armoured cable to be supplied by the Contractor shall meet the
requirements of BS 7846, complies with acid gas emission requirements of IEC 60754 Part 1 and Part 2, flammability
IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3categories A, B and C, resistant to fire C-W-2 of BS 6387, IEC 60331 and F-2 and F-3 of
BS 7846, smoke emissions IEC 61034-1 and 2. The cable shall have low smoke and fume properties, no halogen acid
gas emissions and reduced ignition and fire propagation properties. Materials used for termination and joints shall also
be fire resistant type.
10.5.5.3 Modular Cable – Fire Resistant, LSOH Type

a. General
LV Cabling inside the tunnel, feeding tunnel light fittings shall be modular cables. This cabling system shall consist of a
main cable with branch cables used for rated 600/1000V main circuit and branch circuit with weather proof connector
reaching up to the individual tunnel light fitting. Entire cabling system to be factory-built, with a pertinent number of
joints with insulation mould between a main cable and branch circuits shall be made at set points in line with the
approved shop drawings. Both main and branch cables to be fire resistant, Low Smoke Zero Halogen type complying to
BS6387. Branch assembly connector ‘Plug-socket’ assembly shall be IP68 water proof type complying with IEC
60529:2001.
b. Conductors
Cable conductors shall comprise stranded bare clean smooth annealed copper wires having a conductivity not less than
100 percent international standard. The surface of the individual strands shall be smooth and clean before the insulation
is applied.
c. Neutral
Cable of all sizes shall have full size neutral, i.e. same wire size as phase conductor up to 25 Sq.mm and approximately
half size for cable sizes bigger than 25 Sq.mm.
d. Insulation
The insulation shall be XLPE complying with the following requirements:
1. Normal Operating Temperature : 80 Deg C
2. Chemical Resistance : High
3. Moisture Resistance :High
4. Thermal Resistivity : Low
5. Fire Resistance : Good
6. Insulation Thickness: shall be in accordance with IEC Publ.502.1
7. Phase Identification: Cables shall be colour coded, Red, yellow and Blue for phases and black for neutral and
yellow/green for earth.
8. Protection Conductor Identification : “YELLOW and GREEN”
e. Cores Laying Up
The cores of cable shall be laid up and where necessary non-hygroscopic fillers shall be used to form a compact and
circular cable.
f. Sheath (Bedding)
The sheath shall consist of an extruded layer of LSZH compound.
g. Armour
The armouring shall consist of galvanized round steel wire.
h. Over sheathing
The over sheathing shall be LSZH compound.
Page 10-34
i. Modular Cables and Socket

For connection of individual light fitting to the main distribution cable plug and socket arrangement shall be followed.
The main cable from the Lighting distribution board to the Junction Box at the tunnel entry area shall be Fire resistant
LSZH armoured cables. From this Junction Box to the tunnel light fittings a modular cable shall be used. This cable
shall have sockets embedded on it. Another flexible cable with the plug shall be provided for connection from the
socket on the modular cable to the light fittings.
The sizes of the modular cables shall be as indicated on the drawings and as approved by the Engineer.
10.5.6 Electrical Cables - In Conduit and Light Poles

Electrical cables in light poles shall be as specified in Section 10.7, unless otherwise indicated on the Contract plans,
specified in the Particular Specifications or described in the Bills of Quantities. Electrical cables installed in conduit
shall have a copper core, shall be cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, and shall be suitable for installation in
conduit, and underground ducts in wet or dry locations. The insulation shall be rated for 90°C in dry locations, 75°C in
wet locations, 130°C for emergency overload conditions and 250°C for short circuit conditions. Multi-core cable shall
have heat resistant PVC oversheath. The cable shall be in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60502 or IPCEA
Publication Number S-66-524. Certified test results for each cable shipment delivered shall be furnished to the Engineer
and the Owner for approval prior to installation of the cable. The cable shall have a normal core section and color
coding as indicated on the Contract plans.
Cables conforming to comparable international standards shall be submitted in writing by the Contractor to the
Engineer and may only be used when approved in writing by the Engineer and the Owner.
10.5.7 Packing
The cables shall be wound on strong wooden cable drums provided with wooden battens to protect the cable from
damage. All drums shall become the property of the Owner. The cables shall be supplied in drum lengths specified
herein. For each cable size unless otherwise approved by the Engineer and the Owner.
Cable Size Drum Length (m)
4x240 Sq.mm XLPE Cu 300
10.5.8 Markings
All cable drums shall be clearly engraved in English and Arabic language as follows:
• Name of manufacturer
• Sizes and number of conductors
• Voltage
• Drum number
• Length of cable
• Contractor's order number
• Contractor's name, address and Contract Number
In addition to the above, two metallic sheets 16 cm x 12 cm fixed on each side of the drum by four screws shall be
marked with the cable length, size and order number in English and Arabic language.
10.5.9 Drawings & Information

Tenderers are required to furnish with their Tenders, the cable manufacturer's comprehensive supporting information for
all cables which the Tenderer proposes to furnish for the Works. Upon award of the Contract by the Owner, the
Contractor shall not substitute cable from a different manufacturer except with the prior approval of the Engineer and
the Owner. The Contractor is required to furnish the following information:
Page 10-35
1. The applicable schedules included herein and/or in the Particular Specifications for all cables proposed for the
Works.
2. A detailed summary of deviations, if any, from the specifications.
3. Dimensioned drawings showing a cross-section through the cables and annotated to show the make-up of the
cables.
4. Short circuit current curves.
10.5.10 License
Where the contracted material or equipment is to be manufactured by a company who has a license from another
company, the Contractor shall obtain from the company, who owns the design, an assurance addressed to the Owner
confirming the safety of the design. At the same time the Owners of the design are to confirm that the produced
equipment will be in good condition and in accordance with their design and comply with the Owner specifications.
10.5.10.1 Materials
1. All materials and equipment shall comply with the latest relevant recommendations of the International
Electrotechnical Commission (I.E.C.) or with the latest relevant British Standard Specifications (B.S.S.). This
applies to cable material quality and testing. If standards as mentioned above contradict with this specification,
then the requirements of this specification shall apply.
2. Tenderers who wish to base their submittals on standards other than those mentioned above may do so
provided they confirm in their Tenders that such standards meet the requirements of paragraph "1” above. At
the time requested by the Engineer and prior to commencing use of these products, the Contractor shall be
required to prove this compliance and, if needed, compliance will be verified by the Owner. The Contractor
shall pay for all costs associated with verifying compliance by the ADWEA/ADDC as specified herein.
10.5.11 Splicing 600/1000 Volt Cable and Wire

Splicing of 600/1000 V insulated electric cable and wire shall comply with the requirements of the manufacturer of the
splicing materials, as specified herein and as approved by the Engineer.
When splicing is required as specified in these Standard Specifications or in the Particular Specifications or indicated on
the Contract plans, it shall mean a splice or tap of pigtail construction made with crimp-on lugs, screw bolt, lock
washer, hex nuts, tape and insulating paint of the following material description and construction. The crimp-on lugs
shall be made of high conductivity copper and shall be electroplated for minimum contact resistance. An oxide inhibitor
shall be used in the wire bore for minimum connection resistance. The splice or tap shall be made using hardware of the
appropriate size for the wire and cables being jointed.
10.5.12 Lighting and Low Voltage Electrical Cable Installation

Where indicated on the Contract plans or specified in the Particular Specifications or described in the Bills of
Quantities, the Contractor shall install lighting and low voltage electric cables, materials and equipment furnished by
the Contractor in compliance with Section 10.14.1 and Section 10.14.10 and as specified herein.
Page 10-36
LOW VOLTAGE CABLE

SCHEDULE “A” - TECHNICAL PARTICULARS, GUARANTEES
600/1000 VOLTS GRADE, 4 CORE, XLPE, ARMORED CABLE
Required Proposed
Sr Description 240 120 70 25 16 240 120 70 25 16
No. mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1. Voltage Grade of Cable 600/ 600/ 600/ 600/ 600/
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
2. Standard to which cables IEC/BS

conform (Ref. Number of 60228/6360
Standards) IEC and/or BS
to ADWEA/ADDC requirement
3. Type of Cable CU/ XLPE/ SWA/ PVC
4. Type of Conductor CIRCULAR COMPACTED STRANDED
(25mm and above TRIANGULAR)
5. (a) Area mm2. 240 120 70 25 16
(b) Strands Nos.. 61/37 37 19 7 7
6. Approx. Diameter over 48.4 34.3 27.0 18.1 19.6
Assembled cores, mm
7. Maximum Resistance of
Conductor per 1000 meters
of completed cable at 20°C
Ohms 0.0754 0.153 0.268 0.727 1.15
8. Insulation:
(a) Material XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE
(b) Thickness mm 1.7 1.2 1.1 0.9 0.9
(Min. Average)
9. Sheath:-
(a) Material PVC PVC PVC PVC PVC
(b) Thickness mm 2.7 2.3 2.1 1.8 1.7
(Nominal of outer sheath)
(c) Approx. diameter
over inner sheath mm 51.0 36.5 29.1 20.0 21.6
10. Armor:-
(a) No. of galvanized
steel wire Nos. 43 38 38 38 38
(b) No. of Copper Conductor
(If applicable) Nos.. 20 8 7 2 2
(c) Diameter of Steel
Armour Wire mm 2.7 2.3 2.1 1.8 1.6
(d) Maximum Resistance of
Armor per 1000
meters of completed
cables Ohms.. 0.153 0.306 0.524 1.45 2.3
(e) Diameter of Copper Wire
(If applicable) 2.5 2.5 2.0 1.6 1.25
(f) Nominal diameter over
armor mm.. 56.0 41.5 33.1 23.2 24.8
MANUFACTURER CONTRACTOR
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-37
LOW VOLTAGE CABLE - (CONT'D)

SCHEDULE "A" - TECHNICAL PARTICULARS, GUARANTEES
600/1000 VOLTS GRADE, 4 CORE, XLPE, ARMORED CABLE
Required Proposed
Sr Description 240 120 70 25 16 240 120 70 25 16
No. mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
11. Serving:-
(a) Material Extruded Black PVC Complying
with BS 6746 Table 1 Type 9
(b) Thickness (Nominal) 3.0 2.5 2.2 1.8 1.8
12. Overall diameter of
Cable mm. 72 53 43 30 25
13. Weight of following:
(a) Copper Conductor
kg/1000 Meters Approx 8550 4213 415 885 560
(b) Steel in Armor
kg/1000 Meters Approx 1720 1520 975 591 380
(c) Copper wire in Armor
Approx (if applicable) 910 360 202 37 22
(d) Finished cable
kg/1000 Meters Approx 15100 8100 4900 2250 1510
14. Minimum radius of bend round
which cable can be held cm. 576 424 344 240 200
15. Nominal drum length Mtrs. 300 500 500 1000 1000
16. Gross weight of completed
drum kg. 5200 4560 2880 2690 1710
17. Current carrying capacity
per circuit:
(a) When laid direct in
the ground:
75cm depth, ground
temperature 35°C
ground resistivity
150°C cm/W Amps. 355 240 175 99 77
(b) Flat formation at 30cm
centers:
i. One - 3 Phase per
Trench Amps.. 355 240 175 99 77
ii. Two -do- Amps.. 287 195 142 81 63
iii. Three -do- Amps.. 250 170 123 70 54
18. Assumed maximum Conductor
Temperature for above:
(a) Laid direct in
the ground °C. 90 90 90 90 90
(b) Laid direct in
the air °C. 90 90 90 90 90
19. Expected life of
cables Years. 30-50 30-50 30-50 30-50 30-50
20. Guaranteed life of
cables Years.. 1 Year 1 Year 1 Year 1 Year 1 Year
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-38
SCHEDULE "B"
DEVIATIONS FROM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall state in the following Schedule, any proposed deviations from the Technical Specifications for low
voltage cables and joints.
Srl. Specification
No. Clause Specified Proposed
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-39
10.6 Foundations for Light Poles and Lighting Control Cabinets

10.6.1 Description
The foundations for 30.5M, 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M, 10.0M and 8.0M high light poles and lighting control
cabinets shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein.
Foundations for light poles and lighting control cabinet shall include, but not by way of limitation, all excavating and
backfilling, concrete, reinforcement steel, anchor bolts, conduit and all appurtenances for the light pole foundations and
lighting control cabinets.
10.6.2 Foundations for Light Poles

10.6.2.1 General
The locations of all light poles as indicated on the Contract plans shall be deemed to be schematic and the final
locations of all light poles shall be as directed or approved by the Engineer.
The conduit for light poles shall be as indicated on the Contract plans, in compliance with the requirements of Section
10.4.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract plans, all light pole foundations shall be drilled or bored in the manner, at
the locations and to the depths indicated on the Contract plans, as specified herein and as approved by the Engineer.
Prior to proceeding with any foundation work for light poles, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval
shop drawings, complete details, calculations for the proposed light poles and all related data for the light poles and the
light pole foundations. The shop drawings shall include all information for the construction of the foundations,
including but not by way of limitation, the temporary metal casings, equipment data, and the proposed method of
conduit installation in the foundation. The method of installation shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
The length or lengths of foundations as indicated on the Contract plans are the estimated minimum length or lengths to
be required for the light pole foundations. The final length of foundations shall be as approved by the Engineer based
upon actual conditions encountered in drilling. The Contractor shall make his own analysis of the subsoil conditions and
work that shall be required to provide the drilled or bored concrete light pole foundations as specified.
10.6.2.2 Materials
All concrete for light pole foundations shall be cast in place using Class C30/20. All concrete shall be prepared utilizing
ASTM C150, Type V cement. All concrete work shall comply with all requirements of applicable Sections in Chapter
4, Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications. The foundation shall be allowed to cure a minimum of seven (7)
days before erecting light poles on the foundations.
All reinforcement steel in light pole foundations shall be reinforcement bars complying with requirements of Section
4.1.2, Materials for Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications.
Foundations for light poles where indicated on the Contract plans shall be furnished with an earth electrode complying
with Section 10.11.10. The size and dimensions of the electrode shall comply with Article 10.11.10.9 unless otherwise
indicated on the Contract plans or specified in the Particular Specifications.
Construction of all foundations for light poles shall comply with the following requirements:
1. All excavations for foundations for light poles shall be made by drilling, boring or sinking a casing unless
otherwise indicated on the Contract plans.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for testing all soil at the bearing levels indicated on the Contract plans, and
shall submit written reports to the Engineer as to the bearing capacity at the depth indicated on the Contract
plans and the coefficient of lateral subgrade reaction over the proposed length of pile, and the acceptability of
such soil to support the proposed foundation and appurtenances. The Contractor shall make boreholes to
depths, locations and frequencies as directed by the Engineer. The frequency and depth of the boreholes shall
depend upon the soil conditions encountered and shall be of the discretion of the Engineer. The total number of
boreholes may or may not be equal to the total number of light poles. The report on each borehole made shall
include all information as directed by the Engineer and specified in Section 2.1.3.1, of Chapter 2, Earthworks,
of these Standard Specifications.
Page 10-40
3. In the event unsuitable soil is encountered within the length indicated on the Contract plans for the light pole
foundations, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer as to the unsuitability of such soil materials. The
Contractor shall be responsible for designing the extension of the depth of such light pole foundations to
acceptable bearing. The design of such foundations shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of
the "Drilled Shaft Manual,” Volume II, Implementation Package 77-21, as published by the U.S. Department
of Transportation Office of Research and Development, Implementation Division HDV-22, Washington, D.C.
20590.
4. The Contractor shall employ an independent chartered engineer or registered engineer as approved by the
Owner or the Engineer to design the increased depth of any such foundations. The Contractor shall submit
design calculations and other data required by the Engineer for review before proceeding with extending the
depth of such foundations.
5. The need for additional foundation depth shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer.
6. The Contractor shall not proceed with further construction of such foundations until receiving written
directions from the Engineer. In the event the depths of the light pole foundations are lowered below the
elevations indicated on the Contract plans and as approved by the Engineer, the additional depths will be paid
for as specified herein or in the Particular Specifications.
7. All drilled foundations shall be installed in the presence of the Engineer. The Engineer shall be notified in
writing a minimum of 48 hours in advance that the Contractor is commencing operations to install drilled
foundations so that the Engineer can be present during the foundation work on a daily basis throughout the
installation of the foundations. All foundations shall be located to the lines and spacing indicated on the
Contract plans and shall be drilled vertically with a tolerance of one in fifty.
8. In cases where the intended bottom of foundation is in soil, bailing will not be permitted by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall take measures to ensure that the ground beneath the base of the drilled or bored excavation is
not disturbed by upward seepage pressure. In such cases the Contractor shall ensure the stability of the
excavation base by maintaining a net positive hydraulic head within the casing. Concrete shall be placed by
tremie all subject to the approval of the Engineer.
9. The foundations shall be drilled with a casing being installed such that the bottom of the casing is maintained
below the bottom of the excavation at all times. If approved by the Engineer, the casing may be withdrawn as
the concrete is placed provided the bottom of the casing is maintained below the top of the concrete while the
concrete is being placed and if the reinforcement, anchor bolts, and conduit can be maintained in their correct
position during the casing withdrawal. Otherwise, the casing must be left permanently in place unless
alternative construction methods are approved by the Engineer.
10. In the event that conditions, during drilling of holes for the foundations, indicate that a drilled foundation is
encountering an obstruction before reaching proper bearing stratum, the Contractor shall bore or drill through
the obstruction (after confirming that it is not an underground utility) or shall use whatever means are
necessary to remove or circumvent the obstruction, without additional cost to the Owner.
11. In the event the Contractor excavates to an elevation below that indicated on the Contract plans or approved by
the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and place Class C20/20 concrete up to the bottom of the foundation
as indicated on the Contract plans or as directed or approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the
Owner.
12. The reinforcement steel cage shall be placed and secured symmetrically about the axis of the foundation and
shall be securely blocked to clear the sides of the casing.
13. Unless tremie methods for concrete placement are approved by the Engineer, the casing shall be clean and free
of water before the reinforcement steel and concrete are placed.
14. The drilling of holes for foundations, installation of reinforcement, placement of concrete and all appurtenant
work shall be carried out in a continuous, uninterrupted operation. Once a foundation hole has been started,
work shall be continuous so that concrete placement shall be completed on the foundation without interruption
of the Contractor's operation and so that at no time shall work on a foundation be stopped or the drilled hole
left open for any reason unless specifically approved in writing by the Engineer.
15. The method of storing and handling of casings shall be such as to avoid injury to the casings.
16. All exposed parts of the concrete foundations extending above the natural or finished ground line shall be
finished smooth with a steel trowel or given a rubbed surface finished in accordance with Section 4.1.3.3 of
Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications. The top of the foundations shall be constructed
Page 10-41
level to provide a proper horizontal surface for erecting all light poles so that no shims or other levelling
devices will be needed.
17. PVC electrical raceway or conduit of the size indicated on the Contract plans shall be installed in the
foundations as indicated on the Contract plans and as directed by the Engineer.
18. Anchor bolts and PVC raceway or conduit shall be located securely in position during the placing of
foundation concrete.
10.6.3 Foundations for Lighting Control Cabinets

10.6.3.1 General
Foundations for lighting control cabinets shall be as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein.
The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and accessories required for construction of the
lighting control cabinet foundation, installation of the control cabinet, earth electrode and all appurtenant work. The
lighting control cabinet shall control night-time illumination of all roadway lighting and such other equipment as
indicated on the Contract plans.
10.6.3.2 Materials
All lighting control cabinet foundations shall be Class C30/20 concrete, as indicated on the Contract plans and shall
meet the requirements for quality and construction as specified in Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these Standard
Specifications.
The lighting control cabinets shall be mounted on the foundations by means of stainless steel expansion bolts of
adequate size as approved by the Engineer.
10.6.3.3 Installation
The foundations shall be made by excavating and backfilling in accordance with Section 10.3 and as indicated on the
Contract plans. The foundations shall be cast in place and allowed to cure for seven (7) days before the control cabinet
is erected.
The exposed portion of the foundations shall be finished smooth with a steel trowel or rubbed to a smooth finish and the
top of the foundation shall be constructed level to provide a proper horizontal surface for erecting the lighting control
cabinet so that no shims or other levelling devices will be needed.
10.7 Light Poles

10.7.1 Description
Light poles shall be as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein.
All 30.5M, 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M , 10.0M and 8.0M high light poles shall be provided with an electrical cut-out
at the pole base near the handhole for terminating and interconnecting underground cables and lantern wiring cables.
There shall be suitable provisions inside the poleshaft to properly fix the electrical cutout. Light Poles 10.0M and less
shall be single shaft. Any light poles more than 20.0M height shall have lowering winch except for mid hinged poles.
All electrical cutouts shall be designed, manufactured, tested and sized in accordance with the requirements referenced
in Section 10.1.2. These specifications shall be read in conjunction with Road Lighting manual Chapter 6, Lighting
Equipment. The service life of light pole foundations shall be as specified in the Road Lighting Manual document no.
AD-D-13. The light pole warranty shall be as included in Section 10.7.6. The structural warranty for light poles shall be
25 years minimum as required by the Owner.
All light poles shall be earthed through a separate earth cable installed underground and terminated at each pole base. In
addition to the earthing through cable, the light poles at the end of each individual underground cable circuit shall be
earthed through separate earth electrodes as specified in these Standard Specifications, Section 10.14.10.3. In case the
light poles need to be installed near the electrical overhead lines, the Contractor has to ensure that the minimum vertical
and horizontal clearance between the light poles and electrical overhead lines are followed as required in ADWEA
standard specifications or as included in the DoT Road Lighting Manual.
Page 10-42
10.7.2 Electrical Cutout for Light Poles

10.7.2.1 Electrical Cutout ABS
The electrical cutout enclosure shall be insulated phenolic / ABS (Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) moulded for three
phases (3Ø) and suitable for looping two 4 core 16mm2 or 4 core 25mm2 XLPE/SWA/PVC Cu cables. The MCB’s shall
be DIN rail mounted compliant with BSEN69898 (6A-10A-16A-20A-25A) and BS88. The electrical cutout shall have
separate live, neutral and earth terminals complete with terminal shields to prevent accidental contact with live
conductors. The brass gland plate shall be suitable for termination of armoured cables with brass glands and cable
shrouds. Miniature circuit breakers shall be the thermal magnetic type and shall have an interrupting capacity of 10KA
at 230/400 Volts AC, Type C, 50 Hz. The wiring shall comply with 17th edition of the IEE wiring regulation. The
electrical cutout shall have transparent hinged cover for MCB with padlocking facility and suitable for mounting on a
suitable strips inside the column. The other properties of the electrical cutout shall be as shown below:
High grade flame retardant
Material
ABS enclosure
Dielectric Strength 450 V/mm
Flammability (UL94) V0 at 1.6mm
Glow-wire Rating (IEC 695-2-1) 960°C
Impact Resistance (BS 7654) – withstand 0.25J at Ambient & -25°C
IP rating IP43 (BS EN 60529)
Terminal Materials Brass (grade CZ121 to BS 2874)
Tinned Terminals Electro-tin platted to BS1872 min 10 microns
Pinching Screws M6 Brass (grade CZ121 to BS2874)
Cable Looping Each terminal has additional bore (or 2 bores) from incomimg/outgoing
Clamping Torque Recommended optimum – 2.25Nm
Conductor Size Up to 25mm2
Earth Connection Incorporates an earth terminal
10.7.2.2 Electrical Cutout Sheet Steel

Underground cables shall be glanded and terminated at electrical cutouts as indicated on the Contract plans. Electrical
cutouts shall be the totally enclosed type, protected against dust and water, IP43 rating. The enclosed material shall be
zinc coated steel. Cutouts shall be provided with brass compression cable glands meeting the requirements of BS.6121,
Type BWL. The glands shall be sufficiently long to completely enclose the cable armor and to overlap the outer sheath
edge of the cable. The electrical cutouts shall be provided with miniature circuit breakers matching requirements of
various lantern sizes and types as described in the applicable Sections of these Standard Specifications and Bills of
Quantities. Miniature circuit breakers shall be the thermal magnetic type and shall have an interrupting capacity of
10KA at 230/400 Volts AC, Type C, 50 Hz. Service life of the device shall be a minimum of 20,000 mechanical
operating cycles. The circuit breaker shall be rated in accordance with the ballast manufacturer's recommendations. The
ambient temperature for the purpose of rating the performance data of the device shall be 50 degrees centigrade. The
circuit breaker knob shall project outside the cutout enclosure enabling its operation without opening the cutout
enclosure. The wiring for each lantern shall be provided with independent circuit breakers in the cutout. The cutout
shall also include an earthing terminal, earth tag and cable shrouds. All accessories supplied for the cutout shall be
suitable for the cable sizes indicated on the Contract plans. All components shall be securely fixed in the cutout.
Furnishing and installing of electrical cutouts for the light poles is a subsidiary obligation to furnishing and installing of
light poles of the sizes described in the Bills of Quantities, and no separate measurement and payment will be made by
the Owner.
10.7.3 Light Poles, 30.5M High

10.7.3.1 General
The work described in this Section shall include, but not by way of limitation, furnishing 30.5M high light poles complete
with pole shaft, lanterns, anchor bolts, lowering mechanisms with supporting cables, power cable, lantern support ring,
head frame assembly, hoisting assembly and accessories, and miscellaneous items such as circuit breakers, terminal
boards, receptacles, necessary to provide complete and working lighting units.
In the event the Contractor proposes lanterns of greater weight and/or greater projected area, the Contractor shall submit,
with shop drawings, computations of all stresses in the pole base plate and anchor bolts all in accordance with "Standard
Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Lanterns and Traffic Signals" and current modifications as
published by AASHTO. The final size of all anchor bolts and base plates shall be as approved by the Engineer.
Page 10-43
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer with his shop drawings a certificate from a registered structural engineer that
the proposed light pole design meets the requirements specified herein.
The Contractor shall also submit to the Engineer, after manufacture, a notarized statement certifying that the light pole
lantern support ring, head frame and all appurtenances and lowering device were built in accordance with the specified
design standard.
lantern support ring, head frame and all appurtenances and lowering device were built in accordance with the specified
design standard.
10.7.3.2 Materials
Light poles shall be fabricated from high strength structural steel, galvanized, meeting the requirements ASTM A595,
Grade B. The steel used for fabrication of shafts shall have minimum yield strength of 4300 kg. per square centimetre.
The light poles shall have a one-piece, steel base plate and anchor plate complying with the requirements of ASTM A588
with minimum yield strength of 4300 kg per square centimetre and shall be of the shape, size and thickness as indicated
on the Contract plans. The light poles shall be welded longitudinally along its height. The weld line shall be smooth and
the surface of the pole and the finish shall be even. The light pole shall be capable of withstanding wind speeds of 160
Km/hr with gusts of 208 Km/hr when equipped with 6 lanterns of the maximum weight and windage area.
All light poles shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of the "Standard Specifications for Structural
Supports for Highway Signs, Lanterns and Traffic Signals" and the current modifications all as published by the
AASHTO Subcommittee on Bridges and Structures or any other equivalent standard. Pole shape shall be polygonal.
Anchor bolts for the light poles shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A321, or equivalent, with minimum yield
strength of 4920 kg/Sq. cm. The anchor bolts shall be of the sizes and dimensions indicated on the Contract plans and as
approved by the Engineer. Fabrication details are not indicated on the Contract plans. Threaded ends of anchor bolts and
nuts are to be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 and as indicated on the Contract plans. Each bolt in
the anchor bolt assembly shall have a threaded section and the bolts shall be double hex nutted with hardened washers for
levelling purposes.
The complete pole unit and appurtenances shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and A385, unless
otherwise specified herein. Precautions shall be taken against embrittlement, warpage and distortion in accordance with
ASTM A143 and A384. All pole sections shall be galvanized inside and outside after assembly of the base plate to the
pole section. A minimum of 0.70 kg of zinc per square meter shall be the average applied with no single point being less
than 0.61 kg per square meter.
The chemical composition and mechanical properties of the structural steel shall be submitted in accordance with these
Lanterns shall comply with the requirement of Section 10.8.
The base plate of the light pole shall be of the shape, size and thickness as indicated on the Contract plans and shall be
secured to the lower end of the light pole shaft by complete penetration butt welding or fillet welding, in accordance with
the requirements of AASHTO or any other equivalent standard. The Contractor shall submit necessary data with the shop
drawings to prove that the proposed welding method is in accordance with approved standards. Additional fillet welds
shall be used when deemed necessary by the Engineer. The base shall be provided with holes to receive the anchor bolts
of the number, size and placement, as indicated on the Contract plans. An earthing lug and nut shall be provided on the
inside of the shaft near the hand hole. The bottom of the base plate in contact with the concrete foundation shall be coated
with black bituminous paint.
The pole shall consist of tapered steel sections with slip joints that can be mechanically fitted together in the field, and
further consist of nuts, bolts, washers and incidentals necessary to complete the assembly and may include a base plate,
anchor bolt covers, pole cap, or handhole and cover, as required on the Contract plans. All exposed surfaces of the poles
shall be of smooth even texture, free from marks, burrs, sharp edges, or imperfection. For the 30.5M pole a maximum of
three sections will be allowed. Slip joints shall have a minimum overlap of 1½ times the diameter of the bottom of the
upper section. The sections shall be pre-fitted and match marked at the factory. In the field, the sections shall be
mechanically fitted using factory supplied equipment. Slip fitted light poles shall not be shipped assembled. The
Contractor shall submit field assembly procedures which shall have been prepared by the manufacturer for the Engineer's
review and approval.
The light poles shall be straight and centered on their longitudinal axis under no wind conditions so that, when examined
with a transit from any direction, the deviation from the normal shall not exceed 3.0 mm within any 1.5 M of height.
Page 10-44
The light poles shall be provided with a handhole opening at the base of the pole. Approximate size of the opening shall
be 25 cm x 100 cm. The handhole shall have a reinforced frame and cover to maintain the original strength of the pole.
The pole shaft at the handhole opening shall be suitably reinforced inside to maintain the original pole strength. The
handhole covers shall be a weatherproof hinged door, fabricated of the same steel used for the pole. There shall be a drip
gutter located above the door to prevent water from entering the handhole. All doors shall be padlocked with heavy duty
padlocks and shall be master-keyed. Padlocks shall be 5 pin tumbler mechanism, brass or bronze, solid case, with chain
and as required by the Engineer.
The size and dimension of anchor bolts and base plates for light poles as indicated on the Contract plans are based on the
data contained in these Standard Specifications regarding weight of lanterns (45 kg) and projected area of lanterns (0.29
square meters) and the wind loads as specified. In the event the Contractor proposes lanterns of greater weight and/or
greater projected area, the Contractor shall submit computations of all stresses in the base plate and anchor bolts all in
accordance with "Standard Specification for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Lanterns and Traffic Signals" and
current modifications as published by AASHTO. The final size and dimension of all anchor bolts and base plates shall be
as approved by the Engineer.
A means of discharging any accumulated moisture shall be provided at the pole base. When grout is used between the
base plate and the top of foundation, to seal it, provisions shall be made for adequate drainage. Grout shall be as specified
in Article d, of Section 4.1.2.10 of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications.
The light pole system shall be provided with a circuit breaker of the rating indicated on the Contract plans. There shall be
a power twist lock disconnect receptacle in the pole base. The circuit breaker shall be suitably derated for Abu Dhabi
climatic conditions, as such as no further derating will be required.
Prior to shipment and storage at the construction site, all light poles shall be carefully wrapped with a nonstaining paper
to preserve the finish.
10.7.3.4 Lantern Support Ring and Head Frame

The light poles shall be equipped with a lantern support ring system and head frame that can be lowered by a winch to
within one meter of the surface of the ground.
The lantern support ring shall be designed for the symmetrical mounting of up to six (6) lanterns as indicated on the
Contract plans.
The head frame assembly shall be attached to the pole top by means of a steel slip fitter and secured by screws as
required, or by welding.
The head frame shall also include three latching devices to support the lantern support ring assembly when the lowering
device is not in operation. The spring used as part of the latching devices shall be made of stainless steel material.
The head frame assembly shall be provided with an antibird entry device as approved by the Engineer to prevent birds
from entering the pole shaft and damaging the wires.
A watertight twist-lock power receptacle shall be provided on the lantern support ring to allow testing of lanterns while in
lowered position. The inner portion of the ring shall be equipped with an approved shock absorbing system protecting the
pole and lantern during the raising-lowering operation.
10.7.3.5 Lowering Winch

The winch (for raising and lowering the lantern support ring) shall be totally enclosed and permanently lubricated and
shall be of such design and gear ratio that the lowering can be accomplished at a rate of approximately 5 meters per
minute. The winch shall be operated by a reversible electric motor or power tool unit and shall be powered from a 230 V
weatherproof outlet or receptacle located in the service area of the light pole. The winch shall be self-locking. One full
layer of steel rope shall be retained on the drum when the carriage is lowered to ensure correct rope stacking.
The power tool unit shall be capable of being installed at the service entrance and means shall be provided for its remote
control from a distance of 5 meters. A torque limiter shall be furnished with the power tool unit. Mechanisms using a
built-in electric motor shall be equipped with an automatic shut-off to stop the motor when the ring is in the top position
or at the lowered ground position. The hoisting and power sheaves shall be made of stainless steel materials. The groove
diameter of the sheaves shall be coordinated with the diameter of the stainless steel hoisting cables and the diameter of
the power cable.
The entire hoisting system shall be designed so that power cable, suspension cables, and hoisting cables may be replaced
from the ground.
Page 10-45
Three stainless steel aircraft hoist cables of 4.8 millimetres diameter or greater shall be provided. The main winch cable
shall be 6.35 millimetres diameter or greater stainless steel aircraft cable. Each cable shall have a safety factor of not less
than 5 times the safe working load of the winch.
10.7.3.6 Portable Power Tool Unit

Provide a portable power tool unit coupled with torque limiter, power mounting frame and remote control switch suitable
to supply driving power to the winch assembly for raising and lowering the lantern support ring and head frame.
The power unit shall be portable, heavy duty, reversible electric motor, 1.5 horse-power minimum, suitable for operating
from 230V, 50 Hertz power supply. Part of the power unit shall be a remote control unit with at least 5 meters of power
cable to permit the operator to stand 5 meters away from the pole base during the lowering and raising operation.
10.7.4 Light Poles, 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M, 10.0M and 8.0M High
10.7.4.1 General
This work shall include, but not by way of limitation, furnishing the 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M, 10.0M and 8.0M high
light poles, complete with pole shaft, base plate, lanterns, ballasts, anchor bolts, appurtenances and all accessories and
incidentals for the complete installation as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein.
With his shop drawings, the Contractor shall submit computations of all stresses in the pole base plate and anchor bolts all
in accordance with "Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Lanterns and Traffic Signals"
and current modifications as published by AASHTO. The final size and dimensions of all anchor bolts and base plates
shall be as approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer with his shop drawings a certificate from a registered structural engineer that
the proposed light pole design meets the requirements specified herein.
and all appurtenances were built in accordance with the specified design standard.
10.7.4.2 Materials
Light poles shall be fabricated from high strength structural steel, galvanized, meeting the requirements of ASTM A-572,
Grade 50. Yield strength of the steel shall be a minimum of 3600 kilograms per square centimetre for 8.0M, 10.0M,
12.0M and 14.0M light pole ASTMA 595, Grade B and 4300 kg/cm2 for 18.0M and 20.0M pole. The light poles shall be
welded longitudinally along its height. The weld line shall be smooth and the surface of the pole and the finish shall be
even. The light poles shall have a one-piece, steel base plate and anchor plate complying with the requirements of ASTM
A588 with minimum yield strength of 3600 kg per square centimetre for 10.0M/14.0M light pole and 4300 kg/cm2 for
18.0M and 20.0M pole shall be of the shape, size and thickness as indicated on the Contract plans. The light poles shall
be capable of withstanding wind speeds of 160 Km/hr with gusts of 208 Km/hr when equipped with 4 lanterns of the
maximum weight and windage area.
All light poles shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of the "Standard Specifications for Structural
Supports for Highway Signs, Lanterns and Traffic Signals" and the current modifications all as published by the
AASHTO Subcommittee on Bridges and Structures or any other equivalent standard. Pole shape shall be polygonal for all
20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M and 12.0M high poles and polygonal or round for all 8.0M and 10.0M meter high poles.
Anchor bolts for the light poles shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A675, Grade 90, with minimum yield
strength of 3867 kg/Sq. cm for 10.0M, 12.0M and 14.0M light pole and 4300 kg/cm2 for 18.0M and 20.0M pole. The
anchor bolts shall be of the sizes and dimensions indicated on the Contract plans and as approved by the Engineer.
Fabrication details are not indicated on the Contract plans. Threaded ends of anchor bolts and nuts shall be hot-dip
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. Each bolt in the anchor bolt assembly shall have a threaded section and each
bolt shall be double hex nutted with hardened washers for levelling purposes.
Lanterns shall comply with the requirement of Section 10.8 or as specified in the Particular Specifications.
The complete pole units and appurtenances shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and A385 unless
otherwise specified herein. All pole sections shall be galvanized inside and outside after assembly of the pole cap and
base plate to the pole section. A minimum of 0.70 kg. of zinc per square meter shall be the average applied with no single
point being less than 0.61 kg per square meter.
The chemical composition and mechanical properties of the structural steel shall be submitted in accordance with these
Page 10-46
The base plate of the light pole shall be secured to the lower end of the shaft by double fillet welds in accordance with
requirements of B.S. or any other equivalent standards. The Contractor shall submit necessary data with shop drawings to
prove that the proposed welding method is in accordance with approved standards. Additional fillet welds shall be used
when deemed necessary by the Engineer. The base shall be provided with holes to receive the anchor bolts of the size and
placement indicated on the Contract plans. An earthing lug with nut shall be provided on the inside of the shaft near the
handhole as indicated on the Drawing. The bottom of the base plate in contact with the concrete foundation shall be
coated with black bituminous paint.
The pole shall be complete with nuts, bolts, washers and incidentals necessary to complete the assembly and shall include
a base plate, anchor bolt enclosure plate, pole cap, handhole and cover, all as required in the Contract plans. All exposed
surfaces of the poles shall be of smooth even texture, free from marks, burrs, sharp edges, and other imperfections.
The light poles shall be straight and plumb on their vertical axes under no wind conditions.
The light poles shall be provided with a handhole opening at the base of the pole. Approximate size of the opening shall
be 12 cm x 20 cm or as required to match the electrical cutout size. The pole shaft at the hand hole opening shall be
suitably reinforced to maintain the original strength of the pole. The handhole cover shall be fabricated of the same steel
used for the pole. Hinges for the hand hole cover shall be stainless steel and all doors shall be padlocked with heavy duty
padlocks complying with Federal Specification FF-P-101-E and shall be master-keyed. Padlocks shall be 5.08 cm Type
EPC, 5 pin tumbler mechanism, brass or bronze, solid case, with chain and as required by the Engineer.
All 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M, 10.0M and 8.0M high light poles in paved locations shall be provided with a
galvanized steel or cast aluminium removable enclosure plate to cover the anchor bolts as indicated on the Contract plans
or as approved by the Engineer and ADWEA/ADDC. Cast aluminium enclosures shall be suitably painted to match the
appearance of the pole finish.
A flag pole holder shall be fixed to the pole shaft at a height determined by the Engineer. The materials, configuration and
construction of the flag pole holder shall match those on existing poles unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
A means of discharging any accumulated moisture shall be provided at the pole base. When grout is used between the
base plate and the top of foundation, to seal it, provisions shall be made for adequate drainage.
Prior to shipment and storage at the construction site, all light poles shall be carefully wrapped with a non-staining paper
to preserve the finish.
10.7.5 Mid-Hinged Light Poles

The Contractor shall supply mid-hinged light poles with the following specifications from 14.0M to 30.5M high light
poles.
1. All masts and brackets shall be designed to meet the wind loading requirements of 160 kph with a gust of 208
kph.
2. The steel used for the construction of the mast and bracket shall have a yield strength of no less than 4450
kg/sq.cm. to ASTM A6 and all welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, American Welding Society
Structural Welding Code. All Manufacturers’ certificates shall be supplied with respect to the steel used in the
mast.
3. The mast shaft shall have an octagonal or polygonal cross-section continuously tapered and longitudinally
welded. No circumferential weld shall be acceptable, except at the mid-hinged point.
4. The high mast shall be designed to accommodate a set of four or six lanterns and associated brackets for
achieving the luminance level requirement as specified elsewhere. A door opening shall be provided in the
base of the mast of adequate dimensions to permit clear access to equipment namely electrical Cutouts
complete with a close fitting weather-proof door having a heavy duty lock. The door seam tightness shall
conform to IP 54 standard. The opening shall be adequately reinforced to maintain the strength of the mast.
5. The base flange shall be free of laminations and the welded connection to the mast shall fully develop the
strength of the section. The base plate shall be manufactured as per the loading requirement or as specified
elsewhere.
6. Inside each mast there shall be a galvanised steel earthing bolt.
7. The entire mast and bracket shall be hot-dip galvanised internally and externally in accordance with ASTM
A123.
Page 10-47
8. All component parts or fasteners shall also receive the same hot-dip galvanised treatment, threaded
components centrifugally spun to remove local excess of zinc.
9. The Contractor shall supply three set of rope (hook fixed to the end of the rope), Pulley, D-shakle, rubber
laminated counter weight and stainless steel grade AISI 316 hook for every project. If the supply of poles are
more than 200 numbers, additional one set of ropes shall be provided for each 200 number of poles supplied.
10. Galvanising shall be performed in such a manner as will provide a minimum coating weight of 714 gr/sq.m. of
surface (minimum 100 microns DFT).
11. Coating weight shall be determined by a suitable magnetic or electronic measuring device. However, in cases
of dispute, the Engineer may direct that a stripping test in accordance with ASTM A123 be carried out.
12. The Contractor shall depute a Technician at site to demonstrate the assembly procedures. The manufacturer
should ensure that the moving parts and fixed parts of the mid-hinged pole have a free movement without
friction.
13. The mast shall be hinged approximately midway above the base so that it may be raised/lowered by means of
externally operated rope and counter weight. The rope shall be portable and to be easily detachable for use with
other high masts. Alignment of the mid-hinged poles shall be properly fixed by the Contractor.
14. The Contractor shall afford every facility for the inspection of the mast and shall carry out tests on materials
and welds as may be instructed by the Engineer and the Owner. Material or workmanship which is not in
accordance with the Specification shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and risk.
15. The mast shall be of a suitable dimension to accommodate the cutout in the bottom compartment.
16. The spindle of mid-hinged mast shall be stainless steel grade AISI 316.
17. All bolts, nuts, locking screws and door chain shall be stainless steel Grade AISI 316.
18. Copper braid for electrical conductivity to be provided between fixed and movable sections.
19. The mast shall have a special arrangement in order to impose no stress or pulling force upon the mast internal
cabling.
20. At mid-hinged point there shall be arrangements to prevent ingress of water, moisture and dust (Minimum
IP54). The position of the hinge opening to be downward when the masts are packed, so mat, dust and rain
shall not enter to the hinge opening and damage the mast.
21. Stainless steel rod of grade AISI 316 shall be provided for slip joint adjustment.
22. The cables support plate at mid-hinged point shall be provided to secure the lantern wire to eliminate any stress
on power cables.
23. Provision of securing the movable part with the fixed part in lowered position shall be made by using hooks
and rope. Securing the movable jacket with the fixed column shaft shall be made by stainless steel prevailing
torque with metal insert type hexagonal nut H, M24 AISI 316 – D shackle shall be provided to secure the
locking system of jacket.
24. The material and structural properties of the light pole similar height shall be same or superior than the
requirements included in Sections 10.7.3 and 10.7.4.
25. All calculations showing the maximum forces encountered in the mast while lowering or raising the mast to be
submitted.
26. All calculations showing the maximum forces on the foundation and the mast holding down bolts/while
lowering or raising the mast to be submitted.
27. All calculations showing the forces encountered by the wind loading to be submitted.
28. All calculations showing the max top flexation under given wind load and the forces occurring on the holding
down bolts to be submitted.
29. All calculations showing the maximum forces and pressure encountered by the mast raising and lowering
equipment during operation to be submitted.
30. Details of the power supply cable tension release facility in the top of the mast to be submitted.
31. Shop drawings showing general dimensions of all components of the pole include mounting bracket (s) for
single and multiple lanterns array.
Page 10-48
32. Detailed scaled drawings of both pole and lanterns mounting brackets.
33. Detail of the fixing and locking system between the pole and the lanterns mounting bracket. The total
maximum load moments for each section under maximum stresses.
34. Computation of stresses in the base plate and anchor bolts, under maximum wind-load with maximum number
of lanterns in place.
35. Maximum deflection at the top of the pole, under conditions and wind velocities mentioned earlier.
36. The Contractor may submit any new treatment method for extra protection against corrosion of the base pate
area and up to the height of 300mm.
37. Detail calculations of the necessary strength for anchor bolts to be used should be submitted for different
heights of the pole and different locations in the pole such as banners, traffic signal heads, CCTV equipments
and sign boards, etc.
38. Means of assembling two section poles shall be indicated in detail. If special tools are required, the Contractor
shall include one complete set and the price is included in the Bid of Quantities for the pole.
39. Impact resistance calculations at a height of one meter above the base plate of the column.
40. Maximum tolerable impact calculations to shear the plate from the pole from an impact point one meter above
the flange plate.
41. All structural calculations shall be approved by a third party certification authority and the same documents
shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
42. The light poles shall be welded longitudinally along its height. The weld line shall be smooth and the surface of
the pole and the finish shall be even.
The Contractor shall provide a written undertaking of the Warranty from the pole supplier, accompanied with the written
proof of the local representative's UAE Operating License and established UAE background, to the satisfaction of the
Owner to warranty the materials and performance as follows:
i. Provide a written ten (10) year on-site replacement material fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement
included transportation, removal and installation of new product. Finish warranty shall include warranty against
corrosion, failure or substantial deteriorations such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking or fading. The
warranty shall include for maintained aesthetic integrity of the decorative pole and assembly, without any partial
or complete separation, dislocation, disjointing, flaring, etc. of any elements of the pole and assembly with no cost
to the Owner.
ii. Provide a written ten (10) year replacement warranty for defective poles with no cost to the Owner.
10.7.6 Multi-Function Light Poles

10.7.6.1 General
Pole shall be of a type that can accommodate a variety of applications. The pole shall be made up of an extruded
aluminium or steel mast that enables proprietary accessories to be mounted along its length and height and position. The
finish colour and design of the pole and accessories shall be as agreed with the Owner for the project. Where required by
design conditions structural reinforcing steel cores shall be used to reduce deflection of pole for accessories' weight
requirements. If the steel core is in contact with Aluminium, the manufacturer shall ensure that bi-metallic corrosion is
prevented by means approved by the Engineer and the Owner. All poles shall be linked by standard components, function
and design. Standards specifications for structural supports for highway signs, lanterns and traffic signals latest edition
with interims. Each service signs shall be installed at recommended height included in relevant standards. The Contractor
should ensure that each service signs are not in conflict when all are installed.
10.7.6.2 Materials
a. Foundations
Structural analysis shall be submitted to show that the foundation design meets the load of the given pole type in its “Full
Loaded" state. Unless otherwise stated it is assumed the pole will sit above foundation on a 100mm bed on non shrink
grout. The base plate needs to be strictly the above ground level to avoid corrosion. The design details shall be submitted
for the Engineer, local authorities and the Owner's review and approval.
Page 10-49
b. Service Hatches
Each pole shall have two service hatches approximately, 400mm from ground level where the connection of cables can be
made between the outside network and the pole accessories. One service hatch shall be used for street lighting and the
remaining one for other services. The service hatch shall be accessible without removing the cover plate or cladding from
the pole base. The cover shall be fixed by two screws. The service hatch or hand hole cover shall fixed with hinges made
of corrosion resistant materials such as stainless steel grade 316(A4), brass, hot-dip galvanized steel, etc. as applicable
based on the pole and cover plate material and shall' be padlocked with heavy duty padlocks complying with the Owner's
requirements and as advised by the Engineer. The hatches shall house general purpose outlets (GPO) that can be accessed
through an external lockable hatch. The hatch door keys shall be supplied as per the standards of the local authorities and
the Owner's requirements. For poles below 10meters one service hatch will be sufficient.
c. Foundation Conduits
Electrical conduits shall be installed through foundation and shall enter the poles from under the base plate.
d. Steel work
Poles' steel work shall be manufactured out of BS grade S355 steel for 8.0M to 14.0M poles or as appropriate to a pole of
Iower height. Hot dipped galvanizing (100 Microns minimum coating thickness) surface treatment shall be applied to
both internal and external surfaces. The base plate, anchor bolts and pole properties such as the material and structural
requirements shall be same or superior than the requirements included in section 10.7.4. All additional fixtures shall be on
steel attachments of BS Grade S275 with hot dipped galvanizing (100 microns minimum). Base plate shall be
manufactured as specified on the Contract plans. Where steelwork is in contact With aluminium work; the manufacturer
shall ensure that bi-metallic corrosion is prevented by means approved by the Engineer and the Owner.
e. Aluminium work
Poles' aluminium shall be made up of extruded aluminium alloy (6063/6082-T6) which shall have an anodized protective
coating finish to 25 microns. The colour of the anodized finish shall be as approved by the Engineer and the Owner. The
transition rim shall be cast aluminium alloy of grade LM6 having coating of minimum 100 microns of polyester powder
coating, type PE-SDF matching the approved colour of the anodized extruded aluminium.
f. Bracketry and Base Plate Cover
Pole brackets and base plate cover shall be manufactured out of ASTM A36/ASTM 618gr3. This shall have high strength,
be easily machinable able to handle an array of finishes. All steel components shall be hot- dip galvanized to a minimum
thickness of 100microns and painted as advised by the Engineer and the Owner. The base plate cover shall be supplied
along with the pole.
g. Fasteners
All fasteners supplied shall be made of corrosion resistant materials such as stainless steel; - Grade 316, brass; hot-dip
galvanized steel etc, based on the materials with which it will be in contact. Bi-metallic contact shall be properly designed
to avoid any galvanic or bi-metallic corrosion.
h. Electric Equipment
M8 x30 mm long threaded stud carrying two nuts and two washers shall be provided as an earth point. It shall be located
with the service hatch. The electrical termination cutouts shall be supplied in accordance with the requirements included
elsewhere in this specification and as shown on the Contract. Each pole shall be polyethylene rope (dia. 4mm) "draw
wired" to assist in feeding electrical and service cables.
i. Product Identification Tag
The name of the lighting column manufacturer and the date of manufacture shall be clearly marked using an aluminium
name tag affixed to the column in an appropriate location and manner to suit the column design and access.
j. Copper Content
All Aluminium Die-cast components shall have a very low copper content of less than 0.1%.
Page 10-50
10.7.6.3 Assembly
a. Assembly of Pole
The pole shall be complete with all accessories and all necessary component assembly undertaken at the factory. The final
assembly of pole and components shall be ready for installation at site without any works required other than using
suitable fixing tools.
b. Mast arm for the Lanterns
The mast arm for the lantern shall be fitted on site to the pole. The attachment of the mast arms shall be made of standard
fasteners through the structural casting. The mast arm shall be self-supporting against all forces including uplift, without
the use of any guy wires unless approved by the Engineer and the Owner. The lantern shall be fixed to the mast arm and
electrically wired. Finally the cable end shall be connected to the electrical termination board at the service hatch located
in the pole base. Additionally, the arm shall be rotatable by over 90° on either side, to allow for convenience of
maintenance.
c. Additional Assembly
Provisions shall be made on the pole for enabling the fixing of other accessories such as fabric or electric banners, street
signs. CCTV cameras or traffic signal heads by others after the installation poles. These provisions shall allow for future
additional accessories to be added without having to remove the existing installed accessories, lantern brackets or the like.
The provisions shall be such as to ensure the clean, aesthetic look is maintained and shall allow for complete dismantling
when not in use, without leaving behind any clamps, lugs, etc...
d. Pole Base Cladding
The pole base cladding shall be as approved by the Engineer and the Owner. The pole base cladding shall be kept plain, if
no particular decorative element is selected by the Owner. If particular decorative base cladding pattern is selected by the
Owner, these pattern shall be included in the Contract plans and Particular Specifications.
Where a decorative element shall be used for the cladding at the base of the pole it shall be made from laser cut, anodized
or PE-SDF powder coated aluminium sheeting, UV-stabiIized, scratch-resistant polycarbonate incorporating LED
lighting as shown on the Contract plans or as advised by the Engineer. The number and type of LED shall be as advised
by the Engineer and the Owner. LED strip shall be hidden behind the polycarbonate sheet. LED lights shall be fixed to
the decorative base with appropriate adhesives. LED wattage shall be finalized on product testing.
10.7.6.4 Design Submission and Production

a. Design for Strength
The poles shall be capable of withstanding a basic wind speed of 45 m/s or 160 km/hr (3 second gust effect) when
equipped with the actual number of lanterns and the associated fittings or accessories as confirmed by the Engineer and
the Owner. All poles shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of AASTHO. Design
calculations shall be submitted, for the
Owner approval, showing the following:
i. Wind load derivation (hand calculation) on lanterns and mounted accessories
ii. Wind loading derivation (hand calculation) on the pole
iii. Sectional area of the pole at regular intervals of height along the pole, especially at areas of cross-section
change and hand hole opening
iv. Stress at the intervals specified in (iii) above.
v. Strength of the pole at the intervals specified in (iii) above
vi. Combined Stress Ratios at the intervals specified in (ii) above
vii. CAFL check (Constant Amplitude Fatigue Limit)
b. Design for Deflection
Actual deflection against the deflection limit of the plies shall be clearly stated in the design calculations and shall
conform to AASTHO. The actual deflection calculated shall be based on the basic wind speed of 45m/s and shall be
measured at the lantern position. The calculated deflection shall be the sum of deflection on the vertical pole section as
well as the outreach bracket arm section. Deflection of both the vertical pole and the arm shall be shown in the design
submission.
Page 10-51
c. Design calculations
Design calculations shall show the pole deflection and shall be checked against the allowable deflection and special
deflection limits required for high definition cameras or traffic signal poles where applicable.
d. Notarized Statement
A notarized statement attested by the UAE Embassy, certifying the poles were built conforming to the manufacturer's
approved drawings and design calculations, shall be submitted after completion of manufacture, and prior to delivery of
poles to site. Pole delivery to project site shall 'not be accepted without this.
10.7.6.5 Quality Assurance

The Owner may request standard production model samples, identical to the proposed, product to be installed. The Owner
may request independent testing of the sample poles to verify the performance and compliance with the specifications.
The Owner shall be the sole judge regarding the acceptability of the performance of the light poles. According to the
requirements of the Project’s Contract documents, if required the relevant Owner reserves the right to attend, or appoint a
third party to attend a factory inspection. During a factory inspection, the 'manufacturer shall perform a full deflection
test, as agreed jointly with an accredited independent test house and the Owner, on a randomly selected pole from the
manufactured lot, for each type of ordered pole to establish the design compliance and structural integrity of the
manufactured pole under simulated conditions of full loading, strictly in accordance with the approved design
calculations and drawings. Different options of the base or lower cladding unit shall be shown on the contract drawings.
The Owner will choose one option during the material review process and the sample shall be submitted accordingly.
10.7.6.6 Warranty
The Contractor shall provide a written undertaking of the Warranty from the pole supplier, accompanied with the written
proof of the local representative's UAE Operating License and established UAE background, to the satisfaction of the
i. Provide a written ten (10) year on-site replacement material fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site
replacement included transportation, removal and installation of new product. Finish warranty shall include
warranty against corrosion, failure or substantial deteriorations such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking or
fading. The warranty shall include for maintained aesthetic integrity of the decorative pole and assembly,
without any partial or complete separation, dislocation, disjointing, flaring, etc. of any elements of the pole and
assembly with no cost to the Owner.
ii. Provide a written ten (10) year replacement warranty for defective poles with no cost to the Owner.
10.7.7 Electrical Cables, Low Voltage, In Light Poles

The power cables inside 30.5M poles, between the circuit breakers and the lanterns shall be flexible, flat or round, 8 core,
minimum 2.5 square millimetre conductor size, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed.
Power cables inside the 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M, 10.0M and 8.0M high poles, between the electrical cutouts, and
the lanterns shall be flexible, flat or round, 2 core and earth, minimum 2.5 square millimetre conductor size, PVC
insulated and PVC sheathed.
The cable shall be suitable for a continuous operation at temperature conditions prevailing in Abu Dhabi as described in
Section 10.1.6 and shall meet the requirements of Section 10.1.2. For LED lanterns, the pole internal cable shall be five or
ten core consisting of phase, neutral, earth and two control cables. Pole internal cable shall be temperature rated to
operate at 105°C.
10.7.8 Required Submittals

The Contractor shall submit the following design calculations and data for the Engineer's approval prior to the fabrication
of any components of the 30.5M, 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M, 10.0M and 8.0M high light poles:
1. General dimensions of all component parts.
2. The total maximum moments, the section modulus required and the section modulus furnished at the base of the pole,
at all splices, and at least every six meters along the pole. For 30.5M high light poles, the Contractor shall include the
section modulus and the actual and allowable stresses together with the supporting calculations for the connection of
the ring as approved by the Engineer.
Along with his shop drawing submittal to the Engineer, the Contractor shall complete and submit technical data for all
Page 10-52
light poles on the applicable schedules provided herein or in the Particular Specifications as directed by the Engineer.
10.7.9 Light Poles Furnished by the Owner

The light poles, if supplied by the Owner shall be complete and shall include, but not be limited to, the pole with base
plate, anchor bolts, cap plate, lantern units, ballast, removable enclosure plates, and all appurtenances, except concrete,
PVC conduits and reinforcement for foundations. Light poles, lanterns and appurtenances furnished by the Owner will
generally comply with the requirements of Sections 10.7 and 10.8 and other applicable Sections of these Standard
Specifications.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and include, but not by way of limitation, the following items of work for the
installation of light poles furnished by the Owner:
1. Loading, transporting, unloading, assembling (as required) and the complete installation of all light poles as indicated
on the Contract plans and as specified herein. All light poles and appurtenances shall be obtained from the designated
storeyard of the Owner.
2. The construction of foundations for all light poles as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein. The
Contractor shall obtain anchor bolts from the Owner and shall set all anchor bolts in accordance with shop drawings
approved by the Engineer.
3. Furnishing and Installing all earth electrodes and PVC conduit at concrete foundations for light poles as indicated on
the approved shop drawings.
10.7.10 Truck Mounted Hydraulic Platform

10.7.10.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish a vehicle-mounted hydraulic platform suitable for 30.5M or 20.0M high pole maintenance as
required by the Owner. Only equipment having complete maintenance and spare parts facilities in Abu Dhabi shall be
considered and Tenderers shall include the details of such with their Tender. The vehicle shall be the latest model of the
current year supplied with tool box, spare tires and workshop manuals for the vehicle and all mounted equipment. All
spare items shall be listed separately. The platform shall be in accordance with ANSI A-92.2-1979 or equivalent.
Operator training shall be provided by a qualified manufacturer's representative for two (2) Owner authorized operators as
approved by the Engineer and/or the Owner.
The platform shall consist of an insulated power (1kV) take off platform and shall have a capacity of at least 300
kilograms. The platform shall be able to reach a height of 45m for ideal erection of 30.5M light poles. Platform shall have
a minimum outreach of 15 m at 15 m height or a height of 30m for ideal erection of 20.0M light poles. Platform shall be
provided with foam type double wall bucket, provide a continuous rotation, accumulator type hydraulic system, hydraulic
tool lines at the upper platform and also at the base of the unit, outrigger warning device, warning light, lower boom hold-
down and dual auxiliary boom supports, hydraulic turntable levelling device, steel flatbed, full truck length base frame,
four (4) outrigger stabilizers, 360° continuous rotation turntable, dual platform levelling system, conventional three-
handle control ground station, PTO hydraulic pump drive with throttle actuator for the truck engine, outrigger and boom
interlock safety system, telescopic boom and fly boom for compactness and easy rotation of platform for cabin crew,
crane should work at min 2° slope, emergency platform release to permit lowering of fiberglass upper boom and corona
shield. Control should be from platform and down at rear side including stabilizing jack. The double wall bucket shall be
insulated against 69,000 volts.
The vehicle chassis should be 4x4 with suitable play load, shall have a suitable horsepower diesel engine, 5-speed
transmission, power steering, front tow hooks, front tow shackles, anti-sway spring or bogie, anti-skid brakes, automatic
drain valve and alcohol evaporator for brake system, air ride driver seat, standard rider seat, air horn, desert tires, four (4)
12-volt maintenance free batteries, anchor lock parking brakes on all four rear wheels, diminishing mirrors, dual and
oversize mirrors, flags, flares, fire extinguisher, heavy duty air cleaner, a minimum 1,000 square inch frontal area radiator
with automatic shutters, and extended front bumper. Any vehicle with better specifications can be proposed by the
Contractor, if advised by the Owner.
The vehicle shall be complete with a lockable tool cabinet, storage compartment for spares, and cab roof mounted orange
flashing beacon.
A recommended list of spare parts for two years of service shall be supplied together with prices and four sets of operator
instruction and maintenance manuals.
Page 10-53
10.7.11 Paint and Number Light Poles

10.7.11.1 Paint Light Poles
All 30.5M, 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M, 10.0M and 8.0M high light poles furnished either by the Owner or by the
Contractor and installed by the Contractor shall be given decorative and remedial painting at the time of installation. The
type of paint and colour shall be as approved by the Engineer. All painting and surface preparation shall comply with
applicable requirements of Chapter 24, Painting, of these Standard Specifications unless otherwise directed by the Owner.
10.7.11.2 Numbering of Light Poles

All 30.5M, 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M, 10.0M and 8.0M high light poles shall be numbered as required by the Owner
and as shown below. The pole numbering shall be provided using an aluminium name plate fixed from the factory
premises by the Manufacturer. An electronic bar coding shall be included in the name plate, so that the Owner’s asset
management personnel’s can retrieve necessary information using an appropriate scanner. The information’s necessary to
be included in the bar codes shall be as determined by the Engineer and the Owner.
Details No. Of Digit Example

Location Area XXXXXX AA, AD, WR*
Road Number XXXXXX E10, E11, E12, ...etc
Road Name XXXXXX Al Khaleed Al Arabi
Road KM Label only KM without fraction K000 K 120
Light Pole Identification & Serial Number XX-0000 HM-0005**
Circuit Number CKT-00 CKT-01
Light Control Cabinet Number LCC-000 Lcc-010
Note:
*
– AA: Al Ain
– AD: Abu Dhabi
– WR: Western Region
**
– S: For Decorative Light Poles
– P: For Light Poles 8.0M up to 12.0M Height
– L: For Light Poles 14.0M up to 16.0M Height
– M: For Light Poles 18.0M Height
– H: For Light Poles 20.0M – 25.0M Height
– HM: for Light Poles 30.5M Height
10.7.12 Spares
The Items for spare electrical units shall be as specified herein, in the Particular Specifications, Contract Documents, and
as approved by the Owner.
All spare light pole Items shall comply with all applicable requirements of the applicable Sections of these Standard
Specifications. All spare units shall be suitably boxed or crated and placed in storage where designated by the Owner. All
spare units shall be identical to and by the same manufacturer as units approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment and appurtenances to carefully load, transport, unload and place
all spares in storage. No materials, boxes or crates shall be stored directly on the ground or similar horizontal surface. The
Contractor shall provide all blocking of wood, concrete or as approved by the Engineer under all materials, boxes or
crates. All materials, crates or boxes shall be suitably identified by Contract.
Page 10-54
LIGHT POLES
SCHEDULE "A"/"C"/"E"
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
OF STEEL FOR 30.5M/20.0M/18.0M/14.0M/12.0M/10.0M/8.0M HIGH LIGHT POLES
1. Table 1 Chemical Composition of Steel
Material Type and Classification

C%
Minimum
Maximum
Si%
Minimum
Maximum
Mn%
Minimum
Maximum
S%
Minimum
Maximum
P%
Minimum
Maximum
Mechanical Properties
2. Table 2
Material Type And Classification
Tensile Strength Minimum, kg/cm2
Yield Stress Minimum, kg/cm2
Elongation Minimum, Percent
3. Maximum Stress Allowed in __M High Pole, kg/cm2
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-55
LIGHT POLES
SCHEDULE "B"/"D"/"F"
SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS
FOR 30.5M/20.0M/18.0M/14.0M/12.0M/10.0M/8.0M HIGH LIGHT POLES
Bill Precise Details of Minor Deviations From Specifications

Item No.
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-56
10.8 Lanterns (HID and LED) and Ornamental Lighting

10.8.1 Description
Lanterns for 30.5M, 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M and 10.0M high light poles, underpass and tunnel lanterns, lanterns for sign
lighting and ornamental lighting units shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as indicated on the Contract plans
and as specified herein. Lanterns shall include, but not by way of limitation, all lamps, ballasts and all related materials
and appurtenances required for the installation of light poles, underpass lanterns, sign lighting and ornamental lighting
units. These specifications shall be read in conjunction with Road Lighting Manual Chapter 2, Purpose of Roadway
Lighting.
10.8.2 1000 Watt HPS Lanterns for 30.5M High Light Poles
10.8.2.1 General
The 1000 watt high pressure sodium lanterns for 30.5M high light poles shall be cut-off, Type V, symmetrical distribution
or Type III, asymmetrical distribution pattern per American National Standards Institute (ANSI) or Illuminating
Engineering Society of North America (IES). Type V distribution pattern shall provide a maximum candlepower of not
less than 229 cd at 55-degree vertical angle. Symmetrical distribution lanterns shall be used for bridge areas and ramp
roads. Straight sections of the roadways outside the bridge areas shall be provided with asymmetric distribution lanterns.
Final locations for the symmetrical and asymmetrical lanterns shall be as approved by the Engineer.
The lanterns for 30.5M high light poles shall be mechanically strong and easy to maintain. The lantern, when installed,
shall be of adequate design to operate at a mounting height of 30.5M and withstand a wind speed of 160 Kph with 208
Kph gusts. The Contractor shall propose lanterns of suitable size and weight. The loading conditions imposed by the
proposed lanterns shall be compatible with the load carrying capabilities of the anchor bolts as indicated on the Contract
plans. The Contractor shall submit with shop drawings, computations of all stresses in the pole base plate and anchor
bolts, all in accordance with the accepted standard.
The ballast components, socket, reflector, mounting adjustments, and wiring terminals shall be readily accessible for
servicing. The lantern shall be provided with a levelling surface and shall be adjusted for ±3 degrees to the pipe arm axis
and for any degree of adjustment with respect to the arm axis. The lantern shall have a pipe arm barrier to limit the
amount of insertion. The terminal board shall be equipped with pressure terminal connectors. The lantern shall be
enclosed and gasketed and shall have an activated charcoal filter for breathing. Lanterns shall be dust-proof and water-
tight.
The refractor shall be made of crystal-clear, heat-resistant, impact-resistant, tempered glass or crystal-clear and heat-
resistant, boro-silicate glass. The latches, nuts, screws, washers, pins and other parts shall be made of stainless steel. The
lamp sockets shall be Type "E40" heavy duty porcelain enclosed, adjustable for varying candlepower angles and
equipped with suitable means for limiting lamp vibration. The housing and refractor holder shall be made of aluminium
or stainless steel. Other external metal parts shall be finished to match the adjacent polished pressed boro-silicate glass or
chemically bonded glass reflector with sealed spun aluminium cover. The lamp shall be installed vertically with base up
for all lanterns.
10.8.2.2 Lamp
The lamp shall comply with the following specifications and requirements are shown below:
Power into Lamp – (watts) 1000
Total Luminous Flux – (lumens) 140,000
Average Life to Burn Out – (hours) 24,000
Minimum Maintain Luminous Flux @ Half Life – (%) 90%
The Contractor shall submit spectral distribution information for the Engineer's approval.
Before placing a final order, the Contractor shall submit as samples, three lighting units (lanterns, ballasts, and lamps) for
quality evaluation.
10.8.2.3 Ballast
The ballast shall be designed to operate the high pressure sodium lamp at the power rating shown and it shall be able to
start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient temperatures ranges and fulfill the specification are shown below.
The ballast shall operate the lamp without affecting the lamp life and performance. Line starting amperes shall not be
more than the line operating amperes.
Page 10-57
Supply Voltage 230V AC @ 50Hz ±10%
Minimum Permissible Voltage Dip When Lamp Is New 25%
Overall Minimum Power Factor 0.9%
Ballast Regulation For Input Voltage Fluctuations of Lamp Volt-Watt Trapezoid per ANSI
±10% From Nominal Voltage Standards
Dielectric Test 2,500V
Min. Pulse Peak Voltage 3,000V
Max. Pulse Peak Voltage 5,000V
Operating Temperature Rate 0°C – 55°C
10.8.3 1000W HPS for 20.0M, 18.0M and 14.0M High Poles and 400W HPS
and MH and 250W HPS and MH Lanterns for 10.0M High Poles
10.8.3.1 General
The lantern shall provide efficient even illumination; the optical system shall be sealed against the entry of moisture, dirt
and insects, mechanically strong and easy to maintain. The reflector, mounting adjustments, wiring terminal board and
ballast components shall be readily accessible. All lanterns shall be of the same appearance and manufacture. Glare of for
20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M and 10.0M high lighting shall be controlled by using lanterns with sharp cutoff characteristics.
The lantern housing shall have a rectilinear style and be of the totally enclosed type with extruded aluminium mastarms
having an integral handhole and cover and cast aluminium fitting for the pole top tenon. Lanterns shall be rain-tight, dust-
tight and corrosion resistant; shall have lens frames made of anodized, extruded aluminium with mitered corners. Ballasts
for each lamp shall be unitized with a plug disconnect. Each lantern shall provide the light distribution as required at each
lantern location shown on the Contract plans, to provide overall lighting as specified in Section 10.8.10.
10.8.3.2 Construction details

The housing sides shall be made of one piece multiformed aluminium or extruded aluminium panels. Multiformed
aluminium assemblies shall have an integral reinforcing spine and a single concealed joint. The housing top shall be sheet
aluminium, interlocking with the side panels and silicone sealed. Pressure injected silicone shall be used throughout to
provide a continuous weatherproof seal. The pole top fitting shall have four stainless steel set screws. Each housing,
mastarm and pole top fitting shall receive integral colour, Aluminium Association Architectural Class I anodizing
(natural). Each lamp section shall accommodate one high-intensity discharge lamp and shall include a hinged reflector
assembly with lamp holder, ballast unit and one piece, clear tempered glass, silicone sealed in a hinged frame made of
natural anodized extruded aluminium sections having metered corners. Lamp holders shall be porcelain with a vibration-
proof lamp grip shell. The frame hinging and latching mechanisms (except for release buttons) shall be completely
concealed. Hinge pins and latches shall be stainless steel. Frame to housing gasket shall be high compliance, hollow
section, memory retentive extruded silicone rubber secured to the frame with silicone adhesive. The hinged reflector and
glassware assemblies shall be safely retained in the closed and open positions but shall be readily removable for cleaning
without the use of tools.
Specular reflectors shall be fabricated of homogeneous sheet aluminium. The reflective surface shall be electrochemically
brightened, anodized and sealed.
Alternative construction details may be considered if proven equal or superior. However, the burden of proof lies entirely
with the Contractor and the judgment of the Engineer regarding acceptability shall be final.
10.8.3.3 Lamp and Ballast Requirements

1. The 1000 watt high pressure sodium lamps and ballasts shall meet the requirements of Section 10.8.2.
2. The 1000 watt metal halide lamp shall comply with the following requirements are shown below:
Page 10-58
The Contractor shall submit spectral distribution information, for the Engineer's approval.
The 1000 watt metal halide ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power rating
indicated in these Standard Specifications and shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for
ambient temperatures ranges and fulfill the specification are shown below. The ballast shall operate the lamp
without affecting the lamp life and performance. Line starting amperes shall not be more than the line
operating amperes.
Minimum Permissible Voltage Dip When Lamp

25%
Is New
Ballast Regulation For Input Voltage Fluctuations of ±10% From Nominal Lamp Volt-Watt Trapezoid per
Voltage ANSI Standards
Min. Pulse Peak Voltage As per manufacturer details
Max. Pulse Peak Voltage As per manufacturer details
3. The 400 watt high pressure sodium lamp shall comply with the following requirements are shown below:
4. The 400 watt high pressure sodium ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power rating
without affecting the lamp life and performance. Line starting amperes shall not be more than the line operating
amperes.
Page 10-59
5. The 400 watt metal halide lamp shall comply with the following requirements below:
The Contractor shall submit spectral distribution information, for the Engineer's approval.
6. The 400 watt metal halide ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power rating indicated in
these Standard Specifications and shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient
temperatures ranges and fulfill the specification are shown below. The ballast shall operate the lamp without
affecting the lamp life and performance. Line starting amperes shall not be more than the line operating amperes.
Ballast Regulation For Input Voltage Fluctuations of ±10% From

±10%
Nominal Voltage
7. The 250 watt high pressure sodium lamp shall comply with the following requirements below:
The Contractor shall submit spectral distribution information for the Engineer’s approval.
8. The 250 watt high pressure sodium ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power rating
without affecting the lamp life and performance. Line starting amperes shall not be more than the line operating
amperes.
Page 10-60
9. The 250 Watt metal halide lamp shall comply with the following requirements below:
Minimum Maintain Luminous Flux @ Half Life –

75%
(%)
The Contractor shall submit spectral distribution information for the Engineer’s approval.
10. The 250 Watt metal halide ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power rating indicated in
these Standard Specifications and shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient
temperatures ranges and fulfill the specification are shown below. The ballast shall operate the lamp without
affecting the lamp life and performance. Line starting amperes shall not be more than the line operating amperes.
Ballast Regulation For Input Voltage Fluctuations of ±10% From

±10%
Nominal Voltage
10.8.4 LED Lanterns for Roadway and Parking Area

Light Emitting Diode (LED) lanterns and their accessories shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering
and workmanship. All the material and equipment of the LED lanterns and their accessories to be supplied shall be brand
new and of the latest proven “state-of-the-art” technology. Prototype equipment shall not be accepted.
Page 10-61
10.8.4.1 General
The design, specification, calculation, manufacturing, testing, shipment, installation and performance of LED lighting
system (or other equally sustainable technology) shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of all the Owner
electrical and lighting standards for electrical distribution works, except as specified herein. Copies should be requested
from the Owner if not already held. The LED lanterns shall be designed to operate continuously at the specified ambient
temperature and humidity with special attention given to the effects of direct sun-exposure during the day and the
occasional sand storms and dusty weather in designing the lantern body.. The manufacturers shall guarantee adherence to
this Specification and the performance of their LED lantern under all the required design conditions.
The LED lantern shall be provided with suitable optical assembly for mounting on light poles as indicated on the Contract
plans and shall provide efficient even low- glare illumination with correct cut-off angles as set out in CIE 126-1997
(Guidelines for Minimizing Sky Glow. Commission Internationale de L 'Eclairage / 01-Jan-1997) and the overall
requirements for Estidama Communities projects as applicable for the area and zone of the project. The lantern housing
shall be slim with low profile. The housing shall be of either extruded aluminium or die cast aluminium with very low
copper-content and high corrosive resistance. Test report to be provided for the entire lantern as an end product for Salt
Fog test as per ASTM B-117 or ISO 9227 for 5000 Hrs or similar International equivalent standard. Test report will show
effect on the housing and also effect on light output after this test is performed. The finish coating for housing shall be
with an anti-corrosive anodized/painting process or equivalent, providing excellent UV and environmental exposure
resistance to fading, peeling cracking or corrosion. The driver(s) shall be integral to the fixture head, encapsulated/potted
and protected in a waterproof (IP) environment, enabling access to the driver(s) for easy maintenance requirements. The
fixtures shall be CE or UL certified, or comply with equivalent international standards with all certification made
available.
10.8.4.2 Applicable Standards and Guidance Documents

The following documents (or equivalent International approved documents) shall be followed:
1. IESNA (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America) - Lighting Handbook 10th Edition.
2. IESNA RP-08(reaffirmed 2005) - Roadway Lighting.
3. CIE 115 -2010 – Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic.
4. IESNA RP-19-01 Roadway Sign Lighting.
5. IESNA RP-20-98 Lighting for Parking Facilities.
6. CIE 129 – Guide for Lighting Exterior Work Areas.
7. IESNA DG-19-08 Design Guide for Roundabout Lighting.
8. IESNA TM-16 -05 Technical Memorandum on Light Emitting Diode (LED) Sources & Systems.
9. IESNA DG-4-03 Design Guide for Roadway Lighting Maintenance.
10. IESNA RP-16-10 Nomenclature & Definitions for Illuminating Engineering.
11. IES/IESNA LM-79-08 Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting
Products.
12. IES/IESNA LM-80-08 Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
13. IEC 60529 or EN 60 529 (IP) and EN 50 102 (IK).Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code for
ingress protection and IK Code for Mechanical Strength).
14. ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008-Americian National Standard for Chromatically of Solid State Lighting
Products.
15. BS EN 62471:2008 or ANSI/IESNA RP-27.3-07 Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems.
16. EN 60598-parts 1, 2-1 & 2-3 (Electrical safety) General and for Road Lighting Lanterns.
17. EN 61547, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3 & EN 55015 – for Electromagnetic Compatibility (Immunity
Requirements, Harmonics Requirements, Flicker Requirements & Radiated and Conducted Emissions,
respectively).
18. CIE 126-1997 Guidelines for Minimizing Sky Glow and IESNA TM-10 Addressing Obtrusive (Urban Sky
Glow and Light Trespass) in conjunction with Urban Lighting.
19. International Commission on Illumination (CIE).
Page 10-62
20. Joint Electron Device Engineering Council (JEDEC).

21. ASTM American Society for Testing of Materials. ASTM B 117-07a Standard Practice for Operating Salt
Spray (Fog) Apparatus, 2007 or ISO International Organization for Standardization. ISO 9227 Corrosion tests
in artificial atmospheres—Salt spray tests, 2006.
22. IEC 60068-2-68 ed1.0 - Environmental testing - Part 2: Tests - Test L: Dust and Sand.
23. ANSI C82.77-2002 - Harmonic Emission Limits & IEEE Std 519 1992 - Harmonic Limits
24. ADM IRI Sustainability Guideline Standard 2010
25. ESTIDAMA - Community Pearl Rating System.
26. UPC – Utilities Design Guidelines, Public Realm Design Guidelines & Urban Street Design Manual
a. LED Lanterns
Within the Lantern:
The light source shall be high brightness white light emitting Diodes (LEDs) with individual minimum efficacy of at
least 100lm/W arranged modularly to provide the required lighting output. All lumen figures shall be Deliver (Hot)
Lumens. The LEDs shall be from a reputed manufacturer of LEDs with proven past performance in accordance with
ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – (American National Standard for Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting
Products) or similar approved International Standard. They shall only be from MacAdam Ellipse Step-3 or Step-4 Bins.
Step-7 Binning is not acceptable.
The CRI ≥70
The LEDs shall be removable/replaceable on site by modular means without any possible risk to maintaining lantern
photometry and without the need to demount the fixtures for sake of future upgrading/maintenance requirements.
Whole Lantern Efficacy:
The optimum efficiency of the lantern shall be confirmed as follows:
Minimum lantern efficacy shall be:
≥ 75llm/cctW (@min50-degC, min95%RH
Which is given as Total Lantern Design(Deliver) Lumen Output (llm) over Total Lantern Circuit Watts(cctW) at
minimum 50°C Operating Outside Ambient Temperature and minimum 95% Relative Humidity.
The efficacy being stated at minimum 50°C (Greater than or equal to 75 llm/cctW) should be supported by a thermal
test report for the lantern. This report should provide percentage depreciation of light output at 50°C from testing value
of 25°C or 35°C. This can be compared with LM-79 efficacy at lab temperature from photometric report and de-rated.
The effect on the driver case temperature at minimum 50degreeC should also be shown.
Lantern Maximum % Direct Uplight shall be as CIE 126-1997 and as required/allowed for the project for the Estidama
application as applicable. The Contractor shall provide the correct lumen output figures for minimum 50°C-ambient
temperature operation of the lantern. The above figure must not be based on using lumen output given for the standard
25°C or 35°C ambient lab test results unless stated that they are the same.
b. Optical Control
The lantern shall be fitted with optical refractors, diffusers and/or reflectors. Different optics shall be proposed to
exactly suit the specific applications. Independent laboratory photometric test reports shall be submitted for the lantern
photometric files used in the lighting calculations. The testing should conform to IESNA LM-79-08 standards.
c. Thermal Management
The LED modules shall be mounted on heavy duty heat sinks to ensure excellent head dissipation. The design of the
heat sinks shall be such that there is a direct thermal path from the led junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a
thermal transfer effect throughout the life of the lantern. The heat sinks shall be proprietary and designed by the lighting
manufacturer to enable the lanterns to work efficiently in Abu Dhabi climatic conditions. The lantern shall be provided
Page 10-63
with a demonstrated ventilation arrangement allowing heat to be dissipated to the atmosphere. The lantern shall be
designed to prevent collection of debris on the heat sinks by proven and stated means.
The Manufacturer shall provide test certification in accordance with IEC 60068 – 2 68 Part 2 Test L: Dust and Sand and
should be submitted by the manufacturer from an independent / independently certified test laboratory. The test
certificate should provide evidence that the heat increase inside the housing enclosure with dust and sand should not be
more than 10% of the heat inside without the accumulation.
The design shall be such that the lantern shall be self cleaning in normal operation. The lantern shall be provided with a
heavy-duty rugged cast aluminium adjustable slip fitter mountable to suit the proposed pole. The Contractor shall
coordinate with the LED fitting manufacturer and pole manufacturer to make sure complete compatibility of the
products.
d. Ingress Protection
The LED Fixture’s Driver and LED Engine/optical unit components shall be externally fully rated at a minimum of IP-
65 (with the driver or driver housing to have a minimum rating of IP-66) and have proven means of negating internal
condensation build-up. They shall have a minimum mechanical strength rating of IK-07 (minimum IK-08 required for
all glass components). All synthetic materials shall be 100% UV Stable.
e. Copper Content
All Aluminium Die-cast components shall have a very low copper content of less than 0.1% for corrosion resistance.
The Owner Warranty requirements for the lantern body shall be as included in Section 10.8.4.6.
10.8.4.4 Fixture Technical Data

For each type of lighting fixture, data on features, accessories, finishes and the following shall be included:
1. Issue separate supporting documents if required.
2. Provide physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
3. Provide details of the driver(s) including, manufacturer, driver efficiency, catalogue code, certifications and
input watts.
4. Provide lantern photometric reports per IESNA LM-79-08, or similar International approved equivalent;
including, laboratory name, report number, date, lantern catalogue number, lantern, and light source
specifications.
5. Provide lantern coefficient of utilization data for reflectance values of 30/0/20 for street-side and house-side
values for all optical distributions variations used.
6. Provide photometry table of zonal lumen output in 10° vertical increments showing both the lumen value and
the percentage of total out per 100 increment.
7. Confirm a minimum of 6,000 hours of continuous operation of the LEDs at three different temperatures per
LM-80-08, or similar International approved equivalent.
8. Provide documentation of the expected useful life including the testing and calculation of useful life and
verification of site lighting performance at that life. If the site defined performance methods are used, the
interpolation between the three sets of LM-80 data, and all calculations applied in deriving the proposed LLD
and useful life shall be provided.
9. Provide safety certification and file number as required for the lantern family which shall be listed, labelled, or
identified per the National electric code (NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US
Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as National Recognised Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and
include CSA (Canadian Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), UL (Underwriters
Laboratory) and CE Conformance European (Communaut Europ enne / Conformit Europ enne). Japanese
electrical standard JET (Japan Electrical Safety & Environment Technology Laboratories). LED Sources
Technical Requirements - Within the fixture the LED sources shall meet the following requirements:
10. Note. Attach separate supporting documents if required.
11. Operating temperature rating shall be between – 40°C and minimum +50°C at a minimum 95% Relative
Humidity (RH).
12. Storage (i.e. non-operating/daytime) temperature : all LED components to be designed to tolerate between –
40°C and minimum +80°C at a minimum 95% Relative Humidity (RH).
Page 10-64
13. Correlated colour temperature (CCT) : 2700-5700K

14. Colour rendering index (CRI) : ≥ 70
15. Lantern manufacturer shall submit reliability reports indicating that the manufacturer of the LED (chip, diode,
or package) has performed Joint Electron Devices Engineering Council (JEDEC), or similar International
approved equivalent; reliability tests on the LEDs as follows. Factory pre-release test reports shall be provided
from the LED manufacturer duly complying to JEDEC JESD22-A108C, or equivalent, for operating life tests
at 85° C Ambient temperature and also for humidity and salt atmosphere corrosion tests. Standards and tests
used must be stated.
16. LED Drivers Technical Requirements - Within the fixture the LED driver(s) shall meet the following
requirements:
17. Drivers shall be 1-10v dimmable and have a minimum efficiency of 85%. Wireless option shall be included in
the driver, if approved by the Owner.
18. Case (Tc °C) Temperature rating -40°C to minimum +80°C and at a minimum 95% Relative Humidity (RH).
Driver/Fixture to have some means of built-in overheat thermal protection in the form of automatic dimming or
stepping/holding down of the driver where temperature exceeds operational limits. Thermal cut-out devices
which turn the fixture LEDs completely off are not acceptable.
19. The Driver and driver output current must be shown to be fully tested and compatible with the exact LED
chips/engine of the lantern. All information provided and the cost analysis/payback calculations should be
calculated with the exact drive current including the calculation for the life cycle, life and resultant increase or
decrease of the energy consumption if applicable.
20. Input voltage; capable of 120-277 volt, single phase or as required by the site.
21. Power supplies can be UL Class 1 or II output or similar European CE or International equivalent.
22. Surge protection: Must be tested in accordance to the requirements of IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2-2002, Scenario I
Location Category C or International equivalent.
23. Drivers shall have a Power Factor (PF) of L: ≥ 0.90.
24. Drivers shall comply with FCC 47 cfr part 18 non-consumer RFI.EMI standards or equivalent.
25. Drivers shall be RoHS Compliant.
26. Drivers shall have a total individual lantern Harmonic Distortion (THD) of: ≤ 20% in accordance with ANSI
C82.77 (2002). However the Contractor shall measure the harmonic at the supply point (LV side of the
distribution substation) after the installation of all the LED street lights and adopt harmonic compensation
methods to limit the total harmonics distortion in the supply voltage to maximum 5% as per IEEE 519
Regulations.
27. Lantern Requirements - The dedicated lantern expected useful life (light output) and Depreciation
requirements shall be as follows:
28. Useful Life Requirements
29. The useful life of the lantern in terms of lumen output must be as specified by one of the following two
methods.
30. As per LM-79-08 or approved International equivalent: Simplified B20-L70 threshold. A minimum of 50,000
operating hours before reaching the B20-L70 lumen output degradation point with no catastrophic failures. The
B20-L70 lumen output must be capable of providing the luminance level and uniformity.
31. Site performance method. A life time of number of hours specified by the site based on expected site lighting
useful life must be capable of providing the luminance levels of uniformity.
32. Useful life testing and verification procedure
33. Simplified B20-L70 threshold. Perform LM-79-08 (or approved International equivalent) testing on the lantern
at both time intervals of 0 hours and 6,000 hours. The lantern shall be operated continuously in the appropriate
UL 1598/153 environment or equivalent except when it is removed to perform the LM-79 light output tests. If
the light output determined at 6,000 hours is ≥ 96% of the light output determined at 0 hours, the lantern meets
the simplified B20-L70 threshold for useful life.
34. Site Performance method. Perform lumen depreciation testing per LM-80-08 (or approved International
equivalent) on the light sources (s) (module/array) for a minimum of 6000 hours (longer testing period is
Page 10-65
encouraged). Identify the installed (in lantern) operating temperature of the LED using the Ts point under
operating ambient temperature of 50°C. From this interpolated curve, determine the lamp lumen depreciation
(LLD) value and useful life that meets the needs of the site defined hours of operation to end of useful life as
well as the luminance level and uniformity required. Project Performance Requirement - The following factors
shall be applied to determine the performance requirements:
35. Light Loss Factors (LLF)
LLF = LLD x LDD (Lamp Lumen Depreciation x Lantern Dirt Depreciation)
i. Assume Lamp Lumen Depreciation (LLD) 0.70 for LED dedicated lanterns except where recommended
otherwise by the lantern manufacturer. Assume the appropriate effects from temperature on the lumen
output of the lantern. Note: The figure used should only match the stated Lumen Depreciation value given
by the manufacturer for 50,000-hour operation at minimum 50degreeC ambient temperature.
Manufacturer shall provide data to demonstrate the 50,000-hour lumen depreciation factor at the
minimum 50degC temperature as required by the Owner. The method of calculation of lumen
depreciation for 50,000 hrs shall be reviewed and declared consistent with their data by the LED chip
manufacturer.
ii. Assume Lantern Dirt Depreciation (LDD) using appropriate and stated depreciation factors to suit actual
environment and resistance properties of the specific fixture.
iii. Photobiological Safety the Manufacturer/Supplier shall provide a written undertaking to the satisfaction
of the Owner of testing to the following standards:
36. Ensure lantern complies with Photobiological Safety of lamps and lamp systems in accordance with the
requirements of BS EN 62471:2008 or ANSI/IESNA RP-27.3-0. Provide proof of testing and compliance with
the standards with certification provided to prove the fixture is classed as “Exempt”.
37. Undertake all lighting design and calculation to the following design standards:
The Contractor shall conduct a Field Performance test of the lighting installations immediately after
energisation of the system in the presence of the Engineer. The test results shall meet the lighting requirements
identified in the above specifications and in Table 10-7. The Owner will take appropriate actions if the
specified lighting levels are not achieved and the Contractor will have to undertake remedial action to address
the problems at his cost and without delay to the Contract.
38. Computer Generated Photometric Analysis of Proposed DAY 1 (Defined as the initial luminance value):
This calculation is useful to ascertain the expected measurable light levels on site during the project
commissioning period. It should be noted that this is not considered a design calculation for the project. The
design calculation is undertaken in accordance with Article 39 below.
i. Provide average luminance/illuminance measurements and uniformity at grade. Spacing between
measurement points shall be as per IESNA standards or equivalent European or International Standards.
ii. Computer calculations should use of the following applicable LLF value (in accordance with the
methodology set out in Article 35 above): using variables 1.0 for both LLD and for LDD.
Table 10-7: Basis of Lighting Acceptance – Street Lighting
Minimum Average Uniformity Ratio Pole Height

Roadway Class/ Light
Luminance(L)=CD/m2 or (minimum to
IESNA Source (meters-m)
Illumination(Em)=LUX average)
Discharge
Freeways & 2
Max 30m***
1.5 (CD/m ) 0.4 (Lmin to Lav) or
Expressways Max 20m***
LED
Major Arterials LED or
1.3 (CD/m2) 0.4 (Lmin to Lav) Max 14m***
(Boulevards) Equivalent**
Secondary Arterial LED or

(Avenue) Equivalent**
Sector Internal LED or

Roads (Street) Equivalent**
Page 10-66
LED or
Access Lanes 0.5 (CD/m2) 0.4 (Lmin to Lav) Max 10m***
Equivalent**
LED or
Cross Walk 30 LUX 0.4 (Emin to Eav) To Match Road***
Equivalent**
Ramp Terminal & LED or
Traffic Conflict 2.0 (CD/m2) 0.4 (Lmin to Lav) Equivalent** To Match Road***
Areas
LED or
Under Bridges* Match Road 0.4 (Lmin to Lav) Equivalent** -
LED or
Parking Lots 5-15 LUX (low to high risk) 0.4 (Emin to Eav) Equivalent** Max 10m***
*Only for situations where the street lighting requirements, mounting heights and fixtures etc. are continued for all areas
exceeding the standard distances and criteria set out under IESNA and/or the use of soffit fixtures is required.
**Any equivalent technology proving similar or better illumination performance, energy efficiency and life cycle cost
and which fully meets the requirements of this specification.
***Optimum pole heights and spacing arrangement to be selected for the project so that it is designed for the maximum
possible overall luminous and energy efficiency with the fixtures proposed.
Project Lighting Calculations - The following performance reports of the lighting installation shall be submitted for
approval along with the material submittal:
39. Computer Generated Photometric Analysis of Proposed FUTURE DATE (Defined as assuming numerous
thousands of hours of operation and using stated design/deliver luminance value).
i. This calculation is considered the DESIGN calculation for the project.
ii. Provide average luminance/illuminance measurements and uniformity at grade. Spacing between
measurement points shall be as per IESNA standards or equivalent European or International Standards.
iii. Computer calculation should use the LLF values (LLD x LDD). All as calculated under the requirements
set out in section 35 above.
iv. The photometric data files shall be provided to the Engineer and the Owner for verification.

The Owner may request a standard production model lantern sample, identical (including LED Package) to the proposed
product, to be installed for inspection. The Owner may also request independent testing of sample lanterns to verify
lantern performance and compliance with the specifications. Testing shall be conducted as per the applicable IESNA,
ANSI or approved International equivalent approved methods of products using Solid Stage Lighting (SSL) sources. The
Owner shall be sole judge regarding acceptability of optical system performance. All testing certificates shall be from a
Laboratory certified/approved by UKAS or UL or has ISO 17025 or equivalent certification.
According to the requirements of the Project’s Contract documents, if required the Owner reserve the right to attend, or
appoint a third party to attend, a factory inspection.
10.8.4.6 Warranty
LED Lantern Warranty – The Contractor shall provide a written undertaking of the Warranty from the Lantern
Supplier(s), accompanied with the written proof of the local representative’s UAE Operating License and established
UAE background, to the satisfaction of either the relevant the Owner to warranty the materials and performance, as
follows:
i. A written warranty for a minimum five (5) year on-site replacement material, fixture, finishes and workmanship.
On-site replacement includes transportation, removal and installation of new product. Body and finish warranty
shall include warranty against failure or substantial deteriorations such as corrosion, blistering, cracking, peeling,
chalking or fading with no cost to the Owner.
ii. A written warranty for a minimum five (5) year replacement material warranty for defective or non-starting LED
source assemblies with no cost to the Owner.
iii. A written warranty for a minimum five (5) year replacement material warranty on all supplied drivers, power
Page 10-67
supply units (PSUs) and in-built control components with no cost to the Owner.
iv. A written warranty for a minimum five (5) year replacement material warranty for non-maintained luminance
levels on all light sources (LED package, LED array, or LED module) including, but not limited to the LED die,
encapsulate, and phosphor. If the expected useful life of the lantern system is not maintained, then the
manufacturer shall replace the light source(s) or lantern as needed with no cost to the Owner.
v. A written warranty for a minimum ten (10) years against the deterioration of the housing, all external components;
such as lenses, gaskets & fastenings, and the fixture finishes including, but not limited to, corrosion, yellowing,
blistering, chalking, cracking, peeling or fading with no cost to the Owner.
10.8.5 LED Lanterns for Tunnel and Underpass Areas

10.8.5.1 General
The design, specification, calculation, manufacturing, testing, shipment, installation and performance of LED lighting
system (or other equally sustainable technology) shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of all the Owner
electrical and lighting standards for electrical distribution works, except as specified herein. Copies should be requested
from the Owner if not already held. The LED lanterns shall be designed to operate continuously at the specified ambient
temperature and humidity with special attention given to the effects of direct sun-exposure during the day and the
occasional sand storms and dusty weather in designing the lantern body. The manufacturers shall guarantee adherence to
this Specification and the performance of their LED lantern under all the required design conditions.
The LED fixture shall be suitable for mounting on tunnel and/or under ceilings. It shall be suitably vibration proof, have
suitable optical distribution and slim and low profile as indicated on the drawing and shall provide efficient even low-
glare illumination. The correct cut-off angles as set out in CIE 126-1997 (Guidelines for Minimizing Sky Glow.
Commission Internationale de L 'Eclairage / 01-Jan-1997) and the overall requirements for Estidama Communities
projects as applicable for the area and zone of the project. The lantern housing shall be slim with low profile. The housing
shall be of either extruded aluminium or die cast aluminium with very low copper-content and high corrosive resistance.
Test report to be provided for the entire lantern as an end product for Salt Fog test as per ASTM B-117 or ISO 9227 for
5000 Hrs or similar International equivalent standard. Test report will show effect on the housing and also effect on light
output after this test is performed. The finish coating for housing shall be with an anti-corrosive anodized/painting
process or equivalent, providing excellent UV and environmental exposure resistance to fading, peeling cracking or
corrosion. The driver(s) shall be integral to the fixture head, encapsulated/potted and protected in a waterproof (IP)
environment, enabling access to the driver(s) for easy maintenance requirements. The fixtures shall be CE or UL
certified, or comply with equivalent international standards with all certification made available.
10.8.5.2 Applicable Standards & Guidance Documents

The following documents (or equivalent International approved documents) shall be followed:
1. IESNA (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America) - Lighting Handbook 10th Edition.
2. IESNA RP-08(reaffirmed 2005) - Roadway Lighting.
3. CIE 115 -2010 – Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic.
4. IESNA RP-19-01 Roadway Sign Lighting.
5. ANSI/IESNA RP-22-11 Tunnel Lighting
6. CIE88 – Guide for Lighting of Road Tunnels and underpasses.
7. IESNA RP-20-98 Lighting for Parking Facilities.
8. CIE 129 – Guide for Lighting Exterior Work Areas.
9. IESNA DG-19-08 Design Guide for Roundabout Lighting.
10. IESNA TM-16 -05 Technical Memorandum on Light Emitting Diode (LED) Sources & Systems.
11. IESNA DG-4-03 Design Guide for Roadway Lighting Maintenance.
12. IESNA RP-16-10 Nomenclature & Definitions for Illuminating Engineering.
13. IES/IESNA LM-79-08 Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting
Products.
14. IES/IESNA LM-80-08 Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
Page 10-68
15. IEC 60529 or EN 60 529 (IP) and EN 50 102 (IK).Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code for
ingress protection and IK Code for Mechanical Strength).
16. ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008-Americian National Standard for Chromatically of Solid State Lighting
Products.
17. BS EN 62471:2008 or ANSI/IESNA RP-27.3-07 Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems.
18. EN 60598-parts 1, 2-1 & 2-3 (Electrical safety) General and for Road Lighting Lanterns.
19. EN 61547, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3 & EN 55015 – for Electromagnetic Compatibility (Immunity
Requirements, Harmonics Requirements, Flicker Requirements & Radiated and Conducted Emissions,
respectively).
20. CIE 126-1997 Guidelines for Minimizing Sky Glow and IESNA TM-10 Addressing Obtrusive (Urban Sky
Glow and Light Trespass) in conjunction with Urban Lighting.
21. International Commission on Illumination (CIE).
22. Joint Electron Device Engineering Council (JEDEC).
23. ASTM American Society for Testing of Materials. ASTM B 117-07a Standard Practice for Operating Salt
Spray (Fog) Apparatus, 2007 or ISO International Organization for Standardization. ISO 9227 Corrosion tests
in artificial atmospheres—Salt spray tests, 2006.
24. IEC 60068-2-68 ed1.0 - Environmental testing - Part 2: Tests - Test L: Dust and Sand.
25. ANSI C82.77-2002 - Harmonic Emission Limits & IEEE Std 519 1992 - Harmonic Limits
26. ADM IRI Sustainability Guideline Standard 2010
27. ESTIDAMA - Community Pearl Rating System.
28. UPC – Utilities Design Guidelines, Public Realm Design Guidelines & Urban Street Design Manual
a. LED Lanterns
Within the Lantern:
The light source shall be high brightness white light emitting Diodes (LEDs) with individual minimum efficacy of at
least 100lm/W arranged modularly to provide the required lighting output. All lumen figures shall be Deliver (Hot)
Lumens.
The LEDs shall be from a reputed manufacturer of LEDs with proven past performance in accordance with
ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – (American National Standard for Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting
Products) or similar approved International Standard. They shall only be from MacAdam Ellipse Step-3 or Step-4 Bins.
Step-7 Binning is not acceptable.
The CRI ≥70
The LEDs shall be removable/replaceable on site by modular means without any possible risk to maintaining lantern
photometry and without the need to demount the fixtures for sake of future upgrading/maintenance requirements.
Whole Lantern Efficacy:
The optimum efficiency of the lantern shall be confirmed as follows:
Minimum lantern efficacy shall be:
≥ 75llm/cctW (@min50-degC, min95%RH)
Which is given as Total Lantern Design (Deliver) Lumen Output (llm) over Total Lantern Circuit Watts(cctW) at
minimum 60°C Operating Outside Ambient Temperature and minimum 95% Relative Humidity.
The efficacy being stated at minimum 60°C (Greater than or equal to 75 llm/cctW) should be supported by a thermal
test report for the lantern. This report should provide percentage depreciation of light output at 60°C from testing value
of 25°C or 35°C. This can be compared with LM-79 efficacy at lab temperature from photometric report and de-rated.
The effect on the driver case temperature at minimum 60°C should also be shown.
Page 10-69
Lantern Maximum % Direct Uplight shall be as CIE 126-1997 and as required/allowed for the project for the Estidama
application as applicable.
The Contractor shall provide the correct lumen output figures for minimum 60°C-ambient temperature operation of the
lantern. The above figure must not be based on using lumen output given for the standard 25 or 35°C ambient lab test
results unless stated that they are the same.
b. Optical Control
The lantern shall be fitted with optical refractors, diffusers and/or reflectors. Different optics shall be proposed to
exactly suit the specific applications. Independent laboratory photometric test reports shall be submitted for the lantern
photometric files used in the lighting calculations. The testing should conform to IESNA LM-79-08 standards.
c. Thermal Management
The LED modules shall be mounted on heavy duty heat sinks to ensure excellent head dissipation. The design of the
heat sinks shall be such that there is a direct thermal path from the led junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a
thermal transfer effect throughout the life of the lantern. The heat sinks shall be proprietary and designed by the lighting
manufacturer to enable the lanterns to work efficiently in Abu Dhabi climatic conditions. The lantern shall be provided
with a demonstrated ventilation arrangement allowing heat to be dissipated to the atmosphere. The lantern shall be
designed to prevent collection of debris on the heat sinks by proven and stated means.
The Manufacturer shall provide test certification in accordance with IEC 60068 – 2 68 Part 2 Test L: Dust and Sand and
should be submitted by the manufacturer from an independent / independently certified test laboratory. The test
certificate should provide evidence that the heat increase inside the housing enclosure with dust and sand should not be
more than 10% of the heat inside without the accumulation.
The design shall be such that the lantern shall be self cleaning in normal operation. The lantern shall be provided with a
heavy-duty rugged cast aluminium adjustable slip fitter mountable to suit the proposed pole. The Contractor shall
coordinate with the LED fitting manufacturer and pole manufacturer to make sure complete compatibility of the
products.
d. Ingress Protection
The LED Fixture’s Driver and LED Engine/optical unit components shall be externally fully rated at a minimum of IP-
65 (with the driver or driver housing to have a minimum rating of IP-66) and have proven means of negating internal
condensation build-up. They shall have a minimum mechanical strength rating of IK-07 (minimum IK-08 required for
all glass components). All synthetic materials shall be 100% UV stable and scratch resistance.
e. Vibration Resistance
The fixture, mounting bracket and connections shall have proven and stated vibration resistant design specifically for
tunnel applications.
f. Copper Content
All Aluminium Die-cast components shall have a very low copper content of less than 0.1% for corrosion resistance.
The Owner Warranty requirements for the lantern body shall be as included in Section 10.8.4.6.
10.8.5.4 Fixture Technical Data

For each type of lighting fixture, data on features, accessories, finishes and the following shall be included:
Note. Issue separate supporting documents if required.
1. Provide physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2. Provide details of the driver(s) including, manufacturer, driver efficiency, catalogue code, certifications and
input watts.
3. Provide lantern photometric reports per IESNA LM-79-08, or similar International approved equivalent;
including, laboratory name, report number, date, lantern catalogue number, lantern, and light source
specifications.
4. Provide lantern coefficient of utilization data for reflectance values of 30/0/20 for street-side and house-side
values for all optical distributions variations used.
5. Provide photometry table of zonal lumen output in 10o vertical increments showing both the lumen value and
the percentage of total out per 100 increment.
Page 10-70
6. Confirm a minimum of 6,000 hours of continuous operation of the LEDs at three different temperatures per
LM-80-08, or similar International approved equivalent.
7. Provide documentation of the expected useful life including the testing and calculation of useful life and
verification of site lighting performance at that life. If the site defined performance methods are used, the
interpolation between the three sets of LM-80 data, and all calculations applied in deriving the proposed LLD
and useful life shall be provided.
8. Provide safety certification and file number as required for the lantern family which shall be listed, labelled, or
identified per the National electric code (NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US
Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as National Recognised Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and
include CSA (Canadian Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), UL (Underwriters
Laboratory) and CE Conformance European (Communaut Europ enne / Conformit Europ enne). Japanese
electrical standard JET (Japan Electrical Safety & Environment Technology Laboratories).
LED Sources Technical Requirements Within the fixture the LED sources shall meet the following
requirements:
Attach separate supporting documents if required.
9. Operating temperature rating shall be between – 40°C and minimum +60°C at a minimum 95% Relative
Humidity (RH).
10. Storage (i.e. non-operating/daytime) temperature : all LED components to be designed to tolerate between –
40°C and minimum +80°C at a minimum 95% Relative Humidity (RH).
11. Correlated colour temperature (CCT) : 2700-5700K
12. Colour rendering index (CRI) : ≥ 70
13. Lantern manufacturer shall submit reliability reports indicating that the manufacturer of the LED (chip, diode,
or package) has performed Joint Electron Devices Engineering Council (JEDEC), or similar International
approved equivalent; reliability tests on the LEDs as follows. Factory pre-release test reports shall be provided
from the LED manufacturer duly complying with JEDEC JESD22-A108C, or equivalent, for operating life
tests at 85° C Ambient temperature and also for humidity and salt atmosphere corrosion tests. Standards and
tests used must be stated. LED Drivers Technical Requirements - Within the fixture the LED driver(s) shall
meet the following requirements:
14. Drivers shall be 1-10v dimmable and have a minimum efficiency of 85%. Wireless option shall be included in
the driver, if approved by the Owner.
15. Case (Tc °C) Temperature rating -40°C to minimum +80°C and at a minimum 95% Relative Humidity (RH).
Driver/Fixture to have some means of built-in overheat thermal protection in the form of automatic dimming or
stepping/holding down of the driver where temperature exceeds operational limits. Thermal cut-out devices
which turn the fixture LEDs completely off are not acceptable.
The Driver and driver output current must be shown to be fully tested and compatible with the exact LED
chips/engine of the lantern. All information provided and the cost analysis/payback calculations should be
calculated with the exact drive current including the calculation for the life cycle, life and resultant increase or
decrease of the energy consumption if applicable.
16. Input voltage; capable of 120-277 volt, single phase or as required by the site.
17. Power supplies can be UL Class 1 or II output or similar European CE or International equivalent.
18. Surge protection: Must be tested in accordance to the requirements of IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2-2002, Scenario I
Location Category C or International equivalent.
19. Drivers shall have a Power Factor (PF) of L: ≥ 0.90.
Drivers shall comply with FCC 47 cfr part 18 non-consumer RFI.EMI standards or equivalent. Drivers shall be
RoHS Compliant.
20. Drivers shall have a total individual lantern Harmonic Distortion (THD) of: ≤ 20% in accordance with ANSI
C82.77 (2002). However the Contractor shall measure the harmonic at the supply point (LV side of the
distribution substation) after the installation of all the LED tunnel lights and adopt harmonic compensation
methods to limit the total harmonics distortion in the supply voltage to maximum 5% as per IEEE 519
Regulations.
Page 10-71
Lantern Requirements - The dedicated lantern expected useful life (light output) and Depreciation
requirements shall be as follows:
21. Useful Life Requirements
The useful life of the lantern in terms of lumen output must be as specified by one of the following two
methods.
i. As per LM-79-08 or approved International equivalent: Simplified B20-L70 threshold. A minimum
of 50,000 operating hours before reaching the B20-L70 lumen output degradation point with no
catastrophic failures. The B20-L70 lumen output must be capable of providing the luminance level
and uniformity.
ii. Site performance method. A life time of number of hours specified by the site based on expected
site lighting useful life must be capable of providing the luminance levels of uniformity.
22. Useful life testing and verification procedure
Simplified B20-L70 threshold. Perform LM-79-08 (or approved International equivalent) testing on the lantern
at both time intervals of 0 hours and 6,000 hours. The lantern shall be operated continuously in the appropriate
UL 1598/153 environment or equivalent except when it is removed to perform the LM-79 light output tests. If
the light output determined at 6,000 hours is ≥ 96% of the light output determined at 0 hours, the lantern meets
the simplified B20-L70 threshold for useful life.
23. Site Performance method
Perform lumen depreciation testing per LM-80-08 (or approved International equivalent) on the light sources
(s) (module/array) for a minimum of 6000 hours (longer testing period is encouraged). Identify the installed (in
lantern) operating temperature of the LED using the Ts point under operating ambient temperature of 50°C.
From this interpolated curve, determine the lamp lumen depreciation (LLD) value and useful life that meets the
needs of the site defined hours of operation to end of useful life as well as the luminance level and uniformity
required.
Project Performance Requirement - The following factors shall be applied to determine the performance
requirements:
24. Light Loss Factors (LLF)
LLF = LLD x LDD (Lamp Lumen Depreciation x Lantern Dirt Depreciation)
i. Assume Lamp Lumen Depreciation (LLD) 0.70 for LED dedicated lanterns except where
recommended otherwise by the lantern manufacturer. Assume the appropriate effects from
temperature on the lumen output of the lantern. Note: The figure used should only match the stated
Lumen Depreciation value given by the manufacturer for 50,000-hour operation at minimum 50°C
ambient temperature. Manufacturer shall provide data to demonstrate the 50,000-hour lumen
depreciation factor at the minimum 50°C temperature as required by the Owner. The method of
calculation of lumen depreciation for 50,000 hrs shall be reviewed and declared consistent with
their data by the LED chip manufacturer.
ii. Assume Lantern Dirt Depreciation (LDD) using appropriate and stated depreciation factors to suit
actual environment and resistance properties of the specific fixture.
iii. Photobiological Safety the Manufacturer/Supplier shall provide a written undertaking to the
satisfaction of the Owner of testing to the following standards:
25. Ensure lantern complies with Photobiological Safety of lamps and lamp systems in accordance with the
requirements of BS EN 62471:2008 or ANSI/IESNA RP-27.3-0. Provide proof of testing and compliance with
the standards with certification provided to prove the fixture is classed as “Exempt”.
26. Undertake all lighting design and calculation to the following Owner’s design standards:
The Contractor shall conduct a Field Performance test of the lighting installations immediately after
energization of the system in the presence of the Engineer. The test results shall meet the lighting requirements
identified in the above specifications and in
Table 10-8. The Owner will take appropriate actions if the specified lighting levels are not achieved and the
Contractor will have to undertake remedial action to address the problems at his cost and without delay to the
Contract.
Page 10-72
Table 10-8: Basics of Lighting Acceptance - Tunnels
Minimum Average
Uniformity Ratio
Roadway Class/ Luminance(L)=CD/m2 Light Mounting
(minimum to
IESNA or Source Height
average)
Illumination(Em)=LUX
Tunnels:
(Interior Zone Level
LED or Ceiling
1) Day Time 8.0 (cd/m2) 0.4 (Lmin to Lav)
Equivalent* Mounted
Luminance
(Interior Zone Level
LED or Ceiling
2) ) Day Time 6.0 (cd/m2) 0.4 (Lmin to Lav)
Equivalent* Mounted
Luminance
LED or
Interior Zone 2.5 (cd/m2) 0.4 (Lmin to Lav)
Equivalent* Ceiling
Luminance
Day Time Luminance Threshold and Transition Zones shall follow IESNA RP-22-11 Section 6 (Lighting Design
Criteria) Design Guidelines.
* Any equivalent technology to LED proving similar or better illumination performance, energy efficiency and long-
term (minimum 15-year) full life cycle cost analysis comparison undertaken to PAS 55 or similar and which fully meets
the requirements of this specification.
27. Project Lighting Requirements
• As above table: Maintained average luminance for interior zone shall vary from 2.5 cd/m2 to 8 cd/m2 and
0.4 uniformity ratio for inside the tunnels.
Project Lighting Calculations - The following performance reports of the lighting installation shall be
submitted for approval along with the material submittal:
28. Computer Generated Photometric Analysis of Proposed DAY 1 (Defined as the initial luminance value):
This calculation is useful to ascertain the expected measurable light levels on site during the project
commissioning period. It should be noted that this is not considered a design calculation for the project. The
design calculation is undertaken in accordance with Article 29 below.
measurement points shall be as per IESNA standards or equivalent European or International
Standards.
ii. Computer calculations should use of the following applicable LLF value (in accordance with the
methodology set out in Article 24 above): using variables 1.0 for both LLD and for LDD.
29. Computer Generated Photometric Analysis of Proposed FUTURE DATE (Defined as assuming numerous
thousands of hours of operation and using stated design/deliver luminance value).
This calculation is considered the DESIGN calculation for the project.
measurement points shall be as per IESNA standards or equivalent European or International
Standards.
ii. Computer calculation should use the LLF values (LLD x LDD). All as calculated under the
requirements set out in Article 24 above.
iii. The photometric data files shall be provided to the Engineer and the Owner for verification.
Page 10-73

The Owner may request a standard production model lantern sample, identical (including LED Package) to the
proposed product, to be installed for inspection. The Owner may also request independent testing of sample lanterns to
verify lantern performance and compliance with the specifications. Testing shall be conducted as per the applicable
IESNA, ANSI or approved International equivalent approved methods of products using Solid Stage Lighting (SSL)
sources. The Owner shall be sole judge regarding acceptability of optical system performance. All testing certificates
shall be from a Laboratory certified/approved by UKAS or UL or has ISO 17025 or equivalent certification.
According to the requirements of the Project’s Contract documents, if required the Owner reserve the right to attend, or
appoint a third party to attend, a factory inspection.
10.8.5.6 Warranty
LED Lantern Warranty – The Contractor shall provide a written undertaking of the Warranty from the Lantern
Supplier(s), accompanied with the written proof of the local representative’s UAE Operating License and established
UAE background, to the satisfaction of either the relevant the Owner to warranty the materials and performance, as
follows:
i. A written warranty for a minimum five (5) years on-site replacement material, fixture, finishes and
workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal and installation new product. Body and
finish warranty shall include warranty against failure or substantial deteriorations such as corrosion, blistering,
cracking, peeling, chalking or fading with no cost to the Owner.
ii. A written warranty for a minimum five (5) years replacement material warranty for defective or non-starting
LED source assemblies with no cost to the Owner.
iii. A written warranty for a minimum five (5) years replacement material warranty on all supplied drivers, power
supply units (PSUs) and in-built control components with no cost to the Owner.
iv. A written warranty for a minimum five (5) years replacement material warranty for non-maintained luminance
levels on all light sources (LED package, LED array, or LED module) including, but not limited to the LED
die, encapsulate, and phosphor. If the expected useful life of the lantern system is not maintained, then the
manufacturer shall replace the light source(s) or lantern as needed with no cost to the Owner.
v. A written warranty for a minimum ten (10) years against the deterioration of the housing, all external
components; such as lenses, gaskets & fastening, and the fixture finishes including, but not limited to
corrosion, yellowing, blistering, chalking, cracking, peeling or fading with no cost to the Owner.
10.8.6 LED Overhead Sign Lantern Materials

The LED overhead sign lanterns for mounting on illuminated overhead signs shall be complete with LED’s, and built-in
drivers. Overhead sign supports shall be as specified in Section 8.4 of Chapter 8, Traffic Marking and Signs, of these
Standard Specifications. The applicable standards and guidance documents shall be as per Section 10.8.4.2.
The overhead sign lanterns shall be LED, wattage as required and shall include, the housing, cover, refractor if necessary,
LED’s, driver, wiring, latches, screws, pins and other parts composing a complete unit. The work shall include, but not
by way of limitation, conduit, wiring, fittings, couplings, elbows, clamps, clips or straps and fasteners, all as required, and
extending the wiring from the handhole at the base of the sign support structure; the conduit elbow in the foundation, and
all other appurtenances necessary to complete the work as directed by the Engineer.
The lanterns shall provide efficient even illumination, be optically sealed, mechanically strong and easy to maintain. The
LED’s shall be mounted linearly. The reflector mounting, wiring terminals and driver components shall be readily
accessible. When closed for operation, the optical assembly shall be sealed against the entry of moisture, dirt, and insects
with IP66 protection rating.
The slip fitter shall provide a horizontal adjustment to permit compensation for mounting misalignment.
There shall be mounting bases at the bottom of the cast housing to permit mounting the lantern directly to the supporting
structure. The light fixture construction details shall be as per applicable requirements included in Section 10.8.4.3. The
fixture technical data shall be as per Section 10.8.4.4. A minimum average maintained vertical illumination of 300 lux
shall be provided for overhead signs.
The rate included in the Bills of Quantities for sign lighting shall include all lanterns, conduit, except conduit in the
foundation, and wire from the handhole to the safety switch; furnishing and installing the safety switch, conduit and wire
from the safety switch to the lanterns, and all other associated work, complete, for lighting the signs on the overhead sign
structure as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein and as approved by the Engineer.
Page 10-74
LED overhead sign materials warranty shall comply as per Section 10.8.4.6.
10.8.7 150 Watt Metal Halide Overhead Sign Lantern Materials

The metal halide overhead sign lanterns for mounting on illuminated overhead signs shall be complete with lamps, fuses
and built-in ballasts. Overhead sign supports shall be as specified in Section 8.4, Chapter 8, Traffic Markings & Signs, of
The overhead sign lanterns shall be metal halide, rated 150 watts and shall include, the housing, cover, reflector, refractor,
socket, lamp, ballast, wiring, latches, screws, pins and other parts composing a complete unit. The work shall include, but
not by way of limitation, conduit, wiring, fittings, couplings, elbows, clamps, clips or straps and fasteners, all as required,
and extending the wiring from the handhole at the base of the sign support structure; the conduit elbow in the foundation;
of these Standard Specifications, and all other appurtenances necessary to complete the work as directed by the Engineer.
The lanterns shall provide efficient even illumination, be optically sealed, mechanically strong and easy to maintain. A
minimum average maintained vertical illuminance of 300 lux shall be provided for overhead signs.
The reflector mounting, wiring terminals, and ballast components shall be readily accessible. When closed for operation,
the optical assembly shall be sealed against the entry of moisture, dirt, and insects. The refractor shall be held in such a
manner as to allow for expansion and contraction of the refractor.
The optical system shall consist of a hydroformed aluminium primary beam reflector which shall be precisely profiled
and contoured to distribute light across the inner surface of the refractor. The prismatic refractor shall be of molded boro-
silicate thermal shock-resistant glass. The inner surface shall have an intricate array of prisms to direct light across the
face of the sign. The outer surface shall be smooth to facilitate self-cleaning. The reflector shall be of the retro-dispersing
type designed to eliminate the halo of excessive luminance to assure more uniform sign luminance.
The slipfitter shall provide a horizontal adjustment range of 10 degrees to permit compensation for mounting
misalignment. The slipfitter shall be designed for use with 2.5 cm diameter conduit.
The terminal board shall be located beneath the reflector at the conduit entry and shall accommodate the electric cable.
The reflector shall be fastened to the housing by means of four stainless steel screws with keyhole slots to facilitate easy
removal and replacement. Leveling pads are to be provided on the inside and bottom of the main housing to permit
accurate installation.
There shall be mounting bases at the bottom of the cast housing to permit mounting the lantern directly to the supporting
structure.
The refractor shall be form-fitted to the anodized door frame and shall have a single piece gasket with a sealing pad to
effectively seal the assembly and housing. The assembly shall be fastened to the housing by means of separable hinges at
the front and spring tempered, stainless steel at the rear. The lamp socket shall be provided with grips or other suitable
means to hold the lamp against vibration.
1. The lamp shall comply with the following requirements:
• Power into lamp: 150 watts (metal halide).
• Total luminous flux: 14,500 lumens.
• Average life to burn out to exceed: 15,000 hours.
• At half life, the maintained luminous flux shall be a minimum of 80 percent of the initial luminous flux.
2. The ballast shall be designed to operate the metal halide lamp of the power rating indicated in these Standard
Specifications and shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient temperatures ranging from -
15°C to +55°C. The ballast shall be constant wattage auto transformers. The ballast shall have a multi-tap terminal
capable of accepting supply voltages of 200 V and 230 V. The following specifications shall be met by the ballast:
It shall be suitable for 50 Hz, 230 V AC ±10% operations.
• The permissible voltage dip without causing the lamp to extinguish shall be minimum 40 percent when the
lamp is new.
• It shall have an overall power factor of at least a 0.9 when operated under rated lamp load.
• It shall operate the lamp without affecting adversely the lamp life and performance as specified herein.
• It shall withstand a 2,500 V dielectric test between core and windings.
Page 10-75
• Line starting amperes shall be not more than the line operating amperes.
• For input voltage fluctuations of ±10 percent from the nominal specified voltage, it shall regulate the lamp
watts to ±5 percent.
The rate included in the Bills of Quantities for sign lighting shall include all lanterns, conduit, except conduit in the
foundation, and wire from the handhole to the safety switch; furnishing and installing the safety switch, conduit and wire
from the safety switch to the lanterns, and all other associated work, complete, for lighting the signs on the overhead sign
structure as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein and as approved by the Engineer.
10.8.8 LED Under Bridge Lantern Materials

10.8.8.1 General
Recessed or surface mounted lanterns shall be complete with LED’s, and built-in drivers as indicated in the Contract
plans. The lanterns shall include hardware and materials required for mounting or recessing the unit on the bridge
structure, bridge abutments and piers as indicated on the Contract plans so that the unit is level and secure in service and
completely prepared for operation. LED under bridge lantern shall consist of housing, cover, reflector, refractor, or LED
modules, driver, wiring and such latches, screws, washers, pins, and other parts composing a complete unit. The lantern
shall provide efficient even illumination, be optically sealed, mechanically strong and easy to maintain. The reflector,
mounting, wiring terminals, and driver components shall be readily accessible for servicing. When closed for operation,
the optical assembly shall be sealed against the entry of moisture, dirt, and insects. The refractor or LED module shall be
held in such a manner as to allow for expansion and contraction of the refractor.
The light fixture details shall be as per applicable requirements included in section 10.8.5.
10.8.8.2 Surface Mounted Lanterns

The housing and refractor holder shall be made of aluminium or aluminium alloy. The external metal parts shall be
finished to resemble polished aluminium. On alloys that darken due to atmospheric exposure, the finish shall be
accomplished by painting with a suitable lacquer, enamel, or other paint in accordance with Chapter 24 Painting, of a
colour approved by the Engineer. The reflector shall be made of aluminium sheet of such grade and quality that:
1. The reflecting surface shall have a specular finish.
2. The reflecting surface shall have a dense protective coating of oxide, not less than 1.2 milligrams per square
centimetre, applied by the anodic oxidation process. The refractor shall be of such material and construction as to
provide low brightness and minimize glare in the direction of oncoming traffic. The latches, nuts, screws,
washers, pins and other parts shall be made of non-corrosive metals or of metals with non-corrosive finishes as
approved by the Engineer. The seal of the optical system shall be accomplished with a gasket material which will
not deteriorate with age. This gasketing shall be continuous and shall assure a weatherproof seal. A knockout for
3.8 centimetre conduit shall be provided at the upper portion of the housing. Any other optical system equivalent
or better to the above requirements will be considered by the Engineer and the Owner if submitted with
appropriate documentation. The conduit shall be secured to the lantern housing with a sealing bushing capable of
providing a watertight, dustproof connection.
10.8.8.3 Recessed Under Bridge Lantern Construction

Each recess type lantern housing shall be designed to be cast in place in the concrete and shall have an integral cast
aluminium junction box. The housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminium. The exterior surfaces of the lantern
housing and junction box in contact with concrete shall receive two heavy shop coats of zinc-chromate primer paint
complying with U.S. Federal Specification TT-P-645.
The door frame shall be of cast aluminium, with quarter-turn latching screws. The overlap door frame (including the
enamel finish) with sealed flat tempered glass lens assembly shall be suitable for areas where high temperature water or
steam spray wash-down is required. The entire lantern shall be fully gasketed and completely sealed for weather-tight,
insect-tight operation. The exposed surfaces of each frame and cover shall be coated with a high temperature, dark brown
or bronze colored synthetic baked enamel. Any other optical system equivalent or better to the above requirements will be
considered by the Engineer and the Owner if submitted with appropriate documentation.
10.8.8.4 Lantern Optical System

The lantern shall contain a position oriented LED modules to permit the use of high output LED’s. The lantern shall
contain an adjustable, sharp cut-off, reflector or LED module optical assembly.
Page 10-76
10.8.8.5 Warranty
LED under bridge sign materials warranty shall comply as per Section 10.8.5.6.
10.8.9 Under bridge Lantern Materials

10.8.9.1 General
Recessed or surface mounted lanterns shall be complete with lamps, fuses and built-in ballasts as indicated in the
Drawings. The lanterns shall include hardware and materials required for mounting or recessing the unit on the bridge
structure, bridge abutments and piers as indicated on the Drawings so that the unit is level and secure in service and
completely prepared for operation. An underpass lantern shall consist of housing, cover, reflector, refractor, socket, lamp,
ballast, wiring and such latches, screws, washers, pins, and other parts composing a complete unit. The lantern shall
provide efficient even illumination, be optically sealed, mechanically strong and easy to maintain. The reflector,
mounting, wiring terminals, and ballast components shall be readily accessible for servicing. When closed for operation,
the optical assembly shall be sealed against the entry of moisture, dirt, and insects. The refractor shall be held in such a
manner as to allow for expansion and contraction of the refractor.
10.8.9.2 Surface Mounted Lanterns

The housing and refractor holder shall be made of aluminium or aluminium alloy. The external metal parts shall be
finished to resemble polished aluminium. The reflector shall be made of aluminium sheet of such grade and quality that:
1. The reflecting surface shall have a specular finish.
2. The reflecting surface shall have a dense protective coating of oxide, not less than 1.2 milligrams per square
centimetre, applied by the anodic oxidation process.
The refractor shall be of such material and construction as to provide low brightness and minimize glare in the
direction of oncoming traffic. The latches, nuts, screws, washers, pins and other parts shall be made of non-corrosive
metals or of metals with non-corrosive finishes as approved by the Engineer.
The seal of the optical system shall be accomplished with a gasket material which will not deteriorate with age. This
gasketing shall be continuous and shall assure a weatherproof seal. A knockout for 3.8 centimetre conduit shall be
provided at the upper portion of the housing. The conduit shall be secured to the lantern housing with a sealing
bushing capable of providing a watertight, dustproof connection. The lamp socket shall be provided with grips or
other suitable means to hold the lamp against vibration.
10.8.9.3 Recessed Under Bridge Lantern Construction

Each recess type lantern housing shall be designed to be cast in place in the concrete and shall have an integral cast
aluminium junction box. The housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminium. The exterior surfaces of the lantern
housing and junction box in contact with concrete shall receive two heavy shop coats of zinc-chromate primer paint
complying with U.S. Federal Specification TT-P-645.
The door frame shall be of cast aluminium, with quarter-turn latching screws. The overlap door frame (including the
enamel finish) with sealed flat tempered glass lens assembly shall be suitable for areas where high temperature water or
steam spray wash-down is required. The entire lantern shall be fully gasketed and completely sealed for weather-tight,
insect-tight operation. The exposed surfaces of each frame and cover shall be coated with a high temperature, dark brown
or bronze colored synthetic baked enamel.
10.8.9.4 Lantern Optical System

The lantern shall contain a position oriented socket to permit the use of high output lamps. The lamp shall be uncoated
and shall be of the horizontal burning type. The lantern shall contain an adjustable, sharp cutoff, reflector optical
assembly consisting of hydroformed, specular Alzak main reflector with both parabolic and cylindrical reflecting
surfaces, auxiliary reflecting elements and a support frame. The assembly shall be arranged in such a manner that the
optical elements may be rotated to permit adjustment of the cutoff over a range from 70 degrees through 86 degrees
above nadir. Direct reading scales calibrated in degrees shall be provided to indicate the cutoff angle setting. The optical
system shall be preset at 85 degrees.
1. The lamp shall comply with the following requirements:
• Power into lamp: 150 watts (high pressure sodium)
Page 10-77
• Total luminous flux: 16,000 lumens.

• Average life to burn out to exceed: 24,000 hours.
• At half life, the maintained luminous flux shall be a minimum of 90 percent of the initial luminous flux.
2. The ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power rating indicated in these Standard
Specifications and shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient temperatures ranging from -
15°C to +55°C. The ballast shall be high power factor for starting. The following specifications shall be met by the
ballast:
• It shall be suitable for 50 Hz, 230 V AC ±5% operation.
• For input voltage fluctuations of ±5 percent from the nominal specified voltage, it shall regulate the lamp
watts within lamp volt-watt trapezoid per ANSI Standard.
• It shall have an overall power factor of at least a 0.9 when operated under rated lamp load.
• It shall operate the lamp without affecting adversely the lamp life and performance as specified herein.
• It shall withstand a 2,500 V dielectric test between core and windings.
• The permissible voltage dip without causing the lamp to extinguish shall be minimum 25% when the lamp is
new.
The cost of junction boxes, extension rings, conduit clamps and junction box fittings will not be paid for separately but
shall be considered as subsidiary to the rate as included in the Bills of Quantities for under bridge lanterns.
10.8.10 Basis of Lantern Acceptance

10.8.10.1 General
The lanterns shall be tested for compliance with the specifications in accordance with Section 10.1.9.
The illuminance levels are the maintained-in-service values after taking into account light loss factors. The Lantern Dirt
Depreciation factor (LDD) for the purpose of calculating illuminance values shall be as follows:
1. Lanterns mounted on 30.5M high poles -0.85
2. Lanterns mounted on 20.0M, 18.0M, 14.0M, 12.0M, 10.0M and 8.0M high pole -0.80 or as recommended by
the Manufacturer.
The Lamp Lumen Depreciation factor (LLD) shall be based on the minimum maintained luminous flux at the half life
as specified in these Standard Specifications for the respective lamp wattage and type.
Prior to the construction of any works required for the lighting system the Contractor shall submit complete shop
drawings for the proposed lanterns. The Contractor's submittal shall include spectral computations for all lantern types,
spacings, locations, and combinations shown in the Contract plans for all lighted areas to prove that the proposed
lanterns meet the required design standards as specified in these Standard Specifications. In addition to the illuminance
calculations based on IES Standards, the Contractor’s spectral computations shall include luminance calculations for
average luminance, longitudinal uniformity and overall uniformity based on CIE standards. The Contractor’s submittal
shall include the photometric diskettes and software for enabling the Engineer to verify the performance of the
proposed lantern. The basis of lighting acceptance shall be as included in Table 10-7, Basis of Lighting Acceptance –
Street Lighting.
10.8.11 Required Submittals

The Contractor shall submit the following design calculations and data for the Engineer's approval for the following
additional items:
1. For roadways: Roadway lighting calculation results showing compliance with lantern acceptance criteria in
Section 10.8.4.4.
2. For tunnels and underpasses: Detailed lighting calculations using appropriate lighting design software
including:
i. Luminance level on road surfaces
Page 10-78
ii. Luminance level on the sidewall

iii. Uniformity ratio on road and on wall
iv. Grid locations
v. Illuminance level on road and wall
3. For LED lanterns: In addition to the general submittal requirements, the following shall be submitted, as
applicable to each type of LED lantern:
Product cut sheets indicating all of the following:
• Complete and unique catalog number for product submitted
• Explanation of all components of the catalog number
• Lantern input current, which often differs from LED drive current
• LED drive current, which is important in estimating LED useful lifetime
• Nominal Correlated colour temperature (CCT)
• Complete specifications, including make and model number, for:
o LED light source(s)
o LED driver(s)
o Any integral controls
• Documentation supporting Claims of lantern recyclability
4. Lantern photometric report per IES LM-79 (2) including:
i. Name of independent test laboratory Documentation of test laboratory accreditation, either:
• Qualified for the IES LM-79 test per the National voluntary laboratory accreditation program (NVLAP),
or
• Qualified, verified, and recognized through the U.S. Department of Energy’s CALiPER program
ii. Report number
iii. Date
iv. Lantern catalogue number, consistent with product cutsheet
v. Description of lantern, LED light sources, and LED driver(s)
vi. Photometry
vii. Colourimetry
5. Computer ‐generated point‐ by‐ point photometr
i. Calculations shall be for maintained values:
• Light loss factor (LLF), where LLF = LLD x LDD x LATF
• Lamp lumen depreciation (LLD) consistent with typical L70 ratings for useful lifetime.
• To allow direct comparison of products with differing L70 duration, a proper economic analysis is
required
• Lantern dirt depreciation (LDD), as per IES DG ‐4 (3) for an enclose
lantern,
based on airborne particulate matter and frequency of cleaning
• Lantern ambient temperature factor (LATF)
• Calculation/measurement points shall be per ANSI/IES RP ‐8 (4), Appendix A
6. Documentation supporting claims of expected L70 useful life (evaluating led lumen maintenance).
i. Option 1, the Contractor shall provide:
• IES LM‐80 (5) report
Page 10-79
• ISTMT report
• Chart illustrating interpolation between TMP curves from IES LM ‐80 (5) data f
TMP from ISTMT report, where TMP interpolation is only valid for same drive current
ii. Option 2, Contractor shall provide:
• IES LM-79 (2) report at 0 hours of operation
• IES LM-79 report at 6,000 hours of operation
7. Safety certification and file number per the National electrical code: NFPA 70 (6)
i. Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational safety health administration (OSHA) as
Nationally recognized testing laboratories (NRTL). NRTL include:
• Canadian standards association (CSA)
• Edison testing laboratory (ETL)
• Underwriters laboratory (UL)
10.8.12 Spares
The Items for spare lantern shall be as specified herein, in the Particular Specifications, Contract Documents, and as
approved by the Owner.
All spare lantern items shall comply with all applicable Sections of these Standard Specifications. All spare units shall
be suitable boxed or crated and placed in storage where designated by the Owner and the Engineer. All spare units shall
be identical to and by the same manufacturer as units approved by the Engineer.
all spares in storage. No materials, boxes or crates shall be stored directly on the ground or similar horizontal surface.
The Contractor shall provide all blocking of wood, concrete or other material as approved by the Owner and the
Engineer under all materials, boxes or crates. All materials, crates or boxes shall be suitably identified by Contract.
Page 10-80
LANTERNS
SCHEDULE "A"/"B"/"C"
1000 WATT/400 WATT/250 WATT LANTERNS
The following drawings/catalogues shall be submitted with the shop drawings written in English only.
1. Scale drawing of specified roadway lighting unit cut-off lantern showing construction details and materials used.
2. Spectral distribution curves (polar curves) for the specified roadway lighting unit with cut-off lanterns.
3. ISO-Candela diagrams of the roadway lighting unit with cut-off lanterns.
4. ISO-lux curves for the specified roadway lighting unit covering the roadway.
5. ISO-luminance diagrams of the specified lighting unit with cut-off lanterns.
6. Coefficient of Utilization of the specified lighting unit with cut-off lantern.
7. Catalogues and other technical literature.
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-81
LANTERNS
SCHEDULE "A"/"B"/"C"
1000 WATT/400 WATT/250 WATT LANTERNS
2. Spectral distribution curves (polar curves) for the specified roadway lighting unit with cut-off lanterns.
3. ISO-Candela diagrams of the roadway lighting unit with cut-off lanterns.
4. ISO-lux curves for the specified roadway lighting unit covering the roadway.
5. ISO-luminance diagrams of the specified lighting unit with cut-off lanterns.
6. Coefficient of Utilization of the specified lighting unit with cut-off lantern.
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-82
LANTERNS
SCHEDULE "D"
LED UNDER BRIDGE LANTERNS
2. Spectral distribution curves (polar curves) for the specified roadway lighting unit.
3. ISO-Candela diagrams of the specified lighting unit.
4. ISO-lux curves for the specified spacing.
5. ISO-luminance diagrams of the specified lighting unit.
6. Coefficient of Utilization of the specified lighting unit.
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-83
10.9 Lighting Control Cabinets

10.9.1 Description
Lighting control cabinets shall be as indicated on the Contract plans, as specified herein and as directed by the
Engineer.
10.9.1.1 General
400/230 volt, molded glass reinforced plastic (GRP) lighting control cabinets for the control of motorway or roadway
lighting shall be free standing and suitable for outdoor installation. All metallic parts of the cabinet, including but not
limited to, bolts, nuts, washers, latches and glanding plate shall be corrosion resistant in the conditions prevailing in
Abu Dhabi. The control cabinet shall be installed directly on the levelled concrete foundation as indicated on the
Drawing. The cabinet opening side shall be facing the adjacent roadway or parking area and shall be parallel to the curb
line.
The lighting control cabinets shall consist of only one compartment and shall be heavy duty hot molded glass
reinforced plastic with a reinforced lockable door. The compartment shall be protected against dust and water in
accordance with the IEC Standard IP-55.
The door shall be pad lockable. Pad locks and master keys shall be supplied. In addition to padlocks, two separate
latches shall also be provided within the doors, one (within the right panel) lockable with a key and another (within the
left door panel) internally lockable by sliding a bolt. The enclosure shall have a tempered glass window for a photo-
cell. Label indicating "PROPERTY OF DoT" and a Danger Sign, both in English and Arabic shall be provided.
The GRP wall thickness shall not be less than 4.5 mm and the bottom thickness shall exceed 6.0 mm. The outside
dimensions and internal connections shall be as indicated on the Contract plans. The unit shall be tested at a recognized
testing station to prove that the unit withstands 46kA r.m.s. for 1 seconds. A short circuit test certificate shall be
submitted with the shop drawings. Doors with gun metal hinges, arranged to give maximum access for cabling and
maintenance, shall be provided.
The cabinet components shall include, but are not limited to, the items as follows:
1. Main and branch circuit breakers shall be three pole of the circuit rating below:
i. Main Protection 1 No. 160A MCCB (Adjustable between 0-7 and 1.0 times rated current).
ii. Branch Circuits 6 Nos. 63A MCCB (Adjustable between 0.7 and 1.0 times rated current).
The MCCB shall be fitted with pressure connections for the cable terminations. The MCCB shall be the thermal
magnetic type, adjustable up to its full rating and complying with IEC 60157. The short circuit rating shall be 25kA for
one second. The characteristics of the Branch MCCB and Main MCCB shall be so selected that in case of a fault on any
Branch cable, only the MCCB of that particular circuit shall trip. Also full discrimination between the characteristics of
pole fuse unit and Branch MCCB shall be ensured.
2. Set of busbars of hard drawn, high conductivity, tinned copper and rigidly supported. The phase and neutral
bars shall have a rating of 200 Amperes. The busbard shall be positioned to give maximum access and covered
with PVC covering for identification and protection against accidental contact. The size of the busbars (Cross
sectional area in Sq. mm) shall be stated in the shop drawing.
All droppers for branch circuits shall be busbar type of not less than 100 amperes rating.
An earth bar, 40mm x 4mm shall be provided at the bottom and secured so as to give a positive electrical
connection.
A 12mm terminal shall be provided on the cabinet body and connected to the earth bar.
3. Six numbers 63 Amps. three phase contactors.
4. Time switch to control the lighting, circuit contactors shall be single pole, 24 hours solar type (24.48 latitude),
double throw with a manual override selector switch.
Time switch shall be powered by a 230 volt heavy duty self starting synchronous motor with spring driven
reserve power to operate the contacts for 24 hours after a power outage, with automatic reserve power rewind
when the power is restored. The incoming circuit to the time switch shall include a four position selector
switch to facilitate the manual connection to any one of the phases.
Page 10-84
5. One photo electric cell controller to override road lighting time controllers in the event of an unusual low
lighting situation occurring during daylight hours. Suitable auxiliary relay, if required, shall also be supplied.
i. The photo electric controls shall be electronic in principle and comply with BS 5972. One shall be
installed on the top of each distribution pillar and shall ride the solar time switches at the pre-set levels.
ii. The photo cell controls shall have a pre-set switch "ON" and switch "OFF" point and have a time delay
incorporated in the circuit to prevent accidental operation of intermittent stray light, such as car head
lamps.
6. One three phase MCB to control time switch and photo electric cell and eight single phase MCB's to control
contactors and door switch including one spare with ratings as indicated on the drawing or as approved.
7. One door switch operated, internal illumination circuit, complete with 18 watt CFL suitably protected against
accidental damage.
8. Compression type brass cable glands for Main and Branch circuits, with earth tags and plastic shrouds and
galvanized steel plate for glanding the armored cables.
9. All the wiring within the cabinet shall be with 600 volt tropical grade PVC insulated color coded and suitable
for the circuit ratings.
10. Two identification signs as indicated on the Drawing and as approved by the Engineer. The identification
signs shall meet all the applicable requirements as specified in Section 8.4, Chapter 8, Traffic Marking &
Signs, of these Standard Specifications.
All the ratings specified are the normal continuous current at 50°C ambient temperature and no further
derating factor shall be applied. The shop drawing submittal shall include in each case, the BS rating and the
Abu Dhabi rating.
The Contractor shall furnish and install earthing and bonding at lighting control cabinets in compliance with
Section 10.14.
The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's certified shop drawings indicating all related components along
with their details for approval by the Engineer.
11. The lighting control cabinet shall include provision for the installation of energy meter in accordance with
the latest ADWEA/ADDC requirements. The energy meter will be supplied by ADDC. The Contractor shall
install the energy meter and provide the bus bar mounted type current transformers with rating 200/5 amp,
Class 0.5, 5VA complete with wiring including the terminal block. The current transformer rating may vary as
required by ADDC and as directed by the Engineer. The lighting control cabinet enclosure shall be provided
with a tempered glass window for the energy meter as approved by ADDC and the Engineer.
10.9.1.3 Lighting Control Cabinet for LED Lighting

The Lighting Control Cabinet shall be capable of controlling and dimming the street lighting LED lanterns using Power
Line Carrier PLC technology or wireless technology and as approved by the Owner. The lighting control cabinet shall
consist of light point manager to transmit/receive data from light point controller. The lighting control cabinet shall be
equipped with devices as required in the public lighting energy saving and monitoring system specification for LED
installations as included in the Section 10.10.2.
The Contractor shall coordinate with Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (ADDC) of Abu Dhabi Water and electricity
Authority (ADWEA), submit all necessary information as required by ADDC, and arrange for the electrical service
connection to the lighting control cabinet for the street lighting system in accordance with the requirements of Section
10.1.5.
Lighting Controls shall comply with the following requirements:
1. All lighting designated for dusk-to-dawn operation shall be controlled by an astronomical time switch and
photocell.
2. All time switches, including astronomical types, shall be capable of retaining programming and time settings
during loss of power for a minimum period of 72 hours.
3. All landscape lighting shall be turned off at 24:00 hrs, unless required for safety reasons. If needed for safety,
lighting levels shall be lowered to those recommended in IESNA RP-33-99 and IES RP-8.
Page 10-85
10.9.1.4 Inspection and Testing

The Contractor shall provide all required inspection and testing for lighting control cabinets in compliance with the
requirement of Section 10.1.9.
10.9.2 Lighting Control Cabinets Supplied by the Owner

The lighting control cabinets, supplied by the Owner will be complete and will generally comply with the requirements
of these Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for and include, but not by way of limitation, the
following work:
1. Loading, transporting, unloading, assembling (as required) and the complete installation of all lighting control
cabinets as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein. All lighting control cabinets and
appurtenances shall be obtained from the Owner's designated storeyard.
2. The construction of all foundations for all control cabinets as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified
herein. The Contractor shall verify the size of the lighting control cabinet, and all appurtenances with the
Engineer prior to commencing construction of such foundations. The Contractor shall obtain earthing
electrodes and anchor bolts from the Owner and shall set all earthing electrodes and anchor bolts in accordance
with shop drawings approved by the Engineer.
10.10 Public Lighting Management System

10.10.1 Public Lighting Energy Saving, Control and Monitoring System for
HPS and MH Installations
All new installations or retrofit for High Pressure Sodium (HPS) and Metal Halide (MH) lighting shall be controlled via
a Public Lighting Management System (PLMS) including independent phase voltage variation and dimming. The
PLMS shall save up to 40% of energy and double the lamp life of HPS and MH lamps.
Next to each lighting control panel (LCP) a power controller (if a retrofit application) shall be installed to adjust the
voltage and dim the lighting during off peak hours. There shall be no changes required to the standard lighting
installation or in case of retrofit to the existing installation. The control system shall be fully independent of the lighting
itself and it shall be able to control any brand of lantern. The system shall comply with CIE115/2010. The
communication and control shall be using Gateway technology or as approved by the Owner and the Engineer.
10.10.1.1 General Requirements

1. The PLMS will work with all lanterns HPS and MH type, equipped with standard magnetic ballast, igniters
and power factor correction capacitor.
2. The PLMS shall be capable of dimming HPS and MH lamps in a range of 100% - 50%.
3. The PLMS shall be capable of adjusting the output voltage for each phase individually to +/- 1% for input
voltage fluctuations from 175V to 264V. The dimming of HID lamps shall not switch off the lamps due to
voltage reduction.
4. The PLMS shall be completely static, meaning no moving parts such as “variac-type” transformers with
brushes and it shall not contain Triac or IGBT based equipment.
5. The kVA rating installed shall be based on full load as per the Contract plans at cosφ 0.8 and a spare capacity
of 30% for future connection of additional loads such as advertising panels or more lighting.
6. The system shall have an automatic by-pass.
7. Each controller shall be de-rated by 30%, certified by the manufacturer.
8. The controller shall be in two separate compartments, one ventilated compartment for the transformers and
terminals IP44 and one sealed compartment for all electronic components IP54 or as approved by the
Manufacturer’s recommendations.
9. The PLMS has to be a field proven system with at least 5000 similar products installed worldwide. The chosen
supplier shall have similar systems installed in at least 5 major cities in the World and at least 5 years’
experience and installation in the GCC.
Page 10-86
10. The PLMS shall use the latest generation technology, and comply with international standards such as. CE-
mark, CEI 17-13/1, EN 60439-1 and UL916. PLMS shall be CE marked and confirm to such standards. Under
no circumstances the system shall induce harmonic currents to the supply grid.
11. All the system component of PLMS will be suitable to operate within the temperature range of –20°C to
+55°C with humidity of 0 – 97 % ; non-condensing.
10.10.2 Public Lighting Energy Saving, Control and Monitoring System for
LED Installations
The proposed system shall comply with CIE115 – 2010. It shall save minimum 60% energy and extend the life time of
the LED’s.
The proposed system shall be compatible with all LED lantern manufacturer and already installed and implemented
DoT/ADDC lighting control system. Multiple manufacturers’ lanterns shall be able to be controlled from the same
system. The source of supply shall be different for lighting and lighting control in order to guarantee full independence
or as approved by the Engineer.
Each lantern has to be equipped with an approved dimmable driver as per Section 10.8.4 (using the 1-10V input or
PWM – Pulse Width Modulation). Each pole shall be equipped with a Lighting Point Controller (LPC). The two shall
be connected with a 5 or 10 core cable, phase, neutral, earth, control+ and control -.
The LPC module shall be located in the pole cut out and shall transmit / receive data to/from the LPM module
(Lighting Point Manger) located in the lighting control cabinet (LCC) via the existing power line using the power line
communication method. Each LPC shall act as a receiver, a transmitter and as a relay to the next LPC. Up to 989 LPC’s
shall be addressed from one LPM. The LPM must be connected to the three phases, random capacitive coupling is not
permitted. The LPM shall be controlled via a digital time clock initiating the different light levels. The LCC shall be
equipped with a suitable filtering system, preventing the higher frequency signals being fed back to the supplies. The
LPM shall have a suitable programming interface.
If required later, the data from the LPM shall be able to be communicated via a MODBus or RS232 interface for
communication to a central location via the GSM network or with a TCP/IP over a fiber- optic converter to the central
location or as required by DoT/ADDC and compatible with already installed lighting control system by DoT/ADDC.
The operation of each lantern shall be monitored and the operating hours shall be tracked. Lantern failures shall be
signalled and maintenance schedules prepared in advance.
Control the Lantern: 4 scenarios shall be activated by the time clock via the LPM. Each of the 16 groups of lanterns
shall take a different operating point, e.g. OFF - 50% - 75% - 100% of max. Light. The 4 scenarios shall be freely
programmed on the LPM.
Monitor the Lantern: Some parameters shall be measured by the LPC and in real time communicated to the LPM two
times per day or as required by the Owner, on the request of the LPM. The time shall be set in the LPM. It is important
that real measurement data is communicated. Alarm thresholds must be set from the central software.
Should for any reason the power line communication not be possible in an installation, the LPC module shall be
controlled via the mains voltage. 230V = maximum light and 170V = minimum light. Min. and Max. shall be set in the
LPC module. This solution is for mixed loads as well, where HPS and LED lights are controlled from the same LCP.
10.10.2.1 General Characteristics of the Wireless System for LED Lanterns

If approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply and install a wireless system to operate, control and monitor the
LED lighting lanterns. The Contractor shall obtain necessary permissions from the police, Telecommunications
Regulation Authority (TRA) or local authorities in order to avoid any interference with existing or planned wireless
systems.
The RF transceiver shall be certified by any of the following Lab/ Authorities:
a) Federal Communications Commission (United States)
b) Industry Canada (Canada)
c) European Telecommunications Standard Institute (Europe)
The wireless system shall consist of the following basic components:
a. Lantern Controller
The lantern controller (LC) shall be responsible to operate, control and monitor the lantern by various operations such
as switching the LED, adjusting the lighting level and detecting possible lantern and system failures as programmed.
Page 10-87
Each lantern controller shall communicate through wireless and secure via RF with the segment controller by an
external antenna attached. The communication distance shall be over 300 meters. The lantern controller shall be built
into each lantern using a suitable hole in the lantern top, IP 66 rated. The lantern controller shall support any dimmable
driver using Dali or 1-10V signal up to total 600W. It shall also provide additional interface to motion sensors (light
sensors) to allow motion based dimming or adaption lighting with minimum four dimming schedule.
The Wireless Controller shall be self-organizing in a RF mesh network which can be used in lighting application for
reliable and efficient operations. This wireless controller shall be used in monitoring and control of street lighting
networks geographically distributed. The wireless controller shall be highly robust, reliable and easy remote monitoring
from intuitive touch screen interface or over the web using the Central Management Software installed at the Client
premises. The wireless controller shall be based on user configurable on/off/dim schedules programmed on a
daily/monthly/yearly/special events basis, or shall be controlled locally using a built-in astronomical clock or shall be
controlled using inputs from motion sensors. The wireless controller shall be powered using a DC power source
available in the LED light fixture. Each controller can belong to multiple groups and act as a master or a slave at the
same time. When a controller is configured as a master, it shall control the status/dimming levels of all the lighting
nodes in that group based on motion or any other user configurable event. Each wireless controller shall provide daily
reports including data about LED burn-outs, lamp cycling, driver failure, over/under voltage, abnormal power
consumption, low power consumption, low power factor and communication failure. All faults shall be sent to the
central lighting management system to generate alarms for visualization and fault rectification. The lantern controller
shall work under the weather and site conditions set out in these Standard Specifications under section 10.1.6.
b. Segment Controller
The segment controller (SC) shall be responsible to control and monitor a minimum of 256 lantern controllers by a
secure private network. The SC shall be able to provide same functionality as the LC. In addition, the SC shall
communicate with a photocell and a real time clock for sustainable system operation. The segment controller shall be
installed in the lighting control cabinet or on top of the lantern. The onboard software shall be upgraded remotely
through the Owner’s facility or as advised by the Engineer and the Owner.
Segment controller shall be served as a gateway for a group of wireless controllers to communicate with the central
server located at the Client premises using a backhaul communication network such as GPRS. Each segment controller
shall consists of a radio module for wireless mesh network configuration. The input and output of the wireless mesh
devises shall be mapped using open protocols to allow easy integration with other systems. The segment controller shall
have an extremely powerful 32 bit microcontroller that allows for the building of complex logic and intelligence for
faster response times and better performance. The segment controller shall be able to be configured remotely from an
easy to use web interface. The segment controller shall be able to be configured in fault tolerant mode to provide the
highest levels of network availability. The segment controller shall be available in several enclosure options that allow
for easy installation.
Each segment controller shall be able to gather data from its branch of LC’s and send/receive the appropriate
information securely when required to the Owner’s database via GPRS, 3G, fiber optic network, Ethernet or modbus or
as advised by the Owner. Unless the SC is unable to connect on the Internet, an external modem shall be installed as a
gateway to transmit all gathered of the lighting lanterns and receive any lighting programs and controls respectively.
Each SC shall not interfere with each other when they are installed in the same area. The SC shall be able to log data up
to two weeks in case there is a failure in the communication with the remote data storage. The segment controller shall
work under the weather and site conditions set out in these Standard Specifications under section 10.1.6.
Commissioning of the wireless system shall be done remotely using outdoor configuration assistant tool in coordination
with the manufacturer representative, the Engineer and the Owner. The lantern controller and segment controller shall
communicate and exchange the following data:
 Lamp status on/off (Control & Monitoring)
 Voltage
 Lantern current
 Power factor cosφ
 Lantern burning hours
 Lantern supply time (how many hours the lantern was supplied with power, this time is not necessarily the
same as the burning hrs)
The manufacturer shall have a reputable place in the region and International market of wireless lighting control
system.The manufacturer shall have at least ten (10) years of experience in public lighting management systems and it
shall have at least 5 similar installations in the GCC or as required by the Owner.
Page 10-88
c. Central Lighting Management Software

The Central lighting management system shall use the latest RF-wireless and GPRS/GSM technology to enable
programming, monitoring and control of streetlights distributed over both large and small regions. The central lighting
management Hardware shall be located at the Client premises. The Central lighting management system shall keep
communication and energy monitoring modules to provide continuous updates per luminaire to the Central Control
station located at the Client premises. The Central lighting management system shall be able to control and monitor,
selected individual or groups of light poles, to be switched ON/OFF as needed from a Client premises. Each streetlight
shall able to support up to ten schedules that can be configured by the user to control On, Off, and dimming levels at
specific times. The schedules shall be programmed on a daily/monthly/yearly basis or can be controlled locally using a
built-in astronomical clock that calculates sunset and sunrise times using the GPS location and time zone data
throughout the year. The Central lighting management system shall have extensive fault monitoring ability to providing
data for intelligent report like burn outs, lamp cycling, driver failure, communication failure and more. All faults shall
be sending through the Central Lighting Management to generate alarms, SMS, Email to the maintenance staff for
visualization and fault rectification of critical issues. The Central lighting management system shall track lantern usage
hours through the controller that can be used for predictive maintenance allowing LED replacement planning in
advance. The Central lighting management system should support multiple industry standard protocols enabling easy
integration with other systems and networks. The Central lighting management system shall be Web-based Monitoring
and Control, to enable comprehensive display of live and historical data and remote configuration. The Central lighting
management system shall be integrated with Google Map and Google Earth or as advised by the Client, to provide an
intuitive and familiar interface for users that requires little training. The Central lighting management system shall
prepare detailed real time reports for the street lighting power consumption and sent via email or as advised by the
Client. The Central lighting management system shall display “energy usage’ and “energy saved” per region or system-
wide over user supplied time frames.
10.10.2.2 General Characteristic of the LPC Module for LED Lanterns

If approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply and install a Power Line Communication (PLC) system to
operate, control and monitor the LED lighting lanterns. The PLC system shall consist of the following basic component:
a. LPC Module
The LPC module shall be located in the pole near the cut-out in an IP65 enclosure. The LPC module shall produce
galvanically isolated output 1-10 VDC to control the driver to achieve dimming from 1 to 100 % with steps of 1-10%.
The communication shall be done in AKS code with power line carrier and the frequency shall be 125 KHz (class 116).
The dimming control shall be achieved via the mains voltage. The minimum communication speed shall be 1000 Baud
rate. The LPC module shall be suitable for lamps up to maximum 600 Watts. The power consumption for the LPC
module shall be lower than 0.7 Watts and the supply voltage shall range 170-254V AC, 50 Hz.
The maximum distance for the communication shall be 1000 meters and each LPC module shall act as a repeater
(relays) in the power line network. The LPC operation temperature shall range from -20 to +55°C where as the storage
temperature of the LC modules shall be from -30 to +80°C. The LPC module shall comply with the EN500065-1 and
EN50178 and CE standards and MTBF > 200,000 hrs.
The lantern controller and segment controller shall communicate and exchange the following data:
 Voltage
 Lantern current
 Lantern supply time (how how many hours the lantern was supplied with power, this time is not necessarily the
The supplier shall have at least ten (10) years of experience in public lighting management systems and it shall have at
least 5 similar installations in the GCC or as required by the Owner.
10.10.2.3 Warranty
Public Lighting Management Warranty - The Contractor shall provide a written undertaking to the satisfaction of the
Page 10-89
A written warranty for a minimum five (5) year on-site replacement materials, finishes and workmanship. On-site
replacement includes transportation, removal and installation of new product. Body and finish warranty shall include
warranty against failure or substantial deteriorations such as corrosion, blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking or fading
with no cost to the Owner.
A written warranty for a minimum five (5) year replacement material warranty for defective or non-operating
Hardware/Software.
A written warranty for a minimum five (5) year replacement material warranty on all supplied electrical and electronic
components, harmonic filters, power supply units (PSUs) and in-built control components with no cost to the Owner.
10.10.3 Tunnel Lighting Energy Saving, Control and Monitoring System for
LED Installations
The proposed system shall comply with CIE88. It shall save up to 60% energy and extend the life time of the LED’s.
The proposed system shall be compatible with any LED lantern manufacturer. Multiple manufacturer’s lanterns shall
be able to be controlled from the same system. The source of supply shall be different for lighting and lighting control
in order to guarantee full independence.
Each lantern shall be equipped with an approved dimmable driver as per Part B of this Specification (using the 1-10V
input or PWM – Pulse Width Modulation). Each lantern shall be equipped with a Lighting Point Controller (LPC). The
two shall be connected with a 5 core cable; (phase, neutral, earth, control+ and control)
The LPC module shall be located near the lantern and shall transmit / receive data to/from the LPM module (Lighting
Point Manger) located in the lighting distribution board (LDB) via the power line using the power line communication
method. Each LPC shall act as a receiver, a transmitter and as a relay to the next LPC. Up to 989 LPC’s shall be
addressed from one LPM. The LPM shall be controlled via the PLC from the tunnel lighting control system initiating
the different light levels required. The LDB shall be equipped with a suitable filtering system, preventing the higher
frequency signals being fed back to the supplies. The LPM shall have a suitable programming interface.
The data from the LPM shall be communicated via a MODBus and TCP/IP over the fiber optic converter to the master
PLC. The operation of each lantern shall be monitored and the operating hours of each lantern shall be tracked. Lamp
failures shall be signalled and maintenance schedules prepared in advance.
Control the Lantern: 4 scenarios shall be activated by the PLC via the LPM. Each of the 16 groups of lanterns can take
a different operating point, e.g. OFF - 50% - 75% - 100% of max light. The 4 scenarios shall be freely programmed on
the LPM.
Monitor the Lantern: Some parameters shall be measured by the LPC and in real time communicated to the LPM two
times per day on the request of the LPM. The time shall be set in the LPM. It is important that real measurement data is
communicated. Alarm thresholds shall be set from the central software.
Should for any reason the power line communication not be possible in an installation, the LPC module shall be
controlled via the mains voltage. 230V = maximum light and 170V = minimum light. Min. and Max. shall be set in the
LPC module. This solution is for mixed loads as well, where HPS and LED lights are controlled from the same LCP.
10.10.3.1 General Characteristic of the LPC Module for LED Lanterns

If approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply and install a Power Line Communication (PLC) system to control
and monitor the LED lighting lanterns. The PLC system shall consist of the following basic component:
a. LPC Module
The LPC module shall be located in the pole near the cut-out in an IP65 enclosure. The LPC module shall produce
galvanically isolated output 1-10 VDC to control the driver to achieve dimming from 1 to 100 % with steps of 1-10%.
The communication shall be done in AKS code with power line carrier and the frequency shall be 125 KHz (class 116).
The dimming control shall be achieved via the mains voltage. The minimum communication speed shall be 1000 Baud
rate. The LPC module shall be suitable for lamps up to maximum 600 Watts. The power consumption for the LPC
module shall be lower than 0.7 Watts and the supply voltage shall range 170-254V AC, 50 Hz.
The maximum distance for the communication shall be 1000 meters and each LPC module shall act as a repeater
(relays) in the power line network. The LPC operation temperature shall range from -20 to +55°C where as the storage
temperature of the LC modules shall be from -30 to +80°C. The LPC module shall comply with the EN500065-1 and
EN50178 and CE standards and MTBF > 200,000 hrs.
The lantern controller and segment controller shall communicate and exchange the following data:
Page 10-90

 Voltage
 Lantern current
 Lantern supply time (how how many hours the lantern was supplied with power, this time is not necessarily the
The supplier shall have at least ten (10) years of experience in public lighting management systems and it shall have at
least 5 similar installations in the GCC or as required by the Owner.
10.10.3.2 Warranty
Tunnel lighting management Warranty - The Contractor shall provide a written undertaking to the satisfaction of the
A written warranty for a minimum five (5) year on-site replacement material, fixture, finishes and workmanship. On-site
replacement includes transportation, removal and installation of new product. Body and finish warranty shall include
warranty against failure or substantial deteriorations such as corrosion, blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking or fading
with no cost to the Owner.
A written warranty for a minimum five (5) year replacement material warranty for defective or non-operating
Hardware/Software.
A written warranty for a minimum five (5) year replacement material warranty on all supplied electrical and electronic
components, harmonic filters, power supply units (PSUs) and in-built control components with no cost to the Owner.
10.11 Electrical Appurtenances

10.11.1 Description
Electrical appurtenances shall be as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein.
10.11.2 Cable Tray, Cable Trunking, Cavity Floor Trunking and Junction
Box for Tunnel Lighting
10.11.2.1 General
The Contractor shall supply and install cable tray, cable trunking and junction box for tunnel lighting as indicated on
the Contract plans, as specified hereinafter, as required by the Owner, and as directed by the Engineer.
10.11.2.2 Cable Tray

Cable trays shall be constructed of marine grade 316 stainless steel. Thickness of the steel shall be a minimum of 1.5
mm for (50-200) mm wide cable trays and 2mm for (300-600) mm wide cable trays. All trays supporting power cables
shall be heavy duty.
Cable trays, bends, and junctions shall be provided as necessary and shall be of similar type and finish. Proprietary
accessories with bends and tee-pieces of the radius type shall be used. Do not install site formed accessories without
Engineers approval. The tray shall be mechanically and electrically continuous. The tray shall be installed in true
vertical and horizontal alignment. Bond all tray systems to the main earthing system. The trays shall be of adequate
widths to support the necessary cables and shall meet the BS EN 61537 regulations. Calculation of the space occupied
shall be submitted and the tray shall be sized accordingly with 20 percent spare space. Trays shall be adequately
supported throughout their length at intervals of minimum 1200 mm. All cables shall be fixed to the cable tray with
cable ties. Ventilated covers shall be provided for all cable trays exposed to direct sunlight.
10.11.2.3 Cable Trunking

Cable trunking shall be of marine Grade 316 stainless steel. The access plate of the trunking shall be removable and be
of suitable sections over the entire length of straight runs. Overlapping collar sections or other similar approved linking
arrangement shall be provided at the junction of the various sections of the trunking. All fixings shall be so arranged
Page 10-91
that there are no projecting screw threads or similar points within the trunking that may cause damage to the cables.
The cross-sectional area of the trunking shall be uniform. Positive-continuity links shall be supplied and fixed at all
trunking-section interconnection points. The whole of the requirements for conditions elsewhere in this specification
shall, wherever appropriate, be deemed to apply to stainless steel trunking.
The Contractor shall ensure that the completed trunking installation is clean and dry internally before installing cables
and that any damage to the finish has been properly rectified. Dress all holes cut in trunking and, with the exception of
conduit connections, fit with a protective beading. Fit pin racks at intervals of 1200mm in vertical runs exceeding
1800mm and not more than 300mm from a junction, and retaining straps at intervals of 1000mm in horizontal runs
where the lid is on the side or the underside.
Drawings showing all manufacturing details of the trunking shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Draw wire
shall be left in all service trunkings for ease of installation. A calculation for the space factor shall be submitted and the
cable trunk should be sized accordingly as per IEE wiring regulations, 16th Edition. Cable trunking, ducting and fittings
shall comply with BS 4678. All materials, supports and accessories shall be of the same manufacturer.
10.11.2.4 Junction Box for Tunnel Lighting

The junction boxes used for terminating the tunnel lighting circuits shall be rated IP-66 and IK10 protection ingress
with IP-66 rated plug and socket type. The connector terminals used inside the junction box shall be spring loaded type,
resistance to vibration, thermal cycling and shocks, with an additional protection through circuit breaker on ceramic
base. The junction box shall be in cast aluminium material. The plug and sockets shall be IP-66 watertightness ingress
and in GRP casing. The contact technology for the sockets shall be with silver nickel tips and it shall be reliable for
tunnel atmosphere as corrosion proof, stands overload and electrical contact pressure quality never affects despite
ageing.
10.11.2.5 Cavity Floor Trunking

Cavity floor trunking shall be constructed of pre-galvanized sheet steel to BS EN 10142 and 3. The thickness of the lid
steel shall be a minimum of 2.5mm. Appropriate bends (90° flat bend, 90° riser bend) and junctions shall be provided
and shall be similar type and finish. Site formed accessories shall not be used. The trunking shall be electrically and
mechanically continuous. Bond all trunkings to the main earthing system. The size of the trunking shall be as indicated
on the Contract plans and as approved by the Engineer.
10.11.3 Isolator Switches

The Contractor shall supply, install, connect, test, and commission the isolator switches as indicated on the Contract
plans, as specified herein, and as directed by the Engineer. Isolator switches shall be of single or three phase suitable
for 400 volt 50 Hz, and shall be surface mounted. The degree of protection for the isolator switches shall be IP65. The
housing for the isolators shall be of cast aluminium or corrosion-resistant metal alloy.
The moulded parts shall be produced from strong arc-resistant material. The contact surface shall be heavily silver
plated for maximum service reliability. Isolators shall be tested to BS 5419: 1977 and IEC 60947-3. The utilization
categories shall be suitable for switching of motor loads or other loads as indicated on the Contract plans.
10.11.4 Local Devices

The Contractor shall supply, install, connect, test, and commission all local devices including, but not limited to,
switches, switched socket outlets, and flexible outlets as indicated on the Contract plans, as specified herein, as required
by the Owner, and as directed by the Engineer.
10.11.4.1 Local Switches

The local switches shall have ratings of 5 amperes or 10 amperes as required to match the connected load. Switches
shall be one-way, two-way, intermediate, or double pole as indicated on the Contract plans or as directed by the
Engineer. Multiple gang switches shall be used at locations where more than one switch is indicated.
Switches shall be of the quick-start, slow-break type specially designed for air-conditioning circuits to BS 3676. The
operation of the switch shall not depend wholly on the action of the spring. The switches shall generally be of the
rocker-operated type. All switch boxes shall be supplied with adjustable steel grids and earthing terminals. Switch units
shall be of the adjustable-grid pattern and shall be secured to the adjustable grid by means of screws. The switch plate
shall overlap all edges of the box by not less than 7 mm for flush-mounting switches.
Page 10-92
The switch plate shall finish flush with the edges of the switch box for surface-mounting switches. Switches for water
heaters and fan-coil units shall be complete with neon indicator lights. Local switches shall be arranged in convenient
positions for switching the various circuits and as indicated on the Contract plans or as directed by the Engineer.
The switches shall be the same manufacture for a particular type of switch throughout the installation. All accessories
in wet and damp areas shall be of the splashproof type to IP54 protection standard. All switch boxes shall be galvanized
steel.
DP switches shall be of flush or surface-mounting type as manufactured in compliance with BS 5733 and BS 3676, as
appropriate. The fuse connection units shall incorporate an integral switch, a neon indicator, and a 13-amp fuse link to
BS 1362. The DP switches supplied for water heaters shall be incorporated with neon indicator lights and shall be
engraved ‘Water Heater’.
One latching mushroom-head emergency-stop-lock push button with trigger action shall be connected to and control
each exhaust fan from the motor control central panel.
10.11.4.2 Switched Socket Outlets

The switched socket outlets shall be installed as indicated on the Contract plans, all in accordance with BS 1363 and BS
546, as appropriate. Unless otherwise stated, 13-ampere switched socket outlets and spur boxes shall be wired on ring-
main circuits. The switched socket outlets shall be assembled in single or multiple units in steel boxes.
All boxes shall be supplied with adjustable steel grids and earthing terminals. Switched socket outlets shall be installed
at locations and be of the type indicated on the Contract plans. These outlets shall be of the same manufacturer
throughout the installation.
10.11.4.3 Flexible Outlets

Flexible outlets shall be of the flush-mounted type and shall meet the requirements BS 5737, or as approved. These
shall be the switched and unswitched type and be provided with a fuse of suitable rating and neon indicator to BS 1362.
10.11.5 Lanterns for Control Rooms and Utility Rooms

The Contractor shall furnish and install lanterns as specified herein for the tunnel control rooms and utility rooms.
The lanterns for the tunnel control rooms and utility rooms shall be as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified
herein. Lanterns shall include, but not by way of limitation, all lamps, ballasts, housings, reflector, lenses, and all
related materials and appurtenances as indicated on the Contract plans or as approved by the Engineer.
Certain manufacturer’s lighting units are specified to be supplied and installed for the Tunnel Control Rooms and
Ancillary Rooms with the intention that the shape, finish, and illumination of these units shall match each other and
match the overall aesthetic concepts or approved equivalent. All fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamp lanterns
shall be equipped with electronic control gear. No deviation from these specified requirements will be allowed unless
otherwise specifically approved by the Owner. If so approved, the Contractor shall submit alternative lanterns having
equivalent architectural and technical features. The Contractor shall provide all information as directed by the Engineer
to prove the equivalency of the proposed alternative lanterns.
The Contractor’s submittal shall include complete spectral characteristics of the proposed lantern and lighting
computations showing the performance of each type of lantern at the proposed locations as indicated on the Contract
plans or as approved by the Engineer. The mounting height of the lantern at each location shall be determined in
accordance with the information available on the structural and architectural Contract plans. Photometric data in
diskettes and complete software shall be submitted for the Engineer’s verification of the lighting computations.
10.11.5.1 Fluorescent Lantern with Two 28-Watt Lamps for Ancillary Rooms
a. General
The fluorescent lantern with two 28-watt lamps for ancillary rooms shall be a moisture-proof lantern and shall be
suitable for surface mounting applications as approved by the Engineer. The lantern size and installation locations shall
be as shown on the Contract plans or as approved by the Engineer. The lantern shall be provided with two 28-watt T5
fluorescent lamps. The two 28-watt fluorescent lamps shall have minimum 5,800 total initial lumens output, daylight.
b. Construction Details
The lantern housing shall be made of impact-resistant polycarbonate. The material shall be hologram free and self
extinguishing. The gasket shall be made of two-component, polyurethane foam, seated in a deep groove in an
Page 10-93
ultranarrow flange. The reflector shall be made of roll-formed, galvanized sheet steel with a white enameled finish and
shall be suitable for installation without tools. The diffuser shall be a one-piece, injection-moulded, transparent, impact-
resistant polycarbonate with a smooth surface finish to minimize dust build-up. The diffuser shall be hinged on either
side for lamp replacement. Diffuser fastens shall be one-piece clips made of corrosion-resistant and easy to clean V2 A
stainless steel. The protection classification of the lantern against foreign particles and water penetration shall be IP65
in accordance with IEC standards.
10.11.5.2 Recessed Compact Fluorescent Lantern with Two 40-Watt Lamps for
the Equipment Room
a. General
The recessed fluorescent lantern with two 40-watt lamps shall be compatible with ceiling grid and suspension system.
The lantern size and locations shall be as indicated on the Contract plans or as approved by the Engineer. The lantern
shall be provided with two 40-watt fluorescent lamps and shall have a minimum 7,000 total initial lumens output
daylight.
The lanterns housing shall be sheet steel with die-cast units to secure the optic. Upper lighting chamber made of high
purity PMMA diffuser pearl material or white painted steel. Diffuser optic with slotted microperforated white painted
steel for all-round glare control. As indicated on the Contract plans, at certain locations the ballast of the lanterns shall
be digital dimmable type.
10.11.5.3 36 Watt LED Recessed Down Light for Control Room

The Ceiling recessed LED lantern shall be with symmetrical wide beam light distribution suitable for 36 Watt
incorporated with electronic control gear and dimmable DALI Unit (Seperate Unit). Reflector shall be smooth made of
aluminized mirrobrite and iridescent-free finish. The reflector trim shall be made of high quality, UV resistant
polycarbonate. While trim mounting ring shall be made of die cast aluminium.
Lantern shall be fitted using twist and lock mechanism with halogen free leads. The electrical connection shall be with
5 pole connector terminal. The mains power supply shall be of 230V AC, 50 Hz. The minimum lantern recess depths
shall be 140mm and ceiling cut out 200mm. The average lamp life shall be minimum 50,000hrs and minimum initial
lumen output of 2370 lumens.
10.11.5.4 3 Watt LED Illuminated Single Sided Signs

a. General
The 3-Watt LED illuminated signs shall be a surface-mounted type and be a self-contained unit maintained with back-
up rechargeable batteries. Locations and size of the signs shall be as shown on the Contract plans or as approved by the
Engineer. The lantern shall be provided with a 3-Watt LED and shall be suitable for increased viewing distance. In the
event of power failure, a back-up power supply shall maintain the lamp in operation for a minimum of three hours. The
recharge period of the battery shall be a maximum of 24 hours.
The signs and diffuser shall be polycarbonate, with a base made of corrosion-resistant anodized aluminium. The
illuminated signs shall be suitable for wall or pendent mounting. Mounting bracket for wall mounting or suspension
mounting shall be sheet steel, powder painted in white (RAL 9003). The fastening hardware shall be stainless steel. The
size, style, and colour for the letters shall be as required by the Civil Defense Department and conforming to EN 1838
and as approved by the Engineer. The lantern shall be IP 22 rating and shall provide minimum initial lumen output of
80 lumens.
10.11.5.5 3 Watt LED Emergency Light

a. General
The 3-Watt LED Emergency Light shall be a surface-mounted, recessed or wall mounted type as per application and be
self-contained unit non-maintained with back-up rechargeable batteries. Locations shall be as shown on the Contract
plans or as approved by the Engineer. The lantern shall be provided with a 3-Watt LED. In the event of power failure, a
back-up power supply shall maintain the lamp in operation for a minimum of three hours. The recharge period of the
battery shall be a maximum of 24 hours.
Page 10-94
b. Construction Detail
The plastic, specular reflector with a base made of impact resistant polycarbonate. The fastening hardware shall be
stainless steel. The lantern shall be IP 22 rating and shall provide minimum initial lumen output of 80 lumens.
10.11.5.6 LED Illuminated Signs

The 24 watt LED illuminated signs shall be a surface-mounted type and be a self-contained unit maintained with back-
up rechargeable batteries. Locations and size of the signs shall be as shown on the Contract plans or as approved by the
Engineer. The lantern shall be provided with a LED lamp and shall have a minimum 2000 initial lumens output. In the
event of power failure, a back-up power supply shall maintain the lamp in operation for a minimum of three hours. The
recharge period of the battery shall be a maximum of 24 hours.
The signs diffuser shall be polycarbonate, with a base plate made of corrosion-resistant material. The fastening
hardware shall be stainless steel. The size, style, and colour of the letters shall be as required by the Civil Defense
Department and as approved by the Engineer. The lantern shall be sealed against the entry of moisture, dust, and
insects.
10.11.5.7 Inspection Lamp

The Contractor shall furnish and install inspection lamp for stormwater reservoir well, ventilation plant rooms as
indicated on the Contract plans. The inspection lamps shall have a reflective head, protective cage around bulb and
useful hang up hook etc. The CFL lamp wattage shall be minimum 22 watt and shall have a minimum 1360 initial
lumens. The lamp shall be connected with minimum 40 meter length underwater cable and three in electrical plug.
These accessories shall be displayed in the pump room with proper labelling.
10.11.5.8 Spares
All spare lantern items shall comply with all applicable Sections of the Standard Specifications. All spare units shall be
suitably boxed or crated and placed in storage where designated by the Owner. All spare units shall be identical to and
by the same manufacturer as units approved by the Engineer for use under this Contract. Spare lantern items shall be
complete with ballast assembly, lamp and all associated appurtenances.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, tools, equipment and appurtenances to carefully load, transport, unload and
place all spares in storage. No materials, boxes or crates shall be stored directly on the ground or similar horizontal
surface. The Contractor shall provide all blocking of wood, concrete or other material as approved by the Engineer
under all materials, boxes or crates. All materials, crates or boxes shall be suitably identified for this Contract.
10.11.6 Tunnel/Under Pass Lighting System

10.11.6.1 General
1. This Section contains the requirement for the design, manufacture, supply, factory acceptance testing, packing,
insurance, delivery to site, unloading, storage, protection, erection and installation, wiring and cabling, site
testing and commissioning, Providing training and supply of spare parts for 3 years for the complete
equipment for lighting of tunnel, including various illuminated signs.
2. All electrical equipment, including ACBs, MCCBs, ELCBs, cabling wiring, Junction Boxes, Terminals,
Lighting Panels, etc. provided as a part of Lighting system shall meet the requirements of the these
Specifications.
3. The PLCs, Communication interfaces and workstations supplied as a part of the lighting system shall meet the
requirements as specified herein.
4. The Contractor shall provide necessary hardwiring from the communication ports/instruments to the program
logic controllers installed by the SCADA system provider. Communication protocol shall be as required by the
SCADA system provider. This work shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation to the respective items
included in the Bill of Quantities. No other payment will be made by the Owner.
Page 10-95
10.11.6.2 Operational Objectives

1. The design of the system to IESNA and CIE Standards shall meet the operational objectives specified herein
and each component part of the system and the system as a whole shall be, in every respect, fit for its purpose,
for which it is intended as set out in this Specification.
2. The system shall be designed so that when in operation, it will, in every respect, meet with all ordinance and
laws and with all rules and regulations of the Owner’s requirements and with those of all statutory authorities,
and utility companies, and with any measure that ought reasonably to have been anticipated.
3. The system shall have a minimum design life of 20 years.
4. The system shall provide safe service for users and the public that accords with the highest prevailing
standards for a public transport facility of this type. The design, execution and maintenance of the works shall
be such that this objective will be readily and consistently achieved during all conditions of operation and use,
subject only to normal requirements of inspection and servicing.
5. The system shall achieve high standards of reliability in operation and use, with minimum regular simple
servicing and with major servicing at only infrequent intervals.
6. The design of the system shall pay proper regard to the methods of manufacture and construction so as to
achieve the required high standard referred to above. Adequate tests, checks and inspection shall be applied by
way of quality control throughout the stages of manufacture and construction of the Works.
7. The arrangements and provisions for servicing and routine replacement of parts shall be such that such work
can be undertaken quickly and easily. To facilitate repairs and overhauls, components shall be interchangeable
between similar plant and complete replacement of faulty units shall be easily achievable.
8. Throughout this Specification and as shown on the Contract plans, the ratings of various major equipment
items are indicated. These ratings, however, are provisional and are subject to verification and adjustment in
the light of the final design of the actual ratings necessary to meet the operating requirements of all the
engineering systems intended for the Project. These specified ratings shall be taken as the minimum or
nominal ratings based on calculations and may be increased by the Contractor at their cost to conform to
standard ratings included in various international standards or to manufacturing standard programs. These
rating shall not be reduced in any way unless otherwise approved.
10.11.6.3 Scope of Work

The scope of Work shall comprise the following:
1. Connect the tunnel light circuit cables to the substations low voltage panel (Main Distribution Board) through
the Power Controllers/Power Regulators.
2. Supplying of Power Regulators or Power Controllers and positioning as shown on the Contract plans.
3. Supply and Installation of Lighting Equipment comprising:
i. 400V Power Controllers/Power Regulator, including PLCs, Industrial PCs as operator interfaces, etc.
ii. Lighting fixtures and associated brackets, supports, conduits, trunking, wireways, trays and cabling/wiring
for Tunnel lighting.
iii. All the required sizes and lengths of lighting cables.
iv. Earthing of all electrical equipment including supply of earthing materials.
v. All jointing and termination, lugs, fuses, lamps, keys, locks, labels and all necessary material to complete
the installation.
vi. All necessary civil works.
vii. All Junction boxes for loop-in, loop-out connections for groups of lights. All communication interfaces to
achieve control of lighting from SCADA workstation or operator work stations (associated with tunnel
lighting control system) including fiber optic cabling.
viii. VDU, Operator workstations (associated with tunnel lighting control system) interfaces as shown on
Contract plans.
4. All labour, plant and materials for the complete erection, adjustment, testing painting and putting to work all
equipment supplied.
Page 10-96
5. Supply and installation of any material which may not be expressly specified but which is necessary for the
completion of the project.
6. Reinstatement of the existing conditions of the services and properties that will be affected during the
construction.
7. Supply of spare parts as recommended by Manufacturer for trouble-free operation for 3 years.
8. The Lighting system supplier shall have a minimum of 5 years of documented experience in providing
Lighting systems on a single system responsibility basis, of which at least 3 years shall be for Road Tunnel
projects. All equipment and systems offered shall be suitable for Road Tunnel Lighting system and shall have
proven record of suitability on similar projects.
10.11.6.4 Description of Lighting System

1. The tunnel lighting shall be designed for a traffic speed as indicated in the roadway Contract plans.
2. The tunnel lighting at and near the approach shall be used to maintain a sufficiently high lighting level inside
the tunnel.
3. This shall enable the driver approaching the tunnel to see into the tunnel thus avoiding the "black hole effect".
4. The level of reinforcing lighting shall be continuously adjustable, using power controller/power regulator
dependent upon the external luminance conditions.
5. Lanterns shall be selected and positioned to provide a continuity of lighting through traffic routes and lanes.
6. The lighting design and control shall ensure that energy will be conserved and running costs optimized.
10.11.6.5 Design Criteria of Lighting System

1. The design of the tunnel lighting generally follows the recommendations of the latest version of the IESNA
RP-22 Recommendations.
2. Tunnel lighting design shall be based on counter beam method if HID light sources are used.
3. The design shall allow sufficient distance for the driver's eye to adapt to the final lighting level in the tunnel
interior where a vehicle is travelling at or below design speed (km/h). Typically, lighting level in different
zones of the tunnel shall be as shown on the Contract plans.
4. The design parameters relating to tunnel lighting are as follows:
• Access zone: The maximum day time value seen from the access zone from Safe Stopping Distance shall
be determined by the Contractor.
The Access zone luminance (L-threshold) values indicated are for guidance only. Contractor shall carry
out actual measurements of L20 at all entrances during construction and shall submit calculations and
results for Engineer’s/the Owner’s approval. Tunnel lighting design shall be carried out by Contractor
based on these actual L20 values measured/calculated.
• Minimum Average night time luminance 2.5 cd/sq.m
• Maintenance factor: 0.8
• Coefficient of diffuse reflectance:
Asphalt class R3 QO = 0.07 AV
5. The designer shall take into consideration effect of flicker created upon lantern spacing and same shall be in
line with CIE and IESNA Standards recommendations.
6. Day time lighting in different zones shall be realized as shown below:
• Threshold Zone High Pressure Sodium Lamps/LED
• Transition Zone High Pressure Sodium Lamps/LED
• Interior Zone LED
• Exit Zone High Pressure Sodium Lamps/LED
• Night time lighting in all zones shall be utilized from LED lanterns.
Page 10-97
7. Tunnel lighting designs shall be carried out by the specialist suppliers. Contractor shall obtain Engineer’s prior
approval for the tunnel lighting system supplier/manufacturer by providing their pre-qualification’s.
10.11.6.6 Power Regulators/Power Controllers

Power regulators/power controllers shall meet relevant BS, EN and CE standards. One of the objective shall be remote
control and monitoring of these Power Controllers (PC) to evaluate cost saving in the lighting loads connected inside
the tunnel.
The general requirements of the Power Controllers shall be as follows:
1. Stabilize voltage source.
2. Dim lighting loads in predefined steps.
3. Monitor and control all operational parameters of the tunnel lighting.
4. Manual/Automatic bypass.
5. Astronomical time settings.
6. Save data and transmit to main workstation.
7. Stand-alone Power Controller with modem connectivity.
8. Clock synchronization with workstation.
9. Mimic displays of the controllers on workstation.
10. General reports and alarms listings.
11. Voltage, current, power, COS ø of each circuit to be recorded.
12. Capability of the following to be ensured within the supplied PCs for future use.
i. Client/Server work environment.
ii. Ethernet communication via optical fibers.
iii. Plant management by active maps.
iv. Remote diagnosis and maintenance scheduler.
10.11.6.7 Tunnel Lanterns – General

The standards indicated below shall be applied to LED lanterns also. (Relevant Standards only).
1. Lanterns shall contain high pressure sodium lamps operate on 230 Volts AC, ± 10% at 50 Hz ± 5%.
2. The Tunnel lighting lanterns shall follow the provisions of the latest versions of the following standards:
• BS 4533 : 1971
• BS 4533 Part 2 Section 2.7 : 1971
• BS 4533 : Section 102.3: 1990
• BS 1615 : 1987
• BS 1470 : 1987
• BS EN 60922 : 1991 and BS EN 60923 : 1991
• BS 6500 : 1990
• IEC 60598 Part 1 and 2
• BS 4533: Part 103: Section 103.1 : 1988
• BS 5489 Part 1, 2 & 3 : 1992
• BS 5225: Part 1 : 1985
• BS 5101 (Part 1) and (Part 2) : 1986
• BS EN 60529 : 1992
Page 10-98
• BS 6193:1990
• BS 3772:1990
10.11.6.8 Lanterns - Construction

Lanterns shall meet the following minimum construction requirements including the LED lanterns (Relevant Details
Only).
High Pressure Sodium Lanterns
1. The lanterns shall be suitable for 230 Volts, 50 Hz AC supply to operate lamps of 400W, 250W, 150W and 100W
HPS lamps with cap base E40 size complete with the following assembly.
2. Aluminium (Magnesium-silicon alloy) extruded or Die-cast Aluminium body in one piece with an anodized finish
and side covers in die cast aluminium alloy as per BS 4533 Section 102.3: 1990.
3. Super purity one piece aluminium reflector of grade S1 of BS 1470: 1987 with an anodic coating of not less than
grade AA10 of BS 1615: 1987.
4. Strong, very high thermally resistant, hinged, front glass protector assembly comprising clean toughened, heat
tempered glass plate, fixed into aluminium frame with rapid closing devices, sufficient to achieve IP65 degree of
protection for enclosure. In the open position, the glass remains suspended from the lantern.
5. Front flat glass assembly is to seat on to neoprene nonrotting type gaskets/or high quality felt gaskets silicon. The
glass shall be capable of rotating 180 degrees.
6. Hinges, mounting clips and fastening bolts shall be of stainless steel grade SS316.
7. Movable porcelain lamp holder with position markings and anti-vibration fixation device.
8. Optical system, electrical control gear and lamp, mounted on "Plug-in" type reflector gear tray with locating pins to
ensure correct alignment when being fitted into body. (As per BS EN 60922: 1991 and BS EN 60923 : 1991).
9. The lantern shall be provided with anti-glare grill and clear flat glass.
10. Two adjustable cable entries for loop in and out and a terminal block for the connection of in-coming and outgoing
supply cables shall be provided in lanterns incorporating auxiliaries and shall be situated as close as possible to the
point of entry of the supply cable and shall be readily accessible and ground wire connection is to be taken through
the plug and socket connector to ensure that ground potential is maintained on the gear tray when it is being
removed from the lantern for maintenance.
11. A means of clamping the electrical supply cables shall be provided in the lantern where necessary to relieve the
termination of strain. The cable clamp arrangement shall not damage the insulation of the cable.
12. Protective sheath for power supply cable, and expandable nylon cable grip for wiring, conforming to BS 4533
Section 102.3: 1990.
13. Brass earth terminal set-in housing, according to BS 4533 Section 102.3.1990.
14. The lamp caps and the lamp holders shall meet the requirements of BS 5101: 1986 (Part 1) and BS 5101: 1986
(Part 2) respectively.
15. The lantern shall be equipped with two brackets suitable for mounting and shall be of hot dripped galvanized steel.
The brackets shall be adjustable for continuous inclination from 0-180 degree if necessary.
16. Lanterns shall withstand high temperatures generated inside tunnels and shall operate normally under such
conditions.
10.11.6.9 Lanterns - Mechanical Requirements

The lanterns shall meet the minimum mechanical requirements including LED lanterns (Relevant Details Only).
1. Lanterns shall be with separate compartments for the optical system and for the control gear.
2. The tightness of the optical compartment shall be IP65, according to the I.E.C. 598-1 standard (International
Electrotechnical Commission). This tightness degree shall be achieved by the use of neoprene gaskets or silicon
gasket. The design of the lantern shall be such that the sealing gasket will never be exposed to sunlight or to the
luminous flux emitted by the lamp.
Page 10-99
3. The tightness of the control gear compartment shall be IP65 or better, according to the I.E.C. 598-1 and 2
standards.
4. The opening of the control gear compartment shall allow a complete and easy visual check of all electrical parts
and shall be suitable for easy access and easy maintenance.
5. The mechanical strength of the body and its accessories and the protector of the lantern shall be sufficient to
withstand without any damage a mechanical shock having an impact energy complying with BS 4533 Section
102.3 : 1990.
6. The lantern shall be able to withstand without any damage a wind speed of 160 km/h.
7. Special precautions shall be given to the choice of materials which shall be able to resist without any damage or
ageing or alteration in its structural or physical properties, the severe Gulf climatic conditions in addition to the heat
emitted by the lamp.
8. Fixing shall be of an effective locking means using stainless steel bolts grade AISI 316.
9. The lantern in general shall comply with the requirements mentioned at BS 4533, Section 102.3: 1990.
10. Lanterns shall have protection against ingress of moisture of IP 65.
11. All fixings which carry the weight of the lantern and internal accessories shall be provided with suitable locking
devices to prevent the dislodgment of any part of the lantern by vibration either in service or in maintenance.
Compliance shall be checked as per BS 4533 Section 102.3: 1990.
10.11.6.10 Lanterns - Electrical Requirements

The lanterns shall meet the minimum electrical requirements including LED lanterns (Relevant Details Only).
1. The electrical accessories such as ballasts, ignitors and capacitors shall be prewired and preassembled on metallic
supports that are fixed into the control gear compartment for each lamp.
2. Special care shall be taken to allow easy maintenance and quick replacement of the accessories. They shall be
bolted (and not riveted) on the removable supports. The supports shall be laid down in the compartment and in no
case shall be suspended by bolts, for security reasons and maintenance facilities.
3. All electrical accessories shall be able to withstand in continuous operation and without any damage, the
temperature existing inside the control compartment, in an ambient temperature of 50 degree C. Cable connections
to the lamp holder within the lantern shall be of the heat resistant type with silicon or glass fiber or other approved
insulation. The arrangement shall comply with BS 4533 Section 102.3: 1990.
4. The cable feed terminals and the earth screw shall be fixed inside the control gear compartment. A cable holder
shall be mounted near the terminals. An isolating conduit shall be fitted to protect the incoming feeder cable. The
arrangement in general shall comply with BS 4533 Section 102.3: 1990.
5. A separate set of control gear shall be provided for the lamp comprising one choke associated with one capacitor,
one ignitor and starter (instant type) if any. The control gear should be encapsulated in an approved enclosure
conforming to IP 65 or better tightness. Terminals of all ballasts, capacitors, ignitors (if any) and starters shall be
shrouded. The ballast shall be designed to operate the lamp and control it continuously in ambient temperatures
ranging from 0°C to 80°C. The ignitor shall be complete with timer (1200 Sec).
6. The choke shall be tropicalised of Class H insulation and vacuum impregnated. The capacity of the choke should be
such as to keep the illumination of the lamp within the design limit. The capacitor shall be of the diphyenyl
impregnated type and shall be in a leak proof metal container fitted with an internal discharge resistor. The
permitted operating temperature of the capacitor shall be marked on its case and shall be 90°C. The capacitors shall
have value sufficient to raise the power factor of the complete system to 0.9 or better. Each lamp shall operate
using only one choke and one capacitor. Any combination of two or more capacitors to have the equivalent value of
capacitance will not be accepted. Chokes and capacitors shall comply with the latest BS EN 60922: 1991 and BS
EN 60923: 1991.
7. The control gear shall be supplied by the lantern manufacturer and shall be incorporated in a separate compartment
in a way that heat emitted by lamp is not conducted or transferred to the gear components.
8. The lantern shall have a screw type lamp holder. The lead at the higher potential above earth shall be connected to
the center contact.
9. The operating temperature and thermal endurance characteristics shall conform to Part 2 of BS 4533 Section 102.3:
1990.
Page 10-100
10. It is envisaged to have continuous dimming control, for the lanterns indicated on the Contract plans. The Lanterns
selected shall be suitable for use over the complete range of power regulators/power controllers specified in this
section.
10.11.6.11 Lanterns - Photometrical Requirements

1. The lamp fitting shall be adjustable to allow the luminous flux distribution to be adapted to the geometrical
installation conditions.
2. The adjusting device of the lamp shall be sufficiently sturdy, and designed in a way it cannot be disturbed, during
its normal life time (vibrations) or during maintenance operations (lamp replacement).
3. This device shall have permanent markings so that the lamp position recommended by the manufacturer can be
easily realized.
4. The photometrical classification of the lanterns, according to CIE Nr. 34 publication shall incorporate the following
characteristics, depending on the lamp position adjustment:
• Longitudinal flux control : Throw - intermediate or long
• Transverse flux control : Spread - Narrow or average
• Glare control : SLI - Greater than 3
10.11.6.12 Lanterns - Photometrical Performance Requirement

1. Computer calculations relating to illuminance and luminance results detailed hereinafter shall be submitted. The
overall luminance uniformity ratio (UO) and longitudinal luminance uniformity ratio (UI) which has to be achieved
in the Tunnel, values of glare control mark (G), threshold increment (TI) and specific Lantern Index (SLI).
2. For the luminance calculation, the Tunnel road surface to be considered is the R3 type with QO = 0.07 according to
the Standards.
3. The calculations shall be performed in accordance with IESNA RP-22 publication CIE 88 and shall be based on the
data given in the Contract plans. These computer calculations, shall achieve the requirements of Sub-Section of
these specification and as shown on the Contract plans.
4. These results are to be achieved taking into consideration a total maintenance factor of 0.7 (dust depreciation factor
x lamp lumen depreciation factor).
5. If possible to have more spacing the computer calculations shall determine the maximum spacing of lanterns to be
adapted to achieve the above results.
10.11.6.13 Documents to be submitted

1. The Contractor shall supply following technical documentation and information for each type of lanterns for the
approval of the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer does not absolve the Contractor of the contractual
obligations regarding the performance and compliance to the specification requirements.
2. Catalogue sheet of the lantern
3. Detailed construction drawing of the lantern, Polar diagram of luminous intensity in roadway vertical plan and
transverse vertical plans.
4. Utilization factor curve for actual inclination of lantern.
5. Isolux diagram for actual inclination of lantern.
6. Intensity table, in the C-gamma co-ordinates recommended by CIE Nr. 27 Publication.
7. Computer calculation printout showing the illumination and luminance levels. Longitudinal Uniformity Ratio (UI),
overall Uniformity Ratio (UO), specific lantern index (SLI), glare control mark (G) and threshold increment (TI).
8. Tightness test certificate conforming to IP65 protection degree for the optical compartment of the lanterns and the
IP65 protection degree for the control gear compartment. This test certificate shall be issued by an independent
official laboratory such as KEMA.
9. Shock test certificate confirming the resistance of the body to an impact energy as per Section 4.4 Section 1.4 of BS
4533, Part 1. This test certificate shall be issued by an independent laboratory such as KEMA.
Page 10-101
10. Wind resistance certificate confirming that no damage will occur to the lantern at winds up to 160 Km/h for a short
period. This certificate shall be issued by an independent official laboratory such as KEMA.
11. Total weight of the lantern (with lamp and control gear).
12. Power factor of one complete lantern (under normal working conditions)
13. Total electric consumption of the lantern, including control gear losses.
14. Rated lumen output of the lamp under nominal conditions
15. Depreciation curve of the luminous flux with burning hours.
16. Luminous flux variation with the main voltage.
17. Make and type of ballast and capacitors separately with their electrical characteristics, e.g.. Impedance, power
factor, Temperature rise (t), max. Temperature (tw) and power losses.
18. The Contractor shall submit full details of areas using the same type of lanterns in the Middle East and Gulf Area.
19. A computer program according to IESNA or CIE standard on CD (compact disks) full IBM compatible should be
supplied and the matrix program for the offered lantern.
20. The supplier shall submit for the Engineer's approval dimensioned drawings of the control gear arrangements
showing the exact positions of chokes and capacitors within the lantern.
21. The Contractor shall submit a sample of the proposed lantern for the approval of the Engineer.
22. Ladder diagram printout of the program for all PLCs.
23. Single Line Diagrams, General Arrangement drawings for all Lighting Distribution Boards and Panels.
24. System configuration diagram for the complete lighting control system.
25. The PLC Program shall be handed over to the Owner at the end of the completion of contract on a CD along with
hard copies of the program. The PLC program printout shall have all the information about all the tags, inputs and
outputs.
26. Contractor shall provide along with bid/tender a recommended list of spare parts for the complete lighting system
including spares for Light fittings, PLCs, Power controllers, etc. for 3 years of trouble-free operation. This list shall
be complete with unit rates.
27. Contractor to provide along with the Bid/ Tender a detailed description about the Mean Time between Failures
(MTBF) of the proposed lighting system. This shall show MTBF of all major parts of the system, such as Light
fittings, PLCs, L20 meters, power controllers or lighting controllers, etc.
10.11.6.14 Tunnel Lighting Control

a. General
i. The Tunnel lighting system shall be controlled automatically by means of a photometer system consisting of
photometers, PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers) used as Lighting controllers or Power controllers, all
communication interface modules, and control contactors.
ii. The lighting control shall be such as to continuously adjust by dimming control, selected groups of lanterns in
conformity with the increase and decrease of external luminance at the entrance zone.
Separate sets of programmable lighting controllers (PLCs), Operator Interface colour VDU (Inductrial PCs),
photometers and power controllers shall be provided as shown in the Contract plans.
iii. The photometers shall continuously monitor the external luminance and transmit the signals to the photometer
control unit which shall process and convert the signals received to determine the appropriate dimming level.
iv. Microprocessor based PLC and power controllers shall be provided in each tunnel lighting section. These
controllers shall be connected together on a fiber optic network and shall communicate using a high speed
protocol such as Profibus/Ethernet or approved equal.
v. It is envisaged to have remote operation capability for lighting control from SCADA system through operator
workstation. Full access to all system functions shall be allowed at the authorized access level. Operator system
entry for each area shall be password protected with different levels of accessibility depending on the level of
Authority of the operator. Development and systems level entry passwords shall be provided for engineering
workstations. Each action taken by any operator at any level of entry, or at any operator terminal shall be log file
Page 10-102
recorded, and time and date stamped. Log in and Log out time and dates shall be printed on the control room
events logging printer. Lighting controllers shall support all functional requirements to achieve this remote
control.
vi. Supplier should submit list of spare parts required for future maintenance and train two persons from Owner's
staff for such a work.
vii. Dimming/Lighting Control shall be generally in line with the Lighting control schematic drawing included in the
Contract plans. However alternate schemes with better functionality and with higher specifications may be
acceptable subject to the Owner/Engineer’s approval during construction.
viii. Any latest technology superior than the specifications included herein for the tunnel lighting control will be
considered by the Owner, if supported with satisfactory documentation.
b. Photometers
i. Photometers shall be provided for the purpose of sensing the adaptation Tunnel surrounding luminance. The
photometers shall operate on silicon photoelectric cell with a suitably designed amplifier to give a linear
electrical signal output proportional to the luminance measured. Suitably compensating filters shall be provided
between the lens of the photometer and the photoelectric cell to ensure that the field of image scanned by the
photoelectric cell is adapted to the spectral sensitivity of the human eye.
ii. The photometer housing shall be corrosion proof and made of high-grade stainless steel. The camera shall be
equipped with a high-grade steel swivel base, which can be swiveled +25 degree horizontally and vertically,
mounted on Hot dip galvanized steel column.
iii. A self limiting heating cable system shall be provided to ensure the absence of moisture so that it would not
affect the operation of the instrument.
iv. Suitable shade shall be provided to prevent solar radiation to the casing.
v. Cable entry glands for power supply and signals to the photometer control unit shall be absolutely dustproof and
moisture-proof.
vi. The signal cable interconnecting the photometers and the photometer control units shall be multi-core armored
cable with shielding, compatible to the control system proposed.
vii. The photometers shall be mounted on Hot Dip Galvanized steel column pointing in the drivers' direction of
vision, at a height of approximately 4.5 m and at the approved locations at all entrance portals.
viii. In addition to SCADA, the Local Operator Inteface, in the form of Industrial grade PC shall provide display of
important parameters of the lighting control, including , but not be limited to, the following:
1. Digital and bar graph display of the external luminance
2. Tunnel lighting level presets for various dimming levels and various lighting zones.
3. Display graphics to indicate the associated dimming zone / circuits activated.
4. Delay-on, delay-off and minimum-burning time presets within the range of 15 seconds to 15 minutes
minimum for each dimming level.
5. Indication of Mode of operation of each power controller (Auto/Manual/ Bypass), and all failure signals.
6. Fire alarm display.
ix. Direct measurement of access zone luminance on site. Luminance meters accepting a 20 deg. circular field of
view shall be used to measure the maximum access zone luminance.
x. The luminance meter shall be mounted on a tripod in the center of the eventual approach roads at a height of 1.5
m above the road surface and with the 20 deg. field centered on the Tunnel entrance. The meter shall be
positioned at the safe stopping distance from the portal. Observations shall be taken on several days with the sun
shining and with white clouds in the sky and in the field of measurement. These readings shall be then used for
calculating actual L20 value, which should be used for the lighting design. The final selected value of L20 along
with back-up as above shall be submitted for the approval of Engineer/the Owner.
10.11.6.15 Tunnel Lighting Dimming Control System

1. The Dimming and Control System shall be designed to dim/control/monitor all HPSV and LED lanterns installed in
tunnels.
Page 10-103
2. The access zone luminance varies with changes in daylight conditions. As the luminance levels in the threshold and
transition zones are constant percentages of the access zone luminance, it is necessary to provide control of the
lighting in these zones. The control shall be done through continuously dimming devices.
3. For adequate light control the access zone light level must be monitored continuously. The access zone luminance
meter shall be placed at the stopping distance and facing the tunnel entrance. The luminance meter should be
mounted between 2 and 5 m high above the pavement or hard shoulder on the near side of the street if the road does
not curve towards the near side. In the latter case, the luminance meter should be positioned over the central
reservation or on the off side of the road. The luminance meter should measure the L20 of the measuring field and
be colour-corrected. Its sensitivity to temperature should be very low and shall have long-term stability.
4. From the momentary access luminance value, the instantaneous luminance required in the threshold zones (Lth)
and Transition zones shall be derived. The dimming and control system shall be designed in such a way that the
Threshold/ Transition Zone luminance shall be automatically achieved depending on real time L20 value
considering the specific K value, Lamp lumen maintenance factor and age of the lamps.
10.11.6.16 Dimming Controllers/Power Controllers

1. HPSV lamp circuits shall be designed to have minimum multi dimming steps to avoid a large difference in the
illumination levels while shifting from daytime to nighttime. The steps shall be continuously stabilized, dimmed
and monitored using appropriate size of Power Controllers.
2. LED lanterns circuits shall be stabilized and monitored. Suitable Lighting controller shall be provided to achieve
this requirement. The dimming or power control shall be included for the whole tunnel length and all circuits shall
be monitored.
3. All Dimming Controllers/Power Controllers of each tunnel shall be linked via a communication Bus using the
PROFIBUS/ ETHERNET or approved equivalent protocol.
4. Separate set of Redundent PLCs, Dimming Controllers/Power Controllers, Locally mounted VDU (Operator
interface), and Communication bus using Fiber optic cabling for communication with the Master PLC, shall be
provided for each tunnel. The Master PLC located in the control room building shall be linked to all PLCs and all
Operator interfaces used for entire Tunnel lighting control, over a fiber optic Ethernet/ Profibus or approved equal
communication network.
5. The Master PLC shall communicate with the Central Surveillance System (SCADA) and shall communicate all
instantaneous electrical values, status of individual circuits, status of all lighting zones, L20 value, percentage
illumination levels achieved in various zones inside tunnels, and alarms on a communication bus, using
EHTERNET TCP/IP (OPC) or Approved equal protocol. The communication media shall be Fiber Optic. The PLC
/ lighting controller supplier shall co-ordinate with the SCADA supplier for achieving the necessary interfacing and
configuration of SCADA system regarding the Tunnel lighting control system.
10.11.6.17 The Main Control System

1. The tunnel lighting shall be dimmed in four steps and one night Step.
2. The daytime lighting shall be continuously controlled in accordance with the daylight outside the respective tunnel
entrance.
3. Each entrance shall have two light meter mounted measuring the daylight at the respective entrance and
luminance inside the tunnel. The lighting control system shall control the switching and dimming of the entrance
and exit zones.
4. The lighting control system shall work independently and shall have PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers) in
each Power Controller located at various locations such as utility rooms and control rooms.
5. All power controllers of one tunnel shall be centrally controlled by the PLC of that tunnel as shown in the Lighting
Control Schematic diagram included in Contract plans. The PLC shall manage the switching of the HPSV steps in
accordance to the outside light and it shall determine the level of dimming for each step.
6. The Lighting Controller PLC shall be located in the power controller as shown on the Lighting Control Schematic
Contract plans. All necessary cabling between all the Lighting controller PLCs and Power Controllers shall be
provided.
7. Cabling and communication interfaces shall be properly selected to have a high speed and effective communication
between the PLCs used for Lighting Control and the Master PLC, as well as between the Master PLC and SCADA
system.
Page 10-104
8. The system shall be designed to have manual control at Power Controller level. For this reason each DB shall have
3-position switches installed (AUTO – MANUAL – BY-PASS). The manual operation shall permit to switch each
step on and off and to adjust the dimming signal using potentiometers on the Power Controller. The quantity of 3-
position switches shall be adequate for ease of operation, for controlling logical groups of Dimming
Controllers/Power Controllers. It shall be possible to remove any one of the dimming controller/power controller
out of service without affecting the rest of the lighting.
9. All signal transmission in field shall be using 4-20 mA DC signal or ETHERNET/RPOFIBUS/MODBUS/approved
equal communication links. Voltage signals shall not be used, unless otherwise specifically approved by the
Engineer/the Owner.
10. Dimming Controllers shall meet with following minimum functional specifications:
Start-up: It shall provide Automatic programmable burn in cycle for the lamps.
Power: Depending on the load.
Output Voltage: Stabilized + 1% of RMS value, independent of input voltage.
Inputs: 1 analogue input
2 digital inputs configurable
Reset and By-Pass switch on front panel
Outputs: 1 analogue output: 4 - 20 mA
2 digital outputs: 0 -24 Volts DC. Wherever required interposing relays shall
be provided to provide Potential free relay contacts, rated 2 Amps, at 220 V
AC.
Communication Ports: 1 communication port for communication with PLC
1 communication port for programming.
Dimming Range: 100-30% of luminous output for HPS lamps
Temperature: -20°C / +60°C
Humidity: 90% no condensing
Efficiency: >98% at rated load
EMC: EN 50081-1, EN 6055-2, EN 60555-3, EN 50082-2, CE conformity
Harmonics: The Dimming Controller shall meet the harmonic regulations as per IEEE 519.
10.11.6.18 Supervision and Back-up Control System

1. This system shall consist of PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers) for overall lighting control and for interfacing
with SCADA and Industrial grade PCs (Personal Computer) as operator/Programming interface.
2. All PLCs and PC shall be fed from UPS supply. The Master PLC and individual Lighting Controller PLCs shall be
connected with each other using a fiber optic network using EHTERNET/PROFIBUS protocol. PLCs in control
room and utility rooms shall have all the light meters connected to it as 4-20mA analogue inputs measuring the
daylight at the respective entrance. This signal shall be made available to other PLCs over the fiber optic network.
3. Remote access shall be available to the Lighting control system through SCADA system, using Microsoft Internet
Explorer. It shall be possible to view the complete information and make necessary changes with password
protection based on authority level allocated. Suitable remote access software shall be supplied and installed along
with the system.
4. Each PLC shall have a back-up PLC capable of taking care of full functionality in case of failure of the PLC. PLCs
shall control all power controllers of the appropriate tunnel section, based on L20 measurement. The PLCs shall
also take into consideration the Lumen maintenance factor and age of lamps. PLCs shall be mounted in the controls
section of LDBs, as shown in the Lighting Control schematic diagram.
5. Each of the PLCs shall also have a fire alarm input (voltage free contact) for the purpose of demanding pre-set
lighting levels in case of fire detection.
6. The fiber optic bus shall be connected to all power controllers throughout the tunnel. Each power controller shall be
provided with all necessary hardware for achieving the communication with the Master PLC.
Page 10-105
7. In the event that dimming controller/power controller does not receive the control signal from the Lighting
controller PLC, the power controller shall communicate the trouble signal via communication bus to the PLC. The
PLC shall then take over the control of that dimming controller via the bus.
8. The PLC shall know the status of all the power controllers and main controllers through interface located in the
power controller.
9. Should the Luminance meter (L20) fail or the signal is not available to the PLC, then the PLC shall take the reading
from the back-up luminance meter. If this data is not available the PLC shall control the lighting with historical
data averaged over the last 7 days, using its own astronomical clock.
10. In case a power controller fails during operation the power controller itself shall also be equipped with an automatic
by-pass system. A failure shall be communicated via a LED on the power controller and via the bus to the PLC.
Should the auto-by-pass fail each step in the power controller shall have a hard-wire by-pass activated with the
Hand-Auto-Bypass switch.
11. In case of failure of any of the Industrial PC (Personal Computer) located in the control room, any other Industrial
PC available on the Local Network shall be capable of performing all the necessary functions. The operating
environment shall be fully multitasking system. The Industrial grade PCs shall meet the latest specification
prevailing in the industry or as approved by the Owner/the Engineer.
12. The alarms that shall be communicated to the SCADA system on the communication bus from lighting system
shall include, but not be limited to the following.
• Status of each power controller - Failed
• Status of each PLC/ Lighting controller- Failed
• Power supply at each lighting DB- Fail
• Each power controller - failed alarm
• Each circuit failure- alarm.
• Mains supply failure alarm
• UPS supply failure alarm.
• Communications failure alarm for communication from Power controller to the Lighting controller PLC
• Communications failure alarm for communication from Lighting controller PLC to the Master PLC and to
SCADA system.
• High temperature of power controller.
• Loss of L20 signal
• Any other parameter critical for the monitoring of the Lighting system- proposed by Manufacturer.
13. The List of parameters to be displayed and recorded on the SCADA system from the Lighting control system shall
include as a minimum the followings. Each of the analogue signal shall be provided with a trend indicating the
signal values for last three months. At the end of three months the values shall be stored in another memory
location. It shall be possible to get a printout of the desired parameters through PLC/SCADA system.
i. Power consumption for each power controllers, for every section of tunnel and for every dimming stage.
ii. Reduction in power achieved at each power controllers due to dimming.
iii. Voltage, power and Current at each power controllers.
iv. Input and Output voltage, Current and power of each dimming controller/power controller.
v. Hours of operation of each stage for each tunnel.
vi. Circuit wise, Lamp usage report and lamp replacement schedule, with date.
vii. Current status of all dimming circuits at any given time.
viii. Status of all power controllers and PLCs used in lighting control system.
ix. Current and historical L20 values at each entrance, in graphical and numerical form for 12 last months.
x. Power controller percentage applied.
Page 10-106
xi. Auto/manual/bypass status of each power controller.

xii. Photocell status.
xiii. Any other parameter as proposed by the lighting system supplier.
10.11.6.19 Training for the Owner’s Personnel

1. Training shall be conducted by personnel employed by the Electrical Subcontractor, familiar with the system
supplied, experienced and trained in developing and implementing instructional courses approved by the Owner.
2. The Contractor shall submit information on the training programme for approval prior to shipment of the
equipment. This submittal shall include a course outline, time required, course schedule, sample workbook and
instructor qualification information, for each level.
3. The Contractor shall make a workbook on each course available to every person taking the courses listed herein.
The workbook shall be of sufficient detail so at a later date a trainee could review in detail the major topics of the
course.
4. One copy of each book shall be delivered to the Owner for its library.
5. The training times shall be scheduled by the Contractor in advance, so as not to disrupt the Owner’s ability to
operate the equipment.
6. Specialized training shall be provided for a minimum of three of the Owner’s personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the system at the manufacturers facility or in Abu Dhabi. The training programme shall be divided
into two segments and each shall consist of at least five, eight hour working days.
7. The maintenance training programme shall be developed for personnel who have electronics maintenance and
repair experience and a general knowledge of computer systems, but shall not assume any familiarity with the
specific hardware furnished. As a minimum, the following subjects shall be covered:
• System architecture and layout
• Hardware components
• Module switch settings (configuration switches)
• I/O modules
• Power supplies
• Data highway
• Programmer connection
• Programming and diagnostic techniques
• Battery replacement and recording
• PC and workstation familiarization and maintenance
• Troubleshooting
• Disassembly
• Cleaning
• Component replacement
• Reassembling
8. The operation training program shall include the following topics:
• Power-up, bootstrapping and shutdown of all hardware devices.
• Interpretation of all standard displays.
• Appropriate actions for software and hardware error occurrences.
• Use of operator interface displays and keyboards.
• Use of printer including replenishment of supplies.
Page 10-107
• Manual data entries.

• Creation and editing of graphic operator display screens.
• Loading of any required software into the system.
• Data base creation and editing.
9. System Management: The training in this area shall cover the following:
i. The daily supervision of the System: e.g., archiving data, system housekeeping, fault reporting, preventing
repetitive alarms.
ii. System administration e.g., planning and providing system expansion and reconfiguration of hardware, control of
users and privileges, software and hardware fault analysis.
iii. Engineering functions, configuration and application programming e.g., additions and changes to the system,
points, displays, reports and logs, preparation and downloading of lighting control programmes and schedules
and software development.
iv. Provide training for the Owner’s personnel for programming, operation, maintenance & troubleshooting of all
parts of Lighting System including but not limited to following:
• Lighting Fixtures
• Photometers
• Communication Interfaces
• Fiber Optic Cabling
• Dimming Controllers/Power Controllers
• PLC’s
10.11.6.20 Site Inspection and Testing

1. The Engineer shall have the option to attend the inspection and tests before setting the equipment to work. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, 48 hours before commencing tests.
2. A Site Acceptance Test (SAT) shall be conducted as part of the ICA system validation and shall include all
equipment and software within the Contractor’s scope of supply. This test shall be conducted after the above
equipment has been installed at the Site and the Contractor is satisfied of the correctness of the installation and of
the operation of the equipment.
3. Particular Test Requirements:
i. Communication test. The Contractor shall firstly conduct a test to establish the correct functioning and ability
to transmit data correctly to and from each port on the system communications network. In the event of any
problem or deficiency being identified in any equipment supplied by others, this shall be reported fully, in
writing, by the Contractor to the Engineer.
ii. Hardware test. Demonstrate correct operation of hardware using off-line diagnostics.
iii. Functionality test. Demonstrate the system performance and functionality meets the specification.
iv. Test details.
• The SAT shall be carried out in accordance with a test specification produced by the Contractor and
• Test equipment and test software shall be provided by the Contractor to load the system to the worst case
scenario defined in the test specification.
• The Contractor shall prepare a test report following the SAT.
4. System Commissioning:
i. Where required in the Project Specification, the Contractor shall provide staff to work in conjunction with the
Owner, to ensure the satisfactory service operation of all equipment in the system, to assist the Owner to
adjust the configuration data and to develop/modify application programme, e.g., sequence controls.
Page 10-108
ii. The Lighting Subcontractor shall provide Performance verification test of the complete Lighting system for a
continuous period of 90 calendar days, for all items under of lighting system, for demonstration of reliability,
repeatability and operability. In the event of failures during this period, the demonstration shall be extended
for a further 90 days period.
5. System Takeover: The criteria for takeover of the system shall be:
i. Submission by the Contractor and approval of as-built drawings.
ii. Submission by the Contractor of all documentation.
iii. Submission of operational and maintenance manuals
iv. Submission of all software design and support documentation and the lodging of source codes in a place of
secure safe-keeping and storage with a Third Party.
v. Provision of information and examples of each type of report and each item of user-configurable
functionality.
vi. Issue of all relevant test certificates.
vii. Successful completion of the SAT.
viii. System commissioning and issue of Final System Test Certificate by the Contractor.
Following satisfactory completion of the above, the Engineer will issue the System Takeover Certificate.
10.11.6.21 Spares
All spare lantern items shall comply with all applicable Sections of the Standard Specifications. All spare units shall be
suitably boxed or crated and placed in storage where designated by the Owner. All spare units shall be identical to and
by the same manufacturer as units approved by the Engineer for use under this Contract. Spare lantern items shall be
complete with ballast assembly, lamp and all associated appurtenances.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, tools, equipment and appurtenances to carefully load, transport, unload and
place all spares in storage. No materials, boxes or crates shall be stored directly on the ground or similar horizontal
surface. The Contractor shall provide all blocking of wood, concrete or other material as approved by the Engineer
under all materials, boxes or crates. All materials, crates or boxes shall be suitably identified for this Contract.
10.11.7 Low Voltage Switchgears

The Contractor shall furnish and install the items as specified herein. The Contractor shall provide necessary hardwiring
from the communication ports/instruments to the program logic controllers installed by the SCADA system provider.
Communication protocol shall be as required by the SCADA system provider. This work shall be considered as a
subsidiary obligation to the item included in the Bill of Quantities. No other payment will be made by the Owner. All
the electrical distribution switchgears shall include minimum 20% spare breakers inside the panel.

Applicable Standards referred to in this Section:
IEC 60439-1 Type tested assemblies for LV switchgear Voltages not exceeding 1000 V ac.
IEC 60947-2 MCCB’s
IEC 60947-2, IEC 60898 MCB’s
IEC 60144 Direct Acting Meters
IEC 60831-1 and2 Power factor correction capacitor
IEC 60664 & IEC 1010-1 Power factor regulator
IEC 60070 & IEC 60831 Capacitor switching contactors
IEC 60289 & IEC 60076 Detuned reactors
IEC 60947-4 Motor Starters
Page 10-109
IEC 60947-4 Contactors

IEC 60529 Degrees of protection of enclosures
10.11.7.2 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Department of Transport Conditions of Contract and Schedule of Further
Requirements and as follows:
1. Product data for each product and component submit also relevant sheets of manufacturer's catalogues.
2. Shop drawings for each switchboard including dimensioned plans and elevations, component and device lists,
and a single-line diagram showing main and branch bus current ratings and short-time and short-circuit ratings
of switchboard.
3. Shop drawings or other descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation and
isolation.
4. Shop drawings of utility company metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
5. Schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices.
6. Manufacturer's Schematic Wiring Diagram.
7. Point-to-point Control Wiring Diagram: Differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
8. Mimic Bus Diagram (only if specifically indicated on the Contract plans) and colour samples. Submit updated
version of diagram reflecting field changes after final switchboard load connections have been made.
9. Installer Certificate Signed by Contract: (Only if required on Contract plans). The sign technician for the
mimic bus meets the experience qualifications specified under "Quality Assurance".
10. Qualification data for field-testing organisation certificates, signed by the Contractor, certifying that the
organisation complies with the requirements specified in Quality Assurance below. Include list of completed
projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified.
11. Report of field tests and observations certified by the testing organisation. Also include a statement that
equipments offered comply with the relevant specifications.
12. Discrimination study of breakers shall be carried out and to be approved by the Engineer.
13. All Switchgear Panels (namely MDBs, MCCs, SMDBs, DBs) should be supplied from one manufacturer only
as a single source.
10.11.7.3 Testing
1. Provide complete distribution equipment, which shall comprise main low tension switch boards, Moulded case
circuit breakers (MCCBs), isolators, switch fuses, lighting contactors etc.
2. The supply and distribution arrangement shall be as indicated on schematic diagrams in the Contract plans.
3. Evidence of country of origin should be produced on request.
4. Complete range of switchboards mainly MDBs and Motor Control Centers shall be TTA (Totally typed tested)
assemblies as per IEC60 439 standards. The Panel assemblers or Manufacturers should have carried out the
below mentioned Type Tests on their equipment.
The assemblies shall conform to the following 7 type test defined in IEC 60439-1:
i. Verification of temperature rise.
ii. Verification of dielectric properties.
iii. Verification of short circuit withstand strength.
iv. Verification of the effectiveness of protective circuit.
v. Verification of clearances and creepage distances.
vi. Verification of mechanical operation.
vii. Verification of degree of protection.
Page 10-110
All short-circuit withstand strength and temperature-rise limits tests shall be certified by an independent test
authority and performed with switchgear installed in real conditions (type tests).
5. Main Distribution Boards and Motor Control Centers should have been tested for Internal Arc withstand as per
AS 3439-1 or IEC 61641 for internal arc confinement.
6. The complete switchboard (MDBs, MCCs, SMDBs, DBs) including enclosure, busbar system, circuit breakers,
motor starters, major switchgear components, etc shall be from one single principal manufacturer only. Local
assembly / local adaptation are allowed however keeping in line with requirements of IEC standards and
ensuring local adaptations done do not affect type testing results of prototype. The test certifications shall be
from one of the internationally recognised High Voltage Laboratories (ASTA, ACAE, CESI, ESEF/ASEFA,
KEMA, PEHLA, ACAE or SATS).
10.11.7.4 Main Distribution Board (MDB)

a. Enclosure Construction
1. The MDB shall be factory-built type in compliance with the IEC 60439-1 to construction of type-tested
assemblies (TTA). Partially type tested assemblies are not acceptable. They shall also comply with IEC 60529
as regards the degree of protection of the enclosures.
2. Minimum degree of protection will be IP54 for IP levels as per IEC 60529.
3. The rated operational voltage of the MDB shall be up to 690V AC.
4. The rated insulation voltage of the MDB shall be up to 1000V AC / 750V DC.
5. The rated impulse voltage of the MDB shall be 12 kV on main repartition elements.
6. The busbars will be braced by means of insulating supports fixed to the frame, in number according to the short
time current Icw 50kA / 3 second and the column width. The configuration should have been type tested
according to IEC 60439-1 by the original manufacturer.
7. The board shall consist of a number of enclosures of equal height and depth mounted side by side to form a
composite board of uniform and pleasing appearance with access to the power cables on the front side. The
boards shall be suitable for floor mounting as required.
8. The switchboards shall be made of folded steel construction; minimum 2mm thickness, fully rust proofed and
stove enameled.
9. All doors, bolt on covers, mounting plates and partitions shall be effectively connected to the earth bar by
means of flexible wire.
10. In order to guarantee the quality of connections, the manufacturer shall supply recommendations for fishplating
and connections, particularly as regards tightening torque.
11. The joints will be equipped with torque nuts.
12. All terminal blocks up to 10 mm² will be equipped with spring terminals to guarantee a contact pressure
independent from the operator and a total insensitivity to vibrations and thermal variations.
13. Panel shall be of front access type for the purpose of access all the components, and also for the purpose of
cable terminations.
14. Adequate care shall be taken in design of panels considering the connection space for the external cables. The
panels shall include sufficient cable supports for routing the cables inside the enclosure. Wherever single core
cables enter, the gland plate shall be either of aluminium or brass plates.
15. The enclosure construction shall integrate a natural ventilation system aimed at regulating the internal
temperature based on the actual capacities of components.
16. All the framework and panelling parts shall be treated with epoxy, epoxy-polyester paint or with a surface
treatment according to the IEC 60068-2-11 tests. They will be of the RAL 9002 shade or as approved by the
Engineer, and will have a minimum resistance to salt-laden fog of 400 hours.
17. Form of construction shall comply to Form –4b as per IEC 60439-1 standards.
18. A quality assurance program shall submitted for approval for prior to the assembly/ manufacturing of the
enclosures.
19. The standardized position of the busbars will enable an easy extension of the switchboard.
Page 10-111
b. Busbar System
1. Bus bar system shall consist of one or more tinned copper conductors fastened to the structure by means of
appropriate insulating supports.
2. The bus bars system shall be completely shrouded with special poly carbonate sheets or with metallic shrouds
as applicable.
3. All the bus bars used in the panel shall be of high grade electrolytic tinned copper of 99.9% conductivity. The
bus bars shall be colour sleeved throughout the length or at the ends for phase identification.
4. The size of the neutral bus bar shall be same as the phase busbar. The neutral bus bars shall be colour sleeved
throughout the length for phase identification.
5. The size of the earth bus bar shall be half the size of the phase busbar. The earth bus bar shall be identified
with green/yellow-green tapes at intermediate intervals.
6. The dimensioning of the horizontal and vertical bus bar system shall be as per the rated current, the short
circuit current, the maximum admissible temperature at permanent operation < 110deg. C and the ambient
temperature around the bus bars. Bus bar sizing shall also comply to the local authority regulations and the
configuration and size of busbars used should have been type tested by the original manufacturer. Busbar
supports should be supplied by the original manufacturer of enclosure and components and provided at the
distances as recommended by the original manufacturer.
7. The main bus bar system shall be preferably located in the upper section of the assembly and its function is
the distribution of current to the individual section forming the assembly.
8. The sub bus bar/vertical dropper of main bus bar system shall be designed same as the main bus bar system.
If the bus bar sizes of the sub bus bar / vertical droppers are reduced then it shall be designed to carry
1.5times the total current of the feeders connected to them.
9. The connections to the individual circuit breakers shall be done by rigid bus bars. They shall be suitably sized
to suit the breaker current rating. It shall be possible to replace the breakers with different ratings within its
frame size without changing the connection bus bars.
10. Calculations shall be submitted to prove the adequacy of the size of the bus bars for the rated current.
11. All the main horizontal and vertical bus bars shall be segregated from other components.
12. The main bus bars shall be provided with removable poly carbonate sheet/metallic front plates to prevent
accidental access to bus bars. Each poly carbonate sheet/metallic shrouds shall be provided with engraved
warning labels indicating ‘Danger – 400V Live Bus Inside – Isolate Main Supply Before Opening This
Cover’ at the front face. All such warning labels shall be riveted to the shroud plates.
13. The line side of the incoming circuit breaker and its bus bar shall be shrouded separately with removable poly
carbonate sheet/metallic front plates to prevent accidental access to bus bars. Such shrouds shall be provided
with engraved warning labels indicating ‘Danger – 400V Live Bus Inside – Isolate Supply Else Where before
Opening This Cover’ at the front face. All such warning labels shall be riveted to the shroud plates.
14. All warning labels shall be of Anodized Aluminium or special PVC material, front engraved type with
white/black text on red/yellow back ground.
15. The main three phase, neutral and earth bus bars shall extend throughout the entire length of panel. They
shall be with predrilled holes at the ends for future extensions.
16. When future space provision indicated in the Contract plans, The space shall be complete in all respects
including fixing arrangement, bus bar connections, shrouds etc, (except the breaker).
17. The bus bars shall be suitably extended, drilled and provided with required bolts and nuts to connect the
external cables to the switchgear.
18. All bolts, nuts used for bus bar connections shall be of suitable size and grade.
19. Adequate care shall be taken in maintaining the clearances and creepage distances through out the panels. All
clearances and creepage distances shall be in accordance to IEC439-1 standards.
20. The complete bus bar design shall be based on 50deg. c ambient and shall be designed to with stand the
temperature rise inside the enclosure.
Page 10-112
c. Circuits and Connections

1. All hardware used shall be of SS316 grade.
2. All outgoing circuits shall have separate compartment and/or be screened so that equipment for any one
circuit can be maintained without risk of contact with live connections on any other circuit.
3. Feeders for circuits rated up to 63A shall be connected to terminal blocks located in separate compartments at
top or bottom, conveniently arranged to facilitate termination of cables and suitably identified.
4. For feeders rated more than 63A copper links shall be suitably extended, rigidly supported and covered with
coloured PVC sleeves or painting for phase identification.
5. All feeders shall be provided with cable lugs and brass cable glands.
6. Removable gland plates suitable for the glands required for the specified cables shall be provide. Where
cables are single core, the gland plates shall be of a non-ferrous metal.
7. All small wiring shall be of stranded copper, not less than 1.5 mm² with PVC insulation. Small wiring shall
be neatly bunched and cleated in harness form, or shall be enclosed in purpose made plastic trunking. Wiring
cleated to metal surfaces shall be insulated from the metal. Where wiring runs through sheet steel panel’s
holes shall be grommeted with suitable grommets.
8. Small wiring associated with external circuits shall be connected to terminal strips conveniently arranged.
9. Each connection shall have separate incoming and outgoing terminals and no more than two wires shall be
connected to any terminal.
10. All spare contacts shall be wired to terminal strips suitable positioned.
11. All wiring shall be identified using plastic ferrules at both ends.
d. Components for MDB
1. Air Circuits Breakers
i. The air circuit breakers shall be of the air break, trip free, draw out type with the main contacts encased in a
reinforced polyester casing and offer double insulation from the operators on the breaker front face. The air
circuit breaker shall be fully tropicalized (T2) as defined in IEC 68.2.30 and shall have salt spray resistance
as per IEC 68.2.11. The ACB shall comply with IEC 60947.2 utilisation category B with Ics=Icu=Icw and
shall accept reverse feeding without reduction of performance. The ACB shall comply with the isolating
function requirements of IEC 60947.2 section 7.1.2 and shall have minimum 500V 50 Hz operational
voltage, 1000 V 50 Hz rated insulation voltage and 12kV withstand surge voltage (Vimp). The 3-pole and
4-pole versions shall have ratings as shown in the Contract plans. In the 4-pole version the neutral pole
shall have the same current rating as the other poles from the 800 to 4000A and N/2 from 5000 to 6300A.
The Ics breaking capacity shall be minimum 50kA symmetrical with Icu=Ics=Icw=50KA. Evidence of the
service breaking capacity (Ics) and withstand capacity (Icw) shall be produced by test certificates from one
of the internationally recognised High Voltage Laboratories (ASTA, CESI, ESEF/ASEFA, KEMA,
PEHLA, OR SATS).
ii. The operating mechanism shall be of the O-C-O stored energy spring type with a closing time less than or
equal to 80 millisecond. Electrically operated circuit breakers shall have the spring charging motor
connected so that the springs remain charged always with the motor disconnected after charging. A standby
manual operating handle for spring charging shall be provided for operating the circuit breaker in case of
power or motor failure. Antipumping function shall be provided by integral devices to prevent reclosing
after a close-open operation if the closing impulse is maintained after the breaker has opened.
iii. The circuit breaker shall have three positions of the drawout mechanism, namely service position where all
main and auxiliary contacts are made, test position where main contacts are open but auxiliary contacts are
closed and isolated position where all contacts are open. Mechanical indication on the front of the ACB
shall be provided to indicate a) main contacts closed 'ON', b) main contacts open 'OFF', c) springs charged,
d) springs discharged e) service position, f) test position, and g), isolated position for drawout mechanism.
iv. Any attempt to withdraw or insert the breaker when it is 'ON' shall trip the breaker automatically. An
interlocking shall be provided to prevent insertion of a circuit breaker having a rating higher than the
current rating of the ACB cradle.
v. Insulated safety shutters shall screen all live parts in the ACB cradle when the breaker is in the isolated or
racked out position.
Page 10-113
vi. The moving contacts comprising the main and arcing contacts shall have visual wear indicator and be of the
spring-loaded type. The main contacts and clusters shall be site replaceable.
vii. The circuit breakers shall have sufficient number of auxiliary contacts for interlocking system as indicated
and described on the Contract plans and shall be suitable for interfacing with SCADA. It shall be possible
to connect all auxiliary wirings from the front face of the air circuit breakers and these wirings shall be
taken trough a set of disconnecting contacts, so that all auxiliary wirings are automatically disconnected in
the isolated and drawout positions.
viii. Integral Trip Unit of Air Circuit Breakers
ix. ACB’s shall be provided with solid state type microprocessor based over current & earth fault relays with
integral LCD display, which shall use digital programming techniques for highest protection accuracy and
be integrated as part of the circuit breaker. The current transformers / sensors and the wiring shall be
integrated within the case and shall be self powered. The current sensors shall be located within the case of
the circuit breaker. The over current relay shall have a wide adjustment range to allow flexibility of setting
on site. The trip unit shall measure the true RMS value of any wave form of current. The control unit shall
be equipped with a push to reset mechanical indicator, for anti-pumping function.
Characteristics of the trip units shall be as given below:
Long time protection (LT)
• Adjustable (in steps of 4% ) from 0,4 to 1 of the sensor rating (In).
• Time delay adjustable from 0.5 to 24 seconds
Short time protection (ST)
• Adjustable from 1.5 to 10 times the long time protection setting (Ir).
• Time delay adjustable from instantaneous to 0.4 seconds.
• Time inverse characteristic (I2t) may be switched in order to improve discrimination
Instantaneous (INST)
• Adjustable from 2 times up to at least 15 times the rated current.
Where indicated in the Contract plans, the trip unit shall be equipped with an earth fault option.
All trip units for ACBs will have integral LCD display which will measure current, voltage parameters. As
a minimum the following parameters will be displayed on the integral display unit:
• Energy, Real Power, Apparent Power, Demand Power
• Current for all three phases
• Voltage
• Power Factor
The integral LCD display will also contain Maintenance Indicators (contact wear, Operation cycles etc)
including last ten trips and alarms.
Communication facility shall be provided which will read and set protection parameters remotely, transmit
all calculated indicators and measurements remotely through Modbus protocol.
All Air circuit breakers will be provided with motor mechanism.
The bus coupler ACB shall be equipped with dummy trip unit and shall not have any trip function.
Discrimination study on relevant software for short circuit studies will be provided by switchgear
manufacturer for all upstream and downstream breakers. All switchgear components shall be from one
single manufacturer for co-ordination and total discrimination between upstream and downstream levels,
which should be shown by back-up calculations.
2. Current Transformers
Current transformer shall be of the bar primary type, air cooled and suitably insulated. They shall be of Class 1
accuracy for measurements and of Class 10P10 accuracy for protection in accordance with IEC 185. The secondary
windings shall be rated at 5A and the rated output shall be suitable for the burden.
Page 10-114
3. Instruments
i. The measuring instruments shall include ammeters, voltmeters, maximum demand indicators and selector
switches as indicated on the Contract plans.
ii. The instruments shall have anti-glare glass fronts, anti-parallax scales and white faces with black numerals
and markings. The length of scales shall not be less than 90 degrees and uniformly divided. The instrument
cases shall be semi-flush mounted and shall be approximately 72 x 72 mm square. Accuracy shall be one
per cent of full-scale values. Moving elements shall be provided with zero adjustments external to the
cases.
iii. Ammeters shall be moving iron type, to BS 89 scaled 0-20000 A for main incoming supply.
iv. Voltmeters shall be moving iron type to BS 90 scaled 0-500V and provided with 6-position selector
switches allowing reading of line to line and line to neutral voltages.
v. Maximum demand indictors shall be of the thermal type with a 20-minute time delay.
vi. Digital indictors for above mentioned measuring instruments shall be provided.
4. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
i. The moulded case circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2 standards and shall be
of the quick make and quick break type having free toggle mechanism ensuring full contact pressure until
time of opening, whether actuated automatically or manually. They shall be of utilisation category 'A'
having rated service breaking capacity (Ics) as indicated in the Contract plans. The circuit breakers shall
be suitable for isolation as per IEC 60947-2 and shall have rated operation voltage of 500V 50 Hz and the
insulation voltage of 750 V, 50 Hz. The breaker shall be available in 3 or 4 pole version as per the
drawing. All poles shall operate simultaneously for circuit breaker opening, closing and tripping. The
mechanism shall be completely enclosed in the compact moulded bakelite case. The moulded case circuit
breaker shall provide class II insulation (according to IEC 664) between the front and internal power
circuits. The breaker shall be designed for both vertical and horizontal mounting and it shall be possible to
supply power either from the upstream or downstream side without any adverse effects on the electrical
performance. Evidence of the service breaking capacity (Ics) shall be produced by test certificates from
one of the internationally recognized High Voltage Laboratories (ASTA, ACAE, CESI, ESEF/ASEFA,
KEMA, PEHLA, ACAE or SATS).
ii. Breakers contacts shall be made of non-welding and non-corrodible composition. Circuit breakers shall be
actuated by a toggle or handle that clearly indicates the three positions 'ON', 'OFF' and 'TRIP' thus
indicating clearly abnormal conditions of the circuit. In order to ensure suitability for isolation complying
with IEC-947-2, the operating mechanism shall be designed such that the toggle or handle can only be in
OFF position if the power are all actually separated. The moulded case circuit breakers shall be able to
receive a locking device in the "isolated" position and there shall be a "push to trip" button in front to test
the operation and the opening of the poles. The circuit breaker rating, the push to trip button, outgoing
circuit identification and the contact position indication must be clearly visible and accessible from the
front, through the front panel or the door of the switchboard. Single pole breakers with a handle tie or a
bar equivalent construction is not acceptable for a multi pole breaker. Moulded case circuit breakers shall
be the withdrawable type.
iii. Breakers shall have the ratings and rated service breaking capacities (Ics) as per IEC 60947-2 as indicated
in the Contract plans (however the minimum Ics breaking capacities for all MCCBs will be
Icu=Ics=50KA/1sec). The breakers shall be of current limiting type.
iv. Circuit breakers shall have inverse time tripping characteristic with automatic release secured through
action of a combination of thermal-magnetic or electronic trip units that shall trip free of the handle and
operate in response to an overload or a short circuit.
v. It shall be possible to equip the moulded case circuit breaker with a motor mechanism if needed and
closing of mechanism shall take place in less than 80 ms. The operating mechanism shall be of the stored
energy type only. The addition of motor mechanism or a rotary handle shall in no way affect circuit
breaker characteristics and shall not block the device settings.
vi. The MCCB's shall be designed for adding auxiliary contacts such as shunt or under voltage releases after
installation at site. The auxiliaries shall be separated from power circuits.
vii. It shall be possible to assemble earth fault protection of MCCB's by adding a residual current device
directly to the circuit breaker case and it shall operate without an auxiliary power supply.
Page 10-115
viii. All MCCB’s shall be equipped with electronic trip units, which are fully interchangeable. Minimum frame
size shall be 200A. The breakers with ratings over 250A shall be equipped with electronic trip units, which
shall remain operational for ambient temperatures up to 60°C. Electronic trip unit shall comply with
appendix F of IEC 60947-2 standard. It shall be possible to fit lead seals to prevent unauthorised access to
the settings of the electronic and thermal magnetic trip units.
ix. All MCCB's frame size shall be equipped with electronic trip units shall sense the actual RMS values for:
• Long time protection from 40% to 100% of the trip unit rating,
• The instantaneous protection shall have the threshold fixed between 12 and 19 times nominal
current, depending on the rating.
• Short time delayed protection.
For all MCCBs, a thermal memory will be provided integral (in the event of repeated overloads, the
electronic trip units shall optimize protection of cables and downstream devices by memorizing
temperature variations). A load monitoring function shall be an integral part of the electronic trip units
indicating four loads levels (60%, 75%, 90% and 105%) by LED's (with flashing LED for 105%). It shall
be possible to install with the electronic trip unit, a high threshold earth fault protection, a load monitoring
remote indication or a set of four fault indicating LED's in front to indicate the cause of tripping.
x. Communication option shall be provided which will read and set protection parameters remotely, transmit
all calculated indicators and measurements remotely through Ethernet/Profibus or Modbus Protocol.
xi. The MDB’s shall have the following detailed functions:
Monitoring Functions: Following parameters shall be available for monitoring at the Operator
workstation.
• Phase Currents
• Average Current
• Full Load Current
• Current Imbalance percent
• Percent Thermal capacity utilized / available
• Power Factor
• Voltage
• Running Hours
• Trends, Graphic Displays for monitored parameters
Protective Functions: Following Protective functions with programmable trip level, warning level and
time delay shall be available at the Operator workstation.
• Under load
• Current Imbalance
• Phase Loss
• Zero Sequence ground fault
• Under voltage Protection
Diagnostic Information: Following information shall be provided at the Operator workstation.
• Breaker Real Time status
• Warning Status
• Time to Reset
• Trip Status
• Time to overload trip
• History and Cause of previous trips (minimum 5)
Page 10-116
• Communication failure
xii. An electrical grade rubber mat to BS 921, 1000mm wide extending the full length of the MDB shall be
provided for each MDB panel.
5. Power Monitoring Unit (PMU)
The unit shall be microprocessor based and shall be capable of measuring and indicating incomer currents on
each phase, voltages between phases and phase to neutral, active and reactive powers, power factor and total
energy consumed. The kWH meter reading shall be stored in password protected non-volatile memory. The unit
shall be mounted on the incomer cubicle at a height not above 1.6 meter from floor level. The backlit display unit
shall be high contrast type, having light emitting characters of height not less than 15 mm. The unit shall work on
the system voltage without the need for any separate auxiliary power. The function of power monitoring unit for
remote indication and alarm shall be included.
6. Sub Main Distribution Boards
i. The Contractor shall supply and install the Sub Main Distribution Board(s) (SMDB) as shown on the
Contract plans and as herein specified.
ii. The enclosures, circuit breakers and other major devices should be from one reputed and approved
manufacturer only.
iii. The SMDB enclosures shall be supplied from original manufacturer of component. The panel builder shall
only fit the breakers on the standard bus bar assembly. Minor adaptations like extension of bus bars to
facilitate cable terminations shall be done by the panel builder as required.
iv. The manufacturer and local assembler of the switchboards should have ISO9001 certification.
v. The SMDB shall be assembled by the Franchised Panel Builders of the approved manufacturer. The
franchised panel builder shall have a minimum of 5years experience under the franchisee agreement.
vi. Type Test Certificate shall be submitted for the SMDB from the manufacturer.
vii. SMDB shall be approved by the local electricity authority.
viii. The SMDB shall be factory tested by the manufacturer at their works prior to delivery to the site. Factory
Test Certificates shall be provided along with the delivery of the panel when dispatched to the site.
ix. The panel builder shall provide a installation, operation and maintenance manual for the panel and the
Contractor shall strictly follow such procedure.
x. Approval shall be obtained from the Engineer for the constructional details, power & control schematic
diagram and installation details prior to manufacturing.
7. SMDB Assembly
i. The SMDB shall be factory-built type and comply with IEC 60529 as regards the degree of protection of
the enclosures.
ii. Unless otherwise specified, the standard index shall be IP54 as defined in IEC 60529 standard.
iii. The rated operational voltage of the SMDB shall be up to 690V AC.
iv. The rated insulation voltage of the SMDB shall be up to 1000V AC / 750V DC.
v. The SMDB shall be designed to have a continuous current rating and minimum short circuit rating as
specified in the Contract plans.
vi. SMDB shall be of MCCB distribution board type with a pre fabricated fully shrouded ASTA certified bus
bar assembly and shall readily accept the manufacturers circuit breakers.
vii. The enclosure shall be of folded and bolted construction fabricated out of minimum 2mm electro
galvanized steel sheet to form a cubicle with impact withstand of IK08. Hinged door shall be provided for
access to the operational knobs of the circuit breaker. Removable gland plate shall be provided at the
bottom of the enclosure. It shall be of floor mounting with front access and suitable for bottom / top entry
of cables.
viii. Door shall be equipped with integral locks. Keys shall be common for all such locks.
ix. Wherever required a metering module from original manufacturer shall be added to the top of the cubicle
to accommodate the meters indicated in the Contract plans.
Page 10-117
x. Where additional cabling space is required, an extension module for cabling space from original
manufacturer shall be provided.
xi. All door & mounting plate shall be effectively connected to the earth bar by means of flexible wire.
xii. All door hinges shall be of concealed type. It shall be possible to remove the door easily when required.
xiii. Panel shall be of front access type for the purpose of access to all the components, and also for the purpose
of cable terminations.
xiv. Adequate care shall be taken in design of panels considering the connection space for the external cables.
The panels shall include sufficient cable supports for routing the cables inside the enclosure. Wherever
single core cables enter, the gland plate shall be either of aluminium or brass plates.
xv. The enclosure construction shall integrate a natural ventilation system aimed at regulating the internal
xvi. The enclosure shall be protected by a thermo polymerised polyester epoxy powder coating to white colour
RAL9001 after pre treatment of the sheet metal.
xvii. Form of construction shall comply to Form –2b as per IEC 60439-1 standards or as specified in the
Contract plans.
xviii. The connections to the individual circuit breakers shall be done by rigid bus bars. They shall be suitably
sized to suit the breaker current rating. It shall be possible to replace the breakers with different ratings
within its frame size without changing the connection bus bars. Circuit breakers can be either plug-in type
or bolt-on type.
xix. Calculations shall be submitted to prove the adequacy of the size of the bus bars for the rated current.
xx. Warning labels shall be provided wherever required.
xxi. All warning labels shall be of anodized aluminium or special PVC material, front engraved type with
white / black text on red / yellow back ground.
xxii. When future space provision is indicated on the Contract plans, The space shall be complete in all respects
including fixing arrangement, bus bar connections, shrouds etc,(except the breaker) and shall be provided
with a blank plate cover to avoid accidental access to the bus bars.
xxiii. All bolts, nuts used for bus bar connections shall be of suitable size and grade.
xxiv. Adequate care shall be taken in maintaining the clearances and creepage distances through out the panels.
All clearances and creepage distances shall be in accordance to IEC 60439-1.
xxv. The complete bus bar design shall be based on ambient temperature of 50deg. c and shall be designed to
with stand the temperature rise inside the enclosure.
xxvi. Neutral and Earth bus bars shall be provided at location convenient to connect the cables.
xxvii. Labelling of the panels, circuit / feeder description, components etc. shall be done in a approved and
systematic manner. All such labels shall be either of anodized aluminium or special PVC material, front
engraved with black text on white back ground.
xxviii. Electrical continuity of the metal parts shall be ensured by a protective conductor consisting suitably sized
tinned electrolytic copper bar. This conductor shall be directly mounted to the structures and include a
horizontal bar with holes drilled to allow the connection of the protective conductor of the power cables.
xxix. The SMDB’s shall have the detailed functions: Following parameters of the incoming MCCB’s shall be
acceptable to the PLC for monitoring at the operator workstation.
• Open
• Closed
• Tripped
• Auto /Manual Mode selected
• Emergency Stop P.B. activated
• “Test” Position of Breaker
8. Final Distribution Board (DB)
Page 10-118
i. The Contractor shall supply and install the Final Distribution Board(s) (DB) as shown on the Contract
plans and as herein specified.
ii. The components used in the distribution boards shall comply with the specification described under
Protective Devices specified herein.
iii. The enclosures, circuit breakers and other major devices should be from one reputed and approved
manufacturer.
iv. The DB shall be branded type supplied from original manufacturer. The panel builder shall only fit the
breakers on the standard bus bar assembly. Minor adaptations like extension of bus bars to facilitate cable
terminations can be done by the panel builder as required.
v. Type Test Certificate shall be submitted for the DB from the manufacturer.
vi. DB shall be approved by the local electricity authority.
vii. All the test equipments at the local assembler factory shall be calibrated at reputed laboratory in regular
time interval. In particular the crimping tools and the torque wrenches used at local assembler factory
should be calibrated and certified. Certificate copies shall be submitted for verification.
viii. The DB shall be factory tested by the panel assembler at their works prior to delivery to the site. Factory
Test Certificates shall be provided along with the delivery of the panel when dispatched to the site.
ix. The panel builder shall provide installation, operation and maintenance procedure for the panel and the
Contractor shall strictly follow such procedure.
x. Approval shall be obtained from the Engineer for the constructional details, power & control schematic
diagram and installation details prior to manufacturing.
9. DB Assembly
i. The DB shall be factory-built type in compliance with IEC 60439-3 standards with regard to construction
and with IEC 60529 with regard to degree of protection of the enclosures. There shall be two sections as
required by the latest ADDC regulations.
ii. Unless otherwise specified, the standard index shall be IP31 or more as defined in IEC 60529 standards.
iii. The DB shall be designed to have a continuous current rating and minimum short circuit withstand rating
of 17 KA rms for 200ms and peak short time withstand of 35KA.
iv. DB shall be of MCB distribution board type with a pre fabricated fully shrouded short circuit tested bus
bar assembly complete with the manufacturers circuit breakers.
v. The enclosure shall be of folded and bolted construction fabricated out of minimum 1.2 mm electro
galvanized steel sheet to form a cubicle. Hinged door shall be provided for access to the operational knobs
of the circuit breaker. Closed knock out type opening shall be provided at top, bottom and at the sides for
cable glands and conduits.
vi. All door hinges shall be of concealed type. It shall be possible to remove the door easily when required,
without the risk of accidental contact to the live bars / breaker terminals.
vii. DB shall be of front access type for the purpose of access to all the components, and also for the purpose
of cable terminations.
viii. Adequate care shall be taken in design of panels considering the connection space for the external cables
and wires.
ix. The enclosure construction shall integrate a natural ventilation system aimed at regulating the internal
x. A thermo polymerized polyester epoxy powder coating to RAL9002 shall protect the enclosure.
xi. The connections to the individual circuit breakers shall be done by completely insulated busbar assembly.
They shall be suitably sized to suit the breaker current rating. It shall be possible to replace the breakers
with different ratings up to 125A or 250A either 3pole / 1pole without changing the connection of bus bars.
xii. Outgoing circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type.
xiii. Warning labels shall be provided wherever required.
10. Protective Devices for Sub Main Panel, Distribution Boards, Motor Control Centers
Page 10-119
The panel builder shall select and provide the appropriate type of components using the specification listed below, in
accordance with the Contract plans / documents and applicable international & local standards.
Discrimination study on relevant software for short circuit studies shall be provided by switchgear manufacturer for all
upstream and downstream breakers. All switchgear components shall be from one single manufacturer for co-
ordination and total discrimination between upstream and downstream levels, which should be shown by back-up
calculations.
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs)
i. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-2 standards. They shall be of
category A with a rated service breaking capacity (Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) - on the
operational voltage range for the ratings up to 630A. Breaker selection will be done as per short circuit levels
mentioned in the Contract plans however minimum service breaking capacity Ics will be 36KA.
ii. Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) shall be fitted with thermal over load and instantaneous magnetic
short circuit protection.
iii. All the MCCB shall be of current limiting type and shall not require any backup fuses. MCCBs shall be fully
fault rated for the duty they perform.
iv. MCCBs shall have a rated operational voltage of 690V AC and have a rated insulation voltage of 750V AC.
v. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall provide class II insulation (according to IEC 664 standard) between
the front and internal power circuits.
vi. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be designed for both vertical and horizontal mounting, without any
adverse effect on electrical performance. It shall be possible to supply power either from the upstream or
downstream side. The MCCB’s for SMDB’s shall be fixed type unless indicated on drawings.
vii. For maximum safety, the power contacts shall be insulated in an enclosure made of a thermosetting material
from other functions such as the operating mechanism, the case, the trip unit and auxiliaries.
viii. The operating mechanism of the moulded-case circuit breakers shall be of the quick-make, quick-break type
with fault tripping overriding manual operation.
ix. All poles shall operate simultaneously for circuit breaker opening, closing and tripping.
x. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be actuated by a toggle or handle that clearly indicates the three
positions: ON, OFF and TRIPPED. The operating mechanism shall be designed such that the toggle or
handle can only be in OFF position (O) if the power contacts are all actually separated. Isolation shall be
provided by a double break on the main circuit.
xi. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be able to receive a device for locking in the "isolated" position, with
up to 3 padlocks.
xii. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be equipped with a "push to trip" button in front to test operation and
the opening of the poles. The circuit breaker rating, the "push to trip" button, outgoing circuit identification
and the contact position indication must be clearly visible and accessible from the front, through the front
panel or the door of the switchboard.
xiii. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be capable of greatly limiting currents. For short-circuits, the
maximum thermal stress I2t shall be limited to 106 x A2S for ratings up to 250Amps and 5 x 106 x A2S for
ratings between 400Amps to 630Amps.These characteristics shall allow high cascading performance with
moulded-case or miniature circuit-breakers downstream.
xiv. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall comprise a device, designed to trip the circuit-breaker in the event of
high-value short-circuit currents. This device shall be independent of the thermal-magnetic or electronic trip
unit.
xv. The electrical endurance of the moulded-case circuit breakers, as defined by IEC 60947-2 standard.
xvi. The addition/extension of a rotary handle shall in no way affect circuit breaker characteristics. Only three
stable tripping mechanism positions (ON, OFF and TRIPPED) shall be possible with the direct rotary handle
or extended rotary handle or toggle. Isolation shall provide positive contact indication (ON and OFF) in front.
The addition of rotary handle shall not mask or block device settings.
xvii. The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be designed to enable safe on-site installation of auxiliaries such as
voltage releases (shunt and under voltage releases) and indication switches as follows:
xviii. They shall be separated from power circuits.
Page 10-120
xix. All electrical auxiliaries shall be of the snap-in type and fitted with terminal blocks.
xx. All auxiliaries shall be common for the entire range.
xxi. Auxiliary function and terminals shall be permanently engraved on the case of the circuit breaker and the
auxiliary itself.
xxii. The addition of auxiliaries shall not increase the size of the circuit breaker.
xxiii. Moulded-case circuit breakers with ratings up to 250 A shall be equipped with thermal - magnetic trip units
of interchangeable types. Moulded-case circuit breakers with ratings over 250 A shall be equipped with
electronic trip units.
xxiv. Electronic trip units shall comply with appendix F of IEC 60947-2 standard (measurement of rms current
values, electromagnetic compatibility, etc.).
xxv. Electronic and thermal-magnetic trip units shall be adjustable and it shall be possible to fit lead seals to
prevent unauthorised access to the settings.
xxvi. Protection settings shall apply to all circuit breaker poles.
xxvii. Characteristics of the trip units of the breakers shall be as given below :
xxviii. For breakers up to 250Amps equipped with thermal trip units
xxix. Adjustable (from 80% to 100% of the current rating) thermal protection.
xxx. Fixed magnetic protection for current ratings up to 200 A
xxxi. Adjustable (from 5 to 10 times the current rating) for current ratings greater than 200 A. It shall be possible
to ensure neutral protection. The tripping threshold shall be equal to that of the phases, or to a reduced value
(generally half of that of the phases).
xxxii. For breakers above 400Amps equipped with electronic trip unit.
• long time protection (LT)
Selectable Ir threshold settings from 40 to 100% of the trip unit rating.
• short time protection (ST)
Im threshold shall be adjustable from 2 to 10 times the thermal setting Ir.
The time delay shall be fixed at 40 ms.
• instantaneous protection
The threshold shall be fixed (between 12 and 19 times In, depending on the rating)
Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs).
i. MCB shall comply with IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60898
ii. MCB shall have a rated operational voltage of 230V/400V AC.
iii. MCB shall be modular, Bolt-on type and available in one, two, three or four poles version. Rating, no. of
poles and KA rating shall be as indicated on the Contract plans.
iv. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract plans, the short circuit fault current rating for all the final circuit
MCBs shall be 10KA as per IEC 60898 standards. The KA rating shall be clearly indicated in the front face
of MCB.
v. MCB shall be reverse fed without reduction in performance.
vi. The operating mechanism of MCB shall be mechanically trip free from the operating handle so as to prevent
the contacts from being held closed against short circuit conditions. MCB shall be of the “automatic resetting
type”.
vii. The individual operating mechanism of each pole of a multi-pole MCB shall be directly linked within the
MCB casing and not by the operating handles.
viii. The operating handle of MCB shall be of the toggle type with possibility of padlocking facility.
ix. Each pole of MCB shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal element for overload protection and magnetic
element for short circuit protection.
Page 10-121
x. MCB Terminals shall be of the tunnel type (IP20) in order to minimize the risk of direct contact.
xi. MCB shall adapt itself to the standard distribution board assembly without any modification.
Earth leakage circuit breakers (RCBOs/ RCCBs).
i. RCBO shall comply with IEC 61009 standards and RCCBs will comply to IEC 61008.
ii. RCBO / RCCB shall have a rated operational voltage of 230V/400V AC.
iii. RCBO / RCCB shall be modular, Bolt-on type and available in two or four poles version. Rating, sensitivity
and no. of poles shall be as indicated on the Contract plans.
iv. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract plans, the sensitivity of the RCBOs / RCCBs will be as indicated
in Contract plans.
v. The operating handle shall be of the toggle type with possibility of padlocking facility. The operating toggle
shall be one, irrespective of 2 pole or 4 pole version.
vi. Terminals shall be of the tunnel type (IP20) in order to minimize the risk of direct contact.
vii. RCBO shall adapt itself to the standard distribution board assembly without any modification.
viii. Minimum breaking capacity for RCBOs will be 10KA.
Earth leakage relays (ELRs)
i. ELR and sensors shall comply with IEC 364 and IEC 755 standards.
ii. ELR shall be modular type. ELR shall be suitable for rail mounting or panel front mounting.
iii. ELR shall be residual current operated protection relay and core balance current transformer operated type.
iv. ELR shall have fixed earth leakage sensitivity setting and shall be instantaneous in operation. Sensitivity will
be provided as indicated in the Contract plans.
v. ELR shall have a test push button built in on the front face of the relay to test the ELR whenever required.
vi. ELR shall be of manual reset type and shall have a reset push button built in on the front face of the relay to
reset after a earth leakage trip. Wherever required, it shall be possible to have a remote reset type of relay.
vii. ELR shall have a built in LEDs on the front face of the relay to indicate the relay is energised and relay trip
status.
viii. All terminals of the ELR shall be of screw type.
ix. Core balance current transformer (CBCT) shall be provided for each relay.
x. Core balance current transformers shall be installed on the power cables and hole the sizes of the CBCT shall
be suit the cable sizes. All such transformers shall be supplied with suitable installation accessories.
xi. Special screened cables shall be used for interconnection between the CBCT and ELR.
xii. Unless otherwise indicated, ELR and CBCT shall be two separate units.
Indication lamps
i. Indicating lamps shall be rated to withstand not less than 20% continuous over voltage and shall be rated to
ensure long life. The applied voltage shall not exceed 80% of the lamp rated voltage.
ii. Lamps shall well be ventilated and the design shall permit removal lamp glass and bulbs from the front of the
unit.
iii. The indicating lamps shall of matching design to push buttons arranged for single hole fixing and of small
body size to allow close grouping.
iv. All terminals shall be of screw type.
v. Indicating lamps on 230V supply shall of the direct bulb type operating at a reduced voltage not exceeding
10volts to give long bulb life and be of LED type or as approved by the engineer.
vi. Indicating lamps shall have shallow bezels which incorporate plastic lenses of the specified colour.
vii. Engraved legend plates shall be fitted with all indicating lamps.
Page 10-122
viii. The engraved legend plates shall be made from special flexible pvc sheet or anodized aluminium sheet. The
minimum characters height on the engraved legend sheet shall be 3mm. The text shall be black colour on a
white background.
ix. The colour of the lenses shall be as per the specific function and in compliance with applicable IEC standard.
x. The IP index of the front face of the indication lamp shall be IP55 as minimum.
Push Buttons
i. Push buttons shall of matching design to indicating lamps arranged for single hole fixing and of small body
size to allow close grouping.
ii. Unless otherwise specified, the push buttons shall be of spring return type. Wherever used for emergency
shutdown / stop purpose, push button shall be of red colour, mushroom head, push to stop, stay put, turn or
pull to release type.
iii. Push buttons shall accept contact blocks either clipped or screwed to its back holder.
iv. Add on contact blocks shall be of N/O or N/C type as required and all such contacts shall be rated for 5A
inductive.
v. Push buttons shall be possible to include up to 8nos. of contact blocks.
vi. All contact block terminals shall be of screw type.
vii. Push buttons shall be of different colour as per their function and in compliance with applicable IEC
standard.
viii. Engraved legend plates shall be fitted with all push buttons.
ix. The engraved legend plates shall be made from special flexible pvc sheet or anodized aluminium sheet. The
minimum characters height on the engraved legend sheet shall be 3mm.The text shall be black colour on a
white background.
x. The IP index of the front face of the push button shall be IP55 as minimum.
Contactors
i. Contactors shall comply to IEC 60947-4 standards
ii. Contactors shall be shall be suitable for rated insulation voltage up to 690volts.
iii. Contactors shall be suitable for operation at 55deg.C.
iv. Contactors shall be of AC3 duty and of 3 pole type unless otherwise specified.
v. Contactors coils operational voltage (Uc) shall be between 0.8 to 1.1Uc and drop out at 0.3 to 0.6Uc.
vi. Contactors, when used in motor starters, shall be co-ordinated with the upstream protection for TYPE 2 co-
ordination.
vii. It shall be possible to easily replace the coil of the contactor.
viii. Contactors at any time shall accommodate auxiliary contacts or pneumatic time delay blocks on front face
and atleast two auxiliary contact blocks on each side / front facia of the contactor.
ix. Contactors for capacitor switching shall of capacitor switching type contactors suitably rated for the capacitor
current. It shall be fitted with a block of early make poles and damping resistors, limiting the value of the
current on closing to 80In max. This current limitation increase the life of all the components of the
installation, in particular that of the fuses and the capacitors.
Over load relays
i. Overload relays shall comply with IEC 60947-1 and 60947-4 standards.
ii. Overload relays shall be shall be suitable for rated insulation voltage up to 690 volts.
iii. Over load relay shall be suitable for operation at 55deg.C.
iv. Over load relay shall be three pole bimetal thermal over type and be equipped with the bimetal element on all
the three poles.
v. Unless otherwise specified the overload relays shall always be of Class 10A
Page 10-123
vi. Overload relay setting range shall be adjustable within a range and shall be selected to suit the requirement.
vii. Overload relays shall be with suitably rated N/O & N/C contacts
viii. Over load relays shall be with a auto / manual mode selector to select the type of fault reset. Unless otherwise
specified the reset shall be always selected to manual.
ix. Over load relays shall be with a test button accessible with a screw driver to allow the checking of control
wiring.
x. Over load relays shall be with a trip indicator.
xi. Wherever required it shall be fitted with a external reset push button (mechanical reset) or an electric reset
facility as indicated on the Contract plans.
Panel Heater
i. Thermostatically controlled heaters to prevent condensation and assist ventilation shall be provided wherever
required.
ii. The rating of any one of the unit shall not exceed 60Watts and the surface temperature of any part there may
be contacted accidentally shall not exceed 65o C.
iii. The heaters shall be so situated that no deterioration can be caused to any of the apparatus or wiring in the
cable.
iv. The heating circuit shall be independently fused and controlled by a suitably labeled selector switch mounted
in an accessible position within the cubicle.
11. Installation
i. Install main board as indicated in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with
recognized industry practices to ensure that the equipment fulfils requirements.
ii. Provide earthing connections for the main switchboard as indicated on the Contract plans. Tighten
connections to assure permanent and effective grounding.
iii. Prior to energization of the main switch board, check with megger tester to ensure requirements of IEE
Wiring Regulations are fulfilled.
iv. Frame and mount printed, basic operating instructions for switch boards, including control and key
interlocking sequences, and emergency procedures, fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover
instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on the front of the switchboards.
12. Identification
Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified and required.
Field Quality Control
i. Manufacturer's Field Services: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the pretesting and adjustment of switchboard components.
ii. Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an electrical testing organization to perform
quality control electrical testing and calibration, visual and mechanical inspections, and tests of
overcurrent protective devices switchboards.
iii. Pre-testing: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following preparations for tests:
• Make insulation resistance tests of switchboard buses, components, and connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuits.
• Make continuity tests of circuits.
• Provide set of Contract Documents to test organisation. Include full updating on final system
configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original
Contract Documents.
• Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of switchboard to test
organisation.
iv. Quality Control Testing Program: Conform to the following:
Page 10-124
• Program Objectives: To assure switchboard installation meets specified requirements, is

operational within specified tolerances, provides appropriate protection for systems and
equipment, and is suitable for energizing.
• Procedures: Make field tests and inspections and prepare switchboard for satisfactory
operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications.
• Schedule tests and notify Engineer at least one week in advance of test commencement.
• Reports: Prepare written reports of test results and observations. Report defective materials
and workmanship. Include complete records of adjustments and remedial efforts.
• Labelling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort. Apply a label to tested
components indicating test results, person responsible, and date.
• Protective Device Ratings and Settings; Verify indicated ratings and settings and make the
final system adjustments of Overcurrent Protection Devices.
v. Visual and Mechanical Inspections: Include the following Inspections and related work:
• Inspect for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory, labels, and nameplate compliance
with up-to-date circuit connections.
• Verify that potential transformers, including their overcurrent protection and current
transformers, meet specified requirements.
Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and other operable devices
in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.
Check switchboard anchorage, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components.
Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to
manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.
Clean switchboard interior and exterior-using manufacturer's approved methods and
materials.
Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for Overcurrent Protective
Devices.
vi. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction:
• Insulation resistance test of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnect from solid
state devices through normal disconnecting features.
• Ratio and polarity tests on current and voltage transformers.
• Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections.
• Verify appropriate capacity, overcurrent protection, and operating voltage of control power
elements including control power transformer and control power wiring.
• Check phasing of alternate supply sources to the same bus.
• Test overcurrent protective devices as specified for compliance.
vii. Retesting: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest switchboards. Verify by the
retests that switchboards meet specified requirements.
viii. Cleaning. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
ix. Protection. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation within each section of switchboards throughout periods during which the switchboard is
not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
x. Demonstration. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service representatives to
demonstrate switchboards and train Owner's maintenance personnel.
Page 10-125
10.11.8 Automatic Transfer Switch Panel

10.11.8.1 General
Manufacture, testing, supply, installation and commissioning of Automatic Transfer Switch panel (ATS) - standalone
type. Whenever the ATS is part of the main distribution boards or other distribution boards the respective panel board
specifications shall be followed in addition to this specification and the more stringent requirements shall prevail. The
specific requirements and details of the automatic transfer switch required are given on the Contract plans.
The Automatic Transfer Switch shall be of mechanically and electrically type interlocked to exclude any possibility of
coupling together the normal and emergency sources.
To ensure continuity of service both air circuit breakers shall have two stable position, CLOSED and OPEN. It shall be
possible to manually operate each air circuit breaker (or unprotected circuit breaker) in the event of the absence of
control voltage.
For maintenance purpose, the transfer switches shall have a neutral position with both air circuit breakers in the OPEN
position. It shall also be possible to lock each air circuit breaker in the OPEN position.
Each air circuit breaker (or unprotected circuit breaker) of the transfer switch shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts
and alarm contacts (TRIPPED status indication).
Automatic Transfer Switch panels shall be assembled only by a franchisee of the original manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer.
Upon request, the franchised panel assembler shall submit the latest documents of quality and performance assessment
carried out by the original manufacturer for Engineer review.
The panel builder / assembler shall design, assemble and test the automatic transfer switch panel as per the pre-defined
guidelines of the original manufacturer. Upon request, the assembler shall obtain approval for the design drawings in
writing from the original manufacturer for the panel design prior submitting for the Engineer approval.
10.11.8.2 Applicable Standards

Unless specified otherwise Automatic Transfer Switch panel (ATS) shall conform in design, material, construction and
performance to the latest editions of the International recommendations (IEC standards) and in particular to the
following publications:
- Low Voltage Switchboard IEC 60439-1
- Degree of protection IEC 60529
In addition to the above listed standards, the local authority regulations shall also be adhered to.
10.11.8.3 Design Considerations

The automatic transfer switch panel shall be of standard, natural air cooled, well tested and proven design which
ensures maximum safety to personnel, maximum service reliability and economic operations. Design and construction
shall be simple, well laid-out and shall provide good accessibility to components and parts.
The construction of automatic transfer switch panel shall comply with Form-4b requirements of IEC 60439-1. Unless
specified otherwise, the form of construction shall be same as the associated / upstream main distribution board.
Unless specified otherwise, the automatic transfer switch panel shall be fixed version, incoming and outgoing switching
devices shall be withdrawable type (fixed type shall be used only where MCCB is used as switching device). However
the actual requirements for the version of the automatic transfer switch and the switching devices shall be as shown in
the Contract plans.
Automatic transfer switch panel shall be rated on the basis of voltage, current, frequency and the symmetrical breaking
capacity of incorporated switching devices.
The electrical system for all automatic transfer switch panel shall be 400V, 50Hz 3phase and neutral, 4-wire solidly
earthed.
Unless specified otherwise, the fault level withstand capacity of the automatic transfer switch panel busbar system rated
above 630A and up to 2500Amps shall be 50KA RMS for 1second as minimum standard. Automatic transfer switch
panel busbar system rated up to 630A shall be fault rated at least at 35KA RMS for 1second as minimum standard.
Page 10-126
The type test certificate shall be submitted for Engineer’s verification, to prove the fault level withstand capacity of the
automatic transfer switch panel. Even under extreme conditions of short circuit or mal-operation there shall be no
danger to persons in the vicinity of the assembly.
All equipment and components of the automatic transfer switch panel shall be capable of continuous operation at their
full current and voltage ratings and without detriment or malfunction at system continuous deviation of up to and
including the following percentages of the normal values.
- Voltages + 10% and – 6%
- Frequency ± 0.1%
All components shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic, thermal and dielectric stresses resulting from prospective
short circuit currents without damage or injury to personnel.
10.11.8.4 Constructional Requirements for ATS Enclosure

1. General Arrangement & Assembly. Automatic transfer switch panel shall comprise of free standing enclosure, bus
bar system, switching devices such as ACB/MCCB, metering equipments, all necessary current transformers and
the like as required. Panel shall be assembled in a systematic manner such as Transformer Incomer section,
Generator Incomer section, Incomers Metering / Indication section and Outgoing section.
Unless otherwise specified the panels shall be designed to accept bottom entry of cables and shall be of front access
type.
Each panel section (cable compartment) shall be provided with thermostatically controlled panel heater.
2. Automatic transfer switch with Air Circuit Breakers as switching device. Where ACBs are used as switching device
in the ATS panel, the panel shall be arranged typically as described below and as per the details shown in the
Contract plans:
Incomer section (Transformer Incoming)
Transformer Incomer panel shall be a 3compartment enclosure with Top & Bottom compartment dedicated for
metering / controls and the Middle compartment shall be dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but
not limited to the following:
Bottom Compartment
Incomer supply cables
Control component for Incoming circuit breaker.
Middle Compartment
Main Incoming 4pole circuit breakers with rating and type as per the drawing.
Indication lamps for circuit breaker status
Top Compartment
Amp meter (3nos.) to measure the load current on each phase.
Voltmeter to measure phase to phase, phase to neutral voltages with 7Pos. selector switch wired to the line side of
the circuit breaker.
Phase indication lamps (R,Y,B) wired to the line side of the circuit breaker.
Power factor meter (If required as per local authority requirement).
KWH energy meter (If location of KWh is approved by local authority).
Control components / control relays for automatic transfer controls.
Incomer section (Generator Incoming)
Generator Incomer panel shall be a 3compartment enclosure with Top & Bottom compartment dedicated for
metering / controls and the Middle compartment shall be dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but
not limited to the following:
Bottom Compartment
Incomer supply cables
Page 10-127
Control component for Incoming circuit breaker.

Middle Compartment
Main Incoming 4pole circuit breakers with rating and type as per the drawing.
Indication lamps for circuit breaker status
Top Compartment
Ammeter (3nos.) to measure the load current on each phase.
Voltmeter to measure phase to phase, phase to neutral voltages with 7Pos. selector switch wired to the line side of
the circuit breaker.
Phase indication lamps (R,Y,B) wired to the line side of the circuit breaker.
Frequency meter.
3. Automatic transfer switch with MCCBs as switching device. Where MCCBs are used as switching device in the
ATS panel, the panel shall be arranged typically as described below and as per the details shown on the Contract
plans:
Incomer section
Incomer panel shall be one cubicle with both incoming circuit breakers accommodated in one common mechanical
interlock base plate. The controls of the ATS and the circuit breakers shall be located in this cubicle. Main busbars
shall be arranged systematically and interconnected to the incoming MCCBs. Busbar terminal extensions shall be
provided for the connecting the main incomer cables. The incoming terminals of both the transformer feed circuit
breaker and generator feed circuit breaker shall be fully shrouded and segregated from each other, preferably
segregated by metallic partitions. The main busbars shall also be fully shrouded.
Metering and control components such as selectors/push buttons shall be mounted on the front door of the incomer
panel section. The metering shall be grouped as per the incomer and shall include but not limited to the following:
Transformer feed Incomer
• Ammeter (3nos.) to measure load current (both Gen. & Tran) on each phase.
• Voltmeter to measure phase to phase, phase to neutral voltages with 7Pos. selector switch wired to the line
side of the circuit breaker.
• Phase indication lamps (R,Y,B) wired to the line side of the circuit breaker.
• Power factor meter (If required as per local authority requirement).
• KWH energy meter (If location of KWh is approved by local authority).
• Generator feed Incomer
• Voltmeter to measure phase to phase, phase to neutral voltages with 7Pos. selector switch wired to the line
side of the circuit breaker.
• Phase indication lamps (R,Y,B) wired to the line side of the circuit breaker.
• Frequency meter.
4. Automatic transfer switch panel enclosure shall be as per the specifications contained for LV enclosures in Main
Distribution Boards Specification.
5. Automatic transfer switch control unit shall be compact, door mounted type, electronic circuitry based branded
catalogue product from circuit breaker manufacturer. The ATS control unit / controller shall comprise of a control
plate assembly and a door mounted control & monitoring unit. The control plate assembly shall accommodate the
power circuit breaker & voltage sensing electronic circuits. The control and monitoring unit shall have selector
switch, indication lights, voltage adjustment, mimic diagram, etc. on the front face of the unit. The control and
monitoring unit shall be door mounted on the ATS panel for setting adjustments & operation. The control unit shall
be interfaced with the control plate assembly by wiring or prefab cables. The ATS control unit shall have at least
the following features as standard:
• Off / Normal / Standby / Auto – 4postion selector for control.
• Automatic mode monitoring of the normal source and automatic changeover
Page 10-128
• Engine generator set start up, control & delayed shutdown (where applicable)
• Load shedding and re-connection of non-priority loads (where applicable)
• Test facility for automatic changeover system
• Circuit breaker status (Off / On / Trip) indication with printed mimic diagram
• Voluntary transfer to standby source (where applicable)
• Remote communication facility through SCADA. The Contractor shall provide necessary hardwiring from
the communication ports/instruments to the program logic controllers installed by the SCADA system
provider. Communication protocol shall be as required by the SCADA system provider. This work shall be
considered as a subsidiary obligation to the item included in the Bills of Quantities. No other payment will
be made by the Owner.
• Operating voltage threshold adjustments
The ATS control unit shall have at least the following characteristics as standard:
• Operating threshold limits shall be:
Under voltage : 0.35 - 0.7Un
Phase failure : 0.5 – 0.7Un
Voltage presence : ≥ 0.85 Un
• Volt free contacts for:
Operation in auto mode
Load shedding and reconnection order
Generator set start order
• Time delay adjustments for:
• Transmission of order for opening of normal source circuit breaker after normal source failure shall be
adjustable between 0.1s to 30s.
• Transmission of order for opening of standby source circuit breaker after normal source return shall be
adjustable between 0.1s to 240s.
• Shutting down the generator set after normal source return shall be adjustable between 60s to 600s.
• Delay before start order to engine generator set shall be 120s or 180s
• Load shedding before closing of standby source circuit breaker shall be adjustable between 0.5s to 30s.
• Load reconnection before closing of normal source circuit breaker shall be adjustable between 0.5s to 30s.
10.11.9 Diesel Generator Set

10.11.9.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install 400-volt, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50-Hz continuously rated diesel generator set to
supply standby power for the equipment as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein. The diesel generator
set shall be complete with all accessories and controls including, but not limited to, diesel engine, generator, battery,
battery charger, day fuel tank of minimum eight hours capacity, exhaust system, control panel with necessary circuit
breaker, wiring as required to provide a totally functional system. The capacity of the diesel generator set shall be as
indicated on the Contract plans and as included in the Bill of Quantities. The Contractor shall provide evidence from the
manufacturer that the proposed generator type has been used satisfactorily under similar conditions in accordance with
the requirements of Section 10.1.6
10.11.9.2 Sequence of Operation

Emergency power generation shall be provided to supply power to the essential loads through an automatic transfer
switch activated by the voltage monitoring relay fitted in the main switchboard. The automatic transfer switch (ATS)
shall normally be closed at the mains position.
Page 10-129
In case of mains power outage, sensed by the voltage out of the limit relay in the generator control panel, the following
shall be the sequence of operation:
• Main feeder circuit breaker electrically opens.
• Generator starts and builds up to the rated speed.
• ATS automatically switches over to standby position.
Once mains supply is restored and stabilized after a predetermined period, as sensed by the voltage signal through the
generator control panel, the following shall be the sequence of operation:
• ATS automatically switches over to mains position.
• Mains circuit breaker closes.
• Generator continues to run for a preset time, per manufacturer’s recommendations, in order to cool the engine
prior to its automatic shut down.
10.11.9.3 Shop Drawings

Shop drawings and product data for the diesel generator set shall include the following detailed information:
• Engine: Make and model, with signed and dated originals of engine manufacturer’s certified performance
curves. Photocopies will not be accepted.
• Alternator: Make and model.
• Voltage regulator: Make, model, and type.
• Generator control panel: As specified hereinafter.
• Battery: Make, type, and capacity.
• Battery charger: Make, type, and model.
• Generator: Type and model.
• Governor: Type and model.
• Air requirements in cubic-metres per second.
• Cooling air required for engine and generator including exhaust pipes.
• Combustion air required.
• BS or DIN rating of engine.
• Torsional Critical Speeds: The procedure detailed in the latest Amendments of BS649, Section 8, or equivalent
DIN specification, shall be followed for the evaluation of the torsional characteristics of the engine generator
assembly.
• Flow diagrams for:
o Diesel fuel
o Lubricating oil
o Cooling liquid
• Dimensioned drawing showing the complete generating set mounted on a steel base, including vibration
isolators, exhaust system, and drip trays. Drawing shall also indicate total weight.
• Dimensions and structural specifications of engine-generator foundation pad.
• Layout drawings of complete engine-fuel system, including pipe sizes and anchor bolt templates for auxiliary
pumps, if required, showing all critical dimensions.
• Dimensioned drawings showing complete engine-ventilation duct arrangements and louvres, including details
of openings required in wall for exhaust air.
• Continuous full-load output of set at 0.8 pf lagging.
Page 10-130
• Transient response of system during motor starting sequence and peak load. Maximum voltage dip and time
required to full voltage shall be included.
• Description of set operation including:
o Automatic starting and transfer to load and back to normal power, including time in seconds from start of
cranking until unit reaches rated voltage and frequency.
o Manual starting.
o Automatic shut down on:
 Overcranking
 Overspeed
 High engine temperature
 Low lube-oil pressure
 Short circuit
 Alternator overvoltage and undervoltage
o Manual remote emergency stop.
o Electrical schematics and wiring diagrams of generator control panel shall be as follows:
i. Single line diagram of entire control panel assembly.
ii. Wiring diagram for interconnection with generator set and transfer switch specified elsewhere.
iii. Test reports and certificates.
iv. Operation and maintenance data as follows:
- Provide data for incorporation into maintenance manual.
- Operation and maintenance manual to include instructions for particular unit supplied and
not general description of units manufactured by supplier. The manual shall include, but not be
limited to, operation and maintenance instructions for engine, alternator, generator-controls
system, generator-control panel, battery charger, battery, fuel system, engine-cooling system,
exhaust system, and accessories to permit effective operation, maintenance, and repair. A
recommended preventative-maintenance schedule and hours to overhaul shall also be included.
v. Technical data as follows:
- Illustrated parts lists with parts catalogue numbers.
- Schematic diagram of electrical controls.
vi. Flow diagrams as follows:
- Fuel system.
- Lubricating oil.
- Cooling system.
vii. Certified copies of factory test results.
viii. Wiring diagram of complete plant. Minimum drawing size A1 (594 x 841).
ix. Single-line diagram showing major electrical components and locations suitable for mounting in
generator room.
x. Detailed operating instructions of generating plant on a complete system.
10.11.9.4 Inspection and Testing

The generator set including engine, alternator, control panel, and accessories shall be inspected and tested during
manufacture in accordance with the requirements Section 10.1.9.
The test procedure for the generator set shall be as follows:
Page 10-131
i. Blank forms and check sheets with spaces to record data as approved by the Engineer. The following shall be
noted at the top of each record sheet:.
1. Date.
2. Generator set serial number.
3. Engine make, model, serial number.
4. Alternator make, model, serial number.
5. Voltage regulator make and model.
6. Rating of generator set kW, kVA, V, A, rpm Hz.
ii. Check sheets shall be marked and data recorded on forms in duplicate.
iii. Tests interrupted for any reason shall be resumed at the beginning of the test (hours may not be accumulated).
iv. All test instruments shall be standard metres with certified calibration.
v. The Engineer or designated representative shall sign the completed forms to indicate concurrence of test results.
vi. The factory test shall be as follows:
• 100 percent rated load, operate set for four (4) hours continuously at 50 °C ambient temperature, taking readings
at 30-minute intervals. The following information shall be recorded for each interval:
o Time of reading.
o Running time.
o Ambient temperature in °C.
o Lube-oil pressure in kPa.
o Engine coolant temperature in °C.
o Alternator voltage, phase 1, 2, and 3.
o Alternator current, phase 1, 2, and 3.
o Power in kilowatts.
o Frequency in Hz.
o Power factor.
o Battery charger current in amperes.
o Battery voltage.
• At the end of four-hour run, increase load to 110 percent rated value, and take readings every 15 minutes for one
hour.
• Before commencing four-hour run, the following shut-down devices and alarms shall be demonstrated:
o Overcranking.
o Overspeed.
o High engine temperature.
o Low lube-oil pressure.
o Emergency stop.
• After demonstration of requirements of items under (3), above, continuous-strip-chart recorders shall be installed
to record frequency and voltage variations during load-switching procedures, with a chart speed of 1.3
millimetres per second. Each load change shall be delayed until steady-state conditions are achieved. The
switching increments shall include:
o No load to 80 percent load to no load.
Page 10-132
o 20-percent load to 40-percent load to no load.

• Performance as follows shall be demonstrated:
o Automatic starting of set and automatic transfer of load on failure of normal power.
o Automatic shutdown of engine on resumption of normal power.
o That battery charger reverts to a high rate of charge after cranking.
• Low oil pressure and high engine temperature shutdowns shall be demonstrated by simulating low oil pressure
and high temperature without subjecting engine to these excesses.
• Test forms shall be as approved by the Engineer.
• All factory tests specified herein may, at the discretion of the Engineer, be repeated on site upon the installation
of the generator set and associated equipment.
10.11.9.5 Materials
a. Engine
The Engine shall comply with the following requirements:
i. Diesel Engine
To BS 5514, or corresponding to DIN or ISO standards.
ii. Prime Mover
Four-cycle diesel compression ignition engine, solid injection full diesel, heavy duty, cold start liquid
cooled, vertical in-line or vee, and current manufacturer, of a type and size, that has been in commercial
use as a prime mover for electric power generation for not less than 5 years. The engine shall be rated for
prime power. Experimental models will not be acceptable. The generator shall also be turbocharged and
after cooled, as required, operating at 1,500 rpm. Cylinder liners shall be full length, replaceable, wet
type, honed, and coated to give fast breaking and long life.
iii. Capacity
The capacity of the engine output shall not be less than 1.34 output brake horsepower per kilowatt at 100
percent continuous rating load while operating at specified site conditions minus the sum of the following:
• Power to drive cooling fan and other auxiliaries.
• Power loss for site ambient conditions.
Site conditions are as specified under Section 10.1.6.
iv. Performance
The engine performance shall be as follows:
• The rated continuous kW output as shown on the Contract plans at 0.8 pf shall be defined as DIN “A”
6270 for an industrial engine rating or equivalent BS 5514 engine-rating curve.
• The engine manufacturer’s approved, published kW rating for continuous electrical power generation
shall be used in assessing the engine capacity. This rating shall be derated for the specified site
conditions in accordance with paragraph (2), above, incorporating latest amendments.
• The diesel generator shall have a standby kW rating and shall be derated for site conditions and all
power-absorbing accessories.
• Engine-performance curves showing ratings, conditions, and definitions will be acceptable as
evidence of brake kW output only if the curves are issued by the engine manufacturer, certified by an
officer of the company, and dated.
• The derating factors (percentage) for each site condition must be provided on a specification sheet
issued by the engine manufacturer, when derating the engine. When derating of the engine is not
necessary, the manufacturer must provide written confirmation of this fact.
Page 10-133
v. Cooling System
The cooling system shall comply with the following:
• The cooling system shall be a heavy-duty industrial radiator and engine-driven fan, both sized to
adequately cool the engine and generator at full load, without derating at 50 °C ambient temperature
and 20 metres mean sea level.
Filler caps, if used, shall be designed for pressure relief prior to removal. Hoses and connections shall
be suitable for temperature up to 130 °C minimum and a working pressure of 100 psig minimum. An
engine-driven pump shall be provided for circulating jacket coolant.
The direct-mounted radiator shall have horizontal discharge, with pusher type fan driven directly from
the engine crankshaft or by a minimum of two V-belt drive with belt adjuster. Direct-mounted
radiators shall be arranged for duct extension. The fan assembly shall be enclosed with a suitable
guard. The radiator-fan drive ratio shall be sized such that the fan-trip speed does not exceed the
maximum allowed by the fan manufacturer. The Contractor shall make the fan manufacturer’s data
available upon request.
• The coolant-circulation pump shall be engine driven and suitable for radiator application.
• The manufacturer’s recommended engine-temperature range shall be maintained at 10 percent
continuous overload in an ambient temperature of 50 °C.
• Cooling-air requirements to be delivered by fan shall be conservatively calculated and shall include
air required to maintain engine-room-temperature rise due to operation of the unit at less than or equal
to 10 °C over ambient (outdoor) temperature. The fan shall be adequately rated to resist static pressure
for the specific site-installation configuration.
• The engine jacket shall be water cooled. The after cooler or inter-cooler shall be as designed and
supplied by the engine manufacturer.
vi. Fuel and Fuel System
The fuel and fuel system shall comply with the following:
• The fuel shall be Type A. Fuel oil to CGSB 3-GP-6c (No. 2 Diesel).
• The fuel system shall be comprised of interchangeable injectors that require no calibration or
adjustment, an engine-driven transfer pump with hand primer, replaceable fuel-filter elements, and a
fuel rack solenoid energized to run.
• The fuel lift pump shall have at least a 1500 mm suction lift at operating speed and a fuel cellulosic
element filtration system before admission of the fuel into the injection pump(s).
• In addition to the fuel filter above, a fuel filter combination water separator with retention shall be
provided. The water shall be drained without dismantling the unit. The unit shall be sized to provide
enough fuel as recommended by engine manufacturer. The filter separator shall be fitted in the fuel
circuit just before the fuel injection pump, offering easy access for servicing and protection from
damage.
vii. Governor
The governor shall be electronic type. Speed drop shall be externally adjustable, from isochronous to 3
percent, temperature compensated, with steady-state speed maintenance capability of 0.25 percent.
viii. Lubrication System
The lubrication system shall conform to the following:
• Shall be pressure-lubricated by engine-driven positive displacement gear pump.
• Shall have full-flow spin on lube-oil filter generator base.
• Shall include a lube-oil cooler.
• The engine sump-drain valve shall extend beyond the engine generator base.
ix. Starting System
The starting system shall conform to the following:
Page 10-134
• Shall be a positive shift, gear engaging starter 24 Vdc dual starters.

• The cranking shall be limited to provide a cranking period of 30 seconds duration.
• The battery shall be nickel cadmium, 24-volt storage with sufficient capacity to crank engine for three
minutes at 0 °C without using more than 25 percent of ampere-hour capacity. One battery per each
diesel generator set shall be provided.
x. Battery Charger
The battery charger shall include the following:
• A battery stand fabricated from angle iron with a two-centimetre plywood base shall be provided 15
centimetres above floor level. A wooden protective cover shall be provided for the battery. The
battery stand and cover shall be specially treated against electrolytic action.
• All necessary battery cables and connectors shall be provided. Cable size shall be selected on the
basis of allowing not more than 5 percent voltage drop at time of peak load.
• The charger shall be complete with charging alternator with regulator.
• The fuel rack solenoid shall be “energized to run” and “fail safe”.
xi. Shock-Resistant Engine-Mounted Control Panel
The generator set shall be provided with a microprocessor-based control panel that shall be designed to
provide automatic starting, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The control system
shall also be designed to allow local monitoring and control of the generator set, and remote monitoring
and control as described in this specification. When mounted on the generator set the control panel shall
be vibration isolated and prototype tested to verify the durability of all components in the system under the
vibration conditions encountered. The control shall meet the requirements of ISO 8528: Part 4. All
switches, lamps and meters shall be oil-tight and dust-tight, and the enclosure door shall be gasketed.
There shall be no exposed points in the control (with the door open) that operate in excess of 50 volts. The
controls shall meet or exceed the requirements of IEC 60801:Part 2, EN 50081-1 and EN 50082-1 for
susceptibility, conducted, and radiated electromagnetic emissions. The entire control shall be tested and
meet the requirements of EN 61000-4-5 for voltage surge resistance. The generator set mounted control
shall include the following features and functions:
• Three-position lockable control switch labeled RUN/OFF/AUTO. In the RUN position the generator
set shall start, and accelerate to rated speed and voltage. In the OFF position the generator set shall
immediately stop, bypassing all time delays. In the AUTO position the generator set shall be ready to
accept a signal from a remote device to start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage.
• Red "mushroom-head" push-button EMERGENCY STOP switch. Depressing the emergency stop
switch shall cause the generator set to immediately shut down, and be locked out from automatic
restarting.
• Push-button RESET switch. The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and allow restarting the
generator set after it has shut down for any fault condition.
• Push-button PANEL LAMP switch. Depressing the panel lamp switch shall cause the entire panel to
be lighted with DC control power. The panel lamps shall automatically be switched off 10 minutes
after the switch is depressed, or after the switch is depressed a second time.
• Generator Set AC Output Metering: The generator set shall be provided with a metering set with the
following features and functions.
• 2.5-inch, 90 degree scale analog voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, and kilowatt (kW) meter.
These meters shall be provided with a phase select switch and an indicating lamp for upper and lower
scale on the meters. Ammeter and kW meter scales shall be colour coded in the following fashion:
readings from 0-90% of generator set standby rating: green; readings from 90-100% of standby rating:
amber; readings in excess of 100%: red.
• Digital metering set, 0.5% accuracy, to indicate generator voltage and frequency, output current,
output kW, kW-hours, and power factor. Generator output voltage display shall be available in
line-to-line or line-to-neutral voltage simultaneously.
• Generator Set Alarm and Status Message Display: The generator set shall be provided with alarm and
status indicating lamps to indicate non-automatic generator status and also existing alarm and
Page 10-135
shutdown conditions. The lamps shall be high-intensity, dual element LED’s for long life. The lamp
indication shall be clearly apparent under bright room lighting conditions. The generator set control
shall indicate the existence of the following alarm and shutdown conditions on a digital display panel:
 low oil pressure (alarm)
 low oil pressure (shutdown)
 oil pressure sender failure (alarm)
 high coolant temperature (alarm)
 high coolant temperature (shutdown)
 engine temperature sender failure (alarm)
 low coolant level (alarm or shutdown--selectable)
 fail to crank (shutdown)
 overcrank (shutdown)
 overspeed (shutdown)
 low DC voltage (alarm)
 high DC voltage (alarm)
 weak battery (alarm)
 low fuel-daytank (alarm)
 high AC voltage (shutdown)
 low AC voltage (shutdown)
 under frequency (shutdown)
 over current (warning)
 over current (shutdown)
 short circuit (shutdown)
 earth fault (alarm)
 over load (alarm)
 emergency stop (shutdown)
In addition, provisions shall be made for indication of two customer-specified alarm or shutdown
conditions. Labeling of the customer-specified alarm or shutdown conditions shall be of the same type
and quality as the above specified conditions. The non-automatic indicating lamp shall be red, and
shall flash to indicate that the generator set is not able to automatically respond to a command to start
from a remote location.
• Engine Status Monitoring: The following information shall be available from a digital status panel on
the Generator Set Control:
 engine oil pressure (psi or kPA)
 engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C)
 engine oil temperature (degrees F or C)
 engine speed (rpm)
 number of hours of operation (hours)
 number of start attempts
 battery voltage (DC volts)
• Control Functions: The control system provided shall include a cycle cranking system, which allows
for user selected crank time, rest time, and number of start cycles. Initial settings shall be for 3
cranking periods of 10 seconds each, with 10 second rest period between cranking periods.
Page 10-136
The control system shall include an idle mode control, which allows the engine to run in idle mode in
the RUN position only. In this mode, the generator excitation system shall be disabled.
The control system shall include an engine speed governor control, which functions to provide steady
state frequency regulation as noted elsewhere in this specification. The governor control shall include
adjustments for gain, damping, and a ramping function to control engine speed and limit exhaust
smoke while the unit is starting. The governor control shall be suitable for use in paralleling
applications without component changes.
The control system shall include time delay start (adjustable 0-300 seconds) and time delay stop
(adjustable 0-600 seconds) functions.
The control system shall include sender failure monitoring logic for speed sensing, oil pressure, and
engine temperature which is capable of discriminating between failed sender or wiring components,
and actual fault conditions.
• Generator Control Functions: The generator set shall include an automatic voltage regulation system
that is matched and prototype tested with the governing system provided. It shall be immune from
malfunction due to load-induced voltage wave form distortion and provide a pulse width modulated
output to the generator exciter.
The voltage regulation system shall be equipped with three-phase RMS sensing and shall control
buildup of AC generator voltage to provide a linear rise and limit overshoot. The system shall include
a torque-matching characteristic, which shall reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency below
a threshold of (48/49 or 58/59 HZ)
The voltage regulator shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and frequency roll-off.
Adjustments shall be broad range, and made via digital raise-lower switches, with an alphanumeric
LED readout to indicate setting level.
The voltage regulation system shall include provisions for reactive load sharing and electronic voltage
and frequency matching for paralleling applications. Motorized voltage adjust pot is not acceptable
for voltage matching.
Controls shall be provided to monitor the output current of the generator set and initiate an alarm
when load current exceeds 110% of the rated current of the generator set on any phase for more than
60 seconds. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level
approaches the thermal damage point of the generator.
Controls shall be provided to monitor the kW load on the generator set, and initiate an alarm condition
when total load on the generator set exceeds the generator set rating for in excess of 5 seconds.
Controls shall include a load-shed control, to operate a set of volt-free contacts (for use in shedding
customer load devices) when overload of the generator set occurs.
An AC over/under voltage monitoring system that responds only to true RMS voltage conditions shall
be provided. The system shall initiate shutdown of the generator set when alternator output voltage
exceeds 110% of the operator-set voltage level for more than 10 seconds, or with no intentional delay
when voltage exceeds 130%. Under voltage shutdown shall occur when the output voltage of the
alternator is less than 85% for more than 10 seconds.
A battery monitoring system shall be provided which initiates alarms when the DC control and
starting voltage is less than 25 VDC or more than 32 VDC. During engine starting, the low voltage
limit shall be disabled, and if DC voltage drops to less than 14.4 volts for more than two seconds a
"weak battery" alarm shall be initiated.
• Control Interfaces for Remote Monitoring: All control and interconnection points from the generator
set to remote components shall be brought to a separate connection box. No interconnections shall be
made in the control enclosure or in the AC power output enclosure. Provide the following features in
the control system:
Common alarm contact set rated 2A @ 30VDC to indicate existence of any alarm or shutdown
condition on the generator set.
One set of contacts rated 2A @ 30VDC to indicate generator set is ready to load. The contacts shall
operate when voltage and frequency are greater than 90% of rated condition.
Fused 10 amp switched 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer use. DC power
shall be available from this circuit whenever the generator set is running.
Page 10-137
Fused 20 amp 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer use. DC power shall be
available from this circuit at all times from the engine starting/control batteries.
The control shall be provided with a direct serial communication link for the Lonworks, modbus RTU
or modbus ASCII via RS 232 communication network interface as described elsewhere in this
specification and shown on the Contract plans.
• Communication Interface to SCADA. The Contractor shall provide necessary hardwiring from the
communication ports/instruments to the program logic controllers installed by the SCADA system
provider. Communication protocol shall be as required by the SCADA system provider. This work
shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation to the respective items included in the Bill of Quantities.
No other payment will be made by the Owner.
• Safety Guards. Guards to protect personnel from hot and moving parts shall be provided. All openings
and clearances shall be sized or arranged to prevent entry of a human finger.
• Drip Cap. A drip cap shall be provided on the thimble when the exhaust fan is installed vertically.
• Engine Ambient Temperature. Suitable for operation at 50 °C ambient.
b. Alternator
• Alternator: The alternation shall include and conform to the following.
 BS 5000 Part 99 or equal.
• Rating: kW rating as shown on the Contract plans, 400 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, neutral brought out, 50 Hz, at
0.95 pf and 50 °C ambient.
• Revolving field, brushless.
• Drip proof screen protected.
• Full amortisseur windings.
• Synchronous type.
• Exciter. Exciter shall be rotating brushless or static permanent magnetic exciter type, adequately sized for
maximum motor starting load, imposed by the motor starting sequence, indicated while permitting a
momentary voltage drop of no more than 40 volts.
• All insulation shall be Class H.
• Output at 50 °C ambient temperature shall be:
i. 100 percent full load continuously.
ii. 110 percent full load for one hour.
iii. 150 percent full load for one minute.
iv. 300 percent full load for one second.
v. Armature leads shall be brought out to terminals and a terminal for neutral shall be included.
vi. Dynamically balanced rotor permanently aligned to engine by SAE flexible-disc coupling.
c. Structural Steel Mounting Base
The structural steel mounting base shall include the following:
• The complete generating set shall be mounted on a structural steel base (containing a base day fuel tank), of
sufficient strength and rigidity to protect the assembly from stress or strain during transportation,
installation, and under operating conditions. Care shall be taken to prevent interference with oil drainage and
other maintenance procedures.
• The assembly shall be fitted with spring-type isolators with adjustable side snubbers to limit vibration and
the control console shall be resiliently mounted.
• Lifting eyes shall be provided at all four corners.
• Two lifting hooks shall be provided in the generator room roof slab with adequate capacity for lifting the
generator set per manufacturer’s recommendations.
Page 10-138
d. Exhaust System
The exhaust system shall conform with the following:
• The system shall be heavy duty, residential type, horizontally mounted exhaust silencer with condensate
drain valve and flanged couplings, as indicated.
• A suitable length of heavy-duty flexible-bellows-type stainless-steel exhaust adapter shall be provided with
flanged couplings at the engine manifold connection. The minimum length of the adapter shall be 100-
millimetres.
• All fittings and accessories shall be provided as required.
• Expansion joints shall be stainless steel, corrugated, and of suitable length to absorb both vertical and
horizontal expansion where required.
• Mounting channels suitable for floor mounting of muffler shall be provided.
• Long-radius 90° flanged elbow from flex to muffler supported from muffler shall be provided.
• Insulation of exhaust system. The insulation of the exhaust system shall include and conform to the
following:
i. Asbestos-free, rigid, hydrous-calcium-silicate precision insulation shall be provided, moulded in
sections, and split ready for application.
ii. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed .043 W/Gn•K at 100 °C.
iii. The density of the insulation shall not be less than 220 kg/m³ (13.8 lbs/ft³).
iv. The compressive strength of the insulation shall be 993 kPa (144 psi) based on 38-millimetre (1 ½”)
thickness of block.
v. The fire-hazard classification shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories or equal regulatory
organization, and shall not exceed the following:
a. Flame Spread Rating: 0
b. Smoked Development: 0
vi. The entire insulated exhaust system shall be aluminium jacketed.
vii. Insulation thickness shall be 125 millimetre.
e. Fuel System
The fuel system shall include and conform to the following:
i. Fuel storage tanks: To API 650-1978, UL and or ADNOC specification.
Base tank (day tank): To UL S601-1975.
ii. A tank level float switch.
iii. Fuel-level gauge.
iv. The black iron feed and return lines shall terminate at a globe-type shut-off valve with a flexible
connection to engine.
v. A drain valve and end plug at the bottom of the day tank.
vi. A renewable cartridge-type day-tank filter.
vii. A fire valve and bronze-body gate valve at the day tank.
viii. Isolating valves on lines, bonze body.
ix. Fuel shall be provided for testing and tanks shall be left full on acceptance.
f. Cooling Air System
The cooling air system shall include, the following:
i. An engine ventilating system.
ii. The cold-air-inlet louver assembly.
Page 10-139
iii. A replaceable air-intake filter.

iv. An outlet-duct-louver assembly.
v. A flange-mounted radiator with flexible-boot ductwork adapter.
g. Battery Charger
The battery charger shall include and conform to the following:
i. A wall-mounted battery charger for installation adjacent to the generator set suitable for a nickel-cadmium
(NiCd) battery.
ii. The equipment shall operate from a 230 V AC power source provided in the generator room.
iii. Standard features:
• Output regulation ± 0.5 percent for input variation of ± 10 percent from no load to full load.
• Automatic current limiting.
• Transistor output regulator.
• Integrated circuit control.
• Convection cooled.
• AC and DC breaker protection.
• Ammeter accuracy to within 5 percent.
• Voltmeter accuracy to within 5 percent.
• On-off switch.
• Equalize charge timer.
• Equalize pilot lamp indicator.
• Output seven amps maximum to zero amps float charging.
• Potentiometer to adjust float and equalize setting.
• Input 230 volt 50 Hz, single phase.
iv. The charger shall have a DC high-voltage alarm to indicate visually and audibly the battery terminal
voltage has reached a dangerous level.
v. The charger shall be capable of recharging the batteries to 80 percent rated capacity after eight hours and
to 100 percent after 24 hours.
vi. The connections to the battery shall be a minimum 6 mm² copper with R90 XLPE insulation.
h. Plant Emergency Stop Pushbutton
The plant emergency stop push button shall include and confirm to the following:
i. A cast ferroalloy enclosure with a 20-millimetre hub at top.
ii. A yellow cover with black stripes, with break-glass seal over the pushbutton.
iii. An “EMERGENCY PLANT SHUTDOWN” nameplate with minimum 12-millimetre high letters painted
steel edged in yellow with black stripes.
i. Finishes
Finishes to the generator set shall be as follows:
i. The alternator-mounted circuit-breaker panel and battery charger shall have a white finish to the internal
surfaces. The external surface shall match the engine and alternator finish.
ii. The exhaust and inlet air hoods shall match the engine and alternator finish.
iii. All other ducts and racks shall be finished in grey.
Page 10-140
iv. d) The Contractor shall furnish one litre of touch-up enamel identical to the items used or as approved
by the Engineer.
j. Equipment Identification
The Contractor shall provide equipment identification as follows:
i. Equipment identification shall be provided.
ii. The control panel shall include:
iii. Nameplates for controls such as alternator breakers.
iv. Nameplates for metres, alarms, indicating lights, and minor controls.
k. Fabrication
Fabrication of the generating unit shall be shop assembled and shall include:
i. Base
ii. Engine
iii. Alternator.
iv. Radiator and fan
v. Fuel and oil coolers.
10.11.9.6 Installation Works

The installation works shall include the installation and testing for the generating unit.
a. Installation of Generator Unit
Shall include the following:
i. Delivery of the engine generator set and accessories to site shall meet the applicable requirements of
Section 10.2.
ii. Factory-trained technicians shall be provided as required to ensure that installation is satisfactory and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and as specified herein.
iii. Installation requirements shall be coordinated with the structural works.
iv. Engine lubricating oil shall be provided.
v. All control wiring and switches shall be provided by the Contractor.
b. Testing of Generator Unit
The Contractor shall carry out performance tests on the generator set in accordance with the following
requirements.
i. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 10 working days in advance of the test date.
ii. The Contractor shall demonstrate the following:
• That all automatic safety shutdowns and alarms are functional.
• Unit start, transfer to load, retransfer to normal power, unit shutdown are functional on
“Automatic” control.
• Unit start and shutdown on “Manual” control.
• Unit start and transfer on “Test” control.
• Unit start on “Engine start” control.
• Operation of automatic alarms and shutdown devices.
iii. The Contractor shall run the unit on load for a minimum period of eight hours to show the load-carrying
ability, stability of voltage and frequency, adequate engine cooling, and the ability of the cooling system to
maintain room temperature rise over ambient (outdoor) at 10 °C or less.
Page 10-141
iv. At the end of the test run the battery voltage shall be checked to demonstrate that the battery charger has
returned the battery to a fully charged state.
v. The Contractor shall provide a load bank for site tests.
vi. Prior to commencing the tests the Contractor shall inspect the generator set for the following:
• Maintenance repair kit has been provided.
• That the repair kit is metric.
• Any loose connections in the wiring.
• That the generator set is clear dirt or foreign matter.
• That the set is in factory condition without any damage or corrosion.
• Mechanical fit and freedom from binding in the accessories and doors, governor and fuel pump
linkage, and all adjustable or sliding parts and controls.
vii. Check for fuel, oil, and coolant leaks.
viii. Check guards and for security of installation.
ix. Check paint finish as per specification.
x. Check fuel in use.
xi. Data plates for equipment specifications, metric, operation.
xii. Quality of data plates.
xiii. Storage compartment for operations and maintenance manual, etc.
xiv. All items inside panel to be identified.
xv. Wire termination markers are tubular and non aging.
xvi. Two sets of wire markers loose in panel.
xvii. Panel wiring to be AWG 14 and protected.
xviii. Check indicating lights for proper colour.
xix. Labeling on wiring for external connection.
xx. Panel doors are formed edges, locking (two keys), latching mechanism.
xxi. Fuel rack solenoid energized to run.
xxii. Alternator has:
• Openings screen protected.
• No cooling air trough terminal box.
• Terminal board in terminal box.
10.11.10 Grounding & Bonding

10.11.10.1 Summary
This section includes the specification for the grounding system and provision for bonding all the conducting parts to
the grounding system.
A new grounding system shall be provided for the facilities being constructed and shall incorporate the features as
described in this section. The grounding system shall provide protection and safety to personnel against electric shock
and protection of equipment against damage due to ground fault in the electrical system.
Suitable earth electrodes shall be included to achieve specified earth resistance.
10.11.10.2 References
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Page 10-142
2. BS 7671: Code of practice for earthing

Products used in the grounding system shall be copper or an approved copper alloy, unless otherwise specified, and
specifically manufactured for the purpose. All connectors, couplers, etc. shall preferably be made of Bronze. For use
with dissimilar materials, suitable bi-metallic connectors shall be used.
10.11.10.4 Performance Requirements

Grounding System Resistance: 2 ohms or to meet Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) requirements.
10.11.10.5 Submittals for Review

1. The following shall be included in the submittals:
• Shop drawings, product data and samples.
• Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive literature on the equipment.
• Make and model of each component.
• Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power requirements.
• Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
• List of spare Parts to be provided.
• Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against damage, prior to installation.
• Complete system diagram showing required components and routing.
2. The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit the final documentation
based on the Engineer’s comments.
3. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
4. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.
5. Submit full technical details and conductor size calculations suitable for short circuit levels.
6. Submit route of each cable or conductor as proposed.
10.11.10.6 Submittals for Information

1. Submittals: Submittal for information.
2. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
10.11.10.7 Submittals for Closeout

1. Project Record Documents: Record actual route of conductors, exact locations of components and grounding
electrodes.
2. Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by the Engineer and Abu Dhabi Distribution Company
(ADDC) where required.
3. Provide grounding test results
10.11.10.8 Regulatory Requirements

1. Conform to the following requirements:
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, USA
• BS 7671 - Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE, UK.
• Latest issue of Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) regulations.
2. In the case of conflict the ADWEA requirements shall take precedence.
Page 10-143
10.11.10.9 Products - Rod Electrodes

1. Shall be the ground rod electrode type, unless impracticable to drive deep into the particular soil.
2. Ground rod electrodes: 19mm diameter comprising a high strength steel alloy core with a molten welded copper
covering.
3. Shall be 3.6m long, in 1.2m sections coupled by strong bronze couplers.
4. Ground electrodes shall be solid copper or steel cored copper with a metallic bonded outer surface. Electrodes
shall be provided with special hardened tips and caps to avoid distortion being driven into the ground. Approved
non-ferrous clamps for connecting the electrodes to the copper strips leading to the disconnecting links shall be
provided.
10.11.10.10 Plant Electrodes

1. Shall be either Copper; or Cast iron where artificial treatment of soil is necessary because of high soil resistivity.
2. Description: Metallic-salt-filled tube electrode.
3. Shape: Straight or as specified.
4. Length: 2400 mm or as specified.
5. Connector: U-bolt pressure plate.
10.11.10.11 Earth Continuity Conductors

Sizes shall be as specified by ADWEA, unless otherwise indicated, but in no case shall size be less than half that of the
associated phase conductors. Insulation shall be of the same material as insulation in associated sub-circuits, colored
green and yellow.
10.11.10.12 Main Conductor

1. Main grounding conductors shall comprise tinned copper tapes of hard drawn, high conductivity copper strip or
stranded copper conductor.
2. Sized to meet requirements of latest edition of BS 7671 and to meet ADWEA regulations.
3. Grounding conductors shall be adequately sized for the maximum fault current and in no case shall be smaller than
38mm x 4mm for Low Voltage equipment.
10.11.10.13 Mechanical Connectors

Provide multiple bolted type Bronze connectors, purpose manufactured for electrode and conductor connection. Where
bare copper is bolted in connections, contact surfaces shall be silver electroplated.
Disconnecting bolts, nuts, locknuts and washers shall be made from phosphor bronze.
10.11.10.14 Exothermic Connections

Welding materials and suitable moulds manufactured by Company specializing in the Products specified in this section
for grounding system shall be used.
10.11.10.15 Pit Components

1. A concrete disconnecting chamber having a removable cover and containing a disconnecting link for test purposes
shall be provided over each earth electrode. The top of the chamber shall be at finished ground level, and the head
of each electrode shall be within the disconnection chamber.
2. Concrete pit: 300 x 300mm any 500mm deep or preformed concrete chamber shall be provided at locations for
electrode.
3. Pit Cover: Cast iron or concrete with legend "EARTH" embossed on cover and to be furnished with recessed
lifting hook.
4. The disconnecting link shall be of tinned copper, be not less than the connecting strip cross sectional area and have
a generous contact area.
Page 10-144
5. Concrete pits inside tunnel area shall be sized considering the concrete thickness.
10.11.10.16 Execution - Examination

1. Co-ordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work.
2 Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
10.11.10.17 Installation
1. Provide a complete new grounding system for complete electrical facilities of tunnel. Existing grounding system
shall be connected to the new system, if found suitable at locations of existing facilities.
2. Electrode System
• Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified
resistance to ground.
• Provide grounding pit with cover at each rod location. Install grounding pit top flush with finished grade.
• Contractor shall be responsible for any rock drilling necessary for the installation of the electrodes, for the
supply and installation of the concrete disconnecting chamber, and the provision of any chemicals required to
assist in obtaining a satisfactory earth.
• The ground electrodes interconnection shall be an electrically unbroken ring using P.V.C. insulated stranded
copper conductor grounding cable sweated to the test links. The cable be adequately sized and of sufficiently
low resistance to carry the maximum fault current for the clearing time of the protective equipment without
undue temperature rise.
• Each group of ground electrodes shall be connected to the station grounding system by stranded copper
conductor grounding cables or copper tapes. The cables shall be sweated to opposite ends of the earth ring and
to two different points on the station grounding system.
• Groups of ground electrodes shall generally be located as close to the building housing the switchgear as
practical, and where two groups are required they shall be located at opposite ends of the building.
• Each group shall comprise one or more interconnected electrodes, driven to a depth of 2m below the summer
water table and with heads located at a depth to suit the disconnecting chamber position.
3. Grounding system
• All connections to the ground tape and any joints in the run of the tape shall be, tinned, riveted, sweated and
electrically continuous. The minimum overlap of any connection be equal to the width of the larger of the two
tapes. When less than four rivets are used, they shall be located diagonally across the joint. Final earth
connections to motors shall be made by a bolted copper disconnecting link to facilitate removal of the motors
without the need for bending the tape. Links shall be located for ease of inspection and testing. Ground tapes
shall be fixed by means of non-ferrous spacer saddles, drilling of the conductors will not be permitted. Ground
conductors within buildings shall be run in ducts or on the underside of control room floors where possible.
• Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit trunking. Terminate each end on
suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
• Earth bars and earthing equipment shall be provided for each grounding system and all main earth electrodes,
grounding leads, neutral earth connections, etc., shall be connected to these.
4. Bonding
• Provide grounding conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where indicated. Bond
steel together.
• Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
• Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; and bond to ground.
• Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and fountain structures.
• Bond together each metallic raceway, pipe, duct and other metal object entering space under access floors.
Bond to underfloor ground grid. Use 35mm² copper conductor.
Page 10-145
• The non-conducting metal work of all electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Electric drives rated at
7.5 kW and above shall be provided with an ground conductor comprising tinned copper tape of 25mm by
3mm minimum cross section and connected to the main earth system. On drives of less than 7.5 kW a separate
insulated copper cable may be used for grounding purposes, providing the total impedance of earth continuity
system do not exceed one ohm. Cable armoring or sheath shall not be used as sole ground conductor.
• Install ground grid under access floors where indicated. Construct grid of 38mm x 4mm bare copper tape
installed on 600mm centers both ways. Bond each access floor pedestal to grid.
• Conduit or trunking shall not be used for earth continuity, but all conduit or trunking shall be connected to
earth. All joints for cable trays, ladders and trunking shall be bonded for continuity using 6 sq. mm. Y.G.
stranded copper cable. Flexible conduits shall have an additional external earth connection adequately bonded
at both ends. Where conduit and/or trunking is used to connect equipment not separately bonded to the
grounding system a separate internal ground conductor shall be run, which shall be securely bonded directly to
the respective equipment by means of a separate recognized earth terminal.
5. Equipment grounding
• Motors Grounding: Connect the motor terminal box to the relative ground loop. The terminal must be
mechanically connected to the frame or, where this is not feasible, extend the grounding conductor through an
insulated bushed opening in the connection box and connect to the frame.
• Main Switchboards, Switchgears and Motor Control Centers Grounding: Connect the special grounding lug or
busbars inside the cabinet to the main earth copper tape. Connect all parts of the switchboards, switchgears and
motor control centers other than “live” parts, to the ground bar in the board in an approved manner.
• Distribution Boards Grounding: Connect grounding conductor from the main distribution earth busbar to an
earth connector welded to the cabinet and earthing bushings on the incoming and outgoing feeder conduits.
• Bus-Duct Feeders Grounding: Connect the green coded ground busbar directly to the ground bus-bar in main
switchboard with ground copper tape.
• Fire Fighting Equipment: ground on a separate ring system.
• Provide separate grounding conductor for circuits supplying personal computers and other sensitive electronic
equipment as directed the Engineer.
6. Cable system
• The lead sheath and/or Armour wires on main cables shall be solidly bonded and grounded to provide
additional ground paths. Particular care shall be taken on cable termination boxes to ensure that the cable
sheath and Armour is adequately bonded to the associated item or plant.
• Particular care shall be taken to ensure grounding continuity across items of equipment situated within a cable
run. Should the design of such equipment not give an adequate and lasting continuity through its structural
body, then additional grounding and conductors shall be provided to independently bond the cable sheaths
together.
• Joints and terminal boxes in underground cables (if approved by the Engineer's Representative) shall be
bridged by tinned copper of adequate cross section, bonded to the cable sheath.
10.11.10.18 Field Quality Control

1. Perform inspections and tests to meet ADWEA requirements.
2. The resistance of any point in the earth continuity system to the main earth mass shall not exceed 2 ohm.
• Measure grounding resistance at each electrode location
• Measure overall grounding resistance of the complete system.
• Install additional earth electrodes if these figures are not met.
Page 10-146
10.11.11 Capacitor Bank Panel

10.11.11.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install capacitor bank panel with complete accessories as specified herein, as required
by the Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (ADDC), and as approved by the Owner and the Engineer. The power factor-
correction capacitor shall comply with the relevant BS and IEC standards.
Capacitor Bank Panel shall be capable of maintaining the power factor greater than 0.93 lagging. It shall be of double-
insulated dry type with a metalized-polypropylene dielectric and shall incorporate a discharge resistance. An
overpressure disconnector switch shall be fitted on each capacitor as an additional safety measure. Capacitance variation
due to ambient temperature shall be considered in the design and the capacitors shall derated to give the required
capacitance at 50°C. Capacitors that are not directly connected to the motor shall be protected by a circuit breaker and
wired through cable with a minimum 150% capacity of the capacitor rating.
A multistep-capacitor bank shall maintain the power factor at a set value indicated by the reactive-power regulator,
which shall control the opening and closing of the capacitor switching contactors. Detuned 3 phase reactors, iron cored
and with copper windings to be connected in series with each capacitor stage for harmonic current suppression. The
high inrush current due to capacitor switching shall be taken in to consideration by using a fast-acting contactor
designed for capacitor switching. The contactor shall be able to handle 100 times the rated current in addition to the
self-inductance effect of the connecting cable between the contactor and the busbar.
Full instrumentation shall be provided to indicate actual power factor in the system. The KVAR rating indicated on the
Contract plans and Bill of Quantities are indicative only. The Contractor shall select the appropriate power factor
equipment based upon the actual loads of the inductive type equipment finally selected, as required by the ADDC and
as approved by the Engineer.
10.11.11.2 Unit Capacitors

1. Capacitors shall comply with BS 1650 and shall be of a dry metalised film construction, containing no liquid and
must have low losses (typically 0.5 Watts/kVAr).
2. Each capacitor shall be housed in a sealed container and be fitted with a fail-safe, pressure sensitive disconnect
device.
3. Each capacitor shall be equipped with suitable discharge resistors to reduce the voltage to less than 50 V in on
minute, or less, after supply disconnection.
4. The capacitors shall be housed in a metal enclosure. The enclosure size should allow enough space and cabling
etc., for at least one additional capacitor unit to be fitted at a later date.
5. Provision shall be made to ensure that a connection point is available for a series connected, de-tuning reactor in
case of problems with harmonics.
6. The equipment must comply with BS 800 with respect to electrical interference.
7. The capacitors shall be protected by a fused switch-disconnector or circuit breaker on the load center.
8. The capacitor manufacturer must recommend the maximum fuse or circuit breaker that will ensure the protection
of each capacitor bank.
9. All power and control cables used within the capacitor bank enclosure must be in accordance with BS 6231 Type
BK.
10. Operating Temperature Limits: 110 percent rated voltage in ambient air temperature between 0°C and 55°C.
10.11.11.3 Power Factor Controller Units

1. The switching of capacitor units on each section of switchgear must be controlled by a single relay.
2. Reactive current sensing and solid-state electronic controller connects appropriate correction capacitors to line
through contactors, with time delay to accommodate capacitor resistor discharge and to prevent hunting.
3. The relay shall:
• have stage indication
• be fitted with hand/off/auto controls for each capacitor unit
Page 10-147
• have a time delay between the switching of stages

• have setting range from 0.9 lagging to unity power factor
• be capable of switching all fitted capacitor units and have provision for switching at least one additional
capacitor unit
• be fitted within the capacitor bank enclosure;
• have provision to switch all capacitors out of circuit when the essential alternator is operating, by operation of
a remote relay contact.
4. Switching contactors must have a minimum duty category AC4 to BS 5424 and a minimum current rating of 1.3
times the current consumed by the capacitor bank. (See BS 1650).
5. Due account must be taken of system harmonics when selecting capacitors.
10.11.11.4 Communication Interface

All capacitor bank panels shall have the following for communication interface.
1. Required input and output dry contacts for reporting alarm and status
2. RS 232 port for serial communication for advanced remote monitoring through computer network.
3. Communication port with Modbus Protocol for connection to SCADA system.
4. The Contractor shall provide necessary hardwiring from the communication ports/instruments to the program
logic controllers installed by the SCADA system provider. Communication protocol shall be as required by the
SCADA system provider. This work shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation to the item included in the
Bill of Quantities. No other payment will be made by the Owner.
10.11.12 Fire Alarm System for Tunnel and Ancillary Rooms

10.11.12.1 General
This specification describes fire detection and Two-Way Firefighters Communications System. The system shall also
have HVAC override control panel. The system shall have addressable intelligent initiation and control devices.
Detectors shall utilize digital communication. The system shall be in full compliance with National and Local Codes.
All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products of a single manufacturer, engaged in the
manufacturing and sale of analogue fire detection devices for over ten years. The system as specified shall be supplied,
installed, tested, and approved by the local Civil Defence, and turned over to the Owner in an operational condition. In
the interest of job coordination and responsibilities the installing Contractor shall contract with a single supplier for fire
alarm equipment, engineering, programming, inspection and tests, and shall be capable of providing a “UL Listing
Certificate” for the complete system. Any latest technology superior than the specifications included herein for the
tunnel lighting control will be considered by the Owner, if supported with satisfactory documentation. The fire alarm
systems shall be interfaced with the central SCADA and surveillance system and the ventilation motor control centers to
provide smoke ventilation control for the tunnel. Fire detection within the tunnel shall be achieved through fiber optic
linear heat detectors of the latest generation of fiber-optic sensors. Two levels of alarms shall be provided to facilitate
early warning. Alarm and the location shall be transmitted to the SCADA and surveillance system, to generate the
following action:
1. Start Smoke Ventilation Controls
2. Pressurization Fans initiation
3. Elevator recall
4. Generate alarms at the civil defence station through Etisalat leased lines
5. Generate automatic control action for the “Lane signal and variable message signs”
6. Transmit fire alarm to the lighting control system
7. Indicate the fire alarm locations at the graphic panels located at the control room buildings.
8. HVAC shut down
Action 1, 2, 3, and 8 shall be directly controlled by the fire alarm panels.
Page 10-148
The Master Control Panels shall be located in the control rooms and shall be suitable to cover all the ancillary rooms,
and tunnel area. Sub fire alarm panels shall be used as necessary for spot detection in underground utility rooms. The
master control panels and sub fire alarm panels shall be networked using suitable fiber optic cable. Detectors and
sounders shall be provided in buildings, as indicated on the Contract plans. Graphic type alarm annunciations showing
the floor plans of the underground ancillary rooms and tunnel area shall be provide in the control rooms, to facilitate
easy identification of the alarm location.
10.11.12.2 Standards, Codes and Approvals

1. The publications listed below form a part of this publication to the extent referenced. The publications are
referenced in the text by the basic designation only. The latest version of each listed publication shall be used
as a guide unless the authority having jurisdiction has adopted an earlier version.
2. Factory Mutual (FM):
FM AG Approval Guide.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Most Current or Approved Standard:
a) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
b) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code.
c) NFPA 90A Standard For The Installation of Air Conditioning And Ventilating Systems.
d) NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
e) BS 5839
4. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (“UL”) Appropriate “UL” equipment standards:
a) “UL” 864 Control Panels.
b) “UL” 268 Smoke Detectors.
c) “UL” 268A Smoke Detectors (HVAC).
d) “UL”1480 Speakers for Fire Protection Signaling Systems
e) “UL” 1971, Standard for Visual Signaling Appliances.
f) “UL”1076 Security.
10.11.12.3 Qualifications of Installers

1. Before commencing work, submit data showing that the manufacturer has successfully installed fire alarm systems
of the same scope, type and design as specified.
2. The Contractor shall submit copies of all required Licenses and Bonds as required in the State having jurisdiction.
3. The Contractor shall be qualified by the Underwriter's Laboratories. Upon completion of the installation the
Contractor shall certify the final system meets “UL” ongoing maintenance.
10.11.12.4 Manufacturer's Representative

Provide the services of a factory trained and certified technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the
type of system provided. The representative shall be licensed by law. The manufacturer’s representative shall supervise
installation, software documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. The
technician shall provide the required training to the Owner's personnel in the system operation and maintenance.
10.11.12.5 Submittal
The Contractor shall include the following information in the equipment submittal:
1. Power calculations. Battery capacity calculations. Battery size shall be a minimum of 125% of the calculated
requirement.
2. Supervisory power requirements for all equipment.
3. Power supply rating justification showing power requirements for each of the system power supplies.
Page 10-149
4. Complete manufacturers catalog data including supervisory power usage, alarm power usage, physical dimensions,
and finish and mounting requirements.
5. Complete drawings covering the following shall be submitted by the Contractor for the proposed system:
Tunnel zone plans in a CAD compatible format showing all equipment and raceways, marked for size, conductor
count with type and size.
6. Installation drawings shop drawings, and as-built drawings shall be prepared by an individual experienced with the
work specified herein.
10.11.12.6 System Requirements

The system shall be complete, electrically supervised proprietary style fire detection and two way firefighters telephone
and smoke control systems with microprocessor based operating system having the following capabilities, features and
capacities:
1. Communications between network nodes, each supporting an interactive, self-standing, intelligent local control
panel, with system wide display. Any network node shall be capable of supporting a local system in excess of
4000 input/output points. The Contractor shall provide necessary hardwiring from the communication
ports/instruments to the program logic controllers installed by the SCADA system provider. Communication
protocol shall be as required by the SCADA system provider. This work shall be considered as a subsidiary
obligation to the item included in the Bill of Quantities. No other payment will be made by the Owner.
2. The local system shall provide status indicators and control switches for all of the following functions:
a) Firefighters' override functions controlling smoke management.
b) Audible and visual notification alarm circuit zone control.
c) Two-way firefighters' telephone communications circuit zone control.
d) Speaker circuit zone control.
e) Status indicators for misting system and valve supervisory devices.
f) Any additional status or control functions as indicated on the Contract plans, including but not limited to;
emergency generator functions, fire pump functions, door unlocking and security with bypass
capabilities.
3. The system shall be listed by “UL” for configuration as an approved NFPA 13 fire sprinkler system deluge and
pre-action and total flooding extinguishing agent release system.
4. The system shall be “UL” 1076 listed for monitoring and reporting security system zoning.
5. Each intelligent addressable device or conventional zone on the system shall be displayed at the Central Alarm
Receiving Terminal and the local fire alarm control panel by a unique alphanumeric label identifying its
location.
6. RS232 port serial communication (SCADA) for advanced remote monitoring and control through computer
network. Communication port with BAC net TCP IP protocol for connection to SCADA system.
10.11.12.7 System Operation

1. Activation of any system fire, security, supervisory, trouble, or status initiating device shall cause the following
actions and indications in the Fire Command Center and at all networked Personnel Machine Interfaces using basic
graphics and multiple detail screens.
2. Fire Alarm Condition:
i. Sound an audible alarm and display a custom screen/message defining the zone in alarm and the specific
alarm point initiating the alarm.
ii. Log to the system history archives all activity pertaining to the alarm condition. The following action shall be
initiated with regard to public address system via Fire Alarm Panels and SCADA System.
iii. Sound an pre-announce tone followed by a field programmable digitized custom evacuation message, on the
zone of alarm, the zone below and the zone above. The visual signals shall operate in a similar pattern.
iv. A simultaneous message shall be delivered via all alarm speakers installed on the utility rooms and stair areas
indicating the requirement for occupants of these zones to remain alert for further instructions.
Page 10-150
v. A simultaneous message shall be delivered via all alarm speakers installed in stairways and elevators
informing occupants the expected high traffic load in the stairwells.
vi. An automatic announcement or tone evacuation signal shall be capable of interruption by the operation of the
system microphone to give voice evacuation instructions overriding the pre-programmed sequences.
vii. Status lights next to speaker selection switches on the control panel shall indicate speaker circuit selection.
viii. Audible signals shall be silenced from the fire alarm control panel by an alarm silence switch. Visual signals
shall be programmed to flash until system reset or alarm silencing, as required by the Civil Defense
Authority.
ix. Activation of any smoke detector shall, recall the elevators to the ground floor and the lockout of controls.
x. Where indicated on Contract plans heat detectors in elevator shaft and machine rooms shall activate an
elevator power shunt trip breaker.
xi. Remote LCD annunciators shall display the alarm condition via unique messages as required by the system
Owner. The graphic style shall indicate alarm zoning as specified.
xii. System operated duct detectors as per local requirements shall accomplish HVAC shut down.
xiii. Door closure devices shall operate by zones or by local requirements.
xiv. Activation of Stairwell pressurization, Smoke purge, and damper control shall be as required and operated as
per local requirements, and as advised by the Engineer.
xv. Print alarm conditions on system printer.
3. Supervisory Condition:
i. Display the origin of the supervisory condition.
ii. Activate supervisory audible and dedicated visual signal.
iii. Audible signals shall be silenced from the control panel by the supervisory acknowledge switch.
iv. Record within system history the initiating device and time of occurrence of the event.
v. Print supervisory condition to system printer.
vi. Remote LCD annunciators shall display the supervisory condition via unique messages as required by the
system Owner. The graphic style shall indicate alarm zoning as specified.
4. Trouble Condition:
i. Display the origin of the trouble condition.
ii. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panel and as indicated on the Contract plans.
iii. Audible signal shall be silenced from the fire alarm control panel by a trouble acknowledge switch.
iv. Trouble reports for primary system power failure to the master control shall be automatically delayed for a
period of time equal to 25% of the system standby battery capacity to eliminate spurious reports as a result of
power fluctuations.
v. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the
event.
vi. Print trouble condition to system printer.
vii. Remote LCD annunciators shall display the trouble condition via unique messages as required by the system
5. Security Condition:
i. Display the device originating the security condition.
ii. A dedicated security LED shall flash until the alarm has been acknowledged, then revert to a steady "ON"
state.
iii. Remote LCD annunciators shall display the security condition via unique messages as required by the system
Page 10-151
iv. The control system shall be capable of bypassing the alarms from an individual security system installed
within selected areas. The pass code allowing this function shall be assignable to individual security
personnel and each bypass action shall be logged to system history. Intrusion alarms occurring during a
bypass period shall be logged to history and displayed but no audible alarm shall occur at the control panel.
v. Print to the system printer (where required) the security condition.
10.11.12.8 Products
1. Control Panel
i. The fire alarm control panel shall be microprocessor based using multiple microprocessors throughout the system
providing rapid processing of smoke detector and other initiation device information to control system output
functions. There shall be a watchdog circuit, which shall verify the system processors and the software program.
Problems with either the processors or the system program the panel shall activate a trouble signal, and reset the
panel. The system modules shall communicate with an RS 485 network communications protocol. All module
wiring shall be to terminal blocks, which will plug into the system card cage. The blocks shall be colour coded to
prevent accidental crossing of wiring.
ii. The basic system shall have capabilities for 252 intelligent initiation devices and can be expanded up to 2500
intelligent initiation devices.
iii. The Device Loop Card shall be capable of 252 intelligent devices distributed between two SLC circuits. Any
trouble on one circuit shall not affect the other circuit. This module controls the signaling from the initiation
devices reporting alarms and troubles to the control panel. This module shall also provide the signaling to the
field devices for the controlling the output of specific initiation devices. The on board microprocessor provides
the Device Loop Card with the ability to function even if the main microprocessor fails. LED’s on the board
shall provide annunciation for the following; Power, Card Failure, Network Failure, Gnd. Fault, Alarm, Trouble,
Short Zone 1, Short Zone 2, Style 6 Open Zone 1, Style 6 Open Zone 2. This card shall plug into the system card
cage.
iv. The Signal Line Circuits shall be tested for opens, shorts and communications with all addressable devices
installed before connection to the control panel. Systems without this capability shall have a test panel installed
for initial testing to eliminate any possible damage short term or long term to the control panel. After initial
testing replace the test panel and proceed with complete testing.
v. The Person Machine Interface shall provide the system information on ¼ VGA monochrome LCD, with Touch
Screen and LED display. Graphic user interface shall be menu driven with 4 tabs showing the level and the total
events for each tab. The tabs shall be; Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Security. Each level shall show 5 events
simultaneously. The LED displays shall indicate Power, Audibles On or Silenced, and Partial System Disabled.
Systems not having the above LED’s shall provide separate LED’s within the control panel enclosure with
appropriate labels. Selection buttons shall be backlit to aid the operator in the selection process. There shall be
controls for scrolling throughout the event list. A button shall provide zoom in zoom out for the amount of
information desired for a specific entry. The PMI shall be capable of monitoring the power supply loading and
show available capacity for future expansion planning. The Person Machine Interface LCD shall provide
standard NFPA symbols showing Fire Service Equipment, Hazards and People in the area of alarm. Systems
without this type of display shall supply a “UL” listed Graphics package with their system. The LCD shall have
a keyboard screen to allow the technician ability to enter text and numbers for passwords or text changes.
vi. Panels with no such facility shall provide dedicated PC with Graphics.
vii. The Zone Indicating Card shall contain 4 NAC circuits rated at 4 amps each with power-limited outputs. The
zone inputs for the card shall be isolated and independently supervised. There shall be at least 3 unique
codes/signals for each circuit based on system logic. These signals shall be Temporal Code 3 (Evacuation),
Steady (Such as "Recall"), and Alert (Such as "Tornado Alert"). The card shall be listed for notification
appliances, horns, bells, strobes, and speakers. The card shall also be listed for NFPA 13 Pre-Action Release,
Halon 1301, FM200, Lease Line, and Municipal Tie. The card shall have the ability to wire the circuits Style Y
or Style Z with outputs synchronized. The card shall have the following LED’s to provide trouble shooting and
annunciation; Power, Card Failure, Network Failure, Gnd. Fault, Zone Activation or Trouble.
viii. Where required to monitor a large amount of relays, provide a Supervised Input Module, which will monitor up
to 16 inputs and includes two Form C contacts rated 1 amp at 24 VDC resistive. Each input shall be individually
programmed for supervised or non-supervised circuits. This module shall be connected to a system network.
ix. The system card cage shall provide the mounting of all system cards, field wiring, and panel’s inter-card wiring.
The terminal strips for the cards shall be colour-coded to eliminate the possibility of making the wrong
Page 10-152
connection. All power limited field wiring shall connect to the top of the card cage. All non-power limited
internal wiring shall be connected to the bottom of the card cage. The card cage shall hold the systems cards and
have capability of connecting multiple card cages to meet system demands.
x. The system shall interface with the Public Address/Background support multiple AIC cards. This card shall be
mounted in the system card cage.
xi. The Firefighter’s Master Telephone (FMT) shall communicate with the firefighters telephones in the field. The
system shall operate 5 telephones of hook simultaneously without loss of audio quality. The FMT shall have
"Warden Page" capability. The FMT shall communicate with the system through the control area network. The
FMT shall be door mounted for easy access.
xii. The Telephone Zone Card (TZC) shall be card cage mounted. The card shall have 8 Class B telephone circuits.
This card shall produce dial tone and busy signals where appropriate. The card shall communicate with the FMT
through the control area network.
xiii. The system card cage shall provide the mounting of all the system cards, field wiring, and panel’s inter-card
wiring. The terminal strips for the cards shall be colour-coded to eliminate the possibility of making the wrong
connection. The terminal blocks maybe disconnected and reconnected while the system is powered up without
causing any difficulties. The card cage shall hold the systems cards and have capability of connecting multiple
card cages to meet system requirements.
xiv. System response time from alarm to output shall not exceed four (4) seconds.
xv. To expedite system troubleshooting, the system cards shall have ground fault detection, and diagnostic LED’s by
card.
xvi. All system cards and modules shall have Flash memory for downloading the latest module firmware.
2. Power Supply
i. The system Power Supply/Charger shall be a 12-amp supply with battery charger. The power supply shall be
filtered and regulated. The power supply shall have a minimum of 1 power limited output rated at 4 amps, and a
minimum of 1 output rated at 12 amps. The system power supply can be expanded up to 48 amps. The auxiliary
power supply module shall share common batteries with the primary power supply. The system power supply
shall have 4 relays, 1 for common alarm, one for common trouble and two programmable relays. The power
supply shall be rated for 120/230V AC 50/60 Hz.
ii. The battery charger shall be able to charge the system batteries up to 100 AH batteries. Battery charging shall be
microprocessor controlled and programmed with a special software package to select charging rates and battery
sizes. An optional Thermistor for monitoring battery temperature to control charging rate shall be available.
iii. The power supply shall have a plug for an AC adapter cable, which allows a technician to plug in a laptop
computer for up or down loading program information or test equipment.
iv. Transfer from AC to battery power shall be instantaneous when AC voltage drops to appoint where it is not
sufficient normal operation.
3. System Enclosures
Provide the enclosure needed to hold all the cards and modules as specified with at least spare capacity for two
cards. The enclosures shall be either black or red. Provide the colour as to the local Civil Defence requirements.
The outer doors shall be capable of being a left hand open or a right hand open. The inner door shall have a left
hand opening. System enclosure doors shall provide where required ventilation for the modules or cards in the
enclosure.
4. System Printer
The system printer shall be built in inside the panel it acts as event logging device providing a permanent history
report of all system activity. Printouts shall be automatically spooled on a take-up reel for easy record storage.
5. Device Programming Unit (DPU)
The programming tool shall program the intelligent devices with usage and device addresses. The unit shall test
both the loop wiring for grounds, opens and shorts. Systems not having this ability shall, tests all the above items
and provide a written report documenting the testing procedure as required in the submittal section.
The system programmer shall print labels for all addressable devices and contain the complete SLC circuit and
device numbers.
6. Intelligent Initiation Devices (Smoke & Heat Detectors):
Page 10-153
i. Smoke Detectors
All initiation devices shall be insensitive to initiating loop polarity. Specifically, the devices shall be insensitive to
plus/minus voltage connections on either Style 4 or Style 6 circuits.
The smoke detector shall be an intelligent digital photoelectric detector with a programmable heat detector.
Detectors shall be listed for use as open area protective coverage, in duct installation and sampling assembly
installation and shall be insensitive to air velocity changes. The detector communications shall allow the detector to
provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within four (4) seconds. Detectors shall be
programmable as application specific, selected in software for a minimum of eleven environmental fire profiles
unique to the installed location. These fire profiles shall eliminate the possibility of false indications caused by
dust, moisture, RFI/EMI, chemical fumes and air movement while factoring in conditions of ambient temperature
rise, obscuration rate changes and hot/cold smoke phenomenon into the alarm decision to give the earliest possible
real alarm condition report. The intelligent smoke detector shall be capable of providing three distinct outputs from
the control panel. The outputs shall be from an input of smoke obscuration, a thermal condition or a combination of
obscuration and thermal conditions. The detector shall be designed to eliminate calibration errors associated with
field cleaning of the chamber. The detector shall support the use of a relay, or LED remote indicator. Low profile,
white case shall not exceed 2.5 inches of extension below the finish ceiling. Detector wiring shall not require any
special shielded cable. The smoke detector shall be an intelligent digital photoelectric detector with a
programmable heat detector. Detectors shall be listed for use as open area protective coverage, in duct installation
and sampling assembly installation and shall be insensitive to air velocity changes. The detector communications
shall allow the detector to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within four (4)
seconds.
ii. Heat Detectors
Thermal (Heat) Detectors shall be rated at 135 degrees fixed temperature and 15 degrees per minute rate of rise.
Detectors shall be constructed to compensate for the thermal lag inherent in conventional type detectors due to the
thermal mass, and alarm at the set point of 135 degrees Fahrenheit. The choice of alarm reporting as a fixed
temperature detector or a combination of fixed and rate of rise shall be made in system software and be changeable
at any time without the necessity of hardware replacement. The detectors furnished shall have a listed spacing for
coverage up to 2,500 square feet and shall be installed according to the requirements of NFPA 72 for open area
coverage.
Detector bases shall be low profile twist lock type with screw clamp terminals and self-wiping contacts. Bases shall
be installed on an industry standard, 4" square or octagonal electrical outlet box.
iii. Manual Stations
Provide addressable manual stations where shown on the Contract plans, to be flush or surface mounted as
required. Manual stations shall contain the intelligence for reporting address, identity, alarm and trouble to the fire
alarm control panel. The manual station communications shall allow the station to provide alarm input to the
system and alarm output from the system within less than four (4) seconds. The manual station shall be equipped
with terminal strip and pressure style screw terminals for the connection of field wiring. The pull station shall be of
double action type.
Surface mounted stations with Metal finish shall be installed in the basements shall be mounted using a
manufacturer's prescribed matching red enamel outlet box. The pull station shall be of double action type.
iv. Interface Devices
Addressable Interface Devices shall be provided to monitor contacts for such items as sprinkler water-flow, tamper,
and PIV switches connected to the fire alarm system. These interface devices shall be able to monitor a single or
dual contacts. An address will be provided for each contact. Where remote supervised relay is required the interface
shall be equipped with a SPDT relay rated for 4 amps resistive and 3.5 amps inductive.
v. Telephone Jack
A telephone jack to be connected on the telephone zone cards. The Remote Telephone Jacks are connected to the
emergency telephone system. They are wired to the telephone zone circuits Telephone Zone Card located in the
main panel system enclosure. The remote telephone jacks are mounted to a single gang electrical box.
10.11.12.9 Linear Heat Detector

1. General
Page 10-154
The Contractor should design, supply and install a fiber optic linear heat detector of the latest generation of fiber-optic
sensors. The fiber sensors, due to their measurement characteristics, shall be especially suitable for malfunction-free fire
monitoring in objects where conventional fire detection are not suitable due to local and environmental conditions. The
basic principle is that Physical measurement dimensions, such as temperature or pressure and tensile forces, affecting
the glass fibers and locally change the characteristics of light transmission in the fiber. As a result of the dampening of
the light in the quartz glass fibers through scattering, the location of an external physical effect can be determined so
that the optical fiber can be employed as a linear sensor.
The detection principle shall be made especially suited for temperature measurement with optical fibers made of quartz
glass with semiconductor laser diodes and a new type of evaluation procedure: the mothed of Optical Frequency
Domain Reflection, it shall be able to measure both scatter effects in up to 4 km-long optical fibers. Through
optimization of the measurement interval time and the local resolution, it shall be possible to display temperature
changes of a few degrees Celsius per minute safely and without malfunction. For these reasons, the system shall be
especially suitable for fire detection in objects in which the use of conventional fire detectors is not suitable due to
extreme environmental conditions.
2. System Feature
The system shall consist of fiber-optic sensor cables and the controller, represents an ideal solution and it shall have the
following features:
i. There shall be No electronics and be hence the system shall be immune to electromagnetic disturbances of all
kinds, and so be ideal for temperature measurement in electromagnetically contaminated areas.
ii. Continuous detection over the entire length of the protection field to linear temperature measurement.
iii. The design of the sensor cable (useful life approx. 20 years) shall be very robust and therefore resistant to
environmental influences, such as temperature, pressure and moisture changes, but also to pollution and exhaust
gases, which still include a considerable amount of corrosive materials.
iv. Installation of the sensor cable shall be simple, as shall be the maintenance. Defective locations can be repaired
(spliced).
v. The Monitoring shall be up to a length of four kilometers per controller.
vi. Redundant design of the monitoring distance shall be possible.
vii. The Detection of convected and radiated heat guarantees reliable fire detection at its location, even when there
are strong air currents.
viii. Fire alarm with precise location indication; information concerning size and spread of fire shall be immediately
available to the emergency services.
ix. There shall be a possibility of data transmission about the course of the fire via standard interface to the alarm
and operating systems.
x. The fiber optic sensor cable shall be with stainless steel tube and halogen-free plastic coating providing a
maximum immunity to environmental influences, such as moisture, heat, cold, corrosion and even
electromagnetic interference fields.
xi. The fiber optic sensor cable shall be easily installed and be completely maintenance-free. Defective locations can
be repaired (spliced) easily.
10.11.12.10 System Architecture

The linear heat detector Controller shall have the following system architecture:
1. sensor cable
2. OTS controller with laser light generation, measurement signal evaluation and software
3. external power supply 24V DC (optional 115 / 230 V AC available)
4. 10 voltage-free outputs (logic freely selectable) for alarm and malfunction reporting to a fire detection centre (9
alarms, 1 malfunction collector) (optionally, 20 outputs available)
5. 4 opto-decoupled inputs, e.g. for resetting, external alarms, monitoring
6. Connection for PC over an RS232 interface for setting operating parameters during initial placement in use.
The PC with the program for initial placement in use is uncoupled during operation.
Page 10-155
7. A PC shall be connected at the interface to display zones and/or the temperature profile (visualization
software).
8. Fibro Gateway, shall be provided. Ethernet interface (TCP/IP) to integrate the controller into a network.
9. All LHD controllers shall be interlocked to SCADA system for monitoring and control.
10.11.12.11 Sensor Cable

The sensor cable shall consist of a stainless steel tube with an outside diameter of 1.17 –1.8 mm. In the tube there
should be 2 independent quartz fibers, each with an outside diameter of 0.25 mm. The fibers shall be dyed differently
for differentiation. The remaining cavity shall be filled with a water-free, heat-conducting fill material.
The stainless steel tube shall be clad with a layer of fine stainless steel wires and sheathed in black plastic insulation to
4mm. This plastic coating will permit better handling in installation, and improve both the mechanical stability and the
sensitivity to pure radiant heat. To simplify zone division, markings of the consecutive meter number is printed on the
sensor cable in intervals of 1m. The sensor fiber is a multimode, graded index, 62.5/125/250 micron waveguide of
international standard dimensions and characteristics. The fiber core material is specifically designed to generate a
strong Raman scattering contribution.
OTS Controller. The controller shall be modularly designed and shall have the following partial modules:
• Transmitter module
• Receiver module
• Digital module (with RS 232 and Ethernet interface)
• Power supply module
The controller shall be supplied with 24 volt DC or Optionally with a wide-range power supply ( min. 86V up to max.
264V AC)
It shall have a total of 20 potential-free switch outputs.
The controller shall be parameterized over a connected PC. The entire cable length shall be subdivided into different
zones for the various requirements (e.g. video, ventilation, illumination zones). A zone is an uninterrupted stretch of the
sensor cable. The specialized Contractor shall submit a proposal (In coordination with different facilities) for the Zones
to be defined as desired, also overlapping, etc. A maximum of 128 zones shall be available to be programmed.
Generally, an alarm is generated if one of the following 3 alarm criteria is exceeded in a zone:
• maximum temperature per zone
• temperature development per zone, in terms of time (time differential)
• temperature difference between a measurement location and the zone average
• (zone differential)
These settings shall refer to a zone and can be adapted individually by zone to the circumstances of protection area.
One PC shall be connected in ongoing operation of the measuring system. The measurement data shall be permanently
displayed with this PC .The zone view, temperature curve for whole length of cable, Frequency curve and
Backscattering curve shall be able to be shown on the screen. It will be helpful for operation and management the fiber
linear detection system.
Size: 19” Rack mounted version 3 units of height

Controller H x W x D 13.3cm x 44.9cm x 31.8cm
Electrical: Maximum power consumption 50W
DC Power supply: Range Power supply: 22… 30VDC 24VDC 30V 22V SUB-D
Nominal Accumulator’s loading voltage 3WK3
Accumulator’s min. discharge voltage
Connector type
AC Power supply: Range Connector type, 85… 264V AC IEC 320C13 EU IEC 320C13
230V AC Connector type, 115V AC US
Page 10-156
Optical: Maximum LASER power, at outlet

<150mW 980nm
LASER nominal wavelength
Max. measuring distance x = 1km, 2km, 3km, 4km
Fiber optic connector type: adaptor E2000 8° angled polished
Communication RS232
Interface: Connector type: socket SUB-D 9 pin male
Alarm Programmable outputs (relay) 20
settings: Connector type: socket SUB-D 25 pin female
Programmable inputs (opto-coupled) 4
Connector type: socket SUB-D 9 pin female
Environmental: Operating / storage temperature 5…40°C
Relative humidity 95%, no condensation
Installation
1. Perform work in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 72.
2. Fasten equipment to structural members of building or metal supports attached to structure, or to concrete
surfaces.
3. Conduit shall be run straight and parallel to walls and ceilings.
4. Where approved, limited energy cable installation shall be used. All cable runs shall be run at right angles to
building walls, supported from structure at intervals not exceeding 1 meter and where installed in
environmental air plenums, be rated for such use and tied/supported by components listed for environmental air
plenums installation.
10.11.12.12 Boxes, Enclosures And Wiring Devices

1. Boxes shall be installed plumb and firmly in position.
2. Extension rings with blank covers shall be installed on junction boxes where required.
3. Junction boxes served by concealed conduit shall be flush mounted.
4. Upon initial installation, all wiring outlets, junction, pull and outlet boxes shall have dust covers installed. Dust
covers shall not be removed until wiring installation when permanent dust covers or devices are installed.
5. "Fire Alarm System" label shall be applied to all junction box covers.
10.11.12.13 Conductors
1. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the Contract plans at each with wire markers at terminal points.
Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.
2. All wiring shall be supplied and installed in compliance with the requirements of the National Electric Code,
NFPA 70, Article 760, and that of the manufacturer.
3. Wiring for signal line circuits shall be minimum 1.5 sqr mm, strobe circuits shall be a minimum 2.5 sqr mm,
speaker circuits shall be minimum 1.5 sqr mm twisted (and meet "UL" 2196 requirements), telephone circuits shall
be a minimum 1.5 sqr mm twisted.
4. All splices shall be made using solderless connectors. All connectors shall be installed in conformance with the
manufacturer recommendations.
5. A consistent colour code for fire alarm system conductors throughout the installation.
6. The installation Contractor shall submit for approval prior to installation of wire, a proposed colour code for
system conductors to allow rapid identification of circuit types.
7. Wiring within sub panels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for adjustment and
maintenance.
Page 10-157
10.11.12.14 Devices
1. Relays and other devices to be mounted in auxiliary panels are to be securely fastened to avoid false indications
and failures due to shock or vibration.
2. Wiring within sub-panels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for adjustment and
maintenance.
3. All devices and appliances shall be mounted to or in an approved electrical box.
10.11.12.15 Field Quality Control: Testing, general

1. All Alarm Initiating Devices shall be observed and logged for correct zone and sensitivity. These devices and their
bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in an area not visible when installed, showing the initials of the
installing technician and date.
2. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before system is energized. Resistance,
current and voltage readings shall be made as work progresses.
3. The acceptance inspector shall be notified before the start of the required tests. All items found at variance with
the Contract plans or this specification during testing or inspection by the acceptance inspector shall be corrected.
4. Test reports shall be delivered to the acceptance inspector as completed.
10.11.12.16 Acceptance Testing

1. A written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for testing the fire alarm system components and installation will be
prepared by the engineer in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification. The Contractor shall be responsible
for the performance of the ATP, demonstrating the function of the system and verifying the correct operation of all
system components, circuits, and programming.
2. A program matrix shall be prepared by the installing Contractor referencing each alarm input to every output
function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input.
3. The installing Contractor prior to the ATP shall prepare a complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric
annunciator displays.
4. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following:
i. System wiring shall be tested to show the following results and the system subsequence operation:
• Open, Shorted or Grounded Circuits.
• Primary and Battery power disconnected.
ii. System notification circuits and appliances operate as programmed. Audibility and Visual levels meet required
standards.
iii. System shall demonstrate the correct messages at the FACP and Remote Annunciator.
iv. System off site reporting shall be verified for alarm, supervisory and trouble.
v. System shall be tested for stand-by battery backup as outline in this specification.
10.11.12.17 Documentation
System documentation shall be supplied to the Owner and shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. System record drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible drawings, and a CD ROM with
copies of the record drawings in DXF format for use in a CAD drafting program.
2. System Operating, Installation and Maintenance Manuals.
3. System matrix showing input signals to output commands.
4. Provide a copy of the system program on a CD ROM.
Page 10-158
10.11.12.18 Warranty and Services

1. The Contractor shall warranty the entire system for electrical and mechanical failures for a period three years. The
warranty shall begin with the completion of the acceptance testing or when beneficial use to the Owner is
determined.
2. The fire alarm system Subcontractor or manufacturer shall offer for the Owner’s consideration at the time of
system submittal a priced inspection, maintenance, testing and repair contract.
3. The Contractor performing the contract services shall be qualified and listed to maintain ongoing certification of
the completed system to the “UL” installed system listing.
4. The installation Contractor shall furnish training as follows:
• Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgment of alarms.
• Training in the system operation including manual control of output functions from the system control
panel.
10.11.13 Uninterruptible Power Supply

10.11.13.1 General
This section contains the description and specifications for the complete uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for the
emergency power to the tunnel lighting, traffic control, CCTV, SCADA, Fire Alarm and communication system in the
tunnel structure to be furnished and installed by the Contractor as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified
herein.
Contract plans and specifications are to be considered as supplemental to each other. Work specified but not shown, or
shown but not specified, shall be performed or furnished as though mentioned in both specifications and Contract plans.
Minor items, accessories or devices reasonably inferable as necessary for completion and proper operation of any
system shall be provided by the Contractor for such systems whether or not they are specifically called for by
Specifications or Contract plans.
10.11.13.2 System Description

1. The UPS shall incorporate the latest technology and shall be designed to provide a continuous source of
conditioned power with total-system-power support during brownouts and blackouts. The system consists of
maintenance-free, sealed, lead-acid battery, automatic battery charger, electronic controls, and metre panel, DC-to-
AC power inverter, and a solid-state-driven transfer switch. These system components shall be carefully matched to
one another to make the unit a completely self-contained, fully automatic power source for operation on any AC
loads within the specified volt-ampere output rating during power failure emergencies. The system shall be suitable
for keeping high-intensity discharge lamps or fluorescent lamps on line.
2. The power-module-electronics cabinet shall house the rectifier/charger, inverter, system status/control, and a
circuit-breaker compartment containing input and output breakers.
3. The storage battery system shall provide DC power to the inverter upon loss of AC input power. Batteries will be
contained in a lockable enclosure.
4. The battery disconnect shall isolate the storage battery from the UPS power module for protection and maintenance
purposes.
10.11.13.3 Relevant Legislation, Directives and Reference Standards

1. General
The choices, engineering developments, choice of materials and components and the construction of the equipment
must comply with current legislation, directives and standards.
Some of the laws, regulations, directives and standards are listed below to provide a minimum frame of reference.
The list is intended as a guideline only and is not exhaustive.
In the event of conflict of laws, it is agreed that the most restrictive law, regulation or standard will apply.
2. Legislation, Directives and Standards.
a) 73/23EEC
Page 10-159
Council Directive 73/23/EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonisation of the laws of Member States relating
to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.
b) 89/336EEC
Council Directive 89/336/EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating
to electromagnetic compatibility.
c) 93/68EEC
Council Directive 93/68/EEC of 22 July 1993 amending Directives 87/404/EEC (simple pressure vessels),
88/378/EEC (safety of toys), 89/106/EEC (construction products), 89/336/EEC (electromagnetic
compatibility), 89/392/EEC (machinery), 89/686/EEC (personal protective equipment), 90/384/EEC (non-
automatic weighing instruments), 90/385/EEC (active implantable medicinal devices), 90/396/EEC (appliances
burning gaseous fuels), 91/263/EEC (telecommunications terminal equipment), 92/42/EEC (new hot-water
boilers fired with liquid or gaseous fuels) and 73/23/EEC (electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits)
d) 92/31EEC
Council Directive 92/31/EEC of 28 April 1992 amending Directive 89/336/EEC of 28.04.92 on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
e) IEC EN 62040-1-2
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) "General and safety requirements for UPS used in restricted access
locations"
f) EN 50091-2 / EN 62040-2
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements” Class RS / C3
g) IEC EN 62040-3
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) “Performance requirements and test methods”
h) EN ISO 9000
Quality management and quality assurance standards. Guidelines for selection and use.
i) EN ISO 9001
Quality systems Model for quality assurance in Design, Development, Production, Installation and Servicing.
10.11.13.4 Description of Supply

The purpose of the present specifications is to define minimum design, construction and testing requirements relating to
the supply of Uninterruptible Power Systems.
1. Design Specifications
The Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) shall include the following functional units:
• Rectifier / battery charger
• Inverter
• Static changeover switch
• Batteries
2. Rectifier/Battery Charger
The rectifier/battery charger shall be designed and made to the following specifications:
• Input switch with auxiliary indicator contact
• Battery Switch with fuse protection.
• Fully controlled Rectifier Bridge.
• Input Power Factor Control mode:
o > 0.99 ( for 20 – 200 KVA)
Page 10-160
o > 0.90 ( for 250 – 800 KVA)

• Battery circuit filter to limit current ripple to batteries to 0.05 C10.
• Testing and control circuit which, in addition to normal functions, shall:
o Check the battery circuit (battery fault)
o Test the battery by automatically performing a partial battery discharge at weekly intervals or at
user's request; the test will be performed by both a voltage testing method and through an
algorithm that checks the battery discharge curve
o Adjust battery float voltage as a function of ambient temperature (correction factor – 0.11% per
°C).
o Stop the rectifier/ charger when output voltage is too high and can damage the battery (max
value allowed 2.4 VPC)
• Calculate the remaining autonomy time of the battery during discharge.
3. Inverter
The inverter shall be designed and made to the following specifications:
• Transistorized (IGBT) switching circuit (pulse width modulation, PWM) capable of converting direct current
voltage from rectifier or battery into alternating current voltage
• For 250-800 KVA – Class H three phase transformer.
• Output filter sized to create an output voltage sinusoidal waveform.
• Neutral sized 1.6 times of phase current.
• Testing and control circuit which, in addition to normal functions, shall:
• Stop the inverter when the voltage is too low as a function of the discharge time, as specified below under
“Battery”.
• Automatically adjust the output power in accordance with ambient temperature.
4. Static Changeover Switch
The static switch assembly shall be designed and made to the following specifications:
• Static switch consists of a pair of thyristors connected in anti-parallel in bypass supply output phase.
• Bypass input and maintenance bypass (standard) on-load manual switches.
• Back-feed detection circuit as specified by IEC/EN 62040-1-1, Article 5.1.4
• Output load manual switch with auxiliary indicator contact
Microprocessor controlled logic shall:
• Automatically transfer load to bypass line without interrupting the power supply in the event of overload,
over-temperature, out-of-tolerance dc voltage or inverter fault conditions.
• Automatically transfer load to bypass line with a delay of 20 ms if the bypass and the inverter are not
synchronised, in the event of overload, over-temperature, out-of-tolerance dc voltage or inverter fault
conditions.
• Automatically re-transfer the load from the bypass line to the inverter line, without interrupting the power
supply, when normal load conditions are restored.
The static bypass shall be equipped with a back-feed protection device compliant with Article 5.1.4 of IEC/EN 62040-
1-1; it shall be available for the user a relay signal contact for the control of the external back-feed isolator to be
installed on the bypass line upstream from the UPS.
5. Batteries
The valve-controlled, sealed lead acid battery shall have an enclosure made of a self-extinguishing material.
The battery shall be housed in a cubicle similar to that of the UPS and shall be protected by fuses located on each pole
and through an appropriate non automatic circuit breaker.
Page 10-161
In order to protect batteries from damage due to deep discharge (discharge with light load), the inverter stop voltage
shall automatically vary as a function of discharge time, as specified in the table below:
Discharge up to 1 hour Shutdown voltage > 1.65 Vpc ……….

“ “ 2 hours “ “ > 1.68 Vpc ……….
“ “ 4 “ “ “ > 1.75 Vpc ……….
“ “ 10 “ “ “ > 1.80 Vpc ………
To maximize battery operating life, the float voltage shall be automatically adjusted as a function of the ambient
temperature.
Batteries will have an operating life of 10 years and, in the event of total failure of the main power source, will
guarantee the supply of nominal UPS output power for a minimum autonomy of 30 minutes or as advised by the Owner.
6. Float/Equalize
You shall have the possibility to choose charging method floating, equalizing or both according to battery manufacturer
recommendation. The charger shall automatically initiate the equalize voltage for the pre-set time on the equalize timer
in case of equalizing method is configured.
10.11.13.5 Operating Modes

This section describes the different operating modes of the Uninterruptible Power System.
1. Normal Operating Mode
The supply of the loads connected to the Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) shall always be supplied by the inverter
which shall be supplied by the primary line through the rectifier/battery charger.
The rectifier shall also provide the power necessary to keep the battery in the fully charged condition.
The inverter shall be synchronized with the bypass line so that the load can be transferred from the inverter to the
bypass supply on account of an overload or inverter stop without any interruption in the power supply to the load.
2. Inverter Stop or Overload
In the event of an inverter stop (whether manual or caused by a UPS protection), the load shall be automatically
transferred to the bypass supply without interruption.
Similarly, when a temporary overload downstream of the UPS occurs, the load shall be automatically transferred to the
bypass supply without interruption and then returned to the inverter when the overload condition ceases.
This capability shall permit the inclusion of loads whose inrush current is greater than the supply capacity of the
inverter, provided always that the bypass supply is within accepted limits.
In the event of an overload with an unsuitable supply, the Uninterruptible Power System shall not transfer the load and
shall continue to supply it from the inverter for a period of time dependent upon the extent of the overload and the
characteristics of the UPS.
These anomalous operating conditions shall be alarmed to the user.
3. Emergency (Mains Failure)
Upon failure or reduction of the primary AC source, the load shall be supplied by the battery through the inverter.
During this stage, power shall be drawn from the battery whose charge will be reduced.
Visible and audible signal shall alert the user to this operating state.
The remaining autonomy time shall be calculated by a diagnostic algorithm.
4. Restoration of Primary AC Source
Upon return of the primary AC source to within tolerance limits, the Uninterruptible Power System shall start operating
in normal mode again.
Even if the battery is completely discharged, the rectifier/charger shall automatically restart, "walk in" and gradually
assume both the inverter and battery recharge loads.
5. Maintenance Bypass Switch
Page 10-162
The UPS shall be equipped with a system of bypass switches capable of transferring the load to the bypass supply
without interruption so as to enable the UPS to be switched off and isolated for maintenance operations.
6. Digital Interactive Operation
a) Normal service condition:
UPS loads will always be powered by the direct line through the bypass static changeover switch unit. The
battery charger must also supply the energy required to maintain the storage batteries at the maximum
charge level. The IGBT inverter must be active and constantly synchronized to the direct line in order to
allow the instantaneous transfer to the conditioned line, caused by variations in the direct line electrical
parameters outside the range allowed.
Digital interactive operation mode shall provide an high efficiency value (98%).
b) Emergency condition (mains failure):
In the event of a direct line and conditioned line power failure, units will be supplied by the storage
batteries by means of the inverter. During this stage, the storage batteries will be discharged. The user will
be alerted to the operating mode by visual and acoustic indications.
A diagnostic algorithm will calculate the remaining autonomy available.
c) Return of direct line power:
When the direct line parameters return within the limits allowed, the Uninterruptible Power Supply system
automatically supplies the load from the direct line again. When power is restored on the conditioned line,
the battery charger automatically starts up again and immediately begins charging the storage batteries, so
that the maximum charge is regained in the shortest possible time.
7. Control and Diagnostics
The electronic power supply module control must be optimized in order to guarantee optimum three-phase power
supply to the load
• Controlled battery charging
• Minimum phase effects on the power supply network
8. Vector Control
The Uninterruptible Power Supply unit shall be equipped with a digital vector control with control algorithm based on
DSP (Digital Signal Processor).
The special DSP algorithms shall guarantee rapid and flexible processing of the measured data, allowing the rapid
generation of controlled variables. Moreover, a real time control of inverter electronic devices must be possible, to
achieve:
• Improved short-circuit behaviour;
• Synchronization or precision of the phase angle between the UPS output and the bypass Supply, even with
distorted supply voltage;
• High level of flexibility in parallel operation.
10.11.13.6 Controls, Measurements, Signals and Alarms

The Uninterruptible Power System shall be controlled by a microprocessor and shall be provided with a back-lit Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD) of 8 lines X 12 characters, as described below.
1. Controls. The UPS shall be provided with the following controls:
Inverter start
Inverter stop (to avoid switching off accidentally, while simultaneously allowing prompt action to be taken in the
event of an emergency, the button must be held down for 2 seconds)
Audible alarm cancel
2. Measurements. The following measurements shall be provided:
Rectifier/Battery
Page 10-163
Battery current while charging …………….

Battery current while discharging …………….
Rectifier/battery voltage …………….
Battery cubicle temperature …………….
Inverter, Bypass
Frequency …………….
Voltage …………….
Current …………….
Overload …………….
Output/Load
Frequency …………….
Voltage …………….
Current …………….
Applied load percentage …………….
Crest factor …………….
3. Signals and Alarms

The following signals shall be provided:
Phase sequence fault …………….

Battery fault …………….
Imminent shutdown due to battery at end of discharge …………….
Inverter out of synchronisation …………….
Overtemperature …………….
Inverter blocked …………….
Overload …………….
Load on bypass …………….
Bypass supply fault …………….
Bypass voltage high/low …………….
Bypass switch closed …………….
Battery temperature alarm …………….
Insufficient ventilation …………….
The following signals shall be made available at terminal board through a zero potential contact:
System normal (summary alarm) …………….

Inverter fault …………….
Load on bypass …………….
Primary supply failure …………….
End of battery autonomy imminent …………….
Page 10-164
The UPS shall also:

• Upon mains failure, display on the display unit the remaining battery autonomy which shall be a function of
battery state and charge (discharge curve, degradation, operating temperature, etc)
• Keep a record of all events preceding and following a fault
• Display simple, clear instructions to step the user through guided procedures
• Permit the addition of a second serial RS232 board for simultaneous and independent use of local and remote
monitoring
• Be able to support graphic measurement and signalling software
• Be able to interface with a network monitoring system using serial communication
• Be able to provide a telemonitoring function
• The terminal board shall also include an input terminal capable of stopping the inverter, stopping the
rectifier/battery charger and inhibiting the static switches (E.P.O.).
a. General Characteristic
1. Cooling. Forced-air cooling shall be provided when necessary to ensure that all components are operating at
below their specified operating temperature.
2. EMI Suppression. Electromagnetic effects shall be minimized to ensure that computer systems, or other similar
electronic systems, shall neither adversely affect nor be adversely affected by the system.
3. Control Power Supply. The control logic power supply shall incorporate a parallel redundant concept with the
inverter DC input and the mains as a dual source of logic power, to insure control power at all times.
4. Nameplate Markings. The nameplate shall be located on the front inside display door and the following
minimum information shall be provided on the nameplate:
a) Model # and Serial #
b) AC Input Voltage, Phase and Frequency
c) Rated AC Input Current
d) Bypass AC Input Voltage, Phase and Frequency
e) DC Input Voltage and Current
f) Rated Output Voltage, Amps, Frequency, Power Factor, KVA and KW.
5. Enclosure. The enclosure shall be a NEMA-1(IP-20), free standing.
6. Cable Entry. Cable entry shall be through the top or bottom of the cabinet.
7. Parallel configuration. It shall be possible to allow simultaneous operation of up to 8 units to be connected in
parallel for future expansion.
8. Communication Interface. All UPS shall have interface cards to have the following and shall be complete with
system software.
a) Required input & output dry contacts for reporting alarm & status.
b) RS 232 port for serial communication (SCADA) for advanced remote monitoring and control through
computer network.
c) Communication port with modbus protocol for connection to SCADA system
d) The Contractor shall provide necessary hardwiring from the communication ports/instruments to the
program logic controllers installed by the SCADA system provider. Communication protocol shall be
as required by the SCADA system provider. This work shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation
to the item included in the Bill of Quantities. No other payment will be made by the Owner.
Page 10-165
10.11.13.7 Uninterruptible Power System Technical Data

Parameter Unit of measure Specification Supplier's data
data
1. Input Characteristics
Nominal voltage (V) 400 V 3-phase …………
Tolerance on voltage assuming float @ 2.27V per

cell (%) ±15 …………
Nominal frequency (60 Hz selectable) (Hz) 50 …………
Tolerance on frequency (%) ±5 …………
Input power factor @ 400V >0.99 (60-200KVA)

>.90 ( 250 – 800 …………
KVA)
Total harmonic distortion (THDi) @ full load (%) ≤3 (60-200KVA) (Any

active filter not …………
acceptable)
≤5 (250-800KVA)
(12 pulse rectifier)
(Any Active filter not
acceptable)
2. Inverter Output Characteristics
Nominal voltage (380/400 selectable) (V) 400 3-ph. + N …………
Nominal power @ 40°C (kVA) 60, 80, 100, 160, 200, 250,
300,400,500,600,
…………
800
Automatic adjustment of nominal output power as (%) @ 25°C = 110% …………

a function of temperature (%) @ 35°C = 105% …………
(%) @ 40°C = 100% …………
Output voltage stability in steady-state condition

for input within permitted limits and load
variations from 0 to 100% (%) ±1 …………
Stability in dynamic conditions for 100% load

step variations (%) According to IEC/EN
…………
62040-3 Class 1
Load crest factor without derating 3:1 …………
Output voltage distortion with 100% linear load (%) <3%(60-800KVA) …………
Output voltage distortion with 100% non-linear
Page 10-166
Parameter Unit of measure Specification Supplier's data

data
load and crest factor 3:1 (%) <5 …………
Phase angle precision with 100% unbalanced

loads (degrees) (degrees) <±3(60-200KVA)
…………
<±2(250-800KVA)
Output frequency stability in synchro with mains

(1 – 2 – 3- 4 selectable) (%) ±1 …………
Output frequency stability with internal oscillator (%) ± 0.1 …………
Frequency slew rate (Hz/sec) <1 …………
Permitted overload:
for 10 min.(60-800KVA) (%) 125% …………
for 60 sec.(60-800KVA) (%) 150% …………
3. Characteristics of Electronic Static Changeover Switch
Nominal voltage (380/400 selectable) (V) 400 V 3-phase …………
Tolerance on voltage (%) ±10 …………
Tolerance on frequency (1- 2- 3- 4 selectable) (%) ±1 …………
4 UPS Characteristics
Noise level measured @ 1 meter and @ 100%

load according to ISO 3746 (dBA) <76 (60-800KVA) …………
AC/AC efficiency at 100% digital interactive (%) 98 (60 – 200 KVA)

mode …………
97(250 -800 KVA)
AC/AC efficiency at 100% double conversion (%) 94 (60-200kVA)

mode …………
92%(250-800KVA)
Operating Temperature °C 0-40
Maximum Relative Humidity (%) Up to 90
Operating Altitude (m) 1000
The constructional and functional characteristics of UPS must be in line with state of the art technology in this field; in
particular:
• They must be equipped with test points
• Instruments and indicators must make maintenance and troubleshooting on the equipment quick and easy
• The cubicle must be robust in construction and must be suitably treated to resist corrosion.
The supplying company must be able to provide proof that it is ISO9001 certified for design and manufacturing and for
the provision of services.
Page 10-167
The UPS will be guaranteed for one year during which time the Supplier will provide technical assistance.
10.11.13.8 Miscellaneous Provisions

This section defines details of services, activities and means necessary to complete the supply of the Uninterruptible
Power System.
1. Documentation
All technical documents issued by the Supplier, in particular the user handbook and the installation,
maintenance and troubleshooting guides must be in the English language.
2. Packaging
The Supplier shall ensure that all equipment is suitably packaged.
10.11.13.9 Maintenance
1. The system shall be fan cooled. The air intake will be from the lower cabinet front and air exhaust will be from the
cabinet top. Air intake will be filtered via easily removable air filters. No additional maintenance other than
periodic system visual inspections shall be required.
2. System MTBF (mean time between failures) shall be 250,000 hours minimum.
3. System MTBR (mean time between repair) shall be 30 minutes typically.
4. System construction shall be in a modular format to facilitate repair. All printed circuit boards shall have plug-in
type connections to the system. No separate tools will be required to maintain the system. The system shall be
completely serviceable from the front. Rear and side access shall not be required.
10.11.14 Telephone Systems

10.11.14.1 General
1. All materials to be used in this project must conform to ETISALAT Specifications. All shall be brand new, well
protected from weather during storage, handling and transportation. All must be free from physical and other
defects or damages.
2. ETISALAT may conduct test on the internal wirings and installation to ascertain whether these are in conformity
with ETISALAT Specifications.
3. The limit of ETISALAT conduit pipe responsibility is only up to the project entrance. The Contractor has to
provide internal cables, all boxes and conduits, etc. including leading in ducts within the plant area and for
connecting the leading in duct/pipe to the ETISALAT duct. ETISALAT however, will provide (and install) the
exchange cable at the Main Distribution Box (M.D.B.)
4. This Section specifies the supply and installation of the following, to provide a telephone system in good working
order:
a. PABX
b. Telephone sets
c. Telephone terminal board and main distribution frame (MDF)
d. Telephone Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)
e. Telephone Distribution Board (TDB)
f. Telephone socket outlets
g. Telephone cables
h. Conduits and accessories
1. Documents
Submit technical documents and manufacturer’s catalogues for PABX system and all other items included with the
tender.
Page 10-168
2. Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings of the proposed system, technical details for PABX and the telephone sets, together with
manufacturer’s literature.
10.11.14.3 Products Description of PABX - General

1. The system required is a digital, IP based, with stored programme control and fully integrates voice and data
communications. This IP communications system shall be able to provide a variety of solutions and services for
telephony, messaging, networking, conferencing, customer management, time/call management, Voice over IP and
more.
2. The digital central controller shall be fully microprocessor based switching centre employing PCM encoded voice
and data interference free digital internal duplex communications. Voice quality shall be natural, clear and crisp
allowing the highest level of intelligibility for distances of up to 2 kM on a single non-polarized, twisted pair for
each station. The station can be configured with one or more units to provide necessary configuration.
10.11.14.4 Capacity
The project shall be served with a PABX and the capacities shall be as advised by the Owner and the Engineer or as
shown on contract plans.
10.11.14.5 System Features

1. Attendant (Operator) Console: The console shall provide a high degree of operator comfort through its character
alphanumeric display, clearly laid out operating panel and operator prompting in plain text, all of which will
simplify call processing. The operator console shall be located in the Main Control Room. All conduits and wiring
shall be provided from the MDF to the operator console.
2. Operation without Console: The functions of the attendant console can be taken over by one or more stations –
switched to night answering or universal answering.
3. Night answering arrangements: If no attendants console, at the answering position is ready to answer, or if no
incoming calls have been answered for a long period, the night answering mode is activated. Calls are directed to an
extension for answering. Each trunk can be assigned a station for night answering.
4. Operator Prompting: Display, LEDS, ringing tone and signal tones that can be heard on the speech path, shall en
sure that the operator is given accurate guidance.
5. Visual and Audible Call Signalling: Each incoming call is signalled, visually by LED and audibly by tone ringing.
Tone ringing can be disconnected, so that when one call is in progress, a further call is only signalled visually.
Waiting calls are indicated on the display, when the attendant console is idle and are signalled by the LED.
6. Attendant Handset/Headset Operation: A headset can be plugged into the console in place of the handset. For call
processing operations, the super-lightweight headset is particularly recommended. Both hands are then free to make
notes while putting through calls. The console is placed out of service by pulling the plug.
7. Signal Tones: Signal and acknowledgement tones heard in the earphone of the handset, or over the loudspeaker,
assist the operator in call processing, in conjunction with the visual initiations and signals.
8. Speed Calling System: Instead of using long call numbers, the attendant can dial frequently required outside
destinations by means of speed calling numbers. Suffix dialling to a specific station is possible.
9. Traffic capacity: The system must have a traffic carrying capacity of 1 erlangs/extension.
10. Cross talk attenuation: Cross talk attenuation shall be 85 dB minimum.
11. Data communication interface module: This module, which is an auxiliary device, shall be provided to connect data
terminals or computers. The module is used to set up data connections directly from the data terminals, or from an
associated telephone.
12. Data communication interface (DCI): The interface to the machine for the diagnostics and traffic programme and for
modification. The date terminal shall have RS 432C Port as defined by EIA.
13. Emergency telephones use in the tunnel area shall be monitored and recorded via CCTV and SCADA system.
10.11.14.6 Station Related Features

1. Inside and outside calls: Stations can receive inside calls and trunk calls, depending on their class of service.
Page 10-169
2. Call Transfer to Attendant: A station user can speak to the attendant during an outside call and request that the
connection be taken over.
3. Station-to-Station calling: All stations users can call one another, by dialling the appropriate call number. Station
to station user terminates his call immediately the connection is set up automatically.
4. Flexible connection of telephone sets: Telephones of different signalling methods can be connected to one and the
same line. All telephones are connected to the system via wire cables. All connecting paths are matched to existing
attenuation values from the services terminal.
5. Line lockout: The feature shall provide for the automatic release for a station from the common equipment, which
has remained off-hook longer than the normal interval, before dialling. This is to enable the common equipment to
be used by other stations.
6. Power failure: The system shall allow certain specified incoming trunk lines to be directly connected, either to a
predetermined extension or to a group of extensions, in case of power failure or any interruption in the C.C.
7. Insertion loss: The insertion loss shall be maximum 1dB.
8. Level of barring: The class of service for the system shall be the following fully barred:
a. Access to ETISALAT lines.
b. External access through attendant.
c. Access to attendant only.
10.11.14.7 Maintenance and Servicing Facilities

1. Faults are detected by corresponding automatic and manual testing and diagnostic programmes and are indicated
on the service or maintenance terminal and at the attendant console.
2. The system will not require any special test device, as faults are diagnosed via the attendant console and the
service terminal. Diagnostic maintenance can be performed within the PABX.
3. Each processor contains a test programme, which runs at regular intervals. If a fault occurs, the testing process is
repeated. If a fault is confirmed, the defective processor is removed from service and the type and location of the
fault shall be indicated.
10.11.14.8 Telephone Set Features

1. The tenderer shall detail the features that apply on each type of set. Feature access on electronic/digital sets shall
be initiated by key access. From normal telephone sets, special access codes may be dialled.
2. The following features may be provided on electronic/digital sets or normal telephone sets, provided that a basic
complement is available.
i. Attendant recall: Station users shall be able to recall the operator during an established call.
ii. Automatic dialling: From electronic/digital sets, keys may be allocated to frequently called numbers. By
operation of the key assigned to a particular number, it shall be automatically dialled. The assignment of
such keys shall be part of a service charge routine, but the station user shall programme the actual number
to be dialled.
iii. Call forward (follow me): When call forward is operational, all incoming calls to the station shall be
automatically forwarded to another preselected destination, either inside or outside the system. The
alternative destination shall be set by the station user when he leaves his location.
iv. Call forward (on answer): When an incoming call to a station is not answered within a predefined period
of time, it shall be automatically forwarded, to a preselected destination within the system.
v. Call status indication: On electronic /digital sets, a display shall indicate the state of a call.
vi. Call waiting: With call waiting, a station user, who is on an established call, is informed that another call
from outside is waiting. The station user may then, either disconnect the existing call, or put it on hold and
establish the new connection. In the latter case, he may alternate between the new and the old connection.
vii. Display: It is preferred that as an option on electronic/digital telephone sets, that displays be provided to
indicate such things as digits dialled, the number of a calling party, time and date information, etc.
Page 10-170
viii. Handsfree operation: Provision must be made for handsfree operation. The telephone set shall have a
speaker, which enable a conversation to be made without using the handset.
ix. Hold: Calls may be placed on hold, in order that other calls may be made. Provision shall be made to
alternate between held and active calls.
x. Last number redial/save number redial: It shall be possible to redial automatically, the last number and to
have it redialled automatically.
xi. Speed call: Speed calls allow a station user to dial a one or two digit code and have the system
automatically dial the call. Two types of sets may be designated – a controller and a user. The controller
may define as well as use the speed call list. A user may only access and use the speed call list
xii. Transfer: This feature allows a station user on any two party call, to hold the existing call, originate a call
to a third party and then transfer the call to the third party
xiii. Volume control: All tones made by a telephone set shall be capable of manual volume control. Where
tones are used to indicate different conditions, it is preferred that their volumes be controlled
independently.
10.11.14.9 Telephone Sets

1. Desktop/wall mounted stations: These stations can call any other station in the system and are capable of capable
full duplex communication using the handset. These stations will have the unrestricted outside trunk line access
with barring for overseas outgoing calls. The LCD display at each master station shows the called and calling
station ID. These shall be tagged as MT (Master Telephone).
2. The staff telephone sets shall be provided with all the above features. The staff telephones shall be used for
intercom system and shall not have direct access to outside trunk lines except through the operator console. These
shall be tagged as T (Telephone).
3. Weatherproof Stations: Rugged emergency telephone sets shall be provided near to each fire-hose cabinet, at each
manual pull station location, at cross passages, inside tunnel substations and ancillary building rooms. These sets
shall not include dial pad. These sets shall have automatic ring down capability to connect the control desk on
pick-up of the handset. Emergency telephone sets shall be installed inside an enclosure and clearly labeled. These
shall be tagged as ET (Emergency Telephone).
10.11.14.10 Telephone Distribution Boxes

1. Telephone distribution boxes to be semi-flush or flush mounted, sheet steel or light metal alloy enclosure, recessed
into the walls, in an approved manner.
2. All telephone cabinets shall be totally enclosed dust-protected and vermin proof. The cabinet shall accommodate
150% of the pairs indicated in the Contract plans.
3. The cabinet shall include a fixed bakelite board of not less than 20mm thickness. Cabinet shall be fabricated with
ample interior dimensions, to allow for easy maintenance.
4. When there is a suitable alternative to the bakelite board, the prior written approval of the Engineer shall be
obtained.
5. The cover shall be hinged to the body. It shall be easy to open and close. When the cover is opened, it shall be
possible to carry out the wiring, efficiently and effectively.
6. Telephone cabinets and boxes must not be used for any other services.
7. Distribution box shall be equipped with terminal blocks, cable fittings and wire rings, so that the wiring may be
carried out effectively.
10.11.14.11 Terminal Block

1. Distribution boxes shall be provided with 10 or 20-pair standard two sided termination blocks. The block shall be
such that one side shall be suitable for a soldered or wire wrapped termination and the other to be fixed by screws.
2. The terminal block shall be made of high insulating phenol resin or equivalent material and should be so
constructed as to be easily and securely fitted to the interior of the box.
3. The terminal block capacity shall be in accordance with the requirements shown on the Contract plans. Each block
shall be supported by an insulator, provided with clamping screws and easy to identify.
Page 10-171
4. Terminal screws and washers must be made of brass, plated with nickle or equivalent and shall have good
conducting properties.
5. The screws shall be of non-removable type and suitable for connection of 0.6mm–0.9mm diameter conductors.
6. The paper used for the designation strip must be of good quality. The transparent plate on the designation strip
shall be of hard PVC plate or equivalent.
7. Finally, the terminal block must be free from any cracks, flaws, burrs, warp, or any other imperfections.
10.11.14.12 Power Supply

Power supply arrangement shall comprise: Power supply unit, designed for the required initial configuration, with
interrupt-free changeover to battery mode for 230V AC, 50 Hz electric supply.
10.11.14.13 Main Distribution Frame

The main distribution frame shall be of closed cabinet design with jumper facilities for:
1. Connection of the system connection cable for the planned initial configuration.
2. Distribution strips for connecting the AC line connection cable with splitting facility. The terminal locations shall
be at least 1.5 times the number of lines required in the initial plan.
3. Distribution strips for connecting the trunks with the splitting facility and over voltage protection.
10.11.14.14 Telephone Socket Outlets

1. Sockets shall be of finishing same as the electrical sockets, but of different size and shape from those used for
electrical wiring. The sockets shall be of ETISALAT approved type.
2. Sockets shall withstand a minimum of 750 (seven hundred and fifty)-plug insertions.
10.11.14.15 Telephone Cables

1. Cables shall be high performance 2 pair, wire of 0.8mm diameter.
2. Cables shall be composed of 20 gauge bare solid copper conductors, dual insulated with polyethylene and fire
retardant polyethylene.
10.11.14.16 Conduits and Conduit Accessories

Conduit and conduit accessories shall be as specified elsewhere.
10.11.14.17 Documentation
1. All documents shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
a. Technical description of the PABX tendered.
b. Service manual for maintenance personnel.
c. Operating instructions for station users.
d. Operating instructions for the attendant console.
• Training:
• Maintenance personnel.
• The manufacturer/supplier shall train the Ministry personnel in the maintenance of the PABX system.
2. Attendants
Personnel operating the attendant console must be trained in the operation and monitoring of the PABX system.
3. Warranty
The warranty shall extend for a period of 2 (two) years from the date of issue of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
4. Spare Parts
Page 10-172
a. Provide spare parts that are identical to and interchangeable with similar parts installed.
b. The following specified spares shall be provided for the telephone system:
c. Telephone set with basic features and connection cables as advised by the Engineer or the Owner.
d. Telephone socket outlets as advised by the Engineer or the Owner.
e. PABX power supply unit as advised by the Engineer or the Owner.
f. Fuses and MCCB used for PABX unit as advised by the Engineer or the Owner.
g. Telephone cables, as advised by the Engineer or the Owner.
10.11.14.18 Execution - Documentation

1. General
a. Installation shall be as directed by the Engineer.
b. The general arrangement of outlets, terminal boxes and conduits shall be as shown on the Contract plans.
2. Telephone Terminal Cabinet
Fix in the location indicated on the Contract plans and as directed by the Engineer.
3. Telephone Outlets
a. Fix where instructed by the Engineer, or in accordance with approved shop drawings.
b. Fix to a wall recessed outlet box.
4. Wiring
a. Fix and terminate neatly, all cables.
b. Provide cable marking to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
10.11.14.19 Separate Earthing

1. All drain wires shall be terminated on an earth post at the MDF/TB, which ultimately shall be connected, by a
conductor of minimum 16 sq.mm, to an independent earthing system, intended for the telephone network. Such
earthing shall be totally separate the other earthing systems of the building. Connection to the MDF/TB post and
the electrodes shall be of the soldered type.
2. The maximum earth resistance shall not be more than 2 Ohms.
10.11.14.20 Training
1. Training of personnel designated by the Engineer shall be carried out to enable to take over, operation and
maintenance of the telephone systems in the shortest time.
2. The Contractor shall submit a detailed training program which shall include theoretical and practical training for 1
month for personnel to be deputed by the the Owner, at the end of the guarantee period., in addition to the Owner’s
personnel participation in the installation and testing stages as specified earlier, and maintenance during the
guarantee period.
10.11.14.21 Telephone Service Connection

The Contractor shall include payment of all charges to Etisalat for effecting the telephone service connection, including
the cost of instruments, as a subsidiary obligation of the works as specified herein. The Contractor shall include in his
contract price all costs required for the service connection works. No additional payment will be made by the Owner.
10.11.15 Public Address and Voice Evacuation System

10.11.15.1 General
The Contractor supply, install, test and commission a high quality system for the tunnel as specified herein. The system
shall be specially designed, Paging and announcement of Evacuation messages in specified areas and shall consist
basically of the following in the main control rooms.
Page 10-173
• Call Station with Keypads

• Metal rack which shall incorporate
o Central Controller
o Power Amplifiers
o Music Source Units
• Loudspeakers
• Metallic Racks, Wiring and accessories necessary for excellent operation of the system.
Supply and installation of accessories and materials shall be complete and in strict compliance with the international
standards of the Public address system and Voice Evacuation System standards, IEC 60849.The system wiring shall be
completely separated from any other system.
The system shall be supplied and commissioned by a specialist company who are the authorized agent in the Emirate of
Abu Dhabi and have a minimum of 5 years experience in the similar field. All the main equipments such as amplifiers,
controller, speaker etc. shall be from same manufacturer.
10.11.15.2 System Overview

The system shall provide digital audio signal processing and transmission of audio signals via a simple network system.
The audio transportation in the system shall be in digital form except for the 100V line from the power amplifiers. It
shall be possible to use the system with or without a PC.
The public address system shall be a networked sound management system. The system elements shall be connected by
the daisy chain principle. The interconnection between the system units shall be achieved by using glass optical fiber
cable. The units shall have individual addresses, which are automatically checked by the Controller for any errors. The
network controller shall have Ethernet and RS232 interfaces. The system shall have both audio and data communication
via fiber cable. All equipment with either audio input or output functions shall have built-in audio processing facilities.
The audio processing shall be done in the digital domain. The user-friendly audio-processing interface can be used for
adjusting the audio processor for various audio inputs and outputs.
The PA system shall have the following functional requirements as minimum. The PA system is the medium to make
public broadcasts of routine, situational, important and emergency announcements. The PA system shall provide
simultaneous broadcasting of different calls to different locations. The PA system shall provide an automatic
announcement facility for making routine, situational or emergency announcements. It shall be interfaced with Fire
alarm system and SCADA via supervised voltage free contacts to do Emergency Broadcasts from Built in Digital
Recorder. The system shall be simple and logical to operate for anyone. The system shall provide a means to give
customized indications for the selection buttons of the call stations.
One Call Station shall be installed in each Control Room or as approved by the Engineer. It shall be possible to do
announcements to a single zone, Group of zones or an all call. The call shall be preceded by an attention tone and
Recorded message if required. Emergency announcements shall be possible to initiate from the call station. Each zone
shall be provided with its individual Power Amplifier to power connected speakers. Power Amplifiers shall be available
in different Power Rating Mainly 1 x 500w, 2x 250w, 4x 125w, 4x 60w, and 8x 60w.Amplifier power shall be selected
according to the connected load. Minimum 20 % Spare capacity shall be available in the Amplifier. One spare
Amplifier shall be provided for each zone according to Power rating. The complete system shall be designed for
redundant network wiring any single point of failure shall not affect the system functions in any manner. Each zone
should have two loops and individual amplifiers. Wiring shall be done using fire proof cables. The zoning of areas shall
be as per the detailed system design.
10.11.15.3 Equipment Specifications

1. Central Controller
The central controller shall be capable of simultaneously routine up to 28 audio channels to the various zones, deliver
power to the system components like Call Station, fault reporting and controlling of the system. A PC can be connected
to the controller, which shows any status change in the system via the configuration and logging software. The central
controller shall be located in the control room.
This unit shall have the following functions:
a) General Features
Page 10-174
Ethernet and RS232 links to external device and PC for diagnostics and logging. It shall have an integral slot for a Flash
Memory Card to Record Digital Messages in Wave files. The duration shall be depending on the Memory Capacity. It
shall be possible to record up to 1000 messages and first messages for 20 minutes duration shall be continuously
monitored. It shall be possible to play minimum 4 messages simultaneously. Monitors all components including the
microphone capsule and reports status change. Controller shall have the capability to handle 256 priorities and 1024
zones and store attention and alarm tones allowing connected call stations to access the same for announcement
broadcast or alarm broadcast.
b) Input signals
Accept 4 analogue audio inputs ( 2 are selectable between line and microphone level while 2 shall be fixed line level
inputs). Accept 8 control inputs - momentary or single shot inputs from, fire alarm panels.
c) Output signals
Provide 5 control outputs ability to program any control output to any control input ( full matrix ). Provide 4 analogue
line level outputs. Unit shall have an internal speakers and headphone socket for monitoring.
d) Indications and Controls
Provide 2 x 16 character LCD display for status indications and a rotary control for navigating the menus and also to
change the volume for the headphone and the internal speaker. Power supply ON/OFF switch with indication. It shall
meet the following technical requirements as minimum included herein.
Mains Voltage 90 to 230 V AC, 50/60Hz
Analog line inputs

Frequency response -3 dB at 20 Hz and 20 kHz
Signal-to-noise ratio > 87 dBA at maximum level
XLR max. input range +18 dBV to +6 dBV
Cinch max. input range +6 dBV to -6 Dbv
Analog microphone inputs
Nominal input level -57 dBV
Signal-to-noise ratio 62 dBA for dynamic range < 25 dB
CMRR > 55 dB at 100 Hz
Input impedance 1360 ohm
Phantom supply 12 V ±1 V @ 15 mA
Input range -51 dBV to -7 dBV
Output impedance <100 ohm
Signal-to-noise ratio 89 dBA at maximum level
Output crosstalk <-85 dB
Distortion at 1 kHz <0.05%
Emissions Acc. to EN55103-1/ FCC-47part 15B
Immunity According to EN55103-2
Safety According to IEC60065-98
Approvals CE / FCC, IEC60849
Operating Temperature -5 to 55 Degree C
Relative humidity 15% to 90%
Page 10-175
2. Call Station
The call station shall be used for making a manual or pre-recorded call to any pre-assigned zones or executing a
predefined action. The call station shall have one key. The call station shall have a fixed microphone to transmit speech
over the network and a press-to-talk key. The call station shall also have a headset socket. Once the headset is connected
the microphone shall be muted.
Features shall include:
• The call station shall have a speech filter with a cut off frequency at 340Hz to improve intelligibility and
prevent clipping of the audio input on low-frequency signals.
• The call station unit can be connected with a maximum of 16 call station keypad units via serial data
communication links.
• The call station shall have a volume control for the monitoring loudspeaker at the call station. The volume
control shall also control the volume of the headset.
• The call station shall be programmable for momentary actions on make contact and toggle actions without
repeat on make contact.
• The call station shall have a digital signal processor, which can be used for audio processing. It can be used to
adjust sensitivity, limiter and parametric equalizer.
• The monitoring loudspeaker shall be on when that particular call station activates a chime or pre-recorded
message, and will be switched off when its own live audio channel is open.
• The call station shall have Three 2-color LED's for the various system indications which shall indicate the
following as minimum
o Power/Error Indication Basic Status Indication
o System Status Indication
Power/Error Indication
• Green On Power on and no system or Call Station Basic faults. Yellow Blinking Power on, but there is a fault
in the system.
• Yellow On Power on, but there is a fault in the Call Station Basic or the network is not operational.
Basic Status LED
• Green On Ready to talk/live announcement.
• Green Blinking Chime on or pre-recorded message playing.
System Status
• Yellow On - Lower priority announcements are being made or are reserved to all or some of the zones which
are pre assigned to the press-to-talk key of the Call Station Basic and selected zones of the Call Station Keypad
• Yellow Blinking Announcements with higher or the same priority (not emergency) are on or reserved to all or
some of the zones which are pre-assigned to the press-to-talk key of the Call Station Basic and selected zones
of the Call Station Keypad
• Red On An emergency announcement is being made. Normal announcements can be made to the zones which
are not involved.
3. Call Station Keypad
The call station keypad is used in combination with the call station basic unit for making a manual or pre-recorded call
to any pre-assigned zones or executing a predefined action. The call station keypad has 8 keys. Additional keypads shall
be used to configure as per the zone requirements.
The call station keypad keys can be programmed for actions of momentary and toggle to activate the following actions:
• Recall of selection
• Live speech call
• Cancel selection
Page 10-176
• BGM off
• BGM volume control
• BGM selection
• Select resources
• Pre-recorded message selection
• Attention and alarm tone selection
• Zone selection
• System control output selection
Each key in the call station keypad shall have one 2-color LED to indicate the key confirmation and as below,
• Yellow always lit The selected resources are occupied by a lower-priority announcement
• Yellow flashing. The selected resources are occupied by an announcement with higher or equal priority
• Green always lit The selected resources are available or reserved for executing an action from that particular
station
4. Power Amplifiers
The main function of the power amplifier is the amplification of audio signals for the loudspeakers. It shall be possible
to select the output voltage between 100V, 70V or 50V by changing jumpers. The equipment can be used as tabletop or
19" rack mounting.
Salient features shall include:
• The 8 x control inputs shall be freely programmable. These shall be programmed for any action to be initiated
in the system and can be assigned with priorities.
• The 1 x control output per amplifier channel shall be freely programmable and can be programmed for any
status change in the system.
• The 2 x 16-character display and rotary control on the front panel shall be used for status enquiries and
monitoring functions. The display shall show the VU meter reading when the audio monitoring mode is
selected or shall revert to the default display mode when there is no fault in the unit. The audio output shall be
monitored by connecting a headphone to the headphone socket. Status changes of the unit shall be monitored
continuously and reported to the network controller for fault/status reporting.
• The control input shall be programmed for momentary, single-shot action on break/make, toggle, start action
on break/make, stop action on break/make. These selections can be made in the configuration software.
• The control input shall have the ability to monitor the cable between the control input and the external switch
against open and short circuits.
• The amplifier monitoring and changeover facility shall be incorporated in the power amplifier. The changeover
relays shall be included in the unit.
• The unit shall incorporate digital audio processing possibilities for 3 sections of parametric equalization and 2
sections of shelving equalization and audio delay.
The Amplifiers shall meet the following technical specification as minimum.
Mains Voltage 90 to 264 V AC, 50/60Hz

Battery Voltage 48 V DC
Rated Output Power (RMS) 500W, 250W, 125w or 60w.
Audio Outputs
Frequency Response 60 Hz to 20 KHz @-2dB
SNR < 87dB
Crosstalk between amplifiers <-80dB at nominal load
Total Harmonic Distortion <0.2% (at 1kHz) at rated output
Page 10-177
Analog line inputs

Signal-to-noise ratio > 87 dBA at maximum level
Input range -12dB to 0dB
Input impedance 22K ohms
Analog microphone inputs
Frequency response
-3 dB at 100 Hz and 16 kHz
Nominal input level
-60dBV
Signal-to-noise ratio
> 60dBV at nominal input
CMRR
> 55 dB at 100 Hz
Input impedance
1360 ohm
Phantom supply
12 V ±1 V @ 15 mA
Input range
–7dB to +8dB
Emissions Acc. to EN55103-1/ FCC-47part 15B

Immunity According to EN55103-2
Approvals CE / FCC, IEC 60849
Operating Temperature -5 to 55 Degree C
Relative humidity 15% to 90%
Line supervision set: The system shall use the same loudspeaker line for communicating with the end-of- loudspeaker-
line unit. The monitoring principle shall not be based on DC current or impedance measurement.
• The line monitoring unit shall be incorporated in the power amplifier unit itself to avoid any non-monitored
parts of the cable.
• Loudspeaker line monitoring shall be provided without any additional wiring.
• The tone generator for loudspeaker monitoring shall be incorporated in the amplifier so that a single failure of
the tone generator will not affect the monitoring of other amplifier channels.
• Loudspeaker line monitoring can be switched on/off from the configuration software.
• The power for the end-of-line monitoring units shall be supplied from the power amplifier.
5. Configuration Software
The configuration software is used for configuring the system. The configuration software shall be located in the
network controller except for the file transfer facilities. Any PC with Internet Explorer version 5.0 or above will be able
to connect to the network controller to access the configuration and logging functions. No special software shall need to
be installed in the PC for configuration or logging. The system shall be able to operate without the configuration PC.
The configuration software shall be required only during the installation and when changes are to be made in the
existing system.
Fault enquiries can be made via the diagnostic section of the web interface. The configuration software shall be
designed in such a way that even first-time users can navigate through the configuration easily.
Configuration of system access rights. There are three authorization levels:
• Administrator
• Installer
• User
The access rights for these three levels are different.
Page 10-178
Configuration of call macro. Call macro is the function that allows the user to program different functions and/or
actions that can be assigned to any inputs such as control input, call station or audio input. A single call macro can be
assigned to multiple inputs. The call macro will define:
• Start chime
• Audio input
• Message(s) - sequence of messages, number of repetitions, interval
• End chime
Zone grouping allows the user to group zones covering the same types of areas.
In the zone configuration, zone-related items such as amplifier channel outputs, audio outputs and control outputs shall
be grouped.
The power amplifier shall be linked to a spare power amplifier so that if there is a fault in the main power amplifier its
functions shall automatically be taken over by the spare power amplifier. The ratio of main power amplifiers to spare
power amplifiers shall be configured according to the specific requirements of the installation.
The configuration of all equipment inputs and outputs shall be carried out using configuration software.
All audio inputs and outputs shall have audio processing facilities. The audio processing facility shall allow the user to
perform parametric equalization with high- and low-pass filters for inputs and outputs, and gain and limiter adjustments
for inputs only.
The delay can be configured for each amplifier channel individually.
The level of the 20 KHz monitoring signal shall automatically be adjusted for proper monitoring of the loudspeaker
line.
The call station keypad shall be programmable for different functions. Details of the functions for which the keys can be
programmed are shown in the call station keypad section.
It shall be possible to define the call station as an emergency call station to provide additional functions such as the
possibility to add zones or audio outputs during the call.
It shall be possible to configure a control input for a sequence of functions.
The call station basic/call station keypad/call kit/call station keypad kit shall be programmable for the functions
specified in their respective sections in the configuration software.
The control input shall be able to be configured for monitoring of cables connected to it for open and short circuit.
It shall be possible to configure each zone for 2 time-based volume settings.
6. Diagnostic and Logging Software
The diagnostic and logging software has the main function of monitoring and recording the status of all the units in the
PA system. It shall log all events such as calls and status changes of system units, and provide a current view of the
system status. This software section can be used for real-time logging by connecting a PC with web browser.
• Modes of enquiry
o General events
o Specific
• Individual unit status
• Call logging
• Fault logging
• This part of the software shall be capable of monitoring the following functions:
o The fault status of the equipment
o Any status changes in the system
• View historical log stored in the network controller
• View logged events of monitored external devices
Page 10-179
• Control audible and visual fault indicators via the PC

o Individual unit status shall be displayed in the individual unit status screen.
• The alarm can be acknowledged and reset. The acknowledgment and reset actions are logged
• View the last 200 faults, which are stored on the network controller
o Continuous remote logging of multiple systems
• A separate stand-alone PC-program shall allow for continuous logging of events and faults from up to four
systems on a single network in a single view via a TCP/IP network connection the relevant systems.
o File transfer software
• PC application
• Supplied together with the Central controller
• User-friendly audio file assembling The main purpose of the file transfer software is to transfer both the data
and audio files from the PC to the network controller. It shall perform the following functions:
• User ID and password-protected access
• Assembly of the message set (a set with multiple wav files). The message set can be stored on the PC and can
be sent to the network controller
• Download configuration file from the network controller
7. Metal Cabinet Speaker
The cabinet loudspeaker shall deliver professional performance from a robust, yet aesthetically designed metal
enclosure and shall be ideal loudspeakers for indoor areas. It shall be specially designed for use in buildings where
performance of systems for voice evacuation announcements. The cabinet shall be designed for both surface mounting
on walls and recessed mounting into brick or concrete walls. The back box of the cabinet shall provide a selection of
mounting holes, even for various types of installation boxes. It shall meet the following Technical requirements as
minimum.
Type Ceiling / Wall

Rated Power (PHC) 6W(6-3-1.5W)
Input rated voltage 100v
Sound pressure level at 6w/1w at 1KHz, 1m 102/94 dB
Effective frequency range (-10 dB) 150 Hz To 20 KHz
Opening angle (at 1 /4 KHz.-6 dB) 120/60 Deg.
Rated impedance 1667 Ohms
Safety Acc to EN 60065
EVAC Compliant Acc to BS5839 part 8
8. 6W Ceiling Loudspeakers.
The ceiling loudspeaker shall be specially designed for use in buildings where performance of systems for voice
evacuation announcements. It shall be a Dual-Cone speaker with circular metal grill. The assembly shall be easily
mounted by a separate mounting ring secured by three integral spring loaded clamps. It shall be supplied with certified
Fire Dome. It shall meet the following technical specification as minimum.
Type Ceiling
Rated Power (PHC) 6W(6-3-1.5W)
Input rated voltage 100v
Sound pressure level at 6w/1w at 1KHz, 1m 98/90 dB
Effective frequency range (-10 dB) 90 Hz To 20 KHz
Opening angle (at 1 /4 KHz.-6 dB) 180/60 Deg.
Page 10-180
Rated impedance 1667 Ohms

Safety Acc to EN 60065
EVAC Compliant Acc to BS5839 part 8
Certified Fire Dome Acc to DIN 4102 B15.
9. 30 W Music Horn Speaker
It shall be rectangular horn features a unique combination of are-entrant horn with two transducers, one for low- and the
other for high frequencies, And shall meet the following Technical Specifications.
Maximum power 45 W
Rated power (PHC) 30 W (30 - 15 - 7.5 - 3.75 W)
Sound pressure level at 30 W/1 W (at 1 kHz, 1 m) 112 dB/97 dB (SPL
Effective frequency range (-10 dB) 125 Hz to 20 kHz
Opening angle (at 1 kHz/4 kHz, -6 dB) Horizontal 105°/90°
Vertical 110°/125°
Rated voltage 100 V
Rated impedance 333 Ω
Ambient temperature range -25 to +55 °C
Water protected acc. to IEC 60529 IP 65
Safety acc. to EN 60065
EVAC compliant Acc to BS 5839 Part 8
10. Metallic Rack
A standard '19 inch' rack or racks, as detailed in BS 5954, shall be provided to house the equipment. The word 'rack' as
used throughout this specification refers to a single rack or a system of multiple racks, as necessary.
The rack shall be of steel construction. The height of the rack shall be chosen to have 25% spare space for future
expansion. The rack shall be fitted with lockable castors. Sufficient natural ventilation shall be provided within the rack
to permit continuous operation of the equipment, in a room ambient temperature between 10°C and 40°C assuming
mechanical ventilation.
An internal mains power (230V) distribution system shall be provided. Each termination shall be labeled with the
equipment item served. All mains terminals shall be shielded from inadvertent touch.
A mains power on/off switch indicator light shall be provided on a mains panel at the bottom of the rack. The mains
panel shall include a standard 13A or IEC socket for test equipment, etc. This socket shall be independent of the rack
power switch and shall be annotated accordingly, i.e. UNSWITCHED'. The rack shall be fitted with a transparent
lockable door.
A comprehensive acoustic study report shall be submitted by the Contractor after necessary commissions and testing.
The study report shall prove the overall performance, appropriate sound levels, satisfactory audio quality and speech
intelligibility as required by the Engineer and the Owner.
10.11.16 Products - Labels/Circuit Lists/Cable Identification

10.11.16.1 Labelling
1. For substations, switchgears, switchboards, motor control centers and panel boards:
Engraved lamacoid name plates, black with minimum 6 mm high white lettering.
2. For Distribution Boards and Circuit Breakers
a. Where individually enclosed or in substations, switchgears, switchboards, motor control centers and panel
boards without doors: engraved lamacoid nameplates, black with 3 mm high white lettering.
b. In panel boards with doors: directories mounted inside transparent plastic covers in metal frames.
Page 10-181
3. Wiring Identification
a. Identify wiring with permanent indelible, wrap-around, identifying markings, either numbered or coloured
heat shrinkable tube or ferrules, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.
b. Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
c. Colour code to standards above as specified elsewhere.
d. Use colour-coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.
4. Conduit and Cable Identification
a. Colour code conduits and metallic sheathed cables.
b. code with plastic tape or paint and points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling or floor, at 15 m
intervals.
c. Colours to be 25 mm wide prime colour and 20 mm wide auxiliary colour to standards above.
d. Number code, per Circuit Schedule, all feeder and branch circuit cables at both connection points and in
manholes, handholes, pull-boxes and junction boxes with fiber or non-ferrous metal tags, fastened with
non-ferrous wire.
5. Device Plates
Device Plates of local toggle switches, toggle switch type motor starters, pilot lights and the like, whose junction is not
readily apparent: plates to be engraved with 3 mm high letters describing equipment controlled or indicated.
6. For Busbars
a. Phase identification letters shall be stamped into the metal of the busbars of each phase of the main buses
in each substation, switchgear, switchboards, motor control center and panel board in addition to colour
identification
b. Letters shall be visible without disassembling current carrying supporting elements.
7. For Doors
Where switchboard rooms, cable chambers, metal screened spaces and the like contain electric power cables, bus bars
or equipment operating at voltages exceeding 600 V: enameled sheet metal, red on white, reading "Danger - High
Voltage".
8. For Rooms
Switchboard rooms, electric closets, metal screened spaces assigned to electrical equipment, and the like: enameled
sheet metal, red on white, reading "Electrical Equipment Room - No Storage Permitted".
9. Languages
Nameplates with directional, operational or warning labels shall be in Arabic and English.
10.11.16.2 Equipment Duties and Ratings

1. Power ratings shown for the proposed equipment are in accordance with the best information available to the
Engineer and are to be considered as minimum ratings. In the event equipment items proposed by the Contractor
should require motors with different power rating than shown, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to furnish
circuit breaker, starting equipment, feeder and branch circuits, conduits, and accessories etc. as required to comply
with the electrical code and prevent excessive voltage drop without added cost to the Owner.
2. Where equipment to be furnished is installed in an existing enclosure or adjacent to existing equipment, the
Contractor shall field check the dimensions of existing equipment, location of conduits, etc., and shall familiarize
himself with all existing conditions and difficulties to be encountered in performing such work.
3. Degree of protection for all electrical equipment, unless indicated otherwise, shall be as follows:
a. IP 54, enclosure for indoor equipment
b. IP 55, enclosure for outdoor equipment
c. IP 65, for outdoor push buttons and switches
d. IP 67, push buttons in the dry well
Page 10-182
e. IP 68, submersible equipment

4. All external equipment shall be corrosion proof and of metallic construction.
10.11.16.3 Segregation Of Services

1. Electrical services shall be segregated as specified throughout the installation to obviate the following;
a. Electrical interference from one circuit to another
b. A fault on one circuit affecting another
c. Unnecessary fire damage
d. Difficulties in circuit identification
e. Voltage limits for general safety
f. Difficulties in removal and/or maintenance.
2. All raceways shall be kept clear of other services except where intentionally earthed or bonded. Generally,
raceways shall be kept 150 mm away from and above hot water and 75 mm away from other services.
3. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, normal, emergency, low voltage cables and wiring shall be segregated
throughout the installation generally in the following manner:
a. Armoured and sheathed cables: Where more than one tray has been specified or is necessary to
accommodate the number of cables on a run, where practical, segregation shall be achieved by dedicating
each tray to either normal or emergency services. Where normal and emergency cables have to run
together in trays, ducts or trenches, they shall be formed in two groups, one normal and one emergency.
Divider on cable trays shall be provided. Power, control and signal cables shall be laid separate.
b. Insulated conductors: Insulated conductor circuits shall, where possible, be segregated throughout by
enclosing in separate conduits, trunking or trunking compartments.
4. Fire Alarms: fire alarm cables shall be segregated from other services throughout and be either armored and
sheathed cable, or insulated conductors enclosed in conduit or trunking, as indicated on the Contract plans.
5. Telephone cables: telephone cables shall be segregated from other services throughout and enclosed in conduit or
trunking, as indicated on the Contract plans.
10.11.16.4 Execution - Polarity

1. The polarity of all apparatus used for the Works specified shall be arranged as follows when apparatus is viewed
from the front:
a. For two pole apparatus the phase or “live” pole at the top (or left hand side) and the '“neutral or earthed”
pole at the bottom (or right hand side). On plug and socket outlets.
b. The polarity shall conform to BS 196, BS 546, or BS 1363 as appropriate.
c. for three or four pole apparatus the phases in order red, yellow, blue and neutral reading from top to
bottom or left to right in the case of vertical and horizontal layouts respectively.
2. All cables shall be so connected between main switchboards, distribution boards, plant and accessories so that the
correct sequence of phase colours is preserved throughout the system.
3. All cable cores shall be identified with phase colours. Where more than one phase is incorporated on a common
system in one room then the live cores shall be red, yellow, blue, as appropriate, and fittings and switch accessories
shall be permanently labeled and segregated in accordance with I.E.E. Regulations.
10.11.16.5 Thermographic Survey of the Installation

1. Procedure for the Survey
a. After completion of Installation and commissioning of the electrical substation and LV panel room, and
when the tunnel is operating under normal operating conditions, the Contractor shall carry out a complete
Thermographic Survey using Infra-Red Devices. This survey shall be part of commissioning checks.
b. The Thermographic Survey shall be carried out on MCCs, MDBs, SMDBs, Distribution Boards, Cables,
Motors, Pumps, and all electrical equipment, etc. as a minimum.
Page 10-183
c. For MDBs and MCCs a detailed survey shall be conducted for Busbars, Busbar Joints, Incomer Cable
terminations, Outgoing Motor Terminations, Circuit Breakers, Contactors, Isolators, Thermal Overload
Relays, Fuses, etc.
d. For Motors, and associated driven equipment, survey shall be conducted on bearings, windings, couplings,
etc. as a minimum.
e. Electrical equipment under survey, shall be operating at more than 60 % of its rated capacity. Electrical
Load shall be verified by using clamp on meters, or the ammeters installed in the respective panels.
f. While making outdoor measurements, adequate correction factors shall be used for the prevalent wind
speeds at the time of survey.
g. The Infra Red Scanners/Detectors used for the survey shall have following features as a minimum.
• Shall be approved Infrared Scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from the normal values.
• High Measurement Accuracy, + 2 Deg C. or better across the full screen.
• Very Large Dynamic range.
• High Image stability.
• On Board storage of full colour thermal TIFF images along with the temperature data.
• Thermal Image recording- 10 MB PCMCIA Card.
• On-Board Colour LCD Display, with bargraph for temperature display.
• Auto and Manual temperature range setting.
• Shall use long Wavelength (8 to 10 µm) Infra-Red radiation.
• Proven Track Record of use in industrial applications for Thermographic surveys, in typical hot and
humid climate in Abu Dhabi region.
• Fully automated report generation- the scanning device shall generate its own reports, which shall be
attached with the main reports.
• Facility for direct connection to a PC.
h. Provide services of a qualified and approved, independent testing agency to perform the testing, in co-
ordination with the Electrical Contractor.
i. Provide Calibration reports of the testing device. Calibration Records shall be submitted prior to testing.
2. Report and Corrective Actions
a. A detailed report containing colour Photographs and the assessment of each section of the electrical
substation and LV panel room shall be submitted for review of the Engineer. This report shall contain
details such as Measured Temperature, Average Expected Temperature, deviation from expected value,
emissivity values, probable reasons for excessive temperatures, and recommendations for corrective
actions.
b. Each report shall contain two photographs, one normal equipment photograph, and another
Thermographic Photograph, to make an assessment of location of the hot spots.
c. If abnormalities such as Hot Spots are detected, which represent Incorrect Installation, Termination,
Overloading, Operation, etc. the Contractor shall carry out modifications.
d. Another Thermographic Survey shall be conducted after corrective actions by the Contractor to
demonstrate a defect free Installation. The reports of this subsequent survey shall include notations of
deficiencies detected and remedial actions taken.
e. All reports with the colour photographs shall be handed over to the Owner’s for their future use. Reports
shall be submitted on a floppy / CD along with hardcopies as per the contract documentation requirements.
10.11.16.6 Fire and Safety Precautions

1. Establish from Architectural Contract plans where fire and smoke barriers exist, and make adequate provision of
fire and smoke barriers in and around trunking, conduits, cables, etc., where they pass through floors and fire rated
Page 10-184
walls, and where protection systems are installed pack space between wiring and sleeve full with Fire Retardant
Material and seal with caulking.
2. The Contractor shall ensure that this work is carried out such that the integrity of any such fire barrier is properly
maintained where pierced by electrical services.
3. The Contractor shall put the notice for electrical shock treatment in details with sketches and instructions as per
standard procedures. The notice shall comply with the requirement of the ADWEA in content and format.
However, this should include the following as a minimum:
ACT IMMEDIATELY
• safeguard yourself.
• switch off current or break electric circuit.
• use or stand on some dry non-conducting material to remove the CASUALTY from cable or source of
electricity.
• start artificial respiration and call for Medical Aid.
TREATMENT FOR ELECTRIC SHOCK: ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
(KISS OF LIFE, MOUTH-TO-MOUTH METHOD)
• Lay the casualty on back and if possible on a table.
• Kneel or stand near to the casualty’s head.
• Remove any obstruction from the mouth.
• Support the nape of the neck and press top of the head so that it is tilted backwards.
• Open your mouth and take a deep breath, pinch the casualty’s nostrils with your fingers. Seal your lips round
his mouth and blow into his lungs until the chest rises.
• Remove your mouth and watch the chest falls.
• Repeat and continue inflation at your natural rate of breathing. Continue to give artificial respiration until
natural breathing is restored or until the medical aid arrives.
• When the casualty is breathing, place in recovery position, lying and resting on the side. Remain with and
watch casualty closely.
10.11.16.7 Safety Interlocks

1. A complete system of interlocks and safety devices shall be provided as necessary for the safe and continuous
operation of the substation/electrical room in order to provide for the following:
a. Safety of personnel engaged on operation and maintenance of the substation/ electrical room.
b. Correct sequence of operation of the substation/electrical room during start up and shut down.
c. Safety of the substation/electrical room when operating under normal or emergency conditions.
2. Interlocks shall be preventive and not corrective.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of interlocking schemes for the approval of the Engineer.
4. Locks for interlocking purposes shall be of the figure lock type.
5. No spare or master key shall be provided, unless specified.
6. Device items are to be arranged to ensure that there is no danger of interchange with existing locks on other units.
10.11.17 Connection of Materials and Equipment Specified Under Other

Sections
The Contractor shall include all materials, labor, tools, equipment and appurtenances required, as specified and as
directed by the Engineer for the connection and the interconnection of equipment and materials specified in other
Sections of these Standard Specifications.
Page 10-185
The Contractor shall include all conduit, cable, electrical wiring and appurtenances for the complete installation and
electrical hook-up of all Items of street furniture as specified in Section 11.8, of Chapter 11 Utilities, of these Standard
Specifications, including telephone booths and bus shelters as required and as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit all details and shop drawings for the connection and interconnection work to the Engineer for
approval prior to proceeding with such work.
No separate measurement or payment will be made by the Owner for such works unless specifically indicated in the
Particular Specifications or in the Bills of Quantities. All such works shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation to the
Items in the Bills of Quantities.
10.11.18 Connection of Materials Furnished by the ADWEA/ADDC and by

the Owner
The Contractor shall include all materials, labor, tools, equipment and appurtenances required, as specified and as
directed by the Engineer for the connection and the interconnection of materials furnished by the ADWEA/ADDC and
the Owner.
This work shall include, but not by way of limitation, the light poles, controllers, cables, and other materials as specified
herein in this Chapter.
The Contractor shall submit all details and shop drawings of the connection and the interconnection work to the Engineer
for approval prior to construction.
No separate measurement or payment will be made by the Owner for such works unless specifically indicated in these
Standard Specifications, in the Particular Specifications or in the Bills of Quantities.
10.11.19 Spares
The Items for spare electrical Items shall be as specified herein, in the Particular Specifications, Contract Documents,
and as approved by the Owner.
All spare units shall be suitably boxed or crated and placed in storage where designated by the Engineer and the Owner.
All spare units shall be identical to and by the same manufacturer as units approved by the Engineer.
all spares in storage. No materials, boxes or crates shall be stored directly on the ground or similar horizontal surface.
The Contractor shall provide all blocking of wood, concrete or other material as approved by the Engineer and the Owner
under all materials, boxes or crates. All materials, crates or boxes shall be suitably identified by Contract.
Page 10-186
LANTERNS
SCHEDULE "A"
LED UNDER-BRIDGE LANTERNS
The following drawings/catalogues shall be submitted with the shop drawings written in English only:
1. Scale drawings of proposed under-bridge lighting unit showing construction details and materials used.
2. Spectral distribution curves (polar curves) for the proposed lighting unit.
3. Iso-candela diagrams of the proposed lighting unit.
4. Iso-lux curves for the specified spacing.
5. Coefficient of utilization of the proposed lighting unit.
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-187
LANTERNS
SCHEDULE "B"
TUNNEL / UNDERPASS LANTERNS, 150 WATT HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM
1. Scale drawings of proposed tunnel lighting unit showing construction details and materials used.
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-188
LANTERNS
SCHEDULE "C"
TUNNEL / UNDERPASS LANTERN 250 WATT HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-189
LANTERNS
SCHEDULE "D"
TUNNEL / UNDERPASS LANTERN, 400 WATT HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-190
10.12 Installation of Miscellaneous Electrical works

10.12.1 Description
The installation of miscellaneous electrical works, including temporary utility protection works at detours, temporary
roadways and temporary works, shall be as indicated on the Contract plans, as specified herein and as directed by the
Engineer.
10.12.2 Temporary Protection

Temporary protection works shall consist of the same protection works required for permanent protection works, i.e.,
concrete encased split PVC ducts for electrical lines. Where proposed detour roads continue longitudinally over existing
electric cables for a distance in excess of approximately twenty (20) meters or as required by the ADWEA/ADDC,
concrete slab protection shall be substituted for the concrete encased split PVC duct. Concrete slab protection for LV,
11 and 22 KV cables shall be the same as used for 33 KV cables.
The Contractor shall remove the temporary protection for the existing electrical lines at detour roads in accordance with
the requirements of Section 1.19.14 of Chapter 1, General Requirements.
10.12.3 Conduit Installation, General

Conduits shall be attached to structures or embedded in concrete structures or direct buried in trenches. Conduits
installed inside bridge box girders or overhead sign structures shall be securely fastened. Exposed conduits shall be
installed parallel or at right angles to structure walls, ceilings and/or floors. Conduit shall be installed concealed
whenever possible, except as otherwise indicated. All conduits shall be rodded and swabbed to remove all dirt and other
foreign materials. Insulating bushings shall be installed on the ends of all conduits. Where conduit runs shall be in the
horizontal position, they shall be uniformly graded so that water will drain out of the conduit.
Flexible conduits for expansion and deflection loops or expansion fittings shall be provided at each expansion joint in
bridge structures, and/or where required to accommodate expansion and contraction in long conduit runs, and at all other
places as indicated in the Contract plans or ordered by the Engineer and/or the Owner. These shall provide for at least the
expansion and deflection expected in the structured joints spanned.
In the event of any discrepancy between electrical and structural Contract plans, in the routing of conduit or mounting of
lanterns and switches on structures, the structural Contract plans shall prevail.
10.12.4 Installation of Galvanized Steel Conduits

10.12.4.1 Description
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing the rigid, galvanized steel conduits of sizes and at locations (attached
to structures or embedded in concrete) as indicated on the Contract plans and as approved by the Engineer and/or the
Owner. The Contractor shall include conduit couplings, fittings, junction boxes, concrete embedded junction boxes with
extension rings, bushings and all hardware for attaching or mounting.
10.12.4.2 Materials
All materials shall comply with Section 10.4 and other applicable Sections of these Standard Specifications.
10.12.5 Installation of PVC Conduits

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing PVC conduit of sizes and at locations as indicated on the Contract
plans and as approved by the Engineer and/or the Owner. The Contractor shall include conduit couplings, fittings,
junction boxes, concrete embedded junction boxes with extension rings, bushings and all hardware for attaching,
embedding or mounting.
10.12.5.2 Materials
All materials shall comply with Section 10.4 and other applicable Sections of these Standard Specifications.
Page 10-191
All trenching and backfill shall comply with Section 10.3.
10.12.6 Reinforced Concrete Service Chambers

10.12.6.1 General
The Contractor shall construct reinforced concrete service chambers at the following locations:
1. Where indicated on the Contract plans.
2. Where existing house services pass under sidewalks or as required by the ADWEA/ADDC or the Owner.
3. Where required for purposes of pulling cables, splicing or at turning points along cable routes in addition to
requirements of applicable Standards and Codes.
4. Where ADWEA/ADDC feeder pillars are located in sidewalks.
10.12.6.2 Materials
All concrete work and reinforcement steel in electric service chambers shall comply with applicable Sections of Chapter
4, Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications. All concrete incorporated in the construction of electric service
chambers shall be Class C 30/20 concrete.
Electrical service chamber covers and frames shall be of the sizes, types and materials as shown on the Contract plans.
All electrical service chamber covers and frames shall be manufactured from ductile iron material meeting the
requirements for ductile iron covers as specified in Section 12.3.2.3 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage, of these
specifications. Most covers and frames for electrical service chambers will be installed in non-traffic green or sidewalk
areas and these covers and frames shall be for medium duty use. Any cover and frame installed in paved traffic areas
shall be heavy duty. The covers shall be rubber gasket sealed, bolt down types using counter-sunk, stainless steel, hex
head cap screws. Each cover shall be cast with the appropriate label as shown in the Contract plans.
All excavation, foundation preparation and backfill shall comply with Section 10.3.
All concrete work shall comply with the dimensions and details as indicated on the Contract plans. Reinforcement steel
shall meet the requirements of Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel, of these Standard Specifications.
The tops of the electrical service chambers shall be flush with the final grade in paved areas, and be located 10 cm above
final grade in non-paved areas. All unused ducts or conduits at electric service chambers shall be capped in a watertight
manner.
10.12.7 PVC Conduit and Concrete Encased Ducts

PVC conduit and concrete encased ducts shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the Contract plans and as
included in the Bills of Quantities. In general, PVC conduit and duct shall be provided to permit routing for lighting
system cables; LV, 11 KV, 22 KV, 33 KV and 132 KV electrical distribution system cables below pavement or other
areas as indicated on the Contract plans or where directed by the ADWEA/ADDC and as specified herein and as
directed by the Owner and/or by the ADWEA/ADDC.
The conduits or ducts shall be PVC conduit and fittings complying with the requirements of Section 10.4.3.
The PVC conduits and ducts, except for 132 KV and 220 KV duct banks, shall be encased in Class C 20/20 concrete
complying with the requirements of Section 4.3.9 of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications. The
dimensions of concrete encasement shall be as indicated on the Contract plans.
The PVC ducts for 132 KV and 220 KV duct banks shall be encased in Class C 30/20 concrete with standard reinforcing
steel complying with requirements of Section 4.3.9 of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications. The
dimensions of concrete encasement shall be as indicated on the Contract plans.
132 KV and 220 KV ducts shall be filled with bentonite around the cables. The Contractor shall furnish and perform all
the works required for providing bentonite in PVC ducts. Bentonite shall be filled in the ducts after the installation of
cables. Bentonite materials and the method of filling shall be as approved by the Engineer. Separate measurement and
payment will be made for providing bentonite fill in 132 KV and 220 KV ducts.
Page 10-192
All trench and backfill at concrete encased PVC conduit and ducts shall comply with the requirements of Section 10.3.
Trench and backfill for concrete encased conduits and ducts shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation to the work for
the Items of concrete encased PVC conduits and ducts and duct banks as described in the Bills of Quantities. No separate
payment will be made by the Owner.
10.12.8 Protection of Existing Electric Cables

This work pertains to the protection of existing LV, 11 KV, 22 KV, 33 KV and 132 KV electric cables exposed by
manual excavation and which are to remain in operation as designated on the Contract plans or where directed by the
Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC.
All excavation and backfill shall be in accordance with Section 10.3.
Precast concrete protection slabs, cast-in-situ concrete protection slabs, extensions of existing cast-in-situ concrete
protection slabs and extensions of the underlying existing concrete encased duct banks shall be installed at road crossings,
paved areas or other locations as detailed on the Contract plans or where directed by the Engineer and/or the
ADWEA/ADDC.
Existing occupied concrete encased PVC ducts shall be extended with concrete encased, matching size, split
polyvinylchloride (PVC) ducts and existing vacant, concrete encased PVC ducts shall be extended with concrete encased,
matching size, whole PVC ducts as specified herein and as approved by the Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC.
Extensions of existing vacant ducts shall be capped watertight upon installation.
New, split polyvinylchloride (PVC) ducts shall be installed around existing electric cables to form a protective concrete
encasement where such cables are to remain under a new paved area or are to pass through the wall of a service chamber
or other locations where designated by the Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC.
The installation of concrete encased, split PVC duct shall be made in the following manner:
1. Split PVC ducts shall be made by jointing two PVC pipe segments, a lower 270° segment and an upper 120°
segment of identical size and specifications. The pipe walls of the lower segment shall be cut on a vertical
making an obtuse angle at the inner surface so as to avoid sharp edges. The cut surface shall be smooth without
any projections. The lower segment shall be placed surrounding the existing cable, with its 90° opening
upwards. The upper 120° segment shall be placed as a lid or cover to the opening of the lower segment, with an
equal overlap on either side. The overlapping portions of the pipes shall be jointed together by spot supplying an
approved PVC glue to avoid displacement while concentrating. After jointing the split PVC ducts shall be
wrapped twice with polyethylene film, 152 microns thick and the wrapping securely fastened to prevent fresh
concrete from entering the ducts. The ducts shall be supported on suitable corrosion resistant spacers.
2. The existing occupied concrete encased PVC ducts shall be extended in the same manner as above. The new split
PVC duct shall be securely joined to existing ducts to be extended in such a manner to insure against any
displacement of the duct extensions during the placement of concrete to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or
the ADWEA/ADDC. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings identifying all the details for the approval of
the Engineer. Split PVC ducts for 132 KV and 220 KV cables shall be filled with bentonite around the existing
cables in accordance with the applicable requirements as specified under Section 10.12.7. Separate measurement
and payment will be made for providing bentonite fill in split ducts for 132 KV and 220 KV ducts.
The cast-in-situ concrete protection slab and protection slab extensions shall be Class C 20/20 concrete and shall match
the existing slabs as approved by the Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC.
The Contractor shall furnish and place precast, Class C 30/20, reinforced concrete protection slabs of the sizes designated
on the Contract plans where directed by the Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC, all in accordance with applicable
Sections of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications and as specified herein, and approved by the
10.12.9 Supply of Cable Covering Tiles

Where any lighting, LV, 11 KV, 22 KV, 33 KV or 132 KV electrical cable are directly buried in trenches in locations
other than where such electrical cables are installed in concrete encased ducts, precast, concrete cable covering tiles
shall be installed over all new electrical cables and over all existing electrical cables exposed by manual excavation to
verify the location of such cables.
The Contractor shall supply precast, concrete cable covering tiles for electric cables according to the requirements of the
ADWEA/ADDC, the Engineer and the Owner and the following:
Page 10-193
10.12.9.1 Materials, General

All materials for cable covering tiles shall comply with applicable Sections of Chapter 4, Concrete works, of these
Standard Specifications and as specified herein.
10.12.9.2 Concrete Mix

The ratio of the concrete mix for the cable covering tiles shall be 1: 1½ : 3 (one part of cement, one and one half parts of
fine aggregate and three parts of coarse aggregate). Cement and aggregate shall comply with the requirements of Section
4.3.7 of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications
10.12.9.3 Curing
The cable covering tiles shall be cured in clean, fresh water for at least seven (7) days after they are cast.
10.12.9.4 Molding
The cable covering tiles shall be cast in appropriate accurately made molds and compacted by an efficient hydraulic
pressure method. The pressure employed for the hydraulic pressed cable covering tiles shall not be less than 70.3 kg/Sq.
cm (1000 psi) over the entire surface receiving the pressure. All faces of the finished cable covering tiles shall be smooth
and all edges and corners true and sound.
10.12.9.5 Inspection and Tests

Sample cable covering tiles, selected by the Owner, shall be subject to inspection and tests as required by the Owner and
as described below. As part of the work for this Item, the Contractor shall transport, unload and place, where directed by
the Owner and the Engineer, all tiles designated by the Owner to be tested.
1. For purposes of the test, the Owner will select up to twelve (12) samples at random for every two thousand
(2000) cable covering tiles or less and a further twelve (12) samples for every additional four thousand (4000)
cable covering tiles or less.
2. Selected sample cable covering tiles shall be tested by ADWEA/ADDC or the Owner in accordance with
ADWEA/ADDC, the Engineer or the Owner inspection and test requirements and at the premises designated by
ADWEA/ADDCD as specified herein.
Each group of twelve samples being tested shall be divided into two batches of six samples. In the event of one sample in
the first batch failing to comply with
ADWEA/ADDC, the Engineer or the Owner test requirements, then the six samples in the second batch shall be tested. If
all six samples in the second batch pass the test, cable covering tiles represented by the group of twelve samples being
tested shall be deemed to comply, but if one sample in the second batch fails, the cable covering tiles represented by the
group of twelve samples being tested shall be rejected.
10.12.10 Placement of Warning Tapes

The Contractor shall furnish and install warning tapes during backfilling work over any electrical cables. Warning tapes
shall be installed over any existing electrical cables uncovered by the Contractor, over new utilities constructed by the
Contractor and over buried cables included in the Works.
Warning tapes shall be place on the compacted backfill material approximately thirty centimetres below finished grade
or as directed by the Engineer.
The warning tape shall be high quality, acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene film a minimum of 15 cm wide, a
minimum thickness of 150 microns and with a minimum strength of 125 kg/cm2 lengthwise and 105 kg/cm2 crosswise
with an elongation factor of 350 percent.
Warning tapes shall be colored and inscribed for identification as follows:
Utility Color Inscription
Electrical Cables Red “Caution – Buried Electric Cable”
Page 10-194
The printed inscriptions shall be of a permanent black lettering and shall be placed a maximum of two meters (2.0M) on
center printed alternately in English and Arabic. The colors shall be vivid, permanent and glossy with a life expectancy
equal to the utility line which it marks. The warning tapes shall be placed with the inscriptions facing up.
10.13 Remove and Salvage Existing Lighting System

10.13.1 Description
Removal and salvaging of the existing lighting system shall be as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified
herein.
10.13.2 Remove and Salvage Existing Lighting System

Where indicated on the Contract plans or where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove and salvage the
existing light poles, complete with all lanterns, foundations, cables, cable covering tiles, control cabinets and all
associated equipment under the supervision of and to the satisfaction of the Owner and as directed by the Engineer.
Prior to commencing the removal of the existing lighting system, the Contractor shall contact the ADWEA/ADDC and
make all necessary arrangements for shut-off of electric power and for removing and salvaging the designated existing
lighting system.
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment and accessories to carefully remove the existing light poles,
foundations, cables, control cabinets and appurtenant equipment and clean, load, transport, unload and place in the
Owner’s storeyard where designated by the Owner.
The Contractor shall exercise care while removing the existing poles, lanterns, foundations, cables and associated
equipment so as not to damage any materials or equipment. Any materials or equipment damaged while removing,
handling or transporting shall be replaced with new material or equipment or repaired as approved by the Owner. All
lanterns, control cabinets and similar equipment removed shall be cleaned, packed, protected and crated as approved by
the Owner. All light poles, lanterns and associated equipment shall be loaded, transported, unloaded and placed in
storage where directed by the Owner and the Engineer. All poles removed shall be cleaned by removing all concrete and
deleterious material, and shall be suitably supported during handling and transporting. Blocking or other approved means
shall be provided to support poles that are placed in storage. All poles shall be covered with an approved protective cover
securely anchored or tied in place.
The Contractor shall remove and transport all light poles and control cabinets designated to be removed and the resulting
excavations shall be backfilled with borrow material in accordance with Section 10.3 and as approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall remove, salvage and transport existing lighting cables designated to be removed in accordance with
Section 10.14.
Where required or directed by the Engineer or described in the Particular Specifications, the Contractor shall extend and
provide connections of electric service between existing light poles which are indicated on the Contract plans to remain in
service.
10.13.3 Removal and Reinstallation of Existing Light Poles

10.13.3.1 General
The existing light poles may conflict with the proposed roadway at certain locations. The Contractor shall remove and
salvage these existing poles from locations conflicting with the proposed works or from locations as directed by the
Engineer. These removed and salvaged poles, if approved for reuse, shall be reinstalled at new locations as specified
herein and as directed by the Engineer. The excess material shall be delivered to the Owner’s stores as directed by the
Engineer.
10.13.3.2 Remove and Salvage Existing Light Poles with Lanterns

The Contractor shall remove and salvage the existing light poles, lanterns, and associated appurtenances from locations
as approved by the Engineer in accordance with the requirements of Section 10.13.2. Abandoned foundations shall be
removed and disposed of unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer as part of the works under the Item, Remove and
Salvage Existing Light Poles.
Page 10-195
10.13.3.3 Foundations for and Install Light Poles

The Contractor shall construct the foundations for and install all light poles with all associated appurtenances at
locations as approved by the Engineer.
Foundations for the light poles shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section 10.6.2.
Work shall include, but not by way of limitation, providing light pole foundations complete with anchor bolts and race
way conduits, and installing light poles complete with all accessories such as electrical cutouts, lanterns, wiring, and all
associated appurtenances as necessary to make each lighting unit complete and fully functional, as specified herein, as
specified in the Standard Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
The size of foundation, anchor bolts, and PVC raceway conduits, shall be as indicated on the Contract plans. The
Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing all the details as required by the Standard Specifications, including
calculations for the analysis of the subsoil conditions. The Contractor shall supply all materials required for the
construction of foundations including anchor bolts and raceway conduits. The Contractor shall reuse the poles, lanterns,
and associated appurtenances, except lamps, removed and salvaged from site for installing on the new foundations. All
lamps shall be replaced with new ones as a subsidiary obligation to the work Item, Foundations for and Install Light
Poles. The Contractor shall modify the existing lantern mast arm assembly, or provide a new lantern mast arm assembly
as required to install one or two lanterns on each pole. Modifying the removed and salvaged lantern mast arm
assemblies or providing new mast arms will not be separately measured and paid, but shall be a subsidiary obligation to
the Item, Foundation for and Install Light Pole. In case the conditions of the existing electrical cutouts, screws, nuts,
lugs, flag holders and/or lantern internal wiring are not suitable for reuse, the Contractor shall provide these items as a
subsidiary obligation to the work Item , Foundations for and Install Light Poles.
Separate measurement and payment will be made for the supply and installation of underground cables, for the supply
of cables for wiring between the electrical cutout and lantern, for the cables to connect the newly installed light poles to
the power source, and for the supply of lanterns in accordance with the requirements of the Standard Specifications for
the respective items and as specified herein these Particular Specifications.
10.14 Electrical Distribution

10.14.1 Description
The LV, 11 KV, 22 KV, 33 KV and 132 KV electrical distribution Works shall be as indicated on the Contract plans, as
specified herein, as included in the Bills of Quantities, as directed by the Engineer and as approved by the
ADWEA/ADDC and the Owner.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, manufacture, testing at the manufacturer's plant, delivery, transport,
loading and unloading, the laying, installing and site testing of all electric cables, material and equipment furnished by
the Contractor, which shall be handed over to the Owner in operating condition.
The Contractor shall load, transport, unload and install the electrical cables, materials and equipment if supplied by
ADWEA/ADDC.
All salvaged LV, 11 KV and 22 KV cable shall be re-used for installation along new routes or delivered to
ADWEA/ADDC Stores or Owner’s stores as determined by the Owner.
The Contractor shall provide electrical service trenches, as detailed on the Contract plans, at building service cable entry
locations under sidewalk areas.
The existing electrical distribution system shall remain energized during installation of new electrical cables, materials
and equipment. Upon completion of the installation, testing and acceptance of the new electrical distribution system by
ADWEA/ADDC, the deactivated electrical cables and appurtenances designated to be salvaged shall be removed as
hereinafter specified.
The Contractor shall familiarize himself and comply with the procedure for ADWEA/ADDC Electrical Distribution
works as specified in Section 10.1.12.
Prior to commencement of electrical work, the Contractor shall complete all manual excavation to locate existing
underground utilities and services as specified in Section 2.4 of Chapter 2, Earthwork, of these Standard Specifications.
Upon receipt of this information, the ADWEA/ADDC will identify the cables to be relocated to the new service reserves
or to be removed and salvaged. The Contractor shall prepare all shop drawings required for the electrical works for
approval by the Engineer and by the ADWEA/ADDC in accordance with the requirements for shop drawings as specified
in Section 1.15.4, Chapter 1, General Requirements, of these Standard Specifications.
Page 10-196
10.14.2 Guaranteed Characteristics

10.14.2.1 Design and Criteria
The cables, equipment and accessories shall be designed to give satisfactory and continuous service under the conditions
prevailing at the site. The design shall also provide adequate facilities for inspection, cleaning and repairs. Precautions
shall be taken in the design to ensure safety of the staff while operating and maintaining the equipment and of the general
public. All equipment shall be designed to minimize the entry of dust. Outdoor equipment shall be so designed that water
cannot enter or collect at any point. Corresponding parts of equipment shall be fully interchangeable.
The Contractor shall be bound to adhere to the design in these Standard Specifications (or elsewhere in these Contract
Documents). If the Contractor has reason to deviate from this criteria, he shall request the Owner and the Engineer for
approval of such deviations. The Owner and the Engineer have the option to accept or reject such deviations proposed by
the Contractor.
10.14.2.2 Rejection of Equipment

In the event the acceptance tests of the various equipment show that any equipment fails to meet the guarantees, the
Owner, the ADWEA/ADDC or the Engineer may direct the Contractor to proceed at once to make alterations and replace
it with new if fails, including furnishing of new parts as may be necessary to meet the requirements of the guarantees.
10.14.3 Submittals
10.14.3.1 General
The Contractor shall submit all shop drawings and related technical details in accordance with Section 1.2.14 of Chapter
1, General Requirements, of these Standard Specifications as specified herein and as directed by the Engineer.
10.14.3.2 Record Drawings, Manuals, Cable Schedules and Records

The Contractor shall prepare all records of the electrical cables, materials and equipment and submit one set of
transparent drawings and nine sets of prints, within two months of the cable laying. Record drawings shall be to a scale
of not less than 1:500 for 132 KV Cables or as advised by the Engineer.
The records shall be carefully taken on site during the installation of the Works. The final presentation of the records and
schedules shall be approved by the Owner, the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer. The records shall show the route, the
exact location of each cable, the position of each joint and shall have schedules showing the date of jointing, the name of
the jointer, the lengths between the joints, the serial number of the cable drums, the direction of the lay of cable, i.e., A &
Z ends, soil conditions, positions of ducts and sectional inserts of the cable trench giving the relative positions of the
cable, tiles, depths and spacings.
Fifteen complete and detailed sets of maintenance instruction manuals, housed in substantial book bindings, shall be
supplied by the Contractor to facilitate maintenance and operation of the Works. These sets of instruction manuals shall
include detailed jointing instructions for each type of joint supplied with the first consignment of cable. All drawings,
manuals and other submittals shall be in the English language. All other lists of tools, spare parts, progress schedules, test
reports and like information reports required to completely document this work shall be provided by the Contractor as
directed by the Engineer.
10.14.4 Low Voltage (LV) Cable and Accessories

10.14.4.1 Cable
All low voltage XLPE (Cross Linked Poly Ethylene) cables supplied by the Contractor for the installation in lighting and
power distribution systems shall comply with the requirements as specified in these Standard Specifications, Section 10.5.
All low voltage PVC cable for wiring inside light poles and/or other lighting units shall be as specified in Section 10.7.
The conductor size and cable length required shall be as included in the Bills of Quantities. The cables shall be installed
in accordance with the requirements as specified in Section 10.14.10.
10.14.4.2 Joint Box for Low Voltage Cable

1. General
Page 10-197
The joints supplied by the Contractor shall be of the dry type, using adhesive precoated on heat shrinkable components.
Joint boxes shall be suitable for 4 core XLPE Armored Cables of various sizes as indicated in the Bills of Quantities, and
shall include all necessary components including, but not limited to, corrosion resistant casing, overall sealing, armor
clamps, armor bonding, connecting ferrules and core insulation tubing required for the straight through jointing of two
cables. All joint boxes shall be designed, manufactured, tested and sized in accordance with the requirements of Section
10.1.2 and as required by the Engineer, the Owner and ADWEA/ADDC. Cable joints shall be installed at locations
including those required for connecting to the existing circuits (shut down joints) as directed by the Engineer and
ADWEA/ADDC, as specified Section 10.14.10.
The heat shrinkable tubes and molds shall shrink to a pre-determined size when heated to 120°C. They shall be coated
internally for sealing against ingress of moisture. The sealant shall have high dielectric capabilities.
The Contractor shall submit evidence with the shop drawings that the proposed technique has been extensively used by
established electricity supply authorities. Records of the clients served during the last five (5) years shall also be
submitted. The Contractor shall submit as part of his shop drawings complete details of Kit Contents for each size of
Joint, including, but not limited to, 'Length of tubing', 'Thickness before and after recovery' and shrink ratio.
The water table in Abu Dhabi is very high. Extra protection shall be supplied to protect the Joints against ingress of water.
All the jointing ferrules and lugs for copper cable shall be tinned copper. All the insulating and anti-tracking tubings shall
be the thick wall sealant lined type. The tubes shall have a high shrink ratio. The minimum overall dimensions shall be
as shown below.
Cable Size Overall Length

16 – 25 Sq.mm 600 mm
70 – 120 Sq.mm 900 mm
185 – 240 Sq.mm 1100 mm
2. Joint Ferrules
Jointing ferrules for copper cable shall be tinned copper circular compression type.
3. Insulating Tubing
The Heat shrinkable conductor tubing shall withstand the specified normal operating temperature of 90°C, and shall
not be affected by the temperature variation resulting from cyclic loading of the cable.
4. Earth and Armor Continuity Bonding
The earth conductivity shall be provided by means of compression type tinned copper bonding strip/braided copper
strip, having conductivity not less than 50% of the phase conductor. Necessary bonding clamps with armor support
rings shall be provided.
5. Overall Sleeve
The overall sleeve shall be a combination of heavy duty galvanized steel wrap around, clamped at each end and a
thick wall heavy duty type heat shrinkable tube or any approved type of composite joint case. A rigid steel tube or
application of wire mesh tape to form a protective cover is not acceptable. The sleeve shall not be affected by the soil
conditions prevailing in Abu Dhabi. The sleeve shall provide perfect sealing against ingress of water.
6. Performance Tests
The Contractor shall submit evidence with the shop drawings that the Joints have been tested by a recognized
Independent Testing Laboratory. The details of tests performed and the results thereof shall be submitted. Detailed
procedures of the tests performed shall also be submitted.
The low voltage Joints shall be tested as follows below:
Sequence Test Name Minimum Requirements

1 Insulation Resistance Minimum 1000 Mega Ohm
2 Impact As per Electrical Council Eng. Recommendation C81
3 A.C. Voltage 3.5 KV for five minutes
4 Impulse Voltage 8 KV
Page 10-198

6 As per VDE (Verin Deutsher Electrotecniker) 0278. 63 ELECT.
Load Cycling
Heat Cycle each of 8 Hours. 5 Hours.Heating-3 Hrs. Cooling
8 Impulse Voltage 8 KV
9 D.C. Voltage 15 KV for five minutes
7. Packing
Each Joint shall be supplied complete with all accessories, packed in a thick polyethylene bag with the size of the
Joint clearly indicated on the bag. Kit Contents with Jointing Instructions fully illustrated with sketches shall also be
supplied.
10.14.5 11 KV and 22 KV Cable

All 11 and 22 KV Cables supplied by the Contractor for installation in the lighting and power distribution systems shall
be stranded copper, cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, PVC sheathed, galvanized steel tape armored and PVC
overall served power cable meeting the requirements of IEC Pub 502 and as specified herein. The conductor size and
length of the cable shall be as included in the Bills of Quantities. The required values included in the technical
requirements for 11 and 22 KV cables indicate the properties acceptable to the ADWEA/ADDC. The Contractor's
proposed cable shall meet these requirements unless otherwise approved by the ADWEA/ADDC.
The cable shall be installed in accordance with the requirements as specified in Section 10.14.10.
10.14.5.2 Construction and Materials

1. Conductor
The conductor shall be compact round strand uncoated annealed copper wires having a 100% conductivity and as
hereinafter specified. Prior to applying the insulation the surface of the conductor shall be smoothed and clean.
2. Conductor Shielding
Conductor shielding shall be extruded black semi-conductive material. The extruded shield shall be easily removable
from the conductor and shall have an allowable operating temperature equal to or higher than that of the insulation.
The minimum average thickness of the semi-conducting layer shall not be less than 0.5mm.
3. Insulation
Insulation shall consist of extruded XLPE. The insulation shall meet the following basic requirements showing
below. For 22 KV insulation requirements, refer to datasheets.
Normal operating temperature 90°C

Permitted overload temperature 130°C
Short Circuit temperature 250°C
Chemical Resistance High
Thermal Resistivity Low
Minimum Average Insulation thickness 4.5mm
The Contractor shall furnish separately the specifications of the proposed insulation material as follows:
(a) Physical properties (Tensile strength, elongation at rupture, aging requirements, cold bend and ozone, chemical
resistance).
(b) Electrical properties (A.C. voltage test, insulation resistance, D.C. voltage test, corona level, dielectric constant,
power factor, the "U" bend test, short circuit levels and derating factors).
(c) Anti hygroscopic properties.
(d) Heat deformation results.
Page 10-199
4. Insulation Shielding
The individual core insulation shall be shielded by a layer of free stripping extruded semi-conducting material
applied directly over the insulation. An insulation shield that requires heat for its removal is not acceptable. Phase
identification shall be provided on the shield in color code, Red, Yellow and Blue. The minimum average thickness
of the insulation shield shall not be less than 1.0mm.
5. Metallic Screen
Metallic screen shall consist of one layer of plain annealed copper tape with suitable over lap and annealed bare
copper wires over the copper tape on individual cores. The average thickness of copper tape shall be 0.15mm. The
size and number of wires in combination with the copper tape shall be designed in such a way that the combined
cable core screens are adequate to carry an earth fault current of 13.6 kA for one second.
The short circuit performance of metallic shielding shall comply with the requirements of IPCEA publication P-45-
482, 1979. The tenderer must prove by calculation that the core screens are adequate to carry the specified earth fault
current.
6. Assembly
Three shielded cores shall be assembled with non-hygroscopic fillers. The direction of lay shall be left-hand lay.
Non-vulcanizable tape(s) shall be applied over the laid-up cores to form a compact circular assembly.
7. Sheath
The sheath shall consist of extruded black PVC complying with BS 6746, Table 1, Type 9. The average thickness
shall be not less than 2mm.
8. Bedding
Bedding shall consist of a fabric tape(s) with a suitable lap. The minimum thickness of bedding shall be not less than
0.5mm.
9. Armor
Armor shall consist of double layers of galvanized steel tape applied over the bedding. The two layers shall be laid
helically with a left hand lay so that the outer tape is centered over the gap of the inner tape. The gap between
adjacent turns of each tape shall not exceed 50% of the width of the tape. The outer tape shall overlap the inner tape
on both sides by not less than 15% of the tape width. The minimum average thickness of each tape shall be 0.8mm.
Galvanizing shall be a smooth finish. The zinc coating shall be applied by either the hot dip or the electro
galvanizing process.
10. Overall Serving
The overall serving shall consist of extruded red PVC complying with BS 6746, Table 1, Type 9. The minimum
thickness at any point shall be not less than 2.8mm. The PVC shall be fire retardant. The detail specifications for the
PVC compound proposed for sheathing shall be submitted separately.
11. Drum Length
The nominal length of cable per drum shall be 350 meters except for bridge crossings. For bridge crossings, the
Contractor shall propose a suitable length per drum, eliminating the need for cable jointing in the bridge structure.
12. Embossing
The following marks shall be embossed on one line on the overall serving:
a. Property of ADWEA Abu Dhabi
b. Manufacturer's name, Contract number
c. Year of manufacture
d. Voltage designation
e. Cable size
f. Sequential length marking at every meter.
13. Manufacturing Process
i. The cable shall be suitably cured, triple extruded, i.e., conductor shielding, insulation, insulation shielding shall
be extruded simultaneously. Steam cured cable is not acceptable.
Page 10-200
ii. The Contractor shall submit cross sectional details, technical particulars and manufacturing data for the cable
offered. He shall also submit the results of tests performed on the cable by an Independent Testing Laboratory.
iii. The manufacturing and quality control system shall be such as to exclude contaminants and voids in the
insulation and semi-conducting shielding. The method of determining the void counts in the insulation and
semi-conducting shielding shall be fully explained. The count of the voids in the completed cable shall be
submitted as part of the technical information.
10.14.5.3 Test
All cables shall be tested in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 10.14.8.
10.14.5.4 Packing
Each length of cable shall be wound on a non-returnable wooden or steel drum lagged with wooden battens.
10.14.5.5 Cable Joint Box and Cable Terminations for 11 and 22 KV Cable
1. Description
All joint boxes and terminations supplied by the Contractor shall be the heat shrinkable type and be suitable for 3
Core, XLPE, armored cables of various sizes as indicated in the Bills of Quantities. All 11 KV joint boxes and
terminations shall be designed, manufactured, tested and sized as specified herein and as required by the
ADWEA/ADDC 11 KV cable joints and terminations shall be installed at locations including those required for
connecting to the existing power distribution network (shut down joints and terminations) as directed by the Engineer
and the ADWEA/ADDC.
The heat shrinkable tubes and molds shall shrink to a pre-determined size when heated to 120°C. They shall be
coated internally for sealing against ingress of moisture. The sealant shall have high dielectric capabilities.
The Contractor shall submit evidence with the shop drawings that the proposed technique has been extensively used
by established electricity supply authorities. Records of the clients served during the last five (5) years with specific
reference of the client shall also be submitted. The Contractor shall submit as part of his shop drawings complete
details of Kit Contents for each size of Joint and terminations including, but not limited to, 'Length of tubing',
'Thickness before and after recovery' and shrink ratio.
2. Cable Joint Box
The joints for the 11 and 22 KV cables shall meet the requirements as follows:
i. Construction. The joints shall be horizontal, straight through, direct buried type. They shall consist of heat
shrinkable premolded components with a protective steel casing and an overall heavy duty PVC jacket.
a. The joint shall be suitable for direct underground burial and shall be water proof and sealed against
ingress of moisture. The ground water table in Abu Dhabi is very high and it is very normal to find
water at a depth of 75cm. This factor shall be considered in the design of joints.
b. The protective steel casing shall be designed to allow for cable core crossing. The jointing shall be by
means of tinned copper crimp type ferrules. The stress control semi-conducting and insulating tube
shall be the premolded heat shrinkable dry type.
c. The splicing shall have armor clamps to hold the cable assembly. A tinned copper shielding braid of
adequate cross section shall be supplied to reinstate the metallic screening of cores.
d. Necessary soldering material and flux shall be supplied with the joints. The protective steel casing with
the outer heat shrinkable heavy duty tube shall be mechanically strong and shall comply with relevant
impact test requirements.
ii. Splice Material and Technique. The splicing technique shall be easy to adopt with minimum skilled labor. The
Contractor shall submit a comprehensive list of all the components. Also the jointing instructions shall be
submitted with the shop drawings.
a. It is essential that the jointing technique has been extensively used by reputable electric supply
companies in the Middle East and specific references shall be submitted. The proposed joints shall be
tested by a recognized laboratory and details of the tests performed and the results obtained shall be
submitted.
Page 10-201
iii. Drawings and Splicing Instructions. The Contractor shall submit detailed sectional drawings indicating the splice
layout and shall furnish detailed descriptive splicing instructions.
3. Cable Terminations
The terminations for 11 and 22 KV cables shall be designed for compound filling or air clearance (without
compound) and shall be suitable for use on switchgear and transformer cable boxes.
System cyclic loading and fault conditions shall not cause any adverse effect on the performance of the terminations.
The terminations shall be supplied complete including, but not limited to, lugs, tubes, sealant, tapes, copper braids,
lead wires, and any other necessary accessories required to complete the termination. The Contractor shall submit
detailed sectional drawings indicating the termination layout and shall furnish detailed terminating instructions. The
overall length of the termination shall be a minimum of 450mm for indoor terminations. The termination shall not be
impaired by the effects of humidity and/or an atmosphere containing salt laden sand. The termination kit shall
contain complete components including, but not limited to the following:
i. Lugs: Compression type electrolytically tin plated copper cable lugs to suit XLPE, copper cables of the
sizes described in the Bills of Quantities.
ii. Stress Control Tubing: Heat shrinkable stress control tubing for individual cores.
iii. Anti-Tracking Tube: Heat shrinkable anti-tracking erosion resistant tube, for external covering of
individual cores.
iv. Cable Breakout: Heat shrinkable mould with anti-tracking properties for 3 core cable.
v. Sealing Boot (In Line/Right Angle as Required): Heat shrinkable mould to seal the core termination, cable
lug and bushing on individual cores.
vi. Earthing: Copper earthing braid for earthing the cable screening. Earth connection shall be completed by
solderless constant force spring roll.
vii. Sundry Items: Miscellaneous sundry items including, but not limited to, binding wire, earthing braid,
soldering wire, solder, sealant, adhesive tapes, sealing tapes and cleaning pad, required to complete the
termination.
4. Performance test for 11 KV Cable Joints and Terminations
The joints and terminations for 11 KV cables shall be tested as follows in Table 10-9. Refer datasheets for 22 KV
joints and terminations.
Table 10-9: 11 KV Test Requirements

1 Impact (Joint only) As per Electrical Council Eng. Recommendation C81.
2 A.C. Voltage 35kV for one minute
3 Partial Discharge Maximum 20 p.c. at 12kV
4 Impulse Voltage 95kV for indoor / 110kV for outdoor
As per VDE 0278. 63 Electrical heat cycles of 8 hours - 5
5 Load Cycling
hours heating, 3 hours cooling at 15kV
7 Thermal Short Circuit As per VDE 0278 / Two - One Second Short Circuits
As per VDE 0278. 63 Electrical heat cycles of 8 hours - 5
8 Load Cycling
hours heating, 3 hours cooling at 15kV
10 Impulse Voltage 48kV for 30 minutes
11 D.C. Voltage 95kV for indoor / 110kV for outdoor
The test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC
Humidity (Termination
12 Publication No. 466, Appendix C, and VDE 0278 on the
only)
termination only. Indoor terminations shall be subjected to
Page 10-202

an A.C. Voltage of 7.5kV for 100 hours in a humidity
chamber, where water with a conductivity of 800 micro
siemens per centimeter shall be sprayed at a rate of 0.4
L/Hr. per cubic meter in the test chamber.
13 A.C. Voltage 35kV for one minute
14 Dynamic Short Circuit As per Cable Specifications
5. Packing
Each joint and termination shall be supplied complete with all accessories, packed in a thick polyethylene bag with
the size of the Joint/Termination clearly indicated on the bag. Kit Contents with Jointing Instructions fully illustrated
with sketches shall also be supplied.
10.14.5.6 Fiber Optic Cable, Telephone Cable and Pilot Cable

All fiber optic cable, telephone cable and pilot cable to be supplied by the Contractor shall met the latest ADDC/ADWEA
specification and requirements. Few type of fiber optic cable, telephone cable and pilot cable are included in these
specifications.
10.14.5.7 Technical Requirements

The Contractor shall complete and submit the schedules, technical particulars and guarantees for 11 KV, 22 KV, 33 KV
and 132 KV XLPE cables and accessories as per latest ADWEA/ADDC standard specifications or as included in the
Particular Specifications.
10.14.6 33 KV Cable and Accessories

10.14.6.1 General
The 33 KV cable design, manufacture, testing at the manufacturer's plant, delivery, transport, laying and installation shall
be as specified herein. The 33 KV power cable installations shall be handed over in operating condition after voltage
testing.
10.14.6.2 Fundamentals for the Design

The routes for the cables have not yet been finalized and are schematic as indicated on the Contract plans. Consequently,
the lengths shall be based on quantities included in the Bills of Quantities.
10.14.6.3 Tests
All cable shall be tested in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 10.14.8.
The manufacturer shall fabricate the cable lengths necessary for the tests and include the extra cable in the order.
Upon completion of the cable installations, tests shall again be performed at site on the complete installation.
10.14.6.4 Material
1. Cable, General
The 33,000 volt cable is for installation in the ADWEA/ADDC's 33 KV system and it shall be constructed in
accordance with and conform to relevant IEC or ASTM Specifications as applicable. The cable is to be laid and
jointed by the Contractor.
The testing and commissioning of the 33 KV cable circuits will be carried out jointly by the Contractor, the Engineer
and the ADWEA/ADDC.
The Contractor shall take full technical responsibility for the installation/jointing and terminating works, testing and
commissioning of the new cables.
2. Cable Requirements
The 33 KV, 3 core cable shall comply with the following:
Page 10-203
i. Conductor
The cable conductor shall consist of compact round stranded, soft annealed uncoated copper wire having a
conductivity of not less than 100 percent of the international standard. The surface of the individual strands shall
be smooth and clean before the insulation is applied. The number of strands shall be 61.
ii. Conductor Shield
The stranded conductor shall be shielded with an extruded semi-conducting layer before insulation is applied.
The thickness of the shield shall be 0.5 mm.
iii. Insulation
The insulation shall be extruded solid dielectric cross linked polyethylene and shall satisfy the following
requirements:
• Normal Operating Temperature 90°C
• Permitted Overload Temperature 130°C
• Short Circuit Temperature 250°C
• Moisture Resistance High
• Thermal Resistivity Low
• Fire Resistance Good
• Nominal Insulation Thickness 10 mm
The insulation thickness and dielectric strength shall be adequate and suitable in all respects for a highest
system voltage of 36 KV continuously.
The average thickness of the insulation shall be not less than the above specified nominal value.
The XLPE insulation shall be easy to strip from the conductors and individual conductors of multi-core cables
shall be easy to separate for termination purposes. The Contractor shall furnish separately the specification
details of the XLPE insulation proposed which shall be accordance with IEC requirements. These shall
include:
• Physical properties (tensile strength, elongation at rupture, aging requirements, cold bend and ozone,
chemical resistance).
• Electrical properties (AC voltage test, insulation resistance, DC voltage test, corona level, dielectric
constant, power factor and the "U" bend test).
• Anti-hygroscopic properties.
• Heat deformation results.
iv. Core Screen
The core screen shall consist of a free stripping non-metallic semi-conducting extruded compound in
combination with a metallic layer in accordance with Articles 5.3 and 8 of I.E.C. Publication 502.1. Phase
identification shall be provided on the screen by colour code Red, Yellow and Blue.
Where the cable core screens are inadequate to meet the earth fault current specified, i.e., 26 KA for one second,
a metallic layer of adequate cross sectional area shall be included in the design either laid up with the main cores
or applied over the screen. The metallic layer shall be constructed of annealed high conductivity copper wires in
accordance with BS 630 or the equivalent I.E.C. Publication.
The Contractor shall prove by calculation that the core screens are adequate to carry the earth fault current. The
maximum foreseeable three phase symmetrical and earth fault current to which the cable shall be subjected is 26
KA for one second.
v. Assembly
The three insulated cores shall be laid up with necessary non-hygroscopic fillers and bound with non
vulcanizable tape to form a complete circular assembly.
vi. Sheath
Page 10-204
The sheath shall be extruded PVC complying with BS 6746, Table 1, Type 9. The nominal thickness of the
sheath shall be 3 mm.
vii. Bedding
Over the sheath shall be applied a bedding fabric tape, minimum thickness 1 mm.
viii. Armor
Armor shall consist of two layers of galvanized flat steel tape applied over the sheath helically in two layers so
that the outer tape is approximately centered over the gap of the inner tape. The gap between adjacent turns of
each tape shall not exceed 50 percent of the width of the tape. The nominal thickness of the steel tape shall be
0.8 mm. The tensile strength of the tape shall be not less than 400 mm Sq.m. Joints in steel tape shall be welded
and surface irregularities removed. Galvanizing shall have a smooth finish.
ix. Overall Serving
The overall serving shall consist of extruded PVC over the armor. The serving material shall be Type 9, Table
1, of BS 6746. The nominal thickness of serving shall be 4 mm. The voltage designation, cable size, number
of cores, manufacturer's name, Contractor’s name, Contract number and Owner’s description as "PROPERTY
OF ADWEA ABU DHABI" shall be embossed on the PVC serving.
x. Size and Drum Length to be Supplied
The Contractor shall be free to supply cable in any convenient drum length he prefers for the installation or as
xi. Technical Details and Samples
The Contractor shall submit with his Tender detailed technical particulars and manufacturing data for the cable
proposed including evidence that the cable manufacturer shall have been manufacturing and supplying similar
cable to leading electric utility companies for at least five (5) years. Tenders lacking these details may be
rejected.
xii. Data to be Furnished by the Contractor
• The Contractor shall fill in, as part to his proposal, all data requested in the schedules attached to the
Particular Specifications. For ease in evaluation, units as indicated shall be strictly adhered to.
• No deviation from these Standard Specifications is acceptable and no alternative proposals will be
considered by the Owner.
3. Telephone Cable
The telephone cable material and type shall be as directed by the ADWEA/ADDC. It shall comply in every respect to the
applicable I.E.C. specification or approved equivalent standards:
The conductor insulation shall have various colors for easy identification and termination, subject to the approval of the
ADWEA/ADDC.
The conductor shall consist of clean, smooth, soft, annealed, solid electrolytic copper wire with standardized
conductivity. The surface of individual wires shall be smooth and clean before the insulation is applied.
The required number of casting elements shall be assembled together and wrapped with a polyester foil. Suitable fillers
shall be applied to form a circular cable. The beading shall consist of a double layer of galvanized steel tape over the
bedding. The armor tapes shall be lapped with a short lay, the second one covering the butt space of the first layer. The
outer sheath shall consist of extruded PVC, type 9, termite resistant and suitable for the site service conditions.
The manufacturer's name, Contractor’s name, Contract number and the year of manufacture shall be embossed on the
outer sheath, as well as "ADWEA/ADDC 7/54 TEL" every 10 meters.
Telephone cables laid in power cable trenches or in the vicinity of power cables shall be protected against damage by
induced high voltages incurring in case of asymmetrical power cable operation, e.g., during short circuits.
The Contractor shall prove by calculation whether the insulation of the proposed cable is sufficient for the given network
configuration, or if special protection devices, e.g., isolating transformers, have to be installed at certain distances within
the cable run. If it proves necessary to install protection devices, the Contractor shall submit his shop plans for the
proposed protection devices to the Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC for approval.
4. Pilot Cable
Page 10-205
The pilot cable shall comply in every respect to the applicable IEC specification or approved equivalent standards. The
pilot cable proposed shall be terminated in marshalling terminal blocks inside marshalling cabinets at each substation.
The pilot cable terminal block shall be of the type having two OBA terminals with an insulated bridging so as to allow a
circuit to be isolated. The plug shall be either color coded or numbered to facilitate easy identification.
5. Sealing and Drumming
Both ends of every length of cable shall be sealed properly immediately after tests at the Contractor's premises. Before
leaving the factory suitable pulling eyes shall be fitted to the cables for use when drawing cables in ducts or conduits.
The cables shall be rolled on strong wooden drums provided with wooden battens to protect the cable from damage.
Alternative steel drums may be provided or a design which allows dismantling the drum flanges from the coil for easy
disposal.
The Contractor shall submit the drum design for approval. The drum shall be marked to indicate the direction of rolling.
6. Joint Box for 33 KV Cables
i. Type of Cable
The joint boxes shall be suitable for three conductor 33 KV cables, cross linked polyethylene extruded dry
insulated type shielded, sheathed, armored and PVC served suitable for indoor or outdoor and underground use.
ii. Cable Size
The joint boxes are required for 33 KV, 3 core 240 Sq. mm copper XLPE insulated type cable.
iii. Construction
a) The joint boxes shall be horizontal, straight through split type made of cast iron coated with bituminous
coating inside and outside. These shall be suitable for direct burial underground and shall be waterproof.
At least two holes with plugs shall be provided for compound filling and inspection. The boxes shall be
suitable for filling with asphaltic base compound.
b) The joint box shall have an inner lead sleeve to be filled with compound. The lead sleeve shall be
sufficiently large to allow for core crossing in the splicing.
c) The box shall have external armor clamps to hold the cable assembly.
d) Ground straps shall be provided for grounding flat steel tape armor on the inside splice box.
e) Tinned copper shielding braid shall be 25.4 mm wide and the ground braid shall be 12.7 mm wide.
f) A compression type jointing sleeve made from wrought copper annealed and tinned shall be provided for
jointing conductors. The sleeve shall be mechanically strong with adequate contact and cross-sectional area
for efficient and reliable service and shall have a hole in the middle to inspect.
g) Insulation material shall consist of prefabricated components, e.g., prefabricated stress cones, tubes etc., to
facilitate the splice-making and save time.
iv. Jointing Material and Compound
The Contractor shall furnish the complete joint box with all jointing materials and compounds for splicing. The
Contractor shall include with his submittal a complete description of all splicing material, e.g., copper
conductors, solder, flux, abrasive cloth, ground clamps, tapes (insulating, friction, cotton, plastic and semi-
conducting, shielding and grounding braids) and prefabricated insulation components.
• Drawing and Jointing Instructions
The Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings of the joint box indicating joint layout and shall furnish
detailed descriptive jointing instructions.
• Jointing Tools
The Contractor shall include a complete jointing kit. A list of contents of the kit shall be provided.
7. Heat Shrinkable Termination

33 KV terminations for indoor, metalclad switchgear, transformers and outdoor overhead line terminations are required
for 240 Sq. mm copper XLPE cable. The terminations shall be suitable for use on switchgear and transformer cable
Page 10-206
boxes and designed for compound filling or air clearance (without compound). All components shall be manufactured
from a modified polyethylene.
All completed terminations shall have a certified fault with standing rating of 1500 MVA at 33 KV. System cyclic
loadings and fault conditions shall have no effect on the terminations. The Contractor shall provide evidence with his
proposal that the terminations have been tested by a recognized testing laboratory. The details of the tests and methods
shall also be submitted.
The Contractor is to supply evidence of experience indicating places where such products are being used.
The terminations shall be supplied complete with lugs, tubes, tapes, copper braids, lead wire and other necessary
accessories allowing for 20% wastage. The exact dimensions of cable boxes will be supplied by the ADWEA/ADDC.
The termination shall not be impaired by the effects of humidity and/or atmosphere containing salt laden sand.
Each termination joint shall be supplied complete with all accessories plus 20% extra material for wastage packed in a
thick polyethylene bag with the size of the joint clearly indicated on the bag.
i. 33 KV Indoor Air Insulated Terminations
Terminations of 240 Sq. mm copper XLPE cable with double steel tape armor at metalclad switchgear and
transformers shall be suitable for termination in cable boxes designed for compound filling or air clearance
(without compound).
The termination kit shall contain the following as the minimum:
(a) Lugs: Compression type cable lugs shall be supplied to suit the 240 Sq. mm copper XLPE cable.
(b) Stress Control Tubing: The stress is to be controlled by heat shrinkable stress control tubing which is to be
applied for the termination of individual cores. The core has copper screening.
The tubing shall withstand the temperature and humidity prevailing in Abu Dhabi. The material shall also be
solvent resistant (transformer oil) in accordance with the applicable BS standard and as required by the
ADWEA/ADDC. Detailed characteristics of the material shall be supplied.
(c) Non-Tracking Tube: Heat shrinkable, non-tracking, erosion resistant tube shall be used for external covering
of individual cores. The Contractor shall furnish characteristics of the material for approval by the
ADWEA/ADDC. Also, the tests applied and results shall be submitted by the Contractor.
(d) Cable Breakout (Trifurcation Glove): Heat shrinkable mould to seal the cable crotch shall have the same
properties as (b) and (c) above.
(e) Transition and in Line Boot: Heat shrinkable mould to seal the core termination, cable lug and the bushing
shall be supplied for individual cores. The material shall have the same properties as (d) above. 15% of
terminations shall include insulating boots with sealant tape for use on right angle connections with long
bushings. All molds shall be reduced to a predetermined size when heated to 120°C. The components shall
be coated internally for moisture sealing. The sealant shall have high dielectric strength.
ii. 33 KV Outdoor Termination
The termination kit shall contain the following as the minimum:
(a) Lugs: Compression type cable lugs shall be supplied to suit 240 Sq. mm copper XLPE cable.
(b) Stress Control Tubing: The stress is to be controlled by heat shrinkable stress control tubing which is to be
applied for the termination of individual cores. The core has copper screening.
The tubing shall withstand the temperature and humidity prevailing in Abu Dhabi. The material shall also be
solvent resistant (transformer oil) in accordance with the applicable BS standard and as required by the
ADWEA/ADDC. Detailed characteristics of the material shall be supplied.
(c) Non-Tracking Tube: Heat shrinkable non-tracking, erosion resistant tube shall be used for external covering
of individual cores. The characteristics of the material shall be supplied. Also, the tests applied and results
shall be submitted by the supplier.
(d) Cable Breakout (Trifurcation Glove): Heat shrinkable mould to seal the cable crotch shall have the same
properties as (b) and (c) above.
(e) Transition Boot: Heat shrinkable transition boot of the same properties as (d) above shall be supplied.
(f) Weather Sheds (Skirts): Heat shrinkable molds for weather sheds (skirts) shall have the non-tracking and
erosion resistant properties as in (b) and (c). The skirts shall cover individual cores so as to increase the
creepage distance.
Page 10-207
All molds shall be reduced to a predetermined size when heated to 120°C. The components shall be coated
internally for moisture sealing. The sealant shall have high dielectric strength.
8. Telephone Cable , Telephone Cable Joints, Cable Terminations and Fiber Optic Cables
Telephone cable, telephone cable joints, cable terminations and fiber optic cables shall comply with latest ADDC
specifications and requirements.
10.14.7 132 KV Cable and Accessories

The 132 KV cable design, manufacture, testing at the manufacturer’s plant, delivery, transport, laying, installing, voltage
testing, commissioning and handing-over in operating condition shall be as required by ADWEA requirements.
10.14.8 Tests
10.14.8.1 General
All tests shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own expense in compliance with Section 10.1.9. The Contractor
shall supply all specimens, testing apparatus and labor required for carrying out the prescribed tests. For the pressure
tests of high voltage cables at the site, the Contractor shall make available a suitable D.C. cable testing set. Pilot cables
shall be tested in accordance with the relevant IEC Publication and these Standard Specifications.
The rates for the various items of work in the Bills of Quantities shall include the cost of all tests specified. The
ADWEA/ADDC may, however, relieve the Contractor from carrying out certain type tests, provided the Contractor
produces type test certificates from a recognized testing authority acceptable to the Owner, the ADWEA/ADDC and the
Engineer. In such cases, the Contract Price will be reduced by an amount equal to the cost of type tests waived by the
ADWEA/ADDC. For this purpose, Tenderers shall quote separately in their Tenders the costs of the type tests specified.
All samples used for testing shall be at the Contractor's expense and shall not affect the lengths of cable to be supplied for
installation. This also applies to joint boxes and other accessories.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, copies of the records of all tests as directed by the Engineer and/or the
ADWEA/ADDC. The Works will not be accepted by the Owner, the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer until they have
passed the prescribed tests and have been approved in writing by the Owner, the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any payments whatsoever or any extension of time for completion because of tests,
or failure of any tests or the rejection of any part or material or plant as a result of any tests or inspection.
All instruments used for testing purposes shall, if required by the ADWEA/ADDC, be calibrated by an approved
authority acceptable to the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer.
10.14.8.2 Tests for All Cables during Manufacture

a. Testing and Inspection
All materials and equipment used in the Works are subject to inspections by the Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC. It
is the Contractor's responsibility to advise the Engineer when equipment and materials are available for inspection and
tests.
The following tests shall be carried out in accordance with details as specified:
1. Power Cables
i. Conductor Resistance Tests
The copper resistance of the conductors shall be measured by direct current at room temperature in
accordance with the applicable IEC Publication.
ii. Capacitance Test
The electrostatic capacitance of each drum length of completed cable shall be measured at power frequency
and shall not be higher than the guaranteed values stated in the cable schedules.
iii. High Voltage Tests
The voltage test shall be carried out with alternating current in accordance with the applicable I.E.C.
Publication.
iv. Dielectric Power Factor/Voltage Test
Page 10-208
Each drum length of completed cable shall be tested for power factor at normal frequency and at ambient
temperature and at 50, 125 and 200 percent of normal voltage. The power factor of the charging KVA, after
correction to a temperature of 20°C, shall not exceed the guaranteed values stated in the schedules or the
values stipulated in the applicable I.E.C. Publication.
v. Voltage Test on Cable Serving
Each drum length of completed cable shall withstand an applied voltage of the required KV D.C. as specified
in the applicable I.E.C. standard for one minute between the cable metallic sheath and external serving
surface.
2. Pilot Cable
i. Conductor Resistance Test
The copper resistance of the conductors shall be measured and shall not be higher than the guaranteed values.
ii. Capacitance Test
The electrostatic capacitance of each drum length of completed pilot cable shall be measured and shall not
differ from the guaranteed values.
iii. Voltage Test
To each drum length of completed pilot cable shall be applied for five (5) minutes a voltage of 3 KV between
pilot conductors and 10 KV between each pilot conductor and armor, and a voltage of 1.5 KV between
screened telephone conductor and the armor. Screen shall be earthed during this test.
iv. Voltage Test on Anti-Corrosion Covering.
The test shall be carried out in accordance with BS 6480 or an equivalent standard.
v. Galvanized Material
Samples selected by the Engineer of all galvanized material shall be subject to the galvanized tests set out in
BS No. 443 and No. 729 or equivalent standards.
b. Type Tests
Power Cables and Accessories
The following tests shall be made on samples taken from cables manufactured for the Works.
i. Thickness of Insulation, Sheathing and Serving.
A sample shall be selected from each 2000 meters of each type of completed cable, and it shall be at least 60 cms
long. The minimum thickness of paper insulation shall be determined and the paper checked for wrinkles or
tears. The minimum and average thickness of lead sheath, armor and the various coverings of bedding and
serving shall be determined and these shall agree with the guaranteed values. Also, the weights of copper, lead
and steel per meter of cable shall be determined.
ii. Dielectric Thermal Resistance Test
A sample of the cable selected by the Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC shall be tested for thermal resistance
of the dielectric at the maximum temperature at which the cable is specified to operate and under stipulated
conditions.
c. Pilot Cables and Accessories
i. Thickness of Insulation, Sheathing, Armor and Serving
Ten representative samples of the manufactured cable shall be examined and average thicknesses of insulation
sheathing, armor, bedding and serving determined. These samples shall be at least 60 cm long and shall be cut
not less than 30 cm from the end of the drum length.
ii. Voltage Test
A sample of the manufactured cable together with a joint box shall be tested and shall not break down when a
voltage of 15 KV is applied for five (5) minutes between pilot cores and between core and armor. During this
test the screens shall be connected to the armor. Subsequently, the sample shall be tested and shall not break
down when a voltage of 2.5 KV is applied for five (5) minutes between 2.5 Sq. mm screened core and the armor.
Screens shall be re-earthed in this test.
Page 10-209
10.14.8.3 Tests for Fiber Optic Cables

The tests for fiber optic cables shall be in accordance with the relevant IEC Publication and as required by
ADDC/ADWEA regulations.
10.14.8.4 Site Tests for 11 KV, 22 KV and 33 KV Cables

1. Measurements of Thickness and Weights
A one meter length of cable shall be cut from every 10 drums of finished cable, selected at random by the Engineer,
and the samples thus obtained, examined in detail and the following measurements and weights recorded:
• Thickness of insulation in mm.
• Thickness in mm of conductor insulating shield and copper shielding tape where applicable.
• Thickness of PVC sheath in mm.
• Thickness of bedding in mm where applicable.
• Number and thickness in mm of armor flat steel tape or wire. (f) Thickness of PVC overall serving in mm.
• Weight of armor flat steel tape or wire in gm.
• Weight of zinc coating of tape armor.
The values of thickness and weight thus determined shall agree with the guaranteed values.
All cable lengths cut and used for various tests shall be the Contractor's responsibility and shall be supplied at no
additional cost to the Owner. Cable lengths cut and used for various tests shall not affect the cable lengths to be
supplied.
2. Accelerated Treeing Test
Accelerated treeing tests shall be carried out on samples by use of high frequency power, heating to operating
temperature (90°C or above) and introduction of liquids into the conductor and into a container surrounding the
insulation shield. The details of the test procedure, voltage and frequency levels, test temperature, types of test fluids,
etc., proposed to be adopted for the accelerated treeing test shall be submitted by the Contractor.
10.14.8.5 Tests for 11 KV Cable

The cable tests shall be performed in applicable parts in accordance with IEC requirements and as specified in these
Standard Specifications. For testing purposes, UO/U shall be considered as 8.7/15kV (IEC 502).
1. Routine Tests
Routine tests shall be carried out on each cable length as follows:
• Conductor D.C. resistance measurement.
• High Voltage A.C. test.
• Partial discharge measurement.
2. Special Tests
The following tests shall be carried out on 10% of the manufactured quantity selected at random from each
consignment, in the presence of the Water and Electrical Authority’s Engineer. Test methods and results shall
comply with IEC 502.
• Conductor Examination.
• Check of dimensions.
• Electrical test.
• Hot Set Test.
3. Type Tests
All the Type Tests, Electrical and Non-Electrical, required by Article 16.0 and 17.0 of IEC 502, shall be performed
on the first lot of each size of cable, in the presence of the Owner appointed Inspector.
Page 10-210
10.14.8.6 Tests for Pilot/Telephone Cables

Each completed cable circuit shall be Megger tested by the application of 1,200 volts D.C. between conductors and each
conductor to the armor for pilot cores, 1,500 volts D.C. for telephone cores and 9,000 volts D.C. for screened pilot
cores.
10.14.9 Training
The Contractor shall provide facilities for the ADWEA/ADDC's local engineers and jointers to be trained in the
technique of installation and jointing of the 33 KV and 132 KV cables and accessories. A group of one engineer and
two jointers will be allocated for each period of training. The Contractor shall ensure that training is so arranged that at
the end of the period of training the Engineer and jointers have reached the necessary standard of competence to
maintain and repair the Works handed over. Such training shall be carried out on the job site in Abu Dhabi.
10.14.10 Cable Installation

10.14.10.1 General
Where indicated on the Contract plans or specified in the Particular Specifications or described in the Bills of
Quantities, the Contractor shall install lighting, LV, 11 KV, 22 KV, 33 KV and 132 KV electric cables, materials and
equipment furnished by any of the following:
1. The Contractor,
2. The Owner,
3. The ADWEA/ADDC,
in compliance with the applicable Sections of this Chapter, as required by the ADWEA/ADDC, the Owner, as specified
herein and as directed by the Engineer.
The Contract plans and these Standard Specifications are not intended to give all the details of wiring system installations.
All appurtenances such as boxes, fittings, and supports shall be provided as per Standards and Codes governing the
installation. Sufficient access and working space and clearances shall be provided around all equipment. Conduits and
cables shall be routed such as to be always either parallel or perpendicular to the structure.
Connection of conductors to terminal parts shall be made by means of pressure connectors and shall ensure thoroughly
good connections without damaging the conductors. Plug-in type connections shall not be acceptable. Connections of
dissimilar metals shall be strictly by methods approved by the Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC. Connections by
means of wire binding screws or studs and nuts having upturned lugs or an equivalent shall be permitted for 6 Sq. mm or
smaller conductors. Conductors shall be spliced or joined with splicing devices suitable for the use or by brazing,
welding or soldering. Soldered splices shall first be so spliced or joined as to be mechanically and electrically secured
without solder and then soldered. All joints and free ends of conductors shall be covered by an insulation equivalent to
that of the conductors or with an insulating device suitable for the purpose. All live parts of the equipment shall be
guarded against accidental contact by approved means. Installation of all cables, cable connections and cable joints shall
be by approved means and performed by persons specially qualified for such work.
There shall not be any intermediate joints in lighting cables except cable connections at terminations of each circuit.
The 132 KV cables and their accessories shall be installed, tested and commissioned by the Contractor with the assistance
of the cable manufacturer's own staff, with local skilled and unskilled labor employed only for excavation, cable laying,
backfilling and for civil Works, which shall also be adequately supervised by the Contractor. The Contractor shall employ
fully qualified and experienced personnel who have had previous experience on comparable installations and this shall
cover the supervisory, oil, testing and commissioning engineers, and jointers as a minimum. No member of staff
employed on the installation works shall be changed without prior written approval of the Owner, the ADWEA/ADDC
and the Engineer.
The Contractor shall supply all tools, haulage and lifting equipment and transport required for the installation of the
various cables for the respective circuits in compliance with Section 1.6.1, of Chapter 1, General Requirements, of these
10.14.10.2 Installing Cables for Lighting and Street Furniture

1. General
Page 10-211
This work shall consist of installing cables for roadway, decorative, bridge, street furniture and other lighting system
works as indicated on the Contract plans, or designated by the ADWEA/ADDC, as specified herein, as required by
the ADWEA/ADDC, and as directed by the Engineer.
2. Underground Direct Burial Cables
Where indicated on the Contract plans or required by the ADWEA/ADDC, or specified in the Particular
Specifications or described in the Bills of Quantities, the Contractor shall install all underground, direct burial
lighting cables furnished either by the Contractor or by the Owner, as specified herein and as directed by the
3. Cable Installation in Light Poles and Conduits
i. Description
This work consists of installing cables, furnished either by the Contractor or by the Owner, in 10.0M, 14.0M,
18.0M, 20.0M and 30.5M high light poles, decorative lighting, all interconnecting conduit between all bridge
lighting, overhead sign lighting and all related systems.
ii. Installing Cables in Poles and Conduit
The Contractor shall install cables of the sizes and types as indicated on the Contract plans, or as required by the
Engineer and/or the ADWEA/ADDC to connect lighting lanterns to the lighting distribution cables.
Where a number of single conductor wires are trained through the pole from the connection with the direct burial
lighting distribution cables in the base of the poles to the connection with the lanterns, the wires shall be neatly
cabled together and properly supported as approved by the Engineer, the Owner and/or the ADWEA/ADDC. All
wires and cables shall be pulled through the conduits so as to receive a minimum amount of abuse while installing.
When pulling wires or cables through conduits, an approved lubricant shall be used. Sufficient slack shall be
allowed in each wire run to permit contraction and expansion of the wires. A service loop of wire shall be left in
each junction box or handhole to facilitate future maintenance or splices. When starting fish wires or tapes into the
conduits, the ends shall be carefully taped so as not to injure the interior wall of the conduit. Where hitches are
used to pull the wire or cables, the hitches shall be applied so as to distribute the strains to both the copper
conductor and braid or insulation on the wire or cables. The hitches shall be made so that there will be no sharp
projections that will scratch or injure the interior bore of the conduit when pulling the cable or wire through it.
10.14.10.3 Earthing and Bonding for Lighting Installations

The earthings of wiring systems, circuits, equipment, arresters, cable armor, conduit or other metal raceways as a
protective measure shall be so arranged that there shall be no objectionable passage of current over the earthing
conductors. The path to earth from circuits, equipment, or cable armors and conduits shall be permanent and continuous
and shall have ample carrying capacity to conduct safely any current liable to be imposed on it and shall have
impedance sufficiently low to limit the potential above earth and facilitate the operation of the devices on the circuits.
The material such as earthing electrodes, copper conductor, fittings, couplings and connectors shall be approved by the
applicable standards as to their design, manufacture, testing and manner of installation. A separate copper wire shall be
pulled through non-metallic conduits to maintain the continuity of earthing systems. Rigid galvanized steel conduit, if
approved by the ADWEA/ADDC, shall be acceptable as the earthing path. Non-current carrying parts which are metallic
such as equipment and cabinet enclosures shall be earthed.
Bonding jumpers shall be of copper wire or strap with a cross-section area not less than 16 Sq. mm. Bonding jumpers
may be used for connecting enclosures to earthing conductors or lugs or to achieve earthing continuity between the
electrically separated components.
Earthing electrodes shall be the copper-clad steel rod type with 1.9 cm diameter and in sections of 1.2 meter long and to
reach 3.6 meter minimum depth. Rods shall have a thick copper covering inseparably molten-welded to a strong steel
core to provide stiffness for easy driving, rust resistance for long life and copper-to-copper contacts throughout to assure
low resistance. Electrodes, upon being driven into the earth, shall have resistance to ground not more than 2 ohms. The
earth pit components shall be as specified under Section 10.11.10. If practicable, two or more electrodes shall be
connected in series as approved by the Engineer, if necessary to attain the resistance value specified.
10.14.10.4 Trench and Backfill

The Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Section 10.3.
Page 10-212
The exact location of each trench and joint pit shall be subject to the approval of the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer.
The Contractor shall arrange that not more than 1,200 meters, or a lesser amount as directed by the Engineer and/or the
ADWEA/ADDC, of excavated trench shall be open at any time.
Where changes in levels are necessary in the bottoms of trenches, the bottom of the trench shall rise or fall gradually.
The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to the road or ground surface due to a slip or
breaking-away from the side walls of the trench.
Where sand dunes exist in the cable routes as finally approved, the sand dunes shall be cleared to the normal ground level.
Cables shall be laid in trenches with dimensions as specified below.
TRENCH DIMENSIONS IN CENTIMETERS
Voltage Width At Bottom Additional Width At Bottom

Depth
Circuit For One Circuit For Each Additional Circuit
132 KV 120 90 -
33 KV 100 50 50
22 KV 100 50 30-45
11 KV 100 50 30-45
6.6 KV 100 50 30-45
LV 75 30 30
Where the width of the service reservation is insufficient, the width of trench shall be as directed by the Engineer and/or
the ADWEA/ADDC.
For 132 KV cables, a 75mm layer of soft, sieved sand shall be placed in the trench to form a smooth bedding before the
cables are laid. After the cables have been laid they shall be covered with an additional layer of soft, sieved sand over
and around the cables to a level of 100mm above the top of the uppermost cable. The method of spreading and
compacting the sand layer over and around the cables shall be as specified by the ADWEA/ADDC. No mechanical
tamper shall be used for this work.
Wherever trenches for 132 KV cables are located parallel to existing services, cables, etc., the Contractor shall maintain a
distance of at least 50 cm between the existing services, cables, etc., and the edge of the new trench. The Contractor shall
cross existing services with the utmost care and shall ensure that the cables are adequately protected. He shall obtain the
written approval of the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer concerning the method of crossing existing services in advance
of proceeding with the Works.
132 KV cables shall be laid to the depth of 110 cm below the road level or the level given by the Engineer.
10.14.10.5 Cable Laying

The cables shall be laid along the routes and in the locations as approved by the ADWEA/ADDC. The ADWEA/ADDC
shall have the right to alter the cable routes and locations where it is considered necessary to avoid obstructions, or to suit
revised services reservations.
The ADWEA/ADDC will supply drawings indicating the cable routes and the locations of proposed circuits. In order to
assist the Contractor, they will also furnish records of existing cables and other services, the accuracy of which, however,
cannot be guaranteed.
All arrangements of cables and methods of laying and installation shall be subject to the approval of the ADWEA/ADDC
and the Engineer. The Contractor shall supply and install labels for the identification of cables, properly numbered and
located and subject to the approval of the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer.
Cable radii shall be as large as possible, and the minimum shall be 25 D along the cable route and 15 D adjacent to joints
and terminations (D being the overall diameter of the cable).
Before installing cables in ducts, the Contractor shall remove any loose material from the ducts and shall prove them by a
method approved by the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer.
Cables shall be placed into underground ducts at all road crossings. Factory installed pulling eyes shall be used when
drawing cables in ducts.
Page 10-213
Cables shall be laid directly from the drum into the trenches and special rollers placed at close intervals shall be employed
for supporting the cables while pulling and laying them. Rollers used during the laying of cables shall have no sharp
projecting parts likely to damage the cables.
Every non-flexible cable shall be securely supported at a point not more than one meter from its terminal gland to prevent
stressing of the termination, and on vertical runs passing through floors, the cables shall be supported immediately above
the floor.
For single core cables carrying three phase alternating current, non-magnetic cleats shall be used, and for other cables,
claw type cleats shall be used.
The Contractor shall install all electric cables on racks, trays and supporting steelwork for the cables as shown on the
Contract plans and in accordance with requirements of the ADWEA/ADDC, as specified herein and as directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall supply all racks, trays and supporting steelwork, for either cables supplied by the
ADWEA/ADDC and installed by the Contractor or for cables supplied and installed by the Contractor. All cables shall be
run with particular regard to neatness of appearance. Multiple runs shall be marshalled so that cables entering or leaving
the run do so in an orderly and logical manner.
Each 132 KV cable circuit consists of three single core cables and associated pilot cable and shall be laid straight in flat
formation, unless directed otherwise by the ADWEA/ADDC, with a minimum spacing of 20 cm between centers and
uniform spacing being ensured at close intervals. The spacing between two 132 KV cable circuits along the same route
and at substations shall be as specified by the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer prior to commencement of installation
work but at no point shall the distance between the 132 KV cable circuits be less than 100 cm. All 132 KV cables routed
in concrete trenches shall be supported by means of suitable spacers. They shall run in a neat and orderly manner and the
crossing of cables within the concrete trench shall be avoided as far as possible. Cables of different voltages shall be kept
separate.
10.14.10.6 Install Cable Covering Tile

The Contractor shall install precast concrete cable covering tiles, furnished either by the ADWEA/ADDC or by the
Contractor, over all new direct burial electrical cables installed in trenches and over all existing electrical cables exposed
by manual excavation to verify locations of such existing cables.
All cable covering tiles shall comply with the requirements of Section 10.12.9 and as specified herein.
Cable covering tiles shall be carefully centered over each cable, all being closely interlocked with the adjacent cable
covering tiles throughout the length of the cables.
The Contractor shall install cable covering tiles over all lighting, LV, 6.6 KV, 11 KV, 22 KV, 33 KV and 132 KV cables
as indicated on the Contract plans, as specified in Section 10.12, as specified herein and as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall furnish all cable covering tiles unless otherwise indicated on the Contract plans, specified in the
Particular Specifications or described in the Bills of Quantities.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all cable covering tiles for 132 KV cables which shall be considered as subsidiary
to the Items of work for the 132 KV cable installations.
Where cable covering tiles are indicated on the Contract plans or specified in the Particular Specifications or described in
the Bills of Quantities to be furnished by the ADWEA/ADDC, the Contractor shall obtain such tiles at the
ADWEA/ADDC storage yard, and shall load, transport, unload and install over cables in accordance with the details
indicated on the Contract plans and the applicable Sections of these Standard Specifications
10.14.10.7 Jointing and Terminating

The Contractor shall install all material furnished by the Contractor, or by the Owner, or by the ADWEA/ADDC
necessary for jointing and termination of lighting, LV, 6.6 KV, 11 KV, 22 KV and 33 KV power cables and pilot cables.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all materials necessary for jointing and termination of 132 KV cables installed in
the Work.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for checking his jointing and terminating work and for putting into operation the
completed cable installation.
The method of stripping the sheath, filler and insulation of all cables necessary for cable jointing and terminating shall be
as approved by the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer.
For control wiring, the cable tails shall be so bound that each wire may be traced back to its associated cable without
difficulty. Cores in pairs or groups shall be kept together. Any spare cores shall be numbered and terminated in spare
terminals.
Page 10-214
The 132 KV oil-filled cables shall be terminated at each end by sealing the ends.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct phase connections of the cables. Site tests shall be carried out by the
Contractor in the presence of the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer and if faults are found, the Contractor shall carry out
necessary corrections.
Where insulated glands are to be installed, the Contractor shall ensure that the insulation is maintained after the cables
have been jointed and shall, if required, demonstrate this to the satisfaction of the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer.
Single core cables shall be identified by colored tape over the cable at all appropriate points.
Each joint shall be clearly labelled in an approved manner to indicate the cable number and the joint number, and single
core cable joints shall be so marked that the phase identity of each joint may be subsequently ascertained.
The following ADWEA/ADDC procedure shall apply and shall be followed by the Contractor for cable jointing:
1. Cable jointing and terminating works are to be performed according to ADWEA/ADDC instructions and
requirements.
2. The Contractor shall provide qualified personnel, approved by the ADWEA/ADDC, to supervise the electrical
works. Shut down joints and terminations shall be installed under ADWEA/ADDC supervision. The
Contractor shall comply with the ADWEA/ADDC procedures for Permit to Work (PTW) for installing the
shut down joints and terminations.
3. Only experienced jointers, approved by the ADWEA/ADDC after practical testing, will be authorized for
jointing works. The jointers will be categorized for different voltage ranges (i.e., LV, 6.6 KV, 11 KV, 22 KV
and 33 KV) of cables. Jointing for a particular voltage range of cable should be done by the jointer approved
for that category.
4. When ADWEA/ADDC supplies the joints and jointing materials for LV, 6.6 KV, 11 KV, 22 KV and 33 KV
cables the Contractor shall comply with the ADWEA/ADDC procedure for the issue of materials.
5. The Contractor shall safely store the materials received from the ADWEA/ADDC and shall maintain proper
accounts and stock records for the ADWEA/ADDC's inspection when required.
6. The Contractor shall give a minimum of three (3) days advance notice to the ADWEA/ADDC before jointing
cables.
7. The ADWEA/ADDC will accept only those joints which are found satisfactory according to
ADWEA/ADDC's tests.
8. Test certificates for each joint shall be signed by the jointer, the Contractor, the Engineer and the
ADWEA/ADDC.
9. The jointer's name and his ADWEA/ADDC approval number shall be furnished in each test certificate.
10. The cost of failed joints as determined by the ADWEA/ADDC's testing shall be recovered from the Contractor
and the Contractor shall reinstall the jointing at no additional cost to the Owner.
11. The ADWEA/ADDC approval for the jointer will be cancelled if three (3) or more joints installed by him
fails.
12. Jointing position for a particular voltage range of cable shall be marked by a point marker tail as approved by
ADWEA/ADDC or the Owner.
The Contractor shall, where required, ring through and identify the cores of the pilot cables. He shall fit
numbered ferrules at all terminations. The ferrules shall be of insulating material which shall be white and
shall have a glossy finish. The ferrules shall be unaffected by oil or dampness. Characters for identification
shall be suitably marked in black.
For pilot conductors, either approved compression lugs or Ross Courtney claw type washers shall be used at
the terminations.
The pilot cables shall be terminated in compression type armor gripping mechanical glands. These glands
shall be provided with an earth tag and PVC shroud.
10.14.10.8 Install Low Voltage Feeder Pillars (Sub Distribution Feeder Pillars)
and Service Turrets (Sub Distribution Service Cabinets)
1. General
Page 10-215
Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specifications, the Contractor shall supply and install all the low voltage
feeder pillars and service turrets, the associated cable terminations, earthing and bonding materials and precast
concrete foundations all supplied by the ADDC, at locations indicated on the Contract plans or as directed by the
ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer. Overall dimensions, internal layout of components and anchor bolt details for
the low voltage feeder pillars and service turrets shall be as required by ADDC and the Engineer and/or as indicated
on the Contract plans. Prior to preparing the shop drawings, the Contractor shall confirm these details with the
Engineer.
All components of the feeder pillar and service turret shall withstand the climatic conditions as specified in Section
10.1.6. System characteristics are as specified in Section 10.1.4.
Properties and performance of the various components of the feeder pillar and service turret shall conform to the
latest editions of the following standards and codes:
IEC 60439 : Low Voltage Switchgear
IEC 60144 : Degree of Protection
IEC 60269 : Low Voltage Fuses
IEC 60529 : Classification of Degree of Protection provided by enclosures
ESI 37-2 : Distribution Fuse Board
DIN 43623 : Low Voltage Switchgear Strip Fuse
BS 5486 : Factory Built Assembly of LV Switchgear
BS 3692 : Bolts, Screws and Nuts
BS 3382 : Electro Plated Coating on Threaded Components
BS 6121 : Mechanical Cable Glands
BS 729 : Hot Dip Galvanized Coating
BS 2989 : Continuously Hot Dip Zinc Coated Steel
2. Low Voltage Feeder Pillar (Sub Distribution Feeder Pillar)
i. General
The Low Voltage Feeder Pillars are intended for outdoor installation in ADWEA/ADDC Power Distribution
400/230 Volt network. They shall have the required number of strip fuse ways fixed vertically in a free standing
weather proof metallic enclosure, complete with cable terminations, glanding and earthing arrangements.
The whole assembly shall be generally as per BS 5486/IEC/VDE specifications (Factory built assembly of LV
Switchgear) except as specified herein.
The Feeder Pillar shall have interphase-barriers and blank labels for feeder identification. The interphase busbar
spacing shall be as per DIN Standard. Interstrip clearance and the depth of the enclosure shall be designed in
consideration of the thermal effects as well as to ensure interchangeability of different manufacturer’s types of
strip fuse ways.
The equipment proposed shall be short circuit tested at a recognized testing facility up to 46kA R.M.S. for 1
second. A short circuit test certificate shall be submitted with the shop drawings.
A tray for spare fuse links and the isolators operating rod shall be included. Holders for keeping maintenance
record cards and space for fixing the wiring diagram shall also be provided.
All parts of the equipment shall be readily accessible and replaceable. The design shall be such that the cables can
be readily terminated from the front side of the cabinet. Insulating materials shall be non-hygroscopic and resistant
to tracking.
All parts of equal size and rating shall be interchangeable. The general design shall be such that the number of
joints shall be kept to a minimum. All bolted electrical joints shall be secured by corrosion-proof high tensile steel
bolts or studs conforming to BS 3692, Grade 8.8. All bolts and studs shall be plated in conformance with BS 3382
and shall have corrosion-proof locking features. Each strip fuse way unit position shall be drilled for mounting at
145mm centers. Provision shall be provided for future installation of additional units.
ii. Rating
Page 10-216
The normal rating specified shall be the continuous rating under the worst temperature conditions encountered in
Abu Dhabi.
iii. Feeder Pillar Assembly
Each type of Feeder Pillar assembly shall be complete with the following:
(i) Required number of strip fuse ways of specified sizes with circuit labels.
(ii) Tinned copper busbar of specified size.
(iii) Cable glands.
(iv) Cable lugs.
(v) NH type fuses.
(vi) IP43 Steel enclosure with locking arrangements.
iv. Configuration
Feeder pillar configuration types shall be as follows:
(a) Feeder Pillar, 800 Amperes, 6 Ways. Feeder Pillar, 800 Amperes, 6 Ways shall be provided with
components as follows:
Two NH strip fuse ways conforming to DIN 43623 (to connect main incoming cables) having a
current rating of 630 Amperes (site rating), with solid links, off-load type, operated by means of an
insulated handle and suitable for 4 core, 240 Sq.mm, low voltage, cross linked polyethylene, steel
wire armored, PVC served, stranded copper conductor. The unit all be supplied with solid links
extractable with a standard fuse puller. Cable glands and lugs suitable for the main cable (4 core, 240
Sq.mm) shall be supplied.
Four NH strip fuse ways conforming to DIN 43623 to connect outgoing feeders. The unit shall be
rated (site rating) for 400 Amperes, but supplied with HRC NH type, Class GL, Size 2 fuses. Space
provision shall be made for the addition of two feeders. The fuses shall comply with VDE/I.E.C 269,
low loss type and VDE marked. All the outgoing feeder units shall be identical. Cable glands and
cable lugs shall be supplied suitable for 4 core, 120 Sq.mm, low voltage, cross linked, polyethylene
insulated, steel wire armored, PVC served, stranded copper conductor.
(b) Feeder Pillar, 800 Amperes, 8 Ways. Feeder pillars, 800 Amperes, 8 Way shall be provided with
components as follows:
Two NH strip fuse ways conforming to DIN 43623 (to connect main incoming cables) having a
current rating of 630 Amperes (site rating), with solid links off-load type, operated by means of an
insulated handle and suitable for 4 core, 240 Sq.mm, low voltage, cross linked polyethylene, steel
wire armored, PVC served, stranded copper conductor. The unit shall be supplied with solid links
extractable with a standard fuse puller. Cable glands and lugs suitable for main cables (4 core, 240
Sq.mm) shall be supplied.
Six NH strip fuse ways conforming to DIN 43623 to connect outgoing feeders. The unit shall be
rated for 250 Amperes, but supplied with 160 Amperes and 200 Amperes, HRC NH type, Class G1,
Size 1, Cartridge Fuses. Provision shall be made for the addition of two feeders. The fuses shall
comply with VDE/I.E.C 269, low loss type and VDE marked.
All the outgoing feeder units shall be identical. The contacts must be liberally designed to carry a
current of 250 amperes continuously in Abu Dhabi climatic conditions. Cable lugs and glands shall
be supplied suitable for 4 core, 70 Sq.mm, XLPE insulated, steel wire armored cable. Fuses shall be
rated for 200 Amperes.
v. Construction
(a) Strip Fuse Way. The feeder pillar shall have the required number of strip fuse ways conforming to
DIN 43623 with positive operation contact and with downward connections at the bottom of strip
fuse ways. (Red Phase shall be on the right hand side). The contacts and downward connections
shall be of tinned copper.
Insertion of NH type HRC fuse cartridges shall be completely safe. Guides of high quality thermally
stable insulating material shall be provided to ensure complete protection against accidental contact.
Under all circumstances the fuse blade shall pass through the insulated guides before contact is made.
Heavy duty wrap around insulated contact guides shall have long durability.
Page 10-217
Termination of cable conductors shall be by means of crimp-type cable lugs to suit the cable sizes
specified. The terminal assembly shall have shrouds. The terminals shall be color coded to identify
the phases.
(b) Busbars. The busbars shall be of high conductivity tinned copper and have a current rating of 800
Amperes, in the site service conditions. The neutral bar shall have a rating of 500 Amperes. The
minimum cross sectional area of the busbars shall be 500 Sq.mm and 250 Sq.mm for phase and
neutral bars respectively.
Phase busbars shall be color marked in sequence from top to bottom "Red", "Yellow", and "Blue".
The neutral busbar mounted at the bottom shall be color marked "Black".
An earth bar shall have 250 Sq.mm minimum cross sectional area and be secured at the bottom so as
to give a positive electrical contact. Two 12mm earth terminals shall be provided on the enclosure
and be connected to the earth bar.
(c) Enclosure. Feeder pillars shall be weather-proof IP43 and of robust construction and shall be
provided with watershed tops. The enclosure shall be designed to prevent the accumulation of water
on any part of its surface.
The metallic enclosure shall be of sheet steel having a minimum 3.0mm thickness, hot dip galvanized
to BS 729 or any equivalent standard. An enclosure constructed with continuously hot dip zinc
coated steel plate conforming to BS 2989 of Grade G 450 and powder coated is also acceptable. The
feeder pillar shall be aluminium/silver colored powder coated.
Adequate ventilation shall be provided to permit natural circulation of air. The ventilation apertures
shall be suitably screened to prevent the entry of vermin and other foreign bodies and ingress of
water. Degree of protection shall be IP43 in accordance with BS 5420.
Access to the front of the feeder pillar shall be by means of two hinged doors with internal stoppers to
limit the door opening at 120°. The hinges shall be heavy duty
type, made of brass/gunmetal or any non-corroding mechanically strong material.
Construction shall be such that the possibility of damage by vandals is minimized. The possibility for
the removal of any fastenings, except the door locks, shall be totally eliminated.
Doors shall be fitted with a central handle having a 3 point cam. The handle shall be fitted with a
cylindrical lock with master key system having water proof dust cover cap to cover the key entry. The
handle with cam assembly and levers shall be made of non-corroding metal with water proof seals to
prevent ingress of water. Provision shall also be made to fix an additional pad lock.
The lock shall be suitable for master key No. AWG V/1. A master key with each batch of ten (10)
units shall be supplied.
A danger sign board with cautions and identification in Arabic and English ("Property of ADWEA
Abu Dhabi") shall be fixed on the door. An identification sign board shall meet the applicable
requirements of ADWEA Standard Specifications.
A name plate shall be fixed to the equipment detailing the information as follows:
Serial Number, which shall be unique.
Year of Manufacture.
Normal Current Rating of Busbar.
Normal Current Rating of Incoming Unit.
Contract Reference.
Gross weight, when fully equipped (kg).
Manufacturer's Name and Reference Number.
(d) Accessories. The Contractor, as part of the Item, Supply Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, of sizes
described in the Bills of Quantities, shall supply all additional accessories required for the complete
installation of the feeder pillars including, but not limited to, the following:
Cable Glands. The cable glands shall be brass compression type suitable for steel wire armored, PVC
served cables of specified size as per BS 6121. The glands shall be supplied complete with earth tag
and PVC shrouds. Flexible, malleable, tinned copper braid of a cross sectional area, minimum 50%
Page 10-218
of the phase conductor, shall be supplied with earth tag in pre-cut lengths with fixing holes and
required nuts and bolts to complete the earthing circuit.
Cable Lugs. All the cable lugs for copper cable shall be tinned copper crimp type.
Circuit Labels. The incoming and outgoing units shall all be fitted with blank circuit labels of
suitable engraving material of white background with black engraving, minimum 2mm thickness.
Fuse Puller. Fuse puller with heavy duty 2000V insulated fire proof hand sleeve shall be supplied,
one (1) with each lot of maximum 25 feeder pillar units.
3. Low Voltage Service Turret (Service Cabinet)
(a) General. The Low Voltage Service Turret is intended for outdoor installation in the ADWEA/ADDC
Power Distribution 400/230 Volt network for connecting underground service cables of sizes as specified
herein. They shall have the required number of strip fuse ways fixed vertically in a free standing, one
door lockable, hot dip galvanized steel sheet, weather proof IP43 enclosure, complete with cable
terminations, glanding and earthing arrangements.
The whole assembly shall comply with the requirements of BS 5486/IEC/VDE specifications (Factory
built assembly of LV Switchgear), except as stated herein, and shall be suitable for site service conditions
in Abu Dhabi.
The service turret shall have interphase-barriers and blank labels for service identification. The interphase
busbar spacing shall be as per DIN Standard. Interstrip clearances and the depth of the enclosure shall be
designed in consideration of thermal effects as well as to ensure interchangeability of different
manufacturer’s types of strip fuse ways.
The equipment proposed shall be short circuit tested at a recognized testing facility up to 46kA R.M.S. for
1 second. A short circuit test certificate shall be submitted with the shop drawing.
A holder for a maintenance record card and space for fixing a connection diagram shall be provided inside
the enclosure.
All parts of the equipment shall be readily accessible and replaceable without excessive dismantling. The
design shall be such that the cables can be readily terminated from the front side of the service turret.
Insulating materials shall be nearly non-hygroscopic and resistant to tracking.
All parts of equal size and rating shall be interchangeable. The design shall be such that the number of
joints shall be kept to a minimum. All bolted electrical joints shall be secured by corrosion-proof high
tensile steel bolts or studs conforming to BS 3692, Grade 8.8. All bolts and studs shall be plated in
conformance with BS 3382 and shall have corrosion-proof locking features.
(b) Rating. The normal rating specified shall be the continuous rating under the worst temperature conditions
encountered in Abu Dhabi.
(c) Assembly. Each Service Turret shall be complete with components as follows:
(i) Required number of strip fuse ways of specified size and circuit identification labels.
(ii) Suitable tinned copper busbars of specified size.
(iii) Cable glands.
(iv) Cable lugs.
(v) NH type fuses.
(vi) Hot dip galvanized steel sheet cabinet with single door with locking arrangements.
(d) Configuration. All Service Turrets shall be provided with components as follows:
(i) Terminals to connect single incoming cable up to 240 Sq.mm direct to busbar by means of crimp type
cable lugs. Suitable cable gland and lugs shall be supplied. Also heat shrinkable insulating tube shall
be supplied to cover the cable cores between gland and terminal.
(ii) One strip fuse way conforming to DIN 43623, Size 2, to connect loop-out cable which shall be
suitable to terminate cable up to 4 core, 120 Sq.mm, low voltage, cross linked polyethylene, steel
wire armored, PVC served, stranded copper conductor. The unit shall be supplied with solid links
extractable with standard fuse pullers. Suitable cable glands and lugs shall be supplied.
Page 10-219
(iii) Four strip fuse way conforming to DIN 43623, Size 1, and be suitable to terminate service cable up to
70 Sq.mm. The unit shall be rated for 250 Amperes, but supplied with HRC NH type, Class G1, Size
1, 125 Amperes. Cable glands shall be supplied suitable for 4 core, 25 Sq.mm, low voltage, cross
linked polyethylene insulated, steel wire armored, PVC served, stranded copper conductor.
(e) Construction
(i) Strip Fuse Ways. The strip fuse way shall be as per DIN 43623 with positive operation contact and
with downward connections at the bottom of strip fuse way. (Red Phase shall be on the right hand
side). The contacts and the downward connections shall be of tinned copper.
Insertion of NH type HRC fuse cartridges shall be completely safe. Guides of high quality thermally
stable insulating material shall be provided to ensure complete protection against accidental contact.
Under all circumstances the fuse blade shall pass through the insulated guides before contact is made.
Heavy duty wrap around insulated contact guides shall have long durability.
Blank labels of suitable engraving material shall be fitted on each strip fuse way. Interphase barriers
and terminal shrouds shall also be provided.
(ii) Busbars. The busbars shall be of high conductivity tinned copper and have a current rating of 400
Amperes. The neutral bar shall have the same rating. The cross sectional area of the busbars shall be
a minimum of 300 Sq.mm. Phase busbars shall be color marked in sequence from top to bottom
"Red", "Yellow" and "Blue". The neutral busbar mounted at the bottom shall be color marked
"Black".
(iii) Sheet Steel Cabinet. The cabinet shall be the outdoor type, free standing to receive cable from the
bottom. The cabinet shall be made of sheet steel and shall be homogeneously colored and weather
proof.
The mechanical and physical properties of the material shall not deteriorate in high temperature and
long exposure to sun rays. Test certificates shall be submitted to demonstrate compliance with these
requirements.
The thickness of sheet steel material shall be a minimum of 3.0mm on the sides and other surfaces
and 3.5mm on the bottom and at load bearing points. The unit shall have a single leaf door with
heavy duty non-corroding hinges.
Ventilation shall be provided to permit natural circulation of air. The ventilation apertures shall be
suitably screened to prevent the entry of vermin and other foreign bodies and ingress of water.
Degree of protection shall be IP43 from top and sides and IP33 from bottom, in accordance with BS
5420.
Door shall be provided with a handle with a three point cam. The handle shall be fitted with a
cylindrical lock with master key system having water proof dust cover cap to cover the key entry.
The handle with cam assembly and levers shall be made of non-corroding metal with water proof
seals to prevent ingress of water. Provision shall also be made to fix an additional pad lock.
The lock shall be suitable for master key No. AWG V/1. One master key with each batch of ten (10)
service turret units shall be supplied.
A name plate shall be fixed to the equipment detailing the following information:-
Serial Number, which shall be unique.
Year of Manufacture.
Normal Current Rating of Busbar.
Contract Reference.
Gross weight, when fully equipped (kg).
Manufacturer's Name and Reference Number.
A danger sign board with cautions and identification in Arabic and English shall be fixed on the
exterior of the unit. A blank label of suitable engraving material to write the service turret number
shall also be provided.
(iv) Accessories. The Contractor shall supply, as part of the Item, Supply Low Voltage Service Turret, all
accessories required for the complete installation of the service turret including, but not limited to, the
following:
Page 10-220
Cable Glands. Cable glands shall be brass compression type suitable for steel wire armored, PVC
served cables of specified size as per BS 6121. The glands shall be supplied complete with earth tag
and PVC shrouds. Flexible, malleable, tinned copper braid of a cross sectional area, minimum 50% of
the phase conductor, shall be supplied with earth tag in pre-cut lengths with fixing holes and required
nuts and bolts to complete the earthing circuit.
Cable Terminals. Termination of main and loop cables shall be by means of crimp type cable lugs of
specified size. Termination of service cable shall be by means of screw connection or box type
terminals to receive cable up to 70 Sq.mm. The terminal shall be color coded for phase identification.
Circuit Labels. The incoming and outgoing units shall all be fitted with blank circuit labels of
suitable engraving material of white background with black engraving, minimum 2mm thickness.
Fuse Puller. Fuse puller with heavy duty 2000V insulated fire proof hand sleeve, one shall be
supplied with each lot of maximum 10 units.
4. Inspection and Tests
The feeder pillars and service turrets shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with the requirements
of Section 10.1.9.
(a) Tests. Routine tests shall be performed on all units as per IEC 60439. In addition, the following type
tests shall be performed in the presence of the Water and Electricity Authority's Engineer/Inspector.
(i) Verification of temperature rise limits.
(ii) Verification of dielectric properties.
(iii) Verification of short circuit strength.
(Verification of the short circuit strength is not required if already performed on an identical unit
earlier. In such case, test certificates shall be submitted with the shop drawings).
(iv) Verification of clearances and creepage distance.
(v) Verification of mechanical operation.
(vi) Verification of degree of protection.
(vii) Verification of properties of enclosure material.
5. Technical Requirements
The Contractor shall submit with the shop drawings all technical descriptions, data sheets, catalogues and
other supporting material including, but not limited to, the following:
(a) All schedules for feeder pillars and service turrets as specified herein or as included in the Particular
Specifications.
(b) Drawings as follows.
(i) General arrangement of the unit showing all dimensions, with mountings/accessories.
(ii) Detailed drawing of strip fuse ways.
(iii) Details of feeder pillar fixing arrangement on concrete foundation.
(iv) Details of cable earthing and glanding arrangement.
(c) Detailed summary of deviations from the tender specification.
(d) Type test certificate performed on identical unit.
(e) Applicable design specifications with the standards and codes used.
(f) Lists of accessories included.
(g) Detailed technical specifications for all components.
(h) Testing schedule.
(i) Outline, general arrangement, sectional and detail drawings for each unit.
(j) Single line diagram showing all auxiliary devices and their connections.
(k) Details of cable terminations and fittings.
Page 10-221
(l) Details of anti-corrosion protection and painting specification (for feeder pillars only).
6. Foundations For and Installation of Feeder Pillars and Service Turrets
The Contractor shall provide foundations for and install feeder pillars and service turrets complete as specified
herein and as approved by the Engineer.
Foundations for installation of feeder pillars and service turrets shall include but not be limited to, all excavation
and backfilling, concrete, installing feeder pillar and service turrets complete with all fixtures, cable connections,
terminations, earthing and bonding and all ancillary materials and related work required to provide the foundation
and erect the feeder pillars and service turrets complete. Foundations for feeder pillars and service turrets,
including anchor bolts, shall meet the applicable requirements of Section 10.6. Unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer, the foundation configuration and mounting method of feeder pillars and service turrets shall be similar to
that specified for the lighting control cabinets. The actual dimensions of the foundation and anchor bolts shall
match the requirements of the feeder pillar and service turret approved for use in the Works. The Contractor shall
verify the locations of the feeder pillars and service turrets with the ADWEA/ADDC and the Engineer before the
installation of any foundations and cabinets.
The holes for all foundations shall be excavated to the size and dimensions required for the construction of all
foundations. All excavating and backfilling shall comply with the requirements of Section 10.3.
The Contractor shall install all the cable glands and terminations of the incoming and outgoing cables of the feeder
pillar and service turret. Each cable gland shall be fixed on a separate gland plate with knock out hole. The gland
plate shall be fixed on the floor plate. The gland plate and the front cover shall be removable for ease of
installation. The earth tag of each gland shall be connected to the earth bar with tinned copper braid of adequate
cross section. The glanding arrangement shall fully ensure earth continuity through the cable armor. The
Contractor shall furnish and install complete earthing and bonding for the feeder pillar and service turret in
accordance with the requirements of Section 10.14.10. Bonding jumper size shall match the requirements of the
incoming power cable rating of each feeder pillar and service turret.
When ADWEA/ADDC supplies the feeder pillars and service turret, the Contractor shall obtain these materials
from the ADWEA/ADDC store yard, load, and transport, unload at site, and install on foundations provided by the
Contractor in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 10.9.2.
10.14.11 Remove and Salvage Existing Electrical Circuits and Materials

10.14.11.1 General
1. Where indicated on the Contract plans or where directed by the Engineer and/or by the ADWEA/ADDC, the
Contractor shall remove and salvage existing underground lighting, LV, 6.6 KV, 11 KV, 22 KV, 33 KV and 132 KV
cables; pilot cables for 11 KV, 22 KV, 33 KV and 132 KV circuits and telephone cables for 33 KV circuits, cable
covering tiles, feeder pillars, service turrets and all appurtenances under the supervision of and to the satisfaction of
the ADWEA/ADDC, the Owner and as directed by the Engineer.
2. All recovered surplus materials shall be returned to the ADWEA/ADDC or the Owner’s storeyard as directed by the
Engineer. All recovered materials shall be suitably salvaged, temporarily stored, loaded, hauled, unloaded and stored
in storeyards where directed by the ADWEA/ADDC and the Owner. All materials shall be stored off the ground and
adequately protected to the satisfaction of the ADWEA/ADDC and the Owner.
3. All excavation and backfill at removal and salvage of existing electrical materials shall comply with the applicable
requirements of Section 10.3.
10.14.11.2 Remove Existing Cable

Upon completion of the installation and final connection of the new cable and when directed by the Engineer and by the
ADWEA/ADDC, the Contractor shall excavate, remove and salvage the deactivated cable and cable covering tiles,
backfill the excavated trench, and return the salvaged cable and covering tiles to the ADWEA/ADDC or the Owner’s
storeyard.
The Contractor shall furnish and utilize pulleys or other approved devices to prevent any damage to existing cables being
removed and salvaged. The Contractor shall recover intact each full length of existing cable designated to be removed
and salvaged. Cutting of any cable, designated to be removed and salvaged, to facilitate removal and salvage shall not be
permitted unless approved by the ADWEA/ADDC and the Owner. The Contractor shall obtain reels from the
ADWEA/ADDC or the Owner upon which he shall store the removed cable. Each reel shall be tagged or marked to
identify the cable as to being high or low voltage cable and as to type as well as the length stored on the respective reels.
Page 10-222
The Contractor shall execute care during all handling of the salvaged cable, cable covering tiles and all other appurtenant
materials so as to prevent any damage to same.
10.14.11.3 Remove Existing Low Voltage Feeder Pillars and Service Turrets
The Contractor shall remove, salvage and transport existing low voltage feeder pillars and existing service turrets and
foundations in compliance with Section 10.13.2 and as directed by the Engineer, the Owner and/or by the
ADWEA/ADDC. The Contractor shall load, transport and unload all salvaged feeder pillars, service turrets and
foundations and place in the ADWEA/ADDC or the Owner’s storeyard where directed by the ADWEA/ADDC or the
Owner.
10.14.12 Rerouting Existing 132 KV Circuits

Where existing 132 KV circuits may be rerouted for short lengths without the need to install new 132 KV circuits to
avoid interference with road works where approved by the ADWEA/ADDC, the Contractor shall reroute existing 132 KV
circuits; including recovery and reinstallation of power and pilot cables, power cable covering tiles and pilot cable
covering bricks and furnishing and installing new joint pits as required; where indicated on the Contract plans or where
directed by the ADWEA and as specified in the Particular Specifications or as described in the Bills of Quantities, as
specified herein and as directed by the Engineer and/or by the ADWEA. The Contractor shall carry out the work of
rerouting existing 132 KV circuits under the supervision of and to the satisfaction of the ADWEA.
10.15 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Sub-Station

10.15.1 General
The specification covers the design, manufacture, factory testing, marking, packing, shipping, transportation to site,
installation, site testing and commissioning of 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation consisting of
prefabricated housings, single-busbar (one or two sections) 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Switchgear, control and
protection equipment, LV AC distribution board, indicating and measuring meters, CTs, VTs, 48 V battery, 48 V
battery charger, Fire Alarm system, Air conditioning system, RTU, DMS, Remote announcation panel and other allied
equipments, complete with control and power wiring, and only those general aspects which are considered minimum
quality and performance requirements by the Owner/ADDC. The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation
offered shall be complete in all respects necessary for their effective and trouble free operation when connected to the
distribution system. The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation shall be placed on suitable approved
concrete foundation in public area and provided with access way. The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated
Substation shall consist of a fully enclosed (including incoming and outgoing cables) vandal and weather proof
housings with, but not limited to, the following:
• Prefabricated housings
• 6.6 KV Air insulated switchgear (Withdrawable fuse contactor assembly)
• 11 or 22 or 33 KV switchgear as per ADWEA / ADDC approved standards
• Power transformer 1500KVA, 11,22,33 KV/6.6KV as per ADWEA/ADDC approved standards
• 100 kVA hermetically sealed 6.6 KV/0.4 kV station transformers
• LV AC distribution board
• 48 V battery and battery charger
• Metering
• Wiring up to interface cubicle for remote control and monitoring (DMS).
• Highway Lighting Controls
• Remote announcation panel
For applicable technical standards, tests, reference shall be made as per ADWEA/ADDC standards
1. Drawings
Schematic Design of 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation (Single Line Diagram) shall be as per standard
drawings.
Page 10-223
The substation layout shall be designed / engineered according to design of individual equipment and it shall be subject
to the Engineer and the Owner/ADDC/local authorities’ approval.
2. Equipment Identification and Colour Codes
Prefabricated Substation equipment identification, reference shall be made as per ADWEA/ADDC standards.
10.15.1.1 Technical Descriptions

a. General
The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation Switchgear and associated equipment ratings shall be as
specified in the Single Line Diagram. The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation Switchgear and
associated equipment shall be capable of withstanding the electrical and mechanical stresses as specified in the Single
Line Diagram. Public safety besides attractive and suitable design shall be considered. The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV
Prefabricated Substation shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61330 / NFC 64400 / NFC 17200. All components
shall be of approved and reliable design. The highest degree of uniformity and interchange ability shall be attained. The
design shall facilitate easy maintenance, fault diagnosis and repair of the components. The noise level of the assembled
11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation shall be measured in accordance with IEC 60551. Cast iron shall
not be used for any part, which may be subjected to mechanical shock. Materials shall wherever possible, be non-
hygroscopic and non-flammable. Insulating materials shall have a high resistance to tracking.
The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation shall not exceed Noise and Radio Influence Voltage Levels as
specified in Technical Data Sheets of ADDC/ADWEA specifications. The equipments in the housings must be
accommodated with necessary clearances, easy access to the 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Switchgear, Lighting Control,
Station Transformer, Battery, Battery Charger and LV distribution board for testing, maintenance, removal and normal
operation (including operation with normal handles) and to provide safety measures against all possible hazards to the
equipment in the housings, such as internal arcing faults in the Switchgear. The housings must be so designed that
internal arc faults are directed away from places where personnel or public may be present. Removal of cables, circuit
breaker from 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Switchgear must be easy and comfortable.
The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Switchgear of similar ratings shall have the same dimensions having components and
devices interchangeable with those of other units. A mimic diagram of suitable size showing incoming/outgoing 11 or
22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV feeders, 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV power transformer, 6.6 KV/0.4kV auxiliary transformer,
lighting control and LV distribution diagram shall be provided at prominent places inside the 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV
prefabricated Switchgear housings. The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation shall be checked after
assembly to ensure that no rattling of individual components occurs. The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Switchgear shall be
designed to ensure that thermal interaction does not unduly affect the performance of any of the components. All 11 or
22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation metal works, including Switchgears, boards, station transformer tank,
cable screens, doors and any internal structural steel work shall be securely bonded together in such a way that a firm
metallic connection exists between each component of the Switchgear metal work and housings external earthing
copper rods. LV substation transformer star-earthing point shall be connected to a separate copper grounding rod.
b. Power Circuits, Control, Protection and Telecommunication Wiring
In selecting cable and wire sizes, due regard shall be paid to the appropriate derating factors in relation to the climatic
conditions at site. All cables and wires shall continuously carry their rated currents under the worst temperature
conditions, which prevail in summer, and shall also withstand maximum fault currents without damage or deterioration.
All secondary copper wiring within panels, boards, etc. shall be in accordance with the relevant IEC standards, it shall
be carried out for the fully rated distribution voltage (2 kV AC/ 1 min. test voltage), and shall consist of copper wires.
The bare ends of stranded wires shall be provided with squeezed sleeves. Secondary wiring to be performed at Site shall
enter the terminal block at one side only. The panel wiring shall terminate in one or more terminal blocks
accommodated at the side or bottom. Generally for wiring, the cable tails shall be so bound that each wire may be traced
back to its associated cable without difficulty. Extra 20% spare terminals of each type shall be provided. Minimum size
shall be as specified in Technical Data Sheets.
All wiring shall be properly supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and securely connected to terminal blocks in
such a manner that wherever practicable, wiring can be easily checked against diagrams. All the power cables, copper
wiring, control cables which are connected to panel boards and equipments inside substation shall be hidden and
covered by suitable cover subject to approval by the Engineer and the Owner. Internal terminations of standard
conductors shall be made with solderless crimping type tinned. Copper lugs which shall firmly grip the conductor, or by
an equally suitable method. Insulating sleeves shall be provided over the exposed parts of lugs. Engraved core
identification ferrules marked to correspond with board wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each cable/wire,
LV or MV, inside substation or in the street lighting network. As much as possible, all circuits shall run along the
shortest path to their addresses but shall run only in horizontal and vertical planes, diagonal runs are not acceptable. The
Page 10-224
wire runs shall not block access for ready test or removal of any device without disturbing other devices. If wiring is
provided to equipment installed on doors, bundled conductors shall be used on the hinged doors with extra/flexible
wire, so arranged that a twisting rather than a bending motion, is imparted to the moving bundled conductors. Each
bundle shall be anchored such that the moving bundle length is the maximum available without loops.
Conductors between terminal blocks and apparatus shall be laid in plastic ducts or covered with plastic bands. All
power circuits, control and protection wiring and low level signal wiring shall be physically separated. Separate laying-
way shall be provided for power cables, and the working voltage of each power circuit shall be marked on the
associated boards. Conductor ends not connected to compression-type terminal blocks shall be provided with approved
claw-washers, which neatly retain all strands, "Push-on" or "Quick" type connectors shall not be used for current
transformers and trip circuits. These connectors may be used for alarm and control system and within an equipment
assembly only. Sample of any such connectors shall be submitted for the Owner/ADDC’s approval.Wiring shall be
arranged to give easy access to the terminal or relays and other apparatus.
Soldered or wire strapped connections shall only be inside electronic systems. Any wire wrapping shall be in
accordance with IEC Publication 60352. All outgoing wiring shall be grouped by function (CT, VT, Trip, Alarm, etc.)
with those going to a common destination allocated to adjacent terminal blocks. Labels shall be provided on the fixed
portion of the terminal boards showing the function of the group. Insulating barriers shall be provided between each
group of power circuit terminals and between the terminal categories as applicable. The height and spacing between the
barriers shall be such as to give adequate protection to the terminals. Connections for indicating instruments, and for the
telecommunication circuits from transducers, or modem outputs, shall use individually shielded wire pairs. One (1)
extra terminal per pair of terminals shall be provided to connect this shield to ground.
c. Equipment Specifications
i. 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Switchgear
Specifications and Technical Data of 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Switchgear reference shall be as per the Single
Line Diagram included in the standard drawings and as specified herein.
ii. Station Transformer
Specifications and Technical Data of Station Transformers, reference shall be as per the Single Line Diagram
included in the standard drawings and as specified herein.
iii. Overall External Housings
11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation Housings requirements, reference shall be as per the
details included below.
10.15.2 Housing
10.15.2.1 General
The specification covers the design, manufacture, factory testing, installation, testing and commissioning of 11 or 22 or
33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation Housing. Further detailed and specific data are contained in the Contract plans.
The housing shall be equipped with 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV switchgear and associated equipment and shall be
installed on suitable concrete foundations. The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV prefabricated substations housings shall be
equipped with, but not limited to:
• Air-conditioning Units
• Fire alarm system
• Lighting
• Emergency lights – Roof mounted
• Sockets
• Earthing bars
• Danger signs
• Identification signs
• Lifting devices
• Distribution cubicle for lighting and sockets (if required).
Page 10-225
1. Lay-out
Substation layout shall be as per contract plans and it shall be subject to the Engineer and Owner/ADDC/ local
authorities’ approval.
2. Equipment Identification and Colour Codes
The equipment identification and reference shall be made as per requirements of ADWEA.

The specification covers the design, manufacture, factory testing of 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation
Housing. Further detailed and specific data are contained in the Contract plans, data sheets and material properties shall
be as per ADDC/ADWEA specifications.
a. General
The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation Housing shall be able to protect the electrical equipment from
sand, dust, rain and moisture. Adequate ventilation for natural circulation of air shall be provided to keep the inside
temperature within the limit. Ventilation apertures shall be suitably screened and louvered to prevent the entry of
vermin, dust and other foreign bodies. Suitable sand traps shall be provided. The housing shall be made of hot dip
galvanized steel sheets, base frame and four corner columns/posts. The complete housing assembly shall be provided
with four lifting lugs for easy lifting and positioning the whole unit at site by the use of crane. The housing shall be of
adequate strength to withstand transportation and handling stresses. The housing shall be designed in such a way that it
provided easy access for maintenance of the equipment including installation and dismantling any equipment.
b. Roof
The roof shall be of light weight design. The metallic ceiling shall be of a double roofing system to diminish heating
due to solar radiation and sun rays in order not to increase the temperature of the internal equipment.
c. Basic Frame
The basic frame of the Housing shall be made of galvanized steel structure, on which the housing is fixed. The steel
four corner posts of the substation or stiffeners shall enhance the strength of the whole assembly.
d. Doors
Access to the 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Switchgear shall be by double hinged and triple latched doors. Door gaskets
shall be of superior quality and capable of withstanding the severe climatic conditions. All hinges and locking elements
shall be of a heavy-duty, stainless steel so as to prevent corrosion. The doors shall be provided with stainless steel/brass
hinges and provided with stoppers. The edges of the doors shall be bent on both sides to assure they fit properly to the
doorjambs to prevent misalignment. Steel pocket shall be provided on each door for drawings and manuals. One door
switch operated internal illumination circuit complete suitably protected against accidental damage shall be provided at
each door. Door limit switch shall be provided to relay open/close status to the remote monitoring system.
An identification sign shall be fixed with four stainless bolts to the housing (subject to approval by ADDC) and shall
bear the following information:
• Manufacturer’s name
• Manufacturer’s serial number
• Year of manufacturing
• Rated voltages, KV.
Danger signs shall be fixed with four stainless bolts at each compartment access door (subject to approval by ADDC).
Danger Signs in English and its Arabic translation shall bear the following information:
• DANGER 6600V and/or 11000 or 22000 or 33000 VOLTS.
• The Danger Sign Boards shall be submitted to ADDC for approval.
e. Air Conditioning
ADDC, NFPA and Civil defence requirements and standards shall be followed
Page 10-226
f. Cable Entries
The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Prefabricated Substation Housing shall be designed to receive underground cables
entering the housing vertically below ground level. Adequate provision shall be considered to protect the underground
cables and to seal the cable entries against ingress of water. Compression type glands with earth tag and plastic shrouds
shall be provided. The gland plate shall be so positioned to allow permissible bending of the cable.
g. Locking Arrangement
All doors shall be pad lockable, pad locks and master keys shall be supplied. Suitable door handles shall be fitted to the
doors. 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV compartments shall be lockable to prevent unauthorised tampering. The locks shall
require minimum maintenance for indefinite period. Two separate latches shall also be provided within each door, one
(within the right door panel) lockable with a key and another (within the left door panel) internally lockable by sliding a
bolt. All hinges, latches and locking elements shall be of a heavy-duty, stainless steel to prevent corrosion. Three sets of
keys suitable to lock and unlock each compartment door shall be supplied with each 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV
prefabricated substation housing.
h. Earthing
The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV prefabricated substation housing shall be equipped with copper earth busbars in each
compartment of cross-sections, to which the metal frames of all items as 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV switchgear and
incoming/outgoing underground cable sheaths/screens shall be connected. Two suitable size threaded terminals
complete with nuts and robust flat washers at suitable locations at the housing shall be provided for connecting to the
external earthing copper rods. Suitable copper flexible earthing straps shall be provided for earthing of doors. Hinges
shall not be relied upon for this purpose. External earthing copper rods as per requirement for equipment and system
earthing shall be provided.
i. Corrosion Protection/Painting
External and interior surfaces of the housing shall be thoroughly cleaned and sand blasted to prepare the metal surface
for painting. The climate in the U.A.E. being very humid and corrosive, special attention is to be paid for the use of
excellent quality paint. For Corrosion Protection measures ADDC standard shall be followed.
j. Partition
ADDC equipments and the Owner equipments shall be segregated and protected with a partition and with individual
access doors. A separate air conditioning system, Lighting circuit, Power circuits for both the rooms shall be provided
as indicated in the standard drawings.
10.15.2.3 Testing and Inspection

The 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV prefabricated substation housing shall be subject to inspection and testing during
manufacturing and after completion by the Engineer/the Owner/Local Authority’s Engineers. Routine testing of each
unit shall be according to relevant IEC Standards. Type Test Certificates shall be submitted along with the material
submittal. Acceptance by the Engineer/the Owner/Local Authority’s Representative of any unit shall not relieve the
manufacturer from any of his performance guarantees or from any other obligations. Test Certificates for each unit shall
be submitted prior to delivery of the unit. The following tests shall be carried out:
10.15.3 11 or 22 or 33 KV Switchgear
The 11 or 22 or 33 KV switchgears shall be as per ADDC/ADWEA specifications and vendor list.
10.15.4 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV Transformer

10.15.4.1 General
The Specifications covers the design, manufacture, factory testing, transport, marking, packing, shipping, delivery to
site, unloading and storage at site, erection commissioning and handing over in satisfactory operating condition of the
floor-mounted, oil-immersed distribution transformers, as defined in IEC 60076-7. The transformers shall be designed
and arranged in full compliance with all applicable Sections, Technical Data Sheets and Drawings required by these
Specifications. The power rating of the transformer shall be as per project design requirements.
The material submittal shall include the following information:
• Technical schedules, all drawings with all information.
Page 10-227
• Type test certificates, including certificates of Short circuit Testing, from independent ADDC approved
laboratory for same rating of transformers offered.
• A short-circuit tested transformer shall not be part of delivery.
• Type test certificates for different bushings, surge arresters (if any) and tap changers
• Quality control system certificate.
• General arrangement of transformer showing all important dimensions.
• Details of HV/LV cable boxes with bushings.
• Details of tap changers, thermometers etc.
• Deviations from Tender Specifications, brochures and catalogues for transformers.
• Applicable technical standards, tests and general requirements shall be as per ADDC standards.
• Equipment identification and colour codes shall be as per ADDC Standards.

a. General Design
The design of the transformer shall be based on the following conditions and requirements:
• The transformer shall be IP55, outdoor installation type
• The transformer shall be designed for operation at ambient temperatures of 50oC
• The maximum permissible temperature rise of the transformer oil (top oil) shall not exceed 45 K, and that of
the windings is to be limited to 55 K (hot spot 68 K)
• The transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at full load at any tap position within their specified
temperature rise limits
• Distribution transformer shall be capable of withstanding external short circuits for at least 2 seconds.
Furthermore, transformer shall comply with the stipulations of the following technical requirements:
b. Windings
The transformer shall be Delta-Star connected, and the vector group shall be Dyn11 in accordance with IEC 60076. All
windings shall be insulated for minimum LI as specified in the Technical Data Sheets. Electrolytic copper of a high
conductivity, and insulation material of high quality (class A, in accordance with IEC 60085) shall be used. Aluminium
windings will not be accepted. The insulation material of windings and connections shall be free from insulation
compounds subject to softening, shrinking or collapsing during service. Moreover, none of the material used shall
disintegrate, carbonise or become brittle under the action of hot oil, under all specified load conditions. To keep the
inter-turn stresses to a minimum multi-layer foil windings shall be provided for LV windings. To increase the capability
of the transformers of withstanding the stresses under short-circuit conditions modern technology in design and
construction shall be applied, and the current density shall not exceed 2.48 A/mm2 in any part of the windings. The
coils must be capable of withstanding movement and distortion caused by all operating conditions as specified in IEC
60076-7. Adequate barriers shall be provided between windings and core as well as between high voltage and low
voltage windings. All leads or bars from the windings to the terminal boxes and bushings shall be rigidly supported.
Stresses on coils and connections must be avoided.
c. Magnetic Core
The magnetic core shall be made of laminations of non-ageing, cold-rolled, rainoriented, silicon steel of high
permeability (Hi-B-type; W17/50: max. 1.12 W/kg) without burrs. Each lamination shall be insulated with high quality
insulation coating. The joints of limbs and yokes shall be designed and constructed to keep the no-load losses and the
hot spot temperature in the magnetic core as well as the noise level as low as possible. The core and its clamping plates
shall form a rigid unit structure, which shall maintain its form and position under the severe stresses encountered during
shipment, installation and short circuits. Care shall be taken to secure uniformly distributed mechanical pressure over all
the laminations to prevent setting of the core and to limit noise and vibrations to a minimum under service conditions.
The maximum magnetic flux density in the legs and yokes of the core shall (at specified rated voltage and frequency)
not exceed values as specified on the Technical data Sheets. The complete core shall be provided with suitable lifting
eyes to facilitate its removal from transformer tank.
Page 10-228
d. Transformer Tank
The transformer tank shall be hermetically sealed upper flange type with bolted cover and shall be equipped with
corrugated sheet steel type radiators incorporated with the tank. Cooling fins shall be welded with round stiffening rods
to prevent vibration during operation of the transformers. Only hermetically sealed type of tanks completely filled with
oil shall be provided. The top cover of tank shall be designed in such a way that the bushings (HV/MV) shall be
replaceable without removing or opening the top cover. All transformer tanks and radiators with fins as above shall be
subject to oil leak tests as specified in the relevant Sections for Inspections and Tests. Gaskets shall be oil resistant and
made of such a material that no serious deterioration will occur under service conditions, i.e. heat and oil resistant nitrile
rubber and/or sealing material, based on aramide fibers and other substitutes, processed with synthetic binding agents.
All gaskets shall be of closed design (without open ends) and shall be of one piece only. Rubber gaskets used for flange
connections of the various oil compartments shall be laid in grooves or groove equivalent retainers on both sides of the
gasket throughout the total length. Gaskets of neoprene and/or such material which can be easily damaged by over-
pressing (e.g. any kind of impregnated/bonded cork) are not acceptable. Use of hemp as gasket material is also
prohibited. Lifting lugs shall be provided on the cover as well as rigid traverses under the bottom as a mounting base.
Bi-directional wheels with blocking facilities shall be provided for the station supply transformers. Two earthing
terminals of adequate size shall be provided and installed diagonally at the bottom of the transformer tank.
e. Cooling
The transformers shall be provided with a self-cooled type of cooling system (ONAN).
f. Terminals
Terminals shall be provided and installed in air-filled cable connection boxes as specified below.
1. Bushings
The bushings shall be of the outdoor type designed for pollution level “I” (light) in accordance with IEC 60815, unless
specified otherwise in the Technical Data Sheets. They shall also correspond to IEC 60137, shall be free from defects
and shall be thoroughly vitrified. Insulators for HV bushings shall be of top quality electrical grade porcelain,
homogenous and non-porous, and shall be in one piece/phase, shall be designed and certified for 70/170 KV insulation
level. MV bushings shall be either porcelain as above or epoxy-resin assembly. The glaze of porcelain insulators shall
not be depended upon for insulation and shall be of a uniform shade of brown, completely covering all exposed parts of
the insulator. The bushings shall be arranged horizontally on side wall of main tank Bushing turrets shall not be
provided to avoid unnecessary pockets wherein gas may collect. Bushings for both HV & MV terminals of distribution
transformers shall be of the DIN type equipped with rigidly fixed solid gas stoppers and shall be designed for the rated
current.
Clear phase (R, Y & B) marking with approved metallic plates for the HV and MV sides shall be provided. HV bushing
connecting nuts/ bolts /washers/ rings/son the top shall be of nonmagnetic (diamagnetic) material. The fixing nuts and
bolts for HV/MV bushings to the tank shall be projected outward so that they can be tightened from outside to stop oil
leak without opening the inspection boxes.
2. Terminal Boxes
Air-filled cable connecting boxes of protection class IP55 shall contain outdoor bushings as above. They shall be
suitable for connections of cables with outdoor sealing ends, shall contain the winding ends and the neutral cable boxes
shall be designed for air insulation dry-type insulation suitable for three-core XLPE 95 /240 mm2 copper cable. IP55,
HV/MV cable boxes shall be mounted on opposite sides of tank. The cover for cable box shall be fixed by stainless
steel studs, bolts and washers. The bushings and cable connections etc. shall be arranged on opposite sides of tank wall.
To minimise the width of the cable box only DIN bushings as above shall be provided for the MV terminals. The cable
terminal boxes shall also be equipped with metal cable glands and shall accommodate the cable sealing ends. The cable
glands on cable boxes shall be of non-magnetic (diamagnetic) material. Suitable grounding studs with bolts and washers
of stainless steel for earthing of the cable sheaths shall also be provided. The MV cable box shall have suitable
arrangement to ensure that MV cables are not cut when cables are disconnected. Insulation level and design (clearances)
shall comply with the related bushings. No insulation barriers shall be provided in the cable boxes. Cable boxes on
transformer shall be complete with all necessary fittings, lugs of specific size, glands, clamp bonding strap(s), cable
bushing supports, cable support etc. Cable entry into the cable box shall be from the bottom. The design of the cable
boxes shall meet protection class IP54. Ingress of dust, water and any other foreign matters in the termination boxes
must be prevented thoroughly. Phases of HV and MV side shall be clearly identified on metallic plates. Note: For
package units the arrangement of terminals, cable boxes, housing etc, shall be suitably selected by the Contractor in an
approved manner in accordance with the specific requirements / specifications for that equipment, and the proposed
details shall be submitted along with the offer for that equipment.
Page 10-229
g. Current Transformers
Where specified, current transformers for protection shall be provided in the HV line and neutral terminals of
distribution transformers. The technical data shall be indicated in the Technical Data Sheets. The technical data shall
also be co-ordinated with the protection requirements and the related switchgear.
h. Off-circuit Tap Changers
Manually operated off-circuit tap changers shall be supplied for the distribution transformers, and shall be capable of
withstanding voltage surges and 200 percent continuous loading without damage or excessive heating, and short circuit
without injury. A dial-type indicator with engraved position numbers shall be provided. Tap chargers for the main
transformer shall be automatic operation, the tap step with voltage level shall be through the MV switchgear panel. The
operation range of the tap changers shall be + 5 (five) percent in 4 (four) steps, unless specified otherwise in the
Technical Data Sheets. The selector switch shall be gang-operated by an accessible single handle from the ground at
convenient floor height, when the transformer is de-energised. This operation handle shall not be located in the cable
connection box, and the tap changer operating mechanism shall be installed at a side wall of transformer tank. Hand
wheels and cranks shall have padlock devices. A dial-type indicator with engraved position numbers, easily legible
from the ground, shall be used, where "1" is related to the position with the maximum high voltage (all windings in
circuit). Tap changers shall have been type tested by a recognised independent testing authority. Only designs which
have been type tested in accordance with the relevant IEC standards will be accepted. The manufacturer of off-circuit
tap changers must have world-wide reputation for these products, as tap changer failure is one of the main cause of
distribution transformer fault(s). The Bidder/Contractor shall provide type test certificates from independent recognised
laboratory , detailed specification/ leaflet / catalogues for the tap changers with his offer.
i. Transformer Oil
The transformers shall be supplied and shipped with their initial oil filling. The insulation oil shall be new inhibited
naphthenic based mineral oil with antioxidant (phenol) additives, and shall have properties such as to avoid formation
of copper sulphide under continuous heavy loading conditions even without passivator additives. It shall be hydro-
treated, and shall have properties complying with IEC 60296 – 2003, with aging properties meeting Special
Applications as specified in this Standard. The flash point shall not be less than 140°C. With regard to more efficient
detection of corrosive sulphur the oil shall have also passed a test in accordance with ASTM D 1275, method B. The
Bidder/Contractor is held responsible to prove the dryness and all other properties of the oil before utilisation.
j. Piping and Valves
The piping required for the connection/filling of the various parts of the transformers as well as the valves required for
oil draining/sampling, filtering, venting, etc. are to be included. The transformers shall also be equipped with drain and
filter valves with adapters of R1½" male thread fitted with cap. All flanges to which the valves are to be connected shall
be welded leak-proof onto transformer tank and piping etc.
k. Measuring and Monitoring Equipment
Standard accessories as specified hereinafter shall be provided.
1. 1 (one) dial type thermometer for top oil temperature with radial type main and maximum pointer, two
adjustable contacts for oil temperature alarm and trip (at 95°C and 105°C). Thermometers shall be of
protection category IP55 and shall be provided with sight glasses of poly-carbonate or laminated security glass.
Capillaries, if any shall be protected by flexible steel conduits throughout the total length, and their connection
points to temperature sensors shall be suitably protected/covered.
2. 1 (one) spare thermometer pocket in tank cover
3. 1 (one) spring-loaded pressure relief device with pin-type operation indicator and trip contact installed in metal
housing of protection class IP55. The device shall be located on tank cover or on a suitable flange of an elbow
pipe of 50 mm diameter connected to the tank cover (in a corner of the tank).
4. 1 (one) protection device for monitoring of oil leakage and gas formation with trip contact (installed directly
above core-coil assembly outside cable box)
5. 1 (one) oil level indicator of an approved design mounted in a corner of the tank. A device combined with the
protection device as before, e.g. a suitable gas detector relay with sight glass, is also acceptable. In such a case
the device shall be installed directly above core-coil assembly as above.
6. 1 (one) marshalling box (protection class IP55) for connection of measuring and monitoring devices, equipped
with cable glands for bottom entrance of multi-core cables, terminal blocks of single insertion type terminals.
All cables from monitoring equipment as specified previously shall be laid in flexible steel conduits and shall
Page 10-230
be rigidly fastened to the tank by non-corrosive metal ties or clamps. The complete wiring shall be of highly
flexible stranded copper and furnished with slip-over ferrules at both ends. Wiring shall also have crimped
termination. The minimum cross-section of the wiring shall be 1.5 mm2. If specified or required, all wiring to
alarm and trip devices shall include an insulated separate protection earth conductor ("green/yellow" colored)
of at least the same cross-section as the line conductor. Suitable grounding conductors shall be provided
between terminal box and related door. The cross-section shall not be less than 10 mm2. Insulated grounding
conductors shall be "green/yellow" colored.
l. Name Plates and Other Designation Plates
Plates made of polished stainless steel of top quality (background clear, engraving black) shall be supplied as specified
hereinafter. A rating plate according to IEC 60076.
A diagram plate showing in an approved manner the internal connections and the voltage vector relationship of the
several windings in accordance with IEC and, in addition, a plan view of the transformer giving the correct physical
relationship of the terminals. This terminal marking plate for phases and neutral on MV sides shall be of stainless steel
and engraved as above and shall be permanently fixed. A plate showing measuring and monitoring circuits and terminal
blocks. This plate shall be located inside the terminal box.
m. Drawings and Documents
The Contractor shall submit the detailed technical specification, technical schedules, testing schedules and procedure,
outline sectional detailed drawings etc. for each transformer, cable termination/ cable boxes with bushings for approval
within a specified period before commencement of manufacturing of the transformer. The following drawings and
documents shall be submitted individually for approval in addition to drawings and documents specified in these
Specifications.
• Specification of the insulation oil
• Bushings MV and HV in details with gaskets, seals, nuts and bolts etc
• Tap changer details
• Thermometers and connection
• Factory test report (submitted after witness tests).
In addition, 5 (five) complete sets of detailed drawings of transformer (electrical and mechanical), OLTC and operation
and maintenance manuals including spare part lists (if any) shall be submitted along with the delivery of the equipment.
The Contractor shall complete and submit the technical datasheet as specified herein or as included in the Particular
Specifications. The power rating provided in the technical datasheet is for 1500KVA transformer. Technical datasheets
for other power rating and different distribution voltage (primary side) the Contractor shall refer to ADDC/ADWEA
standards specifications.

a. General
Each of the transformer shall be subjected to inspections and tests to be performed at the manufacturer's premises and
test shop (recognised and certified at least by ISO 9001) and at site, as specified hereinafter to verify their conformity
with the guaranteed and other design data. Ten percent of total quantity of transformers shall be tested in the presence of
the Owner/Engineer/ ADDC engineers. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest issues of the
Recommendations of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC-standards) supplemented by these
specifications. The Contractor is obliged to submit a detailed test procedure for approval in due time, prior to the tests
(at the latest three months before testing). Detailed test schedules separately for each unit showing working-day-wise
when each of the witness tests will be carried out shall be submitted for approval along with the test procedure as above.
b. Factory Tests
The following tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner/Engineer/ADDC engineers:
i. Routine Tests (as per IEC 60076)
• Measurement of winding resistance.
• Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement.
• Measurement of short-circuit impedance and load-loss.
Page 10-231
• Measurement of no-load loss and current.

• Dielectric routine test.
• Induced voltage dielectric test
ii. Tests on Transformer Tank and Accessories
Prior to the (Type Tests or/and Routine Tests) tests, the Contractor shall submit the following test certificates as a
minimum requirement:
• Oil-tightness test
• Insulating oil
• Current transformers, if any
• Protective devices, accessories etc
• Tap changers
• Core losses of laminations.
The above mentioned tests shall be in accordance with IEC Standards, as far as applicable.
10.15.4.4 Corrosion Protection

Corrosion Protection measures, references shall be as per ADDC Standards.
10.15.4.5 Rejection
The Owner/ADDC shall have the right to reject any transformer or reactor if the actual values are in excess of the
guaranteed values by more than the margins specified hereunder:
• No-load losses + 15%
• Load losses + 10%
• Total losses + 10%
• Temperature rise limit + 1.0 K
For all of the other values the margins stated in IEC standards are applicable.
10.15.4.6 Transport
The core and coils shall be completely dried before shipment and shall be assembled with the transformer tank and the
transformers shall be supplied and shipped with their initial oil filling in the main tank. The transformers shall be
transported and shipped in a sea-worthy packing in accordance with the usual international standard.
10.15.5 100 kVA Transformer 6.6 KV/0.400 KV (IP68)

This work consists of designing, manufacturing, furnishing, placing, connecting earthing, terminating and
commissioning 6.6 KV/0.400kV transformer at the locations shown on the Contract plans, in accordance with these
specifications and as included in the Bills of Quantities.

The transformer shall be watertight, buriable and outdoor type with continuous duty, integral assembly, grounded,
tamper-resistant IP 68 and weatherproof with oil immersed.
The transformer shall be completely fabricated at the factory and the only site work will be the connection of the
external cables. It shall comply with the requirements of IEC/IEE/NFC standards.
10.15.5.3 Technical Requirements for the Transformer

The transformer shall comply with the following technical requirements:
Page 10-232
• Voltage (Primary) : 6600V, 3Ph, 3 wire

• Voltage (Secondary) : 400V+N, 3Ph, 4 wire
• System Frequency : 50Hz
• Maximum Voltage Variation : ±10%
• Maximum Frequency Variation : ±0.1%
• Combined Absolute Voltage and : ±10%
Frequency Variation
• Power Rating : 100KVA
• Primary Winding Insulation Level : 7200V
• Secondary Winding Insulation Level : 1100V
• Primary Protection : Not applicable
• Insulating Material : Class A
• Earthing Terminal : M10
• Short Circuit Impedance : 3.5%
• Magnetising Current : 3.5%
• Degree of Protection : IP68
• Tap changers : +5% +7.5%
• Primary Connection : watertight three one phase disconnectable connection for 6.6 KV, 3x1C x 35mm² cable
maximum (Three single core cables with XLPE insulation, copper with screen, water tight tape and PE outer
sheath)
• Secondary Connection : 5C, H.07 RNF, 25mm² cable, Rubber Flexible Power Cable
• Dielectric Medium : Mineral Oil
• Installation : Outdoor, at the side of the substation
• Ambient Temperature : suitable and certified for an ambient temperature in Abu Dhabi conditions
• Transformer primary and secondary shall be three-phase units.
• The supply of material shall include all plugs with accessories for termination including insulation compound.
10.15.5.4 Technical Requirements for the Terminations

Each Transformer shall be supplied with termination kits complying with the following requirements:
Max. Current Rating: 80A
Voltage Rating: 7.2kV (peak)
Cable Insert Diameter: ≤ 44.5mm
IP Rating: IP 68
10.15.6 6.6 KV Switchgear

10.15.6.1 General
installation, site testing and commissioning of 6.6 KV switchgear with incomer contactor, Outgoing contactor feeder,
busbars, earthing lock, interlocks, control interface complete with control and power wiring, and only those general
aspects which are considered minimum quality and performance requirements by the Engineer and the Owner. Further
detailed and specific data are to be as below and as per the Single Line diagram.
Page 10-233
The 6.6 KV switchgear offered shall be complete in all respects necessary for their effective and trouble free operation
when connected to the distribution system. The 6.6 KV switchgear shall be indoor type and installed in air-conditioned
or prefabricated substations. The switchgear shall be manufactured under IEC or equivalent standards. Manufacturer
shall provide details of the standards the units are manufactured which will need an approval of acceptance from the
Engineer and the Owner. The Manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in manufacturing/assembling such
units and shall have similar units in the similar application operational in Middle East region for more than 5 years.
The switchgear shall consist of the following equipment:
• Incomer contactor
• Outgoing feeder contactor
• Control interface
• Interlocks
• For schematic Design Drawings of 6.6 KV Switchgear refer to standard drawing
• For equipment identification and colour codes, reference shall be made as per the Owner standard
requirements.

a. General
The 6.6 KV switchgear ratings shall be as per the Single Line Diagram. The Switchgear equipment specified ratings
shall be as specified in the Technical Data Sheets/Single line diagram. The Switchgear shall be complete, ready for
installation, with all components furnished unless specifically excluded in the Scope of Work. The complete
documentation, drawings, operating instructions, installation, Operation & Maintenance and spare parts manuals, etc.
shall be included in the supply and will be subject to the approval of the Engineer and the Owner according to the
requirements of this Specification.
The highest degree of uniformity and interchange ability shall be attained. The design shall facilitate easy maintenance,
fault diagnosis and repair of the components.
Materials shall wherever possible, be non-hygroscope and non-flammable. Insulating materials shall have a high
resistance to tracking.
A mimic diagram of suitable size showing the schematic of 6.6 KV switchgear shall be provided at prominent places.
Operation and maintenance manual of the switchgear printed in English shall be available with each switchgear. Access
for maintenance shall be from front and side only.
The Switchgear shall be of the free-standing, self-supporting, with all high voltage equipment installed inside fully
protected in metallic and earthed enclosures, suitably divided into individual compartments for each feeder. The
erection of the Switchgear shall not require any cutting, welding or drilling of material on site.
Metal shutters shall be provided to completely shroud the fixed contacts of the switchgear, which are connected to bus-
bars and to feeder circuits. These shutters shall be opened and closed automatically by the movement of the Switch
carriage and shall prevent access to the fixed isolating contacts when the Incomer / feeder contactor is withdrawn.
The Incomer / Feeder contactor shall be installed on a carriage and shall be connected to the bus-bars and feeder circuit
through plug and socket type connecting respectively isolating devices. The devices shall be off-load type and shall be
suitable for operation whilst the bus-bars of the feeder circuit are alive.
Each switchgear equipment shall be provided with means for connecting the circuit and the bus-bars to the main earth
bar of the equipment for maintenance purposes. Full details of the method of earthing shall be submitted by the
Manufacturer. Such earthing shall be achieved by the following means:
For the earthing of cable feeder and transformer feeder circuits: - by fixed earthing switches fitted into the cable box
portion of the panel. The earthing switch shall be mechanically interlocked to prevent closure unless the circuit breaker
is fully withdrawn from the unit or secured into the isolated position. It shall not be possible to move the contactor into
the service position with the earthing switch closed.
b. Electrical Ratings
• Service voltage : 6,6 KV
• Dielectric strength 50 Hz - 1 min : 20 KV
Page 10-234
• Rated current of the busbar : as per transformer capacity

• Thermal rating 1 s : 3200 A rms
• Electrodynamic rating : 8300 A peak
• Frequency : 50 Hz
c. Construction
The numbers of compartment are to be designed to the project requirements nevertheless uniformity shall be maintained
in components to regularize the maintenance of spares. Minimum two spares are required in the switchgear
compartment and shall be expandable.
The cubicle framework shall be made of bent and welded sheet steel and assembled by bolt. The cubicle shall be
mounted on a base support. The function of each compartment can be indifferently selected according to the design
configuration. The enclosure shall be of IP54, painted to RAL 7035 and 7016 colour.
10.15.6.3 Equipments
a. Incomer Contactor
Incomer contactor switch shall be designed in such a way to provide isolation from the upstream 11 or 22 or 33 KV
while performing maintenance in the 6.6 KV switchgear. The equipment includes mechanical latching arrangement
with electrical mechanical interlocks for emergency operations. It shall consist of:
i. A Fixed Unit
The fixed unit shall comprise of:
• Vertical bus-bars rated to as per transformer capacity
• Earthing isolation switch
• Cable chamber for incomer 6.6 KV cable
• Terminals for incomer 6.6 KV cable terminations
• Metal guard to prevent access to bus-bar connectors while the door is open
ii. A Withdrawable Unit
The Withdrawal unit shall comprise of:
• MV Plug-in connectors
• Service voltage contact points
• MV 3 pole SF6 contactor as below
• Type : Rollarc 400, 3 poles
Contactor Rating : 400A
• Breaking capacity : 4kA rms at cosφ> 0.15
• Making capacity : 10 kA Peak
• Thermal rating : 2600A RMS at 1 sec
• Coil pull in consumption : 600 vA
• Coil hold consumption : 30 vA
• Electrical endurance : 300,000 operations
• Mechanical endurance : 3,000,000 operations
• 3 nos of 6,6 kV fuses
• Indication for live voltage
Control, Signalling and Protection Equipment
Page 10-235
LV component for control, signalling and protection which shall include a control power supply unit, if control power
supply is not fed from an external battery source.
iii. Control and Signalling Set
The control and signalling set shall be installed on the door and shall be ready for operation without opening the door.
The control and signalling set shall have an alphanumeric display unit and navigations shall be user friendly in the
language of English. The navigations shall be using keypads.
The control and signalling set shall have the following to the minimum:
• An ON/OFF Switch
• A local / Remote selector switch
• Indication lamps for ON/OFF
• Indication lamps for Local / Remote operations
• Indication lamps for Open / closed position of the contactor
• Fault status indications such as Fuse blown status, SF6 gas leakage status, etc
• R Y B indicator
• Ampere indicator
• Volt indicator
• Frequency indicator
• KWh indicator
• PF indicator
Alerts and Faults
Alert Indications:
A visual indication shall be made for at least the following Alerts:
• When the Mains supply is beyond the variable of ± 10%
• When the remote signal is open
• When the Mains frequency is out of range
Fault indications:
A visual indication shall be made for at least the following faults:
• When there is a leakage in SF6 contactor
• When the MV fuse is blown
Remote indications:
Volt-free contacts shall be available for at least the following:
• Contactor position (ON / OFF)
• Presence of 6.6 KV voltage
• Mode of operation (Local / Auto)
• MV fuse blown
• SF6 leakage
All above alerts and fault indications shall be readily available to interface vide the serial link.
iv. Interlocking Device
Necessary interlock shall be achieved with the Primary 11 or 22 or 33 KV switch gear to prevent closure of earth
terminal under live voltage conditions. This can be achieved by mechanical locking system.
Page 10-236
b. Outgoing Feeder Contactors

The number of outgoing feeders can be decided based on the load schedule and design nevertheless uniformity shall be
maintained in components to regularize the maintenance of spares. It shall include mechanical latching arrangement
with electrical mechanical interlocks for emergency operations. The outgoing feeder contactors shall consist of
i. A Fixed Unit
The fixed unit shall comprise of:
• Vertical bus-bars rated to as per design requirements
• Earthing isolation switch
• Cable chamber for incomer 6.6 KV cable
• Terminals for incomer 6.6 KV cable terminations
• Metal guard to prevent access to bus-bar connectors while the door is open
• Protection equipments such as CT, Earth fault detection tore
ii. A Withdrawable Unit
The Withdrawal unit shall comprise of:
• MV Plug-in connectors
• Service voltage contact points
• MV 3 pole SF6 contactor as below
• Type : Rollarc 400, 3 poles
Contactor Rating : 400A
• Breaking capacity : 4kA rms at cosφ> 0.15
• Making capacity : 10 kA Peak
• Thermal rating : 2600A RMS at 1 sec
• coil pull in consumption : 600 vA
• coil hold consumption : 30 vA
• Electrical endurance : 300,000 operations
• Mechanical endurance : 3,000,000 operations
• 3 nos of HRC fuses according to the load with a breaking capacity of 30 kA
Control, Signalling and Protection Equipment
LV component for control, signalling and protection which shall include a control power supply unit if control power
supply is not fed from external battery source.
iii. Control and Signalling Set
The control and signalling set shall be installed on the door of each feeder and shall be ready for operation without
opening the door. The control and signalling set shall have an alphanumeric display unit and navigations shall be user
friendly in the language of English. The navigations shall be using keypads. The control and signalling set shall have
the following to the minimum:
• An ON/OFF Switch
• A local / Remote selector switch
• Indication lamps for ON/OFF
• Indication lamps for Local / Remote operations
• Indication lamps for Open / closed position of the contactor
• Fault status indications such as Fuse blown status, SF6 gas leakage status, etc
Page 10-237
iv. Measurement and Protection Set

The measurement of various parameters shall be possible through the control interface.
Alerts and Faults
Alert Indications :
A visual indication shall be made for at least the following Alerts:
• When the Mains supply is beyond the variable of ± 10%
• When the remote signal is open
• When the Mains frequency is out of range
• Error from the measuring instruments
Fault Indications:
A visual indication shall be made for at least the following faults:
• When there is a leakage in SF6 contactor
• When the MV fuse is blown
• Overcurrent
• Earth fault
Remote indications :
Volt-free contacts shall be available for at least the following:
• Contactor position (ON / OFF)
• Mode of operation (Local / Auto)
• MV fuse blown
• SF6 leakage
Overcurrent fault on each phase
• Earth fault
All above alerts and fault indications shall be readily available to interface vide the serial link.

All switchgear components (Feeder contactors, etc.) shall be tested in accordance with the latest relevant IEC Standards
(as minimum requirement) and other Standards as may be approved by the Engineer and the Owner.
Acceptance by the Owner for the switchgear component shall not relieve the manufacturer from any of his performance
guarantees or any other contractual obligations.
Test certificates for each switchgear component shall be submitted prior to delivery for approval.
The Owner reserves the right to perform checks during manufacturing process at any time or all the times. It shall be at
the discretion of the Engineer and the Owner to witness tests on 100%, or any percentage quantity of each lot for
routine tests, apart from the type tests, wherever called for.
a. Factory Tests
The complete assembly of the switchgear shall be tested at the Factory and if deemed necessary the tests shall be done
with the presence of The Engineer / the Owner or their appointed third party inspection agencies. Manufacturer shall
furnish details of tests performed at the factory.
b. Routine Tests
Switchgears and their components shall be subjected to routine tests as per the relevant IEC or equivalent
recommendations. Routine test certificates shall be submitted for the Owner’s review and approval before shipment of
the switchgear components. Following tests shall be performed as routine tests in addition to the standard tests:
1. Power frequency voltage tests
Page 10-238
3. Voltage test on auxiliary circuits

4. Measurement of resistance of main circuits
5. Operation tests
6. Continuity with diagrams (scheme check)
7. Measurement of closing and opening speeds and times
8. Dielectric testing and main circuit resistance measurement.
The type test certificates shall be submitted along with the materials submittals.
c. Visual Inspection
The various components of the 6.6 KV Switchgear shall be inspected visually in accordance with the list of defects set
forth below:
i. Material
• Parts not made of material as specified
• Any component missing or damaged.
ii. Finish
• Dirt, grit or foreign matter embedded in finish
• Painting works not in order
• Pits, cavities on the surface of components and bus-bars. The contact surface of switches and breakers not
being smooth and uniform in thickness
• Steel parts rusted.
iii. Construction
• Construction of any major components not as per specification or good engineering practice
• Nuts and bolts not tight
• Nuts not freely moving or loose on threads
• Doors of the enclosure do not fit properly
• Welding not proper
• Locking arrangement not proper
• Earthing straps between doors and enclosure not of adequate size
• Marking/Name Plates
• Caution notices missing, not legible, incomplete or not permanent.
• Labels with correct circuit names / numbers.
d. Site Tests
The 6.6 KV Switchgear should be suitable for specified functions illustrated in this specification unless otherwise
approved by the Owner. The Manufacturer shall carry out electrical and function tests when installation of the 6.6 KV
switchgear has been completed. The tests shall comprise but not limited to the following:
Control and secondary wiring check test. Secondary wiring shall be checked to ensure that all connections are in
accordance with the wiring diagram. Relays and other devices shall be checked by actual operation, if possible. Those
circuits for which operation is not feasible shall be checked for continuity. A check shall be made for proper sequence
of operation of mechanically operated auxiliary switches and devices. Insulation resistance of each bus shall be
measured from phase-to-phase, and from phase-to-ground with Switch / Feeder contactor open in the service position.
All fuse link rating shall be checked.
Ratio, polarity, Insulation resistance measurement, excitation characteristics measurement tests shall be performed on
all instrument transformers. Primary current injection test to prove sensitivity and stability of the transformer. Bus-bar
and Pilot wire differential protections. The external circuit of the current transformer shall be completely tested before
Page 10-239
the shorting devices are removed from the current transformer secondary terminals. The tests shall include the
followings:
• Continuity check of the circuit external to the current transformer by applying of current.
• Primary injection through each CT to ensure that the correct amount of current flow is through each element in
the circuit.
• Operational check to verify that all devices in the current transformer circuit will be activated by current
flowing in the circuits, that the effect of the current on each device is correct for the quantity of current flowing
and that the circuit remains complete for all values of current through the maximum current output capability
of the current transformer whose external circuit is being tested
• Phase check to verify correct phase relationship at each device connected in the current transformer circuit.
• All protection devices shall be bench tested and calibrated in accordance with the related settings
• Checking of proper annunciation system operation
• Calibration and adjustment of instrumentation
• Interlocking checks
• Functional checks.
The scope of the tests should be finalized and submitted to the Owner/the Engineer/ADDC for approval prior to
implementation.
10.15.7 Lighting Control Methodology

10.15.7.1 General
installation, site testing and commissioning of lighting control system consisting of photocell, lighting control panel,
control and power wiring if applicable, and only those general aspects which are considered minimum quality and
performance requirements by the Engineer and the Owner. Further detailed and specific data are to be as below and as
per the Single Line diagram.
The Lighting control system offered shall be complete in all respects necessary for their effective and trouble free
operation when connected to the distribution system.
The Lighting control cabinet shall be installed within the prefabricated 11 or 22 or 33 KV/6.6 KV substation.
Lighting control system shall consist of, but not limited to, the following:
• Photocell
• Lighting control panel
10.15.7.2 Technical Description

a. General
The Lighting control equipment ratings shall be as per the Single Line Diagram included in standard drawings. The
Lighting control equipments shall be capable of withstanding the electrical and mechanical stresses. The highest degree
of uniformity and interchange ability shall be attained. The design shall facilitate easy maintenance, fault diagnosis and
repair of the components.
Materials shall wherever possible, be non-hygroscope and non-flammable. Insulating materials shall have a high
resistance to tracking.
A mimic diagram of suitable size showing power and control scheme of the Lighting control system shall be provided at
prominent places.
b. Operating Principle
The objective of having the Lighting control on the MV network is to have a centralized and reliable lighting control.
The lighting commands are fed to the SF6 contactors through a central lighting control module based on the prevailing
daylight conditions. The daylight conditions are observed using a Photocell and also doubled with an Astronomical
clock to ensure timely operations. Lighting commands to each distribution feeders shall be with a minimum time delay
Page 10-240
of 30 seconds. Permanent network are powered with a single ON / OFF command per day. The system shall support
any dimming philosophy implemented by the Owner for the street lighting system.
c. Equipments
1. Photocell
The photocell shall be a twilight switch with photoelectrical order allowing the lighting ON or OFF according to the
external luminous environment. Its following characteristics:
• Supply voltage : 230 V
• Frequency : 50 Hz
• Power cut : 10 A
• Temperature of use : - 35°C to +70°C
• Watertight to immersion and spear
It consists of:
• A photo-battery operating a galvanometric relay, controlling the output contactor, setting 4 lux or as approved
by the Engineer or the Owner
• A plugging support
• A hood protecting the photocell against the direct sunlight
• A fixing collar
The linking between the photocell and the LV cabinet shall be made with a cable U1000 RVFV type, in copper, cross-
section not less than 1.5 mm²
2. Lighting Control Panel
The panel shall be made of sheet steel with minimum thickness of 2mm, with glycerophalic paint, grey colour, closed
by one door with a lock, IP 21 rated. This panel shall be wall mounted type and inside with a base frame housing the
internal components. The front door of the panel shall house:
• An indication lamp for Power availability
• An ON/OFF/AUTO selector switch
• Indication lamps for faults conditions, on the network and control signals.
• Reset push button
• Push button to test the indication lamps.
The internal components shall be circuit breakers, contactors and relays for operations defined in the principle of
operation.
10.15.8 Remote Announcation System

The objective of the Remote annunciation system is to monitor various parameters within the substation to improve the
maintenance team’s efficiency. System management will be carried out by means of a user interface. This remote
monitoring will be achieved by transmitting information from 6.6 KV cells via a serial communication. This is achieved
through a monitoring cabinet equipped with an intelligent module with Jbus RS485 / GSM communication and
necessary cabling between equipments. The module must be supplied by the 48 VDC existing, Power supply needed: 20
W The box will also be equipped with:
• A 30 mA differential circuit breaker for the power outlet supply,
• One power outlet,
• A 230V voltage presence indicator light,
• A 48V voltage presence indicator light,
• One AC/DC 230V/24V power supply,
• Adjustable thermostat 5 to 60°C to check the substation ambient temperature.
Page 10-241
• Connection wiring and terminal blocks.

Operating principle:
The information from 6.6 KV switchgear will be received via the serial link of the incoming and feeder contactors. The
monitoring system allows the supervision of the points indicated in the table below to minimum. On fault, a SMS shall
be sent to a mobile phone designated by the Owner. The SMS will indicate the name of the faulty condition within
substation and the faulty feeder and also the type of fault. On fault, in addition to the SMS the fault shall be reported to
an email or group of email designated by the Owner. The E-mail will have the same text as the SMS. Fault history shall
be sent via email and the time period shall be defined by the Owner. The general information of the substation
(information to confirm) can be supervised, maximum 12 On/Off information.
List of fault to be monitored (to miniumum):
• Auxiliary power supply availability
• Control power supply availability
• Lack of 6.6 KV in the 6.6 KV switchgear
• 6.6 KV Fuse blown
• SF6 leakage in 6.6 KV contactor
• Street lighting feeder’6.6 KV contactor open upon receipt of lighting command
• Over current fault on the street lighting 6.6 KV feeder
• Earthfault on the street lighting 6.6 KV feeder
• Substation door open
• Substation ambient temperature beyond defined value
• Substation fire alarm
10.15.9 Spares
The spares for MV system equipments shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. The amount shall be ten
percentage of the cost of the total MV system equipments supplied under each contract. All spare MV items shall
comply with all applicable Sections of these Standard Specifications. All spare units shall be suitable boxed or crated
and placed in storage where designated by the Owner and the Engineer. All spare units shall be identical to and by the
same manufacturer as units approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment and
appurtenances to carefully load, transport, unload and place all spares in storage. No materials, boxes or crates shall be
stored directly on the ground or similar horizontal surface. The Contractor shall provide all blocking of wood, concrete
or other material as approved by the Owner and the Engineer under all materials, boxes or crates. All materials, crates
or boxes shall be suitably identified by Contract.
Page 10-242
TRANSFORMERS / REACTORS / RESISTORS

Auxiliary/Distribution Transformers (Floor Mounted, Oil-Insulated), 1500 kVA, 33 ± 5%/6.6 kV
Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 Manufacturer
1.01.1 name
1.01.2 country of manufacturing
1.02 Place of testing
1.03 Kind of installation outdoor
1.04 Applicable standards IEC 60076
1.05 Type of core core type
1.06 Type of cooling ONAN
1.07 Type of tank
1.07.1 corrugated sheet steel hermetically sealed yes/no yes
1.07.2 with nitrogen cushion yes/no
1.08 Number of windings two
1.09 Specification for transformer oil IEC 60296
2.00 RATINGS
2.01 Rated power kVA 1500
2.02 Service conditions
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-243


0
2.02.1 maximum ambient temperature C 50
2.02.2 maximum service altitude m 1000
2.03 Temperature rise limit of windings
2.03.1 oil K 45
2.03.2 windings K 55
2.03.3 hot spot K 68
2.04 Rated voltages
2.04.1 primary kV 33
2.04.2 secondary at no-load on principle tap kV 6.6
2.05 Number of phases 3
2.06 Rated current
2.06.1 primary (at principal tap) A
2.06.2 secondary A
2.07 Vector group symbol Dyn11
2.08 Rated frequency Hz 50
2.09 Impedance voltage (75 0C) at full rated power % 6.0
2.10 Magnetic flux density, at rated voltage Tesla 1.72
and frequency
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-244

2.11 No-load losses, at rated voltage and frequency kW max. 2.6
2.12 No-load current (Io/In) %
2.13 Core losses (W17/50) W/kg
2.14 Load losses (75 0C) kW max. 11.0
2.15 Tap-changer current rating A
2.16 Tapping range ±% 2 x 2.5
2.17 Number of steps ± No. 2
2.18 Tapped winding HV
2.19 Principal tapping at kV 33
3.00 INSULATION LEVEL
3.01 Primary (winding/bushing):
3.01.1 power frequency withstand voltage (winding) kV 70
3.01.2 lightning impulse level (winding) kV 170
3.01.3 power frequency withstand voltage (bushing) kv 70
3.01.4 lightning impulse level (bushing) kv 170
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-245

3.02 Secondary (winding/bushing):
3.02.1 power frequency withstand voltage kV 20/28
3.02.2 lightning impulse level kV 60/75
4.00 TESTS
4.01 Routine tests according to IEC 60076 on each unit
4.02 Separate source AC withstand voltage test on each unit
4.02.1 test voltage / primary kV 70
4.02.2 test voltage / secondary kV 20
4.03 Induced AC voltage withstand test on each unit
4.03.1 test voltage / primary kV 69.3
4.03.2 test voltage / secondary kV 13.2
5.00 OPERATING DETAILS
5.01 Constant power at all taps yes
5.02 Cooling method ONAN
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-246

5.03 Noise level (LpA) at measuring dB(A) 62
distance of 0.3 m
5.04 Permissible over-load and duration (in minutes)
5.04.1 20 % over-load
5.04.1.1 at 30 0C min.
5.04.1.2 at 40 0C min.
5.04.1.3 at 50 0C min.
5.04.2 30 % over-load
5.04.2.1 at 30 0C min.
5.04.2.2 at 40 0C min.
5.04.2.3 at 50 0C min.
5.04.3 40 % over-load
5.04.3.1 at 30 0C min.
5.04.3.2 at 40 0C min.
5.04.3.3 at 50 0C min.
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-247

5.04.4 50 % over-load
5.04.4.1 at 30 0C min.
5.04.4.2 at 40 0C min.
5.04.4.3 at 50 0C min.
6.00 DESIGN DETAILS AND FEATURES
6.01 Current densities at rated power
6.01.1 primary A/mm2 < 2.48
6.01.2 secondary A/mm2 < 2.48
6.02 Winding resistances at 75 0C
6.02.1 primary Ω /phase
6.02.2 secondary Ω /phase
6.03 Type of winding
6.03.1 primary Layer
6.03.2 secondary Layer
6.04 Winding conductor material (all windings) copper
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-248

6.05 Winding connections / braced or crimped Braced
6.06 Branded or core bolt construction Core Clamp
6.07 Thermal class of insulation A
6.08 Insulation material
6.08.1 primary Epoxy Dotted Paper
6.08.2 secondary Epoxy Dotted Paper
6.08.3 tapping leads Paper Tubes
6.08.4 core lamination Carlite
6.09 Radiator / wall thickness mm 1.2
6.10 Type of valves globe or gate valves
6.11 Efficiencies
6.11.1 at 25 % of rated power %
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-249

6.12 Voltage regulation at 75 0C and rated power
6.12.1 at power factor 0.80 %
6.13 Thicknesses
6.13.1 cover mm 6
6.13.2 walls (except corrugated sheet steel radiator) mm >6
6.13.3 bottom mm 6
6.14 Nominal internal pressure at full load max. bar
6.15 Internal withstand test pressure at full load bar
7.00 MASSES, MEASURES AND DRAWINGS
7.01 Overall dimensions
7.01.1 height mm
7.01.2 depth mm
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-250

7.01.3 width mm
7.02 Shipping dimensions
7.02.1 height mm
7.02.2 depth mm
7.02.3 width mm
7.03 Height of crane hook mm
7.04 Transformer masses
7.04.1 total mass kg
7.04.2 transportation mass kg
7.04.3 untanking mass kg
7.04.4 mass of core kg
7.04.5 mass of windings kg
7.04.6 mass of tank and fittings kg
7.04.7 mass of insulation liquid kg
7.05 Drawings
7.05.1 dimensional drawings No.
7.05.2 connection diagram No.
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-251
TRANSFORMER
Auxiliary/Distribution Transformers (Floor Mounted, Oil-Insulated), 100 kVA, 6.6kV ± 5%/0.400 kV
Sl.
No. REQUIRED TENDERED
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 Manufacturer
1.01.1 name
1.03 Kind of installation Outdoor
1.04 Applicable standards IEC / NFC

/equivalent
1.06 Type of cooling ONAN
1.07 Type of tank

1.07.1 corrugated sheet steel hermetically sealed yes/no
1.07.2 with nitrogen cushion yes/no
1.08 Number of windings two
1.09 Specification for transformer oil IEC / NFC

/equivalent
2.00 RATINGS

0
2.02.1 maximum ambient temperature C 54
2.03 Temperature rise limit of windings

2.03.1 oil K 45
2.03.2 windings K 55
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-252
TRANSFORMER
Sl.
2.03.3 hot spot K 68
2.04 Rated voltages

2.04.1 primary kV 6.6
2.04.2 secondary at no-load on principle tap kV 0.400
2.06 Rated current

2.06.1 primary (at principal tap) A 8.75
2.06.2 secondary A 140
2.09 Impedance voltage (75 0C) at full rated power % 3.4
2.10 Magnetic flux density

2.10.1 at nominal voltage and frequency Tesla
2.10.2 at maximum system voltage Tesla
2.10.3 saturation Tesla
2.11 Maximum permitted Losses at 750C, rated

voltage,
frequency, full site rated load and main tap
2.11.1 load losses kW 1.25
2.11.2 no-load losses kW 0.3
2.12 Tolerances
2.12.1 ….for total losses %
2.12.2 ….for component losses %
2.14 Core losses (W17/50) W/kg
2.15 Tap -Changer current rating A
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-253
TRANSFORMER
Sl.
2.16 Tapping range +% 5
2.17 Number of steps No 3
2.18 Tapped winding MV
2.19 Principal tapping at kV 6.6
2.20 Terminations
2.20.1 …. Primary (MV) termination type Plug-In
2.20.2 …. Primary (MV) terminations rating A 80
2.20.3 …. Primary (MV) cable maximum mm 44

diameter
2.20.4 …. Secondary (LV) termination type Cable direct from
transformer
2.20.5 …. Secondary (LV) cable rating mm² 70
2.20.6 …. Secondary (LV) cable length M ≤6
2.21 Protections
…. MV protection type
…. Fuse type
…. Fuse rating
…. LV protection Thermal overload
3.01 Primary (winding/bushing):

3.01.1 power frequency withstand voltage (winding) kV
3.01.2 lightning impulse level (winding) kV
3.01.3 power frequency withstand voltage (bushing) kV 22
3.01.4 lightning impulse level (bushing) kV 60
3.02 Secondary (winding/bushing):
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-254
TRANSFORMER
Sl.
3.02.1 power frequency withstand voltage kV
3.02.2 lightning impulse level kV
3.03 Minimum creepage distance of bushings

3.03.1 primary mm 70
3.03.2 secondary mm 20
4.00 TESTS
4.01 Routine tests according to IEC 60076 or on each unit

equivalent
4.02.1 test voltage / primary kV
4.02.2 test voltage / secondary kV
4.03 Induced AC voltage withstand test on each unit
4.04 Heat-run test (for pre-qualification only)

4.05 Lightning impulse tests on HV winding
(for pre-qualification only)
4.05.1 test voltage / full wave kV
4.05.2 test voltage / chopped wave KV as per IEC or equivalent
4.06 Short circuit test (for pre-qualification only)

4.06.1 name of independent testing laboratory who carried
out the short circuit test on similar
transformer
4.06.2 test certificates attached yes
4.06.3 validity of quality control certificate

4.06.4 name of issuing authority
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-255
TRANSFORMER
Sl.
5.00 OPERATING DETAILS
5.01 Constant power at all taps yes
5.03 Noise level (LpA) at measuring dB(A)

distance of 0.3 m
5.04 Permissible over-load and duration (in
minutes)
5.04.1 20 % over-load
5.04.1. at 30 0C min.
1
5.04.1. at 40 0C min.
2
5.04.1. at 50 0C min.
3
5.04.2 30 % over-load
5.04.2. at 30 0C min.
1
5.04.2. at 40 0C min.
2
5.04.2. at 50 0C min.
3
5.04.3 40 % over-load
5.04.3. at 30 0C min.
1
5.04.3. at 40 0C min.
2
5.04.3. at 50 0C min.
3
5.04.4 50 % over-load
5.04.4. at 30 0C min.
1
5.04.4. at 40 0C min.
2
5.04.4. at 50 0C min.
3
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-256
TRANSFORMER
Sl.
6.00 DESIGN DETAILS AND

FEATURES
6.01.1 primary A/mm2
6.01.2 secondary A/mm2
6.02 Winding resistances at 75 0C

6.02.1 primary Ω /phase 8.034
6.02.2 secondary Ω /phase 0.00745
6.03 Type of winding

6.03.1 primary
6.03.2 secondary multi-layer foil
6.05 Winding connections / braced or crimped

6.06 Branded or core bolt construction

6.08.1 primary
6.08.2 secondary
6.08.3 tapping leads
6.08.4 core lamination
6.09 Radiator / wall thickness mm 1.2
6.10 Type of valves

6.11 Efficiencies
6.11.1 at 25 % of rated power % 98.52
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-257
TRANSFORMER
Sl.
6.11.2 at 50 % of rated power % 98.84
6.11.3 at 75 % of rated power % 98.76
6.11.4 at 100 % of rated power % 98.59
6.11.5 at 125 % of rated power % 98.38
6.11.6 at 150 % of rated power % 98.14
6.12 Voltage regulation at 75 0C and rated power

6.13 Thicknesses
6.13.1 cover mm 8
6.13.2 walls (except corrugated sheet steel mm 3

radiator)
6.13.3 bottom mm 3
6.14 Nominal internal pressure at full load max. bar < 0.2
6.15 Internal withstand test pressure at full load bar 0.3

7.01.1 height mm
7.01.2 depth mm
7.01.3 width mm

7.02.1 height mm
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-258
TRANSFORMER
Sl.
7.02.2 depth mm
7.02.3 width mm
7.03 Height of crane hook mm

7.05 Drawings
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-259
6,6 kV SWITCHGEAR
(SWG SF6 Insulated, PLUG-IN)
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 Applicable standards IEC 62271-200
1.02 Type test

1.02.1 carried out yes/no
1.02.2 date dd-mm-

yy
1.02.3 testing laboratory
1.02.3.1 name
1.02.3.2 country
1.03 Type
1.04 Commercial operation time of offered switchgear years min. 5
type
2.00 CONSTRUCTION DATA
A. 6,6 kV SF 6 -Insulated Switchgear

2.01 Manufacturer
2.01.1 name
2.02 Enclosure
2.02.1 type metal-clad
2.02.2 material painted steel

plate
2.02.2.3 thicknesses
2.02.2.3.1 base frame mm
2.02.2.3.2 side panels mm 2
2.02.2.3.3 top cover mm 2
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-260
6,6 kV SWITCHGEAR

2.02.2.3.4 doors mm 2
2.02.3 arc-proof yes
2.02.4 extensible at both sides yes
2.02.5 color RAL 7035 - 7016
2.03 Compartments/Modules Details

2.03.1 contactor
2.03.1.1 insulation medium SF 6
2.03.1.2 degree of protection, IP 3X
2.03.2 VT Busbar
2.03.2.1 insulation medium air
2.03.2.2 degree of protection, IP 3X
2.03.3 busbars
2.03.3.2 degree of protection, air/SF 6 IP 3X
2.03.4 cable sealing end and CTs

2.03.4.2 degree of protection IP 3X
2.03.5 control, protection, etc.

2.03.5.2 degree of protection IP 3X
2.03.6 separation sheets of compartments

2.03.6.1 material painted steel
plate
2.03.6.2 thickness mm 2
2.04 Busbars
2.04.1 material copper
2.04.2 single busbars yes
2.04.2.1 location Rear

compartment
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-261
6,6 kV SWITCHGEAR

2.04.2.2 sections No.
2.04.2.3 number of runs No.
2.04.2.4 minimum clearances

2.04.2.5 between phases mm 90
2.04.3 phase barrier provided yes/no
2.04.4 busbar support insulators

2.04.4.1 manufacturer
2.04.8.1.1 name
2.04.8.1.2 country of manufacturing
2.04.8.2 type
2.04.8.3 material epoxy resin
2.04.8.4 applicable standards IEC
2.04.8.5 creepage distance mm
2.05 Contactor
2.05.1 manufacturer
2.05.1.1 name
2.05.1.2 country of manufacturing
2.05.2 applicable standards IEC 62271-100
2.05.3 type PLUG-IN
2.05.4 no. of poles 3
2.05.5 operating facilities

2.05.5.1 hand yes
2.07.6.3.1 remote control (if applicable) yes
2.07.6.3.2 CTs for protection for yes
feeder neetwork
2.05.6 operation mechanism
2.05.6.1 opening spring
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-262
6,6 kV SWITCHGEAR

2.05.6.2 closing spring
2.05.6.3 coils
2.07.7.3.1 Coil pull-in No. 1
2.07.7.3.2 Coil Hold No. 1
2.05.7 Light position indicator of main contact yes
2.05.8 interlocking with earthing switch yes

2.06 Earthing arrangement
2.06.1 feeder isolator cum
earthing switch
2.07 Isolator cum earthing switch

2.09.1 manufacturer
2.09.1.1 name
2.09.1.2 country of manufacturer
2.09.3 type
2.09.4 no. of poles 3
2.09.5 operating facilities

2.09.5.1 hand yes
2.09.6 mechanical position indicator of main contact yes
2.09.7 interlocking with contactor provided yes
2.07 Light Voltage 6,6 kV

2.07.1 manufacturer
2.07.1.1 name
2.07.2 type capacitor
2.07.3 provided for each phase and feeder yes
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
2.08 Fault indicator - Display

Page 10-263
6,6 kV SWITCHGEAR

2.08.1 manufacturer
2.08.1.1 name
2.08.2 housing
2.08.2.1 material
2.08.2.2 window
2.08.3 remote indication (if applicable) yes/no
2.08.3.1 provision for remote indication yes
2.08.4 current transformer

2.08.4.1 core-balance yes
2.08.4.2 burden VA
2.08.5 type
2.08.6 re-set manual with remote end re-set facilities yes
2.08.7 re-set automatic yes/no
2.08.7.1 power
2.08.7.1.1 from CT or AC auxiliary supply yes
2.08.7.1.2 from built-in battery no
B. Numerical control/protection card

2.09 Manufacturer
2.09.1 name
2.10 Type numerical
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-264
6,6 kV SWITCHGEAR

D. Wiring
2.11 Material
2.24.1 stranded copper wires for cross-sections yes
2
>2.5mm else solid copper wires
2.12 Cross-sections
2.12.1 power circuits (min) mm2 1.5
2.12.2 control circuits mm2 0.75
2.12.3 CT circuits (min) mm2 0.75
2.12.4 telecommunication/control/protection
connections
2.12.4.1 pairs are screened (for yes
communication)
2.12.4.2 external wiring mm2 0.75
2.12.4.3 other wiring mm2 0.5
3.00 ELECTRICAL DATA
A. General
3.01 Remote control Interface terminals/cubicle yes
B. 6,6 kV SF 6 -Insulated Switchgear

3.02 Common
3.02.1 nominal operating voltage kV 6.6
3.02.2 rated voltage, SF 6 kV 7.2
3.02.3 frequency Hz 50
3.02.4 insulation level

3.02.4.1 power frequency withstand voltage,
1 min.
3.02.4.1.1 phase to phase and kV 20
phase to earth, SF 6
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-265
6,6 kV SWITCHGEAR

3.02.4.2 lightning impulse withstand voltage
3.02.4.2.1 phase to phase and kV 40
phase to earth, air/SF 6
3.02.5 rated short-circuit current, 1s kA 3.2
3.03 Busbars (For maximum power

transformer rating of 2MVA)
3.03.1 rated current carrying capacity at max. 40°C A 400
3.03.2 operating current carrying capacity at max. A

50°C
3.04 Contactor SF 6
3.04.1 rated currents at 40°C
3.04.1.1 outgoing feeder A 400
3.04.1.2 incoming feeder A 400
3.04.1.3 arc quenching medium

3.04.1.3.1 SF 6 yes
3.04.1.4 pressure inside the contactor bars 2.5
3.04.1.5 number of operations (ON/OFF)

3.04.1.5.1 at rated current No. 300,000
3.04.2 rated supply voltage of operating mechanism

3.04.2.1 closing coil Vac/V dc 230/48
3.04.2.1.1 allowable variation of ±% +5% -10%

voltage
3.04.2.1.2 power required at VA/W
normal voltage
3.04.02.2 tripping coil (if applicable) Vac/V dc 230/48
3.04.02.2.1 allowable variation of ±% +5% -10%

voltage
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-266
6,6 kV SWITCHGEAR

3.04.02.2.2 power required at Va/W
normal voltage
3.04.3 whether control circuitry is suitable for yes
monitoring of closing and tripping circuits

3.04.4 auxiliary switches
3.04.4.1 type
3.04.4.2 number No.
3.04.4.3 normal current at rated voltage A
3.04.5 auxiliary contactor contacts

3.04.5.1 NO/NC No. 10
3.05 Isolator cum earthing switch

3.05.1 auxiliary contacts
3.05.1.1 NO/NC No. 1
3.06 Fuses (VT)

3.06.2 type HRC
3.06.3 rated current at 400 C A
3.06.4 rated current at 500 C A
C. Numerical control/protection cards

3.07 General
3.070.1 DC Infeed
3.070..1 rated voltage Ac/V dc 230/48
3.070..2 DC/DC converter included yes
3.070..3 allowable tolerances % +-10 %
3.070..4 power consumption VA/W 10 VA/10W
3.07.1.1 Rated current A 0.1
3.07.1.1 continuously x IN x IN 2
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-267
6,6 kV SWITCHGEAR

3.07.1.2 for 1 s x IN 80
3.07.2 Protection class of relay housing IP 3X
3.08 Architecture
3.08.1 Characteristics
3.08.1.1 characteristic acc. to IEC 60255 yes
3.09 Protection Measuring Units

3.09.1 Current setting
3.09.1.1 phase elements 0 - 200A
3.09.1.1.1 in steps 1A
3.09.1.2 earth element 0 - 20 A
3.09.1.2.1 in steps 1A
3.09.1.3 operating time
3.09.1.3.1 continuous variable yes
E. Wiring
3.10 Power frequency withstand voltage kV 2
ac1min
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-268
6,6 kV SWITCHGEAR

6.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
6.01 Type test reports enclosed yes
6.02 Technical literature enclosed yes
6.03 Standard conditions of installation enclosed yes
6.04 Relevant drawings enclosed yes
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-269
10.16 MV Power Distribution Network

10.16.1 General
10.16.1.1 Introduction
This Specification describes the requirements for the design, manufacture, testing and supply of the MV Distribution
Network for energizing the street lighting network
10.16.1.2 Site Conditions

The following conditions shall be considered in the design and supply of the system according to section 10.1.6.
10.16.2 Trench and Backfill

10.16.2.1 Introduction
Trench and backfill for cables shall be performed to the requirements of Section 10.14.10.4.
10.16.3 Armoured Three Single Core 6.6 KV Cable

The specification consists of designing, manufacturing, supplying, laying, terminating and commissioning of Armoured
Three Single Core 6.6 KV Cable at the locations shown on the Contract plans, in accordance with these specifications
and as included in the Bills of Quantities. Suitable earth cable shall be provided with every MV power distribution
network.

The Armoured Three Single Core 6.6 KV Cable shall comply with the following technical requirements:
• Medium Voltage (6.6 KV) twisted three core radial field type cable manufactures according to NFC 33220 or
IEC 60502 standards.
• Three single-core cable with XLPE insulation and PE sheath assembled as a bunch designed for direct burial
without complementary protection.
• Cross section : 35sq.mm.
• Max Voltage Drop, single phase : 1.03V/A.km
• Conductor : bare copper, class 2 to IEC 60228
• Semi Conductor Insulation : XLPE (Cross linked polyethylene)
• Screen : Semi conductor extruded, bare copper wire spinning
• Waterproof tapes sheath : XLPE (Cross linked polyethylene)
• Assemblage : 3 twisted single core
• Rated Voltage Uo/U : 3.6/6 (7.2) kV
• Usage Characteristics
• Weather resistance : good
• Chemical resistance : good
• Water proofing : excellent
• Conductor temperature in service : not less than 90°C
Page 10-270
10.16.3.3 Network Earthing

The earthing network adopted on the MV network shall be of TNR-S (Terre Neutral - Seperate) centralized Earthing
scheme utilizing minimum 1C x 25sq.mm copper cable interconnecting the earthing rods of every transformer pit of the
respective Distribution feeder.
10.16.4 Cable Laying

Cable laying shall be performed to the requirements of Section 10.14.10.5.
10.16.5 Supply Cable Covering Tiles

Supply of Cable Covering Tiles shall be performed to the requirements of Section 10.12.9.
10.16.6 Install Cable Covering Tiles

Install Cable Covering Tiles shall be performed to the requirements of Section 10.14.10.6.
10.16.7 T-Junction Box

The specification covers designing, manufacturing, supplying, connecting and commissioning of T-Junction Boxes at
the locations shown on the Contract plans, in accordance with these specifications and as included in the Bills of
Quantities. A joint marker as per ADDC specifications shall be provided at each jointing location.

The T-Junction Box shall be cast in resin, corrosion resistant, watertight and suitable for directly buried installation with
plug-in terminals. The T-Junction Box shall have the following electrical characteristic:
Isolation Voltage: 7.2kV
Operation Voltage: 6.6 KV
Maximum Current: 80A
IP Rating: IP68
2
The T-Junction Box shall be suitable to accommodate 3x1C x 35mm composite
CU/XLPE/GSWA/PVC cable(s).
The T-Junction Box shall be one of the following arrangements:
a) 1 input x 2 output
b) 1 input x 3 output
10.16.8 Watertight Transformer 6.6 KV/0.400kV

This work consists of designing, manufacturing, furnishing, placing, connecting earthing, terminating and
commissioning 6.6 KV/0.400kV transformer at the locations shown on the Contract plans, in accordance with these
specifications and as included in the Bills of Quantities.

The transformer shall be casted in araldite resin, watertight, buriable and outdoor type with continuous duty, integral
assembly, grounded, tamper-resistant IP 68 and waterproof with oil immersed. The transformer shall be completely
fabricated at the factory and the only site work will be the connection of the external cables. It shall comply with the
requirements of IEC/IEE/NFC standards.
Page 10-271
10.16.8.3 Technical Requirements for the Transformer

The transformer shall comply with the following technical requirements:
• Voltage (Primary) : 6600V, 3Ph, 3 wire
• Voltage (Secondary) : 400V+N, 3Ph, 4 wire
• System Frequency : 50Hz
• Maximum Voltage Variation : +10% - 6%
• Maximum Frequency Variation : ±0.1%
Frequency Variation
• Power Rating : 32KVA
• Useful Power Rating 25.6KVA
• Frequency : 50Hz
• Primary Voltage : 6600V (Phase to Phase)
• Secondary Voltage : 400V (Phase to Phase)
• Primary Winding Insulation Level : 7200V
• Secondary Winding Insulation Level : 1100V
• Primary Protection : HPC fuse with breaking capacity of 10kA
• Earthing Terminal : M10
• Short Circuit Impedance : 3.5%
• Magnetising Current : 3.5%
• Degree of Protection : IP68
• Primary Connection : watertight three one phase disconnectable connection for 6.6 KV, 3x1C x 35mm² cable
maximum (Three single core cables with XLPE insulation, copper with screen, water tight tape and PE outer
sheath)
• Secondary Connection : 5C, H.07 RNF, 25mm² cable, Rubber Flexible Power Cable
• Dielectric Medium : Mineral Oil
• Installation: In an underground pit (2200mm x 1000mm x 1500mm app.)
• Ambient Temperature: suitable and certified for Abu Dhabi conditions as per section 10.1.6.
• Transformer primary and secondary shall be three-phase units.
• The supply of material shall include all plugs with accessories for termination including insulation compound.
• The transformer shall be with cast in araldite resin enclosure as per manufacturer’s standards.
The transformer shall house a bypass module for remote operation within the enclosure.
10.16.8.4 Technical Requirements for the Terminations

Each Transformer shall be supplied with termination kits complying with the following requirements:
Max. Current Rating : 80A
Voltage Rating : 7.2kV (peak)
Cable Insert Diameter : ≤ 44.5mm
IP Rating : IP 68
Each termination work after completion shall be certified by the transformer manufacturer's authorized representative.
Page 10-272
10.16.9 Low Voltage IP55 Cabinet / Lighting Distribution Board

This specification covers designing, manufacturing, supplying, erection, connection and commissioning of low voltage
IP55 cabinet at the locations shown on the Contract plans, in accordance with these specifications and as included in the
Bills of Quantities

The low voltage IP55 outdoor cabinet shall be GRP, containing the protection equipments, doors with padlocking locks
and equipped with compression gland for incoming and outgoing cable. The cabinet shall be equipped with:
• 4 circuits breakers with overload shut trip coil
• Compression gland for one 5C x 25mm2 cable (incomer)
• Compression gland for two 4C x 25mm2 or two 4C x 16 mm2 cable or two 4C x 10mm2 cable (outgoing) or as
per project requirement
The concrete foundation with the mounting details of the low voltage IP55 cabinet shall be as detailed in contract plans.
10.16.10 Reinforced Concrete Transformer Chamber

Reinforced Concrete Transformer Chamber shall be performed to the applicable requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete
Works, of these Standard Specifications and as shown on Contract Plans. The reinforced concrete transformer chamber
shall be provided with a cover and proprietary locking system as shown on the contract plans.
Page 10-273
TRANSFORMERS
6.6 ± 5% kV / 0.400 kV Street Lighting Transformer, 32 kVA
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 Manufacturer
1.01.1 name
1.03 Kind of installation outdoor,
Underground
1.04 Applicable standards IEC / NFC / equivalent
1.06 Type of tank Epoxy resin

IP 68
1.07 Specification of transformer oil IEC / NFC

equivalent
2.00 RATING

0
2.02.1 maximum service temperature C 50
2.03 Temperature rise limit at all tap changer settings

2.03.1 oil / top K 45
2.03.2 winding / average K 55
2.03.3 winding / hot spot K 68
2.04 Rated voltages

2.04.1 primary kV 6.6
2.04.2 secondary at no-load kV 0.400
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-274
TRANSFORMERS

2.06 Rated current

2.06.1 primary (at principal tap) A
2.06.2 secondary A
2.09 Impedance voltage (75oC) at full rated power %
2.10 Magnetic flux density

2.10.1 at nominal voltage and frequency Tesla
2.10.2 at maximum system voltage Tesla
2.10.3 saturation Tesla
2.11 No-load losses, at rated voltage and frequency kW
2.13 Core losses (W17/50) W/kg max. 1.12
2.14 Load losses (75oC) kW max. 1.5
2.15 Tap changer current rating A
2.16 Tapping range ±% 7.5
2.17 Number of steps ± No. 3
2.18 Tapped winding MV
2.19 Principal tapping at kV 6.6
2.20 Terminations
2.20.1 …Primary (MV) termination
type
2.20.2 …Primary (MV) terminations A 80
rating
2.20.3 …Primary (MV) cable mm 44
maximum diameter
2.20.4 … Secondary (LV) Cable direct from
termination type transformer
2.20.5 … Secondary (LV) sq.mm max 50
terminations rating
2.20.6 … Secondary(LV) cable M ≤6
length
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-275
TRANSFORMERS

2.21 Protections
2.21.1 … MV protection type Fuse
2.21.2 … MV Fuse type HRC
2.21.3 … MV Fuse short circuit kA

rating
2.21.4 … MV Fuse current rating A 20A
2.21.5 … LV protection Thermal overload
3.01 Primary (windings/bushings)

3.01.1 power frequency withstand voltage kV 22
(winding)
3.01.2 lightning impulse level (winding) kV 60
3.01.3 power frequency withstand voltage kV 22

(bushings)
3.01.4 lightning impulse level (bushings) kV 60
3.02 Secondary (windings/bushings)

3.02.1 power frequency withstand voltage kV 3/10
3.02.2 lightning impulse level kV NA/20
3.03 Minimum creepage distance of bushings

3.03.1 primary mm 70
3.03.2 secondary mm 20
4.00 TESTS
4.01 Routine tests according to IEC 60076 on each unit
4.02.1 test voltage / primary kV 22
4.02.2 test voltage / secondary kV
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-276
TRANSFORMERS

4.03 Induced AC withstand voltage test on each unit
4.04 Heat run test (for pre-qualification only)

4.05 Lightning impulse tests on HV windings
(for pre-qualification only)
4.05.1 test voltage / full wave kV 60
4.05.2 test voltage / chopped wave kV as per IEC or

equivalent
4.06 Short circuit test (for pre-qualification only)
4.06.1 name of independent testing laboratory
who carried out the short circuit test
on similar transformer
4.06.2 test certificates attached yes
4.06.3 validity of quality control certificate

4.06.4 name of issuing authority
5.00 OPERATIONAL DETAILS
5.01 Constant power at yes

all taps
5.03 Noise level (LpA) at measuring distance of 0,3 m dB(A)
5.04 Permissible over-load and duration (in minutes)

5.05 20 % over-load min.
5.05.1 at 30oC min.
5.05.2 at 40oC min.
5.05.3 at 50oC min.
5.06 30 % over-load
5.06.1 at 30oC min.
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-277
TRANSFORMERS

5.06.2 at 40oC min.
5.06.3 at 50oC min.
5.07 40 % over-load
5.07.1 at 30oC min.
5.07.2 at 40oC min.
5.07.3 at 50oC min.
5.08 50 % over-load
5.08.1 at 30oC min.
5.08.2 at 40oC min.
5.08.3 at 50oC min.
6.00 DESIGN DETAILS AND FEATURES

6.01.1 primary A/mm2 < 2.48
6.01.2 secondary A/mm2 < 2.48
6.02 Winding resistances at 750C

6.02.1 primary Ω/phase
6.02.2 secondary Ω/phase
6.03 Type of windings

6.03.1 primary
6.03.2 secondary multi layer foil
6.05 Winding connections / braced or crimped

6.06 Branded or core bolt construction

6.08.1 primary
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-278
TRANSFORMERS

6.08.2 secondary
6.08.3 tapping leads
6.08.4 core lamination
6.09 Radiators / wall thickness mm
6.10 Type of valves

6.11 Efficiencies
6.12 Voltage regulation at 75oC and rated power

6.13 Thickness of tank cover, walls and bottom

6.13.1 cover mm
6.13.2 walls (except corrugated sheet steel mm

radiators)
6.13.3 bottom mm
6.13.4 nominal internal pressure at full load max. bar
6.13.5 internal withstand test pressure at full bar

load
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-279
TRANSFORMERS
7.01.1 height mm
7.01.2 depth mm
7.01.3 width mm

7.02.1 height mm
7.02.2 depth mm
7.02.3 width mm
7.03 Height of crane hook m

7.05 Drawings
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-280
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES

6.6 KV XLPE-Insulated Twisted Three-Core Underground Cables
(3x1x35 mm2 )
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 Manufacturer
1.01.1 name
1.01.2 country of manufacturer
1.02 Manufacturer quality system ISO 9001
1.02.1 applicable standards

1.02.1.1 certified by (Company Name)
1.02.1.2 validity till (year)

1.03 Applicable standard(s) for the Cable IEC 60502, 60228
NFC 33-220
1.04 Type test
1.04.1 carried out yes/no yes
1.04.2 date dd-mm-yy
1.04.3 testing station

1.04.3.1 name
1.04.3.2 country
2.00 CONSTRUCTION DATA
2.01 Conductor
2.01.1 applicable standards IEC 60228 / 60502
2.01.2 type compacted round,
stranded class 2
Bare annealed
2.01.4 minimum cross-section (electrical) mm2 35
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-281

(3x1x35 mm2 )
longitudinal water stopper material in

2.01.5
conductor
2.01.5.1 water blocking tape between each NA
layer of wires?
2.01.6 approximate diameter mm 7.1
2.02 Conductor screen

2.02.1 material extruded semi-
conducting
compound
2.02.2 minimum thickness mm 0.5
2.02.3 resistivity to IEC 60502-2 Ωm > 1000
2.02.4 volume resistivity of conductor screen Ωm at 90oC

allowable protrusion in conductor screen
2.02.5 µm
at
conductor screen & insulation interface
2.03 Insulation
2.03.1 material XLPE
2.03.2 nominal thickness mm 2.5
2.03.3 thermal resistivity °C.m/W

2.03.4 allowable protrusion in insulation at µm
insulation and insulation screen interface
2.03.5 allowable protrusion in insulation at µm
conductor screen and insulation interface
2.04 Insulation screen (non-metallic)
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-282

(3x1x35 mm2 )

strippable
2.04.1 material extruded
semi-conducting
compound
2.04.2 minimum thickness mm 0.5
2.04.3 resistivity to IEC 60502-2 Ωm > 500
2.04.4 volume resistivity of insulation screen Ωm at 90oC

2.04.5 allowable protrusion in insulation screen at µm
insulation and insulation screen interface
2.05 Extrusion method of conductor screen,
insulation and insulation screen
2.05.1 simultaneously yes/no
2.06 Method of curing (gas/silicone/silane/long die, etc.) Silane
2.07 Method of cooling (water/nitrogen, etc.) water
2.08 Screen (metallic)

2.08.1 material Bare copper wire
2.08.2 number of layers No. 1
2.08.3 nominal wire diameter mm 0.3
2.08.4 approx cross section area mm2 25/3
2.08.5 approximate diameter mm
2.09 Interstitial conductor

2.09.1 applicable standards IEC 60228
2.09.2 number of cores 3
2.09.4 minimum cross section mm2 35

2.09.5 volume resistivity of interstitial conductor Ωm at 90 C
o
material
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-283

(3x1x35 mm2 )

2.10 Longitudinal water stopper
Water Stopper
2.10.1 material special tape
2.11 Binder
2.11.1 material Polyester tape
2.11.2 thickness mm
2.12 Inner sheath

2.12.2 material PVC-ST2
2.12.4 minimum thickness mm
2.13 Armouring
Galvanised steel
2.13.1 type tape
2.13.2 number of steel tapes 2
2.13.2.1 nominal thickness mm 0.5
2.13.2.2 width mm
2.13.3 cross section mm2
2.14 Outer sheath

2.14.2 material Polyethylene
2.14.4 minimum thickness mm
2.14.5 sulphide resistant yes/no
2.14.6 chloride paraffin free yes/no
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-284

(3x1x35 mm2 )

2.14.7 fire retardant yes/no

black with
2.14.9 color stripes
2.14.10 length marking at every meter interval yes/no
2.14.11 text printed as specified yes/no
2.15 Phase overall diameter (approx) mm 18.8
2.15.1 Individual Phase overall diameter (approx.) mm 18.8
2.15.2 Max Overall diameter (approx) mm 40.5
2.16 Nominal weights

2.16.1 cable kg/m 3.52
2.16.2 steel kg/m
2.16.3 copper kg/m
3.00 ELECTRICAL DATA
3.01 Rated voltage (Uo/U) kV 3.6/6
3.02 Highest system voltage (Umax) kV 7.2
3.03 Frequency Hz 50
3.04 Standard switching impulse withstand kV peak
voltage (peak value)
3.05 Impulse withstand voltage (+90°C) kV peak 75
3.06 Power frequency withstand test voltage (4 x Uo) kV/4hrs 25
3.07 Maximum partial discharge at 1.73 U 0 as per IEC 60502-2
3.07.1 Routine Test pC
3.07.2 Type Test pC >10

3.08 Dielectric stress at power frequency
voltage
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-285

(3x1x35 mm2 )

3.08.1 at insulation screen kV/mm
3.08.2 at conductor screen kV/mm

3.09 Maximum current carrying capacity
(at Uo) for the following conditions, L.F.=1:
3.09.1 in ground: soil temperature=40°C,
depth=1.1m, T.R.= 1.5 m.K/W
3.09.1.1 1 cable of 3 x 1 x 35 mm² A 137
3.09.1.2 2 cables, d=15cm A
3.09.1.3 3 cables, d=15cm A
3.09.1.4 4 cables, d=15cm A

in concrete cable trench/cable room: air=
3.09.2
500C
3.09.2.1 1 cable on tray/racks A
3.09.2.2 2 to 3 cables on tray/racks A
3.09.2.3 4 to 5 cables on tray/racks A

3.10 Maximum emergency current rating at 60% A
and 80% pre-load to IEC 60853
3.11 Copper loss at full load condition per cable W/m/phase
3.12 Maximum dielectric loss per cable at normal W/m/phase
voltage, normal frequency and maximum
conductor temperature
3.13 Metallic screen loss (including interstitial W/m/phase
conductors) of cable per metre at nominal
voltage, normal frequency at half load and
full load conditions per cable
3.14 Maximum loss of steel wire armour per metre at W/m/phase
normal operating conditions and at maximum
3.15 Total losses of cable per metre at normal W/m/phase
operating conditions and at maximum
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-286

(3x1x35 mm2 )

3.16 Permissible symmetrical fault current in conductor
3.16.1 for 1.0 s duration kA 4.9

maximum conductor short circuit
3.16.3 °C 250
temperature
3.17 Symmetrical fault current in metallic screen

3.17.3 maximum metallic screen short circuit °C 200
temperature (0.5 second)
3.18 Minimum symmetrical fault current in
interstitial copper conductor
3.18.1 for 1.0 s duration kA
3.18.2 for 0.5 s duration kA

maximum interstitial copper conductor
3.18.3 °C
short
circuit temperature (0.5 second)
** metallic screen and interstitial copper
conductor bonded
3.19 Screening factor (ground current/total earth
fault current at earth faults)
3.20 Maximum permissible continuous conductor °C 90
temperature
3.21 Maximum permissible temperature of outer sheath
3.21.1 at normal operation °C 60
3.21.2 at emergency operation, refer to below °C
3.21.3 at short circuit °C 70

3.22 Maximum permissible conductor temperature for °C
117% of max. transmission capacity, prevailing
maximum 100 hrs/year and 500 hrs in total
(emergency overload)
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-287

(3x1x35 mm2 )

3.23 Duration at which the cable can be sustained at hour
maximum conductor temperature under
emergency situation
3.24 Maximum permissible short-circuit temperature
3.24.1 for welded/pressed conductor connections °C
3.24.2 appropriate duration s

3.25 Maximum DC conductor resistance at 20°C mΩ/km 524
(five-digit accuracy)
3.26 Maximum AC conductor resistance at 90°C mΩ/km 668
(five-digit accuracy)
3.27 Maximum DC metallic sheath resistance at 20°C Ω/km
3.28 Minimum insulation resistance at 20°C GΩ.km Ki > 3.670

3.29 Maximum d.c. resistance of steel wire armour µΩ/m
per metre of cable at 20°C
3.30 Loss current to earth at three-phase system mA/km
(at 90°C and Uo)
3.31 Maximum working capacitance under full load µF/km
condition
3.32 Working inductance
3.32.1 for the conductors mH/km
3.32.2 for metallic sheath mH/km
3.33 Relative permitivity of XLPE insulation

3.33.1 at 20°C (maximum)
3.33.2 at 90°C (maximum)
3.34 Maximum value of dielectric loss angle of cable x 10-3
at nominal voltage, 50 H z and at conductor
temperature of 20oC
3.35 Dissipation factor at 90°C conductor temperature
3.35.1 at 0.5 x Uo(max) x 10-3
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-288

(3x1x35 mm2 )

3.35.2 at 1.0 x Uo(max) x 10-3
3.35.3 at 2.0 x Uo(max) x 10-3
3.36 Maximum charging current at Uo per conductor A/km
3.37 Charging capacity of three-phase system (at Uo) kVar/km
3.38 Relative permitivity of outer covering

3.39 Approximate surge impedance µΩ/m
3.40 Positive phase sequence impedance (R+jX) per µΩ/m
metre of three phase circuit at 90°C
3.41 Zero phase sequence impedance (R+jX) per µΩ/m
metre of three phase circuit at 90°C
3.42 Max. electrostatic capacitance per core per pF/m
meter of cable
4.00 OTHER DATA

4.01 Date of first commercial operation of the dd-mm-yy
offered cable type
4.02 Reference list/sheet attached yes/no yes
4.03 The design life of the offered cable type years 50

4.04 Guarantee failure rate as a result of an internal
breakdown (No. of failure per 100 km circuit
per year)
4.05 Minimum permissible bending radius D

4.05.1 in ducts m 0.25
4.05.2 laid direct or in air m 0.25
4.05.3 adjacent to joints or terminals m
4.06 Maximum permissible pulling force kN

4.07 Maximum permissible sidewall pressure to
cable at bending point kN/m 5.25
4.08 Delivery length per drum

4.08.1 standard length m
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-289

(3x1x35 mm2 )

4.08.2 maximum length m
4.08.3 minimum length m
4.08.4 tolerance on length of cable % +/- 3
4.09 Recommended size of cable duct mm
5.00 DRUM DETAILS

5.01 Manufacturer
5.01.1 name
5.01.2 country of manufacture
5.02 Material
5.02.1 wooden yes/no Yes
5.02.2 steel with screwed lagging (returnable) yes/no
5.02.2.1 lagging material wooden slabs

5.03.1 flange diameter (max.) mm
5.03.2 core diameter mm
5.03.3 width (max.) mm
5.04 Minimum spindle hole diameter mm
5.05 Weights
5.05.1 maximum gross weight of a full drum kg
5.05.2 empty drum kg
6.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
6.01 Whether all type test reports enclosed yes/no yes
6.02 Whether technical literature enclosed yes/no yes

6.03 Whether tables giving rating factors for variation yes/no yes
in standard conditions of installation enclosed
6.04 Whether relevant drawings enclosed yes/no yes
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-290

(3x1x35 mm2 )

7.00 SAMPLE
7.01 Minimum length of cable sample prior to approval m 5
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Page 10-291
Index
11 and 22KV Cable, 198 149, 152, 156, 157, 158, 159, 166, 167, 169, 173,
132 KV Cable, 207 176,魴178, 180, 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 194, 195,
33 KV Cable, 202 196, 207, 210, 211, 215, 217, 218, 219, 222, 223,
6.6kV Switchgear, 232 224, 225, 226, 227, 229, 230, 233, 239, 241, 272
accessories, 17, 18, 42, 43, 46, 49, 50, 51, 61, 64, 70, existing electrical cables, 192, 213
90, 91, 92, 94, 99, 121, 128, 130, 131, 132, 138, factory test, 130, 131
140, 141, 145, 146, 158, 167, 171, 173, 181, 182, field-testing, 109
194, 195, 196, 198, 201, 202, 206, 207, 210, 218, Fire Alarm System, 147
220, 229, 231, 232, 271 Fire Resistant Cable, 34
Aluminium, 49, 50, 64, 70, 227 Footcandle, 15
Ambient Light, 14 Frame, 15, 45, 58, 123, 167, 171, 225
Amplifiers, 173, 176 functional test, 19
appurtenances, 18, 19, 20, 23, 26, 28, 31, 40, 44, 46, Glare, 15, 16, 58, 100
53, 54, 57, 74, 80, 86, 90, 92, 94, 108, 184, 185, grounding conductor, 144, 145
194, 195, 210, 221, 241 Heat resisting, 31
Armor, 32, 33, 37, 38, 197, 199, 204, 208 heating circuit, 123
Average Initial Illuminance, 14 High Pressure Sodium Lamp, 15
Average Luminance of the Road Surface, 14 Highway Lighting Control, 239
Average Maintained Illuminance, 14, 16 Horizontal Lux, 15
Ballast, 14, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61 ignitors, 99
ballasts, 24, 46, 57, 58, 76, 92, 99 Illuminance, 14, 15, 16, 79
Binning, 14, 63, 69 inspection, 15, 18, 19, 20, 22, 25, 48, 52, 67, 74, 86,
Bonding Jumper, 14 94, 95, 107, 124, 144, 147, 157, 158, 193, 196, 205,
Brightness Control, 16 207, 214, 220, 226, 228, 237
bushings, 26, 27, 28, 145, 190, 206, 227, 228, 230 installation, 11, 12, 14, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25, 26,
Cable Covering Tile, 213 28, 32, 35, 40, 41, 42, 46, 49, 51, 52, 53, 54, 57, 62,
Candela, 14, 81, 82, 83 65, 67, 68, 71, 73, 74, 84, 85, 86, 87, 89, 90, 91, 92,
Candlepower, 14 93, 94, 95, 96, 100, 107, 115, 116, 118, 120, 121,
capacitor bank panel, 146 122, 123, 124, 125, 132, 133, 137, 139, 140, 141,
Capacitor Bank Panel, 146 142, 144, 148, 153, 155, 156, 157, 158, 167, 172,
capacitors, 15, 99, 101, 122, 146, 147 173, 177, 178, 179, 182, 185, 190, 191, 192, 195,
circuit breakers, 43, 52, 84, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 196, 198, 202, 204, 207, 210, 211, 212, 213, 215,
114, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 121, 125, 126, 127, 216, 218, 220, 221, 222, 225, 227, 232, 233, 238,
240 239, 270
Climatic conditions, 17 internal condensation, 64, 70
Coefficient of Utilization, 14, 81, 82, 83 Interrupting Current, 15
conductivity, 14, 31, 32, 36, 48, 84, 111, 138, 143, 197, Isocandela Line, 15
198, 201, 203, 204, 217, 219, 227 junction boxes, 28
Conductor shielding, 198 keypads, 175, 235, 236
Conduit, 11, 14, 26, 27, 28, 35, 145, 156, 171, 181, lamps, 14, 15, 16, 24, 57, 58, 66, 72, 74, 76, 85, 86, 92,
190, 191, 192, 211 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 103, 104, 105, 121, 122, 126,
connecting boxes, 228 127, 134, 135, 158, 195, 235, 236, 240
Control Cabinet, 14, 85, 240 Lantern, 15, 16, 22, 45, 49, 52, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 70,
Corrosion Protection, 231 71, 72, 74, 76, 78, 79, 87, 89, 90, 93, 100
Cut-Off, 15 Lantern Dirt Depreciation, 15, 66, 72, 78
Cutout Sheet Steel, 43 Lantern Efficacy, 16
Diesel Generator Set, 128 Lanterns, 57
direct burial lighting cables, 211 LED Driver, 15
Duct, 15, 26, 145 LED Lanterns, 61, 68
earthing, 32, 42, 43, 44, 47, 85, 86, 90, 91, 92, 95, 123, Light Emitting Diode, 15, 61, 62, 68
142, 144, 145, 172, 201, 211, 215, 218, 220, 221, Light Loss factor, 15
223, 226, 228, 231, 232, 233, 270 Light Poles, 40, 42
electrical facilities, 18, 144 lighting control cabinets, 17, 20, 40, 42, 84, 85, 86, 221
encased ducts, 191, 192 Lighting Control Cabinets, 84
energization, 123 lighting fixture, 64, 70
equipment, 11, 12, 15, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 26, Lighting Unit, 15, 16
36, 40, 42, 44, 47, 48, 53, 54, 61, 80, 86, 94, 95, 96, Longitudinal Uniformity of Road surface Luminance,
106, 107, 108, 109, 112, 123, 124, 126, 128, 132, 15
139, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, Low Smoke and Fume, 33
Page 10-292
Lowering Device, 15 reflector, 57, 58, 74, 76, 92, 93, 94, 98
Lumen, 15, 62, 63, 66, 68, 69, 72, 78, 105 Remote Announcation System, 240
Lux, 15, 16 remote control switch, 46
magnetic core, 227 Rerouting, 222
megohmeter test, 19 Salient features, 176
Metal Halide Lamp, 16 self-cooled, 228
Metallic screen, 199 service connections, 17
Mid-Hinged Light Poles, 47 Shielding, 15, 198, 199
Motors Grounding, 145 Shoe Base, 16
Mounting Height, 16, 73 signaling set, 235, 236
Multi-Function Light Poles, 49 Slip Base, 16
MV Power Distribution Network, 269 Spacing, 16, 66, 67, 73
natural circulation, 217, 219, 225 spares, 53, 54, 80, 94, 101, 108, 172, 185, 234, 236,
Optic Factor, 16 241
optical compartment, 99, 101 split, 138, 190, 192, 205
Ornamental Lighting, 57 street lighting, 20, 23, 29, 50, 67, 85, 241, 269
Overall Uniformity of Road Luminance, 16 substation, 65, 71, 181, 182, 183, 184, 205, 223, 225,
overload, 32, 35, 91, 114, 116, 121, 123, 133, 136, 160, 226, 232, 239, 240, 241
161, 166, 198 Surround Ratio, 16
Paint Light Poles, 54 suspected damage, 18
painting, 54, 62, 68, 76, 96, 112, 221, 226 Telephone Systems, 167
Pavement Reflection Factor, 16 Threshold Increment, 16
Photometric Analysis, 66, 67, 73 torque limiter, 45, 46
photometric brightness, 16 trademark, 25
Poly carbonate, 29 transformer, 85, 114, 121, 124, 127, 160, 201, 205,
polyvinylchloride, 27 206, 223, 227, 228, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 239,
portable power tool, 46 270, 271
power mounting frame, 46 transformer tank, 228, 229
prefabricated, 205, 222, 223, 224, 226, 233, 239 trenches, 25, 26, 182, 190, 192, 195, 204, 212, 213
Prefabricated Sub-Station, 222 Truck Mounted Hydraulic Platform, 53
protection, 25, 26, 29, 62, 65, 69, 71, 84, 91, 92, 93, underground, 25, 35, 41, 42, 145, 148, 195, 200, 205,
94, 98, 99, 101, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 211, 212, 218, 221, 226, 271
118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 124, 125, 133, 139, 141, Uniformity Ratio, 16, 66, 73, 101
142, 146, 154, 155, 158, 159, 160, 161, 171, 181, Uninterruptible Power Supply, 158
184, 190, 192, 197, 204, 217, 219, 220, 221, 222, Uninterruptible Power Systems, 159
224, 228, 229, 230, 235, 236, 239, 269, 272 ventilation, 64, 70, 94, 111, 117, 118, 123, 130, 147,
pullboxes type IV, 30 152, 155, 163, 180, 217, 219, 225
pulling wires, 211 voltage level, 17, 136
PVC, 27 wireless system, 87, 88, 89
Reflectance, 16 Zone selection, 176
Page 293
PART 2
ROAD UTILITIES
CHAPTER 11 - UTILITIES

Chapter 12: Utilities

Table of Contents
List of Tables ................................................................................................................................................................. 11-4
11 Utilities ............................................................................................................................................................. 11-5
11.1 Reference Standards and Codes ................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.2 Telephone Services ...................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.1 Description .......................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 11-7
11.2.2.1 PVC Telephone Conduit ................................................................................................................. 11-7
11.2.2.2 Concrete .......................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.2.3 Service Chambers, Pull Boxes and Joint Boxes .............................................................................. 11-7
11.2.3 Construction Requirements ................................................................................................................. 11-7
11.2.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.2.3.2 PVC Telephone Conduit ................................................................................................................. 11-8
11.2.3.3 PVC Telephone Conduit for Public Telephone Booths................................................................... 11-8
11.2.3.4 Pull Box, Service Chambers and Joint Boxes ................................................................................. 11-9
11.2.3.5 Protection of Existing Telephone Service ....................................................................................... 11-9
11.2.3.6 Demolition of Existing Telephone Works....................................................................................... 11-9
11.2.3.7 Public Telephone Booth Foundations ............................................................................................. 11-9
11.3 Electrical Services ...................................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.3.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 11-10
11.4 Sewerage Services ...................................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.4.1 Protection of Services ........................................................................................................................ 11-10
11.4.1.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.4.1.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-11
11.4.1.3 Construction Requirements ........................................................................................................... 11-11
11.4.2 Contingency Ducts ............................................................................................................................ 11-12
11.4.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-12
11.4.2.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-12
11.4.3 Emergency Sewer Bypass Ducts and End Structures ........................................................................ 11-13
11.4.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-13
11.4.3.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-14
11.4.4 Service Chambers .............................................................................................................................. 11-15
11.4.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.4.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.5 Relocation Works .............................................................................................................................. 11-15
11.4.5.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.5.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.5 Central Cooling .......................................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.5.1.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.5.1.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.5.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-19
11.5.2.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-19
11.5.3 Service Chambers and Vaults ............................................................................................................ 11-19
11.5.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-19
11.5.3.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-19
11.5.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-20
11.5.4.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-20
Page 11-1
11.6 Gas Services ............................................................................................................................................... 11-21

11.6.1.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.6.1.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.6.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-23
11.6.2.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-23
11.6.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-23
11.6.3.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-23
11.6.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-24
11.6.4.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-24
11.7 Water Services ........................................................................................................................................... 11-25
11.7.1.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-25
11.7.1.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-25
11.7.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-26
11.7.2.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-27
11.7.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-27
11.7.3.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-27
11.7.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................... 11-27
11.7.4.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11-28
11.8 Street Furniture........................................................................................................................................... 11-29
11.8.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 11-29
11.8.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 11-30
11.8.3 Construction Requirements ............................................................................................................... 11-31
11.8.3.1 Sun Shelters................................................................................................................................... 11-32
11.8.3.2 Benches ......................................................................................................................................... 11-32
11.8.3.3 Waste Receptacles and Planter Boxes ........................................................................................... 11-32
11.9 Bus Shelters ................................................................................................................................................ 11-32
11.9.1 Performance Specifications ............................................................................................................... 11-33
11.9.1.1 Iconic Symbol ............................................................................................................................... 11-33
11.9.1.2 Theme ........................................................................................................................................... 11-33
11.9.1.3 Bus Shelter Type, Size & Capacity ............................................................................................... 11-33
11.9.1.4 Visibility ....................................................................................................................................... 11-33
11.9.1.5 Accessibility .................................................................................................................................. 11-34
11.9.1.6 Ambient Waiting Area Temperature in the Shelter ....................................................................... 11-34
11.9.1.7 Modularity and Moveability.......................................................................................................... 11-34
11.9.1.8 Structural Requirement ................................................................................................................. 11-34
11.9.1.9 Required Furniture and Amenities ................................................................................................ 11-34
11.9.1.10 Service Bay ............................................................................................................................... 11-34
11.9.1.11 Materials ................................................................................................................................... 11-35
11.9.1.12 Control Switches ....................................................................................................................... 11-35
11.9.1.13 Advertisement at the Shelter ..................................................................................................... 11-35
11.9.1.14 Provision of Using Intelligent Transport Systems for Passenger Information Purposes .......... 11-35
11.9.1.15 Environmentally Friendly ......................................................................................................... 11-35
11.9.1.16 General Provisions in Bus Shelter Design ................................................................................ 11-35
11.9.1.17 Owner and Authorities Concerned Applicable Laws and Regulations ..................................... 11-35
11.9.1.18 Approved Layout for Installation Dimensions .......................................................................... 11-35
11.9.1.19 Civil Works Related Material Quality as per Approved Specifications.................................... 11-35
Page 11-2
11.9.1.20 Electrical Works Related Material Quality ............................................................................... 11-36

11.9.1.21 Paint and Color ......................................................................................................................... 11-36
11.9.1.22 Shelter Graphics........................................................................................................................ 11-36
11.9.2 Material Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 11-37
11.9.3 Removal of Existing Bus Shelters ..................................................................................................... 11-40
Index ........................................................................................................................................................................ 11-41
Page 11-3
List of Tables
Table 11-1: Designations and titles for AASHTO and ASTM standards that apply to utility works ............................ 11-5
Table 11-2: Designations and titles for BS and BS EN standards that apply to utility works ....................................... 11-6
Table 11-3 Street furniture reference standards .......................................................................................................... 11-30
Table 11-4 Bus shelter material specifications ........................................................................................................... 11-37
Page 11-4
11 UTILITIES
This chapter applies to utility works including telephone, electrical, sewerage, central cooling, gas, and water services,
street furniture and bus shelter works. All works shall be as indicated on the Contract plans, Contract documents, as
specified herein and as directed by the Engineer.
11.1 Reference Standards and Codes

Standards and codes shall be as specified in these specifications, in the Contract documents, if any, and the following, in
their latest edition:
AAMA Architectural Aluminium Manufacturers Association;
AAMA 605.2:1992 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and
Panels;
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing;
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction;
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute;
ANSI American National Standards Institute;
ANSI H35.2-2009 American National Standard Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products, 2009;
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials;
BSI British Standards Institution;
BS EN European Standards;
DIN 975 Metric thread - Threaded rods;
DDA Disability Discrimination Act;
GB/T 6892-2006 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys extruded profiles for general engineering.
Table 11-1 and Table 11-2 presents American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO),
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), British (BS), and European (BS EN) Standards that are related to
materials for utility works. It also includes designations and titles.
Table 11-1: Designations and titles for AASHTO and ASTM standards that apply to utility works
AASHTO ASTM
Title
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded

ASTM A307 - 12
Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A153 / Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
A153M - 09 Hardware
ASTM A276 - 13a Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
ASTM A36 /
Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
A36M - 12
Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for
ASTM A193 /
High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special
A193M - 12b
Purpose Applications
ASTM A194 / Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for
A194M - 13 High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
ASTM A240 /
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
A240M - 13c
Applications
ASTM A320 / Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for
A320M - 11a Low-Temperature Service
Page 11-5
AASHTO ASTM
Title
ASTM A675 / Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special
A675M - 03(2009) Quality, Mechanical Properties
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
ASTM B209 - 10
Plate
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
ASTM B221 - 13
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
Table 11-2: Designations and titles for BS and BS EN standards that apply to utility works
BS BS EN
Title
BS 3506:1969 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe for industrial uses
Metal hose assemblies. Guidance on the construction and use of

BS 6501-1:2004
corrugated hose assemblies
BS EN ISO Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
1461:2009 Specifications and test methods
BS EN Paints and varnishes. Powder organic coatings for hot dip galvanised
13438:2013 or sherardised steel products for construction purposes
FencesSpecification for powder coatings used as a plastics finish to
BS 1722-16:2009
components and mesh
BS EN 12206- Paints and varnishes. Coating of aluminium and aluminium alloys for
1:2004 architectural purposesCoatings prepared from coating powder
BS EN 755- Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and
2:2013 profilesMechanical properties
BS EN 755- Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and
9:2008 profilesProfiles, tolerances on dimensions and form
BS EN 12020- Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in alloys
2:2008 EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063Tolerances on dimensions and form
BS EN 3- Portable fire extinguishers - Characteristics, performance
7:2004+A1:2007 requirements and test methods
Portable fire extinguishers - Additional requirements to EN 3-7 for the
construction, resistance to pressure and mechanical tests for
BS EN 3-8:2006
extinguishers with a maximum allowable pressure equal to or lower
than 30 bar
BS 1377-9:1990 Methods for test for soils for civil engineering purposesIn-situ tests
BS EN 206:2013 Concrete. Specification, performance, production and conformity
BS 8500- Concrete. Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1Method of

1:2006+A1:2012 specifying and guidance for the specifier
BS 8500- Concrete. Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-
2:2006+A1:2012 1Specification for constituent materials and concrete
BS Steel for the reinforcement of concrete. Weldable reinforcing steel.
4449:2005+A2:2009 Bar, coil and decoiled product. Specification
Scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel reinforcement
BS 8666:2005
for concrete. Specification
Page 11-6
11.2 Telephone Services

11.2.1 Description
The Contractor shall perform telephone works as may be included in a separate set of Contract Plans, specifications and
bills of quantities as provide by Etisalat or Du and/or their consultant. All the works to be carried out in the telecom
network shall comply with the design guidelines, general specifications and the standard Contract Plans of Etisalat or
Du and/or their consultant. The Contractor shall get all the shop drawings and method statements approved by engineer
& relevant authorities prior to the construction. The handing over & commissioning should be as per engineer’s
requirements defined in the contract documents & in compliance with relevant authority’s guidelines and under the
supervision of authority as appropriate.
Work under this section shall include the installation of PVC conduit, concrete encased contingency conduits,
reinforced concrete slab protection, pull boxes, joint boxes, service chambers and telephone booth foundations as shown
on the Contract Plans and included in the bills of quantities. In general, the rest of the telephone system wiring shall be
installed by Etisalat or Du. However, works may vary as per project requirements thus contractor to refer to Etisalat or
Du and/or their consultant specifications for works other than described in this section.
The Contractor must extend full co-operation by way of liaison and co-ordination with other Contractors who may be
operating within the site of the works engaged in essential work for the Department of Transportation or any other
developer or Government Authority.
Installation work shall be as shown on the Contract Plans, as specified herein and per the additional requirements of
Etisalat or Du. All trench and backfill methods and protection and demolition of existing plant shall be in accordance
with Etisalat or Du requirements for such works and shall be as approved by the Engineer.
11.2.2 Materials
11.2.2.1 PVC Telephone Conduit
All materials shall comply with all requirements as specified in Etisalat or Du and/or their consultant standard
specifications and relevant specifications stated herein.
All telephone conduit, bends, and couplings shall be made from material consisting of polyvinylchloride (PVC) in
accordance with BS 3506:1969 or as required by Etisalat or Du. Size of the conduit shall be as shown on the Contract
Plans.
11.2.2.2 Concrete
All concrete work shall meet the requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these standard specifications.
11.2.2.3 Service Chambers, Pull Boxes and Joint Boxes

Watertight service chambers, pull boxes and joint boxes shall have neoprene gasketed removable enclosure covers.
Joint boxes shall be made of corrosion resistant, high impact strength, fiberglass-reinforced polyester material and shall
have good stability in high ambient temperatures. Dimensions of the joint boxes shall be as shown on the Contract
Plans.
Service chambers and pull boxes shall be constructed of reinforced concrete.
Contractor shall furnish and install water tight manhole covers and frames where shown on the Contract Plans. The
covers and frames shall meet the requirements of Etisalat or Du.
11.2.3 Construction Requirements

11.2.3.1 General
Contractor shall include provisions for future routing of telephone cables and for the installation of telephone
instruments by Etisalat or Du in the telephone booths, all as shown on the Contract Plans per the requirements of
Etisalat or Du and as directed by the Engineer.
Where shown on the Contract Plans, empty PVC telephone conduit shall be provided for the telephone system of the
size indicated in the Contract Plans and/or in the bills of quantities. A schematic of the conduit system is as indicated
on the Contract Plans. Conduit shall be routed above grade or below grade as indicated on the Contract Plans and as
Page 11-7
Concrete encasement and service chambers, pull boxes and joint boxes shall be as specified and as required by Etisalat
or Du and/or the Engineer. Service chambers, pull boxes and joint boxes of adequate size shall be installed directly
adjacent to the locations where the telephone instruments are intended to be installed. All joints on the PVC telephone
conduits system shall be waterproof. Conduits shall be cleaned and tested by passing a cylindrical brush and iron test
mandrel through the conduit, in the presence of the Etisalat’s or Du’s representative.
Contractor shall cooperate with Etisalat or Du in installing the provisions as specified and make necessary adjustments
to suit their requirements.
Contractor, prior to Etisalat or Du commencement of their work, shall notify Etisalat or Du of his proposed schedule to
perform the work. Upon request from the Contractor, Etisalat or Du will locate any buried cable, duct or other
telephone facilities which may interfere with the Contractor’s operations.
Contractor shall report any known or suspected damage to any facilities immediately to the Engineer. This shall in no
way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the repair or replacement of facilities damaged by his operations.
In the event of damage to any telephone facilities by the Contractor’s operations, Etisalat or Du will require the
Contractor to restore the system or facilities to operation immediately. Repair or replacement shall meet with the
approval of Etisalat or Du. All damaged cables shall be replaced in complete spans and all splices shall be in locations
permitted in the original installation. No additional payment will be made for compliance with these requirements or
for any penalty or expenses incurred to effect repairs to damaged telephone facilities.
Etisalat or Du or their Contractor will construct telephone manholes and/or joint boxes where existing telephone house-
services pass beneath sidewalks. Etisalat's or Du’s work will be in progress during the Contract. Etisalat or Du will
complete the manholes and/or joint boxes. Contractor shall adjust the finished elevation of Etisalat's or Du’s manholes
and/or joint boxes if required and provide the frame and cover in accordance with the requirements for manholes and/or
joint boxes as specified herein.
11.2.3.2 PVC Telephone Conduit

Contractor shall install telephone conduit as shown on the Contract Plans and as included in the bills of quantities. In
general, PVC telephone conduit shall be provided to permit routing of telephone cables below grade as indicated on the
Contract Plans or where directed by Etisalat or Du. All telephone conduits shall be provided with removable, sealed
caps and pull ropes firmly connected to the inside of the caps, as approved by the Engineer and Etisalat or Du.
Buried conduit shall be installed in an 800 mm deep trench on 200 mm of sand covered with 200mm of sand and
backfilled with select materials. Trenching, surround and backfill shall meet the requirements of Articles 13.3.3.4 &
13.3.3.5 of Chapter 13, Landscaping and Irrigation.
All telephone conduits located under traffic and pedestrian pavement shall be concrete encased. Installation of concrete
encased PVC telephone conduit shall comply with the requirements of Article 13.3.3.20 of Chapter 13, Landscaping
and Irrigation.
A detectable warning tape shall be installed above the conduits. Tape shall meet the requirements of Section 12.19.2 of
Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage, except that the tape shall be labeled, “CAUTION – TELEPHONE CABLES
BELOW”. Buried marking tape shall be placed in the trenches above all conduits. Depth shall be 0.50 m below
finished grade.
Telephone conduit installed as contingency ducts for future services under pedestrian and traffic pavement shall meet
the requirements of Article 13.3.3.20 of Chapter 13, Landscaping and Irrigation.
11.2.3.3 PVC Telephone Conduit for Public Telephone Booths

Contractor shall furnish and install all PVC telephone conduits for installing telephone service cables between the
telephone jointing chamber and the public telephone booth foundation pull box, and for electric service cables between
Water and Electrical Department’s service turret or feeder pillar and the public telephone booth foundation pull box as
specified herein and as directed by the Engineer. Contractor shall install the telephone cable and the power cable in
these conduits as part of the conduit installation work. Etisalat or Du will supply to the Contractor, free of cost, all
telephone cables and power cables required for this work.
PVC telephone conduit and fittings shall comply with the requirements of Article 11.2.2.1.
Conduit shall be of the sizes shown on the Contract Plans, encased in Class C15 concrete, and shall be installed within
the telephone service reserve strip and/or along routes as approved by Etisalat or Du and the Engineer. Conduits shall
be installed at 600 mm minimum depth below the finished level. All trench and backfill for PVC telephone conduit
installations shall comply with the requirements of Article 11.2.3.2.
Page 11-8
11.2.3.4 Pull Box, Service Chambers and Joint Boxes

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing concrete pull boxes and service chambers and prefabricated plastic
joint boxes as shown on the Contract Plans and as directed by the Engineer. Pull boxes and service chambers may be
pre-cast of cast-in-situ of reinforced concrete. In general, smaller pull boxes are constructed by pre-casting with
reinforced concrete. Larger service chambers may be pre-cast or cast-in-situ, but generally the bases are pre-cast with
the tops cast-in-situ with the frame and cover to match final grade elevation. Concrete work shall meet the
requirements of Sections 4.3 and 4.4 of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these standard specifications.
Pre-cast pull box and service chamber bases and joint boxes shall be installed by excavating and placing the structure on
a prepared foundation consisting of at least 150 mm thick layer of 50 mm minus crushed gravel. Conduits shall be
installed by grouting their ends within the concrete structure openings using a high strength, non-shrink epoxy type
mortar or grout. Ducts into fabricated plastic joint boxes shall be connected using manufactured waterproof fittings, as
per the recommendations of the joint box or conduit manufacture, as approved by the Engineer. All work shall be done
neatly and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Backfilling shall be done after the upper concrete structure walls and top slab are cast and frame and cover installed
with concrete cured, meeting 21-day strength. Excavation and backfilling around the joint box, pull box or service
chamber shall meet the requirements of Articles 2.4.2.11, 2.5.2.4 and 2.5.3.2 of Chapter 2, Earthworks, for structural
excavation and backfill.
11.2.3.5 Protection of Existing Telephone Service

Contractor shall include all works required for the protection of existing telephone conduits, which are exposed by
manual excavation to determine locations of such conduits, as indicated on the Contract Plans or as specified in the
particular specifications and as described in the bills of quantities, as directed by the Engineer and as approved by
Etisalat or Du.
Warning tapes shall be installed during backfill as specified in Article 11.2.3.2.
Protection of exiting telephone service shall consist of exposing the conduits and concrete encasing them where located
under proposed pedestrian and traffic pavements. Concrete encasement shall be done in accordance with Article
11.2.3.2.
Where existing telephone ducts, not otherwise concrete encased, are located under temporary traffic pavement such as
detours or other main construction equipment crossings, they shall be protected with reinforced concrete protection
slabs in accordance with Article 13.3.3.20 of Chapter 13, Landscaping and Irrigation. Temporary reinforced concrete
protection slabs shall be removed after the detour is closed, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
11.2.3.6 Demolition of Existing Telephone Works

Contractor shall coordinate with Etisalat or Du to identify all existing telephone works to be removed and/or relocated.
For existing works that are to be relocated, but to remain in service, the relocation portion of the conduits and service
chambers, pull boxes and joint boxes shall be installed prior to removal of any of the existing services. After Etisalat or
Du completes the installation of the cabling, electrical components and the rerouted telephone works are restored to
service, the Contractor may demolish the existing works to be removed. Demolition shall be done in close coordination
with Etisalat or Du to avoid damage to any other existing telephone works that are to remain.
11.2.3.7 Public Telephone Booth Foundations

Foundations for the installation of Etisalat or Du public telephone booths shall be installed as shown on the Contract
Plans. Etisalat or Du will supply and install the public telephone booth on the foundations.
Foundations shall be constructed to the lines and dimensions as shown on the Contract Plans. Number of anchor bolts,
bolt locations, and anchor bolt dimensions shall be verified by the Contractor with Etisalat or Du, and approved by the
Engineer, prior to casting concrete. Projecting portion of the anchor bolts and the nut and washer shall be treated by
hot-dip galvanizing. Raceway or conduit for telephone and electrical cables shall consist of PVC conduit with a
minimum radius as shown on the Contract Plans.
All concrete work for the foundations shall be cast-in-place, reinforced Class C25/20 meeting the requirements of
Sections 4.3 and 4.4 of Chapter 4, Concrete Works. Foundations shall be allowed to cure a minimum of seven (7) days
before backfilling, installing cables or erecting the telephone booth.
All reinforcement steel bars shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
Page 11-9
Anchor bolts shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A307 - 12, Grade A. The anchor bolts shall be capable of
supporting the telephone booth loads maximum bending moment under worst case potential loading. Bolts and nuts
shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 / A153M - 09.
All foundations shall be furnished with an earth electrode complying with Section 10.11.10 and Article 10.11.10.9 of
Chapter 10, Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Plans.
Holes for foundations shall be excavated to the dimensions required for construction. All excavating and backfilling
shall comply with the requirements of Articles 2.4.2.11, 2.5.2.4 and 2.5.3.2 of Chapter 2, Earthworks.
PVC conduit, anchor bolts and ground rods shall be located securely in position by the use of templates during the
placing of foundation concrete.
PVC conduits of size as shown on the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer, encased in Class C15 concrete,
shall be provided by the Contractor for the telephone service line between the booth foundation and the nearest
telephone service chamber and between the booth foundation and the Water and Electrical Department’s service turret
or feeder pillar for permanent power supply to the booth.
11.3 Electrical Services

11.3.1 Description
Electrical services including the supply of all electrical appurtenances, electrical distribution cables, materials, labor,
tools, equipment and incidentals for the installation of lighting systems, sign lighting systems, underpass/short tunnel
lighting, ornamental lighting, under bridge lighting, cables for low voltage, (LV), 11 KV, 22KV, 33 KV, 132 KV and
220 KV electrical distribution systems, conduits, lighting controllers and appurtenant works shall be as indicated on the
Contract Plans, as specified in Chapter 10, Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works, and as directed by the Engineer.
The electrical distribution works shall be done as included in Section 10.14 of Chapter 10, Lighting and Electrical
Distribution Works. Remove and salvage of existing lighting system shall be in accordance with Section 10.13 of
Chapter 10. The MV power distribution network shall be done as per Section 10.16 of Chapter 10.
11.4 Sewerage Services

Contractor shall perform all sewerage works as may be required in a separate set of Contract Plans, Specifications and
Bills of Quantities as provided and prepared by the Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC) and/or their
designated consultant.
All the works to be carried out in the sewage network should comply with the design guidelines, general specifications
and the standard Contract Plans of ADSSC authority. The contractor should get all the shop drawings and method
statements approved by engineer & relevant authorities prior to the construction. The handing over & commissioning
should be as per engineer’s requirements defined in the contract documents & in compliance with relevant authority’s
guidelines and under the supervision of authority as appropriate.
In general, works under in this section include protection of existing sewerage services, installation of
contingency,sewer bypass ducts and sewerage relocation works as shown on the Contract Plans. However, works may
vary as per project requirements thus contractor to refer to Abu Dhabi Services Company (ADSSC) specifications for
works other than described in this section.
The Contractor shall provide the work required as per design to meet the requisite performance and specifications but
not limited to the works described in this section.
11.4.1 Protection of Services

Works required under this section include the following items:
a. Contractor shall perform all works required for the protection of existing sewer lines, which are exposed by
manual excavation to determine locations of such lines, as shown on the Contract Plans, as specified in the
Particular Specifications, as specified herein, as directed by the Engineer, and as approved by the Abu Dhabi
Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC).
Page 11-10
b. Contractor shall furnish and install concrete slab protection, concrete encased split PVC protection ducts and
concrete surround protection for existing sewers as shown on the Contract Plans, as specified herein, and in
accordance with the requirements of ADSSC.
c. For existing sanitary sewer lines under temporary or permanent pavement, the Contractor shall review the need
for protection. Existing sanitary sewer lines encountered with 2.5 m of backfill or greater above the crown of
pipe to finished pavement elevation do not require protection. Existing sanitary sewer lines encountered under
pavement with less than 2.5 m of backfill (cover) above the crown of pipe to finished pavement elevation require
a cast-in-situ concrete protection slab as indicated on the Contract Plans and as directed by the Engineer.
d. Contractor shall install new protection ducts of split PVC pipe sleeves with concrete surround where existing
house service sewers pass beneath sidewalks or at other locations shown on the Contract Plans or directed by the
Engineer.
e. Contractor shall install concrete surround protection on existing sewer lines as shown on the Contract Plans or
directed by the Engineer. Support shall be provided to prevent displacement of the sewer pipe during excavation
and concrete placement.
f. Dimensions of concrete protection slab, encasement and surround shall be as shown on the Contract Plans.
g. Temporary Protection of Existing Buried Pipelines
1. Temporary protection works shall consist of the same protection works required for permanent protection
works.
2. During the construction, the Contractor shall provide all temporary protection for existing buried pipelines as
may be required by his construction operations, as specified herein, as indicated in the specifications of all
utility agencies that own the pipelines, and as directed by the Engineer.
3. Crossing of the buried pipelines by trucks and vehicles shall be kept to a minimum and will be permitted only
at the approved locations. At the approved temporary crossing points, a minimum of 1.50 m depth earth
cover shall be placed as a protection layer, and temporary concrete barriers shall be provided.
h. The Contractor shall prepare shop Contract Plans for the temporary protection work and submit them to the
Engineer for his review and approval. The Contractor shall also obtain approval from the respective utility
agencies before commencing this work. The Contractor shall be liable for damages, if any, as mentioned in the
relevant clauses of the Specifications stated herein.
i. Grease Trap/Oil interceptor requirements shall comply with Section 12.14 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage.
11.4.1.2 Materials
All materials to be incorporated in the slab protection works shall be as shown on the Contract Plans, as specified herein
and as directed by the Engineer.
All materials shall comply with all requirements as specified in Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC)
standard specifications and relevant specifications stated herein.
Protection slabs shall be constructed of C25/20 concrete and shall be reinforced with welded wire fabric complying with
Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel, where shown on the Contract Plans. All concrete work shall comply with the
requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works.
Concrete encasement or surround for ducts and pipes shall be in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 4,
Concrete Works, composed of C25/20 concrete with a minimum thickness of 200 mm surrounding the duct or pipe or
as shown on the Contract Plans. Pipe materials for ducts shall comply with the applicable requirements of Section
12.1.3 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage, and/or Article 13.3.2.2 of Chapter 13, Landscaping and irrigation.
11.4.1.3 Construction Requirements

Contractor shall undertake all necessary investigations, trial trenches and/or excavations to establish the location of any
existing sewer lines that require protection. Contractor shall coordinate with the ADSSC to obtain all relevant as-built
information relating to the sewerage services within the project site before commencing any trial excavations.
Contractor shall report any known or suspected damage to any existing facilities immediately to the Engineer. This
shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the repair or replacement of facilities damaged by his
operations.
In the event of damage to any sewerage services by the Contractor’s operations, the ADSSC will require the Contractor
to restore the system or facilities to operation immediately. Repair or replacement shall meet with the approval of the
ADSSC. No additional payment will be made for compliance with these requirements or for any penalty or expenses
incurred to effect repairs to damaged sewerage services.
Page 11-11
For concrete slab protection for existing sanitary sewer lines, the work shall include, but not by way of limitation,
excavating all trench materials both wet and dry; removal and disposal of rubbish, existing pavements, driveways, brush
and timber, structures, and piping to be relocated or abandoned; tight sheeting, shoring, diking, well pointing, bailing
and dewatering as required; furnishing and placing approved safety equipment (portable trench boxes or sliding trench
shields, etc.) to protect personnel and the work; placement of a reinforced concrete slab over the top of the pipe in
accordance with details on the Contract Plans; backfilling and compaction of excavated areas to finish grade; restoring
utilities, shoulders, trees, shrubbery, fences, culverts; other work incidental to construction and other items disturbed by
construction operations.
Prior to installation of the cast-in-situ slab protection the overburden shall be excavated and removed to a depth above
the pipe as shown on the drawing or as approved by the Engineer. Excavation and concrete placement shall be done
either by manual labour or with equipment located not closer than 2 m from the outer edge of the existing sewerage
pipes.
Dimensions of the slab protection shall be as shown on the Contract Plans, and the slab shall extend a minimum of 2 m
each side of the existing sewerage pipes and 2 m each side of the proposed traffic pavement area. Slab shall be cast-in-
situ against the undisturbed soil.
All excavation, foundation preparation and backfill shall comply with the requirements of Sections 2.4 and 2.5 of
Chapter 2, Earthworks.
During excavation and backfill work, special care shall be taken to assure that all construction equipment used in the
hauling, spreading, and compacting process are confined to the area directly over the properly cured and approved
concrete slab protection. All construction equipment access across the sewerage pipes shall only be made over
carefully marked or flagged crossing locations with the widths to be directly centered over the concrete slab protection,
or over temporary slab protection that the Contractor may elect to install as a temporary access for construction
operations.
Warning tape shall be placed above any exposed pipes and above any concrete surround placed around existing pipes.
Warning tape shall be installed during backfill at a depth of 300 mm to 450 mm above the top of the pipe. Warning
tape shall meet the material requirements of Section 12.19.2 of Chapter 12, Stromwater Drainage, except that it shall be
appropriately labelled.
Concrete slab protection shall be removed upon removal of temporary and detour pavements, unless the temporary
pavement is to be replaced by permanent paving or unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Removal of temporary
concrete slab protection shall be done in a manner that does not disturb the underlying utility. Concrete slab shall be
excavated and broken-up into manageable pieces to be disposed of as approved by the Engineer.
Concrete encasement, using split ducts for existing house service sewer, shall be done per the requirements of Articles
13.3.2.23 and 13.3.3.20 of Chapter 13, Landscaping and Irrigation. Diameter of the split PVC pipe sleeve shall be 300
mm unless otherwise shown on the Contract Plans or approved by the Engineer.
11.4.2 Contingency Ducts

Contractor shall provide and install contingency sewer ducts for future sewers where under pedestrian and traffic
pavements, at the locations shown on the Contract Plans or as approved by the Engineer and as per Abu Dhabi
Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC) requirements and specifications. Flexible walled PVC and GRP ducts shall be
concrete encased. Reinforced concrete pipe ducts may be direct buried where depths of cover, bedding and class of
pipe meet the applicable requirements for installation under traffic pavements as described in the applicable clauses of
Article 12.1.4.5 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage, and as approved by the Engineer.
11.4.2.2 Materials
All materials to be incorporated in the contingency ducts shall be as indicated on the Contract Plans, as specified herein
Concrete and reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, and Chapter 5,
Reinforcing Steel, consisting of C25/20 concrete.
Materials for contingency sewer ducts shall comply with the following requirements,
Page 11-12
1. PVC pipes: Contractor shall conform to the applicable requirements of Article 12.1.3.7 of Chapter 12,
Stormwater Drainage.
2. Glass reinforced plastic pipes (GRP) for ducts: Article 12.1.3.3 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage.
3. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): Article 12.1.3.5 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage.

Dimensions of concrete encasement shall be as shown on the Contract Plans. Concrete encasement for PVC or GRP
contingency ducts for sewers larger than 450 mm diameter shall be reinforced as shown on the Contract Plans.
Installation of piping for ducts shall generally meet the requirements of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage. Installation
of reinforced concrete pipe for contingency sewer ducts shall meet the requirements of Chapter 12, and as shown on the
Contract Plans.
Installation of concrete encased pipe materials for contingency sewer ducts shall also meet the requirements of Article
13.3.3.20 of Chapter 13, Landscaping and irrigation.
All contingency ducts for sewers shall terminate in a reinforced concrete end wall with the end capped, as shown on the
Contract Plans and per the following:
1. Ends of contingency utility ducts shall terminate in a cast-in-situ cantilevered concrete retaining wall (duct end
wall) whose purpose is to help protect the roadway, sidewalk, curbs and other works over the ducts from damage
due to excavation to open-up the end of the ducts for utility placement at some future date where shown on the
Contract Plans.
2. All concrete work shall comply with the requirements in Chapter 4, Concrete Works. All exposed buried
concrete faces shall be protected with waterproofing sealants or membranes as required in Chapter 28,
Waterproofing.
3. End caps for the contingency utility ducts shall be commercially manufactured of materials similar to the
respective contingency utility duct pipe material and sized to match the belled joint end of the duct pipe, utilizing
a rubber gasketed seal, meeting the requirements as otherwise specified for pipe joints for the respective
contingency utility duct pipe material type. Each cap shall have a pulling handle and attachment for a wire
pulling rope where applicable for electrical and telephone ducts. Smaller PVC ducts (200 mm diameter and
smaller), as an option to the gasketed cap, may utilize a tight fitting PVC cap that can be inserted into the bell
end of a typical PVC bonded type pipe joint fitting which is sealed with a liberal application of silicone sealer.
All contingency utility duct pipe end caps shall be of quality suitable for long term buried conditions which
makes the duct water tight.
4. Each duct end wall shall be designed site specific by the Contractor and shown in plan and sections on the shop
Contract Plans, as otherwise approved by the Engineer.
5. Excavation, dewatering, construction and backfilling for duct end walls shall meet the applicable construction
requirements of Sections 2.4 and 2.5 of Chapter 2, Earthworks.
6. Top of the duct end wall shall be formed and finished to match the particular curb or top configuration as per
each site's requirements as shown on the Contract Plans and approved by the Engineer. Appropriate brass
marker plaques shall be installed in the top of the duct end wall on the centerline of the matching duct type,
immediately after troweling smooth the freshly placed concrete. Utility marker shall be pushed into the wet
concrete, on duct and end wall width centerlines, such that the marker is flush with the surface of the end wall.
Care shall be taken to remove any wet concrete from the surface of the utility marker.
7. Prior to backfilling, the duct end wall concrete shall be allowed to cure to 7-day concrete strength, the ducts
cleaned and the contingency utility duct pipe ends capped and sealed. After final approval by the Engineer, the
duct end wall may be backfilled with load bearing backfill material per the requirements of Article 2.5.2.2 of
11.4.3 Emergency Sewer Bypass Ducts and End Structures

Contractor shall install emergency sewer bypass ducts and end structures at locations shown on the Contract Plans and
as approved by the Engineer. Ducts will be used for direct connection of pressure, pumped, bypass sewerage pipelines
Page 11-13
and shall be constructed and installed as per materials and standards suitable for pressurized piping, as per applicable
requirements specified herein.
11.4.3.2 Materials
Materials shall comply with the following items:
1. C25/20 concrete and reinforcement meeting the applicable material requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works,
and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel, shall be used for duct encasement, end structures and thrust blocks. Blinding
concrete shall be C15/20 concrete.
2. Ductile iron frames and covers shall be medium duty covers meeting the requirements of Article 12.3.2.3 of
Chapter 12. Covers shall have cast-in-labelling similar to that shown on the Contract Plans for storm water
drainage catch basins and inlet structures to read in both English and Arabic: "Emergency Sewer Bypass Duct,
ADSSC".
3. Pipe used for emergency sewer bypass ducts shall meet the applicable requirements for PVC, GRP, HDPE or
steel pressure pipe in Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage. GRP pipe shall meet the additional requirements of
being suitable for 12 bar working pressure. All pipes shall be clearly marked with the specified pressure rating.
4. Joints on vertical pipe sections and pipe sections adjacent to thrust blocks shall be restrained type fittings or
otherwise manufactured as a single unit. All other joints shall be a push-fit type rubber gasket sealed fitting
system as recommended by the manufacturer for this application. All joint fittings and hardware shall be of
material type to meet the local environmental corrosion factors or otherwise fully protected by suitable coatings
as approved by the Engineer. Stubs and backing rings for bonded flange fittings at restrained pipe joints shall be
composed of ni-resist ductile iron. In addition all exposed metal parts shall also be coated with coal tar epoxy
coatings for complete corrosion resistance. All bolts, nuts, washers and other fastening hardware shall be
stainless steel in compliance with ASTM A276 - 13a Type 316. Connection flanges in the end chambers shall be
suitable for attachment by metric standard raised face flanges drilled in accordance with ISO 7005. End flange
shall be fitted with a ni-resist ductile iron cap, elastomeric seal, and stainless steel fastening hardware.
5. Spare fittings: Contractor shall provide additional fittings and adaptors with each end structure installed to
provide for the connections of future bypass and pump discharge lines. All fittings and adaptors shall have
flanged fittings, elastomeric gasket sealed, metric standard faced, drilled in accordance with ISO 7005. Fittings
shall include, for a single 600 mm diameter duct end structure, a 90° manifold such that three 300 mm diameter
pump discharge pipes can be connected to the single duct pipe. Pipe manifold shall be of size that permits
attachments to the duct flange, with a 90° bend such that the three pump discharge pipes, laying on the ground,
can be connected to the manifold. Each of the three 300 mm diameter manifold openings shall include a closure
plate, gaskets, hardware, and adaptor fittings for 200 mm diameter pipe to be connected to the 300 mm diameter
pipe flange on the manifold. Fittings shall include, for a double 600 mm diameter duct end structure, a 90°
manifold suitable for connecting both ducts in common to seven separate 300 mm diameter pump discharge
pipes. This fitting shall also include adaptors for 200 mm diameter pipe and end plates as otherwise specified for
a single duct pipe. Manifold shall be constructed from welded steel pipe, fully hot dipped galvanized and coated
both internally and externally with a two part coal tar epoxy. Manifold shall be hydraulically pressure tested to
16 bars at the manufacturers plant. Manifolds and reducer fittings shall be supplied complete, including all
flange closure plates, rubber gaskets, stainless steel bolts, nuts, washers, plugs, other necessary hardware and any
required tools (wrenches and spanners), all suitably packaged and crated for long term storage and delivered to
location as directed by the Engineer.

Emergency sewer bypass ducts and end structures shall be installed as per the details on the Contract Plans, in
accordance to authority requirements, as approved by the Engineer and as follows:
1. Prior to installation of the emergency sewer bypass ducts, the Contractor shall prepare and submit shop Contract
Plans of each duct installation for approval. Shop Contract Plans shall be drawn to the scale approved by the
Engineer, showing each installation in plan and section, to include locations; depths; locations of nearby existing
and proposed utilities; installation details; end structure details; all material manufacturer's literature, installation
and jointing recommendations/details; material certifications; guarantees; and any other items required by the
Engineer.
2. All excavation, foundation preparation and backfill shall comply with the requirements of Sections 2.4 and 2.5 of
Page 11-14
3. All concrete work shall comply with the dimensions and details as indicated on the Contract Plans, meeting the
construction requirements of Chapters 4, Concrete Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
4. Emergency sewer bypass duct shall be laid on a uniform grade (one end lower than the other such that it can be
easily pumped dry after use) as per the applicable requirements of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage. All
jointing shall be done as per the pipe and joint fitting manufacturer’s and appropriate standard specification
organization recommendations. Pipe installation shall meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 12.
5. End structures shall be installed as shown on the Contract Plans, meeting the applicable requirements of Chapter
12, Stromwater Drainage. Exterior and interior surfaces of end structures shall be protected by waterproofing
membranes or liners meeting the applicable requirements of Chapter 12.
6. All ducts shall be pressure and leakage tested after installation. Pressure and leakage test shall be carried out
simultaneously. Prior to testing, all ducts shall have been backfilled, with concrete encasement and thrust blocks
having reached the required 7-day strength. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer and
signed by the Contractor who will present the test report in a format approved by the Engineer. Testing shall be
done in accordance with the applicable clauses of Section 12.1.5 of Chapter 12, Stromwater Drainage.
7. After successful testing is completed all testing plugs and apparatus shall be removed, the duct drained of all
standing water, cleaned as necessary and the end fittings capped and sealed, as per the approval of the Engineer.
11.4.4 Service Chambers

At locations where existing house service sewers pass beneath sidewalks, the Contractor shall install reinforced
concrete service chambers where shown on the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
General service chambers may also be used at other locations for other purposes when directed by the Engineer.
Dimensions of the general service chamber shall be as indicated on the Contract Plans, but may be subject to
modification based on the site conditions at the direction of the Engineer. All general service chambers shall be
designed site specific by the Contractor and shown in plan and sections on shop Contract Plans for approval by the
Engineer.
11.4.4.2 Materials
General service chambers shall be cast-in-situ using C25/20 reinforced concrete in accordance with Chapter 4, Concrete
Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
Ductile Iron frames and covers shall be medium duty covers meeting the requirements of Article 12.3.2.3 of Chapter 12,
Stormwater Drainage. Covers shall have cast-in-labelling similar to that shown on the Contract Plans.

All concrete work shall comply with the dimensions and details as shown on the Contract Plans and as specified in
Chapter 4, Concrete Works. Tops of the covers of service chambers shall match final grade levels in paved areas, and
shall be placed 100 mm above final grade level in non-paved areas.
All unused ducts, conduits or sleeves at concrete service chambers shall be sealed with removable watertight caps as
Installation of ductile iron frames and covers shall comply with Article 12.3.2.3 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage.
11.4.5 Relocation Works

The relocation works of existing sewerage network shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Abu
Dhabi Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC) and shall be constructed and installed as per materials and standards
suitable as per applicable requirements specified herein.
Page 11-15
At locations where existing sewerage section required diversion or relocation, the Contractor shall install sewerage lines
as shown on the Contract Plan or as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain the flow of all existing and/or newly constructed pipes to be connected in the system as a
subsidiary obligation for the items included in the Bills of Quantities or as per Contract Plans and instructed by
Engineer.
The contractor should prepare all the shop drawings and method statements approved by engineer & relevant authorities
prior to the construction. The handing over & commissioning should be as per engineer’s requirements defined in the
contract documents & in compliance with relevant authority’s guidelines and under the supervision of authority as
appropriate.
11.4.5.2 Materials
Only new materials and equipment shall be used unless otherwise specified.
Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing line, unless specified otherwise.
All materials for inclusion in the permanent works must conform to the specification in all respects and shall duly
approved for the specific application on prescribed forms. However, materials having equal or higher performance
properties may be considered for approval provided the suppliers/manufacturers establish beyond doubt that the
proposed materials are of the same or superior quality.

The relocation works under in this section are consists of the detailed design, construction and commissioning of the
sewage network, after suitably construction of relocated sewer line connection to existing sewer network, demolition /
abandoning of existing sewer line in coordination with ADSSC/or its consultant, and temporary disposal of existing
sewage during the construction stage as shown on Contract Plans, specified in contract and as per engineers instruction.
1. The Contractor shall comply with Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC) requirements as per scope
shown on Contract Plans and as specified herein.
2. The Contractor shall observe the impact of relocating existing sewer network and provide schedule and
construction methodology minimize or eliminate disruption in service in coordination with ADSSC and as per
engineer’s approval.
3. Contractor shall perform all works required for the relocation of existing sewer lines as shown on the Contract
Plans, as specified in the Particular Specifications, as specified herein, as directed by the Engineer, and as
approved by the Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC).
4. The Contractor shall make all the necessary arrangements for any land required for working areas outside the
right of way, including payment when necessary, and the Employer does not accept any liability in connection
with such land. This includes land for compounds, temporary roads, detours, diversions and stock piling
materials.
5. The Contractor shall give three weeks notice to the owner/occupier before entering private lands and the
Contractor shall not enter on to those lands until given permission by the Engineer.
6. The Contractor shall make his own arrangement with the owners of the services and with other persons
interested, for any diversions, temporary stoppages and reinstatements, and he shall allow in his programme for
all such arrangements.
7. If any underground service is encountered unexpectedly, excavation shall cease, and the Engineer's
Representative shall be notified immediately. Emergency work, as necessary, should be put in hand without
delay and without prejudice to the indemnity of the Employer
8. The Contractor shall give notice, in writing, to the Engineer and to the appropriate service company of all
damages to existing services caused by him or by any Sub-Contractor in the course of the Works. He shall be
held responsible for any such damage and shall immediately have such damage made good at his own expense
and shall relieve the Employer of all claims in respect of any loss or interruption involved.
9. All existing sewers, culverts, water courses and drains of every kind and condition that have been altered,
extended or otherwise interfered with either directly or indirectly by the work, or that may by leakage, silting,
stopping of free flow or otherwise interfere with or delay the execution of the work, shall be made good, cleaned,
Page 11-16
placed in working order, supported, maintained, and protected and the Contractor shall provide everything
necessary for efficiently dealing with, protecting, pumping or removing, as the case may be, all water, sewage, or
spoil there from.
10. During the execution of the Works the Contractor shall maintain flows in pipelines and at pumping stations or
alternatively provide adequate means of diverting the flows or overpumping of the flows to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
11. Where required, the Contractor shall be responsible, prior to removal of pipes, for the disconnection of all
services and clearance from Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC) and all Service Authorities.
12. All pipes to be removed and either salvaged or relaid shall be carefully removed as per Engineers instructions
and every precaution taken to avoid breaking or damaging the pipe. The pipes shall be stored when necessary so
that there will be no loss or damage before relaying. The Contractor will be required to replace sections lost from
storage or damage by negligence or by the use of improper methods in their removal.
11.5 Central Cooling

Contractor shall perform all central cooling works as may be required per a separate set of Contract Plans,
Specifications and Bills of Quantities as provided by Tabreed Abu Dhabi and/or their consultant.
All the works to be carried out in the central cooling works should comply with the design guidelines, general
specifications and the standard Contract Plans of Tabreed Abu Dhabi and/or their consultant. The contractor should get
all the shop drawings and method statements approved by engineer & relevant authorities prior to the construction. The
handing over & commissioning should be as per engineer’s requirements defined in the contract documents & in
compliance with relevant authority’s guidelines and under the supervision of authority as appropriate.
In general, works under in this section include the providing of protection of existing cooling lines, provisions for
contingency ducts and relocation works where shown on the Contract Plans or directed by the Engineer. However,
works may vary as per project requirements thus contractor to refer to Tabreed Abu Dhabi and/or their consultant
specifications for works other than described in this section.

Contractor shall provide and install concrete slab protection over existing central cooling lines under all permanent and
temporary traffic pavement as shown on the Contract Plans, and as directed by the Engineer, and in accordance with the
requirements of the service provider.
Protection of exiting central cooling lines shall consist of extending protection slabs at roadway crossings and/or
furnishing and installing concrete protection slabs at new locations as indicated on the Contract Plans or as directed by
the Engineer.
11.5.1.2 Materials
All materials shall comply with all requirements as specified in Tabreed Abu Dhabi and/or their consultant standard
All materials to be incorporated in the slab protection works shall be as shown on the Contract Plans and as specified
herein.
Protection slabs shall be constructed of reinforced C25/20 concrete. Reinforcement and concrete materials shall comply
with Chapter 4, Concrete Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
Contractor shall prepare and submit shop Contract Plans for the Engineers approval of all concrete protection slabs.
Shop Contract Plans shall provide locations, dimensions and structural reinforcement details for slabs for each site
condition as to service size, soil conditions and trenching and backfill specifics.
Page 11-17
Warning tape and utility markers shall meet the requirements of Section 12.19.2 of Chapter 12, Stromwater Drainage,
except that the tape and markers shall be labelled appropriately with the name of the central cooling service as approved
by the Engineer and/or service provider.

Contractor shall perform all works required for the protection of existing central cooling lines, which are shown on
Contract Plans and as otherwise located by the Contractor within the project limits.
existing gas services that require protection. Contractor shall coordinate with the service provider to obtain all relevant
as-built information relating to the gas services within the project site before commencing any trial excavations, and if
necessary shall request the service provider to locate any lines, duct or other central cooling facilities which may
interfere with the Contractor’s operations.
operations.
In the event of damage to any central cooling facilities by the Contractor’s operations, the service provider will require
the Contractor to restore the system or facilities to operation immediately. Repair or replacement shall meet with the
approval of the service provider. No additional payment will be made for compliance with these requirements or for
any penalty or expenses incurred to effect repairs to damaged central cooling facilities.
Protective concrete slabs shall be located directly above and centred on the pipe.
Slab widths shall be dependent on the diameter of the pipe to be protected and the dimensions of concrete protection
slab shall be as indicated on the Contract Plans. Where not shown on the Contract Plans, the reinforced concrete
protection slab should be located within 150 mm to 300 mm above the top of the central cooling service utility, with a
width and reinforcement design sufficient to carry the full weight of the maximum probably dead and live loads where
at least 300 mm width on each side of the utility trench will be bearing on undisturbed soil and assuming no support on
the central section of the protection slab.
Where required for protection of existing cooling services, the utility line shall be carefully exposed using hand
excavation to expose its top surface. Trenching shall be kept as narrow as possible. Exposed utility line shall be
backfilled and compacted with pipe/duct surround material and to a depth, as approved by the Engineer and accepted by
the service provider. All excavation and backfill shall be in accordance with Sections 2.4 and 2.5 of Chapter 2,
Earthworks. Backfill shall be brought up to a depth of between 150 to 300 mm above the top of the service line and the
reinforced concrete protection slab cast in place on top of a compacted and prepared foundation. Concrete work shall
meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
Warning tapes shall be installed during backfill above the top of all concrete protection slabs and any exposed central
cooling utility lines and utility location markers installed, as otherwise specified.
a. Temporary Protection of Existing Buried Pipelines

works, except that temporary concrete protection slabs shall be excavated and removed upon removal of the
temporary traffic crossings.
2. General. During the construction, the Contractor shall provide all temporary protection for existing buried
pipelines as may be required by his construction operations, as specified herein, as indicated in the
specifications of all utility agencies that own the pipelines, and as directed by the Engineer.
Crossing of the buried pipelines by trucks and vehicles shall be kept to a minimum and will be permitted only at the
approved locations. At the approved temporary crossing points, a minimum of 1.50 m depth earth cover shall be placed
as a protection layer, and temporary concrete barriers shall be provided.
The Contractor shall prepare shop Contract Plans for the temporary protection work and submit them to the Engineer
for his review and approval. The Contractor shall also obtain approval from the respective utility agencies before
commencing this work. The Contractor shall be liable for damages, if any, as mentioned in the relevant clauses of the
Specifications stated herein.
Page 11-18

This work covers the furnishing and installation of concrete encased contingency ducts for central cooling services,
where shown on the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
11.5.2.2 Materials
Concrete shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.3 of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, for C25/20 concrete.
Materials for contingency central cooling ducts shall comply with the following requirements,
1. PVC pipes: Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Article 12.1.3.7 of Chapter 12,
Stormwater Drainage.
2. Glass reinforced plastic pipes (GRP) for ducts: Article 12.1.3.3 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage.
3. Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP): Article 12.1.3.5 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage.

Concrete encased ducts below proposed roads and highways shall be installed in accordance with the service provider
requirements, as shown on the Contract Plans and as approved by the Engineer.
All excavation, foundation preparation and backfill shall comply with the requirements of Sections 2.4 and 2.5 of Chapter
2, Earthworks.
All concrete work shall comply with the dimensions and details as shown on the Contract Plans and as required in
Chapter 4, Concrete Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
Concrete encased ducts shall be installed as described in Articles 13.3.2.23 and 13.3.3.20 of Chapter 13, Landscaping and
Irrigation. All ducts 450 mm diameter and larger shall have duct end walls meeting the requirements of Article 11.4.2.3.
All contingency ducts installed for future services shall be marked with brass marker plaques as described in Article
11.5.3 Service Chambers and Vaults

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing concrete service chambers and vaults, with ductile iron frames and
covers, for central cooling services as indicated in the Contract Plans or at locations required by site conditions, and as
11.5.3.2 Materials
All materials shall meet the requirements of Article 11.4.4.2 as applicable.

Construction of service chambers and vaults for central cooling services shall meet the applicable requirements of
Section 10.12.6 of Chapter 10, Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works, and Article 11.4.4.3.
All concrete work shall comply with the dimensions and details as shown on the Contract Plans. The tops of the covers
of service chambers shall match final grade levels in paved areas, and shall be placed 100 mm above final grade level in
non-paved areas.
All unused ducts, conduits or sleeves at concrete service chambers shall be capped in a watertight manner.
Page 11-19

The relocation works of existing district cooling network shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of
Tabreed Abu Dhabi and/or their consultant and shall be constructed and installed as per materials and standards suitable
as per applicable requirements specified herein.
At locations where existing district cooling pipes section required diversion or relocation, the Contractor shall install
new district cooling pipes as shown on the Contract Plan or as directed by the Engineer.
appropriate.
11.5.4.2 Materials
All materials to be supplied and installed in accordance with this specification shall be subject to requirements and
specifications of Tabreed Abu Dhabi and/or their consultant.

The relocation works under in this section are consists of the detailed design, construction and commissioning of the
district cooling section after suitably construction of relocated district cooling line connection to existing district cooling
network, demolition / abandoning of existing district cooling pipes in coordination with Tabreed Abu Dhabi and/or their
consultant, and disposal of existing district cooling pipes during the construction stage as shown on Contract Plans,
specified in contract and as per engineers instruction.
1. The Contractor shall comply with Tabreed Abu Dhabi and/or their consultant requirements as per scope shown
on Contract Plans and as specified herein.
2. The Contractor shall observe the impact of relocating existing district cooling pipes and provide schedule and
construction methodology minimize or eliminate disruption in service in coordination with Tabreed Abu Dhabi
and/or their consultant and as per engineer’s approval.
3. Contractor shall perform all works required for the relocation of existing district cooling pipes as shown on the
Contract Plans, as specified in the Particular Specifications, as specified herein, as directed by the Engineer, and
as approved by the Tabreed Abu Dhabi and/or their consultant.
materials.
services and clearance from Tabreed Abu Dhabi and/or their consultant and all Service Authorities.
Page 11-20
11.6 Gas Services

Contractor shall perform all works as may be required by a separate set of Contract Plans, Specifications and Bills of
Quantities as provided by Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their subsidiary company
and/or consultant.
All the works to be carried out in the gas networks should comply with the design guidelines, general specifications and
the standard Contract Plans of Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their subsidiary
company and/or consultant. The contractor should get all the shop drawings and method statements approved by
engineer & relevant authorities prior to the construction. The handing over & commissioning should be as per
engineer’s requirements defined in the contract documents & in compliance with relevant authority’s guidelines and
under the supervision of authority as appropriate.
In general, works under in this section provides for works for the protection of existing gas and petroleum lines,
provision of contingency ducts for future gas lines and relocation works as shown on the Contract Plans or directed by
the Engineer. However, works may vary as per project requirements thus contractor to refer to Abu Dhabi National Oil
Company (ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their subsidiary company and/or consultant specifications for works other
than described in this section.

The Contractor shall provide and install reinforced concrete slab protection over existing gas lines under all permanent
and temporary traffic pavement as shown on the Contract Plans, and as directed by the Engineer and in accordance with
the requirements of Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their subsidiary company and/or
consultant company as appropriate.
Protection of exiting gas lines shall consist of extending protection slabs at roadway crossings and/or furnishing and
installing concrete protection slabs at new locations as shown on the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Dimensions of concrete protection slab, encasement and surround shall be as indicated on the Contract Plans. In
addition, the Contractor shall follow all related documents of ADNOC, including but not limited to the following items:
1. Design basis memorandum
2. Construction standards and specifications
3. Material standards and specifications
4. Health, safety and environment
11.6.1.2 Materials
All materials shall comply with all requirements as specified in Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC),Takreer,
Dolphin or their subsidiary company and/or consultant standard specifications and relevant specifications stated herein.
herein.
with the requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
Contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings for the Engineers approval of all concrete protection slabs. Shop
drawings shall provide locations, dimensions and structural reinforcement details for slabs for each site condition as to
service size, soil conditions and trenching and backfill specifics.
Page 11-21
Warning tape and utility markers shall meet the requirements of Section 12.19.2 of Chapter 12, Stromwater Drainage,
except that the tape and markers shall be labelled appropriately with the name of the natural gas service as approved by
the Engineer and/or service provider.

Contractor shall perform all works required for the protection of existing gas lines, which are shown on the Contract
Plans and as otherwise located by the Contractor within the project limits.
as-built information relating to the gas services within the project site before commencing any trial excavations, and if
necessary shall request the service provider to locate any lines, duct or other gas facilities which may interfere with the
Contractor’s operations.
operations.
In the event of damage to any gas distribution facilities by the Contractor’s operations, the service provider will require
the Contractor to restore the system or facilities to operation immediately. Repair or replacement shall meet with the
Protective concrete slabs shall be located directly above and centred over the utility line.
Slab widths shall be dependent on the diameter of the utility line to be protected and the dimensions of concrete
protection slab shall be as indicated on the Contract Plans. Where not shown on the Contract Plans, the reinforced
concrete protection slab should be located within 150 mm to 300 mm above the top of the gas utility, with a width and
reinforcement design sufficient to carry the full weight of the maximum probably dead and live loads where at least 300
mm width on each side of the utility trench will be bearing on undisturbed soil and assuming no support on the central
section of the protection slab.
Where required for protection of existing gas services, the utility line shall be carefully exposed using hand excavation
to expose its top surface. Trenching shall be kept as narrow as possible. Exposed utility line shall be backfilled and
compacted with pipe/duct surround material and to a depth, as approved by the Engineer and accepted by the service
provider. All excavation and backfill shall be in accordance with Sections 2.4 and 2.5 of Chapter 2, Earthworks.
Backfill shall be brought up to a depth of between 150 to 300 mm above the top of the service line and the reinforced
concrete protection slab cast in place on top of a compacted and prepared foundation. Concrete work shall meet the
applicable requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
Warning tapes shall be installed during backfill above the top of all concrete protection slabs and any exposed central
cooling utility lines and utility location markers installed, as otherwise specified.

Page 11-22

This work covers the furnishing and installation of concrete encased contingency ducts for gas distribution and supply
services, where shown on the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
11.6.2.2 Materials
and as approved by the Engineer.
Concrete shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, for C25/20 concrete.
Materials for contingency gas ducts shall comply with the following requirements,
1. PVC pipes: Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Article 12.1.3.7 of Chapter 12, Stromwater
Drainage.
2. Glass reinforced plastic pipes (GRP) for ducts: Article 12.1.3.3 of Chapter 12, Stromwater Drainage.
3. Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP): Article 12.1.3.5 of Chapter 12, Stromwater Drainage.

All excavation, foundation preparation and backfill shall comply with the requirements of Sections 2.4 and 2.5 of Chapter
2, Earthworks.
Concrete encased ducts shall be installed as described in Article 13.3.3.20 of Chapter 13, Landscaping and Irrigation. All
ducts 450 mm diameter and larger shall have duct end walls meeting the requirements of Article 11.4.2.3. All
contingency ducts installed for future services shall be marked with brass marker plaques as described in Article 13.3.2.6
of Chapter 13, Landscaping and Irrigation.

covers, for gas services as indicated in the Contract Plans or at locations required by site conditions and as directed by
the Engineer.
11.6.3.2 Materials

Construction of service chambers and vaults for gas services shall meet the applicable requirements of Section 10.12.6
of Chapter 10, Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works, and Article 11.4.4.3.
All concrete work shall comply with the dimensions and details as shown on the Contract Plans. Tops of the covers of
service chambers shall match final grade levels in paved areas, and shall be placed 100 mm above final grade level in
non-paved areas.
Page 11-23

The relocation works of gas network shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Abu Dhabi National Oil
Company (ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their subsidiary company and/or consultant and shall be constructed and
installed as per materials and standards suitable as per applicable requirements specified herein.
At locations where existing gas pipes section required diversion or relocation, the Contractor shall install new gas pipes
as shown on the Contract Plan or as directed by the Engineer.
appropriate.
11.6.4.2 Materials
All materials to be supplied and installed in accordance with this specification shall be subject to requirements and
specifications of Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their subsidiary company and/or
consultant.

The relocation works under in this section are consists of the detailed design, construction and commissioning of the gas
section after suitably construction of relocated gas line connection to existing gas network, demolition / abandoning of
existing gas pipes in coordination with Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their
subsidiary company and/or consultant., and temporary disposal of existing gas pipes during the construction stage as
shown on Contract Plans, specified in contract and as per engineers instruction.`
1. The Contractor shall comply with Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their
subsidiary company and/or consultant requirements as per scope shown on Contract Plans and as specified
herein.
2. The Contractor shall observe the impact of relocating existing gas pipes and provide schedule and construction
methodology minimize or eliminate disruption in service in coordination with Abu Dhabi National Oil Company
(ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their subsidiary company and/or consultant and as per engineer’s approval.
3. Contractor shall perform all works required for the relocation of existing gas pipes as shown on the Contract
Plans, as specified in the Particular Specifications, as specified herein, as directed by the Engineer, and as
approved by the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their subsidiary company
and/or consultant.
materials.
Page 11-24
services and clearance from Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC),Takreer, Dolphin or their subsidiary
company and/or consultant and all Service Authorities.
11.7 Water Services

Contractor shall perform all potable water works as may be required in a separate set of Contract Plans, Specifications
and Bills of Quantities provided and prepared by Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) or its
subsidiary company and/or consultant.
All the works to be carried out in potable water works should comply with the design guidelines, general specifications
and the standard Contract Plans Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) or its subsidiary company
and/or consultant. The contractor should get all the shop drawings and method statements approved by engineer &
relevant authorities prior to the construction. The handing over & commissioning should be as per engineer’s
requirements defined in the contract documents & in compliance with relevant authority’s guidelines and under the
supervision of authority as appropriate.
In general, works under in this section include the installation of protection for existing water services, the installation
of contingency ducts and relocation works when shown on the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer. However,
works may vary as per project requirements thus contractor to refer to Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority
(ADWEA) or its subsidiary company and/or consultant specifications for works other than described in this section.

Contractor shall provide and install concrete slab protection over existing water lines under all permanent and
temporary traffic pavement as shown on the Contract Plans, as directed by the Engineer and in accordance with the
requirements of the Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA).
11.7.1.2 Materials
All materials shall comply with all requirements as specified in Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA).
and/or consultant standard specifications and relevant specifications stated herein.
herein.
with Chapter 4, Concrete Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
Contractor shall prepare and submit shop Contract Plans for the Engineers approval of all concrete protection slabs.
Shop Contract Plans shall provide locations, dimensions and structural reinforcement details for slabs for each site
condition as to service size, soil conditions and trenching and backfill specifics.
Warning tape and utility markers shall meet the requirements of Section 12.19.2 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage,
except that the tape and markers shall be labelled appropriately with the name of the water service as approved by the
Engineer and/or service provider.
Page 11-25

Contractor shall perform all works required for the protection of existing water lines, which are shown on the Contract
Plans and as otherwise located by the Contractor within the project limits.
as-built information relating to the water services within the project site before commencing any trial excavations, and
if necessary shall request the service provider to locate any lines, duct or other utility facilities which may interfere with
the Contractor’s operations.
operations.
In the event of damage to any water facilities by the Contractor’s operations, the service provider will require the
Contractor to restore the system or facilities to operation immediately. Repair or replacement shall meet with the
Protective concrete slabs shall be located directly above and centred over the utility line.
Slab widths shall be dependent on the diameter of the utility line to be protected and the dimensions of concrete
protection slab shall be as indicated on the Contract Plans. Where not shown on the Contract Plans, the reinforced
concrete protection slab should be located within 150 mm to 300 mm above the top of the gas utility, with a width and
reinforcement design sufficient to carry the full weight of the maximum probably dead and live loads where at least 300
mm width on each side of the utility trench will be bearing on undisturbed soil and assuming no support on the central
section of the protection slab.
Where required for protection of existing water services, the utility line shall be carefully exposed using hand
excavation to expose its top surface. Trenching shall be kept as narrow as possible. Exposed utility line shall be
backfilled and compacted with pipe/duct surround material and to a depth, as approved by the Engineer and accepted by
the service provider. All excavation and backfill shall be in accordance with Sections 2.4 and 2.5 of Chapter 2,
Earthworks. Backfill shall be brought up to a depth of between 150 to 300 mm above the top of the service line and the
reinforced concrete protection slab cast in place on top of a compacted and prepared foundation. Concrete work shall
meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
Warning tapes shall be installed during backfill above the top of all concrete protection slabs and any exposed water
lines and utility location markers installed, as otherwise specified.


This work covers the furnishing and installation of concrete encased contingency ducts for water distribution and supply
services, where shown on the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Page 11-26
11.7.2.2 Materials
Materials for contingency water ducts shall comply with the following requirements,
1. PVC Pipes, Glass Reinforced Plastic Mortar Pipe and Fittings (GRP or RPMP), Reinforced Thermosetting Resin
Pipe (RTRP) and Fittings, GRP pipe, Concrete Pipe and Fittings, and Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP), shall
meet the requirements of Section 12.1.3 of Chapter 12, Stormwater Drainage.
2. Concrete for duct encasement shall be C25/20 complying with the applicable requirements of Chapter 4,
Concrete Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.

Concrete encased ducts shall be installed as described in Article 13.3.3.20 of Chapter 13, Landscaping and Irrigation.
All ducts 450 mm diameter and larger shall have duct end walls meeting the requirements of Article 11.4.2.3. All
contingency ducts installed for future services shall be marked with brass marker plaques as described in Article

covers, for water services as indicated in the Contract Plans or at locations required by site conditions and as directed by
the Engineer.
11.7.3.2 Materials

Construction of service chambers and vaults for water services shall meet the applicable requirements of Section
10.12.6 of Chapter 10, Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works, and Article 11.4.4.3.
All concrete work shall comply with the dimensions and details as shown on the Contract Plans. Tops of the covers of
service chambers shall match final grade levels in paved areas, and shall be placed 100 mm above final grade level in
non-paved areas.

The relocation works of existing potable water network shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Abu
Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) and/or consultant and shall be constructed and installed as per
materials and standards suitable as per applicable requirements specified herein.
Page 11-27
At locations where existing potable water section required diversion or relocation, the Contractor shall install potable
water lines as shown on the Contract Plan or as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain the flow of all existing and/or newly constructed pipes to be connected in the system as a
subsidiary obligation for the items included in the Bills of Quantities or as per Contract Plans and instructed by
Engineer.
The contractor should prepare all the shop Contract Plans and method statements approved by engineer & relevant
authorities prior to the construction. The handing over & commissioning should be as per engineer’s requirements
defined in the contract documents & in compliance with relevant authority’s guidelines and under the supervision of
authority as appropriate.
11.7.4.2 Materials
1. The Potable Water Supply system is to be a nominally 12 bar rated system and shall be designed to a test
pressure of 18 bar.
2. All materials to be supplied and installed in accordance with this specification shall be subject to
ADWEA/ENGINEER approval.
3. Sample lengths of pipe, saddle straps, ferrules (combined with stop cocks), stop valves, angle valves, water
meters and fittings such as elbows, tees, reducers, Couplings, adaptor, connectors and metal flexible hose
assemblies, etc shall be trial assembled at site and subjected to pressure testing, all in the presence and to the
satisfaction of the ADWEA/ENGINEER.
4. Pipe material and fittings should be GRE/GRP, uPVC or DI in accordance with ADWEA specification. The
CONTRACTOR's complete detail design including calculations, detail drawings and samples shall be submitted
for ADWEA/ENGINEER approval.
5. Stop Valves and Stopcocks and Fittings shall be in accordance with ADWEA specification, latest edition.
Manufacturer's test certificates are required the test pressure shall be 16 bar.
6. All flexible hose assemblies shall comply with BS 6501-1:2004 and shall be of a type suitable of withstanding
the same pressure as the piping to which they are attached.
7. All flexible hose assemblies shall comply with BS 6501-1:2004 and shall be of a type suitable of withstanding
the same pressure as the piping to which they are attached.

1. Contractor shall perform all works required for the relocation of existing potable water lines as shown on the
Contract Plans, as specified in the Particular Specifications, as specified herein, as directed by the Engineer, and
as approved by the Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) and/or consultant.
2. The positions of all public and privately owned services shown on the Contract plans have been based on the
records of various utilities and Public Authorities and must be regarded as approximate. The Contractor must
verify this information and satisfy himself as to the exact nature and position of all such apparatus. The
Engineer does not guarantee the accuracy of the information given on the Contract plans and no warranty is
given or implied.
3. The Contractor shall take into account the current laws regarding the safety of service lines, together with any
amendment or additions thereto. The Contractor shall include in his tender for anything in these laws considered
to have a monetary value.
4. The cost of locating or verifying the location of existing pipelines, liaison with the various Service Authorities
and complying with the above shall be borne by the Contractor unless provided for elsewhere in the Contract.
5. Before opening the ground for any purpose, the Contractor must notify all concerned parties by issue of formal
"Notice of intent" and must obtain information by Formal Notice regarding the location of pipeline. The
complete responsibility for obtaining this information rests with the Contractor.
6. The Contractor shall take any and all measures reasonably required by any public or concerned Authority for the
support and full protection of all mains, pipes, cables and other apparatus during the progress of the Works, and
shall construct and provide to the satisfaction of the Authority concerned, all works necessary for the prevention
of damage or interruption of services.
Page 11-28
7. If in the execution of the Works, by reason of any subsidence caused by, or any act of neglect or default of the
Contractor, any damage to any apparatus or any interruption of, or delay to the provision of any service is
caused, the Contractor shall report it to the Engineer immediately and bear and pay the cost reasonably incurred
by the Authority concerned in making good such damage and shall make full compensation to the Authority for
any loss, sustained by reason of such interruption or delay.
8. The Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of the Works, afford facilities to properly accredited agents
of any Public or Utility Authority for access to all or any of their apparatus situated in or under the site, as may
be necessary for inspecting, reporting, maintaining, removing, renewing or altering such apparatus in connection
with the construction of the Works or any other purpose whatsoever.
9. The Contractor will be fully responsible for ensuring observance of the above regulations by his sub-contractors.
10. Where any utility or service works are to be constructed under a separate contract by the Employer within the
Site and concurrent with the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall cooperate with the other Contractor
and shall coordinate his construction operations to avoid interference with the other Contractor's operations.
11. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish all necessary shop drawings of the works required to complete the
adjustment of apparatus to finished grade or specified level. The drawings must be approved by the concerned
Utility Authorities and the Engineer prior to commencement of any work at the site. Measurement shall be for
each utility facility adjusted to finished grade or level approved by the Engineer.
12. The Contractor shall relocate certain utilities to service reservation areas as specified in the Contract. This work
may only include the construction of necessary protective housing (e.g. box culverts, slabs, concrete encased
sleeves etc.) in the service reservation areas for utility lines to be relocated. Or this work may include necessary
protective housing as described above and, in addition the relocation of specific utility lines to the service
reservation areas. In both cases the Contractor shall complete the necessary survey to establish the lines and
levels, prepare shop drawings and submit them to the Engineer for his review and approval. The Contractor
shall obtain approval from the concerned Authority before commencing this work.
13. Any public or private service for water, electricity, drainage, etc. affected by the Works shall not be interrupted
without the written permission of the Engineer. Such permission will be withheld until suitable approved
permanent or temporary alternative services have been provided by the Contractor or by the owner of the utility
or his agents.
11.8 Street Furniture

11.8.1 Description
Street furniture shall be as shown on the Contract Plans, as specified herein and/or in the Particular Specifications and
as approved by the Engineer. Work for the respective Items of street furniture shall include all materials, labour, tools,
equipment and appurtenances to complete the furnishing and installing each Item of street furniture as located and
detailed on the Contract Plans, and as approved by the Engineer.
Street furniture shall be manufactured so as to facilitate erection and future maintenance. Design and manufacture of all
equipment shall ensure satisfactory operation under local climatic conditions. All street furniture shall be fabricated as
indicated on the Contract Plans, or as recommended by the manufacturer.
All proposed manufacturers or suppliers shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, and shall be capable of
supplying all or part of the street furniture in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and the Contract
Plans. Selected manufacturer shall submit for review and approval by the Engineer, a complete list of equipment and
materials that are proposed for use in the project. List shall be accompanied by descriptive literature, technical details
and Contract Plans sufficient to fully describe and explain the proposed street furniture. Appropriate foundation design
shop Contract Plans shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted for approval by the Engineer.
Street furniture shall include, but not be limited to the following items:
1. Benches
2. Trash receptacles
3. Sun shelters
4. Bollards
5. Tree grates
6. Sidwalk shades
7. Playground equipment
8. Sun shades
Page 11-29
11.8.2 Materials
Materials of all components used in the street furniture shall be suitable for working under the weather and site
conditions set out in these Specifications, thus withstanding the variations of temperature and other prevailing
conditions without distortion or deterioration of any part of the street furniture. In every case where an industry
standard has been established for a particular type of material, the material shall comply with the provisions set forth in
that standard.
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, detailed shop Contract Plans, material samples and such other data
as may be required by the Engineer for each Item of street furniture. Accompanying the shop Contract Plans, the
Contractor shall submit colour samples on typical shapes for approval of the Engineer as well as certificates that the
colour finish meets specification requirements.
Based on the data approved by the Engineer, and prior to production of all units, the Contractor shall furnish and install
a complete, operative and detailed prototype of each Item of street furniture for approval by the Engineer and Owner.
No street furniture shall be fabricated and delivered before the prototypes of the respective Items of street furniture have
been approved by the Owner.
Street furniture shall not be fabricated until the Engineer approves the shop Contract Plans in writing.
Street furniture materials shall be in accordance with the following standards shown in Table 11-3:
Table 11-3 Street furniture reference standards
Reference specification Standard or Code
Architectural Aluminium Manufacturers Association (AAMA) AAMA 605.2:1992

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) AISI 304
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM A36 / A36M - 12
ASTM A153 / A153M - 09
ASTM A193 / A193M - 12b
ASTM A194 / A194M - 13
ASTM A240 / A240M - 13c
ASTM A320 / A320M - 11a
ASTM A675 / A675M - 03(2009)
ASTM B209 - 10
ASTM B221 - 13
Street furniture shall be constructed of the materials as shown on the Contract Plans, or as specified in the Particular
Specifications and shall include all accessories and hardware for the complete assembly and installation.
All concrete for foundations and other applications shall be C25/20 concrete. Concrete for encasing ducts shall be C15.
All concrete work shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works. Foundations shall be allowed to
cure a minimum of seven (7) days before erecting items of street furniture on the foundations. Any textured and/or
exposed aggregate finishes for concrete works shall be as approved by the Engineer.
Electrical components associated with street furniture shall be constructed to comply with applicable requirements of
Section 11.3.
All hardware used to secure aluminium and wood elements in place shall be stainless steel.
All metal work (including anchor bolts) for street furniture shall comply with the following:
1. Steel components, complying with ASTM A36 / A36M - 12
2. Aluminium components, shall be solid, sized, and formed as indicated on the Contract Plans. Aluminium shall
comply with the values stated in ASTM B221 - 13 and ASTM B209 - 10. Bar shapes shall be square cornered,
extruded alloy 6061-T651 and/or 6063-T5.
Page 11-30
3. Aluminium plate shall be alloy 6061-T651.

4. Aluminium welding alloy shall be the type best suited to the particular application as recommended by the
aluminium manufacturer.
5. Anchor bolts shall be ASTM A675 / A675M - 03(2009), Grade 90, steel and shall be galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A153 / A153M - 09.
6. Stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be American Iron and Steel Institute, Type 304, stainless steel and
shall comply with ASTM A320 / A320M - 11a requirements.
7. Bolts shall comply with ASTM A193 / A193M - 12b, Grade B8, Class 2; nuts shall comply with ASTM A194 /
A194M - 13, Grade 8; and flat washers shall comply with ASTM A240 / A240M - 13c, Type 302.
All fastening hardware for base plate enclosure boxes associated with street furniture components shall be stainless
steel. Stainless steel fasteners shall be flat, Phillips head, countersunk machine screws. Removable base plate enclosure
boxes shall be typical for all units, in varying sizes and formations as detailed on the Contract Plans, fabricated of 6 mm
thick ASTM A36 / A36M - 12 steel, all welded construction, with welds ground flush and smooth. Units shall be
galvanized, prime and finish painted as specified herein.
Street furniture units specified to receive colour coating shall be factory chemically pre-treated, then receive a thermo-
cured inhibitive primer, then a factory applied fluoropolymer resin colour coating complying with the requirements of
U.S. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association, AAMA Specification No. 605.2, Specifications for High
Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels, followed by a clear, transparent protective
topcoat. The finish colour coating shall be as noted on the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Any surfaces
or colour coating damaged during installation shall be repaired or recoated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

All installation work and component parts of the street furniture shall meet the site conditions and comply with the
requirements as shown on the Contract Plans and as specified herein or in the particular specification:
All excavation and backfill shall meet the applicable requirements of Sections 2.4 and 2.5 of Chapter 2, Earthworks.
All concrete work shall meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, and Chapter 5, Reinforcing
Steel.
All electrical work shall meet the applicable requirements of Section 11.3.
Street furniture components shall be supplied with the required spare parts as may be otherwise included in the bills of
quantities and/or the particular specifications.
All members and plates shall be fabricated with eased or rounded corners as detailed. Bending shall be performed hot or
cold as necessary to produce the radii indicated on the shop Contract Plans. All assemblies shall be made by full
welding in accordance with American Welding Society standards, with welds finished smooth and flush with adjacent
surfaces.
After complete fabrication, the street furniture units specified to receive colour coating shall be factory chemically pre-
treated, then receive a thermo-cured inhibitive primer, then a factory applied fluoropolymer resin color coating
complying with the requirements of U.S. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association, AAMA Specification
No. 605.2, Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels, followed by
a clear, transparent protective topcoat. The finish color coating shall be matte finish and shall match the Architectural
Aluminum Manufacturers Association dark bronze anodized finish color.
Any surfaces or color coating damaged during installation shall be repaired or recoated to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Installation of street furniture shall include all excavation and backfilling, all required foundations, conduit in
foundations and under paved areas as shown on the approved shop Contract Plans. Contractor shall verify the location
of the street furniture foundations, size of the foundations, anchor bolt size and locations and related details with the
manufacturer and the Engineer before placement of any foundations.
Holes for all the foundations shall be excavated to the size and dimensions required for construction of the foundations.
Forms shall include templates complying to hold anchor bolts, galvanized conduit and ground rods securely in place
during the casting of concrete. Double nutting of bolts and grouting of base plates will be required by the Engineer.
Page 11-31
11.8.3.1 Sun Shelters

All sun shelters shall be as indicated on the Contract Plans and as specified herein. All sun shelters shall be complete
with benches and as appropriate, tables, with all components as specified, as shown on the approved shop drawings or
as required for the installation.
Sun shelters shall be installed complete as per the recommendation of the manufacturer and per the approved shop
drawings.
All conduit, cable, electric wiring to control cabinet, etc., of sun shelters shall comply with the applicable requirements
of Chapter 10, Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works, and as directed by the Engineer.
The complete structure of the sun shelter shall be designed to withstand wind speeds of 160 km/hr with gusts of 200
km/hr when fully completed.
The Contractor shall submit all design data and calculations with the shop drawing submittal for the Engineer's review
and comments. Design shall include the manufacturer's recommended size, proportion, reinforcement and other details
for the reinforced concrete foundation.
All sun shelters shall be prefabricated and pre-assembled by the manufacturer as much as possible and shall be
delivered to the site in the largest sections as reasonable to handle and install on the foundations with the use of a crane.
All field connections shall be bolted unless otherwise required by the manufacturer due to design requirements and as
All existing sun shelters removed and to be relocated shall be cleaned, painted and refurbished to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and Owner. The Contractor shall suitably support and brace the existing sun shelters during all handling,
transporting and installing operations.
The Contractor shall remove completely all existing foundations and slabs where existing sun shelters are removed.
The resulting excavation shall be filled with compacted borrow material in accordance with the requirements of Articles
2.5.2.2 and 2.5.3.1 of Chapter 2, Earthworks, of these Standard Specifications.
The Contractor shall furnish and install new foundations and anchor bolts at the relocation of the existing sun shelters.
11.8.3.2 Benches
All sidewalk benches are to be fabricated as shown on the approved shop Contract Plans. Shop Contract Plans shall be
prepared in accordance with the selected and approved manufacturer’s fabrication Contract Plans and
recommendations.
Wood slats shall be a nominal 50 mm thick. Wood slats shall be secured with a minimum of 13 mm diameter stainless
steel bolts, countersunk into the concrete bench components, and stainless steel nuts and washers. All corners and
edges of wood shall be rounded. All wood shall be select and shall not be kiln dried.
Installation shall meet the applicable requirements of Article 11.8.3.1.
11.8.3.3 Waste Receptacles and Planter Boxes

Waste receptacles and planter boxes are to be fabricated as shown on the approved shop Contract Plans. Shop Contract
Plans shall be prepared in accordance with the selected and approved manufacturer’s fabrication Contract Plans and
recommendations.
Installation shall meet the applicable requirements of Article 11.8.3.1.
All planter boxes shall include the necessary irrigation distribution and emitter systems, planting soil mix and plantings
as required on the Contract Plans and in the particular specifications, meeting the applicable requirements of Sections
13.1 and 13.3 of Chapter 13, Landscaping and Irrigation.
11.9 Bus Shelters

This section provides specifications and requirements for the designing, furnishing, and installing bus shelters. Such
work shall be in accordance with the Abu Dhabi Standard Drawings for Road Projects (AD-D-14), performance and
material specifications included in the following subsections and articles and in conformity with the requirements of the
Contract documents.
The Contractor shall submit all design data, layouts, and calculations with the shop drawings submittal for the
Engineer's review and approval.
Page 11-32
11.9.1 Performance Specifications

The Contractor shall design, furnish, and install bus shelters in accordance with the following performance
specifications.
11.9.1.1 Iconic Symbol

The bus shelter design shall provide a key means of identifying the transit system and signifying a new era of public
transit service for the Emirate. The bus shelter design shall be iconic and unique to the culture, flavor and conditions of
modern Abu Dhabi Emirate. The Contractor shall adhere to the iconic design provided in the Abu Dhabi Standard
Drawings for Road Projects (AD-D-14), and Contract documents.
11.9.1.2 Theme
Theme followed for the bus shelter design shall be symbolic to Abu Dhabi and in line with the planned cultural
development. The Contractor shall adhere to the theme provided in the Abu Dhabi Standard Drawings for Road Projects
(AD-D-14) and Contract documents.
11.9.1.3 Bus Shelter Type, Size & Capacity

The bus shelter type-wise design, approximate dimensions with passenger capacity shall be as follows:
a. Type B 321
Small size, air-conditioned, single door (3 Closed Bay A/C, 2 Open Bay and 1 Service Bay)
Size: 9.6m x 1.6m with Roof Canopy Front 1.0 m
Internal Capacity: minimum of 4 sitting, 6 standing, and 1 wheelchair
External Capacity: minimum of 2 sitting & 8 standing
b. Type B 521
Medium size, air-conditioned, single door (5 Closed Bay A/C, 2 Open Bay and 1 Service Bay)
Size: 12.8 m x 1.6m with Roof Canopy Front 1.0 m
c. Type B 621
Large size, air-conditioned, double door (6 Closed Bay A/C, 2 Open Bay and 1 Service Bay)
d. Type B 040
Small size, open (4 Open Bay only)
Seats shall be oriented to face the roadway and/or on-coming traffic.
11.9.1.4 Visibility
The bus shelter design shall enable passengers to see oncoming buses clearly. The bus shelter interior shall clearly be
visible from the outside during day and night.
Page 11-33
11.9.1.5 Accessibility
The bus shelter shall facilitate easy boarding and alighting from buses. Passengers with wheelchairs and other special
mobility needs shall be able to enter and exit the shelter as well as to provide enough space within the bus shelter to
accommodate them.
11.9.1.6 Ambient Waiting Area Temperature in the Shelter

Abu Dhabi has a hot and humid climate, with outside temperatures exceeding 50 degrees Celsius and 90% humidity.
The bus shelter air-conditioning design and calculations shall ensure that bus shelters have adequately cool interiors that
ensure an ambient temperature between 20 and 24 degrees Celsius at all times.
11.9.1.7 Modularity and Moveability

Bus shelter design shall be quick and easy to assemble/disassemble and scalable to accommodate increased/decreased
capacities (e.g. upgrading a bus shelter from small to medium).
Bus shelter shall be easily moveable, and does not require a built-in foundation hence it shall be assembled on a guide
rail as a single unit.
Bus shelter shall follow the same design and utilize a standardized range of modular components to reduce cost and
maintain maximum flexibility. Each modular component shall be provided with a model number and unique
identification number.
11.9.1.8 Structural Requirement

The complete structure of the bus shelter shall be designed to withstand wind speeds of 160 km/hr with gusts of 200
km/hr when fully completed.
11.9.1.9 Required Furniture and Amenities

The following shall be included with each bus shelter:
1. Bus stop name that is visible from the street
2. Litter / Recycle Bins
3. Seating (should prevent passengers from lying on them)
4. Internal and external LED Lighting
5. Passenger Information Panel with LED Lighting
6. Passenger Instructional Signs
7. Internal and external CCTV camera.
11.9.1.10 Service Bay

The service bay shall integrate utilities and provide clutter-free bus shelter. The service bay shall accommodate the
following:
1. Isolated Air Conditioning outdoor unit
2. AC maintenance access
3. Electrical connection and distribution
4. Fire-proof litter bin module
5. Advertising unit (not in all configurations)
6. Fire Proof Recycling Bins
7. Solar Panel batteries (if part of the design)
8. Future Vending Machine (Ticket /Commercial)
Page 11-34
11.9.1.11 Materials
Materials for the bus shelters shall be durable, UVresistant, fire-retardant, rust-proof and easy to maintain. Materials
and designs which tend to trap sand and dirt are not permitted.
All electrical material and allied components shall be approved and in compliance with ADDC 2009 regulations and
any other applicable standards with-in Abu Dhabi Emirate.
11.9.1.12 Control Switches

All control switches shall be concealed from the public and shall be vandalism-resistant.
11.9.1.13 Advertisement at the Shelter

Advertisement is very important component of the bus shelter. The Contractor shall adhere to the advertisement
requirement in the bus shelter as per the design provided in the Abu Dhabi Standard Drawings for Road Projects (AD-
D-14) and Contract documents.
11.9.1.14 Provision of Using Intelligent Transport Systems for Passenger

Information Purposes
Each bus shelter shall have the provision of Intelligent Transport Systems for passenger information purposes.
The Contractor shall provide the innovative ways for the future use of Intelligent Transport Systems within the bus
shelter.
11.9.1.15 Environmentally Friendly

The bus shelter detailed design based on the concept design renderings and preliminary design drawings provided in the
Abu Dhabi Standard Drawings for Road Projects (AD-D-14), and Contract documents shall adhere to methods and
materials for reducing the temperature inside the bus shelter.
The Contractor shall use photovoltaic, solar energy, or other alternative sources of energy, as approved by the Engineer,
utilizing the bus shelter roof spacing for bus shelter B040 lighting, Advertisement Panel lighting and bus shelter A/C
Fan in winter season.
Passive cooling and heat blocking/repelling techniques such as forced ventilation during winter, energy efficient
materials, double roofing, reflective surfaces, etc shall be provided as approved by the Engineer to reduce the energy
required for the air-conditioning systems.
11.9.1.16 General Provisions in Bus Shelter Design

The Contractor shall provide the following provisions in the bus shelter design:
1. Provision for future additional rear short roof.
2. Provision for future additional rear seating.
11.9.1.17 Owner and Authorities Concerned Applicable Laws and Regulations

The Contractor shall provide 100 % complete adherence to the Owner and Authorities concerned laws and regulations.
11.9.1.18 Approved Layout for Installation Dimensions

The Contractor shall adhere to the Owner and Authorities’ regulations and provide the following for the Engineer’s
approval:
1. Layouts with complete details
2. Distance of bus shelter from the Roadside Curbstone shall be 2.5 - 3.0 Meters
3. Acceptable slope shall be 2 - 3 % towards the Curb to facilitate storm water drainage
4. Distance from bus shelter downstream shall be 3.0 - 3.5 Meters.
11.9.1.19 Civil Works Related Material Quality as per Approved Specifications

The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
Page 11-35
1. Adherence to the Owner and Authorities’ regulations for bus shelter foundation design drawings.
2. The bus shelter foundation design depth shall not be more than 450 mm deep from the road level and 550 mm
from the interlock level until unless needed otherwise and approved accordingly by the relevant Authorities.
3. Concrete works shall be in accordance with Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these standard specifications.
4. Steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel, of these standard specifications.
5. Waterproofing shall be in accordance with Chapter 28, Waterproofing, of these standard specifications.
6. Tiling shall be in accordance with Section 7.6 of Chapter 7, Incidental Construction, of these standard
specifications.
11.9.1.20 Electrical Works Related Material Quality

The Contractor shall adhere to ADDC / AADC regulations and provide the following for the Engineer’s approval:
1. Electrical Drawings with complete details of all the electrical works.
2. External & Internal armoured Cables (Flame Retardant and Fire Resistant) [PVC/S.C/ colored wires inside
flexible G.I pipe].
3. GRP Distribution Board (at Accessible Location) with power cutouts, meter board and 3 Phase meter wiring
4. Main Earthing (rod, earth pit, earth conductor etc.)
5. Isolator for air-conditioner machine and connect by same size and type of wire.
6. Civil and electrical works including ducting for Electricity Cable laying as per ADDC / AADC requirements.
11.9.1.21 Paint and Color

Bus shelter Paint / Color specification shall be as follows:
1. Powder Coated (Polyester Powder Coat)
2. Thickness of Coating in Microns (minimum 80 μm)
3. Finish Type (Semi-Gloss Metallic finish)
4. Powder curing temperature (180 to 210 degree Celsius)
5. Color Retention Guarantee (20 Years)
6. Name of the Suppliers (National Paint, DuPont, Jotun, ICI or equivalent)
7. Galvanizing of steel to comply with BS EN ISO 1461:2009.
8. Galvanized steel powder coating to comply with BS EN 13438:2013 & BS 1722-16:2009.
9. Aluminium powder coating to comply with BS EN 12206-1:2004.
The Contractor shall provide to the Owner the color samples for bus shelter during the Design Stage for approval. The
Owner may choose more than one color for bus shelters as deemed necessary.
11.9.1.22 Shelter Graphics

The bus shelter shall include the following graphics:
1. The Main Graphic shall demonstrate the following with size 200H x 1000W (No litter, No eating, No smoking,
No sleeping, monitored by CCTV). Showing four languages: Arabic, English, Urdu, and Hindi. Printed on Clear
Vinyl.
2. “Female Priority for Seating”. Showing Arabic and English languages. Printed on White Vinyl. Size: 400 x 400.
3. “Handicap” graphic printed on White Vinyl. Size: 450H x 400W.
4. “Danger” graphic printed on White Vinyl. Size: 200H x 220W.
5. “Slide to Open the Door” 2 No. graphics placed oppositely. Printed on White Vinyl. Size: 80H x 250W.
6. “General Trash” & “Mixed Recycling” graphics for Litter Bins, printed on Clear Vinyl. Size: 245H x 450W.
Note: (All measurements shall be in mm.)
Page 11-36
11.9.2 Material Specifications

The Contractor shall design, furnish, and install bus shelters in accordance with the following material specifications
shown in Table 11-4.
Table 11-4 Bus shelter material specifications
Item Description Material Specifications
Structural Steel for Structural Steel Sections - S275, Galvanize – BS EN ISO 1461:2009
Columns & Beams
1 Steel Section minimum thickness 5 mm
(Main Structural
Member) Contractor to provide dimensional details for Steel Section and Welding standard.
Aluminium Cladding for Aluminium Extrusions - BS EN 755-2:2013, BS EN 755-9:2008, BS EN 12020-

Columns & Beams and 2:2008 & GB/T-6892:2006 Equivalent,
2
Internal & External Aluminium Extrusions minimum Thickness 3 mm
Skirting Powder Coating - As per Paint Performance Specifications.
Low E Glass as per Estidama Regulation,

Glass Panels (External
3 Size: 8-10-8, U-value up-to 1.8, Shading Coefficient maximum 0.30, Light
Front, Side & Rear)
Reflection out maximum 12, Light Reflection in maximum 14.
Aluminium Alloy plate ASTM B209 - 10: ANSI H35.2-2009, Water Jet Cutting,
Aluminium Mashrabia
4 Aluminium Plate Thickness 10 mm, Powder Coating - As per Paint Performance
Rear Panels
Specifications, Aluminium plate mounted in the bespoke Aluminium extrusions.
Honeycomb Composite Panels, Thickness minimum 15mm, Fire Rated and

5 External Roof Panel approved by Abu Dhabi Civil Defense (ADCD), Paint as per performance
specification, Custom Color to be matched by the panel supplier.
Honeycomb Composite Panels, Thickness minimum 15mm, Fire Rated and

Equipment Bay Dividing
6 approved by Abu Dhabi Civil Defense (ADCD), Paint as per performance
Panel
specification, Custom Color to be matched by the panel supplier.
Door: Self-closing sliding doors with gravity.
Door Handle: Stainless Steel Grade 304 Mirror finish. Length 800 mm, Dia 38 mm,
Bus Shelter Main Installation dimensions to comply with the Disability Discrimination Act (DDA)
7 International Standards.
Entrance Door
Door Glass: Low E Glass as per Estidama Regulation, Size: 8-10-8, U-value up-to
1.8, Shading Coefficient maximum 0.30, Light Reflection out maximum 12, Light
Reflection in maximum 14 and to match the main shelter Glass panels.
Aluminium Alloy plate ASTM B209 - 10: ANSI H35.2-2009, Aluminium Plate
Service Bay Entrance Thickness 10 mm, Water Jet Cutting, Powder Coating - As per Paint Performance
8
Door Specifications, Aluminium plate mounted in the bespoke Aluminium extrusions
with Stainless Steel Mesh, Hydraulic Door Opening Levers
Aluminium Grade 1100-H14, Thickness 1.5 mm, Powder Coating - As per Paint
Interior False Ceiling Performance Specifications,
9
Panels Steel Cross Rail Section with minimum Yield Strength 275 N/mm2
M8 Threaded Rod A2 SS DIN 975
Advertisement Panel
10 As per Design at Site (BS03433b)
with Flex Banner
Air-Conditioning Unit
11 As per A/C Design Drawings and Calculations (3, 3.6, 4.2 Tons)
with Ducting
12 Recycling Bins Stainless Steel Grade 304, PF866 Star Embossed finish
Page 11-37
Stainless Steel Grade 304.

Installation dimensions to comply with the Disability Discrimination Act (DDA)
International Standards.
Standard Seats: Length 1500 mm, Width 400 mm, (minimum space per seating 400
13 Seating mm), Hand Rest Height 200 mm,
Seat Divider 15 mm in the seating arrangement, Installation Height (450 mm from
finished floor)
Perch Seats: Length 1400 mm, Width 300 mm, Installation Height (650 mm from
finished floor).
The bus shelter design shall make the maximum use of daylight. Bus shelters shall
Internal and External be lit during periods of limited daylight availability. LED light shall be used with
14
LED Lighting 150 LUX levels inside and outside. Product shall be Philips / GE / LG / Osram or
equivalent.
Passenger Information
15 As per Design at Site (BS03433b)
Panel with LED Lighting
NP2 Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher - BS EN 3-7:2004+A1:2007, BS EN 3-8:2006,
16 Fire Extinguisher
Approved by Abu Dhabi Civil Defense (ADCD).
a. Inside the bus shelter: Ceiling DOME type Wireless IP CCTV Camera.
b. Outside the bus shelter: Mounted Waterproof (IP 65) Wireless IP Day & Night
CCTV Camera.
c. CCTV solution: Wi-Fi, UMTS or Ethernet. Provide methodology to record and
view the video of the CCTV cameras either in the bus shelter or any other
remote location as part of central control.
d. Minimum required Back-up Time Period: 30 days.
e. Operating Temperature: Minus 10o C to 60o C,
f. Illumination: Minimum "0" Lux up to 20m.
g. Resolution: Minimum 600 TVL,
h. Scanning System: PAL / CCIR.
i. Image Pick-up Device: Minimum 1/3" Sony Ex VIEW HDD CCD Sensor
equivalent,
j. White Balance: Auto.
k. Live Streaming system over 3G with necessary software and hardware.
CCTV - Internal & l. Network and Communication requirements plus GSM operator 3G.
17
External with DVR m. POE communication with camera,
n. Video review software.
o. H.264 /MPEG-4 AVC video compression,
p. Adjustable Varifocal Lens.
q. The field of view of any camera is not to be capable of being affected by the
position of a sun visor.
r. DVR shall have picture and motion detection functionality, and shall contain an
internal clock that shall operate independently of the main power supply.
s. Simultaneous record, stream on all cameras, at full frame rate, up to D1
resolution.
t. Auto-optimization of available bandwidth for remote streaming.
u. Ability to export recorded files as .AVI
v. Remote Data Back-up Facility (Optional for the Owner)
w. CCTV solution shall be in-line with Authorities concerned including National
Crisis Management Cell requirements and demonstrated at bus shelter for
necessary Owner’s approval.
Page 11-38
Installation, Final
Testing &
18 As per Operating Conditions.
Commissioning with
permanent power
19 Anchor Bolts Hilti Fixing. As per approved Structural Design from Authorities Concerned.
20 Shelter Graphics As per Shelter Graphics Performance Specifications.
21 AC Drainage Duct As per ADSSC design and material requirements.
For Main Contractor
Main Power Supply

Electricity Cable Works - As per Electrical Works Related Material Quality Performance Specification and
1
From ADDC ST/FP to Authorities concerned regulatory requirements.
Bus Shelter DB
Main Distribution Board

with Switches, Main
As per Electrical Works Related Material Quality Performance Specification and
2 Meter Board with Cut-
Authorities concerned regulatory requirements.
out, A/C Isolator,
Earthing Rod
3 Bus Shelter - Timer LCD Type with Display, ZEN-20C1AR-A-V2 or equivalent.
Plate Bearing Test as per BS 1377-9:1990, section 4.1 and with 600 mm diameter
circular plate.
Plate Bearing Test for
4 Foundation Design shall be based on Soft Sandy Soil with Standard Penetration
Bus Shelter Foundation
Resistance (N=5) and Max Allowable Bearing Pressure of 50 KN/m2. Subgrade
Modulus = 2,000 KN/m2/m.
Foundation reinforced Concrete as per approved foundation Design from

Authorities concerned. The Concrete design to comply as follows in-line with
Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these standard specifications:
• Concrete Grade C30/20 to BS EN 206:2013/ BS 8500-1:2006+A1:2012/ BS
8500-2:2006+A1:2012
5 Concrete • Modulus of Elasticity E = 210 KN/mm2
• Uncracked Concrete Young Modulus Ecm = 31 KN/mm2
• Cracked Concrete Young Modulus = 0.4*Ecm = 12.4 KN/mm2
• Specific Density = 25 KN/m3
• Concrete Young Modulus = 0.17
Foundation Reinforcement steel as per approved foundation Design from

Authorities concerned. The reinforcement steel to comply as follows in line with
Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel, of these standard specifications,
• Reinforcement bar Grade B 500 B (Reinforcement bar yielding strength fy = 500
6 Reinforcement Bars N/mm2) to BS 4449:2005+A2:2009.
• Nominal cover to all reinforcement to be 50mm
• Reinforcement to be cut and bent in accordance with BS 8666:2005
• Reinforcement spacers to be plastic or concrete to achieve 50mm cover.
Page 11-39
Foundation Water
7 Waterproofing as per Chapter 28, Waterproofing, of these standard specifications.
Proofing
Concrete Grade 30/20 to BS EN 206:2013 / BS 8500-1:2006+A1:2012/ BS 8500-

2:2006+A1:2012
8 Screed Screed to be poured to the internal area of the bus shelter and to the service area of
the shelter with careful manner. Level of internal area water drainage slope is
approx 2% - 3% to be allowed.
Tiling as per Section 7.6 of Chapter 7, Incidental Construction, of these standard

specifications
9 Internal Flooring
Grout color shall be as per 173 Charcoal until unless stated and approved
otherwise.
External Paving Interlocks and / or Tiles as per Section 7.9 of Chapter 7, Incidental
10 External Flooring Construction, of these standard specifications.
Lay-out and material duly approved by the Owner.
11 Service Bay Flooring Plain Concrete. Levelled and finished.
11.9.3 Removal of Existing Bus Shelters

The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and accessories as required to carefully remove,
transport, refurbish and install the existing bus shelters at locations designated by the Owner.
All existing bus shelters being relocated shall be cleaned, painted and refurbished to the satisfaction of the Owner. The
Contractor shall suitably support and brace the existing bus shelters during all handling, transporting and installing
operations.
The Contractor shall remove completely all existing foundations and slabs where existing bus shelters are removed. The
resulting excavation shall be filled with compacted borrow material in accordance with the requirements of of Articles
2.5.2.2 and 2.5.3.1 of Chapter 2, Earthworks, of these Standard Specifications.
The Contractor shall furnish and install new foundations and anchor bolts at the relocation of the existing bus shelters.
All foundation work, anchor bolts and appurtenances shall comply with the requirements of Section 11.9.
Page 11-40
Index
Air Conditioning, 34 public telephone booth foundations, 9
bus shelter, 5, 33, 34, 35, 36, 38, 40 PVC telephone conduit, 7
central cooling, 17 PVC telephone conduit for public telephone booths, 8
Commissioning, 39 Recycling Bins, 34, 37
demolition of existing telephone works, 9 regulations, 29, 35, 36
Distribution Board, 36, 39 Roof Panel, 37
Earthing, 36, 39 Sampling, 5
electrical services, 10 Screed, 40
emergency sewer bypass ducts and end structures, 13 Seating, 34, 36, 38
External Flooring, 40 sewerage contingency ducts, 12
Fire Extinguisher, 38 sewerage service chambers, 15
gas, 21 sewerage services, 10
humidity, 34 shelter, 4, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 40
iconic, 33 solar energy, 35
Internal Flooring, 40 Solar Panel, 34
LED Lighting, 34, 38 street furniture, 29
Modulus of Elasticity, 39 symbolic, 33
of modular components, 34 telephone service chambers, pull boxes and joint
Passengers, 34 boxes, 7
Plate Bearing Test, 39 telephone services, 7
Power Supply, 39 telphone pull box, service chambers and joint boxes, 9
protection of existing telephone service, 9 Waste receptacles, 32
protection of sewerage services, 10 water services, 25
Page 11-41
PART 2
ROAD UTILITIES
CHAPTER 12 – STORMWATER DRAINAGE

Chapter 12: Stormwater Drainage

Table of Contents
List of Tables ................................................................................................................................................................. 12-5
12 Stormwater Drainage ........................................................................................................................................ 12-7
12.1 Storm Drains ................................................................................................................................................ 12-7
12.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................12-7
12.1.2 References Standard and Codes...........................................................................................................12-7
12.1.3 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 12-16
12.1.3.1 Submittals ................................................................................................................................. 12-17
12.1.3.2 Pipe Handling ........................................................................................................................... 12-17
12.1.3.3 Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) Pipe & Couplings .................................................................. 12-17
12.1.3.4 Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe (RTRP) & Couplings ................................................... 12-20
12.1.3.5 Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP), & Couplings ........................................................................ 12-21
12.1.3.6 Metal Pipe, Couplings & Fittings ............................................................................................. 12-26
12.1.3.7 Plastic Pipe................................................................................................................................ 12-28
12.1.3.8 Polymer Concrete Precast Grated Drainage Channel ............................................................... 12-32
12.1.3.9 Pavement Underdrains and Edge Drains .................................................................................. 12-32
12.1.4.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 12-35
12.1.4.2 Abandonment of Existing Storm Drain Pipe and Structures ..................................................... 12-35
12.1.4.3 Excavation and Preparation of Trench ...................................................................................... 12-36
12.1.4.4 Shoring ...................................................................................................................................... 12-38
12.1.4.5 Pipe Installation ........................................................................................................................ 12-38
12.1.5 Cleaning and Testing ......................................................................................................................... 12-49
12.1.5.1 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................... 12-49
12.1.5.2 Testing of Gravity Pipelines ..................................................................................................... 12-49
12.1.5.3 Testing of Water Retaining Structures ...................................................................................... 12-51
12.1.5.4 Other Test Allowances .............................................................................................................. 12-52
12.1.5.5 Internal Inspections ................................................................................................................... 12-52
12.1.5.6 Deflection Testing..................................................................................................................... 12-52
12.1.5.7 Video inspection ....................................................................................................................... 12-52
12.1.5.8 Records of Inspection and Testing ............................................................................................ 12-54
12.1.5.9 Connections to Existing Storm Drains ...................................................................................... 12-54
12.1.5.10 Trenchless Pipe Installation Methods ....................................................................................... 12-54
12.1.5.11 Materials ................................................................................................................................... 12-55
12.1.5.12 Trenchless Installation .............................................................................................................. 12-56
12.2 Culverts ...................................................................................................................................................... 12-63
12.2.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 12-63
12.2.2 Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipes ...................................................................................................... 12-63
12.2.3 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 12-64
12.2.4 Precast Box Culverts ......................................................................................................................... 12-64
12.2.4.1 Acceptance ................................................................................................................................ 12-65
12.2.5 Construction requirements ................................................................................................................. 12-65
12.2.5.1 Pipe Culvert Installation ........................................................................................................... 12-65
12.2.5.2 Cast-In-Situ Box Culvert Installation ....................................................................................... 12-65
12.2.5.3 Pre-Cast Box Culvert Installation ............................................................................................. 12-66
12.2.5.4 End Sections ............................................................................................................................. 12-66
12.2.5.5 Precast Concrete Flared End Sections ...................................................................................... 12-67
12.2.5.6 Metal Flared End Sections ........................................................................................................ 12-67
12.2.5.7 Laying End Sections ................................................................................................................. 12-67
12.2.5.8 Headwalls ................................................................................................................................. 12-67
12.2.5.9 Extending Existing Culverts ..................................................................................................... 12-68
12.2.5.10 Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe ..................................................................................................... 12-68
12.2.5.11 Riprap Protection for Culverts .................................................................................................. 12-69
12.3 Stormwater Structures ................................................................................................................................ 12-69
12.3.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 12-69
12.3.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 12-69
12.3.2.1 Concrete .................................................................................................................................... 12-69
12.3.2.2 Reinforcing Steel ...................................................................................................................... 12-69
Page 12-1
12.3.2.3 Ductile Iron Frames, Covers and Grates ................................................................................... 12-69

12.3.2.4 Testing ...................................................................................................................................... 12-70
12.3.2.5 Frame Anchor Bolts .................................................................................................................. 12-71
12.3.2.6 Orifice Flow Control and Weir Plates....................................................................................... 12-71
12.3.2.7 Ditch Bottom Inlet Grates ......................................................................................................... 12-71
12.3.2.8 GRP Ladders ............................................................................................................................. 12-71
12.3.2.9 Pre-Cast Concrete Riser Sections ............................................................................................. 12-73
12.3.2.10 Protective Coatings and Sealants .............................................................................................. 12-73
12.3.3.1 Structural Excavation and Foundation Preparation................................................................... 12-73
12.3.3.2 Structure Base ........................................................................................................................... 12-74
12.3.3.3 Pre-Cast Structure Installation .................................................................................................. 12-74
12.3.3.4 Cast-In-Situ Structure Installation ............................................................................................ 12-76
12.3.3.5 Application of Protective Coatings ........................................................................................... 12-77
12.3.3.6 Frames and Covers.................................................................................................................... 12-77
12.3.3.7 Ladders and Interior Steps ........................................................................................................ 12-77
12.3.3.8 Testing Structures ..................................................................................................................... 12-77
12.4 Brickwork and Blockwork ......................................................................................................................... 12-78
12.4.1 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 12-78
12.4.1.1 Concrete Bricks and Blocks ...................................................................................................... 12-78
12.4.1.2 Bricks ........................................................................................................................................ 12-78
12.4.1.3 Sand for Mortar......................................................................................................................... 12-78
12.4.1.4 Lime for Mortar ........................................................................................................................ 12-78
12.4.2 Construction ...................................................................................................................................... 12-78
12.4.2.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 12-78
12.4.2.2 Cement Mortar .......................................................................................................................... 12-79
12.4.2.3 Cement Line Mortar.................................................................................................................. 12-79
12.4.2.4 Cement Mortar Rendering ........................................................................................................ 12-79
12.5 Backfilling .................................................................................................................................................. 12-79
12.6 Miscellaneous Concrete Work ................................................................................................................... 12-79
12.6.1 Offset Roadway Scuppers ................................................................................................................. 12-79
12.6.2 Pipe Headwall Structures................................................................................................................... 12-79
12.6.3 House Connection, Flush Inlet Structure, Grate, Frame and Pipe ..................................................... 12-80
12.6.4 Channels and Benching ..................................................................................................................... 12-80
12.6.5 Construct Precast Concrete Ditch Channel ........................................................................................ 12-80
12.6.6 Road Gullies ...................................................................................................................................... 12-80
12.6.6.1 Road Gully Grating and Frames ............................................................................................... 12-81
12.7 Wire Mesh Gabions and Mattresses ........................................................................................................... 12-81
12.7.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................. 12-81
12.7.2 Types ................................................................................................................................................. 12-81
12.7.3 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 12-81
12.7.4 Foundation Preparation ..................................................................................................................... 12-82
12.7.5 Assembly and Placement ................................................................................................................... 12-82
12.7.6 Filling Operation ............................................................................................................................... 12-82
12.7.7 Roadside ditches ................................................................................................................................ 12-83
12.7.8 Concrete Spillways ............................................................................................................................ 12-83
12.8 Infiltration Ponds ........................................................................................................................................ 12-83
12.8.1 Access Roads and Ramps .................................................................................................................. 12-84
12.8.2 Earth Dikes ........................................................................................................................................ 12-84
12.8.2.1 Requirements of Standard Specifications Shall be as Follows ................................................. 12-85
12.8.2.2 Maintenance and inspections .................................................................................................... 12-85
12.9 Swales ........................................................................................................................................................ 12-85
12.9.1 Construction Guide Lines for Swales ................................................................................................ 12-85
12.10 Sand Traps.................................................................................................................................................. 12-86
12.11 Soakaways .................................................................................................................................................. 12-86
12.11.1 Concrete Ring/Chamber .................................................................................................................... 12-86
12.11.2 Plastic Soakaways System ................................................................................................................. 12-87
12.11.3 Brick Soakaways System................................................................................................................... 12-87
12.11.4 Trench Soakaways System ................................................................................................................ 12-88
12.12 French Drain for Excessive Water ............................................................................................................. 12-88
12.12.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 12-88
12.12.2 Material ............................................................................................................................................. 12-88
Page 12-2
12.12.2.1 Properties of Filter (C100) ........................................................................................................ 12-89

12.12.2.2 160mm Dia. Class 10 Slotted uPVC Drains Pipe ..................................................................... 12-89
12.13 Flushing of Existing Surface or Sub-Surface Drain for Any Diameter ...................................................... 12-89
12.13.1 Remove, Repair and Refix Drainage Components ............................................................................ 12-89
12.14 Petrol and Oil Interceptor ........................................................................................................................... 12-89
12.14.1 Type of Oil Interceptor ...................................................................................................................... 12-90
12.15 Special Manholes, Utility Bypass Chambers & Alternative Inlet-Catch Basin & Flush Inlet Structures .. 12-90
12.16 Adjusting Existing Storm Drain Structure Covers and Grates to Match New Grades ............................... 12-91
12.16.1 Abandonment of Existing Structures ................................................................................................. 12-91
12.16.2 Connections to Existing Drainage Structures .................................................................................... 12-91
12.17 Cleaning Storm Drains and Structures ....................................................................................................... 12-92
12.17.1 Existing Pumping Station Structure Maintenance ............................................................................. 12-92
12.17.2 Existing Outfall Structure Maintenance ............................................................................................ 12-92
12.17.3 Equipment ......................................................................................................................................... 12-93
12.17.4 Hydraulic Cleaning Equipment ......................................................................................................... 12-93
12.17.5 High Pressure Jet (Hydro-Cleaning) Equipment ............................................................................... 12-93
12.17.6 Mechanical Cleaning ......................................................................................................................... 12-93
12.17.7 Maintenance Requirements ............................................................................................................... 12-93
12.18 Pump Stations............................................................................................................................................. 12-94
12.18.1 Tunnel/Underpass Drainage/Storm Water Pump Stations ................................................................. 12-94
12.18.2 Outfall Pump Stations........................................................................................................................ 12-94
12.18.3 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 12-94
12.18.3.1 Concrete .................................................................................................................................... 12-94
12.18.3.2 Shop Drawings and Contractor Submittals ............................................................................... 12-95
12.18.3.3 Delivery, Storage and Handling ................................................................................................ 12-95
12.18.3.4 Warranty ................................................................................................................................... 12-95
12.18.3.5 Reinforcement ........................................................................................................................... 12-95
12.18.3.6 Protective Coatings ................................................................................................................... 12-95
12.18.3.7 GRP Ladders, Landings and Railings ....................................................................................... 12-96
12.18.3.8 Stop Plank Grooves .................................................................................................................. 12-97
12.18.3.9 Piping ........................................................................................................................................ 12-97
12.18.3.10 Trash Racks .............................................................................................................................. 12-97
12.18.3.11 Stainless Steel Fabricated Penstock .......................................................................................... 12-98
12.18.3.12 Flange Adaptor ....................................................................................................................... 12-100
12.18.3.13 Dismantling Joints .................................................................................................................. 12-100
12.18.3.14 Multi-Turn Electric Actuators................................................................................................. 12-101
12.18.3.15 Security fencing ...................................................................................................................... 12-106
12.18.3.16 Metal Railing .......................................................................................................................... 12-106
12.18.3.17 Concrete Pile Foundations ...................................................................................................... 12-107
12.18.3.18 Lighting................................................................................................................................... 12-107
12.18.3.19 Paving and Kerbs .................................................................................................................... 12-107
12.18.4 Pumps and Controls ......................................................................................................................... 12-107
12.18.4.1 Operating Environment ........................................................................................................... 12-107
12.18.4.2 Pumps ..................................................................................................................................... 12-107
12.18.4.3 Control .................................................................................................................................... 12-110
12.18.4.4 Enclosure ................................................................................................................................ 12-110
12.18.4.5 Motor Starters ......................................................................................................................... 12-111
12.18.4.6 Motor Control Centre.............................................................................................................. 12-117
12.18.4.7 Scada System .......................................................................................................................... 12-126
12.18.4.8 Level Measuring & Control Equipments ................................................................................ 12-132
12.18.5 Valves .............................................................................................................................................. 12-134
12.18.5.1 Air Valves ............................................................................................................................... 12-134
12.18.5.2 Washout Valve ........................................................................................................................ 12-135
12.18.5.3 Gate Valve .............................................................................................................................. 12-135
12.18.5.4 Non-return valves ................................................................................................................... 12-135
12.18.5.5 Flap valves .............................................................................................................................. 12-136
12.18.5.6 Flush Valves ........................................................................................................................... 12-136
12.18.5.7 Surge Protection Measures ..................................................................................................... 12-136
12.18.5.8 Painting ................................................................................................................................... 12-139
12.18.6 Testing ............................................................................................................................................. 12-139
12.18.6.1 Performance Testing Contract Plans ....................................................................................... 12-139
12.18.6.2 Manufacturer Testing .............................................................................................................. 12-140
Page 12-3
12.18.6.3 Operational Testing................................................................................................................. 12-140

12.18.6.4 Field Tests ............................................................................................................................... 12-141
12.18.6.5 Performance Testing ............................................................................................................... 12-141
12.18.6.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals ..................................................................................... 12-141
12.18.6.7 Maintenance of Pumping Requirements ................................................................................. 12-141
12.18.7 Spare parts ....................................................................................................................................... 12-144
12.18.7.1 Delivery, storage and handing ................................................................................................ 12-144
12.18.7.2 Service Spare Parts ................................................................................................................. 12-144
12.19 Pressure pipelines ..................................................................................................................................... 12-145
12.19.1 Materials .......................................................................................................................................... 12-146
12.19.1.1 General .................................................................................................................................... 12-146
12.19.1.2 Submittals ............................................................................................................................... 12-146
12.19.1.3 Acceptance Inspections ........................................................................................................... 12-147
12.19.1.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling .............................................................................................. 12-147
12.19.1.5 Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipe (GRP) ...................................................................................... 12-148
12.19.1.6 Stainless Steel Pipes................................................................................................................ 12-148
12.19.1.7 Ductile Iron Pipes ................................................................................................................... 12-148
12.19.1.8 UPVC Pipes and Fittings ........................................................................................................ 12-151
12.19.2 Placement of magnetic warning tapes ............................................................................................. 12-155
12.19.3 Construction requirements ............................................................................................................... 12-155
12.19.3.1 Pipe installation....................................................................................................................... 12-155
12.19.3.2 Joining of Dissimilar Pressure Pipes....................................................................................... 12-164
12.19.3.3 Thrust and Anchor Blocks for Pressure Pipes......................................................................... 12-164
12.19.3.4 Testing of Pressure Pipelines .................................................................................................. 12-165
12.19.3.5 Pipeline Valve Chambers ........................................................................................................ 12-165
Index ...................................................................................................................................................................... 12-166
Page 12-4
List of Tables
Table 12-1: Designations and titles for AASHTO and ASTM standards ...................................................................... 12-9
Table 12-2: Designations and titles for BS, BS EN, and DIN standards ..................................................................... 12-14
Table 12-3: Initial ultimate resistance of GRP pipes ................................................................................................... 12-20
Table 12-4: Loading schedule...................................................................................................................................... 12-23
Table 12-5: Synthetic gaskets ...................................................................................................................................... 12-24
Table 12-6: PVC liners ................................................................................................................................................ 12-25
Table 12-7: Chemical solutions ................................................................................................................................... 12-26
Table 12-8: Installation alignment tolerances of corrugated steel pipe ....................................................................... 12-28
Table 12-9: Pervious backfill gradation ....................................................................................................................... 12-32
Table 12-10: Pervious backfill material for use as drainage layer against soil retaining structures such as bridge
abutments and retaining walls ............................................................................................................... 12-32
Table 12-11: Gradation for free-draining blanket material .......................................................................................... 12-33
Table 12-12: Prefabricated edge drain core ................................................................................................................. 12-33
Table 12-13: Prefabricated edge drain Geotextile wrap .............................................................................................. 12-34
Table 12-14: Gradation for cement treated permeable material .................................................................................. 12-34
Table 12-15: Tests for cement treated permeable material .......................................................................................... 12-34
Table 12-16: Non Cohesive Soils and Wide Trench Widths ....................................................................................... 12-38
Table 12-17: Bedding requirements............................................................................................................................. 12-40
Table 12-18: Equivalent USCS and AASHTO soil classifications for SIDD .............................................................. 12-40
Table 12-19: Pipe Protruding ....................................................................................................................................... 12-41
Table 12-20: Alternative methods for compaction of pipe surrounds ......................................................................... 12-44
Table 12-21: Loading classification for covers frames and grates............................................................................... 12-70
Table 12-22: GRP ladders ........................................................................................................................................... 12-72
Table 12-23: Sand for Mortar ...................................................................................................................................... 12-78
Table 12-24: Type and Size of Wire ............................................................................................................................ 12-81
Table 12-25: Hydraulic properties for standard type of pocket french drain ............................................................... 12-88
Table 12-26: Properties of Filter C100 ........................................................................................................................ 12-89
Table 12-27: The 160mm dia. Class 10 slotted uPVC drain pipe ................................................................................ 12-89
Table 12-28: Mechanical self cleaning screen design specifications and base on the rate of flow.............................. 12-98
Table 12-29: Pipe materials and flow wave velocity ................................................................................................. 12-137
Table 12-30: Typical Routine Maintenance Monthly Inspection .............................................................................. 12-142
Table 12-31 : Annual Maintenance Inspection .......................................................................................................... 12-143
Table 12-32 : Tightening Torque of Bolts & Nuts for Mechanical Joint ................................................................... 12-151
Table 12-33 : Quality product properties ................................................................................................................... 12-151
Table 12-34 : Classification of uPVC Pipe ................................................................................................................ 12-152
Table 12-35 : Mean tolerances on outside diameter of uPVC Pipe ........................................................................... 12-152
Table 12-36 : Particular, requirements for uPVC testing ........................................................................................... 12-154
Page 12-5
Page 12-6
12 STORMWATER DRAINAGE
12.1 Storm Drains
12.1.1 General
Stormwater drainage work includes furnishing all the labour, materials, and equipment required to install operational
stormwater drainage systems — including excavating, furnishing, placement, and compacting backfill material. — All
such works shall be read in conjunction with the tender documents and comply with the details shown on the Contract
plans and the Specifications outlined in this chapter. These Specifications apply to all materials used in storm water
drainage systems for the conveyance of stormwater and groundwater, unless noted otherwise.
12.1.2 References Standard and Codes

Standards and codes for storm water drainage shall be as specified in these specifications, in the Contract documents, if
any, and the following, in their latest edition. The Contractor shall present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying
that the product complies with the applicable section of the specification. Where requested or specified, the Contractor
shall submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance with the applicable section of the specification.
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
ANSI American National Standards Institute ;
ANSI A 21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for water or Other
Liquids;
ANSI A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings;
ANSI A21.5 Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems;
ANSI A21.53 2006 Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings;
ANSI. A21.10 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in. for Water;
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers;
ASCE Standard practice for direct design of buried precast concrete pipe using standard installations
(SIDD);
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
ASME/ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (1996);
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials;
AWWA American Water Works Association
AWWA C151-09 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast for water;
AWWA. C110-12 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings;
AWWA. C111-06 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings;
AWWA C600-10 Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances;
AWWA C104/A21.4 Cement-mortar lining for ductile-iron pipe and fittings for water, 2013;
AWWA C105-10 Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems;
AWWA C508-09 Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 50-mm through 600-mm NPS;
BS British Standards;
CGPM: 2013 BIPM-CGPM. bipm.org. Bureau International des Poids ET Measures, (France)
DoT Department of Transportation
API.5L:2000 Specification for Line Pipe. Washington, DC : American Petroleum Institute;
ISO International Organization for Standardization
Page 12-7
ISO 2548:1973 Centrifugal, mixed flow and axial pumps -- Code for acceptance tests -- Class C;
ISO 2505:2005 Thermoplastics pipes - Longitudinal reversion - Test method and parameters;
ISO 1167-1:2006 Thermoplastics pipes, fittings and assemblies for the conveyance of fluids - Determination of the
resistance to internal pressure;
resistance to internal pressure;
resistance to internal pressure.;
ISO 2507-1:1995 Thermoplastics pipes and fittings - Vicat sofetening temperature -General test method;
ISO 3127:1994 Thermoplastics pipes - Determination of resistance to external blows - Round-the-clock method;
ISO 3472: 1975 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes - Specification and determination of resistance to
acetone;
ISO 3606:1976 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes - Tolerances on outside diameters and wall
thicknesses;
ISO 1183-1:2012 Plastics Methods for determining the density of non-cellular plastics -- Part 1: Immersion
method, liquid pyknometer method and titration method;
ISO 1133: 2011 Plastics -- Determination of the melt mass-flow rate (MFR) and the melt volume-flow rate
(MVR) of thermoplastics;
ISO 11837:2011 Machinery for forestry -- Saw chain shot guarding systems -- Test method and performance
criteria;
ISO 3126:2005 Plastics piping systems -- Plastics components -- Determination of dimensions;
ISO 4427-1:2007 Plastics piping systems -- Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings for water supply -- Part 1: General;
ISO 2505:2005 Thermoplastics pipes -- Longitudinal reversion -- Test method and parameters;
ISO 1167-1:2006 Thermoplastics pipes, fittings and assemblies for the conveyance of fluids -- Determination of the
resistance to internal pressure -- Part 1: General method;
ISO 6259-1:1997 Thermoplastics pipes -- Determination of tensile properties -- Part 1: General test method;
ITE: 2001 Equipment and Material Standards of the Institute of Transportation Institute of Traffic
Engineers.
DIN German Institute for Standardization;
DIN 3352 Gate Valves;
DIN 3230-4:1977 Technical conditions of delivery for valves; Valves for potable water service, Requirements and
testing;
DIN 1693:1973 Ductile Iron Castings Made to Specification GGG 40;
DIN 19565 Specifications for GRP centrifugal pipes
DVS 2203 1,2,3 Testing of welded joints between panesl and pipes made of thermoplastics. Dusseldorf: Technical
Committee of the German Welding Society;
ISO 9001:2003 Quality Management System.
Table 12-1 and Table 12-2 present American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO),
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), British (BS), and European (BS EN) Standards and designations
and titles.
Page 12-8
Table 12-1: Designations and titles for AASHTO and ASTM standards
AASHTO ASTM
Title
AASHTO
Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe
M252:2009
AASHTO M278 Standard Specification for Class PS46 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe.
Standard Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced

ASTM D3262-11
Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe
Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
ASTM D3840-10
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Fittings for Nonpressure Applications
Standard guide for Underground Installation of Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber
ASTM D3839-08
Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe
ASTM F477- Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic
2010 Pipe.
ASTM D1763 -
Standard Specification for Epoxy Resins.
00(2013)
ASTM D581:
Standard Specification for Glass Fiber Greige Braided Tubular Sleeving.
2007
ASTM Standard Practice for Determining Dimensions of Fiberglass (Glass-
D3567:2006 Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading
D2412:2011 Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading.
ASTM Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means
D2853:2007 of a Barcol Impressor.
ASTM
Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins.
D2584:2011
ASTM D2310: Standard Classification for Machine-Made Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-
2006 Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
ASTM Standard Specification for Filament-Wound Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-
D2996:2007 Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
ASTM Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-
D2997:2007 Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
ASTM Standard Specification for Contact Molded Fiberglass (Glass Fiber
D3982:2008 Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Ducts.
AASHTO M Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and
170-09 Sewer Pipe.
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and
ASTM C76-11
Sewer Pipe.
AASHTO M198- Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and
05 Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants.
Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and
ASTM C990
Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants.
Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
ASTM D412
Elastomers—Tension
ASTM
Standard Test Method for Rubber Property 8212;Durometer Hardness
D2240:2010
Page 12-9
AASHTO ASTM
Title
ASTM D572:2010 Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration by Heat and Oxygen
Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric

ASTM D149 Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power
Frequencies
ASTM Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds
D1784:2011 and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic Coated for
ASTM A760:2010
Sewers and Drains
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc and Aramid Fiber Composite
ASTM A885:2002
Coated for Corrugated Steel Sewer, Culvert, and Underdrain Pipe .
Standard Specification for Post Applied Coatings, Pavings, and Linings for
ASTM A849:2010
Corrugated Steel Sewer and Drainage Pipe .
Standard Practice for Application of Asphalt Coatings to Corrugated Steel
ASTM A862:2008
Sewer and Drainage Pipe
Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated, for
AASHTO M036
Sewers and Drains
Standard Specification for Bituminous-Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert
AASHTO M190
Pipe and Pipe.
Standard Specification for Corrugated Aluminum Pipe for Sewers and
AASHTO M196
Drains,.
Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Polymer-Precoated, for
AASHTO M245
Sewers and Drains.
ASTM D1056- Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials 8212;Sponge or
2007 Expanded Rubber
AASHTO M198- Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and
2010 Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants.
Standard Practice for Installing Factory Made Corrugated Steel Pipe for
ASTM A798-2007
Sewers and Other Applications
ASTM F568M. - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded
2007 Metric Fasteners.
Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot Dip
ASTM A780-2009
Galvanized Coatings
Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Structural Plate, Zinc Coated,
ASTM A761-2009
for Field Bolted Pipe, Pipe Arches, and Arches
AASHTO Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Structural Plate, Zinc-Coated,
M167M for Field-Bolted Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches
Standard Specification for Field-Applied Coating of Corrugated Metal
AASHTO M243
Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches.
ASTM 153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware .
Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Sheet for Corrugated

AASHTO M197
Aluminum Pipe.
AASHTO M219 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
Page 12-10
AASHTO ASTM
Title
ASTM B209-2010 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy 6061 T6 Standard Structural

ASTM B308-2010
Profiles
ASTM Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High
A193/A193M-12b Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose
Applications
AASHTO T 241- Standard Method of Test for Helical Continuously Welded Seam
95 Corrugated Steel Pipe,
AASHTO
Standard Method of Test for Penetration of Bituminous Materials
T049:2007
Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel
ASTM A90:2011
Articles with Zinc or Zinc Alloy Coatings
ASTM D 1056- Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials 8212;Sponge or
2007 Expanded Rubber
ASTM A377 - Standard Index of Specifications for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe

03(2008)e1
ASTM D4976- Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion
2006 Materials
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer
ASTM F949-2010
Pipe With a Smooth Interior and Fittings.
ASTM C293- Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced
2008 Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals
AASHTO Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1500-

M294:2011 mm (12- to 60-in.) Diameter.
Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall
ASTM F894
Sewer and Drain Pipe
Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using
ASTM D3212
Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D2657 Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
Standard Classification for Chemical Resistance of Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

ASTM D5260 (PVC) Homopolymer and Copolymer Compounds and Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe
ASTM D2122
and Fittings
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer
ASTM F949
Pipe With a Smooth Interior and Fittings
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity
ASTM F794: 2009 Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter . s.l. :
American Society for Testing snd Materils,
ASTM Standard Test Method for Water Infiltration Resistance of Plastic
F1365:2009 Underground Conduit Joints Which Use Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
ASTM D2466
Fittings, Schedule 40
Page 12-11
AASHTO ASTM
Title
ASTM D3034- Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer
2008 Pipe and Fittings . s.l. : American Society of Testing and Materials,
AASHTO Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Wall Drain
M304:2011 Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D543- Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical
2006 Reagents
ASTM D2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
-2009 (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems .
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and

AASHTO M264
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping.
Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
ASTM C443:2011
Rubber Gaskets.
Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for
ASTM A615M
Concrete Reinforcement .
ASTM D1621- Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular
2010 Plastics.
ASTM D4716- Standard test method for determining the (in-plane) flow rate per unit
2008 width and hydraulic transmissivity of a geosynthetic using a constant head.
ASTM D1621 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular
2010 Plastics
Standard Test Method for Determining the (In plane) Flow Rate per Unit
ASTM
Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a Geosynthetic Using a Constant
D4716:2008
Head .
ASTM Standard Test Method for Thickness of Textile Materials . s.l. : American
D1777:2011 Society for Testing and Materials
AASHTO M Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway
288:2006 Applications.
ASTM Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a
D4751:2004 Geotextile
ASTM Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by
D4491:2009 Permittivity
ASTM D3776 Standard Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric .
ASTM D Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of
4632:2008 Geotextiles
ASTM Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles . s.l. :
D4533:2011 American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textiles Constant Rate of
D3787:2011 Traverse (CRT) Ball Burst Test
ASTM Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured
D5821:2006 Particles in Coarse Aggregate
AASHTO Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
T96:2002 Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
AASHTO Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils
T176:2008 by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test
Page 12-12
AASHTO ASTM
Title
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,

ASTM D1785
Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40
2104:2003 (Withdrawn 2010)
ASTM Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) Plastic
D1527:2005 Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 .
ASTM Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
D2321:2011 Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications .
Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a
AASHTO T 180
4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.
ASTM Standard Practice for Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast
C1103:2009 Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines
Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated,
ASTM A53:2010
Welded and Seamless .
ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics .
Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel

ASTM A240:2011
Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
ASTM A36:2008 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel .
AASHTO Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for
M259:2011 Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers.
Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for
AASHTO
Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers with Less Than 2 ft of Cover Subjected
M273:2011
to Highway Loadings
Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
ASTM C39
Specimens .
AASHTO Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), for
M218:2003 Corrugated Steel Pipe
Standard Specification for Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
ASTM A500:2010
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
AASHTO M 111
and Steel Products
ASTM A536-84
Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
(2009)
ASTM F594-09e1 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
ASTM A276-10 Standard specification for stainless steel bars and shapes.
Standard Specification for High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel, up to

ASTM A588:2010 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance
Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
ASTM A123:2009
and Steel Products .
Standard Practice for Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings
ASTM A385:2011
(Hot Dip)
Page 12-13
AASHTO ASTM
Title
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic

ASTM D790:2011
Stainless Steel Pipe
Standard Test Method for Short Beam Strength of Polymer Matrix
ASTM D2344
Composite Materials and Their Laminates
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
ASTM E84:2012
Materials
ASTM C478:2011 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C497:2005 Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile
Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air
ASTM C1244-11
Pressure (Vacuum) Test Prior to Backfill
ASTM Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed,
A497/A497M-07 for Concrete.
Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
ASTM A185
Concrete .
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars,
2008 Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
ASTM B209 -
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2010
ASTM.194M-10a. Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
2010 Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
ASTM A240 / Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel
A240M - 11b Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
ASTM A48:2008 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
ASTM Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure of

D1599:1999 Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings.
Standard specification for electrofusion type polyethylene fittings for
ASTM F1055-11 outside diameter controlled polyethylene and corsslinked polyethylene
(PEX) pipe and tubing.
ASTM D638 - 10 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
ASTM F738M-
Standard specification for stainless steel metric bolts, screws and studs.
02(2008).
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi
ASTM A307-10
Tensile Strength.
ASTM D6951M- Standard Test Method for Use of the Dynamic Cone Penetrometer in
09. Shallow Pavement Applications.
Table 12-2: Designations and titles for BS, BS EN, and DIN standards
BS BS EN
Title
Specification for unsaturated polyester resin systems for low pressure fibre
BS:3532-1990
reinforced plastics.
Epoxide resin systems for glass fibre reinforced plastics: Pre-impregnating
BS:3534-1964
systems, Part 2.
Page 12-14
BS BS EN
Title
Specification for E glass fibre rovings for reinforcement of polyester and

BS:3691-1990
epoxy resin systems
Specification for E glass fibre chopped strand mat for reinforcement of
BS:3496-1989
polyester and other liquid laminating systems
Woven glass fibre fabrics for plastics reinforcement. Specification for
BS:3396-1987
desized fabrics.
Specification for glass reinforced plastics (GRP) pipes, joints and fittings
BS:5480-1990
for use for water supply or sewerage
BSI 2494-1986 Specification for elastomeric joint rings for pipework and pipelines.
Plastics piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage and

sewerage. Structured-wall piping systems of unplasticized poly(vinyl
BS EN 13476-2007 chloride) (PVC-U), polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE).
Specifications for pipes and fittings with smooth internal
Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas. Design
BSI EN 124:1994
requirements, type testing, marking, quality control.
BS 3505-1968 Upvc pipe material and specifications
BS EN 1092- Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and
1:2007+A1:2013 accessories, PN designated. Steel flanges
Industrial type flooring and stair treads. Glass reinforced plastics (GRP)
BS 4592-6-2008 moulded open mesh gratings and protective barriers.
Specification for acceptance tests for centrifugal, mixed flow and axial
BS 5316-1:1976 pumps. Class C tests
BS 5911 Part
Precast Concrete Pipes and Fittings
100:1998
Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and above-ground
BS EN ISO 1452-2-
drainage and sewerage under pressure. Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride)
2009
(PVC U). Pipes.
Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in water
BS EN 681-2-2000
and drainage applications. Thermoplastic elastomers.
BS EN 1092- Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and
2:1997 accessories, PN designated. Cast iron flanges.
General introduction to standards for preparation of steel substrates
BS 7079-2009
before application of paints and related products.
BS EN ISO 1461- Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
2009 Specifications and test methods.
Copper and copper alloys. Profiles and rectangular bar for general
BS EN 12167-1998
purposes.
BS EN
Specification for masonry units, clay units
771-1-2011
BS EN Method of test for masonry units. Determinarion of net and gross dry
772-13-2000 density of masonry units (except for natural stones)
Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water pipelines.
BS EN 545:2010
Requirements and test methods
Page 12-15
BS BS EN
Title
Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for sewerage
BS EN 598: 2007
applications. Requirements and test methods
BS EN 1401-1- Plastics piping system for non-pressure underground ... for the installation
2009 of Unplasticised PVC pipe work for gravity drains and sewers.
Plastics piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage and
BS EN 13598- sewerage. Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U), polypropylene (PP)
1:2010 and polyethylene (PE). Specifications for ancillary fittings including
shallow inspection chambers
Plastics piping systems for water supply with or without pressure. Glass-
BS EN1796:2103
reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP)
BS EN 14364:
Plastic piping system for drainage and sewerage with or without pressure
2006+A1:2008
BS 5750-8:1991,
EN 29004- Quality systems Guide to quality management and quality systems
2:1993,ISO 9004- elements for services
2:1991
BS EN 13476-2 PVC Pipes for Non-pressure Drainage Sewerage, Annex F (normative)
:2007 Utilisation of non-virgin PE material
All activities relating to this section of the standard specification shall comply with the following or approved equal
standards.
12.1.3 Materials
Contractor shall provide storm drainage pipes in compliance with the following general items:
1. At each location where a pipe is to be installed, the Contract plans will specify the size and approximate length
along with the requirements for each approved option at that location as shown on the Contract plans.
2. Contractor may utilize any of the pipes listed within for any storm drain application, unless otherwise shown on
the Contract plans within restrictions noted in Chapter 4, Volume I of the Abu Dhabi Road Drainage Manual
pertaining to minimum and maximum cover depths, bedding conditions and material/corrosion protection usage
restrictions.
3. Drainage gravity sewer pipes may be GRP-glass reinforced plastic, RTRP-reinforced thermosetting resin, RCP-
reinforced concrete, corrugated steel, corrugated aluminium alloy, PVC- polyvinyl chloride or CPM-corrugated
polyethylene materials at the option of the Contractor unless otherwise shown on the Contract plans or included
in the BOQ.
4. Underdrain pipe shall be perforated and may consist of, polyvinyl chloride pvc, Upvc or GRP materials at the
option of the Contractor unless otherwise shown on the Contract plans or included in the BOQ.
a. Perforations shall consist of slots meeting the size and opening area requirements listed in AASHTO M 252.
Inside diameter and diameter tolerances shall conform to the requirements of either AASHTO M 252 or
AASHTO M 278.
5. All contiguous pipes and all pipes in close proximity shall be of the same kind and material. Special sections,
fittings, elbows, branch connections, end sections, connectors, coupling, and other such items shall be of the
same type and material as the pipe to which they are attached.
6. Each pipe type and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, unless otherwise accepted by the
Engineer.
7. Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and soundness of all materials, including the proper handling and
storage of storm drain materials.
8. All water required for testing and cleaning the pipelines shall be potable water or irrigation water and shall be
provided by the Contractor at his cost. All inspection requests shall be provided to the Engineer for at least 24
hours before his intention to test a section. Note that acceptance of testing shall not relieve Contractor from any
Page 12-16
of the responsibilities and obligations under the Department of Transport Conditions of Contract and Schedule of
Further Requirements
9. For the storm drainage pressure pipe material requirements and specification refer to Section 12.19.
12.1.3.1 Submittals
Contractor shall submit for Engineer’s approval, a detailed description of the types of pipe materials, proposed
trenching operations, dewatering system and shoring methods prior to the commencement of storm drain construction.
Submittals shall also include the following items:
a. Manufacturer’s literature for materials used, including:
1. Pipe manufacturer’s name, address and contact numbers
2. Suppliers name, address and contact numbers
3. Product name description and detailed specifications
4. Material safety data sheets for each material
5. Storage and handling procedures
6. Manufacturer’s complete and detailed installation instructions. Instructions shall cover the means of
assembly, testing procedures and subsequent backfilling and Quality Control.
b. Manufacturer’s certification of compliance with these specifications. Records of all tests and inspections shall be
maintained by the manufacturer and Contractor and two copies of all test certificates shall be delivered to the
Owner
c. Detailed design of the pipes and fittings that he proposes to supply including calculations and all design
parameters used
d. Contractor shall perform field demonstrations, if required by the Engineer, to verify the adequacy of
recommendations.
e. At the Engineer request, prior to transporting any of the materials to the site, the Contractor shall submit two
samples of each type of material for the approval of the Owner and shall carry out the required tests as per these
standard Specifications. Approved samples will be retained by the Engineer until the completion of the Contract.
f. Shop drawings as required in Chapter 1, Section 1.15.4 of these standard specifications.
12.1.3.2 Pipe Handling

Contractor shall comply with the following requirements for pipe handling:
1. Load, transport, unload, and otherwise handle pipe and fittings to prevent damage of any kind. Handle and
transport pipe with equipment designed, constructed and arranged to prevent damage to pipe, lining and coating.
2. Do not permit bare chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids or cradles to come in contact with pipe. Use nylon
straps around pipe for lift when relocating pipe with crane or backhoe. Do not lift pipe using hooks at each end
of pipe.
3. Place pipe along project site where storm water or other water will not enter or pass through pipe.
4. Thermoplastic pipes shall be protected from sunlight ultraviolet damage by storing under cover.
5. Hoist pipe from trench side into trench only by means of sling of canvas, leather, nylon or similar material.
6. Stack pipe on timbers.
7. Do not use petroleum based lubricant for pipe jointing
12.1.3.3 Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) Pipe & Couplings

a. General
Pipe manufacturers must be members of, affiliated international standard organization, a quality control or certification
authority relevant to the pipes or fittings and couplings proposed for incorporation in the works and must be approved
by the Engineer.
Page 12-17
b. Components
1. A thermosetting resin type pipe, GRP pipes are machine made fibreglass reinforced plastic mortar pipes with
flexible gasket joints and fittings. GRP pipes shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN 1796 & BS EN
14364:2006+A1:2008 and conform to the requirements ASTM D3262, ASTM D3840 and ASTM D3839 for
materials and installation procedures including jointing, trenching, pipe installation, backfill, stiffness and
deflection.
2. Joints, couplings and fittings shall be of the bell and spigot, or flanged type having a rubber O ring(s) or flexible
elastomeric gaskets. Elastomeric seals (gaskets) shall be in accordance with ASTM F477, or per manufacturer's
recommendations and as approved by the Engineer.
3. Laminating resin (type) and reinforcement (grade) determine the classification of reinforced plastic mortar pipes
and fittings. Resin system used shall comply with the requirements of the above-referenced specifications for
ASTM Type I and Grade I (B.S. 3532) for polyester thermosetting resins and with ASTM Type 2 and Grade 2
(B.S. 3534) for epoxy resin systems. Specification for epoxy resin materials shall comply with the requirements
of ASTM D1763.
4. Polyester resins shall not be used where subject to pH conditions consistent with salt, brackish or alkali
water/soils. For these situations, Contractor shall provide pipe with vinylester resin, or epoxy resin system.
5. Resins shall be cured to achieve 90 % of the manufacturer’s recommended Barcol hardness value. All pipes and
fittings shall have a resin rich liner of approved vinylester resin having an approximate thickness of 2.5 mm
comprising an innermost layer (i.e., that in contact with the liquid) of 0.6 mm minimum to 0.8 mm maximum
thickness incorporating two layers of C glass. Remainder of the liner construction shall consist of at least two
layers of 450 g/m2 power bound E glass chopped strand mat having glass content between 25 % and 35 % by
weight or the equivalent of chopped strand E glass depending on the method of manufacture. No chopped
strands or sand are allowed in the inner face layer of the resin rich liner within the pipes.
6. Glass for storm water applications: With the exception of the veil in the inner liner of the pipe all fibre
reinforcements shall be either E glass or ECR glass and shall have a surface treatment compatible with the resin
and shall comply with BS:3691-1990 and BS:3496-1989.
7. Aggregates and fillers: Sand aggregates shall be clean, graded silica sand containing no impurities and be in
accordance with BS EN 1796 & BS EN 14364:2006+A1:2008. Fillers as defined in BS EN 1796 & BS EN
14364:2006+A1:2008 shall not be used. For storm water applications silica sand aggregate shall contain no less
than 95% silicon dioxide.
8. Pipe sockets must be moulded with a resin rich liner similar to the pipe construction and as below:
9. All resins to be used shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM D581. All resin systems adopted shall be
at least equal to the requirements of BS 3532 Type B for polyester thermosetting resins and BS 3534 for
vinylester and epoxy resin systems.
10. Pigment additives in the resins will not be permitted for these pipes unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
11. All fibre reinforcements used shall be of E type glass and shall comply with the requirements of BS 3691, BS
3496, BS 3396 and BS 3749 and shall have a surface treatment compatible with the resin.
12. Technique of GRP pipe Centrifugal cast as an alternative manufacturing technology available in UAE and
regions and shall comply with DIN 19565 standards and requirements for centrifugal pipe and shall be approved
by the Owner.
13. For GRP pressure pipes and fittings utilized for exposed service inside pumping facilities or valve/junction
chambers shall be designed to resist all bending stresses, thrust forces, surge pressures, negative pressures
(vacuum) and vibratory forces.
14. All GRP gravity and pressure pipes shall be manufactured utilizing the filament winding process unless an
alternative manufacturing process is approved in writing by the Engineer. Specific details of proposed
alternatives shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
15. All GRP gravity and pressure pipes fittings and couplings shall be capable of withstanding the required working
pressures, tests pressures and loadings expected to be encountered in the field. Testing pressure to be 1.5 times
the rated working pressure.
c. Tolerances for GRP Pipe

GRP pipes shall be fabricated and supplied that meet the following requirements:
Page 12-18
1. Dimensions: Inside diameter, length, wall thickness and squareness for each pipe shall be measured in
accordance with ASTM D3262 and ASTM D3567. Actual outside diameter shall be measured in accordance
with Table 3 of ASTM D3262. Manufacturing tolerance on the internal diameter shall meet the following:
i. ±3.0 mm for pipes over 300 mm diameter up to and including 600 mm diameter,
ii. ±0.5 % of the diameter for pipes over 600 mm diameter.
2. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all pipes shall be supplied in straight lengths of not more than 12 m
effective length excluding special order pipes in nominal lengths of 6 m. Permitted tolerance on the effective
length shall be ±50 mm. No nominal lengths of less than 1 m may be used unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
3. Deviation from straightness of the bore of the pipe shall not exceed 0.3 % of the effective length of the pipe for
pipes up to 5 m laying length to a maximum of ± 15 mm for pipes having a laying length greater than 5 m.
4. Provide minimum average wall thickness of stated design thickness. Provide minimum single point thickness not
be less than 98 % of stated design thickness.
5. Tolerance of fittings for GRP Pressure pipe: Provide tolerance of angle of elbow and angle between main and leg
of wyes or tee to ±2 degrees. Provide tolerance on laying length of fitting to ±50 mm. Bends, tees, and junctions
shall be of mitre construction and the use of steel for any part of these fittings will not be permitted. Tolerance
from the stated value on the angle of change of direction of a bend, tee, or junction shall be ±10 on nominal sizes
up to 600 mm and ±0.50 for larger diameters. Tolerance on the effective length of fittings quoted by the
Contractor shall be ±5 mm. Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings relevant to pipes, couplings, and
fittings to the Engineer for approval.
d. Testing of GRP Pipes

Each GRP pipe and fitting shall be subjected to a visual inspection after off loading at site. Any pipes or fittings which
have been damaged during delivery shall be replaced by the pipe shall be subjected to further hydraulic tests which shall
be carried out by the Contractor. Testing shall consist of the following items:
1. Hydraulic tests: Each and every pipe and fitting shall be subjected to an internal hydraulic pressure test at the
manufacturer's works prior to delivery. Test shall be applied to a pressure equal to 1.5 times the rated working
pressure for each classification of pipe. Test pressure shall be applied for a minimum period of 5 minutes without
signs of leakage.
i. First pipe and every thirtieth thereafter of each diameter shall be maintained at the test pressure for a
minimum of four hours without signs of leakage.
ii. One pipe in every 60 manufactured of each diameter shall be subjected to an external pressure test to 150
kPa for a minimum period of four hours without signs of leakage.
iii. For testing of GRP non pressure pipelines referee to Article 12.1.5.2.
2. Stiffness: A minimum of one pipe for every 30 pipes manufactured shall be tested in accordance with ASTM
D2412 or BS EN 1796 & BS EN 14364:2006+A1:2008. A minimum of one pipe for each size of pipe shall be
tested. GRP pipes and fittings long term specific stiffness shall be as shown on the contract plans or not less than
minimum initial specific stiffness of 2,500 N/m2 as determined by test method described in BS EN 1796 & BS
EN 14364:2006+A1:2008 and ASTM D2412. GRP pipes are manufactured in SN 2500, 5000 and 10000 N/m2
stiffness categories and offer alternative types for mounting depending on the loads.
For pressure piping system applications of GRP pipe stiffness shall be 10000N/m2.
Stiffness for microtunnelling or pipe jacking operations shall be minimum 50,000 N/m2 unless encased in
concrete.
For Non traffic areas SN 2500 pipe stiffness are accepted. For under traffic loads areas GRP pipes stiffness shall
be minimum 5000 N/m2 Contractor shall provide bedding factor calculation to the Engineer for approval. The
design calculation shall be complying with (AASHTO-H-25 or HS-25 loads).
The hoop flexural modulus shall be demonstrated application as the below equation:
The stiffness of the pipe is defined as follows:
Stiffness of the pipe = EI/D3
Where E= Bending modulus of pipe wall circumferentially (N/m2).
I = Moment of inertia of pipe wall per unit length (m4/m)
Page 12-19
D= Nominal diameter in meters.

3. Factory testing Long term strain corrosion resistance: Control testing shall be done on each class and diameter
carried out by the manufacture in accordance with BS EN 1796 & BS EN 14364:2006+A1:2008 on at least
three specimens at each of two strains. These strain levels shall be the strain levels at which failure is predicted
from the strain corrosion type test results to occur at 100 hours and at 1000 hours. No failure shall be below the
lower 95% confidence limit of the type test regression line and at least one specimen at each strain level shall
have failure time above the type test regression line. Failure strains at 60 years shall be calculated from the
results of this quality control test using the least squares method. Value must not be less than 1 %.
4. Longitudinal tensile strength: A minimum of one pipe for every 100 pipes manufactured shall undergo a beam
test in accordance with ASTM D3262. A minimum of one pipe for each size of pipe shall be tested.
5. Deflection test: All GRP pipelines shall be subjected to deflection test at site using a deflectometer or similar
device approved by the Engineer. Deflection shall be calculated as a percentage of the difference between the
measured in-situ diameter (on any axis) and the stated non-deflected diameter divided by the non-deflected
diameter. A reduction in the diameter shall be considered to be a negative deflection. Maximum deflection
criteria for flexible pipes with granular bedding (measured- in-situ) shall be as follows:
i. After completion of surround (at Contractors option): 0%
ii. Within one month after backfilling trench (mandatory): 2%
iii. Immediately prior to final assembly and pressure test (mandatory): 4 %
6. Pipes shall have an initial ultimate resistance to longitudinal tensile force per unit of circumference of not less
than shown Table 12-3.
Table 12-3: Initial ultimate resistance of GRP pipes
Initial ultimate resistance
Diameter (mm)
(N/mm)
Up to and including 600 mm nominal diameter 150
Greater than 600 mm up to and including 1200 mm nominal diameter 200
Greater than 1200 mm up to and including 2400 mm nominal diameter 300
7. Curing: A minimum of one pipe for every 30 pipes manufactured shall undergo a Barcol hardness test in
accordance with ASTM D2583. A minimum of one pipe for each size of pipe shall be tested. Sample pipe shall
also withstand a commercial acetone test on the internal portion of the laminate.
8. Loss of ignition: A minimum of one pipe for every 30 pipes manufactured shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM D2584
9. Joint tests: A minimum of two pipes in every 100 pipes manufactured shall be joined and tested in accordance
with Section 6.5 of ASTM D3262
10. Other works tests: Quality control testing shall include thorough checks of all raw materials to ensure that they
comply with the relevant standards. Each pipe and fitting shall also be subjected to a complete visual inspection
before shipment.
11. Test failure: Any pipe failing during the above tests will be rejected. An additional five pipes manufactured
either side of the failed pipe shall then be tested, and if any of these ten pipes fails, then every pipe shall be
tested. Only pipes passing all of the preceding tests will be accepted. All the failed pipe will be replaced at the
contractor cost and at no additional cost to the Owner
12. Internal surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be smooth and both the internal and external surfaces shall be
clean and free from defects such as protruding fibbers, voids, pits, bubbles, cracks, blisters, tackiness and foreign
matter that would impair their performance in service.
13. Additionally testing requirements shall meet all the requirements of Sub-article d of Article 12.1.3.3
12.1.3.4 Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe (RTRP) & Couplings

a. Components
RTRP shall comply with the following requirements:
Page 12-20
1. Reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP) shall meet all the general requirements of GRP pipes included in
Sub-article c of Article 12.1.3.3. Standard classification of machine-made reinforced thermosetting resin pipe
shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D2310
Types of pipe acceptable are as follows:
i. Filament wound reinforced thermosetting resin pipe shall conform to ASTM D2996
ii. Centrifugally cast reinforced thermosetting resin pipe shall conform to ASTM D2997
iii. Custom contact--moulded glass-fibre reinforced thermosetting resin ducts shall conform to ASTM
D3982)
iv. For non- restrained pipes and joints mainly for underground use, this product range consists of
Thermosetting resistant polyester resin, Fiberglas Reinforcements and fine Silica sand aggregates
conforming to AWWA C-950/BS / BS EN 1796 & BS EN 14364:2006+A1:2008 (for Pressure and non
Pressure pipe system), and DIN 16869, ISO 10369 .
2. Filament wound reinforced thermosetting resin pipe shall be manufactured by filament winding pre-stressed;
preimpregnated continuous glass fibre roving’s in pre-determined dual helix angle winding pattern. Internal
surface of the pipe and fittings shall be smooth and both the internal and external surfaces shall be clean and free
from defects such as protruding fibres, voids, bubbles, cracks, blisters, tackiness and foreign materials. Structural
wall of filament wound reinforced thermosetting resin pipes shall be manufactured by winding continuous glass
roving’s in a pre-determined winding pattern. No chopped glass filaments shall be used in the structural wall.
Sand shall not be incorporated in the structural wall. Winding angle for circumferential layers shall be about 800
and for the helical layers, it should be between 550 and 650, measured from the axis of the pipe to ensure high
rigidity and hoop strength.
b. Tolerances for RTRP Pipe

Reinforced thermosetting resin pipe shall meet all the tolerance requirements of GRP Pipes included in Sub-article c of
Article 12.1.3.3.
c. Testing of RTRP Pipe

Testing requirements for RTRP -reinforced thermosetting resin pipe shall meet all the requirements of GRP pipes
included in Sub-article d of Article 12.1.3.3 and 12.1.5.2.
12.1.3.5 Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP), & Couplings

a. Components
RCP shall comply with the following requirements:
1. RCP shall be round and conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 170 or ASTM C76M and as stated herein.
2. Wall thickness and steel area for all classes of pipe which are of a diameter not set forth in AASHTO M 170 or
ASTM C76M and/or BS599 Part-1 but within the maximum and minimum diameter limits set forth therein, shall
be determined by interpolation from data given in the tables for pipes of diameters next smaller and next larger,
respectively.
3. Reinforcement shall consist of bars meeting the requirements of Chapter 5 of these standard specifications. All
reinforcement shall be as specified.
4. Reinforcement steel in the pipe barrel shall be tied to the reinforcement steel in the pipe joint. Reinforcement
shall be fabricated as a rigid cage of bars or wire fabric. Transverse reinforcement shall be fabricated either as
complete hoops, welded or lapped, or as a continuous helix. If the transverse reinforcement is formed as a
cylindrical helix, both ends of the cage shall be finished off as a complete hoop. Splices shall be either welded or
lapped and tightly wired. Either lap or butt welds may be used, but the weld must develop the full strength of the
bar and when required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit for testing, samples of welds proposed for
use. Lap of unwelded splices shall extend 30 diameters when bars are being used for reinforcement and 40
diameters when wire is being used.
5. The categorization of pipe into Classes, pipe thickness, reinforcement sizes and areas, number of bars and its
arrangement the number of cages, reinforcement cover, D-Load and ultimate load test shall be exclusively as per
the requirements of ASTM C76M only.
6. The minimum cement content, surface voids, water absorption, hydrostatic tests ( Deflection, Straight and
Page 12-21
Sheer), Straightness shall exclusively be in compliance with BS 5911 Part 100.
b. Tolerances
1. Reinforced concrete pipes shall have a minimum nominal length of 2.5m and a maximum length of 6m unless
otherwise specified or for special purposes such as curves or closures.
i. Use steel made forms with butt joints throughout when casting pipes.
a) The surfaces of the forms adjacent to the pipe walls shall be smooth and true.
b) Forms shall be sufficiently tight with suitable gaskets provided at all form joints to prevent leakage of
mortar.
c) The forms shall be braced and sufficiently stiff to withstand without detrimental deformation all
operations incidental to the placement and compaction of concrete within the form.
d) The forms and end rings shall be constructed such that the pipe when manufactured has circular and
cylindrical inner surfaces and they can be stripped from the pipe without damage to the pipe or its
surfaces.
e) Clean and oil the forms at the start of each continuous production. Discard defective forms and end
rings or adequately repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2. Accurately place reinforcement steel in the concrete wall. The minimum concrete cover over reinforcement shall
be 25mm.Permissible variations shall be within the tolerances specified in ASTM C76 or BS 5911.
i. Tie the reinforcement steel in the pipe barrel to the reinforcement steel in the pipe joint. Fabricate the
reinforcement as a rigid cage of bars or wire fabric. Fabricate transverse inforcement either as complete
hoops, welded or lapped, or as a continuous helix. When the transverse reinforcement is formed as a
cylindrical helix, finish off both ends of the cage as a complete hoop.
ii. Use lapped or butt welded type splices.
3. Butt weld splice must develop the full strength of the bar .submit for testing, samples of welds proposed for use
when required by the Engineer.
4. Lap splice must extend 30 diameters when bars are being used for reinforcement and 40 diameters when wire is
being used.
i. Use suitable devices to hold the cage of reinforcement in its circular shape, and to maintain the cage in
place within the forms during the placing and consolidating of the concrete.
ii. Use sufficient longitudinal reinforcement to provide a rigid cage of reinforcement. Providing enough
longitudinal steel to provide a cage sufficient to retain its shape
c. Testing of RCP Pipe

Manufacturer testing of concrete pipe joints
When a particular type of pipe joint design, material or joining method has not previously been tested and approved, the
following test shall be made on one test length of the assembled storm sewer pipe to qualify the design, material or
method of joining the pipe. At the option of the Engineer, additional testing may be requested if subsequent field testing
of installed pipe indicates difficulty in obtaining properly joined pipe. Tests will be conducted at the manufacturer’s
yard, and the manufacturer will be required to make such space and facilities available as required to conduct the tests
in an efficient and workmanlike manner.
The following type tests shall be performed at the beginning of each contract:
1. D-Load test (0.3 mm crack) and cover to reinforcement as per ASTM C76M. The D-Load test shall be
performed for one in 250 pipes of production.
2. Hydrostatic tests (Deflection, straight and sheer) as per BS 5911 part-100.
3. Surface voids, water absorption, straightness surface evenness.
The following Routine Quality Control Test shall be performed for each batch:
• Straightness and Compressive Strength,
• D-Load and Hydrostatic ( as Instructed by the Engineer),
• Visual inspection, etc.
Page 12-22
Cracks in an installed concrete pipe that exceed 0.25 mm in width shall be appraised by the Engineer and assessed for
structural integrity, environmental conditions, and the design service life of the pipe. Cracks having greater widths, or
otherwise determined to be detrimental, shall be sealed by a method approved by the Engineer and as per the
requirements of Chapter 32 Section 32.6.1 and section 32.5.6 of these standard specifications.
The below method to be considered for Testing of RCP pipes:
Hydrostatic pressure tests on pipes in straight alignment
Hydrostatic pressure tests on pipes in straight alignment shall be made in accordance with the procedure outlined in
paragraph 8(a) of AASHTO M 198, except that they shall be performed on an assembly consisting of not less than three
nor more than five pipe sections selected from stock by the Engineer and assembled in accordance with standard
installation instructions issued by the manufacturer. End sections shall be bulk headed and restrained against internal
pressure.
Hydrostatic pressure tests on pipes in maximum deflected position
Upon completion of the test for pipe in straight alignment, the test section shall be deflected until at least two of the
joints have been deflected to the maximum amount shown in the manufacturer’s standard installation instructions.
When thus deflected, there shall be no leakage at the joints from an applied internal hydrostatic pressure of 35 kPa.
For testing non pressure pipelines refer to 12.1.5.2.
For testing of pressure pipelines refer to Article 12.19.3.4.
Hydrostatic pressure test on pipe under differential load.
Test sections shall be suitably supported so that one of the pipes of the test assembly is suspended freely between
adjacent pipes, bearing only on the joints. Suspended pipe shall then be loaded, at its midpoint, in addition to the mass
of the pipe, in accordance with the following schedule, listed in Table 12-4.
Table 12-4: Loading schedule
Diameter (mm) Load (kg)
350 3,500
450 4,000
550 4,500
600 and over 5,000
While under this load, the stressed joints shall show no leakage when subjected to an internal hydrostatic pressure of 35
kPa. At the option of the manufacturer, 0.5 of the load may be applied on the bell.
d. End plugs, Joints and Gaskets

All RCP joints shall be push fit gasket type joints, meeting the requirements of the following items:
1. All bell and spigot concrete culvert pipe shall be joined with rubber gaskets. Joints and gasket material shall
meet the requirements of AASHTO M 198 or ASTM C990. Length and cross-sectional diameter of the gasket,
the annular space provided for the gasket, and all other joint details shall be such as to produce a watertight joint
which shall not leak when pulled 13 mm over and above the initial jointing allowance.
2. Plan of the ends of the pipes shall be perpendicular to their longitudinal axes.
3. Synthetic gaskets shall be formed from a compound made exclusively from neoprene or SBR (styrene butadiene
rubber), and shall contain no filler, reclaimed rubber or any deleterious substances. Stock shall be extruded or
moulded and cured in such a manner that any cross-section shall be dense, homogeneous and free from porosity,
blisters, pitting and other imperfections. Stock shall be extruded or moulded with smooth surfaces to the
specified size within a tolerance of +6 percent on any dimension, measured at any cross-section.
4. Pipe end plugs shall be precast, reinforced concrete plugs as shown on the Contract plans. Concrete shall comply
with the requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these standard specifications, with concrete being Class
C25. Reinforcing bars shall be complying with the requirements of Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel, of these
standard specifications.
5. Upstream and downstream pipe plugs shall match the particular pipe joint configuration and be supplied with a
rubber gasket as necessary. Inner and outer surfaces of the precast plug shall be coated with coal tar epoxy as
specified in the applicable requirements of Section 24.5 of Chapter 24 of these standard specifications.
6. Pipe stub end shall be wrapped with two layers of 0.25 mm thick polyethylene sheeting before backfilling. As an
Page 12-23
option, the Contractor may use manufactured end caps, meeting the same joint and material requirements as
specified for the associated pipe, as approved by the Engineer. End plug shall be same as pipe material
Synthetic gaskets shall conform to the requirements in Table 12-5.
Table 12-5: Synthetic gaskets
Property ASTM Value
Neoprene or SBR content by volume ASTM D412 Minimum 70 %
Tensile strength ASTM D412 18 mPa Minimum,
Elongation at breaking point ASTM D412 420 %
Shore durometer (hardness) ASTM D2240 50 to 70 (Dimensionless)
Test for accelerated aging of After 7 days in air at 70 ±1 °C or after 48 hours in

vulcanized rubber by the oxygen ASTM D572 oxygen at 70 ±1 °C and 2 mPa, the tensile strength and
pressure method. elongation shall not be less than 65 % of the original.
e. Chloride and Sulphate Protection

Contractor shall provide corrosion protection where shown on the Contract plans or as required for protection from soil
of high chloride/sulphate contents conditions, high ground water table levels and per the requirements of Chapter 4, of
the DoT Road Drainage Manual, as required or approved by the Engineer and per the items listed below:
1. Protection includes a protective coating to the outside and the installation of a flexible PVC sheet liner with
continuous locking extensions in reinforced concrete pipe and auxiliary structures to effectively protect the exposed
concrete surfaces from corrosion.
i. Exterior of the pipe shall be coated with 2-layers of coal tar epoxy type protective coatings, per the
requirements of Section 24.5 of Chapter 24 of these Standard Specifications.
ii. Interior of all reinforced concrete pipe and fittings shall be provided with a plastic liner (PVC) covering the
complete interior surface of the pipe. Liner shall be permanently locked to the pipe wall by a mechanical
locking extension embedded integrally with the pipe at fabrication. Once cast into the pipe, the liner shall be
permanently and physically attached to the concrete by the locking mechanism and shall not rely on an
adhesive bond unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
a) Polyvinylchloride resin shall constitute not less than 99 %, by weight, of the resin used in the formulation
of the liner. Copolymer resins will not be permitted.
b) Liner shall be bonded to concrete by means of integral locking extensions embedded in the concrete shall
have a minimum thickness of 1.65 mm. Locking extensions shall be of the same material as the liner plate
and shall be integral with the sheets of liner plate. Locking extensions shall have an approved cross section
with a minimum height of 10 mm and a minimum web thickness of 2 mm. They shall be 60 mm (tolerance
of ±5 mm) apart and shall be such that when the extensions are embedded in concrete, the liner will be held
permanently in place.
c) Welding strips shall have a thickness of 3 mm and maximum thickness of 4 mm. Joint strips shall have a
minimum thickness of 2 mm.
d) Joint strips shall be 100 mm (tolerance of ±1 mm in width and shall have each edge bevelled prior to
application.
e) Welding strips shall be 25 mm (tolerance of ±2 mm) in width. All welding and outside corner strips shall
have edges bevelled at time of manufacture.
f) Liner must be continuous and free of pinholes both across the joints and in the liner itself.
g) Installation of all plastic liner shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, the
approved shop drawings and as follows:
1) Liner shall be applied and secured to the forms and inspected and approved by a representative from an
approved independent testing laboratory prior to the placement of reinforcing steel.
Page 12-24
2) Qualifications of installers: Installation of the plastic liner to the forms and other surfaces shall be
considered as highly specialized work, and personnel performing this type of work at the pipe
manufacturer's plant shall be trained in methods of installation and shall demonstrate their ability to the
representative from the independent testing laboratory.
3) Placing plastic liner: All liner installed in pipe shall be positioned so that the locking extensions are
parallel with the axis of the pipe. Liner shall be set flush with the inner edge of the bell end of a pipe
section and shall extend past the spigot end as per the manufacturers for recommendations making a
proper liner joint, dependent upon the type of liner joint to be made with the adjoining pipe.
4) Concrete placement: Concrete placed against the liner shall be carefully vibrated so as to avoid damage
to the liner and produce a dense, homogeneous concrete securely anchoring the locking extensions into
the concrete. External vibrators shall be used particularly along the lower terminal edge of the plastic
liner. If approved stiffeners are used along locking extensions of liner installed in forms for pipe, they
shall be withdrawn completely during the placement of concrete in the forms. Concrete shall be re-
vibrated to consolidate the concrete in the void spaces caused by the withdrawal of the stiffeners.
5) Removing forms: In removing forms, care shall be taken to protect the liner from damage. Sharp
instruments shall not be used to pry forms from lined surfaces. When forms are removed any nails that
remain in the liner shall be pulled without tearing the liner and the resulting holes clearly marked. Form
tie holes shall be marked before ties are broken off and all areas of serious abrasion of the liner shall be
marked.
6) Liner in pipe shall be cleaned for inspection and spark tested with a spark detector and any defects shall
be repaired prior to shipment of the pipe.
h) Field joining of liner:
1) No field joint shall be made to the liner until the lined pipe or structure has been backfilled and tests as
described in Article 12.1.4.3. Where groundwater is encountered, the joint shall not be made until
pumping of the groundwater has been discontinued and no visible leakage is evident at the joint. Liner
at joints shall be free of all mortar and other foreign materials and shall be clean and dry before joints
are made.
2) Jointing of liner shall be done by heat bonding method per recommendations and instructions by the
manufacturer.
3) Hot joint compound shall not be brought in contact with the liner.
4) No coating of any kind shall be applied over any joint, comer, or welding strip, except where non-skid
coating is applied to liner surfaces.
5) Adhesive shall not be applied to the surfaces of cement mortar in pipe joints, or to the surfaces of liner
or joint strips opposite said mortar and concrete surfaces.
i) Liner in pipe shall be cleaned for inspection and spark tested with a spark detector and any defects shall be
repaired prior to shipment of the pipe at no cost to the Owner.
Testing of RCP gravity pipes shall meet all the requirements of Article 12.1.3.5.
For testing of PVC liners refer to the below Sub-article f of Article 12.1.3.4.
f. Testing of PVC Liners

Manufacturer’s compliance certificate shall include the independent testing results that confirm the plastic liner meets
the requirements listed in this section. Certificate shall demonstrate at minimum the properties shown in Table 12-6, and
Table 12-6 and shall comply with the other requirements listed as follows:
Table 12-6: PVC liners
Property at 43°C ASTM Initial Under chemical resistance

Tensile strength D412 15 mPa min.) 14.5 mPa min.)
Elongation at breaking point D412 200 % min. 200 % min.
1-sec. 50-60 ±5
Shore durometer (hardness) D2240
10-sec. 35-50 ±5
Weight change D149 +1.5 % max -
Page 12-25
1. Tensile specimens shall be prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM D412 using Die B. Weight change
specimens shall be 25 mm by 75 mm samples. Specimens for testing of initial physical properties may be taken
from liner sheet and welding strip at any time prior to final acceptance of the work.
2. Chemical resistance: After conditioning to constant weight at 43º C, tensile specimens and weight change
specimens shall be exposed to the following solutions for a period of 112 days at 25º C ±3º. At 28 day intervals,
tensile specimens and weight change specimens shall be removed from each of the chemical solutions (refer to
Table 12-7) and tested in accordance with ASTM D412. If any specimen fails to meet the 112 day requirement
before completion of the 112 day exposure, the material will be subject to rejection.
Table 12-7: Chemical solutions
Chemical solution Concentration
Sulphuric acid 20 %*
Sodium hydroxide 5%
Ammonium hydroxide 5 %*
Nitric acid 1 %*
Ferric chloride 1%
Sodium hypochlorite 1%
Soap 0.1 %
Detergent (linear alkyl benzyl sulfonate or LAS) 0.1 %
Bacteriological BOD not less than 700 ppm.
*Volumetric percentages of concentrated C.P. grade reagents.
3. Field tests: Surface of the liner shall be cleaned to permit visual inspection and spark testing. All welds shall be
physically tested with a non-destructive probing method. All liner, when installed, may be tested by the
Engineer, using a spark type detector set at 20,000 volts.
4. All areas of liner failing to meet the field test shall be properly repaired and retested at contractor cost.
5. Any spark testing of liner by the Contractor for his own purpose shall be done with a detector approved by the
Engineer.
6. Each transverse welding strip which extends to a lower edge of the liner shall be tested. Welding strips shall
extend below the liner providing a tab.
7. A 4.5 kg pull will be applied normal to the face of the pipe by means of a spring balance. Liner adjoining the
welding strip shall be held against the concrete during application of the force. 4.5 kg pull shall be maintained if
a weld failure develops, until no further separation occurs. Defective welds shall be retested after repairs have
been made. Tabs shall be trimmed away neatly after the welding strip has passed inspection.
8. Contractor shall provide all equipment required to test the liner in the manner recommended by the manufacturer
and as described herein. Contractor shall also provide qualified approved personnel to perform the testing.
12.1.3.6 Metal Pipe, Couplings & Fittings

This Specification covers steel and aluminium corrugated pipe, pipe arch materials. For ductile iron pipe specifications
and requirements refer to Article 12.19.1.7.
a. Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic and Bitumen Coated

Pipe, coupling bands and fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A760. Pipe classification type, Type I, IA, II,
IIA, III, or IIIA, shall be as shown on the Contract plans unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Pipe shall be
fabricated from steel sheet with zinc and aramid fibre composite coatings in accordance with ASTM A885, with a
further asphaltic bitumen post-fabrication coating in accordance with ASTM A849 and A862.
Special sections, such as elbows and prefabricated end sections shall conform to the applicable requirements of
AASHTO M 36M, M 190M, M 196M, and M 245M.
Gaskets for all water-resistant joints shall be a continuous band or strip, at least 180 mm wide and 13 mm thick. Rubber
for the gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1056.
Page 12-26
Watertight joints, when specified on the project Contract plans, shall use O -ring gaskets, with appropriate diameters as
specified under AASHTO M 36M, and conforming to the technical requirements of AASHTO M 198. Watertight joints
may substitute or be used when water-resistant joints are required.
Pipe fabrication shall normally have continuous water tight seams depending of the classification and use requirements,
however, for the case where riveted seams are approved for use, selection of the revert material shall be carefully made
to avoid less noble material type corrosion.
Coupling bands for field joints for each type of corrugated steel pipe shall maintain pipe alignment during construction
and prevent infiltration of water and surrounding fill material during the life of the installation. Coupling bands shall be
the correct type to match the associated pipe type as per the requirements of ASTM A760. All coupling shall be
equipped with gaskets.
Performance of joints and coupling bands shall be in accordance with ASTM A798. Bolts and nuts for all types of
coupling bands shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F568.
Repairs of damaged coatings shall be done in accordance with ASTM A780.
b. Corrugated steel structural plate, metallic and bitumen coated, for Field-Bolted Pipe,
Pipe-Arches, and Arches
Corrugated steel structural plate, fasteners and accessory materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM A761 and
AASHTO M 167 with the addition that the plate shall be zinc and aramid fibre composite coated with a full asphaltic-
bitumen coating to both inner and external faces in accordance with ASTM A885, ASTM A849, ASTM A862 and
AASHTO M 190 or M 243.
All fastening hardware, bolts, nuts and washers shall meet ASTM specifications A761 and AASHTO M 167, and be
zinc coated in accordance with ASTM A153.
Repair of damaged coatings shall be done in accordance to ASTM A780.
c. Bituminous Coated Corrugated Aluminium Culvert Pipe

Aluminium corrugated culvert pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 196. Pipe shall be post-fabrication
coated with bituminous material, at the factory, meeting requirements of AASHTO M 190. Invert paving shall be
nominal diameter of dimensions as referred to in AASHTO M 196 and AASHTO M 197 shall be defined as meaning
the minimum inside dimension of the pipe and the type shown on the Contract plans.
Connecting bands shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 196, except that the minimum width of band for
helical pipe shall be 300 mm.
If headwalls or flared end sections are not included in the BOQ nor shown in the Contract plans, the inlet and outlet of
all culverts fabricated of 16 or 14 gauge sheets shall be reinforced in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Pipe fabricated by riveting shall conform to AASHTO M 196.
Pipes fabricated with a continuous helical lock seam parallel to the corrugations shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 197 for Type I without perforations.
d. Bituminous Coated Corrugated Aluminium Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arches and
Arches
Aluminium corrugated plates, fasteners and accessories for plate pipes, pipe arches and arches shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M 219. All exterior and interior surfaces shall be coated with asphaltic-bituminous material
meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 190 or AASHTO M 243.
Plates shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy 5052-H141, with chemical properties per ASTM B209 Mechanical
properties shall conform to AASHTO M 219
Ribs shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy 6061-T6, with properties per ASTM B209 and ASTM B308.
Nuts and bolts and other special securing devices shall be galvanized steel and shall meet the standards of ASTM A307
with the zinc coating in compliance with ASTM A153. Stainless steel nuts, bolts, and other securing items shall comply
with ASTM A193. The shape of the nuts, bolts, and other special securing items shall be the same geometric
configuration as recommended by the manufacturer of the plates. All bolts or other special securing items, which
require a bend, shall be bent to final position before galvanizing operation.
Page 12-27
e. Tolerances of Corrugated Steel Pipes

All the corrugates steel pipe tolerances shall be in accordance with the pipe classification type I,IA,II,IIA,III and IIIA
and complying with the manufacturers requirements and standard specifications for each type in the above sections.
The installation alignment tolerances shall be as shown in the below table.
Table 12-8: Installation alignment tolerances of corrugated steel pipe
Tolerances
Installation Alignment Tolerances
Vertical Deviation *
Design Grade Horizontal Deviation
Inches/100 feet
>1 % Horizontal Joint 1½
≤1 % Depletion not to exceed 1
≤ 0.5 % Industry standards ±0.5
Note: For cross culverts increase tolerance by 50 percent
Depletions greater than 5% are unusual.
f. Testing of Corrugated Steel Pipe

Observations of corrugated steel pipe and pipe arch for compliance and tests of the type and quantity shall be in
accordance with applicable test standards as per ASTM A760, and ASTM A885, AASHTO T 241 and AASHTO T 49.
Testing of zinc coatings shall be in accordance with ASTM A90 and AASHTO M 36, and the asphaltic bituminous
coating tested in accordance with AASHTO M 190 for the type specified.
Observations of corrugated aluminium pipe and pipe arches for compliance and tests of the type and quantity shall be in
accordance with the applicable test standards as per AASHTO M 196 and AASHTO M 219. The testing of the asphaltic
bituminous coating shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 190 or AASHTO M 243.
Rubber gaskets for corrugated metal pipe joints shall meet the applicable test standards of ASTM D1056 for flexible
cellular materials - sponge or expanded rubber.
Additionally testing requirements shall meet all the requirements of Section 12.1.4.
12.1.3.7 Plastic Pipe

a. General
• Plastic drain pressure pipe manufactured from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) shall comply with BS 4346.
• PVC gravity pipe line shall comply with BS-EN-14-1 and BS-EN-1437, test method F.
• High-density polyethylene (HDPE) Pressure pipe shall be manufactured and comply with BS6437 or DIN 8075
& DIN 8075 & ASTM F-714, BS EN 12056, DIN 53455, ISO R 527, DIN 53452.
• For Installation of Gravity HDPE pipe shall comply with BS EN 12056, for Fittings shall be manufactured
according to EN 1519 and D3035.
• For Upvc pressure pipe refer to Article 12.19.1.8. For hydrostatic testing of uPVC refer to Sub-article f of Article
12.19.1.8. For non pressure testing of Upvc refer to Article 12.1.5.2.
Magnetic tape shall be used as a locator for all plastic pipes which is installed less than 3 m deep. The tape should be
installed 1 to 2 m below top of ground and centred over the pipe. When feasible, the tape shall be fastened to metallic
appurtenances associated with the installation (i.e. valves, fittings, manhole rings, etc.) in an effort to enhance its
detestability. Magnetic tape shall meet the requirements of Section 12.19.2.
All types of plastic pipe shall be stored in a manner that the pipe will not be deformed as recommended by the
manufacturer. Plastic pipe is subject to potential degradation when exposed to prolonged periods of sunlight. Material
degradation is generally indicated by a discoloration of the pipe. Plastic pipe shall be stored inside a building, under a
cover or covered up totally. Any discoloured pipe will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the project.
For pipe storage, clearly mark each standard and random length of pipe in permanent letters not less than 6 mm high at
intervals of 127 mm or less with at least the following:
1. Manufacturer's code and name or trademark
Page 12-28
2. ASTM F949 (0.32 MPa), cell classification

3. Material
4. Nominal size
5. Factory marked insertion line on spigot end of pipe
6. Manufacturer's code must include day, month, year, shift and plant of manufacture.
Fittings shall be marked with permanent letters not less than 6 mm high with the same information as for pipe storage.
All plastic pipes which are connected to a manhole, junction chamber, catch basin, headwall, inlet or similar structure
shall be installed with an approved manhole connection adapter, pipe collar or water-stop such that each connection is
leak-free and that there is no detrimental affect resulting from the material property characteristic differences between
the plastic pipe and the structure. Connection adapters shall be used to provide additional water tightness and
withdrawal resistance. Connection adapters shall meet the physical properties of ASTM C923. Installation of water
stops shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.
Pipe shall have gasket joints manufactured with a socket configuration, which will prevent improper installation of the
gasket and will ensure that the gasket remains in place during joining operations. The gasket shall be manufactured
from a synthetic elastomeric material and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477. Spigot end of each joint of
pipe shall be marked circumferentially to indicate the proper home mark. Pipe, which is field- cut, shall be chamfered
and the home mark identified in accordance with the applicable criteria.
b. Corrugated High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe

1. Components
Corrugated HDPE pipe, , shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 252 for pipe sizes less than 250 mm in
diameter and AASHTO M 294 for pipe sizes 250 mm in diameter and larger. Pipes shall fulfil the required ring
stiffness according to BS EN 13476 and ASTM F894. For perforated pipe, all sizes shall be perforated in
accordance with AASHTO M 252. Chemical resistance of HDPE shall conform to BS EN 13476-2:2007. .
Corrugated HDPE pipe shall be watertight unless otherwise included in the BOQ or shown in the Contract plans as
perforated HDPE pipe.
HDPE pipe joints, fittings and connections shall be watertight according to the requirements of ASTM D3212,
unless the pipe is perforated. Polyethylene tubing shall be connected with snap-on, screw-on, or wrap-around
fittings and couplings conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 252 or AASHTO M 294. Solvent
cementing of joints will not be permitted.
HDPE pipe, which is manufactured without the standard bell and spigot joint configuration shall be joined by a
heated fusion process in accordance with ASTM D2657. Additional standard specification for HDPE also can find
in the following standards Additional information:. ASTM Pipe Specification F2306, ASTM Installation
Specification D2321, ASTM Gasket Specification F477, ASTM Joint Specification D3212, AASHTO Pipe
Specification M252, AASHTO Pipe Specification M294
2. Testing of HDPE Pipe

HDPE pipe shall conform to the controlled pressure test of 74.5 kappa of air or 7.6 m of water as stipulated in
ASTM D3212 (lab test).
HDPE pipe shall be watertight according to the requirements of ASTM D3212 (91), except that the internal water
pressure test shall be conducted at 14 kPa.
Perforated pipe cannot be hydraulic tested after installation; however it shall be subject to deflection testing after
backfilling as otherwise specified for flexible walled pipes.
Additionally testing requirements shall meet all the requirements of Section 12.1.4
c. Corrugated Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

1. Components
Corrugated PVC sewer pipe with a smooth interior including joints and fittings shall be conform to the
requirements of ASTM F949. Corrugated PVC pipe with smooth interior shall be manufactured as a single
extrusion of the smooth interior and the corrugated outer walls. Corrugated exterior profile must be annular and
seamless.
Page 12-29
Pipes and fittings shall be homogenous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions or other
injurious defects. Pipe shall be made of PVC compound having a minimum cell classification of 12454 as defined
in ASTM D1784 (41). Fillers that lower the tensile strength of the compound or change the minimum cell
classification are not allowed. PVC compounds must contain a minimum of 0.5 % by weight rutile titanium
dioxide, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Owner.
Corrugated PVC pipe and fittings chemical resistance must comply with ASTM D5260, with a cell classification
of S47552.
Minimum corrugated PVC pipe wall thickness when measured in accordance with ASTM D2122 must be as
specified in Table 1 of ASTM F949.
Fittings for PVC corrugated pipe with smooth interior shall conform to ASTM F949 Section 5.2.3 or ASTM F794
Section 7.2.4. To insure compatibility the pipe manufacturer shall provide all fittings. Pipe and fittings must be
homogenous throughout and uniform in colour, capacity, density and other properties. Inside and outside surfaces
must be semi-matte or glossy in appearance and free of chalky, sticky or tacky material. Pipe walls must be free of
cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusions, or other defects that are visible to the naked eye or that may affect
the pipe wall's integrity. Pipe or fittings with abrasions or scratches deeper than 10 % of the wall thickness must
not be used. Joint surfaces, upon which the gasket may bear, must be smooth and free of imperfections, ridges,
fractures or cracks that could adversely affect joint seal.
All joints shall be water-tight, made with integrally-formed bell and spigot gasket connections with gaskets ready
for field assembly. Install joints so that when assembled, the elastomeric gasket will be compressed radically
between the pipe bell and spigot to form a tight seal. Single or double elastomeric gaskets must comply with
ASTM F477 for low-head applications. Use extruded or moulded gaskets cured in such a manner that any cross
section will be dense, homogeneous and free of porosity, blisters, pitting or other imperfections. Double gasket
must be a single piece gasket that fits into the first two full corrugation valleys on the spigot end. Gaskets shall be
shipped and stored in containers that prevent damage from UV exposure and handling.
Lubricant must not have detrimental effect on the gaskets or pipe and must be one recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
Wyes, tees, reducers, elbows, couplings, laterals and other fittings shall be moulded or fabricated and comply with
ASTM F949 with a cell classification of 12454 or 13343, as defined in ASTM D1784.
Where perforated corrugated PVC pipe with smooth interior is to be used, as included in the BOQ and shown in
the Contract plans, the perforations shall be in accordance with Table 5 of ASTM F949
2. Testing of Corrugated Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Pipe

There shall be no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when the pipe is tested per ASTM D2412 in
accordance with ASTM F949 Section 7.5 and ASTM F794 Section 8.5.
Minimum corrugated PVC pipe stiffness must be 0.44 mPa when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412.
Solid pipe shall have no leakage when gasketed pipe joints are tested in accordance with ASTM F1365. Perforated
pipe cannot be hydraulic tested after installation; however it shall be subject to deflection testing after backfilling
as otherwise specified for flexible walled pipes.
d. Heavy Wall PVC Perforated Pipe for Use under Traffic Areas
1. Components
Heavy wall PVC perforated pipe for use under traffic areas shall be a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe
meeting ISO standard 138/2N 238E, Series S16 (Class 16); manufactured from a compound which meets the
physical and chemical properties of ASTM D1784 , Class 12454-B or ISO Standard 138/2 N238E. Plastic pipe
fittings shall be socket type complying with the requirements of ASTM D2466 or ISO Standard 138/2N 238E.
Perforation shall be located in parallel lines, within the bottom 120O of the pipe circumference. Perforations shall
be cleanly cut or drilled, uniformly spaced holes or slots, cut perpendicular to the pipe axis not to exceed 4 mm
width and 30 mm length. Water inlet area shall be a minimum of 2,117 mm2 per linear meter of pipe. Total
perforations shall be so spaced and located that the vertical loading strength of the in-place perforated pipe is
within 90 % of the minimum vertical loading strength specified for non-perforated PVC pipe.
Page 12-30
2. Testing of Heavy Wall PVC Perforated Pipe

There shall be no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when the pipe is tested per ASTM D2412 in
accordance with ASTM F949 Section 7.5 and ASTM F794 Section 8.5.
Heavy Wall PVC perforated pipe stiffness must be tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2412.
Compliance and tests shall be in accordance with the applicable test standards per ISO 138/2 N238E for series S16
(Class 16) pipe, and ASTM D1784.
e. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Solid and Perforated Pipe and Fittings

1. Components
PVC pipe and fittings shall be supplied in the sizes and types as shown on the Contract plans in accordance with
Standard Specifications ASTM D3034 or AASHTO M 278 or AASHTO M 304.
PVC pipe shall be made by continuous extrusion of green unplasticized PVC plastic and marked as prescribed by
the ASTM standards.
Resistance of the pipe and fittings to chemical reagents shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D543 and
changes, if any, in weight or tensile strength must not exceed the limits specified in Table 2, ASTM D1784.
All fittings shall be of the same material as the pipe and shall be consistent therewith in strength, dimensions and
utility. Adapters shall be provided for transitions to other pipe products. For flange adapters refer to Article
12.18.3.12.
Pipe shall incorporate an integral bell joint with a single rubber gasket conforming to ASTM F477. Pipe joint shall
meet ASTM D3212. Solvent cementing of joints will not be permitted. For Flange adaptors specifications and
requirements refer to Article 12.18.3.12.
Both pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic having a cell classification of 12454-B and pipe materials shall
meet ASTM D1784. It shall be highly resistant to hydrogen sulphide, sulphuric acid, gasoline, oil, and other
chemicals commonly found in sewage and industrial waste. It shall have a smooth internal surface for minimum
flow resistance. When properly bedded and back-filled it shall withstand normally encountered loads without
rupturing or leaking at the joints. In the normal atmospheres pipe shall have a self-extinguishing flammability
characteristic.
Solvent cement used in cemented joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2564. It shall produce a watertight
joint that will have sufficient strength within five minutes after assembly to permit normal installation, handling
and moving.
Gasketed joints shall be used where service conditions may subject the installation to expansion, Contraction,
angular displacement of deformation of the pipe. To facilitate the assembly of gasketed joints, each pipe bell end
shall have an internal groove to hold the gasket in place while inserting the spigot end of a mating pipe or fitting.
Spigot ends shall have a chamfer and smooth external surface so that they may be readily mated with bell ends
without cutting or deforming (pinching) the gasket.
Pipe joints shall meet ASTM D3212 for joints for drain and sewer pipes using flexible elastomeric seals, and the
seals meet ASTM F477 for elastomeric seals. All gaskets shall be factory installed and have a steel reinforcing
ring
(locked-in).
For perforated pipe, the size and spacing of the perforations shall conform to AASHTO M 278 or AASHTO M
304 and BS4660/BS5481.
Perforated pipe holes diameters and the distances between hole centres shall be measured with a steel rule with at
least 1-mm graduations. The angle between the two rows of holes shall be measured with an index head capable of
measuring accurately to within 1o.
Proper holes location is assured if print line faces upward after installation.
2. Testing of PVC Solid and Perforated Gravity Pipe

Pipe shall be tested for dimensional compliance, flattening and pipe stiffness, impact resistance and extrusion
quality in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D3034. Testing shall also meet all the requirements of
Section 12.1.4.
Page 12-31
12.1.3.8 Polymer Concrete Precast Grated Drainage Channel

Precast grated drainage channels shall be composed of a precast polyester concrete channel with an integral ductile iron
frame and bolt down removable grating as shown on the Contract plans. Precast drainage channel grates and frames
shall be of a removable bolt down to frame type grate where the ductile iron frame is made an integral part of the
precast drain channel at time of manufacture, of type and size as shown on the Contract plans. Polyester concrete
drainage channel, frame and grating shall comply with DIN 19580 and EN 124 (106) class E. Grating and channel
combination shall also meet or exceed the minimum loading capabilities of BS EN 124 (113) and BS5834:Part 3 1985
for grade A loading, for heavy duty use as specified. All fastening hardware shall be stainless steel ASTM 2833 F11ac1.
12.1.3.9 Pavement Underdrains and Edge Drains

Drainage for pavement layers and the pavement aggregate base courses shall be the type as shown on the Contract plans
or as included in the Bills of Quantities, and as approved by the Engineer, Pavement base course drains will generally
be of the two types as listed in the following subsections.
a. Pavement Underdrains
Pavement subbase underdrain systems consist of perforated plastic pipes which includes outlets, vents, cleanouts, gravel
envelope, filter fabric and miscellaneous appurtenances as shown on the Contract plans.
Gravel envelope shall be pervious backfill material meeting the requirements of Chapter 2, Article 2.5.2.5 of these
standard specifications. Gravel envelope may also consist of a cement stabilized permeable material where shown on
the Contract plans or directed by the Engineer. Cement stabilized permeable material shall meet the material
requirements of Sub-article e of Article 12.1.3.9. Geotextile fabric shall meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 2,
Section 2.7.2, of these standard specifications, or as required in Table 12-13, as approved by the Engineer.
Perforated pipe shall meet the requirements of Sub-article e of Article 12.1.3.7, and where under traffic areas, meeting
the additional requirements of Sub-article d of Article 12.1.3.7. Underdrain outlet pipes shall meet the requirements of
Sub-articles f and g of Articles 12.1.3.9.
b. Pervious Backfill
Pervious backfill material shall be clean, hard, durable sand, gravel or crushed stone free from organic material, clay
balls or other deleterious substances conforming to the gradation requirements in Table 12-9.
Pervious backfill material used as a drainage layer against soil retaining structures (such as bridge abutments and cut or
fill retaining walls) shall meet the gradation requirements of Table 12-10.
Table 12-9: Pervious backfill gradation
Sieve size Percent by mass passing designated sieve (AASHTO T 27(12) and T 11(13))
53 mm 100
37.5 mm 95 - 100
19 mm 50 to 100
9.5 mm 15 - 55
2.36 mm 0-5
0.075 mm 0-3
Table 12-10: Pervious backfill material for use as drainage layer against soil retaining structures such as bridge
abutments and retaining walls
75 mm 100
53 mm 90 - 100
37.5 mm 35 - 70
25.0 mm 0 - 15
12.5 mm 0-5
Page 12-32
c. Material for Free-Draining Blankets

Material for free draining blankets, used for constructing vertical drains or as a base layer for embankments constructed
over soft foundations, shall consist of either a clean processed aggregate material meeting the gradation requirements of
Table 12-11 or natural dune sand obtained from a clean, uniformly open graded and non-contaminated source.
Table 12-11: Gradation for free-draining blanket material
75 mm 100
19 mm 95 - 100
4.75 mm 50 - 100
1.18 mm 20 - 85
0.3 mm 3 -30
0.15 mm 0-7
0.075 mm 0-3
d. Prefabricated Edge Drains

Prefabricated geocomposite edge drains (PGED) (also called fin drains) are prefabricated drains placed adjacent to
pavement to intercept and remove water from the subbase and subgrade. They consist of a fabricated polymer drainage
core wrapped in a geotextile filter. They function like a longitudinal underdrain, in which a vertical column of porous
backfill is placed above perforated collector pipe in a trench cut at edge of pavement. However, the prefabricated unit
replaces both the filtering function of porous backfill and the water removal function of subdrain pipe.
The PGED shall be of composite construction, consisting of a polystyrene core thermo-formed with drainage channels
on both faces, factory-wrapped with non-woven spun bonded polypropylene geotextile fabric folded and sewn closed
on two edges to form a pocket (for drainage pipe), and including support straps at upper edge of panel.
To obtain material manufacturer and type approval, the Contractor shall submit the following information to the
Engineer:
1. A product sample (1 m, full-width sample including the fabric)
2. Product identification
3. Technical information on use of the product
4. Independent lab results showing the following properties:
i. Property specification test method
ii. Core compressive strength per ASTM D1621
iii. Core flow rate per ASTM D4716
iv. Geotextile filter fabric wrap per Table 9-5
5. Gravel envelope shall be pervious backfill material meeting the requirements of Chapter 2 of these standard
specifications. Gravel envelope may also be cement-treated permeable material where shown on the Contract
plans or directed by the Engineer. Cement treated permeable material shall meet the requirement of Chapter 4 of
these standard specifications.
Prefabricated edge drain core shall consist of a three-dimensional, non-biodegradable, thermo-formed high-impact
polystyrene meeting the requirements shown in Table 12-12.
Table 12-12: Prefabricated edge drain core
Property Value Test
Maximum compressive strength 190 kPa ASTM D1621

50 l/min/ m of unit width at hydraulic gradient of
Minimum In-plane flow rate ASTM D4716
1.0 % and compressive stress of 145 kPa
Thickness wrapped with fabric 19 mm ASTM D1777
Page 12-33
Prefabricated edge drain geotextile wrap shall consist of a spun bonded 100 % polypropylene geotextile fabric, non-
woven, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, with >50 % elongation at break; AASHTO Class 3,
complying with the properties, shown in Table 12-13, determined according to AASHTO M 288.
Table 12-13: Prefabricated edge drain Geotextile wrap
Property Value Test

Apparent Opening Size 600-1500 micrometer ASTM D4751
Permittivity 0.5 sec-1 ASTM D4491
Weight 120 grams/square meter ASTM D3776
Grab tensile strength 400 N ASTM D4632
Trapezoidal tear strength 130 N ASTM D4533
Puncture strength 130 N ASTM D3787
The fabric shall surround and be attached to the core material in a manner which does not restrict the flow capacity of
the core material. The geocomposite shall be resistant to commonly encountered chemicals and hydrocarbons and
resistant to ultraviolet exposure. Prefabricated edge drain outlet pipes and fittings shall meet the requirements of Sub-
articles f and g of Article 12.1.3.9.
e. Cement-Treated Permeable Material

Cement treated permeable aggregate material shall be provided where a stabilized aggregate base course is required
underneath permeable pavements or as fill around edge drains, as shown on the Contract plans.
Aggregate shall be clean and free from decomposed materials, organic material, and other deleterious substances. All
natural aggregates shall be thoroughly and uniformly washed before use. Aggregate shall meet the gradation suggested
in Table 12-14.
Table 12-14: Gradation for cement treated permeable material
Sieve size (mm) Percent passing

37.5 100
25 100
19 80
9.5 40
4.75 16
2.36 6
0.075 2
Aggregate shall conform to the additional quality requirements shown in Table 12-15 prior to the addition of cement:
Table 12-15: Tests for cement treated permeable material
Test Test method Requirements

Fractured coarse aggregate particles ASTM D5821 Minimum 90 %
Abrasion AASHTO T96 500 rev; max. 45 %
Sand equivalent AASHTO T176 Minimum 55
Combined bulk specific gravity range for the aggregate shall be 2.35 to 2.85. Combined water absorption range for the
aggregate shall be zero to 2.5.
Portland cement content of cement treated permeable aggregate shall be no less than 167 kg/m3. Water-cement ratio
(the ratio of the amount of water, exclusive only of that absorbed by the aggregate, to the amount of cement, by weight)
shall be approximately 0.37:1. Exact water to cement ratio shall be as approved by the Engineer.
f. Outlet Pipes
Pipe for the underdrain and prefabricated edge drain outlet laterals shall be rigid PVC pipe of sizes as shown on the
Contract plans or as required by the prefabricated edge drain manufacturer, conforming to the requirements of ASTM
Page 12-34
D1785, polyethylene pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2104, or ABS pipe conforming to the
requirements of ASTM D1527.
Open end of the outlet pipe conduit shall be connected into either a drainage structure or a concrete pad drain in
accordance with the details shown on the Contract plans.
g. Fittings
Provide fittings and materials necessary to make splices and connections of the underdrain and prefabricated edge
drains to outlet piping that conform to the manufacturer’s requirements and as shown on the Contract plans. Design of
fittings, connections and piping’s shall be consistent with the rest of the underdrain or prefabricated edge drain system
with regards to flow capacity and strength for all potential loads and to prevent soil intrusion into the fitting and piping.
In cases where the prefabricated edge drain is terminated without an outlet, provide a blank plug fitting to prevent soil
intrusion into the end.

12.1.4.1 General
This section includes requirements for constructing storm drain lines as shown on the Contract plans or approved by the
Engineer.
It is not necessary that all storm drain pipes on any one project be of the same kind of material. However, all contiguous
pipes shall be of the same size, material, thickness, class, and treatment and shall be that required for the maximum
height of cover.
Lengths shown on the Contract plans are approximate. Do not order and deliver the storm drain pipe until a list of sizes
and lengths is approved by the Engineer.
Contractor shall provide shop drawings showing his proposed procedure for installing storm drains and associated
structures for the project. Shop drawings shall be prepared in accordance with Article 12.1.3.1 and include the following
items:
1. Schedule for installation work
2. Staging Contract plans and traffic management proposals for performing storm drain installation
3. Contract plans and profiles for all pipes and structures complete with structure numbering, invert and cover
elevations at structures and exact laying lengths of pipe between structures. Final surface elevations along the
profiles.
4. Class or strengths of pipes to match cover depths and feasible loadings
5. Type of structures with class or type of cover or grate that matches loading requirements shown on the profiles
6. Structure details
7. Manufacturer’s literature on pipe handling and installation recommendations
8. Pipe bedding details
9. Pipe installation methodology
10. Pipe to structure connection methodology with lengths of special order pipe required
11. Total number of each type, length, sizes and strength classes of pipes to be used.
12. Procedures for performing excavation and backfill for pipe placement, including all safety procedures and
necessary shoring details
13. Equipment to be used.
14. Sources of bedding and pipe surround material.
15. Other material submittals as otherwise required by the specifications
16. QA/QC manual to be submitted for pipe installation.
12.1.4.2 Abandonment of Existing Storm Drain Pipe and Structures

All existing storm drain pipe and associated structures shown to be abandoned on the Contract plans shall be either
Page 12-35
removed or the pipe ends plugged with permanent type waterproof sealed end caps/plugs, as otherwise approved by the
Engineer, as specified in Chapter 2, Section 2.3.2.3 of these standard specifications. Removal of bridges, culverts and
drainage structures, and as specified by the following items:
1. All pipe abandoned in place under traffic pavement shall be completely filled with either sand or CDF (refer to
Chapter 4, Section 4.3.10.3 of theses standard specifications, Controlled density fill (CDF) concrete) using a
pumped fluidised grouting process.
2. Contractor shall submit shop drawings as to procedures for abandonment of all storm drain pipes and structures
for approval by the Engineer prior to the start of work. Shop drawings shall include methods of excavation,
removal, shoring and backfilling for pipes and structures to be removed. Shop drawings shall include full details
and methodology of filling or end caps for pipes and structures to be abandoned in situ.
3. All structures to be abandoned in situ shall have the bottoms broken such that they will drain and filled with
either compacted sand or weak concrete. Tops of the structures shall be removed to a depth of at least 0.3 m
below final grade level in non paved areas, and to at least 0.3 m below top of subgrade level in pedestrian and
traffic pavement areas.
4. All abandoned pipe and structures that are removed shall become the property of the Contractor and removed
from the site and/or broken up and disposed of as approved by the Engineer.
12.1.4.3 Excavation and Preparation of Trench

All earthworks that may be required to construct storm water drain sewers, structures and other facilities as indicated on
the Contract plans shall comply with the applicable requirements of Chapter 2, Section 2.4 of these standard
specifications. This shall include all temporary work, dewatering, bracing, sheeting, shoring and supporting with timber
struts, trench boxes and safety shields and other works as may be necessary and required for the proper, safe and
efficient performance and construction of the storm water drainage system works and all works incidental thereto in an
expeditious manner to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
Contractor assumes the risks with unexpected findings in terms of excavated materials, utilities, obstacles and any
damage resulting from his activities.
Contractors methods used in excavation shall not cause damage to surrounding property or damage remaining
pavements and other existing improvements that are to remain. Outriggers for excavation equipment and other heavy
equipment shall be fitted with street pads to prevent pavement damage.
Levels to be recorded shall comply with the following:
1. Bench marks and baselines are to be agreed with the Engineer.
2. Before the surface of any part of the site is disturbed, the Contractor shall take and record levels on 10.0 m grids,
unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
3. Two working days notice is to be given to the Engineer, so that the recording of levels can be performed in the
presence of the Engineer.
a. Pipe Trenches
Trenches for drainage pipe installations shall be excavated as shown on the Contract plans and approved by the
Engineer.
Trenches must be of sufficient width in the pipe zone to permit proper installation and bedding of the pipe and to
provide the required compaction of backfill. At minimum clearance between the pipe and trench wall shall not be less
than one sixth of the outside diameter (OD), or OD/6, on either side of the pipe. Above the top of the pipe zone, the
Contractor may excavate to any width.
Trench width for flexible walled pipes (plastic, corrugated metal and thermosetting) shall be in accordance with ASTM
D2321 and shall be sufficient to ensure working room to properly and safely place and compact haunching and other
backfill materials. Minimum trench width shall not be less than 1.25 times the pipe OD plus 300 mm, (1.25 x O.D. +
300 mm). For two or more, a parallel pipe in a common trench, properly compacted backfill is required between pipes.
Minimum spacing between pipes shall be as follows: if the pipe diameter ≤ 600mm minimum spacing is 300 mm, if the
pipe diameter >600 mm, minimum spacing shall be D/2.
After excavating to the foundation level and the material remaining in the trench bottom is determined to be unsuitable
by the Engineer, excavation shall be continued to such additional depth and width as required by the Engineer and the
unsuitable material replaced in accordance with Chapter 2, Article 2.4.2.5, of these stand specifications.
Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, such material shall be removed to provide a
Page 12-36
minimum of 150 mm clearance under all portions of the pipe trench width.
In the event that, due to negligence or error on the part of the Contractor, any excavation is taken down to a level lower
than is indicated on the Contract plans, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall fill in the void so formed to the proper
level with approved material in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick, which shall be thoroughly compacted meeting the
applicable requirements of Section 2.5, Embankments and backfill, or as approved by the Engineer.
In the event the Engineer considers that concrete is necessary for this filling, then the Contractor shall provide Class
C10 concrete or CDF at his own expense.
Trench length excavation in advance of pipe laying shall be kept to a minimum. The maximum length of open trench
for all installations, except non-reinforced, cast-in-place pipe, shall be 100 m or the Contractor's daily installation
length, whichever is less. Excavations shall be closed up at the end of the day or otherwise protected against ground
water infiltration and public access.
Contractor shall keep the project site safe and free from obstructions. Open-cut trenches and excavation for structure(s)
shall be braced and sheeted as necessary to protect persons, property, traffic and the work. Adequate bridging and
planked crossings shall be provided and maintained across all open trenches for pedestrians and vehicles. Barriers,
lights, flares, and flagmen shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor at all trenches, excavations, and
embankments all in accordance with Chapter 1, Section 1.19.14 of these standard specifications.
b. Manhole
Excavation for manholes and other structures connected to the pipelines shall be sufficient to provide a minimum of 300
mm between their surfaces and the sides of the excavation. Structure excavation shall meet the applicable requirements
of Chapter 2, Article 2.4.2.11 of these standard specifications.
Where pipe is to be placed in a new embankment, the embankment shall be constructed as shown on the Contract plans
for a distance each side of the pipe location of not less than 5 times the OD and to a minimum height equal to ½ of the
OD of the pipe. Embankment material shall be installed in accordance with Chapter 2, Article 2.5.3.1 of these standard
specifications. Trench shall then be excavated as otherwise specified, and the pipe installed in accordance with the
Contract plans.
Contractor shall furnish, install, and operate all necessary equipment to keep excavations free from water during
construction, and shall dewater and dispose of the groundwater in accordance with Chapter 2, Article 2.4.2.3 of these
When the trench is in an existing paved area, the pavement shall be saw-cut on neat lines parallel and equidistant from
the trench centreline. Width of the saw cut shall not be any greater than is required to properly install the pipe and not
damage the edges of the pavement left in place, as directed by the Engineer. Pavement between the lines shall be broken
and removed as directed by the Engineer immediately ahead of the trenching operations. Existing pavement shall not be
cut until the respective utility companies have marked the location of their underground facilities and the Engineer has
given final approval of trench alignment.
c. Pipe Lines in Wide Trench

No wide unsupported trenches shall be permitted, in general, within the area of the works and therefore all trenches
should confirm to the minimum trench widths stated above an shall be supported with the use of approved trench
sheeting or sheet piles. However in exceptional circumstances wide trenches may be approved by the Engineer in which
cases the following shall apply:
1. Wide trenches shall be constructed to not less than the defined widths for the flexible pipelines in granular
bedding defined below.
2. Prior to commencing trench excavation in an area an assessment of the Modulus of deformation (E’s) shall be
made of the solid likely to be encountered at springing level of the pipes. In no cohesive soils, approved static
cone penetrometer tests shall be carried out. In cohesive soils other approved method shall be used to determine
E’s. Tests shall be carried out at internals to be determined on site which in variable ground conditions may be to
every pipe length.
3. If the valve of E’s determined from the results of such tests is greater than 2.5 MN/m2 then trench widths shall
be constructed to the widths defined in the following Table 12-16 unless alternative means of increasing the
passive resistance of the trench sides are detailed or are proposed in method statements where economic or
environmental restrictions make wide trenches undesirable.
Page 12-37
Table 12-16: Non Cohesive Soils and Wide Trench Widths
Non-cohesive Soils Wide Trench Widths

Static Cone Menetrometer Test KG/cm2 Modulus of Deformation E’s (MN/m2) D = Pipe Diameter
8.5 – 7.7 2.50 – 2.25 2.5 * D
7.7 – 6.1 2.25 – 1.50 3.0 * D
6.1 – 3.1 1.80 – 0.90 4.0 * D
3.1 0.9 5.0* D
12.1.4.4 Shoring
Contractor shall furnish and install shoring and bracing, when necessary, because of space limitations, or for trench
safety and/or the protection of existing adjacent above or underground facilities. If workers enter any trench or other
excavation 1.5 meters or more, it shall be shored. All excavation shoring shall meet the applicable requirements of
Chapter 2, Article 2.4.2.11 of these standard specifications. In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the following
items:
1. Sheeting shall not extend below the bottom of the pipe barrel.
2. Shoring to be removed, or moveable trench shields or boxes, shall be located at least 2½ pipe ODs away from
flexible walled pipe if the bottom of the shoring, shield, or box extends below the top of the pipe, unless a
satisfactory means of reconsolidating the bedding or side support material disturbed by shoring removal can be
demonstrated.
3. Unless, otherwise approved by the Engineer, sheeting, timbering, lagging and bracing shall be removed during
backfilling, and in such a manner to prevent any movement of the ground pr damage to the pipe or other
structures.
4. When the Engineer approves or directs that sheet piling, lagging and bracing be left in place, such material shall
be cut-off where designated and upper part withdrawn. If sheet piling is used, it may be removed simultaneously
with placing and compacting of backfill.
5. When using movable trench supports, care shall be exercised to prevent disturbing the pipe location, jointing or
embedment. Removal of any trench protection below the top of the pipe within 2.5 pipe ODs of each side of the
pipe will be prohibited after the pipe embedment has been replaced and compacted.
6. Movable trench support shall only be used in either wide trench construction where supports extend below the
top of the pipe or on a shelf above the pipe with the pipe installed in a narrow, vertical wall sub-trench.
7. Any voids left in the trench wall or embedment material by support removal shall be carefully filled with
bedding material and compacted.
8. Removal of bracing between sheeting shall only be done where backfilling proceeds and bracing is removed in a
manner that does not relax trench support.
12.1.4.5 Pipe Installation

Drainage pipe shall be handled carefully. Proper facilities shall be provided for handling and lowering the sections of
pipe. All pipes which show defects due to negligence or rough handling shall be removed and replaced if so ordered by
the Engineer. Any drainage pipe which is not in true alignment or which shows undue settlement after laying or is
damaged shall be removed. If more than 10 % of a pipe shipment lot are rejected because they do not comply with these
Specifications, the Engineer has the right to reject the whole lot.
Pipe shop drawings, including profiles shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation. Unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer, the installing of drainage pipe shall begin at the downstream end and progress upstream.
Pipe joints and joint materials shall conform to these specifications, the recommendation of the manufacturer for the
type of pipe specified, or shall be approved by the Engineer as providing a secure and/or waterproof joint.
Bell or groove ends of rigid pipes and outside circumferential laps of flexible pipes shall be placed facing upstream.
Flexible corrugated pipe shall be installed with the separate sections firmly joined together with the corrugations in
alignment.
Where there is restricted cover, the bolts of the bands connecting flexible corrugated pipe shall be advanced so that the
Page 12-38
tops of the bolts will be in line with or below the top of the pipe.
Field strutting of corrugated metal pipe and structural plate pipe may be done at the Contractor's option and expense to
afford added protection from construction equipment and other loads during installation, backfilling and filling above
the pipe. Method and scheduling of installation and removal of strutting, however, shall be conducted as approved by
the Engineer.
Field strutting shall constitute installation of structurally sound timber sills, compression caps and struts.
a. Bedding the Pipe, Backfill and Borrow Materials

All trash, forms, sheeting, bracing, and loose rock or loose earth shall be removed from the area into which bedding
material is to be placed.
Bedding material shall be placed in a manner which will prevent distortion, damage to, or displacement of the pipe from
its intended location. Bedding material shall also be placed so that adequate support will be provided in the haunch
support areas for the pipe. Voids or loose soils which are found to occur due to improper placement or compaction of
bedding materials will result in rejection of that portion of the pipe installation. Replacement of the pipe will be at the
Contractor's expense.
Compaction of bedding material shall be performed without damage to the pipe and surrounding in-place material.
Special care shall be taken in placing, shaping and compacting all bedding material under haunches of pipe to prevent
moving the pipe or raising it from its bedding.
Bedding and upper pipe surround shall be placed and compacted to the full bottom width of the trench.
Water jetting will not be allowed for the compaction of bedding material.
If borrow material is used as a upper trench backfill, the same shall be furnished, hauled, placed and compacted by the
Contractor in accordance with these specifications.
All flexible walled pipes including thermosetting, plastic and corrugated metal types shall be installed per the
requirements in Sub-article b of Article 12.1.4.5. All rigid pipe including RCP and DIP shall be installed per the
requirements in Sub-article c of Article 12.1.4.5.
Concrete encasement shall be used for all flexible walled pipes including thermosetting, plastic and corrugated metal
types. Where installed under traffic pavement areas shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations which shall be included with submission details for approval by the Engineer. The minimum
requirements are shown below:
Concrete protection slabs shall be C 20 concrete type and as detailed on the Contract plans shall be provided over the
uPVC pipelines under roads when cover to pipe is equal or less than 1.2 m for a gravity line; and for pressure line at any
depth.
If the depth of GRP pipe cover is less than 1. m concrete protection slab shall be provided as per per Contract plans and
b. Bedding and Backfill for Flexible Walled Pipe

1. Flexible walled pipe shall be unloaded and handled with reasonable care. Pipe shall be placed in the bed
starting at the downstream end. Trench width shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and Sub-article a of
Article 12.1.4.5. Trenches with pipe in place shall be backfilled as soon as practicable, but no later than the end
of each working day.
2. Bedding material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321 Class I or Class II material. A minimum of 150
mm of bedding shall be provided prior to placement and shall be loosely compacted extending across the full
width of the trench. Bedding material size shall be 38 mm maximum. Pipe surround material shall meet the
same requirements as the bedding material and shall extend to 150 mm above the top of the pipe. Pipe
surround material shall be installed and compacted across the full width of the trench.
3. Descriptions for Class I and II material are as follows:
Class I - Rounded edge crushed stone or rock, dense or open graded with little or no fines (6 mm to 32 mm
size)
Class II - Clean, coarse-grained material, such as gravel, coarse sands and gravel/sand mixtures (32 mm
maximum size)
Trench backfill material (trench backfill above the pipe surround material) and installation methods shall meet
the requirements as required by the applicable clauses in Chapter 2, Section 2.5 of this standard specifications,
Page 12-39
Embankments and Backfill, as applicable to the trench location (different requirements depending on if trench
is in pavement under traffic, embankment or landscape areas) and Article 12.1.4.5 and as approved by the
Engineer.
The compaction equipment loads to be considered as per the manufacture requirements. Minimum cover pipe
depth shall be 0.9 meter and maximum cover depth over the pipe shall be in accordance with stiffness class
corresponds the specific cover of backfill, so stiffness class should be choosed carefully according to the
required backfill, and related soil nature to avoid pipe failure. The recommended Maximum cover depth is 9
meters. (Refer to Abu Dhabi Road Drainage Manual Section 4.4.1).
Backfill material with large lumps or material that cannot be spread evenly and not complying with the
requirements of the backfill material specifications will be rejected and transported/disposed out of the site on
the contractor cost.
c. Bedding and Backfill For Rigid or Concrete Pipe

Installation of rigid pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASCE standards publication, Standard Practice for Direct
Design of Buried Precast Concrete Pipe Using Standard Installations (SIDD) and as shown on the contract plans.
Bedding thickness, soil and compaction requirements are provided in
Table 12-17 and Table 12-18 shows the equivalent soil designations per the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS)
and AASHTO.
Table 12-17: Bedding requirements
Installation Haunch and
Bedding thickness Lower side*
type outer bedding
D0/24 minimum, not less than 75 mm. 95%category
Type 1 95 % category I
If rock foundation, use D0/12 minimum, not less than 150 mm. I
D0/24 minimum, not less than 75 mm. 90 % category I or 90 %
Type 2
If rock foundation, use D0/12 minimum, not less than 150 mm. 95 % category II category I
Notes:
a) Refer to Table 9-10 for soil category classifications.
b) Compaction and soil symbols — i.e., ’95 % Category I’ refers to Category 1 soil material with a minimum
standard Proctor compaction of 95 %.
c) Soil in the outer bedding, haunch, and lower side zones, except within Do/3 from the pipe spring line, shall
be compacted to at least the same compaction as the majority of soil in the overfill zone.
Table 12-18: Equivalent USCS and AASHTO soil classifications for SIDD
Representative soil type

SIDD Soil
USCS AASHTO
Gravelly sand (category I) SW,SP,GW,GP A1,A3
GM, SM, ML, Also GC, SC with less than 20 percent
Sandy silt (category II) A2, A4
passing No. 200 sieve
Once the envelope of pipe bedding and pipe surround material is placed and properly compacted, the remainder of the
pipe trench backfill should be placed and compacted to prevent settlement at the surface. All compaction shall be done
in layers meeting the applicable requirements of Section 2.5, Embankments and backfill.
Excavations shall be backfilled without unnecessary delay, but not until pipes, joints, structures and other construction
details have been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer.
d. Concrete Protection Encasement to Pipes

1. Full concrete encasement shall be used for all flexible walled pipes installed under traffic pavement areas refer
to Sub-article b of Article 12.1.4.5.
2. Concrete encasement shall be of Class C25 concrete or as shown on the Contract plans. Reinforcement steel
shall meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel, of grade and sizes and shown on the
Contract plans.
Page 12-40
3. Concrete compressive strength of all pipe encasement shall meet the 21 day concrete strength before backfill
begins over a level 300 mm above the top of pipe. Backfill may start below a level 300 mm above the top of
pipe encasement concrete has achieved its 7 day strength, such that no damaged to the concrete will occur
when placing the backfill.
4. Construction joints shall be provided in the encasement at the first two pipe couplings immediately adjacent to
the structure for all pipe-to-structure connections, and at locations directed by the Engineer. Construction joint
shall be formed to allow pipe joint flexibility in case of differential settlement between the pipe and structure.
Construction joint shall be formed by placing a compressible board, polystyrene or fibre board as approved by
the Engineer, at the pipe joints as shown on the Contract plans. Compressible board shall be cut to fit the pipe
diameter and the full dimensions of the concrete bedding or encasement before installing. Thickness of the
construction joint and compressible board filler shall be as shown on the Contract plans or as directed by the
Engineer.
e. Pipes Protruding from Structures, Concrete Surrounds and Anchor Blocks

Unless otherwise detailed a pipeline at or below ground level protruding from a structure shall have two flexible joints
adjacent to the structure located as follows in Table 12-19.
Table 12-19: Pipe Protruding
Maximum distance to first

Pipe Diameter (mm ) Distance between first and second joint (mm)
joint ( mm)
Min Max
Up to 300 150 450 2.5* dia. but not less than 450 mm.
300-1000 300 1.5* dia. 2.5*dia
Above 1000 450 1.5*dia. 2.5*dia.
Method statement may propose that the first joint be formed by building an appreciate sleeve, collar or coupling in to
the wall of the structure. Where such a capable of maintaining an effective seal under the specified deflection and
loading conditions specified in Article 12.1.4.1.
In the case of flexible pipe materials, particular attention will be placed on elliptical deflection conditions.
These joints will be required at surrounds and anchor blocks unless directed otherwise on site.
1. Flexible Pipe Bedding Materials

Between the structure and the first joint any disturbed ground below the pipe will be removed and replaced with
Type C15 concrete in the form of cradle and as per the direction of the Engineer. The cradle shall not extend
beyond the first joint.
Beyond the first flexible joint within the excavated working space of the structure the concrete fill shall be brought
up 300 mm below the pipe invert only. Specified bedding materials will then be used.
2. Rigid Pipe Bedding Materials

Within the excavated working space for the structure disturbed ground below the pipe will be removed and
replaced with type C 15 concrete to within 300 mm of the underside of the pipe. Specified· bedding materials will
then be used to support the pipe.
The width of the concrete backfill shall not be less than the nominal widths except for any permanent shuttering
against temporary trench supports to facilitate removal of such trench supports after concreting.
Where a flexible pipe passes through a rigid concrete face to a structure or surround the pipe shall be protected
from stress concentration and possible fracture of the pipe at the concrete face. A 10 mm thick neoprene or other
approved synthetic rubber strip shall be wrapped around and cemented to the pipe unless special wall protection
units are used.
The neoprene will normally extend through the width of a wall to a dry chamber or structure but will be limited to
150 mm or 100 mm is exposed to liquid (groundwater or liquid inside the structure) a sealant groove shall be
formed if detailed and filled with an appropriate, approved, joint sealant.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the rubber strip is not displaced during concreting.
Where a pipeline protrudes from a concrete surround, no protection from stress concentration will be required if
Page 12-41
the surround ends at a flexible joint leaving the next pipe free. If the surround ends on a pipe barrel the specified
protection will be provided and, for pressure pipes only, the protruding pipe will be wrapped from the edge of the
neoprene strip along to the next flexible joint at which the concrete surround is interrupted with an approved
compressible material such as damp-proof sheeting or building felt of minimum thickness 2mm
f. Joining Different Pipe Types or Sizes

Drainage system often involves connecting pipes of different materials or sizes. Options to make these transitions are
often limited by the joint quality required. One very common method of connecting different types of pipe of the same
size, and in some cases different sizes, is through the use of a concrete collar. This generally provides a minimum silt-
tight joint quality but the resulting quality ultimately depends on workmanship.
For smaller diameter, pipe maybe joined manually
For all other joining methods for pipe diameter more than 400mm, ensure bell and spigot are adequately homed for
proper installation and tight joining seal. If no homing mark is present, measure the depth of the bell and use a crayon or
other material to place a homing mark on appropriate corrugation of the spigot end.
All the joining pipes shall be according to the pipe types specifications and requirements.
g. Laying Pipe
Drainage pipe shall be installed in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the
project Contract plans or specified by the Engineer in the properly dewatered trench. Mud, silt, gravel, and other
foreign material shall be kept out of the pipe and off the jointing surfaces. Storm water drainage pipe shall be installed
in the trench after the ground has been dewatered as required and the bedding for the pipe has been prepared and/or
formed.
Contractor shall provide line and grade stakes set on the natural ground surface. It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to transfer the line and grade to the bottom of the pipe trench.
All pipe laid in the trench to the specified line and grade shall be kept in longitudinal compression until the backfill has
been compacted to the crown of the pipe. Contractor shall exercise care in matching pipe joints for concentricity and
compatibility. In no case shall two pipes be joined together with ends having the maximum manufacturer’s tolerance.
Pipe, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, shall be laid up grade from point of connection on the existing pipe or
from a designated starting point with the tongue or spigot ends of tongue-and-groove or bell-and-spigot pipe pointing in
the direction of flow.
Tongue or spigot end of the pipe shall be cleaned of all dirt and foreign matter and coated with gasket lubricant or a
soft, vegetable soap compound. A snap-on rubber gasket shall be placed upon the prepared tongue or spigot surface.
Groove or bell section shall be cleaned and coated with a mixture of cement mortar and a lubricant as approved by the
Engineer. Tongue or spigot section of pipe shall be carefully bedded and then stabbed into the grooved or bell section of
pipe by the manufacturer's recommended installation method.
For the purpose of reducing the angular deflections at pipe joints, and for closure sections, the Contractor may be
permitted to install pipe sections of less than standard length with the Engineers approval. Closing pieces and short
sections of pipe shall be fabricated and installed by the Contractor as deemed necessary and as shown on the approved
shop drawings and as specified in Sub-articles a, b, c, d, e and h of Article 12.1.4.5.
Interior of the pipe shall, as the work progresses, be cleaned of all dirt, jointing material and superfluous materials of
every description. On small pipes where cleaning after laying will be difficult, a swab or drag shall be kept inside the
pipeline and pulled forward past each joint immediately after its completion. When pipe laying is not in progress, the
forward end of the pipe shall be kept tightly closed with an approved temporary plug.
All pipe joints shall be completely shoved home.
Where pipe joints must be deflected within the manufacturer’s recommended limits to accommodate required horizontal
or vertical curvature, it shall first be joined in straight alignment and then deflected as required. The amount of joint
deflection shall not exceed 75 % of the manufacturer’s recommended maximum value and subject to satisfactory
hydraulic testing.
Contractor shall make available at the start of the pipe laying operations, and during the course of the work when
required by the Engineer, the pipe manufacturer's representative to help inspect the installation work and to help assure
that the manufacturer's installation recommendations are being followed.
Upon final acceptance of the work, all pipe and appurtenances shall be open, clean, and free draining.
Plugs for pipe branches, stubs, or other open ends which are not to be immediately connected shall be made of an
Page 12-42
approved material and shall be secured in a place with a joint comparable to the main line joint, or stoppers may be of
an integrally cast breakout design.
Dissimilar pipe shall be joined by use of a factory-fabricated adapter coupling or a pipe collar as detailed on the Shop
drawings.
Storm sewer line connections to trunks, mains, laterals, or side sewers shall be left uncovered until after hydraulic
testing and the Engineer has inspected and approved the work. After approval of the connection, the trench shall be
backfilled as specified.
Where a storm or sanitary side sewer is larger than the trunk, main, or lateral to which it is to be connected, the
connection shall be made only at a standard manhole unless otherwise shown on the Contract plans.
h. Unsuitable Condition for Laying Pipes

No pipe shall be laid when; in the opinion of the Engineer are unsuitable soil conditions and ground water. Water shall
be controlled and its disposal provided at each constructions site without nuisance to adjacent property, traffic or
streams and without causing soil erosion.
1. A dewatering system of sufficient capacity to maintain the water level 30 cm below the base of the bedding
course shall be in operation prior to excavation for placement of the bedding. The dewatering operation shall be
carried out so that it does not weaken the soil under or alongside the trench. The normal water table shall be
restored to its natural level in such a manner as not to disturb the pipe and its foundation.
2. The Contractor shall provide and maintain ample means and devices with which to promptly remove and
properly dispose of all water entering the excavations or other parts of the work until all work has been
completed. Storm water drainage lines may be used to convey the discharge from the dewatering system
however; it is the Contractor’s responsibility to assure that any sediment are carefully limited, and removed from
the storm water drainage lines upon completion of the dewatering operation.
3. The Contractor shall inspect and clean all storm water drainage lines of any foreign materials after being used for
his dewatering purposes. The proposed program for the control of ground water, including the use of storm water
drainage lines shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to commencing any laying storm water
drainage pipes or construction of storm water drainage structures.
i. Survey Line and Grade

The Contractor shall provide line and grade stakes set on the natural ground surface. It shall be the Contractor’s
responsibility to transfer the line and grade to the bottom of the pipe trench.
Where pipelines are to be constructed in trenches, the Contractor shall provide, fix, and maintain, at such points as
directed by the Engineer, properly painted control stakes and batter boards for the setting of pipes to correct grade and
alignment. The batter boards shall be situated above the line of pipe or immediately adjacent thereto and at no time shall
there be less than three batter boards in position on each length of pipe line under construction to any one gradient.
Consideration will be given by the Engineer to an alternative means of checking and controlling line and grade such as
laser beam equipment, provided approval is secured in writing from the Engineer.
Lines and grades shall be constantly checked and in the event the batter boards do not line up, the work shall be
immediately stopped, the Engineer notified, and the cause remedied before proceeding with the work. Any other
procedure shall have the written approval of the Engineer.
Contractor shall provide a gauge rod of sufficient length to reach from the invert of the pipe being laid to the top line
strung on the three batter boards. Gauge rod shall be graduated and numbered in metric units along its entire length.
Gauge rod shall be equipped with either a plumb line or two spirit levels and the utmost care used to ensure a truly
vertical gauge rod at the time a reading is taken and the pipe is being set.
j. Laying Concrete Pipe

Suitably mark pipe with elliptical reinforcing to clearly indicate the top and bottom of the pipe. Firmly place the first
section of pipe at the outlet to the designated line and grade with the groove end or bell end pointing upgrade.
Completely fill all handling holes in the pipes with grout.
Lying of concrete pipe shall also be in accordance with the applicable general requirements for the laying of pipe as
specified in Article 12.1.4.5.
k. Pipe Buoyancy
Pipes buoyancy should be considered anytime there is possibility that pipe flotation could occur.
Page 12-43
Some of those conditions are:

1. Pipelines in an area with high water table.
2. Flooding to consolidate backfill.
3. Pipelines in areas, which will be inundated, such as a flood plain or under a future man-made lake.
4. The buoyancy of a buried pipeline depends upon the weight of the pipe material, the weight of the volume of
water displaced by the pipe, the weight of the liquid load carried by the pipe, and the weight of the backfill
material.
5. Whenever the water table level is above the invert of the pipe, the potential for flotation exists. The resistance
to flotation is directly related to the specific gravity of the pipe material and the volume of water displaced.
6. When high water table conditions are present (or maybe in the future), consideration should be made as to the
potential for flotation. The decision as to what type of pipe to use may be based solely on flotation.
7. The weight of fluid inside the pipe should not be considered because all pipelines may be dewatered at some
time.
8. Concrete pipe should be the pipe of choice whenever the possibility of flotation exists.
l. Compaction of Pipe Surrounds

The granular material shall be carefully laid and compacted at the sides of pipes according to one of the following
methods for alternative types of compaction plant as agreed with or directed by the Engineer. Refer to Table 12-20.
Table 12-20: Alternative methods for compaction of pipe surrounds
Surround Max Layer
Alternative methods (minimum Number of Passes of compaction plant
Material Thickness
mm Hand Rammer Vibrating plate 100kg Power Rammer
Gravel 200 2 1 2
Sand 150 3 2 4
m. External Design Load for Rigid pipes

For safe design the supporting strength of an installed pipeline must exceed the total external design load where the
supporting strength is the product of the pipe crushing strength and the bedding factor and the total external load is the
sum of the trench load, surcharge load and for pipes greater than DN600 the equivalent water load.
Where BF = Bedding factor

EL = Total external load (see BS EN 1295 -1)
Fse= Factor or safety taken as a minimum of 1.25
Fn= Maximum moment in pipe wall under field load
1. Unreinforced pipes (DN225-600 inclusive) = 1.25
2. Reinforced pipes manufactured to BS EN 1916, Fse increases to 1.5, however in order to maintain design
continuity and to cater for schemes designed prior to the implementation of BS EN1916, Also the reinforced
pipes shall be tested and comply with BS5911-100.
3. For a cost effective design, either a higher bedding factor or pipe of lower strength is used, when the bedding is
of higher quality
4. Design load for rigid pipes (reinforced-concrete pipe is designed and manufactured according to D-load
specification (ASTM C76 M-90) and AASHTO Section 30.5.7, 2005.
5. The Contractor must demonstrate that alternative methods of compaction will provide positive deflection of rigid
pipes during installation.
6. The use of power rammers will not be permitted over any pipe until the depth of fill above the crown of the pipe
is at least 300mm.
Page 12-44
Service warning tapes shall be placed over the pipelines as specified.

The backfill requirements for trenches around structures shall be the same as that for pipeline except that compaction by
mechanical means shall commence from the formation level (to the specified densities).
n. Deflection Measurements for Flexible Pipelines

The measurement shall be taken on at least two separate occasions:
1. As soon as a pipeline has been installed, tested and the trench backfilled, but before the dewatering is removed.
2. Immediately prior to the issue of a Certificate of Completion.
If any these tests indicate that the deflection may exceed the permitted values the pipe or pipes shall be replaced. Any
pipe removed for this reason shall be taken from site and not incorporated in the permanent works.
All pipes replaced for any reason shall subsequently be subject to deflection checks as described above. Deflection
checks shall also be carried out on adjacent pipes for 20m either side of the removed pipes.
The allowable positive or negative deflections on the pipelines shall be as follows:
i. After initial Installation 3%
ii. Long Term 5%
o. Deflection Measurements – GRP Pipes

The measurement shall be taken on at least three separate occasions:
1. After the pipe surround material has been placed and compacted to 300mm above the pipe crown.
2. On completion of all backfill material up to final ground level but before the dewatering is removed. This
measurement shall be taken within one day of completion of backfilling.
3. Immediately prior to the issue of a Certificate of Completion.
Pipes exhibiting any negative deflection in the vertical in (1) above and/or pipes exhibiting a deflection in excess of 2%
in (2) above or 4% in (3) above shall be exposed and the surround replaced and recompacted. Should any deflection
exceed 5% that pipe shall be replaced. Any pipe removed for this reason shall be taken from site and not incorporated in
the permanent works and at Contractor costs.
All pipes exposed for recompaction and pipes replaced for any reason shall subsequently be subject to the three
deflection checks listed above. Deflection checks shall also be carried out on adjacent pipes for 50m either side of the
recompacted or removed pipes.
p. Deflection Measurements for Rigid Pipelines

All rigid pipelines will be subjected to in-situ deflection measurements. Any section of pipe failing to meet the
deflection criteria shall have its surround material recompacted, such procedure being repeated until the in-situ
deflection is found to be satisfactory.
In the above paragraph deflection shall be considered as the maximum difference between the measured in-situ
diameter and the stated non-deflected diameter on any axis divided by the non-deflected diameter.
For all pipes the horizontal and vertical deflections shall be measured at each end at points 100mm and 1.5m away from
the joint and at 3.0m intervals thereafter, or as directed by the Engineer. For pipe lengths of less than 3.0m these
deflections shall be measured at each end at a point 100mm away from the joint and at the mid-point.
For pipelines smaller than 600mm diameter defections shall be checked by pulling though an approved cylindrical plug
dimensioned to suit the permissible minimum deflected diameter of the pipe.
Alternately, a deflect meter of a form that can be drawn through the pipeline and be capable of measuring diametric
dimensions both vertically and horizontally may be used for deflection measurement of pipes of diameter less than
600mm. The deflectometer shall be calibrated for each diameter regularly in the presence of the Engineer to maintain
the accuracy of the instrument. The device shall also provide a means of identifying where each deflection measurement
was taken along the length of a pipeline. This shall be in the form of either a continuous printout or a visual display on a
remote monitor.
For pipes of 600mm diameter and greater the device shall be in the form of a telescopic spring loaded rod graduated for
each diameter to show percentage deflections.
The Contractor shall tabulate the results of the measurements and copies shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately
Page 12-45
after each set of measurement has been taken.
q. Protection for Existing Pipe

For existing storm water drainage lines under temporary or permanent pavement, the Contractor shall provide cast-in-
situ concrete slab protection as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein.
Existing storm water drainage lines encountered with 2.5 meters of backfill or greater above the crown of pipe to
finished pavement elevation do not require protection.
Existing storm water drainage lines encountered under pavement with less than 2.5 meters of backfill (cover) above the
crown of pipe to finished pavement elevation require a cast-in-situ concrete protection slab as indicated on the Contract
plans and as directed by the Engineer.
Protection slabs shall be constructed of Class C-40 concrete and shall be reinforced with welded wire fabric complying
with ASTM A497 or A185, all as indicated on the Contract plans. All concrete work shall comply with the requirements
of Concrete Works, of these Standard Specifications.
For existing storm water drainage lines (if any), the work under this Item shall include, but not by way of limitation,
excavating all trench materials both wet and dry; removal and disposal of rubbish, existing pavements, driveways, brush
and timber, structures, and piping to be relocated, supported or abandoned; tight sheeting, shoring, well pointing,
bailing and dewatering as required; furnishing and placing approved safety equipment (portable trench boxes or sliding
trench shields, etc.) to protect personnel and the work; placement of a reinforced concrete slab over the top of the pipe
in accordance with details on the Contract plans; backfilling and compaction of excavated areas to finish grade;
restoring utilities, shoulders, trees, shrubbery, fences, culverts; other work incidental to construction and other items
disturbed by construction operations not included within subsequent Bills of Quantities items.
All excavated material shall be disposed of in accordance with requirements of, Article 2.3.2.5, Disposal of Materials;
Backfill shall be approved material in accordance with Section 2.5 of Chapter 2, Earth Works, of these standard
specifications.
Concrete slab protection shall be removed upon removal of temporary and detour pavements, unless the temporary
pavement is to be replaced by permanent paving or unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Removal of temporary
concrete slab protection shall be done in a manner that does not disturb the underlying utility. The concrete slab shall be
excavated and broken-up into manageable pieces to be disposed of as approved by the Engineer. All the concrete works
shall be in accordance with Chapter 4 of these standard specifications.
r. Laying Flexible Wall Pipe (Thermosetting Resin, Plastic and Corrugated Types)
Contractor shall install flexible wall pipes in compliance with the pipe manufacturer's written handling and installation
instructions, as shown on the Contract plans as specified herein and as per the approved shop Contract plans. Laying of
flexible walled pipe shall also be in accordance with the applicable general requirements for the laying of pipe as
specified in Article 12.1.4.5.
Bedding and backfill provide the structural support for thin wall flexible pipes and shall conform for Article 12.1.4.5,
Sub-article b. When encasing pipes in concrete, the pipe shall be firmly anchored to the blinding concrete to prevent
floating during pouring of the concrete.
Perforated plastic pipe shall be installed within an envelope of compacted permeable gravel material as shown on the
Contract plans, and as otherwise specified herein. Installation and sizing of the pipe surround material shall be as shown
on the Contract plans, as otherwise specified and as shown on the approved shop drawings.
Pipe placement shall begin at the downstream end. When using bell and spigot, bell shall be attached to one end of the
pipe at the manufacturing plant before shipment. Install the gasket on the spigot end and apply lubricant in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations. During laying of the pipe, push the spigot end of the pipe into the bell end of
the previously laid pipe.
Care shall be exercised when handling corrugated metal pipe to avoid damaging any bitumen or zinc coatings.
Corrugated metal pipe with riveted or resistance spot welded seams shall be laid in the trench with the outside laps of
circumferential joints upgrade and with longitudinal laps positioned other than in the invert, and firmly joined together
with approved bands.
Outside circumferential laps of the corrugated pipe shall be placed facing upstream. Pipe shall be placed with
longitudinal laps or seams at the sides. Paved or partially lined corrugated pipe shall be laid so the longitudinal
centreline of the paved segment coincides with the flow line. Pipe sections shall be joined so the inner surfaces are flush
and even and the ends are centred as required. Provide field joints that maintain pipe alignment during construction and
prevent infiltration of side material during the life of the installation. Corrugated pipes shall be firmly joined by
Page 12-46
approved coupling band devices. Use coupling bands with annular corrugations only with pipe with annular
corrugations. Provide bands with corrugations that have the same dimensions as the corrugations in the pipe end or that
are designed to engage the first or second corrugation from the end of each pipe. Band may also include a U-shaped
channel to accommodate upturned flanges on the pipe.
Corrugated aluminium metal pipe or pipe arch in contact with concrete shall be painted with 2 coats of paint. Prior to
painting, the pipe shall be cleaned with solvent to remove contaminants. After cleaning, the pipe shall be painted with 2
coats of coal tar epoxy meeting the applicable clauses for Section 24.5 of Chapter 24 of these Standard Specifications.
s. Laying Underdrain Perforated Pipe

Underdrains shall be installed in a permeable aggregate envelope wrapped in geotextile fabric of the dimensions shown
on the Contract plans. Installation and overlap of the geotextile fabric shall comply with the provisions of Chapter 2 of
these standard specifications. Perforated plastic pipe bedding and backfill shall be compacted in place, in layers not
exceeding 100 mm thick, to a minimum of 95 % of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T180,
Method C.
After securing the geotextile fabric to the sides and bottom of the trench, the pipe bedding shall be compacted the full
width of the excavated trench to the minimum depth shown on the Contract plans. Pipe bedding shall be manually
excavated to match the bottom one-third of the pipe circumference such that the perforated pipe is uniformly supported.
Extra clearance shall be excavated for pipe joint bells or collars.
Perforated pipes shall be laid with the perforations down. Outlets, riser pipes, and associated fittings shall be
constructed in accordance with the details shown on the Contract plans.
Join the pipe with appropriate couplers. Join plastic pipe in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Before placing the upper aggregate surround material, obtain the Engineer’s approval of pipe placement.
Spot checks using a go no-go mandrel deflection instrument shall be made by the Contractor on a minimum of 20 % of
the completed under drain pipe to check for deflection, as directed or approved by the Engineer. Maximum allowable
tolerance in grade is ±5 %. Deflection testing shall be done per the requirements in Section 12.11.1.
Outlet for each underdrain shall be clean at the time of installation and shall be free of obstructions after installation.
Pipes that are found to be plugged shall be replaced by the Contractor, including replacement of aggregate materials,
surfacing and backfill materials, at no additional cost to the Owner.
In cases where the top of the gravel envelope will be temporarily below the existing ground surface, the remainder of
the trench above the roadway subgrade level shall be temporarily backfilled until such time as the excavation for the
roadway takes place. However, prior to placing the temporary backfill, the filter fabric shall be folded over the top of
the trench, and strips of plywood, or other similar material, cut to the full width of the trench shall be placed temporarily
over the fabric. All such temporary backfill and strips of plywood shall be removed prior to completing the placement
of the remaining pervious backfill required.
t. Laying Prefabricated Edge Drains

During all periods of shipment and storage, keep the prefabricated edge drains wrapped and protected from direct
exposure to sunlight, mud, dirt, and debris. Repair or replace any damaged portion of the drains to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Trenches for the prefabricated edge drain and necessary lateral outlet pipes shall be neatly cut through existing materials
to the lines and dimensions shown on the Contract plans or as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer. Trenching method shall normally be use of wheel cutter trenching equipment although an alternative method
may be approved by the Engineer.
Edge drain material including lateral outlet pipes shall be placed in accordance with the Contract plans and the
manufacturer's recommendations. Edge drain shall be placed so that the fabric on one side is in intimate contact with the
aggregate base materials. It may be necessary to use spacers or blocks to keep the edge drain up against the aggregate
base during backfilling.
Place the prefabricated edge drain abutting the side of the trench farthest away from the centreline of pavement (the
outside of the trench). Place the drain in an upright vertical position so that it has no bends, crimps or sags in its final
position. Since many prefabricated edge drain types provide drainage on only one side, Place the drain so the side that
provides drainage faces the pavement.
Install panels in sequence (as shown on the Contract plans or recommended by the manufacturer) so that long edges
abut and each panel's open fabric pocket can receive the fabric-wrapped edge of the next panel. Align successive panels
in final position so that integral pipe pockets are in lateral alignment along lower edge and can accommodate drainage
Page 12-47
pipe installed in a continuous run.

Support panels in final (vertical) position using integral panel support straps or nails, pegs, poles or other appropriate
method until backfill operations are complete. Install splices required in the prefabricated edge drain prior to placement.
Install splices and connections in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to ensure continuity of the
drain.
Backfill material shall meet the requirements of Article 12.1.4.5, Sub-articles a, and b.
Avoid disturbing or dislocating panels during backfill operations. Place backfill materials against installed panel
surfaces in direction required to keep open-edged fabric pockets free of fill materials. Where required to avoid panel
damage during placement of fill materials, provide temporary protection for panel surfaces (sheet plywood, etc.).
Remove temporary panel protection upon completion of backfill placement. Avoid tearing or damaging filter fabric
during backfill operations. Overlay areas of torn or damaged fabric with additional fabric held in place until completion
of backfill work.
Backfill shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 150 mm of loose depth with the backfill compacted to a minimum of 95 %
of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T 180 , Method C as approved by the Engineer. Care shall be
taken during compaction to prevent damage to the edge drain material or lateral pipes.
For any given prefabricated edge drain run, install outlets no later than 48 hours after placement. Do not backfill the
outlet trench until the installation of the fitting and connection to the outlet pipe is inspected and approved by the
Engineer. Backfill all trenches before the end of the workday.
Where installed in existing pavement, the upper 50 mm of the edge drain trench shall be filled with hot asphaltic
concrete, meeting the applicable material requirements specified in Chapter 3, Pavement, of these standard
specifications, and compacted.
Amount of trench excavated at any time shall not exceed the amount of pavement edge drain system which can be
installed and the backfill completed in one working day. Backfill must be placed to the top of the edge drain trench if
the asphaltic concrete will not be placed in the same working day.
All necessary splices and connections are to be made with kits furnished by the manufacturer and in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications and directions.
Pipe and fittings shall be joined by solvent cementing. Solvent cement and primer shall be of commercial quality
specifically manufactured for use with approved drain materials. Solvent cement and primer used shall be made by the
same manufacturer. Colour of the primer shall contrast with the colour of the pipe and fittings. Solvent cement and
primer shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
Trenches in the existing embankment areas shall be backfilled with existing embankment material and compacted as per
the requirements of Chapter 2 Section 2.5 of these standard specifications.
Locations of outlets, vents and cleanouts will be marked with soil anchored flexible delineator posts as shown on the
Contract plans and as approved by the Engineer.
Edge drain outlet, vent, and cleanout pipes shall be clean at the time of installation and shall be free of obstructions after
installation.
Outlet and vent covers consisting of commercial quality 12.5 mm mesh stainless steel metal screens or grates with
polyvinyl chloride slip joint nut fittings shall be installed at the end of each outlet pipe and vent pipe to prevent animal
entry.
Contractor shall not damage the adjacent existing pavement during the excavation and placement operation. Any
damage done to the pavement shall be repaired, at no additional cost to the Owner, in a method approved by the
Engineer.
u. Installing Precast Polyester Concrete Channels

Polyester concrete channel shall be delivered in 1.0 m long installation units with tongue and groove type connections
such that the units can be easily interlocked together when installing.
End units shall be fitted with either a blank end cap or a horizontal PVC pipe outlet end fitting as appropriate. The outlet
end fitting shall be suitable for a solvent cement connection to 100 mm diameter Class 10 PVC pipe, as specified for
irrigation mains in Chapter 13 of these standard specifications.
Polyester channel shall be provided in three depth sizes and shall be installed as shown on the Contract plans. By
utilizing the maximum allowable length for the shallower channel units first, the Contractor shall ensure that the
maximum allowable lengths at each of the various depths are not exceeded. Deepest unit shall always be used for the
outlet unit to provide adequate cover for the 100 mm diameter outlet pipe.
Page 12-48
Polyester channel shall be installed by cast-in-situ in a 150 mm minimum thickness Class C25 concrete bedding, to
form a flush kerb as shown on the Contract plans. Top of the concrete bedding shall be at the final pavement grade and
sloped to match the top of the ductile iron grate, which shall be set 10 mm below pavement grade. This top slope of the
concrete bedding shall be carefully finished to obtain a smooth inflow surface.
Polyester channel shall be installed on a flat grade and held securely in place while placing the concrete bedding.
Installation of the channel shall proceed after the placement of the underlying sub base and base pavement courses, with
the concrete bedding being cast directly against the approved compacted layers for optimum bearing. A 5 mil minimum
thickness polyethylene plastic sheeting shall be laid over any exposed pervious backfill material serving as perforated
pipe filter envelopes, prior to pouring the concrete bedding. 100 mm diameter outlet pipe shall extend on a 0.3 %
minimum grade to the nearest curb inlet structure and shall be concrete encased as specified for flexible pipe
installations. Expansion joints, as specified in Chapter 4 of these standard specifications. Expansion joints shall be
installed in the concrete bedding on 4.0 m maximum spacing’s, which coincide with the polyester concrete channel unit
joints.
12.1.5 Cleaning and Testing

12.1.5.1 Cleaning
This work consists of removing unsuitable material from, within and around constructed and installed stormwater
drainage system including but not limiting to culverts, storm drains and associated structure. This work shall be done
for the testing of the stormwater drainage system for acceptance approval by the Engineer.
a. Final cleaning shall be performed by the Contractor upon completion of installation of the storm drain facilities
including backfill and prior to paving and performing any closed circuit television (CCTV) inspection.
Contractor shall clean the entire new pipeline of all dirt and debris. Pipes up to and including 600 mm in
diameter shall be cleaned either by the pulling of a cleaning swab through the pipe or by high pressure
rodding/vacuum truck. All newly constructed pipeline greater than 600mm nominal internal diameter will after
cleaning be inspected from the inside and the Contractor shall provide a suitable trolley for this purpose. Pipes
over 600 mm in diameter shall be cleaned by method approved by the Engineer.
b. Temporary plugs shall be installed and maintained during cleaning operations at points of connection to existing
facilities to prevent water, dirt and debris from entering the existing storm drain facilities. Installation and
removal of temporary plugs shall be conducted under the supervision of the Engineer. No dirty water from the
cleaning operations shall be discharged into any downstream storm drain facility.
12.1.5.2 Testing of Gravity Pipelines

a. Jointed Pipelines Shall not be Tested or Subject to Infiltration Limitations
All other non-pressure pipelines of 600mm nominal diameter or smaller shall be given a preliminary test when the
pipeline is bedded and jointed before backfilling and a final test after backfilling in the presence and to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
Unless otherwise instructed gravity pipelines shall be tested in sections between manholes. In addition pipelines shown
as straight line on the Contract plans shall be subjected to a light sighting test as detailed in the pipelaying specification
12.1.4.5.
Preliminary and final tests will not normally be applied to pipelines greater than 600mm (nom.) internal diameter and
acceptance of these pipelines will be dependent on satisfactory visual inspection of the pipes and joints.
Non-pressure pipe lines laid in open cut shall be acceptance tested after they are jointed before any concreting or
backfilling is commenced, other than such as may be necessary for structural stability whilst under test.
The method for acceptance testing shall be:
1. For pipelines up to and including 600mm in diameter, the water test shall be applied;
2. For pipelines greater than 600 mm, but not exceeding 900 mm in diameter, the air test shall be applied;
3. For pipelines greater than 900 mm in diameter, a visual examination shall be applied;
i. Testing of storm water drainage pipes shall include the following methods conducted by the Contractor:
a) Infiltration of water
b) Exfiltration of water
Page 12-49
c) Exfiltration of air under pressure

d) Deflection testing for flexible thermosetting resin, plastic and corrugated metal pipe
e) Lamping (All lines subject to this test)
f) TV inspection
ii. Testing techniques shall be as specified herein. At a minimum, testing methods as shown above, either (1),
(2), or (3) or a combination thereof will be acceptable. In addition, flexible pipe materials shall be tested
after installation and backfilling for deflection.
iii. Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer, the first section of storm water drainage pipe
constructed, of approximately 300 m in length or the entire length of the pipe if it is less than 300 m, shall
be tested by the infiltration, exfiltration or air testing method before additional excavation is permitted. (this
test shall be done for pipe diameter ≥400 mm)
iv. Flexible pipe materials shall be neither tested for deflection not sooner than 7 days nor later than 30 days
after backfilling is completed. Excavation shall not proceed beyond the first 300 m section until test results
for the entire 300 m are satisfactory.
v. Engineer will designate additional sections for testing as conditions warrant in his opinion. Engineer
reserves the right to select the location and lengths of additional test sections when construction operations
or materials change, or where construction difficulties indicate leakage or pipe deflection may be present or
in sections selected at random.
vi. Engineer shall notify the Contractor of the location where a test is to be required not later than 15 days after
the installation has been completed. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
arrange to commence the test within 15 days after installation or 15 days after notification by the Engineer,
whichever date is later.
vii. Testing of reinforced concrete pipe that has a PVC liner shall be done prior to the sealing of the PVC liner
at the joints.
viii. All other labour, equipment, material and water, including plugs, gauges and meters, shall be furnished by
the Contractor.
b. Infiltration Test for Storm Drainage Pipes

1. At locations where ground water is above the top of the pipe, an infiltration test shall be performed. To check
the amount of infiltration, the Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain a V-notch sharp crested weir in a
wood frame tightly secured at the invert of each pipe lateral and at locations on the main system directed by the
Engineer.
2. Infiltration shall not exceed 14 litres per twenty-four (24) hours per mm of pipe diameter per km length, and no
individual leak will be permitted, If the infiltration exceeds the maximum permitted, the Contractor shall
immediately make all repairs and replacements that, in the opinion of the Engineer are necessary to secure the
required water tightness.
After all repairs are made to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall again make an infiltration test and this
procedure shall be repeated until a satisfactory test is made at no additional cost to the Owner.
When infiltration is demonstrated to be within the allowable limits, the Contractor shall remove all weirs.
c. Exfiltration Test for Storm Drainage Pipes

1. In areas where ground water is not encountered during construction, the Contractor shall perform exfiltration
tests.
2. To check the amount of exfiltration, the ends of each section of the pipeline between manholes shall be
plugged with watertight bulkheads. Inserted in each bulkhead at the top of the pipe shall be a 50 mm pipe, with
an elbow, extending 1.2 m vertically in the upper manhole and to the same elevation in the lower manhole. Air
in the drainage pipe shall be exhausted by filling the 50 mm upper manhole pipe to a height of 1.2 m of water.
Using measured containers, the water shall be poured into the upper 50 mm pipe as needed to maintain a
constant head of 1.2 m in the upper pipe and a constant level in the lower pipe for a period of thirty minutes,
not allowing the lower pipe to overflow.
3. Rate of flow required to keep this required head shall be the exfiltration.
4. Exfiltration shall not exceed 14 litres per twenty-four (24) hours per mm of pipeline diameter per km length,
Page 12-50
and no individual leak will be permitted that, in the opinion of the Engineer,
5. If the exfiltration exceeds the maximum permitted, the Contractor shall immediately make all repairs and
replacements that, in the opinion of the Engineer, are necessary to secure the required water tightness. After all
repairs are made to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall again make an exfiltration test and this
procedure shall be repeated until a satisfactory test is made.
6. When exfiltration is demonstrated to be within the allowable limits, the Contractor shall remove bulkheads, test
pipes and equipment used in such testing operations.
d. Preliminary Test/Air Test for Storm Drainage Pipes

The length of pipeline under test shall be plugged and air shall be pumped into the pipeline until a pressure of 100mm
head of water is indicated in U-tube connected to the system. After allowing a suitable time for stabilization of the air
temperature the pressure shall hold (without further pumping of air) to not less than 75mm over a period of 5 minutes.
Release of the air pressure shall be carried out by removal of the stopper at the end of the pipeline away from the
monometer which will remain connected. Failure to pass the test shall not preclude acceptance of the pipe line if a
successful water test is subsequently carried out
The contractor will not be permitted to commence testing later than 4 hours after sunrise or earlier than 4 hours before
sunset during the summer period unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
e. Final Test/Water Test for Storm Drainage Pipes

The part of the pipeline under test shall be filled with water to a level 1.25m above its highest point. After standing for
30 minutes time for absorption, the water shall be topped up if necessary and in the following 60 minutes the loss off
water shall not exceed 7.5 litres per metre of diameter per 30m of length of pipeline under test.
Where in the opinion of the Engineer’s representative the above test is not sufficiently indicative of water tightness by
reason of high ground water levels the test will not be applied. Acceptance of the pipelines will then depend on
satisfactory inspection or testing for infiltration as referred in Article 12.1.5.2, and air test of the pipeline in manhole
lengths.
The Engineer may require any length of pipe suspected of being damaged to be retested the water test at any time
during the contract period.
f. Testing of Renovated and Replaced Pipelines

All non –pressure pipelines renovated or replaced by slip lining, soft lining, or pipe bursting methods shall be given an
air test or water test per Article 12.1.5.1, Sub-article c, in the presence and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Pipelines of 600mm or more internal diameter shall have each joint individually tested by means of an approved joint
testing apparatus. Pipelines of lesser size shall be tested in convenient lengths by filling with water under pressure.
Unless specified elsewhere, the test pressure shall be 900 kN square metre (91.8 m head) for cast iron and RCP pipes
shall be 50% above the manufacturers rated working pressure for the approved pipes for steel, plastic and other pipes.
The pressure test shall be sustained for a period of 30 minutes and the volume of water required maintaining the test
pressure shall be determined in an approved manner. The test will not be considered satisfactory if the rate of loss of
water from full pipe exceeds 1 litre per hour per 100 mm diameter per kilometre of pipeline under test, or from an
individual joint test, if the loss of the pressure during the test period exceeds 70kN per square metre.
Each test shall be restricted to pipes of one class and wherever practicable the length of pipeline to be pressure tested at
one time shall not exceed 500 metres. Particular care nuts are taken to isolate air valves, etc, not to apply higher
pressure than specified at any point on the pipelines and to ensure that the pipelines are adequately anchored before any
test is carried out.
Wooden plugs shall be provided and maintained in all open ends of the pipelines so as to exclude silt and deleterious
matter until the pipelines are commissioned
12.1.5.3 Testing of Water Retaining Structures

As soon as possible after completion the structures works, all water retaining structures shall be tested for water
tightness. Each structure shall be filled with water and shall stand for a period of three days, to allow for absorption.
The structure shall be considered satisfactory if, subsequent to this period, there shall be no fall in level over a period of
24 hours (after making the allowance for rainfall and evaporation) and no visible leaks, or damp surface areas.
This shall be carried out before any backfilling and before the supplication of any external concrete protection has taken
Page 12-51
place.
12.1.5.4 Other Test Allowances

For either the infiltration or exfiltration test, all lateral or side stormsewer branches included in the test section shall be
taken into account in computing allowable leakage. An allowance of 0.8 litres per hour per 0.3 m of head above invert
shall be made for each manhole included in a test section.
Upon final acceptance of the work all sewers, side sewers and fittings shall be open, clean, and free draining.
12.1.5.5 Internal Inspections

a. All pipelines with dimensions varying from 300 to 800 mm diameter shall be checked by a mirror or video
inspection type test. All pipelines, manholes and other structures exceeding 800 mm diameter shall be visually
inspected from the inside of such structures. This checking and inspection shall be performed by the Contractor.
Results of these investigations shall be recorded on approved inspection forms and submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
b. Storm water drainage pipelines shall be built so as to remain true to line and grade. Inclining grade of the bottom
of the pipeline after completion shall be such that after flooding with clean water, the water shall drain off so that
no remaining puddle of water shall be deeper than 5 % of the nominal pipe diameter (or ±2.5 % of pipe diameter
laying tolerance from grade). Any section of pipe that does not comply with these Specifications at any time
previous to final acceptance of the work shall be replaced or relayed at the Contractor's expense.
c. Contractor shall be held strictly responsible that all parts of the work shall bear the load of the backfill. If cracks
0.30 mm wide or greater develop in reinforced concrete pipe during construction will be rejected. If the cracks
happened within deflect liability period of the project the Contractor will be required to replace, all such cracked
pipe at his own expense.
d. For load bearing material and compaction factor refer to Chapter 2, Article 2.5.2.1, Article 2.5.2.2 and Article
2.5.2.5 of these standard specifications.
12.1.5.6 Deflection Testing

All flexible wall pipe and 20 % of perforated underdrain pipes, shall be tested for deflection after installation and
backfilling, Pipes shall be tested by pulling a go, no-go mandrel through the pipe. Mandrel shall be of diameter that is
not less than 90 % of the inside diameter of the pipe being tested. Mandrel shall be of design such that it does not twist
or bind, but stays in parallel alignment with the pipe walls.
Testing shall be done in convenient pipe sections as approved by the Engineer, such that pull ropes can be attached to
both ends of the mandrel, for retrieval in case the mandrel becomes wedged in a deformed section.
If flexible walled pipes develop deflections from round, greater than 10 %, at the time of testing, the Contractor will be
required to replace, all such deformed pipes at his own cost and with no additional cost to the owner. All the test results
shall be recorded in special formatted tables according to the work shop drawings.
All pipes exceeding a maximum ring deflection of 5% of the vertical internal pipe diameter shall be considered to have
failed and shall be replaced by the Contractor and at the contractor cost.
Each section which has been replaced due to failure of the deflection test shall be retested by the Contractor and at
contractor cost.
12.1.5.7 Video inspection

a. Upon completion of construction, a video inspection shall be performed only on the sections or portions of the
system where repair and/or replacement of pipe was deemed necessary by the Engineer because of excess
deflection, settlement, cracks, leaks, improperly seated joints and departures from approved grades and
alignment. Video files and a written report of all video inspections shall be provided to the Engineer prior to the
final inspection. Form of the report and type and format of the video file shall be as approved by the Engineer
b. Fees and costs connected with television inspections shall be paid for by the Contractor.
c. All defects including, but not by way of limitation, dips, cracks, leaks, improperly sealed joints, excessive
deflection limits and departures from approved grades and alignment shall be repaired by removing and
replacing the defective sections of pipe at contractor cost.
d. All defect repairs and corrective work required as the result of the video inspection shall be performed by the
Contractor without delay and at no cost to the Owner. Upon completion thereof, the system shall be re-tested and
Page 12-52
such further inspection made as directed by the Engineer.

Inspections by video are subject to the following conditions and requirements:
e. Video recordings must be made and submitted in high quality electronic media such as DVD. video equipment
must include the following items:
1. Digital video camera with articulating head
2. Self powered transporter adapted for conditions of the pipe
3. Video monitor
4. Video recorder
5. Lighting
6. Cables and power sources
f. Video equipment shall meet the following requirements:
1. Be specifically designed and constructed for pipe inspection
2. Have camera lighting for minimizing reflective glare
3. Have an adjustable focal-distance range from 150 mm to infinity
4. Produce a minimum resolution of 2 lines per mm ( 356 lines per inch) for both the camera and monitor
5. Have a remote-reading meter counter accurate to 1 % over the length of the particular section being
inspected. Verify accuracy of the distance meter in the video with a walking meter, roll-a-tape, or other
authorized device.
6. Inspect at a rate that is not more than 9 m per minute.
g. Engineer’s discretion shall be final in determination of defects.
Report inspection findings and recommended repairs. Inspection and evaluation report shall include:
1. 2 copies of the video recording and on the outside of each copy include:
i. Recording number.
ii. Inspection date.
iii. Current distance along the pipe measured by a count meter.
iv. Encoded text description of location, pipe size, type and length.
v. Printed labels with location and date on a hard copy of the video recording.
vi. Audio portion stating:
• Inspection date.
• Confirmation of the orientation and origin of the tape counter meter.
• Description of pipe size, type and length.
• Description and location of each defect.
• Description and location of each lateral pipe opening.
• Description of flow direction.
2. 1 set of the digital photographs.
3. Documentation of the condition of the pipe, including:
i. Any condition that might prevent proper installation of pipe liner or invert paving.
ii. Protrusions.
iii. Collapsed or crushed areas.
iv. Reduced cross-sectional areas.
v. Each lateral pipe opening, including:
Page 12-53
• Drainage system identification.

• Distance into pipe.
• Exact position and orientation within pipe wall.
• Size or dimensions of opening.
• Connecting joint.
• Flow direction.
vi. Each pipe joint.
4. Either a recommendation for repairs or statement that no repairs are needed.
5. If repairs are recommended, describe the location and conditions, including any sharp or protruding
appurtenances that might snag or tear the pipe liner. If possible, include a detailed evaluation by human entry
of the areas where repairs are needed. Describe any corrective action proposed to re-establish lateral pipe and
service openings.
If the Engineer determines that the inspection documentation is not adequate, the inspection and evaluation report will
be rejected and Contractor shall re-inspect and resubmit report at no additional costs to the owner. Inadequate
documentation may include poor camera head position, poor camera focus, and poor illumination, rapid rate of
progression, and incomplete records and logs.
12.1.5.8 Records of Inspection and Testing

All the inspections and tests shall be recorded, maintained and handed to the Owner.
12.1.5.9 Connections to Existing Storm Drains

At the locations shown on the Contract plans, as approved by the Engineer the Contractor shall connect the new storm
drains to the existing storm drains or structures but not until the new works have passed the final tests.
1. The contractor shall have all the NOC’s and permissions from all the relevant authorities prior to start his works
2. Contractor shall co-ordinate with other Contractor to join the pipes at the interface with adjoining Contracts. An
end plug shall be provided at the limit of Contract interfacing with the adjoining Contract. If the other Contractor
has already laid the pipe up to the interface, the Contractor shall remove the end plug and join the pipes after
completing the required pressure tests
3. Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent any dirt or extraneous material from entering the existing main
or service pipe
4. Contractor shall agree with the Engineer, the exact length of existing pipework to be removed
5. Engineer may put the interconnection into use as soon as possible after its installation and will carry out an
inspection to detect any evidence of leakage
6. Existing main and lateral pipes shall only be cut using special equipment approved by the Engineer. Cuts shall be
perpendicular to the centre line of the pipe and special care shall be taken with respect to the location of the cut
to ensure that the new pipe work shown on the Contract plans may be installed
7. Any remedial work necessary to eliminate leakage shall be carried out by the Contractor
8. No pipe work shall be covered or backfilled until the Engineer is satisfied that the interconnection has been
checked by the supervision responsible engineer and is free of all leakage and has approved the connection.
9. The contractor shall be contacted the ADCC for all power supply works and NOC’S to be obtained prior to start
any related works.
12.1.5.10 Trenchless Pipe Installation Methods

a. Contractor shall provide a complete set of method statement and shop drawings for approval prior to starting the
work. Shop drawings shall be complete and as a minimum include the following items:
1. Schedule
2. Maintenance of traffic
3. Safety management plan
Page 12-54
4. Risk Management Plan

5. Geotechnical report on specific soil investigation and recommendations
6. Traffic Management Plan
7. Detailed Shop drawings including:
i. Pipe and structures including the jacking/receiving pit profiles
ii. Jacking/receiving pit details
iii. Installation of jacking equipment thrust and foundation slabs
iv. Method of spoil transportation from face, temporary spoil, nature of haulage equipments, and disposal
location.
v. Pipe details including joint and fitting requirements
vi. Type of grout and joints used and relevant specification
vii. Installation method: i.e. auguring, open shield jacking, closed shield jacking, tunnel boring machine, etc.
Including lubrication and void grouting methods
viii. Type of lighting and ventilation system
ix. Alignment and steering control and monitoring equipment
x. Confirmation that the MTBM shall be capable of achieving the tolerances in line and level as specified
xi. Shoring system
xii. Dewatering system
xiii. The contractor shall contacting the ADCC for all power supply works and NOC’S to be obtained prior to
start any works.
xiv. Standby power supply shall be provided as required.
8. Detailed set of jacking and pipe strength calculations
9. Detailed methodology description
10. Surface deflection monitoring and control
11. Engineer and operator qualifications, which includes references for experience performing similar work
under similar conditions.
b. Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all materials, labour and equipment required for trenchless
installation of all duct and sleeve pipe and direct tunnelled pipe at the locations and in accordance with the
details shown on the project Contract plans and conforming with the requirements of these Specifications.
Work in this Specification section includes all storm drain pipe and utility services that are shown on the
Contract plans or proposed by the Contractor to be installed by trenchless pipe installation methods.
12.1.5.11 Materials
Materials to be used shall be approved by the Engineer prior to construction. Pipe to be installed by tunnelling shall
generally conform to the requirements of Section 12.1.3 and as shown on the Contract plans, but usually shall consist of
welded steel pipe meeting the requirements of Sub-article b below, where used as a sleeve for other pipe or utility
installations and heavy walled GRP or RCP having modified joints.
Additional reinforcement or strength of pipe and joint modifications required to withstand jacking pressure shall be
determined and furnished by the Contractor.
Alternative piping will be considered, in particular for pipes proposed to be used for directional drilling installation
methods. These materials shall be proposed by the Contractor and be of type as recommended by the speciality
subcontractor or manufacturer for such installations and as approved by the Engineer
a. Direct Jacked Pipe

Reinforced concrete pipe using double-rubber gasket, fiberglass reinforced epoxy collar, or approved equal type joints,
heavy wall GRP pipe, and steel pipe, modified with special joints and of strengths as required for the jacking loads, may
be jacked directly. When pipe is to be jacked in place, the design of such pipe, as shown on the Contract plans, is based
on the superimposed loads and not upon the loads which may be placed on the pipe as a result of the jacking operations.
Any increase in pipe strength required to withstand jacking loads shall be determined by, and be the responsibility of
the Contractor.
Page 12-55
b. Sleeve Pipe
1. Diameter of the sleeve pipe (sometimes called casing pipe) shall be sufficient to allow adjustments in the line
and grade of the pipe to be installed within the sleeve so as to meet allowable tolerances and to allow sand
and/or grout to be placed between it and the sleeve pipe. Minimum diameter of the sleeve pipe shall be 150
mm larger than the outside diameter of the joints of the pipe to be installed within it.
2. Steel sleeve pipe shall not be less than 10 mm thick unless otherwise shown on the Contract plans or specified
in the particular specifications. Steel pipe shall be bare steel casing pipe meeting the requirement of ASTM
A53, Grade B, Types E or S, or and approved equal. Ends shall be prepared for butt-welding and bevelled at
37.5oC. Steel sleeve pipe shall have minimum yield strength of 240 mPa. All joints in the carrier pipe or utility
shall be within the sleeve shall be watertight.
3. Any section of sleeve pipe showing signs of failure shall be replaced and any leaking joint shall be repaired at
no additional cost to the Owner.
Reinforce concrete sleeve pipe shall conform to the ASTM C76, Class V, Wall C.
c. Sleeve Spacers and End Seals

Use manufactured sleeve (casing) spacers to position carrier pipe in casing. Do not use wood skids.
Spacers and seals shall meet the following material requirements:
1. HDPE band/panel and riser: ASTM D638.
2. Stainless steel or carbon steel band/panel and riser: type 304 stainless steel according to ASTM A240 or carbon
steel according to ASTM A36 .
3. Liner: Elastomeric PVC per ASTM D149.
4. Spacer skid/runner: Abrasion resistant polymer with a low friction coefficient
5. Casing end seal shall be minimum 3 mm thick manufactured synthetic rubber casing end seal with stainless
steel bands and fasteners. Do not use PCC casing end seals with flexible carrier pipes.
12.1.5.12 Trenchless Installation

Contractor shall develop an installation plans and detailed shop drawings and submit to the Engineer at least 2 weeks
prior to start of work for approval in accordance with Article 12.1.5.10. Plans shall describe in detail the size, length,
depth, material, protection of the utility and pavement during and after construction, provisions for grouting, method of
construction, health, safety and environmental requirements, construction procedure, size and material of carrier pipe
and casing pipe, and include the additional following items:
1. General: Select a method of installation that is appropriate for the soil conditions anticipated and will:
i. Allow the pipe to be installed to the desired line and grade within the specified tolerances, as per Article
12.1.3.4, Sub-article b.
ii. Prevent heaving or settlement of the ground surface or damage to nearby facilities
iii. Prevent damage to the carrier pipe and any lining materials within the carrier pipe.
iv. Contractor shall conform with Abu Dhabi Road Drainage Manual appendix A, and final design stage for
selection guidance and submittal requirements.
2. Preparation:
i. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations
ii. Locate, identify, and protect utilities indicated to remain from damage
iii. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities
iv. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcroppings] and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping
v. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from
excavating equipment and vehicular traffic
vi. Establish minimum separation from other utility piping in accordance with local code
3. Excavation and backfill:
Page 12-56
i. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Chapter 2 of these standard specifications. Excavation for the
boring operation(s) shall be the minimum necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. Bracing and
shoring shall be adequate to protect workmen and any adjacent structures or roadways. Pits shall be
protected to prevent the public from entering them. Engineer requires that the excavations be fenced and
protected from stormwater runoff.
ii. Pits shall be placed as far away from existing structures or the travelled way as possible. In no case shall
pits be closer than 3 m to the travelled way unless approved by the Engineer. Pits shall be backfilled and
compacted to 95 % maximum density when the pipe installation work is finished.
iii. Pit / shaft construction method
a) Pits can constructed as segmental shafts.
b) Segmental pit concrete system can be constructed of any diameters and as shown and specify on the
Contract plans.
c) Number of segments per pit varies depending on the pits diameter.
d) Joints and connection details shall comply with the requirements of concrete works Chapter 4, Section
4.4.4 of these standard specifications.
e) Installation of the segmental concrete rings shall consider the installation available techniques:
• Caisson method
• Under pin method
• Combination of (1) and (2) method.
f) The contractor shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, Section 4.4.1 and
4.4.2 and other related sections of these standard specifications.
g) For control ground water, contractor shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, Sub-article
2.4.2.3a and Article 2.4.2.7 of these standard specifications.
4. Dewatering:
i. Intercept and divert surface drainage runoff away from excavation through use of dikes, curb walls, ditches,
pipes, sumps, or other means.
ii. Develop substantially dry subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations.
iii. Comply with requirements for dewatering to any watercourse, prevention of stream degradation, and
erosion and sediment control.
iv. The ground water disposing and discharging location shall be agreed and approved by the related authority,
and as per Chapter 2 of these standard specifications.
5. Existing work:
i. Maintain access to existing facilities and other remaining active installations requiring access
ii. Modify installation as necessary to maintain access.
6. Pits or approach trenches:
i. Excavate approach trenches or pits in accordance with shop Contract plans and as site conditions require.
ii. Ensure casing entrance face as near perpendicular to alignment as conditions permit.
iii. Establish vertical entrance face at least 0.3 m above top of casing.
iv. Install dewatering measures and excavation supports as specified in Chapter 2, Article 2.4.2.3, Dewatering,
and Sub-article 2.4.2.11b, Excavation Support, of these standard specifications.
a. Installation Methods
Installation methods shall be done per one of the general methods described by the following items:
1. Auger boring: A method that utilizes a rotating cutting head to form the bore hole and a series of rotating augers
inside a casing pipe to remove the spoil.
2. Directional drilling: A method for installing pipe from a surface-launched drilling rig. A pilot bore is formed and
then enlarged by back reaming and removing the spoil material. Pipe is then pulled in place.
Page 12-57
3. Open-ended pipe ramming: A method that involves driving a steel casing pipe with a percussive hammer. Front
end of the casing pipe is open-ended. Spoils are removed from the pipe.
4. Pipe jacking: A method in which pipe is pushed into the ground with hydraulic jacks while soil is simultaneously
excavated. Excavation and alignment control normally requires a closed or open shield or tunnel boring machine
depending on soil conditions.
5. Microtunneling: A method of pipe jacking using a remote controlled tunnel boring machine
6. Utility tunneling: A method of forming large diameter tunnels. As excavation takes place at the front of the
tunnel, a liner is constructed to temporarily support the tunnel. Upon completion of the tunnel, the pipe is pushed
in place.
7. Other: Other methods may be allowed with the Engineer’s approval.
b. Pipe Installation:
Pipe installation shall generally follow the general methods described for the approved procedure listed below:
1. Boring:
i. Push pipe into ground with boring auger rotating within pipe to remove spoil. Do not advance cutting
head ahead of casing pipe except for distance necessary to permit cutting teeth to cut clearance for pipe.
Arrange machine bore and cutting head to be removable from within pipe. Arrange face of cutting head
to provide barrier to free flow of soft material.
ii. When unstable soil is encountered during boring retract cutting head into casing to permit balance
between pushing pressure and ratio of pipe advancement to quantity of soil.
iii. When voids develop greater than outside diameter of pipe by approximately one inch, grout to fill
voids.
iv. When boring is obstructed, abandon boring; relocate jack or tunnel as directed by Engineer for more on
Settlements refer to Article 12.1.5.12, Sub-article h.
2. Jacking
i. Construct adequate thrust wall normal to proposed line of thrust.
ii. Impart thrust load to pipe through suitable thrust ring sufficiently rigid to ensure uniform distribution of
thrust load on full pipe circumference.
3. Boring and jacking

i. Use a steerable closed face tunnel boring machine made up of individual roller cutter units which is
turned and pushed by drilling machine to provide cutting action.
4. Mining and jacking:

i. Utilize manual hand mining excavation from within a cutting shield on end of pipe as pipe is advanced
with jacks, allowing minimum ground standup time ahead of casing pipe. Procedure may also be used
with a semi-closed shield to better control the cutting face in soft or low cohesive soils.
c. Slurry
1. Slurry will be a mixture of water and bentonite clay. The fluid will be inert. The fluid should remain in the tunnel
to ensure the stability of the tunnel, reduce drag on the jacked pipe, and provide backfill within the annulus of
the pipe and tunnel.
2. Disposal of excess slurry and spoils will be responsibility of the Contractor who must comply with all relevant
regulations, right-of-way, and workspace and permit agreements. Excess slurry and spoils will be disposed at an
approved location. The Contractor is responsible for transporting all excess slurry and spoils to the disposal site
and paying any disposal costs. Excess slurry and spoils will be transported in a manner that prevents accidental
spillage onto roadways. Excess slurry and spoils will not be discharged into sanitary or storm drain systems,
ditches or waterways.
3. Mobile spoils removal equipment capable of quickly removing spoils from the microtunnelling machine face
will be present during drilling operations to fulfil with the requirements of Article 12.1.5.12.
4. The Contractor will be responsible for making provisions for a clean water supply for the mixing of the slurry.
Page 12-58
d. Grouting Materials:
Prepare mixes that satisfy the required applications. Materials used in grout mix shall meet the following standards:
1. Cementitious Material:
i. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, unless the use of Type III is authorized by the Engineer; or ASTM
C 595, Type IP.
ii. When aggregates are potentially reactive with Alkalis in cement, use cement not exceeding 0.6 percent
alkali content in the form of Na2 O + 0.658K2O.
2. Water: Clean, free from harmful amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, or other deleterious substances, and meeting
requirements of ASTM C 94.
3. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Determine the potential reactivity of fine aggregate in accordance with the
Appendix to ASTM C 33.
4. Fluidifier: Use a fluidities meeting ASTM C 937 that holds the solid constituents of the grout in colloidal
suspension and is compatible with the cement and water used in the grouting operations.
5. Admixtures:
i. Use admixtures meeting ASTM C 494 and ASTM C 1017 as required, to improve pumpability, to control
time of set, to hold sand in suspension and to reduce segregation and bleeding.
ii. For cellular grout, do not use foam or admixtures that promote steel corrosion.
iii. Ensure that admixtures used in a mix are compatible. Provide written confirmation from the admixture
manufacturers
6. Water Reducers: ASTM C 494, Type A.
i. Water Reducing Retarders: ASTM 494, Type D.
ii. High Range water reducers (Superplasticizers): ASTM C 494, Types F and G
7. Prohibited Admixtures: Admixtures containing calcium chloride, thiocyanate or materials that contribute free
chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight or cement.
8. Grout Type Applications.
i. Grout for pressure grouting and back grouting: sand-cement mortar mix.
ii. Grout for annular grouting: Low density (cellular) grout or sand-cement mortar mix.
iii. Ground stabilization: Sand cement mortar mix.
9. Do not include toxic or poisonous substances in the grout mix or otherwise inject such substances underground.
10. Provide grout that meets the following minimum requirements:
i. Minimum 28day unconfined compressive strength: 1000 psi for sand-cement mortar grout; 300 psi for
cellular grout.
ii. Determine strength by ASTM C 942.
e. Construction Operations Criteria:

1. Use methods of microtunneling and pipe-jacked tunneling operations that will minimize ground settlement.
Select a method which will control flow of water and prevent loss of soil into the tunnel and provide stability of
the face under anticipated conditions.
2. The Pilot Tube Microtunneling system shall utilize a two or three phase system as described below;
i. Three pass System
a) Phase 1- A rigid steel pilot tube in approximately one-meter lengths shall be installed through the
ground from the drive shaft to the receiver shaft by earth displacement with the jacking frame. The
alignment of the pilot tube shall be established with a theodolite mounted at the rear of the drive shaft
and accurately set to the desired line and grade. The theodolite shall view a lighted target in the lead or
steering pilot tube. A camera shall be fitted to the theodolite and shall transmit the image of the
crosshair and the target onto a monitor screen to be viewed in the drive shaft by the operator. As the
operator advances the pilot tube through the earth the centre of the target will drift from the crosshair as
Page 12-59
a result of the biased or slanted leading tip of the pilot tube. The operator shall rotate the pilot tube as
required to orient the slanted steering tip toward the crosshair and continue to advance the pilot tube
until it reaches the receiver shaft.
b) Phase 2 – An enlargement casing with an outside diameter up to 1½ larger than the product pipe shall
be rigidly connected to the final pilot tube and advanced into the earth behind the pilot tube. An auger
shall be used inside the enlargement casing to remove the material being excavated. The auger shall be
contained inside the limits of the enlargements casing as it progresses along the proposed alignment. A
train of temporary steel casings with an outside diameter very similar to the enlargement casing and
used to move the enlargement casing from the drive shaft to the receiver shaft. The enlargement casing
will cut a bore hole from the drive shaft to the receiver shaft and the temporary casings will case the
hole as it is cut. Each temporary casing shall be fitted with an internal auger to transport the excavated
material to the drive shaft where it shall be removed from the shaft and disposed of at an approved
location. The pilot tubes shall be recovered in the receiver shaft as the temporary casings are installed.
c) Phase 3 – The product pipe shall then be installed directly behind the final temporary casing pipe with
the jacking frame. The casing pipes and augers shall be recovered in the receiver shaft as the product
pipe is installed.
ii. Two Pass System
a) Phase 1 - The pilot tube shall be installed in the same manner described phase 1 of the Three Pass
System.
b) Phase 2 - The enlargement casing shall be installed in the same manner described in phase 2 of the
Three-Phase System. Each product pipe shall be fitted with an internal protective-casing pipe to house
the auger and prevent damage to the product pipe. The product pipe shall be installed directly behind
the enlargement casing with the internal casing rigidly connected to the auger chamber of the
enlargement casing. The internal casing shall be manufactured such that the excavated material does not
leak excessively into the product pipe. The internal casing shall be fitted with a protective shoe to
protect the product pipe from damage and to support the casing and auger at the centerline of the pipe.
The product pipe shall be advanced along the proposed alignment with the jacking frame thus
progressing the enlargement casing from the drive shaft to the receiver shaft with the pilot tubes being
recovered in the receiver shaft. The excavated material shall be tunnelled into and conveyed through the
internal casing to the drive shaft where it shall be removed from the shaft and disposed of at an
approved location. Upon reaching the receiver shaft the enlargement casing shall be removed and the
internal casings and augers retracted and recovered at the drive shaft.
3. Conduct tunnelling operations in accordance with applicable safety rules and regulations, OSHA standards and
Contractor’s safety plan. Use methods, which include due regard for safety for workmen, adjacent structures,
utilities, and the public.
4. Maintain clean working conditions on the project site.
5. The Contractor is required to record the exact position of the micro tunnelling method or shield after each shove
to ensure alignment is within the specified tolerances. The Contractor shall make immediate corrections to
alignment before allowable tolerances exceeded if a mis-alignment is recorded.
6. The Contractor shall required to check and record survey control for the tunnel against an above-ground
undisturbed reference at least for each 7.5m of tunnel constructed.
7. The Contractor shall take all necessary action to ensure the safety of the work and shall ensure compliance with
the pre-approved safety Management Plan requirements at all times.
8. The sizes of all excavations shall conform to the following requirements:
i. Shafts shall be at the minimum size possible commensurate with safe working practices and located at the
maintenance holes. The Contractor shall select the size and provide the design of all shafts.
ii. Every face of any excavation that exceeds a depth of 1.5 m shall be supported or contained by shoring
unless the face is cut back to a safe slope.
iii. The shoring of the excavation shall be braced as the excavation progresses and where a mechanical digger
is used, the shoring is to be kept as close as practicable to the excavator.
iv. All necessary, measures must be taken to ensure that excavations are left in a safe condition, including the
erection of suitable hard barricades, warning signs and hazard lights.
v. The earthworks shall be set out in accordance with the design.
Page 12-60
vi. The contractor shall inspect the site, and verify all existing levels, survey control points and set out points
shown on the Contract plans, before commencing the earthworks.
vii. The excavations shall be made to the depth and extent as shown on Contract plans with proper allowance
for fill, additional cover where required and formwork. The excavations shall be kept free and clear of
loose materials, water and rubbish. Should excavation to the nominated depth reveal unstable or
unsuitable ground, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer.
f. Contingency Planning
The Contractor shall prepare a contingency plan specific to the site operation. The Plan should address but not be
limited to the following:
1. General procedures
2. Labour issues
3. Equipment needs and spares
4. Time considerations
5. Clean up and monitoring methods
6. The Owner and regulatory contact
7. Disposal Contract plans
8. Public Relations
g. Obstructions and Loss of Ground

After satisfactory completion of the installing the new pipe and removal of all equipments and excavated materials for
the MT&PJ operations, the Contractor shall conduct the inspection outlined as follows.
1. If a stoppage in the forward progress of the Works is encountered, the cause of the stoppage shall be determined
by the Contractor. When the cause has been identified, the installation method shall be modified to the
satisfaction of the Engineer to best suit the actual conditions encountered. Should the stoppage be shown to have
resulted as a direct result of the Contractor’s incorrect of faulty equipment, materials or method, then all
remedial costs will be at the Contractor’s expense.
2. Should appreciable loss of soils occur during microtunneling operation, the voids shall be backpacked promptly
to the extent practicable with soil cement consisting of slightly moistened mixture comprising one part cement to
five parts granulate materials. Where the soil is not suitable for this purpose, the Contractor shall import suitable
materials.
3. All damages, loses during the MT and PJ construction works will be at contractor cost with no additional cost to
the Owner.
h. Settlement and Monitoring

1. The Contractor shall undertake all the necessary care and precautions to protect existing structures, utilities and
services in planning and execution of the Works.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification and protection of services here these are crossed by
construction activities.
3. Where crossing of roadways, railways, bridges, underpasses and Interchanges are involved, the Contractor
prior to beginning the bores, a geotechnical investigation was undertaken to investigate, determine and analyse
the soil types and engineering soils data to avoid any settlements during this boring procedure.
4. Where utilities and pipelines are involved, the Contractor shall monitor soil settlement directly above, and 3m
before and after, the utility or pipeline intersection.
5. The Contractor shall ensure surface or ground monitoring points are recorded on centreline of tunnelling at a
minimum of 30m intervals or at least three locations per tunnel drive.
6. The Contractor shall ensure surface settlement monitoring readings are taken monitoring point, and when the
zone of active excavation has passed and no further movement is detected.
7. The Contractor shall cease operations when monitoring points observe or indicate any surface disruption. The
Contractor shall propose immediate action for review and approval by the Owner to remedy the problem.
Page 12-61
i. Performance Requirements
1. The Contractor shall provide proof of certification by the MT and PJ equipment manufacturer of the energy
consumption, condition, and operational characteristics of all equipment to be used for installing the specified
pipe.
2. The Contractor shall provide details of all bentonite injection operations if required to be used as a lubricant
during the jacking operations.
3. Dewatering shall not be permitted for microtunneling, but, if required may be permitted for construction of
access shafts.
4. The Contractor shall ensure the pipes are jacked into place without damaging the pipe joints or the completed
pipe section.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that the MT equipment employs a spoil removal system that shall have the
capability of balancing the earth or water pressures at the face, either by the use of compressed air or slurry, if
required.
6. The Contractor shall ensure that the system is laser controlled and monitored by the operator at all times. All
functions of the system shall be monitored and transmitted to the remote operations console. The minimum
information available to the operator on the consoles shall include rate of advance length of conduit installed,
thrust force, deviation from line and grade, role, inclination and valve positions.
7. The Contractor shall ensure that the tunnel shield is articulated and maneuvered by steering jacks or other
approved method to enable accurate control of line and grade.
8. The contractor shall ensure that the equipment has the capability of jacking force applied to the pipe or tunnel
shield so as not to exceed the manufactures recommended compressive loads for the pipe.
9. The Contractor shall ensure that the lubrication system is provided that injects an approved lubricant at the rear
of the tunnelling shield to lower the friction developed on the exterior of the pipe during jacking.
10. The Contractor shall ensure that all groundwater pressure encountered during the excavation of the tunnel be
balanced by the tunnelling machine.
11. The contractor shall ensure that the slurry tunnelling system uses a minimum volume of water in the slurry
system.
12. The Contractor shall ensure that the tunnelling shield be capable of keeping drift and rotation or role to a
minimum.
j. Carrier Pipe or Utility Installation through Sleeve

Carrier pipe or utility installation through a sleeve shall be done per the following procedure:
1. Clean dirt and debris from the interior of the sleeve pipe after installation.
2. Install casing spacers on carrier pipe sections as necessary to support the pipe/utility barrel according to the
manufacturer's recommendations subject to the following minimum requirements:
i. Install a spacer within 300 mm of each side of the carrier pipe/utility joint and at a maximum spacing of
1.8 m.
ii. Do not allow the pipe/utility to be supported by joint bells.
iii. Lubricate casing spacers with manufacturer recommended material. Do not use petroleum-based
lubricants or oils.
3. Ensure that thrust loads will not damage carrier pipe/utility joints. Provide thrust collars between joint shoulders
of concrete pipe.
4. Provide timbers for sufficient cushioning between the end of the pipe pushed and the jacking equipment to
prevent damage to the pipe. Do not allow the steel jack face to thrust against the unprotected pipe/utility end.
5. Position jacks so the resulting force is applied evenly to the entire end of the pipe/utility
6. Alternately, for smaller diameter utilities, it may be necessary to provide pulling rope/cable and draw the utility
through the sleeve.
7. Assemble pipe joints in the jacking pit before pushing the carrier pipe/utility into the casing.
8. Close the end of the sleeve pipe around the carrier pipe/utility with a casing end seal.
Page 12-62
9. When shown on the Contract plans or required in the Particular Specifications, fill the annular space between the
carrier and casing pipe with flowable mortar or pressure grout.
k. Direct jacking of RCP and GRP Pipe

Guide rails shall be accurately set to line and grade to insure installation within tolerances allowed. Diameter of the hole
shall not be more than 30 mm greater than the outside diameter of the pipe.
Tunnelling/jacking method shall be selected for satisfactory installation appropriate to the soil and site conditions, as
l. Pit Restoration
Remove installation equipment and unused materials from the launching and receiving pits. Backfill the pit with
suitable materials according to the applicable clauses of Chapter 2 of these standard specifications.
Apply the testing requirements. Restore the site to original condition or better.
m. Grade and Alignment Tolerances

Extreme care shall be exercised by the Contractor to maintain line and grade during jacking operations. Maximum
deviation for line and grade of sleeve pipe shall be such that the line and grade of the pipe/utility installed within the
casing can be adjusted a sufficient amount within the casing to achieve the line and grade shown on the Contract plans.
This adjustment shall be made to whole length of pipes/utilities deviating from line and grade and not merely to the
sections of pipe nearest the end of the casing.
Directly jacked RCP and GRP pipe will be allowed a maximum deviation of ± 30 mm per 30 m length from intended
line and grade unless more stringent tolerances are shown on the Contract plans.
12.2 Culverts
12.2.1 Description
Any structure not classified as a bridge which provides an opening under the roadway is deemed a culvert. Large
culverts or multiple barrel culverts exceeding a total of 6 m in flow opening width are considered a bridge. Construction
of bridge shall meet the requirements of Chapter 32, Precast Concrete Culverts.
12.2.2 Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipes

In case of severe potential acid generation from hydrogen sulphide gases, moisture and bacteria on the pipe wall, an
internal liner to be specified to protect the reinforced concrete pipe which will enhance its durability, long life and
economy. The liner either soft (HDPE/PVC) or GRP, this additional protection against corrosion media gives the pipe a
trouble free service.
Reinforced concrete drainage pipes are designed and manufactured in accordance with ASTM C 76M and relevant BS
5911 part-1 specification, the rubber gasket meets the requirements of ASTM C 443M. The exterior wall may be coated
with bituminous or coal tar epoxy paint as per Section 24.5 of Chapter 24 of these standard specifications.
a. PVC / HDPE Lining: The HDPE/PVC T-shape profile sheet mechanically locks into the concrete interior wall,
forming a continuous smooth surface with lower friction coefficient than concrete and offers no sustenance to
fungus, bacterial slimes. The dense glossy surfaces of HDPE neither absorb nor retain precipitated material.
Lining continuity guaranteed by heat welding each individual pipe line with the next one. This method in lining
is permanently flexible, resistant to acid solutions, diluted solvents, and petroleum products, exposure to
vegetable and animal oil, alkali chemicals and bacteria. A spark test is performed in the plant to determine any
possible pinholes in the lining that may have developed and repair is done immediately.
The HDPE liner shall be impermeable, corrosion resistant suitable for the storm sewer environment and shall be
resistant to chemicals and minerals.
The HDPE membrane shall be 400 micron (1600 gauge) thick and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1505,
D1709, D 1922, D1525, and D638.
The finished HDPE membrane thickness shall have average 400 microns with cariation no greater the 10%
anywhere across the sheet in any direction and surfaces shall have not strations, roughness, pinholes or bubbles.
The liner shall have prefabricated corners.
b. GRP LINING: Manufactured and designed as per the ASTM C76M and BS5911 part 1 specification. The
Page 12-63
embedded liner is the interior of the reinforced concrete pipe, where its thickness ranges from 4mm to the
required thickness of the project specification. The liner is a resin layer of fibre glass with a surface veil of chop
glass.
12.2.3 Materials
Pipe culvert material selection shall be made in accordance with Section 12.1.3 except that thermosetting resin and
plastic pipe materials shall not be used on exposed end sections, due to long-term UV exposure damage.
It is not necessary that all pipe culvert pipes on any one project be of the same kind of material. However, all
contiguous pipes shall be of the same size, material, thickness, class, and treatment and shall be that required for the
maximum height of cover, unless otherwise shown on the Contract plans
Cast in place concrete culverts materials and construction requirements shall be in accordance with the Chapter 4,
Section 4.3, Materials, and Section 4.4, Construction requirements of these standard specifications.
Installation, including trenching, bedding and backfill for culverts shall be in accordance with Chapter 32 of these
End sections and headwalls materials and construction requirements shall be in accordance with Section 12.2.5.
Safety bars and outlet protection materials and construction requirements shall be in accordance with Article 12.2.5.10
and Article 12.2.5.11 and Chapter 32 of these standard specifications.
12.2.4 Precast Box Culverts

Contractor shall provide precast box culverts per the details shown on the Contract plans or provide a shop drawings
design and details as approved by the Engineer. Design and construction of square or rectangular precast reinforced
concrete boxes shall conform to BS EN 13242, AASHTO M 259 or M 273, with the Contractor supplied design
controlled by the amount of cover shown on the Contract plans. Pre-cast reinforced concrete box culverts shall meet the
material and manufacturing requirements of Chapter 4, Section 4.3, Materials, and Section 4.4.8, Concrete for precast
elements. Reinforcement and welded steel fabric used in pre cast box culverts shall conform to the requirements of
Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 of these standard specifications.
Contractor shall furnish and submit for approval, substantial evidence of manufacturer’s qualification to produce the pre
cast box culverts. Such evidence of prequalification shall include the following items:
a. Written evidence of successful completion of at least 3 projects of size and scope similar to the project for which
he wishes to be prequalified for. Projects shall have been performed within the previous 5 years. Such evidence
shall include references for said work.
b. A written document detailing the manufacturer’s quality control program which demonstrates conformance to
the requirements of DoT Manual QA/QC
c. Give written notification 2 weeks in advance of performing casting operations. Engineer may, at his option,
inspect the precast facilities including, but not limited to, reinforcing assembly; forming equipment; concrete
batching facilities; placement, curing, and handling equipment; and testing and inspection equipment and
procedures.
d. All the works at the site location are shall comply with DoT/QA/AC manual requirements.
e. Certification: Submit a certificate of compliance issued by the manufacturer of the precast reinforced concrete
box sections at the time of shipment. Certificate shall include the following:
1. Specification under which the box sections were manufactured.
2. A statement that the construction of the box sections, and all materials used therein, are in compliance with
the requirements of the applicable ASTM or AASHTO specifications.
3. A statement that the fabrication, assembly, concrete strengths, curing and finishing meet the specifications
4. Name of manufacturer, date casting was made and signature/date by the manufacturers responsible
representative.
Manufacturer of the precast sections shall maintain, for a period of one year following shipment, a copy of
the appropriate test reports and other documentation necessary to support the certificates of compliance.
Manufacturer of box culverts must sample and test the concrete for compressive strength at least once every
production shift but not less than once daily. Test result records must be available to the Engineer review and
approval..
Page 12-64
Contractor shall provide for Engineer representatives attendance to inspect casting facilities and/or inspect
actual casting operations at time of casting units if so requested.
12.2.4.1 Acceptance
Contractor shall provide shop drawings for pre cast concrete box culverts which shall include the construction method,
dimensions, and reinforcement including splice type and location, and height of earth cover. If not shown on the
Contract plans, reinforcement design shall be done and checked by the Contractor and the calculations provided with
the shop drawings.
Submit a certificate of compliance signed by the manufacturer's representative for each shipment.
Carefully handle concrete boxes in loading, unloading, transporting, and laying.
Do not lay boxes which are cracked, checked, spelled, or damaged, and permanently remove all such sections from the
work. Boxes which show defects due to handling will be rejected at the site of installation regardless of prior
acceptance.
Fine cracks and checks on the surface of the member which do not extend to the plane of the nearest reinforcement will
not be cause for rejection unless they are numerous and extensive. Repair cracks which extend into the plane of the
reinforcing steel, but are acceptable otherwise, in an approved manner. If the crack width exceeding 0.25mm in width,
shall be kept on file for monitoring conditions during subsequent inspections. Crack measurements and photographs
shall be taken for monitoring conditions during subsequent inspections.
Repair small damaged or honeycombed areas, which are purely surface in nature. Excessive damage, honeycomb, or
cracking will be subject to structural review. Make sound repairs, properly finish, and cure in conformance with the
pertinent specifications. When fine cracks or hair checks on the surface indicate poor curing practices, discontinue
further production of precast boxes until corrections are made and proper curing provided.
12.2.5 Construction requirements

12.2.5.1 Pipe Culvert Installation
Pipe culverts shall be installed and tested in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 32 and Chapter 4 of these
If the culvert does not have a headwall, a dike or plug of impervious material shall be compacted around the pipe near
the intake end of the culvert to prevent seepage and soil piping along the pipe barrel. Dike shall be at least 0.6 m long
and adequately surround the pipe to form an impervious barrier. When suitable impervious materials are not available at
the site, the plug shall consist of concrete encasement meeting the requirements of Article 12.1.3.5, Sub-article e.
Ends of the pipe or pipe arch shall be rigidly supported to prevent movement before and during the construction of head
walls or installation of flared end sections.
Culverts shall not be left extending beyond the staked limits unless approved by the Engineer.
Where shown on the Contract plans, culvert pipes shall be bevelled to match the embankment or ditch slope but shall
not be bevelled flatter than 4:1. Minimum length of each section of pipe that is to be bevelled shall be at least 6 times
the diameter of the pipe when measured from the toe of the bevel to the joint.
12.2.5.2 Cast-In-Situ Box Culvert Installation

Cast-in- situ box culverts shall be constructed in accordance with Chapter 4, Concrete Works, Section 4.4, Construction
requirements, and as shown on the Contract plans.
In general, the following installation procedure shall be followed, as approved by the Engineer:
1. Plain concrete bed , granular filter material and Geotextile membrane sheets shall be provided prior to cast the
culvert as shown on the contract drawings
2. Place the base slab or footings of box culverts and allow setting before the remainder of the culvert is
constructed.
3. Before concrete is placed in the sidewalls, thoroughly clean the culvert footing of all shavings, sticks, sawdust,
or other extraneous material and carefully chip and roughen the surface to minimum 6 mm amplitude.
4. Do not construct walls and top slab as a monolith on box culverts where the depth of pour below the bottom of
the top slab exceeds 1.2 m unless approved in writing. Make any necessary construction joints vertical and at
right angles to the axis of the culvert.
Page 12-65
5. When walls are poured separately, in non-rigid frame box culverts, place the concrete in the walls and allow
setting a minimum of 2 hours before placing the top slab.
6. When walls are poured separately, in rigid frame box culverts, place the concrete in the walls and allow setting a
minimum of 12 hours before placing the top slab.
7. Construct each wing wall, monolithically. Make construction joints, where unavoidable, horizontal and locate so
that no joint will be visible in the exposed face of the wing wall above the ground line.
8. Do not release false work for box culverts and other structures with decks lower than the roadway pavement and
with span lengths of 4.2 m or less until the last placed concrete has attained a compressive strength of 11 mPa,
provided that curing of the concrete is not interrupted.
9. Formwork shall conform to Section 4.6, Formwork.
10. For water proofing materials, the Contractor shall comply with water proofing material type A in accordance
with Chapter 28 of these standard specifications.
11. Construction joints shall be made as shown on the Contract plans ,shop drawings and shall be approved by the
Engineer and as specified herein construction joints against which earth fill is to be placed shall be protected by
heavy coal asphalt confirming to ASTM 312 Type-II.
12. When construction joints are exposed to view or where water seepage is possible, a water stop acceptable to the
Engineer must be installed. It must be placed a minimum of 0.60cm into the concrete and no more than 0.9cm
away from the joint.
13. In order to bond successive courses, constructed of Bevelled wood strips must be inserted prior to concrete
placement and subsequently removed.
12.2.5.3 Pre-Cast Box Culvert Installation

Precast reinforced concrete box culverts may also be furnished in lieu of the cast-in-situ method. In general, the
manufacturer’s installation procedure is to be followed or as approved by the Engineer. General laying is as follows:
a. Plain concrete bed , granular filter material and Geotextile membrane sheets shall be provided prior to cast the
culvert as shown on the contract drawings
b. Bed the boxes as shown on the Contract plans.
c. Begin the placing of the boxes at the downstream end of the line. Place the grooved ends of the box segments
facing upstream. Place the bottom of the segments in full contact with the prepared bedding. Check the box
segments for alignment and grade at the time of joining the sections.
d. Keep the interior of the boxes free of dirt and other foreign material as the box laying progresses, and leave clean
at the completion of the work. Take up and relay any box which is not in true alignment, which shows any undue
settlement after laying, or is damaged.
e. Join the box segments in such a manner that the ends are fully entered and the inner surfaces are flush and even.
The maximum tolerable gap in the joints will be 19 mm, checked immediately after making each joint. If any
annular space exists in the interior portion of the joint, fill with an approved mortar. Finish the mortar flush with
the interior surfaces of the box units.
f. Seal joints for precast boxes with flexible, watertight, preformed joint material installed according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations and Chapter 32 of these standard specifications.
g. For multiple box installations, solidly fill the space between the box walls with grout. Use grout of workable mix
suitable for pumping without segregation. Place the grout by pumping or an approved alternate method.
Consolidate the grout by mechanical vibration or rodding during placing. Perform the grouting in a continuous
pour in lifts not exceeding 1.8 m. Vertical grout barriers may be used to control the flow of grout horizontally.
Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 17 mPa in 28 days when tested according to ASTM C39.
h. For more details on the culverts construction refer to Chapter 32 of these standard specifications.
12.2.5.4 End Sections

Furnish the same type of pipe and end sections at an individual location, except that thermosetting resin and plastic pipe
may be connected to metal or concrete end sections.
Plastic flared end sections will not be allowed.
Fabricate flared end sections as shown on Contract plans. Minor variations may be authorized to permit the use of the
Page 12-66
manufacturer's fabrication methods.
12.2.5.5 Precast Concrete Flared End Sections

Precast flared end sections shall comply with the following:
1. Meet the material requirements in Article 12.1.3.5 and meet the requirements of Chapter 32 of these standard
specifications.
2. Area of steel reinforcement per linear foot of flared end section must be at least equal to the minimum steel
requirements for circular reinforcement in circular pipe for the internal diameter of the circular portion of the
flared end section
3. Basis of acceptance of the precast concrete flared end section will be made per requirements of section 5.1.2 of
AASHTO M 170.
12.2.5.6 Metal Flared End Sections

Metal flared end sections shall comply with the following:
1. Prefabricated steel flared end sections shall comply with AASHTO M 36, and M 218
2. Prefabricated aluminium flared end sections shall comply with AASHTO M 196, and M 197.
3. Metal flared end sections may be used as an alternative to precast concrete flared end sections. Metal flared end
sections used on concrete pipe 900 mm in diameter or smaller shall be equipped with toe plates.
4. Use connector sections to match culvert pipe.
5. Mortar used to connect metal flared end sections to precast concrete pipe shall comply with requirements of
Chapter 4, Article 4.3.10.4, of these standard specifications, Mortar and grout.
12.2.5.7 Laying End Sections

End sections shall be installed as shown on the Contract plans.
Excavate the bed for the end section to the required width and grade. Place bedding for the end section, same depth and
type as used for the culvert pipe.
For metal end sections with toe plates, excavate a trench for the toe plate in a manner to permit the toe plate to be
against the inner face of the trench in its final position. After end sections have been properly secured to the pipe,
backfill the trench and firmly compact.
Place the precast concrete end section with its tongue (or groove) fully entered in the groove (or tongue) of concrete
culvert pipe.
Where flared end section material does not match the pipe type or material, connect the end section to the culvert pipe
using a commercially manufactured bolted band type fitting where the outer band can be tightened down around a
flexible gasket against the barrels of the flared end and culvert pipe to provide a water tight and secure connection.
Flared end section laying shall be according to the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. When the pipe is properly
positioned, the end section shall require the invert of the pipe and the invert of the end section to be at the same
elevation.
After attaching the end section to the culvert pipe, place pipe surround and upper trench backfill as otherwise specified
for the pipe, bringing the backfill to match the final grade elevations.
12.2.5.8 Headwalls
a. Plain concrete bed , granular filter material and Geotextile membrane sheets shall be provided prior and as
shown on the contract drawings
b. Headwalls shall be constructed as shown on the Contract plans. Concrete work shall meet the applicable
requirements of Chapter 4, Section 4.4, Construction requirements, of these standard specifications.
c. Excavation and backfill for headwalls shall meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 2, Sections 2.4,
Roadway excavation, and Section 2.5 of these standard specifications, Embankments and backfill, for structural
excavation and backfill, with the additional requirement that material placed immediately against the back side
(retaining side) of the concrete shall be pervious backfill material installed so that it can either drain to daylight
at the end of the headwall, or provided with underdrains as approved by the Engineer.
Page 12-67
d. If toe walls for precast concrete flared end section are cast-in-place, they shall be constructed of Class C15
concrete, or concrete of a commercial mixture meeting Chapter 4. Material, proportioning, air entraining,
mixing, slump and transporting of the Portland cement concrete shall be in accordance with Chapter 4. Air-
entrained concrete will not be required. Concrete shall be placed and cured in accordance with the applicable
provision of Chapter 4 of these standard specifications. If toe walls are precast, they may be constructed of any
of the above specified concrete mixtures or they may be constructed of the same mixture used to fabricate the
precast concrete flared end section. Precast toe walls may be cured in accordance with Chapter 4 of these
standard specifications or in the same manner as the flared end section.
e. Flared end section shall be joined to pipes or pie arches are shown on the Contract plans. They shall be carefully
placed to the line and grade of the structure on a uniformly firm soil foundation.
f. Precast concrete flared end section: The joint material between the end section and the adjoining pipe shall be
installed in the same manner. Toe walls shall be of the size and shape shown on the Contract plans and may be
precast or cast in place. Forming of cast in place toe walls will not be required.
g. Metal Flared End Section: The end section shall be joined to the pipe or pipe arch as shown on the Contract
plans. The toe plate, if specified, shall be set in a trench or driven to the proper elevation. Care shall be taken to
avoid damage to the metal.
h. Safety Slope End Section: Safety slope end section shall consist of a metal flared end section of safety bar
system or a bar gate system, toe plate extension, if required in the contract and any fasteners required for
attachment to the culver pipe.
i. Construction Requirements: Safety slope end sections shall be attached as shown on the Contract plans. They
shall be carefully placed to the line and grade of the structure on a uniformly firm soil foundation shaped to fit
the lower part of the end section.
j. Toe Plate Extension: The toe plate extension, if required in the contract, shall be attached to the end section as
shown on the Contract plans.
k. Safety Bar System: Safety bars are required on end sections used on culver pipe 24 inch (600mm) in diameter or
greater. The number, size and spacing of safety bars shall be as per Article 12.2.5.10, and as shown on the
Contract plans and as per the requirements of Chapter 32 of these standard specifications.
l. In lieu of the safety bar system, the bar gate system may be used. If used, the bar gate system shall be fabricated
and installed as shown on the Contract plans. And approved by the Engineer.
12.2.5.9 Extending Existing Culverts

Where existing culverts are to be extended or otherwise incorporated in the new work, remove only such part or parts of
the existing structure as is necessary to provide a proper connection to the new work. Cut, shape, and trim the
connecting edges to the required lines and grades without weakening or damaging the part of the structure to be
retained. Do not damage reinforcing bars which are to be left in place so as to project into the new work as dowels or
ties.
Install the extension culvert as otherwise specified for installing new culverts of the appropriate type, per the following
additional requirements:
1. Furnish concrete, mesh and steel reinforcing, and epoxy as necessary to construct concrete collars for box culvert
and pipe extensions.
2. Existing headwalls may be relocated to new locations if methodology of removal and reinstallation is approved
by the Engineer and is done without damaging the structure and culvert pipe. Otherwise, demolish, remove and
dispose of existing and reconstruct new as shown on the Contract plans.
3. Remove headwalls in such a manner as to prevent damage to the existing culvert. Repair or replace damaged
culvert as directed.
For defects and repairing the cracks refer to Chapter 32, Article 32.5.6, of these standard specifications.
12.2.5.10 Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe

Install safety bars on headwalls as shown on the Contract plans. Safety bars for culvert pipe shall be meeting the
following requirements:
1. Steel pipe used as safety bars and steel pipe used as sockets shall conform to ASTM A53 Grade B. Steel tubing
used as safety bars shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B.
Page 12-68
2. Steel plate shall conform to ASTM A36.

3. All parts shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M 111.
12.2.5.11 Riprap Protection for Culverts

Riprap protection for culverts shall be constructed in accordance with the Contract plans and shall meet the
requirements of Chapter 7, Section 7.4.3 of these standard specifications.
Riprap protection may be done using rock riprap, grouted riprap or gabions per type and details shown on the Contract
plans and comply with the requirements of Chapter 7, Article 7.4.3.2, of these standard specifications.
12.3 Stormwater Structures

12.3.1 Description
This work consists of constructing stormwater structures and all associated accessories and connecting to existing
structures of the types and sizes designated in accordance with the Contract plans and as approved by the Engineer.
Work shall consist of furnishing all materials and constructing or reconstructing drainage structures, which shall include
placing connecting pipe, structural excavation, foundation preparation, cast-in-situ or precast concrete placement and
backfill.
12.3.2 Materials
12.3.2.1 Concrete
Concrete shall be a minimum of Class C25 for reinforced structural concrete and Class C10 or C15 for bedding and
blinding layers, complying with the requirements of Chapter 4, Section 4.3 of these standard specifications.
12.3.2.2 Reinforcing Steel

All reinforcement shall meet the requirements of Chapter 5 of these standard specifications. Reinforcement shall be
fusion bonded epoxy coated for drainage structures used in corrosive environment areas, unless otherwise shown on the
Contract plans.
12.3.2.3 Ductile Iron Frames, Covers and Grates

Ductile iron frames, covers and grates refers to items such as the following items:
1. Drainage manhole covers.
2. Dewatering duct end structure covers
3. Utility service chamber, pull box and manhole cover.
4. Catch basin and inlet grates or solid covers
5. Curb inlet grates.
6. Rodding port (pipe access for clean out) covers.
7. Roadway drains (offset roadway scuppers) with bolted grates.
8. Slotted trench drain grates (Trough Drains).
9. Bridge inlet grates and structure (scuppers)
10. Other miscellaneous chamber access covers requiring a traffic loading capable heavy duty cover as shown on the
Contract plans
Frames and covers shall be manufactured of ductile iron material complying with ASTM A536, Grade 80-55-06. All
covers shall be of dimensions and type and appropriately labelled with cast-in lettering, in both English and Arabic, as
approved by the Engineer and/or shown on the Contract plans.
Cast ductile iron frames, covers and gratings shall be smooth, true to pattern and free from projections, sand holes, blow
holes or other distortions. Castings shall be grit blasted to near white metal condition and coated with a coal tar epoxy
paint finish, applied in two coats to a minimum dry film thickness of 470 microns which shall result in a smooth
coating, tough and tenacious when cold, and neither tacky nor brittle. Coating Materials shall be as specified and
comply with the requirements of Chapter 24 of these standard specifications,.
Page 12-69
Covers, frames and gratings shall meet or exceed minimum wheel loading requirements as defined for the specified
grade test load in accordance with EN 124. General guidelines for usage under BS EN124 (as shown below in Table
12-21) shall be used in selection of covers, frames and gratings unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer.
Table 12-21: Loading classification for covers frames and grates
BS EN 124 Test load

Areas of Usage
Class (tonnes)
A15 1.5 For use in areas where only pedestrians have access.
B125 12.5 For use in car parks and pedestrian areas where occasional vehicular access is likely.
For use in areas where not extending more than 500 mm from the kerb face into the
C250 25
carriageway.
For use in areas where cars and lorries have access, including carriageways, hard
D400 40
shoulders and pedestrian areas. All units to be either non-rock or silent in operation.
For use in areas where heavy wheel loads are imposed such as loading areas, freight
E600 60
yards or equipment maintenance area pavements.
Access covers and gratings capable of withstanding a 90 tonnes test load. For use in areas
F900 90 where very heavy wheel loads are imposed such as airport runway and taxiway
pavements.
Ductile iron covers and flush inlet grates shall be equipped with cast-in lifting eyes, holes or other handling facilities
and shall be made in sections as required for larger sizes (1.2 m and larger in one direction) to facilitate removal and
lifting unless otherwise shown on the Contract plans or approved by the Engineer.
Contractor shall supply one prying and lifting bar of approved design for each 30 covers and/or flush inlet grates
(minimum of one tool for every type cover or flush inlet grate). Prying and lifting bars shall be of approved appropriate
design to match the different cover configurations.
For slotted trench drain grates and other bolt down covers/grates all fastening hardware shall be stainless steel. Slotted
trench drain grates and frames shall be of a removable bolt down to frame type grate where the ductile iron frame is
made an integral part of the precast drain channel at time of manufacture, of type and size as shown on the Contract
plans.
Sealing plates for manholes, chambers and sump access covers shall be GRP. Sealing plate thickness shall be a
minimum of 7 mm and the minimum design load – 7.5 kN/m². Underside of the plate shall be protected with a resin rich
vinlyester liner 1.5 mm thick, reinforced with one layer of glass tissue and two layers of 300 g/m2 CSM. Isopthalic
resin may be used in the structural wall. All glass shall be ECR or other corrosion resistant type (max. weight 450
g/m2).
Sealing plate shall incorporate a peripheral rubber ring retained in such a manner that when pushed into the access
opening, a tight seal will be formed between the plate and the manhole cover frame. The plate and rubber ring shall be
designed such that a watertight seal is obtained without the use of bolts. Rubber rings shall be made of EPDM rubber
formulations compliant with applicable sections of BS 2494. Ring joints shall be vulcanized. Sealing plates shall have
two securely laminated GRP lifting handles. Cuts and/or drilled faces shall be sealed with resin.
Coated covers and frames shall be delivered, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s recommendation.
Contractor shall only use synthetic lifting straps for handling. Steel chains and clamps will not be allowed.
GRP sealing plates shall be stored in closed containers or out of direct sunlight until needed.
12.3.2.4 Testing
Observations of ductile iron frames, covers and gratings for compliance and test of the type and quantity shall be in
accordance with EN 124. Minimum 2 % of the consignment shall be sampled at random and load tested.
a. Inspection during Manufacture

Materials and equipment covered by this Specification may be subject to inspection by the Engineer at anytime during
construction at the manufacturer’s works or those of his sub-contractors.
Should the Engineer so direct, no materials or equipment shall be dispatched by manufacturers or suppliers until
notification, by the Engineer, in writing that the inspection requirements have been satisfied.
Page 12-70
b. Inspection, Testing & Reporting Generally

All inspection and testing necessary to ensure that the work is carried out in accordance with this
specification shall be carried out as the work proceeds, including all tests referred to in these Specifications
and as shown on the Contract plans.
The Engineer may waive requirement for testing of specific items of work or materials in cases where, in the
opinion of the Engineer, the work is seen as complying with the requirements of the Specifications and
further testing is not justified. However, no waiver shall apply unless provided in writing by the Engineer
and any waiver shall only apply to the specific item of work set out in the written advice from the Engineer.
The results of all inspections and tests shall be provided to the Engineer as soon as practicable.
c. Quality Assurance Testing and Reporting

Prior to commencing work on site or ordering any materials, a documented plan for Quality Assurance inspection,
testing and reporting shall be submitted to the Engineer.
The plan submitted to the Engineer shall include the names and positions of staff responsible for managing Quality
Assurance for work covered by this specification and shall include sample forms for inspections, testing and reporting
the results of test for both materials and workmanship.
Acceptance or rejection by the Owner, or the Engineer, of inspection or test certificates provided under the Quality
Assurance procedures shall in no way relieve the responsible party from fulfilling all or any of their obligations under
the Specifications.
Test and test certificates carried out or provided pursuant to the Specification generally and which have been included
in QA/QC manual of DoT shall have the same effect (if any) on obligations as if they carried out independently of the
Quality assurance programme.
12.3.2.5 Frame Anchor Bolts

Where manhole cover and grate frames are shown on the Contract plans as being anchored to structures using bolts,
provide galvanized steel threaded rod and stainless steel nuts and washers. Stainless steel shall meet the requirements of
ASTM F594. Threaded steel anchor bolts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A307. Galvanizing shall comply with
the requirements of ASTM A153.
Precast top slabs, adjustment rings and frame and covers shall be drilled to accommodate the anchor bolts.
a. Fixings
Fixings used for anchoring ladders in manholes and other structures shall be approved material and comply with the
project requirements, Contract plans and in according to Article 12.3.2.8. All fixing holes shall be filled with cement
epoxy mortar and the exposed fixing material sealed with a coal tar epoxy coating, or GRP liner as applicable.
12.3.2.6 Orifice Flow Control and Weir Plates

Orifice and weir plates for control of storm drainage flows and levels shall be fabricated to the dimensions and shapes
as shown on the Contract plans. Orifice and weir plates shall be manufactured from new stainless steel materials,
meeting the requirements of ASTM A276 and be of AISI type 316. Stainless steel bolts shall be of the same type steel
as the adjoining parts
Manholes and other structures requiring orifice and weir plates shall be modified as necessary to accommodate the flow
control plates as shown on the Contract plans.
12.3.2.7 Ditch Bottom Inlet Grates

Ditch bottom grates shall be the type and size as shown on the Contract plans. Grates shall be fabricated from structural
carbon steel meeting the requirement of ASTM A36 and/or A588. All grates shall be hot dipped galvanized after
fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123 and A385, and further coated with coal tar epoxy to a minimum 470
micron thickness. Grates shall be capable of supporting a Class ‘A’ EN 124 load where used adjacent to traffic areas.
All grates shall be bolted and hinged or otherwise securely fastened to avoid unauthorised removal.
12.3.2.8 GRP Ladders

a. GRP ladders, landings and safety cages shall be fabricated from pultruded (extrusion type forming process)
Page 12-71
structural quality fibreglass shapes utilizing a synthetic surfacing veil for chemical and ultra-violet resistance,
and special high-modulus pultrusion process for strength. Minimum glass content shall be 60 % comprising both
longitudinal strands and continuous strand mat so aligned as to prevent splitting due to laminar shear. The
structural components shall possess parameters shown in Table 12-22.
Table 12-22: GRP ladders
Parameter ASTM Value

Tensile strength D638 207 mPa
Ultimate compressive strength D638 207 mPa
Barcol hardness D2583 50
Tensile modulus D 638 17,237 mPa-m
Flexural strength D790 207 mPa
Flexural modulus D790 12,410 mPa
Flexural modulus-full section 19,305 mPa
Short beam shear D2344/D2344M 31 mPa
Shear modulus-transverse 3,102 mPa
Flame spread E 84 25 or less
b. All ladder and cage components are to be integrally pigmented yellow. GRP ladders shall utilize channel side
rails and 34.9 mm minimum diameter round rungs, both of high modulus fibre glass composition.
c. Rung to side rail connections shall utilize a keyed, pinned, and bonded joint for positive prevention of rung
rotation and pull out. Rungs shall have a factory applied epoxy glass bead non-skid coating for maximum safety.
d. Ladder shall be entirely non-metallic with the exception of non-corrosive splice or mounting fasteners. Upon
the Engineer’s approval, ladders installed in manholes and junction chambers may be constructed of GRP
materials by method of lay-up type moulding, meeting the minimum strength requirements as otherwise
specified.
Each rung shall be able to withstand a point load of 5,000 N when applied as follows:
1. At the centre of the rung and/or
2. Close to one end.
e. When supported horizontally over a span of 1 m with the climbing face uppermost and with a load of 1,000 N
applied at the centre of the span, the ladder shall not deflect more than 15 mm at the point of application of the
load and shall show no permanent deflection after removal of the load. Each ladder fixing shall be capable of
withstanding shear and pull-out loads of 5,000 N.
f. All cut or trimmed edges of the GRP ladder and braces shall be coated with a resin rich 2 mm thick layer
consisting of an approved vinyl ester resin with at least two layers of c glass veil meeting a 90 percent resin to
10 % c glass veil ratio by weight.
g. GRP ladders shall extend and be made to suit the full depth of each structure and shall be installed as indicated
on the Contract plans.
h. Ladders shall be drilled for wall fixing at both ends and additional intermediate fixing connections shall be
provided at centres not greater than 1 m for ladders over 3 meters long. Rungs shall be at 300 mm centres and at
a distance of not less than 200 mm from the wall. Rungs shall be a minimum of 300 mm wide (between vertical
side rails), or as otherwise detailed on the Contract plans.
i. Where shown on the Contract plans, safety cages and landings shall be constructed using the same materials as
required for ladders. Safety cages shall have a diameter of 750 mm. Bottom of the cage shall be 2.4 m above
benching or platform levels
j. All ladders, landings, gratings, structural components and railings shall be securely fastened and braced for a
solid secure feeling installation, using all stainless steel hardware with drilled and epoxied type stainless steel
threaded concrete inserts for attachments to concrete and with vinyl ester resin GRP bolts and nuts (fibre bolts)
for GRP component to GRP component connections. Gratings shall be capable of supporting a 5 kN per m2
uniform loading with a maximum deflection of 11200 of the span width as per standard specification BS4592.
GRP components shall be a bright safety yellow or orange colour.
Page 12-72
k. Deep Manholes: manholes deeper than 5 meters shall be at least 1200mm in diameter and specifically designed
for access and strength. Intermediate GRP platforms shall be formed from precast manhole top slabs placed
equidistant down the manhole such that the maximum spacing is 4.5m and as indicated on the Contract plans.
Ladder and gages shall comply with Article 12.3.2.7 and 12.3.2.8.
12.3.2.9 Pre-Cast Concrete Riser Sections

Precast concrete grade rings and cones shall comply with ASTM C478, except that the wall thickness shall be 150 mm
minimum. Provide interlocking keyways on rings and cones. Provide cones with cast in place inserts for the manhole
frame. O Ring rubber gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C443M. Pre cast concrete riser sections shall
be tested in accordance with the test methods found in ASTM C 497. Section may be furnished with attached steps or
ladders, if needed. Dimensions, spacing and test strength of the steps are described in ASTM C478 and ASTM C497.
Precast units shall be approved by the Engineer prior to delivery to the job site. Precast manhole sections shall be
subject to rejection for any of the following deficiencies:
1. Fractures or cracks passing through the wall, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the
joint.
2. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing, and moulding.
3. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture.
4. Damaged or cracked ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint.
5. Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.25 mm or more and extending for a length of 300 mm or
more, regardless of position in the section wall.
12.3.2.10 Protective Coatings and Sealants

a. In general, where storm drain pipes and structures will be subject to salty and brackish or other high corrosive
environment, as shown on the Contract plans, as otherwise specified and approved by the Engineer, all ferrous
metal and concrete surfaces shall be covered by a protective coating or membrane, both inside and outside of the
structure.
b. Coal tar epoxy coating shall be used for protective coatings on all structure covers, grates and frames and on the
interior surfaces of smaller storm water drainage structures such as inlets and valve and service chambers; and on
the exterior surface of reinforced concrete pipe and elsewhere as shown on the Contract plans, or as otherwise
specified.
c. GRP or other two part epoxy coating for use as a inner liner shall be used on manholes, junction chambers and
other major storm drainage structures.
d. Water-proofing membrane Type A with 2 layers of asphaltic hard board protection shall be applied to the
exterior surface of all storm water drainage structures prior to backfilling as shown on the Contract plans and
shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 28 of these standard specifications.
e. Penetrating acrylic sealant shall be applied to all exposed concrete surfaces not otherwise protected.
f. Structures exposed to sea water, shall have all exposed concrete surfaces below high tide level coated with a
protective coating overlaid with a anti-fowling coating.
g. All coating materials and application work shall meet the applicable specifications of Chapter 24 of these

12.3.3.1 Structural Excavation and Foundation Preparation
a. Structural excavation and foundation preparation of the site shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, of
these standard specifications, Construction excavation, and as specified herein.
b. Excavate to the elevations shown on the Contract plans, with additional 0.45 m clear around the structure outer
surfaces. Remove, by hand, the last 150 mm of material above the footing bottom final grade before placing the
footing material. Do not remove material, except unsuitable material, below the final grade, if placing footings
on excavated surfaces other than rock.
c. Cut rock or other unyielding foundation material to a firm surface— level, stepped, or serrated —to meet the
Page 12-73
neat lines of the footings. Clean rock seams and cavities, and fill with concrete or grout. Use concrete (of the
same class as the footing) to backfill areas outside the neat lines or below the final grade of the footing bottom.
Notify the Engineer after each footing excavation. Do not place blinding or footing concrete until the Engineer
approve the excavation depth and the foundation material. Maintain the density and the approved surface
elevation and shape of the foundation before installing blinding concrete.
d. Prior to casting the base slab, the foundation soil shall be covered with a working surface by placing 100 mm of
Class C10 or C15 upon the prepared subgrade. Blinding concrete shall generally extend the width and length of
the structural excavation, but no less than 150 mm beyond the length and width of the structure base.
e. Channels and Benching: A semi-circular channel shall be formed in the concrete floor of the manhole. The
benching shall rise vertically from the horizontal diameter of the pipe to the height of the soffit and then be
sloped back at a gradient specified on the Contract plans upwards to the manhole wall the flow channel shall be
formed so that it presents an evenly curved flow path through the manhole. The cross section of the flow channel
shall be uniform.
Benching shall be floated to a dense, smooth hard surface and shall be protected with protective coatings on all
interior concrete surfaces. Liner that provides a water tight structure or epoxy coated and GRP liner.
12.3.3.2 Structure Base

a. Prior to installation of concrete base structures, the blinding concrete shall be cleaned. Where protective concrete
coats are specified or shown on the Contract plans as being required, a protective waterproofing membrane type
A shall be applied over the slab surface. No asphaltic protection board shall be placed over membrane type A
under base slabs and the Contractor shall take care not to damage the membrane during rebar and concrete
placement. All the protective waterproofing membrane shall be comply with Chapter 28 of these standard
specifications.
b. All manholes, junction chambers, catch basins, inlets, dewatering duct end structures and general service
chambers shall have a 300 mm thick (or the thickness shown on the Contract plans) poured-in-situ or precast
base of Class C25 concrete. Reinforcement supports for poured bases shall have plastic protected legs to prevent
damage to the waterproofing membrane surface. All concrete and reinforcement placement shall meet the
applicable requirements of Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 of these standard specifications.
c. Base slab shall be cast and finished to invert grade in conjunction with the pipes entering at invert level. Care
shall be taken to ensure that the concrete joint adjacent to the pipe wall is watertight.
d. Invert of cast-in-place bases shall be hand-worked to provide channels conforming in size to the inside diameter
of the piping as indicated on the Contract plans. Channels shall vary uniformly in size and shape from inlet to
outlet. Concrete base shall be shaped with a wood float and shall receive a hard steel trowel finish before the
concrete sets. A template shall be used to accurately form the level surface that will receive the first precast
section. Benching and channels shall be made to conform accurately to the pipe grades and openings, and shall
be brought together smoothly and in alignment with the pipe at the ends of curved benching, with well rounded
junctions, satisfactory to the Engineer, and in compliance with details shown on the Contract plans and approved
shop drawings for each manhole.
e. During construction of cast-in-place bases, all storm sewer mains and stub piping shall be in place, including
ring-type seals, before concrete placement. Ends of pipes shall be flush with the inside walls.
f. Pipe grade and alignment shall be verified immediately upon placement of concrete to assure that the pipelines
are in proper position prior to the concrete taking an initial set. Invert elevation and flow line of piping shall be
as shown on the approved shop drawings Manhole base shall extend a minimum of 250 mm below the bottom of
the lowest pipe and 150 mm above the top of the largest pipe unless shown otherwise in the Contract plans
g. Cast-in-place bases shall set a minimum of 24 hours before the manhole construction is continued.
h. In case of groundwater is discharge to the system, the bottom of the top slab shall be protected by PVC liner as
per Section 12.2.1.
12.3.3.3 Pre-Cast Structure Installation

Structure excavation, foundation stabilization (if necessary), placement of blinding concrete, and base shall be
performed in accordance with Section 12.2.2, Article 12.3.3.1 and Chapter 4 of these standard specifications.
a. Installing Precast Section

1. Proper equipment shall be provided for lowering the precast sections into position. Any precast section
Page 12-74
damaged during handling or placing shall be repaired or replaced at the option of the Engineer and at the
Contractor's expense. Not more than two holes shall be cast or drilled in the shell of each section for the
purpose of handling and placing and if such holes are provided, they shall be filled and finished with mortar
after placing.
2. Rubber gaskets or flexible plastic gaskets shall be used in tongue and groove joints of precast units. All other
joints and all openings cut through the walls shall be grouted and watertight. Handling of the precast units after
the gasket has been affixed shall be done carefully to avoid disturbing or damaging the gasket or contaminating
it with foreign material. Care shall be exercised to attain proper alignment before the joints are entirely forced
home. During insertion of the tongue or spigot, the units shall be partially supported to minimize unequal
lateral pressure on the gasket and to maintain concentricity until the gasket is properly positioned.
3. For non tongue and groove joints, where shown on the Contract plans, concrete manhole base and successive
precast sections shall receive a mastic joint sealing compound prior to setting the precast sections. Mastic joint
filler shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 198 and shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations so as to form a watertight seal.
4. Following the vacuum testing as described in this section, the joints will be mortared and tooled to a smooth
finish, free of voids. Note that manholes are to be vacuum tested following assembly of the concrete sections,
but prior to mortaring the joints, or backfilling.
5. Where required and as shown on the Contract plans, concrete surfaces shall be protected from sulphate and
chloride attack via application of waterproofing materials and protective coatings or liners to all exterior and
interior surfaces.
6. Manhole components incorporating a PVC liner shall be installed and tested in accordance with these
specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations, and the Contract plans. Note that PVC lined manholes are
to be vacuum tested following assembly of the concrete sections, but prior to mortaring the joints, welding the
seams of the PVC liner, or backfilling. After testing, PVC liner seams in structures at the joints shall be
welded. PVC liner shall be secured by insertion between the uppermost grade ring and the manhole cover
frame. Where PVC liner is used, a polyurethane coating shall be applied to all exposed concrete on the
manhole base, following completion of the rest of the manhole construction.
7. Assemble the precast sections to the elevation required by the location of the manhole in accordance with the
Contract plans and as follows:
i. Paved areas: Top of cover shall be flush with the finished paving surface in both traffic and pedestrian
areas.
ii. As an alternative Brick could be used (up to 5 levels) to match the cover with pavement surface. For more
details on the Brick and block works specification refer to Section 12.4.1.
iii. Highway clear zone areas: Top of cover shall be no more than 300 mm above the existing surface where
outside the limits of traffic and shoulder pavement.
iv. Unpaved green or other landscaped areas: Top of cover shall be 150 mm above the ground surface.
Cover or grating of a manhole, catch basin, or inlet shall not be grouted to final grade until the final elevation
of the pavement, gutter, ditch, or sidewalk in which it is to be placed has been established, and until permission
thereafter is given by the Engineer to grout the cover or grating in place. Covers shall be seated properly to
prevent rocking.
Secure the manhole frame to the grade ring with mortar in accordance with the Contract plans. Locking
manholes shall have covers locked to the frame. Frame shall be attached to the top precast section by drilling
and installing stainless steel, anchor bolts set in epoxy in addition to the mortar collar around the frame in
accordance with the Contract plans.
After the frame is securely set the cover shall be installed. Cleaning any of foreign materials from the frames
and covers shall be done to ensure a satisfactory fit.
Where manholes are to be given a protective coating, they shall be free of seepage and surface moisture.
Piping installation adjacent to the manhole and connection to the base or shaft sections shall be performed as
shown on the Contract plans and approved shop drawings. Piping installation into flexible pipe connectors
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for assembly, lubricants and limits of
deflection.
In order to prevent accidental use of the new storm drain before completion and acceptance, new inlet grates
shall be sealed with a plastic membrane or waterproofing paper. Seals shall be removed at the time of final
Page 12-75
inspection or as directed by the Engineer. Removal of all construction debris and water shall be completed
prior to final inspection.
New connections to existing manholes, where stubs have not been provided, shall be made by core drilling
through the walls or base as approved by the Engineer.
Flexible seals shall be used for the pipe penetration. Apply a protective epoxy coating to the cored concrete and
the ends of any reinforcing steel exposed in accordance with Chapter 5 of these standard specifications.
12.3.3.4 Cast-In-Situ Structure Installation

Cast-in-situ concrete structures shall be done in accordance with the Contract plans and detailed shop Contract plans
prepared by the Contractor and as approved by the Engineer
Excavation and bases for cast in situ shall be in accordance with the requirements of Article 12.3.3.1.
Concrete and reinforcement work shall meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 4, Section 4.3, and Chapter 5 of
these standard specifications,
All structures shall be made watertight via proper concrete installation techniques utilizing epoxy bonded cold pour and
construction joints, joint waterstops, pipe collars and flanges, thorough concrete consolidation and vibrating during
placement, etc., such that each structure meets the maximum allowable leakage criteria when tested as specified
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor's concrete construction techniques and workmanship are of marginal
quality, and/or the structures do not meet the leakage test requirements, then the Contractor shall be required to utilize
additional water tightness measures such as use of pipe collers or flexible pipe to wall seals through walls, use of
flexible water stops at all construction joints (water stop type as approved by the Engineer), and improved placement
procedures for better vibration rods access causing the pour. Any structure exceeding the maximum leakage amount
during leakage testing, or having obvious structural defects such as honey combing, rock pockets and form or
reinforcement alignment slippage shall be removed and rebuilt unless another method of repair is approved by the
Engineer.
All pipes ends shall be flush with the inside of the structure walls, unless otherwise shown on the Contract plans.
Ends of PVC lined reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) end shall be protected by adding an extra PVC pipe liner around the
pipe end, heat bonded to the inner PVC liner and wrapped around the square end of the pipe to the outside pipe wall
utilizing a specially formed PVC piece to match the end configuration, bonded, with epoxy adhesive to the concrete
pipe wall both at the inner pipe circumference and the outer pipe circumference at a distance not less than 200 mm from
the end of the pipe. Ends of GRP, plastic, corrugated metallic, ductile iron and vitrified clay pipes shall be cut at the
angle to match the structure wall and shall be cast with the end of the pipe flush with the inner structure wall. Cut GRP
pipe ends shall be coated with a resin rich vinylester protective coating as otherwise specified. Cut corrugated metallic
pipe shall be recoated with zinc and bitumen as per the coating repair method otherwise specified.
Where required as shown on the Contract plans, concrete surfaces shall be protected from sulphate and chloride attack
via application of waterproofing materials and protective coatings or liners to all exterior and interior surfaces.
Protective coating materials shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 24 of these Standard Specifications.
Protective liners for pre-cast manholes may also utilise PVC liners meeting the requirements of Section 12.2.2.
Installation of PVC or GRP liner plates (minimum thickness 7mm), including the welding/bonding of all joints, lap
strips, flaps, etc., shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Nailing through the plate shall
not be allowed. Liner plate shall be held snugly in-place against inner forms by means of light gauge steel wire, light
steel banding straps, or other suitable means. If steel banding straps are used, they shall be applied in strap channels
provided for this purpose. For more on GRP and HDPE lines specification refer to Article 12.3.3.7.
Concrete poured against PVC and GRP liner plates shall be consolidated in a careful manner so as to protect the liner
plate and to produce a dense, homogeneous concrete securely anchoring the liner bonding lugs into the concrete. In
removing forms, care shall be taken to protect liner plate from damage.
Sharp instruments shall not be used to pry forms from lined surfaces. All holes and cut, torn or seriously abraded areas
in the liner plate shall be repaired. Patches shall be limited to those which can be made with a single patch strip.
Parallel, overlapping or adjoining patch strips will not be allowed.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to installed PVC and GRP liner plate from
equipment and materials used in or taken through the work. Applied lining shall be free from bubbles due to poor
workmanship.
Manhole joints must be dry before the PVC or GRP liner plate joints are made. All mortar and other foreign material
Page 12-76
shall be removed from surfaces adjacent to the joint, leaving them clean and dry. No liner plate joints shall be made
until the trench has been backfilled and the manhole has been tested for leaks.
12.3.3.5 Application of Protective Coatings

At the start of the application, and periodically as work progresses, the services of the manufacturer’s technical
representative must be provided at the job site as often as deemed necessary by the Engineer to advise on all phases of
the work. All protective coating work shall also meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 4 of these standard
specifications.
Contractor shall follow the protective coating manufacturer’s recommendations for specific procedures and details.
Applications of spray-on type coatings shall be made with specialized spray equipment to produce a fast curing (within
seconds) seamless, flexible membrane in one coat. Sufficient time shall be allowed to elapse between successive coats
to permit satisfactory recoating, but once commenced; the entire coating operation shall be completed without delay.
Upon completion of the work, staging, scaffolding, and containers shall be removed from the site or destroyed in an
approved manner. Coating spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed.
12.3.3.6 Frames and Covers.

Elevations at which frames and covers are to be set shall conform to the requirement set forth on the Contract plans, but
in all cases shall be governed by the Engineer in the field.
Cover or grating frames of a manhole, catch basin, or inlet shall not be installed, grouted or installed by cast-in-situ with
the structure wall, to final grade until the final elevation of the pavement, gutter, ditch, or sidewalk in which it is to be
placed has been established, and until permission thereafter is given by the Engineer to grout/cast the cover or grating
frame in place. Covers/grates shall be seated properly to prevent rocking.
Manhole frames shall be set at the required grade and shall be securely attached to the top pre-cast manhole shaft unit
with a grout bed and filled as shown on the standard details. After the frames are securely set in the place provided
herein, covers shall be installed and all necessary cleaning and scraping of foreign materials from the frames and covers
shall be accomplished to ensure a satisfactory fit. All the frames and covers shall be manufactures of ductile iron
complying with ASTM A536 Grade 80-55-06, where traffic load anticipated the wheel loading requirements shall be in
accordance with EN 124. For more details on the frames and cover specifications refer to Article 12.3.2.3.
12.3.3.7 Ladders and Interior Steps

Ladders and steps shall be placed at equal intervals of 300 to 375 mm. Lower step shall not be more than 450 mm from
the top of the manhole bench, and the upper step shall not be more than 600 mm below the top of the frame. Steps shall
be located above a solid bench. For more detail refer to Article 12.3.2.8.
12.3.3.8 Testing Structures

Engineer may require testing to verify that the stormwater structure is watertight. Testing shall be conducted after the
trench around the structure has been backfilled. Negative air pressure test, as specified in ASTM C 1244 , or a water test
as specified below shall be used to test all stormwater structures and manholes junction chambers and all storm water
structures.
Prior to testing, all pipe entries shall be plugged with water-tight fittings such as expandable plugs. Test shall be carried
out by filling the manhole with water to an elevation 300 mm above the beginning of the cone section, but to a
maximum depth of 6 m. Water shall stand in the manhole for a minimum of 1 hour to allow the concrete to reach
maximum absorption. After 1 hour, the Contractor shall refill the manhole to the original depth, and the drop in the
water surface shall be recorded after a period of 2 minutes for each 0.3 meters of depth. Maximum allowable drop in
water surface for the period of testing shall be 12 mm for each 15 minutes of testing.
In lieu of the foregoing, manholes may be vacuum tested in accordance with ASTM C1244.
Repairs shall be made as directed by the Engineer whenever leakage exceeds the test limit at no cost to the Owner.
Page 12-77
12.4 Brickwork and Blockwork

12.4.1 Materials
12.4.1.1 Concrete Bricks and Blocks
Concrete bricks and blocks shall be constructed from C40 concrete but the coarse aggregate shall be 10 mm to 5 mm.
The blocks shall be cast in clean oiled moulds.
They shall be free from cracks, uniform in size true to shape free from deleterious matter, clean , hard, impervious with
smooth faces in appearance similar to ordinary surface finish, Class 1, and with well defined arises. The constituent
parts comprising the concrete of the blocks shall conform, unless otherwise stated, to Chapter 6 of these standard
specifications.
Bricks and blocks shall not be incorporated into the Works until they have matured under suitable conditions for 28
days. All concrete blocks shall comply with the particular requirements of BS EN 771-1:2011.
12.4.1.2 Bricks
Engineering bricks and special purpose bricks such as radial bricks, weir bricks, copings and bull nosed bricks shall
have an average compressive strength of at least 69 N/mm2 and an average absorption not exceeding 4.5 percent by
weight measured by standard billing or vacuum method.
Bricks beneath frames for chambers and Inlets shall comply with BS-EN-771-1.
The performance characteristic requirements shall be conforming BS EN 772-1, BS EN772-7 and BS EN772-13.
Faces of engineering bricks to be exposed to the weather or liquids shall not be wire cut.
Bricks for arches and circular work of 1.5 meters and less in diameter shall be purpose made radial bricks.
12.4.1.3 Sand for Mortar

Sand for mortar shall comply with the following as shown in Table 12-23.
Table 12-23: Sand for Mortar
Percentage by mass passing sieve

Sieve Size
Rendering Brickwork/General Purpose
5.00 mm 100 100
2.36mm 90-100 90-100
1.18mm 70-100 70-100
600 microns 40-80 40-80
300 microns 5-40 5-70
150 microns 0-10 0-15
12.4.1.4 Lime for Mortar

Lime for cement –time and lime –sand mortar shall be the hydrated type to the approved standard BS 882-1992.T.4
Grades C and M.
12.4.2 Construction
12.4.2.1 General
Bricks and Blocks shall be properly stacked on level hard standing. Broken blocks shall be removed from the site.
Bricks shall be adequately protected from inclement weather.
During hot and dry weather bricks and blocks shall be wetted as necessary and the tops of walls shall be wetted before a
course is laid
Page 12-78
All faces of brickwork will be kept clean and no rubbing down of exposed faces will be permitted.
Vertical faces of all bricks shall be well buttered before being laid and the whole well grouted at each course.
Brick work and block work should be built in a uniform manner. Corners and other advanced work should be raked
back and not raised above the general level more than 1.0m at one lift.
All blocks shall be laid on even full beds of mortar, vertical faces of all blocks shall be buttered before being laid and
the whole well grouted at each course.
The overall dimensions of four blocks laid in mortar shall not exceed by more than 25 mm the overall dimensions of the
same blocks laid dry.
12.4.2.2 Cement Mortar

Mortar for pre –cast concrete units, brick work and block work shall be gauged in the proportions of one part of cement
to three parts of sand .Lime shall only be added if specifically ordered.
Cement mortar shall be mixed on a clean surface in small quantities sufficient only for30 minutes work and shall not be
remixed or worked up again after setting or hardening any mortar that has become set or hard shall rejected and
removed from the site.
Ingredients shall be measured in proper boxes and shall be turned over and thoroughly mixed on a wooden platform.
12.4.2.3 Cement Line Mortar

Cement lime (gauged) mortar shall consist of one part Portland Cement, one part of lime and six parts of sand by
volume (1:1:6) All materials shall be accurately gauged using gauged boxes and shall be thoroughly mechanically
mixed. Mortar that has begun to set shall not be revised or re-used.
12.4.2.4 Cement Mortar Rendering

Cement mortar rendering shall consist of two or more coats: the undercoat shall be 13 mm thickness and scored from a
key for the final coat which shall be not less than 6 mm in thickness. The finished coat shall be worked with proper
metal floats, and the face left with an even and polished surface.
The mortar for the undercoat of the renderings shall be gauged in the proportion of one part of cement to three part of
sand, and the finished coat shall be in the proportion of one part of cement to two part of sand.
For at least 24 hours before rendering is applied the concrete or brick work face or previous coat of rendering shall be
thoroughly soaked with water, and the finished rendering shall be watered at least four times a day and kept damp for a
period of at least fourteen days after completion . Not more than three days shall elapse between the application of one
coat and its being covered up with a second or finishing coat. All arises shall be sharp and liner.
When rendering is to be applied to brickwork, the joints shall be raked and cleaned out to a depth of 13 mm.
12.5 Backfilling
Backfilling of manholes, inlets, catch basins, and drywells shall be done in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2,
Article 2.5.2.4 of these standard specifications.
12.6 Miscellaneous Concrete Work

12.6.1 Offset Roadway Scuppers
Installation of these items shall be done in accordance with the Contract plans Installation of offset roadway scuppers
shall meet the construction requirements as otherwise specified herein.
New bridge scuppers shall be fabricated from structural steel plates and shapes in accordance with AASHTO
designation M270 (ASTM A709) grade 50 and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTMA 123 after fabrication
and as per section (Structural). For the detail specification of the Bridge deck refer to Section 29.4 of Chapter 29 of
these standard specifications.
12.6.2 Pipe Headwall Structures

Construction of headwall structures shall be as shown on the Contract plans. And shop drawings Construction of
headwall structures shall meet the requirements of Section 12.3.3.
Page 12-79
Where required in the Contract plans, headwall structures in corrosive environments shall be constructed with poured-
in-situ, sulphate resistant, Class C40 concrete. Buried concrete surfaces of the headwall structure in contact with the
ground shall be protected with coal tar epoxy starting at 150 mm below finished grade lines and continuing down to the
blinding concrete. Exposed concrete surfaces, starting at 150 mm below the finished grade lines and all surfaces above
that level shall be coated with an acrylic sealant as otherwise specified.
12.6.3 House Connection, Flush Inlet Structure, Grate, Frame and Pipe
Contractor shall install storm water drainage flush inlet structures for house connections at locations directed by the
Engineer or as indicated on the Contract plans. These inlets are for the purpose of providing storm water drainage at low
points around individual homes, buildings, courtyards, and parking areas. Grate and frame shall be bedded in Class C25
reinforced concrete and attached directly to the outlet pipe of the dimensions shown on the Contract plans.
Grate and frame shall be manufactured of ductile iron material complying with ASTM A536 , Grade 80-55-06. Castings
shall be of the dimensions shown on the Contract plans .Medium duty cover frame can be used for the residential areas
and heavy duty cover frames shall be used for all commercial parking areas and as approved by the Engineer. Frame
shall be equipped with a matching outlet pipe spigot manufactured from similar ductile iron material. Contractor shall
set the top of the frame, flush with the surrounding surface. Subgrade preparation and backfill shall be in accordance
with Chapter 2, Article 2.5.2.4 and Article 2.4.2.11, of these standard specifications. All existing pavements, sidewalks
and curbs which are to remain, but cut and removed at the locations of house connections and storm water drainage inlet
structures, shall be reinstated in accordance with applicable requirements of Chapter 3 of these standard specifications
and as per Article 12.3.3.6.
Contractor shall install the inlet structure, grate and frame in a manner that matches the site surface to a neat and
finished appearance, as approved by the Engineer.
12.6.4 Channels and Benching

A semi circular channel shall be formed in the concrete floor of the manhole. The benching shall rise vertically from the
horizontal diameter of the pipe to the height of the soffit and then be sloped back at a gradient specified on the Contract
plans upwards to the manhole wall. The flow channel shall be formed so that it presents and evenly curved flow path
through the manhole. The cross section of the flow channel shall be uniform.
Benching shall be floated to a dense, smooth hard surface and shall be protected with protective coatings on all interior
concrete surfaces. Protective coatings shall be made from polypropylene liner that provides water tight structure or
epoxy coated and GRP liner.
12.6.5 Construct Precast Concrete Ditch Channel

Two Types of Concrete Ditch Channel to be considered as specified show on the Contract plans.
a. Construct precast concrete ditch channel.
b. Construct concrete lining ditch channel.
All requirements of precast concrete ditch channel work shall be according to these standard specification, Chapter 4.
The precast concrete ditch channel to be placed on required grades and lines as shown on the Contract plans or as
directed and approved by the Engineer. A footing trenches and excavation shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
placement of precast concrete ditch channel, subbase should be firm or compacted and approved by the Engineer
precast channel should be placed on the outside of the surface slop properly according to the Contract plans.
The works include providing material equipment, labours and other requirement to complete the work to satisfactory of
the Engineer.
12.6.6 Road Gullies

Gullies shall comprise the gully grating and frame and the polypropylene gully pot, all as shown on the Contract plans
The gully pots shall be supplied with a fibre glass sand bucket with lifting handle, as detailed on the Contract plans. The
sand bucket shall have perforations in its upper part and small holes 3 mm in diameter in its base. The total area of
perforations shall not be less than 20,000sq.mm and the minimum diameter of each hole shall be 50 mm. The depth of
the bucket shall not be less than 750 mm.
The gully pot shall be surrounded by a minimum of 150 mm of concrete as shown on the Contract plans.
The connecting pipe between the gully pot and the drain/manhole shall be 300 mm dia. uPVC.
Page 12-80
The connection into the drain pipe shall be made by means of an oblique junction.
The Contractor shall provide copy technical brochures for the gully for the Engineer approval.
12.6.6.1 Road Gully Grating and Frames

Kerb inlets/flush inlets shall be hinged heavy duty (BS EN124:1994), ductile iron or Reinforced Polymer concrete of an
approved design, 470 x 470mm class C250 as mentioned in EN 124 and an inlet height to suit the kerbs, complete with
ductile iron or GRP gulley grating with integral GRP or similar sand barrier which can be positioned within the grating
to present either the barrier or a clear opening at the kerb. The design shall incorporate a locking device, comprising a
robust, non-corrodible, internal key operated turnbuckle or similar method, to minimise unauthorised use. The grating
inside the kerb gully shall fit completely and securely at any positions of gully. All exposed surfaces shall be coated
with an approved heavy duty abrasion and chemical resistant epoxy paint to a minimum D.F.T. of 375 microns and the
adhesion of the paint to the substrate shall not be less than 6MPa. Separate submittal shall be made for the kerb gully,
paint and the painting.
12.7 Wire Mesh Gabions and Mattresses

12.7.1 Scope
The work shall consist of furnishing; assembling and installing rock filled stainless steel wire mesh gabion baskets and
mattresses.
12.7.2 Types
Gabions shall consist of rectangular or square wire mesh formed containers filled with rock. Gabions will conform to
the following:
Welded wire mesh with a uniform square or rectangular pattern and a resistance weld at each intersection as prescribed
in ASTM A974. The welded wire connections shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A185, including wire
smaller than W1.2 (0.124 in.) except that the welded connections shall have minimum average shear strength of 70%
and minimum shear strength or 60% of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the wire. The wire shall be 316
stainless steel wire manufactured to ASTM A580 by Modular Gabion System.
Gabions shall be furnishes as baskets or mattresses. Baskets and mattresses shall be fabricated within a dimension
tolerance of plus or minus 5%.
Baskets shall be with height of 380mm or greater. Mattresses have a thickness of 300mm and less.
12.7.3 Materials
Gabions shall be fabricated, assembles and installed in accordance with the nominal wire sizes and dimensions found in
Table 12-24.
Table 12-24: Type and Size of Wire
Type of Wire Mesh Size Inches Wire Diameter Inches
Lacing Wire n/a 0.0086
Welded Mesh 3x3 0.105
Spiral Binder n/a 0.105
Spiral binders are the standard fastener for welded-mesh gabion baskets and mattresses, and shall be formed from wire
meeting the same quality requirements as specified for the gabion baskets and mattresses.
Standard fastener must provide a minimum strength of 1,400 lbs. pre lineal foot for gabion baskets and 600 lbs. per
lineal foot for gabion mattresses. All fasteners shall meet all of the closing requirements of the gabion manufacturer.
Rock shall conform to the quality requirements as follows and at least 85% of the rock particles, by weight, shall be
within the predominant rock size range. Recycled concrete may be used in lieu of the specified aggregate at the
engineer’s discretion.
At least 30 days prior to delivery to the site, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing of the source from
which the rock will be obtained, and include the test data and other information by which the material was determined
by the Contractor to meet the specification. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer free access to the source for the
purpose of obtaining samples for testing and source approval.
Page 12-81
a. Bedding or filter material when specified, shall meet the gradation shown on the Contract plans. Geotextile,
when specified shall conform to the requirements specified in the Contract plans or the manufacturer’s
recommendation and shall comply with AASHO T 27 and T11 and Chapter 2, Article 2.5.2.6 of these standard
specifications.
12.7.4 Foundation Preparation

The foundation on which the gabions are to be placed shall be cut or filled and graded to the lines and grades shown on
the Contract plans. Surface irregularities, loose material, vegetation, and all foreign matter shall be removed from
foundation surface area. When fill is required, it shall consist of materials conforming to the specified requirements.
Gabions and bedding or specified Geotextile shall not be placed until the foundation preparation is completed, and the
sub grade surfaces have been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
Compaction foundation
Compaction of bedding or filter material will be required per Contract plans and specifications. The surface of the
finished material shall be to grade and free of mounds, dips or windrows. Extra care should be taken with foundation
preparations in order to ensure a level and smooth surface. Geotextile shall be installed in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract plans and specifications.
12.7.5 Assembly and Placement

The assembly and placement of gabions shall be in accordance with the following procedures: Assembly. Rotate the
gabion panels into position and join the vertical edges with fasteners for gabion assembly. Where lacing wire is used,
wrap the wire with alternating single and double half hitches and intervals between four to five (4-5) inches. Where
spiral fasteners are used, crimp the ends to secure the spirals in place. Use the same fastening procedures to install
interior diaphragms where they are required.
Interior diaphragms will be required where any inside dimension exceeds three feet for gabion baskets thicker than
twelve. Diaphragms will be installed to assure that no open intervals are present that exceeds three. For baskets
rectangular cells are allowed with dimensions in one direction and not to exceed 1.8 meters in the perpendicular
direction.
Placement: Place the empty gabions on the foundation and interconnect the adjacent gabions along the top, bottom and
vertical edges using lacing wire or spirals. Wrap the wire with alternating single and double half hitches at intervals of
four to six (4-6) inches. Spirals are wound through the mesh openings on 3 inches centres at the connecting edges then
each end of the spiral is crimped to secure it in place. Lacing wire may be used as needed to supplement the
interconnecting of welded mesh gabions, and the closing of lids.
Interconnect each layer of gabions to the underlying layer of gabions along the front, back, and sides. Stagger the
vertical joints between the gabions of adjacent rows and layers by at least one half of a cell length.
12.7.6 Filling Operation

a. After adjacent empty wire gabion units are set to line and grade and common sides properly connected, they
shall be places in straight line tension to gain a uniform alignment. Staking of the gabions may be done to
maintain the established proper alignment prior to the placement of rock. No temporary stakes shall be places
through Geotextile material. Pre-formed stiffeners or connecting lacing wire shall be attached during the filling
operation to preserve the strength and shape of the structure.
b. Internal connecting crosstie wires shall be placed in each unrestrained gavion cell greater than 18 inches in
height, including gabion cells left temporarily unrestrained. Two internal connecting wires shall be placed
concurrently with rock placement, at each 12-inch interval of depth.
c. In welded mesh gabions these crossties or stiffeners can be placed across the corners of the gabions (at 12 inches
from the corners) providing diagonal bracing. Lacing wire or preformed wire stiffeners may be used.
d. The gabions shall be carefully filled with rock, either by machine or hand place methods, ensuring alignment,
avoiding bulges. And providing a compact mass that minimizes voids. T no point in the filling process may rock
be mechanically placed from a height of over 36 inches from machine to fill area. Machine placement will
require supplementing with hard work to ensure the desired results. The interior compartments shall be filled in
stages so that the depth of rock
e. Placed in any one cell does not exceed the depth of rock in any adjoining cell by more than 12 inches. Along the
exposed faces, the outer layer of stone shall be carefully placed and arranged by hand to ensure a neat, compact
placement with a uniform appearance.
Page 12-82
f. The last layer of rock shall be uniformly levelled to the top edges of the gabions. Lids shall be placed over the
rock filling using only approved lid closing tools as necessary. The use of crowbars or other single point leverage
bars for lid closing is prohibited due to the potential for damage to the baskets.
g. The gabion lid shall then be secured to the sides, ends and diaphragms with spiral binders or lacing wire using
the prescribed method of tying.
h. Any damage to the wire mesh during assembly, placement and filling shall be repaired promptly in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations or replaced with undamaged gabion baskets.
12.7.7 Roadside ditches

Purpose of roadside ditches is to collect, contain, and carry away the runoff without eroding roadway sections, to
prevent the water seepage into the road subgrade, and to allow the subgrade to drain.
Ditches usually have natural soil bottom/sides but can be lined with grass, plastic grids, rock riprap, asphalt, or concrete
for higher velocity conditions. Ditches usually have profiles follows the road logitutinal slope.
The maximum allowable side slope is 3:1, with a recommended side slope of no more than 4:1.
Slopes and a size are necessary to store the volume of pavement runoff until it has time to infiltrate and evaporate away
or discharge to depressed areas or natural ground.
A road patrol inspection will be required once a year for all ditches. Inspection should record the location and type of
repairs needed. Inspect for:
• Ditch line should be uniform and free of obstruction.
• Check side slopes of ditches for erosion and possible need for repair of eroded (gully) sides slopes.
• Check conditions of ditch paving material.
• Check for growth of undesirable vegetation
• Check for areas of excessive sedimentation, windblown sand, or other fill.
• Where side ditches are filled with sweet sand for landscaping or fill for parkings, special permission may be
required for reshaping the side ditch. Alternately, a different but appropriate drainage facility may be required in
accordance with the design and recommendations of the Owner for these locations.
• Geotextile for wrapping granular materials shall comply with requirements of Chapter 2 Section 2.7.2 of these
12.7.8 Concrete Spillways

Concrete spillways should only be used when the side slopes are flatter than 1:4. On steeper slopes a more positive type
of over side drain such as a pipe down drain should be used and as per site conditions.
Concrete spillways are effective in preserving raw fill slopes that are 1:6 or flatter in friable soils during the period
when protective growth is being established. Concrete spillways should be spaced so that a dike 50 mm high placed at
the outer edge of the paved shoulder will effectively confine drainage between spillways. When it is necessary to place
a spillway on curved alignment, attention must be given to possible overtopping at the bends.
All the concrete works shall be comply with Chapter 4 of these standard specifications.
12.8 Infiltration Ponds

Infiltration ponds for stormwater quality treatment are earthen inpoundments used for the collection, temporary storage,
and infiltration of incoming stormwater runoff to groundwater. Infiltration ponds are typically and end-of-pipe facility,
where swales are level and shallow storage areas that parallel and collecting runoff directly from the roadway
pavement.
Stormwater treatment for infiltration ponds is accomplished by the retention of the treatment volume runoff, where
sediments, thrash and other pollutants are captured by the filtration action through the soil.
Infiltration ponds can also be designed as combination detention/infiltration ponds for flow control where soil
conditions limit full infiltration of the runoff.
Infiltration ponds should have a minimum design infiltration rate of at least 15cm per hour. Infiltration can still be
considered in the design if the infiltration rate is less, but infiltration is considered a secondary function for this case.
Page 12-83
Infiltration rate to use for design shall be established by site testing. Site infiltration should be determined in-situ by a
method that accurately estimates the infiltration rate of the soil layer at the bottom of pond elevation. One such method
is the falling head test. At least three tests should be taken over infiltration site. Design infiltration rate will be the
average value of the tests divided by a safety factor (SF).
Base of all infiltration ponds should typically be 1.5m above the maximum ground water elevation, bedrock (or
hardpan), or other low-permeability layer.
Ponds can be excavated or constructed on sloping sites using water impoundment containment berms (dams)..
Where no pre-treatment is provided for infiltration ponds typically are positioned and located where pre-treatment is not
practical, then the surface area that can be considered for infiltration is the pond side slopes only. It is reasonably
assumed for this case that the bottom of the pond will become sealed off by sediments and oils.
Unless otherwise located with an irrigated landscape area, with the pond, bottoms and side slope vegetated, the floor
side slopes of infiltration ponds are usually protected with a 150 to 300mm thick layer of coarse sand or gravel.
Aggregate layer should be placed over a Geotextile filter fabric within the water operational areas.
Site Access road shall be reserved for the passage of heavy equipment, and to remove and dispose of sediments and for
operation and maintenance purposes.
Over time, incoming organic materials and fine soil particles will seal the surface of the pond, lowering the infiltration
rate. Sand/gravel filter layers can be readily removed and replaced as it becomes clogged. For more detailed on the
requirements specification of Pond construction refer to the Chapter 2, Article 2.4.2.9, of these standard specifications
12.8.1 Access Roads and Ramps

Requirements for access roads and ramps for detention/Infiltration ponds:
a. Access road and ramps shall be accommodated where required and as shown on the Contract Plans.
b. A minimum 4.5 meter wide access easement shall be provided from public street or ROW to the pond. The
access road shall be surface with a crushed rock or block pavement or other acceptable surface and as per Owner
approval.
c. An access ramp and concrete stairs shall be provided to the control structure and other drainage structure
associated with pond and for operation and maintenance
d. The access road shall be designed as per Owner Design Criteria requirements.
e. Signage and fencing shall be provided to the pond As shown on the Contract plans
f. Planting and landscaping (if required).
g. Access roads and ramps shall be designed and approved by the Engineer prior starting any construction works
12.8.2 Earth Dikes

Earth dikes is structure that intercept, divert and convey surface run-on, generally sheet flow, prevent erosion.
Earth dikes may be used to:
a. Convey surface runoff down sloping land
b. Intercept and divert runoff to avoid sheet flow over sloped surfaces
c. Divert and direct runoff towards a stabilized watercourse, drainage pipe or channel
d. Intercept runoff from paved surfaces
Earth dikes also may be used:
1. Below steep grades where runoff begins to concentrate
2. Along roadways and facility improvements subject to flood drainage
3. At the top of slopes to divert run-on from adjacent or undisturbed slopes
4. At bottom and mid-slope locations to intercept sheet flow and convey concentrated flows
5. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the Engineer approval
Page 12-84
12.8.2.1 Requirements of Standard Specifications Shall be as Follows

a. Care must be applied to correctly size and locate earth dikes. Excessively steep, unlined dikes are subject to
erosion and gully formation
b. Conveyances shall be stabilized
c. Use a lined ditch for high flow velocities
d. Select flow velocity based on careful evaluation of the risks due to erosion of the measure, soil types, over
toping, flow backups, washouts and drainage flow patterns for each project site
e. Compact any fills to prevent unequal settlement. For embankment and back-fill refer Chapter 2, Section 2.5 of
these standard specifications
f. Do not divert runoff from the highway right-of-way onto other property
g. Provide stabilized outlets
12.8.2.2 Maintenance and inspections

a. inspect temporary measures prior to the rainy season, after rainfall events, and regularly (approximately once per
week) during the rainy season
b. Inspect ditches and berms for washouts. Replace lost riprap, damaged linings or soil stabilizers as needed
c. Inspect channel linings, embankments and beds of ditches and berms for erosion and accumulation of debris and
sediment. Remove debris and sediment and repair linings and embankments as needed or as directed by the
Engineer
d. Temporary conveyances shall be completely removed as soon as the surrounding drainage area has been
stabilized or at the completion of construction
e. For earthworks, excavation and construction requirements refer to Chapter 2 of the standard specifications.
12.9 Swales
Swales are usually located parallel to the roadway or constructed as excavated trenches with berms as necessary to
create a level top surface. Swales are sized to contain and infiltrate the runoff that sheet flows directly off of the
adjacent pavement, shoulder, and side-slope surfaces.
All the excavations, backfilling and other related works shall comply with Chapter 2 and all related subsections of these
12.9.1 Construction Guide Lines for Swales

a. Begin vegetated swale construction only when the up gradient site has been sufficiently stabilized and temporary
erosion and sediment control measures are in place. Vegetated swales should be constructed and stabilized very
early in the construction schedule, preferably before mass earthwork and paving increase the rate and volume of
runoff. If the swales are constructed to assist with temporary drainage during construction, the facilities should
be graded to final design grade and stabilized at the cessation of mass earthwork.
b. Rough grade the vegetated swale. Equipment shall avoid excessive compaction and/or land disturbance.
Excavating equipment should operate from the side of the swale and never on the bottom. If excavation leads to
substantial compaction of the subgrade (where an infiltration trench is not proposed), 18 inches shall be removed
and replaced with a blend of topsoil and sand to promote infiltration and biological growth. At the very least,
topsoil shall be rototilled into the subgrade in order to penetrate the compacted zone and promote aeration and
the formation of macropores.
c. Following this, the area should be disked prior to final grading of topsoil.
d. Fine grade the vegetated swale. Accurate grading is crucial for swales. Even the smallest nonconformities may
compromise flow conditions and may lead to ponding in undesirable locations. The accidental creation of a
preferential flow path in the swale will encourage scour rather than the desired smooth laminar flow across the
cross-section.
e. Seed and vegetate according to final planting list. Initial seeding with an annual turf grass is recommended to
provide temporary stabilization. Plant the swale at a time of the year when successful establishment without
irrigation is most likely. However, temporary irrigation may be needed in periods of drought. Vegetation should
Page 12-85
be established as soon as possible to prevent erosion and scour.

f. Concurrent with the previous step, stabilize freshly seeded swales with appropriate temporary or permanent soil
stabilization methods, such as erosion control matting or blankets. If runoff velocities are high, consider sodding
the swale or diverting runoff until vegetation is fully established.
g. Once the swale is sufficiently stabilized, remove temporary erosion and sediment controls.
12.10 Sand Traps

Sand traps shall be installed and accommodated, where required and shown on the Contract plans, and approved by
Owner and the Engineer.
The trap shall be installed at the upstream end of the connection and upstream of the grit separator or petrol interceptor.
It shall be located to afford adequate access for maintenance and emptying.
In accordance with any Contract plans and these Standard Specifications, the Contractor shall furnish all materials,
labour, equipment, tools and construct complete the sand trap as shown in any applicable Contract plans.
12.11 Soakaways
12.11.1 Concrete Ring/Chamber
a. Soakaway shall be constructed using precast concrete pit or rings. Concrete works shall comply with the
requirements of section 4 of the specification. Concrete shall be grade C40 for the precast concrete chambers and
the cover slab, using Moderately Sulphate resisting Portland cement.
b. Excavation for soakaway chambers shall be in accordance with the Contract plans. Soakaway chamber and
granular backfill shall be completely encased in geotextile filter fabric in accordance with the Contract plans and
as per Chapter 2 of these standard specifications. During construction of the drywell, precautions shall be taken
to avoid undue compaction of the foundation and adjacent soil areas, and to prevent debris and eroded material
from contaminating the granular backfill material.
c. The cover slab shall be of the dimensions and contain the reinforcement as shown on the Contract plans or
detailed in the Project Specifications.
d. The structural concrete shall be designed for durability and shall include as a minimum the following
specification:
1. Minimum cover 74mm
2. All surfaces to be painted with a protective coating water proofing membrane type A.
3. Any reinforcement shall be epoxy coated in accordance with BS 7295
e. The soakaways shall have an internal diameter of 2m unless otherwise designated and shall be of a minimum
depth of 3 m unless otherwise designated.
f. The precast concrete rings shall be at least 150mm thick and shall have three evenly spaced lifting points.
g. No permanently embedded metal parts shall be left with a cover less than 40mm from the surface. The precast
pits/rims shall be constructed with 50mm diameter holes at 400mm centres in rows spaced 300mm apart. The
holes shall be alternately offset.
h. The bottom pit shall be founded on it situ blinding concrete 200mm deep.
i. The soakaway shall be surrounded by granular material which shall infill the whole void between the soakaway
and the undisturbed ground around the excavation.
j. The granular material shall be laid in tamps and shall nowhere be less than 225mm in width.
k. The granular material shall be clean crushed rock from a source approved by the Engineer. The nominal size
shall be 75mm. The material passing a 0.075mm sieve shall not exceed 5%.
l. Cast iron covers and frames shall be to BS EN 124 of the designated loading class and as shown on the Contract
plans.
m. Filter fabric material lining to the outside of the soakaway excavation shall be Terram, manufactured by shall be
approved by the Engineer. The placing and laying of the material shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and shall comply with requirement of Chapter 4, Section 4.4.1 of these standard specifications.
Page 12-86
n. The Geotextile material shall not be left exposed to the sun for a period greater than 7 days before burying. The
material shall be Class A and shall meet the requirements of Chapter 2, Article 2.5.2.9 of these standard
specifications.
o. Before completing of the road drainage part of the Works the Contractor shall systematically clean the whole
road drainage system including gullies, connecting pipes and soakaways. The entire system shall be clear of
debris and silts and in a sound working order.
p. Cast iron covers shall be freed from surfacing materials and pivot points shall be greased. The Contractor shall
be responsible for cleaning up any silting of the surface water drainage system caused by other Contractors
working within the Site and the approval of the employer.
12.11.2 Plastic Soakaways System

1. Plastic Soakaway cells are produced in different shapes and modular. Manufacturer and supplier of the plastic
soakaways shall be approved by the Owner.
2. Plastic Soakaways void ratio shall be equal to 95% with minimum 20 tons/m² load bearing capacity, cost
effective and easy operation and maintenance
3. Plastic soakaways Continuous parabolic arch system for underground stormwater infiltration (or detention) that
meets the requirements of the BS6008 and BS EN 1295.1 for trafficability (including emergency vehicles- Fire
trucks) The product shall be of PE or PP and should not have any lateral intrusion or cuts, the overall shape shall
be continuous with gusset plates on the footing to prevent rotation. The product should be also tested at high
temperatures (40 degree), the overall factor of safety at 50 years should 2 and the polymer should be tested for
creep (10,000 hours – Stepped Isometric Test). The end plate should also parabolic and structurally designed,
vertical or straight end plates should not be acceptable. The inlet system should be capable to trap silt and litter
with the use of the geotextiles without affecting the incoming flow rates (peak inflow)
4. Continuously curved arch conveyance system; shall be of polyethylene or polypropylene to meet BS EN 1295.1
and BS 6008 for lateral and vertical loading including emergency vehicles axles. The system shall be capable of
trapping over 90% of solids and 100% of big littering if this is not the case higher clogging factor shall be used
5. These models has different dimension in size and volume however they all require a minimum of 450mm cover
and they can handle a maximum of 3.66m of cover.
6. Installation of these Plastic soakaways shall be according to the manufacturer recommendations and as approved
by the owner.
7. The permeable Geotextile and backfill granular materials shall be comply with Chapter 2, Section 2.7 of these
standard specifications and shall comply with AASHO T 27 and T11.
8. Access chamber shall be provided for the operation and maintenance purpose as shown on the contract planss.
9. The contractor shall provide alternatives type plastic soakways to the Owner with technical and cost comparisons
for his approval.
12.11.3 Brick Soakaways System

1. Brick soakaway chamber walls shall be constructed as per Section 12.4.1 requirements and as shown on the
contract plans. The joints shall be struck flush with the work as it proceeds. Two ring brick arches shall be
formed over pipes larger than 300mm diameter. All joints shall be watertight. The inner surface of the manhole
shall be plumb and smooth throughout.
2. Where a pipe of 300mm diameter, or larger, is to be joined to either new or existing brick manholes the opening
and the pipe shall be protected by the construction of a brick arch of two rings of bricks on edge.
3. The space between the brickwork and the face of the excavation shall be filled with ST4 Mix/C20 grade concrete
as the work proceeds, and shall be of not less than 150mm thickness.
4. In-situ concrete shaft and chamber cover slabs shall be of not less than 150mm thickness of C30 grade concrete
and suitably reinforced to BS EN 1917:2002 for its appropriate location and use and as shown on the Contracts
plans and approved by the Engineer.
5. All covers and frames for brick soakaways shall be as per BS EN 124 D400. Double triangular covers and must
be securely bolted together at all times when in position. For more on covers and frames refer to Article 12.3.2.3.
6. Where the depth of invert of a brick soakaways chamber exceeds 900mm below the finished surface, double
manhole step irons to BS EN 13101:2002 shall be provided.
Page 12-87
7. Where the depth of invert of a chamber exceeds 3.500m below the finished surface, a ladder to BS4211:2005
(Class A) shall be provided.
8. Where the depth of invert of a chamber exceeds 6.000m, a landing slab(s) to BS EN 1916:2002, BS EN
1917:2002 and BS5911-1:2002, BS5911-3:2010, BS5911-4:2002 shall be provided no more than 6.000m apart.
Step irons or ladders shall be positioned so as to conform to BS EN 752:2008.
9. Deep Soakways are not intended for access other than by use of winch. And shall comply with BS EN
752:2008, ladders must not be installed.
12.11.4 Trench Soakaways System

Trench soakaways usually installed vertically in a trench as shown on the Contract plans and as per the Engineer
approval
a. Trench soakaways should be constructed sufficiently faraway from buildings or other structures such as bridges
in order to prevent the risk of undermining foundations. Building practices recommend that a minimum distance
of 3m-6m between a subsurface drainage system and a building should be adopted, depending on ground
conditions
b. Soakaways should not normally be deeper than 3 to 4m in order to maximize the length of the flow path to the
water table through the unsaturated zone. The greater the thickness of unsaturated zone available, the greater the
potential for pollutant attenuation.
c. The long term performance of the soakaway depends on maintaining the initial storage volume by keeping the
pores clear within the granular fill. Any material that is likely to clog the pores of the drainage material or seal
the interface between the storage and the adjacent soil should be intercepted before discharge to the soakaway
(CIRIA, C522) in order to maximize the effective life of the soakaway between cleaning consideration of the
need for sediment traps and, where appropriate, oil interceptors to treat the surface water prior to discharge to
soakaways may be required(CIRIA, Report 156)
d. Whilst the interception of sediments prior to entry into the soakaway is an essential pre-requisite to good design,
some soakaway designs may incorporate the use of geotextiles to prevent the migration of fine materials.
Geotextiles may be used to:
e. Separate granular backfill materials from ground material in the walls of excavated pits; prevent fines within the
soakaway from migrating outward into granular surround materials hence reducing clogging of those materials;
lay over the top surface of a granular fill to prevent downward ingress of backfill material during and after
surface reinstatement. The granualar mater shall be as per the requirements of Chapter 2, Section 2.5.2 of these
The Geotextile material shall not be left exposed to the sun for a period greater than 7 days before burying. The material
shall be Class A and shall meet the requirements of Chapter 2, Article 2.5.2.9, of these standard specifications.
12.12 French Drain for Excessive Water

12.12.1 Description
French drain usually will be installed vertically in a trench as per manufacturer’s specification and in conformance with
the detail shown on the Contract plans and shall be constructed against the concrete retaining walls to take the excessive
irrigation water from the soil and transport this water to the drainpipe at the toe of the French drain. Typically used
alongside roads and also adjacent to water courses to stabilize the bank. Reference is also made to the UK French drain
regulations DTp Type 6.
12.12.2 Material
French drain consist of three polyimide filament drainage core, covered on both sides with weights range from 100g/m²
up to 1200g/m², non woven fabric.
The three components are spot welded together and at both edges continuously welded in such a way that a drainpipe
can be installed into the French drain, by means of the already inserted cord.
Table 12-25: Hydraulic properties for standard type of pocket french drain
Page 12-88
French drain Type 1/0.50/C100 French drain Type 2/0.50/C100
French drain Type 1/1.00/C100 French drain Type 2/1.00/C100
Discharge Capacity 0.37/s.m (30 kPa @ I = 1.0) / EN ISO Discharge Capacity 1.34 I/s.(20kPa at I = 1.0) / EN ISO
12958 (f/f) 12958 (f/f)
12.12.2.1 Properties of Filter (C100)

Table 12-26: Properties of Filter C100
Weight 100 g/m2 EN 965 Thickness 0.5mm EN 964-1
Tensile Strength 6 kN/m EN 10319 Elongation at break 33% EN 10319
O 90 0.16mm EN ISO 12956 Kv 2.3x10-3m/s DIN 53936
12.12.2.2 160mm Dia. Class 10 Slotted uPVC Drains Pipe

Work shall be done according to the requirements of Chapter 2 Article 2.5.2.6 of these standard specifications.
Table 12-27: The 160mm dia. Class 10 slotted uPVC drain pipe
Test Sieve (mm) Percent by Weight Stone
63 100 -
37.5 85-100 -
20 0-30 100
14 0-5 85-100
10 - -
5 - 0-25
2.36 - 0-5
12.13 Flushing of Existing Surface or Sub-Surface Drain for Any

Diameter
Flushing of existing surface or subsurface drains for any diameter shall be performed in accordance with the following
requirements:
1. The flushing shall be done from manhole to manhole.
2. The flushing shall be done using high pressure rodding spray hose working from upstream manhole with
removal of water, sediment and trash removed by vacuum truck from downstream structure.
3. The contractor shall provide a block in the downstream structure to prevent water, sediment and debris from
bypassing the vacuum truck removal. The contractor shall use CCTV (Closed Circuit TV) to check inside the
pipe.
12.13.1 Remove, Repair and Refix Drainage Components

The works shall be consist of removal, repairing, and re-fixing of storm water system cover, frame and grating of
manholes, catch basin and inlet by steel grit blast to Swedish Standard SA 2.5 and coat with coal tar epoxy 470 micron
min. in two coat to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
12.14 Petrol and Oil Interceptor

Contamination of surface water by patrol, oil, chemicals or suspended solids can cause these discharges to have a
serious impact on the receiving water.
Page 12-89
An interceptor is a trap used to separate out hydrocarbon pollutants from rainwater runoff.
The provision, location and sizing of interceptors shall be driven the location of any outfalls from paved areas where
there is a risk of contamination.
Interceptors shall be provided prior to any secondary infrastructure final discharge point to ensure that the quality of the
water being discharged meets the standards required by the local regulations.
Oil separator design shall be constructed in accordance with BS EN 858-1:2002 and as per design guidelines of
Department of Transportation road drainage manual and as per the approved manufacturer’s recommendations and the
Owner approval.
Class 1 interceptors shall be provided in high risk areas such as refueling areas and wash down areas.
Class 2 interceptors shall be provided for all car parks.
Class 3 Oil interceptors shall be provided before any inlet to the drainage pumping station
Class 4 Interceptor shall be providing at each outfall to the water bodies.
Due to considerations the Contractor shall provide an access arrangement for inspections, repair and maintenance of the
oil separator.
The Contractor shall provide portable pumps sets at large sites to assist in evacuation of interceptors.
Fabric reinforcement may be necessary where vehicle loading has to be taken into account or where high extension
access shafts are to be fitted
12.14.1 Type of Oil Interceptor

1. GRP Oil interceptor: Contractor shall construct GRP oil interceptor with concrete surround as shown on the
contract plans and as per manufacturer specifications and approved by the engineer.
2. Concrete: Oil interceptor shall be accommodated, where big flow anticipated and per the design requirements
and as shown on the contract plans. The Contractor shall construct the concrete interceptor as per requirement of
Chapter 4 of these standard specifications and reference standards: ASTM D-4097, ASTM C478 and ASTM
C443.
3. Shop drawings consisting of catalog cuts or Fabricator showing the structure and frames, grates and covers shall
be submitted by the contractor to the Engineer for approval.
4. Where an external bypass is required, the manufacturer must provide calculations’ and designs for all the
structures, piping and any other required material applicable to the proper functioning of the system and shall be
12.15 Special Manholes, Utility Bypass Chambers & Alternative

Inlet-Catch Basin & Flush Inlet Structures
If an unavoidable conflict is found to occur between the storm water drainage system and a service or utility, the
Contractor shall install a special manhole, utility bypass chamber, alternative inlet, catch basin or flush inlet structure,
as required, to work around the utility, as directed or approved by the Engineer.
Contractor shall prepare detailed shop drawings for each structure where required, for approval by the Engineer. Shop
drawings shall include detailed dimensions and structural construction details and necessary for the construction of the
structure.
Special manholes, utility bypass chambers, alternative inlet, catch basin and flush inlet structures shall meet the material
requirements of Section 12.3.2 and the installation requirements of Section 12.3.3.
When constructing the structures, the conflicting utility shall be carefully excavated, braced, shored, and covered with a
split GRP pipe sleeve of the appropriate diameter. Pipe sleeve shall be wrapped with a 6 mm thick layer of GRP
laminate consisting of a minimum 40 % 'E' glass to a maximum 60 % resin content, by weight. GRP sleeve shall be
encased with reinforced concrete, becoming an integral part of the manhole structure.
When backfilling the newly constructed special manhole, the existing utility shall be carefully re-bedded and backfilled
to the densities and with the materials as required by the concerned utility agency. Placement of the protective sleeve
and re-bedding shall be done so as to provide uniform, continuous, support for the utility, without sagging or settlement.
Where required for high alkali or salty conditions, concrete surfaces shall be covered with waterproofing materials as
specified and shown on the Contract plans. Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to assure minimum
Page 12-90
disturbance to the concerned utility. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage done to the utility during his
operations, and shall make full restitution for damages as required by the utility department and the Engineer, without
additional compensation. Construction of special manholes and utility bypass chambers shall be done with close
cooperation, review and inspection of the work by the concerned utility agency's representative.
Contractor shall prepare and install two warning/identification plaques one in English and one in Arabic, inside each
sleeved and channel type special manhole. Plaque shall be a 4 mm minimum thickness GRP plate, shaped as necessary
to match the inside surface of the GRP manhole liner. Plaque shall be resin bonded, after lettering, to the GRP liner,
near the top of the structure in a convenient, noticeable position. Plaques shall be lettered with stencils for a professional
appearance, using two components polyurethane enamel having a bright, glossy finish. Surface preparation and painting
shall be done as per the paint manufacturer's recommendations. Plaque shall be of the colours and size, and contain the
appropriate information as per the example shown on the Contract plans.
12.16 Adjusting Existing Storm Drain Structure Covers and

Grates to Match New Grades
For adjustment of existing structure covers, use the following procedure:
1. Remove the existing frame and cover. Break back the concrete to the pavement subbase level while saving and
protecting the vertical rebar to a length suitable for splicing of rebar for the required riser extension
2. Place a 15 mm thick (minimum) steel plate cover on the structure riser opening
3. Salvage any existing manhole rings (for precast ring manhole risers) and manhole frames and covers for reuse if
conditions of rings, frame and cover are suitable and shall be approved by the Engineer.
4. Place and compact the required surfacing
5. Locate the steel-plate manhole cover with a metal detector or other method approved by the Engineer
6. Cut a 1.5 m × 1.5 m square opening in the surfacing and remove the surrounding material in accordance with the
Contract plans
7. Form and install the necessary reinforcement (provide drilled and epoxy installed dowels if necessary) and cast-
in-situ the concrete riser extension (or install additional pre-cast manhole rings as applicable for the structure
type) placing the cover frame in accordance with the Contract plans
8. Place and compact the required surfacing in compliance with the requirements of Chapter 3 of these standard
specifications.
Existing frames and covers/grates to be reset shall be carefully removed and reset to the required grade; however, at the
Contractor's option and with approval of the Engineer, adjustable extension rings, of the type which do not require the
removal of the existing frame, may be used. Extension device shall provide positive locking action with the existing
frame and shall permit adjustment in height to conform to the new finished pavement surface. Material for the extension
device shall be compatible with the existing frame and conform to the material and loading requirements as otherwise
specified for storm drain structure covers.
Once reset, frames and covers/grates shall be free of all dirt, mud, concrete, asphaltic paving materials and other
deleterious substances and shall have all vent holes unobstructed.
Contractor may propose an alternate method of adjusting manholes by providing the Engineer with the proposed
procedure for approval.
12.16.1 Abandonment of Existing Structures

Abandonment of existing drainage structures shall meet the requirements of Chapter 2, Article 2.3.2.3 of these standard
specifications, Removal of bridges, pipes, culverts and drainage structures.
12.16.2 Connections to Existing Drainage Structures

Contractor shall excavate completely around the existing structure to prevent unbalanced loading. Structure shall be
kept in operation at all times and the necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent debris or other material from
entering the storm drain, including a tight pipeline bypass through the existing channel if required. All damage to the
manhole resulting from the Contractor operation shall be repaired at no additional compensation.
When connecting a new storm drain to an existing structure that has no stub-out or block out, the following items shall
be complies with:
Page 12-91
1. The Contractor shall obtain from the Operating Authority prior permission in writing before carrying out any
work on the existing system.
2. Concrete core structure or riser wall to accommodate new pipe
3. To avoid any differentials settlement rocker pipe piece shall be provided where required and as shown on the
contract plans For more detail refer to Table 12-19 pipe protruding in Article 12.1.4.5, Sub-article e.
4. After the new pipe is laid, the opening through the wall around the new pipe shall be sealed off with material
compatible with existing manhole wall components.
5. Where installing the new pipe at the structure invert level, any existing bench shall be broken out to a minimum
depth of 25 mm and thoroughly cleaned.
6. New bench and channel shall be formed from mortar concrete with an epoxy additive to assure adequate bonding
to the existing bench.
7. All surfaces shall be steel-towelled to a smooth, dense surface.
12.17 Cleaning Storm Drains and Structures

This work consists of cleaning, removing, and disposing of all debris and obstructions from existing or new culvert
pipes, storm drain pipes, drains, and inlet structures, manholes, box culverts, grates, pumping station trash racks, or
other drainage features and as shown on the Contract plans. Care shall be taken not to damage any portions of the
structure. Any damage to the structure or immediate area of roadway or sidewalk shall be restored to its original
condition by the Contractor at no additional compensation cost to the Owner.
12.17.1 Existing Pumping Station Structure Maintenance

The Contractor shall be responsible for the operation and maintenance of the existing pumping structures on a continual
basis during the life of the Contract. In addition, once each year during the life of the contract including the
maintenance period of one year (365 days) after the handing over the pumping structures, the Contractor shall dewater,
clean , remove sediments, and make repairs as required to the pumping structures. The Contractor shall schedule his
operations such that this maintenance work does not begin until the 2nd week of September and is finish before the 2nd
week of November of each year.
The maintenance work for pumping structure shall include the dewatering and cleaning of the structure, pulling and
performing annual servicing of the pumps, reinstallation and test running of the pumps, repair and replacement as
required of any damaged mechanical / electrical/piping package component or structure/liner items. Repair and
replacement work shall be done in accordance with the recommendation and supervision of electrical mechanical
package subcontractor, as approved by the engineer. The Contractor is also responsible for all electrical services
connection cost and other operation costs during the construction and maintenance period of the contract.
12.17.2 Existing Outfall Structure Maintenance

The contractor shall be responsible for the operation and maintenance of the outfall structure on a continual basis during
the life of this contract. In addition, once each year during the life of this contract including maintenance period, the
contractor shall dewater, clean, remove sediments, apply anti fouling coatings to the outfall structure and make repairs
as required to the outfall structure. The contractor shall schedule his performance, such that this maintenance work does
not begin until the 2nd week of September and is finished before the 2nd week of November of each year.
The annual maintenance work for the outfall structure shall consist of furnishing and installing stop planks in the stop
plank grooves; cleaning of the stop plank grooves prior to installation of the stop planks; dewatering the inside of the
outfall and pipe upstream of the stop planks; assist the Engineer with inspections; removal of all sediments, sand,
debris, sea growth and marine deposits; application of approved anti-fouling coatings and sealants as per manufacturer's
recommendations; making any repairs; checking and adjustment of flap gate seats for proper sealing and removal of all
marine deposits; and removal of stop planks after final approval of the maintenance work is ; given by the Engineer.
This maintenance shall include any work necessary to ensure proper operation of the flap gate, including removal and
remaching, or replacement of the seats and hinge parts, as necessary
Anti-fouling coatings for the outfall structure shall be applied as per the manufacturer's recommendations, as specified,
and as approved by the Engineer. The contractor shall take special precautions not to scratch or damage the concrete
surfaces during the cleaning process. The use of highly acidic cleaners will not be allowed. All marine deposits on the
flap gate seats shall be carefully removed to bare metal followed by hand buffing with fine grade emery cloth to
Page 12-92
produce a shine. Cleaning the flap gate seats with mechanical grinders or by other methods that degrade the precision
machined mating surfaces will not be permitted.
12.17.3 Equipment
Drainage structures are to be cleaned as thoroughly as possible and to the bottom of each structure by an approved
method, which typically will entail use of a high pressure rodding and vacuum truck equipment. Common techniques
utilized for cleaning are suggested below.
12.17.4 Hydraulic Cleaning Equipment

Equipment used shall be of a movable dam type and be constructed in such a way that a portion of the dam may be
collapsed at any time during the cleaning operation to allow the flow past the cleaning head to protect against flooding
of the storm drain. Movable dam shall be equal in diameter to the pipe being cleaned and shall provide a flexible
scraper around the outer periphery to ensure total removal of sediments. If cleaning balls or other such equipment that
cannot be collapsed instantly are used, special precautions against flooding of the drains and causing damage to public
or private property shall be taken.
12.17.5 High Pressure Jet (Hydro-Cleaning) Equipment

All high pressure storm drain cleaning equipment shall be designed for ease and safety of operation. Equipment shall
have a selection of two or more high velocity nozzles. Nozzles shall be capable of producing a scouring action from 15o
to 45o in all sizes designated to be cleaned. Cleaning shall be accomplished by using a pump capable of delivering
water from 5 mPa to 10 mPa to the self-propelled nozzles. Equipment shall also include a high velocity gun for washing
and scouring wet well walls and floor.
Gun shall be capable of producing flows from a fine spray to a solid stream. Equipment shall carry its own water tank,
auxiliary engines, pumps, and hydraulically driven hose reel. All controls shall be located so that the equipment can be
operated above ground.
Typically the wash water, debris and sediments are removed at the same time as the jetting using a high capacity
vacuum truck.
12.17.6 Mechanical Cleaning

Bucket machines shall be in pairs with sufficient power to perform the work in an efficient manner. Machines shall be
belt operated or have an overload device. Machines with direct drive that could cause damage to the pipe will not be
allowed.
Power rodding machines shall be either sectional or continuous type capable of holding a minimum of 230 m of rod.
The rod shall be heat-treated steel. To ensure safe operation, the machine shall have a fully enclosed body and an
automatic safety throw-out clutch or relief valve.
Chain knockers may be used in a back and forth motion to loosen heavy deposits of material. Chain knockers may be
used in ductile iron pipe only. Contractor may recommend other heavy cleaning equipment for use with the approval of
the Engineer
12.17.7 Maintenance Requirements

All existing pipes and drainage structures that require cleaning are identified in the Contract plans. They shall be
cleaned by flushing, rodding, or whatever means are necessary to provide unobstructed drainage. All catch basin sumps,
manholes, inlet and outlet structures, and debris racks shall also be freed of all dirt, rock, and debris. Existing drainage
facilities shall be cleaned as a first order of work to enhance natural drainage off and through the project. They shall be
kept clean throughout the life of the project and be clean upon final acceptance of the work.
All storm drains to be cleaned shall be plugged at the discharge end prior to cleaning. All sludge, dirt, sand, rocks,
grease, and other solid or semi-solid material resulting from the cleaning operation shall be removed at the downstream
manhole or wet well of the section being cleaned. Passing material from one sewer line section to another sewer line
section or from manhole section to manhole section shall not be permitted except when using high velocity jet
equipment. The maximum limit before material is removed will be approximately 180 m.
All new project storm drains and structures shall be cleaned of all construction debris, sediments and other detritus prior
to final inspection and handover. Cleaning of project installed storm drains and structures will be at the Contractors
expense, with no additional compensation.
Page 12-93
12.18 Pump Stations

12.18.1 Tunnel/Underpass Drainage/Storm Water Pump Stations
Tunnels shall be provided with drainage/storm water system to collect, store and discharge storm water from the ramp
area, fuel/hazardous liquid and fire fighting water from the tunnel area. Pump stations and the drainage/storm water
system will be designed in accordance with NFPA 502 and NFPA 820 and Abu Dhabi Civil Defense Regulation. The
drainage collection system will be designed so that spills of hazardous or flammable liquids cannot propagate along the
length of the tunnel. All components will be constructed of non-flammable materials. Pump stations and reservoirs shall
be provided in multiple locations based on tunnel gradient and external storm water network.
Pump station shall be in two sections, wet well and dry valve chamber room. Wet well and valve/piping rooms should
be separated with sealed covers. All equipments in Wet well and dry room shall be explosion proof. Wet well shall be
provided with a separate oil collection chamber and thrash rack before the pumping chamber. All vents shall be
terminated at roof level. Pumps shall be of the submersible type explosion proof completely assembled and tested at the
factory. Control panels and electronic control components shall be located in a separate room next to pump room. The
pumping stations will be selected on the following basis:
• Pumps: mixed flow pumps
• Pump Rating: Each pump 100% of calculated drainage volume or the flow rate associated with simultaneous
operation of two fire standpipe hose systems, whichever is larger.
• Pump Head: To suit static and friction heads of the installation. Friction head calculated with two pumps
operating.
• Pump Type: Non clog surface water explosion proof type.
• Gate valves, Check Valves, Flap valves, flow meter, ultrasonic level sensor, hydrocarbon detection and flood
detection.
Pumps will be supported independent of discharge piping. Discharge line will be fixed, stainless steel 316L pipe with
quick-connection coupling to pumps and will discharge to a common header with a single discharge line from the
station. The discharge line will pass through an oil trap before emptying into the surface water drainage system.
External drain connection from pump station to brake chamber shall be ductile iron.
The pumps will operate as duty/standby, and will use ultrasonic level controls for automatic operation. Pump room shall
be provided with explosion proof type lifting hoist.
12.18.2 Outfall Pump Stations

Outfall pumping stations are constructed associated with outfall structure to maintain the continuity and passage of
surface drainage and ground water flows to the sea, from the storm water mainline. Pump stations shall be designed in
accordance with NFPA 820 and Abudhabi Cvil Defence Regulation.
The pumps will operate as duty/standby, and will use ultrasonic level controls for automatic operation. Pump room shall
be provided with explosion proof type lifting hoist.
12.18.3 Materials
12.18.3.1 Concrete
The concrete work shall conform to the lines, profiles and dimensions as indicated on the Contract plans, as directed by
the Engineer and as per the applicable requirements of Chapter 4, Concrete Works, of these standard specifications. All
reinforced concrete for pumping structures shall be constructed with class C40 concrete. Concrete for pipe bedding
cradles and encasement shall be class C40. Concrete for blinding layers (mud slabs) shall be class C35. Concrete for
curbs, electrical room foundations, and pull boxes shall be Class C40. Concrete duct encasements, fence pole
foundations, and light pole foundations shall be Class C40.
Page 12-94
12.18.3.2 Shop Drawings and Contractor Submittals

Contractor shall prepare, and submit to the Engineer for approval, complete shop drawings in accordance with
applicable requirements specified herein. Shop drawings shall include, all details of the site layout Contract plans,
Architectural, structural, mechanical/electrical components including the name of the manufacturer and installation
subcontractor; description of sequence of construction; structural calculations; description of materials; test
certifications and guarantees; manufacturer's literature for installation, testing, operation and maintenance, design, and
all other related data as required and as directed by the Engineer.
Shop drawings for the structural components shall be fully integrated for the requirements of the architectural,
electrical/mechanical component shop drawings.
12.18.3.3 Delivery, Storage and Handling

Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Specific requirements shall be as specified in the relevant specification section governing the manufacture and
installation of the material or product in question. Additional requirements may be required as per the
manufacturer’s recommendations and as directed by the Engineer.
2. Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the Engineer. Any products
damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked and set aside. Proposals for repair of any
damaged products shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval. No repairs to damaged products
shall be attempted without the Engineer’s approval.
3. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer, shall be removed from site and replaced at
the Contractor’s expense.
4. All products shall be handled and stored in accordance with printed recommendations of manufacturer
5. All site storage areas shall be shaded, at all times.
6. Electronic equipments including panels shall be stored in air conditioned spaces.
7. Precautions shall also be taken to protect items sensitive to sunlight or heat prior to backfilling operations.
12.18.3.4 Warranty
Contractor shall submit pump manufacturer’s warranty for units being supplied to the Department against defection
workmanship and material for a period of Ten (10) years or 10,000 hour under normal use, operation and service.
Warranty shall be in printed form and apply to all similar units.
12.18.3.5 Reinforcement
All reinforcing steel for concrete work shall be Grade 420, deformed round bar, meeting the requirements of Chapter
5, Reinforcing Steel, of these standard specifications.
12.18.3.6 Protective Coatings

Interior concrete surfaces of enclosed chambers shall be coated with a GRP liner unless otherwise approved or shown
on the Contract plans. All backfilled exterior concrete surfaces of the structures, starting at 15cm below the finished
grade lines, shall be water proofed with waterproofing membrane system type B in accordance with Chapter 28,
Waterproofing, and asphalt protection board. All exposed exterior concrete surfaces of the structures, starting at 15 cm
below the finished grade lines and above, and other exposed concrete surfaces as shown on the Contract plans and/or
directed by the Engineer shall be coated with sealant. Exposed surfaces of the structure below the high tide elevation of
+ 1.50 meters, new Abu Dhabi Datum, shall be protected with anti-fouling coatings. Interior surfaces of minor concrete
structures, such as pull boxes, shall be protected with a coal tar epoxy coating. Exterior surfaces of minor structures
shall be coated with a waterproofing membrane system, type A, as per Chapter 28. The protective coating materials
shall meet the following requirements:
a. Sealant. Sealant shall be applied to all exposed concrete surfaces not otherwise protected. Sealant shall be a
surface penetrating type clear sealer meeting the requirements of Chapter 29, Section 29.6, and Chapter 4
Concrete works, of these Standard Specifications.
1. Sealant shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions at the rate of approximately 10 to
15 square meters per 4.0 liters. Apply the water repellent sealer with a low pressure airless spray gun and a
coarse spray nozzle. Flood the surface to obtain a uniform coverage.
Page 12-95
2. The water absorption values for treated concrete surfaces when tested in accordance with ASTM C-642 shall
not exceed 1% moisture after 48-hour submersion in water, when compared to similar untreated concrete
surfaces with approximately 4.8% moisture after 48-hour submersion in water.
3. The treated specimen from above shall not exceed 1.3% moisture by weight when submerged in boiling
water for 24 hours following the 48-hour soak when tested in accordance with ASTM C-642.
4. The treatment must allow treated substrates to retain vapour permeability and application must be compatible
with damp substrate surfaces. Verification of this property shall be demonstrated by treating a sample
specimen which is in a water-saturated condition at the time of application, drying the treated sample to a
constant weight, and then performing ASTM C-642 testing procedure with the treated sample gaining no
more than 1% of its weight when submerged for 24 hours.
5. No staining, discoloration, darkening or texture change of the surface shall occur as a result of the treatment
used.
6. The treatment must be able to resist salt penetration as measured by AASHTO T-259 and T-260. After 90
days of salt ponding the treated samples will absorb less than 0.7 kg chloride per cubic yard at the 1 mm to
12 mm depth and no more than 0.35 kg chloride per cubic yard at the 12 mm level compared to an untreated
sample with 2.7 kg/.76 m³ respectively.
b. Waterproofing Membrane System (Type B). All backfilled exterior surfaces of the structures shall be
waterproofed with a waterproofing membrane type B, and asphalt protection board complying with all
requirements of Chapter 28 of these standard specifications.
c. GRP Liners. The interior surfaces of the pumping structure shall be waterproofed with a self-adhering spray-on
GRP type coating liner. The liner shall consist of a three-part system involving: (1) the use of a primer/sealer
base coat applied in a minimum of two coats to completely saturate and seal the porous concrete surface; (2) a
secondary coating of reinforced epoxy resin using a chopped glass fibres roving or glass flake type
reinforcement of minimum 29% reinforcement to resin ratio by weight, applied in two coats to a minimum dry
film thickness of 2.5 mm; and (3) a final surface coating of non-reinforced epoxy gel (resin) to a minimum dry
film thickness of 0.35 mm. The sealer/primer base coating shall be of type as recommended by the coating
process manufacturer/subcontractor. The glass reinforced epoxy (GRP) layer shall be a two-part epoxy resin
reinforced by type ECR chopped glass fibers or glass flakes of types, physical properties and quality as
recommended by the approved manufacturer and application subcontractor. The final non-reinforced resin layer
shall be of same type epoxy resin as used for the reinforced epoxy resin layer.
1. The reinforced and non-reinforced resin layers shall be applied by spray methods wherein the spray
equipment is capable of mixing the two resin components at the nozzle automatically maintaining the proper
mix and reinforcement to resin ratios and spraying the mixture, with the reinforcement in a prewetted
condition, uniformly and evenly onto the surface without globing or thin spots.
2. Each sealer/primer and reinforced and non-reinforced resin coat shall be coloured, using colour additives of
different colours, to assist in the inspection of the coats. The final coat shall be a light reflective colour. The
contractor shall follow all safety and application guidelines suggested by the manufacturer. The interior areas
shall be force-air ventilated and all workmen suitably protected during application and curing of spray-on
GRP liners.
3. Prior to start of construction of the pumping structure, the Contractor shall submit, with his shop drawing
submittals, samples of the spray-on GRP lining process. The shop drawing submittal shall also include the
name of the manufacturer and application subcontractor; the manufacturer's recommendations for the process
including exact details of the various coatings, material properties, testing requirements, and application
instructions; the subcontractor’s experience, required equipment and names and experience of key personnel;
and documented examples of similar applications that have been in service for a minimum of 5 years.
4. The spray-on GRP lining installation shall be done by a subcontractor who is experienced and regularly
employed in GRP application work of this kind where the GRP lining components and overall process is
recommended by the materials manufacturer. The spray-on GRP lining process, manufacturer and
subcontractor are to be approved by the Engineer prior to start of the pumping structure work.
d. Coal Tar Epoxy. Coal tar epoxy shall meet the material and installation requirements as specified in Chapter 24,
Section 24.5, of the Standard Specifications.
12.18.3.7 GRP Ladders, Landings and Railings

Ladders shall meet the requirements of Article 12.3.2.8 and as per the details shown on the Contract plans and as
specified herein. In addition, where shown on the Contract plans, the tops of ladders shall be equipped with extended
Page 12-96
side rails to the top of the adjacent railing. The side rail shall be securely bracketed meeting the same requirements for
GRP pultruded type ladder and railing components as otherwise specified.
Ladder landings and interior safety railings shall be manufactured and assembled from pultruded GRP structural type
components as per the grating, structural components and railing systems as approved by the Engineer, and as per the
details shown on the Contract plans. The GRP components shall be manufactured using a reinforced vinylester resin,
utilizing an ultra-violet inhibitor in the resin rich surface layer. Gratings shall incorporate a continuous meniscus (or
bonded grit surface) moulded into the upper surface for skid resistance.
All ladders, landings, gratings, structural components and railings shall be securely fastened and braced for a solid
secure feeling installation, using all stainless steel hardware with drilled and epoxy type stainless steel threaded
concrete inserts for attachments to concrete and with vinylester resin GRP bolts and nuts (fiber bolts) for GRP
component to GRP component connections. Gratings shall be capable of supporting a 5 kN per square metre uniform
loading with a maximum deflection of 1/200 of the span width as per standard specification BS4592. GRP components
shall be a bright safety yellow or orange colour.
Each ladder fixing shall be capable of withstanding shear and pullout loads of 5000N.
GRP safety cages shall be as shown on the Contract plans and shall be manufactured in the same manner as GRP
ladders but without the hardwood core.
Safety cages shall be provided where the distance between the ladder landings exceeds 4.5m.
Safety cages shall be constructed of three flat vertical members supported by flat hoops with diameter of 750mm. The
hoops shall be at a maximum of 700mm centres and the first hoop shall be 2.4m above ground or platform level.
Each hoop shall be able to withstand a tangential point load of 740N and a vertical point load of 1200N applied at any
point on the hoop. The maximum allowable deflection at the point of application of the load shall not exceed 25mm
and there shall be no
A hand grab shall be installed on the concrete slab at the top of each ladder as shown on the Contract plans. The hand
grab shall consist of a 20 mm diameter stainless steel bar recessed into the surface of the top of the concrete cover
slabs securely bolted into the block-out recess using as a minimum two 12mm diameter stainless steel anchor bolts,
such that the top of the bar is flush with the concrete surfaces. The recess shall be sized for an easy and comfortable
hand grab around the mounted bar to assist with entries and exits from the ladder.
12.18.3.8 Stop Plank Grooves

The Contractor shall supply and install stop plank grooves at the locations shown on the Contract plans. The stop plank
grooves shall be designed to accommodate the stop planks specified in the Contract plans. The stop planks grooves
shall be manufactured as per the requirements of ASTM A-276 type 316 stainless steel and shall be either embedded
formed channel or embedded welded angles. The stop plank grooves shall be similar in design to those manufactured
by Waterman Industries, Inc. or an equivalent product as approved by the Engineer. The final dimensions and block
out dimensions shall be coordinated with the manufacturer, depending on maximum widths and water pressures. The
grooves shall be installed in the side walls and bottom slab where shown on the Contract plans.
12.18.3.9 Piping
Internal and external piping of pump stations shall meet the applicable requirements of Section 12.19 pressure pipe
lines, as shown on the Contract plans. Piping shall also follow hazard classifications per NFPA 820
12.18.3.10 Trash Racks

The trash racks (vertical orientated GRP composition grates) for pump protection shall be of the size, and installed at
the locations, as shown on the Contract plans. The trash racks shall consist of paralleling, vertical, GRP rectangular
bars, assembled such that the narrow edge of each bar, is perpendicular to the direction of flow. Trash racks shall be
fabricated from structural quality type components meeting the minimum requirements for pultruded type structural
fiberglass shapes as otherwise specified for GRP ladders in Article 12.3.2.8,. Each trash rack shall be constructed in
sections, sized for ease of handling, such that they can be removed or replaced through the available openings in the
structure slabs. The horizontal GRP cross-bracing for the grates shall have a center-to-center spacing of not less than
1/3 the horizontal clear span of each grate assembly. The maximum clear opening between the vertical bars shall not
exceed 65 millimeters. The total clear opening through the trash rack shall not be less than 0.5 square meters per
square meter of surface area.
The vertical bars, cross-bracing, and outside frame shall be sized, assembled and composed of approved GRP materials
such that when each section of trash rack is supported evenly on the two supported edges, the total deflection does not
Page 12-97
exceed 1.0%, when a uniform loading of 1,500 kilograms per square meter is applied in the same direction as the
primary water flow.
All outer surfaces of the GRP trash rack components shall be composed of a 2 mm thick approved vinylester resin with
at least two layers of c glass veil meeting 90 percent resin to 10 percent C glass ratio by weight, utilizing an ultra-
violet inhibitor.
Trash rack shall be installed in steel 316L guided channel, the channel shall be extended to roof and the trash rack shall
be with a steel chain for easy removal of trash rack. Roof slab at the location of trash rack shall be provided with a
solid cover or heavy duty grating. Ultrasonic level sensors shall be provided on both sides of trash rack for automatic
detection of percentage of dirt in the trash rack by analysing the water level.
The pumps shall be further protected by the installation of a stainless steel screen over the outside surface (surface
against the flow) of the trash racks. The screen shall be a heavy duty industrial grade 316L stainless steel mesh, 13mm
x 13mm square openings, securely fastened to a rigid frame. The frame shall also be constructed of stainless steel
angles or channel type components such that it can be fastened to the trash rack with the screen laying flat against the
surface of the GRP trash rack bars. The screen frame shall use stainless steel fasteners and clips such that the screen
can be easily removed and reinstalled for maintenance purposes. All stainless steel materials shall meet the
requirements of ASTM A-276, Type 316L, and be fabricated as per the requirements of Chapter 23, Section 23.5.14 of
these Standard Specifications, and as detailed on the Shop Drawings and as approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit detailed shop Drawings for the trash racks, which shall include detailed dimension and
attachment loading test certifications; details of screen, frame and mounting; details of mounting and hardware,
manufacturer name and address, and certifications of material compositions, for approval by the Engineer prior to
delivery to the site.
Chequered steel plates: are steel plates with rhombic shapes on the surface because of the rhombic shapes, the surface
of the plates are rough, which can be used as floor board, factory stair boards, deck board and car boards, etc.
Chequered steel plates are measured and represented by plate thickness, and thickness varies from 2.5mm to 8mm.
Chequered steel plates are made of #1-#3 common carbon steel; the chemical composition applies to GB 700 carbon
construction steel certificate and as per Chapter 1, Section 1.15.7 of these standard specifications.
Mechanical Screen Chamber Self-cleaning screen is a universal separator of insoluble solids from fluids. Usually it is
installed in the entry object of mechanical pre-treatment. The advantage of this device is the filtration belt self-cleaning
effect and the fact that it can be used in deep canals. Table 12-28 presents the mechanical self cleaning screen design
specifications and base on the rate of flow.
Table 12-28: Mechanical self cleaning screen design specifications and base on the rate of flow
Specifications
Rate of flow: Q 5 to 1700 l.s-1 (6120m3h-1)
Canal width: 350 to 2000 mm
Canal depth: 450 to 8000 mm
Slot width: 1, 3, 6, 10, 15 mm
Power input: 0,12 to 0,75 kW
Frame slope: α 60, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90°
Other parameter ranges need to be consulted with the manufacturer.
Mechanical Screen Chamber Self-cleaning screen is a universal separator of insoluble solids from fluids. Usually it is
installed behind the sand/gravel traps. The advantage of this device is the filtration belt self-cleaning effect and the fact
that it can be used in deep canals.
Manually cleaned bar screen design to remove large solids, rags, and debris. Opening size: 30 to 50 mm, Bars set at 30
to 45 degrees from vertical to facilities cleaning.
For the required sizes and materials and equipments of the screens, the contractor shall comply with the manufacturer
requirements and specifications. Owner approval is a must.
12.18.3.11 Stainless Steel Fabricated Penstock

The fabricated stainless steel penstock is a rectangular faced penstock shall be designed to meet the peak flow rates
and a nominal pressure rating of 10 bars which shall be marked on the valve body, and a liquid temperature of 500 C.
Page 12-98
1. The penstock design shall be designed to suit specific duty and aperture owner requirements.
2. Size Range 400mm2 up to 3000mm2.
3. Mounting
• Wall
• Channel
• Side wall
a. Material Specification
Open top and full frame are manufactured from stainless steel to BS EN10088: 1955 grades 1.4301 (304) or 1.4401
(316) (latest edition).
5. Door
Design for high impact whilst incorporating a lightweight single skin design with rib reinforcing manufactured in
stainless steel to BS EN10088: 1955 grades 1.4301 (304) or 1.4401 (316)
The number of reinforcing ribs will vary according to the specific duty and size requirements
6. Sealing Faces
The sealing arrangements combine the use of resilient and or synthetic materials. The seal between the frame and
the door is self adjusting double wiper type seal, which is mechanically fixed with a retaining strip.
7. Invert
A flush invert is utilised as standard on the fabricated stainless steel series (to ensure a smooth flow with a positive
seal and allowing complete drainage at the invert of the penstock.
The invert of the frame (where required) is positioned to align with the invert of the civil structure, therefore
eliminating any steps in the flow path and rendering itself cleaning.
8. Wedging / Pressure Pad Assembly

An adjustable wedging or pressure pad assembly shall be included within the design to accommodate specified
duties, wear in service and ensure a positive seal.
9. Spindle
Rising or non rising type shall be manufactured from stainless steel to BS EN10088: 1955 grades 1.4301 (304) or
1.4401 (316). Extension spindles are in the same material.
10. Frame Yoke

Frame yokes are fitted when thrust is required to be taken by the frame and positioned to allow removal of the door.
The yoke material is the same material as for the frame.
11. Fixing Bolts

Cab ne supplied when requested and shall be comply with manufactured requirements and approved by the owner.
12. Leakage Rates

The penstocks shall be designed and installed to allow minimal leakage and will always be lower than the allowable
leakage as detailed within BS 7775 (resilient sealing faces)
Maximum allowable leakage according to BS 7775:
For on – and off seating heads up to and including 6 meter – 0.5 litres per minute per meter at seal perimeter.
b. Installation
The proper installation of penstocks is of paramount importance to their performance and sealing abilities; therefore, the
installation of every penstock should always be carried out with instruction supplied with each unit.
Page 12-99
Full operating and maintenance instruction are also provided and shall be similarly observed.
12.18.3.12 Flange Adaptor

Flange adaptors shall be used on GRP, cast and ductile iron and stainless steel pipes to enable plain ended pipe to be
connected either to flanged pipe or to flanged valves or other fittings. Flange adaptor to be provided with flat mating
faces, suitable for bolting to raise faces. Flange adaptors shall be provided with SS 316 nuts and bolts. Flange adaptors
to suit pressure rating of the flange PN 16.
There are three types of flange adaptors:
a. Flange adaptors for PVC pipe: Flange adaptors join plain end PVC pipe to valves, fittings, pumps and virtually
all types of liquid and process equipments. The ductile iron flange provides a watertight rigid flange connection.
Flange Adaptors for PVC pipe shall be made of ASTM A356 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron. Drilling shall be done
in accordance with ANSI B 16.1-125lb. For cast and ductile iron flanges and ANSI B16.5-150lb. For steel
flanges. Flanges shall meet all the test requirements of AWWA C-900, ASTM D2241, ASTM D1599 and ASTM
D2992. The dual seal gasket shall be provided with the PVC flange adaptor.
b. Flange Coupling Adaptors for Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe: Flange coupling adaptors provide stress relieving
flexibility and ease of installation and alignment. They allow a quick means of cutting in flanged valves for
existing lines, and dampen vibration from tamping equipment.
Material specifications for flange coupling adaptors from Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe shall comply with the
following:
Flange Body shall be made from Ductile Iron shall meet ASTM A 536-80, Grade 65-45-12. AWWA Class D ,
C-207 with ANSI 150lb. Drilling
End Ring shall be made from Ductile Iron, meeting or exceeding ASTM A 536-80, Grade 65-45-12
Gaskets: Virgin SBR compounded for water and sewer service. Meets or exceeds ASTM D2000 3 BA715.
Flanged O - Ring Gasket shall be neoprene rubber.
Bolts and Nuts: Shall be high strength, low alloy steel, with heavy hex nuts. The steel used shall follow AWWA
C-11-80 composition specification.
c. Installation Flange coupling Adaptors GRP pipe shall meet BS EN 1092. And AWWA class D
Installation of the flange adaptors are used for field installations in lieu of standard threaded pipe flanges when the latter
are found to be impractical due to time and/or cost restraints.
Set screws are integral part of the adaptor to give restraint and prevent blow-off. The set screws should be tightened to
70ft.lbs torque.
Gaskets are mechanical joint type and are furnished with flange adaptor.
Flange adopters are 125 lbs faced and drilled.
12.18.3.13 Dismantling Joints

The Dismantling Joint is a double flanged fitting that allows longitudinal adjustment in flanged pipe systems. It
provides greater flexibility at both planning and installation stages of flanged piping system.
The Dismantling joint is particularly suitable for simplifying the installation and removal of:
a. Isolation valves
b. Non return valves
c. Flow metering equipment
d. Pump sets
e. Pressure reducing valves
f. Flanged pipe and fittings
Dismantling joints are designed and manufactured according to the BS EN ISO 9001:1994. DJ shall be coated with the
thermoplastic polymer Rilsan Nylon 11 as standard. Rilsan Nylon 11 shall meet and approved to the stringent
performance standards of WIS 4-52-01 (part 1) which requires the highest adhesion, flexibility, penetration and impact
resistance characteristics, ensuring that Dismantling Joints are well equipped to withstand transport, storage, site and
corrosion damage.
Page 12-100
Working Pressure: all the Dismantling Joints are fully end load resistance and a have pressure rating equal to that of the
flange.
The Dismantling joint can be installed with a spanner and a torque wrench. The Dismantling Joints shall be made and
fitted from EPDM grade E water quality gaskets and comply with BS EN 681-1:1996 standard.
All the materials related to the flange adopters and Dismantling Joints shall be agreed and approved with the Engineers.
Also, the pipe seals are manufactured to various international specifications such as BS: 2494 DIN: 4060, BS EN-681,
ASTM F 477, etc.
12.18.3.14 Multi-Turn Electric Actuators

The actuators shall be suitable for use on a nominal _volt, _ phase, _Hz power supply and are to incorporate motor,
integral reversing starter, local control facilities and terminals for remote control and indication connections housed
within a self contained, sealed enclosure.
As a minimum the actuators should meet the requirements set out in EN15714-2 and ISA SP96.02
In order to maintain the integrity of the enclosure, setting of the torque levels, position limits and configuration of the
indication contacts etc. shall be carried out without the removal of any actuator covers and without mains power over an
Infra red or Bluetooth® wireless interface. Sufficient commissioning tools shall be provided with the actuators and must
meet the enclosure protection and certification levels of the actuators. Commissioning tools shall not form an integral
part of the actuator and must be removable for secure storage / authorised release. In addition, provision shall be made
for the protection of configured actuator settings by a means independent of access to the commissioning tool. Provision
shall be made to disable Bluetooth® communications or only allow a Bluetooth® connection initiated by an Infra-Red
command for maximum security.
The actuator shall include a device to ensure that the motor runs with the correct rotation for the required direction of
valve travel irrespective of the connection sequence of the power supply.
a. Actuator Sizing
The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified differential pressure and temperature. The safety
margin of motor power available for seating and unseating the valve shall be sufficient to ensure torque switch trip at
maximum valve torque with the supply voltage 10% below nominal. For linear operating valves, the operating speed
shall be such as to give valve closing and opening at approximately 10-12 inches per minute unless otherwise stated in
the data sheet. For 90° valve types the operating time will be specified.
b. Environmental
Actuators shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use. The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient
temperature ranging from -33°C (22°F) to 70°C (140°F), up to 100% relative humidity. Actuators for hazardous area
applications shall meet the area classification, gas group and surface temperature requirements specified in data sheet.
c. Enclosure
Actuators shall be o-ring sealed, watertight to IP66/IP68 7m for 72hrs, NEMA 4, 6. The motor and all other internal
electrical elements of the actuator shall be protected from ingress of moisture and dust when the terminal cover is
removed for site for cabling, the terminal compartment having the same ingress protection rating as the actuator with
the terminal cover removed.
Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply connection.
All external fasteners shall be plated stainless steel. The use of un-plated stainless steel or steel fasteners is not
permitted.
d. Motor
The motor shall an integral part of the actuator, designed specifically for valve actuator applications. It shall be a low
inertia high torque design, class F insulated with a class B temperature rise giving a time rating of 15 minutes at 40°C
(104°F) at an average load of at least 33% of maximum valve torque. Temperature shall be limited by 2 thermostats
embedded in the motor end windings and integrated into its control.
Electrical and mechanical disconnection of the motor should be possible without draining the lubricant from the
actuator gearcas
Page 12-101
e. Motor Protection
Protection shall be provided for the motor as follows:
• Stall - the motor shall be de-energized within 8 seconds in the event of a stall when attempting to unseat a
jammed valve.
• Over temperature - thermostat will cause tripping of the motor. Auto-reset on cooling
• Single phasing - lost phase protection.
• Direction – phase rotation correction.
f. Gearing
The actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in a oil-filled gear case suitable for operation at any angle. Grease
lubrication is not permissible. All drive gearing and components must be of metal construction and incorporate a lost-
motion hammer blow feature. For rising spindle valves the output shaft shall be hollow to accept a rising stem, and
incorporate thrust bearings of the ball or roller type at the base of the actuator. The design should be such as to permit
the opening of the gear case for inspection or disassembled without releasing the stem thrust or taking the valve out of
service. For 90° operating type of valves drive gearing shall be self locking to prevent the valve back-driving the
actuator.
g. Hand Operation
A handwheel shall be provided for emergency operation, engaged when the motor is declutched by a lever or similar
means, the drive being restored to electrical operation automatically by starting the motor. The hand wheel or selection
lever shall not move on restoration of motor drive. Provision shall be made for the hand/auto selection lever to be
locked in both hand and auto positions. It should be possible to select hand operation while the actuator is running or
start the actuator motor while the hand/auto selection lever is locked in hand without damage to the drive train.
Clockwise operation of the hand wheel shall give closing movement of the valve unless otherwise stated in the data
sheet. For linear valve types the actuator hand wheel drive must be mechanically independent of the motor drive and
should be such as to permit valve operation in a reasonable time with a manual force not exceeding 400N through
stroke and 800N for seating/unseating of the valve.
h. Drive Interface
The actuator shall be furnished with a drive bushing easily detachable for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox
input shaft. The drive bush shall be positioned in a detachable base of the actuator. Thrust bearings shall be sealed for
life and the base shall be capable of withstanding five times the rated thrust of the actuator.
i. Local Controls
The actuator shall incorporate local controls for Open, Close and Stop and a Local/Stop/Remote mode selector switch
lockable in any one of the following three positions: local control only, stop (no electrical operation), remote control
plus local stop only. It shall be possible to select maintained or non-maintained local control.
The local controls shall be arranged so that the direction of valve travel can be reversed without the necessity of
stopping the actuator.
The local controls and display shall be rotatable through increments of 90 degrees to suit valve and actuator orientation.
j. Torque and Limits

Torque and turns limitation to be adjustable as follows:
• Position setting range – multi-turn: 2.5 to 8,000 turns, with resolution to 7.5 deg. of actuator output.
• Position setting range – direct drive part turn actuators: 90° +/-10°, with resolution to 0.1 deg. of actuator output.
• Torque setting: 40% to 100% rated torque.
Position measurement – Absolute position measurement should be incorporated within the actuator. The technology
must be capable of reliably measuring position even in the case of a single fault. The design must be simple with the
minimum amount of moving parts (no more than 5). Technologies such as LEDs or potentiometers for position
measurement are considered unreliable and therefore not preferred.
Measurement of torque shall be from direct measurement of force at the output of the actuator. Methods of determining
Page 12-102
torque-using data derived from the motor such as motor speed, current, flux etc are not acceptable
A means for automatic torque switch bypass to inhibit torque off during valve unseating and latching to prevent torque
switch hammer under maintained or repeated control signals shall be provided.
The electrical circuit diagram of the actuator should not vary with valve type remaining identical regardless of whether
the valve is to open or close on torque or position limit.
k. Remote Valve Position and Status Indication

Four contacts shall be provided which can be selected to indicate any position of the valve; Provision shall be made for
the selection of a normally closed or open contact form. Contacts shall maintain and update position indication during
handwheel operation when all external power to the actuator is isolated.
The contacts shall be rated for 5mA to 5A, 120V AC, 30V DC.
As an alternative to providing valve position indication any of the four above contacts shall be selectable to signal one
of the following:
• Valve opening, closing or moving
• Thermostat tripped, lost phase
• Motor tripped on torque in mid travel, motor stalled
• Remote selected
• Actuator being operated by handwheel
• Actuator fault
Provision shall be made in the design for an additional eight contacts having the same functionality.
A configurable monitor relay shall be provided as standard, which can be used to indicate either Availability or Fault.
The relay should be a spring return type with a Normally Open / Normally Closed contact pre-wired to the terminal
bung.
The Monitor (availability or fault) relay, being energized from the control transformer will de-energise under any one or
more the following conditions:
Available Mode Fault Mode
• Loss of main or customer 24V DC power supply • Loss of main or customer 24V DC power supply
• Actuator control selected to local or stop • Motor thermostat tripped
• Motor thermostat tripped • Actuator internal fault
• Actuator internal fault
Provision shall be made in the design for the addition of a contactless transmitter to give a 4-20mA analogue signal
corresponding to valve travel and / or torque for remote indication when required. The transmitter will auto range to the
set limits
l. Local Position Indication

The actuator display shall include a dedicated numeric/symbol digital position indicator displaying valve position from
fully open to fully close in 0.1% increments. Valve closed and open positions shall be indicated by symbols showing
valve position in relation to the pipework to ensure that valve status is clearly interpreted. With mains power connected,
the display shall be backlit to enhance contrast at all ambient light levels and shall be legible from a distance of at least
5m (16ft).
Red, green, and yellow LEDs corresponding to open closed and intermediate valve positions shall be included on the
actuator display when power is switched on. The yellow LED should also be fully programmable for on/off, blinker and
fault indication. The digital display shall be maintained and updated during handwheel operation when mains power to
the actuator is isolated.
The actuator display shall include a fully configurable dot-matrix display element with a minimum pixel resolution of
168 x 132 to display operational, alarm, configuration and graphical data logger information. The text display shall be
selectable between English and other languages such as: Spanish, German, French, and Italian. Provision shall be made
to upload a different language without removal of any covers or using specialized tools not provided as standard with
the actuator.
Page 12-103
Data logger graphical displays should as a minimum be able to display log and trend graphs on the local LCD for the
following:
• Torque versus Position
• Number of Starts versus Position
• Number of starts per hour
• Dwell Time
• Average temperature
The main display shall be capable of indicating 4 different home-screens of the following configuration:
• Position and status
• Position and torque (analogue)
• Position and torque (digital)
• Position and demand (positioning)
Provision shall be made for the addition of an optional environmental cover to protect the display from high levels of
UV radiation or abrasive materials.
The local controls and display shall be rotatable through increments of 90 degrees to suit valve and actuator orientation.
m. Integral Starter and Transformer

The reversing starter, control transformer and local controls shall be integral with the valve actuator, suitably housed to
prevent breathing and condensation. The starter shall be suitable for 60 starts per hour and of rating appropriate to
motor size. The controls supply transformer shall be fed from two of the incoming three phases and incorporate
overload protection. It shall have the necessary tapping and be adequately rated to provide power for the following
functions:
• Energising of the contactor coils.
• 24V DC or 110V AC output for remote controls (maximum 5W/VA)
• Supply for all the internal electrical circuits.
n. Remote Control Facilities

The necessary control, wiring and terminals shall be provided integral to the actuator enclosure. Open and close external
interlocks shall be made available to inhibit local and remote valve opening / closing control. It shall be possible to
configure the interlocks to be active in remote control only.
Remote control signals fed from an internal 24V DC (or 110VAC) supply and/or from an external supply between 20V
and 60 VDC or 40V and 120VAC, to be suitable for any one or more of the following methods of control:
• Open, Close and Stop control.
• Open and Close maintained or push to run (inching) control.
• Overriding Emergency Shut-down to close (or open) valve from a normally closed or open contact.
• Two-wire control, energise to close (or open), de-energise to open (or close).
Additionally provision shall be made for a separate ‘drive enable’ input to prevent any unwanted electrical operation.
It shall be possible to reverse valve travel without the necessity of stopping the actuator. The motor starter shall be
protected from excessive current surges during rapid travel reversal. The internal circuits associated with the remote
control and monitoring functions are to be designed to withstand simulated lightning impulses of up to 2kV.
Provision shall be made for operation by distributed control system utilising the following network systems:
• Profibus
• Modbus
• Foundation Fieldbus
• Pakscan (wired and wireless)
• HART
Page 12-104
o. Monitoring Facilities
Facilities shall be provided for monitoring actuator operation and availability as follows:
Actuator text display indication of the following status/alarms:
• Closed Limit, open limit, moving open, moving closed, stopped
• Torque trip closing, torque trip opening, stalled
• ESD active, interlock active
• Thermostat trip, phase lost, 24V supply lost, Local control failure
• Configuration error, Position sensor failure, Torque sensor failure
• Battery low, power loss inhibit
Integral datalogger to record and store the following operational data:
• Opening last /average torque against position
• Closing last /average torque against position
• Opening motor starts against position
• Closing motor starts against position
• Total open/closed operations
• Maximum recorded opening and closing torque values
• Event recorder logging operational conditions (valve, control and actuator)
The datalogger shall record relevant time and date information for stored data.
Datalogger data shall be accessed via non-intrusive Bluetooth® communication and data displayed on the local LCD.
Sufficient standard intrinsically safe tools shall be provided for downloading datalogger and actuator configuration files
from the actuators and subsequent uploading to a PC. The actuator manufacturer shall supply PC software to enable
datalogger files to be viewed and analysed.
p. Wiring and Termination

Internal wiring shall be tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for the control and 3-phase
power. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end. The terminals shall be embedded in a terminal block of high
tracking resistance compound.
The terminal compartment shall be separated from the inner electrical components of the actuator by means of a
watertight seal and shall be provided with a minimum of 3 threaded cable entries with provision for an additional 5
extra conduit entries.
All wiring supplied as part of the actuator to be contained within the main enclosure for physical and environmental
protection. External conduit connections between components are not acceptable. A durable terminal identification card
showing a plan of terminals shall be provided attached to the inside of the terminal box cover indicating:
• Serial number
• External voltage values
• Wiring diagram number
• Terminal layout
The code card shall be suitable for the contractor to inscribe cable core identification alongside terminal numbers.
q. Commissioning Kit
Each actuator shall be supplied with a start-up kit comprising installation instruction manual, electrical wiring diagram
and cover seals to make good any site losses during the commissioning period. In addition, sufficient actuator
commissioning tools shall be supplied to enable actuator set up and adjustment during valve/actuator testing and site
installation commissioning.
Page 12-105
r. Performance and Test Certificate

Each actuator must be performance tested and individual test certificates shall be supplied free of charge. The test
equipment should simulate a typical valve load, and the following parameters should be recorded.
• Current at maximum torque setting
• Torque at max. torque setting
• Flash test voltage
• Actuator output speed or operating time.
In addition, the test certificate should record details of specification such as gear ratios for both manual and automatic
and second stage gearing if provided, drive closing direction, wiring diagram number.
12.18.3.15 Security fencing

Security fencing shall be a vinyl coated chain link type wire fencing meeting the requirements of Chapter 7, Article
7.7.2.1 of these standard specifications and as shown on the Contract plans, and as approved by the Engineer.
This work furnishes, installs, repairs, and replaces fences and gates, complete with hardware and appurtenances, as
shown on the Contract plans, as specified herein, and as approved by the Engineer. Types and height of fencing shall be
shown on the Contract plans. These types include the following:
• Chain-link fence, including vinyl coated chain link.
• Glare screen
• Wire fence, which may be barbed wire or include woven wire
• Temporary fence
• Sand fence
For more details on the material and standard specification refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.7.2 Table 7-36 of these
12.18.3.16 Metal Railing

Metal railings shall be of the material type, size, coatings and fabrication as indicated on the Contract plans and Chapter
27 of these standard specifications. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract plans, all anchors embedded in concrete
and fasteners shall be stainless steel. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract plans railings shall be manufactured from
aluminium as per the following requirements:
1. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval detailed shop drawings in accordance with Section 12.1.3 of
these standard specifications, Shop drawing submittals. Accompanying the shop drawings the Contractor shall
submit color samples on typical shapes for approval by the Engineer as well as certificates that the color finish
meets Specification requirements.
2. Aluminium members for railing shall be solid, sized, and formed as indicated on the shop drawings. Aluminium
shall comply with the values stated in ASTM B221 and B209. Bar shapes shall be square cornered, extruded
alloy 6061-T6511 and/or 6063-T5. Aluminium plate shall be alloy 6061-T651. Aluminium welding alloy shall
be the type best suited, and as recommended by the aluminium manufacturer.
3. All base plate fastening hardware shall be stainless steel. Bolts shall comply with ASTM A193 (, Grade B8,
Class 2; nuts shall comply with ASTM A194, Grade 8; and flat washers with ASTM A240, Type 302.
4. Railing members shall be fabricated with eased or rounded corners unless otherwise shown on the Contract
plans. Bending shall be performed hot or cold as necessary to produce the radii shown. All assemblies shall be
made by full welding in accordance with American Welding Society standards, with welds finished smooth and
flush with adjacent surfaces. Aluminium infill plate members shall be finished as indicated on the Contract plans
or as per ASTM B221 , and as approved by the Engineer, from samples to be submitted by the Contractor.
Railing posts and balusters shall be at a right angle to the top and bottom railing members unless otherwise
indicated on the Contract plans.
5. After complete fabrication, the railing units shall be factory chemically pre-treated, and then receive a thermo-
cured inhibitive primer, then a factory applied fluoropolymer resin color coating complying with the
requirements of U.S. Architectural Aluminium Manufacturers Association, AAMA Specification No. 605.2,
Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels, followed by a
Page 12-106
clear, transparent protective topcoat. Finish colour coating shall be matte finish and shall match the Aluminium
Association dark bronze anodized finish colour.
6. Galvanized metal railing shall be of the size and fabrication as indicated on the Contract plans and comply with
the requirements of Chapter 27, Railings, of the Standard Specification. Unless otherwise indicated on the
Contract plans, all anchors embedded in concrete and fasteners shall be stainless steel.
7. All railings shall be suitably prepared and hot dipped galvanized after assembly, in accordance with the
requirements of Chapter 27 of these Standard Specifications.
12.18.3.17 Concrete Pile Foundations

All concrete piles shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 17, of the Standard Specifications, and as indicated
on the Contract plans, and as directed by the Engineer.
12.18.3.18 Lighting
Lighting for exterior and interior areas of pump stations shall meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 10 of these
standard specifications and as shown on the Contract plans. Lighting shall also follow hazard classifications per NFPA
820.
12.18.3.19 Paving and Kerbs

Pavement and kerbs for pump stations shall meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 3 and Chapter 7 of these
standard specifications, and as shown on the Contract plans.
12.18.4 Pumps and Controls

12.18.4.1 Operating Environment
Equipment shall be suitable for use with the following environment and service conditions:
1. Humidity is 100 % for extended periods at maximum ambient temperatures.
2. Saliferous atmosphere
3. Liquids to be pumped may be salty, brackish ground water and storm runoff containing large quantities of sand,
rock flour, road oils, and other miscellaneous debris.
4. Maximum peak ambient shade temperature is 50° C.
5. Maximum average ambient shade temperature for 24 hours is 45° C.
6. Minimum ambient temperature is 73° C.
7. Maximum temperature of metal surfaces in direct sunlight is 80° C.
8. Maximum 24-hour average temperature of liquid to be pumped is approximately 37° C.
9. Maximum wind velocity is 125 km/hr.
10. Soils corrosive with common sulphate reducing bacteria. Concrete and metals may be subject to extreme
corrosive effects, whether in contact with soil, air or water depending on the pump station location with Abu
Dhabi Emirate
11. Electrical power available is 400/230 volts, 3 phase (4 wires), 50-Hertz (Hz) frequency with a design fault level
of 31 mVA and a solidly earthed grounding system.
12.18.4.2 Pumps
Pumps shall be of two types, electrical submersible, F impeller type for low flow application and electrical,
submersible, axial flow, propeller type pumps for high flow application.
Pumps shall be of the type, size and capacity as shown on the Contract plans and as approved by the owner.
Pumps shall be designed for a working life of 100,000 hours with over hauls at not greater than 20,000 hour intervals.
Pumps shall be selected to give non-overloading characteristic and with a duty point within 10% of the best efficiency
achievable. Pump motors shall be derated for a liquid temperature of 37° C.
Page 12-107
a. Axial Flow Pumps

The driving motor of axial flow pump shall be suitable for operation with available electric power source, otherwise
described, being a squirrel cage type dynamically balanced, with stator windings arranged for star delta starting when
applicable. The motor chamber shall be sealed from ingress of water medium, being fully submersible. The motor shall
be protected by a moisture sensor controlled through the control panel. There shall be an oil chamber between the
hydraulic parts and the electric motor. The motors shall be suitable for full or partial submersion in the liquid to be
pumped and the complete motor/pump unit shall be water, oil and heat resistant. The stator winding shall be insulated
against heat and humidity and shall incorporate thermal protection devices connected through the control panel.
Two back to back mechanical seals shall be provided, the upper seal being lubricated via an oil reservoir. The upper
seal shall be from carbon, carbon tungstide while both parts of the lower seal shall be from carbon tungstide. The oil
reservoir shall be provided with a moisture detector to indicate an alarm on seal wear or failure. Motor leakage
detection shall be provided via a moisture detector in the enclosure above the upper bearing.
Each pump shall operate at slow speeds, at 720-rpm optimum, but in no case shall they operate at a greater speed than
1500 rpm, and shall be capable of operating continuously when only partially submerged without overheating or
overloading. The cooling system shall be self operated. The motor shaft shall be of stainless steel (ASTM A276 UNS
32760), supported by self-lubricating or lubricated for life type ball bearings of suitable type capable of supporting axial
thrust for the drive involved. Each bearing shall be provided with overheat protection. The following materials shall be
used for the pump/motor units unless otherwise approved by the Engineer:
Pump and motor casing, impeller, Propeller, wear ring, duck foot bend.
Duplex stainless steel to ASTM A351 UNS J93380 with RRE number not less than 40.
Screws, bolts, nuts, washers, cable sealing glands, lifting straps, and other hardware shall be Stainless steel ASTM
A276, Type 316L
Upper bearings greased for life expectancy of pump and motor
Upper mechanical seal: Oil lubricated, carbon, Carbon tungstide
Lower mechanical seal: Carbon tungstide, carbon tungstide
All parts of the installation that come into contact with water shall be totally resistant to corrosion under operating
conditions. The motors shall be manufactured in accordance with NFC 51.111 standard. Insulation shall be class F with
protection to IP-68. Guide rails, discharge stools, clamps, supports, brackets, hardware, chains, shackles and other
accessories shall be manufactured from stainless steel grade 316L.
Pumps shall be tested at the manufacturer’s works before delivery. Test Certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer
prior to any deliveries. Pump shall be tested in accordance with ISO 2548, class C or to BS 5316, part 1, class ‘C’,
Annex ‘B’, as approved by the Engineer. Testing shall also meet the requirements as otherwise herein specified.
The Contractor shall install all pumps, mounting equipment, lifting chains, hardware, fittings, wiring, fixings, brackets,
guide rails, mounting stools, discharge pipes, valves and other necessary items after the structural work has been
completed and approved. Concrete structural blockouts shall be incorporated for the epoxy mortar placement of covers,
pipes and fittings into the finished structure. All installation work shall be done as per the approved shop Contract plans
or as directed by the Engineer, meeting all Subcontractors recommended clearances and dimensions for proper
operation of the equipment. The Contractor shall follow manufacturer’s recommendations for installation procedures,
and as approved by the Engineer. The access covers shall be aligned and checked such that the pumps can be removed
with adequate clearance on a vertical lift.
The axial flow propeller pumps shall be installed in a vertical discharge chimney composed of a GRP pipe, encased in
reinforced concrete as part of the pumping structure, as shown on the Contract plans, Shop drawings, and approved by
the Engineer The top of the GRP pipe discharge chimney shall be flanged with a bolt-on rubber gasket cover for leak
proof sealing against the pumping pressure. On the back side of the GRP flange a stainless steel ring shall be moulded
to the GRP flange, with the stainless steel cover bolts welded to be backing ring such that hold down nuts can be easily
removed and replaced for removal of the cover when removing the pump for maintenance and inspection purposes.
Pump power and protection cables shall be installed through a separate removable plate (gland plate) being part of the
pump chimney sealing cover using threaded, non-corrosive, sealing glands as shown on the Contract plans such that the
axial flow pump can be easily removed from the pump chimney with the cables being disconnected from waterproof
type decontactors located within the top slab recess around the top of the pump chimney, accessible from under the
upper slab covers. Two extra pump chimney sealing covers and four extra separate removable gland plates with cable
sealing glands and all seals shall be supplied. The pump lifting chain shall be shackled to a stainless steel anchor bolt
with eye mounted near the top of the discharge chimney properly sealed for a watertight seal. The anchor bolt and eye
(eye bolt with shackle) shall be mounted in a recessed area such that it is clear for pump removal. The power cables
shall be strapped to the lifting chain and looped to fit over the anchor bolt shackle such that the chain and cable are held
Page 12-108
tight within the chimney. The bottom of the discharge chimney shall be equipped with a stainless steel plate, which acts
as a sealing plate (bearing surface) for the axial flow pump. The sealing plate shall be fabricated and installed as shown
on the Contract plans. The sealing plate arrangement has been designed to fit specific pump manufacturer requirements.
If alternate sealing configurations are required to match a particular approved pump manufacture then details for this
alternate ring shall be shown on the shop drawings.
The discharge chimney GRP liner and connection flange for the discharge pipe connection shall be pre-fabricated by the
GRP manufacturer prior to installation, meeting the requirements for GRP pipes as otherwise specified. The axial flow
pump discharge pipe shall be equipped with a vacuum release valve located in the dry well valve chamber.
Axial flow pumps shall be closely coupled to the electric motor, fully submersible and supported within the concrete
(GRP lined) discharge chimney by resting, by its own weight, on a supporting ring sealed by use of a gasket. Propellers
shall be capable of adjustable pitch or solidly mounted which in either case shall be preset at the factory, to closely
match required head/flow relationships for each site. The pump shall be complete including lifting chain, shackles,
wiring, and lubrication and seals ready for installation and operation.
b. Mixed Flow Pumps

The pumps shall be capable of handling raw, untreated stormwater. The discharge connection elbow shall be
permanently installed in the wet well along with the discharge piping. The pumps shall be automatically connected into
place, and shall be easily removed for inspection or service. There shall be no need for personnel to enter the pump
well. Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection elbow shall be accomplished by a simple linear
downward motion of the pump. A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the pump unit. The entire weight of
the pump unit shall be guided by two guide rails and pressed tightly against the discharge connection. No portion of the
pump shall bear directly on the floor of the pit.
Guide rails shall be standard weight Type 316L stainless steel pipe of the size recommended by the pump manufacturer
and as approved by the Engineer. The guide rails shall not support any portion of the weight of the pump when it is in
the operating position. The guide rails shall be provided with a cone at the top to allow easy positioning of the pump.
Each pump shall be provided with stainless steel 316L lifting chains. The chains shall have collars at 1.2 metre intervals
to assist in raising the pump.
All submersed parts of the pump shall be of duplex stainless steel, AISI Ref. 1.4517. O-rings shall be made of nitride
coated material. Pumps shall be designed so as to allow reverse rotation, without damage to any components. The pump
motor shall be squirrel cage, induction, and shell type design, housed in an air-filled, watertight chamber. The pump
shall be designed to meet the requirements of IP-68. The motor shall be provided with Class F insulation and be
designed for continuous duty. Pump motor shall be explosion proof in accordance with NFPA standards and ADCD
requirements. The junction chamber, containing the terminal board, shall be sealed from the motor by elastomeric
compression seal (O-ring). Connection between the cable conductors and motor leads shall be leak proof. Each unit
shall be provided with an adequately designed cooling system. Thermal sensors shall be used to monitor motor
temperatures. The stator shall be equipped with three (3) thermal switches, embedded in the end coils of the stator
winding (one switch in each motor phase). These shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to the external
motor overload protection and wired to the control panel.
The installed thermal sensor cable shall be suitable for submersible pump application with P122-MSHA approval. This
shall be indicated by a code or legend permanently embossed on the cable. Cable sizing shall comply with NEC
Specifications. Cable shall be of sufficient length to connect to the external junction box without splicing.
Pump shaft shall be of stainless steel, AISI Ref. 1.4462. Each pump shall be provided with a tandem
mechanical rotating shaft seal system. The lower seal unit, between the pump and oil chamber, shall contain one
stationary and one positively driven rotating tungsten carbide ring. The upper seal unit, between the oil pump and motor
housing, shall contain one stationary carbon and one positively driven rotating ceramic ring. The seals shall require
neither maintenance nor adjustment, but shall be easily inspected and replaced.
Each pump shall be provided with two conductivity probes to monitor the moisture content of the oil in the chamber
between the lower and upper mechanical seals. The probes shall be wired to a separate protective circuit which, when
connected to a conductivity sensitive relay in the control panel will activate a visual alarm, which shall remain on until
re-set by the service Engineer. The pump will not trip due to a moisture alarm.
The pump shaft shall rotate on two (2) totally sealed permanently lubricated bearings. The upper bearing shall be a
single row deep groove ball bearing and the lower bearing a two-row angular ball bearing. The impeller shall be of
Duplex Stainless Steel to BS standard AISI grade 1.4517 dynamically balanced, single channel non-clogging design
with a solid-handling capability of 70 x 70mm. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft. The volute shall be of single
piece design and shall have smooth fluid passages large enough at all points to pass any size solid which can pass
through the impeller. A wear ring system shall be installed to provide efficient sealing between the volute and
impeller. The pump motor cable shall be suitable for submersible pump application with P122-MSHA approval. This
Page 12-109
shall be indicated by a code or legend permanently embossed on the cable. Cable sizing shall comply with NEC
Specification for pump motors and ADDC standards. The pump shall be provided with a 3-core motor cable of
sufficient length to connect to the junction box without splicing. The pump motor cable end shall be provided with a
415 volt, 3 pole, isolator.r Specifications.
The Contractor shall install all pumps, mounting equipment, lifting chains, hardware, fittings, wiring, fixings, brackets,
guide rails, mounting stools, discharge pipes, valves and other necessary items after the structural work has been
completed and approved. Concrete structural blackouts shall be incorporated for the epoxy mortar placement of covers,
pipes and fittings into the finished structure. All installation work shall be done as per the approved shop drawings or as
directed by the Engineer, Contractor shall follow manufacturer’s recommendations for installation procedures, and as
approved by the Engineer. The access covers shall be aligned and checked such that the pumps can be removed with
adequate clearance on a vertical lift.
12.18.4.3 Control
All control panels/cabinets shall be manufactured to IP-54, form 4b modular construction in accordance with the IEC
Standards. They shall include, in general, power-on lights, run and trip lights, HAO selector switches, duty selector
switches, door interlocked isolator, line and control circuit fuses, and all the necessary internal and interconnecting
wiring, relays, and contactors as required according to the sequence of controls. Indicating lamps shall be provided to
denote normal and alarm conditions for all equipment.
12.18.4.4 Enclosure
All panels shall be in the form of cubicles, which shall be drip-proof and fully tropicalized. The panels shall be
fabricated steel construction, 2.0mm minimum thickness. Hinged doors shall be provided and arranged to lie flat back
and not restrict access to the apparatus contained within the panel. Hinged doors shall be of the lift-off type, secured
with integral handles and shall be flush fitting and sealed with a gasket of rubber or other approved material to prevent
the ingress of dust. Before painting, metal parts shall be thoroughly cleaned free from rust, scale, burrs, grease, and
moisture. The following minimum painting requirements shall apply to all surfaces and ferrous parts unless the
Contractor can show, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that any alternative he proposes is in all respects equal or
superior to the specified requirements.
a. One priming coat of corrosion-inhibiting paint applied immediately after cleaning.
b. Two coats of no glossy, weather-resistant paint.
c. One finishing coat of glossy, weather-resistant nonfading paint to external surfaces.
d. One finishing coat of matt-white, weather-resistant, no fading paint to all internal surfaces.
External colours shall be to the approval of the Engineer. All exposed screws, bolts, or other fixings shall have rounded
heads with protective and decorative plating. After erection at site is completed, all external surfaces shall be cleaned
and all defects in the previous painting shall be made good to the approval of the Engineer. An approved locking device
for the panel shall be provided. All locks shall be provided with two identical keys. It shall not be possible to open any
lock with the key of any other lock provided under this Contract. Keys and locks shall be impressed with the
manufacturer’s serial number.
Internal wiring shall be colour-coded and, in general, shall be bunched and run on trays or in purpose-made slotted
plastic cable trunking. Positive fixing of cable ends shall be ensured by crimped cable tags or other approved
terminations. Each cable end shall be permanently identified. Fuses shall be grouped and mounted so as to be readily
accessible without danger. Fuses, terminal blocks, and all items of equipment shall be readily identified by means of
clearly visible labels secured to them by screws. For each electric motor of 3.5 kW and above, an ammeter shall be
provided.
All items on the outside face of the panel shall be identified by means of white laminated plastic labels engraved with
black letters and attached by screws. Attachment by adhesive of any description will not be permitted. Motor starters
shall be provided in accordance with Article 12.18.4.5. Low voltage motor circuits shall be controlled by a contactor
starter and an individual set of HRC fuses. The contactor shall be the normal means of stopping and starting the motor.
Each contactor starter shall be fitted with an isolating switch to provide isolation for maintenance and disconnection in
the event of welded contacts under stalled motor conditions. The contactors shall comply with IEC 158-1 (1970) and be
capable of dealing with normal and fault conditions.
Interlocks shall be provided to ensure that the unit access door can only be opened when the associated contactor is
opened and the contactor cannot be closed in the service position until the access door is closed. Auxiliary contacts for
remote interlocking and indication shall be fitted in each individual contactor starter. Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs)
used shall be rated at 10 kA minimum. Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) shall be rated at |35| kA minimum and
Page 12-110
be provided with ON, OFF and TRIP positions. Complete details of the panel and the control wiring diagrams shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
For panels assembled locally, the Engineer reserves the right to inspect the manufacturer’s workshop and equipment
before approving the manufacturer and from time to time during the construction to satisfy him that the best
workmanship is being employed.
12.18.4.5 Motor Starters

The motor starter shall be of rating to carry the full load current of its rated duty at its most severe load conditions. All
starters shall be capable of at least 20 starts per hour at 100 percent full load torque.
a. Motors and Starters

1. Motors up to 2.2kW (3 HP) shall use the following starting method:
i. DOL starting having a starting current no greater than 6 times full load current (FLC).
a) Motors bigger than 2.2kW (3 HP) and up to 10kW (13.5 HP) shall have their starting current restricted
to 4 times FLC and shall use one of the following starting methods: -
b) Solid state reduced voltage starting (SOFT) having torque characteristic suitable for the application.
c) Rotor resistance starting.
d) Auto-transformer staring.
e) Star-delta starting.
2. Motors bigger than 10kW (13.5 HP) shall have their starting current restricted to 2.5 times FLC and shall use
one of the following starting methods:
i. Solid state reduced voltage starting (SOFT) having torque characteristic suitable for the application.
3. Starter Types: Starters shall be selected from one of the following types:
i. Direct On Line (DOL). TP contactor for switching direct-on-line (DOL) in accordance with BS EN
60947-4 and fitted with auxiliary contacts.
ii. Auto Transformer. For autotransformer starting, magnetically operated starting accelerating and running
contactors shall be provided operating under solid state or electronic timing devices. The autotransformer
shall limit the starting current to 4 times full load current (FLC) with 60 percent, 70 percent and 80
percent tapping.
iii. Soft Reduced Voltage starting ('soft' starting)
a) For Solid State Reduced voltage starting a micro-processor based electronic logic module shall be
provided with 3 pole, 6 thyristor (SCR) full wave power section together with the following features: -
• Turn on current adjustment - 100 to 400% FLC.
• Pulse start adjustment - 0 to 2 seconds.
• Adjustable current ramp time - 2 to 30 seconds.
• Starting current limit adjustment - 100 to 400% FLC
• Over temperature protection.
• Fan assisted cooling above 11 kW.
b) The starter shall be provided with two sets of contactors, one of which shall bypass the soft starter
when the motor has reached full speed. Sufficient logic and relays shall be provided to achieve this
without high transients and to prevent contactor flutter.
c) A membrane key pad and display shall be provided to adjust all the above parameters, and also
capable of inputting trip states to check the operation of the contactors and soft starter.
iv. Star-Delta Starting (∆Y)
a. Star-delta starters shall be provided with contactors as for DOL starters, arranged in such a
manner to ensure the star contactor opens before the delta contactor closes.
b. The period of running in star and the transition time shall be controlled by adjustable solid-
Page 12-111
state type timers.

c. For closed transition type star-delta starters, further requirements shall be wire wound
porcelain core resister banks of sufficient thermal rating to allow three (3) consecutive starts
of 30 seconds starting period followed by a 15 minutes rest and another 30 seconds starting
period. Resistance value shall be chosen to give high starting current with low transient.
Starter cubicles incorporating resistor banks shall be well ventilated with vermin proof and
dust ventilation louvers.
b. Accessories
1. Contactors shall be selected for AC3 duty (AC-Load category). The duty current shall be at the midpoint of the
operating range of the contactor.
2. Motors will be required to operate in a predetermined sequence and starters shall include suitably rated
auxiliary contacts/relays.
3. Components of the starter shall have been type tested and ASTA certified to achieve Type 2 co-ordination in
accordance with IEC 947.
4. volt-free changeover contacts shall be wired down to outgoing terminals for remote indication of the plant
status information specified. As a minimum requirement running/stopped, healthy/fault indications shall be
provided for each motor drive.
5. Analogue signals specified shall be wired down to outgoing terminals. Analogue signals for such indication
shall be 4-20mA, fully floating, and capable of driving into a load of up to 500 ohm.
6. Outgoing terminals for remote indication and control shall be continued to telemetry cubicle if provided, or
otherwise they shall be located in the common control cubicle.
c. Starter Components
1. Each starter shall be housed in a separate compartment, which shall contain the following: -
i. One triple pole MCCB externally operated and interlocked with the cubicle door. There shall be provision
for padlocking in the OFF position.
ii. One Starter as below.
iii. One Motor Protection Relay for protection against:
a) Over current
b) Unbalance
c) Single phase
d) Earth fault
2. For motors 11 kW and above, the relay shall be electronic and provide display indication of:
i. relay settings
ii. percent of FLC that the motor is taking
iii. continuous monitoring of thermal capacity of motor
iv. thermal capacity used during start of motor
v. if tripped, how much time before restart to take place
vi. stall or short circuit trip
vii. earth fault trip
viii. starting
Provide overload relay having current/time characteristic at its setting (hot/cold for the thermal overload) to
match with the motor manufacturers thermal stability time/current characteristic curve. Consideration must be
given to the required method of starting (DOL, auto transformer etc.).
3. Number of communications capable, Intelligent Motor Protection Relay/Motor Manager as specified in this
section.
Page 12-112
4. Set of auxiliary relays and timers required to provide the necessary indication and control sequence.
5. Set of main motor terminals and auxiliary terminals for remote controls and indications.
6. Set of terminals for remote lock-off stop push buttons.
7. One 230/110V 50 Hz double wound single-phase transformer with earth screen and of suitable capacity to
supply all control circuit and pilot lamp requirements. The control and pilot lamp circuits shall be fuse
protected on both poles. The transformer secondary side shall be center tapped and earthed via a removable
bolted earth link. The transformer primary side shall be supplied through a suitably rated fuse and neutral link
via auxiliary contacts of the main fuse switch with a suitably wired switch marked TEST/NORMAL for the
purpose of conducting live functional tests to the control circuit whilst the main fuse switch is isolated. The
switch shall be mounted to prevent the closing of the cubicle door with the switch in the TEST position.
8. One anti-condensation heater (off when starter contactor is closed). The heater shall be separately fused,
controlled by a hygrostat type switch with reasonable setting range (50-100 percent) which operates when the
present value of %RH ( Relative Humidity) is exceeded above due point.
9. Set of power factor correction capacitors with separate fuses and contactors for all drives above 11 kW, to give
a power factor of not less than 0.93.
10. Provide set of relays/auxiliary contactors, terminals, etc. required to provide protection for each submersible
pump against leaking of liquid into sealing/stator housing.
11. Following equipment shall be mounted on the door of each starter unit:
i. One ammeter with suppressed scale to read running and starting current.
ii. Running (Red) and AVAILABLE (green) indicating lamps.
iii. One pilot lamp to indicate MOTOR FAILED (Amber).
iv. One. HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch.
v. Set START/STOP push buttons.
vi. Lamp test push button.
vii. One externally operated overload reset push button.
viii. One running hour counter reading to 9999 hours.
ix. One 6 digit Operations Counter to count the number of starts.
x. One duty/standby label.
xi. Provide individual indication lamp for each separate motor fault condition.
d. Motor Protection Relays

1. All the starters and main Incomer breakers shall have electronic solid state, multifunction, microprocessor
based relays with communication capabilities. These relays shall perform all the functions such as Status
Indications, Motor parameter monitoring, allow for local and remote control, protective functions, and shall
provide diagnostic information about the motor and the relay itself. All Intelligent MCCs and LV switchboards
shall be time synchronized with the SCADA. SCADA will be the master clock. The details of the functions to
be carried out by the motor protection relay/ motor manager are as follows;
i. Signals /Information to be provided for each motor starter
ii. Indications to be provided at the Starter Module (on front door) and at the Operator Station through
SCADA.
a) Running,
b) Stopped,
c) Tripped,
d) Auto /Manual Mode selected.
e) Emergency Stop push-button (PB). Activated.
f) Test Position of Main Switch.
g) Phase currents indication on the front door of the starter module.
Page 12-113
2. Commands from the operator station and from the Starter Module.
i. Start / Stop Command.
ii. Fault Reset at Starter module, at the System Engineer’s station.
3. Monitoring Functions: Following parameters shall be available for monitoring at the Operator workstation.
i. Phase Currents,
ii. Average Current,
iii. Full Load Current.
iv. Current Imbalance percent.
v. Percent Thermal capacity utilized / available.
vi. Power Factor,
vii. Voltage,
viii. Running Hours.
ix. Trends, Graphic Displays for monitored parameters
4. Protective Functions: Following Protective functions with programmable trip level, warning level and time
delay shall be available at the System Engineer’s Workstation.
i. Thermal Overload- Trip Class adjustment.
ii. Under load,
iii. Jam protection,
iv. Stall Protection,
v. Current Imbalance,
vi. Phase Loss,
vii. Zero Sequence ground fault,
viii. Start Limitation,
ix. Under voltage Protection,
x. PTC Thermostat input,
5. Diagnostic Information: Following information shall be provided at the Operator workstation.
i. Motor Controller Real Time status,
ii. Warning Status,
iii. Time to Reset,
iv. Trip Status,
v. Time to overload trip,
vi. History and Cause of previous trips (minimum 5)
vii. Communication failure
e. Soft Starters
1. Products - Enclosures
i. The enclosed product in motor control center cubicle shall be complete with controller equipment,
motor protection circuit breaker incorporating thermal and magnetic protection, contactor, control
supply transformer and in separate compartment the power factor correction items. The protection
rating for the MCC cubicle shall be as per the General Specification for MCC.
ii. The soft starters shall be mounted in an enclosure to be installed inside MCC cubicle. Ventilation
louvers with filters shall be provided along with a suitable rating enclosure.
iii. The enclosures shall be provided with a door mounted digital keypad for facilitating fault annunciation,
Page 12-114
parameter adjustment, and programming of the soft starter, without opening the enclosure door.
iv. Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided with a thermostat and have OFF/ON control on the cubicle
front door. The heater shall not be in operation when the motor is functioning.
2. Ratings
i. Rated input system is 415 volts ± 10%, 3 phase, 4 wire, and 50 Hz ± 5%.
a) The starter for specified motor shall be rated to work in the shaded ambient temperature of 50°C.
Having relative humidity of 95% (non-condensing).
b) The starter shall be rated for the continuous maximum rating of the motor and not its running load.
c) The soft starters shall be derated for operation at 50°C ambient temperatures. Soft starter shall be
suitable for starting and stopping of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motor.
d) Power factor correction capacitor shall be provided to keep the power factor of the system within
0.93 lagging to unity over the entire operating range.
3. Design Characteristics.
i. Solid-state, reduced voltage motor starters shall be closed transition, shunt duty type with shorting
contactor, for full speed operation. When the motor and load reach full speed, the shorting contactor by-
passes the SCR (Silicon Controlled Rectifier) power section. The solid-state power section shall consist
of six silicon controlled rectifiers (two per phase connected back-to-back, in reverse parallel
configuration) to provide a soft start for the indicated pump motors.
ii. At turn-on, the control ramps up to the current limit in set time and maintain that current until the motor
comes up to full speed. If a problem exists and the motor fails to reach rated speed within a
predetermined period of time, the control will shutdown. The starter shall provide a smooth, steeples
acceleration and deceleration of the load from start to full speed and from full speed to stop.
iii. The starter shall be equipped with metal oxide arrestor type surge suppressors across the SCR’s to
protect against voltage transients and resistor/capacitor scrubber networks to protect against false firing
of the SCR’s. Each SCR heat sink shall have a temperature sensor that shall shut the starter down in the
event of an over temperature condition. When a starter failure occurs, the actual problem shall be
indicated by an LED ( light emitting diode) on the control panel front.
iv. The starters shall be equipped with microprocessor controlled motor protection relays to control,
monitor and protect the motors. The relay shall monitor three phase current and voltage and make trip
and alarm decisions based on pre-programmed motor current and voltage conditions.
v. Control functions shall include start detection, starter transition, incomplete sequence and number of
starts per hour. The relay shall monitor and display load current of each phase, percent of full load
current of each phase and running time. The relay shall protect the motor against time over current,
instantaneous over current, under load, phase unbalance, earth fault, phase loss and phase reversal.
vi. The manufacturer shall supply certified test results to confirm that the controller has been tested to
substantiate designs according to applicable standards. The tests shall verify not only the performance
of the unit and integrated assembly, but also the suitability of the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus
bracing. In addition, the unit shall be factory tested in accordance with applicable standards.
vii. Manufacturer shall be prepared to show proper evidence of having tested for noise immunity on both
input and output power connections.
viii. The soft starter shall provide torque for perfect linear acceleration without external feedback (via
tachogenerator) independent of motor load or type of application.
ix. The soft starter shall be by-passed at the end of the starting cycle, the soft starter shall be designed to
provide thermal and other motor protective functions during both the soft starting mode and running
mode on by-pass.
f. Display Unit
All the dialogue functions shall be accessible on the front panel of the unit via:
1. Digital key pad for operation and programming.
2. LED display.
3. Terminal block with serial inter phase.
Page 12-115
g. Essential Features
1. Shall provide linear acceleration and declaration to protect both equipment and personnel.
2. Shall provide control of the operating characteristics during starting and stopping.
3. Shall limit starting torque to protect the driven mechanism.
4. Shall provide gradual starting of high inertia machines.
5. Thermal overload protection of both the motor and the starter, with microprocessor motor temperature
monitoring.
6. Torque control system (TCS) shall incorporate torque feedback; torque estimation and torque reference
calculation and adopt the motor torque profile for application.
7. Soft starter shall be of rigid construction and shall incorporate an integral ventilation fan. The fan operation
shall be controlled by the soft starter through the thermo contact fixed on the SCR system.
8. Soft starter shall be factory set for the specified application and ready to use. Configuration and display
parameters shall also be possible to be modified at site.
h. Adjustments and Configuration

1. All dialogue functions, display units, remote functions, terminal blocks, configuration switches shall be
accessible on the front of the control module without any exposure to control circuit boards and electrical
power devices during routine adjustments.
2. The starter shall be preset to the following for normal operation, unless specified otherwise:
i. Torque acceleration ramp of 10 seconds.
ii. Current limitation to 200% of the motor full load current rating.
iii. Class 10 overload protection.
3. Digital display unit shall indicate the following minimum conditions,
i. Soft starter status - Ready, starting/stopping, run.
ii. Motor status - Current, Torque, Thermal Status, Power factor.
iii. Fault Status - Motor thermal overload, starter thermal overload, over current, phase failure, phase
inversion, supply failure, locked rotor fault, maximum starting time exceeded, and internal fault.
4. Keypad shall provide the facility to configure the following operating parameters:
i. Current limitation on starting adjustable from 150% to 250% of rated motor current.
ii. Adjustable soft start torque ramp time from 1 to 60 seconds.
iii. Adjustable soft stop torque ramp time from 1 to 60 seconds.
iv. Initial torque adjustable from 10% to 100% of nominal motor torque.
v. Torque limit adjustable from 10% to 200% of nominal motor torque.
vi. Maximum start time adjustable from 10 to 300 seconds.
vii. Selection of class 10 or 20 motor thermal overload protection.
5. The following facilities shall be available through the keypad:
i. Assignment of controller input and outputs.
ii. Reset of the motor thermal state.
iii. Return to factory settings.
6. Output relays shall provide the following status indications.
i. Contact for indication of fault or position of incoming breaker.
ii. Contact for the indication that the torque ramp is complete.
Page 12-116
iii. Contacts to indicate that the shorting contactor has operated.

7. Additional upto-isolated type input and outputs shall be available to provide the following status indications:
i. Logic output for indication of motor thermal overload pre-alarm.
ii. Analog output selectable for motor current, motor torque, thermal state and power factor.
i. Protections
1. The soft starter shall be designed for TYPE 2 protection co-ordination.
2. A microprocessor controlled digital thermal protection system shall be included which continuously calculates
the temperature rise of the motor and the soft starter and provides:
i. Overload pre-alarm, which indicates by relay contact that the motor has exceeded its rated temperature,
set at 110% of the rated motor thermal capacity.
ii. Thermal fault condition, which stops the motor if the temperature exceeds 120% of the motor thermal
capability.
iii. Analog electronic circuit with a time constant adjustable to the motor's thermal cooling time-constant
ensuring the memorization of the thermal state even after power supplies disconnection or shorting out
of the power semiconductors.
3. The soft start shall provide phase loss, phase reversal, under load, stall, and jam protection.
j. Shorting Contactor
1. A microprocessor shall control the operation of the Shorting contactor.
2. The Shorting contactor shall close; bypassing the thyristors after the motor current is at least below 130% of
the motor full load current, at the completion of ramp and open on a stop command to allow a deceleration
ramp.
3. Overload protection integral to the soft starter shall continue to protect the motor when bypassing is utilized.
12.18.4.6 Motor Control Centre

Multi-cubicle suite, free standing floor mount type motor control centers shall be provided according to BS EN 60439
for factory built assemblies consisting of units for incoming feeder, outgoing feeders, variable frequency drives, motor
starters, integral distribution boards, PLC/SCADA interfaces and VDU (Variable Drive Unit) etc. and other associated
items. Single cubicle panel up to 1200 mm high by 900 mm wide shall be designed for wall mount for indoor
installations. Bigger cubicles shall be free standing floor mount type.
Ratings and references: BS EN 60439 (IEC 439).
Incoming circuit isolation: Circuit breaker.
Voltage Rating: 415 volts three phase, four wire, 50 Hz or as specified for other voltages.
Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating: 31 MVA (43 KA) at 415 volts for 1 second duration.
Horizontal Bus: Copper, with a continuous current rating of specified amperes. Include copper ground bus entire length
of control center.
Vertical Bus: Copper.
Configuration: Units front mounting only, accessible from the front.
Feeder Tap Units: Circuit breakers or Fusible switches as indicated.
a. Motor Starters. Motor starters as per Clause 12.18.4.6

Provide Control Modules to perform the input/output control functions. Module shall incorporate faceplates having
membrane type pushbuttons and LEDs. All pushbutton and LED functions shall be furnished with clearly written
identification. Modules shall replace conventional start, stop, hand, auto, and control functions and overload reset
function. Modules shall replace conventional indicating lights for status of run, off, selector switch position, and
overload alarm and trip of motor.
Page 12-117
b. Soft Starters. Soft starters as per Clause 12.18.4.6

Interface with Central Control System (SCADA). All signal transfer between the MCCs and the central control system
(SCADA) shall be through communication bus using high speed communication protocol. All the starters and main
Incomer breakers shall have electronic solid state, multifunction, microprocessor based relays with communication
capabilities. These relays shall perform all the functions such as Status Indications, Motor parameter monitoring, allow
for local and remote control, protective functions, and shall provide diagnostic information about the motor and the
relay itself.
All Intelligent MCCs shall be time synchronized with the SCADA. SCADA will be the master clock.
The details of the functions are as follows.
1. Signals /Information to be provided for each motor starter.
2. Indications to be provided at the Starter Module (on front door) and at the Operator Station through SCADA.
i. Running,
ii. Stopped,
iii. Tripped,
iv. Auto /Manual Mode selected.
v. Emergency Stop P.B. activated.
vi. Test Position of Main Switch.
vii. Phase Currents.
viii. Running hours.
i. Phase Currents,
v. Percent Thermal capacity utilized/available.
vi. Power Factor,
vii. Voltage,
i. Thermal Overload-Trip Class adjustment
ii. Under load
iii. Jam protection
iv. Stall Protection
v. Current Imbalance
vi. Phase Loss
vii. Zero Sequence ground fault
viii. Start Limitation
ix. Under voltage Protection
Page 12-118
x. PTC Thermostat input

ii. Warning Status,
iii. Time to Reset,
iv. Trip Status,
vii. Communication failure.
c. Construction
1. General. Motor control centre (MCC) shall be type-tested assemblies (TTA) complying with the performance
requirements of BS EN 60439 (IEC 439). Motor control centre shall be constructed to Form 4b. Separation
requirements complying with BS EN 60439 Part 1. Provide separate busbar chambers and separate
compartment for each functional unit. Provide separate termination for each functional unit having its own
integral gladding facility.
Motor control centre rated for total connected loads less than 10kW shall be constructed to Form 2b type 2
(unless indicated otherwise) separation, complying with the requirements of BS EN 60439 Part 1. Provide
separate chamber for the busbars. Provide suitable chassis-mount for withdrawable starter unit. Motor control
center shall be multi-cubicle or single cubicle type. Motor control center shall be of the flush fronted, sheet
steel, freestanding (or wall mounted type), and extensible at both ends unless otherwise specified. Operation of
the MCC shall be from the front with all switches being accessible from floor level.
Shipment shall be made in sections to facilitate field handling, and the shipped sections shall be joined together
to form a complete back-to-wall or back-to-back unit assembly as indicated on the Contract plans. Transit
sections of the MCC shall be fitted with removable lifting lugs. At one end of each MCC, an empty panel shall
be provided, of the wardrobe type, suitable for mounting electronic control equipment, PLC etc. Where
necessary, (e.g. to allow extension), the busbars shall be carried through the enclosure in a purpose made steel
plate trunking. This panel shall be provided in addition to any panels required for an intelligent motor control
center.
MCC frames, covers, doors and mounting plates shall be fabricated from a minimum 2 mm thickness mild
steel pressed or rolled to shape and neatly finished and free from any joints or sharp edges. The MCC
plinth/bed frame shall have a 3 mm thickness minimum. MCC shall have a minimum protection rating of IP54
to BS EN 60529 unless otherwise indicated. The MCC shall be vermin-proof.
Individual starter shall be housed in separate compartment/section. All full voltage starter units for sizes up to
and including 100 kW shall be of the draw out type (unless indicated or specified otherwise). Draw-out
provisions shall include a positive guide rail system and stab shrouds to absolutely ensure alignment of stabs
with the vertical bus. Draw-out units shall have a tin-plated stab assembly for connection to the vertical bus.
No wiring to these stabs shall extend into the bus compartment. The MCC shall include a set of main copper
busbars and the required number of dropper busbars to suit the columns of starters. Interior of all units shall be
painted white for increased visibility. Units shall be equipped with side-mounted, positive latch pull-apart type
control terminal blocks rated 600-volts. All drawout units shall be secured by a spring-loaded quarter turn
indicating type fastening device located at the top front of the unit. Each unit compartment shall be provided
with an individual front door.
An arrangement shall be incorporated which will ensure that, when the starter is withdrawn, the aperture can be
padlocked to prevent unauthorized insertion of starters. Arrangements of starters in the MCC shall be
organized to suit the most practicable arrangement with regard to temperature rise and location of Duty 1 and
Duty 2 starters.
Main busbar ratings above 200A, the busbar arrangement shall be third party certified by an independent
testing authority (e.g. ASTA). Busbar arrangements for 200A and below need not be certified.
2. Mounting. Floor mounted assembles shall either be provided with an integral plinth or a separate rolled mild
steel channel bed frame, at least 50mm high. Fixing shall be by not less than four holding down bolts per
assembly section, located around the periphery of the section. The fixing shall not be visible from outside the
section, but shall be readily accessible from within.
Page 12-119
3. Doors and Covers. Doors shall be adequately sized to accommodate readily and neatly all mounted equipment,
open at least 120 degrees, be rigidly constructed, suitably braced and provided with at least two substantial
hinges which shall be captive when the door is closed. Each door shall be provided with chromium placed ‘T’
type catches at least one of which shall be lockable. Padlocks will be supplied and fitted by the Contractor to
the approval of the Engineer. Each door shall be provided with an internal welded earthing stud, and shall be
bonded to the assembly main earth bar. Doors and covers giving access to potentially live conductors shall be
provided with prominent warning labels, in English and Arabic.
4. Component Mounting. Each cubicle shall be provided with a removable steel component mounting plate
located clear of the cubicle rear panel. Components, other than door mounted, shall be located on the
component mounting plate by bolting into tapped holes or by using self-tapping screws. Nuts used for securing
components shall be captive. Rail type fixings may be used where appropriate. Components shall not be
mounted on any other surface. Components shall not be located within the assembly at a height greater than
2000mm or less than 500mm above finished floor level. It shall be possible to replace and maintain any
component without first removing other components.
5. Ventilation and Cooling. Provide arrangement for ventilation, when required, without sacrificing the IP rating
requirement. Provide cooling arrangement for panels accommodating heat producing drives and controllers.
Provide calculations to justify the proposed cooling capacity.
6. Bolts, Nuts and Screws. Bolts, nuts, screws and washers used in the construction of the assembly shall be
stainless steel. Bolts and nuts for cover fixing shall be captive and provided with protective washers to prevent
damage to paintwork. Floor-fixing bolts shall be manufactured from stainless steel.
7. Anti-condensation Heater. Each compartment shall be provided with a separately fixed compartment 230V
anti-condensation heater. Apart from those in motor starter compartments, the heaters shall be controlled by
means of individual OFF/AUTO switches. Auto operation shall be by means of adjustable panel mounted
hygroscope/thermostat units covering the range of humidity and temperature envisaged. Each circuit shall be
fused and taken from the load side of the compartment isolator where applicable.
8. Cable Terminations. Terminals for outgoing connections shall be located at a low level in the compartment
adjacent to the cable gland trays. Direct termination on equipment such as Distribution Board Fuses or
Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB’s) is not acceptable. Live terminals shall be covered with a 2 mm thickness
plastic cover, or suitably shrouded. Cable entries shall be affected using glands.
Cabling shall enter assemblies through not less than 3 mm thick removable steel or brass (for single core
cables); gland plates fitted at least 200 mm above finished floor level. Gland plates shall be rustproof and
provided with a welded and bonded earthing stud, and adequately sized to accommodate present and known
future cabling requirements. Access to both sides of each gland plate when it is in position shall be possible
from within the assembly. Cables shall enter at the bottom of assemblies as specified and have a suitable means
of fixing. Gland plates are not necessary on small individual starters where access shall be by knock outs.
Gland plates shall be removable for drilling. Provision for accommodation of rising armoured cables shall be
provided with adequate cable supports and a form of cable entry via approved cable glands secured to a steel
glanding plate.
Space shall be provided to accommodate cable glands of appropriate size for incoming and outgoing circuits
and non-ferrous gland plates shall be supplied where single core cables are terminated. All glands, plates and
trays shall be adequately earthed. Cableways shall be provided as necessary to ensure that apart from inter-
connections no cable routed to one cubicle shall pass through any other cubicle.
9. Labels. External labels shall be clear Perspex back engraved in Arabic and English and shall have chamfered
edges shall be affixed with chrome plated nuts and bolts with slotted holes to allow for expansion of the label.
Internal labels shall be multi-layered plastic to an approved design engraved in Arabic and English affixed with
chrome plated nuts and bolts or a permanent adhesive. Each compartment door shall have a title label and each
door mounted component or control shall have a function label. Every internal component shall be identified
and each fuse shall be labelled with identification (fuse, type, fuse current capacity). Adhesive labels will not
be acceptable for this purpose. Labels shall have circuit designations. Each group of terminals shall have a
function description label. Compartments with doors or covers not interlocked to an isolator shall have an
external label affixed thereto as follows:
DANGER, LIVE TERMINALS with flash and voltage in red letters on white background in Arabic and
English.
Labels shall not be attached to trunking covers or other readily removable items.
10. Panel Earthing. MCC shall be equipped with a suitably rated full-length earth bar of high conductivity solid
copper and minimum cross-section of 25mm x 6mm, and in accordance with the recommendations of BS EN
Page 12-120
60439/IEC 439. Within the MCC, all metal parts of all equipment supplied, other than those forming part of an
electric circuit, shall be bonded to the earth bar. Earth continuity conductors shall be at least 2.5mm sq. in
section.
Busbars. All busbars shall extend through the length of the board with same cross section throughout unless indicated
otherwise. A Copper Earth Busbar sized at least 50% of the phase busbars shall be provided along the full length of the
board. Busbars shall be adequately supported by porcelain or moulded insulators spaced on suitable centers so that the
complete assembly can withstand the maximum mechanical stresses to which it may be subjected to under fault
conditions. Busbars shall be housed in separate adequately ventilated compartment, which shall not contain any wiring
or apparatus other than that required for connections for busbars. Busbars shall be continuously rated at an ambient
temperature of 50°C. Connections from the main busbars to outgoing circuit breakers or fuse switches shall be via
copper busbars, Cable connections shall not be acceptable. The busbars shall be electro-tinned hard drawn, high
conductivity 99.9% purity copper, suitably PVC heat-shrink sleeved for phase color identification to BS 158. Moulded
PVC shrouds shall be provided over joints. Busbars shall be suitable for extension at both ends.
d. Internal Wiring and Terminations

1. Wiring Types. Internal wiring for control and instrumentation purposes shall generally be carried out using
600/1000 V grade, single core, PVC insulated, multi-stranded copper cables to BS 6231. Minimum size of
cable shall be 2.5 mm2 for power circuits and 1.5 mm2 for control circuits.
Cable colour identification shall be:
Red - Red phase
Yellow - Yellow phase
Blue - Blue phase
Black - Neutral
Green and Yellow - Earth/Protective conductors
White - 60 V d.c.
Orange - Control interconnections between cubicles
Purple - < 50 V a.c
Brown - Current Transformers (secondary windings)
2. Wiring Terminations. Wiring shall have crimped terminations, only one wire being held by any one crimp.
Crimped lugs shall be of the insulated type without conductor exposure between the crimp and wire insulation.
Type of crimp used shall be appropriate for the type of terminal to which it connects. Terminations shall be
nearly arranged leaving adequate length for one re-termination.
3. Terminal Blocks. Terminal blocks for the connection of small wiring shall comprise shrouded anti-tracking
moulding of melamine phenolic or comparable material with provision for securing conductors either by high
tensile screws and clamps or alternatively in the case of small telephone type conductors by solder tag
connection. Terminal blocks shall be arranged to facilitate easy access to both terminals and wiring ends.
Connections for outgoing circuits to auxiliary pilot cables shall be provided with test links.
Removal rail terminals shall be provided for all wiring, mounted at an angle to provide ease of access.
Disconnecting-disconnecting link type terminals shall be provided for analogue signal circuits, external control
devices and all alarm/telemetry signals. Sufficient, suitably sized earth terminals and end stops shall also be
provided.
Gap between gland plates and associated terminals shall be such that conductors can be safely manipulated and
connected without damage. Terminals shall face the door of a cubicle for ease of connection. Barriers shall be
provided on all terminal banks, to group terminals into logical divisions. Power terminals of different phases
shall be barriered from each other and separated from control terminals. In all cases care shall be taken to
ensure that terminals are easily accessible after all wiring and plant cabling has been installed and terminated.
All connections shall be made on the front of terminal blocks. No more than two conductors shall be connected
to one side of a terminal. Outgoing cables shall be wired so that all assembly wiring is connected to one side
only. Terminal numbers, voltage grouping and terminal block layout shall correspond precisely with wiring
diagrams so that quick and accurate identification of wiring can be made. Terminals shall show the circuit wire
number reference, as stated in the wiring diagrams of the manufacturer. Telemetry terminals shall be located on
a common rail and a separate common telemetry section shall be provided. Sufficient number of terminal
connections including 15% spare terminals shall be provided for all control and instrument wiring.
Page 12-121
4. Wiring Installation. Wiring shall be neatly laid and run in limited compression insulated cleats, insulated straps
or, where more than ten wires follow the same route, in plastic slotted-sided trunking with clip-on covers.
Where trunking is used, the effective overall cross-sectional area of cables shall not be greater than 70% of the
trunking cross sectional area.
Wiring to items of equipment mounted on hinged doors or subject to movement shall run in helical binding or
flexible conduit, being securely anchored at both ends; leaving ample slack to prevent wiring strain. Holes in
steel work through which cables pass shall be protected using grommets or bushes, suitable for the size of hole.
Cables used for control, extra low voltage and instrument signal transmission, likely to be affected by
interference, shall be screened and/or spaced from each other and from heavy current power cables. The
separation distance shall ensure that the resultant electrical noise is insufficient to cause any form of
malfunction of associated equipment or give false readings.
5. Ferruling and Marking. Wiring shall be identified at each end by means of glossy plastic ferrules showing the
wire number as stated in the control wiring diagram of the manufacturer.
e. Circuit Breakers, Fuses and Fuse Switches

The MCC shall contain incoming and outgoing circuit breakers and fuse switches as specified. Main circuit breaker
shall be externally operated and interlocked with the cubicle door. The unit shall also be capable of being padlocked in
the OFF position. Fuse switches used in MCCs shall comply with BS EN 60947-3, be of the double-break design and
meet utilization category AC23.
f. Disconnects
Low Voltage Combination Controllers: Combined motor controllers with circuit breaker disconnect in common
enclosure. Provide means for locking disconnect handle, and means for defeating cover interlock. Circuit Breakers
complying with BS EN 60947-2 shall be provided as isolation and protection means for every motor controller
incoming circuit.
g. Auxiliary Switches
Auxiliary switches for indication protection interlocking and supervisory purposes shall be readily accessible and
enclosed in a transport dust proof cover. Adequate secondary disconnection shall be included between the fixed portion
of a circuit breaker and the moving portion. Spare auxiliary contacts (two normally open and two normally closed) shall
be provided on each unit and wired to suitable accessible spare terminals. Selector switches shall be of the rotary type,
spring loaded to ensure clean controlled operation, with all switch positions fully and clearly identified.
h. Current Transformers
Current transformers shall comply with BS 7626. Current transformers shall be of the bar primary type, air cooled and
suitably insulated. The current transformers shall be of Class C accuracy for indication and Class CM accuracy for
metering purposes. Current transformers shall be rated not less than 5 VA and shall have thermal and mechanical rating
at least equal to those of the main circuit breakers.
i. Control Power Transformers

110-volt secondary, 100-volt minimum, for each motor controller/starter. Provide fused primary and secondary.
Secondary side center-tapped and earthed via a removable bolted earth link.
j. Indicating Lamps and Pushbuttons

1. Indicating Lamps. Indicating lamps shall be low voltage and connected from the transformer secondary. Bulbs
shall be voltage rated 10% higher than the transformer secondary voltage to ensure long life. Lamps shall be
well ventilated and the design shall permit removal of lamp glass and bulbs from the front of the unit.
Indicating lamps shall be supplied by individual fused circuits. Pilot lamp bulbs shall be of the same voltage
regardless of transformer primary voltage. Colour of indicating lamp lenses shall comply with BS EN 60073.
Lens shall be self-colored. LED lamps shall not be used except where they form an integral part of the
proprietary equipment.
2. Pushbuttons. Plated or similar bezels. They shall generally match indicating lamps in style; start pushbuttons
being recessed to prevent accidental operation. Stop pushbuttons shall not be recessed. Illuminated
pushbuttons, where used, shall be of a design that allows easy replacement of the lamps from the front of the
panel. Emergency stop pushbuttons shall be of the stay put mushroom headed (shape) type.
Page 12-122
k. Instrumentation
1. The measuring instruments shall include ammeters, voltmeters, power factor meters, selector switches and
associated accessories and described herein as follows:
Ammeter, Voltmeter and Power Factor Meter
Measuring instruments shall be moving iron vane type, flush pattern with dust and moisture-proof enclosures.
Anti-glare glass front, anti-parallax scales and white faces with black numerals and marking shall be used. All
instruments shall be of long scale 240 Degree with full load indicating approximately at 1800.
Dial size shall be 10 x 10sq. cm. (96 x 96 mm)
Accuracy shall be one percent of full scale values.
Moving elements shall be provided with zero adjustments located at face of dial.
Ammeter shall be capable of withstanding twice of rated current for 10 minutes and overload sustained under
fault conditions without damage or loss of accuracy.
Voltmeter shall have a measuring range from 0 to 500 V and shall withstand twice the rated full-scale voltage
for 1.0 minute without damage.
Three ammeters or a single ammeter with selector switch shall be provided to read the current of each phase.
Voltmeter selector switch shall be of the rotary type with cam-operated contactor and shall have (7) positions:
off, R-Y, Y-B, B-R, R-N, Y-N, B-N.
Single and poly phase power factor meters with associated current and potential transformers shall be provided
as required and specified herein.
2. Power Monitoring Unit: The unit shall be microprocessor based and shall be capable of measuring and
indicating incomer currents on each phase, voltages between phases and phase to neutral, active and reactive
powers, power factor and total energy consumed. The kWH meter reading shall be stored in password
protected non-volatile memory. The unit shall be mounted on the incomer cubicle at a height not above 1.6
meter from floor level. The backlit display unit shall be high contrast type, having light emitting characters of
height not less than 15 mm. The unit shall work on the system voltage without the need for any separate
auxiliary power. The function of power monitoring unit for remote indication and alarm shall be included.
3. Kilowatt meter shall be provided, as per ADDC specification, irrespective of the facility available in the multi-
function unit.
l. Protection Relays
1. Protection relays shall comply with BS 142.
2. Secondary injection shall be easily possible by means of purpose-made voltage and/or current plug-in type test
terminal blocks which automatically open circuit or short circuit the integral voltage transformers or current
transformers respectively and provide termination’s for the test supply. Disconnection of any permanent wiring
will not be acceptable.
3. Thermal overload relays shall be used for motors ratings up to and including 11kW, giving protection against:
i. Overcurrent unbalance
ii. Single phase
iii. Earth fault
4. Solid-state electronic protection relays shall be used for motors rated above 11kW, having the following
protection features:
i. Overload
ii. Overcurrent
iii. Single phase
iv. Earth fault
v. Under voltage
vi. Over voltage
Page 12-123
Plus digital indication of:

i. Relay settings
ii. % of FLC that the motor is taking
iii. Continuous monitoring of thermal capacity of motor
iv. Thermal capacity used during start of motor
v. If tripped, how much time before restart to take place
vi. Stall or short circuit trip
vii. Earth fault trip
viii. Starting
5. Documentary evidence must be produced showing the current/time characteristic of each overload at its setting
(hot/cold for the thermal overload) overlaid on the motor manufacturers thermal stability time/current
characteristic for comparison. Consideration must be given as to the requested method of starting (DOL, star
delta, etc.).
6. All motor overload relays shall include a manual resetting facility.
m. Motor Protection Relays

All the starters and main Incomer breakers shall have electronic solid state, multifunction, microprocessor based relays
with communication capabilities. These relays shall perform all the functions such as Status Indications, Motor
parameter monitoring, allow for local and remote control, protective functions, and shall provide diagnostic information
about the motor and the relay itself. All Intelligent MCCs and LV switchboards shall be time synchronized with the
SCADA. SCADA will be the master clock. The details of the functions to be carried out by the motor protection relay/
motor manager are as follows.
1. Signals /Information to be provided for each motor starter
i. Indications to be provided at the Starter Module (on front door) and at the Operator Station through
SCADA.
ii. Running,
iii. Stopped,
iv. Tripped,
v. Auto /Manual Mode selected.
vi. Emergency Stop P.B. activated.
vii. Test Position of Main Switch.
viii. Phase currents indication on the front door of the starter module.
i. Phase Currents,
v. Percent Thermal capacity utilized / available.
vi. Power Factor,
vii. Voltage,
Page 12-124

i. Thermal Overload- Trip Class adjustment.
ii. Under load,
iii. Jam protection,
iv. Stall Protection,
v. Current Imbalance,
vi. Phase Loss,
vii. Zero Sequence ground fault,
viii. Start Limitation,
ix. Under voltage Protection,
x. PTC Thermostat input,
ii. Warning Status,
iii. Time to Reset,
iv. Trip Status,
vii. Communication failure
n. Central Monitoring Unit (CMU)

1. The CMU shall be a microprocessor-based, self-contained device (NEMA 3R/12 faceplate) suitable for door
mounting and shall perform the following listed functions. Each assembly shall have provisions for a
communications module to provide for remote computer monitoring.
2. Monitoring and display parameters of up to 16 starters or controllers equipped with product operated network
interface card (PONI). Communications over the local area network shall be 9,600 baudrate. Parameters locally
displayed at the CMU for each starter and controller shall also be capable of being communicated to a PLC.
Information displayed at the CMU shall include the following:
i. Status - On, Off, Tripped, NOT available
ii. Starter/controller description and identification
iii. Three-phase current
iv. Control voltage
v. Overload condition (alarm)
vi. Cause of device trip
vii. Operations count
viii. Run time
ix. Set points
3. The CMU shall pass data to a PLC from the starters, controllers and overload relays. The master or the host
network's baud rate (speed of upper network passing data to PLC) shall be independent of the CMU's sub
network baud rate. The master or host network's baud rate shall be established via the PONI communications
module while the CMU's sub-network baud rate shall be switch selectable at CMU.
4. The program directing the functions or the CMU shall be permanently stored in the CMU. The addresses, types
of devices and descriptions shall be stored in memory during the learn mode and shall also be retained
Page 12-125
throughout a power loss. Unless there has been a change, it shall not be necessary to re-enter the learn mode
after a power loss.
5. CMU shall have an 8-digit alphanumeric display to monitor active data, trip data or set points, which are
available from the individual Motor Control devices. CMU shall have separate LEDs to indicate which group
of data is being displayed, as selected through membrane-type alphanumeric pushbuttons by the user. CMU
shall have alphanumeric display to indicate the address of the control device for which data is being displayed.
CMU shall have membrane type push buttons to allow the user to step up or down to select the control device
to be displayed. CMU shall have separate LEDs to indicate operational status of CMU and alarm status on any
one of the motor control devices. CMU shall have an acknowledge/reset membrane-type pushbutton to permit
the user to reset the CMU following a motor control device trip.
6. The CMU shall have a Help button function, which shall scroll English explanations in the alphanumeric
window for any condition or abbreviations.
7. Provide an addressable communication card capable of transmitting all data, including trip data over a
compatible two-wire, local area network to a central personal computer for storage and or printout. Provide
data and time-stamping for all starter/contactor operations. Reprogramming of the CMU shall not be required
when adding a communication module. The network shall also be capable of transmitting data in RS232c
format via a translator module.
o. Accessories
For each MCC, supply the following equipment:
1. 1 No. electrical grade rubber mat to BS 921, 1000 mm wide extending the full length of the switchboard.
2. 1 No. pair of electrical grade rubber gloves to BS EN 60903.
3. 1 No. notice in English and Arabic advising treatment for a person suffering from electric shock.
4. 1 No. wall mountable lockable key box complete with tags and numbering.
12.18.4.7 Scada System

The storm water lift station shall operate from an RTU( remote Terminal Unit) installed in the motor control centre,
which shall communicate with the master SCADA system via GRPS or 3G services by an approved Telecom services
provider.
a. Station Control
The RTU shall be compatible with the master existing SCADA system. The RTU shall be DNP (distributed network
control) 3.0 for communication and shall be proven record and approved by the Engineer.
b. Pump Control:
Pumps shall be operated locally, directly by the MCC or remotely by the RTU/SCADA system signaling the MCC. The
selection of local or remote control shall be made at the remote SCADA console. In the case the RTU fails control shall
automatically revert to local.
1. Local Control
In local control, the pumps may operate automatically via the float level switches or by hand, via the
Hand/Off/Auto selector switched provided for each motor starter. When hand control is selected, the pump maybe
started and stopped using the start/stop pushbuttons provided to each motor starter. This mode of operation shall
override all control circuits with the exception of the motor starter protection devices and the dry run float switch.
When Auto Control is selected the pumps shall automatically
Start and stop according to signals from the wet well float switches operating relay’s within the MCC, and
according to the sequence described in Sub-article g of Article 12.18.4.5.
2. Remote Control
When remote control is selected by SCADA and the RTU is functioning correctly, the automatic control of the
pumps shall be either by the ultrasonic level sensor or the float switches. The primary method of control shall be
by ultrasonic level sensing float control only being initiated under failure of the level sensing system, or if it
selected at the SCADA console.
Page 12-126
The primary method of control shall utilize level set point information down loaded from SCADA to the RTU.
Three levels shall control the pumps in a similar method to that for float control described above. In the case of
SCADA communications failure, the RTU shall continue to operate on the last good level set point data received
from SCADA. The RTU shall only attempt to start pumps that are selected in Auto and are energized. If after a
time delay, a duty pump has failed to start the RTU shall alarm the failure and start the assist pump.
i. Dry Run Protection. A low, low level float switch in the wet well shall provide dry run protection
regardless at the mode of operation of the pumps (Hand or Auto). The relay contacts shall be wired fail
safe thereby stopping the pump on low, low level of float switch failure.
ii. High Level Alarm. A high level float switch in the wet well shall provide a high water alarm. Activation
of this float switch shall initiate and audio/visual alarm at the MCC. The RTU shall monitor the status
of this alarm.
c. Pump Condition Monitoring

The pumps shall be fitted with condition monitoring instrumentation which shall include as a minimum, motor winding
temperature, bearing temperature and water ingress detection. These valves shall be input into the RTU. In the event of
high motor temperature or water ingress, the RTU shall trip the pump and alarm the events on SCADA.
The pumps shall be fitted with current transducers to monitor the running current. After a pump has started and after a
preset time has elapsed, the RTU shall read the current and generate an alarm if the current is below a preset value.
d. Interfacing RTU with Other Local Controllers

The RTU shall interface with the following equipment for data acquisition and transmission:
1. Valve chamber sump pump status
2. Valve chamber flood alarm
3. Electrical room sump pump status
4. Status of automatic transfer switch
5. Fire alarm system status
6. Electrical room floor/alarm
e. RTU Equipment
1. Introduction
i. The RTU shall use DNP 3.0 Protocol for communication and shall have proven past record of installed
system using DNP 3.0 Protocol for communication with Citect SCADA application software.
ii. RTU Types:
a) The Tenderer shall offer RTU’s to meet the I/O requirements as specified in Schedule of technical
Data.
b) There shall be options for fitting additional I/O to increase the installed quantity by 32 DIN, 12 AIN,
16 DOT and 4 AOT.
c) Serial communications links shall be supported so that a minimum of 8 RTU’s can be networked. It
shall be possible to configure one of the main RTU’s as the Master which will communicate with
the Masterstation and to have RTU’s act as ‘Slaves reporting to the Master by direct serial
communications, leased line/private wire, low powered radio or PSTN.
d) It shall be possible for each Slave to perform its own control and monitoring functions and for
Slaves to pass parameters between each other.
iii. RTU Functions. RTU’s shall be capable of the following functions as a minimum:
a) Data acquisition
b) Data recording and tagging
c) Alarm Management
d) Data Handling
Page 12-127
e) Sequence Control
f) Data processing (Including Maths Functions)
g) Self Diagnostics
h) Communication Control
i) Local data entry via integral keypad or similar
j) Local LCD display for the display of plant signals and RTU status. Each RTU shall have a battery
backed real time clock capable of maintaining an accuracy of + 1 second per day.
iv. RTU Address. Each RTU shall have a unique identification address selected by a portable programmer
or integral keypad and stored in non volatile memory within the RTU.
v. Maintenance and Repair. The RTU shall be constructed for ease of Maintenance & Repair.
vi. MTBF and MTFR. The tenderer is to supply details on MTBF and MTFR figures for the RTU
equipment.
2. Construction
i. The RTU’s shall be of a robust modular construction suitable for use in an industrial environment.
ii. Temperature and humidity 55˚C, 100% condensing
a) Shock and vibration
b) Shock to meet EES, 1980, section 5.6.6.1
c) Vibration to meet BS2011 part 2, 1 FC & IEC 68.2.6 test FC
d) All RTU and ancillary equipment shall be protected from corrosion.
Where it is required that the RTU equipment is to be provided in additional enclosure/panels/kiosk the tender shall
provide details of how this is to be achieved and any areas of the specification that may be compromised. Where
applicable the following details for enclosures shall apply to all RTU types.
i. Enclosures shall be provided in accordance with IEC 144 (BS 5420) and to IEC 159 and IP54 as a
minimum.
ii. High impact resistance polycarbonate or rolled sheet steel, minimum 1.5mm thick on all panels except
back plates, removable gland plates and doors which shall be minimum 1.6mm thick.
iii. When mounted in a GRP enclosure the space envelopes within which the RTU (including its back up
battery whether integral with RTU or in a separate enclosure) have to fit as follows:
320 (h) x 400 (W) x 400 (D)
iv. Enclosures shall have substantial door with smooth folded edges and suitably stiffened to prevent
flexing under normal use. Tumbler locks shall be provided with a universal key for each enclosure
supplied to the purchaser. Sufficient locks shall be provided on each enclosure to ensure the rating of
the enclosure is maintained when shut.
v. Enclosures shall be suitable for wall mounting or mounting on a back plate within a further enclosure.
vi. A single scheme identification label shall be securely fastened to the RTU of the RTU enclosure.
vii. The label shall show:
a) An appropriate station address & phone number to be stipulated by the Engineer.
b) RTU Type, serial number and any other references necessary to uniquely identify the RTU.
c) Operating voltage/frequency/current. Authorized Access Only
3. Power Supplies
i. General. Power supplies for RTU’s shall be fully protected against reverse polarity, overvoltage,
undervoltage and other faults.
Conditioning shall be inherent in the power supply design to protect against voltage transients and
mains-borne radio frequency interference typically found in an industrial environment from entering the
processing logic circuits.
Page 12-128
RTU shall be capable of monitoring their power supply as part of the watchdog function, and reporting
an incoming AC power supply failure as an RTU alarm. This shall not utilize any of the signal
inputs/outputs as specified.
ii. Voltages.
a) All mains powered RTU’s shall operate on 230 volts ± 5%, 45 to 65Hz a.c. Any additional
enclosures, transformers or circuit breakers required to meet the relevant standard shall be included
in the Tender.
b) In the event of any supply voltages a.c. or d.c. being outside the allowable range the RTU shall not
operate in a non deterministic manner.
c) All mains powered RTU’s digital inputs ahall be sourced from the RTU at not greater than 28 volts
dc and not less than 15 volts dc. The source supply shall be isolated from all other RTU circuits.
d) At solar sites the Tenderer shall specify the mechanism for optimizing power usage.
e) Battery Backup. All RTU types shall be provided with an integral battery separate from all other
batteries to protect the RTU from loss of data and to maintain the real time clock.
In addition RTU’s shall be supplied complete with a battery sized to provide the following minimum
functionality for 8 hours following mains failure.
a) Monitoring of all digital input and pulse inputs.
b) Scanning all analogue inputs.
c) Holding all digital outputs in the same position immediately prior to mains failure.
d) Holding all analogue outputs at their values immediately prior to mains failure.
e) Receive or initiate 12 calls a day with the master station.
The RTU shall transmit a battery low alarm to the master station if the battery falls within 10% of its
minimum operating voltage. This shall not utilize any of the signal inputs/outputs as specified.
It shall also be possible to automatically load test the battery (battery routine check) while under mains
supply and report the condition of the battery to the Master station.
The battery shall be automatically recharged by the RTU on restoration of the mains supply within 12
hours.
It shall not be possible for this battery backup to be inadvertently switched off.
This battery can either be mounted inside the RTU enclosure or in a separate enclosure. If supplied in a
separate enclosure, it shall be supplied complete with 5 meters of cable to connect the battery to the
RTU. In all cases the Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the system including venting. The
battery enclosure shall be of identical IP rating to the RTU enclosure.
Signal Inputs and Outputs. The details in the following sections apply to all RTU types.
All signal inputs and outputs shall be protected to meet as a minimum the requirements of IEC 801. The
Tenderer shall state the performance criteria, which the RTU complies with respect to the above
standard.
Local information shall be available to show what I/O modules are fitted and their status. This
information shall also be made available to the Master station.
iii. Digital Inputs.
a) A digital input shall mean the detection of the closure or opening of a remove volt-free and earth-
free contact for a software configurable period of at least 250 milliseconds.
b) If possible any of the digital inputs shall be able to be used as pulse inputs.
c) Maximum contact resistance (closed contacts) should be better than 180 ohms. Minimum contact
resistance (open contacts) should be better than 50K ohms.
d) Isolation between inputs and incoming 230V supply shall be > 1000V ac peak and>1000V dc.
e) Isolation between inputs and all other RTU interfaces shall be >500V ac peak and >500V dc.
iv. Digital Outputs.
Page 12-129
a) This shall be a volt free relay contact configurable for either normally open or closed in the de-
energized state, which when driven shall either go to the opposite state continuously or for a
software configurable period of time (minimum 2 seconds).
b) The rating of the contacts shall be 100 mA 24 volts dc. Inductive load or 500mA 55 volts 50Hz a.c.
resistive load.
c) The relay shall be rated for 106 operations.
d) Isolation to be as for digital inputs above.
e) The relay driver circuit shall be capable of monitoring by the RTU for correct operation.
v. Analogue Inputs.
a) On all mains powered RTU’s the analogue input loop supplies shall be provided externally.
Zero and scaling facilities shall be software definable by the user.
4. Noise Rejection
i. Common mode noise rejection shall be greater than 80 dB, measured at 50Hz ± 1%.
ii. Series mode noise rejection shall be greater than 40dB, measured at 50Hz ± 1%
iii. Accuracy. A minimum of 14 bit analogue to digital conversion shall be used providing resolution of at
least 1 in 16,384. Overall conversion accuracy measured from the RTU terminals shall be linear and
better than 0.15% of full scale under operating conditions specified elsewhere in this specification.
iv. Input Impedance. Minimum of 200k ohm on any voltage channel. Maximum of 250 ohm on any current
channel.
v. Cross talk. Better than 50dB at 50 Hz ± 1% between a ny channel, no electrical connection between
current loops
vi. Ranges. As a minimum the following input ranges shall be provided:
• 0.5 volts and 1.5 volts d.c. on voltage channels for mains RTU’s.
• 2. 0-20mA and 4-20mA d.c. on current channels for main RTU’s
vii. Isolation. To be as for digital inputs above and to include channel to channel isolation of >500V ac PK
>500V dc.
viii. Analogue Outputs
a) Ranges. As a minimum the following output ranges shall be provided
b) 0-20mA
c) 4-20mA
d) Loop Compliance. The integrity of loop signal shall be continuously monitored and if the loop
impedance exceeds the drive capability the fault shall be reported to the master station. Such faults
shall also be displayed locally.
e) Load Impedance. The output shall be capable of driving into 0 to 1200 ohms independently on each
channel.
f) Resolution. D to A converter 12 bits.
g) Protection. Each A.O shall be capable of withstanding indefinitely short circuiting or open
circuiting.
h) Accuracy. Overall conversation accuracy of 0.2% of full scale over the operating temperature range
stated elsewhere in this specification.
i) Setting time shall be better than 40mS.
j) Isolation. To be as for analogue inputs above.
k) Pulse Inputs. Each of the digital inputs will be able to be utilized as pulse inputs i.e. being able to
count the number of closures or openings.
All pulse inputs should have the following characteristics:
Page 12-130
1) Count Rate. Maximum 20Hz.

2) Count Capacity. Up to 9,999,999 plus a roll over count .
3) Reset each counter shall be able to be reset to zero or preset to a user selected value from the
Master station by a suitably Privileged user at a workstation or as part of a user Program running
within the RTU.
4) Filtering. The pulse input shall include the necessary circuits to prevent spurious counts from
poor waveforms and spurious line interference likely to be found within an industrial
environment.
5) Wetting Voltage. As for digital inputs.
ix. Local Keypad / Display. The RTU shall include a keypad / Display to provide the following as a
minimum:
a) Display of RTU I /O in the form of meaningful descriptions with status or units. e.g. pump 1
Running Upstream pressure 30 bar
b) Display of the RTU communications status.
c) Resetting of RTU.
d) Diagnostics data ( tender to specify)
e) RTU timed.
f) Software Requirements. RTU software shall conform to the requirements of IEC61131-3.
x. Mains Failure. In the event of a mains failure and after expiry of the battery back–up the manufacturer’s
operating software shall be arranged to provide an orderly shutdown.
Upon restoration of the supply, the RTU shall restart in an orderly operationally safe manner by
performing self-check routines in readiness to continue as required by the users programmed
instructions without intervention.
Upon the detection of failure and restoration of mains power, the RTU shall send an appropriate
message to the Master station.
xi. Alarms and Events. The system shall be able to detect/generate the following types of alarms at the
RTUs.
a) Status Alarms. Each change to status or derived status shall generate an event which, if so
configured, shall be reported as an alarm it shall be possible to assign a separate time delay to each
status point for which an event has to persist before being reported as an alarm. This delay shall be
configurable from 0 to 900 seconds.
b) Analogue Value Alarms Each analogue shall have minimum of four thresholds or limits if an
analogue or derived value transgresses any one of these limits, an event shall be generated which
shall be able to be reported as an alarm. Each threshold transgress shall be a separate alarm e.g. high,
high. Low, low low. However, whether the alarm state is higher or lower than the threshold shall be
configurable such that any threshold could be high or low alarm as required it shall be possible to
assign a separate dead band to each analogue point which shall apply to all four associated
thresholds. It is desirable that separate dead bands should be assigned to each threshold for each
analogue point these limits are in addition to those in (D) below.
c) Derived Alarms. The system shall have the ability to test against a combination of values and /or-
states and detect an alarm. It shall provide detection, for example of valid pump running
combinations.
RTU alarm processing shall enable combined events or alarms to be derived which shall be reported
with a different priority than the constituent alarm or events.
xii. Profile Alarms. Profile alarms shall be provided to test analogue values against diurnal profiles i.e. a
series of thresholds variable with time.
The facility shall test analogue values (e.g. a level) against a profile of thresholds and shall report
alarms when the value transgresses the thresholds after a value and time dead band period.
Profile alarms shall take the forms of up to four discrete thresholds points (high , high , low and low,
low) the values of which shall be determined at a configurable interval, typically every 15 minutes ,
Page 12-131
over 24 hour period. This shall constitute a single daily profiles.

The RTU alarm management process shall compare downloaded profiles with the measured plant
parameter and produce an alarm if a violation exists. Normal dead band facilities shall be applied in this
case.
Profiles shall be downloaded manually or automatically .There shall be the option to downloaded the
previous week’s validated data, for each day of the week with assigned values for each (e.g. 15 minute)
increment. Seven days profile data shall be stored at the Master stations and the system shall maintain
between 24 and 48 hours of profile data in the RTU. As a default, on failure to receive an updated
profile the RTU shall revert to the start of the existing profile.
Users shall be able to create profiles by copying logged or archived validated operational data to form a
single baseline for the set of profile thresholds i.e. one value for each 15 minute interval .The system
shall generate the thresholds above and below the baseline profile over the profile duration from either a
global difference or a fixed percentage deviation of the full scale, e.g. high, high shall be =5% high +3%
etc.
The user shall be able to edit the baseline profile and threshold levels for each interval in order to fine
tune the profile. It shall not be acceptable to require users to enter every individual thresholds point at
each interval.
f. Instrumentation and Processing Controls Diagram

1. All components of I&PD shall be designed and constructed of approved materials and be of robust
construction. All components shall be reliable and designed for ease of maintenance and repair and be of
uniform design for ease of interchangability.
2. All equipment must comply with the relevant British Standard Specifications or equal approved.
3. The output from analog instruments shall be 4 to 20 milli-amps.
4. All recorders, indicators and transmitters shall have a clearly marked scale with numerical indications at
intervals of not greater than 5 divisions of the value of the item being measured.
5. All recorders, indicators, and transmitters must be of the fast response type critically damped to ensure that
over-shoot does not occur. Measuring errors and inaccuracies must be kept to a minimum.
6. The glasses of all components i.e. indicators, recorders, etc., shall be of the ground, non-reflecting type.
7. All equipment shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, using any special
equipment, cabling and components for the correct and efficient operation of the complete installation. All
instrumentation and control components are to be checked and commissioned by the Contractor.
8. All components, instruments, indicators, recorders and transmitters shall be suitably labeled indicating the
measurement being made, its location and any reference number as shown on the Contract plans.
9. All assemblies and components shall be tropicalised and designed for use in the local climatical conditions.
Printed circuit cards or plug-in modules shall be able to withstand tests for resistance to vibration, corrosion,
moisture and extremes of temperature.
10. The control system shall be flexible and be capable of expansion to incorporate changes or additions to
input/output signals or control system reconstruction. This shall be achieved without extensive assembly or
wiring modifications.
11. Easy access shall be provided for inspection and maintenance. Attention shall be paid to the method of
indicating malfunctions and diagnosing of faults so as to facilitate repair and return to service with minimum
delay.
12.18.4.8 Level Measuring & Control Equipments

a. Ultrasonic Level Sensor and Transmitter
The continuous level measurement shall be by ultrasonic type level sensor and transmitter. The sensor shall be
automatic temperature compensated for any change in atmospheric temperatures. The ultrasonic transducer shall be
mounted suitably on top of the wet well in an accessible position and the control unit shall be mounted within the
control panel. The control unit shall have LED indication to indicate the receipt of return echo. In the event of lost echo,
it should be possible to program the control unit to drive the current output to either 4/20mA or 22mA as per the
requirement. The control unit should be capable of electronically aligning the sensor for optimum performance. The
Page 12-132
inter-connecting signal cable shall be supplied by the instrument manufacturer.
1. Sensor
Range 20 metres
Material PVC construction with thermoplastic rubber facing
Mounting ¾ threaded mounting
Amplifier Integral
Cable length 30 metres
Protection IP-68
2. Control Unit
Mounting Panel mounted
Supply Voltage 230 Vac, 50 Hz
Relays 4 off SPCO relays + 1 fault alarm
Output 4/20mA
Cable Entry 20mm
Display 4 digit + 20 segment paragraph
Material Polycarbonate
Protection IP 65
An external infra - red programmer shall be used to program the control unit in order to avoid any accidental
changes to the parameters.
b. Electro Magnetic Flow Meter Installation

The meter performance will be the best if the liquid flow in the piping is well stabilized; therefore it is necessary to
observe specific rules for the sensor placement in piping. In the contact planes between the sensor and the adjoining
piping sections should be no edges as these would cause flow turbulence. Make sure that straight piping sections are
provided before and after the sensor; their required length is proportional to the inner diameter of the piping concerned.
If more than one flow-disturbing element such as pipe bend or fitting is located near the sensor, the required length of
straight piping section on the sensor side concerned should be multiplied by the quantity of such elements.
In the cases of bi-directional flow-rate measurement, the same conditions concerning flow stability shall be met at the
input and output sides of the sensor.
In the case where the pipeline nominal size is bigger than nominal size of flow meter, it is necessary to use conical
reduction with the maximum slope 15°. In the case of bi-directional flow, conical reduction must be installed straight
piping 10 Ø (diameter) after the pump and before the flowmeter and 5 Ø (diameter) after the flowmeter In the case of
horizontal installation, eccentric reduction must be use to prevent bubbling.
Magnetic flowmeters shall use the principle of electro-magnetic induction to produce a DC voltage proportional to the
rate of liquid flow. Coil excitation shall be DC. The coil shall generate a magnetic field, which in turn induces a voltage
in the flowing liquid, which is sensed by a pair of electrodes in contact with the liquid. The magnetic flowmeter shall
utilize DC bi-polar pulsed coil excitation. The coil shall be protected from contact with the liquid. The electrodes shall
be made of AISI 316 TI stainless steel. The electrode input impedance shall be 1 x 1014 ohms. The measuring pipe
shall be made of AISI 316L stainless steel. The measuring pipe shall have built-in earthing electrodes. The earthing
electrodes shall be AISI 316 TI. No separate empty pipe electrodes are required and the converter should be capable of
detecting low flow. The sensor body shall be rated to IP 68.
The signal converter shall be integral mounted on the sensor. The converter shall have functions of flowrate, 2
totalisers, low flow cut-off, empty pipe cut-off, flow direction and pulse output. The converter should have automatic
zero point adjustment. It should be possible to program the converter via integral keypad. It shall not be necessary to
remove covers, panels or fasteners to accomplish calibration or program changes. No handheld communicators are
acceptable. The accuracy of the flowmeters shall be 0.25% of the actual flow at velocities greater than 0.5m/s. The
display shall have background illumination with alphanumerical text, 3 x 20 characters to indicate flow rate, totalized
values, settings and faults. The enclosure materials shall be fibre glass - reinforced polyemide with a protection rating of
IP 67. The supply voltage shall be 230 Vac, 50 Hz.
Flow meters shall display on the motor control centre, the instantaneous flow, accumulated flow and yesterday’s
accumulated flow. The data shall also be available to the RTU for remote transmission via the master SCADA system
Page 12-133
c. Level Electrode Switches

Level electrode switches shall comprise of a control unit coupled to a number of electrodes to function as a flood alarm
system. The control unit shall be of modular style and totally enclosed except for the panel mounted terminals and
indicators. All live parts at a voltage in excess of 55 volts shall be shrouded and provided with warning labels. The unit
shall have an output relay with double pole changeover contacts and a diode on the front panel to indicate when the
relay is energized. The unit shall be equipped with a lockable sensitivity control potentiometer and be capable of
operating the electrodes at up to 500 metre distance using a 24 volt d.c. supply. The electrodes shall be housed within a
weatherproof holder constructed from diecast Aluminium and allowing a minimum of 75mm adjustment of the
electrode length. The electrodes shall be from grade 316 stainless steel, with the lower end sealed and the upper end
locked to a glazed ceramic insulator, cemented to the holder. The electrodes shall be firmly secured using stainless steel
brackets with heat shrink sleaving for protection.
d. Float Switches
The level sensors shall be single pole double throw (SPDT) metallic switch rigidly moulded in a hermetically sealed,
hollow teardrop-shaped, abrasion and corrosion resistant polypropylene body and polypropylene coated wire cable. A
three conductor oval cable (3 core, 2.5mm²) heavily sheathed in polypropylene shall be moulded into the smaller end of
the sensor. An eccentric metal weight shall also be moulded into the smaller end of the sensor to cause the sensor to
hang straight when in the no immersed position and to create a stable position and pivot point at the support cable when
in the immersed position.
e. Covers and Frames

Contractor shall supply and install covers and frames of the types and size as shown on the Contract plans. Contractor
shall supply two sets of locking keys and lifting hooks suitable for each type of cover used on the pumping structure.
Covers will be solid as specified in Article 12.3.2.3.
12.18.5 Valves
12.18.5.1 Air Valves
Air valves are required on the pumping mains to release air, but they should not be used as a surge protection measure.
However, air valves, particularly if fitted with a vented non-return valve or in-flow check valve, may assist in surge
control, and their operation must be carefully considered.
Air valves require regular maintenance because if the air valve does not function correctly, large or negative surge
pressures could result, with consequent damage to equipment or personnel.
If air is allowed into the rising main on pump stop/trip through an air valve, the pump control system should be
designed to prevent a restart until the transient pressures have stabilized.
Control of the pumps is usually by start/stop level signals, but where surge on start-up may have a significant effect, the
use of 'soft' starters should be considered.
Air valves shall be installed on pipelines where necessary. Generally this will be at the high points of a pipeline.
Air valves are to be as small (Physically) as possible compatible with the functions that are required at the appropriate
location.
Usually, air valves shall be of the double orifice type. Single air valves may be used in particular locations. Either type
shall have a screw down stopcock to facilitate maintenance.
A drain plug shall also be fitted.
Air valve assemblies shall include a double flanged gate valve with 90 –meter gearing under the air valve to facilitate
removal /replacement of the air valve.
Flanges are to be drilled to NP 16 requirements and comply with BS EN 1092-1:2007+A1:2013 unless otherwise stated.
Air valves (usually double) will be sized as follows:
300mm main 65mm (may be single or 80 mm
400 to 500 mm mains 100m
600 to 800 mm mains 150m
900 mm and above 200mm
Page 12-134
Air valve construction shall comply with, or be better than the following minimum standard.
Body and external metalwork Ductile iron (GGG40)
Internal metalwork Stainless steel 316
Spindle Stainless steel 316
Internal coating Certified non-toxic epoxy at least 300 microns thick
External coating Epoxy at least 300 microns thick
Float Plastic or Stainless steel or light alloy EPDM coated
Valves shall be tested before leaving the factory to 1.5 times the rated working pressure.
Third party inspection Agency shall witness and report on the tests and deliver their report with the RCDR.
Valves shall be packed for shipping so that no damage can occur.
12.18.5.2 Washout Valve

Washouts shall be provided at suitable places along the pipeline route and shall comply with BS 78 and consist of:
1. Level invert tee, valve and piping , or
2. Ordinary tee , bend , valve and piping
Washouts may consist of a double chamber, to avoid laying piping. One chamber shall be dry , the other adjacent, shall
be wet and be capable of being pumped out.
12.18.5.3 Gate Valve

Isolating gate valves shall be stainless steel 316, PN16, flanged with stainless steel trim and outside screw rising stem.
Valves shall comply with BS 5150.
a. Valves shall have cast or ductile iron bodies, high tensile bronze or stainless steel spindles, gunmetal nuts, wedge
gates with gunmetal faces and seats and bonnets fitted with soft packing glands. The glands shall be fitted with a
bronze bush Extension spindles shall be of bronze or stainless steel unless otherwise specified.
1. Spindle shall be SS 316.
2. Wedge nut shall be stainless steel or equivalent.
3. Rubber quality shall be EPDM of 1.5 mm minimum thickness. Alternative material may be approved by the
Engineer depending upon valve application.
b. Gate valves shall be capable of being operated by one man with an operating torque not exceeding 40 Nm when
applied by the hands to the hand wheel which shall not be more than 450mm diameter.
c. If the valve demands greater effort, a geared headstock shall be fitted and in any event for all valves of 400mm
diameter and above geared headstocks shall be fitted.
d. All gate valves shall be fitted with a position indicator which clearly and positively indicates the position of the
valve gate and shall be clearly marked to indicate 'Closed' ¼, ½, 3/4 and 'Open' positions of the valve.
12.18.5.4 Non-return valves

a. Non-return valves for installation in pump discharge pipelines shall be of the non-slam type and shall generally
conform to BS5153 with flanged body ends and non-ferrous trim. Valve service ratings shall be as specified.
Flanges shall be drilled in accordance with BS4504, Section 3.2.
b. The flow velocities through non-return valves shall be kept to a minimum and in no circumstances shall the
velocity exceed 2.5 metres/sec. When selecting and sizing reflux valves emphasis shall be placed on the need to
'surge' and 'slam' and protective measures shall be taken.
c. Non-return valves shall be designed for use with chlorinated potable water. They shall have ductile iron bodies
and single hung or multiple doors. The valve seating shall be gunmetal faced, and the doors shall have facings of
gunmetal. The door shall not swing through more than 60 degrees.
d. Non-return valve spindles shall be of solid forged manganese bronze or stainless steel. The bearings shall be
accessible for inspection and replacement, from the outside of the valve. A soft packed gland shall be provided.
e. Mild steel levers shall be fitted to the valves for fitting counterweights and for hand flushing.
f. Facilities shall be provided for fitting electric limit switches to indicate whether the valve is open or closed.
Page 12-135
12.18.5.5 Flap valves

Pipes terminating to pressure reducing chamber or petrol interceptor shall be provided with flap valve. Flap valve shall
be stainless steel 316, PN16, flanged, swing pattern with stainless steel trim. Valves shall comply with BS5153
Alternatively, the flap valves could be from elastomer duckbill. The elastomer flap valves are made from Neoprene,
Hypalon, Buna-N, EPDM and Viton materials. The mounting Bands are made from 304 or 316 Stainless steel.
The elastomer duckbills are good replacements for ineffective metal flap gate valves because they are not wrap and are
virtually maintenance free.
The elastomer duckbills offer low cracking pressure to eliminate standing water and very low headloss that is not
affected by rust, corrosion or lack of lubrication.
The elastomer duckbill valves are cost effective because they require no maintenance or repairs and have a long
operational life span.
The elastomer gate valves operate using line pressure and backpressure to open and close, so no outside energy source
is required.
The elastomer duckbill check valves are produce in different sizes and series.
The flange size drilling shall conform to ANSI B 16.10, Class 150# or can be constructed with DIN, 2632.
12.18.5.6 Flush Valves

An automatic flush valve shall be attached to the pump volute to provide a flushing stream from the pump’s discharge
to flush the station sump and to keep it free from sludge build up. The valve shall close after a predetermined period of
time or when the pump stops whichever occurs first and shall be totally leak proof in the close position. The valve shall
open in readiness for the next pump cycle.
The valve shall be suitable for operation based on the ejector principle with a ball as closing device without ejector
principle with a ball as closing device without any electrical components or shall be suitable for operation on AC
supply.
The material of construction for the flush valve shall be cast iron to BS 1452,grade 220 or DIN 1690 gg20.
12.18.5.7 Surge Protection Measures

Surge (or water hammer) is an oscillating pressure wave generated in a pipeline during changes in the flow conditions.
There are four common causes of surge in a pipeline:
• Pump starting;
• Pump stopping/power failure;
• Valve action;
• Improper operation of surge control devices.
The most likely one of these is the sudden stopping of pumps caused by a power failure.
A surge analysis should usually be carried out unless the system is simple and can be calculated by the below formula:
Where:
∆P =Pressure change (m)
a = Pressure wave velocity (m/s)
∆V = Flow wave velocity change in 1 cycle (m/s)
g = Acceleration of gravity (9.81m/s2)
The simple cycle time can be calculated with the formula:
Where:
L=Pipe length in meters
Page 12-136
Table 12-29: Pipe materials and flow wave velocity
Pipe Material Flow wave Velocity

Ductile Iron 1000-1400
Reinforced Concrete 1000-1200
Plastic 300-500
Note: If the surge pressure approaches zero or the pipeline maximum pressure, a full surge analysis should be carried
out using special Surge computer model like KY Pipe software.
a. Surge Suppression Methods

Surge devices materials shall be as shown on the Contract plan and shop drawings and as per the Engineer approval. For
the requirements on materials and submittals refer to Article 12.19.1.2. Surge suppression could be achieved using one
of the following devices. The most appropriate device will depend on the individual circumstances of the installation:
• Flywheel
• Pressure vessel with bladder
• Dip-tube surge vessel
• Surge tower
Air Valves shall not be used as a method of surge control, but their operation under surge conditions should be carefully
considered.
b. Flywheels
Flywheels absorb energy on start up, slowing the rate of velocity change in the pipe line. In reserve, when the pump is
stopping, the flywheel releases energy again, slowing the rate of velocity change. Together these two actions reduce the
peak surge pressure.
As the flywheel must be located on the drive shaft it is not suitable for submersible pumps or-close coupled pumps.
However, they are simple devices for wet well /dry well pumps and is preferred where possible.
If submersible pumps have been chosen, a larger pump running at a slower speed may have the effect of a flywheel.
Because the flow continues through the pump after the stop signal, the effect on the stop and start levels should be
carefully considered.
c. Pressure Vessels
Pressure vessels for surge suppression are tanks partially filled with a gas (air or nitrogen) usually the liquid is
contained in a bladder with gas on the outside to prevent the liquid absorbing the gas or coming into contact with the
inside of the pressure vessel, and this is the preferred type. The bladder material should be carefully selected for use in
the conditions experienced in Abu Dhabi and shall be as per owner approval.
Refilling is usually from a high-pressure cylinder and care should be taken to avoid over pressurisation of the bladder.
Bladders should not lose pressure in normal operation, but they can fail, leading to absorption of the gas into the liquid,
and a drop in pressure.
Vessels without a bladder are charged with air pressure from an air compressor, either manually or automatically. There
is therefore additional machinery and an additional maintenance requirement. This type of surge vessel is not
recommended.
On pump start-up, liquid enters the vessel, compressing the gas until it equals the liquid pressure. When the pump stops,
the gas pressure forces liquid back out into the pipe system, both actions slow the rate of pressure change, which
reduces the peak surge pressure. Ultrasonic inspection of aluminium –alloy plate for pressure vessels shall conform to
the ASTM B548-03(2009).
To dampen oscillations, a non-return valve may be fitted to the surge vessel outlet pipe, to allow unrestricted flow into
the pipeline, and a bypass around the NRV fitted with an orifice plate to restrict the flow back into the vessel.
d. Dip Tube Surge Vessels

A dip tube surge vessel is pressure vessel, the top portion forming a compression chamber limited by a dipping tube
with a shut off float valve.
This type of vessel is particularly appropriate for use on rising mains with flat profiles.
Page 12-137
e. Surge Towers
A surge tower is a vertical tank or pipe fitted into the pipeline, open to atmosphere and the energy storage is by the
static head of the liquid in the tower.
Surge towers are only practical for systems with relatively low heads and surge pressures, but can pose an odour risk.
Due to the design of a surge tower, there is no routine maintenance required to ensure the surge tower keeps operating
correctly.
It is unlikely that surge towers would be appropriate for use in Abu Dhabi.
Anchorages and thrust blocks to resist the temperature expansion, internal pressure, and surge forces that will otherwise
pull the pipe joints apart. This will require proper bedding procedures, restrained joints or continuous pipe, pipe collars,
or structural concrete blocking.
Air and vacuum release valves at a high point, if it cannot otherwise escape, will block the pipe capacity. Alternately, a
vacuum caused by the closing of a valve or pump shut down can collapse a pipe and must be eliminated by allowing air
to enter the pipeline.
Pressurised access and inspection chambers locations shall not exceed 300-m spacings.
Non-reverse flow-check valves.
Washouts, or low-point drains, for draining the pressure pipe during maintenance shall be located at low points on the
pipe profile.
Energy dissipater structures at open outfalls.
Tidal type flap gates for discharge below tide levels.
Dispersion systems for deep water outfalls.
Pipe selection: General factors to be considered in the selection of pipe include the following:
1. Design requirements for Bypass pumping system: Bypass pumping systems shall have sufficient capacity to
pump the required peak flow. Pipeline plugs, pumps of adequate size handle peak flow, and temporary
discharge piping to ensure that the total flow of the main can be safety diverted around the section to be closed.
Bypass pumping system may be required to be operated 24 hours a day therefore, all necessary monitoring
devices to be provided for any pump failure.
2. Adequate standby equipment shall be available and ready for immediate operation and use in the event of an
emergency or break down. One stand by pump for each pump size utilized shall be installed at the mainline
flow bypassing locations, ready for use in the event of primary pump failure.
3. Bypass pumping system shall be capable of bypassing flow and over flows around the work area and of
releasing any amount of flow up to the full available flow into the work area as necessary for satisfactory
performance of the work.
• Service conditions;
• Pressure, including surges;
• Soil loads, bearing capacity of soil, and potential settlement;
• Corrosion potential of soil;
• Potential corrosive nature of some waters;
• Availability;
• Local availability and experienced installation personnel;
• Sizes and thicknesses, such as pressure ratings and classes;
• Compatibility with available fittings;
• Properties of the pipe;
• Power supply according to the local practice in this cases;
• Services corridor to be considered;
• Coordination with Authorities to obtain all required NOC’S
Page 12-138
• Strength, including static and fatigue, especially for water hammer;

• Ductility;
• Corrosion resistance;
• Fluid friction resistance, which is more important in longer pipelines;
• Economics;
• Costs, such as installed cost, including freight to jobsite and installation;
• Required life; and
• Cost of maintenance and repairs.
Guidelines for pipe selection and other practical design and installation methodologies are provided online by most of
the manufactures that produce pipe suitable for pressure flows, the selected pipe shall be in according to the owner
requirements and approval.
12.18.5.8 Painting
Painting shall comply with Chapter 24 of these Standard Specifications.
Paint surfaces before they become unreachable because of assembly operations.
Painting shall not impair legibility, life expectancy, or function of the following items:
• Brass surfaces
• Nameplates
• Push buttons
• Operating handles
• Electrical cover plates
• Plastic parts
• Locks
Clean, prime, and touch up damaged areas of painted surfaces. Use the same type primer, paint, and colour as the
damaged finish. Do not use cold galvanizing aerosol cans for repair or touch up work.
12.18.6 Testing
Before delivery, each item of plant and the components shall be tested in accordance with the relevant specification of
ISO, BS or ASTM standard as applicable, or where tests not specified to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Triplicate
copies of routine tests performed in accordance the relevant British, ISO or ASTM standard shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. During manufacture, inspection and testing shall be witnessed by representatives of the Engineer
and the Department and/or appointed inspector. The Contractor shall provide for all transportation, housing, living
expenses, tools, test equipment and all other necessary facilities for the Engineer and the Owner, who may carry out or
witness any inspections and tests that may be deemed necessary
Testing shall also meet the requirements as otherwise herein specified.
12.18.6.1 Performance Testing Contract Plans

Submit a work plan for performance testing of pumping plant equipment. Work plan shall include methods for the
following items:
1. Blocking pipes at their entrance point into the pump/wet wells if required
2. Removing all debris from the pumping plant, , in particular the sediment/sand sump and pump/wet wells before
testing
3. Operational test, including pump controller operation
4. Supplying water
5. Water disposal
Submit a Maintenance and Operations Manual for the pump station before completion of the work. Manual shall
include all operational and maintenance requirements, including the following:
Page 12-139
1. Index
2. Part lists
3. Operating instructions
4. Maintenance instructions
5. Wiring schematics, with control and power conductor numbers identified
6. Certified pump curves
12.18.6.2 Manufacturer Testing

Pumps shall be tested at the manufacturer's works before delivery. Test certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer
prior to any deliveries. Pump shall be tested in accordance with ISO 2548 (class C or to BS 5316, part l, Class ‘C’,
Annex 'B', as approved by the Engineer. Pump manufacturer shall perform the following inspections and test on each
pump before shipment from factory:
1. Impeller, motor rating and electrical connections shall first be checked for compliance to the customer's purchase
order
2. A motor and insulation test for moisture content and/or insulation defects shall be made
3. Each pump/motor unit shall be run on a test bed that will simulate the specified performance of each pump, to
check their actual performance as to rated power use, pumping head and flow rate curves
4. Submersible pumps shall be run submerged in water to a minimum of 2 m
5. After operational test No. 4, the insulation test (No. 2) is to be performed again
Contractor shall obtain and submit to the Engineer for approval all testing results, which have been certified as being
the true version. These certificated test results (signed and dated, with representative’s seal) shall include pump
delivery, head, kW input, overall efficiency, and other figures in accordance with the testing procedure.
Each motor shall undergo tests at the manufacturer's work in accordance with the appropriate standard as approved by
the Engineer. Test certificates shall be provided for each motor delivered.
Each cable shall undergo the routine tests at the manufacturer's works in accordance with the appropriate British, ISO or
ASTM Standard. Control centre shall be tested at the manufacturer's works with suitable loadings, switches and lamps
substituted for the external limit switches and motors to check for sequence of operation. Control centre shall be tested
at the manufacturer's works with suitable loadings, switches and lamps substituted for external limit switches and
motors to check for sequence of operations.
Control panels shall be tested for insulation resistance and pressure (flash).
Upon delivery of the plant to the site, the electrical/mechanical subcontractor shall supervise installation, and shall
attend and supervise the initial running tests in order to set overloads and adjust timing relays etc., and generally ensure
that the electrical plant is commissioned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Electrical/mechanical package subcontractor
shall be available and supervise all subsequent running, testing, and maintenance servicing or modifications during the
life of the Contract
12.18.6.3 Operational Testing

After erection at site the electrical/mechanical subcontractor shall test the plant as a whole and where necessary the
items and components thereof, in accordance with the relevant ISO, BS, and ASTM standards. Where appropriate or
where tests are not otherwise specified, prove to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the plant is in correct working
order and ready for service.
Perform the operational tests in the Engineer's presence.
Perform operational tests of the pumping plant to demonstrate the following items:
1. Proper rotation of each pump
2. Manual operation of the pumps separately and combined
3. Automatic operation of the pumps separately and combined
Repeat the operational tests until the requirements have been met.
Electrical/mechanical subcontractor shall test the whole of the machinery in the presence of the Engineer to ascertain
that the performance pump outputs, kW input, etc., are satisfactory and that the works test figures are possible under site
Page 12-140
conditions.
Contractor and the electrical/mechanical subcontractor shall supply all labour both skilled and unskilled, also all
necessary instruments to carry out the tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Should the equipment prove unsatisfactory in any respect the equipment in whole or part will be rejected. In the event
of failure of any part of the equipment, the costs of all future tests shall be met by the Contractor.
12.18.6.4 Field Tests

a. General Performance. Each pump shall be operated as described herein. The Contractor shall provide the
services of the pump manufacturer’s representative for two day to operate the pumps of each type.
b. Hydraulic and Electrical Tests. The pump performance shall be documented by obtaining concurrent readings
showing motor voltage and amperage, pump suction head, pump discharge head, and pump RPM. Readings shall
be documented for at least three (3) pumping conditions to ascertain the actual pumping curve. One test shall be
at shutoff head. Each power lead to the motor shall be checked for proper current balance.
c. Bearing Temperature. Bearing temperatures shall be determined by a contact type thermometer. Alternatively,
lubricant temperature may be measured. A running time or at least 20 minutes shall be maintained for this test.
d. Vibration. The pump shall be visually and manually checked for excessive vibration. If, in the sole opinion of the
Engineer the pump vibration is excessive, it shall be corrected and then re-checked and recorded.. The vibration
of the pump measured at any point on the pump and motor when operating at full speed shall not exceed the
following
Speed, rpm Vibration Amplitude, mils
Minimum Speed Per H.I. Standards
Full Speed Per H.I. Standards
e. Test Results. If pumps fail to meet specified requirements, adjustments shall be made and test rerun until
performance meets the requirements. Test results shall be recorded for each pump for each test and full reports
shall be submitted to Employer. The costs of retesting and reporting shall be borne by the contractor.
12.18.6.5 Performance Testing

After acceptance of the operational tests, the electrical/mechanical subcontractor shall run performance tests on the
installed pumping plant equipment. Performance tests include two 5 minute tests for each pump.
Performance tests must show that each installed drainage pump meets the following items:
1. 97 % of the factory certified performance curve
2. Design pump rates shown on the Contract plans
3. Each pump must not load its motor more than the actual full load nameplate amperage, regardless of head.
12.18.6.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

The Contractor shall assemble |seven (7)| manuals containing maintenance and operating instructions for each piece of
equipment and systems requiring service. Instructions shall be bound in a hard cover |4-ring| binder of suitable size and
indexed. Maintenance and operating instructions shall include the following information:
The Contractor shall submit one copy of the manual to the Engineer for review four weeks prior to the beginning of the
instruction period. The Contractor shall incorporate the Engineer’s comments and prepare the final version, three copies
of which shall be delivered to the Department during the instruction period.
12.18.6.7 Maintenance of Pumping Requirements

The Contractor shall prepare a Maintenance Plan with detailed maintenance schedules and frequencies that meet the
requirements herein or such other requirements as may be mutually agreed with the Employer in writing. The
Contractor shall consider the following during the preparation of Maintenance Plan
1. The potential impact of asset failure;
2. Historical records of asset failure;
3. The likelihood of asset failure;
Page 12-141
4. The current condition of the asset;

5. Importance to operation.
The Contractor shall schedule preventive maintenance, but not limited to as detailed in Table 12-30 and Table 12-31
below. Actual frequencies and activities shall be agreed by the Employer which shall take full account of manufacturer
recommendations, actual operation hours, equipment condition and other relevant factors. All maintenance work shall
be documented and recorded in the Contractor’s Computerized Maintenance Management System.
Table 12-30: Typical Routine Maintenance Monthly Inspection
Item
Main Composite Task Services
No.
- Check water level in wet well, inlet manhole, check for any abnormal foreign
body in chamber and remove
- Check operation of electrical motor, pumps, compressors and other equipment
by starting and stopping each unit. Exercise valves and penstocks
- Check equipment for excess vibration and noise,
overheating, leaks an excess pressure
1 General Items - Clean out pump well, inlet manhole, wash down walls and remove sludge.
Then filling the well with at least 5(m3) of water
- Clean electrodes, float switches and ultrasonic head
- Check operation of all facility services including small power and lighting and
maintain as required
- Provide routine running of pump by manually & automatic operation.
- Repaint all corroded parts, including valves and pipe works.
Standby Diesel
2 - Record relevant parameters
Engine
Submersible Pump
3 - Check control equipment
Station
- Clean, Check & tighten counterweight screws
Non – Return
4 - Check proper operation, check & rectify stuffing box leaks
Valves
- Check valve bypass where fitted to leaks, lubricate & operate
- Operate valve through a full cycle
5 Gate Valves - Check and service glad packing
- Clean and lubricate valve screw & nuts
- Check compressor oil level, top up as required
6 Air Conditioning - Check operation of controls and safety devices
- Clean and blow out dust from inside of control panels
- Clean any dust exterior of panels
- Remove dust and dirt from compartment using vacuum cleaner fitted with a
rubber nozzle, brushes of soft cloth
- Visual check for signs or component overheating, investigate underlying fault,
eliminate cause and renew damager wiring and components as necessary
7 Switch boards
- Inspect contactor and relay contacts for signs of wear and general deterioration,
clean or renew as necessary
- Check the setting of timing relays
- Check for blown fuses & indicating lamps, establish reason for failure,
eliminate cause and renew as necessary
- Clean all dust from components using a vacuum cleaner or blower
- Visual check for signs or component overheating, investigate underlying fault,
MCCs & free- eliminate cause & renew damager wiring and components as necessary
8
standing DB’s - Inspect contactor & relay contacts for signs of wear and general deterioration,
clean or renew as necessary
- Check the setting of timing relays
Page 12-142
Item
Main Composite Task Services
No.
- Check for blown fuses & indicating lamps, establish reason for failure,
eliminate cause & renew as necessary
- Check Hand , off & Auto switch
- Check presence of PLC & instrument signals, function of auto relay, manual
start of equipment & space heater
Uninterruptible - Check battery electrolyte levels and top up

Power Supplies, - Check and clean ventilation panels are free from obstructions
9
Battery Chargers & - Check alarms
Batteries - Check overall operation of unit
Ultrasonic & - Check and compare instrument reading of transmitter, field indicator and PLC
Transducer type and re-calibrate as necessary
10
Level - Calibrate instrument loop and check alarm
Meter/Controllers - Clean and vacuum enclosure and circuit boards
11 Float level - Check operation and alarm by simulation
Wall Mounted - Clean al dust exterior of panels, replace defective MCBs

12 Lighting Distribution
Board - Provide full examination/service and replace defective components
Luminaries, - Check switches and sockets for signs of deterioration & abnormally
13 Switches and
Sockets Outlets - Replace defective components
14 Outside Lighting - Replace lighting element as necessary
Table 12-31 : Annual Maintenance Inspection

Item Main Composite Task Services
No.
Examine starter contacts and motor carbon brushes and replace as required. Clean
and maintain circuit breakers
1 General Items
Grease motor bearings
Check clean and lubricate lifting equipment inside & outside facility
Visual inspection for all equipment, cables, etc.
Test and record insulation resistance and earth loop impedance of all equipment. Test
Electrical and and record resistance of earthing points
2 Safety Check of
Provide and record insulation test for all equipment and cables
all stations
Test and calibrate protection relays
Test and maintain lighting Protection to approved standards
Standby Diesel Examine starter contacts and motor carbon brushes and replace as required. Clean
3
Engine and maintain circuit breakers
Check motor and cable insulation
Submersible Pump
4 Visual inspection of electric cable
Station
General overhaul
5 Pressure Gauges Provide calibration and certification
6 Bore hole wells Well Maintenance Procedure
Non – Return Remove valve cover, clean disk hinges for free movement
7
Valves Clean sump in bottom of valve, clean faces & restore valve cover
Page 12-143
Item Main Composite Task Services

No.
Check all nuts for tightness
8 Gate Valves
Check coating for damage and repair as necessary
Clean ad adjust condenser fan blades
Check voltage, current, pressures and temperatures
9 Air Conditioning
Check earthing
Clean surface for corrosion and chipping, clean and repaint
Check compartment and incomer door interlocks for current operation, take remedial
10 Switch boards action if necessary
Provide a full safety inspection, including operation of all interlocks and earthing
Air Circuit
11 Open and close the breaker, locally and remotely using different auxiliaries
Breakers
12 Protection Relays Inspect and test in accordance with the O&M Manuals
13 LV Cables Conduct and record insulation resistance tests
14 Earthing Conduct and record test including resistance of earthing point
MCCs & free-

15 Provide a full safety inspection, including operation of all interlocks and earthing
standing DB’s
Power Factor
16 Carry out visual inspection and clean as necessary
Controllers
Provide inspection, testing & maintenance in accordance with BS 6651
Earthing &
Check resistance of each earth rod and maintain as required, check all earthing
17 Lighting
connections
Protection
Check earthing of Electric & Electronic equipment not listed elsewhere
Wall Mounted Provide a full safety inspection, including operation of all interlocks, earthing &
18 Lighting protective devices
Distribution Board Check & record insulation resistance on all incoming & outgoing cables
12.18.7 Spare parts

Contractor shall supply spare parts for the electrical and mechanical equipment suitable to maintain the pumping station
in operating condition for the life of this Contract and the maintenance period of one year (365 days) after the handing
over. Spare parts shall be of same quality, type, and manufacturer as approved for the electrical and mechanical
equipment to be installed in the pumping structure. Quality and type of spare parts shall be as recommended by the
electrical/mechanical subcontractor, as otherwise approved or directed by the Engineer.
12.18.7.1 Delivery, storage and handing

Equipment shall be packaged in containers constructed for normal shipping, handling and storage. Containers shall
provide adequate protection for the equipment in a dry indoor environment until time for installation.
12.18.7.2 Service Spare Parts

a. Critical Services Spare Parts
For critical services, the following parts should be stocked, where applicable:
• Impeller with impeller rings
• Thurst bearing end-cover
• Radial bearing end cover
• Shaft
• Radial
Page 12-144
• Thrust
• Radial heat flinger
• Impeller Key
An alternative approach is to stock a complete back pull-out assembly. This is a group of assembled parts which
includes all but the casing and coupling.
b. Recommended Spare Parts

When ordering spare parts, always state the serial number, and indicate the part name and item number from the
relevant sectional drawing. It is imperative for service reliability to have a sufficient stock of readily available spare
parts.
It is suggested that the following spare parts to be stocked, where applicable:
• Bearing locknut
• Bearing lock washer
• Cartridge mechanical seal
• Casing gasket
• Casing wear ring
• Finned tube cooling assembly
• Impeller nut
• Impeller wearing ring – casing side
• Impeller wearing ring – cover side
• Oil rings
• Oiler with wire guard
• Radial bearing
• Radial bearing end – cover gasket
• Seal chamber cover wear ring
• Set screws
• Throat bushing 0 seal chamber cover
• Thrust bearing (duplex pair)
• Thrust bearing end cover gaskets
• Thrust bearing end cover O-ring
• Thrust bearing end cover shim pack
• Water jacket cover O rings
• Washout valve
• Gate Valve
• Air valves
• ALL other spare parts shall be agreed with the Owner during construction stage.
12.19 Pressure pipelines

This section specifies the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance for a pressure or rising main
(pumped) pipe system as shown on the Contract plans and as approved by the Engineer
The storm water pressure pipelines corridor width shall be considered during the construction stage, NOC’s from
different authorities shall be obtained by the contractors prior starting any construction works.
Soil investigation test shall be conducted along within the pressure pipe line corridor. Where high ground water
anticipated, the contractor shall make consider all the necessary measurements against the floating of the pipe and
chambers during construction. Method statement shall be provided for the Engineer for his approval.
Page 12-145
12.19.1 Materials
12.19.1.1 General
Contractor shall meet the following requirements:
1. Pipe materials to be utilized shall be as shown on the Contract plans and as per the below section.
2. Each type of pipe and fittings for the entire Contract shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, unless
otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
3. All equipment used in the system shall have local agents, certified by the manufacturer to check, test, adjust,
commission and maintain the same.
4. Materials incorporated in the work covered by this section shall be unused, new products in good condition.
5. Materials spoiled due to improper storage or mishandling shall be rejected.
6. All the system components shall be of the type and construction, capable of withstanding the local ambient
conditions and shall be resistant to deterioration from high incidence of ultraviolet rays.
7. All copper alloys used in the construction of valves etc., which come in contact with water, shall be
dezincification resistant type.
8. Materials of similar nature shall be products of the same manufacturer. Mixing up products of different standards
or those of different manufactures will not be permitted for the same service.
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer .The following documentation for review and approval before commencing
work:
a. Drawings: design Contract plans with calculations
b. Materials and equipment schedules:
1. All catalogue cuts, diagrams, Contract plans, and such other data as may be required to demonstrate
compliance with the specifications.
2. All materials shall be as described in the Specifications. For pipes additional submittal items are required:
i. Manufacturer’s name
ii. Standard of manufacture
iii. Proposed pipe or fitting diameters
iv. Pressure / vacuum
v. Proposed manufactured lengths and weights
vi. Shop drawings for fittings, showing all dimensions
vii. Installation Contract plans and shop drawings
viii. Samples shall be supplied according to the Engineer’s request
3. Contractor shall submit material approvals for all the materials which are proposed to be used in the system,
at least 7 days in advance to their installation. Any material used which is not approved shall be removed
from the site and the Contractor shall replace them at his own cost.
4. Materials to equivalent British (BS), German (DIN), or Japanese (JIS) or other international standards are
acceptable, provided that the Contractor substantiates their equivalence and ensures their compatibility with
other components of the system. Contractor shall furnish copies of the current version of the reference
standards for comparison, if so required by the Engineer.
c. Shop drawings: Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions on the Shop drawings and shall report
all variations to the Engineer. All shop drawings shall be submitted for approval with supporting calculations
prior to starting the work on site. Shop drawings shall be prepared to detail any installation not completely
detailed in the Contract plans, or to detail any alterations to the Contract plans and shall include, but not be
limited to:
1. Civil works, mechanical pipe work and electrical control equipment with circuit diagrams
2. Details of typical connections
Page 12-146
3. Wiring diagrams including conduits, pull boxes, sizing and calculations to verify that cable sizing is in
accordance with valve manufacturer’s printed recommendations wherever applicable.
4. Corridors for all the ducts and conduits to be considered.
d. Manufacturer’s certifications:
1. Test certificates from approved independent laboratories or testing agencies for materials used in the work
shall be furnished at no extra cost, if required by the Engineer.
2. Pipes: Certification by a recognized certification mark scheme such as The Kitemark or by an independent
third party testing organization approved by the Engineer, that production has been carried out under a
system of supervision, control and testing applied during manufacture in accordance with BS 5750 or an
approved equal procedure.
3. Valves and special steel fittings: Manufacturer's certificate for pressure testing and coating, including holiday
and DFT (design for testability) test reports for each valve, fitting and spool.
e. Recommendation of the manufacturer: Contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s recommendation for each
material or procedure, including recommended spare parts to be utilized, and all relevant operational data.
Contractor shall have a copy of the manufacturers’ instructions available on-site at all times while work is in
progress, and shall follow these instructions unless otherwise authorized to deviate by the Engineer.
f. Spare parts: Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s listing of spare parts for approval prior to commissioning
any piece of equipment. Recommendations shall include stocking recommendations; exploded assembly
diagrams illustrating location and spare parts to be utilised and all relevant operational data.
g. Manufacturers’ literature: At such time as the list of materials has been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall provide 4 sets of manufacturer’s technical and maintenance literature to the Engineer. Data sheets shall
provide sufficient technical information to identify each product and shall include the name and the address of
the nearest supply firm which shall have a local representative
h. Method statements: Contractors construction method statement shall be submitted prior to commencing work to
cover at least the following activates:
1. Construction of reservoirs, associated chambers and / or pump stations
2. Pipe Installation and special equipment installations
3. Testing of the entire drainage system, including any automated controls
4. Shop drawings and wiring diagrams in accordance with Article 12.18.3.2.
12.19.1.3 Acceptance Inspections

1. Contractor is advised to carry out any tests, at his cost, needed to satisfy himself, regarding the soundness of the
pipes, fittings and jointing materials prior to acceptance testing by the Engineer.
2. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in sufficient time to allow the
Engineer to inspect and test the products, if so desired. All notifications shall be made in writing to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide for all transportation, housing, living expenses, tools, test equipment and all other
necessary facilities for representatives of the Engineer, the Department and/or approved inspector, who may
carry out or witness any inspections and tests that may be deemed necessary.

1. Specific requirements shall be as specified in the relevant specification section governing the manufacture and
installation of the material or product in question. Additional requirements may be required as per the
manufacturer’s recommendations and as directed by the Engineer.
2. Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the Engineer. Any products
damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked and set aside. Proposals for repair of any
damaged products shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval. No repairs to damaged products
shall be attempted without the Engineer’s approval.
3. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer, shall be removed from site and replaced at
the Contractor’s expense.
Page 12-147
4. Pipes shall be stored on site in a covered pipe store. Pipes shall on no account be exposed to sunlight.
5. Pipe store shall allow for circulation of air.
6. All products shall be handled and stored in accordance with printed recommendations of manufacturer
7. All site storage areas shall be shaded, at all times.
8. Pipe stacks shall be designed to ensure that pipes, and especially pipe sockets, are not deformed during storage.
9. Precautions shall also be taken to protect items sensitive to sunlight or heat prior to backfilling operations.
10. Any pipe, whether installed or not, that is observed to be sunburnt, or oval, shall immediately be removed from
the site, and replaced.
12.19.1.5 Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipe (GRP)

Refer to Article 12.1.3.3.
12.19.1.6 Stainless Steel Pipes

Stainless steel piping and fittings in the lift station shall be flanged, Sch 40S ANSI Type 316L. Pipe supports shall be
provided as per manufacturer's recommendations. All pipe supports, inserts and brackets shall be ANSI Type 316L. All
stainless steel pipes passing through concrete shall be installed with a wall pipe containing an intermediate waterstop
wall collar. Collar shall be cantered in the concrete.
12.19.1.7 Ductile Iron Pipes

Ductile iron pipes shall be manufactured to grades of Ductile Iron 500/7 and 600/3 as per ISO 1083 and /or
ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 and as per the Owner approval. Push on joints shall be utilized in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Gaskets shall be suitable for hydrocarbons. Piping shall be assembled in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and where buried in concrete shall be supported on concrete cradles before encasement.
Pipe work shall be pressure tested to 5 bar minimum for 2 hours. Pipe shall be coated with asphaltic/bitumen and
wrapped with 200 micron thick polyethylene to ANSI/ASTM C105/A21.5. Lining shall be 5mm cement in accordance
with AWWA C104.
a. Pipe Surround
Pipe bedding and surround material shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Pipe surround for all pressure pipe shall be a granular material free draining, hard, clean, chemically stable,
crushed aggregate free of agglomerated particles meeting the following requirements, unless approved otherwise
by the Engineer:
i. 10 mm nominal size for all pipe diameters
ii. Maximum particle size : 16 mm
iii. Maximum percentage passing 5 mm sieve : 10 %
iv. Maximum compaction fraction shall be 0.14.
2. Generally, concrete surround is not used for pressure pipes unless otherwise shown on the Contract plans . In
areas of shallow cover under traffic pavement areas or other areas subject to reduced soil foundation strengths,
concrete pipe surround in accordance with Article 12.1.4.3 and 12.1.4.5 and as directed by the Engineer
3. Filler board utilized to form discontinuities in concrete pipe surround shall be one of the following:
i. Bituminous fibre board
ii. Styrofoam.
Thickness shall be as shown on Contract plans. Multiple layers may be used.
4. Pipe wrap placed around pipe joints shall be suitable self-adhesive waterproof membrane or other self–adhesive
tape as approved by the Engineer.
b. Backfill
Material placed above the pipe surround for trench backfill (not under traffic or pedestrian pavement) shall generally
use the native excavated material, if it conforms to the following requirements.
Page 12-148
1. Maximum particle size: 150 mm

2. Liquid Limit: 40 maximum
3. Plasticity index: 10 maximum
Beyond the edge limits of vehicular and pedestrian pavement, if the excavated material is deemed unsuitable or
insufficient for general backfilling, borrow material (non-load bearing) conforming to Chapter 2, Article 2.5.2.7 of these
standard specifications may be utilized.
Backfill material under pavement areas, shall meet the requirements of Chapter 2, Article 2.5.2.2 of these standard
specifications.
c. Geotextile
Geotextile for wrapping granular pipe surround shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, Section 2.7.2 of these
d. Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings and Joints

All ductile iron pipes (DIP), fasteners and accessories shall meet the requirements of ASTM A377-03(2008)e1.
DIP shall be provided in nominal 5.5 m or 6.1 m laying lengths and shall be lined as specified herein.
Diameter indicated on the Contract plans shall represent the nominal inside diameter of the pipe.
Grade of iron shall be 60-42-10 having a minimum tensile strength of 414 mPa and/or grade 500/7 and 600/3 as per
ISO1083 and as approved by the Engineer, minimum yield strength of 290 mPa, and a minimum percent of elongation
of 10 %., ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C 151) for a minimum working pressure of 16 bars
especially in the pump station.
Fittings and special lengths shall be ductile iron at least K9 equivalent to Class 40 for all pressure pipe application and
shall be in accordance to the requirements of either AWWA C 153/ANSI A21.53 or AWWA C 110 /ANSI A21.10.
Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C 111/ANSI A21.11.
All Pipe work and fittings shall be PN16 flanged to BS EN 1092-2 Flanged joint gaskets shall be rubber, full faced, of
3mm nominal thickness to BS EN 681-1. Bolts, nuts, washers, anchor plates and all fixings shall be of stainless steel
grade 316 S31 to BS 970-1 and shall remain unpainted.
Dl fittings shall be lined and externally protected as otherwise specified for DIP.
DIP shall be furnished with either bell or spigot, mechanical or flanged joints as specified on the Contract plans.
Cutting of DIP shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C 600.
DIP shall be lined with cement linings per the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C 104/A21.4. Cement linings shall be
further protected with a seal-coat of asphaltic material per ANSI/AWWA C 104/A21.4.
Requirements of ANSI A21.5 or AWWA C 105 for materials and installation procedures for polyethylene encasement
of underground installations of ductile iron pipe shall be met. Polyethylene wrap shall be marked in accordance with the
requirements of ANSI A21.5 and AWWA C 105. Polyethylene wrap in tube or sheet form for piping encasement shall
be manufactured from virgin polyethylene material conforming to the requirements of ASTM D4976. Specified
minimum thickness is 8 mils. Ductile iron pipe enclosed within a steel casing does not require polyethylene encasement.
e. Testing of Ductile Iron Pipe

Each piece of pipe shall be tested and shall have an absence of holidays (small areas of pipe devoid of lining) when
tested by a suitable holiday detector. In all cases, the barrel area of the pipe shall be tested using both a voltage of 7,500
volts and a dry conductive probe. The bell area and the exterior of the spigot end shall be tested using both a voltage of
67.5 volts and a wet sponge.
All sections of DI pipeline and fittings shall be hydrostatically tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The test
pressure shall be such that the section being tested will be subjected to 1.5 times the working pressure. The working
pressure shall be the maximum pressure that can be developed in the system.
All coatings and linings shall be tested for dry film thickness and for continuity using a holiday detection unit. Where
holidays are detected or the DFT is less than required, the area shall be recoated in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and as approved by the Engineer.
DI Test pressure: The test pressure to be applied shall be 15 bars at the lowest point.
Page 12-149
f. Leakage Testing
In testing, the main shall be filled with clean water and properly vented to remove trapped air. After a period of 24
hours, the pressure shall be raised by pumping to the specified test pressure. Pumping shall then cease at 10 bars and
after a period of 24 hours, pumping shall be resumed and the quantity required to be pumped, in order to restore the test
pressure, divided by the time, shall be the measure of the rate of loss.
The length of main under test shall be deemed to have passed the test if the leakage does not exceed 0.1 litres per mm of
internal diameter per 24 hour per kilometre of pipeline per 30m of water pressure.
g. Jointing Ductile Iron Pipe

The jointing work for “push-in” or “mechanical” type of joint shall follow the following procedures unless otherwise
With “Push-In” Type Joint, jointing works shall proceed in the following order:
1. Lower pipes into the trench without damaging them
2. Remove all foreign material such as sand, mud, gravel, dirt and paint flakes.
3. Clean the rubber gasket and insert it into the socket in the following manner
i. For Diameter under 600mm,
• Form the gasket into a heart-shape, and insert the lower portion of the gasket into the groove of the
socket.
• Insert the remainder of the gasket into the Socket Groove making sure that the projection on the inside
of the sockets fits into the groove of the rubber gasket. The gasket shall not warp at any point.
• Confirm that the gasket is seated correctly.
ii. For Diameter greater than 600mm,
• Align the white marks of the rubber gasket with the marks on the face of the socket end and insert the
gasket into the socket in the form of a clover-leaf.
• Make sure that the projection on the inside of the socket fits into the groove of the rubber gasket. The
gasket shall not warp at any point.
• Confirm that the gasket is seated correctly under the socket.
• Apply lubricant to the internal surface of the gasket. The type of lubricant used shall be of that approved
by the Engineer.
• Clean the external surface of the spigot end and apply lubricant to the external surface of the spigot.
Ensure that the lubricant covers the entire end to the first white line of the spigot.
• Align the spigot with the gasket and attach the jointing tools as follows:
a) For Diameter Under 150mm,
• Attach the wire rope and set the fork into position
• Insert the spigot into the socket by pulling on the fork
b) For Diameter from 200mm – 600mm,
• Set the lever-block into the position. One (1) lever block shall be sufficient.
• Insert the spigot into the socket by pulling on the lever block
c) For Diameter from 700mm – 1200mm
• Set the lever-block into position. Two (2) lever blocks shall be sufficient.
• Insert the spigot into the socket by pulling on the lever block
• When first of the two white lines marked around the spigot disappears into the socket, the
jointing is finish
Jointing works shall proceed in the following order:
1. Make a bell hole the pipe socket and spigot to provide additional space for tightening bolts and nuts.
2. Clean the external surface of the spigot
3. Clean the gland and set the gland on the spigot
Page 12-150
4. Clean the rubber gasket and place it on the spigot. The gasket shall be placed about 200mm from the end of the
spigot.
5. Clean the internal surface of the socket and remove all foreign materials.
6. Apply lubricant to the external surface of the spigot and the gasket and to the internal surface of the socket.
Ensure that the lubricant covers the entire end to the first white line of the spigot.
7. Align the socket with the spigot and push the gasket into the clearance between the spigot and the socket.
8. Centre the gland, align the bolt holes and insert the bolts at the top and bottom then left and right side, tighten the
bolts slightly.
9. Insert the remaining bolts into the bolts holes and gradually tighten them.
10. Check tightness of all bolts and nuts with the use of a torque wrench. Correct torque for bolts and nuts is
specified in the following table:
Table 12-32 : Tightening Torque of Bolts & Nuts for Mechanical Joint
Torque Diameter of Pipe Recommended Average Handle

Bolt Size
(kgm) (mm) Length (mm)
M20 10 100 – 600 250
M24 14 700 – 800 350
M30 20 900 – 2,600 450
h. Tolerance on Dimensions
The tolerance on wall thickness, length, diameter and standard mass of DIP pipes and fittings shall be in accordance
with BS EN 545:2010 and BS EN598:2007 and or equivalent AWWA C209-06: .
By incorporating a stronger material, adding additional impact and tear requirements, eliminating the minus thickness
tolerance, incorporating marking requirements, and requiring an ultraviolet inhibitor for non-carbon black film, the
standard has been strengthened and will ensure a quality product for the end user and it shall be as in the below Table:
Table 12-33 : Quality product properties
Tensile Tensile Dielectric Impact Propagation Minimum
Elongation
Film Strength Strength Strength Resistance Tear Resistance Thickness
(%)
(psi) (lbs/in) (V/mil) (grams) (gram force) (mil)
LLDPE 3.600 28.8 800 800 600 2.550 8
HDCLPE 6.300 25.2 100 800 800 250 4
12.19.1.8 UPVC Pipes and Fittings

The uPVC pipes and fittings to be supplied shall be of classes C, D or E as specified on the Contract plans and shall be
All the Upvc pipes and fittings shall be manufactured in the Emirates of Dhabi. For storm water drains and sewers, they
shall be Class 10 for under traffic and Class 6 for no traffic areas as defined in ISO 4422(2.0) and for services ducts
they shall be Class 10 as defined in DIN 8061 (1.0MPa) unless otherwise stated.
Subject to the specified requirements of this Section, the plain ended pipes shall be manufactured in accordance to MS
628:1982 or BS 3505:1968. The bell mouthed pipes, with one ended bell mouthed and one plain ended shall be
manufactured in accordance to MS 628:1982 and BS 4346 Part 2:1970. uPVC joints and fittings shall be manufactured
in accordance to BS 4346 Part 1:1969 and BS 4346 Part 2:1970.
The bell mouthed socket shall be manufactured in accordance to BS 4346 Part II. The pipes shall conform to the
standards as stated unless specifically or otherwise stated in this specification.
a. Materials
The material used in the manufacture pipes, joints and fittings shall consist substantially of polyvinyl chloride, to which
may be added only those additives that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of the polymers, and the
production of finish, mechanical strength and capacity.
None of these additives shall be used separately or together in quantities sufficient to constitute a toxic hazard, or to
impair the fabrication or welding properties of the pipes, joints and fittings in particular long term mechanical strength
and impact strength.
Page 12-151
The addition of the manufacturer’s own rework material produced during the manufacture and works testing of pipes,
joints and fittings complying with this specification is permissible. No other rework material shall be used.
The dispersion of all ingredients in the material composition shall be informed.
If tin stabilizers are used for joints and fittings, these shall be only dialkyl tin C4 and higher homologues.
When tested by method 120B of BS 2782 (Methods of Testing Plastics), the deformation temperature of the material
under load shall not lower than 75 degrees Centigrade.
b. Classification
The pipes, joints and fittings shall be classified in accordance to the Maximum Permissible Working Pressure as in the
below Table:
Table 12-34 : Classification of uPVC Pipe
Maximum permissible working pressure
Class of pipe At 20 deg. C At 30 deg C
C 9 bar 7.2 bar
D 12 bar 9.6 bar
E 15 bar 12.0 bar
c. Tolerance and Dimensions

Mean tolerances on outside diameters shall conform to the requirements of below table. An out of roundness tolerance
of + / - 0.55 percent on mid mean outside diameter is permitted.
A tolerance of +3mm –10mm shall be allowed on the length of an individual pipe but the total length of pipe supplied
shall be not less than the total length ordered.
Table 12-35 : Mean tolerances on outside diameter of uPVC Pipe
Mean outside Out of
Nom. Size
diameter roundness Wall Thickness (mm)
(mm)
(mm) (ovality (mm)
Avg. PN 12 Individual Avg. PN 15 Individual value
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
10 17.0 17.3 17.0 17.3 - - - 1.9 1.5 1.9
15 21.2 21.5 21.2 21.5 - - - 2.1 1.7 2.1
20 26.6 26.9 26.6 26.9 - - - 2.5 1.9 2.5
25 33.4 33.7 33.3 33.8 - - - 2.7 2.2 2.7
32 42.1 42.4 42.0 42.5 - - - 3.2 2.7 3.2

40 48.1 48.4 48.0 48.5 - - - 3.7 3.1 3.7
50 60.2 60.5 60.0 60.7 - - - 4.5 3.9 4.5
65 75.0 75.3 74.8 75.5 - - - 5.5 4.8 5.5
80 88.7 89.1 88.4 89.4 5.3 4.6 5.3 - - -

100 114.1 114.5 113.7 114.9 6.8 6.0 6.9 - - -
125 140.0 14.4 139.4 141.0 8.3 7.3 8.4 - - -
155 168.0 168.5 167.4 169.1 9.9 8.8 10.2
175 193.5 194.0 192.8 194.7 11.4 10.1 11.7 - - -

200 218.8 219.4 218.0 220.2 11.6 10.3 11.9 - - -
225 244.1 244.8 243.2 245.7 12.9 11.5 13.3 - - -
250 272.6 273.4 271.6 247.4 14.3 12.8 14.8 - - -
300 323.4 324.3 322.2 325.5 17.0 15.2 17.5 - - -

350 355.0 356.0 353.7 357.3 18.6 16.7 19.2 - - -
375 405.9 406.9 404.3 408.5 21.1 19.0 21.9 - - -
400 456.7 457.7 454.9 459.5 23.8 21.4 24.6 - - -
Page 12-152
d. Joints
The pipes to be supplied shall have an integral bell-mouth socket formed on one end for mechanical rubber ring joint
conforming to the relevant sections of BS 4346 Part 2.
The plain end of the pipes shall be chamfered to facilitate insertion during jointing.
A witness mark should be put in on the cut end of the pipe.
Rubber ring shall be factory fitted in the ring housing of the pipe by the manufacturer in the correct way as to
specification unless otherwise stated.
The rubber ring shall have the retaining capabilities to hold itself in the housing without causing displacement during
handling, storage and installation of the pipe.
The rubber ring shall be of type:
a) The type which employ compression sealing system
b) The type which employ a combination of lip compression sealing system
The uPVC coupler joints shall be suitable for use with plain ended uPVC pipes. Each coupler joint shall consist of a
uPVC sleeve suitable for jointing two rubber rings set in plain grooved ends. The rubber rings shall be manufactured of
natural rubber complying with the requirements of Type 1 of BS 2494 Part 1 (1976).
The completed joint shall be watertight when the pipes are deflected at angles up to 5 degrees and subjected to (3.6 +/-
0.1) times the Maximum Permissible Working Pressure specified.
e. Pipe Seal
The seal shall consist of flexible of rubber element of effectively seal against the spigot and socket, and a reinforcing
plastic element bonded to the rubber element to hold the seal firmly.
The seal material shall be EPDM rubber in 60 +/- 5 IRHD hardness and meets the requirement of ASTM F-477 and EN
681-1.
The material is approved for contact with cold potable water as in BS 6920 Part
Depending on the request of the client, seals can be supplied either fitted in the pipe groove or separately in a proper
sealed packaging boxes to retain the quality of the seals over a long period.
Each seal shall be marked with pipe dimension, manufacturing period and relevant standards used in the manufacturing.
The rubber ring shall have the retaining capabilities minimum of 5 kgf for ND 100mm and below and 9 kgf for sizes
ND 155mm.
For pipe Installation and construction specifications refer to Article 12.1.4.5 and Article 12.19.3.1.
f. Hydrostatic Testing of uPVC Pressure Pipelines

Divide pressure pipelines into sections not exceeding 500m in length. Test each section separately.
a. Before pressure testing is started, re-check the pipes and the valves for cleanliness, and recheck the operation of
all valves. Cap off the open ends of the pipeline (or sections thereof) with blank flanges or cap ends additionally
secured where necessary with temporary struts and wedges. Complete all anchor and thrust blocks and fasten
securely all pipe straps and other devices intended to prevent the movement of pipes.
b. Apply test pressure to the entire pipeline or section being tested toeither the design test pressure specified in the
drawings or 1.5 times the working pressure, 1.5 times the surge pressure or 1.5 times the pump closed valve
pressure, whichever is the greatest. Unless otherwise specified herein, working pressure for all pumping mains is
6 bar and the design test pressure is 9 bar. Immediately prior to commissioning, complete the pipeline and retest
the entire pipeline.
c. Fill each pipeline or section with water and displace all free air from the pipeline.
d. Raise the pressure in the pipeline by pumping water until the highest of the working pressure/surge
pressure/pump closed valve pressure is attained in the lowest part of the section.
e. Maintain at this level by further pumping until it is steady for a period of not less than 24 hours.
f. Monitor the pipeline over a period of 24 hours without further pressurisation.
g. At the end of this period, measure the reduced pressure in the pipeline, the original test pressure restored by
Page 12-153
pumping and the loss measured by drawing off water or air from the pipeline until the pressure has fallen to
match the reduced pressure previously noted.
h. Ensure that the loss does not exceed 0.02 litre per millimetre of pipe diameter per kilometre of pipe per day for
each bar of head applied.
i. If the pipeline fails the test, locate the faults, repair and retest the pipeline until it passes.
j. Visually inspect all exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints during the tests.
k. After satisfactory completion of the 24 hour period test, bring the pipeline to test pressure and maintain it at this
pressure, by pumping if necessary, for one hour. Disconnect the pumping and no water is allowed to enter the
pipeline for a further period of two hours.
l. At the end of the two hours period, restore the original test pressure by pumping water into the pipeline.
Determine the volume of makeup water required to achieve the test pressure specified and deemed to represent
the cumulative loss during the two hour period of test.
m. Ensure the loss does not exceed the limit stated in ‘f’ above. If the pipeline fails the test,locate and repair the
faults and repeat the test.
n. Ensure that all valves in the pipeline are satisfactorily operating under working pressure and that the pipelines
have been finally cleaned out as specified hereafter.
o. Do not test pipes against closed valves.
For testing of Non pressure pipe refer to Article 12.1.5.2.
g. Particular Requirements for uPVC Testing

The following table mentions the minimum, particular, requirements/tests to be carried out at the frequency. The
standards mentioned here are for specific compliance and not general. Nevertheless this in no way replaces your and
any other body’s testing regime. All test Certificates shall be retained for at least 10 years for any inspection.
Table 12-36 : Particular, requirements for uPVC testing
No Test Specs. Test Method Freq. Remarks

1 Weights @ 1.44g/cm3 DIN 8062 ASTM D729 D
2 Marking DIN 8062 - F Contract No Also, every 2 m
3 Short Term Hydro Test ISO 161/1 ISO 1167 A DIN 8062 also
4 EPDM Gasket Tests EN 681-1 EN 681-1 C EPDM instead of rubber
5 Impact ISO 3127 ISO 3127 B TIR < 10%
ASTM
6 Joints Tightness(each size/class) ASTM D4161 D @ 12m head, instead
D4161
7 Water Absorption DIN 8061 DIN 8061 D
8 Vicat Softening ISO 2057 ISO 2057 D < 79 Degree C
9 Heat Reversion BS 3505 ISO 2505 A
10 Tensile Strength & Elongation ISO 3502 ISO 3504 B
11 Opacity ISO 3474 ISO 3474 A
12 H2SO4 Resistance ISO 3472 ISO 3472 D
If ISO 161/1 then tolerance ISO
13 Outer Diameter DIN 8062 ISO 3126 A
3606
If ISO 4065 then tolerance ISO
14 Wall thickness DIN 8062 ISO 3126 A
3606
15 Resistance Acetone ISO 3472 ISO 3472 A
16 Loss on Ignition ASTM D2584 B No more than 10% residue.
17 10K Hours Pressure Test BS 3505 BS 3505 E First one within 2 years,
Freq Legend: A-Every Shift; B-Monthly; C-yearly; D-Once a Contract; E-5 Yearly; F-Every Pipe
Page 12-154
12.19.2 Placement of magnetic warning tapes

The Contractor shall furnish and place warning tapes during backfilling work over any cables, pipelines, conduits, pipe
sleeves and ducts. Warning tapes shall be installed over any existing utilities uncovered by the Contractor, over new
utilities constructed by the Contractor and over any buried cables, pipe lines, conduits, pipe sleeves and ducts included
in the Works.
Warning tapes shall be placed on the compacted backfill material approximately thirty centimetres below finished grade
The warning tapes shall be high quality, acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene film a minimum of 15 cm wide, a
minimum thickness of 150 microns and with a minimum strength of 125 kg.cm2 lengthwise and 105kg/cm2 crosswise
with an elongation factor of 350 percent.
• Warning tapes shall be colored and inscribed for identification as follows:
• Utility Colour Inscription
• Electric Cable Red Caution - Buried Electric Cable
• Telephone Cables Green Caution – Buried Telephone cable
• Waterlines Blue Caution – Water Pipeline
• Stormwater / Sewer / Irrigation Pipelines Yellow Caution – Sewer Irrigation Pipe Lines
• Traffic Control System Orange Caution - Traffic Control Cable
The printed inscriptions shall be of a permanent black lettering and shall be spaced a maximum of two meters (2M) on
center printed alternately in English and Arabic. The colors shall be vivid, permanent and glossy with a life expectancy
equal to the utility line which it marks.
The warning tapes shall be placed with the inscription facing up.
12.19.3 Construction requirements

12.19.3.1 Pipe installation
Pipeline installation shall meet the following requirements:
a. General
1. Maximum buried depth for pipes shall be 9 meters, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer according to
bedding factor calculations.
2. Minimum cover depth shall be 900 mm, or as shown on the Contract plans, measure from the top of the pipe
to the finished grade level
3. Where trenches are required to be deeper than the general depth mentioned above, the Contractor shall dig
the trench to this required depth with a gradual slope necessary for the proper laying of the pipeline
4. Pipelines shall not be vertically closer than 300 mm to other pipelines, services or structures
5. Continuous temporary fencing suitable to protect the general public shall be provided
6. Trial holes shall be carried out as necessary to confirm existing soil conditions and determine exact location
of utilities or other obstructions. Trial holes shall be made using manual excavation (per requirements of
Article 2.4.2.12, Manual excavation, Chapter 2, or other suitable means, as approved by the Engineer.
7. Line and level of pipes shall be as shown on the Contract plans.
i. Contractor shall not make any deviation from the specified lines or levels without the written approval
of the Engineer.
ii. Unless instructed by the Engineer, any deviation in line and / or levels, along with any additional
excavation, dewatering, backfilling, thrust blocks, valves, air and vacuum assemblies, blow off
assemblies, extra pipe lengths, chambers or other appurtenances which may be required, shall be at the
cost of the Contractor.
8. When the work is carried out adjacent to or across the line of existing services the Contractor shall be
responsible for maintaining all services and utilities. A detailed method statement shall be prepared by the
Page 12-155
contractor and Prior approval from the concerned agency/authority shall be obtained before starting the work.
b. Excavation
1. Trench excavation shall meet the applicable requirements of Section 2.4, Roadway excavation, and the
additional requirements as specified herein
2. All trench excavation work shall be performed in dry conditions maintained in accordance with the
requirements of Article 2.4.2.3, Chapter 2, of these standard specifications,
3. Before commencing the trench excavations, the route of the trench shall be pegged out accurately and the
existing ground level surveyed and recorded as agreed with the Engineer.
4. If obstructions are encountered during excavation, the Contractor will make necessary changes on the shop
drawings and submit the amended Contract plansto the Engineer for review and approval.
5. For dewatering refer to Chapter 2 Article 2.4.2.3 of these standard specifications.
6. Trench excavation shall not be permitted until the pipes and fittings to be laid in the trench are available on
site. Length of excavation in advance of pipe laying may be limited by the Engineer
7. In general, selected (materials tested and passed all soil sieve requirements) excavated materials shall be used
in the backfill, unless the material is found to be unsuitable
8. For shallow excavations shall be stepped back at a safe and stable slope no steeper than 1 vertical to 1
horizontal
9. Where stepped back excavations are not feasible (deep excavation, soil condition), Contractor shall use trench
boxes, caissons, sheet piling or other means of soil support as approved by the Engineer
10. Trench width is dependent on the nature of the ground, depth, and pipe size
11. Clear width of the trench at any level shall be a minimum of one pipe diameter, plus 300mm (±50 mm). In all
cases the trench shall be excavated sufficiently to ensure efficient laying and jointing of the pipes
12. Bottom of the trenches shall be properly trimmed off and compacted to provide a firm and uniform bearing at
formation level. Minimum bearing value shall be 150kN/m2. Bearing value shall be verified by dynamic cone
penetrometer test per ASTM D6951.
13. If loose or unsuitable soil is encountered at formation level, such material shall be removed as directed by the
Engineer and replaced with concrete or approved granular material
14. When excavating to designated formation levels or to specified limits, the Contractor shall not excavate the last
150 mm until immediately before commencing construction work. If, the Contractor excavates the last 150 mm
before he is ready or able to commence the work, he may be required to remove and replace additional material
when directed by the Engineer. Any such further excavation and replacement of additional foundation material
ordered by the Engineer shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
15. Should the trench bottom while acceptable to the Engineer at the time of his inspection, subsequently become
puddled, soft or loose due to exposure or flooding during the progress of the works, the Contractor shall
remove such damaged softened or loosened material and replace it with approved material as directed by the
Engineer.
16. Care shall be taken to prevent excess excavation beyond designated levels or limits. Any excess excavation
from the bottom or sides of the trench shall be filled with the designated pipe surround material, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
c. Pipe jointing and Installation

1. Trench excavation and backfill shall be carried out expeditiously. Refilling and surface reinstatement of trench
excavations shall be commenced and completed as soon as reasonably practicable after the pipes have been
laid and jointed.
2. Pipe laying shall follow closely upon the progress of trench excavation. Contractor shall not permit
unreasonably excessive lengths of trench excavation to remain open while waiting testing of the pipeline.
3. Contractor shall take precautions to prevent flotation of pipes in locations where open trench excavations may
become flooded. This may include the partial refilling of the trench leaving pipe joints exposed for tests of the
joints, or any other methods approved by the Engineer. If flotation has occurred, the Contractor shall remove
and replace the pipes after drying the trench, unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
Page 12-156
4. Placing pipe surround: Pipe surround shall be placed as follows, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer:
i. Granular pipe surround:
a) Approved geotextile shall be placed completely around all granular pipe surround.
b) Trench formation shall be smooth and free from debris.
c) Geotextile shall be placed loosely with no wrinkles or folds.
d) Void spaces shall not be left between the geotextile and ground surface.
e) Successive sheets of geotextile shall be overlapped a minimum of 300 mm with the upstream sheet over
lapping the downstream sheet.
f) Geotextile shall be folded over the pipe surround material in a manner to produce a minimum overlap of
300 mm.
g) If the geotextile is damaged during installation or aggregate placement, a geotextile patch shall be
placed over the damaged area extending beyond the damaged area a minimum distance of 300 mm
h) Placement of bedding material (granular pipe surround) shall proceed immediately following the
placement of geotextile
i) Granular pipe surround shall be placed across the full width of the excavated trench
j) Thickness of granular pipe surround below the pipe shall be as shown on the Contract plans
k) Granular pipe surround material shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 200 mm with one pass of
plate vibrator or other approved equivalent mechanical method
l) Hand tamping will only be permitted where insufficient space is available to allow the use of
mechanical equipment
m) Bedding layer shall be shaped to match the bottom ¼ diameter circumference of the pipe. Additional
shaping shall be provided for joint bells, such that the pipe is supported uniformly along the barrel of
the pipe, and not on the joint.
n) After jointing and laying of the pipe, granular pipe surround shall be brought up equally on both sides of
the pipe and carefully compacted in layers not exceeding 200 mm thickness
o) Ensure pipe surround is in contact with the underside of the pipe barrel.
p) Thickness of bedding material above the crown of pipe shall be as shown on the Contract plans
q) Particular care shall be given to avoid damage to pipe or geotextile.
r) Where practicable the placing and compaction of backfill material shall be carried out in sequence with
the removal of trench supports, unless the Contractor is instructed to leave them in place as directed by
the Engineer
ii. Concrete pipe surround:
a) Where indicated on the Contract plans, or ordered by the Engineer, pipe shall be encased with Class
C20 concrete in accordance with the details shown on the Contract plans
b) Approved polythene sheeting (10 mil. thick) shall be placed below blinding and around concrete pipe
surround, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer
c) Concrete shall not be placed until the joints at each end of the pipe have been completed
d) All joints shall be wrapped with a suitable self-adhesive membrane at least 300 mm wide, to prevent
grout entry into the joint
e) Trench bottom and sides to depth of required concrete surround, shall be covered with 1.5 mm thick
waterproof sheeting beneath the pipe barrel.
f) Pipes shall be initially supported above the trench bottom using pre-cast concrete blocks. Blocks shall
be laid accurately to line and level.
g) Concrete surround shall be placed in a sufficient number of lifts to prevent pipes from floating or
moving
h) Concrete shall first be placed on one side of the pipe in order to be worked under the pipe along its full
length to ensure that no voids develop
Page 12-157
i) Concrete shall then be brought up equally on both sides of the pipe until the required level is reached
j) All concrete pipe surround must be vibrated to assure proper consolidation, but care must be taken to
avoid floating the pipe
k) If the surround is cast in one operation, measures shall be taken to secure the pipe from floating or
moving. These measures must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of the operation
l) Continuity of the concrete pipe surround shall be broken at each joint
m) Discontinuities in concrete pipe surround shall be provided over their full cross sectional area at each
pipe joint with approved filler board.
n) Unless otherwise noted on the Contract plans, the thickness of filler board shall be:
1) 18 mm for pipe diameter less than 450 mm
2) 36 mm for pipe diameters 450-1200 mm
3) 50 mm for pipe diameters greater than 1200 mm
o) Cure concrete pipe surround with polythene sheeting over the top at least 24 hours immediately after
placement.
d. PE Pipes Joining
All PE pipes shall be joined by fully automatic butt fusion welding equipment. All PE pipes specials and tapping
saddles shall be joined by fully automatic electro fusion equipment.
e. Automatic Butt Fusion Welding Machine

The full set of Automatic Butt Fusion welding machine shall comprise the following:
1. Chassis and Clamps which are sufficiently robust to accurately align the pipe to be jointed and have insert rings
to fit different pipe diameters up to 315mm nominal outer diameter.
2. Hydraulic/Pneumatic Unit capable of actuating the clamp unit to provide adequate force and speed of operation
for pipes diameter up to 315mm nominal outer diameter. The pressure required shall be automatically set and
calculated by the control box.
3. Trimming/Planning Tool capable of being mounted securely within the frame of the jointing machine, to
prevent twist during trimming and planning to produce accurately matched planed surface.
4. (d) Electrically operated heating plate with temperature controller for a uniform temperature range of between
200 to 220 deg. C. The plate shall be uniformly coated with teflon having adequate release properties and fitted
with an accurate temperature probe using a digital thermometer.
5. Control Box designed to carry out the operations automatically for pipes diameter up to 315 nominal outer
diameter with the following facilities:
i. Automatic interlock of the entire joint cycle with correct heater temperature;
ii. Ambient temperature compensation at bead-up; nominal dwell time less than two seconds; constant
monitoring of pipe slippage;
iii. Automatic monitoring of cooling cycle;
iv. Identification of real time; date; job and operator for every joint;
v. Pipe selection programme specific to material type; diameter and
vi. SDR rating;
vii. Automatic recognition of dual pressure welding conditions for thick wall pipes;
viii. Complete data retrieval facility for all joints via a data printer or electronic transfer to comply with
BS 5750:Part 1 4.9.2 on special processes;
6. Audible alarm to alert operator at critical stages.
Portable Generators of brushless alternator construction complete with voltage stability consistent with TIN-12
specification: alternator to be capable of providing a 10% overload facility. Generators to be rated to the appropriate
fusion application and the equipment as specified by the manufacturer
Page 12-158
The Butt Fusion jointing procedure shall be as follows:

1. Cleaning of the trimming tool and the Heater plate. The trimming tool shall be cleaned with water and lint free
materials. The heater plate shall be cold when cleaned with soap and water lint free materials. The heater plate
shall be cleaned at the start of each working day by making a dummy joint. The joint shall be cut-off before
actual jointing work is conducted.
2. Trimming of pipe ends.
Before trimming, the pipe ends shall be wiped clean on both the inner and outer surfaces to remove mud or dust
with a damp cloth. The pipe ends shall then be cut square to remove any embedded hard particles or
stones using a universal or other approved PE pipe cutter. The pipe shall be dry prior to proceeding. The pipes
shall then be positioned in the clamps with pipe makings aligned. This will assist in obtaining best match in
diameter. The pipes clamps are then tightened to grip and reround the pipes. The pipe ends shall then be
trimmed and planed with the trimming tool mounted onto the machine until continuous shavings are produced
from each pipe end.
Bevel and clean outer and inner edges of loose shavings and check the pipe end for alignment. The pipe ends
trimmed surface shall not be touched or handed to prevent contamination of the clean surfaces before fusion.
The pipe ends shall not have any visible gap when the ends are brought together. The maximum outside
diameter mismatch of the pipe ends, measured by a depth gauge, shall not be more than 10% of the pipe wall
thickness when the pipe ends are brought together for pipes up to 315 ND. If the mismatch is greater, the pipe
shall be realigned and replanned until permitted tolerance is obtained.
3. Automatic jointing
The operator shall check that the machine is levelled with appropriate levelling apparatus, input operator code,
identify pipe materials and diameter and after inspecting trimming start the automatic fusion cycle. All joints
shall be assigned a number and shall be marked on the pipe by suitable marker approved by the Engineer and
also recorded on drawings. A log book recording joints data shall be kept by the Contractor on site for the
inspection of the Engineer.
The full set of Automatic Electrofusion machine shall include the following:
1. Automatic Electrofusion Control Box capable of operating in a fully automatic mode compatible with the
integral heating elements of all electrofusion fittings for pipes up to 315mm nominal outer diameter used in this
Contract. There shall be a complete data retrieval facility for all joints to be undertaken via a data printer or a
data transfer unit.
2. Potable Generator as specified for the automatic butt fusion machine.
3. The generator shall be rated to the appropriate electrofusion application as specified by the manufacturers of the
fittings.
4. Universal main alignment and restraint clamps units with insert rings for pipe sizes up to 315mm nominal outer
diameter, multi- functional for couplers, elbows and tees.
5. Alignment and restraint underclamp bottom-loaded saddle kits and G- clamps for pipe sizes up to 315mm
nominal outer diameter.
The Electrofusion jointing procedure shall be as follows:
1. Trimming of pipe ends square axis and any burrs removed. Check pipes and fittings for correct fit into couplers.
If the pipes are found to be too oval to fit into couplers, the pipes shall be rerounded by on approved mechanical
pipe rerounding tool or a straight length of suitable round pipe be fused onto the end before jointing.
2. Clean pipe ends and prepare pipe ends with universal scraper or approved surface preparation tool capable of
removing the oxidised surface of the pipe ends for length in excess of insertion depth. For tapping tees and
saddles the general area in excess of the saddle base area shall be cleaned to the satisfaction and approved by the
Engineer. The tool shall remove a layer 0.2 – 0.4mm thick from the outer surface preferably as a continuous
strip of swarf over that length and round the pipe or for the full area of saddle base. Hand scrapers of the Harris
type’ or equivalent are allowed for tapping tees and saddles.
The prepared area shall then be cleaned with acetone or other approved solvent. The prepared pipe surface shall
not be handled or contaminated prior to welding.
3. The electrofusion fittings or tapping tees shall be removed from packaging and degreased with acetone or other
approved solvent prior to insertion to pipe ends or clamp onto pipe. The insertion depth is than marked by
suitable marker by inserting the couplers/fittings up to the center stop.
Page 12-159
4. Using correct sized pipe clamps or saddle clamps, secure the pipe fittings. The alignment and gaps between the
pipes and fittings shall be checked by depth gauges. The total gaps between the pipe outer diameter and fittings
shall not exceed 2% of the pipes nominal outer diameter. The fittings shall be adjusted with suitable wedges, if
required, to axially align the pipes centrally in the fittings.
Electrofusion shall then only be allowed to proceed after complying with the above checks.
5. On completion, the melt indicators of the fusion fittings should appear. If there is no apparent movement of the
melt indicators, the joint shall be cut out and a new joint be made.
The joint shall be left in the clamps for the cooling time specified for the fittings or tapping tees.
6. The main shall not be tap with the integral built-in cutter until the joints or saddles have been approved by the
Engineer.
Jointing and laying:
1. In general, plastic PE pipes (fusion welded) and PVC pipes (solvent joints) shall be jointed before being placed
in the trench.
2. Push fit and flanged jointing shall be performed in the trench, with additional excavation carried out to provide
extra space around the couplings. These shall be large enough to allow unhindered jointing of the pipes
3. All pipes, fittings, valves etc. shall be carefully lowered into the trench with suitable equipment in a manner that
will prevent damage. All foreign matter shall be removed from inside the pipe or fitting before being lowered
into position.
4. Pipes shall be laid with identification marks uppermost
5. At the close of a day or whenever pipe laying is not in progress the open ends of the installed pipe shall be closed
by an approved cap or blank to prevent the entrance of ground water or any other foreign matter. Under no
circumstances shall pipes be used for the storage of tools etc. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that
the pipeline is clear and free of all foreign matter at all times.
6. Sufficient surround material and/or backfill shall be placed on the pipe to prevent floatation. Any pipe that has
floated shall be removed from the trench and re-laid in a dry trench
7. Pipe shall be laid and jointed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations except as modified in this
Section
8. Each Section of pipe shall be fitted together correctly and shall be laid true to line and grade in accordance with
the bench marks established by the Contractor
9. Any pipe which is not in true alignment, both vertically and horizontally, or shows any undue settlement after
laying, shall be taken up and re-laid correctly by the Contractor at his own expense
10. For granular pipe surround, all adjustments in line and grade shall be made by scraping away or filling and
tamping under the barrel of the pipe; not by wedging or blocking.
11. Spigot and socket pipes shall be laid upgrade without break from structure to structure and with the socket end
upgrade
12. Ground water shall be kept below the joint when jointing
13. Pipes shall be laid in straight lines, both in the horizontal and vertical planes, unless deflected joints are approved
by the Engineer.
14. For pipe lines laid in trenches, the permissible tolerance shall be as follows:
i. Vertical deviation: plus or minus 3 mm
ii. Horizontal deviation from the centreline at any point: plus or minus 12 mm.
15. Excavator buckets shall not be used to push joints home.
16. Pipe sections shall be so laid and fitted together that the pipeline will have a smooth and uniform interior.
17. All pipelines adjoining structures shall have a flexible joint as detailed on the Contract plans
18. For pipeline jointing systems incorporating flexible jointing rings a gap shall be left between the ends of the
pipe, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer
19. Before making any joints the Contractor shall ensure that the interior of each pipe or fitting is clean and that it
remains clean
Page 12-160
20. Immediately before starting a joint, the Contractor shall clean the end of each pipe to be joined and shall
otherwise specially prepare the ends for jointing as may be necessary for the particular kind of joint.
21. Contractor shall use only the proper jointing materials (solvents, gaskets, nuts, bolts, washers, lubricants, etc.) as
obtained from the approved supplier for the specified pipe service and exposure conditions
22. Only approved lubricant (or soap) provided by the pipe manufacturer may be utilized on gaskets. Axel grease or
chassis grease is never allowed
23. All joints shall be accurately made and shall be capable of passing the designated tests for individual joints and
for the completed pipeline as may be specified.
24. Graphite grease shall be applied to the threads of bolts before mechanical or flanged joints are made
25. After completing a joint, any damaged paint or coating shall be restored, and any metal joint which is not already
coated shall be cleaned and painted with two coats of pure epoxy paint or other painting system approved by the
Engineer.
26. Anchorage of joints at bends and discontinuities:
i. Anchorage lugs shall be provided for socket, spigot fittings and socket clamps and tie rods used on all
pipes under pressure
ii. Concrete thrust blocks may be used in lieu of the above where socket and spigot pipe is used below
ground subject to the availability of adequate space and approval of the Engineer.
iii. For Joint in concrete encasement refer to Article 12.1.4.5.
iv. For More detail on thrust and anchor blocks refer to Article 12.19.3.3.
27. For the purpose of reducing the angular deflections at pipe joints, and for closure sections, the Contractor may be
permitted to install pipe sections of less than standard length with the Engineers approval
28. Closing pieces and short sections of pipe shall be fabricated and installed by the Contractor as deemed necessary
in the field
29. Contractor shall be responsible for taking the measurements required to determine the lengths of short portions
of pipes for insertion as closing lengths in pipelines.
30. Pipe and methods of jointing shall be such that the locations of fittings and lengths of pipe can be adjusted in the
field to suit field conditions and variations in stationing.
31. Cutting of pipes for inserting specials, fittings or closure pieces shall be carried out in professional manner with
an approved cutting machine described below in order to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the
pipe:
i. Cutting ring for nominal diameter 100 to 150 mm
ii. Cutting chain for nominal diameter 100 to 450 mm
iii. Disc cutter for all diameters if approved by the Engineer.
iv. Cut ends of pipes all shall be properly chamfered
v. Only experienced men shall be employed by the Contractor cutting pipe.
vi. Contractor shall take every precaution to ensure that both the measurements and the cutting of pipes are
to the accuracy required.
32. Building-in pipes:
i. All buried pipes built into a concrete wall or structure shall be provided with two flexible joints adjacent
to the structure.
ii. For flexible pipes (uPVC,GRP), the first joint shall be at the exterior face of the structure and the
second shall be at 1.5 x the pipe dia. or 500 mm minimum away from the structure
iii. For rigid pipes (steel, RC) the 2nd joint may be at a typical pipe length.
iv. Pipes which extended more than 100 mm beyond concrete wall shall be protected with a concrete
surround (nib) built integral with the external face of the structure
v. All internal and external protection membranes to the concrete structure shall be sealed around the pipe
openings as recommended by the membrane manufacturer
vi. Any over-excavation adjacent to a structure and/or beneath the formation level of a pipeline, either to be
Page 12-161
constructed under the Contract or in a future Contract, shall be backfilled with Class C35 concrete.
33. Deflection at curves:
i. If approved by the Engineer, a change of direction in either the horizontal or vertical planes may be
made by deflecting straight pipes provided the amount of joint deflection does not exceed 75 % of the
manufacturer’s recommended maximum value and subject to satisfactory performance of the joints
ii. Where a change of direction cannot be made by deflection at the joints of ordinary straight pipes, bends
shall be used.
iii. Locations of such bends and other specials are indicated on the Contract plans and their exact positions
will be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
iv. All pressure pipelines shall be secured at all changes in direction by concrete anchor blocks and or by
the provision of restrained joints shall comply with BS EN 1092-2: 1997.
34. After jointing, the interior of the pipes shall be free from any dirt, stones or other matter that may have entered
them. For this purpose, a rubber disc, brush or other suitable implement that will not harm the internal lining of
the pipe shall be pulled through the pipe after jointing.
f. Hydrostatic Pipe Testing

General:
1. Pressure pipelines shall be given an interim pressure test after placement of the pipe surround
2. Joints shall be left exposed to visually inspect for leaks
3. Pipeline shall be divided into sections not exceeding 500m in length, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
4. Proposed methods and program for testing including details of test equipment shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. Submittal for performing hydrostatic pressure tests for each section of pipeline shall
include:
i. Location and capacity of the test pump
ii. Test pressure at the pump as well as that at the highest and lowest points
iii. Procedures for venting the air from the pipeline
iv. Disposing the water after satisfactory testing
5. Test pressure shall be 1.5 times the operating pressure but shall not exceed 1.5 times the rated pressure.
6. Contractor shall provide all test rigs, gauges, pressure raising equipment pressure recording instruments and all
other necessary equipment to satisfactorily carry out the tests as specified
7. Gauges shall have a dial diameter. of 160 mm and be calibrated up to 30 bar maximum at intervals of 0.20 bar
and shall have calibration certificates from a recognised testing laboratory, dated not more than 1 month prior
to the date of the first test
8. All gauges and equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
9. Contractor shall supply an experienced test specialist, labour and supervision needed for the performance of
the tests and recording the results
10. Should any section fail to pass the tests, the Contractor shall determine the cause of the failure and shall repair
any damage or leakage sustained by the pipeline during the tests and retest the section. Cost of such repair
work, and the abortive test shall be borne by the Contractor
11. Before any testing work is implemented, the Contractor shall have the mains thoroughly cleaned out. All such
cleaning shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
12. No testing work may commence on any test section without the prior approval of the Engineer
13. Section under test shall be properly sealed off, with special stop end caps held securely in position by adequate
temporary anchorage, and filled with water
14. On completion of testing, the section of tested pipeline shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of any
extraneous matter, as approved by Engineer
15. Testing may be conducted on the system as well as in sections. Limiting test section size is determined by test
equipment capability as approved by the Engineer
Page 12-162
Testing procedure:
1. Principles: A closed pipe section is filled with water. An overpressure is applied in the pipe, following a
specified time/pressure scheme. At the end of the pressure test scheme, a small amount of water will be added
to the pipe volume to maintain a given constant pressure. Test shall pass or fail based on the volume of added
water.
2. Pipeline shall be filled with water. Pipeline shall be adequately vented during the filling operation to expel all
entrapped air. Line shall be filled slowly to prevent possible water hammer
3. After filling and before application of the test pressure, maintain the test section at the rated pressure for a
standing period of not less than 24 hours to achieve conditions as stable as possible for testing. Standing period
will commence from the time at which the rated pressure was reached successfully, after which all exposed
joints shall be carefully inspected for evidence of leakage If neither appreciable movement of the pipeline, nor
any leakage has been observed during the standing period, the section shall be subjected to the specified test
pressure
4. Pumping shall be resumed and the pressure slowly raised to the specified test pressure at the highest point in
the pipeline (or section under test) provided that the pressure at the lowest point of the pipeline (or section
under test) shall not exceed the maximum allowable test pressure
5. Specified test pressure shall be continuously maintained by the use of the pump for a period of at least 4 hours
and the amount of make up water required to maintain the pressure shall be accurately measured (to the nearest
1/8 litre) regularly every 30 minutes throughout the test
6. Pipeline shall be deemed to have passed the test if:
i. No water is visibly coming out of the pipe or joints at any point;
ii. Amount of make-up water required does not exceed the rate of 0.1 litre per millimetre of pipe diameter,
per kilometre of pipeline, per 24 hours for each 30 m head of pressure applied
iii. Maximum drop in pressure (during the last half hour of the test period, when no further make-up water
may be pumped in) shall not exceed 10 % of the maximum test pressure
7. During all testing, the trench and the joint pockets in particular shall be kept clear of water
8. Should the trench become unstable due to leaking from testing or re-testing, it shall be excavated to solid
ground and made up with lean mix concrete or such other material as the Engineer may direct, all at the
Contractor’s expense
9. A test fail, the Contractor shall at his own expense replace defective pipes or fittings, repair leaking joints or
otherwise rectify defective work
10. Cleaning, inspection and testing shall then be repeated until the work is accepted by the Engineer at no extra
cost to the Department of transport.
11. Final pressure testing:
i. After all the various pipe sections have been tested and successfully completed, all pressure lines shall
be given a final pressure test to be carried out on the entire length of the pipeline after all sections have
been joined together.
ii. Final pipeline test pressures and procedures shall be conducted as described above for each sectional
testing
iii. Valves and all pipeline appurtenances shall be hydraulically tested together with the pipeline in which
they are installed
12. Valves shall be tested for operation under working pressure
13. Valves shall be adjusted so that they operate smoothly, seat properly and are installed to tolerances
recommended by the manufacturer.
g. Backfilling
1. Trench backfill above the pipe surround shall meet the requirements of Sub-article 2.5.3.1c, Earth embankment
construction, Chapter 2, where under traffic and pedestrian pavements, or the requirements of Article 2.5.3.3,
Non-load-bearing fill placement, where outside of traffic and pedestrian pavement edges
2. Backfilling of trenches shall commence as soon as practicable after the pipeline works have been completed,
tested and approved by the Engineer
Page 12-163
3. No fill material shall be placed and no compaction shall be permitted adjacent to concrete structures until 70%
of the designated compressive strength has been reached
4. Buried marking tape shall be placed in the trenches above all pipes. Depth shall be 0.5 m below finished grade
5. Pipeline marker posts shall be placed over pressure pipelines at locations indicated on the Contract plans. All
labelling and lettering shall be complete before installation. Marker posts shall be set in concrete as shown on
the Contract plans. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to reflective sheeting and/or lettering.
h. Flushing
Before the commissioning of any pressure supply pipeline and before acceptance by the Engineer, the pipeline shall be
flushed. Pipeline shall be flushed with sufficiently high velocities to remove any sand or debris which has remained in
the pipelines. Velocities shall not be less than 0.75 m/s. Time required for flushing shall be at least the time required to
discharge 3 times the contents of the pipeline section to be flushed. Flushing water shall be disposed off in a manner
12.19.3.2 Joining of Dissimilar Pressure Pipes

For dissimilar pipes where standard adaptor couplings are not available, the jointing shall be accomplished with a
special fabricated gasketed coupling. Connections using concrete encasement without gasketed couplings are expressly
prohibited.
a. Plugs and connections. Plugs for pipe braches, stubs or other open ends which are not to be immediately
connected shall be made of an approved material and shall be secured in place with joint comparable to the main
line joints.
b. Pipe end plugs material shall have dimensional flexibility that ensures a leak proof seal on a range of pipe
materials including plastic, cast iron, RCP, steel ERP and duct i.e. Iron.
c. Plugs shall be made from ideal materials for capping pipe ends, cleanouts, open test pipes and are suitable for
underground use on plastic pipes, GRP Pipes, ductile iron pipes, GRP pipes ductile iron pipes, RCP pipes, cast
iron pipes and as per the contract specification.
a. Fittings
Provide fittings and materials necessary to make splices and connections of the underdrain and prefabricated edge
drains to outlet piping that conform to the manufacturer’s requirements and as shown on the Contract plans. Design of
fittings, connections and piping shall be consistent with the rest of the underdrain or prefabricated edge drain system
with regards to flow capacity and strength for all potential loads and to prevent soil intrusion into the fittings, couplings
and piping.
In cases where the prefabricated edge drain is terminated without an outlet, provide a blank plug fitting to prevent soil
intrusion into the end.
12.19.3.3 Thrust and Anchor Blocks for Pressure Pipes

Underground pressure pipelines shall be provided with concrete blocks as follows:
a. Thrust/anchor blocks shall be provided at every installed bend, tee or angle branch.
b. Anchor/thrust blocks shall be provided on pipelines laid to gradients steeper than 1:20, up to 1:15 every third
pipe shall be anchored, up to 1:10 every second pipe and at 1:15 every pipe shall be anchored. The Contractor
shall comply with the detail tender documents and shall submit design calculation for thrust forces and to be
approved by the owner.
c. The location of the concrete thrust block shall be in according to Abu Dhabi utility corridor design manual
(UCDM)
d. Contractor shall obtain construction NOC from all relevant authorities
e. Anchorage lugs shall be provided for socket, spigot fittings and socket clamps and tie rods used on all pipes
under pressure. Concrete thrust blocks may be used in lieu of the above where socket and spigot pipe is used
below ground subject to the availability of adequate space and approval of the Engineer. Unless otherwise
specified all metallic mechanical joints, flanged joints, ferrule and saddle straps shall be protected on site by the
cold application of an approved tape wrap. Application of tape with accessories and out wraps shall be strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
f. Restrained joints do not work in compression. Restrained joint can be used either to create a complete
Page 12-164
“restrained joint anchorage system” (as an alternative to concrete anchors or thrust blocks) or they can be used in
association with concrete anchors or thrust blocks. Some of the benefits of restrained joint anchorage system on
pressure pipelines are: No concrete is required. This is convenient in areas where the logistics of providing
concrete is difficult. They occupy no space outside of the pipe trench. This is convenient where space is at a
premium in congested service corridors, or where future interference by other utilities can be anticipated.
12.19.3.4 Testing of Pressure Pipelines

As soon as a length of pipe has been laid and before backfilling when applicable and when ordered it shall be subjected
to the following preliminary Test: air shall be pumped into the pipeline by suitable means until a pressure of 300mm
head of water is indicated on a water manometer and the test will not be satisfactory if the air pressure falls to less than
275mm during a period of 5 minutes. Pipelines shall be given a Final test using water after they have been backfilled,
cleaned and inspected.
Pipe lines shall be tested and Inspected as laying proceeds. This testing should be applied before any side fill is placed.
The pressure test shall be sustained for a period of 30 minutes and the volume of water required maintaining the test
pressure shall be determined in an approved manner. The test will not be considered satisfactory if the rate of loss of
water from full pipe exceeds 1 litre per hour per 100 mm diameter per kilometre of pipeline under test, or from an
individual joint test, if the loss of the pressure during the test period exceeds 70kN per square metre.
Each test shall be restricted to pipes of one class and wherever practicable the length of pipeline to be pressure tested at
one time shall not exceed 500 metres. Particular care must be taken to isolate air valves, etc, not to apply higher
pressure than specified at any point on the pipelines and to ensure that the pipelines are adequately anchored before any
test is carried out.
Wooden plugs shall be provided and maintained in all open ends of the pipelines so as to exclude silt and deleterious
matter until the pipelines are commissioned
12.19.3.5 Pipeline Valve Chambers

Pipeline valve chamber construction shall conform to the following items:
1. Valve chambers and/or junction chambers shall be constructed as shown on the Contract plans
2. All pipe fittings to be cast into chamber walls shall have a puddle flange with OD at least 25 % greater than the
OD of the pipe
3. Concrete work shall not begin until the pipe fittings to be cast into the chamber walls are on site. Thereafter the
chamber shall be cast, water-proofed and backfilled as quickly as possible
4. No box outs will be allowed. All pipes cast into chamber walls shall be fitted with a temporary internal jig to
assure proper alignment and flange orientation is maintained between all interconnecting pipes and fittings
during casting. Jigs may be made from uPVC pipes, GRP pipes or steel tubing
5. Unless otherwise shown/indicated on the Contract plans, all exterior surfaces below grade shall be covered with
water proofing membrane per requirements of the applicable clauses of these Standard specifications.
6. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract plans, all interior and exterior exposed surfaces shall be epoxy coated
per the requirements of the applicable clauses of these Standard specifications
7. Chamber covers in traffic areas shall be heavy duty meeting the requirements of Article 12.3.2.3 and set to the
paved area profile and be flush with the paved area surface
8. Chamber covers located in non-traffic areas shall be set to an elevation as shown on the Contract plans or as
directed by the Engineer and as per the Abu Dhabi Road Drainage Manual.
9. Ladders if shown on the Contract plans shall be of GRP meeting the requirements of Article 12.3.3.7
10. Hand railing, if shown on the Contract plans shall be aluminium meeting the requirements of Article 12.18.3.16.
11. All fixing bolts and other hardware shall be stainless steel 316
12. All chambers shall be watertight on completion
13. No testing for leakage of water into chambers shall be conducted, unless it is deemed necessary in the opinion of
the Engineer
14. Contractor shall take all precautions deemed necessary by the Engineer to ensure that chambers are not left in an
unprotected condition or used as rubbish and waste dumps. If the designated covers are not on site after casting
the cover slab, a temporary plywood cover shall be securely fitted in all openings.
Page 12-165
Index
abandonment, 35 outlet pipes for underdrains, 34
adjusting existing storm drain structure covers and pervious backfill, 32
grates to match new grades, 91 pipe backfill, 39
aluminium culvert pipe, 27 pipe bedding, 39
aluminium structural plate pipe, 27 pipe construction requirements, 35
bedding and backfill for flexible walled pipe, 39, 40 pipe culvert installation, 65
bedding and backfill for rigid or concrete pipe, 40 pipe handling, 17
cast-in-situ structure installation, 76 pipe headwall structures, 79
cement-treated permeable material, 34 pipe installation, 38
check valves, 138 plastic pipe, 28
chloride and sulphate protection, 24 polymer concrete precast drainage channel, 32
cleaning pipe, 49 polyvinylchloride (PVC) solid and perforated sewer
cleaning storm drains and structures, 92 pipe, 31
connections to existing drainage structures, 91 precast box culverts, 64
connections to existing storm drains, 54 pre-cast concrete riser sections, 73
corrugated steel pipe, 26 pre-cast structure installation, 74
corrugated steel structural plate, 27 pressure pipelines, 145
culvert end sections, 66 protective coatings and sealants, 73
culvert headwalls, 67 pumps, piping and controls, 107
culvert materials, 64 PVC liner, 24
culverts, 63 reinforced concrete pipe (RCP), 21
deflection testing, 52 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP), 20
ductile iron pipe, 149 riprap protection for culverts, 69
edge drains, 32 safety bars for culvert pipe, 68
exfiltration test, 50 sand, 33
fence, chain-link, 106 special manholes, utility bypass chambers and
fence, glare screen, 106 alternative inlet-catch basin and flush inlet structures,
fence, sand, 106 90
fence, temporary, 106 storm drains, 7
fence, wire, 106 stormwater structures, 69
flap gate, 138 structural excavation, 73
glass reinforced plastic (GRP) pipe, 17 submittals, 17
GRP ladders, 71 testing concrete pipe joints, 22
grp testing, 19 testing corrugated metal pipe, 28
heavy wall PVC perforated pipe, 30 testing corrugated PVC pipe, 30
house connection, flush inlet structure, grate, frame and testing ductile iron pipe, 149
pipe, 80 testing HDPE pipe, 29
hydrostatic pressure tests, 23 testing heavy wall PVC pipe, 30
infiltration test, 50 testing of PVC liners, 25
internal inspections, 52 testing of storm water drainage pipes, 49
laying concrete pipe, 42 testing pumps and controls, 139
laying flexible wall pipe, 46 testing pvc sewer pipe, 31
laying precast polyester concrete channels, 48 testing structures, 77
laying prefabricated edge drains, 47 trash racks, 97
laying underdrain, 47 trench excavation, 36
materials for stormwater structures, 69 trench shoring, 38
metal pipe, 26 trenchless pipe installation, 54
metal railing, 106 underdrains, 32
motor control centre, 117 video inspection, 52
offset roadway scuppers, 79
Page 12-166
PART 2
ROAD UTILITIES
CHAPTER 13 – LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

Chapter 13: Landscaping and Irrigation

Table of Contents
Table of Contents........................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
List of Tables ................................................................................................................................................................. 13-4
13 Landscaping and Irrigation ................................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1 Landscaping ................................................................................................................................................. 13-5
13.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 13-5
13.1.1.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1.1.2 Related Documents ......................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1.1.3 Reference Standards and Codes ...................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1.1.4 Quality Control ............................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1.1.5 Submittals ....................................................................................................................................... 13-7
13.1.1.6 Compliances .................................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.1.1.7 Site Conditions ................................................................................................................................ 13-9
13.1.1.8 Warranty ......................................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.1.2 Products ............................................................................................................................................. 13-10
13.1.2.1 Delivery, Storage and Handling .................................................................................................... 13-10
13.1.2.2 Agricultural Soils .......................................................................................................................... 13-10
13.1.2.3 Compost and Organic Manure ...................................................................................................... 13-11
13.1.2.4 Fertiliser ........................................................................................................................................ 13-12
13.1.2.5 Standards for Organic Fertilisers and Conditioners ...................................................................... 13-12
13.1.2.6 Standards for Inorganic Fertilisers ................................................................................................ 13-14
13.1.2.7 Irrigation Water ............................................................................................................................. 13-14
13.1.2.8 Planting Medium ........................................................................................................................... 13-14
13.1.2.9 Planting Medium Mixtures and Method of Applications .............................................................. 13-16
13.1.2.10 Plant Protection Chemicals ....................................................................................................... 13-18
13.1.2.11 Plant Material............................................................................................................................ 13-18
13.1.2.12 Lawn ......................................................................................................................................... 13-20
13.1.2.13 Existing Vegetation Protection Materials ................................................................................. 13-21
13.1.2.14 Ancillary Items ......................................................................................................................... 13-21
13.1.3 Execution ........................................................................................................................................... 13-22
13.1.3.1 Preliminaries ................................................................................................................................. 13-22
13.1.3.2 Existing Vegetation Protection...................................................................................................... 13-23
13.1.3.3 Planting Season and Conditions .................................................................................................... 13-24
13.1.3.4 On-Site Acclimation and Storage .................................................................................................. 13-24
13.1.3.5 Handling and Transportation of Plant Material ............................................................................. 13-24
13.1.3.6 Planting Medium ........................................................................................................................... 13-24
13.1.3.7 Planting Depths and Pits ............................................................................................................... 13-25
13.1.3.8 Percolation Tests ........................................................................................................................... 13-25
13.1.3.9 Installation of Plants ...................................................................................................................... 13-25
13.1.3.10 Planting Sequence ..................................................................................................................... 13-26
13.1.3.11 Levelling and Cleaning ............................................................................................................. 13-27
13.1.3.12 Lawn Areas ............................................................................................................................... 13-27
13.1.3.13 Heavy Machinery...................................................................................................................... 13-29
13.1.4 Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................... 13-29
13.1.4.1 Drought Conditions ....................................................................................................................... 13-29
13.1.4.2 Wind Deflecting Fences ................................................................................................................ 13-29
13.1.4.3 Establishment Maintenance........................................................................................................... 13-29
13.1.4.4 Establishment Maintenance Operations ........................................................................................ 13-30
13.1.5 Pest and Disease Control ................................................................................................................... 13-38
13.1.5.1 Palms ............................................................................................................................................. 13-38
13.1.5.2 Trees and Shrubs ........................................................................................................................... 13-39
13.1.5.3 Lawn and Ground Cover ............................................................................................................... 13-41
13.2 Hardscape ................................................................................................................................................... 13-42
13.2.1 General .............................................................................................................................................. 13-42
13.2.1.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................. 13-42
13.2.1.2 Related Documents ....................................................................................................................... 13-42
13.2.1.3 Reference Standards and Codes .................................................................................................... 13-42
13.2.1.4 Levels, Reference Points and Setting Out ..................................................................................... 13-43
13.2.1.5 Quality Control ............................................................................................................................. 13-43
Page 13-1
13.2.1.6 Submittals ..................................................................................................................................... 13-43

13.2.1.7 Mock-Ups and Samples ................................................................................................................ 13-44
13.2.1.8 Compliances .................................................................................................................................. 13-44
13.2.1.9 Site Conditions .............................................................................................................................. 13-44
13.2.2 Products ............................................................................................................................................. 13-44
13.2.2.1 Delivery, Handling and Storage .................................................................................................... 13-45
13.2.2.2 Sub-Base ....................................................................................................................................... 13-45
13.2.2.3 Cement .......................................................................................................................................... 13-45
13.2.2.4 Sand............................................................................................................................................... 13-45
13.2.2.5 Water ............................................................................................................................................. 13-45
13.2.2.6 Permeable Paver Bedding, Filler and Base ................................................................................... 13-46
13.2.2.7 Pavers ............................................................................................................................................ 13-46
13.2.2.8 Pre-Cast Concrete Tile .................................................................................................................. 13-49
13.2.2.9 Quarry Tile .................................................................................................................................... 13-50
13.2.2.10 Natural and Manufactured Stone .............................................................................................. 13-50
13.2.2.11 Natural and Manufactured Gravel ............................................................................................ 13-50
13.2.2.12 Specific Landscape Features ..................................................................................................... 13-51
13.2.2.13 Geotextile Fabric ...................................................................................................................... 13-51
13.2.2.14 Ancillary Items ......................................................................................................................... 13-51
13.2.3 Execution ........................................................................................................................................... 13-52
13.2.3.1 Preliminaries ................................................................................................................................. 13-52
13.2.3.2 Concrete Unit Paving .................................................................................................................... 13-52
13.2.3.3 Pre-Cast Concrete Slabs and Kerbs ............................................................................................... 13-55
13.2.3.4 Pre-Cast Concrete Tile .................................................................................................................. 13-57
13.2.3.5 Quarry Tile .................................................................................................................................... 13-58
13.2.3.6 Natural and Manufactured Stone................................................................................................... 13-59
13.2.3.7 Natural and Manufactured Gravel ................................................................................................. 13-61
13.3 Irrigation..................................................................................................................................................... 13-62
13.3.1 General .............................................................................................................................................. 13-62
13.3.1.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................. 13-62
13.3.1.2 Related Documents ....................................................................................................................... 13-62
13.3.1.3 Reference Standards and Codes .................................................................................................... 13-62
13.3.1.4 Quality Control ............................................................................................................................. 13-63
13.3.1.5 Submittals ..................................................................................................................................... 13-64
13.3.1.6 Compliances .................................................................................................................................. 13-67
13.3.1.7 Site Conditions .............................................................................................................................. 13-67
13.3.1.8 Guarantee ...................................................................................................................................... 13-67
13.3.2 Products ............................................................................................................................................. 13-68
13.3.2.1 Delivery, Handling and Storage .................................................................................................... 13-68
13.3.2.2 Piping ............................................................................................................................................ 13-68
13.3.2.3 Fittings .......................................................................................................................................... 13-70
13.3.2.4 uPVC Cement Primer Lubricant and Tape.................................................................................... 13-70
13.3.2.5 Underground Warning Tape.......................................................................................................... 13-70
13.3.2.6 Brass Marker Plaque ..................................................................................................................... 13-71
13.3.2.7 Pipeline Marker Posts ................................................................................................................... 13-71
13.3.2.8 Thrust Blocks ................................................................................................................................ 13-71
13.3.2.9 Valves and Accessories ................................................................................................................. 13-71
13.3.2.10 Gauges and Meters.................................................................................................................... 13-74
13.3.2.11 Valve Chambers and Boxes ...................................................................................................... 13-76
13.3.2.12 Electrical Equipment and Wiring.............................................................................................. 13-76
13.3.2.13 Bubblers .................................................................................................................................... 13-79
13.3.2.14 Emitters ..................................................................................................................................... 13-80
13.3.2.15 Sprinklers .................................................................................................................................. 13-81
13.3.2.16 Storage and Pumping Facilities ................................................................................................ 13-83
13.3.2.17 Irrigation Pump Installation Requirements ............................................................................. 13-102
13.3.2.18 Irrigation Pump Station Maintenance Requirements .............................................................. 13-103
13.3.2.19 Filters ...................................................................................................................................... 13-103
13.3.2.20 Subsurface Drainage ............................................................................................................... 13-105
13.3.2.21 Irrigation Central Control System........................................................................................... 13-106
13.3.2.22 Sensors, Controllers and Decoders ......................................................................................... 13-107
13.3.2.23 Irrigation Ducts and Protection Slabs ..................................................................................... 13-110
13.3.2.24 Subsurface Irrigation Equipment ............................................................................................ 13-110
Page 13-2
13.3.3 Execution ......................................................................................................................................... 13-111

13.3.3.1 Design Criteria ............................................................................................................................ 13-111
13.3.3.2 Installation Procedure.................................................................................................................. 13-112
13.3.3.3 Layout ......................................................................................................................................... 13-112
13.3.3.4 Excavation................................................................................................................................... 13-112
13.3.3.5 Backfilling................................................................................................................................... 13-113
13.3.3.6 uPVC Pipe Installations .............................................................................................................. 13-114
13.3.3.7 Polyethylene Pipe Installations ................................................................................................... 13-115
13.3.3.8 Steel Pipe Installations ................................................................................................................ 13-117
13.3.3.9 Thrust Blocks and Anchors ......................................................................................................... 13-117
13.3.3.10 Valves ..................................................................................................................................... 13-118
13.3.3.11 Valve Chambers and Boxes .................................................................................................... 13-118
13.3.3.12 End Flushing Points ................................................................................................................ 13-118
13.3.3.13 Connections to Existing Pipelines .......................................................................................... 13-118
13.3.3.14 Irrigation Equipment ............................................................................................................... 13-119
13.3.3.15 Electrical Installations............................................................................................................. 13-119
13.3.3.16 Control System Installation .................................................................................................... 13-122
13.3.3.17 Testing .................................................................................................................................... 13-122
13.3.3.18 Automatic System Commissioning......................................................................................... 13-124
13.3.3.19 Irrigation and Control System ................................................................................................. 13-124
13.3.3.20 Irrigation Duct and Protection Slabs ....................................................................................... 13-124
13.3.4 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 13-125
13.3.4.1 Compliances ................................................................................................................................ 13-125
13.3.4.2 System Monitoring ...................................................................................................................... 13-125
13.3.4.3 System Flushing .......................................................................................................................... 13-126
13.3.4.4 Servicing of Remote Control Solenoid Valves and Components ................................................ 13-126
13.3.4.5 Adjustments and Cleaning .......................................................................................................... 13-126
13.3.4.6 Emergency Repairs ..................................................................................................................... 13-126
13.3.4.7 Training ....................................................................................................................................... 13-127
13.3.4.8 Final Acceptance Inspection ....................................................................................................... 13-127
Index .......................................................................................................................................................................... 13-128
Page 13-3
List of Tables
Table 13-1 Landscape testing standards ........................................................................................................................ 13-7
Table 13-2 Agricultural soil grading criteria ............................................................................................................... 13-10
Table 13-3 Agricultural soil chemical criteria ............................................................................................................. 13-11
Table 13-4 Anions and cations criteria for irrigation water ......................................................................................... 13-14
Table 13-5 Planting medium mixture .......................................................................................................................... 13-15
Table 13-6 Compost application rates ......................................................................................................................... 13-15
Table 13-7 NPK slow release organic fertiliser rates................................................................................................... 13-15
Table 13-8 Date palm initial fertiliser application rates and methods ......................................................................... 13-16
Table 13-9 Tree pit initial fertiliser application rates and methods ............................................................................. 13-16
Table 13-10 Large shrub pit initial fertiliser application rates and methods................................................................ 13-17
Table 13-11 Small shrub, groundcover beds, accent plants and lawn areas initial fertiliser application rates and methods
..................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-17
Table 13-12 Seasonal flowers initial fertiliser application rates and methods ............................................................. 13-18
Table 13-13 Tree stake sizes ........................................................................................................................................ 13-21
Table 13-14 Planting pit size and depth ....................................................................................................................... 13-25
Table 13-15 Maintenance fertiliser application rates and methods.............................................................................. 13-31
Table 13-16 Seasonal flowers maintenance fertiliser application rates and methods .................................................. 13-31
Table 13-17 Palm tree pest and disease control methods ............................................................................................ 13-38
Table 13-18 Fruit tree pest and disease control methods ............................................................................................. 13-39
Table 13-19 Ornamental tree and shrub pest and disease control methods ................................................................. 13-40
Table 13-20 Lawn and ground cover pest and disease control methods ..................................................................... 13-41
Table 13-21 Bedding sand gradation .......................................................................................................................... 13-45
Table 13-22 Permeable bedding and joint/opening filler gradation ............................................................................ 13-46
Table 13-23 Permeable base gradation ....................................................................................................................... 13-46
Table 13-24 Permeable sub-base gradation ................................................................................................................ 13-46
Table 13-25 Concrete unit pavers required BS values ................................................................................................ 13-47
Table 13-26 Precast concrete unit paver specifications .............................................................................................. 13-48
Table 13-27 Brick/ clay bedding and joint/filler gradation ......................................................................................... 13-49
Table 13-28 Tile joint/filler gradation ........................................................................................................................ 13-50
Table 13-29 Natural and manufactured gravel suppliers ............................................................................................ 13-51
Table 13-30 Construction tolerances for paving surface levels .................................................................................. 13-55
Table 13-31 Characteristics of resins for polyethylene pipes ..................................................................................... 13-68
Table 13-32 ASTM standards for valve boxes ........................................................................................................... 13-76
Table 13-33 Valve box dimensions ............................................................................................................................ 13-76
Table 13-34 Minimum configurable inputs and outputs ............................................................................................. 13-90
Table 13-35 Minimum infiltration slot areas ............................................................................................................ 13-105
Table 13-36 Geotextile fabric standards ................................................................................................................... 13-106
Table 13-37 Preferred irrigation devices .................................................................................................................. 13-112
Page 13-4
13 LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

13.1 Landscaping
13.1.1 General
13.1.1.1 Scope
This Section of the Landscaping and Irrigation Specification covers the preparation, installation and maintenance of all
landscape areas. This includes:
1. Supply, transportation and installation of specified living planting material (plants), planting soil and additives
blending.
2. Supply and installation of associated ancillary horticultural proprietary items.
3. Supply and installation of mulch.
4. Maintenance service for two-year guarantee period.
13.1.1.2 Related Documents

The following Sections of the Specifications shall be read in conjunction with this Section:
1. Chapter 1 General Requirements
2. Section 13.2 Hardscape
3. Section 13.3 Irrigation
The following related documents should be used as a reference when considering road landscaping and irrigation within
urban locations:
1. Abu Dhabi Urban Street Design Manual
2. Abu Dhabi Public Realm Design Manual
13.1.1.3 Reference Standards and Codes

All activities relating to this Section of the Specification shall comply with the following International Standards, n
their latest edition, unless noted otherwise in this Specification.
BS 3936 - 1: 1992 Nursery stock – Specifications for trees and shrubs;
BS 3936 - 7: 1989 Nursery stock – Specification for bedding plants;
BS 3936 - 9: 1998 Nursery stock – Specification for bulbs, corms & tubers;
BS 3936 -10:1990 Nursery stock – Specification for groundcover plants;
BS 3998:1989 Recommendations for tree work;
BS 4043:1989 Transplanting root-balled trees;
BS 4428:1989 Code for general landscape operations (excluding hard surfaces);
ISO 9001: 2008 Quality management systems;
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.
13.1.1.4 Quality Control

The Contractor shall not proceed to complete further works until the following has been inspected and approved in
writing by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 48 hours prior to the inspection. Such notification
shall be given by a written inspection request (in a format acceptable to the Engineer) each and every time various
areas of the work are to be carried out or covered up so as to prevent subsequent inspection.
1. Submission of construction works program.
Page 13-5
2. Monthly progress reports.

3. Approval of all samples & materials.
4. Evidence of plant material availability.
5. Plant importation program.
6. Excavated landscape areas.
7. Filled, compacted and graded soil in landscape areas prior to mixing of amendments.
8. Setting out of planting areas and pits prior to excavation.
9. Excavated pits and percolation tests prior to planting.
10. All plant stock approved in the nursery prior to transportation.
11. All plant stock approved at the site prior to planting.
12. Staking, guying and tying of trees, palms and shrubs.
13. Irrigation dripper lines working and tensioned and aligned correctly prior to shrub and groundcover planting.
14. Excavation of ornamental stone/mulch areas prior to laying geotextile and any edging or placing of stone.
15. Any irrigation approvals (refer to Section 13.3 for additional information).
16. Detailed maintenance manual (refer to DoT’s A13 Road Landscaping Manual, for additional information).
17. Monthly maintenance schedules.
18. Monthly maintenance records sheets.
19. As Built drawings from the Contractor.
If the Contractor does not notify the Engineer in sufficient time to allow for the inspection prior to covering up or
completing installations, the Contractor shall remove all such materials/equipment as deemed necessary by the Engineer
to verify compliance of the work. Any delays, additional work or additional costs attributed to the above shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
a. Sample Testing
Test results shall be based on a representative sample of material to be used. Do not use materials until accepted by the
Engineer. Material used in construction shall be the same as that tested and accepted by the Engineer. Testing shall be
performed by an independent testing laboratory that has been pre-accepted by the Engineer. All costs for sampling and
testing shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Testing reports are required for the following:
1. Manufacturers certified analysis of all standard products, including fertilisers and manures.
2. Certificates confirming the origin and size of all standard products, including fertilisers and manures.
3. Health certificates for all imported plant material.
The following information is required for each listed below.
1. Agriculture soil.
a) pH value;
b) Electrical conductivity (EC) expressed in ohms/cm @ 25o C;
c) Free carbonates;
d) Chlorides (CI);
e) Sulphates (SO4);
f) Exchangeable sodium;
g) Boron (B) expressed in milligrams per litre;
h) Sodium (Na);
i) Magnesium (Mg);
j) Mechanical sieve analysis; and
Page 13-6
k) Sodium absorption ratio (SAR) expressed in ohms/cm @ 25o C.

2. Planting medium.
a) pH; and
b) Electrical conductivity (EC) expressed in ohms/cm @ 25o C.
3. Irrigation water.
If municipal supply water or other known source of irrigation water is not used, test certificate must be
produced along with submittal of sample.
a) pH
b) Electrical Conductivity (EC)
c) Chlorides (Cl)
d) Nitrate (NO3)
e) Bicarbonate (HCO3)
f) Sulphates (SO4)
g) Calcium (Ca)
h) Sodium (Na)
i) Magnesium (Mg)
j) Potassium (K); and
k) Boron (B).
Testing shall be done in accordance with the following standards:
Table 13-1 Landscape testing standards
Test Standard No. Standard Title
ASTM C136 Standard test method for sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates
ASTM D422 Standard test method for particle size analysis of soils
ASTM D2607 Standard classification of peats, mosses, humus and related products
ASTM D2974 Standard method of test for moisture, ash and organic matter of peat materials
ASTM D2976 Standard method of test of pH of peat materials
b. Certifications
Contractor shall provide importation, transportation and any other certification for plant and other material required by
the Engineer or local laws.
Certificates of inspection shall accompany the invoice for each shipment of plants, planting soil and accessories as may
be required by law for transportation and acceptance. Submit certificates to Engineer for approval.
13.1.1.5 Submittals
a. Samples
Submit samples of the following for the Engineer’s approval in accordance with Chapter 1 General Requirements.
Provide two sets of the following to be submitted for Engineers review and approval:
1. Agricultural soil (Prior to amending): 5 Kg along with soil analysis report.
Page 13-7
2. Planting medium (After amendment): 5 Kg of each specified along with analysis report.
3. Fertilisers, manures & other additives; along with manufacturer’s documentation.
4. Irrigation water if not used from municipal or previously known source with water analysis report.
5. Natural stones/Drainage stone: 0.25 cubic metres.
6. Geotextile fabric & other drainage materials: 1 square metre.
7. Staking & Guying materials and methods: as per project requirements.
8. Samples of all plants to be used prior to delivery: Arrange nursery visits as necessary, with majority stock
segregated in one location
b. Manufacturer's Literature
Manufacturer's literature, material safety data sheets (MSDS) and labels for the following materials shall be submitted:
1. Fertiliser.
2. Pesticides and all plant protection chemicals.
3. Anti-desiccant.
4. Compost and Manure.
5. Any other project specific products not listed above.
c. Drawings
Note: Allow a minimum 5 working days for Engineer’s review.
1. Shop drawings.
a) Additional works or modifications during construction require design drawings with details called shop
drawings. These drawings shall comply with the International Standard EN ISO 11091: 1999
Construction Drawings – Landscape Drawing Practice and its Annexure B.
2. As Built drawings:
a) The Contractor shall maintain one set of “As Built” drawings. All approved changes and all completed
and approved work shall be recorded on these drawings. The Contractor shall maintain this on a daily
basis. At the time of substantial completion the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the complete “As
Built” set of drawings for approval and final approved set shall be submitted within 14 days of final
approval.
3. Once the drawings have been approved the Contractor shall prepare and submit three sets of fully book bound
drawings and one soft PDF copy on CD with scanned literature as necessary within 14 days of final approval.
d. Landscape Management and Maintenance Manuals

Note: Allow a minimum 10 working days for Engineer's review.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two sets of the draft Landscape Management and Maintenance Manual
(refer to DoT’s A13 Road Landscaping Manual, for additional information) for approval 14 days prior to substantial
completion (refer to Section 13.1.4.3 for additional information). The Manual shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Irrigation applications and maintenance (refer to Section 13.3.1.5 for additional information).
a) Details including water application rates for each distinct area and maintenance procedures.
2. Landscape and hardscape maintenance.
a) Details and method statements including fertiliser descriptions, application rates and programs.
b) General maintenance procedures including pruning, plant and lawn care, weed control, stakes and ties,
replacement, and clean up.
3. Pest and disease control.
a) Details and method statements including safety, application rates and procedure, schedules of pesticides/
herbicides/ fungicides.
Page 13-8
4. Equipment inventory and maintenance procedures, including full manufacturer’s maintenance manuals.
5. Personnel requirements.
Note: This may vary depending on the project scope of works.
The final contents of the manual shall be agreed with the Engineer. Once the manual is approved the Contractor shall
prepare and submit three sets of fully book bound manuals with original manufacturers technical catalogues, literature
etc. and one soft PDF copy on CD with scanned literature as necessary within 14 days of final handover (refer to
Section 13.1.4.3 for additional information).
e. Machinery Information
Submit information about machinery that will be utilised for plantation and maintenance works: type, source, year of
manufacture and quantity.
13.1.1.6 Compliances
a. Personnel Information
Perform work only with personnel qualified and experienced in the work required in this Section under direction
of an approved skilled foreman (site supervisor). Contractor shall provide the resumes and qualifications of the lead
landscaping personal that he intends to use for approval. These personnel will require as minimum the following
qualifications:
1. Horticulturist/ arborist: Shall have a Bachelor of Science (B.Sc.) degree in ornamental horticulture and a
minimum of three years field experience. Five years additional field experience in ornamental horticulture may
be substituted for B.Sc. degree. Forestry or agriculture degrees or experience may not be substituted.
Experience must be in an arid climate similar to U.A.E.
2. Landscape foreman: Shall be skilled in the installation of planting and associated landscape elements with a
minimum of 10 years experience in landscape construction. A minimum of three years of this ten years
experience must have been in arid climates similar to U.A.E. and shall have experience in the handling and
planting of palms and specimen plants.
3. Landscape labourers: Shall be skilled in the installation of planting and associated landscape elements with a
minimum of 2 years experience in landscape construction.
b. Plant Material Acceptance

Engineer will inspect plant material upon delivery to the site. Upon acceptance of the plant material as to the correct
species, quantities, and condition, written approval will be given and notice to proceed.

Contractor shall ensure that the location of buried utilities and other services have been clearly identified during
surveying and setting out of the works and confirmed by investigation. Contractor shall immediately repair any damage
to utilities, structures, and permanent buried and aboveground services. If damage occurs, the Contractor shall be
held solely responsible for any cost incurred due to the damage.
Contractor shall maintain tidy site conditions at all times and perform site clearing and cleaning on a daily basis.
Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning operations. Do not burn waste materials at site, or
bury debris or excess materials on site, or discharge volatile or other harmful dangerous materials into irrigation or
drainage systems. Remove and dispose waste materials in a lawful manner.
Access to the Project shall be maintained by the Contractor at all times. Contractor shall ensure roads and
thoroughfares used for the transportation of construction machinery, labour, materials, cleaning fluids or debris are not
soiled. At the discretion and notification by the Engineer, the Contractor shall take all necessary steps to clean or repair
roads and thoroughfares at their expense.
Contractor shall be responsible for safeguarding all structures, plant or property in the Project and shall provide all
shoring, or supports as may be necessary to preserve their stability.
13.1.1.8 Warranty
Contractor shall comply with the following warranty requirements:
Page 13-9
1. There shall be one year establishment and nourishment period from the date of substantial completion (refer to
Section a for additional information) and issuance of provisional certificate. Establishment and nourishment
cost shall be paid as per the relevant BOQ.
2. Provide two-year warranty after the establishment and nourishment period acceptance. Contractor shall quote
for this two years period.
3. All plant materials furnished shall be guaranteed as to the species, hybrid, flower colour, and/or variety. If
any guaranteed plant material proves to be of a different species, hybrid, flower colour and / or variety not
initially determinable, the Contractor shall replace that plant with a new plant of the originally specified
species, hybrid, flower colour and/or variety.
4. Replace all plant material found in an unhealthy growing condition during the warranty period.
5. Any fully defoliated plant during construction or establishment cannot be considered as acceptable if at
all it survives and establishes later, due to its uncertain health at a later stage.
6. Replacements shall be with new healthy plant(s) of same species / variety / hybrid / flower colour and size at
the time of replacement.
13.1.2 Products
1. Notify the Engineer 14 calendar days in advance of time and manner of delivery of plants.
2. Immediately before shipping all plants in partial or full leaf shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant, applying an
adequate film over trunk, branches, twigs and/or foliage.
3. Plants shall be prepared for shipment in a manner that shall not cause damage to the branches, shape, and
future development of the plants after planting.
4. All plant material shall be packed to provide adequate protection against climatic, seasonal, or breakage
injuries during transit.
5. All plants shall be received in site approved nursery at least one week prior to planting to absorb transportation
shocks (refer to Section 13.1.3.4 for additional information).
6. Evidence of inadequate protection, carelessness while in transit or improper handling shall be cause for
rejection. All plants shall be kept moist, fresh and protected at all times. Such protection shall encompass the
entire period during which the plants are in transit, being handled, being stored or being planted.
7. Containerised plants shall not have their containers broken or their root systems cracked or damaged in any
way.
8. Upon arrival, plants will be inspected for proper transit procedures. Should the roots be dried out, large
branches be broken, balls of earth be broken, or loosened, or areas of bark be torn, or should the plant have
desiccation, leaf shredding, diseases, insect eggs, insect infestation or damage from browsing or grazing, the
Engineer will reject the injured plant(s).
13.1.2.2 Agricultural Soils

Agricultural soil shall be sweet sand free of calcium carbonate, subsoil, refuse, roots, noxious weeds, phytotoxic
materials, rocks, sticks, brush, litter, construction debris or any other deleterious materials. The agricultural soil shall
be approved by the Engineer before its use. It shall be free draining, non-toxic and capable of sustaining healthy
plant growth. It should have good water holding capacity and minimal runoff or erosion characteristics. Obtain the
agricultural soil component of the planting medium from one approved source. It shall conform to the following
physical and chemical criteria:
Table 13-2 Agricultural soil grading criteria
Sieve Size (mm) % by Mass Passing
5.000 100
2.380 65 to 100
Page 13-10
Sieve Size (mm) % by Mass Passing
1.180 45 to 100
0.600 35 to 80
0.300 5 to 48
0.150 0 to 15
0.075 0 to 3
Table 13-3 Agricultural soil chemical criteria
Chemical Characteristic Requirement
pH value Not less than 6.5 or not more than 8
Electrical conductivity (EC) Less than 2500 micromhos/cm (2.5 dS / m) saturated extract at 25o C
Free carbonates Less than 0.5% air dried
Chlorides Less than 200 ppm in saturated extract
Sulphates Less than 200 ppm in saturated extract
Exchangeable sodium Less than 15% in neutral normal ammonium acetate
Boron Less than 1.5 ppm, hot water soluble
Sodium Less than 250 ppm
Magnesium Less than 100 ppm
Nitrates Less than 75 ppm
a. Soil Samples
At least 7 days before schedule use, the Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer, the proposed source or
sources of agricultural soil (sweet sand) for approval. The Contractor shall ensure that representative samples of
agricultural soil are taken from each source for testing purposes. Each sample shall be tested and analysed by a
qualified agricultural soil testing laboratory, and the results submitted in writing to the Engineer. All testing
procedures for agricultural soil shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates. Use of soil shall be
permitted only after approval of the Engineer.
b. Storage
Agricultural soil shall be stored in heaps no greater than one and a half metres high. Soil heaps shall be
protected from undue compaction and no construction or waste materials shall be stored on or mixed with the soil.
Soil heaps not intended for immediate use must be kept covered to prevent wind drifts and other public nuisance.
13.1.2.3 Compost and Organic Manure

Compost and organic manure shall be from an approved source and shall conform to following standards.
1. Compost and manure of cattle, sheep, chicken etc. shall be from an approved company. It shall be pasteurised
and free from plant pests such as insects, weed and disease. It shall be composted fully so that it may be used
in direct contact with plant roots, at the quantities specified, without harmful effects to the root system or the
plants’ overall health and appearance. It must be free from any viable seed that may germinate at a later
stage. The particle size and moisture content of compost should be ideal for easy mixing with soil.
2. Organic manure in the form of fishmeal that is premixed with a suitable nitrogen fixing and phosphate
dissolving microorganism based product. The micro-organism based product has to be mixed well with
Page 13-11
fishmeal at the rate of one litre per 50 Kg. of fishmeal or as per the manufacturer’s recommendation. This
mixture has to be thoroughly incorporated in to soil or planting medium.
13.1.2.4 Fertiliser
Fertiliser shall be organic, slow release compound fertiliser equivalent to NPK 8-8-16 for palms or 16-8-8 for other
plants. In addition to NPK elements, it should a l s o c o n t a i n the following:
1. Minimum 25% sulphur.
2. 2% Magnesium oxide (MgO).
3. 30 gm of fishmeal / Kg of 8-8-16.
4. 150 gm of Emirates Magic (as supplied by Emirates Bio Fertiliser Factory), or equivalent.
5. 1.5% trace elements.
Fertiliser shall be furnished in standard containers with the name, weight and guaranteed analysis of the contents
clearly marked. Production and expiry dates must be clearly printed on the fertiliser bags.
Potassium in any fertiliser used must be from an organic source and not from chlorine. When a mixed fertiliser is
specified, the first number shall represent the minimum percentage of soluble nitrogen (N), the second number shall
represent the minimum percentage of available phosphoric acid (P 2 O 5 ) and the third number shall represent the
minimum percentage of water – soluble potash (K 2 O).
13.1.2.5 Standards for Organic Fertilisers and Conditioners

Fertilisers of various categories must conform to the following specifications.
a. Slow release organic fertilisers (Non-biological).

Slow release organic fertilisers shall conform to the following:
1. The fertiliser should be heat treated and fermented;
2. The organic matter content should not be less than 40%;
3. Moisture content should not exceed 25%;
4. EC should not exceed 10 millimhos / Cm in an extract from 1:5;
5. The pH should not exceed 7.5 in an extract of 1:5;
6. The C/N ratio should not exceed 20:1;
7. The Sodium chloride (NaCl) percentage should not exceed 2% and soluble sodium should not be more than
0.8%;
8. Free of soil, sand and other impurities; and
9. Free from harmful weed seeds, disease causing pathogens, nematodes, insect pests etc.
In addition to above, based on recommendations of the Engineer (wherever needed) other soil additives are to be
used. Those products should conform to specifications provided herewith.
b. Fish/ Bone/ Sea Weed/ Blood Based Fertilisers

The content of organic matter and plant nutrient elements of this fertiliser should not be less than 50%. Primary and
secondary elements as percentages and trace elements as ppm should be indicated on the packaging.
c. Biological Organic Fertilisers with beneficial micro-organisms

The specification should comply to those of non-biological organic fertilisers mentioned above with an exception
/addition of the following.
1. The moisture content should not exceed 30%
2. Names of biological microbes added in the fertiliser must be indicated in the Certificate of Analysis.
Page 13-12
d. Liquid Organic Fertilisers

In cases where the below mentioned liquid organic fertilisers are to be used, the following aspects should be
considered.
1. Sea Weed/ Fish/ Bone/ Blood Based Fertilisers:
a) The content of organic matter and plant nutrient elements should not be less than 25% (from fresh weigh or
total volume- W/ W or W/ V-).
2. Fertilisers of which the main contents are humic or fulvic acid:
a) The percentage of both humic and fulvic acid should not be less than 12%.
3. Fertilisers which contain organic matter + humic or fulvic acid + NPK:
a) The percentage of all these contents together should not be less than 50% (from fresh weigh or total
volume- W/W or W/V-).
e. Soil Conditioners
Soil conditioners shall conform to the following specifications.
1. Organic Conditioners
Organic conditioners like Peat moss and Coco Peat must conform to the following standards.
a) Peat Moss
i. Free from natural soils & sands
ii. Percentage of organic matter should not be less than 95%
iii. Free of diseases, animal or plant pests especially nematodes
iv. EC should not exceed 3 millimohs / cm in an extract of 1:5
v. pH should not exceed 4 in an extract of 1:5
vi. Sodium chloride should not exceed 0.2%
vii. Moisture content should not exceed 60 %
b) Coco Peat (Coconut coir peat)
i. Free from natural soils, sands and other plant parts
ii. Percentage of organic matter should not be less than 85%
iii. Free of diseases, animal or plant pests especially nematodes
iv. EC should not exceed 3 millimohs/Cm in an extract of 1:5
v. pH should be between 5 and 7.5 in an extract of 1:5
vi. Sodium chloride should not exceed 0.2%
vii. Moisture content should not exceed 60 %
2. Non Organic Conditioners
The product should be supplied in tightly packed bags or containers with proper labelling. The technical
leaflet of product should contain:
a) Chemical name
b) Effective material and proportion
c) Application methods for achieving best result as well as its impact on soil and the type of soil it suits.
Products listed below shall conform to the following specifications:
a) Agricultural Gypsum
i. Calcium sulphate should not be less than 80%.
ii. Sodium chloride should not exceed 3%.
b) Agricultural Sulphur
Page 13-13
i. Percentage of sulphur element should not be less than 8.5%.

c) Polymers
i. The water holding capacity should be clearly indicated.
d) Bentonite
i. Sodium chloride should not exceed 2%.
e) Perlite
i. Saturation capacity should not be less than 300%.
ii. pH should not exceed 7.5.
iii. Should be odourless and free of any disease or pest organism.
13.1.2.6 Standards for Inorganic Fertilisers

Chemical fertilisers approved by the Engineer only must be used according to project needs. Fertilisers of pure
chemical nature must conform to the product specifications and label details. Packing should clearly mention the
brand name, nutrient content in percentages and any other additives present. Products must be packed in such a
way that it doesn’t contaminate environment and should avoid any spillage. For granular fertilisers it must be of
uniform granular size for easy spreading. It must be without any moisture contamination and free of caking and
impurities. For liquid chemical fertiliser, it must be clear liquids without crystallisation and settlements. For
suspension fertiliser, particles must easily dissolve when diluted. An ISO certified company’s product must be used
in all projects.
13.1.2.7 Irrigation Water

Irrigation water should be from a known source and it shall conform to the following standards of which the anions
and cations shall be within the below mentioned levels.
Table 13-4 Anions and cations criteria for irrigation water
Anions
Chlorides (Cl) 200 ppm
Bicarbonate (HCO 3 ) 115 ppm
Sulphates (SO 4 ) 390 ppm
Nitrate (NO 3 ) 10 ppm
Cations
Calcium (Ca) 120 ppm
Sodium (Na) 130 ppm
Magnesium (Mg) 45 ppm
Potassium (K) 18 ppm
Boron (B) 2 ppm
0
In cases where any leaching of salts is required, water used shall be less than 1 millimhos / Cm at 25 C.
13.1.2.8 Planting Medium

Planting medium shall consist of a homogeneous mixture of soil, organic compost and fertilizers as specified, in
proportions listed in Table 13-5.
Page 13-14
Table 13-5 Planting medium mixture
Planting Medium Rate
Agricultural soil 75% by volume
Organic amendment 25% by volume
Sulphur 1 Kg/m3 soil
Fertiliser 2 Kg/m3 soil
Contractor shall provide additional compost at the time of installation in rates shown in Table 13-6.
Table 13-6 Compost application rates
Location Rate
Palm pit – apply after 3 months for palms 25 Kg per pit
Tree pit – depends on tree size/age 20 Kg per pit
Large shrubs 15 Kg per pit
Small shrubs and groundcover beds 10 Kg per m2
Lawn areas 10 Kg per m2
Note: 25 Kg = 1 bag of organic matter (normally)
Contractor shall provide NPK slow release organic fertiliser at the time of installation in rates shown in Table 13-7.
Table 13-7 NPK slow release organic fertiliser rates
Location N.P.K Rate
Palm pit – apply after 3 months for palms 8-8-16 400 to 500 gm per pit
Tree pit – depends on tree size/age 16-8-8 300 gm per pit
Large shrubs 16-8-8 200 gm per pit
Small shrubs and groundcover beds 16-8-8 200 gm per m2
Lawn areas 16-8-8 200 gm per m2
Application rates and kind of fertilisers mentioned above shall be for planting medium preparations and first
application only. Application rates and methods for maintenance are explained in Section 13.1.2.9 Planting Medium
Mixtures and Method of Applications.
Maintenance and further application shall be scheduled in accordance with the Engineer’s instruction depending upon
the season, type of plant, and health conditions.
For palms, manure and fertiliser inputs can be added to palm pits after planting at a later stage as approved by the
Engineer.
Planting medium for lawn areas should be prepared, one week before the grass stolons are planted.
Page 13-15
13.1.2.9 Planting Medium Mixtures and Method of Applications

a. Initial Fertiliser Application
The following tables are for initial application of mixtures to planting medium or first application (in case of palms).
The method and time of application should be maintained for each type of plants listed below.
Table 13-8 Date palm initial fertiliser application rates and methods
After Planting or
Per Establishment
SI Kind of Fertilisers Remarks
Palm 3-4 6-7
Months Months
1 Organic matter 25 Kg 25 Kg nil Apply uniformly in trenches made of 200 mm
based width and 150 mm depth 0.75 to 1 metre away
from trunk within the individual palm basins.
Mix well with soil in trench working with hand
shovel (spade), backfill scooped out soil above
trench to level, irrigation to follow immediately.
2 Slow release
Organo- chemical 400 200 200
fertiliser (NPK As above
Grams Grams Grams
8-8-16)
3 Fishmeal pellets or
granules @ 500 500 nil As above
20 Gr/ Kg of Grams Grams
Organic manure
4 Micro organism 1 litre 1 litre per nil Mix fishmeal and microfert thoroughly and
based ( as Microfert) per 100 100 palms spread in trench of palm basin uniformly; mix
@ palms well with soil and other inputs. Irrigate as
1 litre per 50 explained above.
Kg of Fish meal
Rates of application of fertilisers shall vary with palm variety, size and age and necessary changes in the kind of
fertilisers and rate of application shall be carried out as instructed by the Engineer.
Table 13-9 Tree pit initial fertiliser application rates and methods
Kind of
SI Per Tree Remarks
Fertilisers
1 Organic matter 20 Kg Spread fertiliser in basins of tree pits prior to planting. Soil to be filled in such
based a manner to get a perfect final level considering settling down of loose soil
after irrigation and to accommodate root ball area of plants after planting.
Thoroughly mix the fertiliser with soil and pre-irrigate well to moisten the
entire medium uniformly before planting to field capacity. Plant as per
specifications. Irrigate plant basins well after planting.
2 Slow release
Organo- chemical 300
Grams
8-8-16)
granules @ 400 As above
20 Gr/ Kg of Grams
Organic manure
Page 13-16
Kind of
SI Per Tree Remarks
Fertilisers
4 Micro organism 1 litre per Mix fishmeal and microfert thoroughly and spread in trench of plant basin
based ( as 125 tree uniformly; mix well with soil and other inputs. Irrigate as explained above.
Microfert) @ pits
1 litre per 50
Kg of Fish meal
Table 13-10 Large shrub pit initial fertiliser application rates and methods
Kind of
SI Per Tree Remarks
Fertilisers
1 Organic matter 15 Kg Spread fertiliser in basins of shrub pits prior to planting. Soil to be filled in
based such a manner to get a perfect final level considering settling down of loose
soil after irrigation and to accommodate root ball area of plants after planting.
Thoroughly mix the fertiliser with soil and pre-irrigate well to moisten the
entire medium uniformly before planting to field capacity at planting. Plant as
per specifications. Irrigate plant basins well after planting
2 Slow release
Grams
8-8-16)
20 Gr/ Kg of Grams
Organic manure
4 Micro organism 1 litre per Mix fishmeal and microfert thoroughly and spread in trench of plant basin
based ( as 166 uniformly; mix well with soil and other inputs. Irrigate as explained above.
Microfert) @ shrubs
1 litre per 50
Kg of Fish meal
Table 13-11 Small shrub, groundcover beds, accent plants and lawn areas initial fertiliser application rates and
methods
Kind of Per Sq.

SI Remarks
Fertilisers Meter
1 Organic matter 10 Kg Thoroughly mix the fertiliser with soil and pre- irrigate well to moisten the
based entire medium uniformly before planting. Moisten the entire medium to field
capacity. Watch for any soil settlement, and grade to finish level before
planting. Plant as per specifications. Irrigate well after planting.
2 Slow release
Grams
8-8-16)
20 Gr/ Kg of Grams
Organic manure
Page 13-17
Kind of Per Sq.

SI Remarks
Fertilisers Meter
4 Micro organism 1 litre per Mix fishmeal & microfert thoroughly and spread uniformly on soil / planting
based ( as 166 sq. m. medium; mix well with soil and other inputs. Irrigate as explained above.
Microfert) @
1 litre per 50
Kg of Fish meal
Table 13-12 Seasonal flowers initial fertiliser application rates and methods
Kind of Per Sq.

SI Remarks
Fertilisers Meter
1 Organic matter 10 Kg Thoroughly mix the fertiliser with soil and pre- irrigate well to moisten the
based entire medium uniformly before planting. Moisten the entire medium to field
capacity. Watch for any soil settlement, and grade to finish level before
planting. Plant as per specifications. Irrigate well after planting.
2 Granular
fertiliser 50
As above
N.P.K Grams
20-10-10 + MgO
Fertiliser application rates and methods listed above is subjected to modifications depending on the project needs, soil
test reports, planting types, seasons etc. and the Contractor shall follow the approved program specified by the Engineer.
13.1.2.10 Plant Protection Chemicals

All pesticides, fungicides, herbicides, nematicides, miticides, tree sealants etc. whether in the form of solutions,
granules, emulsifiable concentrates, pellets or fumigants must conform to all legal safety standards.
The product must be with a low mammalian toxicity and a high LD50 value and should cause only a minimal damage to
the environment. The Contractor should educate the persons involved in carrying out plant protection
measures about all safety precautions for storage and handling of the product. It should be useful and effective
against the target pests.
Product label must carry details of product’s ingredients, formulations, toxicity, and rates of application, pests controlled
and proper means of safe handling. The Contractor must be able to provide the MSDS of product as instructed by
the Engineer and use only approved products.
While using a plant protection chemical, the following safety guidelines should always be followed:
1. Use only products tested and recommended by the local authorities.
2. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for rate and safety of application of the product.
3. Use the lowest recommended concentration whenever it is possible.
4. Do not apply on a windy or cloudy (sign of rain) day.
5. Do not prepare excess amount of chemical and dispose any excess per Environment Agency – Abu Dhabi
requirements.
6. Do not spray near pet cages, beehives, water pools, drinking fountains, etc.
7. Spray chemicals during early morning or late evening especially during summer to avoid plant injury.
13.1.2.11 Plant Material

a. General
All planting material shall be of the size specified and obtained from an approved source. All plants shall be supplied as
specified and the Contractor is expected to obtain stock from outside the UAE if it is not available locally.
Page 13-18
1. Plants to be obtained outside the UAE shall be accompanied by a draft programme for importation of such
plants, indicating supplier or source and delivery times required.
2. Imported plants must be acclimatised for a period of six (6) weeks minimum prior to planting.
Plants shall be true to type and supplied under botanical names. Synonyms must be checked with the Engineer.
All planting stock shall be well-balanced and well formed, sound, vigorous, healthy and free from disease, sun-
scald, abrasion, harmful insects or insect eggs and with a healthy, unbroken root system filling their containers but not
root-bound. Unless otherwise specified, only nursery grown plants will be used. All plants shall be container grown
except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract.
Locate and tag the plant material listed in the Contract. Tag all plants provided that the quantity of any one species is
less than 50 units. Where more than 50 units of one species are specified, tag 10% of the required number as "Sample
Plants" and all plants of this species delivered shall match the quality of the sample.
b. Substitutions
When plants of the specified species are not available, substitution may be made only with the written approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor will not be allowed to use different techniques or quality criteria without Engineer’s
approval. No equipment, fertilisers, plant materials, soil mix or other materials specified will be accepted or installed
or planted without the Engineer’s written approval.
c. Nomenclature
The nomenclature of plants shall conform to the scientific names given in:
1. L.H. Bailey Hortorium, Cornell University. 1976. Hortus Third, A concise dictionary of plants cultivated in the
United States and Canada. Macmillan, NY.
2. Graf, Alfred Byrd. Exotica, Series 4: International Cyclopedia of Exotic Plants from Tropical and Near-
Tropical Regions.
3. Graf, Alfred Byrd. Tropica: Colour Cyclopedia of Exotic Plants and Trees for Warm-Region Horticulture
[1978]. 5th edition 2003.
d. Trees
All trees supplied shall meet the following criteria:
1. They must have a clear straight stem.
2. They must have a well balanced crown with the terminal leader intact.
3. They must possess at least four main branches, giving an overall height of 2.5-3 m at the time of planting.
Pruning at the time of removal from the nursery will not be permitted.
4. Root ball dimensions: diameter 500 mm x 300 mm deep minimum.
5. All saw cuts are to be clean and free from any ripping or splitting and shall be trimmed smooth after cutting.
6. All trees and palms are to be purchased and stored in suitable nursery conditions within 6 weeks of the start of
the contract.
7. All dimensions shown with minimum and maximum tolerances (i.e. 120-150 mm) in the planting schedule
(refer to DoT’s A13 Road Landscaping Manual, for additional information) refer to dimensions that will be
accepted. Measurement of all plants of one species shall, as a minimum; average between the minimum and
maximum tolerances provided in the planting schedule (i.e. average of 120-150 mm is 135 mm).
8. Trees are to be sprayed with approved anti-desiccant 48 hours prior to transport.
9. Trees are medium size nursery grown trees pruned during growth to produce a tight well rounded head, and a
straight stem clear of leaves or twigs. Unless otherwise specified in the BOQ, trees shall be 20-30mm diameter
of stem when measured 1m from ground level and shall have a straight stem of minimum 1.5m.
e. Palms
All palms supplied shall meet the following criteria:
Page 13-19
1. Palms shall be balled and burlapped unless container grown are available. When palms grown in sandy soil are
removed for planting, where retention of ball of earth or burlapping around root ball is not possible due
to its soil texture, extreme care should be taken to minimize the root damage.
2. Offshoots will not be acceptable. They shall have a vigorous root system, crown of new leaves, proper colour
of leaves of an adult palm and sufficient hardiness.
3. Excavation has to be made at sufficient distance away from trunk so that feeder roots are not cut or
bruised. Care must be taken to avoid any kind of root damage while transporting or off loading.
4. Prior to transporting for transplanting, all suckers, flowering and fruiting parts and approximately thirty
percent of fronds shall be removed. Remaining fronds shall be:
a) Sprayed with approved anti-desiccant 48 hours prior to transplanting;
b) Lifted to enclose and protect the growing tip; and
c) Wrapped in hessian and securely tied in position.
5. Roots shall be balled and the hessian tied.
6. Verticality shall be maintained with a tolerance of +/- 5%.
7. Imported palms shall be acclimatised for at least six months before removal from the nursery.
f. Shrubs, Herbaceous Plants and Groundcovers

Shrubs, herbaceous plants and groundcovers shall meet the following requirements:
1. All shrubs supplied are woody perennials of generally multi-stemmed and bushy habit ranging from 3 to 4.5 m
in height down to 500 mm height. Shrubs shall meet the requirements for spread or height indicated in the
drawing and/or specified in the BOQ. Measurement of height for shrubs shall be taken from the ground level
to the average height of the shrubs and not the longest branch or stem. Shrubs shall have at least three stems
and shall be well balanced and bushy with strongly developed root system, free from pest and disease.
2. All herbaceous plants supplied are non-woody perennials of clump forming habit. Such plants shall have well
developed stems and a healthy root system, free from pest and disease. Clumps of herbaceous plants shall
include rhizomes, corms, tubers or roots and soil undisturbed by lifting, with evidence of growing shoots
emerging above soil level. All shrubs and herbaceous plants shall be cultivated in containers of appropriated
dimensions corresponding to the size of the plants and the requirements of the species.
3. All groundcover plants supplied are low growing, 500 mm or less, or prostate shrubs or herbaceous plants
whose habit is to totally cover the soil. All ground cover species shall be evenly balanced to allow equal
growth in all directions. Plants shall have fully developed root system and leaves. Unless otherwise specified,
rooted cuttings will not be accepted. All plants shall be container grown.
13.1.2.12 Lawn
Grass species shall be Paspalum vaginatum variety, “Saltine‟. Certification of variety shall be supplied by the
Contractor for approval by the Engineer. Contractor shall provide the lawn grass by:
1. Stolons;
2. Sod; and/or,
3. Seeding.
a. Stolons
Contractor shall supply stolons for lawn areas in compliance with the following:
1. Source of stolons shall be approved by the Engineer.
2. Stolons shall be prepared using an approved verticutting machine.
3. Stolons shall be between 75mm and 150mm in length with 3 to 6 buds per stolon. Dry, dormant stolons shall
be kept refrigerated at 0° to 3°C for no longer than 2 weeks prior to planting. The Contractor shall soak
stolons in water after removing from cold storage and prior to planting.
4. Fresh stolons shall be harvested from the source and delivered to site within 24 hours. The Contractor shall
only deliver as many stolons as can be installed during that day’s work.
Page 13-20
5. In the event of planting works being delayed, stolons shall only be stored at site for a maximum of 2 days.
During this time stolons shall be kept moist, shaded and ventilated as approved by the Engineer. Any stolons
kept longer than this shall be discarded by the Contractor.
6. Stolons shall be free of mould, and any evidence of pests or diseases.
b. Sod
Contractor shall supply sod for lawn areas in compliance with the following:
1. Sod must be healthy looking and not exhibiting any symptoms of prolonged storage, yellowing or drying.
2. Sod should be preferably of equal size.
3. Soil mixture should be well adhered to the root system and shall not have less than 50mm thickness.
4. Sod must be free of mould, weeds, pests and diseases.
5. Sod soil mixture should contain sufficient moisture at the time of delivery at site.
c. Seed
Contractor shall supply seed for lawn areas in compliance with the following:
1. Seed shall be free from any kind of invasive weed seeds.
2. Seed shall be true to its type with a minimum purity of 90% and germination rate of 75%. Analysis certificate
or test reports by the producer mentioning the purity and germination percentage of dominant grass seed,
percentage of other grass seeds and weed seeds with names and inert materials must be submitted. Each bag or
packing must bear these details and approved by the Engineer prior to installation.
13.1.2.13 Existing Vegetation Protection Materials

All items for the protection of existing vegetation shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Protective fence posts shall be 2400 x 100 x 100 mm timber sections. Fence wire shall be 4.0 mm diameter
galvanized-steel wire fixed and tensioned with galvanized-steel U-pins.
2. Protective wrapping shall be in strips of thick hessian, wrapping straw mattress, or other approved material, to
a height of 2 metres above ground level. The protective wrapping shall be secured using 2-mm galvanized wire
and turnbuckles starting 250 mm above ground level and at 500- mm centres. The wire shall be strained to
securely fix the protective wrapping but not too tight to damage the tree.
3. Strainers shall be approved 100 mm-long galvanized turnbuckles.
13.1.2.14 Ancillary Items

All ancillary items shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Tree stakes
All trees shall be double staked. Stakes shall be of timber, straight, free of projections and pointed at one end.
Stakes shall be pressure impregnated with non-injurious wood preservative to be applied at least two weeks
before use. Contractor shall comply with Table 13-13 for providing the tree stakes.
Table 13-13 Tree stake sizes
Plant Type Stake Size

Tree above 1.5m height 3000 x 50 x 50 mm
Tree up to 1.5m height 2400 x 50 x 50 mm
Large Shrub 1800 x 50 x 50 mm
2. Tree ties
Tree ties shall be tree straps of fabric webbing with a UV resistant plastic adjustable buckle and a protective
cushion. Ties fabricated from galvanized wire and guard hose will not be accepted. Hessian bands shall be 75
mm wide to lengths necessary for wrapping tree trunks and main branches.
Page 13-21
3. Guying and anchoring

Where guying and anchoring of large plant material is required, the Contractor shall submit a method
statement for the Engineer’s approval. Durable high strength rubber strapping is preferred over steel cable and
turn buckle arrangements.
4. Temporary planting screens
Whenever planting is in an exposed position, liable to strong or excessively hot wind conditions, windbreaks
shall be provided until such time as the planting is firmly established. Screens shall be 1,750 mm using high
density polyethylene monofilament shade net of 75% density supported by tree stakes as described above.
5. Hessian
Hessian bands shall be 750 mm wide to lengths necessary for wrapping tree trunks and main branches.
6. Anti-desiccant
Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion type, film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration but retard
excessive loss of water form plants. Trees or shrubs shall be sprayed 48 hours prior to moving. It should be
delivered in containers of the manufacturer and mixed according to the manufacturer's directions.
7. Gravel mulch
Gravel shall be free from additional organic and waste material, of a consistent beige colour or as specified in
the BOQ.
Gravel shall be spread evenly over areas as indicated with final spreading finished with a rake. In areas of
abutment with other landscape materials (e.g. turf, planting, mulches) the finish line of the gravel must be a
clean sharp edge or held with aluminium edging as indicated in the Contract Plans and the BOQ.
8. Temporary shade structure
For plant species requiring shade during establishment on site, temporary shade structures shall be erected and
maintained by the Contractor.
9. Root control barrier
Root control barriers shall be used to protect adjacent structures from damage as shown on the Contract Plans
and as directed by the Engineer. The barrier shall be HDPE, minimum 600 mm wide in continuous rolls and
manufactured for this purpose.
Do not fully enclose or encircle the plants roots system. Locate at the interface between the plant and the
objects being protected
13.1.3 Execution
13.1.3.1 Preliminaries
a. Site Investigations
Contractor shall verify existing conditions before starting work. Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and
conditions are as required, and ready to receive landscaping.
Contractor shall report in writing to the Engineer prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution
of the work of this section. Do not proceed with landscaping work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
By beginning work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions
encountered at no additional cost to Owner.
b. Site Enclosures
The Contractor shall erect temporary fencing to the boundaries of the site as required for the protection of the public
and/or to the Contractor’s site infrastructure and storage areas, including nurseries.
c. Existing Planting Soil

Where the Contract Plans indicate storage or reuse of existing topsoil, carefully strip and stockpile to avoid
unnecessary compaction, contamination or any damage to the topsoil.
Page 13-22
Do not pile higher than 3m and cover in windblown areas to protect from drying out. Do not store longer than
12-months. If this is required seek additional approval for alternative methods.
13.1.3.2 Existing Vegetation Protection

Contractor shall erect temporary fencing to protect existing vegetation to be retained. The area shall enclose the outer
drip line and root zone of all trees. Storage of building materials, construction refuses or any other deleterious
material is not permitted in the fenced area. Topsoil shall not be removed from any areas protected by fencing.
Protect all existing vegetation to be retained with maximum care at all times during construction and possession of the
site. The Contractor will be required to replace any damaged or destroyed vegetation to the full value of the said
vegetation and at the discretion of the Engineer. Contractor shall give seven days notice to the Engineer of any areas of
existing vegetation to be cleared. Contractor shall provide any required permits and receive written approval by the
Engineer prior to removal. The Engineer, at their discretion, may instruct the retention or transplanting of vegetation if
so required.
a. Tree and Palm Survey

Contractor shall survey the position and ground level at the base of every existing tree and palm within the Project with
a girth greater than 75 mm or large shrub greater than 40 mm (as measured at one metre above ground level). Contractor
shall identify the species of these existing trees, palms and shrubs, their size (height x spread), and condition and submit
this information to the Engineer on plans at a minimum scale of 1:250.
b. Palm Relocation
Contractor shall comply with the following requirements for the relocation of existing palms. Any relocated palm that
fails due to poor workmanship or failure to comply with these specifications shall be replaced with a similar quality
specimen by the Contractors at their expense.
1. Palms shall not be relocated during the months December to February inclusive.
2. All equipment including for excavation, lifting and transport shall be suited to the purpose.
3. Any Subcontractors appointed by the Contractor for this work shall be experienced in relocation of mature
palms and be approved by the Engineer prior to any works commencing.
4. Palms shall be prepared for relocation and replanted within 24 hours.
5. The root ball shall be excavated such that 90% of the active roots are uncut and the root ball intact.
6. Damage to the root ball, the trunk and the canopy must be avoided; any damages to the growing shoots will
immediately condemn the palm and it will be rejected.
7. Prior to transporting for replanting, all suckers, flowering and fruiting parts and approximately thirty percent of
fronds shall be removed. The remaining fronds shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant 24 hours prior to lifting.
The fronds are to be formed to enclose and protect the growing tip. Wrapped in hessian and securely tied in
position. The root ball is to be held secure using wire mesh and Hessian materials to contain the soil and retain
maximum soil moisture. Hessian shall be kept wet until lifting for transport.
8. A lattice patterned harness shall be placed under and around the root ball such that the root ball can be lifted
from four opposite positions, by crane, without damage to any part of the roots.
9. The palm shall be lifted by the root ball with the base of the trunk secured such that the palm remains as near
as possible to upright during lifting.
10. Where the palm is to be transported by truck to a new location, the root ball shall be tightly wrapped in hessian
and kept moist at all times.
11. The palm shall be lifted by a crane of appropriate capacity and the root ball carefully lowered onto the truck
tray then the trunk lowered onto a cradle or cushioning material such that it will not be damaged or move
during transport will not be damaged by wind and is not likely to foul overhead cables.
12. Palms being relocated within reach of the crane will be prepared in the same manner prior to lifting and
planting in the new location. The entire operation will be done within a 24 hour period and the root ball kept
moist at all times.
13. Transplanting locations shall be agreed on site with the Engineer and shall be prepared at least one week
before transplanting takes place.
14. Palms shall be watered in and mulched in accordance with the specification for normal planting works.
Page 13-23
15. Any damage due to relocation operations to existing grass areas, plants, planting areas, shall be corrected to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
16. Relocated palms and the surrounding soil shall be maintained as part of the warranty period.
13.1.3.3 Planting Season and Conditions

1. Planting shall occur only after approval of the Engineer.
2. No planting shall be carried out during periods of heavy rain, sandstorms, heavy winds, or during intense
daytime heat.
3. Plants and trees shall only be moved or planted in the cooler winter months between mid September and
mid May.
4. Palms and lawns can be installed in the more humid months late May to early September.
a) When special conditions warrant a variance to the planting times above, a proposed planting schedule
shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. In such cases, the planting will be installed at
no additional cost and all conditions and obligations such as maintenance and warranty remain the
responsibility of the Contractor.
5. Planting of trees and shrubs will occur prior to lawn planting. All planting should be carried out only after
the irrigation system is fully operational.
13.1.3.4 On-Site Acclimation and Storage

All plant materials shall be acclimatised on site for a minimum of 15 working days and protected against drying at all
times. This is only possible if facilities are available on site approved by the Engineer. Otherwise immediate planting is
recommended. In such cases required acclimatisation shall have been fulfilled in the nursery to overcome any
transplanting shock later.
Palm trees shall be planted immediately upon arrival on site. If palms have to be held for longer than twelve hours
before planting they should be ‘heeled-in’ in trenches which are kept moist at all times.
13.1.3.5 Handling and Transportation of Plant Material

Plant material shall be lifted or moved in such a manner that the roots are not disturbed. Plant materials shall be lifted
by handling the container and not the above ground portion of the plant. Root systems of all plants shall not be
allowed to dry out at any time and shall not be exposed to excessive or artificial heat or to freezing
temperatures. During transportation all plants shall be packed adequately to ensure protection for climatic or
physical injuries. Tarpaulins or other covers shall be placed over plants when they are transported by open trucks
or freight cars. Plants are not to be piled on top of one another. All plants shall be treated with anti-desiccant prior to
transportation.
13.1.3.6 Planting Medium

Mix the soil additives with agricultural soil at the rates specified. The planting medium shall be mixed
mechanically by an approved method to create a homogeneous mixture. For individual pits of tree and shrub planting,
planting medium shall be prepared in situ by mixing the specified quantity of each ingredient for each pit. Soil
mixing procedure shall comply with the following items:
1. Mix physical ingredients to a uniform mixture. Organic portion should be moist (50% moisture content as
received basis) but not overly wet to the point where fertiliser particles cling to it. Agricultural soil should be
moist (1 to 2 %) but not wet.
2. Mix fertiliser ingredients until homogeneous.
3. Apply fertiliser ingredients to the physical mixture and mix until homogeneous.
4. pH of the amended planting medium shall be within the range of 6.5 to 8.
5. Resultant planting medium shall be moistened to about 5-10 %.
Planting medium shall be covered if not to be utilised immediately and shall not be stored for periods longer than 2
weeks.
Page 13-24
13.1.3.7 Planting Depths and Pits

Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall comply with Table 13-14 for the minimum planting beds and pits
sizes and depths.
Table 13-14 Planting pit size and depth
Location Size / depth

Palm pits 2000 x 2000 x 2000 mm
Tree pits 1500 x 1500 x 1500 mm
Large Shrub pits 1000 x 1000 x 1000 mm
Small Shrub pits 750 x 750 x 750 mm
Shrub beds 500 mm depth
Groundcover beds 300 mm depth
Turf areas 300 mm depth
The planting medium depth from top level of pit must be 1.5 times or more than the total root ball depth and in no
rd of
cases should it be less than 1/3 the pit depth.
13.1.3.8 Percolation Tests

Percolation tests shall be carried out at a minimum rate of 1 test per 50 plants with respect to individual species or as
directed by the Engineer at a higher frequency. The test shall be carried out using the following procedure:
1. Fill the plant pit with irrigation water and mark the level reached.
2. Monitor the rate of percolation over a period of one hour. If the water level drops by more than 20mm then
the pit has passed the test.
3. If the plant pit fails the test, bore holes shall be augured at the bottom of the pit to achieve proper percolation to
the approval of the Engineer.
13.1.3.9 Installation of Plants

1. Planting operations shall be confined to one area at a time. The objective being to prepare, plant, and finish
each landscape area in one operation complete with its own functioning irrigation system.
2. Move and handle plants by container or root ball. Large palms and trees which are moved by crane or front
end loader must be protected so as not to damage the root ball, trunk, branches, or fronds.
3. Plant containers shall be cut off all container grown plants and removed.
4. Set the plants at the same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the ground from which they were dug
or soil level in their container except palms.
5. Water all plants immediately after planting.
6. Immediately after planting, all plant material shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant, applying an adequate film
over trunks, branches, twigs, and/or foliage. Cut ropes or strings from the tops of all plants after plant has been
set, except palms.
a. Container Grown Plants

1. Set all planting plumb and brace trees and shrubs rigidly in position until the planting soil mix has been
consolidated around root ball by water settlement.
2. When planting, water thoroughly and lightly tamp to eliminate all air pockets in the planting soil mix.
3. Groundcover and small shrubs shall be planted in neat rows with triangular spacing as shown on the Contract
Plans.
Page 13-25
b. Palms
1. Palms shall be planted in prepared pits, size as specified on the Contract Plans, backfilled and firmed.
2. Frond wrapping and dead fronds to be removed after turgidity in fronds is observed or new growth indicates
adequate recovery.
3. Palm trees with an installed brown trunk height of 2.50 to 3.00 m shall require three 55 x 110 mm timber
shores to prevent tilting during soil settling after planting.
13.1.3.10 Planting Sequence

Planting shall be done only once the installation of irrigation system has been completed in all respects, planting
area have been prepared properly and the work approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall proceed with planting
operations as portions of the site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each type of landscape
work required. Once started, the Contractor shall complete planting operations for the particular site until all planting
material and ancillary items are installed. The Contractor shall comply with the following planting sequence.
1. Planting bed preparation.
a) Prior to spreading of any planting medium, the sub-grade shall be filled or excavated to the appropriate
levels.
Sub-grade shall then be raked level and cleared of all debris and rock to reveal a smooth clean sub-base at levels
required to accommodate the specified depths of planting medium and mulch.
2. Placement of planting medium.
a) Planting medium shall be spread at levels to accommodate mulch where specified. Final grades should
not deviate more than +/- 25mm from the finish ground specified.
Finished ground level adjoining building shall be kept 150mm below the level of the damp-proof course.
Planting medium shall be placed in planting areas to the layer thickness as shown on the Contract Plans, or as otherwise
directed by the Engineer. If not otherwise shown or directed, minimum placement thickness shall be 300 mm (in dry
state, prior to saturation compaction). Placement of planting soil mix shall be uniform and graded to a uniform surface.
After placement, the planting soil mix shall be compacted using water saturation to the full mix depth. Area shall be
levelled to within plus or minus 50 mm and then again be thoroughly irrigated with water to eliminate air pockets and
settle soil. Soil shall be evenly moistened to a depth of 300mm. After the irrigation system has been installed,
recompact and settle all disturbed areas and fine grade to a smooth continuous grade. There shall be no uneven surfaces
greater than plus or minus 15 mm.
After a period of ten days, all germinating weeds shall be removed from the area and the soil shall be relevelled to form
a smooth continuous grade.
3. Setting out.
a) Stake out the outline of planting areas, groundcover beds and individual tree and shrub locations for
approval by the Engineer prior to plants being installed.
b) Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing 7 calendar days before the inspection of staking.
4. Excavation for planting.
a) At the time of planting, a hole shall be made into the pit/bed large enough to take the plants root ball
(refer to Section 13.1.3.7 for additional information).
b) Planting hole shall be thoroughly watered and the Contractor shall perform the percolation test (refer to
Section 13.1.3.8 for additional information) prior to installing plant material.
5. Planting.
a) Plants shall be carefully removed from containers. The plants shall be removed with all the soil intact
around the roots. Care shall be taken not to damage the roots of the plants. The plant shall be placed
upright in the centre of the hole. Planting should be avoided in extreme weather conditions.
b) Care shall be taken to set the plant in such a way to ensure that the collar line (line of contact between soil
and stem) is at the same level as the surrounding ground. Fill around the plant root ball with planting
medium in layers of 150-300 mm.
Page 13-26
c) The Engineer shall approve the relative positioning of all plants, and any relocation, if needed, shall be
carried out by the Contractor as part of the Contract.
6. Watering.
a) Watering shall be carried out through the approved irrigation system only. Under emergency
situations when watering could not be carried out through irrigation system, plants shall be irrigated with
water tanker using hosepipe fitted with fine spray heads and under controlled pressure. Watering should
not adversely affect the plant or ground conditions (i.e., if pressure is too high or shower nozzles absent).
b) For palms, trees and shrubs a circular watering basin slightly larger than the planting hole shall be
formed utilising planting medium. Immediately after planting, all plants shall be thoroughly watered in.
Ensure that soil from the watering basin does not migrate so as to cover the root ball top or around the
collar of the plant as this can cause damage or death of the plant.
7. Back filling.
a) Backfill with approved planting medium in layers not exceeding 300 mm. Each layer shall be separately
firmed and watered in to eliminate all air pockets until final soil level is reached. Allow for
compaction/subsidence by overfilling by 100 mm.
Once placed the planting material shall be covered with plastic sheeting or fenced and clearly marked to prevent
disturbance until planting commences.
8. Staking and guying.
a) Stakes shall be driven into the tree pits at least one third of their specified length. Stakes are required for
any new plantings with respect to the size and individual plant condition and location as directed by
the Engineer. If these are required for improvement of the growing conditions of the plant temporarily
then they can be requested by the Engineer at anytime.
9. Pruning.
a) Immediately after planting, all plants are to be pruned in accordance with accepted horticultural practices
or as directed by the Engineer. Pruning shall consist of carefully cutting back any damaged, dead
or diseased branches and the removal of any weak or malformed growth, with the aim of forming each
type of stock to the standard shape for its species.
b) The above horticultural care and arboriculture practices shall be applied to existing trees retained within
the project area. If requested, a method statement of proposed arboriculture works to existing trees shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
10. Identification.
a) A plastic label clearly engraved with the species and variety shall be attached to each plant or to each
group of plants (1 tag/10 plants minimum). Approval may be sought from the Engineer not to label
particular plants.
13.1.3.11 Levelling and Cleaning

After planting, the area surrounding the plant shall be restored to 25mm below finish. Excess soils and rubbish
shall be disposed of properly and final layer of mulch shall be applied.
13.1.3.12 Lawn Areas

Lawn grass areas shall be installed using one of the following items:
1. Stolons.
2. Sodding (Laying rolled or rectangular turf).
3. Seeding.
a. Preparation
Before planting lawn areas the ground must be prepared in such a way to avoid any water logging, surface run-off
or soil erosion. Levels shall be graded toward drainage inlets or subsoil drainage lines if available. Always form
slopes away from buildings and structures. Ensure the following before actual planting starts:
Page 13-27
1. Prior to beginning planting operations the irrigation system must be completely operational ensuring 100%
coverage.
2. Bring the water content of the area to be planted to field capacity and allow water to percolate until standing
water disappears.
3. Apply fertiliser quantities and kinds as approved by the Engineer.
4. Cultivate to a depth of 300 mm.
5. Level the ground to finish levels with suitable garden tools and machinery. All sticks, stones larger than 10
mm diameter, weeds, debris and other extraneous material shall be removed. Area shall be rolled and raked to
true lines free from unsightly variations, bumps, ridges or depressions.
b. Stolons
Contractor shall comply with following when installing stolons.
1. Keep dry dormant stolons refrigerated 0°- 3°C, until the area to be planted is prepared. Do not exceed two
weeks of refrigeration. Soak stolons in water after removing from cold storage and prior to planting.
2. Do not exceed two days of storage on job site. Stolons are to be kept moist, shaded and ventilated during such
storage.
3. Sow at 6 US bushels (36.5 litres) per 100 square meters. Note: UAE bushels are typically smaller with a
coverage rate of approximately 20 bushels per 100 square metres.
4. Plant utilising a disc to cut in stolons and followed by cultipacker roller or other technique approved by the
Engineer.
5. Water as necessary to keep the stolon bed moist until germination.
6. Once grass is up begin lengthening intervals between irrigation.
7. Planting shall not occur when day temperature is extremely high or night temperature is extremely low.
c. Sodding
Contractor shall comply with following when installing sod.
1. Sod soil mixture should contain sufficient moisture at the time of delivery at site.
2. Transporting of sod must be in covered trucks on wooden pallets to avoid any damage while in transit. Off
loading from trucks at site must be done using proper unloading machinery such as forklifts or by means of
slings and supports.
3. Sod shall be laid on cultivated soil within 24 hours of stripping. From the point of unloading, the sod shall be
taken to the actual location of its lay by the use of flat-bedded wheelbarrows. Sod shall not be thrown on the
ground.
4. Sod shall be laid to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. The ends of the sods shall be butted. Strips shall
be staggered to offset joints in adjacent courses.
5. Sod shall be tamped or rolled to ensure contact with the planting medium. Planting medium shall be
worked into minor spaces between pieces of sod and excess planting medium be removed.
6. The perimeter of the lawn area shall be flagged off to stop foot traffic until after the third mowing or as
7. Immediately after laying, lawn shall be hand watered abundantly using water hoses so that water
percolates down as quickly as possible to enable root mass to be in contact with the planting medium.
Watering should be continued in this manner for about a week by which time rooting will have started. Care
should be taken not to over water so as to cause water logging. Normal sprinkler irrigation programme shall be
commenced once root establishment is ensured.
d. Seeding
Contractor shall comply with following when seeding.
1. Seeding shall be spread over a fine levelled, cultivated soil bed by hand or mechanical seeders.
Page 13-28
2. After final levelling, work a hand rake mildly on soil surface to make shallow groves for seeds to fall in which
shall be later covered by irrigation water so that seeds shall not be blown off by subsequent wind.
3. Since grass seed is very tiny and free flowing, it may be mixed with coarse sand up to two times of its quantity
to get a uniform sowing coverage while hand spreading. Half of the specified rate shall be applied twice in
perpendicular directions so as to achieve an even seed distribution rate.
4. Following seeding, the bed shall be raked or harrowed or to cover the seed with soil to a maximum depth of
25mm. Water shall be applied lightly and frequently until one week or 50% germination and then gradually
increase duration and period between watering until normal irrigation programme is met.
e. Protection of Lawn
The perimeter of the lawn areas shall be flagged off to restrain foot traffic until after the second mowing (followed
by complete grass coverage) or as directed by the Engineer.
13.1.3.13 Heavy Machinery

Heavy machinery, which would excessively consolidate the subsoil, shall not be used during any operations nor shall
heavy machinery be taken over on areas prepared for planting or grassing.
13.1.4 Maintenance
After planting and prior to the onset of the 365-day maintenance period the Contractor shall be responsible for
carrying out all necessary measures to ensure that the plant material thrives and become established and that the
landscape areas are kept in a clean and tidy condition.
13.1.4.1 Drought Conditions

If water supply is or is likely to be restricted by emergency legislation, inform the Engineer without delay and ascertain
availability and additional cost of second class water from an approved source. If planting has not been carried out, do
not plant until instructed. If planting has been carried out, obtain instruction on supplying water.
13.1.4.2 Wind Deflecting Fences

Contractor shall be responsible to ensure all plants and planted areas are protected from the ingress of sand and
exposure to windblown sand. Wind deflecting fences consisting of black shade cloth doubled over a three wire fence
1.2m in height are to be erected as and when required and to the approval of the Engineer.
13.1.4.3 Establishment Maintenance

Furnish and supply all materials, equipment and labour for maintenance of all landscaped areas and irrigation installed.
Maintenance shall include measures necessary to establish and maintain plants in a vigorous and healthy growing
condition including, but not limited to the following:
1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits: When herbicides are used for weed control, apply in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from use of herbicides.
2. Watering sufficient to saturate root zoon of the plant.
3. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches and treatment of prune wounds.
4. Disease and insect control.
5. Tree ties, tree stakes, plastic edgings and other landscaping accessories.
6. Replacement of sub-standard or dead plant material.
7. Maintenance of the irrigation system in full working order at all times (refer to Section 13.3 for additional
information).
a. Substantial Completion
The Engineer shall certify the date when substantial completion of the l a n d s c a p e works has been achieved.
Substantial Completion will not be awarded until 100% of all plant material is planted and in living, healthy condition
and is planted as per the specification. A fully defoliated plant, though it may survive, cannot be considered as
successful establishment due to its possible ill health at a later stage.
Page 13-29
Once substantial completion is achieved the Contractor shall maintain the works for 365-days before Final
Completion known as the Establishment Maintenance Period
13.1.4.4 Establishment Maintenance Operations

Contractor shall maintain the landscape for a period of 365 days after the date certified by the Engineer that the work
has been completed and has issued the substantial completion certificate. During the maintenance period the Contractor
shall carry out maintenance of the planting strictly in accordance with the Landscape Management and Maintenance
Manual (refer to DoT’s A13 Road Landscaping Manual for additional information) approved by the Engineer.
Depending on the scope of works this manual should be incorporated with irrigation and hardscape maintenance as
one complete volume.
The extent of the landscape to be maintained by the Contractor shall be deemed to cover and include all soft
landscape areas and irrigation systems within the overall project boundaries as shown on the Contract Plans.
The Contractor shall carry out the following maintenance operations when necessary and as directed by the Engineer
to alleviate any undesirable growing conditions.
1. Replacement of dead/missing plants.
2. Grass cutting around trees.
3. Watering.
4. Cultivation and loosening of soil.
5. Mowing and edging.
6. Weeding.
7. Pruning and clipping.
8. Firming up and adjusting tree stakes and ties.
9. Eradication of pests and/or diseases.
10. Top-dressing and mulching.
11. Fertilising.
12. Cleaning of plant basins.
13. Foliage washing.
14. Clearance of windblown sand from landscape areas.
a. Compliances
The Contractor shall ensure that a senior qualified supervisor is made available for organising and running the
maintenance program. The Contractor shall also have available an experienced foreman who can supervise the workers
on a day-to-day basis. These personnel will require as minimum the following qualifications:
1. Supervisor shall be a graduate in Horticulture or Agricultural Science with minimum 6-years exposure to
landscape projects in the Middle East.
2. Foreman shall be a degree or diploma holder in Horticulture / Agriculture Science with not less than 4 years of
field experience in landscape projects.
3. They shall be able to recognise field problems and to carry out remedial measures time to time.
4. They shall be able to organise the work force and manage works to keep the plants in premium condition.
b. Specific Maintenance Practices

The Contractor shall utilise the following specific maintenance practices for carrying out works relevant to the plant
types, application time, and prevailing deficiency symptoms. Details of such works shall be explained in the Weekly
Schedule for the succeeding week’s works. The Contractor is not limited to the listed specific maintenance practices and
is responsible to carry out all works necessary to maintain healthy, aesthetic plants to the satisfaction and approval of
the Engineer.
Page 13-30
c. Maintenance Fertiliser Application

The following application rates are general recommendations required per annum. Specific recommendations shall
have to be followed depending up on the soil analysis and testing for each planting area. Time of application, rate per
application and methods shall be as per the approved Landscape Management and Maintenance Manual.
Table 13-15 Maintenance fertiliser application rates and methods
Slow Nitrogenous Chelated

Organic N.P.K + Soil
Plant Release (Urea/Am. Micro
Manure T.E. Conditioner
Organic Sulphate) Nutrient
Once a Once a Twice a As shown per As shown per

Timing Once a year
year year year annum annum
As
Measurement Kg As Shown Grams Grams Kg
Shown
Palm 100-200
10 2.5 to 3 Kg 1 to 2 Kg 250-500 twice 2
(per palm) twice
Trees
5 500 Grams 0.5-1 Kg 100-250 once 100-200 once 1
(per tree)
Shrub 200-250 200-250

2.5 100-150 twice 50-100 once 0.5
(per shrub) Grams Grams
Groundcover 100-200 100-200

5 50 three times 25-50 twice 0.25
(per m2) Grams Grams
Table 13-16 Seasonal flowers maintenance fertiliser application rates and methods
Kind of
SI Per Sq. Meter Frequency Remarks
Fertilisers
Granular fertiliser Spread around plants in planting beds, mix well with
1 N.P.K 12-24-12 + 50 Grams Monthly planting medium, irrigate to field capacity
MgO immediately after application.
Soil application by fertigation or by foliar spray (-.3
Micronutrient grams per litre of water). Conduct foliar test spray in
2 0.3 Grams Fortnightly
fertiliser small area to establish safety for concentration before
spraying large areas.
Fertiliser application rates and methods listed above is subjected to modifications depending on the project needs, soil
test reports, planting types, seasons etc. and the Contractor shall follow the approved program specified by the Engineer.
d. Palm Care
1. Care of Replacement Palms
Six to eight weeks after planting, remove palm wrapping, separate fronds and check for terminal bud growth.
If terminal bud shows signs of growth leave palm unwrapped to allow the heart to receive sunlight. If no sign
of regrowth is evident, it can be safely assumed that the palm had died and therefore should be replaced.
2. Pruning and Cleaning

i. Phoenix dactylifera and Washingtonia filifera require the oldest fronds to be removed in November, but
periodic removal of dead fronds shall be carried out as and when necessary.
Page 13-31
ii. Fronds shall be removed using a sharp disinfected saw cutting on the underside of the petiole as close to
the trunk as possible. The frond shall be tensioned by pushing it up. Any dead, dry leaves / stalks
hanging must be removed.
iii. Inflorescence must be tied and kept clean. Excessive male inflorescence must be cut and removed.
iv. Trunk shall be maintained with a uniform girth as the leaf sheaths are to be cut clean.
v. Maintain palm-planting basins by removing all debris and weeds. Care shall be taken to protect
bubblers and other irrigation accessories while cleaning.
vi. After an established period of one growing season the Contractor shall clean palms by having all bases
of old fronds saw back close to stem at a downward sloping angle, leaving no cavities which might
harbour larval pests.
vii. Leaf axils shall be periodically checked for infestation of rats or reptiles and control measures shall be
taken immediately.
viii. Offshoots shall be removed keeping only the main trunk of the palm thereby maintaining a good
appearance, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
ix. Pollination shall be carried out at right time with viable pollen collected from healthy palms. Only
workers experienced in pollination techniques shall be engaged for this work.
3. Irrigation
The Contractor shall coordinate with the irrigation Contractor to ensure that the palms receive adequate amount
of water as per application rates specified unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
4. Fertiliser Application
Refer to Section c for fertiliser application rates and methods.
5. Pest and Disease Control

Refer to Section 13.1.5.1 for pest and disease control methods.
e. Tree and Shrub Care

1. Pruning and Cleaning
i. All plants shall be maintained in a well-pruned condition to improve their appearance and to keep them
healthy. Provide monthly inspection and if necessary removal of dead, dry, diseased and broken
branches.
ii. Cuts shall always be made on a slant so that they shed water easily and be just above a branch junction,
bud or leaf mode, pointing in the direction that the new branch should grow so that ragged and split
ends are avoided. Stubs of branches left beyond the bud will dieback to the bud, making entry of
disease easier.
iii. Pruning on flowering trees and shrubs shall not occur until after blossoming but prior to bud production
so as not to affect the forthcoming blossoms.
iv. Light pruning to shape a plant or remove dead branches can be done all year round.
v. Heavy pruning shall be done during the dormant season (December - February) and only when leaves
have fallen.
vi. All cuts shall be clean leaving no stubs. Cut ends shall be applied with a fungicide to prevent entry of
disease causing organisms.
2. Tree Stakes and Ties

i. Stakes for all ornamental trees shall be inspected on a monthly basis to prevent girdling of trunks or
branches, and to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds.
ii. Any lean from natural causes shall straightened.
iii. Stakes loosened or broken shall be repaired or replaced using the specified stakes (refer to Section
13.1.2.14 for additional information).
Page 13-32
iv. Tree ties shall be inspected on a monthly basis. Loosen ties when necessary to avoid constricting the
growth of limbs and the trunk.
v. Where necessary stakes and ties shall be replaced using the equivalent material being removed.
vi. Tree stakes and supports shall be removed only once the plants are anchored strongly by its own
root system and the tree is capable of standing vertical and able to resist normal summer high winds
and winter storms.
vii. At completion of the maintenance period, or as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall obtain
approval from the Engineer to remove all stakes and ties, except those trees requiring
continued support.
3. Irrigation
The amount of water needed for healthy growth will vary depending on plant size, wind and sun exposure,
season and soil type. The Contractor shall coordinate with the irrigation Contractor to ensure that the trees and
shrubs receive adequate amount of water as per application rates specified unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.

6. Weed Control
i. Remove all undesirable plant material around the base of trees on a monthly basis.
a) For trees planted in grass areas, approximately 80 cm diameter shall be maintained around the base
of the trees, free from grass and other plant material.
b) Trees in gravel and other planted areas shall be kept clear of all undesirable plant materials.
c) Weeds within 50cm of the plants stem shall be removed by hand and not dug out so as to avoid
any risk of damage.
ii. Chemicals shall only be used in places away from other plants.
f. Ground Cover
1. Trimming and Edging
i. The growth pattern of ground cover shall be maintained in such a way that the canopy level shall be
equally maintained without growth differences unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
ii. Top growth shall be cut back to promote lower growth and horizontal growth.
iii. Edging shall be carried out when plants have reached the edge of the plant bed boundary.
iv. Pruning shall be carried out using hand shears or a powered hedge trimmer. After cutting, all
clippings should be removed to avoid any problems of disease transmission from the dead leaves.

4. Weed Control
Hand weeding shall only be permitted in order to avoid chemical injury to ground covers. If a weed needs
chemical control measures, the Contractor shall use a selective chemical that kills only the weed without
harming ground cover.
Page 13-33
g. Climbers and Vines

1. Pruning
i. Pruning shall start whilst the plant is small, so it will grow gradually and increase evenly in
size.
ii. All pruning cuts shall be neat and clean and made 1 cm above a well-developed healthy bud or sound
out wards growing side shoot, at an angle of about 45 degrees to the growing point.
iii. Light pruning to shape a plant or remove dead twigs shall be done monthly.
iv. Heavy pruning shall occur during the dormant season so that stems are generally of equal length to help
avoid them going "leggy". Pruning just above outward-pointing branches will also help to train them to
spread laterally.
2. Irrigation
The amount of water needed for healthy growth will vary depending on plant size, wind and sun exposure,
season and soil type. The Contractor shall coordinate with the irrigation Contractor to ensure that the climbers
and vines receive adequate amount of water as per application rates specified unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
4. Staking and Tying

i. Vines shall be tied and trained to grow along the walls and against trellis work, using expandable
wire reinforced plastic ribbon twine.
ii. The material shall not harm the twigs or branches on tying with supports or stakes.
iii. Contractor shall obtain prior approval of the Engineer for the material.
5. Weed Control
i. Hand weeding shall only be permitted in order to avoid chemical injury to climbers and vines.
ii. If a weed needs chemical control measures, the Contractor shall use a selective chemical that kills only
the weed without harming the climber or vine.
iii. Cultivate the soil surface to a depth of 50 mm on a monthly basis.
h. Lawn
1. Mowing
i. Frequency of mowing shall be determined by the grass variety grown, climatic conditions and other
microclimatic factors.
a) Mowing frequency during summer months (March - October) shall be twice weekly.
b) Mowing frequency during winter months (November - February) shall be once every two weeks.
c) Additional mowing may be required depending upon the speed of growth and species or as per the
need according to growing conditions.
ii. Grass shall be mowed at a height of 25 mm, but not less than 1/3 of total length of grass blade.
iii. Grass shall not be mowed immediately after irrigation or a rain event.
iv. Mowing shall be followed at right angles to previous cutting direction.
v. Machinery for mowing (a mechanized mower) shall be fitted with grass collecting boxes.
vi. Equipment shall be in optimum operating condition prior to use. Faulty or un-serviced equipment is not
accepted for use.
Page 13-34
vii. Cutting blades of mower shall be inspected before each cutting and be sharpened if required. Any
broken or bent blades shall be replaced immediately.
viii. Clippings shall be manually removed immediately after mowing before next irrigation. The Contractor
shall alternatively use a modern mower that can cut grass in to fine pieces and spread grass
clippings on the land (mulching mower). In such case care shall be taken not to delay between mowing.
2. Trimming and Edging

i. Trimming grass against the base of walls, fences, kerbstones and in places where access from
mowers is not possible shall be done at same frequency as the mowing.
ii. Trimming grass shall be by hand with grass shears or with a powered nylon string trimmer.
iii. Edging against pavements, flower beds, plant basins etc. shall carried out using a motorized edging
machine or long handled shears.
iv. Edging and trimming shall occur not less than once a week during summer months (March-October).
v. Edging and trimming shall be as required during dormant winter months (November- February).
3. Irrigation
Watering shall be carried out in early mornings, to avoid excessive moisture loss due to evaporation. The
Contractor shall coordinate with the irrigation Contractor to ensure that the lawn receives adequate amount of
water as per application rates specified unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
4. Fertiliser application
i. Prior to fertiliser application, Contractor shall obtain approval of the Engineer for the type of fertiliser
and shall follow the rates recommended by the manufacturer.
ii. Fertilisers shall be applied to the grass while the ground is dry and followed by thorough watering after
application
iii. Fertiliser shall be applied either using applicators, which can be tractor mounted for large areas or
broadcast by hand in small areas.
iv. Fertiliser shall be applied at half rate in two directions at right angles to each other to ensure a complete
spread.

6. Weed Control
i. Removal of weeds shall be controlled either by manual removal or by using suitable selective herbicide.
ii. If herbicide is to be used, Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer after submitting the
literature of the product and by doing test applications.
iii. Broadleaf herbicides shall be applied whilst the target weed is actively growing but prior to seed
germination.
iv. Herbicides shall be applied late in the day to avoid excessive evaporation that would prevent the plant
from absorbing sufficient chemical.
v. If broadleaf weed infestation is severe, it may be necessary for several applications at approximately
two-week intervals to achieve acceptable control.
vi. Herbicides shall be applied using powered spraying machines or a knapsack sprayer as per the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
vii. Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits or approvals for use of herbicides prior to its application in
publically accessible locations.
viii. Herbicides shall not be applied when the public is present.
Page 13-35
7. Dethatching
Contractor shall dethatch the lawn once a year or as necessary during the active growing period of lawn.
Proper equipment is to be used. After dethatching, all dead material shall be removed manually or with a
mower having box collectors. Follow fertiliser and irrigation application immediately.
8. Aerating
Contractor shall aerate lawn areas once a year, twice a year in heavily foot traffic areas, or as instructed by
the Engineer. Proper aerating tools shall be used to remove small cores of earth. The small cores of earth
shall either be collected or broken down and raked into the lawn area.
9. Gap Filling and Patch Works

Contractor shall repair dry or damaged patches or gaps in lawn area with the same variety grass during a
suitable season.
10. Top Dressing

i. Lawn shall be cut prior to top dressing.
ii. Do not fully cover the grass blades.
iii. Prevent smothering by raking to work soil down to ground level.
iv. Top dressing may be carried out in several stages for more uneven areas.
v. Top dressing shall be undertaken in the dormant period (November - February) prior to summer.
vi. Apply fertiliser after levels are obtained and irrigate the area.
11. Manure Topping

i. Top dressing with manure may be utilised in lieu of fertiliser with the approval of the Engineer.
ii. Use well-decomposed manure in powder form free from lumps or other impurities.
iii. Manure shall be applied during moderate weather conditions by either hand spreading or using a manure
spreader for large lawn areas.
iv. Manure shall not be allowed to fall in heaps on the lawn surface.
v. Top dressing with manure shall not occur immediately before dethatching or mowing.
vi. Top dressing with manure shall occur immediately after mowing but before first irrigation.
vii. Lawn area shall be thoroughly watered after manure spreading. Keep the ground moist until the manure
particles are properly incorporated with soil.
i. Maintenance Manual Reports

1. Submission of Reports
i. Operations and Maintenance Schedule.
a) Within 7 days of substantial completion, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a
comprehensive Operations and Maintenance Schedule that includes methodology for addressing
all horticultural and other issues explained in this section for each location and plant species. This
shall include any other operations the Contractor deems necessary for the betterment of
maintenance of landscape.
ii. Daily Records.
a) The Contractor shall keep records of daily operations undertaken in relation to maintenance
works. This shall include activities and procedures carried out on a day-to-day basis and are
submitted with the Monthly Report.
iii. Weekly Programme Schedule
a) The Contractor shall inspect the site once per week during the maintenance period and shall
prepare a brief schedule of operations required for the coming week. The format for the schedule
Page 13-36
of operations will cover each distinct area of the site. The schedule shall describe the operations
the Contractor intends to carry out in the coming week to cover the items listed in the specification
and to ensure that the current weather conditions and growing performance is taken into account.
b) A copy of this schedule is to be submitted to the Engineer every week so that a running record of
proposed operations can be checked at the maintenance inspections each month. If in the opinion
of the Engineer the maintenance works have not been satisfactorily carried out according to site
conditions and the specifications, part of the monthly payment shall be withheld until the works
have been satisfactorily carried out.
iv. Monthly Maintenance Schedule.
a) The Contractor shall prepare a Monthly Maintenance Schedule forecasting the required
maintenance operations for the coming month.
b) The Monthly Maintenance Schedule shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer before the
th
25 of the preceding month.
c) Maintenance activities shall not be limited to those listed in this section, and submission or
approval of this schedule in no way relieves the Contractor from the responsibilities of carrying
out any additional maintenance works required to keep the landscape in good condition.
v. Monthly Report.
a) The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Monthly Report detailing all activities and practices
adopted during the previous month to the Engineer for review.
b) The Monthly Report shall be submitted during the first week of every month.
c) The Engineer shall review and comment on the works done, based on weekly and monthly
forecasted work schedules and daily reports.
j. Replacements
The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any plants that fail to survive as a result of inadequate maintenance
operations, poor workmanship or poor quality of plant material during the establishment and maintenance period. The
Final Completion Certificate will not be issued until all plants scheduled in the Drawings and Schedule of Work are
successfully installed in a healthy condition in the manner specified and as approved by the Engineer.
k. Soil Analysis during Establishment Maintenance Period

The Contractor shall arrange analysis of soil samples from locations within the project at 6 monthly intervals or as
directed by the Engineer. The required number of samples shall be decided and instructed by the Engineer depending on
the size of the project and other planting features. Test results must comply with the specified standards for pH levels of
planting medium. The Contractor shall take necessary corrective measures if it does not comply.
l. Monthly Inspections
All landscape areas shall be inspected monthly by the Engineer and lists of remedial works issued after each inspection.
All items on the remedial lists are to be carried out by the time of the next inspection, i.e. within one month.
m. Site Cleaning
The Contractor shall keep the landscape areas clean and tidy at all times and dispose of all waste materials arising from
the cleaning (refer to Section 13.1.1.7 for additional information).
n. Final Handover
Two weeks before the end of the Establishment Maintenance Period, a joint inspection shall be held with the
Contractor and the Engineer to review the requirements for alteration or replacement in order to gain approval for
Final Handover. In order to ensure satisfactory handover procedures, the site meetings held each month between the
Contractor and Engineer will be used to inspect and approve the maintenance works which will be reviewed
to ensure adequate work has been done.
At the time of final inspection, all areas under contract shall be free of weeds, neatly cultivated and raked, and all
plants in good order. Grass shall be neatly cut and all clippings removed. No bare patches of earth shall be
visible in turf or ground cover planting areas unless specified. If, after the inspection, the Engineer is of the opinion that
all works have been performed in accordance with the Contract Plans, Specifications and site instructions, the
Page 13-37
Engineer will give written approval of acceptance and completion of the project. If all or certain portions of the works
are not acceptable under the terms and intent of the Contract Plans and Specifications, the formal Establishment
Maintenance Period for all the work shall be extended at t h e expense of the Contractor, until the defects in the
works have been corrected and the works are accepted by the Engineer.
13.1.5 Pest and Disease Control

13.1.5.1 Palms
The Contractor shall inspect palms on a monthly basis for pests and diseases and perform proper treatments,
approved by the Engineer, at the identified problems. Table 13-17 provides a list of pests and diseases along with
methods and rates which shall be used as a guide for control. This list in no way relieves the Contractor from the
responsibilities of carrying out any additional maintenance works required to keep palms in healthy condition. The
Contractor shall include any other operations they deem necessary, or at the discretion of the Engineer, for the
betterment of the palms.
Table 13-17 Palm tree pest and disease control methods
Pest / Disease Application Method Frequency Remarks

Boreholes in Pesticide both in the stem Twice: Mid-May and
trunk and head Mid-June
Affected palms shall be
November to April when
Red Palm Pesticides and sex immediately removed and disposed
mating and egg
Weevil aggregation pheromone traps from the site before infection
production occurs
spreads.
Baiting
Rats. 5 to 6 blocks for each
Provided in locations of Placement of lockable traps in areas
Rodents 5-10m
known problematic areas away from public access and view.
Mice. 1 to 2 blocks for
each 1-2m
Fruit Stalk/ Leaf Pesticide and colour/ light
November to April
Borer traps
Longhorn Date Preventative care includes dusting
Palm Stem Pesticide and light traps November to April of palm crown after harvesting
Borer fruits and again before flowering.
Preventative care includes
Twice immediately after
Lesser Date collecting and burying fallen
Pesticide pollination with
Moth infected fruit in the ground to
fortnightly intervals
reduce re-emergence of adults.
Dubs Bug/ Date Removal of suckers, annual pruning
Pesticide/ Use of natural Mid-November to Mid-
Palm and providing wind breakers reduce
enemies May
Leafhopper infestations.
Do not use insecticide unless
Scales and Per manufacturer’s infestation is considered serious.
Pesticide
Mealy Bug recommendation Oil based insecticide is
recommended.
Pesticide in conjunction with Per manufacturer’s
Turn over surrounding soil to about
a granular insecticide to the recommendation when
Termites 50 cm deep to destroy soil canals
soil, and removal of sandy termites or soil mounds
and treat with a nematicide product.
mounds are present
Per manufacturer’s
Mites Pesticide recommendation when
mites are present
Fungal Per manufacturer’s If multiple diseases are present
Fungicides
Diseases: recommendation ensure fungicide is non-selective
Page 13-38

Black Scorch and covers all known diseases
Graphiola
Diplodia
Khamedj
Bud Rot
Leaf Spots
Fruit Rot
Nematodes: Wash tools, shoes and equipment
Root Knot Drenching palm once exposed to known problem areas
Nematicide
Root Rot during growing season before working in other areas to
Stunning Root reduce the spreading of nematodes.
13.1.5.2 Trees and Shrubs

The Contractor shall inspect trees and shrubs on a monthly basis for pests and diseases and perform proper
treatments, approved by the Engineer, at the identified problems. Table 13-18 provides a list of pests and diseases
along with methods and rates which shall be used as a guide for control. This list in no way relieves the Contractor
from the responsibilities of carrying out any additional maintenance works required to keep trees and shrubs in healthy
condition. The Contractor shall include any other operations they deem necessary, or at the discretion of the Engineer,
for the betterment of the trees and shrubs.
Table 13-18 Fruit tree pest and disease control methods

Initial applications in late
winter and early spring
Clean soil of debris and turn over
with regular treatments
Fruit Fly Pesticide and fruit fly traps soil 50 cm deep prior to initial
during growing season
application.
per manufacturer’s
recommendations
Whiteflies
Aphids Pesticide, traps and natural Per manufacturer’s Removal of dust and ants will assist
Thrips enemies recommendation the natural enemies.
Leafhoppers
Initial application in early
spring applied to the new
Pesticide, traps and natural Remove suckers from the trunk
Leaf Minor foliage. Fortnightly
enemies below the graft union.
applications may be
required
Scales and Mealy Per manufacturer’s infestation is considered serious.
Pesticide
Bug recommendation Oil based insecticide is
recommended.
Worms Pesticide
recommendation
Red Mite Per manufacturer’s
Bud Mite Pesticide recommendation when
Citrus Flat Mite mites are present
Page 13-39

Fungal Diseases:
Black Spot If multiple diseases are present
Cummosis Fungicides ensure fungicide is non-selective
recommendation
Citrus Rapid and covers all known diseases
Decline

Drenching tree once exposed to known problem areas
Root Knot Nematicide
during growing season before working in other areas to
Root Rot reduce the spreading of nematodes.
Table 13-19 Ornamental tree and shrub pest and disease control methods

Initial applications in late
winter and early spring
Clean soil of debris and turn
with regular treatments
Fruit Fly Pesticide and fruit fly traps over soil 50 cm deep prior to
during growing season per
initial application.
manufacturer’s
recommendations
Whiteflies
Aphids Pesticide, traps and natural Per manufacturer’s Removal of dust and ants will
Thrips enemies recommendation assist the natural enemies.
Leafhoppers
Per manufacturer’s infestation is considered serious.
Mealy Bug Pesticide
recommendation Oil based insecticide is
recommended.
Hairy Caterpillar
Per manufacturer’s Dust trees and shrubs during the
Spindle Caterpillar Pesticide
recommendation caterpillar’s early stage
Arak Caterpillar
mites are present
Fungal Diseases:
Black Spot
Leaf Spot If multiple diseases are present
Per manufacturer’s ensure fungicide is non-
Wilting Fungicides
recommendation selective and covers all known
Damping Off diseases
Root Rot
Ring Rot
Wash tools, shoes and
Nematodes: equipment exposed to known
Drenching tree once
Nematicide problem areas before working in
Root Knot during growing season
other areas to reduce the
spreading of nematodes.
Baiting
Rats. 5 to 6 blocks for Placement of lockable traps in
Provided in locations of
Rodents each 5-10m areas away from public access
known problematic areas
Mice. 1 to 2 blocks for and view.
each 1-2m
Page 13-40
13.1.5.3 Lawn and Ground Cover

The Contractor shall inspect the lawn and ground cover on a monthly basis for pests and diseases and perform proper
treatments, approved by the Engineer, at the identified problems. Table 13-20 provides a list of pests and diseases
along with methods and rates which shall be used as a guide for control. This list in no way relieves the Contractor
from the responsibilities of carrying out any additional maintenance works required to keep the lawn and ground cover in
healthy condition. The Contractor shall include any other operations they deem necessary, or at the discretion of the
Engineer, for the betterment of the lawn and ground cover.
Table 13-20 Lawn and ground cover pest and disease control methods

Initial application in Mid-
Cutworm Summer when high
Thatching with aeration will
Armyworm Pesticide percentage of white grubs
increase effectiveness of insecticide
White Grubs are present in upper soil
layer
Whiteflies
Aphids Pesticide, traps and natural Per manufacturer’s Removal of dust and ants will assist
Thrips enemies recommendation the natural enemies.
Leafhoppers
Initial application in early
spring applied to the new
Pesticide, traps and natural
Leaf Minor foliage. Fortnightly
enemies
applications may be
required
Per manufacturer’s infestation is considered serious.
Mealy Bug Pesticide
recommendation Oil based insecticide is
recommended.
Wheat bran soaked in a Bait to be applied immediately after
pesticide mixture (bait) Apply bait once irrigation when the soil is wet
Mole Cricket
broadcasted on the infested infestation has occurred which encourages the crickets to
area come to the surface to feed
mites are present
Fungal
Diseases:
Black Spot
Leaf Spot If multiple diseases are present
Fungicides ensure fungicide is non-selective
Wilting recommendation
and covers all known diseases
Damping Off
Root Rot
Ring Rot

Drenching and
exposed to known problem areas
Root Knot Nematicide broadcasting during
before working in other areas to
Root Rot growing season
reduce the spreading of nematodes.
Snails Broadcasting pesticide (bait) Do not use metaldehyde based baits

on the ground within the where children and pets could
Slugs recommendation
planted area encounter them
Page 13-41
13.2 Hardscape
13.2.1 General
13.2.1.1 Scope
The work included in this Section covers the various types of paving finishes and their installation. The Section includes
but is not limited to all paver types, granular aggregate base courses, joint materials and gravel/pebble courses.
Specifications are to be read in conjunction with the whole document. Where materials are referred to in this and
other sections of this document (i.e. concrete), no one section shall take priority over another: All relevant clauses
shall apply.

2. Section 13.1 Landscaping
3. Section 13.3 Irrigation
The following related documents should be used as a reference when considering hardscape within urban locations:

Materials that have not been individually specified in this document shall be of international standard. The minimum
acceptable standard shall be the relevant British Standard (if applicable), Australian Standard, American Standard or
ISO.
The following reference standards included in this section shall apply:
AASHTO M17-77 Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures;
AASHTO M20-70 Standard Specification for Penetration Graded Asphalt Cement;
AASHTO M140-70 Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt;
AASHTO M208-72 Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt;
AASHTO M226-78 Standard Specification for Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement;
ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates;
ASTM C88 Test Method for soundness of aggregate by use. Sodium Sulphate or Magnesium
Sulphate;
ASTM D242-85 Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures;
ASTM D692-85 Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures;
ASTM D946-82 Specification for Penetration - Graded Asphalt Cement for use in Pavement
Construction;
ASTM D977-85 Specification for Emulsified Asphalt;
ASTM D1073-81 Specification for Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures;
ASTM D1557-78 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures
using 4.54 Kg (10 lb.) Rammer and 457mm (18 in.) Drop;
ASTM D2397-85 Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt;
ASTM D3381-83 Specification for Viscosity - Graded Asphalt Cement for use in Pavement Construction;
ASTM D3515-84 Specification for Hot-Mixed, Hot Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures;
ASTM D4253-83 Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils using a Vibratory Table;
Page 13-42
ASTM D4254-83 Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of Relative
Density;
BS 13808:2005 Bitumen and Bituminous Binders. Framework for Specification Cationic bituminous
emulsions;
BS 434-2:2006 Bitumen road emulsions. Code of practice for the use of cationic bitumen emulsions
on roads and other paved areas;
BS EN 1342:2001 Sets of natural stone for external paving. Requirements and test methods;
BS EN 1343:2001 Kerbs of natural stone for external paving. Requirements and test methods;
BS EN 1338:2003 Concrete paving blocks. Requirements and test methods;
BS EN 1339:2003 Concrete paving flags. Requirements and test methods;
BS EN 1340:2003 Concrete kerb units. Requirements and test methods;
BS EN 13108:2006 Bituminous Mixtures. Materials Specifications. Stone Mastic Asphalt;
BS 5931:1980 Code of practice for machine laid in situ edge details for paved areas;
BS EN 1344:2002 Clay pavers. Requirements and Test Methods;
BS 7533-1:2001 Pavements constructed with clay, natural stone orconcrete pavers. Guide for the
structural design of heavy duty pavements constructed of clay pavers or precast concrete
paving blocks;
BS 7533-2:2001 Pavements constructed with clay, natural stone orconcrete pavers. Guide for the
structural design of lightly trafficked pavements constructed of clay pavers or precast
concrete paving blocks;
BS 7533-3:2005 Pavements constructed with clay, natural stone or concrete pavers. Code of practice for
laying precast concrete paving blocks and clay pavers for flexible pavements;
BS 7533-4:2006 Pavements constructed with clay, natural stone orconcrete pavers. Code of practice for
the construction of pavements of precast concrete flags or natural stone slabs.
Latest editions of all relevant International Standards shall be used with current amendments and additions. Any
differences between their requirements and this specification shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
13.2.1.4 Levels, Reference Points and Setting Out

The works are to be set out from primary datum levels and setting out points indicated on the Contract Plans or
from information provided and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a proposal for setting out and
controlling the alignment of the works to the Engineer for approval prior to the start of construction. The Contractor
shall supply to the Engineer details of the value and location of all temporary benchmarks and established reference
points. Should the Contractor dispute the original ground levels shown on the Contract Plans he shall agree these with
the Engineer before disturbing the original ground.

Provide kerb/ paving units that are the products of one supplier and one quarry as specified. Stone material shall
comply with the standards of the United States National Granite Quarries Association (NGQA).
13.2.1.6 Submittals
a. Samples
Submit samples of each element that is to be used in the finished work for the Engineer’s approval, showing the
full range of colour and finish variations expected. Provide at least four un-mounted units.
b. Manufacturer’s Literature
Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations. Provide
certifications stating that materials comply with requirements.
Page 13-43
c. Drawings
1. Shop drawings.
a) Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication and installation of all hard landscaping works to
include plans and details showing exact size, shape, profile, curvature, and finish and installation method.
2. As Built drawings.
and approved work shall be recorded on these drawings. The Contractor shall maintain this on a daily
basis. At the time of substantial completion the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the complete “As
Built” set of drawings for approval.
b) Once the drawings have been approved the Contractor shall prepare and submit three sets of fully book
bound drawings and one soft PDF copy on CD with scanned literature as necessary within 14 days of final
approval.
d. Machinery Information
Submit information about machinery that will be utilised for installation and maintenance works: type, source, year of
manufacture and quantity.
13.2.1.7 Mock-Ups and Samples

a. Mock-ups
Prior to construction, the Contractor shall provide mock-ups of typical paving and edging types (min. area 3.0m x 3.0m)
at locations approved by the Engineer and obtain Engineer's approval of visual qualities. The approved mock-ups shall
be clearly labelled and retained on site in an approved location for the duration of the project as the standard for all
material or work of that type. Approved mock-ups may be incorporated into finished work with written approval of the
Engineer.
b. Samples
Submit samples of all materials to be used for approval before construction commences. Samples shall be
submitted in a timely manner allowing for manufacture and/ or procurement times: Rejection of sample submitted by
the Contractor shall not be an excuse for delay of any sort, or justification for extension of any kind.
a. Personnel Information
Perform work only with personnel qualified and experienced in the work required in this Section under direction
of an approved skilled foreman (site supervisor). Contractor shall provide the resumes and qualifications of the lead
personal that he intends to use for approval. These personnel will require as minimum the following qualifications:
1. Foreman: Shall be skilled in the installation of materials and associated hardscape elements with a minimum of
10 years experience in hardscape construction. Experience must in an arid climate similar to U.A.E.
2. Labourers: Shall be skilled in the installation of materials and associated hardscape elements with a minimum
of 2 years experience in construction.

Refer to Section 13.1.1.7 for information.
13.2.2 Products
Where materials used in this section have been specified elsewhere in DoT’s A15 Standard Specifications (i.e., sub-
base, cement, sand) the relevant clauses shall apply to this section. Materials that have not been individually
specified shall be of first class quality and the minimum standard acceptable shall be the relevant British Standard
where applicable.
Page 13-44
13.2.2.1 Delivery, Handling and Storage

Deliver, store and handle paving units in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Store above ground and protect from damage and soiling in a location approved by the Engineer.
13.2.2.2 Sub-Base
All sub-base for vehicle traffic paving (80mm) shall refer to Chapter 3. This reference shall take priority over all
others with the approval of the Engineer.
Other general sub-base shall be as follows:
1. Compacted bed of 150mm layer of clean sharp crushed sand.
2. Road base shall be a min 150mm layer of material compacted to 95% of the M.D.D. as obtained in BS 1377
test 13 (field density tests to be carried out at a frequency of 2 tests per 1000m² as per BS 1377 test 15 B).
3. Road base shall be laid over a properly watered and compacted base course.
4. Shall be subject to final approval by the Engineer.
13.2.2.3 Cement
All cement shall refer to Chapter 3. This reference shall take priority over all others with the approval of the Engineer.
All other cement shall be sulphate-resisting cement to BS 4027:1996 or AASHTO M85-80.
13.2.2.4 Sand
a. Mortar Sand
All sand for general purpose mortars shall me the requirements in BS1200 Table 1.
b. Bedding Sand
Bedding sand shall be natural sand or crushed rock having a grading within the limits listed in Table 13-21. Clay, silt
and fine dust content shall not be more than 3% by mass. Sand shall be free from deleterious salts and contaminants.
The sulphate and chloride content shall not be more than 0.4% and 0.6% respectively, as a percentage by weight.
Table 13-21 Bedding sand gradation
Sieve Size Percentage Passing
5 mm 90 - 100
2.36 mm 75 – 100
1.18 mm 55 – 90
0.60 mm 35 – 59
0.30 mm 8 – 30
0.15 mm 0 - 10
c. Jointing Sand
Sand for jointing shall be clean dry natural sand or crushed rock with 100% passing a 1.18mm BS sieve and not more
than 10% passing a 75 micron BS sieve.
13.2.2.5 Water
Water shall be clean and uncontaminated potable mains supply. Testing shall be to BS EN 1008: 2002 where required
Page 13-45
13.2.2.6 Permeable Paver Bedding, Filler and Base

Permeable paver filler, bedding and base material shall be crushed stone with 90% fractured faces, LA Abrasion < 40
per ASTM C 131. Do not use rounded river gravel for vehicular applications. All stone materials shall be washed with
less than 2% passing the No. 200 sieve. Bedding, joint/filler, base and sub-base shall conform to ASTM D 448
gradation listed in the following tables.
Table 13-22 Permeable bedding and joint/opening filler gradation
12.5 mm 100
9.5 mm 85 – 100
4.75 mm 10 - 30
2.36 mm 0 – 10
1.16 mm 0-5
Table 13-23 Permeable base gradation
37.5 mm 100
25 mm 95 – 100
12.5 mm 25 – 60
4.75 mm 0 – 10
2.36 mm 0-5
Table 13-24 Permeable sub-base gradation
75 mm 100
63 mm 90 – 100
50 mm 35 – 70
37.5 mm 0 – 15
19 mm 0-5
13.2.2.7 Pavers
a. Permeable Pavers
Permeable pavers may have spacer bars on each unit. Spacer bars are recommended for mechanically installed pavers.
Manually installed pavers shall be installed with or without spacer bars. Contractor shall verify with manufacturers that
overall dimensions do not include spacer bars.
b. Concrete Unit Pavers

Pavers shall be delivered to site packaged, complete with original manufacturer, seals and warranties. Contractor shall
comply with the following requirements for supplying concrete unit pavers.
1. Shall be supplied and installed as documented or as approved by the Engineer in accordance with the material
schedule and Contract Plans.
Page 13-46
2. All concrete unit pavers shall be hydraulically pressed.

3. Provide shop drawings indicating colour and pattern for Engineers approval.
4. Chamfered concrete triangular edge and half blocks with spacers shall be in accordance with the appropriate
specification clause.
5. Cut blocks to be sawn not guillotined.
6. Colours shall be as specified on the in the material schedule and Contract Plans or as specified by the
Engineer. Discoloured or faded blocks shall not be accepted.
7. Size/ Shape of units shall be as described in the material schedule.
8. Samples on site are to be prepared in advance of work commencing. Sample panels are required to ensure
that the colours, textures and finishes are to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
9. No work shall be accepted that fails to meet the standards of the approved samples.
All pavers shall be manufactured according to British Standards and complying with BS EN 1338:2003. Required BS
values are provided in Table 13-25.
Table 13-25 Concrete unit pavers required BS values
Property Value
Water Absorption <7.0%
Compressive strength * >49 N/mm2
Transverse Breaking Load 2

>7 N/mm
Texture Refer to material schedule
Mean Wet Skidding Res. Greater than 60

Length + 2mm
Permissible Size Tolerances Width + 2mm
Thickness + 3mm
* Compressive strength of pavers should be tested in accordance with BS EN 1338:2003 and shall not be less
than 49N/mm2 at age of 7 days.
c. Precast Concrete Unit Pavers

Pavers shall be delivered to site packaged, complete with original manufacturer, seals and warranties. Pre-cast concrete
units shall be supplied by an approved supplier or an approved equivalent. All precast units delivered to site shall
have a Certificate of Compliance issued by the manufacturer in accordance with Item No. 12 of BS 6073:2008.
Contractor shall comply with the following requirements for supplying precast concrete unit pavers.
1. Shall be made using either ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1:2000 or white cement binder, using
potable quality water.
2. Aggregates shall be approved natural aggregate complying with BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008 Granite or
Marble chips.
3. Pigments shall be used in powder form and shall conform to BS EN 12878:2005.
4. Shall be treated with a solvent based silane siloxane solution, which penetrates the pores of concrete and reacts
with moisture to form a hydrophobic polysiloxane lining to capillaries leaving a permanent, hard wearing and
dust free surface.
5. All precast concrete unit pavers shall be hydraulically pressed.
6. Shall be textured where required on the Contract Plans, and processed in a fully automated shot-blasting
machine to expose the natural colour of the aggregate.
7. Tolerances shall be a maximum dimension deviation of:
Page 13-47
a) Thickness: 3mm;
b) Length and Width: 2mm;
c) Difference between diagonals: 2mm; and
d) Flatness winding and bowing: 1mm.
8. Compressive strength of pavers shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 1338:2003 and shall not be less
than 49N/mm2 at age of 7 days.
9. Transverse strength, when sampled and tested as described in BS EN 1338:2003 shall not be less than
14kn.
Pavers should conform to BS EN 1338:2003, wet press process, as manufactured by an approved manufacturer or
equivalent to the specifications listed in Table 13-26.
Table 13-26 Precast concrete unit paver specifications
Property Value
Paver Size- refer Materials Schedule
Paver Colour/Texture refer Materials Schedule
Sides Smooth
Edges Sharp
Surface Treatment anti stain
Compressive strength >49 N/mm2
Water Absorption 1-4%
d. Brick/ Clay Unit Pavers

Pavers shall be delivered to site packaged, complete with original manufacturer, seals and warranties. Brick/ clay units
shall be supplied by an approved supplier or an approved equivalent. All brick/ clay units delivered to site shall have
a Certificate of Compliance issued by the manufacturer in accordance with ASTM C 902, Specification for Pedestrian
and Light Traffic Paving Brick or ASTM C 1272, Specification for Heavy Vehicular Paving.
Brick/ clay pavers may have spacer bars on each unit. Spacer bars are recommended for mechanically installed pavers.
Manually installed pavers shall be installed with or without spacer bars. Contractor shall verify with manufacturers that
overall dimensions do not include spacer bars. Contractor shall comply with the following requirements for supplying
brick/ clay unit pavers.
1. Minimum average compressive strength of 10,000 psi.
2. The average cold water absorption shall not be greater than 6% with no individual unit testing greater
than 7%. Absorption test results may not be achieved through the use of sealers or other products applied to the
paver.
3. Resistance of 50 freeze - thaw cycles, when tested in accordance with ASTM C67. In addition the paver must
pass CSA-A231.2 freeze thaw test in saline solution without the use of sealers or other products
applied to the paver. A test report must be submitted by the manufacturer.
4. The dimensional tolerances around the mean values for length, width, and depth shall be 1.60 mm.
5. The pavers should be solid units without core holes or other perforations.
The Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer conducts a test sampling of 24 pavers every 50,000 pavers
manufactured to determine the pavers compliance with dimensional and water absorption characteristics. The 24 paver
samples shall be representative of the colour mix in the typical finished package and chosen on a consistent basis from
one kiln car.
Bedding and joint/filler shall conform to ASTM C 33 gradation listed in Table 13-27.
Page 13-48
Table 13-27 Brick/ clay bedding and joint/filler gradation
9.5 mm 100
No. 4 95 – 100
No. 8 80 – 100
No. 16 50 – 85
No. 30 25 – 60
No. 50 10 – 30
No. 100 2 - 10
13.2.2.8 Pre-Cast Concrete Tile

Contractor shall comply with the following requirements for supplying pre-cast concrete tile.
1. Wet mix, hydraulically pressed pre-cast concrete paving tiles with shot blasted exposed aggregate. Deep
penetrating coating or integrally mixed sealant to prevent increase of waterborne chlorides and sulphates, non-
staining, chemical resistant to fuel, oils and atmospheric contamination and helps to prevent efflorescence and
improve colour resistant to UV light.
a) Aggregates shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 3 with a nominal size of 10mm and a maximum
aggregate size not exceeding 14m.
2. Portland cement conforming to BS12 and BS 4027 (SRC) or ASTM, C150 Type V.
3. Pigment (inorganic) shall comply with BS EN 1014-1:2010.
a) Minimum pigment content shall be 5% by weight of cement, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
4. Water: shall comply with BS 3148: 1982.
5. Variation in the tile dimension shall be:
a) Length & Width: +/- 3 mm
b) Thickness: +/- 3 mm
c) Square Edges: nearest 2 mm
6. Colour and pattern of the tiles shall be as noted on the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
7. Shall be locally manufactured in UAE.
8. Curing.
a) Curing in wet condition: 24 hours
b) Further curing: 12 days
9. Compressive Strength.
a) Average strength of 10 blocks tested in accordance with BS EN 12390-3:2002: Part 1 shall be not less
than 35 N/mm2.
b) Strength of any individual block shall be not less than 30 N/mm2.
10. Water Absorption.
a) Average of 5 specimens tested in accordance with ASTM C140 shall not be greater than 3%.
b) No individual result shall be greater than 3.5%.
11. Sulphate and Chlorides.
a) The total sulphate content shall not be more than 4.0% by weight of the cement in the mix.
Page 13-49
b) The total chloride content (as Nacl) shall not be more than 0.15% weight of mix.
Joint/filler shall consist of non-plastic sand meeting the gradation listed in Table 13-28.
Table 13-28 Tile joint/filler gradation
2.36 mm 100
1.18 mm 90 – 100
0.30 mm 15 – 50
0.075 mm 0–3
13.2.2.9 Quarry Tile

Contractor shall comply with the following requirements for supplying ceramic tile.
1. Ceramic tile shall be standard grade quality as manufactured by an approved manufacturer and shall conform
to the requirements of Chapter 7.
2. Ceramic tile shall be manufactured to sizes specified in Contract Plans.
3. Colour and pattern of the tiles shall be as noted on the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
4. Shall be locally manufactured in UAE.
13.2.2.10 Natural and Manufactured Stone

Natural and manufactured stone shall match the approved sample obtained from the approved quarry / source. The
Contractor shall confirm in writing that the quarry can supply the quantity required for the project to the dimensions
and quality stated in the Project documents and this confirmation shall be provided at the time of submitting the
sample for approval.
Natural and manufactured stone shall be free from any defects that could adversely affect the integrity of the material.
They shall be free from any mark or defect on the face visible in the completed works that could, at the Engineers
discretion, mar the integrity or appearance of the finished work.
Samples submitted for the Engineer’s approval shall not be smaller than 30 cm x 30 cm (or other size specified and
approved by the Engineer) and in the case of slabs for use in work where the patterning, colour, or matching of pieces
is of particular importance larger samples shall be provided upon the Engineer’s instruction.
Stone material shall comply with the standards of the United States National Granite Quarries Association
(NGQA).
13.2.2.11 Natural and Manufactured Gravel
Natural and manufactured gravel courses shall match the approved sample obtained from the approved quarry / source.
The Contractor shall confirm in writing that the quarry can supply the quantity required for the project to the
dimensions and quality stated in the project documents and this confirmation shall be provided at the time of
submitting the sample for approval.
Natural and manufactured gravel courses shall be naturally coloured, hard durable gravel, clean, washed, without any
fine material, free from salts, organic material or other deleterious substances. Colour and grade samples shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. All natural and manufactured gravel courses shall be placed on approved
geotextile fabric unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Natural and manufactured gravel used for pervious backfill, such as gravel infill or wadi stone surface, shall meet the
requirements of Chapter 2 Earthworks.
Natural and manufactured gravel courses shall be supplied by an approved supplier listed in Table 13-29 or approved
equivalent.
Page 13-50
Table 13-29 Natural and manufactured gravel suppliers
Manufacturer Contact Information

P.O Box 5934, Sharjah, U.A.E.
Tel: 06 5333609
Terrazzo Ltd. Fax: 06 5333058
E-mail: Terrazzo@emirates.net.ae
Website: http://www.terrazzo ldt.com
PO Box 3151, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel. 04 3338855
Proscape
Fax. 04 3338831
Email: Proscape@emirates.net.ae
13.2.2.12 Specific Landscape Features

Contractor shall provide all plans and specifications necessary to convey the design of specific landscape features not
covered in this Section to the Owner for review and approval during the design stage prior to tendering. Specific
landscape features shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Fountains, including electrical, mechanical and structural requirements.
2. Recreation facilities, including play structures, gazebos, shelters, kiosks, and pavilions.
3. Walls, including screening, sound barriers, and retaining walls.
4. Fences, including screening, pedestrian, security and sand barrier.
5. Decorative lighting, including poles, site, pedestrian and aesthetic lighting.
6. Shade structures.
13.2.2.13 Geotextile Fabric

Contractor shall comply with the following requirements for supplying geotextile fabric.
1. Shall be non-woven 75% polypropylene / 25% nylon,
2. Weight: 10g/m²
3. Thickness: 0.3 mm
4. Shall have good permeability to water.
5. Shall be resistant to all naturally occurring soil acidities and resistant to tearing and stress.
5. Shall be manufactured by DuPont (‘Plantex’), Terram or approved equivalent.
13.2.2.14 Ancillary Items

a. Paver edging
Paver edging shall consist of 200 x 100 x 80 mm precast pigmented concrete pavers laid as header course (side by side
on the 200 mm side) colour to be approved or as specified. Precast concrete pavers to be laid on 50 mm Class C15
concrete.
b. Plastic Edge Restraints

Triangular PVC extrusions (45 mm high by 89 mm wide) designed to serve as edge restraints for unit pavers; rigid type
for straight edges and flexible type for curved edges, with pipe connectors and 9.5 mm diameter by 300 mm long steel
spikes.
Page 13-51
13.2.3 Execution
13.2.3.1 Preliminaries
All work shall be carried out in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Damaged or disfigured units shall
not be used. Finished work shall have an even overall appearance with even joint widths and free from any
discolouration. In-situ concrete infill in any area of work shall not be accepted unless approved by the Engineer.
a. Reconstruction of Existing Pavements

Where due to the Contractor’s construction the existing pavement has to be lifted and where it is not to be replaced
with a new paved surface the Contractor shall replace any damaged or unstable pavement tiles with matching material
to the approval of the Engineer.
The existing paving shall be removed back to an un-fractured sub-base. The sub-base shall be regraded,
supplemented, compacted and blended all as necessary to achieve the required bedding surface.
Concrete blocks and pavement tiles shall be bedded as detailed and specified or shall match the existing bed to the
approval of the Engineer.
b. Service Covers
The levels of any existing and proposed service covers in landscape areas shall be adjusted as necessary to
marry in with the proposed paving levels. Where directed, recessed manhole covers shall be used as specified and shall
be appropriate for infilling with the specified surface finish. Covers shall be in filled to match the adjacent paving
pattern and joint lines. Where possible, paving shall be laid right up to the edge of the service covers. Any existing
concrete surrounding the covers shall be broken out.
c. Concrete Trim Foundations

Accurately cast concrete foundation for paving trims shall be laid as detailed and in accordance with the
Specification for concrete kerbs.
d. Protection of Completed Works

The Contractor shall provide adequate protection of all finishes until Substantial Completion is approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following:
1. Ensuring all works are adequately protected and, if the Contractor is working in the vicinity of works
completed by others, that these too are adequately protected.
2. All paving bedded on mortar shall be kept free from pedestrian traffic for 4 days after laying.
3. All paving bedded on mortar shall be kept free from vehicular traffic for ten (10) days after laying.
4. All paving with dry, semi-dry or plastic mortar jointing shall be protected from rain, dust storms, chemical
attack and the harmful effects of heat, wind, flowing water, vibrations and shocks by appropriate means
for at least 3 days immediately after filling the joints.
In the event of a dispute over standards of materials, reparation and workmanship, it is the responsibility of the
Contractor to be aware of the above British Standards copies and ensure that the Contractor is aware of their
contracted responsibilities as described in said standards. The above British Standards form part of the contract
documentation and, as such, are deemed to be included in the rates for the works.
13.2.3.2 Concrete Unit Paving

a. Sub-grade
Excavation and preparation of all bases shall be prepared according to Chapter 2, Earthworks and Chapter 3,
Pavement of the Road and Structure Works Specifications, Volume 1 and Chapter 7, Incidental Construction of the
Road and Structure Works Specifications, Volume 2.
b. Base and Edge Restraints

Pavement of the Road and Structure Works Specifications, Volume 1. The Contractor shall comply with the following:
Page 13-52
1. Final surface profile is formed in the base allowing the paver course to be laid on a uniformly thick sand bed.
2. The surface of the compacted sub-base must be close textured to prevent sand migrating from the bedding
course.
3. A fine grit or equivalent binding material shall be applied and surface vibrated to provide a close and smooth
textured surface.
4. Construction of edge restraints / edge paving prior to laying paving course is required. This restraint edge
shall be a rigidly bedded and jointed construction with movement joints provided approximately 6-10 metres
centres.
5. Edge restraints must have seven (7) days to mature sufficiently and during this time they must be suitably
protected using waterproof covers. All edge restraints must be suitably robust and shall have sufficient
haunching with concrete prior to infilling with base materials, laying course and /or pavers.
6. Edgings and quadrant shall be laid and bedded on a 3:1 sand/cement mortar bed not less than 10 mm and not
more than 40 mm thick on a foundation of concrete Grade 20 SRC.
c. Paver Laying
Prior to laying pavers, the Contractor shall carefully blend the pavers to ensure an even distribution of colour
differential within the pack. Packs shall be distributed from corner to diagonally opposite corner. Pavers ready to be
laid shall not be stacked on prepared sand but rather placed on boards back from the working face. Use of recently laid
paving shall be minimized prior to compaction. The Contractor shall regularly check installed pavers for a consistent
joint alignment and pattern layout.
d. Paver Cutting
Cutting of pavers shall be carried out with a mounted cutting saw with a diamond tipped blade. No mechanical splitters
shall be used. Cuts must be clean and free of chipping or splits of any kind.
e. Mortar Bedding
The mortar bedding shall comply with the following:
1. Shall consist of freshly mixed moist mortar 1:3 cement: sand mortar with plasticiser as required, using
sand complying with BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008 grading M or F.
2. Shall be spread to achieve a nominal compacted thickness of 25 mm after bedding the slabs.
3. Mortar that has been mixed for more than 1 hour shall be discarded.
4. Slabs shall be laid on a full mortar bed and bedded down to line and level with a pavers maul.
5. Where units are laid with a close joint (i.e. 2 to 4 mm) jointing sand shall be brushed into the joints.
6. Where units are laid with a wide joint (i.e. 6 to 10 mm) the whole of the joints shall be filled with mortar.
f. Sand Bedding
The sand bedding shall comply with the following:
1. The laying course shall consist of bedding sand with moisture content of between 3% and 7% that shall be
reasonably constant through laying.
2. The bedding sand shall be spread to permit a compacted nominal thickness after bedding of as shown
in the Contract Plans.
3. The un-compacted thickness of sand shall depend on the nature and moisture content of the sand and the
Contractor shall carry out a trial area to ascertain the necessary surcharge.
4. The units shall be laid directly onto an un-compacted sand bedding laying course.
5. The units shall be bedded down into the sand using a paver’s maul or where appropriate a rubber faced
vibrating plate to the Engineers approval shall be used.
6. No units shall be laid within 500 mm of an unrestrained edge of the screed sand layer.
7. Units shall be laid with joints 2-4 mm wide with jointing sand brushed into the joints.
Page 13-53
g. Dry Mortar Joints

Dry mortar joints shall comply with the following:
1. Mortar mix shall be 1:3 cement and slightly damp sand to BS 1200, 100% passing a 1.18 mm sieve.
2. Paving shall be dry prior to jointing. The dry mortar shall be brushed into the joints and knocked down by
tamping the slabs carefully with a maul. This operation shall be repeated until the joints are filled solid and
flush. All residues shall be brushed off without delay.
3. Paving shall not be wetted allowing the jointing mortar to hydrate naturally. Immediately after filling joints
the paving shall be covered with polythene sheeting for 3 days to protect from rain, dust storms, chemical
attack etc.
h. Mortar Pointed Joints

Mortar pointed joints shall comply with the following:
1. Mortar mix shall be semi dry cement: sand to BS EN 12620:2002 + A1: 2008 grading limits M,
proportions as specified and coloured as required by the Engineer.
2. Paving shall be dry prior to jointing. The joints shall be carefully and thoroughly filled with mortar using a
proper pointing tool and slotted masking shield.
3. Joints shall be flush, recessed or raised as detailed or as required by the Engineer.
4. Any mortar stains or droppings on the face of the paving shall be removed. Immediately after jointing the
paving shall be covered with polythene sheeting for 3 days to protect from rain, dust storms, chemical attack
etc.
i. Sand Filled Joints
Paving shall be dry prior to jointing. Jointing sand shall be brushed into the joints and knocked down as required
by tamping the paving carefully with maul. This operation shall be repeated until the joints are filled solid and flush.
j. Joint Filling and Compaction

Joint filling and compaction shall comply with the following:
1. After each 20 sq. m or such area that has been agreed with the Engineer has been laid the pavers shall be
compacted to the required levels using a plate vibrator.
2. Prior to compaction of pavers, fine jointing sand shall be brushed into joints.
3. Pavers and sand must be dry during this process.
4. Surplus sand must be brushed away before pavers are compacted. Laying course sand is not acceptable for this
process.
5. Compactor type must comply with BS 7533-3:2005 Annex F. OR The plate vibrator shall be plate area of 0.20
to 0.35 sq m and have a compaction force of 12-24 KN and frequency of approximately 75-100Hz
as appropriate for the material.
6. A minimum of two passes of the plate vibrator shall be made in each direction, i.e. at 90 degrees to each other.
Vibration shall continue until no further compaction of the sand layer is apparent. Fine dry sand with
particles size of 0.3 mm shall then be brushed over the paving until the sand is no longer absorbed into
the joints.
7. The plate vibrator shall not pass closer than 1 m to a temporarily unrestrained edge during laying.
8. No paving shall remain un-compacted overnight, or during other lengthy breaks in construction, except for the
one metre strip at the temporarily un-compacted edge, which shall be covered and protected from rain.
9. On completion the finished surface level shall be within 6 mm of the design level and the maximum deviation
within the compacted surface, measured by a 3 m straight edge, shall not exceed 6 mm.
10. The level of any two adjacent pavers shall not differ by more than 2 mm.
11. Any areas of paving which do not comply with these tolerances shall be removed, and sand laying course
lifted and re-laid and the paving units re-laid to the correct levels.
Page 13-54
12. Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps, alignment and squareness shall be checked after paving the
first three rows of pavers and thereafter at regular intervals. If joints begin to open the pavers shall be
knocked together using the hide mallet.
k. Construction Tolerances
Construction tolerances shall comply with the requirements outlined in Table 13-30.
Table 13-30 Construction tolerances for paving surface levels
Tolerance of Surface Levels
Pavement Levels Maximum permissible deviation from the design level (mm)
+20
Sub-base
-15
Sub-grade
0
Road base
-12
+6
Surface Course Overall
-6
Tolerance of Laying Course Thickness
Thickness (mm) Tolerance (mm)
+15
50
-20
+12
30
0
Surface Regularity
Flatness 10 mm under 3 m straight edge
Level 2 mm between adjacent joints
The surface course shall be between 5 mm and 10 mm above adjacent gullies and between 3 mm and 6 mm above
surface drainage channels and outlets. It is important to avoid ponding at these locations.
l. Post Construction Procedures

During the period immediately following completion and up to handover, any settlement in sand joints shall be
topped up and compacted.
13.2.3.3 Pre-Cast Concrete Slabs and Kerbs

a. Sub-grade
Excavation and preparation of all bases shall be prepared according to Chapter 2, Earthworks and Chapter 3, Pavement of
the Road and Structure Works Specifications, Volume 1 and Chapter 7, Incidental Construction of the Road and
Structure Works Specifications, Volume 2.
b. Sub-base
The sub-base shall be compacted to a field density not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined in
accordance with BS 1377:1990 Part 4 (Method 3.5 or 3.6). Field density tests shall be carried out at a frequency of 2
tests per 1000 sq. m laid or as directed by the Engineer.
c. Laying Course
The laying course shall comply with the following:
Page 13-55
1. Laying course shall be laid to compacted thickness of 50 mm plus a surcharge necessary to provide the
specified final bed thickness after vibration of the slab paving.
2. Sand shall be carefully levelled to a smooth surface to receive the paving slabs. No compaction of the sand
layer and no traffic including pedestrian is to be permitted before slabs are laid.
3. Laying course shall consist of sharp sand and BS EN 12620:2002 + A1: 2008 with a particle size of 4 mm
containing not more than 3% silt and/or clay by weight.
4. Sand shall be obtained from a single source, allowed to drain before use, and shall be covered with suitable
sheeting to minimize moisture changes.
5. Permissible sulphate and chloride contents shall not exceed 0.4% and 0.06% when tested in accordance
with BS 812 Part 118 and Part 117 respectively.
6. Laying course profile shall be similar to that of the finished surface. The maximum deviation from the design
levels shall be +6 mm.
d. Edge Restraints
The edge restraints to the paved area shall be laid in advance of the laying course and all obstacles within the area, such
as service covers (refer to Section b for additional information), shall be constructed to the correct finished levels.
e. Concrete Slab and Kerb Laying

Precast paving slabs used for vehicular and pedestrian carriageways will be laid to the pattern shown in the Contract
Plans. Any deviation to the pattern shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to such change. The paving slabs shall be
laid on the sand in a manner so as not to disturb those slabs already laid. Each slab shall be placed firmly against its
neighbour so that they fit closely together. Slabs to be laid butt jointed with maximum 3 mm gap.
f. Slab Cutting
Where slabs do not fit at the edge, restraints or other obstructions such as service covers, the gaps shall be filled
using cut slabs. Any damaged or broken slabs shall not be laid. Cutting shall be undertaken using a mechanical saw.
Mechanical splitters shall not be used. Any slabs damaged during compaction shall be replaced at the discretion of the
Engineer.
g. Joint Filling and Compaction

1. Allowances shall be made in the final levels of the base for the compaction of the laying course which may
occur when the paving slabs are being vibrated. The amount of surcharge required for the laying course shall
be determined by site trials prior to the commencement of the actual surfacing and shall be repeated when
the source of sand supply or a change of weather conditions occurs.
2. After each 20 sq. m or such area that has been agreed with the Engineer has been laid the slabs shall be
compacted to the required levels using a plate vibrator.
3. The plate vibrator shall be plate area of 0.20 to 0.35 sq m and have a compaction force of 12-24 KN and
frequency of approximately 75-100 Hz.
4. A minimum of two passes of the plate vibrator shall be made in each direction, i.e. at 90 degrees to each
other. Vibration shall continue until no further compaction of the sand layer is apparent. Fine dry sand with
particles size of 0.3 mm shall then be brushed over the paving until the sand is no longer absorbed into the
joints.
6. No paving shall remain un-compacted overnight except for the one metre strip at the temporarily un-
compacted edge, which shall be covered and protected from rain.
6. On completion the finished surface level shall be with 6 mm of the design level and the maximum deviation
within the compacted surface, measured by a 3 m straight edge, shall not exceed 6 mm.
7. The level of any two adjacent slabs shall not differ by more than 2 mm.
lifted and re-laid and the paving slabs re-laid to the correct levels.
Page 13-56
9. Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps, alignment and squareness shall be checked after paving
the first three rows of slabs and thereafter at regular intervals. If joints begin to open the slabs shall be
knocked together using the hide mallet.
10. Surfaces to receive interlocking brick or slab paving to have sufficient sand fine gravel or other approved
fine material applied and surface vibrated to provide a close and smooth surface.
h. Post Construction Procedures

During the period immediately following completion and up to handover, any settlement in sand joints shall be topped
up and compacted.
13.2.3.4 Pre-Cast Concrete Tile

a. Sub-grade
Excavation and preparation of all bases shall be prepared according to Chapter 2, Earthworks and Chapter 3, Pavement
of the Road and Structure Works Specifications, Volume 1 and Chapter 7, Incidental Construction of the Road and
Structure Works Specifications, Volume 2.
b. Base and Edge Restraints

The Contractor shall comply with the following:
1. Contractor shall lay out lines marking the tiles area and establish grade elevation and slope of finished
pavement surface.
2. The area to receive laying course shall be free from foreign materials, cut or soft spots and the level must be
correct. Any defects shall be corrected by replacing unsuitable material or as necessary.
3. Edge restraints shall be fixed prior to laying operations and must have seven (7) days to mature sufficiently.
During this time they must be suitably protected using waterproof covers.
c. Tile Laying
The Contractor shall comply with the following when laying tile:
1. Tiles shall be laid on a sand bedding (laying course) of 50 mm thickness (after compaction) in such manner as
not to disturb the tiles already laid.
2. The manner of laying shall ensure that the tiles avoid disturbing the sand cushion until the unit is in correct
position.
3. Under no circumstance shall the sand cushion be compacted or walked upon after it has been screeded.
4. Each tile shall be placed firmly against its neighbour so that they fit closely together.
5. Tiles shall be butt jointed so that joints are < 1mm.
6. Any surplus jointing shall be confined to the edge against the kerb face and the gap shall be filled with
appropriate sand/mortar grout as approved by the Engineer to match the tile colour.
7. Paving tiles shall be laid in the approved pattern in the direction to the main pavement axis. Any deviation to
the pattern shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to such change.
8. Contractor shall regularly check installed tiles for a consistent joint alignment and pattern layout.
d. Tile Cutting
Where tiles do not fit at the edge, restraints or other obstructions such as service covers, the gaps shall be filled
using cut t i l e s . Any damaged or broken tiles shall not be laid. Cutting shall be undertaken using a mechanical tile
splitter. Mechanical saws shall not be used. Any tiles damaged during cutting shall be replaced at the discretion of the
Engineer.
e. Joint Filling and Compaction

1. Allowances shall be made in the final levels of the base for the compaction of the laying course which may
occur when the tiles are being vibrated. The amount of surcharge required for the laying course shall be
Page 13-57
determined by site trials prior to the commencement of the actual surfacing and shall be repeated when the
source of sand supply or a change of weather conditions occurs.
2. After each 15-20 m2 area has been laid, the tiles shall be vibrated with a plate vibrator having a frequency
appropriate for the size of tiles and as approved by the engineers.
3. A minimum of two passes of the plate vibrator shall be made in each direction, i.e. at 90 degrees to each other.
Vibration shall continue until no further compaction of the sand layer is apparent. After tile surfacing has been
compacted, dry jointing sand shall be spread over the surface and brushed to seal the butt-jointing.
4. Laying course shall have a compacted thickness of 50 m.
6. No paving shall be left in an un-compacted condition overnight, except for the 1 m strip at the temporarily
unrestrained edge, which shall be covered and protected from rain.
7. On completion, the finished surface level shall be within 3 mm of the design level.
8. Maximum deviation within the compacted surface, measured by a 3 m straight edge shall not exceed 3 mm.
9. Level of any two adjacent tiles shall not differ by more than 0.5 mm.
lifted and re-laid and the tiles re-laid to the correct levels.
11. Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps, alignment and squareness shall be checked after laying the
first six rows of tiles and thereafter at regular intervals. If joints begin to open, the tiles shall be knocked
together using only a hide mallet.
f. Lifting and Relaying Tiles

The Contractor shall comply with the following when lifting and relaying tiles:
1. The minimum necessary area of tiling to be lifted and relayed shall be agreed with the Engineer before
beginning work.
2. Contractor shall carefully remove the tiles, clean the exposed faces, protect, load, transport and unload the
sound and unbroken tiles at locations approved by the Engineer. Broken, chipped, or unclean tiles shall not be
accepted.
3. Remove the tiles by hand so as to preserve the tiles. Any damaged tiles shall be replaced by the Contractor at
no additional cost.
4. Cart away and dispose of the remainder of the broken/damaged tiles to a location approved by the Engineer.
5. Remove the bedding sand material laid below the tiles to a clean level protected area as directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall also remove the compacted sub-base to a separate location approved by the
Engineer.
6. Before beginning relaying of tiles, the Contractor shall agree with the Engineer the location where any new
tiles are to be placed to minimize negative aesthetic impacts due to colour difference.
7. Additional or substitute pattern, if needed, can be used for laying tiles only after a written approval from the
Engineer is obtained.
8. Laying of tiles shall comply with Section c.
9. Tiles re-laid against existing tiles shall be placed slightly higher to accommodate any consolidation or
settlement. This level difference shall be agreed with the Engineer after initial laying trials.
10. The Contractor shall supply new bedding sand for the laying of the tiles. The use of the old bedding sand will
only be permitted if approved by the Engineer and only after the Contractor has carried out tests as per the
requirements of this Specification.
13.2.3.5 Quarry Tile

Contractor shall comply with the requirements for the installation of quarry tile as outlined in Chapter 7.
Page 13-58
13.2.3.6 Natural and Manufactured Stone

a. Setting Out
Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings, which shall take into account actual site conditions, the setting out of
natural and manufactured stone and related features to the Engineer for approval prior to beginning work.
b. Stone Laying
1. Sub-grade and base shall be sound, clean, suitably close textured, free from movement under compaction and
free from compaction ridges, cracks and loose material.
2. Drainage outlets, if necessary, are to be within +0 to –10 mm of the required finished level.
3. Stone paving units shall be solidly bedded on a mortar mix of 1 part cement to 5-6 parts clean sharp sand by
volume.
4. Stone paving units may be bedded on a semi-dry mix consisting of 1 part cement to 3½ - 4 parts sand by
volume (12:4-4½ by weight) to BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008, with approval by the Engineer. The units shall
be dampened on the back with clean water and tapped into position with a mallet.
5. Shall be laid butt jointed with no visible gaps between units with joints at least 3 mm wide.
6. Any bed material brought to the surface at the joints shall be wiped from the face of the stone with a damp
sponge or cloth immediately after the stone is in position.
7. Finished stone shall have an even overall appearance with no joints showing. Joints to be free of mortar and
any other unnatural stains.
8. Movement joints in the stone and bed should be sited every 10 m or as approved by the Engineer to suit
patterns or fixed objects.
9. Perimeter and intermediate movement joints shall be incorporated in the stone paving in accordance with the
recommendations of BS 6213:2000.
10. Lines and levels of finished surface shall be smooth and even to prevent ponding.
11. Lay stone paving units upwards from the bottom of slopes where creep may occur.
12. Deviation from specified levels shall e +/- 6 mm over 3 m.
13. Stone paving shall be set 6 mm above drainage outlets and 3 mm above kerbs to allow for settlement.
14. Variation in gap under a 3 m straight edge placed anywhere on the surface shall not be more than 6 mm.
15. Stone paving bedded on mortar must be kept free from pedestrian traffic for 4 days after laying.
16. Stone paving bedded on mortar must be kept free from vehicular traffic for 10 days after laying.
c. Stone Cutting
Stone shall be sawn cut fully square from faces for the full width and thickness of the piece or as otherwise shown
on the Contract Plans for particular pieces. Cutting of stone shall be carried with a masonry saw to give true junctions
with edgings and adjoining finishes. Chipped or broken edges shall not be accepted.
d. Wet Bedded Stone Work

Contractor shall examine all surfaces to receive work and notify the Engineer in writing of all conditions that
would adversely affect the work. At the direction of the Engineer, perform calcium-chloride test to ensure concrete
surfaces are free of contained moisture prior to commencement of work. Contractor shall not commence work in any
area where such notice of adverse conditions has been sent to the Engineer, until corrective work has been completed or
waived. Starting of work in any area without issuance of such notice will constitute acceptance of conditions in the area
by the Contractor. Any defects occurring thereafter shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor.
1. Sub-Grade
Pavement of the Road and Structure Works Specifications, Volume 1. In addition, the Contractor shall comply
with the following:
Page 13-59
i. The surface of the compacted sub-base must be close textured to prevent sand migrating from the
bedding course. A fine grit or equivalent binding material shall be applied and surface vibrated to
provide a close and smooth textured surface.
2. Base and Edge Restraints

i. Construct edge restraints/ edge stones prior to laying stone.
ii. Edge restraint shall be rigidly bedded and jointed construction with movement joints provided
approximately 6-10 metres centres.
iii. Edge restraints shall have 7 days to mature sufficiently. During this time they shall be suitably
protected using waterproof covers.
iv. All edge restraints shall be suitably robust and shall have sufficient haunching with concrete prior to
infilling with base materials, laying course and /or stone.
v. Edging stones shall be laid and bedded on a 3:1 sand/cement mortar bed not less than 10 mm and not
more than 40 mm thick on a foundation of concrete Grade 20 SRC.
3. Stone Laying
Prior to laying stones, careful blending is required to ensure even distribution of colour. Loads shall be
distributed from corner to diagonally opposite corner. Stone ready to be laid shall be placed on boards back
from the working face. Contractor shall regularly check installed stones for a consistent joint alignment and
pattern layout
4. Mortar Bedding
i. Mortar bedding shall consist of freshly mixed moist mortar 1:3 cement: sand mortar with plasticiser as
required, using sand complying with BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008.
ii. Mortar shall be spread to achieve a nominal compacted thickness as indicated in the Contract Plans after
bedding the stone.
iii. Mortar which has been mixed for more than one (1) hour shall be discarded.
iv. Stone shall be laid on a full mortar bed and bedded down to line and level with a hide mallet.
v. Rounded stone shall be laid so as each individual stone is in contact with at least three adjacent stones.
Mortar shall be in contact only with the lower/rear 75% of the stone or as indicated in the Contract
Plans. Mortar shall fill the entire cavity under/to the rear and around each stone.
vi. Care shall be taken to avoid mortar staining the upper/front surface of the stone. All excess mortar
shall be brushed from the stone work prior to the mortar setting.
vii. Stone bedded on wet mortar must be kept free from pedestrian traffic for 4 days after laying.
viii. Stone bedded on wet mortar must be kept free from vehicular traffic for 10 days after laying.
5. Movement Joints
Movement joints in the stone work and bed shall be sited every 10 m or as indicated in the Contract Plans to
suit patterns or fixed objects. Perimeter and intermediate movement joints shall be incorporated in the
stonework in accordance with the recommendations of BS 6213:2000.
6. Tolerances
i. On completion the finished surface level of each stone shall be within 6 mm of the design level.
ii. Maximum deviation across the stone surface, measured by a 3 m straight edge, shall not exceed 6 mm.
iii. The upper level of any two adjacent stones shall not differ by more than 2 mm.
iv. Any area which does not comply with these tolerances shall be removed, and re-laid to the correct
levels.
Page 13-60
e. Post Construction Procedures

1. All concrete surfaces subject to contact with the ground shall be protected by high build, flexible bitumen/
rubber latex emulsion such as MASTERSEAL 420, Degussa MBT or equal approved.
a) The bitumen/ rubber latex emulsion shall be tested to BS 8102:1990.
b) The bitumen/ rubber latex shall have a minimum rubber content of 10% and should dry to a seamless,
flexible, vapour proof membrane. The product shall be manufactured by a company certified to conform
to the requirements of the quality, environmental and occupational health & safety standards ISO 9001,
ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001.
2. All slate and sandstone shall be treated with a clear matt stain sealant after installation in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions with the approval of the Engineer.
13.2.3.7 Natural and Manufactured Gravel

1. Sub-grade shall be graded to even running falls to achieve the detailed levels against paved and planted areas.
2. Surface of the sub grade shall have all stones and similar material larger than 25mm removed. The sub-grade
surface shall be free from all rivulets, crusting and caking.
3. Sub-grade shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to the laying of the gravel.
4. Laying of natural and manufactured gravel shall be to the depths as indicated in the Contract Plans.
5. All natural and manufactured gravel shall be laid on an approved geotextile fabric over a compacted sub-grade.
The sub-grade and if required a 50mm layer of levelling sand shall have sufficient crossfall to ensure adequate
drainage.
6. Gravel shall be raked, rolled, and watered as necessary to achieve a smooth surface of even depth to even
running falls in accordance with the Contract Plans and on the approval of the Engineer.
Page 13-61
13.3 Irrigation
13.3.1 General
13.3.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance for an automatic irrigation
system and distribution system as shown in the Contract Plans and as approved by the Engineer. Work includes
operation and maintenance of the system, which shall extend for a period of one year minimum or as stated in the
Contract from the certified completion date.
The Contractor shall be responsible for operation and maintenance of the system under the supervision of the Engineer
or the Owner.
The irrigation specifications have been prepared with reference to ADM specifications Section 02800 Revision 02 Dated
March 2005.

2. Section 13.1 Landscaping
3. Section 13.2 Hardscape
The following related documents should be used as a reference when considering road landscaping and irrigation within
urban locations:
3. Abu Dhabi Utility Corridors Design Manual
4. Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council’s (UPC) Estidama Pearl Rating System (PRS)
5. Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC) Design Guidelines
6. Parks and Recreation Facilities Division (PRFD) Design Standards Manual
7. PRFD FORM ER03: Guidance Notes Irrigation Design Submission Requirements For 3rd Party Projects,
February, 2012.
8. Emirate of Abu Dhabi Municipality Manual of Design Standards, Chapter 5, 1996.

The British Standard (BS) and other International Organization for Standardization Standards (ISO) and codes of
practice referred to in this section are listed below and reference made to the latest editions of these.
Whenever a scheme of supervision and control is in operation, in respect to any British Standard, all materials required
to comply with that standard shall be marked with BSI certification trade mark (The Kite mark). Where materials
are required to comply with other British Standards, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer test certificates,
furnished by the supplier or manufacturer of the materials, indicating compliance with the relevant British Standards.
BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-tight joints are made on the thread (1985);
BS 543 Steel pipes, fittings and specials for water, gas and sewage (1966);
BS 729 Hot dip galvanized coatings steel pipes and tubes;
BS 1387 Screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubulars and for plain end steel tube suitable for welding or
for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads;
BS 1452 Grey Iron castings;
BS 1972 Polythene pipe for (Type 32) for above ground use for cold water services;
BS 2494 Materials for electrometric joint rings for pipe work and pipelines;
Page 13-62
BS 3416 Black Bitumen coating solutions for cold water applications (1975);
BS 3505 Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) pressure pipe for potable water;
BS 3900 Method of test for paints;
BS 4027 Sulphate resisting Portland cement (1980);
BS 4346 Joints and fittings for use with unplasticised PVC pressure pipes;
BS 4504 Flanges and bolting for pipes, valves and fittings (Metric series);
BS 5152 Cast iron globe and globe stop and check valves for general purpose (1974);
BS 5153 Cast iron check valves for general purposes (1974);
BS 5155 Butterfly valves;
BS 5163 Cast iron gate valves for waterworks;
BS 5750 Quality systems;
BS 7562-5 Planning, design and installation of irrigation schemes. Guide for irrigation equipment (1993);
BS 8010 Code of practice for pipelines (1987);
DIN 8061 General quality and testing of PVC-u pipes;
DIN 8062 Dimensions of PVC-u pipes;
ISO 7 Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads;
ISO 264 Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings with plain sockets for pipes under pressure;
Laying lengths; Metric series (1976);
ISO 1452 Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and above ground drainage and
sewerage under pressure - Unplasticised poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) - Part 1: General (2009);
ISO 1452 Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and above-ground drainage and
sewerage under pressure - Unplasticised poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) - Part 2: Pipes (2009);
sewerage under pressure - Unplasticised poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) - Part 3: Fittings (2009);
sewerage under pressure - Unplasticised poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) - Part 4: Valves (2009);
sewerage under pressure - Unplasticised poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) - Part 5: Fitness for purpose
of the system (2009);
ISO 4132 Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and metal adaptor fittings for pipes under pressure;
Laying lengths and size of threads; Metric series. (1979);
ISO 4179 Ductile iron pipes and fittings for pressure and non-pressure pipelines - Cement mortar lining
(2005);
ISO 4427 Polyethylene (PE) pipes for water supply;
ISO 5167 Measurement of fluid flow by means of pressure differential devices inserted in circular cross-
section conduits running full;
ISO 9000 Quality management systems – Fundamentals and vocabulary;
ISO 9001 Quality management systems – Requirements;
ISO 14001 Environmental management systems – Requirements with guidance for us;
ISO 14004 Environmental management systems General guidelines on principles, systems and support
techniques (2004).

The Contractor shall not proceed to complete further works until the following has been inspected and approved in
writing by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 48 hours prior to the inspection. Such notification
Page 13-63
shall be given by a written inspection request (in a format acceptable to the Engineer) each and every time various areas
of the work are to be carried out or covered up so as to prevent subsequent inspection.
1. Submission of works construction program.
2. Monthly progress reports.
3. Approval of all samples and materials
4. Marking out of pipe line route and valve location
5. Trenching and sand bedding.
6. Flushing the main line.
7. Pipe pressure testing.
8. Leak testing of laterals.
9. Flushing the entire section.
10. Installation of electric remote control solenoid valves.
11. Installation of application devices such as sprinklers, bubblers and dripper lines.
12. Installation of controller(s).
13. Any soft and hard landscape approvals (See PRFD specifications section 02950 & 02970).
14. Detailed Maintenance Manual.
15. As Built drawings from the Contractor.
16. Monthly maintenance schedules.
17. Monthly maintenance records sheets.
18. Weekly maintenance schedules.
19. Weekly maintenance records sheets.
If the Contractor does not notify the Engineer in sufficient time to allow for the inspection prior to covering up or
completing installations, the Contractor shall remove all such materials/ equipment as deemed necessary by the
Engineer to verify compliance of the work. Any delays, additional work or additional costs attributed to the above shall
be at the Contractor’s expense.
a. Manufacturer’s Certification
1. uPVC pipe
Contractor shall provide certification by a recognised certification mark scheme such as the Kite mark, or by
an independent third party testing organisation approved by the Engineer, that production has been carried out
under a system of supervision, control and testing applied during manufacture in accordance with BS 5750
/ ISO specification or an approved equal procedure such as the American National Standard Institute (ANSI),
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
2. Valves and Special Steel Fittings

Contractor shall provide manufacturer's certificate for pressure testing and coating, including holiday and
dry film thickness (DFT) test reports for each valve, fitting, and spool, if applicable.
3. Emitters
Contractor shall provide certification of coefficient of manufacturer’s variation.
13.3.1.5 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following documentation for review and approval before
commencing work.
Page 13-64
a. Existing Irrigation System

The Contractor shall locate and identify the existing irrigation system, electrical control and monitoring network,
pumping stations and reservoirs within and feeding the project area and shall submit them as ‘Existing Drawings’ for
Engineer’s approval in a suitable scale agreed with the Engineer. These drawings need only to include down to the
solenoid valves.
The Contractor shall propose suitable take-off points for a new irrigation system if not nominated or shown in the
Contract Plans and the Engineer shall decide as to which existing pipe, valve, etc. are to be retained, relocated,
removed or abandoned.
b. Irrigation Demand
After obtaining the final approved soft landscaping shop drawing and plant list, the Contractor shall re-compute the
maximum water requirement for each irrigation circuit valve and submit to Engineer for approval. Using updated data
gathered the Contractor’s irrigation engineer shall prepare water application schedule co-ordinated with the pump
station available irrigation water, field satellite number, irrigation valve circuit number, cubic meter per hour discharge
per circuit valve, number of hour/minute operation per circuit valve, and proposed time of operation for each
valves. The Contractor shall submit the schedules to the Engineer for approval.
c. Drawings
Note: Allow a minimum 10 working days for Engineer’s review as a minimum.
1. Shop drawings.
a) The Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions on the contract drawings and shall report
all variations to the Engineer. Both Imperial units and Metric units are used as appropriate, with strong
preference for metric.
b) All shop drawings shall be submitted for approval with supporting calculations prior to starting the work
on site.
c) Shop drawings shall be prepared to detail any installation not completely detailed in the Contract Plans,
or to detail any alterations to the Contract Plans and shall include, but not be limited to:
i. Civil works, mechanical pipe work and electrical control equipment with circuit diagrams;
ii. Details of mainline, lateral pipes and other typical connections;
iii. Details of typical connections;
iv. Wiring diagrams including conduits, pull boxes, sizing and calculations to verify that cable sizing is
in accordance with valve manufacturer’s printed recommendations wherever applicable;
v. Electrical power and control wiring diagram system for irrigation controller, field wiring and
grounding; and
vi. Details for drip line layout in shrub and ground cover beds and showing interface with
planting layout.
vii. Details for sprinkler/bubbler heads layout in lawn beds and trees showing interface with planting
layout.
The approval of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibility under the Contract for a
successful and timely completion of the work.
2. As Built drawings.
and approved work shall be recorded on these drawings. The Contractor shall maintain these drawings
on a daily basis. At the time of substantial c ompletion the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer the complete “As Built” set of drawings for approval and the final approved set shall be
submitted within 14 days of final approval.
b) Once the drawings have been approved the Contractor shall prepare and submit three sets of fully book
bound drawings and one soft PDF copy on CD with scanned literature as necessary within 14 days of final
approval.
Page 13-65
d. Materials and Equipment Schedules

All materials shall be as described in the specifications. Provide all catalogue cuts, diagrams, drawings, and such
other data as may be required to demonstrate compliance with the specifications. The Contractor shall submit material
approvals for all the materials, which are proposed to be used in the system to the Engineer, in advance prior to their
installation. Any material used, which is not approved, shall be removed from the site and the Contractor shall replace
them at their own cost.
e. Installations and Testing

The Contractor shall submit their proposed work method statement for approval prior to commencing work. The
statement shall detail proposed sequence of work, hold points, testing frequency and document control.
f. Recommendation of the Manufacturer

The Contractor shall submit manufacturers’ recommendation for each material or procedure, including recommended
spare parts to be utilised, and all relevant operational data. The Contractor shall have a copy of the manufacturers’
instructions available on-site at all times while work is in progress, and shall follow these instructions unless otherwise
authorise to deviate by the Engineer.
g. Spare Parts
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s listing of spare parts for approval prior to commissioning any piece of
equipment. Recommendations shall include stocking recommendations; exploded assembly diagrams illustrating
location and spare parts to be utilised and all relevant operational data.
h. Manufacturers’ Literature
Contractor shall provide four (4) sets of manufacturer’s technical and maintenance literature to the Engineer. Data
sheets shall provide sufficient technical information to identify each product and shall include the name and the
address of the nearest supplier and details of the local representative.
i. Irrigation Management Plan

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two sets of the draft Irrigation Management Plan (refer to DoT’s A13 Road
Landscaping Manual, for additional information) for approval 14 days prior to substantial completion (refer to Section a
for additional information). The manual shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Design basis of irrigation system.
2. Two sets, A3 size, of As Built drawings.
3. Logic of operation of the systems.
4. Description of equipment:
a) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions;
b) Performance curves, data sheets, test reports, relevant catalogues and warranties; and
c) Complete nomenclature, illustrations, assembly drawings, diagrams required for maintenance and
commercial number of replaceable parts.
5. Operating Procedures:
a) Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions;
b) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency instructions;
c) Summer and winter operating instructions; and
d) Special operating instructions.
6. Maintenance Procedures:
a) Routine operations;
b) Guide to trouble shooting;
c) Disassembly repairs and reassembles; and
Page 13-66
d) Alignment, adjusting and checking.

7. Valve charts and Irrigation valve operation schedule complete with controller station No., size, flows sequence
of operation and operating time.
8. Spare parts:
a) List of recommended spare parts; and
b) Names, contact numbers and addresses of spare part suppliers.
9. Bill of Quantities of Material used in the contract.
Note: This may vary depending on the project scope of works.
The final contents of the manual shall be agreed with the Engineer. Once the manual is approved the Contractor shall
prepare and submit three sets of fully book bound manuals with original manufacturers technical catalogues, literature
etc. and one soft PDF copy on CD with scanned literature as necessary within 14 days of final handover (refer to
Section n for additional information).
Perform work only with personnel qualified and experienced in the work required in this Section under direction of an
approved skilled foreman (site supervisor). Contractor shall provide the resumes and qualifications of the lead irrigation
personal that they intend to use for approval. These personnel will require as minimum the following qualifications:
1. Irrigation foreman: Shall be skilled in the installation of irrigation systems with a minimum of 10 years
experience in irrigation construction. A minimum of three years of this ten years experience must have been in
arid climates similar to U.A.E. and shall have experience in the installing and programming automated
irrigation systems.
2. Irrigation labourers: Shall be skilled in the installation of irrigation elements with a minimum of 2 years
experience in irrigation installations.

Refer to Section 13.1.1.7 for information.
a. Existing Underground and Surface Utility Protection

The Contractor shall furnish temporary support, adequate protection, and maintenance of all underground and surface
utilities encountered during construction. Where the grade or alignment of pipes is obstructed by existing utilities, such
as conduits, ducts, pipes, branch connections etc. the obstruction shall be supported, relocated, removed, or
reconstructed at the Contractor’s expense unless otherwise provided to be paid for separately. Whenever it is
necessary to determine the location of existing underground utilities, the Contractor, after an examination of
available records, shall make all explorations and excavations as may be directed by the Engineer to determine
these locations. Only such tools and equipment as have been approved by the Engineer shall be used by the
Contractor to execute the work in a safe and efficient manner.
13.3.1.8 Guarantee
All work included under this section shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against any defects and malfunction of
materials and workmanship supplied by the Contractor, concealed defects, fraud or misrepresentation for a period of one
year minimum from the date of final acceptance of the irrigation system or as stated in the Contract.
Should any trouble develop within the time specified due to faulty workmanship, faulty products or damage by the
Contractor, the defect and any resulting damage and side consequences shall be corrected by the Contractor at their
expense, within twenty-four (24) hours of notification by the Engineer. Any settling of backfilled trenches, which may
occur during the guarantee period, shall be repaired, including complete restoration of all damaged property, at the
Contractor’s expense. Any dead or otherwise affected plants resulting from such defects shall be replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
a. Irrigation Equipment Performance Warranty

The irrigation system components shall be under warranty for performance. A manufacturer statement of warranty is
required for irrigation equipment products to be free of defects in materials or workmanship under normal use for a
certain period according to the product as follows:
Page 13-67
1. One (1) year minimum for micro sprayers.

2. Two (2) years minimum for spray heads and rotors, check valves.
3. Three (3) years minimum for pressure compensating drip emitters.
4. Five (5) years minimum from the original date of manufacture for solenoid valves, controllers, sensors and
drip tubing. Two (2) additional years for environmental stress cracking are required for drip tubing.
5. Ten (10) years minimum for subsurface irrigation system components.
If a defect in the product is discovered during the applicable warranty period, the manufacturer should repair or replace
the product or the defective part via the Contractor, within one week of notification by the Owner at no additional cost.
This warranty does not extend to repairs, adjustments, or replacement of a product or part that results from misuse,
negligence, alteration, modification, tampering, or improper installation and/or maintenance of the product. This
warranty extends only to the original installer of the product.
The commencement day of Performance Warranty period is the day after completion of the Maintenance Period.
13.3.2 Products
All equipments, fittings and accessories shall be suitably rated to comply with the system design and operating
parameters.
13.3.2.1 Delivery, Handling and Storage

Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Delivery, storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a manner to avoid product damage.
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products.
3. Products shall be stored off the ground on timber blocks of sufficient size and spacing to provide adequate
support.
4. Products shall be stored on site in a temperature, humidity etc. environment as recommended by the
manufacturer.
5. Products that are stored outside at the site shall be stored under cover to prevent ultra violet deterioration and
as recommended by the manufacturer.
6. Notify the Engineer 14 calendar days in advance of time and manner of delivery of material.
7. The Contractor shall inspect all products upon delivery to site and report any damage to the Engineer.
8. Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling shall be marked by the Contractor and set aside.
9. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval.
10. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall be removed from site and replaced.
13.3.2.2 Piping
a. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes And Fittings
HDPE pipes shall conform to ISO 4427, pipe grade PE 100 with SDR 17 and rated for PN 10. The normal outside
diameter (ND) shall be in accordance to ISOR 161-1. All jointing shall be fully automatic butt fusion welding with
stub flanges drilled to PN 16 and special restraint transition fittings at PE to metal connections. The system shall be
restrained completely and no thrust blocks are required, except at locations where HDPE pipes are connected to
unrestrained pipe systems. Fittings and bends shall be fabricated from PE 100 polymer of compatible material to that of
the pipe. At special locations, by approval of the Engineer, electro fusion joining will be allowed. Table 13-31
provide the characteristics of resins for polyethylene pipes.
Table 13-31 Characteristics of resins for polyethylene pipes
Characteristics of Resins for Polyethylene Pipes Resin Type - PE100
O 0.16 to 0.7
Melt Flow Rate (g/minute) MFI at 190 C and 5 Kg
Page 13-68
Characteristics of Resins for Polyethylene Pipes Resin Type - PE100

O < 0.2
Melt Flow Rate (g/minute) MFI at 190 C and 2.16 Kg
O >15
Oxidation Induction Time (minutes) OIT in pure oxygen at 200 C
3 > 941
Basic Resin Density (Kg/m ) for compression moulded plaques
O > 10,000 hours
Position of Knee in the 80 C stress rupture curve – black resins
50 year strength at the 97.5% Lower Confidence Limit (LCL) MPa >10
Elongation at break - percent >600
Environmental Stress Crack Resistance ESCR - hours >1,000
Percentage of recycled polymer Not Allowed
b. uPVC Pipe
uPVC pipe shall conform to ISO 161/1 and shall be class 16/class10 (as per the Bill of Quantities). Pipes up to 90 mm
nominal diameter shall have solvent welded joints and pipes of 110 mm and above diameter shall have rubber ring
sealing. Rubber sealing pieces shall be fabricated from EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) or an approved
equal material, and shall conform to BS 2494 1976 part 1.
Base uPVC used for the manufacture of pipes shall be virgin material, purchased from an internationally recognised
manufacturer. Additives stabilisers and agents used to aid the manufacturing process shall not comprise more than
3.5% of the pipe material, by weight. Pipes shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the manufacturing standard, the
manufacturer’s name, date of manufacture, nominal bore, and working pressure/class. Pipe shall be smooth from inside
and outside and shall show no evidence of blisters, grooves or other extrusion marks. The contractor shall provide three
samples of all size pipes of one metre in length for approval prior to installation of any plastic pipe.
c. Linear Density Polyethylene (LDPE) Pipe

Polyethylene pipe shall be manufactured from linear low-density polyethylene incorporating a minimum of 2.8%
carbon black, properly dispersed and antioxidants in an amount not exceeding 0.5%. Working pressure shall be
minimum 4kg/cm² or more. A random sample of drip pipes shall be subjected to the Teepol crack resistance test. The
sample shall be immersed in a bath containing a solution of 10% Teepol and 90% water maintained at 50 degree C. The
pipe shall resist the solution without showing any fatigue or crack for a period of 150 hours.
Polyethylene pipes shall be legibly and durably marked with letters of minimum height 3 mm. The marking shall be
reproduced at intervals of not more than 1 m. The following information shall be marked on the pipe.
1. Manufacturer’s name or registered trademark.
2. Type number and designation ‘PE’ in the form “TYPE 30PE” as appropriate.
3. Class of pipe in the form ‘CLASS IRRIG’.
4. Nominal inside diameter and wall thickness.
5. Identification of place of manufacture. The manufacture’s code is acceptable.
PDPE pipes shall be fixed intact to the ground using heat resistant stakes at every 10 metres and an automatic end
flush valve shall be installed at the end of the line. Drip stakes shall be provided at each point of change in direction of
drip line.
d. Steel Pipes
Steel pipes shall be used for all above ground installations and for some selected underground installations as
approved by the Engineer. Pipes shall conform to API-5L (American Petroleum Institute) schedule 80 or other equal
and approved. Pipes shall be coated by electrostatic fusion bonded epoxy to average DFT 150 microns or by fusion
bonded plastic powder coating to average DFT 500 microns. Pipes and fittings shall be degreased, blast cleaned to a
minimum standard of BS 4232 second quality (SA 2 ½).
Page 13-69
Threaded steel pipe and fittings used for risers less than or equal to 2” shall be in accordance with BS 1387
designated medium thickness and galvanized in accordance with BS 729. Any galvanized steel pipe installed in
contact with the soil shall be wrapped with at least two layers of an approved pipe wrapping tape. The wrapping tape
shall extend a minimum of 100 mm above soil.
e. Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) Pipe for Ducts

Glass reinforced plastic pipes for ducts shall comply with the the applicable requirements of Chapter 11.
Adhesive at joint pieces shall be a two component adhesive. One component shall be applied to the outside of the pipe
and the other component on the inside of the coupling piece. Bonding shall take effect within a few minutes.
When storing pipes on the ground near the trench, the soil shall be leveled and shall not contain any hard objects
exceeding 40 mm that could damage the pipes. For long periods of storage, pipes shall be placed on 100 mm wide
supports provided at a spacing of 2.5 m, and side blocks shall be provided to prevent rolling. All pipes shall be handled
and supported during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
13.3.2.3 Fittings
a. uPVC Fittings
All uPVC fittings shall be ISO/DIN specification and have a minimum rating of 16 kg/cm² at 20 degree C. Fittings
shall be suitable for use with the above specified pipes. Where uPVC flanges are required these shall be drilled to NP16
as detailed in BS 7622 and BS 7772. All fittings above 160 mm shall be fusion bonded epoxy coated ductile iron or
cast iron or flanged GRP. The contractor shall use only fittings that are approved by the Engineer. All nuts and bolts
shall be stainless steel 316 grade.
b. Linear Density Polyethylene (LDPE) Fittings

All fittings for drip lines shall be compression type. The pipe for sprayers and quick coupling valve connections shall
be as per BS 1972-67 class C. The fittings for LDPE pipes shall be compression quick joint type with minimum 12
bar nominal pressure rating.
c. Steel Fittings
Welded fittings shall be schedule 80 and weld neck. Flanges shall be in accordance with BS 4504 PN16. All bolts,
nuts and washers used for flange assemblies, or integral with bolted couplers shall be of stainless steel A4-70.
13.3.2.4 uPVC Cement Primer Lubricant and Tape

uPVC cement and thinner shall be of the type approved by the Engineer and shall comply with the following
requirements.
1. Solvent cement shall have a minimum working pressure of 16 bar and a tensile strength of 112 bar after 72
hours.
2. Cement shall have heavy viscosity, medium cure speed, and clear colour and be suitable for pipe diameters up
to 315 mm.
3. Cement shall conform to ASTM-D-2564-91 and be NSF/UPC approved.
4. Primer shall be certified to contain a minimum of 25% THF and must meet ASTM F656.
5. Pipe lubricant shall be specially formulated to work with rubber ring joints and will be NSF approved.
6. Cans of solvent cement primer and lubricant shall have labels intact and shall be stamped with the date of
manufacture and shelf life. No cans with an expired shelf life will be permitted.
7. Joints compound for threaded connection shall be PTFE tape or an approved equal thread sealant.
13.3.2.5 Underground Warning Tape

Underground warning tape shall comply with the following requirements.
1. Shall be laminated polyethylene and aluminium foil construction capable of detection by low output
generator equipment.
2. Shall remain legible and colour fast in soil conditions at pH values of 2.5 to 11.0 inclusive.
Page 13-70
3. Shall be of the type specially manufactured for making and locating underground utilities.
4. Shall be not less than 150mm wide and shall have the phrase “CAUTION – IRRIGATION PIPELINE
AND CONTROL CABLES” in English and Arabic stamped in black letters and repeated at maximum
intervals of two meters.
5. Shall be terminated inside valve boxes to allow clipping of detector equipment to the tape.
6. S hall be laid 300 mm above pipeline.
13.3.2.6 Brass Marker Plaque

Brass marker plaque shall be made to the size 200 x 150 mm and shall be of "Admiralty Brass" BS Code No.CZ III BS
2871. The plaque shall be 5 mm thick with two lags 150 mm long 20 mm wide by 5 mm thick welded at the back. The
plaque shall have engraving 2 mm deep.
13.3.2.7 Pipeline Marker Posts

Pipeline marker posts shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy components and shall conform to the following
requirements:
1. Size and length shall be as shown on the Contract Plans.
2. Tubing shall be BS 1474 Grade 6063 Alloy.
3. All cast parts shall be aluminium alloy to BS 1490 Grade LM-6.
4. Minimum wall thickness for tubing shall be 5 mm.
5. A welded bar shall be provided for casting into concrete foundations.
6. All welding shall be Tungsten Inert Gas (TIG).
7. Entire assembly shall be chemically treated and polyester power coated (120 mic. nominal thickness) and hot
cured.
8. Colour shall be as directed by the Engineer.
9. Pipe line diameter (mm) shall be labelled in English and Arabic along with the appropriate service designation;
“Irrigation Pumping Main”.
10. Lettering shall be made from “High-Intensity” reflective sheeting. Minimum height of lettering shall be 70
mm. Lettering colour shall be white or as directed by the Engineer.
13.3.2.8 Thrust Blocks

Thrust blocks shall be provided to anchor all mechanically jointed pipes. Heavy-duty polyethylene sheet shall be used
to wrap the pipe at the point of contact between pipeline fittings and thrust block. Concrete shall be Grade Class B in
accordance with the concrete specifications. Where manifolds and laterals pass under roads or paved areas and through
foundations and walls shall be in concrete ducts.
13.3.2.9 Valves and Accessories

a. Isolation Gate Valves
All isolation gate valve sized 4 inches and above shall be ductile iron (to BS 2789) and conform to the following:
1. Construction of valve to BS 5163 with flange end connection to PN16 as defined in BS 7772.
2. Internal non-rising stem with clockwise closing rotation.
3. Valve opening and closing shall be with key and not with hand wheel.
4. Stainless steel spindle and resilient seal wedge.
5. Valve body test pressure (open gate) of 2700 kN/sq. metre.
6. Valve seat test pressure of 1600 kN/sq.metre at 60 degree C.
7. Internal and external fusion bonded epoxy finish, minimum thickness 300 micron.
8. Stem cap to main body bolts to be recessed with silicon sealing.
Page 13-71
9. Wedge shall be stainless steel with EPDM coating.

10. Sluice gate valves of diameters up to 3” shall be to BS 5157 series B1 class PN20 suitable for q working
pressure of 9 kg/cm² or above. The valves shall have BSP thread inlet and outlet connections. The body shall be
forged brass, cast brass or bronze.
11. The connection between ductile iron flange adaptor and HDPE shall comply with AWWAC207 Class D flange
and as per Section 12.18.3.12 of Chapter 12 “Stormwater Drainage” of these Standard Specification.
b. Butterfly Valves
The valves shall be designated, manufactured and tested in accordance with American Water Works Association
Standard ANSI/AWWA C504, unless specified otherwise and shall comply with the following:
1. Flanges and connections shall fully conform to BS EN 1092, PN16. Provide raised face flanges, unless
specified otherwise. Socket, groove end, mechanical connections are to be approved individually.
2. Valve shafts shall be of the through type for sizes 100mm to 600mm. Larger valves shall be of the stub type
design. Shafts shall be located to the disc by O-ring sealed taper pins retained with stainless steel nuts.
3. Valve discs shall be of the solid type without external ribs or vanes to obstruct flow.
4. Resilient seats shall be located on the valve disc and shall provide a 3600 continuous, uninterrupted seating
surface. Seats shall be mechanically retained with a stainless steel retaining ring and stainless steel cap screws
which shall pass through both the resilient seat and the retaining ring. The resilient seats mating surface shall
be to a 3600 continuous, uninterrupted stainless steel body seat ring. Resilient seat shall be field adjustable and
replaceable and shall not require hypodermic needles or pressure vessels to replace or adjust.
5. Sleeve bearings shall be provided in the valve’s hubs and shall be nylatron or woven Teflon, fibreglass backed
and shall be self-lubricating.
6. Thrust bearings shall be provided and shall be adjustable on valves 750mm and larger.
7. Shaft seals shall be V-type and shall be replaceable without removal of the valves from the line or the shaft
from the valve.
a) Body material shall be DIN 1693 GGG-40 ductile iron or approved equivalent.
b) Disc: Valve disc material shall be DIN 1693 GGG-40 ductile iron or approved equivalent.
8. Shafts shall be stainless steel 316.
9. Seat resilient seat shall be Buna-N and made to a Type 316 stainless steel body seat ring.
10. Manual, electric or cylinder actuation shall be provided as specified in the Contract Plans.
c. Quick Coupling Valve and Fittings

The valves and fittings shall be designated, manufactured and tested in accordance with American Water Works
Association Standard ANSI/AWWA C800, unless specified otherwise.
The valves shall provide plug-in type, underground water outlets for the temporary connection of hosepipes and shall
comply with the following:
1. Connection and operation shall be by means of special coupler keys inserted into the valve throat. The valves
and key are to be of the same manufacturer to ensure compatibility of the connection.
2. Valve construction shall be red brass or bronze with a self-closing protective cover. The valve shall be a single
piece design with single slot and stainless steel spring. The valve should have locking mechanism to
vandal resistance.
3. Valve shall have a maximum of 0.5 bar pressure loss at the rate of 3.2 lps.
4. Internal parts shall be removable for service.
5. Keys shall be brass with machined shanks for a positive seal.
6. Valves shall have 25mm female pipe threaded connection and keys shall have 25mm male connection. The
valve and key shall be 25 mm bore with no size reduction.
7. Swivel hose ELLs shall be of red brass or bronze construction used to connect to quick coupler keys so that
hose can be turned a full 360 degree without breaking hose near the coupler key.
Page 13-72
8. Hose ELLS shall have a female pipe thread of 25 mm and a male thread of 25mm.
d. Electric Remote Control Solenoid Valve Complete With Pressure Regulating Module
Solenoid valves shall comply with following specifications:
1. Construction shall provide for convenient access to functional parts without removal of valve from system
plumbing. A manual flow control adjustment, with shut-off capability, shall be furnished on all valves. Bonnet
shall have sufficient volume to ensure proper closing against rated test pressure. Valve pressure rating shall not
be less than 13 bars.
2. Valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of heavy duty glass reinforced nylon body and internal
parts shall be stainless steel diaphragm made of nylon reinforced BUNA-N rubber and provide for a positive
seal between bonnet and body. Solenoid coils shall be encapsulated in moulded epoxy. Solenoid functional
parts shall be of stainless steel for corrosion resistance.
3. Valves shall be normally closed diaphragm type with slow opening and closing action for protection
against surge pressure. Actuation shall be by encapsulated type solenoids rated at 24 volts, 50 cycles, and 2.0
watts unless otherwise specified. Maximum pressure rating shall be not less than 200-PSI BSP inlet/outlet,
solenoid plunger shall in co-operate with self-flushing type stainless or internal filter.
4. There shall be provision for manual open/close and flow control stem with cross handle for regulating the
flow. All valves shall be provided with a pressure regulator to regulate the pressure between 1 to 7 bars
(within an accuracy of ± 0.35 bar regardless of upstream pressure). It shall provide full and accurate pressure
capabilities irrespective of whether it is operated electrically or manually. The pressure measurement shall be
possible via Schrader valve or integral pressure gauge. The pressure regulator shall be with a calibrated dial
for setting the outlet pressure.
5. The valve shall be capable for pressure regulating electrical and manual mode operation using external
and internal bleeds. Valve shall be suited for dirty or treated sewage effluent water.
6. The valves shall be inline or angle configuration as per the requirements. The valve construction shall be such
as to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve
installation.
7. Only moulded uPVC/Brass fittings shall be used with solenoid valve assemblies.
e. Flush Valve Assembly

Contractor shall install where required and as shown in the Contract Plans, flushing points consisting of gate valve,
valve box, valve supports, gravel bed, 1.5 meters of polyethylene pipe coiled inside the valve box.
f. Ball Valves
Ball valves shall be designated, manufactured and tested in accordance with BS EN 1452-4:2010, unless specified
otherwise and shall comply with the following:
1. For 3” and smaller valves installed in the valve boxes uPVC ball valves shall be designed for a working
pressure of not less than 16 bar and water operating temperature of 60°C.
2. Valves shall be the suitable size for the incoming line size with a clear waterway equal to the full nominal
diameter of the valves and shall be opened by turning counter clockwise.
3. The operating nut or wheel shall have an arrow cast in the valve indicating the direction of opening.
g. PE Valves
PE valves shall comply with the following:
1. PE Valves shall be SDR 11 with stem extension.
2. Body and ends shall be manufactured from polyethylene (PE 100) the ball shall be manufactured from
acetyl/polypropylene for strength and thermal resistance.
3. Shall withstand temperatures up to 60°C.
4. Pipe connections shall be by butt fusion.
Page 13-73
h. Air Release Valve

The body and cover of the valve shall be of ductile iron, SG-GGG50. Nozzles with seals and actuating mechanism to
be located in the removable upper plate connected to the valve body using stainless steel (grade 316/A4) bolts.
Valves shall be coated with epoxy internally and externally to average DFT 300 microns for protection against
corrosion of body components. All nuts and bolts shall be of stainless steel grade 316/ A4.
Air valve shall be of the double orifice type, rated a minimum working pressure of 16 bar. The air valve shall be
for the following functions:
1. Large volume of air release on pipeline filling.
2. Vacuum relief in the event of pipe drainage.
3. Air release under pressure when the pipe is operational
Automatic double orifice air valves shall be provided at all high points on the pressure mains. Automatic air valves
shall have non-corrosive floats in chambers with clear space ensuring blockage free operation. All components for the
air valve actuating mechanism including lever shall be of stainless steel.
i. Pressure Reducing Valve

Pressure reducing valves shall be straight or angle pattern, spring loaded meeting the following requirements:
1. Body: Cast iron GG-25 (1.4571) or better
2. Seat: Stainless steel (1.4571)
3. Disc: Stainless steel (1.4122)
4. Stem: Stainless steel (1.4021)
5. Bonnet: Nodular cast iron GGG40 (0.7040)
6. Spring: Steel wire (1.7102)
Pressure reducing valve shall be hydraulically operated, diaphragm actuated in globe pattern. The valve shall be
designed to automatically reduce a higher upstream pressure to a constant lower downstream pressure. The valve shall
be installed in the irrigation/supply main line inside chambers where possible pressure reduction is required as agreed
with the Engineer. Pressure settings shall be accurate and repeated throughout the flow range. The regulation action of
the valve shall be controlled by and externally mounted pressure- reducing pilot. The valve shall close drip tight
when the downstream pressure meets the pilot pointing. All sizes shall be equipped with a stabilizing devise to control
smoothly at low flows. The main valve body and cover shall be made from 300 series stainless steel. The valve shall
be with flanged ends. The diaphragm shall consist of non-fabric reinforced Buna-N rubber and shall not be used as s
seating surface. The pilot shall be adjustable, bronze bodied direct acting, spring loaded and normally closed. The
pilot shall be supplied with a stainless steel seat ring. Provide adequate clearance for valve servicing and maintenance.
Install pressure gauges to monitor valve inlet and outlet pressure as agreed with the Engineer.
13.3.2.10 Gauges and Meters

a. Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges are typically in the suction and discharge areas of each pump and as specified in the Contract Plans for
screen filters. Gauges shall meet BS 1780 Stainless Steel Glycerine Filled Bourdon type pressure gauge, black scale on
white background and shall comply with the following:
1. Case: Stainless steel with phosphor bronze bourdon tube.
2. Dial Size: 150mm diameter.
3. Mid-Scale Accuracy: 1/2 percent.
4. Scale: Both bar and psi.
5. Process Connections: ½” NPT
6. All wetted parts: Stainless steel 316
7. Complete with: Micrometer point
Accessories Required:
Page 13-74
1. Needle valve (petcol).

2. Adjustable pressure snubber.
3. Diaphragm seal isolator.
Where equipment and pipe mounted gauges are inaccessible for reading and are subjected to vibration, gauges shall be
mounted remote with stainless steel tubing connecting to equipment with shut off at equipment and gauge.
Discharge gauge ranges shall be a standard commercially available range with the maximum reading not less than 5 bar
greater than the pump rated shut off pressure.
Use compound type suction gauges with a minimum range of 750mm of mercury. The gauges shall be of first class
construction, tropicalised with dust and damp proof sealed brass cases or other approved non-corroding solid (not
plated) materials. The mechanism shall be of robust design, capable of withstanding the degree of vibration, shocks and
pressure fluctuations normally encountered with pump operation when protected by snubbers.
b. Water Meters
Water meters shall comply with following:
1. Shall be of the electromagnetic type utilising pulsed D.C. excitation and shall be microprocessor based. Each
unit shall be of stand-alone type.
2. Shall be double-flanged to BS EN 545, 598, 969 and of carbon steel construction. The rotary vane must not
extend across the whole width of the internal diameter.
3. Shall feature on-site field validation for sensor, transmitter and interconnecting cable. The flow meter
dimensions shall be in metric units. The flow meter shall be calibrated at the factory to its actual flow range in
m3/hr as specified in the data sheets. A factory calibration certificate shall be provided with the meters.
4. The Wetted Material Lining shall be suitable for potable water and waste water as per BS 6920.
5. The Electrodes shall be stainless steel 316.
6. Pressure limitations for pipelines ≤600mm as flange rating and for pipelines ≥700mm shall be 6, 10 or 16 bar.
7. End connections shall be ANSI/AWWA C207 Class B and D for PN10 and S10/AS2129 Table D and E for
PN16.
8. Environmental protection IP68 (NEMA6P).
9. Shall be buriable to 5m depth.
10. Pressure equipment directive 97/23/EC.
11. Electronic Display Unit Mounting shall be integral with sensor or remote up to 100m. Housing of the
electronic display shall be IP65 (NEMA4) with glass-loaded polypropylene, polycarbonate window ULVO
rated. The electrical connections shall be 20mm glands, or accepts 1/2 in. NPT connections.
12. Temperature ranges: -10 to 70 degree centigrade.
13. Shall be able to endure vibration, when in service, without any degradation in performance. When flow meters
are installed in areas where vibration exists, then a suitable anti-vibration pad is to be provided.
14. Labelling and name plates shall show manufacturer's name, serial number, nominal internal diameter,
maximum operating pressure, calibration factors, type of enclosure, forward flow direction, weight, and power.
c. In Line Pressure Regulator

In line pressure regulators shall comply with the following:
1. Shall maintain a constant downstream pressure for a fixed flow rate, regardless of variable inlet pressure above
a minimum pressure equal to the spring strength plus valve friction loss.
2. Shall be manufactured from durable heat resistant plastic and have ¾” BSP female treaded inlet and outlet
connections.
3. Regulator shall be capable of installation below finished grade and shall have an ”O‟ ring seal, which prevents
debris entry inside and shall be suitable for 1 to 20 gpm at 20 to 150 psi.
Page 13-75
13.3.2.11 Valve Chambers and Boxes

a. Valve Chambers
The isolation valve chambers shall be RCC chambers or as specified in the Contract Plans. Contractor shall submit
shop drawings as per site conditions for approval by the Engineer. The valve chamber covers shall be ductile iron
medium duty and epoxy coated. The word of “IRRIGATION” in English and Arabic shall be casted on the covers.
Valve chamber with depth more than 1.5 m shall be provided with heavy duty GRP ladder 400 mm wide.
In special conditions where the valve chambers are installed in asphalt the valve chamber covers shall be heavy duty.
b. Valve Boxes
Solenoid valves, tertiary irrigation system isolating valves, flush valves, quick couplers, and wire pull boxes shall be
installed in a lockable cover access box of sufficient size with stainless steel bolts A4-316 to permit ready removal of
the valve inner assemblies without removing the box from the ground. Valve numbers and station numbers must be
clearly marked inside and outside of the box with permanent paint or by using plastic tags.
Valve boxes shall be composite service boxes constructed from structural foam HDPE resin plastic. The valve boxes
shall have additional ribbing to strength the chamber & to counteract the side loading pressures. The valve boxes shall
be green colour and should have ultra-violet resistance properties. The valve boxes shall conform to ASTM standards
listed in Table 13-32.
Table 13-32 ASTM standards for valve boxes
Properties ASTM Test Method Valve (HDPE) Valve (ABS)
Tensile strength D-638 38 mPa 43 mPa
Plexular modulus D-790 104 mPa 172 mPa
Notched izod impact strength D-256 0.11 kg-m/cm 0.05 kg-m/cm
Deflection temperature D-648 60 to 76 deg C 98 to 107 deg C
The valve box covers shall be labelled in Arabic and English and shall have covers that are lockable or bolt down as
directed by the Engineer. Valve box dimensions shall comply with Table 13-33.
Table 13-33 Valve box dimensions
Type of Use Dimensions (Top External Dimension)
Quick coupler 1.5” dia and below 245 mm dia round green colour box with minimum depth 260 mm
Pull boxes, flush valves, Air Valves 1”,

298 x 430 x 300 mm deep rectangular green colour box
Solenoid valves 1” dia and below
Solenoid valves over 1” dia and up to 2” dia. 406 x 650 x 380 mm deep rectangular green colour box
Solenoid valves over 2” dia and up to 3” dia,

495 x 825 x 457 mm deep rectangular green colour box
Drip solenoid valve assembly with Y strainer
Valve identification tags shall be made of brass or aluminium and a minimum of 75mm x 50mm. They shall be
stamped with the valve function number size. The valve shall be similarly identified on the ‘As Built’ drawings. Valve
boxes to have a 2-year warranty confirmed by the manufacturer.
13.3.2.12 Electrical Equipment and Wiring

a. Electrical Equipment
Electrical equipment shall be in accordance with Chapter 10. Enclosures shall be protected in accordance with IP55 for
equipment installed above grade and IP58 for equipment installed below grade.
Wiring to and from control panels shall be routed in conduit above grade. Above grade conduit shall be liquid-tight
flex, or rigid galvanised steel and provision shall be made for inspection tees and ells to facilitate removal in the future.
Wiring under traffic and pedestrian pavement shall be laid in conduits. Underground conduit shall be uPVC electrical
Page 13-76
conduit in accordance with BS 3506, otherwise electrical supply and control wiring may be direct buried as specified
herein. All equipment shall be provided with earth leakage circuit breakers.
b. Field Controllers
Field controllers shall comply with the following:
1. Field controllers shall be solid state computer controllers capable of independent timed operation. When
operating independently of the central computer, cycle starting and stopping shall generally be automatic, by
programmed settings. Cycles may also be initiated manually at the controller site, cancelled and/or interrupted,
via a remote control interface from a centralised location, or linked to another (lead) controller. These
functions shall be overridden by the central controller.
2. It shall be possible to vary all programme timings in increments not greater than 10 %, in the range 10 % to
150 % of seasonal timing.
3. Controllers shall be pedestal mounted in lockable robust stainless steel weatherproof cabinets.
4. Input shall be 220 VAC 50 Hz. Output shall be nominally 24 VAC 1.5 A and shall be sufficient to
accommodate the maximum number of valves.
5. Controller shall have a minimum of 24 stations. Field wires shall be terminated in screw terminal blocks
connected to the controller by a pre-installed cable harness.
6. Irrigation controller shall be capable of operating a minimum of four 24 VAC, solenoid valves at a time.
Controller shall be such that the program data is retained during power outages without the need of battery.
7. Controller shall provide easy addition of more stations and simplified inventory management.
c. Electrical Wire
All electrical wire for underground use shall be single core solid “underground feeder” type insulated with a flame
retardant thermoplastic compound, rated for 600 volts and direct burial and conform to the following.
1. Cables shall be suitable for installation in the ground flooded with Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE) water
having corrosive chemicals.
2. Contractor shall prepare a wire sizing chart with effective lengths of each station and common wires, which
shall be submitted for approval prior to commencement of work.
3. Each solenoid valve shall be connected by a separate control cable from the irrigation Controller Unit
(ICU) and a common cable shall be run connecting all the solenoids for return connection.
4. Cable markers shall be used for indicating valve number for each cable at work ends as well as at splices.
5. Cables shall be laid in uPVC conduits where passing under traffic or pedestrian pavement.
6. Power cables and signal cables for satellites shall be separated and laid in separate trenches or conduits.
7. Insulation material shall be of low density and high molecular weight.
8. Insulation shall be suitable for maximum conductor temperature of 60 degree Celsius. Minimum insulation
thickness shall not be less than 1.2 mm.
9. Cables manufacturer’s name or code, insulation type, gauge of wire and voltage should be marked at intervals
of not more than 1m.
10. Contractor shall indicate valve number on each cable at both ends as well as at splices.
11. Cable shall be suitable for direct burial in the earth, however it is required to be installed in ducts or conduits,
having the following diameter sizes:
a) 25 mm up to 4 wires
b) 40 mm up to 8 wires
c) 50 mm up to 15 wires
d) 75 mm up to 30 wires
e) 100 mm more than 30 wires
Page 13-77
12. Wire connectors at the solenoid valve shall accomplish with moulded waterproof PVC plastic connectors.
Joints shall be made up using copper crimps and a rapid hardening. Waterproof sealant, shall be used as
recommended by the solenoid valve manufacturer.
13. Where cables are placed in conduits, pull boxes shall be provided at 80 m maximum distance and at all
bends/changes of direction.
14. Separate wire shall be laid for each solenoid valve, and valve combination shall be arranged at the respective
field satellite.
15. Power supply cable shall be armoured.
16. Cable manufacturer shall certify that the insulated conductors have been tested for and meet the requirements
of UL 44.
17. Conductors shall be colour coded.
18. Provide minimum one spare cable for every five cables and spare cable shall run up to the last valve on each
main/sub-main.
19. Irrigation control cables shall be colour coded as follows:
a) Common wire: Black
b) Drip valve wire: Green
c) Bubbler valve wire: Blue
d) Spray valve wire: Red
e) Sprinkler valve wire: Orange
f) Spare wire: White
d. Wire Connectors
All wire connections at electric remote valves and all splices of wire in the field shall be made using wire connectors.
The wire connectors shall be specifically designated to ensure waterproof underground wire connections. The
connectors shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed water resistant wire connectors; rated 600 volts for u PVC
insulated copper wire with insulation temperature rating of 105°C. Connectors shall be insulated with colour coded,
pliable, vinyl skirt. Connectors shall feature a live spring which assures a tight grip even on small wire combinations.
All wire connections to be arranged in plastic pull boxes at fixed internal distances of maximum 80 metres and at any
change of direction.
e. Pull Boxes
Pull boxes shall be provided as detailed in the Contract Plans and at a minimum at every 100 metre and at each point
of change in direction. Each electric remote valve shall have a separate pull box beside the valve box.
f. Electrical Distribution Cables

Electrical distribution cables shall meet the following requirements:
1. Cables shall meet the applicable requirements of Chapter 10 and as otherwise specified herein.
2. Cabling shall be XLPE/SWA/PVC and PE insulated suitable for direct burial installation. All installation
materials shall be supplied, to form a complete installation, installed, connected and tested in accordance with
the Contract Plans and as approved by the Engineer.
3. Cables shall be 600/1000 V grade with copper conductors.
4. Power cables shall be XLPE armoured.
5. All control cables shall be PVC insulated and shielded.
6. Inside pump station or control panel/kiosk, all cables are to be laid through surface mounted rigid type heavy-
duty cable trays.
7. Conduits running on the floor shall be covered with proper channels to avoid damage or injury.
8. Conduits shall be fixed on floor or walls using spacers and cleats secured by means of brass screws. Conduit
shall comply with BS 4568 and of class 4 rigid steel screwed type having interior and exterior coated with
zinc. Connection to terminal boxes shall be made using spiral type flexible steel conduit.
Page 13-78
9. Power cables to irrigation controller units shall be XLPE insulated, steel wire armoured and PVC jacketed.
Copper conductor shall conform to BS 6360. Cable shall conform to BS 5467.
10. Control cables for solenoid valves shall be polyethylene (PE) insulated and single core un-armoured for direct
burial in ground. The PE insulation material shall be of low density and high molecular weight. Insulation shall
be suitable for maximum conductor temperature of 60 degree Celsius. Minimum insulation thickness shall not
be less than 1.2 mm. PE insulated single core cable shall be for 600V grade operation. The cables shall be
suitable for installation in the ground flooded with treated sewage effluent water having corrosive chemicals.
11. Each solenoid valve shall be connected by a separate control cable from the irrigation controller unit and a
common cable shall be run connecting all the solenoids for return connection.
12. Contractor shall ensure that each cable is of sufficient rating for its normal and fault conditions.
13. Rating and cross section required for each cable shall be assessed using the following factors:
a. Fault level;
b. Conditions of ambient temperature relevant to method of laying;
c. Voltage drop Voltage drop in motor circuits due to starting;
d. Over-current settings of circuit breakers;
e. Disposition of cabling whether in air, ducts or buried; and
f. Cable ratings shall be calculated in accordance with ERA 69-30.
14. Contractor shall submit details of the cable sizes using actual parameters for the Engineer's approval before
ordering.
15. All design cable sizes and lengths are approximate. Contractor shall be responsible for measuring the length of
cable required and providing a suitable cable accordingly.
16. Each cable shall be supplied in a suitable length and be continuous through its run.
17. Armoured PVC insulated cable conductor shall be suitably sized as per BS 6360 and PVC insulation as per BS
6004 and BS 6746C as applicable
18. Cables, bearing the manufacturer’s name, shall only be used.
19. Armoured XLPE insulated cable shall comply with BS 5467.
13.3.2.13 Bubblers
Materials susceptible to UV degradation or oxidation used in the construction of bubblers shall conform to the
following:
1. Components comprised of materials susceptible to UV degradation or oxidation intended for use above ground
shall be stabilized to provide protection from Ultraviolet (UV) rays if the material is subjected to the UV
degradation mechanism.
2. Components intended for use below ground shall be stabilized to provide adequate protection while stored
above ground in uncovered areas.
3. Where carbon black is utilized as a UV stabilizer, it shall be at a minimum of 2.0 weight percent (wt%) in the
final product where the maximum is no more than 3.0 wt%.
4. If colours are used in the final product, the pigments shall contain a UV stabiliser at a concentration
determined to provide protection equivalent to that achieved using carbon black.
5. Components comprised of materials susceptible to UV degradation or oxidation intended for use shall have
sufficient antioxidants to be thermally stable when subjected to the oxidation degradation method. The total
content of the stabilizer package in plastic formulations shall be less than 0.5 parts per 100 parts of resin.
6. Where polyethylene is used, the minimum induction temperature shall be 438°F (220°C) when tested in
accordance with ASTM D‐3350.
a. Pressure Compensating Bubbler

The bubbler shall be a pressure compensating type capable of providing a consistent discharge rate of 0.02, 0.03,
0.06 & 0.12 lps at 2 to 5 bar pressure. Bubblers shall be constructed from UL stabilised engineering grade plastic. The
Page 13-79
bubbler assembly shall have a plastic inlet screen to protect the nozzle against clogging. The bubbler shall have a 15/21
inlet (FNPT) for connection to the piping system riser.
b. Adjustable Flow Bubbler

The full circle bubbler shall have a discharge rate of 0.09 lps at 2 bar pressure. The bubbler body and screen shall be
constructed of plastic. The adjusting screw shall be of stainless steel. The bubbler shall have a 15/21 female threaded
inlet. All performance data tests shall be conform to ASAE S 398.1 standard procedures. The bubbler shall have an
inlet screen to protect nozzle against clogging, and adjusting screw, capable of shutting off the bubbler and regulating
the flow.
c. Bubbler Stake
Stakes for bubblers shall be constructed from strong temperature resistant polypropylene plastic construction with
protective stop collar and length shall be 300mm. Double barb inlets shall accept 13mm inside diameter (ID)
polyethylene tubing and ensure a firm connection. Outlet for bubbler shall be ½” external male thread.
d. Bubbler Riser
Riser for bubbler shall be constructed from UV resistant thermoplastic materials for long life. It shall be one piece,
black design with no extra fittings or adapters. It should be able to withstand pressure up to 5.5 bars and temperature
up to 65 deg C.
e. Bubbler Pop-Up Bodies

The body and stem shall be constructed of high impact, corrosion resistant heavy duty plastic. The pop-up body
shall have co-moulded (or) separated wiper seal in the top cover constructed from EPR rubber in polypropylene
base for cleaning debris from pop-up stem as it retracts into case to prevent from sticking up. Full sealing around the
pop-up stem shall occur at 0.6 bars. The wiper seal form an integral part of the cap and shall not be detachable.
The riser shall have a strong stainless steel retracts spring for positive pop down. Pop-up height shall be not less
than 10.2 or 30.5cm as required. The sprinkler shall have a screen under the nozzle to protect it from clogging and for
any removal of cleaning and flushing system. The sprinkler shall have 15/21 threaded inlet. The sprinkler shall
have a built in check valve to prevent low head drainage. If the elevation is above 3.0m, use check valve. The pop- up
shall have a ratcheting mechanism and a full flow inlet unit.
13.3.2.14 Emitters
The emitter shall be manufactured from virgin polyethylene. The emitter shall have turbulent flow path design. The
inner section shall be removable. The inner section shall lock into the outer body by two retaining clips. The outer body
shall have 4mm barbed inlet and retaining clip suitable for the polyethylene tube. Discharge shall be 8, or 16 LPH at 20
Psi (1.38 Bars) as required.
The installation shall be with special tools by the manufacturer of the drip emitters.
a. Single Outlet Pressure Compensating Emitter

Emitter shall be the single outlet fully pressure compensating type capable of providing constant discharge over the
pressure range from 0.35 to 4.2 bars and shall conform to the following:
1. Flow rates available shall be 4/8/16/24 lph.
2. Emitter shall give a constant flow rate for temperature up to 60°C.
3. Each emitter shall have “dual flow regulations” utilising both turbulent flow labyrinth and EPDM diaphragm.
4. Complete units shall be resistant to standard agricultural chemical/fertilizers and withstand UAE
environmental conditions.
5. Labyrinth shall give the emitters large path and works at pressure below 0.35 bars. So no emission spikes
occur at low pressures.
6. Diaphragm shall be free floating and controls the emission flow rate from 4.2 bars.
7. Emitter shall be continuously self-cleaning.
8. Emitter shall have built in filtration system in the inlet barb.
Page 13-80
9. Emitter shall have a barbed inlet and nipple outlet to accept 4 mm micro tube. The outlet shall have a baffle to
deter insect entry.
10. Coefficient of manufacturing variable shall be less than 0.05.
11. Emitters shall be stamped with the manufacturer name, product type and flow rate.
b. Pressure Compensating Dripper Line (In-Line)

The dripper line shall be manufactured from linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) incorporating a minimum of 2.8
% carbon black, antioxidants in an amount not exceeding 0.5 % and shall have a nominal pressure PN 6 with pressure
compensating emitters factory installed to the inside of the tube at selected intervals and conform to the following:
1. Working pressure shall be minimum 4 kg/cm².
2. Pressure compensating emitter shall consist of “dual regulation” utilising both turbulent flow labyrinth and
EPDM diaphragm.
3. Dripper shall be continuously self-cleaning.
4. Pressure compensation shall be between 0.35 to 4.2 bars and the flow must remain constant at temperature
varying from 0 to 60 deg. C.
5. Coefficient of manufacturing variability must be less than 0.04 as determined by an independent organisation.
6. Dripper line shall be guaranteed against solar damage for 7 years.
7. Dripper line shall be able to be installed with the dripper in any orientation.
8. Temperature up to 60°C shall not affect the dripper flow rate.
9. Dripper shall have a large “water path” outlet that acts as a mechanical barrier to root intrusion.
10. Drip line shall have an inside diameter of 13.6 mm and in dripper flow rates of 2 or 4 lph as agreed with the
Engineer.
11. Pressure compensating dripper line spacing shall be 30, 50, 70 or 100 cm.
12. Minimum 7 years continuous testing in sub-surface application by an independent organisation is required.
13. Pipes shall be fixed intact to the ground using heat resistant stakes at every 5 metres and an automatic end
flush valve shall be installed at the end of the line.
14. Drip stakes shall be provided at each point of change in direction of drip line. The maximum length of the pipe
to one side shall be based on the manufacturer’s recommendation.
15. A random sample of drip pipes shall be subjected to the Teepol crack resistance test as follows:
a) Samples shall be immersed in a bath containing a solution of 10 % Teepol and 90 % water maintained at
50O C;
b) Pipe shall resist the solution without showing any fatigue or crack for a period of 150 hours; and
c) Tests shall be carried out in an independent laboratory within the UAE.
13.3.2.15 Sprinklers
The pop-up sprinklers should be equipped with factory installed drain check valves.
Not less than 4” pop-up spray heads shall be used with matched precipitation rate (MPR) nozzles or adjustable arc
nozzles from 25° to 360° with an adjusting screw capable of regulating the radius and flow are to be used for turf grass
with spacing up to 5.0m. The nozzles shall provide the required radius of flow at 2.0 Bar.
Not less than 4” pop-up rotary heads shall be used with adjustable arc nozzles from 40° - 360° are to be used for wide
turf grass areas with spacing from 5.0m to 10.0m. The nozzles shall provide the required radius at 2.0 Bar.
a. Spray Head Pop-Up Sprinkler

The sprinkler body, stem, nozzle and screen shall be constructed of high impact, corrosion resistant heavy duty plastic.
The sprinkler shall have co-moulded (or) separated wiper seal in the top cover constructed from EPR rubber in
polypropylene base for cleaning debris from pop-up stem as it retracts into case to prevent sprinkler from sticking up.
Full sealing around the pop-up stem shall occur at 0.6 bars. The wiper seal form an integral part of the cap and shall not
be detachable. Nozzles shall be removable to allow for pattern change and easy maintenance.
Page 13-81
The sprinkler shall have a strong stainless steel retracts spring for positive pop down. The sprinkler shall have a
screen under the nozzle to protect it from clogging and for any removal of cleaning and flushing system. The sprinkler
shall have a built in check valve to prevent low head drainage. The sprinkler shall have a ratcheting mechanism and a
full flow inlet unit shall come complete with a flush plug and nozzle.
b. Rotor Pop-Up Sprinkler

The pop- up rotator (rotor) shall produce and maintain a matched precipitation not greater than 15mm per hour
throughout the arc and radius adjustment range and it shall be of viscous fluid brake rotary type and produce multiple
streams.
0 0 0 0
The part circle pop up rotator shall have an infinitely adjustable arc between 90 – 210 or between 210 – 270
0
depending on the model selected. The full circle model shall irrigate 360 . Full or part circle model shall be capable
of up to 25% radius reduction using a stainless steel radius adjustment screw on the top of the nozzle. The radius
reduction screw shall have a slip clutch mechanism to prevent internal damage if turned past the minimum or
maximum radius settings. The radius reduction screw shall reduce the pressure and flow upstream of the nozzle
there by maintaining the stream integrity.
Part circle rotator shall have arc adjustment capabilities using a stainless steel ring at the top edge of the nozzle.
The adjustment ring shall be effective only while the sprinkler is popped up and shall be ineffective while the sprinkler
is popped down. When turned past the minimum or maximum arc limits the adjustment mechanism shall have a slip
clutch action to prevent internal damage.
The pop up rotator shall have a pop up that occurs approximately at 15 psi of water pressure. Upon cessation of
water pressure, the sprinkler shall pop down. The pop up rotator shall be fitted with detachable filter stem and nozzle
orifice shall be manufactured from urethane for durability.
The sprinkler shall include a set of five (5) interchangeable nozzles and be available interchangeable nozzles
discharging from 0.09 to 0.21 lps.
The sprinkler shall be available in an adjustable part circle configuration. The adjustable part-circle unit shall be
minutely adjustable from 40° to 360°. The adjustable unit shall be adjustable in all phases of installation (i.e., before
installation, after installation (static), and after installation while in operation). The pop up versions of the sprinkler
shall have a ratcheting riser assembly for final arc orientation.
The pop-up sprinkler shall have a built in check valve to prevent low head drainage, and be capable of checking up
to 2.0m of elevation change. If the elevation exceeds 2.0m, use check valve as per Section 13.3.2.15.e.
The sprinkler shall have an exposed surface diameter of 5.7 cm after installation. The sprinkler shall have a 15/21
female threaded inlet. The sprinkler shall be serviceable after installation by unscrewing the body cap, removing the
riser assembly, and extracting the inlet filter screen. The body and the riser of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-
corrosive, heavy duty plastic. The sprinkler shall carry a two-year warranty.
c. Heavy Duty Gear Driven Sprinkler

The sprinklers shall be of the gear driven, rotary type, capable of covering a 6m to 14m radius at 3.4 bars with a
discharge rate of 0.35 lps. The sprinklers shall be available with eight (8) standard nozzles discharging from 0.06
to 0.52 lps or four (4) low angles discharging from 0.1 to 0.30 lps. The sprinkler shall have a radius adjustment
screw. The sprinkler shall have a provision to enable the user to stop the water flow through an individual sprinkler
head.
The sprinkler shall be available in both full circle and adjustable part circle configurations. The adjustments part
circle unit shall be minutely adjustable from 40° to 360°. The adjustable unit shall be adjustable in all phases of
installation (i.e., before installation, after installation while static, and after installation while in operation).
The sprinkler shall have a minimum of 10.2cm pop-up stroke to bring the rotating nozzle turret into a clean
environment. The sprinkler shall have a rubber firmly attached to the top of the sprinkler riser. When specified the
sprinkler shall have a cover moulded of purple acryl rubber to indicate the use of reclaimed water.
The sprinklers shall have a built in check valve to prevent low head drainage and be capable of checking up to 3.0m in
elevation change. If the elevation exceeds 3.0m, use check valve as per Section 13.3.2.15.e.
The sprinkler shall be serviceable after installation in the field by unscrewing the body cap, removing the riser assembly,
and extracting the inlet filter screen. The body and the riser of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-corrosive,
heavy duty plastic and nozzle-turret assembly shall be encased in stainless steel. The sprinkler shall carry a five-year
exchange warranty (not prorated).
Page 13-82
d. Pop-Up Sprays and Rotor Connection

The flexible connection between the irrigation sprays/rotors and the sub-main shall be via UV stabilised class C low-
density polyethylene (LDPE) pipe type 32 manufactured to BS 1972/67 – 3287. All pipes shall have size, class,
manufacturer’s name and standard printed on the product.
Compression fittings shall be used for pipe connection to the sprays/rotor. The fittings shall have the body, locking
ring, thrust collar and internal barb manufactured from master batch UV stabilised polyethylene. The locking ring shall
be manufactured from acetylic resin and rubber seal NBR material. The fitting shall have a pressure rating of 16 bars
and shall secure the pipe with an external locking ring plus an internal push fit barbed adaptor. The two locking
components shall be compressed onto the pipe to form a secure seal by the rotation of the locking nut. The final
assembly shall have working pressure rating of 10 bar minimum and test pressure 16 bar. Pop-up sprays shall use ½”
class C and rotors shall use minimum ¾” class C polyethylene pipe.
e. Check Valves for Hillside Sprinklers Installation

If the elevation is above 3.0m, the check valve shall be installed along the lateral connecting the uphill and downhill
sprinklers. The check valve shall be a spring-loaded adjustable valve constructed of corrosion resistant materials. The
valve body shall be moulded of heavy-duty, UV stabilised, schedule 80 PVC. The internal spring shall be constructed
of 300 series stainless steel and the seal shall be constructed of EPDM material. The valve shall have an adjustment
range of 1.2m to 9.8m of elevation. The adjustment shall be accomplished by turning the adjustment screw from the
discharge side of the valve without taking the unit off the riser.
f. Triple Swing Joint Assembly

Triple swing joint shall be made of schedule 80 high-impact uPVC type material. Pressure rating shall be
minimum 200 psi. It shall have full 360° adjustments / 3 planes. Size shall be 1” BSP/Metric) dia. and 12” length.
Thread configuration shall be 1” spigot inlet x 1” MIPT outlet. It shall have quality EPDM, “O‟ ring or ACME
thread seals. It shall have a minimum 3 year warranty.
13.3.2.16 Storage and Pumping Facilities

Works and equipment shall be provided according to the applicable British Standards.
Contractor shall comply with these specifications in addition to Chapters 1,2,4,5,21, 24 and 28 for minimum acceptable
requirements of all works and equipment included in the design, installation and maintenance of the irrigation storage
and pumping facilities. If the specifications do not cover all the works involved, ADWEA (ADSSC & ADDC)
specifications shall be applicable. Alternatively the Contractor may seek Engineer’s clarifications.
Prior to commencement of any work the Contractor shall submit for approval any material and equipment to be used or
installed. For all works, the Contractor shall submit a Method Statement with sufficient description of proposed work
sequence, materials and tools to be used for the Engineer’s evaluation.
a. Service Conditions
All works and equipment shall be suitable for the ambient and service conditions and the Treated Sewage Effluent
(TSE) quality as per the following:
1. Ambient Temperature: 10°C to 55°C
2. Estimated Irrigation Water Quality: Filtered and treated municipal wastewater
3. Normal Chlorides: 500-1500 mg/l
4. Intermittent Chlorides: up to 3000 mg/l
5. Free or combined chlorine residual: Normally 1.0 (but up to 10) mg/l
6. pH: 7.1
7. Temperature range: 20°C to 35°C
b. Guarantees and Warranties for Storage and Pumping Facilities Equipment

Guarantees and warranties by the suppliers of various components in lieu of single-source responsibility by the
equipment manufacturer will not be accepted. The primary equipment manufacturer and the Contractor shall be solely
Page 13-83
responsible for the equipment warranty of all equipment furnished under the storage and pumping facilities works. In
the event a component fails to perform as specified or is proven defective in service during the warranty period,
excluding items normally expended during operation, the manufacturer and the Contractor shall provide a replacement
part without cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with manufacturer’s guarantee and warranty certificates for all equipment,
duly registered with the manufacturer.
The Contractor is not responsible for operation and maintenance works after handing over to the Owner unless it is
otherwise included in the Contract Plans.
The defects liability period extends for one (1) year for civil works and three (3) years for all electro-mechanical
works.
c. Storage Facilities
A. Concrete Storage facility specifications shall comply with this section and the following chapters:
1. Chapter 1 General Works
2. Chapter 2 Earthworks
3. Chapter 3 Pavement
4. Chapter 4 Concrete Works
5. Chapter 5 Reinforcing Steel
6. Chapter 10 Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works
7. Chapter 12 Storm Water Drainage
8. Chapter 17 Drilled Piles
9. Chapter 21 Concrete Structures
10. Chapter 23 Steel Structures
11. Chapter 24 Painting
12. Chapter 28 Waterproofing
13. Chapter 29 Miscellaneous Items for Structures
14. Chapter 30 Miscellaneous Metals
B. GRP Storage facilities
GRP storage facilities construction are limited to temporary storage facilities or upstream temporary booster pumps.
PRFD aims at removal of the old permanent GRP tanks installation in Abu Dhabi emirate. However, if there is a
requirement for of GRP irrigation tanks installation, the specifications shall be as follows:
• GRP tanks shall have high ratio of mechanical strength of weight.
• Chemical resistance to most of the compound, no corrosion with water, sewage or effluent even after
prolonged exposure to adverse environment and soil condition.
• Low electrical and thermal conductivity.
• Protection against mould, macro organism, Bacteria, Algae and fungi.
• Non toxic approved for storage and handling portable water.
GRP resin material Specifications shall be a commercial grade unsaturated polyester resin confirming to BS 4994
(CRYSTIC 123 PA, Palatal P 5 N – Palatal A 430, Norpol resin ISO 72 – 80 MEM, Norpol Resin 44 M – 85 MEM
etc).
The glass fibre reinforcement used will be commercial E type chopped strand mat glass fibre (PPG CSM 79, Owners
Coming, Binani etc) and woven roving confirming to BS 3496 and BS 3749 respectively.
Thixotropic agents, catalyst, promoter etc. Will be added as required for the manufacturing process.
GRP inside lamination; Surface veli impregnated with 90-95% resin.C glass or alternatively synthetic veli. 2 Plies
bonded 450g/32CSM. Preferably with 20 tex strands. Alternatively silan-sized chopped roving impregnated with 70-
80% resin. British standard BS 4994-87 recommends a minimum of 1200g/m2CSM.
Page 13-84
All the material specified for GRP Tanks and types shall be discussed, agreed and approved during the design stages
with the Owner.
1. Summary of Products
i. The irrigation reservoir shall be constructed with two compartments.
ii. Each compartment shall have separate ductile iron TSE supply and GRP overflow pipe work.
iii. Both compartments shall be connected via a 400 X 400mm penstock to allow isolation of one
compartment from the other for maintenance issues.
d. Pumping Facilities
Pump stations’ general specifications are in Chapter 12. Pumping facility civil, mechanical and electrical works
specifications shall comply with this section and the following chapters:
1. Chapter 1 General Works
2. Chapter 2 Earthworks
3. Chapter 3 Pavement
4. Chapter 4 Concrete Works
5. Chapter 5 Reinforcing Steel
6. Chapter 10 Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works
7. Chapter 12 Storm Water Drainage
8. Chapter 17 Drilled Piles
9. Chapter 23 Steel Structures
10. Chapter 24 Painting
11. Chapter 28 Waterproofing
12. Chapter 29 Miscellaneous Items for Structures
13. Chapter 30 Miscellaneous Metals
The irrigation pump station shall comprise, but not limited to, the following:
1. Main irrigation pumps
2. Sump pump
3. Ventilation system
4. Air conditioning system for Motor Control Center (MCC) room
5. Suction and discharge pipe work and valves
6. Automatic cleaning filters
7. Fertiliser preparation and dosing system
8. Inlet and discharge flow meters
9. Fire protection
1. Summary of Products
i. The Contractor shall supply all materials, labour, supervision, temporary works, false-work, plant,
machinery, equipment, parts, tools, supplies, transportation, utilities, construction facilities, incidentals,
detailed design, logistic support, site testing and commissioning any associated items required to provide
reliable automatically operated irrigation pump station in accordance with international standards and
codes. The irrigation pumps shall be identical and will be designed with the selected pump arrangements
and flows as per the irrigation design requirements.
ii. Sump pump shall be provided in the pump station basement to remove any leakage and wash water. The
Contractor shall verify the exact pump head requirements according to the site conditions.
Page 13-85
iii. Forced fresh air and exhaust air ventilation shall provide 12 air changes per hour and shall comply with
AMCA 99 for fabrication, AMCA 210 Performance Ratings, Conform to and bear the AMCA Certified
Rating Seal, AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 Sound Ratings.
iv. The wash water system shall comprise a hose rack with 20m of 20mm diameter hose, connected to the
pumps’ discharge line, all valves and accessories including 32mm pressure reducing ball valve at wash
water supply line. The supply pressure shall be limited to 2.0 Bar.
v. The MCC room shall have an air conditioning system (split type). Each unit shall consist of outdoor
condensing unit, indoor fan coil unit, refrigerant pipe work, valves, electrical and controls. The air
conditioning units shall comply with BS3456, Room Air Conditioners, BS EN 60335 Air Conditioning,
I.E.E. Regulations, ARI 210 - Unitary Air Conditioner Equipment ARI 240, ARI 270, NFPA 70 -
National Electrical Code and ASHRAE 1989.
vi. Irrigation water shall be filtered using automatic filters with 200 mesh size (75micron) 316L stainless
steel cartridge and shall comply with the general requirement in Section 13.3.2.19. The filter backwash
shall be discharged to the drain sump.
vii. Provide fertiliser preparation system for occasional dosing to irrigation system. The dose, timing and
frequency shall be controlled manually and as per operator requirements and shall comply with the
requirements detailed in Section 13.3.2.16.i.
viii. The drainage system for the pump room shall consist of one sump pit with two submersible pumps (one
duty and one standby) each with 100mm diameter check valve and 100mm diameter gate valve
discharging directly to nearest storm manhole.
ix. All ductile iron pipe work and fittings to BS EN 545, pressure rating PN16 and thickness class shall be
K9 for pipe work and K12 for fittings and shall comply with the general requirements in Chapter 12.
x. Valves and pipe work shall be provided with adequate supports.
xi. Discharge flow meter chamber shall be located downstream of the pump room with air relief valve,
isolation gate valve with an extended stem and two saddle straps for sampling and drainage purposes.
xii. Inlet flow meter located inside the inlet valve chamber upstream of the reservoir shall consist of one
manual isolation butterfly valve and two motorized butterfly valves. Specifications of butterfly valves
shall be as per Section 13.3.2.9.
e. Main Irrigation Pumps Requirements

1. Reference Standards
i. BS4504, PN16 Flanges and their joints
ii. BS5316 Sec.3 Precision class tests
iii. BS5304 Code of Practice for safety of machinery
iv. BS6007 Specifications for rubber insulated cable for electric power
v. BS5316 Pt 2 Specifications for acceptance tests for centrifugal pumps
vi. BS1780 Specifications for bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges
vii. DIN1691 Flake graphite cast iron
viii. I.P.55 Ingress Protection
ix. NEMA National Electrical Manufactures Association
x. AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association
2. General Requirements
i. Pumps shall be split case, L-10 life of at least 10 years per AFBMA test procedures single stage
centrifugal pumps furnished as a complete unit by the pump manufacturer, including an electric motor.
All pumps of the same rating shall be identical.
ii. Pumps and drives shall be rated for continuous duty and shall be capable of pumping the specified flow
range without surging, cavitations, or vibration. The pumps shall not overload the motors at any point on
the pump performance characteristic curve within the limits of stable pump operation as recommended
Page 13-86
by the Manufacturer to prevent surging, cavitations, and vibration. Motors (with starting system
supplied) shall develop and accelerate the pumps to full speed at full discharge conditions.
iii. To ensure vibration-free operation, all rotating components of each pumping unit shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. The
mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided.
The amplitude of vibrations as measured at any point on the pumping unit shall not exceed the limits set
forth in the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards or equivalent British Standards.
iv. All parts of each pump shall be designed to withstand the stresses that will be imposed upon them during
their handling, shipping, installation, and operation.
v. All pump performance (head versus discharge) curves shall be continuously rising as discharge is
decreased. Backward curving performance curves are not acceptable.
vi. All pumps and motors for each type of pump shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, who shall
assume full responsibility for the completeness of the pumps.
3. Pump Construction
i. Pumps shall be split case centrifugal pumps furnished for vertical installation.
ii. Pumps shall be mounted on a rigid cast iron or fabricated steel base. Motor stool shall be cast iron or
fabricated steel.
iii. The impeller shall be one piece machined, accurately balanced and installed on the pump shaft. The
impeller design shall be of double entry suction type.
iv. Pump shafts shall be accurately machined and ground, sized to withstand loads imposed by continuous
operation at any point throughout the pump curve range, plus allowance for ample safety factors. Shaft
sleeves shall be positively secured to the shaft in the seal area but be removable and replaceable.
v. The pumps shall have all bearings independent of drive motor bearings. Bearings shall be of the anti-
friction grease-lubricated ball or roller type. Main pump bearings shall be designed
vi. A flexible type coupling shall be provided between pump shaft and motor shaft. The coupling halves
shall fit tightly to the shafts so as not to become loose during operation at any point throughout the pump
operating range.
vii. The pumps shall be provided with mechanical seals which are manufacturer’s standard for the service
conditions specified in this section.
viii. Each pump shall have a standard stainless steel nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous location
showing the name, rated capacity, and total head, and the address of the manufacturer, serial and model
number, and such other information as the manufacturer may consider necessary to complete the
identification of the item. The equipment item number shall also be shown.
4. Materials of Pump Construction

i. Shaft: Stainless Steel BS 970, Grd. 431S29
ii. Pump casing: Cast Iron BS 1452, Grd. 250,
iii. Bearing housings: Cast Iron, BS 1452, Grd. 250
iv. Mechanical Seals: Carbon against Silicon faces, balanced
v. Shaft Sleeves: Stainless steel, BS970, Grd 431S29 or equal
vi. Casing wear rings: Bronze LB2
vii. Impeller: Bronze LG4
Provide taps with threaded plugs for pressure gages in the pump casing at the suction and discharge flanges.
Taps shall be 9mm in diameter.
The design for the pumps shall allow removal of the rotating assembly without disturbing alignment of the
pump and motor.
Water for mechanical seals and/or seal flushing, where required by the manufacturer, shall be product water
conducted by conduits furnished with an external or internal pump. Seal water shall be filtered with cartridge
or canister type filters, supplied by the pump manufacturer.
Page 13-87
5. Motors
Each pump shall be driven by a motor of adequate size to drive the pump throughout the pump operating curve
on 415 Volt, 3 Phase, 50 Hz power. The motor shall be squirrel cage induction type. Provide stainless steel
motor nameplate indicating manufacturer, serial and model numbers, kW rating, full load amps, voltage, and
other information considered necessary by the manufacturer. Verify that the motor to be used is suitable for
use with the VFD.
6. Guards
Guards shall be provided at all exposed couplings, drives and shafts, and shall be of galvanized perforated steel
plate pattern 2mm thickness with flanged bolted connections or engineer approved alternative.
f. Variable frequency Drive (VFD)

Variable speed drives; adjustable frequency drives or herein identified as AC drives for use with standard three-phase
asynchronous motors. The Contractor shall provide labour, equipment, supervision and materials for the installation,
testing and start-up of the VFD as shown in the Contract Plans as an unit for motor control centres and as specified in
this section.
Provide a factory trained technician to start-up and commissioning of each VFD during field acceptance tests.
i. The variable speed drives shall be of the electronic, pulse width modulating (PWM), variable frequency
type with an output suitable for controlling standard industrial squirrel cage motors, with a synchronous
speed as specified in the pump section.
ii. The AC Drive and associated control equipment shall be housed within a cubicle forming a part of the
relevant motor control centre. The cubicle shall be considered as a starter and generally comply with the
requirements for motor starter cubicles.
iii. The load characteristic shall be considered to be “pump type” with variable torque. The supplier shall be
responsible for coordination with the motor manufacturer and provide a properly matched drive-motor
system for the specified duty. The drive-motor system shall take into consideration of the following:
a) Load torque requirements and drive capability.
b) Motor rating (amperes) and loading.
c) Motor efficiency.
d) Motor insulation.
e) Effects of power factor capacitors.
f) Motor thermal protection.
2. Rating
i. Rated input system is 415 volts ± 10%, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz ± 2%.
ii. The power factor of AC drive shall be kept within 0.93 lagging to unity over the entire operating range.
iii. The controller for specified motor shall be rated to work in the shaded average ambient temperature of
50° C having relative humidity of 95% (non-condensing).
iv. The AC drive shall be rated for the continuous maximum rating of the motor and not its running load.
Evidence shall be provided to confirm that the drive rating is sufficient for the motor rating (input
current).
v. The efficiency of the AC Drive at 100% speed and load shall not be less than 95%.
vi. The drive shall be designed for variable torque. The drive shall be capable to supply 115% of rated
current for up to 1 minute.
vii. The output carrier frequency of the AC Drive shall be randomly modulated and selectable within the
range from 2 kHz to 8 kHz depending on Drive rating. The drive shall provide a low noise quiet
operation.
viii. The output frequency shall not exceed 200 Hz.
Page 13-88
3. Enclosure
i. The enclosed product in motor control centre cubicle shall be complete with controller equipment, motor
protection circuit breaker incorporating thermal and magnetic protection, contactor, and control supply
transformer as per the Contract Plans.
ii. The enclosure for the AC drive unit shall have a protection rating of minimum IP 20 to BS EN 60947-1
or NEMA 1. Note that the overall enclosure protection shall satisfy the requirements as specified for
Motor Control Center (MCC) cubicle.
iii. Ventilation grills with sand traps shall be included.
iv. Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided with a hydro/thermostat and have OFF/ON control on the
cubicle front door. The heater shall not be in operation when the driver is functioning.
4. Product Requirements
i. The AC Drive shall convert the input AC mains power to an adjustable frequency and voltage as defined
in the following sections.
ii. The input power section shall utilise a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers. The diode
rectifiers shall convert fixed voltage and frequency, AC line power to fixed dc voltage. This power
section shall be insensitive to phase rotation of the AC input line.
iii. The output power section shall change fixed DC voltage to adjustable frequency AC voltage. This
section shall preferably utilize 3rd generation insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT) or intelligent
power modules (IPM) with current source design as required by the current rating of the motor.
iv. A DC link choke smoothing reactor shall be included to limit fault throughput.
v. The AC drive shall be designed for both manual and automatic speed control. The manual speed control
shall be by means of a hand-adjusted potentiometer.
vi. The starting arrangement shall include a ramp for speed control so that the starting current remains
within the limit of normal rated current of the motor.
vii. The drive shall incorporate facility to allow the connection of an Emergency Stop Push Button to ensure
effective direct stopping of the drive, if dangerous situations arise. The means provided shall include an
air-break on-load contactor suitable to open directly by operation of the emergency push button. The
arrangement shall not:
a) Inhibit any in-built deceleration provided by the controller.
b) Produce additional safety hazards.
c) Cause damage to the controller.
5. Protection
i. Upon power-up the AC Drive shall automatically test for valid operation of memory, option module, loss
of analogue reference input, loss of communication, dynamic brake failure, dc to dc power supply,
control power and the pre-charge circuit.
ii. The power converter shall be protected against short circuits, between output phases and ground; and the
logic and analogue outputs.
iii. The AC Drive shall have solid-state I²t protection that is UL Listed and meets UL 508 C as a Class-10
overload protection and meets IEC 947.
iv. The protection shall be provided for TYPE 2 coordination.
v. For a fault condition other than a ground fault, short circuit or internal fault, an auto restart function will
provide programmable restart attempts. The programmable time delay before restart attempts shall be
adjustable from 10 second to 10 minutes.
vi. A microprocessor controlled digital thermal protection system shall be included which continuously
calculates the temperature rise of the motor, independent of the drive and provides:
a) An overload pre-alarm, which indicates by relay contact that the motor has exceeded its rated
temperature, set at 110% of the rated motor thermal capacity.
Page 13-89
b) A thermal fault condition, which stops the motor if the temperature exceeds 120% of the motor
thermal capability.
c) An analogue electronic circuit with a time constant adjustable to the motor's thermal cooling time-
constant ensuring the memorization of the thermal state even after power supplies disconnection or
shorting out of the power semiconductors.
vii. The AC Drive shall provide SCR heat sink construction for heat transfer.
viii. The AC Drive shall have a programmable fold-back function that will anticipate a controller/motor
overload condition and fold back the frequency to avoid a fault condition.
ix. The AC Drive shall include Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs) for protection against voltage surges.
6. Configuration and Setting Range

i. The AC Drive shall self-configure to the main operating supply voltage and frequency.
ii. Upon power-up, the AC Drive shall send a signal to the connected motor and store the resulting electro-
mechanical resistance data into memory. The inductance data will be measured during no-load operation
when operating at a frequency equal to power frequency. The AC Drive shall automatically optimize the
operating characteristics according to the stored data.
iii. The AC Drive will be factory pre-set for the application.
iv. A choice of three types of acceleration and deceleration ramps will be available in the AC Drive
software; linear, S curve and U curve.
v. The acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable from 0.1 to 500 seconds.
vi. The memory shall retain and record run status and fault type of the past 8 faults (minimum).
vii. Slip compensation shall be a software-enabled function.
viii. The starter shall have a PID control system integrated as standard to accept the external signals coming
from sensors and transducers in the pumping application.
ix. Table 13-34 provides the minimum configurable inputs and outputs, which shall be used to interface the
drive with the control system for remote applications:
Table 13-34 Minimum configurable inputs and outputs
Analogue Input Output

0(4) to 20 mA 2 nos. 2 nos.
0(2) to 10 V 2 nos. 2 nos.
Digital 2 nos. 2 nos.
Relay (dry contacts) 2 nos. 2 nos.
x. Provide communication interface and facility for control to integrate the operation of the system. The
facility shall be compatible with the arrangement for other equipment in the MCC and suitable for
operation of the drive with PLC through RS485 serial interface.
xi. The drive controller shall incorporate a user friendly programmer keypad having LCD panel in “Plain
Language Text in English” with help feature to enable easy setting up of parameters, and running the
drive diagnostic program without referring to the instruction manual. Parameter setting shall be password
protected. The man/machine interface facility for parameter setting shall include:
a) Menu selection
b) Parameter setting
c) Speed potentiometer
xii. The display will be a high resolution, LCD backlit screen capable of displaying graphics such as bar
graphs as well as alphanumeric characters, simultaneously. The display panel shall be used to monitor the
electrical metering parameters by menu driven selection. This shall include:
a) Input/output currents
b) Input/output voltages
Page 13-90
c) Input/output frequencies
d) Kilowatt
e) Running hours
xiii. The following operator devices, either door mounted or unit mounted but accessible without opening the
door, shall be included:
a) Start
b) Stop
c) Emergency stop
d) Fault reset
e) Local/remote selector
f) Hand/off/auto selector
g) Heater on/off
xiv. The AC Drive shall have LEDs mounted on the front panel to indicate functional status. This shall
include:
a) Green LED: system healthy
b) Red LED: drive faulty
c) Red LED: motor faulty (Thermal)
d) White LED: motor running
e) Amber LED: overload alarm
f) Red LED: emergency stop
7. Control
i. Terminal strip shall be provided to connect external devices for starting/stopping the AC Drive, speed
control and displaying operating status. All control inputs and outputs will be software assignable.
ii. 2-wire or 3-wire control strategy shall be defined within the software. External relays or logic devices
will not be required.
iii. The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be rated for 24 VDC.
iv. The internal power supply unit shall incorporate automatic current fold-back protection facility to protect
it, if incorrectly connected or shorted. The transistor logic outputs shall be current limited and shall be
protected, if shorted or excess current is pulled.
v. All logic connections shall be furnished on pull-apart terminal strips.
8. Cables
i. Cables between the drive and motor shall be sized and insulation grade selected based on the
manufacturer’s recommendation for the particular installation considering the distance between them.
Multi-core power cables shall be armoured and XLPE insulated. The armour of the cable shall be cross-
bonded to earth. All signal and control cables shall be shielded.
ii. Any restriction on the length of the cable shall be taken into care and if required, output reactors shall be
provided with suitable compensation for output torque.
g. Sump Pumps
1. Reference Standards
i. BS EN1092, PN16 Flanges and their joints
ii. BS 5316 Sec.3 Precision class tests
iii. BS 5304 Code of Practice for safety of machinery
iv. BS 6007 Specifications for rubber insulated cable for electric power
Page 13-91
v. BS 5316 Pt 2 Specifications for acceptance tests for centrifugal pumps

vi. BS 1780 Specifications for bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges
vii. DIN1691 Flake graphite cast iron
viii. I.P.68 Ingress Protection
ix. NEMA National Electrical Manufactures Association
x. AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association
xi. HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards
2. Pumps Construction
i. Dry pit submersible pumps shall be direct driven by squirrel cage induction motors, running at a speed
not exceeding 1500 rpm. The pumps shall be designed for permanent dry installation and occasional
flooding. It must be designed and constructed specifically for this purpose to a minimum of IP68.
ii. Immersible pumps shall be direct driven, single stage, vertical spindle, centrifugal, driven by squirrel
cage induction motors, running at a speed not exceeding 1500 rpm. The pumps shall be designed for
permanent wet installation with a suspension device. It must be designed and constructed specifically for
this purpose to a minimum of IP68. The pumps shall be automatically and firmly connected to the
discharge connection, guided by no less than two guide bars extending from the top of the station to the
discharge connection. There shall be no need for the personnel to enter the wet-well. Sealing of the
pumping unit to the discharge connection shall be accomplished by a machined metal-to-metal watertight
contact or with O-ring gasket. Where shown in the Contract Plans, the pump shall be free standing on its
own skirt base, and connected to the flexible discharge hose.
3. Cooling System
i. Motors shall be sufficiently cooled by the surrounding environment or pumped media.
ii. Larger pumps shall be supplied with duplex stainless steel cooling jacket.
4. Mechanical Seal, Shaft and Bearings

i. All seal materials shall be compatible with and resistant to the fluid being handled. There shall be two
back-to-back mechanical seals provided to seal off the motor from the pump. The upper seal shall be oil
lubricated; its rotating component shall be of carbon whilst its fixed component, like both parts of the
lower seal, shall be made from tungsten carbide or silicon.
ii. Pump shaft and motor shaft shall be the same unit. Couplings shall not be acceptable.
iii. Bearings shall be capable of taking the static weight of the rotating parts and any thrust produced by the
operation of the pump. Bearings shall be of the antifriction type designed for B10 life of 50,000 hours per
NFBMA test procedures. The bearing between the motor rotor and the impeller shall be lubricated by an
internal oil supply, which shall also serve to cool shaft seals.
5. Impeller, Casing, Wear Rings

i. The impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced, double shrouded non-clogging or vortex
design having a long through let without acute turns.
ii. The impeller shall be capable of handling solids, selected for maximum hydraulic efficiency, thus,
reducing operating costs. The impeller shall be retained with an allen head bolt and shall be capable of
passing a mininum 25mm diameter solid, unless specified otherwise.
iii. Pump casing shall be single-piece non-concentric design with smooth passages large enough to pass any
solids that may enter the impeller.
iv. Replaceable wear rings shall be provided for the casing and/or impeller as per Engineer’s approval.
Wear rings shall be constructed of suitable wear resistant material (minimum 300 Brinell hardness).
v. Alternatively an adjustable suction plate may be used for controlling the axial impeller clearance, as
Page 13-92
6. Guide Railing and Lifting Equipment

i. A guide railing system, where applicable, shall be provided to ensure simple and effective removal and
reinstallation of the pump set. The system shall be two guide bars, vertical over its entire length, be
retained at the bottom by fixings forming part of the discharge connection and at the top by a
bracket/access frame arrangement. The access frame shall be drilled for lifting chain support brackets and
motor cable support clips. The works shall include all of this equipment and all necessary brackets; clips;
fixings and packing.
ii. Where approved by the Engineer, SS 316 guide ropes system may be used in place of guide rails.
iii. A lifting chain shall be supplied with each pumping set connected to an eye mounted on the site of the
pump withdrawal opening.
iv. A discharge connection shall be provided such that the pump can readily be raised from within the sump
without first undoing nuts and bolts or any other fixing arrangement. The pump shall be automatically
coupled to the delivery pipe work, by its own weight, during the lowering operation.
v. Lifting equipment shall be provided for sump pumps, which affords a safe and simple method of
removing the pump set and depositing it in a location suitable for ready removal from the site. Comply
with the requirements of Crane Manufacturers Association (CMA), Monorail Manufacturers Association
(MMA), Hoist Manufacturer’s Institute (HMI), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA),
and the National Electrical Code (NEC).
h. Electrical Requirements
1. General Electrical Requirements
i. Supply, installation and commissioning of the power system to receive power from the nearest power
source designated by the ADWEA / Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (ADDC). This shall include all
the necessary equipment like switchgear, cables and accessories complete as per the specifications and
requirement of the ADWEA/ADDC.
ii. Supply, installation and commission of motor control centres as detailed in Chapter 12.
iii. Supply, installation and commission of all power, control and signal cables from MCC to various
electrical equipment, motors, distribution boards, control panels, local control stations, etc. to make the
irrigation pump stations complete in all respects. This shall also include all the cable trays, conduits,
uPVC ducts, concrete pull pits, cable support systems, trenches, etc. required for proper installation of all
the cables.
iv. Supply, installation and commission of internal, external and emergency lighting including all necessary
distribution boards, weather proof junction boxes, fittings, poles including concrete foundation and all
related civil work, cables, wires, cable trays, trenches, uPVC ducts, concrete pull pits, conduits, and
accessories, etc. to ensure proper illumination levels for the complete plant and surrounding area, as
specified in Chapter 10.
v. Supply, installation and commission of single phase socket outlets, and combined single phase and three
phase sockets outlets, located internally and externally. Sockets shall be metal clad of the industrial type.
vi. Supply, installation and commission of earthing and lightning protection system for complete plant,
buildings and facilities, including earth pits, grid conductors, test points, etc. to achieve the specified
earth resistance as per NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities, and BS
7671: Code of practice for earthing.
vii. Supply, installation and commission of telephone system including junction boxes, outlets, cables,
conduits chambers etc. as specified Section 13.3.2.16.j.
viii. Supply, installation and commission of local control stations, emergency stop PB station for all motors as
specified and as shown in the Contract Plans.
ix. Supply, installation and commission of weatherproof junction boxes including isolators, for pumps,
hoists and any other motor having its cable supplied fixed to motor and supplied as a complete unit.
x. Supply, installation and commissioning of Fire Detection and Alarm System as specified in Section
13.3.2.16.k.
xi. Minor civil works in addition to the required work specified for completion of electrical installation shall
also be included.
Page 13-93
2. Irrigation Pumps Electrical Requirements

i. Motors shall be constructed to the requirements of Chapters 11 and 16 for air cooled machines.
ii. Where variable speed drives are required to satisfy the output requirement of the pump, it shall be by
means of variable frequency, solid state equipment. In these circumstances, motors shall be specifically
designed to function when supplied from such sources whilst maintaining their fully rated output.
iii. Where forced ventilation is necessary in order to maintain design output, details of the rating of fan
motors used for this purpose shall be included in the tender document.
iv. The additional loading represented by forced ventilation fans will be taken into account when calculating
overall system operating efficiency.
v. The pump motor shall be rated for a minimum margin on absorbed power of 10% based on maximum
absorbed power at maximum design discharge and suitably de-rated for continuous operation in a 55°C
ambient temperature.
3. Sump Pumps Electrical Requirements

i. The pump motor shall be rated for a minimum margin on absorbed power of 10% based on maximum
absorbed power at maximum design discharge and suitably de-rated for continuous operation in a 55°C
ambient temperature.
ii. Motor shall be squirrel cage, induction, and shall have permanently lubricated bearings and mechanical
seal. Motor shall have lower ball bearing for thrust that shall be capable of taking drive shaft-weights
where necessary and upper sleeve bearing for radial loads.
iii. Motor shall be housed in oil-filled watertight submersible casing. Motors shall be NEMA design B.
Degree of protection against ingress of solid particles and water shall be IP 68 minimum complying with
BS EN 60034-5 (EN 60529).
iv. Motor shall be constructed with insulation of class F material, complying with specification standard BS
2757. The temperature rise shall be limited to class B insulation (80°C rise) providing required margin to
operate at an ambient temperature of 50°C.
v. Motors shall be rated to operate without overloading under all pump-operating conditions, from
essentially no head to shut-off head and from continuous operation to 15 start-stop cycles per hour
minimum.
vi. Power and signal cables shall be connected to the motor through a watertight terminal box, sealed from
the motor. Cables shall be brought out directly from the well in un-jointed run. Cables shall be securely
anchored to the wellhead so as to avoid any stress, the anchor being capable of ready release.
vii. Cables shall be flexible in construction. Cables shall be EPR (Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber) insulated,
Poly-chloroprene sheathed. Insulation grade shall be 600/1000V.
viii. Cable conductor shall be tinned, annealed, stranded and shall comply with BS 6007.
ix. Cables shall normally terminate directly between the motor and the motor control cubicle.
x. If required, due to the longer distance between the pump-motor and motor control cubicle a junction box
shall be provided outside the well, for splicing the motor cables with the circuit cable. The junction box
shall be weatherproof and of protection class IP 56 minimum. If a plug-socket connection arrangement is
provided, it shall not be possible to energize the power supply cable when the plug and socket is
disconnected. Cable between the junction box and the motor control cubicle shall be XLPE/SWA/PVC
type.
xi. Provide an automatic pump control system. All pump control and electric switches mounted inside the
wet well shall be suitable for use in Class 1, Division 1, Group C and D applications.
xii. The control for automatic pump system shall utilize float switches to operate at preset liquid levels in the
pump well to control the pumps. The float switches shall be set at the elevations shown in the Contract
Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
xiii. Provide suitable fixing of level sensor cables to avoid tangling at all water levels inside the well. Provide
sufficient excess cable lengths to permit field elevation adjustment.
xiv. A complete control panel shall be provided for the pump station for local mounting and shall be
completely wired and ready for field connection of power and sensor cables.
Page 13-94
xv. The housing enclosure for the control panel shall be of IP55 (NEMA 4X), corrosion proof with rain
canopy and stand-off sunshields for outdoor mounting. If necessary, provide enclosure (IP54/NEMA 3R)
fans with dust filters louvers to ensure with specified temperature ratings. Control panel shall be double
wall, a door-in-door structure, with a hinged, dead front, lockable outer door with print pocket. Hinged
inner door shall contain all push buttons, control switches, meters, indicating lamps etc. Motor starters,
contactors, circuit breakers, terminals etc. shall be mounted on a frame inside the inner panel. The panel
main disconnect switch shall be interlocked with the inner panel door. The panel size shall be flexible to
accommodate all equipment and generous space left for maintenance. Panels up to 1200mm high by
900mm wide shall be designed for wall mounting on an equipment rack. Larger panels shall be free
standing, and shall be mounted on a 100mm house-keeping pad.
xvi. Shrouded terminals shall be provided for all power field wiring. Field wiring connections shall be
numbered terminal strips. The control panels shall be factory tested prior to shipment. All wire within the
panel shall be routed in wireway. Separate terminal blocks, wireway and barriers shall segregate the
intrinsically safe circuitry.
xvii. The panel shall include the following major pieces of equipment:
a) Main power disconnect switch, handle interlocked with inner door.
b) Main thermal-magnetic circuit breaker with ground fault protection.
c) Combination starter/Star-delta starter for each pump. Combination starter to include a motor circuit
protector, contactor and overload relays. Motor protection relay for motors larger than 11kW.
d) Feeder circuits as shown in the Contract Plans.
e) Feeder for power factor correction capacitor bank.
f) Interior fluorescent work light with door switch and convenience socket outlet.
g) 240V, single phase control circuit for pump(s) including selector switch, control switch, run time
meters, indicating and alarm lights, etc.
h) Hand-off-auto selector switch and on-off control push button on hand mode selection.
i) Duty-standby selector switches or lead/lag duty automatic changeover control relays for multiple
pump arrangement.
j) Intrinsically safe circuitry for wet well controls, switches, relays alternator, 240/24V control power
transformer, etc.
k) Panel space heater with humidity sensing switch, sized to prevent condensation.
l) A high-level (alarm) beacon light (60 watt) shall be mounted on the top of the control cabinet. The
light shall be enclosed in a red polycarbonate enclosure. The light shall be activated by pump failure,
fault trip or high-level alarm.
m) All electrical controls and devices shall be furnished with labels in English and Arabic describing
their function and the name of the equipment served.
xviii. Power factor correction capacitors shall be provided to maintain the power factor within 0.93 lagging and
unity. Over compensation must be avoided.
xix. Capacitors shall be heavy duty, liquid-filled, industrial type.
xx. Provide with current limiting fuses and discharge resistors.
xxi. The capacitors shall be mounted inside the cabinet or near to the motor control cabinet and switched in
with the motor.
i. Chemical Dosing System

1. The chemical injection unit shall comprise of a skid mounted rigid polypropylene make-up tank with
reinforced ribs mounted on a pedestal and dosing pumps (duty, stand-by) calibrated in 5 l/h or less increments,
agitator, complete with valves, fittings, filters, dry running protection and connection pipes. The tank should be
fixed to pedestal using stainless steel 316 anchor bolts and nuts.
2. The dosing pump shall be diaphragm type and constructed from corrosion resistant material suitable for
fertilizer chemical solution, the unit shall have an operating head of 10 bar over the full flow range. The
injection rate shall be set manually to required flow.
Page 13-95
3. The pump should be equipped with automatic gas release system. Pump diaphragm shall have a guarantee of
two years life at duty point.
4. Dosing pump shall be started manually and shall run on an adjustable timer basis. They shall also stop dosing
when the chemicals tank is empty. The tank agitator shall also stop when the tank is empty.
5. The equipment shall be able to handle either liquid or solid chemical depending on the requirements.
6. The injector shall incorporate a stop cock to allow its removal under mains pressure.
7. All components of the injection system shall be rated for 16 bar.
8. Control shall be affected by a control panel mounted on the skid incorporating the controls and starters for the
dosing pumps. The panel shall be Form 2 IP 55 rating, designed for mounting in the pump station basement.
Provide for monitoring and control from the main PLC in the MCC.
9. For the foundations, supports and fixings; anchor bolts, nuts, washers and sleeves shall be 316L stainless steel
chemical type, conforming to ASTM A-167 and ASTM A-267.
10. Where anchor bolts and equipment bases are of different materials provide dielectric protection by coating of
holes in the bases and insulating sleeves and washers.
11. Anchor bolts shall extend through nuts a minimum of three threads but not exceed 12mm.
j. Telephone System
The telephone system should comply with BS 1363 13A plugs, socket outlets, adapters and connection units and
Etisalat Regulations.
The contractor shall provide shop drawings, including annunciator layout and system wiring diagrams showing each
device and wiring connection required. The Contractor shall provide electrical characteristics and connection
requirements in addition to test reports indicating satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections. For all
submittals, the manufacturer's installation instructions shall be included indicating application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by the product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products.
i. Telephone cabling and equipment supply and installation shall be carried out by an approved Etisalat
Contractor specializing in telephone installations.
ii. All telephone related installations carried out by the Contractor shall conform to the Etisalat standard
specifications and regulations together with this specification and the Contract Plans.
iii. The Contractor shall supply and install cable ways, empty conduits with draw wires and/or trunking,
telephone points and outlets, PVC ducts, telephone junction boxes, and manholes as required and shown
in the Contract Plans.
2. Telephone outlets
i. The Contractor shall supply and install telephone points and the associated mains power outlets which
shall conform to BS 6312, BS 1363.
ii. The telephone outlets shall be jack type and from the same manufacturer, and finish as for the lighting
and general power outlets, unless specified otherwise.
iii. Telephone outlets shall be of the type approved by Etisalat.
k. Fire Detection and Alarm System

Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72, BS 5839 or other approved standard, manual and automatic local fire alarm system with
connections to municipal system or central station as specified.
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings, including annunciator layout and system wiring diagrams showing each
device and wiring connection required. The Contractor shall provide electrical characteristics and connection
requirements in addition to test reports indicating satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections. For all
submittals, the manufacturer's installation instructions should be included indicating application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by the product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products.
Page 13-96
1. Reference Specifications
i. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
ii. NFPA 72 Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Protective Signalling Systems.
iii. NFPA 72E Automatic Fire Detectors.
iv. NFPA 72G Notification Appliances for Protective Signalling Systems.
v. NFPA 72H Guide for Test Procedures for Protective Signalling Systems.
vi. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
vii. BS 5839 Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings.
viii. BS 5445 Components of automatic fire detection systems.
ix. BS 5446 Specification for self-contained smoke alarms and point-type smoke
detectors.
x. BS 6207 Specification for mineral-insulated copper sheathed cables with copper conductors.
xi. Other national standards pertaining to Fire Alarm Systems as directed by the Engineer.
2. Regulatory Requirements
i. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
ii. Conform to requirements of BS 5839.
iii. Latest issue of Abu Dhabi Electricity and Water Authority regulations (ADCC).
iv. Requirements of the Department of Civil Defense, Abu Dhabi.
In the case of conflict the Abu Dhabi Civil Defense Department requirements shall take precedence.
Furnish products listed and classified by UL, FM or testing firm acceptable to the Engineer and Abu Dhabi
Civil Defense Department as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
3. Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection Control Panel

i. Control Panel: Modular construction with surface wall-mounted enclosure.
ii. Power supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote annunciators, door
holders, smoke dampers, relays, and alarm signalling devices. Include battery-operated emergency
power supply with capacity for operating system in standby mode for three hours followed by alarm
mode for 10 minutes.
iii. System Supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in trouble mode.
iv. Initiating Device Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication; occurrence of
single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from
initiating an alarm.
v. Indicating Appliance Circuits: Supervised march time signal module, sufficient for signal devices
connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but
does not disable that circuit from signalling an alarm.
vi. Trip Circuit: Output connections for Civil Defense master fire alarm.
vii. Remote Station Signal Transmitter: Electrically supervised digital alarm communicator transmitter,
capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals over telephone lines to central station receiver.
viii. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each detection zone to provide
accessory functions specified.
ix. Provide “Trouble Acknowledge, Drill, and Alarm Silence” switch.
x. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuit trouble places system in trouble mode, which causes
the following system operations:
a) Visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at fire alarm control panel.
b) Visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel.
Page 13-97
c) Trouble signal transmitted to Civil Defense central station.

d) Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences audible trouble alarm; visual alarm
is displayed until initiating failure or circuit trouble is cleared.
xi. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of initiating device places circuit in alarm mode, which causes
the following system operations:
a) Sound and display local fire alarm signalling devices with march time signal.
b) Transmit non-coded signal to Civil Defense central station.
c) Indicate location of alarm on fire alarm control panel.
xii. Alarm Reset: System remains in alarm mode until manually reset with key-accessible reset function;
system resets only if initiating circuits are out of alarm mode.
xiii. Lamp Test: Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at fire alarm control panel.
4. Initiating Devices
i. Manual Station: Surface mounted, non-coded type, single action, and manual station with break-glass
rod. Provide manufacturer's standard back box.
ii. Heat Detector: Combination rate of rise and fixed temperature, temperature and rate of rise as per
manufacturer’s recommendation.
iii. Smoke Detector: NFPA 72E, BS 5445 or other approved standard, ceiling mounted, ionization type and
High Performance Optical type with adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, auxiliary relay contact, integral
thermal element rated specified degrees C, and visual indication of detector actuation. Provide two-wire
detector with common or four-wire detector with separate power supply and signal circuits.
5. Signalling Appliances
i. Alarm Bells: NFPA 72G or other approved standard, electric vibrating, 200mm bell with operating
mechanism behind dome. Sound Rating: 81 dB at 3m.
ii. Alarm Lights: NFPA 72G or other approved standard, strobe lamp and flasher with red lettered "FIRE"
on white lens.
6. Fire Alarm Wire and Cable

i. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Mineral insulated copper sheathed cables to BS 6207.
ii. Initiating Device and Indicating Appliance Circuits: Mineral insulated copper conductor (MICC) cable to
BS 6207.
l. Performance Requirements for Electrical Works

1. The MCC shall be housed in separate room adjacent to pump room and reservoir in an above ground building.
Suitable air conditioning and ventilation should be provided as indicated.
2. Provision should be made to connect emergency generator shall be suitable to supply power to the pump
station in the event of main’s power supply failure.
3. Fault and alarm conditions in the pump station (including power failure, pump failure, pump room flooding,
abnormal level indication etc.) shall be displayed using a beacon lamp. The beacon lamp shall be installed
outside the MCC room in a suitable location.
4. The pumps shall be started using variable speed drives with complete protections as described in the
specifications the operation of the pumps will be controlled automatically.
5. The system shall be designed for automatic and unattended operation.
6. Internal cabling within the pump house shall be in cable trays or surface mounted rigid type GI conduit.
7. External cabling between the MCC room and pump room shall be in PVC ducts compete with cable draw pits,
manholes required for proper installation and maintenance.
8. Pump room illumination system shall be provided using weather proof luminaries.
Page 13-98
9. The incoming power cable, (with all installation material and labour) from the ADDC supply point shall be
supplied and installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer/ADDC and
arrange power connection to the pump station and all activities with regard to the power connection and
commissioning of the pump stations. The Contractor shall produce and submit the necessary documents for the
approval of ADDC related to the connection.
m. Instrumentation, Control and Automation (ICA) Requirements

The applicable standards are BS 6739 Code of practice for instrumentation in process control Systems: Installation
design and practice. In addition, ISO 3511 Process Measurement Control Functions - Instrumentation Symbolic
Representation shall be followed.
The Contractor shall submit control loop descriptions for each loop in the system. Ensure that tag numbers cross-
reference with loop diagrams and tag numbers shown on instrument specification forms. Describe each element and
include appropriate tag number in parenthesis.
When additional elements are necessary, use and assign tag numbers not in conflict with others and in accordance with
ISO procedures.
The following minimum engineering and shop drawings (but not limited to) shall be prepared in accordance with ISA
(Instrument Society of America) standard and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before starting the
procurement and construction.
1. P & I D with all control and interlock links.
2. Flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic. Label with settings, adjustable
range of control and limits.
3. Graphic displays indicating mechanical system components, control system components, and controlled
function status and value.
4. Description of control sequence & I/O list.
5. Control schematic and ladder logic diagram.
6. Loop drawings.
7. Instrument schedule.
8. Instrument hook up drawings.
9. Instrument data sheets.
10. Instrument location drawings.
11. MOV actuator torque calculations.
12. Panel drawings.
13. Cable block diagram.
14. Cable layout drawings.
15. Cable schedule.
16. UPS power load calculations and cable sizing calculations.
17. UPS power distribution drawings for instrumentation.
1. General Control Philosophy

i. The operation of the irrigation pump station shall be by three selectable modes.
a) Auto/manual in remote mode with main SCADA
b) Auto/manual with local PLC
c) Manually by hard wire relay logic including all pump protections.
ii. Process components shall be provided with a local Hand-Off-Automatic (H-O-A) or Open-Automatic-
Close (O-A-C) switch that shall permit manual control by the operator if required. For testing and
troubleshooting purposes, H-O-A switches shall allow equipment operation in the hand position without
verification of other equipment interlocks or permissive. Similarly, O-A-C switches shall permit manual
valve control. Any equipment, which could be damaged in this manner or present a personnel hazard,
Page 13-99
however, shall be provided with the necessary protective interlocks in all modes of operation. Semi-
automatic operation and its required manual initiation shall be available to the operator at local positions
near the operating equipment as well as at the control panel.
iii. All analogue set point and timers shall be adjustable by an operator with password protection on the
SCADA system. The SCADA system shall have the Human Machine Interface (HMI) with screen. The
SCADA system shall be connected to master SCADA system for remote control.
iv. All important indications and control shall be available on the panel by direct wire during the manual
operation by hard wire relay logic.
v. There shall be a reservoir with two compartments connected to each other through one penstock valve.
Each compartment of the reservoir shall feed to the common suction header of the pumps. The discharge
of the pump shall be connected to the irrigation network through screen filter system.
vi. A branch pipeline shall be connected to main TSE pipeline to feed the reservoir. The level control of the
reservoir shall be through level transmitter, level switches which will initiate the inlet MOV to start the
filling to the defined high level. The MOV shall control the flow as per the setting made on PLC to feed
reservoir at constant flow.
vii. There shall be a fertiliser dosing system which shall provide fertiliser injection before irrigation network.
The dosing shall be feed by a metering pump controlled through PLC and irrigation controller.
viii. The station will be furnished with a “Dual Redundant Hot Stand-By Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC)” Panel shall be installed inside the electrical room. The pump station will allow status monitoring
and remote control from the master SCADA system (available at Mussaffah for Abu Dhabi Island and
mainland).
ix. In normal case, the pump station shall be running in remote mode through PLC with all controls from
master SCADA. The PLC shall have the configuration as per control philosophy approved by the
responsible authority (currently PRFD) and shall be updating all the commands and settings continuously
on both PLC. The failure of any one PLC shall give an alarm at local panel and at master SCADA
station.
x. Relay logic shall control the station manually in the event of a failure of the PLC.
2. Pump Control Philosophy

i. The pumps shall be initiated by the irrigation controller when irrigation is to be started. All the duty
pumps will operate automatically and shall be stopped by irrigation controller when irrigation is
completed.
ii. The pumps are to be controlled through the VFD which gets speed control signals from PID controls in
the PLC. The main discharge header flow and pressure will govern the VFD control as per the
responsible authority’s operation and maintenance (O&M) requirements (currently PRFD).
iii. The pump configuration will be 3 duty and 1 stand by. The pump runtimes will be calculated in the PLC
and displayed on the SCADA system. The lead pump shall be selected by PLC based on the minimum
run hours. The stand by pump shall be selected based on the maximum run hours. However, there shall
be a manual selector switch to select any pump as stand by to override the selection of PLC.
iv. All pumps will be protected for dry run when the level of reservoir reaches the LSLL set point.
v. All the pumps shall be protected for no flow. This will be achieved by installing a paddle type flow
switch on the pump suction. The pump shall be tripped, if there is no flow within a defined time
(adjustable).
vi. Each pump shall include integrally mounted temperature and vibration probes that will shut the pump
down if activated. Alarms shall be displayed and logged in the SCADA system.
vii. The failure or tripping of any pump shall activate the start of stand by pump within defined time
(adjustable).
3. Level Instruments
i. There shall be an ultrasonic type level transmitter for each compartment of reservoir.
ii. There shall be bar graph type digital indicators for level installed on the PLC panel.
Page 13-100
4. Level Switches
i. There shall be four float type level switches for each compartment of reservoir where LSL & LSH shall
be used for level alarm and LSLL & LSHH shall be used for interlocks.
ii. All the level switch status shall be indicated on SCADA system. The level switch used for pump tripping
shall have bypass switch.
5. Flow Meters
i. There shall be two flow meters, electromagnetic type installed in the flow meter chamber on discharge
line and incoming line, with transmitters having local indications and totaliser. The flow shall be
displayed on the transmitter and SCADA system with totaliser and recorder. Signal transmitters shall be
mounted indoors wherever possible. If this is not possible they shall be sun shielded.
ii. The flow meter shall be supplied and installed with earthing rings. The earthing wires shall be connected
to a proper earthing system.
6. Pressure Transmitter
i. Pressure indicating transmitter will be installed on the main discharge lines and high/low alarm shall be
generated by RTU/PLC.
ii. The pressure shall be recorded on the SCADA system.
iii. All the transmitter, indicators and gauges shall be installed with the sun shades, if they are outside the
building.
7. Pressure Gauge
i. All the pressure gauges shall be supplied with 2 valve manifold and snubber.
8. Control Panel
i. The Contractor shall design, supply and install a control panel in the MCC room. The control panel shall
consist the necessary switches, push buttons, lamps, indicators, relay circuits, PLCs, alarms, hooters, etc.
as per requirement of the pump station.
ii. The Contractor shall supply and install a Video Display Unit (VDU) in the control panel with all the
necessary accessories.
9. PLC, RTU & SCADA

i. Contractor shall design, supply and install a “Dual Redundant Hot Stand-By Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC)” in the control panel.
ii. The PLC shall communicate through 3G communication with the master SCADA located in the new
building at Musaffah (currently under PRFD authority) for the remote control, supervisory and interlock
purposes. The Contractor shall install the required hardware and connect on both sides, configure at the
master SCADA, test and commission the remote control system.
iii. The Contractor shall install an operator work station with printer in the control room for pump station
monitoring and control by the operator.
iv. The Contractor shall supply and install all the communication equipment, junction boxes, accessories, etc
required to achieve communications.
10. Motor Operated Valves

i. The MOVs shall be provided with a motorised actuator with a local-remote switch and an open-stop-
close switch. In the remote position they will be controlled from the SCADA system. In the local control
mode, they will be controlled from the actuator.
ii. If a pump fail or a chamber is to be taken out of service, the operator will manually turn off the pumps
and close the gate. The operator will then manually pump out of the chamber. There is an interlock to
stop the pump from running in auto if the gate is closed but the operator should turn the pump on in the
case of a failure or loss of signal.
Page 13-101
iii. The actuator shall be smart type with ability to upgrade in future for facilities like Modbus/Profibus
communication, F/O communication, wireless operation, etc. The actuator shall have also position
transmitter and indication for % opening shall be displayed on the SCADA. The Contractor shall submit
the torque calculation for the Engineer’s review.
11. UPS and Batteries

i. The Contractor shall supply and install an UPS with batteries and power distribution board for the
instrumentation requirements of pump station. The UPS autonomy shall be for three (3) hours.
ii. The Contractor shall submit the load calculation for the power requirement in support of UPS capacity
selection. However, the capacity shall not be less than 5 KVA. If the capacity is more than 5 KVA then
20 % spare capacity shall be added.
13.3.2.17 Irrigation Pump Installation Requirements

The Contractor is responsible for the irrigation pump station Installation in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and under the supervision of the system supplier’s factory trained personnel.
The pump performance shall be verified by field test at the rate specified. Refer to Chapter 12 for pump station testing.
a. Suppliers Field Services

Provide a factory trained manufacturer's representative with demonstrated ability and experience in the installation and
operation of the equipment included herein to perform the services listed below:
1. Supervise and approve the installation.
2. Test, calibrate and adjust all components for optimum performance.
3. Assist in initial start-up and field-testing.
4. Inspect the completed installation and prepare an inspection and performance test report.
5. Instruct Owner personnel in the operation and user maintenance of all components.
6. Supervise the correction of any defective or faulty work before and after acceptance by the Owner.
7. Installation of all assemblies and components shall be in accordance with the details indicated on the approved
shop drawings and the printed instructions of the manufacturer.
8. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the equipment operation with the instrumentation
requirements to ensure compatibility of control interfacing with the operations.
b. Testing and Commissioning of Pumps and Mechanical Equipment

Pumps shall be tested in accordance with ISO 9906 against the manufacturer’s published curve.
Pumps shall comply with the Grade 1 test criteria, except for pumps less than 10 kW in which case the requirements of
ISO 9906 Annex A shall apply. In the case of the submersible drain pump, type testing is acceptable.
c. Testing and Commissioning of all Electrical Equipment

The Contractor is responsible for testing and commissioning and supply of as-built drawings, O&M manuals for the
complete electrical installation. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating and obtaining approval from the ADDC
for power supply and connection.
d. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Instrumentation

Four categories are required as follows:
1. Overall Plant Manual.
2. Control Panel and Communication System Manual.
3. Individually Instrument Manual from Manufacturer.
4. Software Manual.
Page 13-102
13.3.2.18 Irrigation Pump Station Maintenance Requirements

The Contractor shall provide with the equipment, all spare parts as recommended by the pump manufacturer to cover
normal operation and maintenance of the pumps.
13.3.2.19 Filters
A filter shall be supplied from a recognised filter manufacturer with proven history of successful operation in hot, arid
environments. The filter shall have the following minimum features:
1. Flanged inlet/outlet connections located at right angles to each other.
2. Flow rate in cubic meters/hour shall be stated and shall be as per BOQ.
3. Stainless steel body construction (Grade 316) subject to irrigation water quality and as approved by the
Engineer.
4. Epoxy coated cast iron end cap secured to the main filter body by stainless steel studs and brass nuts.
5. All internal components shall be stainless steel.
6. The filter support element and mesh shall be stainless steel and the mesh size shall be 200 mesh.
7. The filter element shall be removable.
8. Cleaning/back wash shall be by automatic valves controls, initiated from the nearby irrigation or pump
controller based on pre defined time periods and backwash shall be connected to a soak pit. The item shall
include for controller, remote control valves, and connection to soak pit, DI inlet and DI outlet manifold.
9. Filter shall come complete with pressure gauges (2 No.), air release valve (1 No.) and a flush gate valve (2
inch).
10. The filter shall have a minimum 10 Bar operating pressure rating and test pressure shall be 1.5 times of the
operating pressure.
11. The item shall also include for timers, automatic valves and connection to soak pit, DI inlet and DI outlet
manifold.
Operation: Automatic vacuum cleaning of inside of filter screen. Reverse flow rotary vacuum cleaning through a centre
tube with vacuum rotor nozzles driven by a hydraulic motor that clean the interior of the screen in one revolution lasting
approximately 5 to 15 seconds. The motor shall be driven by clean water from outlet side of the filter.
Pressure monitoring gauges shall be liquid filled and provided at inlet and outlet of the filter manifold.
2” Bronze (or) Brass (or) Nylon reinforced plastic angle flush valve.
The filter system must be delivered complete from one manufacturer. Each filter tank, manifold set and controller, must
be serially numbered by the manufacturer and the manufacturer must provide a certificate of warranty for the complete
system mentioning the serial number of those components. The manufacturer’s certificate must state that all
components are suitable for the climatic conditions of the U.A.E and as per the requirements of Section 13.1.1.5.
a. Screen Filter
Automatic self-cleaning screen filter shall be provided at the pump header, which is specifically designed for use with
organic contaminants. Cleaning shall be effected by hydraulically powered suction scanner automatically activated
when the pressure across the filter reaches 0.35 bars. The capacity of the filter should match with the system flow.
Filters shall comply with the following and as per the requirements of Section 13.1.1.5:
1. Primary stage filtration shall be performed by a one piece perforated PVC coarse screen having circular
holes of 9 mm diameter.
2. Secondary stage filtration shall be provided by a stainless steel grade 316 with 200 mesh size (74
microns). Flushing line to be connected to an existing drainage manhole.
3. Filter shall be equipped with electrical control system contained in a Nema 4X enclosure, which shall regulate
the filter rinse cycles and prevent the filter from engaging in a continuous rinse. The control system shall
be microprocessor based and shall be suitable for control of up to ten (10) filters. The system shall provide for
rinse cycle activation by one of four options: differential pressure, timer external signal or manually, and shall
include an integral rinse cycle counter which shall record the rinse cycles activated by each method. The
system shall include local alarm and remote contacts to indicate filter malfunction.
Page 13-103
4. Filter shall have flush valve actuator of a heavy duty construction threaded into a brass valve body.
5. Filter shall clean itself automatically without the need for an external energy source.
6. Filter shall provide uninterrupted flow and also provide filtration during the flushing cycle.
7. Fine screen elements shall be easily replaceable without requiring any changes to be made in the construction
of the elements of the cleaning system or the need to remove the filter from the pipeline.
8. Installation shall be possible in any desired position (horizontal, up-side down, vertical or inclined).
9. Pressure drop across a clean filter screen shall not exceed 3 psi (20 kPa).
10. Filter shall have isolation valves in the suction as well on delivery side for easy maintenance. The
controller for the filters shall be equipped with timer and pressure differential control unit.
11. Pressure gauges to be connected to suction and delivery side of each filter.
12. All nuts and bolts shall be of stainless steel grade 316 or A4-70.
b. Root Watering System

The root watering system for trees shall consist of a basket constructed from high grade ultra violet resistant polymer in
which the bubbler assembly is to be installed.
The basket shall be approximately 1000mm in length and 100mm in diameter. The basket shall have an opening for
connecting the bubbler assembly. The bubbler pipe shall enter the basket through the upper half in such a way that the
bubble shall be installed almost flushed with the ground. The entire basket shall be filled with large size gravel up to the
bubbler. The hole shall be drilled in an approved position and there shall be three numbers of root watering systems for
each tree.
The root watering system shall be suitable to allow the following:
1. Deep dripping and hence deep rooting for wind resistance for the trees in the sloppy, rocky and thick grass
areas.
2. Assist in leaching in saline soil and saline water conditions.
3. The system shall keep the bubbler assembly safe from walking animals and protect against damage.
4. Avoid evaporation losses.
5. To allow water, air and nutrient to reach the root system directly.
c. Y Strainer
Y strainer shall be used within the drip system control valve assembly to protect the downstream drip system from
clogging. Body shall be constructed from high heat and chemical resistant glass reinforced plastic, glass filled nylon or
polypropylene two-piece threaded housing with O-ring seal moulded. The whole filter unit shall be manufactured from
the same manufacturer and comply with the following:
1. The filters to be construction to handle constant pressure upstream of the control valves. The pressure range is
from 25 to 150 PSI (1.7-10.3 Bar).
2. The filters can be handle flows from 0.25 to 220 GPM (0.016 to 13.87 LPS).
3. The Y-Filter shall be constantly cleaned to avoid clogging. It shall be fitted with a minimum 74 micron
screen.
4. Outer support shall be woven stainless steel wire and inner screen shall be woven stainless steel cloth. Inner
and outer screens shall be soldered together.
d. Centrifugal Sand Separator

The sand separator shall be supplied from a recognised separator manufacturer with proven history of successful
operation in hot, arid environments. The separator shall have the following minimum features:
1. Inch inlet and outlet connections right angles to each other.
2. Flow rate in (US) gpm shall be stated.
3. Stainless steel (Grade 316) or 10 gauge carbon steel body construction and shall be rated to 10 bar.
Page 13-104
4. The separator shall be capable of removing solids 50 microns / 325 mesh in size and heavier than 1.2 specific
gravity.
5. The separator shall have an open chamber inlet without slots to insure unobstructed flow.
6. The whole separator system shall be manufactured from USA or Australia.
7. Auto-purge valve shall also from the same manufacturer.
8. The separator shall be hydrostatically tested.
9. The friction loss for the required flow shall be less than 0.5 bars.
10. Operation: A tangential inlet and mutually tangential internal accelerating slots shall be allowed to promote the
proper velocity necessary for the removal of the separable solids. The centrifugal action of the separator shall
force particles to move in a downward spiral motion. The separator shall be installed in a vertical/ inclined
position, so that gravitational force quickly pulls the debris into the dirt-holding chamber.
11. The separator shall be without any moving parts or filter media.
13.3.2.20 Subsurface Drainage

The subsurface drainage shall consist of underground slotted drainage pipe work and shall comply with the following:
1. uPVC main drain pipe of size 160 mm and above shall be as per BS 3505 and shall be made from the basic
UPVC compound, base polymer K-57 uPVC resin or equivalent.
2. Fittings shall be uPVC, easy to use push fit type with profiled EPDM sealing rings confirming to DIN 4060
and shall be leak proof in gravity flows.
3. Transition pieces shall be used in cases where connections are to be made with a different grade material
piping.
4. Slotted pipes shall be made of uPVC or HDPE with a profiled outer wall and smooth surfaced inner wall and
shall be standard lengths of 4, 6, 8 or 12 metres or be flexible type in larger lengths/rolls which can be cut
using fine toothed saw on site.
5. Mushroom shaped sealing ring shall be used in the second groove from the end and lubricants shall be made
use of for the connections.
6. Slotted pipe fittings shall be of a material similar to the pipe material.
7. Minimum slots length shall be 75mm and width 2.0mm with a minimum of 13 slots per metre. The
longitudinal slot staggered rows shall be radically separated by an angle of 90 degrees between centres for
giving a large lower area for carrying ground water.
8. Pipes shall be slotted to a pattern that allows minimum infiltration rates in excess of that specified in BS EN
1852 and BS EN 13476.
The slots are designed to give at least the minimum infiltration area as shown in Table 13-35. Two longitudinal rows of
slots are machine cut in the pipe and are separated radially. Longitudinally slot centres are staggered.
Table 13-35 Minimum infiltration slot areas
Nominal Diameter (mm) Pitch (mm) Minimum Slot Area (mm2/m)

110 120 3450
160 120 5025
225 120 7070
315 120 9900
9. Include for all fittings, joining, geotextile fabrics (refer to Section 13.3.2.20.b for additional information) to
cover the pipes and gravel (refer to Section 13.3.2.20.a for additional information). The double wall
construction shall allow leak proof operation, and the ring stiffness shall be in excess of 10 KN/ square metre
allowing high load bearing capacity. There shall be a limit stop in the joint to prevent over insertion and the
pull out strength shall be in excess of 50N.
10. Traffic load capacity shall be minimum 60 tons and it shall accept a height of covering embankment up to 10.0
m.
Page 13-105
11. All pipes shall have a temperature rating of – 40°C to 80°C.

12. Main drain lines shall be connected to a soak away pit or to nearest drainage system as advised by the
Engineer.
13. The Contractor shall submit the inflow calculations to the Engineer for approval based on the proposed
irrigation rates.
a. Perforated Pipes Surround and Backfill

Granular surround shall be free draining, hard, clean, chemically stable, crushed aggregate free of agglomerated
particles with 20mm nominal size for all pipes diameters, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
Suitable material placed above the pipe surround for general trench backfill (not within paved roadways or paved
parking areas) shall conform to the following requirements, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. Maximum particle size: 150mm
2. Liquid Limit: 40 Maximum
3. Plasticity index: 10 Maximum
b. Geotextile Fabric
Geotextile fabric for granular surround of non-perforated pipe shall comply with the requirements of Table 13-36 unless
Table 13-36 Geotextile fabric standards
Geotextile Fabric for Granular Pipe

Standard Limits Units
Surround
EN ISO 10319 or
Tensile strength (strip test) Min 6 KN/m
ASTM D5035
Puncture resistance EN ISO 12236 Min 1000 N
Pore size EN ISO 12956 Max 120 Microns
Water permeability 10cm water column EN ISO 60500-4 50 to 125 L/m²/Sec
Weight EN 965 Min 130 G/m²
The fabric shall be woven or non-woven consisting of long chain synthetic polymeric filaments or yarns formed in to a
stable net work such that the filaments or yarns retain their relative position to each other when subjected to the
proposed use within the limits of physical characteristics required as specified herein.
The geotextile fabric shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals in the soil and water and shall contain an ultra
violet light inhibitor.
The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a certificate stating the name of manufacturer, product name, style
number, chemical composition of filaments or yarns and other pertinent information to fully describe the geotextile.
Geotextile fabric shall be subject to sampling and testing to verify conformance to the specification.
1. The frequency of the testing shall be as directed by the Engineer.
2. All samples shall be collected and tested in the presence of Engineer in a laboratory approved by the
Engineer.
Each geotextile fabric roll shall be wrapped with a material that will protect the geotextile fabric from damage due to
shipment, water, sunlight and contaminants. The wrapping shall be maintained during shipment and storage.
Geotextile fabric shall be transported and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. For
additional specifications and requirements on the subsurface drainage refer to Chapter 12 “Stormwater Drainage” of
13.3.2.21 Irrigation Central Control System

The central control station shall be available to satisfy the system requirements and shall be user friendly. The central
computer shall communicate with the field controller’s directly. Central control and monitoring program shall use a
strong protocol to exchange. This communication shall be direct real time. The control software shall be year 2012
Page 13-106
compliant. The central control software shall allow remote access from different locations by means of cellular and/or
dial-up telephone line for control and monitoring. Central controller software shall be easy to use and utilises
pointer mouse and single screen user programming functionality. That is, user definable selections for each area of
operation are performed on a single “at-a-glance” windows screen. The software screens mimic the user screens on the
touch screen panel of each controller. The central control system software shall have the following minimum
capabilities:
1. Support more than one project.
2. True windows user interface.
3. Allows printing of any report.
4. Allows uploading of data and programs from field units.
5. Supports moisture sensors.
6. Paging facility shall be supported and engineered by the system manufacturer, sending alphanumeric messages.
7. Flow prediction to analyze the demand on the hydraulic design.
8. Complete flow management by enabling flow sensor.
9. Water network protection.
10. Effective water management using ET sensors.
11. Sensor measurements.
12. Comprehensive and user friendly irrigation programming screens. (Time based, quantity based and irrigation
depth).
13. Define multiple crop type and adjust water factor for each type.
14. Off-line programming for field units.
a. Cellular Site Systems

A remote site interface may be connected via an optional cellular modem and shall comply with the following:
1. The optional cellular modem kit shall be installed into the site interface and shall be assigned its own cellular
telephone number.
2. The cellular modem kit shall be approved by Etisalat and shall be connected via an integral 40-pin connector to
an existing plug in the site interface.
3. The cellular modem shall be powered at all times by the interface and shall not contain nor require batteries of
any kind.
4. The cellular modem kit shall include an internal antenna with an optional connection for external antennas if
needed.
5. The cellular modem shall be available for existing GSM cellular systems.
6. The cellular modem kit shall be compatible and shall be able to coexist, within the site interface, with hardwire
to local controller interfaces.
b. Electrical Surge Protection and Grounding

Surge protection shall meet the requirements of IEEE 472-1974.
The central control system shall have a surge protection unit (SPU) to protect components from electrical surges,
to be installed on the external wall of the computer room and to be grounded as instructed in the technical data sheet.
Approved grounding of the SPU, shall be provided for lightning/ electrical surges with 8’ grounding copper rods as per
Abu Dhabi Water & Electricity Authority (ADEWA) regulations.
13.3.2.22 Sensors, Controllers and Decoders

a. Evapotranspiration (ET) Sensor
The ET sensor shall be compatible with the Irrigation Central Control System and automatically provide data to
the central computer to analyse the current irrigation requirements for optimal water management. The ET sensor
shall automatically monitor meteorological conditions that affect water consumption. The central computer shall
Page 13-107
calculate ET by the modified Penman equation from the meteorological inputs (excluding wind direction), and then
adjusts the irrigation schedule of each program.
b. Field Controller
The central control system shall be responsible for the monitoring of the equipment’s under contract scope of work
and override local control with manual commands locally from controller or central. All these controllers shall be field
programmable. The controllers shall be intelligent device, modular and expendable units and capable of processing
local control. It shall control and monitor the pumps, valves and flow sensors connected to it.
The controller shall be smart and have the intelligence to accumulate data and make decisions locally. Comprehensive
standard application development and diagnostic program shall be used for programming the controller locally or
remotely. The irrigation central control system shall use a solid communication protocol allowing real time, two-way
direct communication with the central system and controller.
Central controllers shall contain full data processing, program intelligence and communication capability and do
not require added hardware or modification to “link” field controllers to the central base. The basic central system
architecture communicates to and from the base PC via point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, point-to-point repeater
or point-to-multipoint repeater with total functionality being available in each standard controller unit. A multitude
of communication options exist that minimize cost yet increase range potential.
The controller shall be installed in a weatherproof enclosure equivalent to 1P55 standards. The controller shall
have solid-state design utilising touch screen/ liquid screen display. The processor module (CPU) shall be real time
process controller and shall support the data transfer with I/O modules, system memory allocation, and communication
port protocol. The CPU shall have 2 nos. of 9 DB communication port for allowing LAN capabilities. The controller
shall be supplied with required number of Input/ Output points and shall include the following minimum configuration:
1. Mother board.
2. Input /Output (I/O) modules or boards.
3. Power supply.
4. Radio communication interface.
5. Combination of radio, telephone & hardwire board.
The field controller shall have independent control over each station start time (up to eight), duration of watering
(maximum 99 hours, 59 minutes, 59 seconds), days of operation and cycle length (1 to 30 days), exempt station
operation by day of week or by date. .A “mimic” function shall provide the ability to copy station timing to any
other station. The controller must operate at ambient temperature range of 30 to 60 deg C with relative and humidity
up to 95 %. The Controller shall carry irrigation programs with the following minimum capabilities and requirements
per irrigation main line:
1. Control irrigation system based on time and quantity.
2. Initiate alarms based on high flow, low flow, main line leak.
3. Flexible programming to change valve set combinations.
4. Possibility to create programs based on conditions.
5. Run/ stop main line.
6. Local or host control may be initiated at the keypad along with satellite address.
7. Universal water budget may be modified from 1% to 300% in one percent steps.
8. Individual station programs or all programming may be erased through a two-step process.
9. A security code can be entered allowing only authorised access to programming functions.
10. Four windows of irrigation for more flexible operation.
c. Decoders
In case of use of two-wire decoder control a minimum of 50 decoder addresses expandable in modules. The control
shall be via a plug-in decoder output module. The decoder output module shall be field-installable without tools, and
only a screwdriver to make the two-wire path connections.
1. The controller shall have internal 120/230 VAC transformer of at least 120 volt – any capacity.
Page 13-108
2. The decoder output module shall in no way reduce the range of features or programming capabilities of the
standard field controller.
3. The decoders may be wired in sequence over any combination of the two-wire paths, including all stations on a
at least single two-wire path. The path shall have the ability to extend up to 10,000 ft./3km to the end of the
wire run over 14 AWG wire, or 15,000 ft./4.5km over 12 AWG
4. The wire path shall be twisted pair, solid-core, color-coded with each conductor in a polyethylene jacket
suitable for direct burial.
5. The two-wire paths may be spliced, or “teed”, permitting extensions of the path in multiple directions. In
general, the distance from the controller to the end of any one end of a “tee” or wire run shall not exceed the
maximum for the gauge of wire, even if the total of all wire exceeds that number.
6. The decoder output module shall have a port for programming station addresses directly into each field
decoder, and shall not require the use of serial numbers. Each decoder shall have one or more (in the case of
multiple output decoders) station addresses programmed at the controller location and the station number shall
be noted on the side of the decoder prior to installing in the valve box.
7. Any single-station decoder output station shall have the optional capability to be designated as a Pump/Master
Valve for programming purposes, and the controller’s ability to operate two P/MV outputs by station may be
divided in any way between direct P/MV connections from the controller’s Master Module, and designated in-
line decoder outputs.
8. The decoder output module shall feature diagnostic status LEDs indicating line status, faults, active decoders
(stations running) and active communications on the two-wire paths. The decoder output module shall use the
existing controller transformer for power output, and shall be capable of running minimum of 10 irrigation
valves and 1 non irrigation valves simultaneously. The decoder output module shall include heavy-duty spark
gap surge suppression as a standard feature, with a rating of not less than 90 Volts, 5 kiloAmps (kA).
9. The decoder output module shall require acknowledgement from each decoder when stations are activated, and
shall permit two-way communications on the wire path. Each decoder shall confirm each station activation, or
the controller shall indicate a failure, whenever a station is turned on.
10. All connections in the two-wire paths (outside the controller enclosure) shall be made with water proof wire
connectors. All connections, tees, and splices shall be positioned in valve boxes for future location and service.
11. Maximum distance from decoder output to solenoid under normal conditions shall be 100 ft./33m. Wire runs
between decoder output and solenoid shall be twisted wire when in excess of 20 ft./7m, to assist in surge
protection.
12. The decoder controller shall be UL listed.
d. Moisture Sensors
Moisture sensors (up to eight) shall be connected to the satellite via a two wire path or use existing valve wires (one
sensor per path) and shall automatically modify or skip any station. The user shall be able to assign any station to any
sensor. The controller shall have local override capability.
e. Flow Meters
Flow meters (up to two) shall automatically shut down and bypass any station in the event of a flow variance (either
excess or sub normal as defined by the user). The satellite shall shut down the master valve in the event that flow
variance cannot be corrected by an individual station shut down. Controller shall have local override capability.
f. Other Sensors
Other types of sensing (up to eight) such as rain, wind speed and direction, temperature, evapotranspiration/ humidity,
etc. shall be connected to the satellite via a two wire path (one sensor per path) and shall automatically modify or skip
any station. The user shall be able to assign any station to any sensor. The controller shall have local override capability.
The controller shall have the ability to automatically calculate and adjust watering times based on evapotranspiration.
The controller shall be able to detect leaks and report to the main controller and shut the system if the leak is
continuous. The central controller shall display projected flow by program using graphics. The graph will calculate
and display the maximum instantaneous flow as well as the total volume. Maximum flow and volume will be
displayed in user-selected units. Graphs may be displayed for a flow source, for all selected programs or for an
individual field controller.
Page 13-109
13.3.2.23 Irrigation Ducts and Protection Slabs

Irrigation ducts and protection slabs shall be installed per the following requirements:
1. All irrigation lines installed under existing or proposed pavement areas shall be installed in concrete encased
ducts. Contingency ducts for future irrigation lines shall also be installed where shown on the Contract Plans.
2. Locations and sizes of irrigation ducts (pipe sleeves as otherwise may be described in the Contract Plans or
BOQ) shall be as shown on the Contract Plans.
3. Irrigation ducts, shall be placed prior to or during construction of the vehicular and pedestrian pavement.
4. Any piping installed after completion of the pavement construction or in areas where existing pavement is to
remain, shall only be placed by first jacking a pipe sleeve under the roadway. Jacked pipe sleeves shall be
heavy duty wall thickness, designed to handle both the upper traffic loads and jacking loads. Pipe sleeve
installation by jacking shall be done in accordance with Chapter 11.
5. Irrigation ducts shall be new, either uPVC or GRP pipe, concrete encased, meeting the requirements in Section
13.3.2.2.
Reinforced concrete protection slabs for new and existing irrigation pipelines (both supply and distribution pipelines)
where under temporary traffic detours or construction equipment crossing areas and for existing irrigation pipelines to
remain under new pavement shall be installed per the following requirements:
1. Irrigation pipelines under traffic areas shall be protected with either split concrete encased ducts (as otherwise
specified herein) or reinforced concrete protection slabs.
2. Temporary protection ducts and slabs shall be removed after the temporary traffic route is finished, unless
3. Reinforced concrete protection slabs shall meet the following requirements:
a) Protection slabs shall be Class C25 concrete and reinforced as shown on the Contract Plans or approved
by the Engineer
b) Protection slabs shall be of size and placement as shown on the Contract Plans or as otherwise approved
by the Engineer. Otherwise, the slabs shall be long enough that each end extends a minimum of 300 mm
on each edge of the irrigation pipeline trench, resting on undisturbed soil.
c) Reinforcement shall be designed to support worst case dead and live loads assuming unsupported length
over the width of the original pipeline trench with end bearing on undisturbed soil. Where reinforcement
design is not shown on the Contract Plans, or for specific protection needs, Contractor shall prepare the
reinforcement design and submit to the Engineer for approval prior to placement of the protection slabs
d) Protection slabs shall be placed a minimum of 150mm and a maximum of 600mm above the top surface of
the irrigation pipeline, laid edge to edge and backfilled with load-bearing backfill as otherwise stipulated
in the applicable clauses of Section 2.5.3, Construction requirements.
13.3.2.24 Subsurface Irrigation Equipment

The following subsurface irrigation equipment shall be used under turf grass or shrub and groundcover areas.
Subsurface irrigation systems are innovative irrigation methods and materials differs widely according to the
manufacturers, therefore the selected subsurface irrigation shall:
1. Efficiently convey and distribute irrigation water to the subsurface point of application without causing
excessive water loss or water/soil quality destruction.
2. Suitable for the site conditions and soil type.
3. Control the water table by subsurface drainage if needed to provide sufficient aeration to the root zone.
4. Address root intrusion and poor capillary action of the soil without the use of chemicals or harmful metal
residue.
a. Porous Pipes
Porous pipes shall meet the following requirements:
1. Suitable for the ambient and service conditions and Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE) quality.
2. Manufactured from recycled materials to ISO9001 standards.
Page 13-110
3. Compatible with barbed fittings dimensions and conventional 12.7 mm hosepipe fittings.
4. Minimum leak rate shall be 3 litre/m/hr at a minimum pressure 1.5 Bar.
5. Inside/outside diameters shall be 16/22mm.
6. Watering rate shall be 4-8 litre/m/hr at a working pressure of 2.0 Bar.
7. Shall give even application along individual run lengths.
b. Subsurface drip irrigation tubes

Subsurface drip irrigation tubes shall meet the following requirements:
1. Emitters shall be protected from root intrusion. Polypropylene fleece (sleeve) shall cover the subsurface drip
lines to provide an even distribution and root intrusion control.
2. Shall be able to operate in a wide pressure range of 0.5 to 4 Bar.
3. Flow rate shall not be less than 2 LPH.
4. Drip tube polyethylene material and the sleeve material shall withstand a water temperature up to 38° C and
ambient temperature up to 52° C.
5. Control valve shall be equipped with an inline Y filter with 120 mesh.
6. Inside/outside diameter shall be 12/16mm.
c. Drip line blankets

Drip line blankets shall meet the following requirements:
1. Blankets shall evenly disperse water uniformly throughout the target area and be suitable for freely draining
soils and engineered growing media.
2. Blankets shall be polypropylene and shall be used for turf and shrubs with root zones not exceeding 30cm.
3. Drip lines with 17mm outside diameter shall be inserted through the blanket, with a 30cm spacing, and with a
pressure compensating emitter flow rate not less than 2 LPH.
4. The outside diameter of the enveloped pipe shall be not less than 35 cm.
5. The water holding capacity per square meter of the blanket shall be 4 litres.
6. Working pressure range shall be 1 to 4 Bar.
13.3.3 Execution
13.3.3.1 Design Criteria
a. Watering Requirements
The Contractor shall calculate the actual maximum water demands based on the planted softscape material. The
Contractor shall also prepare the irrigation schedule, station run time, and demonstrate the seasonal change in water
requirements on the water demand by programming the field controllers to cater for the seasonal changes.
Contractor shall demonstrate that the average landscape irrigation requirement in aggregate shall not require more than
1.5 l/ m / day.
2
Irrigation demand estimated based on an average annual rate applying Estidama standards to public realm areas as
follows:
1. All public parks landscaping in aggregate does not require more than 10 l/m2/day;
2. All streetscape landscaping in aggregate does not require more than 7 l/m2/day;
b. Irrigation Devices
Table 13-37 provides the preferred irrigation devices per plant type.
Page 13-111
Table 13-37 Preferred irrigation devices
Optional Subsurface Drip Irrigation

Plant Type Preferred Irrigation Device
System*
Buried in-line drip system or sandwiched
Turf/lawn – small areas Low or flat angle spray head/rotors
in-line drip system
Buried in-line drip system or sandwiched
Turf/lawn – large areas Above ground rotor-driven sprinklers
in-line drip system
Buried in-line drip system or buried porous
Ground covers Pressure compensated in-line drippers
pipe system
For hedges only: Buried in-line drip
Shrub beds – small shrubs Pressure compensated in-line drippers
system or buried porous pipe system
Individual pressure compensated For hedges only: Buried in-line drip
Shrub beds – large shrubs
bubbler/dripper emitters system or buried porous pipe system
Individual pressure compensated
Palms/trees Subsurface drip irrigation is not allowed
bubbler/dripper emitters
* Refer to DoT’s A13 Road Landscaping Manual for additional information on subsurface irrigation systems
13.3.3.2 Installation Procedure

The Contractor shall carry out the works according to the following sequence or as agreed with the Engineer.
1. Layout of pipe line route and end valve locations.
2. Trenching and sand bedding.
3. Installation of mains, sub main and control valve take offs.
4. Installation of isolation valves.
5. Pipe pressure testing for main and sub main.
6. Installation of manifolds and laterals.
7. Backfilling.
8. Lateral pipes system leak test.
9. Installation of electric remote control solenoid valves.
10. Flushing of the system.
11. Installation of irrigation heads.
12. Installation of controllers.
13. Final testing and commissioning.
13.3.3.3 Layout
Contractor shall stake the distribution system layout based on the Contract Plans for the Engineers review and approval
prior to the start of installation work. Contractor shall identify the staking of any sections that have been revised from
the design layout, for specific review and approval by the Engineer.
13.3.3.4 Excavation
Contractor shall comply with the following for trenching work:
1. Prior to trenching all services crossing or running close to the line of the trench shall be identified and exposed.
In addition the line of the trench shall be swept using an approved detection device, capable of detecting both
live and “dead” cables.
2. All irrigation distribution pipelines shall be at a depth as shown in the Contract Plans, or as otherwise
specified, or a minimum of 450mm below finished grade measured from the bottom of the pipe or as shown in
the Contract Plans.
Page 13-112
3. All irrigation pipes to be constructed under pavement shall be placed in a duct meeting the requirements of
Section 13.3.2.2.e. Where the pipe must be placed under existing pavement to remain, the duct shall be
installed by a method of pipe jacking in accordance with Section 11.1.6.2. All ducts shall extend a minimum of
300mm beyond the limits of sidewalks and pavement. Existing irrigation pipes to remain under new project
traffic pavement shall be encased in split ducts, concrete encased, in accordance with Section 13.3.2.23.
4. Where possible, mains and laterals or section piping shall be placed in the same trench. All lines shall be
placed a minimum of 1.0m from the edge of concrete sidewalks, curbs, guardrail, walls, fences, or traffic
barriers.
5. Mainlines and lateral lines shall be defined as follows:
a. Mainlines: All supply pipe and fittings between the supply pipeline, reservoir or supply mains connection
and the irrigation control valves.
b. Lateral Lines: All supply pipe and fittings between the irrigation control valves and the connections to the
irrigation heads.
c. Swing joints, thick walled poly pipe, flexible risers, rigid pipe risers, and associated fittings are not
considered part of the lateral line but incidental components of the irrigation heads.
d. Pipe pulling will not be allowed for installation and placement of irrigation pipes.
6. Trenches:
a. Trenches shall be made as narrow as practicable, but not less than the pipe diameter plus 300mm, and
shall provide sufficient room for laying, jointing and testing.
b. Width of the trench at the crown of the pipe shall not exceed the pipe diameter plus 600mm.
c. Sheeting, bracing and shoring shall be used to provide for the safety of all personnel for all trenches.
d. Trench bottom shall be composed of stable uniform sand with no protuberances that might cause point
loading of the pipe.
e. Trench formation shall be trimmed to an even finish which will provide continuous support for the pipe.
f. Additional excavation shall be carried out at the position of the pipe socket to ensure proper joint
assembly and pipe support.
g. If the existing formation is unsuitable for pipe laying, pipes shall be laid on a bed of imported sand
100mm thick (minimum). This sand may be sourced from sieved excavated material, but shall not contain
any particles larger than 5.0mm, and shall have good self-compacting properties.
h. De-watering shall be provided (if necessary) to remove any surface or ground water entering the
excavations.
i. Ground water level shall be maintained at least 300mm below the bottom of each excavation.
j. Trench shall not be excavated more than three (3) days prior to pipe laying.
7. Mainline and control cables will be allowed to be laid in the same trench with a lateral line but shall be laid at
different levels.
8. Contractor shall exercise care when excavating trenches near existing trees to minimise damage to tree roots.
Where roots are 50mm and greater in diameter, except in the direct path of the pipe, the pipe trench shall be
hand excavated and tunnelled.
9. When large roots are exposed, they shall be wrapped with heavy burlap for protection and to prevent excessive
drying.
10. Trenches dug by machines adjacent to trees having roots less than 50mm in diameter shall have the sides hand
trimmed making a clean cut of the roots.
11. Trenches having exposed tree roots shall be backfilled within 24-hours unless adequately protected by moist
burlap or canvas as approved by the Engineer.
13.3.3.5 Backfilling
Contractor shall comply with the following for backfilling work:
1. Initial backfill shall be by hand in 300mm lifts and carried in such a manner to ensure adequate support under
the pipe and distributed evenly to ensure there are no voids under or to the sides of the pipe.
Page 13-113
2. For pipe sizes of 90mm diameter and below, backfill material shall be clean sand and shall not contain any
particles larger than 5mm.
3. Backfill shall be placed in 300mm lifts and consolidated without mechanical compaction by flooding the
trench with irrigation water.
4. For pipe sizes 110mm diameter and above, backfill material shall be deposited in 300mm lifts in general
areas and compacted to 90% (by water tamping or by any other approved method). In paved areas lifts shall
be 150mm and backfill shall be compacted.
5. Mechanical compactors shall not be used until there is a minimum of 300mm above the crown of the pipe.
6. Backfill material shall be sand and shall not contain any particles larger than 25mm for the first 100mm
above the pipe, thereafter backfill material shall contain no particles larger than 50mm.
7. Whenever ambient temperatures exceed 35° C, centre loading for PVC pipes greater than 90mm shall only be
carried out in the early morning or shall alternatively be preceded by cooling of the pipe string by
application of water.
13.3.3.6 uPVC Pipe Installations

uPVC pipe installation shall meet the requirements of applicable sections of Chapter 11, and the following additional
items:
1. Threaded uPVC joints shall be assembled using Teflon tape as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
2. Spigot ends of all pipes shall be chamfered to a depth of half the wall thickness at an angle of 15 degree.
3. Pipes cut on site should be cut square to the pipe axis with a fine-toothed saw. All swarf and burrs should be
removed from the pipe prior to assembly of joints. Pipe cutters may be used for 32mm pipe and smaller.
4. Spigot insertion depth shall be measured and marked on all pipes larger than 76 mm using indelible ink to
allow checking at a later date.
5. Ring Joints shall be made using an approved non-ionic lubricant compatible with the sealing ring. Pipes sized
up to 225mm may be jointed using a crowbar and a timber protection piece. Joints larger than 225mm shall be
assembled using a clamped lever device. Before backfilling, joints shall be checked to ensure that the spigot is
inserted at least 90% of the socket depth.
6. Solvent welding of uPVC joints shall be carried out by experienced fitters who fully understand the technique
and have successfully made a solvent weld joint in the presence of and to the approval of the Engineer. Helpers
brought up on site may only be allowed to make solvent joints after inspection of their technique by the
Engineer
7. All fitters involved in solvent cement jointing shall be provided with safety gloves that prevent solvent
touching the skin and safety glasses. Gloves shall be kept in good condition and shall be replaced periodically
8. Solvent welding of uPVC joints shall not be carried out in windy conditions (wind speeds greater than 18
km/hr).
9. Solvent welded joints made on pipe 90mm and above shall be proceeded by lightly abrading both surfaces to
be jointed using a medium glass paper or clean emery cloth. Solvent “cleaner” (colour) shall be applied to all
mating surfaces using a dauber or brush (application using rags will not be allowed). After ensuring that the
mating surfaces are clean and dry, solvent cement shall be applied in sufficient quantities to ensure good
bonding but not in excessive quantities that will leave appreciable residues inside the pipe.
10. Brush size shall be 3/8” round for 32mm pipes; 1” flat for 50mm and 2” flat for larger pipes.
11. Solvent cement should be applied by two people simultaneously for pipe 76mm and above. Immediately after
application of the solvent cement the pipes shall be pushed together in a smooth continuous motion that
ensures that the spigot is at least 90% inserted in to the socket. The joint shall be held for a minimum of 20
seconds after insertion and then surplus cement shall be cleaned from the outside of the pipe using a rag or
paper. Solvent cement and cleaner shall be provided in tins with brush or dauber fixed to the lid of tin. The
lids shall be firmly closed at all times except during application. Any tins of solvent cement that become
viscous or harden shall be discarded.
12. Brushes on which the solvent cement has hardened must be discarded. All fitters involved in solvent cement
jointing shall be provided with safety gloves that prevent solvent touching the skin. The gloves shall be kept in
good condition and shall be replaced periodically.
Page 13-114
13. Jointing shall not be carried out in windy conditions (wind speeds greater than 18km/hour).
14. Where direction of flow is apparent the pipes shall be laid so that the flow is from spigot to socket.
15. Because of high coefficient of linear expansion of uPVC, the pipes shall be allowed to cool to within 10° C of
the ambient temperature at the shaded bottom of the trench before back filling commences.
16. Where uPVC pipes are to be partially encased in concrete, they shall first be wrapped in compressible material
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
17. Where manifolds and laterals pass under roads or paved areas and through foundations and walls they shall be
in ducts.
18. Junctions shall be formed using 90-degree tees only. Not more than two tees shall be connected in line barrel
to barrel. If third tee is required on the same line it must be separated from the first two by a pipe not less than
2.0m long.
19. When a pipeline is complete or when construction is delayed, the open ends shall be stopped or sealed off until
the pipeline is required to operate or work recommences. Care shall be taken that the system does not become
silted up.
20. At each point where pipeline is temporarily terminated, temporary end caps shall be used and a marker shall be
attached to the end of the pipeline and fixed at ground level.
21. On plastic to metal connections, work the metal connection first. Use a non-hardening compound on threaded
connections. Connections between metal and plastic are to be threaded utilizing female threaded uPVC
adapters with threaded schedule 80-PVC nipple only.
a. Pipe Laying on a Granular Bed

Pipe installation on a granular bed shall comply with the following:
1. Granular material shall be laid to a minimum thickness of 100mm on the trench floor and shall extend to the
full width of the trench.
2. Pipes shall be laid with the sockets upstream directly on the granular bed, which shall be adjusted to ensure
exact line and level uniform bearing.
3. Pipes shall rest evenly on the granular bed for the full length of packing such as timber, bricks or stones.
Socket holes, where needed, shall be short as practicable and shall be scraped in the granular bed deep enough
to prevent the socket from bearing on the bottom. Socket holes shall be repacked after pipe laying.
4. Adjustments to the level of the pipes shall be by raising or lowering the granular bedding. The pipes shall rest
evenly on the adjusted bedding throughout the length of their barrels. Adjustments shall never be made by
local packing.
b. Pipe Laying on Natural Formation

Pipe installation on a natural formation shall comply with the following:
1. Where shown in the Contract Plans and when approved by the Engineer the ground shall be allowed to be
formed and trimmed so as to provide a uniform solid bearing trench, pipes shall be laid upon the
formation.
2. Socket and joint holes where needed, shall be as short as practicable and shall be scraped or cut in
the foundation, deep enough to give a minimum clearance of 50mm between the socket and the formation.
3. If the formations inadvertently are low at any point, it shall be brought up to the correct level, and care shall
be taken to ensure uniformity of pipe support. Pipes shall rest evenly on the formation throughout the
length of the barrels. Adjustment shall never be made by local packing.
13.3.3.7 Polyethylene Pipe Installations

Polyethylene pipe installation shall meet the requirements of applicable sections of Chapter 11, and the following
additional items:
1. Polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Ends of the polyethylene pipe shall be cut square and inserted to the full depth of the fitting.
3. Clamps for insert fittings shall be stainless steel.
Page 13-115
4. The pipes shall be bedded on good dry approved bedding material free of lumps or stone chippings. If the
material in the trench bottom is considered unsuitable or unstable, it shall be removed to a depth of 100 mm
and the bottom of the trench shall be filled with a 100 mm layer of suitable approved fill material. All bedding
material shall be subject to prior approval of the Engineer.
5. Wherever practical, mechanical excavation methods shall be used, except where such methods may cause
damage to existing structures, services, ruins or relics. In such locations, the contractor shall use hand methods
only.
6. Where shoring is used to stabilize excavations, the shoring shall be removed progressively to ensure that
adequate backfilling is carried out without leaving voids. All excavated material shall be placed so as to avoid
any danger or hindrance to others.
7. All pipes, fittings, valves etc., shall be carefully lowered into the trench with suitable equipment in a manner
that will prevent damage. All foreign matter shall be removed from inside the pipe or fitting before being
lowered into position.
8. The minimum bend radius for the installation of polyethylene pipes shall be 15 times the outside diameter of
the pipe (15xOD). In conditions where it is not feasible to bend 15xOD, the Contractor shall consultant with
the manufacturer before finalising bend radius. When a joint falls within the pipe bend section, the minimum
radius shall be 25 times the outside diameter (25xOD).
9. At the close of a day or whenever pipe laying is not in progress the open ends of the installed pipe shall be
closed by an approved cap or blank to prevent the entrance of ground water or any other foreign matter. Under
no circumstances shall pipes be used for the storage of tools etc.
10. Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the pipeline is clear and free of all foreign matter at all times until
final handover (refer to Section 13.1.4.4.n for additional information).
11. Sufficient backfill shall be placed on the pipe to prevent floatation. Any pipe that has floated shall be removed
from the trench and re-laid in a dry trench.
12. Additional excavations shall be carried out to provide extra space around couplings. These shall be large
enough to allow unhindered jointing of the pipes.
13. All pipes shall be laid and maintained to the agreed alignment and grade ensuring that the pipe is properly
bedded along its whole length. Fittings and valves shall be at the required locations. No deviation shall be
made from the agreed alignment or grade except with the written consent of the Engineer.
14. Approved backfill material free from clay, rocks and other unacceptable material shall be compacted by means
of hand tools around the pipe up to 30cm above top of pipe in layers of not more than 20cm. If in the opinion
of the Engineer the materials excavated from the trench are not suitable for this purpose, the Contractor shall
supply suitable materials, to be approved by the Engineer.
15. The materials shall be made damp, if necessary, to attain adequate compaction around and under the pipes and
fittings. The balance of the backfill to the final ground level shall contain no stones more than 15cm in their
largest dimension, and shall not contain more than 25 percent of stones. All backfill shall be compacted in a
manner approved by the Engineer. The trenches or any other excavation shall only be backfilled using
approved fill, and shall not be used for dumping unwanted excavated material, which should be disposed of
away from the site as directed by the Engineer. Any depressions caused by settlements due to trench
excavations and backfilling shall be made good by the Contractor using approved fill material.
a. Butt Fusion Welding Principles and Procedures

Buff fusion welding shall comply with the following:
1. Machining: Pipe ends shall be machined so that the surfaces to be welded are totally clean, free from ridges
and are square to each other.
2. Bead Up: Pressing pipe against a hot plate which is thermostatically controlled causes a melt to form and any
minor irregularities in surfaces and squareness can be eliminated by pressing until an even bead of melt forms
around the circumference.
3. ‘Soaking’: Relieving the pressure against the plate stops melt being forced from the heated zone. (If the pipe is
kept just in contact with the plate then a molten region is formed a short distance along the pipe barrel).
4. Plate removal: 'Snapping' the pipe from the surface of the plate by swift application of reverse pressure on the
hydraulic rams on machine allows the heater plate to be removed. Reversal of pressure then allows the two
surfaces to be brought into contact and for a weld to form.
Page 13-116
5. Fusion: Application of pressure causes the molten surfaces to be forced together. The melt is pressurised and
the surface regions are squeezed out from the joint region. When it emerges from the interface and melts it
has no stiffness and so folds back on itself to form a bead.
6. Cooling: Following bead formation, the molten interface cools relatively rapidly and eventually solidifies. It
has been the convention to maintain pressure during cooling and to then wait until the weld has cooled
sufficiently to regain sufficient strength and before allowing the pipe to be removed from the welding machine.
7. Contractor shall exercise care and control over the welding equipment, the cycle itself and the environment in
which welding is carried out.
8. Contractor shall provide qualified welders and shall be subject to annual welder qualification tests. The
acceptance criteria shall be as in DVS 2203.
9. Where circumstances dictate that the drag is unavoidably high, great care shall be taken with pressure control,
especially when using dual pressure conditions.
10. Contractor shall control dust contamination by carrying out all welding in a simple protective shelter. The
floor shall be covered by tarpaulin (or similar) if the ground is dusty.
11. Ensure the heater plate is fully clean by making a dummy weld every time the plate has been allowed to cool.
12. Following cooling, the surfaces shall be re-trimmed to allow production welding to begin. Alternatively a
scrap piece of pipe may be used and then discarded.
13. For thick walled pipes (wall thickness > 20mm), two dummy welds shall be made. The weld shall remain
clamped until all re-solidification has taken place. The cooling time shall be such that no significant axial
stress is placed on the weld until it has reached 800° C. Guidance on cooling time shall be per the pipe
manufacturer.
b. Welding Equipment
All welding equipment shall be regularly maintained and comply with the following:
1. The clamps shall be effective in holding the pipe square.
2. The trimmer shall be square and have power in reverse to ensure a clean cut.
3. The heater plate shall have a control system capable of maintaining a uniform temperature over the area in
contact with the pipe.
4. The hydraulic system shall be effective and a gauge must be attached which can accurately resolve pressures to
be used.
5. Pipe shall be supported on well-maintained rollers. This should ensure that the 'drag' pressure needed to
overcome friction is minimised. The drag pressure shall always be less than the fusion pressure.
13.3.3.8 Steel Pipe Installations

Steel pipe installation shall meet the requirements of applicable sections of Chapter 11, and the following additional
items:
1. All galvanised steel pipe shall have sound, clean cut, standard pipe threads well fitted. All pipes shall be
reamed to the full diameter and burrs removed before assembly.
2. Threaded galvanised steel joints shall be constructed using either a non-hardening, non-seizing multipurpose
sealant or Teflon tape or paste as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
3. All steel pipe threaded joints shall be made tight with wrenches without the use of handle extensions.
4. Steel pipe joints that leak shall be cleaned and remade with new material. Caulking or thread cement to make
joints tight will not be permitted.
13.3.3.9 Thrust Blocks and Anchors

Installation of thrust blocks and anchors shall meet the following requirements:
1. For all main and lateral pipes larger than 76mm, at each bend, deviation or at the end of pipeline, a thrust block
shall be provided.
2. Thrust blocks shall be installed as shown in the Contract Plans.
Page 13-117
3. Heavy duty polyethylene sheet shall be used to wrap the pipe at the point of contact between pipeline fittings
and the thrust block.
4. Calculation and design of the thrust blocks shall be done by the Contractor and to be approved by the
Engineer.
5. The metal straps and anchor bolts shall be non-corrosive, of adequate strength and dimension to prevent
movement and rubber strips shall be provide under all straps at contact surfaces.
6. Where concrete thrust blocks encase uPVC pipe a membrane of polythene film (1000 gauge) shall be used
between the concrete and the uPVC pipe.
13.3.3.10 Valves
Valve installation shall meet the following requirements:
1. Gate valves, air valves and solenoid valves shall be installed in valve boxes or chambers as shown in the
Contract Plans. Installation shall be neat and tidy. Install all valves operators, actuators and strainers in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
2. Air release valves shall have piped outlets to the nearest acceptable drain, soakaway or to a minimum 2.5m3
washed gravel pit.
3. Valve boxes and chambers shall be installed level and correctly aligned. Set valves and piping level and
plumb. Set covers on valve boxes and chambers to grade.
4. In unpaved areas, provide a 600mm square by 150mm thick concrete pad with a continuous 10mm rebar
formed around the valve box cover.
5. In paved areas, provide a rubber pad (valve box cushion) around the valve box cover in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommended procedure.
6. For valves deeper than 600mm deep, provide direct-buried valves with an operating nut valve stem extension.
Extension top to be readily available under the valve box covers. Pin the stem extension to the valve operating
nut so that it cannot be easily removed.
7. Valves on horizontal sections of pipe work shall be installed with the spindle vertical. All valves shall be
installed so as to be as accessible as possible.
8. Valve identification tags shall be wired to all valves.
13.3.3.11 Valve Chambers and Boxes

Valve boxes shall be bedded in cement sand mortar on a concrete or concrete block chamber and shall be flush with the
surrounding surface. Block chambers shall have in-situ concrete bases to the Engineer requirements. Blocks shall be
laid in stretcher bond. Beds and vertical joints shall be completely filled with mortar as the blocks are laid and joints
shall be flush cut as the work proceeds. Valve boxes shall, if necessary, be re-set to the correct position and level if
any settlement occurs.
13.3.3.12 End Flushing Points

The Contractor shall install where required and as shown in the Contract Plans main line, sub main line and lateral
end flushing points consisting of a brass valve, uPVC riser and adapter, thrust block, valve box bedded on engineering
block and gravel, a flexible 1.5m length of pipe and a steel anchor with rubber padding between the uPVC pipe and
anchor.
13.3.3.13 Connections to Existing Pipelines

Connections to existing pipelines shall be made as follows:
1. At locations shown in the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall connect the new
pipelines to the existing pipelines or structures but not until the new works have passed the final tests.
2. Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors, if necessary, to join the pipes at the interface with adjoining
Projects. An end cap shall be provided at the Project limits. If the other Contractor has already laid the pipe up
to the interface, the Contractor shall remove the end cap and join the pipes but not until the new works have
passed the final tests.
Page 13-118
3. Existing mains and service pipes shall only be cut using special equipment approved by the Engineer. Cuts
shall be perpendicular to the centre line of the pipe and special care shall be taken with respect to the location
of the cut to ensure that the new pipe work may be installed.
4. Contractor shall agree with the Engineer, the exact length of existing pipe work to be removed, prior to
removal.
5. Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent any dirt or extraneous material from entering the existing
main or service pipe.
6. Engineer may put the interconnection into use as soon as possible after its installation and will carry out an
inspection to detect any evidence of leakage.
7. Any remedial work necessary to eliminate leakage shall be carried out by the Contractor.
8. No pipe work shall be covered or backfilled until the Engineer is satisfied that the interconnection is free of all
leakage and has approved the connection.
13.3.3.14 Irrigation Equipment

Irrigation equipment installation shall meet the following requirements:
1. Top of the sprinkler case shall be flush with final grade.
2. All sprinklers adjacent to kerbs and pavement shall be placed as shown in the Contract Plans with a minimum
30cm away from the edge of the pavement or kerb.
3. Shrub heads, unless otherwise specified, shall be placed on risers approximately 300mm above finished grade.
4. Final position of valve boxes, capped sleeves, and quick coupler valves shall be between 13mm and 26mm
above finished grade or mulch.
5. Drip irrigation emitters shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. Install drain valves at the lowest point of each zone in a 200mm diameter round valve box over at least 2.5m3
of washed gravel.
13.3.3.15 Electrical Installations

a. Testing
All electrical equipment shall have passed adequate routine factory tests. Field tests shall be made by qualified
personnel approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall furnish all apparatus, material, labour and facilities for performing
the required tests. Unless otherwise specified the individual electrical equipment shall undergo the following tests in
accordance with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) recommendations or other approved standards.
1. In the workshop.
a. High voltage test
b. Check on mechanical function
c. Pre-test of functional sequences
2. On site.
a. Visual inspection
b. Insulation test (megger test)
c. Check of functional sequences
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer acceptance test certificate of all tests carried out in the workshop including all
measuring data and subsequent evaluation. The following tests are to be carried out for all cables as a minimum:
1. Resistance measurement.
2. Insulation test with specified AC power frequency test voltage.
3. Insulation resistance measurement of every individual cable length at site.
4. Electrical continuity test for all controls.
The following tests shall be carried out upon completion of the earthing system:
Page 13-119
1. Measurement of the conductance of the earthing wires.

2. Measurement of the intermediate resistance of the earthing electrodes.
Contractor shall provide, at their expense, the necessary qualified personnel and measuring instruments for the above
measurements.
b. Electrical Codes
All electrical installations shall operate at a system voltage of 220 VAC, single phase, 50 cycles, unless specifically
shown otherwise. The entire works shall be carried out in strict accordance with this specification and those as issued by
the regulating authority.
c. Insulation Colour Code

Insulation colours shall be in accordance with the IEE regulations.
d. Cable Installation
1. Measure, mark off and cut all cables to length before installation or laying.
2. Temporary sealing, protection and support of cables being installed or laid, and testing of cables for insulation
before jointing or termination.
3. Prepare of all necessary materials for the placement, support or carriage of all cable runs.
4. If cables pass through foundation walls or other underground structures, the necessary ducts or openings shall
be provided in advance for the same. If it is necessary to cut holes in existing foundations or structures the
Contractor shall determine their location and obtain approval of the Engineer before cutting is done.
5. Seal cables using fire retardant cable sealing material in ducts, sleeves or trenches to prevent ingress of water.
6. Test cable insulation, phasing and continuity.
7. All outdoor terminals shall be shrouded and the termination shall be covered with heat-shrink shrouds.
8. Cable termination shall be made with proper size cable lugs. Copper strands shall not be cut to use with under
size lugs.
9. Cables in the panels, shall not be connected directly to the terminals of circuit breaker or isolators, but shall be
connected through terminal block.
10. Terminal board/ block shall be levelled and per the Contract Plans.
11. Each cable shall be tagged at the termination point, fitted over its over-sheath, providing cable number and
circuit identification.
12. Cores of control wire shall be provided with ferrules or sleeves with markings.
13. Spare cores of control or power cables shall be terminated on the terminal blocks with identification level and
tagged spare.
e. Jointing of Cable
1. Cable sealing and jointing shall be in accordance with the best current practice.
2. Cables with metal sheaths or armouring shall be terminated or jointed with metal sheaths or armouring solidly
bonded to the metal joints or terminal boxes to provide a low resistance path under fault conditions.
3. Provide joint boxes to extend existing cable to connect to the new panel. Identical type of cable shall be used
for extension.
4. Obtain Engineers approval prior to jointing on the incoming cable.
5. Length of the additional piece of cable shall not be less than 15m.
f. Cable Pulling
When cable is being laid in ground or pulled through trenches, cable pulling shall be by manual means and sufficient
wooden roller supports shall be provided over the bottom of the trench to prevent damage to cables. Cable guides shall
be used for pulling cables round a bend.
Page 13-120
g. Installation of XLPE Cable

1. A certified cable jointer shall carry out the jointing of XLPE cables.
2. Contractor shall provide evidence to the Engineer that the jointer has the relevant experience.
3. Terminal sealing of cable shall be by compound in cable boxes or by heat shrink kits.
4. Completed terminations shall be moisture proof.
5. Cable ends shall be flame warmed thoroughly to ensure all moisture is driven off the dielectric before
proceeding to jointing or terminating the cable.
6. Lead sheathed cables cut for installation, shall have the ends sealed immediately by means of a lead cap and
wiped to the sheath for air tightness, if jointing or termination is not carried out immediately.
7. Bending radii for XLPE cables shall be in accordance with IEC 502.
8. Cables shall be terminated on cable sockets/ lugs of correct size.
9. Cutting of copper strands of the conductor to suit undersized sockets is not permitted.
10. Cable entries through sleeves, ducts, floor or wall shall be sealed by tar, epoxy-resin or other water-repellent
compound, suitable for the ambient conditions.
11. Cables through floors or slabs shall be sleeved through a short section of uPVC duct, suitably bushed to
prevent abrasion to the cable.
12. Cable sheaths shall be bonded by copper earth bonding leads of appropriate size, and connected to main earth
distribution bars at the switchboards or transformers.
h. Cable Trenching
1. Cable shall be laid along the irrigation pipeline in the same trench, as far as practicable. Exact location may be
adjusted following the approval of the Engineer.
2. Cable routes shall be as straight as possible and as indicated in the Contract Plans.
3. Excavation of trenches for the cables shall be as shown in the Contract Plans.
4. Contractor shall arrange to excavate and lay the distribution cables at the appropriate time such that the cables
will not be disturbed when installing other items of work.
i. Cable Protection
Before the cables are laid, the trench shall be partly filled with clean sand, screened to remove any stones larger than
2.0mm, to a depth of 200mm. Another 200mm deep layer of similar sand shall be filled after laying the cables.
At road crossings and other places where cables enter conduits or ducts, adequate sand bed shall be provided so that the
cables do not slack or suffer damage from conduit/duct pipe ends after backfilling.
j. Cable Markers
Cable markers shall be installed over the cable route every 50m and at points of change of direction, or at the joints, if
these exist.
k. Cable Laying
1. Wiring between the automatic controller and automatic valves shall be direct burial and may share a common
neutral. Separate control conductors shall be run from the automatic controller to each valve.
2. When more than one (1) automatic controller is required, a separate common neutral shall be provided for each
controller and the automatic valve which it controls. Wire shall be installed adjacent to or beneath the
irrigation pipe.
3. Plastic tape or nylon tie wraps shall be used to bundle wires together at 3m intervals and the wire shall be
“snaked” from side to side in the trench. When necessary to run wire separate from the irrigation pipe, the wire
shall be bundled and placed under detectable marking tape.
4. When lateral pipelines have less than 450mm of cover, direct burial wire shall not be adjacent to pipes but
shall be placed at a minimum depth of 450mm.
Page 13-121
5. Wiring placed under pavement and walls, or through walls, shall be placed in ducts per the requirements of
Chapter 10, Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works.
6. Splices will be permitted only at junction boxes, valve boxes, pole bases, or at control equipment. A minimum
of 300mm of excess conductor shall be left at all splices, terminal and control valves to facilitate inspection
and future splicing.
7. All electrical conductors and conduit shall be installed by a certified electrician including all wire splices and
wire terminations.
8. For all 24-volt direct burial circuits, the continuity test, ground test, and functional test shall be performed.
Megger test confirming insulation resistance of not less than 2 megohms to ground is required. All wiring shall
be tested in accordance with Chapter 10, Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works.
13.3.3.16 Control System Installation

a. Central Control System
The central control system shall be installed in a suitable place advised by the Engineer. The Contractor shall follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation for the installation. Manufacturer’s representative shall supervise all stages of
the control system installations.
b. Field Controllers
The field controllers shall be installed at the locations shown on the approved shop drawings. Manufacturers’
representative shall supervise all stages of the control system installations. At a minimum, field controllers shall
comply with the manufacturer’s recommendation for installation and the following:
1. Controllers shall be installed onto concrete bases, control wire shall be colour coded and provided with tags.
2. Control cable shall be bundles and tied with a plastic cable tie at least every 6.0m interval.
3. Installation of cable bundles in conduits shall be carried out in such a way as to preclude the possibility of
stretching the cable without damaging the insulation.
4. All the cables splices shall be waterproof and made inside valve or conduit boxes leaving at least one metre of
spare cable neatly coiled and each joint and bend.
5. Controllers shall be individually earthed by an approved copper clad grounding rod minimum length 15mm x
3.0m driven down into the water table and connected to the controller by a brass clamp and a 4mm2 grounding
wire.
6. Decoders, encoders and terminators shall be installed in plastic valve boxes and their function and reference
number shall be clearly indicated in indelible ink.
13.3.3.17 Testing
a. Pipeline Pressure Test
All pipelines shall be tested before being brought into service. The test shall be a hydrostatic pressure test performed by
filling the pipe with water and raising the pressure to test pressure. Hydrostatic pressure testing shall meet the
following requirements:
1. Contractor shall supply all water required for testing. Availability of water is not guaranteed and if not
available the Contractor shall supply said water and all transportation required to bring it to the test site.
2. Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum of three (3) working days notice prior to testing a section of
pipe work.
3. Contractor shall ensure that each test start and end shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
4. All joints shall be left exposed until testing is completed.
5. Length of tests section shall be maximum 500m or as directed by the Engineer.
6. Pipe length to be tested may be blanked off using a blank iron or steel flange previously drilled and tapped for
test equipment connection and strutted as necessary against end thrust. The blank flanged may be attached to
the pipeline by a flange adapter or similar. Contractor shall take all steps necessary to restrain pipe ends
Page 13-122
against the developed thrust. Contractor shall submit thrust calculations detailing the restraint system for all
lines 100mm and larger.
7. Testing shall not be carried out against closed valves.
8. All charging shall be carried out from the lowest point of the under test section and all testing equipment shall
be located at this point. Pressure gauge shall also be located at the lowest point or adjustment must be made for
the level of the pressure gauge relative to the pipes location.
9. Prior to the testing care shall be taken to ensure that all anchor blocks have attained adequate maturity and that
any solvent welded joints included in the pipe system have developed full strength. Correct support and
anchorage of any above ground sections of the pipeline is also necessary.
10. Underground pipelines shall be back-filled taking particular care to consolidate around lengths which may
have been deflected to negotiate curves.
11. Pipes shall be charged slowly from the lowest point with any air cock in the open position. Air cocks shall then
be closed in sequence from the lowest point, only when discharged water becomes visibly free from aeration.
12. Following a satisfactory charge, the pipe shall be allowed to stand overnight to allow any residual air to rise
out. Re-venting is then necessary and any water deficiency shall be made up.
13. Pressure testing can then begin by pumping slowly until the pressure reaches the designate pipe pressure
rating. For mains, this pressure shall be kept for 6 hours. For laterals, this pressure shall be kept for 30 minutes.
No visible leaks or drips shall be allowed.
14. After pressure testing is complete and accepted, the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer shall then
conduct a thorough inspection of all sprinkler heads, emitters, etc. This inspection is required to ensure that
the entire irrigation system is operating properly.
b. Painting
1. Dry film thickness (DFT) of all painted valves and spool pieces shall be measured on delivery to site. DFT
shall be the average of no less than three measurements with no one measurement less than 75% of nominal
average DFT.
2. Holiday tests shall be carried out on internal and external surfaces on delivery and also on external surfaces
prior to backfilling.
c. Electrical tests
1. Each electrical equipment cable and complete system shall be thoroughly inspected and tested before finally
placing in to service.
2. All tests shall be made in compliance with respective regulations, recommendations and standards.
3. Any modifications or repairs deemed necessary upon completion of the tests shall be executed at the
Contractor’s expenses. Further tests shall be carried out on any modified or repaired equipment until it is
certified trouble free and acceptable for its intended service by the Engineer.
4. All testing shall be demonstrated to the Engineer.
5. All gauges used in the testing of water pressures shall be certified correct by an independent testing laboratory
immediately prior to use on the project. Gauges shall be retested when ordered by the Engineer.
6. Automatic controllers shall be tested by actual operation for a period of two weeks under normal operating
conditions. Should adjustments be required, the Contractor shall do so according to the manufacturer’s
direction and test until operation is satisfactory.
d. Flushing
1. All main supply lines shall receive two fully open flushings, to remove debris that may have entered the line
during construction: the first before placement of valves; the second after placement of valves and prior to
testing.
2. All lateral lines shall receive one fully open flushing prior to placement of sprinkler heads, emitters, and drain
valves. Flushing shall be of sufficient duration to remove any dirt or debris that has entered the lateral lines
during construction.
Page 13-123
13.3.3.18 Automatic System Commissioning

Before final inspection, the Contractor shall adjust and balance all sprinklers to provide adequate and uniform coverage.
Spray patterns shall be balanced by adjusting individual sprinkler heads with the adjustment screws or replacing nozzles
to produce a uniform pattern. Unless otherwise specified, sprinkler spray patterns will not be permitted on pavement,
walks, or structures.
Commissioning of fieldwork and equipment shall include all works required to bring the system into service and to
make sure that system is operating efficiently and shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Flushing all the pipelines.
2. Adjustment of valve outlet pressure +/- 10% of normal.
3. Replacing all clogged or partially clogged emitter lines, delivering less than 50% of normal flow or any emitter
overflowing by more than 50% (squirting).
4. Carrying out emission uniformity test involving at least 40 emitters on up to 10 valves as directed by the
Engineer.
5. Ensure that all valve boxes and sprayers are flush with finish grade.
6. Tests shall only be carried out after all valve pressures have been adjusted.
7. Preparing of irrigation schedules.
8. Adjusting controllers to give an optimal flow regime in accordance with the Contract Plans and as instructed by
the Engineer. Valves sequence may be modified to ensure that valves operate in a logical sequence to facilitate
maintenance operations. Irrigation cycles for sprinklers and sprayers should be programmed during nighttimes
and early morning.
13.3.3.19 Irrigation and Control System

Each particular function of the Irrigation system shall be demonstrated in accordance with an approved commissioning
procedure developed and to the requirements of the Engineer.
13.3.3.20 Irrigation Duct and Protection Slabs

Contractor shall comply with the following when installing irrigation ducts and protection slabs:
1. Concrete encased pipe or wiring ducts shall be installed as shown in the Contract Plans. All ducts shall extend
a minimum of 300mm beyond the limits of pavement.
2. Concrete encasement for ducts less than 200mm diameter shall be Class C15. Unless otherwise indicated on
the Contract Plans, the concrete encasement shall be a minimum of 200mm thick above, below and along the
length of all duct pipe, fittings and appurtenances.
3. Pipe ducts 200mm diameter and larger shall be encased in reinforced Class C25 concrete as per specific
installation details shown on the Contract Plans.
4. All concrete work shall comply with all material and installation requirements of Chapter 4.
5. All contingency ducts for future irrigation pipes shall have the ends sealed with tight fitting caps.
6. For existing irrigation pipes or electrical wiring to remain, under new pedestrian or vehicular pavement, the
irrigation pipe or wire shall be sleeved using a split duct, concrete encased. Split ducts shall be installed per
the following:
a. Split ducts shall be made by jointing two pipe segments, a lower 270 degree segment and an upper 120
degree segment of identical size and specifications.
b. Pipe walls of the lower segment shall be cut on a vertical making an obtuse angle at the inner surface so as
to avoid sharp edges. Cut surface shall be smooth without any projection.
c. Lower segment shall be placed surrounding the existing irrigation pipe, with its 90 degree opening
upwards. Upper 120 degree segment shall be placed as a lid or cover to the opening of the lower segment,
with an equal overlap on either side. Overlapping portions of the pipes shall be jointed together by spot
supplying an approved glue to avoid displacement while placing concrete surround.
d. After jointing the split ducts shall be wrapped twice with polyethylene film, 152 microns thick and the
wrapping securely fastened to prevent fresh concrete from entering the ducts.
Page 13-124
e. Ducts shall be supported on suitable corrosion resistant spacers for casting the concrete surround
f. Installation of ducts shall meet the excavation and backfill requirements of Section 11.1.3, Construction
requirements, and specifically meeting the requirement of Section 11.1.3, Concrete encasement, for
concrete pipe surround.
7. After placement of the pipeline in the duct, the void between the duct and the pipelines shall be sealed to
prevent the ingress of ground water and soil. Sealing shall be done as agreed by the Engineer, but typically
will involve applying a mixture of latex grout or silicon sealer by a pressure method to completely fill the void
within the initial 200mm minimum distance of each duct end. Excavation dewatering shall be maintained and
backfilling not started until end sealer and duct concrete surround has cured.
8. Contingency ducts for future irrigation pipes and other utility lines and services shall be provided with a brass
marker plaque. Plaque shall be placed at the end of each contingency duct, on top of cast-in-place kerbs, duct
end wall, concrete barriers, or in a separate 300mm x 300mm x 150mm thick concrete slab, cast 100mm above
ground elevation or flush with adjacent pavement or kerb tops, outside the pavement edge or kerb line, as
applicable and as approved by the Engineer. Brass marker plaque shall be installed by pressing the plaque
mounting stud into the freshly cast and trowel concrete surface until the top of the plaque is flush with the
finished concrete surface.
13.3.4 Maintenance
Contractor shall maintain all irrigation for a period of 365 days after the date certified by the Engineer that the work has
been completed and has issued the substantial completion certificate. During the maintenance period the Contractor
shall carry out maintenance of the irrigation system strictly in accordance with the Irrigation system maintenance (refer
to DoT’s A13 Road Landscaping Manual for additional information) approved by the Engineer. Depending on the
scope of works the irrigation system maintenance manual should be incorporated with the landscape and hardscape
maintenance as one complete volume.
The extent of the irrigation to be maintained by the Contractor shall be deemed to cover and include all irrigation
systems within the overall project boundaries as shown on the contract drawings.
The Contractor shall carry out the following maintenance operations when necessary and as directed by the Engineer.
1. System Monitoring.
2. System Flushing.
3. Servicing of Remote Control Solenoid Valves and Components.
4. Adjustments and Cleaning.
5. Emergency Repairs.
The Contractor shall ensure that a senior qualified supervisor and planning engineer are made available for
organising and running the maintenance program. The Contractor shall also have available an experienced irrigation
technician who can supervise a team of plumbers and helpers on a day-to-day basis who would be responsible for
operation and maintenance in the downstream side. Pumping station operation and maintenance would be under the
responsibility of a separate team of operatives and maintenance staff reporting to the pumping station technician.
13.3.4.2 System Monitoring

a. General
Contractor shall comply with the following items:
1. The irrigation system shall be operated for a minimum period of 14 days by the irrigation system sub-
contractor after all system testing and adjusting to check the performance of all components and controls.
Afterwards, continued system operation and maintenance shall be provided by the Contractor until the start of
the contractual operation and maintenance period.
2. In the spring, when the drip irrigation system is in full operation, the Contractor shall make a full inspection of
all emitters. This shall involve visual inspection of each emitter under operating conditions. All adjustments,
flushings, or replacements to the system shall be made at this time to ensure the proper operation of all
emitters.
Page 13-125
3. Repair or replace broken hardware and pipes with materials that match the originals. Test all repairs. Identify
leaks and repair them promptly. Signs of leakage include particularly green spots, soggy areas around spray
heads and above ground hoses, jammed spray heads and torn hoses.
4. Shut off irrigation systems and adjust whenever irrigation water falls or runs onto hard surfaces such as
sidewalks, streets or driveways.
5. As plants mature, add or relocate system components as needed to maintain uniform distribution of water.
Ensure that system modifications do not exceed the system watering capacity.
b. System Pressure
The system pressure has to be monitored on the daily basis. The pressure drop is mainly due to leakage in the system,
which has to be attended immediately. The pressure drop in the filter needs to be checked and if the drop exceeds 0.5
bars the automatic flushing should start.
c. Irrigation Controller
Contractor shall comply with the following checklist for the controller:
1. Check the scheduled functioning of the controller.
2. Check for any faulty or tripped stations.
3. Reset automatic controllers according to the changing/seasonal needs of the plants. Irrigation systems should
be rescheduled quarterly to correct run times.
4. Program the irrigation controller for multiple start times on watering by sprayers to reduce runoff and deep
percolation below root zone. Drip systems shall not be cycled in this manner.
5. Any changes or an alteration in the controller has to be with prior approval of the Engineer.
d. Solenoid Valves, Quick Coupling Valves and Air Valves

All valves are to be monitored for efficient working during the operation of the system. Inspect the valves to see if
they operate without slamming open or closed in order to prevent damage from surges.
13.3.4.3 System Flushing

Flush valves are provided at the end of the main line if it is not a ring main design and at the end of each drip laterals.
The lines shall be flushed every three weeks to maintain the proper workings of the system.
13.3.4.4 Servicing of Remote Control Solenoid Valves and Components

Contractor shall comply with the following for servicing:
1. The downstream pressure shall be adjusted in the pressure regulator module of the solenoid valve and set to
the design pressure before starting the irrigation system.
2. The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer’s instruction for the servicing. Any part, which is faulty, has to
be replaced immediately.
3. The gate valve in the solenoid valve assembly shall be closed and opened slowly in order to avoid surge.
4. If the valve and or the valve box need to be changed, the identifying tags shall be maintained on the box and
the valve.
5. The y-strainer installed with solenoid valve shall be cleaned thoroughly every 2 months or more frequently so
as to improve the smooth working of the system.
13.3.4.5 Adjustments and Cleaning

The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for adjusting and cleaning all drip lines, emitters,
bubblers, sprayers and rotors.
13.3.4.6 Emergency Repairs

The Contractor shall be equipped with all tools and fittings to attend to the repair immediately in coordination with the
Engineer if required. If excavation is to be done, the Contractor shall comply with the following:
Page 13-126
1. The excavation area shall be demarked with warning tape.

2. The area shall be shut off using the isolation valve.
3. Care shall be taken to not damage the nearby plants and vegetation.
4. For excavating grass area, lay plastic sheet and put the excavated soil on the plastic.
5. Do not mix the topsoil with the soil of lower layers. Use separate plastic areas for topsoil and other layers if
necessary.
6. The replacing materials shall be the same as specified and used in the system. Any materials other than
specified require prior permission of the Engineer and ‘As Built’ drawings updated accordingly.
7. Proper thrust block have to be provided if required.
8. After backfilling, proper levelling has to be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
13.3.4.7 Training
At the end of the warranty period, when the system is operating properly, and all irrigation works and clean up are
completed, the Contractor shall provide training to the Owner prior to the final acceptance inspection. Training shall
comply with the following:
1. Training shall be made by the subsurface irrigation system provider (i.e., manufacturer) only.
2. For equipment and systems, the Contractor shall provide the training necessary to familiarise their staff and the
Owner’s staff with operation and maintenance procedures.
3. The Contractor shall notify the Owner to arrange a training session seven (7) days in advance of proposed
session date.
4. All expenses of training shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
13.3.4.8 Final Acceptance Inspection

At the end of the warranty period, when the system is operating properly, and that all works and clean up are completed,
the Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least seventy-two (72) hours in advance for the Final Acceptance Inspection.
The irrigation system shall be inspected for the following:
1. Irrigation lines:
a) Line laid to grade;
b) Emitters facing upward for inline drip systems;
c) Leaking sections repaired; and
d) Uniform and adequate coverage.
2. Subsurface drip equipment, control valves and flush valves operate properly and are not leaking.
3. Gate valves and drain valves operating properly and are not leaking.
4. Controller operating properly and programmed.
Any deficiencies in the system shall be noted by the Engineer and a written copy shall be given to the Contractor.
Within seven (7) days, the Contractor shall make required corrections to bring all materials and work into conformance
with the Contract Plans.
Contractor shall provide a revised set of “As-Built” drawings if any modifications have been made during the warranty
period that are not correctly reflected on the “As-Built” drawings presented at time of Final Completion.
Page 13-127
Index
Abu Dhabi Public Realm Design Manual, 13-5, 13-42, Lawn, 13-34
13-62 Linear Density Polyethylene (LDPE) Fittings, 13-70
Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company, 13-62 Linear Density Polyethylene (LDPE) Pipe, 13-69
Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council’s (UPC) Estidama Maintenance Manual Reports, 13-36
Pearl Rating System (PRS), 13-62 Manufacturer's Literature, 13-8, 13-43
Abu Dhabi Urban Street Design Manual, 13-5, 13-42, Mock-ups, 13-44
13-62 Moisture Sensors, 13-109
Abu Dhabi Utility Corridors Design Manual, 13-62 Natural and Manufactured Gravel, 13-50
Adjustable Flow Bubbler, 13-80 Natural and Manufactured Stone, 13-50
ADM, 13-62 Palm Care, 13-31
Agricultural Soils, 13-10 Palm Relocation, 13-23
Air Release Valve, 13-74 Parks and Recreation Facilities Division (PRFD), 13-
Ball Valves, 13-73 62
Brick/ Clay Unit Pavers, 13-48 Pavers, 13-46
Bubbler Pop-Up Bodies, 13-80 PE Valves, 13-73
Bubbler Riser, 13-80 Percolation Tests, 13-25
Bubbler Stake, 13-80 Permeable Pavers, 13-46
Butterfly Valves, 13-72 Pest and Disease Control, 13-38
Certifications, 13-7 Planting Depths and Pits, 13-25
Check Valves for Hillside Sprinklers Installation, 13- Planting medium, 13-7, 13-8, 13-14, 13-15, 13-24, 13-
83 26, 13-28
Chemical Dosing System, 13-95 Planting Season, 13-24
Climbers and Vines, 13-34 Planting Sequence, 13-26
Compost and Organic Manure, 13-11 Pop-Up Sprays and Rotor Connection, 13-83
Concrete Unit Pavers, 13-46 Pre-Cast Concrete Slabs and Kerbs, 13-55
connections to existing pipelines, 13-118 Pre-Cast Concrete Tile, 13-49
Construction Tolerances, 13-55 Precast Concrete Unit Pavers, 13-47
Container Grown Plants, 13-25 Pressure Compensating Bubbler, 13-79
Decoders, 13-108 Pressure Compensating Dripper Line (In-Line), 13-81
DoT’s A13 Road Landscaping Manual, 13-6, 13-8, 13- Pressure Gauges, 13-74
19, 13-30, 13-66, 13-112, 13-125 Pressure Reducing Valve, 13-74
Electric Remote Control Solenoid Valve Complete Pumping Facilities, 13-85
With Pressure Regulating Module, 13-73 qualifications of the lead landscaping personal, 13-9,
Emirate of Abu Dhabi Municipality, 13-62 13-44
Estidama, 13-62, 13-111 Quality Control, 13-5, 13-43, 13-63
Evapotranspiration (ET) Sensor, 13-107 Quarry Tile, 13-50
Fertiliser, 13-8, 13-12, 13-15, 13-16, 13-18, 13-31, 13- Quick Coupling Valve and Fittings, 13-72
32, 13-33, 13-34, 13-35, 13-85 Rotor Pop-Up Sprinkler, 13-82
Field Controller, 13-108 Sample Testing, 13-6
Final Handover, 13-37 Samples, 13-7, 13-8, 13-11, 13-43, 13-44, 13-47, 13-
Fire Detection and Alarm System, 13-96 50, 13-81
Flush Valve Assembly, 13-73 SCADA, 13-99, 13-100, 13-101, 13-102
Geotextile Fabric, 13-51 Seeding, 13-28
Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) Pipe for Ducts, 13-70 shrubs, 13-20
Ground Cover, 13-33 Single Outlet Pressure Compensating Emitter, 13-80
groundcovers, 13-20 Sodding, 13-28
Guarantee, 13-67 Specific Landscape Features, 13-51
Heavy Duty Gear Driven Sprinkler, 13-82 Spray Head Pop-Up Sprinkler, 13-81
herbaceous plants, 13-20 Steel Fittings, 13-70
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes And Fittings, Steel Pipes, 13-69
13-68 Storage Facilities, 13-84
In Line Pressure Regulator, 13-75 Submittals, 13-7, 13-43, 13-64
Instrumentation, Control and Automation (ICA) Substantial Completion, 13-29
Requirements, 13-99 Substitutions, 13-19
irrigation electrical equipment, 13-76, 13-77, 13-78 Sump Pumps, 13-91
Irrigation Management Plan, 13-66 Sump Pumps Electrical Requirements, 13-94
Irrigation Pumps Electrical Requirements, 13-94 Telephone System, 13-96
Isolation Gate Valves, 13-71 Tree and Shrub Care, 13-32
Landscape Management and Maintenance Manuals, trees, 13-19
13-8 Triple Swing Joint Assembly, 13-83
Page 13-128
uPVC Fittings, 13-70 Variable frequency Drive (VFD), 13-88

uPVC Pipe, 13-69 Warranty, 13-9, 13-67, 13-68
Valve Boxes, 13-76 Water Meters, 13-75
Valve Chambers, 13-76
Page 13-129

Ad-C-01 - Part 2

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ad-C-01 - Part 2

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

STANDARD CONSTRUCTION

Document Number: AD-C-01

DOCUMENT NO: AD-C-01

Document Development Consultant: Parsons International Limited

10 Lighting and Electrical Distribution Works

CHAPTER 10 – LIGHTING & ELECTRICAL

DOCUMENT NO: AD-C-01

Chapter 10: Lighting & Electrical Distribution Works

10.5.4 Low Voltage PVC Wiring Cables ..................................................................................................... 10-33

10.8.1 Description ........................................................................................................................................ 10-57

10.11.2.1 General...................................................................................................................................... 10-91

10.11.10.3 General Requirements............................................................................................................. 10-143

10.11.14.11 Terminal Block ...................................................................................................................... 10-171

10.14.2.2 Rejection of Equipment .......................................................................................................... 10-197

10.15.5.2 General Requirements............................................................................................................. 10-232

10 LIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

10.1.2 Reference Standards and Codes

CSA CSA Group International;

Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel

BS 3692:2001 ISO Metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts

Specifications for degrees of protection of enclosures of switchgear

BS 5972:1980 Specification for photoelectric control units for road lighting

Mechanical cable glands, Armour glands. Requirements and test

BS 6360:1991 Specification for conductors in insulated cables and coords

BS 6746:1984 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables

Specification for performance requirements for cables required to

Specifications for degrees of protection of enclosures of switchgear and controlgear for

IEC 60228:2004 Conductors of insulated cables

IEC 60529:2013 Degrees of Protection Package

IEC 60598:2011 Lanterns, general requirements and tests

IEC 60695:2006 Fire hazard testing

IEC 60068:2013 Environmental testing

IEC 60947:2010 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear

10.1.3 Definition of Terms

10.1.4 Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) Electrical

System Rated Voltage 400/230 volts

System Rated Voltage 11 KV 22 KV 33 KV 132 KV

Solidly Earthing through

10.1.5 Service Connections

10.1.6 Site Conditions

Ground thermal resistivity (g) 150 Kcm/W

10.1.7 Coordination with Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority

10.1.8 Schedules and Technical Details

10.1.9 Inspection and Testing

10.1.10 Field Performance Tests

10.1.11 Electrical, Utilities and Record Drawings

10.1.12 Procedures for Electrical and Lighting Works

10.1.12.1 Procedure for the Lighting Works

10.1.12.2 Procedure for ADWEA/ADDC Electrical, Distribution Works

10.1.12.3 Shop Drawings Procedures for Lighting Systems after Approval of

10.1.12.4 As-built Drawings

1. Route of each cable

10.2 Lighting and Electrical Materials, General

10.2.3 Control of Materials

10.2.4 Analysis of Materials

10.3 Earthwork for Electrical

10.3.2 Trench and Backfill

10.3.3 Construction Methods

10.3.4 Excavation for Structures

10.4 Conduits, Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes

10.4.2 Rigid Galvanized Steel Electrical Conduit

Inside Diameter (cm) Minimum Wall Thickness (mm)

10.4.3 Rigid Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Conduit